Zihxavy  of  trhe  trheolojical  ^tminaxy 

PRINCETON  •  NEW  JERSEY 
PRESENTED  BY 

Rev.  Fred  A.   Grandall 


(       JAM  14  1915 


GKAMMAK 


OF   THE 


HEBREW  LANGUAGE. 


BY 

WILLIAM    HENRY   GREEN, 

PROFESSOR  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY  AT  PRINCETON,  K.  Jo 


iaeto  iStiition. 


CAREFULLY  EEVISED  THROUGHOUT 
AND  THE   SYNTAX    GREATLY   ENLARGED. 


SECOND   THOUSAND. 


NEW   YORK: 

JOHN  WILEY  AND   SONS, 

53  East  Tenth  Street, 

1895. 


CoPTEisHT,  1888,  by 
JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS. 


PREFACE. 


The  twenty-seven  years,  which  have  elapsed  since 
the  first  publication  of  this  Grammar,  have  been  exceed- 
ingly fniitful  in  the  philological  and  exegetical  study  of 
the  Old  Testament.  And  important  progress  has  been 
made  toward  a  more  thorough  and  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  grammatical  structure  of  the  Hebrew  language. 
This  edition  of  the  Grammar  has  been  carefully  revised 
throughout  that  it  may  better  represent  the  advanced 
state  of  scholarship  on  this  subject.  Nearly  every  page 
exhibits  corrections  or  additions  of  greater  or  less  conse- 
quence. And  the  Syntax  particularly,  which  was  not 
fully  elaborated  before,  has  been  greatly  enlarged,  and 
for  the  most  part  entirely  rewritten.  The  plan  of  the 
Grammar,  the  method  of  treatment,  and  in  general  the 
order  of  the  sections  are  unchanged.  And  little  occasion 
has  been  found  to  alter  the  more  general  and  comprehen- 
sive statements,  which  are  distinguished  by  being  printed 
in  large  type.  The  changes  are  chiefly  in  the  addition 
of  fuller  details  enlarging  and  multiplying  the  para- 
graphs in  small  type. 

The  principle  of  eschewing  all  supposititious  forms  and 
adducing  none  but  such  as  really  occur  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, has  been  steadfastly  adhered  to  as  heretofore,  with 
the  view  of  rigorously  conforming  all  rules  and  examples 
to  the  actual  phenomena  of  the  language.  The  text  of 
Baer  is  preferred  so  far  as  published,  the  disputed  ortho- 
phonic  Daghesh-forte  excepted,  though  it  is  recog- 
nized and  its  rules  are  stated.     In  the  discussion  of  the 


IV  •  PREFACE. 

poetic  accents  free  use  has  been  made  of  the  elaborate 
treatises  of  Baer  and  Wickes ;  and  the  names  which  they 
employ  are  given  as  well  as  those  which  previously  were 
more  familiar.  The  intricate  rules  for  the  employment 
of  Methegh  are  also  drawn  from  Baer.  The  position  of 
the  accent  is  indicated  as  in  previous  editions  by  a  small 
vertical  stroke  above  all  Hebrew  words  except  mono- 
syllables. 

The  convenience  of  students  has  been  consulted  in 
removing  the  paradigms  of  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns 
from  the  body  of  the  volume  and  placing  them  together 
at  the  end.  A  new  paradigm  has  been  introduced,  afford- 
ing a  succinct  view  of  the  formation  of  nouns  of  different 
classes,  with  their  respective  significations.  The  declen- 
sions of  nouns  have  been  simplified  by  an  arrangement 
which  corresponds  at  once  with  their  etymological  struc- 
ture and  with  the  vowel  changes  to  which  they  are 
severally  liable.  While  every  part  of  the  Syntax  is 
much  more  fully  developed  than  before,  special  atten- 
tion has  been  paid  to  the  use  of  the  tenses,  which  is  so 
thoroughly  discussed  in  the  admirable  treatise  of  Dr. 
Driver.  The  old  names  preterite  and  future  are,  for 
reasons  given  on  pp.  299-302,  preferred  to  perfect  and 
imperfect,  which  are  now  so  generally  adopted ;  but  the 
latter  are  used  in  conjunction  with  the  former  for  the 
convenience  of  those  who  like  them  better.  The  various 
kinds  of  compound  sentences,  involving  relative,  condi- 
tional, circumstantial,  and  co-ordinate  clauses,  receive  the 
attention  which  is  due  to  their  peculiar  character  and 
separate  importance.  The  different  rules  and  statements 
of  the  Grammar,  and  particularly  of  the  Syntax,  are 
illustrated  and  confirmed  by  a  copious  citation  of  pas- 
sages in  which  they  are  exemplified.      Full  indexes,  as 

before,  accompany  the  Grammar  to  facilitate  its  use. 
Princeton,  August  22,  1888. 


coisrTEisrTS. 


PART  I.— ORTHOGRAPHY. 
Divisions  of  Grammar,  §1. 

OETHOGEAPHIC     SYMBOLS. 

The   Letters. — Alphabet,  §2;    Sounds,  §3;    Double  forms,  §4;    Names, 
§  5  ;     Order,  §  6  ;     Classification,  §  7 ;     "Words  never  divided,  §  8 ; 
Abbreviations  and  Signs  of  Number,  §  9. 
The  Vowels. — Masoretic  Points,  §10;    Vowel  Letters,  §11;    Signs  for  the 
Vowels,  §12;    Mutual  Relation  of  this  twofold  Notation,  §§13,  14; 
Pure  and  Diphthongal  Vowels,  §  15. 
Sh'va,  silent  and  vocal,  simple  and  compound,  §  16. 
Pattahh  Furtive,  §17. 
SyUables,  §  18. 

Aiiibiguoiis  Signs. — Hhirik,  Shurek,  and  Kibbuts,  §19.1;   Kamets  and 
Kamets-Hhatuph,  §  19.  2 ;    Silent  and  Vocal  Sh'va,  §20. 
Points  affecting  Consonants: — Daghesh-lene,  §§21,  22. 

Daghesh-forte,  §  23  ;  diflTerent  kinds,  §  24 ;  omission  of,  §  25. 
Mappik,  §26. 
Raphe,  §  27. 
Points  attached    to   "Words. — Accents,   their  design,   §  28 ;    forms  and 
classes,  §  29 ;    like  forms  distinguished,  §  30  ;   poetic  accents,  §  31 ; 
position  as  determined  by  the  character  of  the  syllables,  §  32. 1 ;  in 
uninflected  words,  §  32.  2.  3 ;  with  affixes,  suffixes  and  prefixes,  §  33 ; 
use  in  distinguishing  words,  §  84 ;  shifted  in  special  cases,  §  35. 
ConseciUlon  of  the  Accents  in  Prose. — Clauses  and  their  subdivisions, 
§  36  ;  tabular  view,  §  37 ;  explanation  of  the  table,  §  38 ;  adaptation  of 
the  trains  of  accents  to  sentences,  §  39. 


VI  CONTENTS. 

Poetic  Consecution. — Clauses  and  their  subdivisions,  §40;  tabular  view 
and  explanation,  §41 ;  adaptation  of  tbe  trains  of  accents  to  sen- 
tences, §42. 

Makkeph,  §43. 

Metbegh,  its  form  and  position,  §  44 ;  special  rules,  §  45 ;  K'ri  and 
K'tbibb,  meaning  of  tbe  terms,  §  46 ;  constant  K'ris  not  noted  in  tbe 
margin,  §  47 ;  tbeir  design  and  value,  §  48. 

Accuracy  of  tbe  points,  §  49. 

OETHOGEAPHIO     CHANGES. 

Significant  mutations  belong  to  the  domain  of  the  lexicon,  §§  50,  51 ;  eu- 
phonic mutations  to  tbe  domain  of  grammar,  §  52. 

Mutations  of  Consonants  at  tbe  beginning  of  syllables,  §  53 ;  at  tbe  close* 
of  syllables,  §54;  at  the  end  of  words,  §55  ;  special  rules,  §56. 

Changes  of  Consonants  to  Vowels  in  reduplicated  syllables  and  letters 
and  in  quiescents,  §  57. 

Mutations  of  Vowels,  significant  and  euphonic,  §58;  due  to  syllabic 
changes,  §  59  ;  to  contiguous  gutturals,  §  60 ;  to  concurrent  conso- 
nants, §  61 ;  concurring  vowels,  §  62 ;  proximity  of  vowels,  §  63 ;  tbe 
accent,  §  64 ;  pause  accents,  §  65 ;  shortening  or  lengthening  of 
words,  §  66. 


PAET  II.— ETYMOLOGY. 

Roots  of  Words. — Design  of  Etymology,  three  stages  in  the  growth  of 

words,  §67;    pronominal   and  verbal  roots,  §68;    formation  and 

inflection  of  words  by  external  and  internal  changes,  §  69 ;  parts  of 

speech,  §70. 

Pronouns  personal,  §  71 ;    pronominal  suffixes,  §  72 ;   demonstrative,  §  73 ; 

relative,  §  74  ;  interrogative  and  indefinite,  §  75  ;  paradigm  I. 
Verbs,  the  species  and  their  signification,  §§  76-80. 

Perfect  Verbs,  §  81  ;  formation  of  the  species,  §§  82,  88 ;  their  inflection, 
§§  84,  85  ;  paradigm  II. 
Remarks  on   the   Perfect    Verbs. — Kal    preterite,   §86;    Infinitive,   87; 
Future,  §88;  Imperative,  §89;  Participles,  §90  ;  Niphal,  ^^91  ;  Picl, 
§  92  ;  Pual,  §  93;  Hiphil,  §^94  ;  Hopbal,  §  95  ;  Hithpael,  §  96. 
Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future,  §97;  and  Imperative,  98. 
Vav  Consecutive  with  tbe  Future,  §  99  ;  with  the  Preterite,  §  100. 
Verbs  with  suffixes,  §§101,  102  ;  Remarks  on  tbe  Perfect  Verbs  with  suf- 
fixes, Preterite,  §  104  ;  Future,  105  ;  Infinitive  and  Imperative,  §  106  ; 
paradigm  III. 
Imperfect  Verbs,  classified,  §  107. 

Pc  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§108,  109;  Remarks,  §§111-115; 
paradigm  IV. 


CONTENTS.  Vll 

Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §  116  ;    Remarks,  §§  118-122  ; 

paradigm  V. 
Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §123;  Remarks,  §§125-128: 

paradigm  VI. 
Pe  Nun  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §129  ;  Remarks,  §§131,  132  ;  paradigm 

VII. 
Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  133-137 ;  Remarks,  §§  139-142 ; 

paradigm  VIII. 
Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§  144-146  ;  Remarks,  §§  148-153  ;  para- 
digm X. 
Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§154-156  ;  Remarks, 

§§  158-161  ;  paradigm  IX. 
Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,   §  164  ;  Remarks,  §g  166-169  ; 

paradigm  XI. 
Lamedh  He  Verbs,  their  peculiarities,  §§170,  171 ;  shortened  future  and 

imperative,  §173;  Remarks,  §§174-179  ;  paradigm  XII. 
Doubly  Imperfect  Verbs,  §  180. 
Defective  Verbs,  §  181. 
Quadriliteral  Verbs,  §  182. 
Nouns,  their  formation,  §183;    Class  L  §§184-188;  Class  II.  §§189,   190; 

Class  III.  §§191-194;  Class  IV.  §§195,  196  ;  paradigm,  XIII. 
MultiUterals,  §  197. 
Gender  and  Number.— FrnximnQ  endings,  §198  ;  anomalies  in  the  use  of, 

§199;  employment  in  the  formation  of  words,  §200;  plural  endings, 

§201;    anomalies,    §202;    nouns    confined    to    one   number,   §203; 

Dual  ending,  204  ;  usage  of  the  dual,  205  ;  changes  consequent  upon 

affixing  the  endings  for  gender  and  number,  §§  206-213. 
The  Construct  State,  its  meaning  and  formation,  §§  214-218. 
Nouns  with  suffixes,  §  219,  220. 

Declensions  of  Nouns,  §221;  paradigms  XIV,  XV,  XVI. 
Paragogic  Vowels  added  to  Nouns,  §§  222,  223. 
Numerals.— Cardinal  numbers,  g§ 224-227;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §228. 
Prefixed   Particles,    §229;  the   Article,    §230;    He  Interrogative,   §231; 

Inseparable  prepositions,  §§232-234;  Vav  Conjunctive,  §235. 
Separate  Particles. -Adverbs,  §  236  ;   with  suffixes,  §  237  ;  Prepositions, 

§238;    with  suffixes,    §§239,240;    Conjunctions,    §241;    Interjec 

tions,  §243. 


PART  III.— SYNTAX. 


Simple  and  Compound  Sentences,  §243.  2;  Office  of  Syntax,  243.  1  ;  Elements 
of  the  sentence,  §  243.  3. 

The  Subject,  a  noun  or  pronoun,  §244;  when  omitted,  245 ;  personal  pro- 
noun, §  246 ;  its  extension,  §  247. 

The  Article,  when  used,  §248;  nouns  definite  without  it,  §249;  omitted 
in  poetry,  §250;  indefinite  nouns,  §251. 

Attributive  adjectives  and  demonstratives,  §252. 


•nil  CONTENTS. 

numerals.— Cardmal  numbers,  §§253,  254;  Ordinals,  etc.,  §255.  1,  2;  frac- 
tional parts,  §  255.  3  ;  distributive  numbers  and  numeral  adverbs, 
§  255.  4. 

Apposition  or  subordination,  §  256. 

The  Construct  State  and  Suffixes,  §§  257-259  ;  resolved  by  the  preposition  p 
§  260. 

The  Predicate,  Copula,  §  261  ;  Nouns,  §  262  ;  Adjectives  and  demonstratives, 
§263. 

Comparison  of  adjectives,  §  264. 

Verbs. — Hebrew  conception  of  time,  §265.  1,  2;  subjective  use  of  the  tenses, 
§  265.  3  ;  different  names  applied  to  them,  §  265.  3,  a ;  the  primary 
tenses;  use  of  the  preterite  or  perfect,  §  266  ;  the  future  or  imperfect, 
§  267  ;  the  preterite  and  future  in  combination,  §§  268,  269 ;  the  modal 
forms,  §  270  ;  the  intentional  or  paragogic  future,  §  271 ;  the  jussive 
or  apocopated  future,  §  272  ;  the  imperative,  §  273;  the  precative  parti- 
cle, §274  ;  the  primary  tenses  with  Vav  Conjunctive,  §  275;  the  second- 
ary tenses,  Vav  Consecutive  with  the  future,  §  276;  Vav  Consecutive 
with  the  preterite,  §  277  ;  participles,  §  278  ;  the  infinitive,  §  279  ;  ab- 
solute infinitive,  §  280  ;  its  emphatic  use,  §  281  ;  change  of  construc- 
tion to  finite  tenses,  §  283 ;  co-ordinate  instead  of  dependent  relation 
of  verbs,  §  283. 

Object  of  Verbs. — The  direct  object  of  transitive  verbs,  §284;  transitive  con- 
struction of  intransitive  verbs,  §  285  ;  indirect  object  of  verbs,  §  286  ; 
verbs  with  more  than  one  object,  §  287. 

Adverbs  and  adverbial  expressions,  §  288. 

Neglect  of  agreement,  §  289  ;  compound  subject,  §  290  ;  dual  nouns,  §  292  ; 
nouns  in  the  construct,  §  293  ;  changes  of  person,  §  294  ;  ellipsis, 
§295. 

Repetition  of  nouns,  §  296  ;  pronouns,  §  297. 

Interrogative,  §  298,  and  Negative  Sentences,  §  299. 

Compound  Sentences. — Relative  clauses,  §§300,  301 ;  the  relative  omitted, 
§  802  ;  poetic  use  of  the  demonstrative,  §  303  ;  indefinite  pronouns, 
§  304  ;  relative  conjunction,  §  305  ;  hypothetical  sentences,  §§  306-308; 
circumstantial  clauses,  §  309  ;  the  conjunction  Vav,  §§310-312. 


PART  FIRST. 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§  1.  Language  is  the  comnninication  of  thouglit  by 
means  of  spoken  or  written  sounds.  The  utterance  of  a 
single  thought  constitutes  a  sentence.  Each  sentence  is 
composed  of  words  expressing  individual  conceptions  or 
their  relations.  And  words  are  made  up  of  sounds  pro- 
duced by  the  organs  of  speech  and  represented  by  written 
signs.  It  is  the  province  of  grammar  as  the  science  of 
language  to  investigate  these  several  elements.  It  hence 
consists  of  three  parts.  First,  Orthography,  which  treats 
of  the  sounds  employed  and  the  mode  of  representing 
them.  Second,  Etymology,  which  treats  of  the  different 
kinds  of  words,  their  formation,  and  the  changes  which 
they  undergo.  Third,  Syntax,  which  treats  of  sentences, 
or  the  manner  in  which  words  are  joined  together  to  ex- 
press ideas.  The  task  of  the  Hebrew  grammarian  is  to 
furnish  a  complete  exhibition  of  the  phenomena  of  this 
particular  language,  carefully  digested  and  referred  as 
far  as  practicable  to  their  appropriate  causes  in  the 
organs  of  speech  and  the  operations  of  the  mind. 

The  Lettees. 

§  2.  The  Hebrew  being  no  longer  a  spoken  tongue,  is 
only  known  as  the  language  of  books,  and  particularly 
of  the  Old  Testament,  which  is  the  most  interesting  and 


2  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  6 

important  as  well  as  the  only  pure  monument  of  it.  The 
first  step  towards  its  investigation  must  accordingly  be 
to  ascertain  the  meaning  of  the  symbols  in  which  it  is 
recorded.  Then  having  learned  its  sounds,  as  they  are 
thus  represented,  it  will  be  possible  to  advance  one  step 
further,  and  inquire  into  the  laws  by  which  these  are 
governed  in  their  employment  and  mutations. 

The  symbols  used  in  writing  Hebrew  are  of  two  sorts, 
viz.  letters  (nvri&<)  and  points  (Q^l^pi).  The  number  of 
the  letters  is  twenty-two ;  these  are  written  from  right  to 
left,  and  are  exclusively  consonants.  The  alphabetical 
table  upon  the  opposite  page  exhibits  their  forms,  Eng- 
hsh  equivalents,  names,  and  numerical  values,  together 
with  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  Rabbinical  character 
employed  to  a  considerable  extent  in  the  commentaries 
and  other  writings  of  the  modern  Jews. 

§  3.  There  is  always  more  or  less  difficulty  in  rep- 
resenting the  sounds  of  one  language  by  those  of  another. 
But  this  is  in  the  case  of  the  Hebrew  greatly  aggravated 
by  its  having  been  for  ages  a  dead  language,  so  that 
some  of  its  somids  cannot  now  be  accurately  determined, 
and  also  by  its  belonging  to  a  different  family  or  group 
of  tongues  from  our  own,  possessing  sounds  entirely 
foreign  to  the  English,  for  which  it  consequently  affords 
no  equivalent,  and  wliich  are  in  fact  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  by  our  organs.  The  equivalents  of  the  follow- 
ing table  are  not  therefore  to  be  regarded  as  in  every 
instance  exact  representations  of  the  proper  powers  of 
the  letters.  They  are  simply  approximations  sufficiently 
near  the  truth  for  every  practical  purpose,  the  best  which 
c^n  now  be  proposed,  and  sanctioned  by  tradition  and 
the  conventional  usage  of  the  best  Hebraists. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  a  double  pronunciation  has 
been  assigned  to  seven  of  the  letters,    A  native  Hebrew 


§3 


LETTERS. 


Order. 

Forms  and  Equivalenta. 

Names. 

Eabbiiiical 
Alphabet. 

Numerical 
values. 

1 

K 

t^k  Aleph 

^ 

1 

X 

2 

1 

Bh,  B 

n-n  Beth 

3 

2 

3 

:; 

Gh,  G 

b-2'h  Gimel 

} 

3 

4 

1 

Dh,  D 

nb"n  Daleth 

1 

4 

5 

n 

H 

«n  He 

? 

5 

6 

^ 

VorW 

11  Vav  (Waw) 

) 

6 

7 

T 

Z 

fl  Zayin 

f 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

n^n  Hheth 

n 

8 

9 

a 

T 

n-t2  Teth 

L^ 

9 

10 

«( 

Y 

li-  Yodh 

^ 

10 

11 

^1 

Kh,  K 

"3  Kaph 

15 

20 

12 

b 

L 

Tzb  Lamedh 

V  T 

3 

30 

13 

53  D 

M 

D^^.  Mem 

c  n 

40 

14 

3  1 

N 

■|1D  Nun 

P 

50 

15 

D 

S 

ry2t  Samekh 

D 

60 

16 

? 

1"'7  Ayin 

i? 

70 

17 

5  r, 

Ph,P 

SE  Pe 

qD 

80 

18 

^Y 

Ts 

■ni:  Tsadhe 

T^ 

90 

19 

p 

K 

Cjip  Koph 

P 

100 

20 

-1 

R 

ID^n  Resh 

■) 

200 

21 

ID 

Sh,  S 

•'t  Shin 

D 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

in  Tav 

T 

D 

400 

would  readily  decide  without  assistance  which  of  these 
was  to  be  adopted  in  any  given  case,  just  as  we  are 
sensible  of  no  inconvenience  from  the  various  sounds  of 
the  Enghsh  letters  which  are  so  embarrassing  to  foreigners 
learning  our  language.    The  ambiguity  is  in  every  case 


4  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  6 

removed,  however,  by  the  addition  of  a  dot  or  point 
indicating  which  sound  they  are  to  receive.  Thus  S  with 
a  point  in  its  bosom  has  the  sound  of  b,  H  unpointed  that 
of  the  corresponding  v,  or  as  it  is  commonly  represented 
for  the  sake  of  uniformity  in  notation,  hh;  5  is  pro- 
nounced as  g,  Di  unpointed  had  an  aspirated  sound  which 
may  accordingly  be  represented  by  gh,  but  as  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  produce  it,  or  even  to  determine  with  exactness 
what  it  was,  and  as  there  is  no  corresponding  sound  in 
Enghsh,  the  aspiration  is  mostly  neglected,  and  the  letter, 
whether  pointed  or  not,  sounded  indifferently  as  g;  "^l  is  d, 
1  unpointed  is  the  aspirate  dh,  equivalent  to  th  in  the,' 
3  is  A:,  'D  unpointed  its  aspirate  kh,  perhaps  resembhng 
the  German  ch  in  ich,  though  its  aspiration,  like  that  of 
3,  is  commonly  neglected  in  modern  reading;  E  isjy,  3  un- 
pointed j9/i  or/;  r  is  ^,  n  unpointed  th  in  thin.  The  letter 
ID  with  a  dot  over  its  right  arm  is  pronounced  like  sh,  and 
called  Shin;  ID  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sin, 
and  pronounced  like  s,  no  attempt  being  made  in  modern 
usage  to  discriminate  between  its  sound  and  that  of  0 
Samekh.  Although  there  may  anciently  have  been  a 
distinction  between  them,  this  can  no  longer  be  defined 
nor  even  positively  asserted;  it  has  therefore  been  thought 
unnecessary  to  preserve  the  individuahty  of  these  letters 
in  the  notation,  and  both  of  them  will  accordingly  be 
represented  by  s. 

a.  The  double  sound  of  the  first  six  of  the  letters  just  named  is  purely 
euphonic,  and  has  no  effect  whatever  upon  the  meaning  of  the  words  in 
which  they  stand.  The  case  of  i:;  is  different.  Its  primary  sound  was  that 
of  sh,  as  is  evident  from  the  contrast  in  Judg.  12:6  of  t^)ii'0  shibboleth 
with  inVio  sibboleth.  In  certain  words,  however,  and  sometimes  for  the 
sake  of  creating  a  distinction  between  different  words  of  like  orthographj', 
it  received  the  sound  of  8,  thus  almost  assuming  the  character  of  a  distinct 
letter,  e.  g.  iniU  to  break,  "ihb  to  hope.  That  Sin  and  Samekh  were  dis- 
tinguishable to  the  ear,  appears  probable  from  the  fact  that  there  are  words 
of  separate  significations  which  differ  only  in  the  use  of  one  or  the  other 
of  these  letters,  and  in  which  they  are  never  interchanged,  e.  g.  billJ  to  he 


§  3  LETTEES.  B 

bereaved,  Vsb  to  be  teise.  bi&  to  be  foolish;  liiu  to  be  drunken,  lya  to  hire, 
"1 30  to  shut  up;  "i^ii^j  to  look,  "iTU  to  rule,  "i^iti  to  turn  back;  tife^  a  lip,  nsio 
to  destroy.  The  close  affinity  between  the  sounds  which  they  represent  is, 
however,  shown  by  the  equivalence  of  such  roots  as  "ED  and  "Sb,  pSO  and 
pB.r,  DrO  and  DHU,  and  by  the  fact  that  &  is  in  a  few  instances  written  for 
b,  e.  g.  no?  Ps.  4  :  7  from  XlTS,  n^?)pb  Eccles.  1:17  for  n!i3=0;  Mbin  Jer. 
19:2  from  tnh,  nnco  but  noa  Isa.  3:17.  The  original  identity  of  d  and  O 
is  apparent  from  their  being  used  interchangeably  in  the  alphabetic  psalms 
Ps.  119  :  161 — 168  and  other  biblical  acrostics  Lam.  3  :  61 — 63,  as  well  as 
from  the  etjonological  connection  between  "ikb  leaven  and  n"ixp'2  a  vessel 
in  which  bread  is  leavened-^  nsb  to  shudder,  "i^nrd  horrible,  causing  a 
shudder;  lib  to  hire,  "libx  a  recompense.  In  Arabic  the  division  of  single 
letters  into  two  distinguished  by  diacritical  points  is  carried  to  a  much 
greater  length,  the  alphabet  of  that  language  being  by  this  means  enlarged 
from  twenty-two  to  twenty-eight  letters. 

b.  The  palatal  aspirate  gh  is  still  preserved  in  the  spelling  of  many 
English  words,  although  it  is  now  lost  in  pronunciation,  being  either  com- 
pensated by  lengthening  the  vowel,  e.  g.  light  (Ger.  licht),  knight  (Ger. 
knecht),  plough  (Ger.  pflug),  or  changed  to  a  labial,  e.  g.  laugh,  tough,  or  to 
an  unaspirated  surd,  e.  g.  hough. 

2.  In  their  original  power  t3  t  differed  from  D  t,  and 
3  k  from  p  Zc,  for  these  letters  are  not  confused  nor  hable 
to  interchange,  and  the  distinction  is  preserved  to  this 
day  in  the  cognate  Arabic;  yet  it  is  not  easy  to  state 
intelligibly  wherein  the  difference  consisted.  They  are 
currently  pronounced  precisely  alike. 

3.  The  letter  n  has.  a  stronger  sound  than  H  the 
simple  7i,  and  is  accordingly  represented  by  hh;  1  is  re- 
presented by  r,  although  it  had  some  pecuharity  of  sound 
which  we  cannot  at  this  day  attempt  to  reproduce,  by 
which  it  was  aUied  to  the  gutturals. 

4.  For  two  letters,  i<  and  :?,  no  equivalent  has  been 
given  in  the  table,  and  they  are  commonly  altogether 
neglected  in  pronunciation.  S  is  the  weakest  of  the  letters, 
and  was  probably  always  inaudible.  It  stands  for  the 
slight  and  involuntary  emission  of  breath  necessary  to 
the  utterance  of  a  vowel  unattended  by  a  more  distinct 
consonant  sound.  It  therefore  merely  serves  to  mark  the 
beginning  or  the  close  of  the  syllable  of  which  it  is  a 


G  ,  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  4 

part,  while  to  the  ear  it  is  entirely  lost  in  the  accom- 
panying or  preceding  vowel.  Its  power  has  been  likened 
to  that  of  the  smooth  breathing  (')  of  the  Greeks  or  the 
English  silent  h  in  hour.  On  the  other  hand  3?  had  a  deep 
guttural  sound  w^hich  was  always  heard,  but  hke  that 
of  the  corresponding  letter  among  the  Arabs  is  very 
difficult  of  utterance  by  occidental  organs;  consequently 
no  attempt  is  made  to  reproduce  it.  In  the  Septuagint 
it  is  sometimes  represented  by  7,  sometimes  by  the  rough 
and  sometimes  by  the  smooth  breathing;  thus  r\^'!^'l_ 
ro>oppa,  ^b?  'HX/,  p^^l'S,  'AjuaXyJK.  Some  of  the  modern 
Jews  give  it  the  sound  of  ng  or  of  the  French  gn  in 
cam])agne,  either  wherever  it  occurs  or  only  at  the  end 
of  words,  e.  g.  ^2'^  SJimang,  iizT  gndmodh, 

§  4.  The  forms  of  the  letters  exhibited  in  the  pre- 
ceding table,  though  found  without  important  variation 
in  all  existing  manuscripts,  are  not  the  original  ones.  An 
older  character  is  preserved  upon  the  Jewish  coins  struck 
in  the  age  of  the  Maccabees,  which  bears  a  considerable 
resemblance  to  the  Samaritan  and  still  more  to  the  Phe- 
nician.  Some  of  the  steps  in  the  transition  from  one  to 
the  other  can  still  be  traced  upon  extant  monuments. 
There  was  first  a  cursive  tendency,  disposing  to  unite  the 
different  letters  of  the  same  word,  which  is  the  established 
practice  in  Syriac  and  Arabic.  This  was  followed  by  a 
predominance  of  the  calhgraphic  principle,  which  again 
separated  the  letters  and  reduced  them  to  their  present 
rectangular  forms  and  nearly  uniform  size.  The  cursive 
stage  has,  however,  left  its  traces  upon  the  five  letters 
which  appear  in  the  table  with  double  forms;  D  "a  D  23  22 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words 
terminate  in  a  bottom  horizontal  stroke,  which  is  the 
remnant  of  the  connecting  link  wdth  the  following  letter; 
at  the  end  of  words  no  such  hnk  was  needed,  and  the 


g  5  LETTERS.  7 

letter  was  continued  vertically  downward  in  a  sort  of 
terminal  flourish  thus,  "]  "j  C]  7,  or  closed  up  by  joining 
its  last  with  its  initial  stroke,  thus  D. 

a.  The  few  instances  in  which  final  letters  are  found  in  the  middle  ot 

words,  as  >^3'^Db  Isa.  9:6,  or  their  ordinary  forms  at  the  end,  as  ^!i  Neh. 
2  :  13,  3^  Job  38  :  1,  are  probably  due  to  the  inadvertence  of  early  tran- 
scribers which  has  been  faithfully  perpetuated  since,  or  if  intentional  they 
may  have  had  a  connection  now  unknown  with  the  enumeration  of  letters 
or  the  signification  of  words.  The  same  may  be  said  of  letters  larger  than 
usual,  as  nsDl  Ps.  80:16,  or  smaller,  as  fiX'n2^'3  Gen.  2:  4,  or  above  the 
line,  as  ""i?*^  Ps.  80  :  14,  or  inverted,  as  ?b;a  Num.  10  :  35  (in  manuscripts 
and  the  older  editions,  e.g.  that  of  Stephanus  in  1541),  or  with  extraordinary 
points,  as  -iriibi-fi  Gen.  33  :  4,  iHi^i  Ps.  27  :  13,  in  all  which  the  Eabbins  find 
concealed  meanings  of  the  most  fanciful  and  absurd  character.  Thus  in 
their  opinion  the  suspended  D  in  nt?^  Judg.  18:30  suggests  that  the  idola- 
ters described  were  descended  from  Moses  but  had  the  character  of  Ma- 
nasseh.  In  "In?  Lev.  11 :42  the  Vav,  which  is  of  unusual  size,  is  the  middlo 
letter  of  the  Pentateuch;  5rj"i:^5!i  Gen.  16:5  with  an  extraordinary  point 
3ver  the  second  Yodh,  is  the  only  instance  in  which  the  word  is  written 
with  that  letter  (the  correct  reading  1  Kin-  15:19  is  "3'31);  the  large  letters 
in  Deut.  6  :  4  emphasize  the  capital  article  of  the  Jewish  faith.  All  such 
anomalous  forms  or  marks,  with  the  conceits  of  the  Eabbins  respecting 
them,  are  reviewed  in  detail  in  Buxtorf's  Tiberias,  pp.  152  etc. 

§  5.  All  the  names  of  the  letters  were  probably  signi- 
ficant at  first,  although  the  meanings  of  some  of  them 
are  now  doubtful  or  obscure.  It  is  commonly  supposed 
that  these  describe  the  objects  to  wliich  their  forms 
originally  bore  a  rude  resemblance.  If  this  be  so,  how- 
ever, the  mutations  which  they  have  since  undergone  are 
such,  that  the  relation  is  no  longer  traceable,  unless  it 
be  faintly  in  a  few.  The  power  of  the  letter  is  in  every 
instance  the  initial  sound  of  its  name. 

a.  The  opinion  advocated  by  Schultens,  Fundamenta  Ling.  Heb.  p.  10, 
that  the  invention  of  the  letters  was  long  anterior  to  that  of  their  names, 
and  that  the  latter  was  a  pedagogical  expedient  to  facilitate  the  learning  of 
the  letters  by  associating  their  forms  and  sounds  with  familiar  objects,  has 
met  with  little  favour  and  possesses  little  intrinsic  probability.  An  interest- 
ing corroboration  of  the  antiquity  of  these  names  is  found  in  their  preserva- 
tion in  the  Greek  alphabet,  though  destitute  of  meaning  in  that  language, 
the  Greeks  having  bon-owed  their  letters  at  an  eai'ly  period  from  the  Phe- 
nicians,  and  hence  the  appended  a  of  'A\(j>a,  etc.,  which  points  to  the  Ara« 
m»ic  form  XS^X. 


8  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  6 

h.  The  Semitic  derivation  of  the  names  proves  incontestably  that  the 
alphabet  had  its  origin  among  a  people  speaking  a  language  kindred  to 
the  Hebrew.  Their  most  probable  meanings,  so  far  as  they  are  still  ex- 
plicable, are  as  follows,  viz:  Alepb,  an  ox;  Beth,  a  house;  Gimel,  a  camel, 
Daleth,  a  door;  He,  doubtful,  possibly  a  window;  Vav,  a  hook;  Zayin,  a 
weapon;  Hheth,  probably  a  fence;  Teth,  a  snake  or  a  hag;  Yodh,  a  hand; 
Kaph,  the  palm  of  the  hand;  Lamedh,  an  ox-goad;  Mem,  water;  Nun,  a 
fish;  Samekh,  a  prop;  Ayin,  an  eye;  Pe,  a  mouth;  Tsadhe,  a  fish-hook  or 
a  hunter's  dart;  Koph,  perhaps  an  axe-head;  Resh,  a  head;  Shin,  a  tooth; 
Tav,  a  cross  mark. 

Eusebius  (Praep.  Evang.  x.  5)  and  Jerome  give  a  mystical  explanation 
of  the  alphabet,  in  which  the  names  of  the  letters  are  read  as  a  continuoua 
sentence.    See  Fiirst's  Aramtiischei  Lehrgebaude,  p.  26. 

§  6.  The  order  of  the  letters  appears  to  be  entirely 
arbitrary,  though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  three 
middle  mutes  H  3  T  succeed  each  other,  as  in  like  manner 
the  three  hquids  b  12  3.  The  juxtaposition  of  a  few  of 
the  letters  may  perhaps  be  owing  to  the  kindred  signifi- 
cation of  their  names,  e.  g.  Yodh  and  Kaph  the  handy 
Mem  water  and  Nun  a  fish,  Resh  the  head  and  Shin  a 
tooth.  The  antiquity  of  the  existing  arrangement  of  the 
alphabet  is  shown,  1.  by  psalms  and  other  portions  of 
the  Old  Testament  in  which  successive  clauses  or  verses 
begin  with  the  letters  disposed  in  regular  order,  viz. 
Ps.  25  (p  omitted),  34,  37  (alternate  verses,  3?  omitted), 
111  (every  clause),  112  (every  clause),  119  (each  letter 
eight  times),  145  (3  omitted).  Pro  v.  31 :  10 — 31,  Lam. 
ch.  1,  2,  3  (each  letter  three  times),4.  In  the  first  chapter 
of  Lamentations  the  order  is  exactly  preserved,  but  in 
the  remaining  three  chapters  3?  and  3  are  transposed. 
2.  By  the  correspondence  of  the  Greek  and  Roman 
alphabets,  which  have  sprung  from  the  same  origin  with 
the  Hebrew. 

a.  The  most  ingenious  attempt  to  discover  a  regular  structure  in  the 
Hebrew  alphabet  is  that  of  Lepsius,  in  an  essay  upon  this  subject  published 
in  1836.  Omitting  the  sibilants  and  Resh,  he  finds  the  following  tripl» 
correspondence  of  a  breathing  succeeded  by  the  same  three  mutes  carried 
through  each  of  the  three  orders,  the  second  rank  being  enlarged  by  the 
addition  of  the  liquids. 


§7 


LETTERS. 


Breathings. 

Mutes. 

Liquids. 

Middle 

Smooth 

Rough 

n 

a  a  1 
1  n  a 
s  p  n 

C=) 

b  a  3 

Curious  as  this  result  certainly  is,  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  alleged 
correspondence  is  in  part  imaginary,  and  the  method  by  which  it  is  reached 
is  too  arbitrary  to  warrant  tbe  conclusion  that  this  scheme  was  really  in 
the  mind  of  the  author  of  the  alphabet,  much  less  to  sustain  the  further 
speculations  built  upon  it,  reducing  the  original  number  and  modifying  the 
powers  of  the  letters. 

b.  It  is  curious  to  see  how,  in  the  adaptation  of  the  alphabet  to  different 
languages,  the  sounds  of  the  letters  have  been  modified,  needless  ones 
dropped,  and  others  found  necessary  added  at  the  end,  without  disturbing 
the  arrangement  of  the  original  stock.  Thus  the  Greeks  dropped  1  and  p, 
only  retaining  them  as  numerical  signs,  while  the  Roman  alphabet  has  F 
and  Q;  on  the  other  hand  the  Romans  found  13  and  0  superfluous,  while 
the  Greeks  made  of  them  S  and  |;  J  and  T,  in  Greek  y  and  C,  become  in 
Latin  C  and  G,  while  n,  in  Latin  H,  is  in  Greek  converted  like  the  rest  of 
the  gutturals  into  a  vowel  •»?. 

§  7.  The  letters  may  be  variously  divided: 
1.  First,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
pronounced. 


\^<\Vo  Yv^ilK)Ov  Gutturals 

Palatals 
\iw  .n.  W(r*vf  e;      Linguals 

-UA  J[  ■W^^^J«-  Dentals 
jiyx  '4^     Labials 


T 
T 

n 


n 

1 


n 
b 

12 


P 
3 

El 


■)  nas  been  differently  classed,  but  as  its  pecuharities  ' 
are  those  of  the   gutturals  (t^^ii'^a  riix)   it  is  usually 
reckoned  with  them. 

2.  Secondly,  according  to  their  respective  strength, 
into  three  classes,  which  may  be  denominated  weak, 
medium,  and  strong.  The  strong  consonants  offer  the 
greatest  resistance  to  change,  and  are  capable  of  entering 
into  any  combinations  which  the  formation  or  inflection 
of  words  may  require.  The  weak  have  not  this  capacity, 


10  ORTHOGBAPHT.  §  7 

but  when  analogy  would  bring  them  into  combinations 
foreign  to  their  nature,  they  are  either  hable  to  mutation 
themselves  or  occasion  changes  in  the  rest  of  the  word. 
Those  of  medium  strength  have  neither  the  absolute 
stabihty  of  the  former  nor  the  feeble  and  fluctuating 
character  of  the  latter. 


Weak, 


!^  n  1   "^     Vowel-Letters, 
55  n  n  3?     Gutturals. 


,^   ,.          {   b  12    2  ^     Liquids, 
Medium,  \ Sibilants. 


Strong,     {    J  5  p     >  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 


The  special  characteristics  of  these  several  classes  and 
the  influence  wliich  they  exert  upon  the  constitution  of 
words  "\;\dll  be  considered  hereafter.  It  is  sufficient  to  re- 
mark here  that  vowel-letters  are  so  called  because  they 
sometimes  represent  not  consonant  but  vowel-sounds. 

a.  It  will  be  observed  that  while  the  p,  k,  and  f-mutes  agree  in  having 
smooth  a  D  n  and  middle  forma  13  5  1,  which  may  be  either  aspirated  or 
unaspirated,  the  two  last  have  each  an  additional  representative  p  12  which 
is  lacking  to  the  first.  This,  coupled  with  the  fact  that  two  of  the  alpha- 
betic Psalms,  Ps.  25,  34,  repeat  S  as  the  initial  of  the  closing  verse,  has 
given  rise  to  the  conjecture  that  the  missing  p  mute  was  supplied  by  this 
letter,  having  a  double  sound  and  a  double  place  in  the  alphabet.  In  curi- 
ous coincidence  with  this  ingenious  but  unsustained  hypothesis,  the  Ethiopic 
has  an  additional  p,  as  the  Greek  alphabet  has  both  tt  and  (ft. 

3.  Thirdly,  the  letters  may  be  divided,  with  respect 
to  their  function  in  the  formation  of  words,  into  radicals 
(ni^TCn-^  ni^nis)  and  serviles  (^^ia^H  ni^nii^).  The  former, 
which  comprise  just  one  half  of  the  alphabet,  are  never 
employed  except  in  the  roots  or  radical  portions  of  words. 
The  latter  may  also  enter  into  the  constitution  of  roots, 
but  they  are  likewise  put  to  the  less  independent  use  of 
the  formation  of  derivatives  and  inflections,  of  prefixes 
and  suffixes.  The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial 


§  8  LETTERS.  11 

words  nblDl  HiS'J  l^'^S  (Ethan  Moses  and  Caleb);  of  these, 
besides  other  uses,  "jln''i<  are  prefixed  to  form  the  future 
of  verbs,  and  the  remainder  are  prefixed  as  particles  to 
nomis.  The  letters  Vriri^Nn  are  used  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  from  their  roots.  The  only  exception  to  the  division 
now  stated  is  the  substitution  of  t:  for  servile  n  in  a 
certain  class  of  cases,  as  explained  §  54.  4. 

a.  Kimchi  in  his  Mikhlol  (b'ibs'a)  fol.  46,  gives  several  additional  ana- 
grams of  the  serviles  made  out  by  different  grammarians  as  aids  to  the 
memory,  e.  g.  'TA'O.  irrsb^'iT  for  his  work  is  timkrstanding ;  ri-V:;  "^Jit 
aniD  I  Solomon  am  icriting;  n:nn  "[X  "i^ibTy  only  build  thou  my  peace, 
•|Tan  ax  b"irt"3  like  a  branch  of  the  father  of  multitude;  'i3"'Vi<  nrs  i-nU'a 
Moses  has  ivritten  to  us.  To  which  Elias  Levita  added  2n33  ini^X  D"J  the 
name  of  Elias  is  written;  and  Nordheimer  "'inD^  "iin  ^NUJ  consult  the  riches 
of  my  book. 

§  8.  In  Hebrew  writing  and  printing,  words  are  never 
divided.  Hence  various  expedients  are  resorted  to  upon 
occasion,  in  manuscripts  and  old  printed  editions,  to  fill 
out  the  lines,  such  as  giving  a  broad  form  to  certain 
letters,  ^i  !— i  S  c:  t-i,  occupyiug  the  vacant  space  with 
some  letter,  as  p,  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary, 
or  with  the  first  letters  of  the  next  word,  which  were 
not,  however,  accounted  part  of  the  text,  as  they  were 
left  without  vowels,  and  the  word  was  written  in  full  at 
the  beginning  of  the  following  hne.  The  same  end  is 
accomplished  more  neatly  in  modern  printing  by  judi- 
cious spacing. 

§  9.  1.  The  later  Jews  make  frequent  use  of  abbre- 
viations. There  are  none,  however,  in  the  text  of  the 
Hebrew  Bible;  those  which  are  found  in  the  margin  are 
explained  in  a  special  lexicon  at  the  back  of  the  editions 
in  most  common  use,  e.  g.  '1^1  for  'y^TijI]  et  completio = etc. 

2.  The  numerical  employment  of  the  letters,  common 
to  the  Hebrews  with  the  Grreeks,  is  indicated  in  the  table 
of  the  alphabet.  The  hundreds  from  500  to  900  are  re- 
presented either  by  the  five  final  letters  or  by  the  combin- 


12  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  10 

ation  of  n  with  the  letters  immediately  preceding;  thus 
'^  or  pn  500,  D  or  nn  600,  ]  irn  or  pin  700,  t\  or  tT\  800, 
Y  or  pnn  900.  Thousands  are  represented  by  units  with 
two  dots  placed  over  them,  thus  X  1000,  etc.  Compound 
numbers  are  formed  by  joining  the  appropriate  units  to 
the  tens  and  hundreds,  thus  Uijln  421.  Fifteen  is,  how- 
ever, made  not  by  H"',  which  are  the  initial  letters  of  the 
divine  name  Jehovah,  mIH^  but  by  It:  9  +  6. 

This  use  of  the  letters  is  found  in  the  accessories  of 
the  Hebrew  text,  e.  g.  in  the  numeration  of  the  chapters 
and  verses,  and  in  the  Massoretic  notes,  but  not  in  the 
text  itself.  Whether  these  or  any  other  signs  of  number 
were  ever  employed  by  the  original  writers  of  Scripture, 
or  by  the  scribes  in  copying  it,  may  be  a  doubtful  matter. 
It  has  been  ingeniously  conjectured,  and  with  a  show  of 
plausibility,  that  some  of  the  discrepancies  of  numbers 
in  the  Old  Testament  may  be  accounted  for  by  assuming 
the  existence  of  such  a  system  of  symbols,  in  which  errors 
might  more  easily  arise  than  in  fully  written  words. 

The  Vowels. 

§  10.  The  letters  now  explained  constitute  the  body 
of  the  Hebrew  text.  These  are  all  that  belonged  to  it  in 
its  original  form,  and  so  long  as  the  language  was  a  hv- 
ing  one  nothing  more  was  necessary,  for  the  reader  could 
mentally  supply  the  deficiencies  of  the  notation  from  his 
famiharity  with  his  native  tongue.  But  when  Hebrew 
ceased  to  be  spoken  the  case  was  different;  the  know- 
ledge of  the  true  pronunciation  could  no  longer  be  pre- 
sumed, and  difficulties  would  arise  from  the  ambiguity 
of  mdividual  words  and  their  doubtful  relation  to  one 
another.  It  is  the  design  of  the  Massoretic  points  (rrhiD'J 
traditioii)  to  remedy  or  obviate  these  inconveniences  by 
supplying  what  was  lacking  in  this  mode  of  writing.  The 


§11  VOWELS.  13 

authors  of  this  system  did  not  venture  to  make  any 
change  in  the  letters  of  the  sacred  text.  The  signs  which 
they  introduced  were  entirely  supplementary,  consisting 
of  dots  and  marks  about  the  text  fixing  its  true  pronun- 
ciation and  auxiliary  to  its  proper  interpretation.  This 
has  been  done  with  the  utmost  nicety  and  minuteness, 
and  with  such  evident  accuracy  and  care  as  to  make 
them  rehable  and  efficient  if  not  indispensable  helps. 
These  points  or  signs  are  of  three  kinds,  1.  those  repre- 
senting the  vowels,  2.  those  affecting  the  consonants, 
3.  those  attached  to  words. 

a.  As  illustrations  of  the  ambiguity  both  as  to  sound  and  sense  of  indi- 
vidual words,  when  written  by  the  letters  only,  it  may  be  stated  that  "*a"i 
is  in  Gen,  12:  4  "ik'i  he  spake,  in  Ex.  6:  29  "is'n  speak  and  "ihn  speaking,  in 
Pi-ov.  25:  11  "ir^  spoken,  in  Gen.  37:  14  "ihn  word,  in  1  Kin.  6:  16  "in'n  the 
oracle  or  most  holy  place  of  the  temple,  in  Ex.  9:  3  "lan  pestilence.  So 
pUJ'^l  is  in  Gen.  29:  10  p;p^1  and  he  watered,  and  in  the  next  verse  p4""' 
and  he  kissed;  NS'^l  occurs  twice  in  Gen.  29:  23,  the  first  time  it  is  X;:^  and 
he  brought,  the  second  NS^I  and  he  came;  D'^pa^ym  is  in  Jer.  32:  37  first 
crhrnT  and  I  ivill  bring  them  again,  and  then  n"^p3\yrn  and  I  tvill  cause 
them  to  dwell;  Di^;2J  is  in  Gen.  14:  19  C^rJ  heaven,  and  in  Isa.  5:  20  C^ib 
putting.  This  ambiguity  is,  however,  in  most  cases  removed  by  the  con- 
nection in  which  the  words  are  found,  so  that  there  is  little  practical  diffi- 
culty for  one  who  is  well  acquainted  with  the  language.  Modern  Hebrew 
is  commonly  written  and  read  without  the  points:  and  the  same  is  true  of 
its  kindred  tongues  the  Syriac  and  Arabic,  though  each  of  these  has  a 
system  of  points  additional  to  the  letters. 

§  11.  1.  The  alphabet,  as  has  been  seen,  consisted 
exclusively  of  consonants,  since  these  were  regarded  as 
a  sufficiently  exact  representation  of  the  syllables  into 
which  in  Hebrew  they  invariably  enter.  And  the  omission 
of  the  vowels  occasioned  less  embarrassment,  because  in 
the  Semitic  family  of  languages  generally,  unlike  the 
Indo-European,  they  form  no  part,  properly  speaking,  of 
the  radical  structure  of  the  word,  and  consequently  do 
not  aid  in  expressing  its  essential  meaning,  but  only  its 
nicer  shades  and  modifications.  Still  some  notation  of 
vowels  was  always  necessary,  and  this  was  furnished  in 


14  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  11 

a  scanty  measure  by  the  vowel-letters,  or,  as  they  are 
also  called,  quiescents,  or  matres  ledionis  (guides  in  read- 
ing). The  weakest  of  the  palatals  "^  was  taken  as  the  re- 
presentative of  the  vowels  ^  and  ^  of  the  same  organ  to 
which  in  sound  it  bears  a  close  affinity;  the  weakest  of 
the  labials  1  was  in  hke  manner  made  to  represent  its 
cognates  il  and  o;  and  the  two  weak  gutturals  5^  and  H 
were  written  for  the  guttural  vowel  a,  as  well  as  for  the 
compound  vowels  e  and  b  of  which  a  is  one  of  the  ele- 
ments. Letters  were  more  rarely  employed  to  represent 
short  vowels;  m  or  ^  for  e  is  the  most  frequent  case; 
others  are  exceptional. 

a.  Medial  a  when  written  at  all,  as  it  very  rarely  is,  is  denoted  by  X, 
e.  g.  'c^  Idt  Judg.  4:  21,  :ni  dag  Neh.  13:  16  K'thibh,  txp  ham  Hos.  10: 14, 
1;txt"  "zdzel  Lev.  16:  8,  trx;"i  rash  Prov.  10:  4  and  in  a  few  other  passages, 
m^xn  sometimes  for  rdmoth,  "ixi:i  tsavvdr,  -[XDXnx  Hos.  4:  6  if  not  an 
error  in  the  text  perhaps  for  emdHik;  final  a,  which  is  much  more  frequently 
written,  is  denoted  by  n,  e.  g.  fnVj  gdld,  nsbn  malkd,  nnx  attd,  rarely  and 
only  as  an  Aramaeism  by  X,  e.g.  NJH  hhoggd  Isa.  19:  17,  S<n"ip  korhhd  Ezek. 
27:  31  K'lhibh,  xn^J  gdbh'hd  Ezek.  31:  5  K'thibh.  The  writing  of  e  and  I, 
0  and  a  is  optional  in  the  middle  of  words  but  necessary  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
nn^l^  or  D'^n"'-.:!!  tsivclthlm,  ip'^I^J  tsivvlthl;  12'J  or  iniu  slmhhu.  In  the 
former  position  "^  stands  for  the  first  pair  of  vowels,  and  1  for  the  second, 
e.  g.  nip'^3152  meiiikoth,  TiSIOS  n'siighothl;  X  for  e  and  0  so  situated  is  rare 
and  exceptional,  e.  g.  ll"i<^  resh  Prov.  6:  11,  30:  8,  and  perhaps  "('X;*!  gdnefn 
Eccles.  12:  5;  nXT  zoth,  nx"i3  j)drdth  Ezek.  31:  8,  ins:jn  bitstsothdv  Ezek. 
47:  11.  At  the  end  of  words  e  is  commonly  expressed  by  1,  and  0  by  "i, 
though  n  is  frequently  and  S<  rarely  employed  for  the  same  purpose,  e.  g. 
iD^^  malkhe,  l:b-2  malkd;  riTi  ¥ge,  ns^lS  paro;  iA  Id.  Final  e  is  represented 
by  n,  medial  e  by  ^,  though  this  is  only  written  in  a  few  particular  forms, 
e.  g.  niiT'  yiKye,  njiinn  or  tiDinn  tiWyend;  Ci'^ns^ba  millethem  Ezek.  11:  6, 
if  not  a  textual  error,  is  at  least  quite  unusual. 

h.  The  employment  of  the  vowel-letters  in  conformity  with  the  scale 
just  given,  is  further  governed,  (1.)  By  usage,  which  is  in  many  words  and 
forms  almost  or  quite  invariable;  in  others  it  fluctuates,  thus  sdhhebh  is 
commonly  nM  or  3110,  only  once  H^laO  2  Kin.  8:  21;  yaHohh  is  yp^J"^  ex- 
cept in  Jer.  33:  26  where  it  is  Slpr^;  thedse  is  m::"n,  but  in  Ex.  25:  31 
niyS'^n;  ethdm  according  to  the  analogy  of  similar  grammatical  forms  would 
be  Cnx,  but  in  Ps.  19:  14  it  is  DHiX;  hemlr  is  in  Jer.  2:  11  written  in  both 
the  usual  and  an  unusual  way,  ^'^^n  and  ^i-ain;  m'lakhim  is  di^bia  except 
in  2  Sam.  11:1,  where  it  is  C'SX^'a;  g'bJmloth  is  in  Deut.  32:  8  rtn:,  in 
Isa.  10:  13  rtl2J,  in  Ps.  74:  17  Pil^'inS;  Id  meaning  not  is  X^,    meaning  fc 


§  12  VOWELS.  15 

him  is  lb,  though  these  are  occasionally  interchanged;  zo  is  written  both 
m  and  IT;  and  po  HS,  IS  and  NS.  (2.)  The  indisposition  to  multiply  the 
vowel-letters  unduly  in  the  same  word,  e.  g.  'lo'^h  mbx,  Hohim  d'^tlbx; 
ndthun  'pn3,  n'thilnim  n"^:n3  or  d3"!n3.  (3.)  The  increased  tendency  to  their 
employment  in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible,  e.  g.  ril3  hb'^hh  Dan.  11:  6, 
always  elsewhere  MS;  TIJIip  Jcddhesh  Dan.  11:  30,  for  UJlp;  "iin  ddvidh  in 
the  books  of  Chronicles  Ezra,  Nehemiah  and  Zechariah,  elsewhere  com- 
monly 111.  This  must,  however,  be  taken  with  considerable  abatement, 
as  is  shown  by  such  examples  as  addirim  QiT^nx  Ex.  15:  10,  D"ni<  Ezek. 
32:  18. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  those  cases  in  which  !!<  is  used  to  record 
vowels  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  those  in  which  it  properly  be- 
longs to  the  consonantal  structure  of  the  word,  though  from  its  weakness 
it  may  have  lost  its  sound,  as  x;£'2  vidtsd,  'paNl  rlshon,  §  57,  2. 

2.  "When  used  to  represent  the  Hebrew  vowels,  a  is 
sounded  as  in  father,  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in 
7net,  i  as  in  machine,  i  as  in  inn,  5  as  in  note,  o  as  in  not, 
ti  as  in  rule,  and  il  as  in  full.  The  quantity  will  be  marked 
when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  when  they  are  short. 

§  12.  There  are  nine  points  or  massoretic  signs  re- 
presenting vowels  (rii2?^Dri  motions,  viz.,  by  which  con- 
sonants are  moved  or  pronounced);  of  these  three  are 
long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful.  They  are  shown 
in  the  following  table,  the  horizontal  stroke  indicating 
their  position  with  reference  to  the  letters  of  the  text. 

Long  Vowels.  Short  Vowels. 


yisib  Kamets     a  — 

^"il  Tsere         e  -z- 

Dbin  Hholem    o  -^ 


T\TB  Pattahh  a  rr 

birc  Seghol  e  -7- 

Ci^t:n  Y:^ib  Kamets  Hhatuph  0  — 

Doubtful  Vowels. 

p'y^'h  Hhirik        -;-       iorz 

p^^iz:  Shurek     — 

■    il  or  a 


-") 


yn{5  Kibbuts 

AU  these  vowel-points  are  written  under  the  letter 
after  which  they  are  pronounced  except  two,  viz.,  Hholem 


16  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  12 

and  Shurek.  Hliolem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the 
letter  to  which  it  belongs,  and  is  thus  distinguished  from 
the  accent  R'bhi^  wliich  is  a  dot  over  its  centre.  When 
followed  by  TZJ  or  preceded  by  123  it  coincides  with  the  dia- 
critical point  over  the  letter,  e.  g.  tw^2  moshe,  i^TL  sbn'e; 
when  it  follows  IT  or  precedes  ic  it  is  written  over  its 
opposite  arm,  e.  g.  nib'ii:"  shomer,  'iZZ'^ri  tirpbs.  Its  presence 
in  these  cases  must  accordmgly  be  determined  by  the 
circumstances.  Since  a  vowel-sign  (or  Sh'va  §  16)  is 
regularly  written  with  every  initial  or  medial  consonant, 
^  must  be  osli  and  ID'  os,  whenever  it  is  preceded  by  a 
consonant  without  a  vowel-sign;  if  it  have  itself  no 
vowel-sign,  IT  will  be  so  and  ID"  slid,  except  at  the  end  of 
words.  If  Sliin  be  preceded  by  a  letter  which  itself  repre- 
sents a  vowel  the  point  over  its  right  arm  will  not  be 
Hholem,  e.  g.  "^^  Ish  not  iyosh,  D^iDifi  rcisli'im,  liiD^I 
rislibn,  but  TDi?^  UosJi  where  &<  is  a  consonant.  Shurek  is 
a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Vav,  thus  \  It  will  be 
observed  that  there  is  a  double  notation  of  the  vowel  u. 
When  there  is  a  1  in  the  text  this  vowel,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

a.  The  division  of  the  vowels  given  above  differs  from  the  common 
one  into  five  long  and  five  short,  according  to  which  Hhirik  is  counted  as 
two,  viz.,  Hhirik  magnum  '^=1,  and  Hhirik  parvum  -^—i;  and  Shurek 
is  reckoned  a  distinct  vowel  from  Kibbuts,  the  former  being  u  and  the  latter 
u.  To  this  there  are  two  objections.  (1.)  It  confuses  the  massoretic  signs 
with  the  letters  of  the  text,  as  though  they  were  coeval  with  them  and 
formed  part  of  the  same  primitive  mode  of  writing,  instead  of  being  quite 
distinct  in  origin  and  character.  The  massoretic  vowel-sign  is  not  ^_  but 
-:-  .  The  punctuators  never  introduced  the  letter  "^  into  the  text;  they  found 
it  already  written  precisely  where  it  is  at  present,  and  all  that  they  did 
was  to  add  the  point.  And  instead  of  using  two  signs  for  i,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  case  of  a,  e,  and  o,  they  us&i  but  one,  viz.,  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  whether  i  was  long  or  short.  The  confusion  of  things  thus  separate 
in  their  nature  was  pardonable  at  a  time  when  the  points  were  supposed 


§13  VOWELS.  17 

to  be  an  original  constituent  of  the  sacred  text,  but  not  now  when  their 
more  recent  origin  is  universally  admitted.  (2.)  It  is  inaccurate.  The 
distinction  between  "'.  and  -;-,  1  and  -;-,  is  not  one  of  quantity,  for  i  and 
M  are  expressed  indifferently  with  or  without  Yodh  and  Vav. 

Gesenius,  in  his  Lehrgebaude,  while  he  retains  the  division  of  the  vowels 
into  five  long  and  five  short,  admits  that  it  is  erroneous  and  calculated  to 
mislead;  and  it  has  been  discarded  in  the  latest  editions  of  his  smaller 
grammar.  That  which  was  proposed  by  Gesenius,  however,  as  a  substitute, 
is  perplexed  and  obscure,  and  for  this  reason,  if  there  were  no  others,  is 
unfitted  for  the  wants  of  pupils  in  the  early  stage  of  their  progress.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  triple  arrangement  here  adopted  after  the  example  of 
Ewald,  has  the  recommendation  not  only  of  clearness  and  correctness,  but  of 
being,  instead  of  an  innovation,  a  return  to  old  opinions.  The  scheme  of 
five  long  and  five  short  vowels  originated  with  Moses  and  David  Kimchi, 
•who  were  led  to  it  by  a  comparison  of  the  Latin  and  its  derivatives.  From 
them  it  was  adopted  by  Reuchlin  in  his  Rudimenta  Hebraica,  and  thus 
became  current  among  Christians.  The  Jewish  grammarians,  before  the 
Kimchis,  however,  reckoned  Kibbuts  and  Shurek  as  one  vowel,  Hhirik  as 
one,  and  even  Kamets  and  Kamets  Uhatuph  as  one  on  account  of  the 
identity  of  the  symbol  employed  to  represent  them.  They  thus  made  out 
seven  vowels,  the  same  number  as  in  Greek,  where  the  distinction  into  long, 
short  and  doubtful  also  prevails. 

b.  The  names  of  the  vowels,  with  the  exception  of  Kamets-Hhatuph, 
contain  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  which  they  are  intended  to  represent, 
Kibbuts  in  the  last,  the  others  in  their  first  syllable.  Their  signification 
is  indicative  either  of  the  figure  of  the  vowel  or  the  mode  of  pronouncing 
it.  Kamets  and  Kibbuts,  contraction,  i.  e.  of  the  mouth;  Pattahh,  opening ; 
Tsere,  bursting  forth ;  Seghol,  cluster  of  grajies;  Hhirik,  gnashing;  Hholem, 
strength;  Kamets-Hhatuph,  hurried  Kamets;  Shurek,  whistling.  It  is  a 
curious  circumstance  that  notwithstanding  the  diversity  of  the  vowel- 
systems  in  the  Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Hebrew,  the  name  Pattahh  is  common 
to  them  all. 

§  13.  This  later  and  more  complete  method  of  noting 
the  vowels  does  not  displace  but  is  superinduced  upon 
the  scanty  one  previously  described.  Hence  it  comes  to 
pass  that  such  vowels  as  were  indicated  by  letters  in  the 
first  instance  are  now  doubly  written,  i.  e.  both  by  letters 
and  points.  By  this  combination  each  of  the  two  methods 
serves  to  illustrate  and  explain  the  other.  Thus  the  added 
signs  determine  whether  the  letters  '"insj^  (which  have 
been  formed  into  the  technical  word  '^^ll^Wi^vi)  are  in  any 
given  case  to  be  regarded  as  vowels  or  as  consonants.  If 
these  letters  are  themselves  followed  by  a  vowel  or  a 


18  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  14 

Sh'va,  §  16,  or  have  a  Daghesh-forte,  §  23,  they  retain 
their  consonant  sound;  for  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  Hebrew,  and  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  belong 
only  to  consonants:  thus  Tj^lp  kovekd,  "^^  dvon,  t\i'112 
mitsvoth  (where  21  being  provided  with  a  separate  point, 
the  Hholem  must  belong  after  i),  tir>y  edJi'voth,  TrtT\ 
v'hdyd,  D^p  kiyyam.  Otherwise  they  quiesce  in  a  preced- 
ing or  accompanying  vowel-sign,  that  is  to  say,  they  have 
the  sound  indicated  by  it,  the  vowel-sign  merely  inter- 
preting what  was  originally  denoted  by  the  letter.  At 
the  end  of  words,  where  Sh'va  and  Daghesh-forte  are 
rarely  written,  ^  is  a  vowel-letter  if  preceded  by  the  sign 
for  either  of  its  homogeneous  vowels  e  or  ^,  and  1  if  ac- 
companied by  the  sign  for  o  or  u;  otherwise  they  are 
consonants,  thus  ^:n  U,  ^'2  me,  Ui^a  ge,  iS  ho,  ^b  lit,  but  ^n'^O 
sdray,  ^ia  goy,  ''^bs  gdlity,  iri  tdv,  ib^c  shdlev,  IT  slv;  the 
combination  V^  is  pronounced  dv,  Vi?  and  lil?  dndv,  TT\D 
and  irp  sHhdv.  In  consequence  of  its  extreme  weakness, 
i^  not  only  quiesces  when  it  is  properly  a  vowel-letter, 
but  may  give  up  its  consonant  character  after  any  vowel 
whatever,  e.  g.  5<i:^5t:  tUe,  "pizJS"]  r'lshon,  Ti^i<B  purd;  final 
i<  is  always  either  quiescent  or  otiant,  §  16.  1;  H  is  never 
used  as  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  and 
there  it  always  quiesces  miless  it  receives  a  Mappik,  §  26. 

a.  As  a  letter  was  scarcely  ever  used  to  express  d,  the  quiescence  of  1 
in  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  very  rare,  and  where  it  does  occur  the  margin  al- 
ways substitutes  a  reading  without  the  1,  e.  g.  f^^^lS"]  Jer.  27:  20,  D''32'irj 
Ezek.  27:  15,  ^in^"''!"}^*^  Ps.  30:  4,  •3—1150')  Isa.  44: 'l7,  "blab  Jer.  33:  8, 
rj3-bl"i5!l  Nah.  1:  3.  In  Vii'^JIX  2  Chron.  8:  18,  and  "'niois  Deut.  32: 13,  ^  rep- 
resents or  quiesces  in  the  still  briefer  S  of  Hhateph-Kamets,  §  16.  3. 

b.  In  a  few  proper  names  medial  n  quiesces  at  the  end  of  the  first 
member  of  the  compound,  e.  g.  l^lklTiQ  Num.  1 :  10,  bitn-?  2  Sam.  2:  19, 
also  written  ^sxTirs  1  Chron.  2:  16.  In  such  words  as  «^3l^^3  Jer.  22:  6, 
Mbsa  Deut.  21:  7,  H  does  not  quiesce  in  Kibbuts,  for  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  readings  13U513,  13EU3  §  46. 

§  14.  On  the  other  hand  the  vowel-letters  shed  light 
upon  the  stability  of  the  vowels  and  the  quantity  of  the 


§  15,  16  VOWELS.  19 

doubtful  signs.  1.  As  ^  was  scarcely  ever  and  u  seldom 
represented  by  a  vowel-letter,  Hhirik  with  Yodh  ("'.)  is 
almost  invariably  long  and  Shurek  Q\)  commonly  so. 
2.  The  occasional  absence  in  individual  cases  of  the  vowel- 
letters,  does  not  determine  the  quantity  of  the  signs  for 
i  and  u;  but  their  imiform  absence  in  any  particular 
words  or  forms  makes  it  almost  certain  that  the  vowel 
is  short.  3.  The  occasional  presence  of  1  and  "^  to  repre- 
sent one  of  their  homogeneous  long  vowels  proves  no- 
thing as  to  its  character;  but  if  in  any  word  or  form  these 
letters  are  regularly  written,  the  vowel  is,  as  a  general 
rule,  immutable.  When  1  and  "^  stand  for  their  long 
homogeneous  vowels,  these  latter  are  said  to  be  written 
fuUy,  e.  g.  bip  kol,  *i^3  nlr,  rr02  milth;  without  these  quies- 
cent letters  they  are  said  to  be  written  defectively,  e.  g. 
■^nrpn  h^k'tmothl,  Dt3  kdmils. 

•     I  •  -:  '        !i  T 

a.  Hhirik  with  Yodh  is  short  in  1"'ri'^^W  vah^mittw  1  Sam.  17:  35, 
f^'^h^'^is'^^  bikk'Tdthekhd^Vs. 45:  10,  -nn;3"^'b  likk'hath  VroY. 30:17,  Tia-ib  Hssodh 
2  Chron.  31:  7.  In  a^p'^S  1  Chron.  12:  1,  20,  i  is  prohably  long,  although 
the  word  is  always  elsewhere  written  without  the  Yodh;  as  it  sometimes 
has  a  secondary  accent  on  the  first  syllable  and  sometimes  not  (see  1  Sam. 
30:  1),  it  may  have  had  a  twofold  pronunciation  tsik'lag,  and  tsiklag. 
Shurek  as  u  is  of  much  more  frequent  occurrence,  e.  g.  "^fS^n  hhukke,  Cl''53ixb 
Vummim,  i|li  yulladh,  ns^in  hhukkd  Ps.  102:5,  d-^feiis^it  2  Chron.  2:  7,  nsiT 
£zek.  16:  84. 

§  15.  The  vowels  may  be  further  distinguished  into 
pure,  a,  i,  u,  and  diphthongal,  e,  o;  e  being  a  combination 
of  a  and  ^,  or  intermediate  between  them,  and  o  holding 
the  same  relation  to  a  and  u. 


ShVa. 

§  16.  1.  The  absence  of  a  vowel  is  indicated  by  — 
Sh'va  (S^TT  emptiness,  or  as  written  by  Chayug,  the  oldest 
of  Jewish  grammarians,  i<2X0),  wliich  serves  to  assure  the 
reader  that  one  has  not  been  inadvertently  omitted.    It 

2* 


20  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  16 

is  accordingly  placed  under  all  vowelless  consonants  ex- 
cept at  the  end  of  words,  where  it  is  regarded  as  un- 
necessary, the  absence  of  a  vowel  being  there  a  matter 
of  course.  If,  however,  the  last  letter  of  a  word  be  "j,  or 
if  it  be  immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter, 
or  be  doubled  by  the  point  called  Daghesh-forte,  §  23, 
Sh'va  is  written  to  preclude  the  doubt  which  is  possible 
in  these  cases,  e.  g.  DD^'r^'-?,  T|3b?^,  t^zp,  n"^^i2^J,  ni<,  rPD. 
Sh'va  is  not  given  to  a  quiescent  letter,  since  it  repre- 
sents not  a  consonant  but  a  vowel,  e.  g.  nj^^iT],  nor  as  a 
general  rule  to  a  final  consonant  preceded  by  a  quiescent; 
thus  ntltan,  nt^n^  Euth  3:4;  t^-'\ri)  Isa.  62:  3,  though  in 
this  case  it  is  sometimes  written,  e.  g.  ru^i'l  2  Sam.  14:  3; 
n^^n^  2  Sam.  14:  2;  n-'nni  Judg.  13:'3;  nxilin  1  Kin. 
17:13.  Sj5  at  the  end  of  a  word,  preceded  either  by  a 
vowelless  letter  or  a  quiescent,  is  termed  otiant,  and  is 
left  unpointed,  e.  g.  i<pn,  i^")^1,  J^'Q"],  ^^IH;  so  hkewise  in 
the  middle  of  a  word,  when  followed  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  preceded  by  a  consonant  to  which  it  has  surrendered 
this  vowel,  its  own  consonant  character  being  lost,  §  57, 
2  (3),  e.  g.  ^J^l^  y'ru  Josh.  24: 14,  bl5<7Jir  s'mol  Num.  20: 17, 
"pizJ^X'i  rlsJion  job  15:  7,  f^ri^'^n  tissena  Ezek.  23:  49. 

a.  Final  ~\  may  receive  Sh'va  for  the  sake  of  distinction  not  only  from 
?],  as  already  suggested,  but  also  from  1  with  which  it  might  be  in  danger 
of  being  confounded  in  manuscripts;  Freytag  conjectures  that  it  is  prop- 
erly a  part  of  the  letter,  like  the  stroke  in  the  corresponding  final  j)  in 
Arabic.  In  such  forma  as  I'^Bs'n  Sh'va  is  omitted  with  the  closing  letter* 
because  the  "^  is  not  sounded. 

2.  Sh'va  may  be  either  silent  (flD  quiescens),  or  vocal 
(:?5  mobile).  At  the  close  of  syllables  it  is  silent.  But  at 
the  beginning  of  a  syllable  the  Hebrews  always  facilitated 
the  pronunciation  of  concurrent  consonants  by  the  in- 
troduction of  a  hiatus  or  slight  breathing  between  them; 
a  Sh'va  so  situated  is  consequently  said  to  be  vocal,  and 
has  a  sound  approaching  that  of  a  hastily  uttered  e,  as 


§  16  VOWELS.  21 

in  given.  This  will  be  represented  by  an  apostrophe,  thus, 

"T^T^n  Vmicllibar,  Utn^B  j^kadhtem. 

a.  According  to  Kimchi  (Mikhlol  fol.  189)  Sh'va  was  pronounced  in 
three  different  ways,  according  to  circumstances.  (1.)  Before  a  guttural 
it  inclined  to  the  sound  of  the  following  vowel,  e.  g.  13X"]  y'^abhedh,  nitb 
s^eth,  !li"i  (l^ii,  and  if  accompanied  by  Methegh,  §  44,  it  had  the  full  sound 
of  that  vowel,  e.  g.  ^ixb  suii,  "^tnn  tlhhl,  t^'il'^  looldm.  (2.)  Before  Yodh 
it  inclined  to  i,  e.  g.  Sp2|^3  b'ya'^JcobJi,  crs  k^'yom,  and  with  Methegh  was 
Bounded  as  Hhirik,  e.  g.  "i^3  hiyadh.  (3.)  Before  any  other  letter  it  inchned 
to  a,  e.  g.  i^ina  b'^rdkha,  ti'^'i'bl gHlllm,  and  with  Methegh  was  pronounced 
as  Pattahh  e.  g.  ni'inp^  bamakheloth. 

3.  Sh'va  may,  again,  be  simple  or  compound.  Some- 
times, particularly  when  the  first  consonant  is  a  guttural, 
which  from  its  weakness  is  in  danger  of  not  being  dis- 
tinctly heard,  the  hiatus  becomes  still  more  audible,  and 
is  assimilated  in  sound  to  the  short  guttural  vowel  a,  or 
the  diphthongal  e  or  o,  into  which  it  enters.  This  assi- 
milation is  represented  by  combining  the  sign  for  Sh'va 
with  those  for  the  short  vowels,  thus  forming  what  are 
called  the  compound  Sh'vas  in  distinction  from  the  simple 
Sh'va  previously  explained. 
These  are, 

Hhateph-Pattahh  ^7;     thus,  1*^?  •modh, 
Hhateph-Seghol     — ;     thus,  l'^i>5  "mor. 
Hhateph-Kamets  — ;     thus,    "bn  liliHi. 

a.  Hhateph  (~i;n  snatching)  denotes  the  rapidity  of  utterance  or  the 
hurried  character  of  the  sounds  represented  by  these  symbols. 

h.  The  compound  Sh'vas,  though  for  the  most  part  restricted  to  the 
gutturals,  are  occasionally  written  under  other  consonants  in  place  of  simple 
Sh'va,  to  indicate  more  distinctlj-  that  it  is  vocal.  Luzzatto  specifies  the 
following  cases:  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  found  under  the  first  of  two  similar 
letters,  e.g.  riihs"^  Num.  10:  36,  or  a  letter  from  which  Daghesh-forte  has 
been  omitted  t^3"^?f]  Gen.  27:38,  after  initial  \  nnn  Gen.  2:  12,  'iJ^ir|i  Dan. 
«:  18,  nVr^  Lev.  25:  34,  '^L'p::n7  Ezek.  26:  21,  after  a  vowel  which  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va  "^r^D,  and  in  certain  forms  of  bsX  to  eat  and  "^^3  to  bless, 
e.  g.  ns^zxn  Gen.  3:  17,^j;;;i^Ta2^Gen.  12:  3.  Hhateph-Kamets  is  less  fre- 
quent, but  sometimes  occurs  where  Hholem  has  been  dropped  liiipri  (from 
SpP)  Num.  23:  25,  "inip"!;?  Job  2:  7,  D'^i^'ii^t^  Ezek.  41:  4,  ti'^^^ii  Gen.  41 :  5, 
f^ns:!  Ps.  104:  17,  nsnsx  Isa.  27:3,  nsaPDX  Jer.  31:33,  and  in  a  few  other 


22  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  17,  18 

instances  -^T;1^.')  Gen.  2:  23,  Irji^bx  Ruth  2:  2,  7,  iTira!)  1  Kin.  13:  7,  T?^?- 
Hhateph-Segliol  occurs  but  once  C^B^bs  2  Sam.  6 :  5  (edition  of  Stephanus). 
Manuscripts  and  editions  differ  greatly  in  this  use  of  the  compound  Sh'vas; 
and  the  same  word  is  differently  written  in  the  current  text,  e.  g.  fT^^S? 
2  Kin.  2:  1,  n^l^Da  ver.  11. 

'  T  T    1  I- 

Pattahh  Fuetive. 

§  1 7.  A  similar  hiatus  or  slight  transition  sound  was 
used  at  the  end  of  words  in  connection  with  the  gutturals. 
When  y,  n,  or  the  consonantal  T\  at  the  end  of  words  is 
preceded  by  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  another 
•  than  a),  or  is  followed  by  another  vowelless  consonant,  it 
receives  a  Pattahh  furtive  — ,  which  resembles  in  sound 
an  extremely  short  a,  and  is  pronounced  before  the  letter 
under  which  it  is  written,  e.  g.  ttn  rWhh,  y^Q'^T  shdmo'*, 
rl'^'yT  maglih't^h,  ri?!bT2J  shamaH,  ''[t]^  yi^hJid. 

a.  Some  grammarians  deny  that  Pattahh  furtive  (3135  stolen)  can  be 
found  under  a  penultimate  guttural,  contending  that  the  vowel-sign  is  in 
such  cases  a  proper  Pattahh,  and  that  tns"biy  should  accordingly  be  read 
shdmaat,  and  'nri'^  yihhad.  But  both  the  Sh'va  under  the  final  letter,  §  16, 
and  the  Daghesh-lene  in  it,  §  21,  show  that  the  guttural  is  not  followed  by 
a  vowel.  The  sign  beneath  it  must  consequently  be  Pattahh  furtive,  and 
represent  an  antecedent  vowel-sound.  In  some  manuscripts  Pattahh  furtive 
is  written  as  Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  even  as  simple  Sh'va ;  thus,  ?'^p'^  or  S'^p'^ 
for  Sipl. 

\  Syllables. 

§  18.  1.  Syllables  are  formed  by  the  combination  of 
consonants  and  vowels.  As  two  vowels  never  come 
together  in  the  same  word  in  Hebrew  without  an  inter- 
vening consonant,  there  can  never  be  more  than  one 
vowel  in  the  same  syllable;  and  with  the  single  exception 
of  ^  occurring  at  the  beginning  of  words,  no  syllable  ever 
consists  of  a  vowel  alone.  Every  syllable,  with  the  ex- 
ception just  stated,  must  begin  with  a  consonant,  and 
may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more  than  two. 
Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel,  whether  represented  by 


§  18  SYLLABLES.  23 

a  quiescent  letter  or  not,  are  called  simple,  e.  g.  Tjb  Vkhcl^ 
Tb^y  b-ld.  (The  first  syllable  of  this  second  example 
begins,  it  will  be  perceived,  with  the  consonant :?,  though 
this  disappears  in  the  notation  given  of  its  sound.)  Syl- 
lables ending  with  a  consonant,  or,  as  is  possible  at  the 
close  of  a  word,  with  two  consonants,  are  said  to  be 
mixed:  thus  DTl'rl^  kam-tem,  ri^Bn  ha-lakht.  As  the  vocal 
Sh'vas,  whether  simple  or  compound,  are  not  vowels 
properly  speaking,  but  simply  involuntary  transition 
sounds,  they,  with  the  consonants  under  which  they 
stand,  cannot  form  distinct  syllables,  but  are  attached 
to  that  of  the  following  vowel.  Pattahh  furtive  in  like 
manner  belongs  to  the  syllable  formed  by  the  preceding 
vowel.  Thus  Ji"iT  zWb",  ""jN;  ''ni  are  monosyllables. 

2.  Long  vowels  always  stand  in  simple  syllables,  and 
short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables,  unless  they  be  accented. 
But  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or  a  short  vowel. 

a.  The  following  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  the  division  of  Hebrew 
words  into  their  proper  syllables ;   thus, 

Dnx         Ci%'i'^i<      xna       Di^a         Qnx  n^^iri  isb      sit 

a-dham      '16-him      b'ro     b'yom      a-dham        to-1'dhoth      se-pher     ze 
Gen.  5 :  1.     irX       naa       ^''tb^.         MBna 

6-tho  a-sa  *15-him  bidh-mfith 
h.  The  reason  of  the  rule  for  the  quantity  of  syllables  appears  to  be 
this.  In  consequence  of  their  brevity,  the  short  vowels  required  the  ad- 
dition of  a  following  consonant  to  make  the  utterance  full  and  complete, 
unless  the  want  of  this  was  compensated  by  the  greater  energy  of  pronun- 
ciation due  to  the  accent.  The  long  vowels  were  sufficiently  complete 
without  any  such  addition,  though  they  were  capable  of  receiving  it  under 
the  new  energy  imparted  by  the  accent.  This  pervading  regularity,  which 
is  so  striking  a  feature  of  the  Hebrew  language,  was  the  foundation  of  the 
systema  morarum  advocated  by  some  of  the  older  grammarians  of  Holland 
and  Germany.  The  idea  of  this  was,  that  each  syllable  was  equal  to  three 
morae,  that  is,  three  rests,  or  a  bar  of  three  beats;  a  long  vowel  being 
equivalent  to  two  morae,  or  two  beats,  a  short  vowel  to  one,  and  the 
initial  or  final  consonant  or  consonants  also  to  one:  thus  pVcj^  ^  (1)  + 
a  (2)  =  3,  f  (1)  +  a  (1)  +  It  (1)  =  3.  An  accented  syllable  might  have  one 
mora  or  beat  either  more  or  less  than  the  normal  quantity.     This  system 


24  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  19 

was  not  only  proposed  by  way  of  grammatical  explanation,  but  also  made 
the  basis  of  a  peculiar  theory  of  Hebrew  prosody.  See  Gesenius,  Geschichte 
d.  Heb.  Sprache,  p.  123. 

c.  The  cases  in  which  short  vowels  occur  in  unaccented  simple  sylla- 
bles, are  mostly  due  to  the  disturbing  influence  exerted  by  the  weak  letters 
upon  the  normal  forms  of  words;  thus,  X'^J^,  Sf^fe,  K^Q,  nJn,  Ml^p  and  the 
like  are  formed  after  the  analogy  of  T^h.  A  long  vowel  in  an  unaccented 
mixed  syllable  is  found  in  but  one  word,  and  that  of  foreign  origin, 
"isN'wJl;^^  hel-Vshatstsar,  though  here,  the  syllable  receives,  if  not  the 
primary,  yet  the  secondary  accent.  The  same  is  the  case  when  a  long 
vowel  is  retained  before  Makkeph,  e.  g.  "^V^^i  so  also  in  the  proper  names 
!iri^3l3,  !in'i"aVl3,  in  which  the  first  member  of  the  compound  preserves  its 
seghoiate  form  as  though  it  were  a  separate  word.  In  the  Arabic,  which  if 
exceedingly  rich  in  vowels,  there  are  comparatively  few  mixed  syllables 
nearly  every  consonant  has  its  own  vowel,  and  this  more  frequently  short 
than  long.  The  Chaldee,  which  is  more  sparing  in  its  use  of  vowels  than 
the  Hebrew,  observes  in  general  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  quantity 
of  syllables,  though  not  with  the  same  inflexible  consistency. 

3.  When  the  consonant  which  concludes  one  syllable 
is  at  the  same  time  attached  to  that  which  follows,  the 
first  syllable  is  in  strictness  neither  sunple  nor  mixed  but 
may  be  denominated  intermediate.  The  vowel  in  an 
intermediate  syllable  is  short  as  though  the  following 
consonant  belonged  to  it  entirely,  while  yet  this  is  hke- 
wise  linked  to  a  succeeding  vowel  or  vocal  ShVa,  thus 
rihin  hhar'bhoth. 

a.  Such  syllables  are  often  occasioned  by  the  special  characteristics  of 
the  guttural  letters,  thus  ni'n  in  which  S"  belongs  in  a  measure  to  both  sylla- 
bles is  for  n^'rt,  K^iriii  hahu  is  for  hah-hii,  §  23.  3.  a,  5^^"'  yah'^rog  is  for 
IT^-  yah-rog,  ibsna  neheph'khu  is  for  lis™  neh-p^khu.  See  also  §  20.  2 
and  §  22.  a. 

Ambiguous  Signs. 

§  19.  It  will  now  be  possible,  by  aid  of  the  principles 
already  recited,  to  determine  the  quantity  of  the  doubt- 
ful vowels,  and  to  remove  the  ambiguity  which  appears 
to  exist  in  certain  vowel-signs. 

1.  Hhirik,  Shurek,  and  Kibbuts,  in  unaccented  simple 
syllables,  must  be  long,  and  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables, 
short,  e.  g.  ITT^  or  IT^"]  yt-rash,  ^is^  yibh-nu,  ib^na  or  ibns 


§19  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  25 

g'bhu-ld,  nV  or  "%''  yul-ladh,  D^3  or  D^^5  Jml-lclm,  ^^^Vn 
or  "p'^a  mauszi.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or 
mixed,  they  are  always  long,  e.  g.  Dh^ilD  o^"  D^n^'iT  si-hliim^ 
^b  Zf,  bis  or  b'iy  q'bhul,  ^nir'^'n  or  ^M^i2;"T^  d'rd-sku-ku,  the 
only  exception  being  that  Hhirik  is  short  in  the  mono- 
syllabic particles  DS,  irti,  D^,  "|"^,  in  "jS,  and  in  some  ab- 
breviated verbal  forms  of  the  class  called  Lamedh-He, 
e.  g.  T^.1,  ^o:-^],  1*1^  The  only  cases  of  remaining  doubt 
are  those  in  which  these  vowels  are  followed  by  a  letter 
with  Sh'va,  either  simple  or  compound.  If  the  former,  it 
might  be  a  question  whether  it  was  silent  or  vocal,  and 
consequently  whether  the  syllable  was  simple  or  mixed. 
If  the  latter,  though  the  syllable  is  of  course  simple,  the 
weak  letter  which  follows  may  interfere  with  the  operation 
of  the  law.  Here  the  etymology  must  decide. 

a.  The  vowel  is  long  or  short  as  the  grammatical  form  may  require; 
thus  in  i'i^^-^,  Ti'inri,  'is-nx-];;  Gen.  22:  8,  which  follow  the  analogy  of  V6'pi, 
and  in  "^b^D  Isa.  10:  34,  ikop  the  first  vowel  is  short;  in  tizh'^t^,  ^OJ-^  the 
first  vowel  is  long.  In  a  few  instances  the  grammatical  form  in  which 
Hhirik  is  employed  is  itself  doubtful;  the  distinction  is  then  made  by  means 
of  Methegh,  §  44,  which  is  added  to  the  vowel-sign  if  it  is  long,  but  not  if 
it  is  short;  thus,  !lk"!|;  y^-T''u,  from  xS^J  to  fear,  and  "id";  yi-sh'nu  from  "|i3'J 
to  sleep;  but  sis'^'^  yir-u  from  nx'^  to  see,  and  >iilj"^  yish-nu  from  tiid  to  do 
a  second  time. 

2.  Kamets  d  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  o  are  both  repre- 
sented by  the  same  sign  ( ^ ),  but  may  be  distinguished 
by  rules  similar  to  those  just  given.  In  an  unaccented 
simple  syllable  it  is  Kamets;  in  an  unaccented  mixed 
syllable  it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph ;  in  an  accented  syllable, 
whether  simple  or  mixed  it  is  Kamets,  e.  g.  ■Q'^  dd-hhdr, 
^ipin  hhoph-sM.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sh'va,  the 
distinction  is  mostly  made  by  Methegh,  §  44;  without 
Methegh  it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly 
Kamets,  e.  g.  Tin'ZT^  hhokh-nid,  nb:n  hhd-kh'md.  Before  a 
guttural  with  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph  it 
is  frequently  o,  though  standing  in  a  simple  syllable  and 


26  OKTHOGRAPHT.  §  19 

accompanied  by  Metliegh,  e.  g.  ''^.'n^  ho-JiJfrt,  ^i^^'Pl 
to-obhdhem.  The  surest  criterion,  however,  and  in  many 
cases  the  only  decisive  one,  is  found  in  the  etymology. 
If  the  vowel  be  derived  from  Hholem,  or  the  gramma- 
tical form  requires  an  o  or  a  short  vowel,  it  is  Kamets- 
Hliatuph;  but  if  it  be  derived  from  Pattahh,  or  the  form 
requires  an  a  or  a  long  vowel,  it  is  Kamets. 

a.  Thus  ni'':xi  Avith  the  prefixed  conjunction  vo^niyyoth,  Tl^'z^Xn  with 
the  article  haPniyya;  n^>^  in  the  Hophal  yo°madh,  If^b^C?  ^^^-  *■*•  ^^  ^"^ 
the  Piel  y'thaP-rehu.  The  first  vowel  is  6  in  t2';^lna  from  "inis,  ci^nj^  from 
•oip,  ta'^onij;:  from  rjno,  ''^-niT>p^  Isa.  38:  14,  ""l-nn];?  Num.  22:  u/'^V't;^ 
Num.  23:  7  and  the  like,  and  the  first  two  vowels  in  such  words  as  fiblpys 
from  b^'D,  cbcx^  Isa.  30:  12  from  OSri,  DDl'i;^^  Deut.  20  :  2,  ^|3--^)5  Hos. 
13:  14,  ibiri  2  Chron.  10:  10,  tsy-bn;^  2  Kin.  15:  10,  because  they  are 
shortened  from  Hholem.  On  the  other  hand  the  first  vowel  is  a  in  '^^p^p 
Job  16:  19  from  ip::,  dr'^n  from  r^n,  -^r^a  from  nis.  The  word  tr^P'J 
is  in  Ps.  86:  2  the  imperative  shomrd,  in  Job  10:  12  the  preterite  shdm'rd. 
The  medial  vowel  is  o  in  the  infinitive  ^\i.'~?.  Obad.  ver.  11,  and  the  future 
^'4:33;;  Gen.  32:  18,  but  a  in  the  preterite  Tj:n3  1  Sam.  24:  11.  The  best 
authorities  decide  that  D^lna  should  be  pronounced  bdtttm,  not  botttm,  as 
the  rule  would  seem  to  require. 

6.  In  a  very  few  instances  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  a  syllable 
bearing  a  conjunctive  accent,  viz.:  "^Sn^  Ps.  38:  21  (in  some  editions),  ^3 
Ps.  33:  10,  Prov.  19:7,  and  in  the  judgment  of  Ewald  Ijjp  Judg.  19:  5 
comp.  ver.  8,  and  SS"  Ezek.  41:  25;  in  Dan.  11:  12  Csl'n";  the  points  belong  to 
the  marginal  reading  D'Ti,  and  the  vowel  is  consequently  Kamets.  There 
are  also  a  few  cases  in  which  Kamets  remains  in  a  mixed  syllable,  deprived 
of  its  accent  by  Makkeph,  §  43,  Avithout  receiving  Methegh,  viz. :  "HJ^  Ps. 
16:  5  (in  some  editions),  -nnp  Ps.  55:  19.  22,  ""20  Ps.  74:  5;  and  a  final 
unaccented  Kamets  is  not  affected  by  the  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte  con- 
junctive, §  24,  in  the  initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  e.  g.  GTS  riPij^a  Gen. 
31:  13.  When  an  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  it  serves  equally  to 
distinguish  d  from  0,  e.  g.  ^sSJI.  Ex.  21:  22  v'ndgh'plm,  ^^:ih^  Ex.  21:  35 
umdkh'ru,  §  45.  5. 

c.  Inasmuch  as  S^^l^^  is  derived  from  "iHO  mdhhdr,  its  first  vowel  might 
be  suspected  to  be  a,"  but  as  it  is  so  constantly  written  with  Hhateph- 
Kamets,  the  preceding  vowel  is  probably  conformed  to  it.  It  is  consequently 
regarded  and  pronounced  as  0.  Kimchi  (Mikhlol,  fol.  188)  declares  that  the 
first  vowel  in  ',h'-i'n  1  Sam.  13:  21,  niib")^^  Eccles.  12:  11  and  l^bri  Num.  24:  7 
was  universally  held  to  be  Kamets,  and  that  with  the  exception  of  Rabbi 
Jonah  ben  Gannach,  who  was  of  a  contrary  mind,  the  same  unanimity 
prevailed  in  regard  to  the  first  vowel  of  "tnlp  Ezek.  40:  43.  As,  however, 
this  last  word  is  in  every  other  place  written  without  the  Methegh,  and 
there  is  no  analogy  for  such  words  as  those  mentioned  above  having  a  in 


§  20  AMBIGUOUS  SIGNS.  27 

their  initial  syllable,  the  best  authorities  are  now  agreed  that  the  vowel  ia 
0,  and  the  words  are  accordingly  read  dorbhdn,  etc.  In  n  k':i'  jasper,  and 
Pib'in  emerald,  Ezek.  28:  13,  which  are  mentioned  by  Kimchi  in  the  same 
connection,  the  first  vowel  is  Kamets. 

d.  In  some  manuscripts  and  a  few  of  the  older  printed  books,  e.  g. 
Stephanus'  Hebrew  Bible  and  Eeuchlin's  Eudimenta  Hebraica,  Kamets- 
Hhatuph  is  denoted  by  (^  ).  It  then  differs  from  Kamets,  but  is  liable  to 
be  confounded  with  Hhateph-Kamets.  It  can,  however,  be  distinguished 
from  it  by  the  circumstance  that  Kamets-Hhatuph  is  always  followed  either 
by  simple  Sh'va,  Daghesh-forte,  or  Methegh ;  none  of  which  ever  immediately 
succeed  Hhateph-Kamets.  Such  a  form  as  is^p  Ezek.  26 :  9  in  some  editions 
is  an  impossible  one  if  (^. )  have  its  ordinary  meaning. 

e.  It  is  surprising  that  in  so  minute  and  careful  a  system  of  ortho- 
graphy as  that  of  the  Massorites,  there  should  be  no  symbol  for  o  distinct 
from  that  for  a,'  and  some  have  felt  constrained  in  consequence  to  suppose 
that  the  signs  for  these  two  vowels  were  originally  different,  but  became 
assimilated  in  the  course  of  transcription.  This  seems  unlikely,  however 
The  probability  is  that  a  and  o,  whose  resemblance  even  we  can  perceive, 
were  so  closely  allied  in  the  genuine  Hebrew  pronunciation,  that  one  sign 
was  thought  sufficient  to  represent  them,  especially  as  the  Massorites  were 
intent  simply  on  indicating  sounds  without  concerning  themselves  Avith 
grammatical  relations.  This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  occasional  selection 
of  Hhateph-Kamets  to  accompany  Kamets,  as  !l!i"ixr7,  rTnr&2,  "^py^n  Jer. 
22:  20,  riyrSX  Isa.27:4,  or  to  replace  it,  as  nidin  from  n-.n  Ezek.36:35,38, 
and  by  the  fact  that  the  article  undergoes  the  same  euphonic  change  be- 
fore n  and  n,  §  231.  4. 

§  20.  1.  As  simple  Sh'va  is  vocal  at  the  beginning  of 
a  syllable  and  silent  at  its  close,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
as  to  its  character  when  it  stands  under  initial  or  final 
letters.  Preceding  the  first  vowel  of  a  word  it  must  of 
course  be  vocal,  and  following  the  last  vowel  it  must  be 
silent,  Dri^lDT  z^kliartdm,  rT^bT  zakhart.  In  the  middle  of  a 
word,  the  question  whether  it  belongs  to  the  syllable  of 
the  preceding  or  the  following  vowel  must  be  determined 
by  the  circumstances.  If  a  complete  syllable  precedes, 
that  is,  either  an  unaccented  long  vowel  or  a  vowelless 
consonant  serving  as  the  complement  of  a  previous  short 
vowel,  it  is  vocal.  If  it  be  preceded  by  a  short  vowel 
which  cannot  make  a  complete  syllable  without  the  aid 
of  a  following  consonant,  or  by  a  long  accented  vowel, 
it  is  silent:    ^nDT  zo-Jch're,   ^n37Pi  tiz-k'ru,    nizb  libh-ne, 


28  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  21 

"jbtpP  tiktol-na.  ShVa  under  a  letter  doubled  by  Dagbesh- 
forte,  §  23,  is  vocal,  sucb  a  letter  being  equivalent  to 
two,  the  first  of  which  comjDletes  the  previous  syllable, 
and  the  second  begins  the  syllable  which  follows:  D^nStr} 
=  D^'iS7Tn  haz-s^kliarwi.  Inasmuch  as  no  syllable  can 
begin  with  more  than  two  consonants,  §  18. 1,  two  vocal 
Sh'vas  can  never  come  together.  And  two  silent  Sh'vas 
can  never  come  together  except  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
since  none  but  final  syllables  can  close  with  two  conson- 
ants. When  two  simple  Sh'vas  concur  in  the  middle  of 
a  word,  therefore,  the  first  is  necessarily  silent  and  the 
second  vocal:  HnSTS  ez-k'rd. 

2.  In  addition  to  this  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  ShVa 
is  vocal  after  intermediate  syllables;  that  is  to  say,  when 
the  consonant  under  which  it  stands  performs  the  double 
office  of  completing  one  syllable  and  beginning  the  next. 
Thus,  when  it  follows  a  consonant  from  which  Daghesh- 
forte  has  been  omitted,  ^irp3";l  vay'hhak^shu  for  vay- 
y^bhak-k'shil,  or  the  first  of  two  similar  letters,  in  order 
that  the  reduplication  may  be  made  more  distinct,  ^bbtl 
haVlii,  ribbp  kiVlath,  '^b'l  tsiVlo,  ^bbs^  aVlay,  ^ppn  Jihik'ke, 
and  in  several  other  cases,  which  will  be  more  partic- 
ularly described  in  §  22. 

a.  Elias  Levita  ingeniously  represented  the  rules  for  Tocal  Sli'va  by 
the  fii'st  five  letters  of  the  Hebrew  Alphabet,  thus  X  (=1)  when  it  stands 
under  the  first  letter  of  a  word;  2  (=2)  after  another  Sh'va;  5  (=  n^il."  lonff) 
after  a  long  vowel;  1  (=1:33^)  after  Daghesh-forte;  n  (=D'iQ'~n  the  similar) 
under  the  first  of  two  Bimilar  letters. 

Daghesh-Lene. 

§  21.  The  second  class  of  signs  added  to  the  Hebrew 
text  are  those  w^hich  are  designed  to  guide  in  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the  consonants.  These  are  the  diacritical 
point  over  Shin,  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte,  Mappik, 


g  21  DAGHESH-LENB.  29 

and  Eaphe.    The  use  of  the  first  of  these  has  abeady 
been  sufficiently  explained,  §  3.  1. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  (bp  irrj^)  is  a  point  inserted  in  the  six 
letters  n  2  D  T  !i  n  (technically  called  B'ghadh  K''phatli), 
to  indicate  the  loss  of  their  aspiration,  e.  g.  H  hli,  ^  b,  etc. 
As  these  letters  are  always  aspirated  after  a  vowel- 
sound,  however  slight,  and  never  as  an  uiitial  utterance 
or  when  following  a  consonant,  they  invariably  require 
Daghesh-lene  whenever  they  are  not  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel  or  a  vocal  Sh'va.  It  is  consequently 
mserted  in  the  initial  aspirate  of  a  word  which  begins  a 
verse,  ri'lrJ^"^!!!  Gen.  1 :  1,  or  which  follows  a  word  bear- 
ing a  disjunctive  accent  (inasmuch  as  this  represents  a 
pause  of  longer  or  shorter  duration),  ^l^S  '^T\'Z/\  Ex.  1:1, 
"B  I  nr?  Gen.  3:  22,  or  ending  in  a  consonant,  ^p.^"-!^, 
^3^*1  rrbXZ  Gen.  24:  42;  but  not  if  it  follows  a  word 
ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent, 
Dihn  ^;3,  ^n'n  nr\'n  Gen.  l:  2.  The  sacred  name  riin^ 
is  followed  by  Daghesh-lene,  even  though  it  may  have  a 
conjunctive  accent,  Num.  10: 29,  Deut.  3:26,  Josh.  10:  30, 
11:  8,  Ps.  18:  21,  because  in  reading  the  Jews  always 
substitute  for  it  the  word  *D'li5,  which  ends  in  a  conson- 

T  —/ 

ant.  In  three  mstances,  however,  e.g.  Wl  ^d'"!^,  Ps.  68: 18, 
^nh-lp  Isa.  34:  11,  nn  lb;i  Ezek.  23:  42,  Daghesh-lene  is 
not  inserted  after  a  vowel-letter,  which  retains  its  con- 
sonant sound. 

2.  Daghesh-lene  is  inserted  in  a  medial  or  final  aspi- 
rate preceded  by  a  vowelless  consonant,  whether  this 
be  accompanied  by  silent  Sh'va  or  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g. 
Ti'^ivCa,  r?b'i;  but  not  if  it  be  preceded  by  a  vowel  or 
vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound,  e.  g.  lr\'il^, 

a.  Thft  primary  signification  of  the  name  Daghesh  ig  commonly  ex* 
plained  from  the  Syriac   ^.*-«?   (liJ?'^),   to  which  Castellus  in  his  lexicon 


30  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  22 

gives  the  sense  of  piercing.  This  is  by  some  applied  to  the  puncture  or 
point  which  is  its  written  sign,  by  others  to  its  power  of  sharpening  the 
sound  of  letters  by  removing  their  aspiration  dr  doubling  them.  Buxtorf, 
however,  in  his  Chaldee  Lexicon,  disputes  the  existence  of  such  a  root  in 
either  Sj-riac  or  Chaldee,  alleging  that  in  Prov.  12:  18,  the  passage  quoted 
to  prove  the  word,  the  true  reading  is  (-*-«'  (Sli5J"i).  The  six  letters  which 
receive  Daghesh-lene  in  Hebrew  have  the  same  twofold  pronunciation  in 
Syriac,  a  red  dot  called  Eukhokh  (■^so?  softness),    being  written  beneath 

PS. 

them  when  they  were  to  be  aspirated,  and  another  called  Kushoi  (wa»a>q-o 
hardness),  being  written  above  them  when  they  were  not. 

b.  Grammarians  are  not  agreed  whether  the  aspirated  or  unaspirated 
sound  of  these  consonants  was  the  original  one.  There  being  no  data  for 
the  settlement  of  the  question,  each  decides  it  by  his  own  theory  of  pho- 
netic changes.  The  correctness  of  the  Massoretic  punctuation  has  some- 
times been  questioned  in  regard  to  this  matter,  on  the  ground  of  the  im- 
probability of  such  fluctuation  in  the  sound  of  these  letters  in  the  same 
word.  But  besides  the  Syriac  analogy  just  referred  to,  the  Sanskrit  lan- 
guage shows  the  almost  unlimited  extent  to  which  euphonic  changes  may 
be  carried  by  a  people  possessing  a  sensitive  and  discriminating  ear.  The 
Sanskrit  aspirates,  besides  being  subjected  to  other  mutations  which  can- 
not here  be  detailed,  regularly  lose  their  aspiration  when  finals,  aud  under 
certain  conditions  when  medials,  throwing  it  back,  where  this  is  possible, 
upon  a  previous  letter.  Bopp  Kritische  Grammatik,  pp.  30.  42.  Similar  laws 
prevail  to  some  extent  in  Gi-eek,  e.  g.  Sp!^,  rpixoc;  TpE(pca,  Spi^'ni;  Svca, 
tTuS'/jv;   OUK  ex^a,  ov^  s^oi;   [/.sff  v/xiv. 

§  22.  The  absence  of  Dagliesh-lene  in  an  aspirate 
sometimes  shows  a  preceding  simple  Sh'va  to  be  vocal 
when  this  would  not  otherwise  have  been  known.  In 
most  of  the  cases  referred  to,  a  letter  originally  belong- 
ing to  the  succeeding  syllable  is  by  the  prefixing  of  a 
short  vowel  drawn  back  to  complete  the  syllable  before 
it;  instead,  however,  of  giving  up  its  previous  connection 
altogether,  it  forms  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  20.  2,  the 
Sh'va  remauiing  vocal  though  the  antecedent  vowel  is 
short;  thus,  3nb  Vbliabh  with  the  prefix  21  becomes  nib^ 
hiVbhahh,  not  -i^bs  hil-hdbh. 

a.  The  particular  instances  in  which  this  may  occur  are  the  following, 
viz.:  (1)  The  Kal  imperative  of  verbs  and  the  Kal  infinitive  with  suffixes, 
e.  g.  ^'^'ys,  '11^3,  ti'niaJ',  ^ina^  from  13?;  yet  with  occasional  exceptions,  as 
BsQDXa  Lev.  23:  39,  where  D  necessarily  closes  the  syllable,  otherwise  two 
successive  letters  would  have  vocal  Sh'va,  contrary  to  §  20.  1.     (2)  Those 


§22 


DAGHESn-LENE. 


forms  of  Pe  Guttural  verbs  in  which  the  first  radical  assumes  a  short  vowel 
in  place  of  the  silent  Sh'va  in  the  regular  inflexion,  e.  g.  ^IT^"'^,  tT:"n  for 
^1^'J';;,  Ci'iazTri,  (3)  The  construct  plural  of  nouns  '^'I'Z'J  from  D"''i25,  r'Sra 
from  nisrs,  riis'^ri  from  rri^in,  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  as  "srn 
Cant.  8:  6,  biit  '•t::-\  Ps.  76:  4;"  i^p^  Isa.  5:  10,  niQin  Ps.  69:  10,  "^sia  Gen. 
50:  23,  but  Cr;'^S"i3  Judg.  7:  6;  "'"l^a,  insa  from  Xa  are  peculiar  in  omit- 
ting Daghesh  in  the  singular  with  suffixes.  (4)  Three  femhiine  nouns  ending 
in  ffl,  Wrb^  from  Ti^h,  ri^n^?  from  "ib^,  Ti'iar  (only  occurring  with  suffixes) 
from  "nay,  but  not  W^"i"3.     Also  a  few  other  nouns  of  different  forms,  viz.: 

Ci":b=T>  ^^^  ■'r?'^-.  ^k'^'^'  ''^■'?'  ^■'^l'^'  °''??")P.  'i'^-  (5)  After  prefixes,  as 
He  interrogative,  e.  g.  Cn3."n';ri  Gen.  29 :  5  from  Cn"^"],  and  inseparable  prep- 
ositions, e.  g.  ^"'h^^  from  ^''a'l,  ri^a  'from  nS'n,  "la^S  from  la'n.  Usage  is 
not  uniform  in  the  case  of  Kal  infinitives  following  inseparable  prepositions, 
e.  g.  airiDb,  airra;  ^3:a,  Vi'.'S,  hhh;  ^i^b  Isa.  31:  4,  5<asb  Num.  4:  23,  8:24; 
ri"isb,  'naya.  (6)  The  suffixes  of  the  second  person  ^,  D3,  "D  never  receive 
Daghesh-lene,  ?j:a,  D5'n|?a,  except  once  after  Nun  Epenthetic,  §  101,  2  (5), 
r,;pnx  Jer.  22:  24. 

These  rules  are  sometimes  of  importance  in  etymology;  thus,  Ti^SiafSJ 
Ezek.  27:  12  must  have  as  its  ground  form  "'ia-ry,  not  liat^;  and  Cia*iX  Hos. 
7:  6,  san'n  Ps.  90:  10  cannot  be  infinitives  with  suffixes,  but  must  be  from 
the  segholates  a"iS,  aiin. 

b.  The  omission  of  Daghesh-lene  from  the  final  letter  of  Plpin  Prov. 
30:  6,  abbreviated  from  Ci'^Q'in  or  ClOin,  and  from  the  aspirate  in  the  proper 
names  ^N^p^  Josh.  15:  38,  2  Kin.  14:  7,  and  BJJ-ip^  Josh.  15:  56  is  ex- 
ceptional. The  Daghesh  occasionally  occurring  in  initial  aspirates  after 
words  ending  in  a  vowel  and  having  a  conjunctive  accent,  is  for  the  most 
part  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive,  §  24,  e.  g.  "^'33  n:i1N  Gen.  11:  31  and  else- 
where, 'ri  n^-ix  Gen.  46:  28,  ns^  ns5  Ex.  15:  1.  21,  T\hkt  ^1  Ex.  15:  13, 
rOB  n-^i"!  Deut.  16:  1  (comp.  ^i:^  r-^i"  Gen.  20  :  9),  D3  h-rvii'}  Deut  31:28 

(comp.  I's  J^Tr'^"^-  ^^^-  ^''  2).  T'"S  ~\'^"r  ^®^-  ^^'-  2^'  ''^  ^'?"'^}t  ^^^-  ^^'-  '^>  ^'^° 

Ex.  15:11.  16,  Isa.  54:  12,  Jer.  20:  9.  But  Daghesh-lene  may  be  inserted 
in  the  first  of  two  similar  aspirates,  if  it  have  no  vowel,  for  greater  distinct- 
ness of  pronunciation;  viz.  in  a  followed  by  a  Gen.  39:  12,  Jer.  3 :  25  or  by 
B  Ex.  14:  4.  17,  Lev.  25:  53,  or  by  »  (in  Baer's  text)  Gen.  32:  11,  40:  7; 
in  a  followed  by  3  Josh.  8:  24,  10:  20,  Isa.  10:  9;  also  in  biblical  Aramseic 
in  1  followed  by  f\  Dan.  3:  3  (in  some  copies)  and  in  D  followed  by  n  Dan. 
3:  3.  The  old  strife  as  to  the  Daghesh  in  the  word  C'P':;  ttvo  is  not  yet 
settled.  Kimchi  explained  it  as  Daghesh-lene  upon  the  supposition  that  the 
word  was  abridged  from  C^rcS;  Schultens  as  Daghesh-forte  arising  from 
an  assimilated  3,  contending  that  it  was  for  ti'^yyii  from  d"]ri3ia;  Nordheimei 
as  an  anomalous  Daghesh-lene,  introduced  as  a  euphonic  expedient  to  pre- 
vent the  combination  of  an  aspirated  ri  with  a  sibilant,  such  as  is  obviated 
in  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  by  a  transposition  that  would  here  be  inadmissible. 
The  puzzle  is  still  further  perplexed  by  the  circumstance  that  it  once 
appears  with  the  preposition  "B  without  the  Daghesh,  '^r'i''3  Judg.  16:  28, 
and  again  with  the  same  preposition  with  it,  C^PiIJ^  Jon.  4:  11,  the  Methegh 
showing  the  Sh'va  to  be  vocal,  as  might  silso  be  inferred  from  the  fact  that 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted. 


32  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  23 


Daghesh-Foetb. 

§  23.  1.  "When  the  same  consonant  was  repeated  with 
a  vowel  or  even  the  shghtest  hiatus  intervening,  so  that 
successive  movements  of  the  organs  of  speech  were  re- 
quired in  the  pronunciation,  the  Hebrews  invariably 
wrote  the  letter  twice.  Wlien,  however,  there  was  no" 
interval  between  the  reduplicated  consonants,  and  the 
only  audible  result  was  a  more  protracted  or  vehement 
utterance  of  the  same  sound  effected  by  a  single  effort 
of  the  organs,  the  letter  was  written  but  once.  This  fact 
the  Massoretic  punctuators  have  indicated  by  placing  a 
point  called  Daghesh-forte  (pj"  "iTj^)  in  the  bosom  of  a 
letter  so  affected,  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled  in  the 
pronunciation;  thus,  b!i3^1  vayyimmal.  Daghesh-forte  may 
be  lOund  in  any  letter  with  the  exception  of  the  gutturals 
i<  n  n  3?,  which  on  account  of  their  weakness  do  not 
admit  of  reduplication.  The  letter  "i,  partaking  of  this 
with  other  peculiarities  of  the  gutturals,  receives  it  only 
in  a  very  few  exceptional  cases,  e.  g.  ^irSJ^'niT  Cant.  5:  2, 
n^-i  Prov.  14:  10. 

-     T 

a.  For  other  examples  of  Eesh  with  Daghesh-forte  see  Prov.ll:  21,  15:1, 
Jer.  39:  12,  Ezek.  16:  4,  also  §  24.  h. 

2.  The  aspirates,  when  doubled,  always  at  the  same 
time  lose  their  aspiration;  thus,  "pB";  yippakedli.  Daghesh- 
forte  in  these  letters  is  readily  distinguishable  from 
Daghesh-lene  by  the  consideration  that  a  consonant  can- 
not be  pronounced  double  except  after  a  vowel.  A  point 
in  one  of  the  aspirates  is,  therefore,  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene. 

3.  Daghesh-forte  in  T  may  be  distinguished  from 
Shurek  in  the  same  way.  Inasmuch  as  two  vowels  cannot 
come  together  in  the  same  word,  if  a  vowel  precedes  it 
Is  Daghesh-forte,  if  not  it  is  Shurek. 


§  24  DAGHESH-FORTB.  S3 

a.  Some  Grammarians  speak  of  Daghesh-forte  impUcihim  in  the  gut- 
turals, by  wliich  they  mean  that  these  letters  appear  in  certain  cases  to 
complete  a  foregoing  syllable  as  well  as  to  begin  that  in  which  they  prop- 
erly stand,  in  spite  of  the  omission  of  Daghesh,  which  analogy  would  re- 
quire them  to  receive. 

h.  The  Arabs  have  a  sign  of  reduplication,  Teshdid  (*),  which  ia 
written  above  the  doubled  letter.  The  Syrians  have  no  written  sign  for 
this  purpose,  and  it  is  disputed  whether  their  letters  were  ever  doubled  in 
pronunciation.  According  to  Asseman  Biblioth.  Orient.  III.  2.  p.  379,  the 
Western  differed  from  the  Eastern  Syrians  in  this  respect,  "Occidentales 
nuUibi  literas  geminant." 

§  24.  Different  epithets  have  been  apphed  to  Daghesh- 
forte  to  describe  its  various  uses  or  the  occasions  of  its 
employment.  1.  When  separate  letters,  whether  origin- 
ally alike,  or  made  so  by  assimilation,  are  by  the  in- 
flection or  formation  of  words  brought  into  juxtaposition, 
the  Daghesh-forte  which  represents  such  a  doubling  is 
called  compensative;  e.g.  ^ri''^^^  formed  by  appending  the 
syllable  "ri  to  the  root  TT}^;  Tlh]  composed  of  the  same 
syllable  and  the  root  'nD,  whose  last  letter  is  changed  to 
X\  to  conform  with  that  which  follows:  ^2,0  from  zb.'O. 
2.  When  the  reduplication  is  indicative  of  a  particular 
grammatical  form  the  Daghesh-forte  is  called  charac- 
teristic, e.  g.  in  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  of  verbs;  as, 
Tjln,  T]3rjriri,  and  certain  forms  of  nouns,  as,  ^iis.  3.  When 
it  has  arisen  from  the  necessity  of  converting  a  previous 
simple  syllable  into  a  mixed  one  in  order  to  preserve  the 
quantity  of  a  short  vowel  which  it  contains,  it  is  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative;  e.  g.  IDI!  for  Dfc\  4.  Wlien  the  initial 
letter  of  a  word  is  doubled  under  the  influence  of  the 
final  vowel  of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  Daghesh-forte 
conjunctive;  e.  g.  m-TTIID,  ^^TI'm*,  i^'l  ^li^p.  5.  When  the 
last  letter  of  an  intermediate  syllable  is  doubled  in  order 
to  make  the  following  hiatus  or  vocal  Sh'va  more  distinct, 
it  is  Dnghesh-forte  dirimens  or  separative,  because  the 
letter  which  receives  it  is  thus  separated  in  part  from 
the  syllable  to  wliich  it  belongs;  e.  g.  "^23?  inn'hlie  for 


34  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  24 

^Zp^  in'hhe.  6.  When  the  first  letter  of  a  final  syllable  is 
doubled  under  the  influence  of  a  previous  vowel  bearing 
the  accent  (mostly  a  pause  accent,  §  36.  2.  a.),  for  the 
sake  of  increased  fullness  and  force  of  pronunciation,  it 
is  Daghesh-forte  emphatic;  e.g.  ^Is'iri  for  ^b'lH.  7.  A  letter 
following  a  guttural  with  silent  Sh'va  is  in  some  manu- 
scripts and  in  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Dehtzsch  regularly 
doubled  by  what  is  called  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  to 
show  that  there  is  no  hiatus  after  the  guttural;  e.  g. 
nia^"]  ramma,  not  ra^ma  Gen.  10:  7,  "i-b'^  yazzer  Isa.  16:9. 
In  the  first  three  uses  named  above  Daghesh-forte  is 
said  to   be    essential,   in  the  last  four  it  is  euphonic 

a.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  occurs  regulai-ly  after  the  pronouns  fr: 
and  nt  followed  by  Makkeph,  e.  g.  B^ys-n^l  3ri-n^  Ps.  133:  1,  -TrT*^^ 
Num.  34:  6.  7.  9;  also  in  the  initial  letter  of  monosyllables  and  of  words 
accented  on  the  first  syllable  after  a  final  Kamets  or  Seghol  in  words 
followed  by  Makkeph  nxi-nn^rb  Gen.  2:  23,  riDS-n;'i^!l  Gen.  43:  15,  or 
having  a  conjunctive  accent  on  the  penult,  riW  r'^i"  Gen.  3:14,  "^  n'rX  Gen. 
33:  5,  provided  this  was  originally  the  accented  syllable,  or,  if  the  accent 
has  been  shifted  from  the  ultimate,  was  the  place  of  the  secondary  accent 
Methegh  Jn^.a  nx^jn  (for  rils'i:^)  Ps.  84:  4,  but  TO  x:^o  Deut.  24:  1,  ::'i-J  T\'i\v 
Ezek.  17:  8;  this  proviso  does  not  attach  to  the  futures  and  participles  of 
n"b  verbs  i-lQ  tiri  Gen.  1:  11,  i^  nby;;  Ex.  21:31,  Final  Kamets  before 
Makkeph  is  not  folloAved  by  Daghesh-forte  unless  the  syllable  containing 
the  Kamets  begins  with  two  consonants  XiTi'^'a  Gen.  27:  26  or  is  im- 
mediately preceded  by  Methegh '^sTinn  Gen.  30:  1,  but  p'n^"^!;??'!  Ps.  45:  5. 
Words  having  the  secondary  accent  Methegh  on  the  first  syllable  likewise 
admit  Daghesh  after  a  final  unaccented  Kamets  or  Seghol,  unless  they 
begin  with  an  aspirate  inn]?  na'r  Gen.  49:  31,  but  n'i'nb'ir  t\\k  Gen.  2:  4. 
The  inseparable  particles  :i,  D,  b,  1,  when  prefixed  without  a  vowel,  do  not 
admit  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive,  except  T]b  which  follows  the  ordinary 
rule  r^  r^i;:^1  Deut.  10:  1,  and  one  additional  instance  dV^  ^i^"^l  Ps.  19:3. 
Sibilants  and  liquids  may  be  doubled  after  an  unaccented  final  u  ^XS  ^'Cffip 
Gen.  19:  14,  vk  ^ll^N'^T  Gen.  19:  2,  1  Sam.  8:  19.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive 
is  rarely  found  after  an  accented  vowel,  yet  N3  tnsri  Gen.  19:  2,  'n^X^  •rii'S 
Ex.  6:  10,  29,  13:  1,  14:  1,  Num.  31:  25.  It  also  occurs  in  a  few  exceptional 
cases  not  embraced  in  the  rules  above  given.  See  the  preface  to  Baer's 
edition  of  Proverbs.  In  a  few  instances  words  thus  united  are  written  as 
one,  e.  g.  Wp  Ex.  4:  2  for  m  tip,  so  ta^-q  Isa.  3:  15,  tixbnp  Mai.  1:  13 
nkSNOa  Isa.  27 :  8. 


25 


DAGHESn-FOBTE. 


S5 


Daghesli-forte  separative  occurs  only  in  the 

nh'li'^h  Prov.  30:  17. 
r^'bi?':  1  Sam.  28 :  10. 
n3D"in'inB3  (?)  Ezek.  13: 
20. 
Tffki^  Isa.  33:  1. 
ninJiS^  Joel  1 :  17. 
Ci'iVna-a  Job  9:  18. 
Tj-inn-a  Nah.  3:  17. 
uinn'r'  Ex.  15:  17. 
-nnpo  Deut.  23:  11. 
rrna?  Ps.  141:  3. 
nn;;:  Prov.  4:  13. 
iiTOisr:  Judg.  20:  32. 
iisp  Jer.  4:  7. 
feo  Isa.  9:  3,  10: 
27,  14:  25. 


rj'nSX  Hos.  3:  2. 
r,"ir\'i-ip"3  Ps.  45:  10. 
C^h^'v]  -^ni.  5:  25. 
}nn;rt;pn  Gen.  18:  21. 
'n;ri3n  Gen.  37:  32. 
■|i:':rn  Gen.  17:  17. 
Cr'^Sf'nn  1  Sam.  10:  24, 
17:25.  2  Kin 
6:  32. 
fiHlan  Job  17:  2. 
■irsan  Ex.  2 :  3. 
Vis^l-nn  (?)  Judg.  20: 
43. 
P5a"'n  1  Sam.  1 :  6. 
-■iir^n  Isa.  57:  6. 


following  examples: 

-•^^t'J  Deut.  32:  32. 
inhb  2  Sam.  23:  27. 
Jer.  29:  27. 
db-^Sa?  Isa.  58:  3. 
Ci3in-i2iy  Am.  5:  21. 
'  -^Ti^'J  Gen.  49:  17. 

Judg.  5:  22. 
rni'iS-J  Ps.  89 :  52. 
tj-niai?:;  Ps.  77  :  20. 
rn-siiV  Prov.  27 :  25. 
''Snna^  Ps.  119:  139. 
i3!irna:2  Ps.  88:  17. 
Dninirii?  (?)  Ps.  37: 15. 
Isa.  5:  28. 
bsi^aiij  Ps.  58:  9. 


nnp-i  Gen.  49:  10. 


This  list  is  corrected  and  enlarged  from  Gesen.  Lehrg.  pp.  86  ff.  Those 
words  which  are  followed  by  a  note  of  interrogation  (?)  are  found  in  some 
editions  but  not  in  others.  Daghesh  separative  may  be  found  after  He 
interroo-ative  in  some  instances  not  included  in  the  above  list. 

c.  Daghesh- forte  empbatic  occurs  only  in  l^'iri  Judg.  5:  7.  1  Sam.  2:  5; 
sisn  Job  22:  12  (Edit.  Baer);  ^kh'^)  Job  29:  21;  Wn;^  or  iinni"  Job  21:  13; 
sina-i  Isa.  33:  12,  Jer.  51:  58;  niinb  Ezek.  21:  15,  16;  -up:  Ezek.  6:9;  mb: 
Isa.  41:  17;  12r3  Ezek.  27:  19;  ^Hl^  (?)  Isa.  19:  6;  and  probably  ^^r^Jn'  J°^ 
13:  9  (not  in  pause). 

d.  Daghesh-forte  orthophonic  also  occurs  according  to  the  Massora  in 
the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  when  the  preceding  word  ends  in  the  same 
letter;  accordingly  the  edition  of  Baer  and  Delitzsch  has  'J^^™"°^  ^^en. 
14:  23  nn'x-?=S<":)  Gen.  31:  54,  and  some  manuscripts  have  C"^3-i'  'iOT  Gen. 
5:  6.  Occasional  instances  also  occur  of  the  doubling  of  an  initial  liquid 
after  another  final  liquid,  e.g.  N5  i  ^^J<'5  (suggesting  the  pronunciation 
vayi/omel-ld)  1  Kin.  11:  22  and  in  certain  manuscripts  ^  "itx]?  Geri.  3:  17, 
nrx'ba-'bs  Ex.  20 :  10,  and  even  (in  manuscripts)  of  an  initial  sibilant  after 
a  final  n,"  e.  g.  t:73T:a-nx  probably  esh-sh'mdm  Gen.  5:2,  "iSNlJ  ni-pbao  Gen. 
4:  4,  S-'-iT-nnsd  Lev."  15:  32.  See  Gesenius'  Lehrgebaude  pp.  90.  91. 

§  25.  In  order  to  the  distinct  utterance  of  a  redupli- 
cated consonant,  it  must  be  followed  as  well  as  preceded 
by  a  vowel-sound.  Daghesh-forte  is  consequently  never 
written  in  a  final  vowelless  letter,  with  the  exception  of 
the  two  words  m,  Pn:,  both  of  wMch  end  in  aspirates 
whose  pronunciation  would  be  changed  by  the  removal 
of  the  Daghesh.  In  every  other  instance  the  doubling  is 


36  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  26 

neglected,  even  thongli  the  letter  be  an  aspirate,  whicli 
will  for  this  reason  resume  its  aspiration;  e.  g.  bp,  ^^p; 
20,  "lab;  t\rr!]  abridged  from  M^nn ;  t\%^^  from  "S'4':^  In 
a  medial  letter  with  Sh'va  Daghesh  may  be  written,  be- 
cause the  Sh'va  being  thus  rendered  vocal  the  reduph- 
cation  can  be  made  audible  by  means  of  the  hiatus 
which  it  represents ;  it  is,  however,  quite  as  frequently 
omitted,  the  Sh'va  commonly  remaining  vocal  as  if  it 
were  inserted,  and  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally 
substituted  for  simple  to  indicate  this  fact,  §  16.  3.  &.; 
e.  g.  D^n^^  for  D^n^^y,  ikC3  for  iJ<DS,  ^n]:^  for  ^h)5":,  ^n^bj^ni 
Judg.  16:  16,  particularly  after  prefixes,  as  Vav  Con- 
versive,  the  article  and  preposition  13,  so  ''h'^1,  lij^l'-^n, 
Dlh'i^3j'32.  It  is  seldom  omitted  from  a  medial  aspirate  on 
account  of  the  change  in  its  sound  involved:  yet  even 
this  is  done  occasionally,  e.g.  'T'i?!"^  Judg.  8:  2  for  Tisi^'J, 
^i:nn  Isa.  22:  10  for  ^krn,  "jinpT  from  "jinST.  In  a  few  rare 
instances  it  is  dropped  from  a  letter  followed  by  a  vowel, 
when  the  laws  of  syllables  will  permit  and  the  pronun- 
ciation wiU  not  be  materially  affected;  e.  g.  nj^ir]  Ruth 
1:  13  for  nsirn,  so  iriTZ^T)  Isa.  60:  4. 

Mappik. 

§  26.  Mappik  (p'B55  bring ing  out  or  uttering'),  is  a 
point  in  one  of  the  letters  Jj5  n  1  ^,  showing  that  it  rep- 
resents a  consonant  and  not  a  vowel,  or  in  other  words 
that  it  does  not  quiesce  in  the  preceding  vowel-sign.  It 
is  unnecessary,  however,  to  employ  any  notation  for  this 
purpose  in  the  case  of  5^  1  and  "'j  for  their  quiescence 
can  be  readily  determined  in  all  cases  by  the  rules  al- 
ready given,  §  13.  Although  it  is  much  more  extensively 
used  in  manuscripts,  therefore,  Mappik  is  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Hebrew  Bible  only  inserted  in  final  H 


§  27,28  ACCENTS.  -  37 

when  it  retains  its  consonantal  power;  e.  g.  »^ii*)i<  artscih, 
fi:pk  artsa,  •^ni:b  Vkdhhdh,  r:n]:b  lakliJid.  The  point  four 
times  found  in'x,  ^5<^il^^1  Gen.  43:  26,  Ezra  8:  18,  ^S^-in 
Lev.  23:  17,  ^Si"^  Job  33:  21,  though  called  a  Daghesh  in 
the  Massoretic  notes  in  the  margin,  is  probably  to  be 
regarded  as  Mappik. 

a.  In  some  manuscripts  and  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  printed  at  Brescia 
in  1494  Mappik  is  placed  not  in  the  body  of  the  letter  He,  but  underneath  it. 

Raphe. 

§  27.  Raphe  (mI'i  weak),  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke 
placed  over  a  letter,  and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh- 
lene,  Daghesh-forte,  or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be.  As 
no  inconvenience  can  arise  from  its  omission,  it  is  only 
occasionally  used  in  modern  Bibles,  and  not  with  entire 
uniformity  in  the  different  editions.  It  is  chiefly  found 
where  a  Mappik  has  been  omitted  in  H,  which  accordmg 
to  analogy  might  be  expected  to  be  inserted,  e.  g.  HlC^in 
Ex.  9:18,  rnTH^  Lev.  13:4,  nktorQ  Num.  15:  28,  nb  Num. 
32:  42,  n^^jTS'-:  Job  31:  22  in  some  copies.  In  :{i"n'lE:?n 
Ex.  20:  4,  Deut.  5:  8,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  shows  that  b  may  either  be  doubled  agreeably  to 
the  point  in  its  bosom  or  not.  In  riil";ri  uib  Ex.  20:  13, 
Deut.  5: 17,  it  is  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  and  shows 
that  the  T\  may  either  have  its  unaspirated  sound,  as  the 
Daghesh  indicates,  or  may  be  aspirated. 

Accents. 

§  28.  The  third  class  of  Massoretic  additions  to  the 
text  are  those  which  relate  to  the  words.  These  are  the 
accents,  Makkeph,  Methegh,  and  the  K'ri.  An  accent 
(pTo)  is  written  upon  every  word  with  a  twofold  design, 
1st,  of  marking  its  tone-syllable,  and  2dly,  of  indicating 


38  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  28 

its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence.  The  great 
number  of  the  accents  has  respect  entirely  to  this  second 
function,  there  being  no  difference  in  the  quahty  of  the 
stress  laid  upon  particular  syllables,  such  for  example  as 
is  marked  by  the  Greek  acute,  grave,  and  circumflex, 
but  only  that  difference  in  its  amount  which  arises  from 
the  unequal  emphasis  naturally  laid  upon  the  different 
members  of  a  clause  or  period.  The  punctuators  have 
attempted  not  only  to  indicate  the  pauses  to  be  made 
in  reading,  as  is  done  by  the  stops  in  use  in  other  lan- 
guages, but  to  represent  to  the  eye  the  precise  position 
held  by  each  word  in  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  and 
the  various  grades  of  attraction  or  repulsion  arising 
from  the  relations  whether  co-ordinate  or  subordinate 
which  subsist  among  them.  Every  sentence  is  fancifull}? 
regarded  as  a  territory,  which,  partitioned  into  its  several 
clauses,  forms  empires,  kingdoms,  and  principalities, 
ruled  by  their  respective  sovereigns,  each  of  whom  has 
his  own  train  of  inferiors  and  dependants.  The  accents 
are  accordingly  divided  into  Disjunctives  or  Rulers 
(p'bh'Z),  and  Conjunctives  or  Servants  (D^Ij?).  The 
former  indicate  that  the  word  upon  which  they  are 
placed  is  more  or  less  separated  from  those  that  follow; 
they  mark  thus  the  end  of  a  clause  or  of  the  section  of 
a  clause  over  which  they  exert  control.  The  latter  indi- 
cate that  the  word  over  or  under  which  they  are  written 
is  connected  with  what  follows  and  belongs  to  the  clause 
or  section  ruled  by  the  next  succeeding  Disjunctive. 

a.  The  stress  of  voice  denoted  by  the  accent  must  not  be  confounded 
with  quantity.  An  accented  syllable  may  nevertheless  be  short,  the  energy 
with  which  it  is  pronounced  not  necessarily  affecting  its  length. 

b.  The  Jews  made  use  of  the  accents  as  musical  notes  in  the  cantilla- 
tion  of  the  sj^nagogue,  whence  they  are  also  called  niiiSS.  In  the  judgment 
of  some  this  is  a  part,  and  perhaps  a  leading  part,  of  their  original  design. 
Their  great  variety,  the  frequent  occurrence  of  accents  of  opposite  powers 
npon  the  same  word,  and  the  distinct  system  of  poetical  accents,   favoi 


§29 


ACCENTS. 


this  opinion.  Such  as  are  curious  to  know  the  details  may  find  the  mode 
of  their  emplo^'uient  for  this  purpose  explained  at  length  in  Bartoloccii 
Bibliotheca  Magna  Eabbinica,  vol.  iv.  pp.  427—444. 

§  29.  The  Disjunctive  accents  may  be  divided  into 
four  classes  of  various  rank  or  power,  as  follows,  viz: 


Class  I.  Emp 

erors. 

*i.  siimk 

(,) 

tpS^b 

*2.  Athnahh 

O 

r;:rx 

a  :  - 

Class  II.    Kings. 

3.  S'gholta 

(•") 

§5^13^0    pOStp, 

4.  Zakeph  Katon 

t 

iii^  =1I2J 

5.  Zakeph  Gadhol 

() 

bi 

^^m 

*8.  Tiphhha 

(,) 

w  >    • 

Class  III.    Dukes, 

*7.  R'bhP 

(•) 

r^7 

*8.  Shalsheleth 

(') 

^^ 

*9.  Zarka 

(") 

^'i^ll  postp. 

10.  Pashta 

(') 

Kli'i^P    postp. 

11.  Y'thibh 

(,) 

a^n-i^^  prep. 

12.  T'bhir 

(,) 

Class  IV.    Counts, 

*13.  Pazer 

C) 

"  T 

14.  Karne  Phara 

(") 

rins  i3-)J5 

15.  T'lisha  Gh'dhola 

(') 

T 

sta^bn  prep, 

16.  Geresh 

(') 

'^z'l 

17.  G'rashayim 

(") 

^i^"}^ 

*18.  P'sik 

(0 

ipiG? 

The  Conjunctive 

accents,  or 

Servants, 

are  the  fo] 

ing,  viz: 

*19.  Merka 

o 

^11? 

*20.  Miinahh 

u 

nji^ 

40  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  30 


OETHOGRAPHY. 

21. 

Merka  Kh'pliula 

ji 

rA^as  NS-na 

•22. 

Mahpakh 

^< ' 

nsf?^ 

23. 

Darga 

^  f ' 

«r.? 

*24. 

Kadhma 

/  ^  \ 

ttaiB 

♦25. 

Yerahh  ben  Yomo 

(y) 

iaii- 

1?  JTn^ 

26. 

T'lisha  K'tanna 

,'K  . 

rii^fj  s^rj-^bn  _posfp. 

a.  Merka  Kh'pliula  has  sometimes  been  reckoned  among  the  Disjuno* 
tives,  as  by  Gesenius  in  his  Lehrgebtiude;  but  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene 
in  the  word  following  that  on  which  it  stands  in  Ex.  5:  15,  Ezek.  14:  4, 
proves  that  it  is  a  Conjunctive. 

h.  According  to  their  most  probable  significations,  the  names  of  the 
accents  appear  to  be  in  part  borrowed  from  their  forms  and  in  part  from 
their  uses.  Thus  the  Disjunctives:  Silluk,  end;  Athnahh,  rest;  Segholta 
huncli  of  grapes;  Zakeph,  small  and  great,  causing  suspension;  Tiphhha, 
palm  of  the  hand ;  Ii'hhi%  square  or  reposing ;  Shalsheleth,  c/iam;  Zarka, 
dispersion;  Pashta,  expansion  or  letting  doivn  (the  voice);  Y'thibh,  sitting 
still;  T'bhir,  interruption ;  Pazer,  separator;  Karne  Phara,  a  heifer^s  horns; 
T'lisha,  great  and  small,  shield;  Geresh,  expulsion;  G'rashayim,  double 
Geresh;  P'sik,  cut  off.  Conjunctives:  Mey^iSi^ -prolonging;  Munahh,  (a  trumpet) 
at  rest,  i.  e.,  in  its  proper  position;  Merka  Kh'phula,  double  Merka;  Mah- 
pakh, (a  trumpet)  iMi'erfefZ;  Daxga.,  progress ;  Kadhma,  beginning,  Yerahh 
ben-Yomo,  moon  a  day  old. 

§  30.  1.  Fourteen  of  the  accents  are  written  over,  and 
eleven  under,  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached. 
P'sik,  whose  only  use  is  to  modify  the  power  of  other 
accents,  is  written  after  the  word  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  in  the  same  line  with  it.  The  place  of  the  accents 
is  either  over  or  under  the  letter  preceding  the  tone- 
vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the  prepositives  Y'thibh 
and  T'hsha  Gh'dhola,  which  always  accompany  the  initial 
letter  of  the  word,  and  the  postpositives  S'gholta,  Zarka, 
Pashta,  and  T'lisha  K'tanna,  which  stand  upon  the  final 
letter.  Y'thibh  is  only  used  when  the  first  is  the  tone- 
syllable.  Pashta  is  repeated  if  the  word  on  which  it 
stands  is  accented  on  the  penult,  e.  g.  ^nh  Gen.  1:2,  or 
ends  with  two  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  T\'£^^  Kuth  3:7,  or 
if  the  last  letter  has  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  JT  Gen.  33: 13, 
and  in  some  manuscripts  and  editions  there  is  a  liJie  re- 


§  31  ACCENTS.  41 

petition  of  S'gliolta,  Zarka  and  T'lisha  K'tanna.  Wlioii 
this  is  not  the  case,  there  is  nothing  to  mark  the  tone- 
sjllable  of  the  word  unless  tliis  may  chance  to  be  the 
one  upon  which  the  nature  of  the  accent  in  question 
requires  it  to  be  placed. 

2.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh,  §  44;  but 
the  former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the 
last  word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written 
imder  a  tone-syllable.    Pashta  is  hkewise  distinguished 
from  Kadhma  only  by  its  position  upon  the  last  letter 
of  the  word,  and  after  the  superscribed  vowel,  if  there 
be  one,   e.  g.  n'iss  Gen.  1:  7,   ^^^b'C  Gen.  24:  7,  while 
Kadhma  is  placed  upon  the  letter  preceding  the  tone- 
vowel,  e.  g.  ^"i;!S5  Gen.  2:  19,  where  this  chances  to  be  a 
final  letter  the  laws  of  consecution  only  can  decide;  thus, 
in  TJ?";!  Gen.  26:4,  ^ri5^".j>;  Deut.  16:3,  the  accent  is  Pashta, 
but  in  ^?"^Tb^  Gen.  17:8,  ^m'l  1  Sam.  29: 6,  it  is  Kadhma. 
Y'thibh  is  distinguished  from  Mahpakh  by  being  written 
under  the  first  letter  of  the  word  and  taking  precedence 
of  its  vowel  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  -"iT^^  Gen.  1:11, 
%  Gen.  31:  6,  Deut.  10:  17;    Mahpakh  belongs  under 
the  consonant  which  precedes  the  tone-vowel,  and  after 
its  vowel-sign  if  this  be  subscribed,  e.  g.  "HSri  Gen.  2: 14, 
^^  Gen.  32:  33,  Deut,  4:  7.     When  the  initial  syllable 
bears  the  tone  and  there  is  no  subscribed  vowel,  the  laws 
of  consecution  must  decide;  thus,  in  i^.'^Tj  the  accent  is 
Y'thibh  m  Gen.  3: 15,  44: 17;  Deut.  10:  17^;  but  Mahpakh 
in  Josh.  17:  1. 

§  31.  The  accents  already  explained  are  called  the 
prosaic  accents,  and  are  found  in  all  the  books  of  the 
Old  Testament  with  the  exception  of  the  Psalms  (D"^iriri), 
Proverbs  (^5?TI?"^),  and  the  poetic  portion  of  Job  (ni^JSi), 
whose  initials  form  the  technical  word  T\h^_.  Here  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails.    Thirteen  of 


42 


OETHOGEAPHY. 


§31 


tLe  prosaic  accents,  one-half  of  the  whole  number,  no- 
wliere  occur  in  the  books  just  named,  viz.:  S'gholta, 
Zakeph-Katon,  and  Zakeph-Gadhol  of  the  Kings,  Pashta. 
Y'thibh,  and  T'bhir  of  the  Dukes,  Karne  Phara,  T'hsha 
Gh'dhola,  Geresh,  and  G'rashayim,  of  the  Counts,  Merka 
Kh'phula,  Darga,  and  T'lisha  K'tanna  of  the  Conjunc- 
tives. Such  as  are  common  to  both  systems  are  in  the 
previous  table  distinguished  hj  an  asterisk.  The  powers 
of  some  of  these,  however,  are  altered,  so  that  a  new 
arrangement  of  them  is  necessary;  and  they  are  supple- 
mented by  additional  signs  formed  by  combining  the 
prosaic  accents  or  assigning  them  unusual  positions.  The 
scale  of  the  poetical  or  metrical  accents  thus  constituted 
is  as  follows,  viz.: 


Disjunctive  Accents. 

Class  I. 

1.  Silluk 

(,) 

ip^P 

2.  Merka-Mahpakh 

<          <    V 

or  Olev'yoredh 

(J 

ip-i^i  n^"i5> 

t.  Athnahh 

(J 

Class  II. 

ninx 

4.  R'bhP 

C) 

T%'] 

5.  B'bhP  Mugrash 

n 

r:\-     •    : 

6.  Zarka  or  Tsinnor 

o 

nis:!  postp. 

7.  Tiphhha  initial  or  D'hbi                 (  ) 

■'ri'i  prep. 

8.  Pazer 

C) 

y.^ 

9.  Great  Shalsheleth 

(-') 

1  rtt:^i?3 

10.  Azla  L'gharmeh 

(1^) 

1  i^in^h  x^Tx 

11.  Mahpakh  L'gharmeh 

CJ 

1  JTOia^  -^Qn^ 

It.  P'sik 

(1) 

ipiDB 

1 

ACCENTS. 

CoNjmicTivjs  Accents, 

13. 

Merka 

^j ' 

T    :  T 

14. 

Munahh 

^j ' 

15. 

Munahh  superior  or  Illuy 

,j . 

•eiy? 

16. 

Tiphhha  or  Tarhha 

^i ' 

^DT^ 

17. 

Yerahh  ben  Yomo  or  Galgal 

\v/ 

t^>B 

18. 

Mahpakh 

^•e  ' 

Tisnp 

19. 

Kadhma  or  Azla 

^Vfi!* 

20. 

Shalsheleth 

.1 

^^^^^ 

43 


Tsinnorlth  ("*)  is  not  a  distinct  accent,  but  is  written 
over  a  simple  syllable  preceding  Merka  or  Mahpakh  in 
the  same  word,  D^^Jp,  '^'^z^,  or  in  an  antecedent  mono- 
syllable,  in  which  case  it  supplies  the  place  of  Makkeph 
n-in  ^3,  bs  U^b'for  rnrr^'S,  bs-^b.  The  disjunctive  Tsumor 
has  the  same  form  but  is  written  over  the  last  letter  of 
the  word  on  which  it  stands,  n%\ 

a.  Olev'yoredh  has  a  compound  sign,  resembling  in  form  a  combina- 
tion of  Merka  and  Mahpakh,  the  former  wi'itten  under  the  tone  syllable, 
the  latter  over  the  syllable  next  preceding,  d'^ruJl;  or  (if  the  tone  be  on 
the  initial  syllable)  over  the  last  syllable  or  letter  of  the  preceding  word, 
■jlX  ■'Src  (Wickes)  or  'IX  '^by's  (Baer);  or  (if  this  word  be  accented  on  the 
ultimate)  over  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to  which  it  properly  belongs  or 
between  the  two  words,  x!  la^ia  (Wickes)  or  Xi'STlJ  (Baer).  When  the  sign 
for  Olev'yoredh  is  divided  between  two  words,  which  should  be  united  by 
Makkeph,  Makkeph  is  not  written  pn'bx  or  ph  bk  for  pirbx.  The  sign 
for  R'bhi*  Mugrash  resembles  a  combination  of  R'bhi'*  and  Geresh,  the 
former  on  the  tone  syllable,  the  latter  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word, 
n^aTXI,  Vs.  P'sik  is  occasionally  used  as  with  the  prose  accents,  §  38.  1.  a. 
to  indicate  a  slight  pause  without  affecting  the  consecution;  but  it  may 
likewise,  when  combined  with  three  of  the  Conjunctives  Shalsheleth,  Kadhma 
or  Azla,  and  Mahpakh,  convert  them  into  weak  Disjunctives,  capable  of 
governing  small  sections  of  their  own. 

6.  The  names  of  the  accents  occurring  in  prose  are  explained  §  29.  b. 
Olev'yoredh  means  ascending  and  descending;  R'bhi*  Mugrash,  GeresJied- 
Khln"';  Tsinnor  and  Tsinnorith,  a  ivafer- course;  D'hhi,  thrust  back;  L'ghar- 
meh,  iy  itself,  i.  e.  independent ;  Illuy,  high;  Tarhha,  toiling  along;  Galgal, 
wheel;  Azla,  going  on.  Tiphhha  and  Shalsheleth,  though  Disjunctives  in 
prose,  are  Conjunctives  in  poetry,  hence  the  absence  of  Daghesh-lene  after 
the  former  in  D'^nrS  xiST?  Prov.  8:  3,  and  the  presence  of  Daghesh-forte 
Conjunctive  after  the  latter  in  "i^  nry^ittj"^  Pi.  3:  3. 


44  oethogeapht.  §  32 

Position  of  the  Accent. 

§  32.  The  accent  in  Hebrew  may  fall  either  upon  the 
ultimate  or  the  penultimate  syllable,  but  never  at  a 
greater  remove  from  the  end  of  the  word.  In  the  former 
case  words  are  technically  termed  Milra  (^^^12  from  he- 
low),  and  in  the  latter  Milel  (b'i^b'r  from  above). 

1.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  considered  in 
relation  either  to  the  syllabic  or  to  the  etymological 
structure  of  a  word,  that  is  to  say,  as  effected  by  the 
nature  of  its  syllables  on  the  one  hand  or  of  the  elements 
of  which  it  is  composed  as  a  significant  part  of  speech 
on  the  other.  It  is  so  far  determined  by  the  syllabic 
structure  of  words,  that  a  long  mixed  syllable  or  a  short 
simple  syllable,  whether  in  the  ultimate  or  the  penulti- 
mate, must  receive  the  accent,  §  18.2,  thus:  "pn^l,  njl^i^ril, 
niiT,  "2^^.  But  the  accent  can  never  fall  upon  a  vocal 
Sh'va,  or  upon  a  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va. 

2.  Considered  in  reference  to  their  etymological 
structure,  words  exist  in  two  conditions,  (1.)  their  primary 
uninflected  state,  by  which  their  essential  and  proper 
meaning  is  conveyed;  (2.)  with  added  affixes  and  pre- 
fixes, by  which  that  meaning  is  variously  modified.  In 
their  nude  or  primary  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tives or  derivatives,  are  accented  upon  the  ultimate,  and 
so  continue  to  whatever  flexion,  involving  no  terminational 
appendages,  they  may  be  subjected.     Thus,  "IpQ,   ~pS, 

np.B,  ^J3S,  -p%  njis:,  ijSEinn;  p^sj,  -pnsT;  n^^?j,'^iia; 

1   T  T    :  -  '  T        '  ■  -:i-  ; 

3.  The  only  exception  is  a  class  of  words  called  Se- 
gholates,  in  which  the  last  vowel  does  not  belong  origin- 
ally or  essentially  to  the  form,  but  is  introduced  for 
the  sake  of  softening  the  pronunciation,  §  61.  2;  these 


§  33  POSITION  OF  THE  ACCENT.  45 

are  accented  on  the  penultimate,  as  Ipb,  "^Sb,  H-Sp,  ln*5, 

a.  til'OV':  Is.  50:  8  is  said  to  be  the  only  instance  of  a  ■word  accented  on 

T   :  -J-  " 

the  antepenult.  The  proper  tone-syllable  of  this  word  is  the  ultimate,  but 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent  by  §  35,  the  vowel  next  preceding,  which 
has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  is  unessential  to  the  form,  cannot  receive  it,  so 
that  it  necessarily  falls  upon  the  one  still  further  back.  In  "'1'3~"3  Ex.  15:  8. 
a  word  of  the  same  formation  the  accent  takes  the  place  of  Methegh,  §  45 : 5, 
comp.  "z-rri  I.sa.  40:  18,  ■lisn^'i  Job  12:  15;  n^ni<!^  and  tTirii  are  the  only 
words  in  which  the  principal  accent  is  followed  by  a  compound  Sh'va. 

§  33.  The  additions  which  words  may  receive  at  the 
beginning  or  end  affect  the  accent  in  proportion  to  th*"'. 
respective  weiglit  accorded  to  them.  Additions  to  the 
end  of  words  are  of  two  sorts,  which  may  be  distin- 
guished as  affixes  and  suffixes.  Affixes  are  so  welded  to 
the  word  or  merged  in  it  that  in  the  popular  conscious- 
ness they  have  become  an  integral  part  of  it,  and  their 
independent  existence  or  separate  origin  is  no  longer 
thought  of;  such  are  the  personal  inflections  of  verbs  and 
the  terminations  indicating  gender  and  number  in  nouns 
and  adjectives.  Suffixes  are  not  so  intimately  blended 
with  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  as  to  have 
lost  their  individual  identity  and  independent  character, 
and  consequently  are  of  greater  weight  as  respects  the 
accent;  such  are  the  fragmentary  pronouns  appended  to 
verbs,  nouns,  and  prepositions. 

1.  If  the  appendage  consists  of  a  vowel  (as  H^,  ti,  ^, 
\  '^.1  ^)?  01^  begins  with  one  (as  W^,  \,  T^,  D"".,  r\i,  1]^,  1\_, 
D^,  1^,  D";_,  T]";.),  and  can  consequently  only  be  pronounced 
by  the  aid  of  the  final  consonant  of  the  word  to  which 
it  is  attached,  it  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its 
initial  vowel  from  a  noun,  adjective,  participle,  or  pre- 
position, as  ^nn'l,  inz^^,  °"^.r1'  ^^^"^5  T.ttI'  ^'%'^:  ^^^^^  ^^V' 
D^ir"i^,  "ii?"!^  from  Wlp.  Such  an  appendage  to  a  verb,  if 
a  suffix,  will  receive  the  accent,  unless  the  verb  be  in  the 
3  fem.  sing,  of  the  preterite,  when  the  accent  will  retain 


4g  OBTHOGEAPHY.  ^  §  ^^3 

its  original  position  unchanged.  The  accent  will  also 
remain  in  its  original  position  on  the  verb,  if  the  appen- 
dage be  an  affix,  unless  it  is  either  dissyllabic  or  causes 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented;^  ^^1^0 
with  a  suffix  ni^^lLivl,  but  with  an  affix  ^^^^l^^vl;  "l^?  with 
a  suffix  il23?,  but  with  an  affix  when  the  vowel^  is  re- 
tained ^121  when  it  is  rejected  ^12T,  nbn,  ntri,  ^bn;  bp_ 
with  affixes  nVfe,  ^Vp,  T'^PI  3  fern.  smg.  pret.  with  suf- 
fixes, Dn^::S  from  n^^S  (primitive  form  t6^^),  so  Dnirpiil, 
TinnriN.  it  is  to  be  olDserved,  however,  that  a  paragogic 
n  or  n  ,  §  61.  6,  attached  to  nouns,  pronouns,  and  ad- 
verbs, and  occasionally  a  paragogic  \  does  not  disturb 
the  position  of  the  accent,  e.  g.  y^S,  H^-iJ^;  nb,  nsi;  so 
rnzh,  n^.i<,  ra-^,  T^^  Lam.  l:  1,  but  ^nsb^J  Isa.  1:  21; 
neither  does  the  feminme  ending  n^,  which  is  a  Segholate 
formation,  §  185,  e.  g.  "nsn^j,  rn^n^j. 

a.  The  affix  receives  the  accent  in  "''^>i2?P!  Ruth  2:8  from  ^'i^;n,  but 
not  in  the  corresponding  form  siliiisd-;  Ex.  18:26  from  liBlS?;  though  in  the 
latter  instance  a  monosyllable  follows,  in  consequence  of  which  the  accent 
would  have  been  shifted  to  the  penult  by  §  35.  1,  even  though  its  proper 
place  had  been  on  the  ultimate.  Paragogic  n..  receives  the  accent,  though 
the  preceding  vowel  remains,  in  the  verbal  form  '^i<"^pN.^  1  Sam.  28 :  5. 

2.  The  appending  of  a  simple  syllable,  such  as  the 
suffixes  ^D,  ^3,  ^n,  n,  i7j,  or  the  verbal  suffixes  n,  ^n,  ^D,  np. 
will  not  alter  the  position  of  the  accent  provided  it  ori- 
ginally stood  upon  the  ultimate;  if,  however,  its  original 
place  was  the  penult,  or  if  the  syllable  in  question  be 
attached  to  the  word  by  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  must 
be  carried  forward  one  syllable  to  prevent  its  standing 
on  the  antepenult,  which  is  never  admissible:  HDS,  ^HDS, 

r±^,  '?r53;  oi<72,  npj^'^,  ^sncj^-^;  bp,  nibp,  "n'^p.  Suffixes 

appended  to  a  word  ending  with  a  consonant  mostly 
require  a  connecting  vowel,  and  consequejitly  shift  the 
position  of  the  accent.  Affixes,  by  reason  of  the  less 
weight  accorded  to  them,  commonly  do  not.    The  suffix 


§  34  POSITION  OP  THE  ACCENT.  47 

?j  follows  the  general  rule  when  preceded  by  a  union 
vowel,  but  draws  the  accent  upon  itself  when  it  is  not, 
e.  g.  T,  ^l^,  tjT,  ^"iij.  A  consonantal  appendage  to  a 
long  unaccented  vowel,  inasmuch  as  it  converts  the  ulti- 
mate into  a  mixed  syllable,  necessarily  draws  the  accent 
upon  it  from  the  penult,   §  32.  1,  e.  g.  ^PCX'J,  Vrip5<"^ 

3.  A  mixed  syllable,  whether  an  affix  as  DFl,  "jri,  or 
suffix  as  05,  "5,  Din,  "n,  will  attract  the  accent  to  itself, 
DnDbn  from  Tj^rj;  Db?!?"^,  Or^b/J  from  t]b:j;  UDI^in  from 
D'^hri.  In  the  unusual  form  Dn>3  2  Sam.  23:6,  the  accent 
stands  upon  the  union  vowel. 

4.  The  only  prefixes  which  exercise  any  influence 
upon  the  position  of  the  accent,  are  the  Vav  conversive 
of  the  future,  wliich  draws  back  the  accent  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  ^t^^,  ^'rj^^),  lili";,  HlE^I;  and 
the  Vav  conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  throws  it  for- 
ward from  the  penult  to  a  simple  ultimate,  ri'^.i:^,  ril^ijl, 

a.  Some  languages  invariably  accent  the  same  part  of  the  word;  thus, 
Bohemian  and  Lettish  the  initial  syllable,  Polish  and  Lazian,  one  of  the 
Caucasian  tongues,  the  penult  of  all  polysyllables.  Others,  in  which  more 
freedom  is  allowed,  have  no  respect  to  the  etymological  structure  of  words, 
but  are  guided  entirely  by  the  character  of  their  syllables.  Thus,  in  Arabic 
and  Latin  words  are  accented  according  to  the  quantity  of  the  penult;  the 
accent  is  given  to  the  penult  if  it  is  long,  to  the  antepenult  if  the  penult 
is  short.  In  others  still  the  etymological  principle  is  the  prevailing  one, 
and  this  often  has  a  wider  scope  than  in  Hebrew.  Thus,  in  Greek  the 
accent  has  the  range  of  the  last  three  syllables.  In  Sanscrit  it  may  stand 
upon  any  syllable  whatever  even  of  the  longest  words.  In  English  it  is 
almost  equally  free,  e.  g.  peremptorily,  inconsideration,  its  removal  from 
its  primary  position  upon  the  radical  portion  of  the  word  being  conditioned 
by  the  respective  weight  of  the  formative  syllables  appended,  e.  g.  person, 
personate,  personally,  personify,  personality,  personification. 

§  34.  The  location  of  the  accent  being  thus  influenced 
by  the  etymological  structure  of  words,  it  may  serve  to 
distinguish  words  of  like  appearance  but  different  for- 
mation. Thus,  Tt\'2  Gen.  30:  1,  Hlks  Gen.  29:  6,  are  parti- 


43  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  35 

ciples,  but  nn-J  Gen.  35:  18,  Hsn  Gen.  29:  9,  are  prete- 
rites, the  feminine  affix  receiving  the  accent  in  one  case 
but  not  in  the  other,  §  33. 1.  So  ^in  they  built,  from  ni^, 

but  Tj3,  in  us;  ^h"^  they  carried  cajjtive  from  nnir,  but  ^^'Id 
they  returned  from  n^U: ;  THiJ  he  has  seized,  but  THJJ  Job 
23:  9  I  shall  see  from  Hi";  S^i";  it  shall  he  evil  from  ^T^, 
vil  he  shall  feed  from  Jin ;  Vn'O  he  was  rebellious,  tr^t  it 
tvas  hitter  from  133;  ^12'^p  arise  thou  (fern.),  ^t^p  my  ris- 
ing up. 

§  35.  The  position  of  the  accent  may  be  shifted  from 
the  following  causes,  viz: 

1.  A  Conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the 
ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  if  a  Disjunctive  unmediately 
follows,  whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable 
accented  on  the  penult,  in  order  to  prevent  the  un- 
pleasant concurrence  of  two  accented  syllables  in  closely 
connected  w^ords,  e.  g.  nVb  a^yg  Gen.  1 :  5,  n'':^  n:in  Gen. 
4:  17,  '^  nbib?  Deut.  32:  36,  rpi  ^m&ini  Ps.  2:  12.'  In  a 

'        T  :  jT  '        I  •••  V  ;  : 

few  exceptional  cases  the  secondary  accent  Methegh 
remains  to  mark  the  original  tone-syllable,  after  the 
principal  accent  has  been  thrown  back,  ]1p^^  "^yzib  Num. 
24:  22,  Vi  b:iD  Isa.  40:  7,  b^  ySS'^rH  Deut.  4:  33.'  ' 

a.  But  the  accent  will  not  be  shifted  from  one  of  the  so-called  grave 
suffixes  Cin,  'n,  CiD,  '|3,  §  33.  3,  "^n  C2-'^N  Gen.  43:  7;  nor  to  a  penult  which 
is  a  mixed  syllable,  n3  S^'^P''.!!  Num.  32:  42;  nor  ordinarily  from  a  mixed 
ultimate  having  a  long  vowel,  §  32.  1,  ib  ^I'n';  Judg.  6:  31,  "^b  t-]p^  Ps. 
94:  16.  A  mutable  Tsere  or  Hholem  may,  however,  be  shortened  and  the 
accent  removed  iV  3"i^  (for  nn^)  Judg.  6:  31,  Isa.  36:  8.  In  the  preterite 
infinitive  and  participles  of  verbs  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  cannot  be  shortened 
to  Seghol,  but  the  accent  may  still  be  shifted  and  the  secondary  accent 
Methegh,  §  44,  be  placed  on  the  original  tone-syllable  )'^p  '^"3^  Num.  24:  22, 
y'%  ^n^  Isa.  40:  7.  8,  49:  7,  66:  8,  Ezek.  22:  25.  Methegh  will  also  stand 
on  the  ultimate  after  the  removal  of  the  accent,  if  the  word  ends  with  the 
8»me  letter  with  which  the  next  begins,  in  order  that  the  stress  of  the 
voice  may  keep  them  distinct  "^H  nVr  Ps.  105:  28,  nr  i'^rn  Deut.  4:  33, 
Num.  17:  23,  or  if  it  ends  with  the  weak  letter  S  preceded  by  Pattahb 
■^y  i'-va^l  Gen.  24:  9. 


§  36  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.  40 

2.  The  special  emphasis  given  to  the  last  word  of  a 
clause  or  section,  and  represented  by  what  are  called  the 
pause  accents,  §  36,  2,  a,  is  sometimes  rendered  more 
bistinct  by  a  change  of  the  accented  syllable  from  the 
ultimate  to  the  penult,  e.  g.  ^ibs^,  "ipbi^;  nri^,  J'iP^^;  riri>, 
niny;  ^^5,  ^bs;  or  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  parti- 
cularly in  the  case  of  forms  with  Yav  conversive  of  the 
future  "qb^l,  T]b)]V,  so  b'^B'JI,  Dgl,  ^";:i<^1.  The  accent  is  in 
a  few  instances  attracted  to  a  short  final  syllable  endmg 
in  a  weak  letter,  e.  g.  i^'l.';  Gen.  41:  33  for  Jj<"]V»  so  i<nri 
Zech.  9:  5,  Mic.  7:  10,  ybn  Ps.  39:  14  for  riijl;  or  to  a 
final  n^  followed  by  an  initial  guttural,  when  greater 
energy  of  voice  is  necessary  to  distinctness  of  utterance, 
thus  nisb  becames  n'bb  before  5<  Gen.  27:  45,  before  n 
Num.  20:  4.  5,  21:  5,  before  3?  Judg.  12:  3,  15:  10;  n^n 
becomes  ni^n  before  ^  Ps.  74:  22;  so  "in  Gen.  29:  21, 

r       •  '  T    T  ' 

rrViD  Judg.  4:  18,  nivd  Isa.  44:  22. 

a.  nja'i,  n^i^p,  n^'^n,  nzTJJ  are  accented  on  the  ultimate  before  nini, 
wliicli  the  Jews  read  "^i'N.  In  like  manner  "E'p'n  becaines  ^s^cin  before  ''X"ip"] 
Isa.47:l,5,  to  prevent  the  confusion  of  similar  sounds  concurring  at  the  end 
of  one  Avord  and  the  beginning  of  the  next.  In  n"|ix  nj'ns  Gen.  28 :  2,  5,  6,  7 
the  accent  cannot  be  shifted,  §  32.  1,  but  the  secondary  accent  Methegh  is 
given  to  the  final  syllable;  so  frequently  to  a  final  guttural  preceded  by 
J'attahh  ly-'N  nDi"i  Hos.  4:  4,  or  Pattahh  furtive,  Ctrn  V^Z'^  Gen.  44:  2. 

Consecution  of  Accents  in  Peose. 

§  36.  1.  The  second  use  of  the  accents  is  to  point  out 
the  relation  of  words  to  one  another.  The  Disjunctives 
indicate  a  greater  or  less  separation  between  the  word 
on  which  they  stand  and  the  following  one;  the  Con- 
junctives indicate  a  connection.  The  greatest  separation 
of  aU  is  effected  by  Silluk,  which  is  written  under  the 
last  word  of  every  verse,  and  is  followed  invariably  by 
two  dots  vertically  placed  (}),  called  SophPasuk  (p^CD  ~,io 
end  of  the  verse).  The  next  in  power  are  Athnahh  and 
S'gholta.    When  a  verse  was  to  be   divided  into  twc 


50  OETHOGKAPHT.  §  36 

clauses,  Athnalih  was  placed  under  the  last  word  of  the 
first  clause,  Silluk  maintaining  its  position  at  the  end  of 
the  verse.  If  it  was  to  be  divided  into  three  clauses, 
which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can  have, 
the  last  word  of  the  first  clause  receives  S'gholta,  the 
last  word  of  the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  of  all 
Silluk.  Verses  of  one  clause  range  from  Gen.  26:  6,  con- 
taining three  words,  to  such  as  Jer.  13:13  and  1  Chron. 
28:  1,  containing  more  than  twenty:  the  most  common 
division  is  into  two  clauses,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:1!  Y"|)i$n .  •  •  ^''•l''?^> 
three  clauses  are  much  less  frequent,  Gen.  1:7  ...  T'^y^ 
:p  .  rp-^b  23 :  16,  24:  30,  26:  28. 

a.  In  Job  1 :  8  (except  in  Baer's  edition)  S'gholta  occurs  in  a  verse  of 
two  clauses  without  Athnahh,  probably  because  the  accentuation  is  con- 
formed to  that  of  Job  2 :  3. 

2.  Each  of  these  clauses  is  capable  of  subdivision  to 
whatever  extent  its  length  or  character  may  seem  to 
demand  by  the  Disjunctives  Zakeph  Katon,  Zakeph 
Gadhol,  R'bhi",  Pazer,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  according 
to  the  number  of  sections  to  be  made  and  the  various 
degrees  of  their  completeness.  Thus,  in  Josh.  1 :  8 
the  clause  of  Athnahh  is  divided  into  five  sections, 
^:n  .  nfeb  . .  nb'p: . . .  ^rj^s^: . . .  mz-^,  in  2  Kin.  l:  6  into 
six,  linpjj'  . . .  i23-,ib  nb'TT' .  bknifl^s  .  .  nVn^  .  .  rbi^.    The 

choice  of  the  accent  to  govern  a  particular  section  de- 
pends not  only  upon  its  power,  but  likewise  upon  its 
rank,  the  more  exalted  officer  standing  in  ordinary  cases 
nearer  the  sovereign.  Accordingly  toward  the  beginning 
of  a  clause  an  inferior  Disjunctive  will  be  used,  even 
though  the  separation  is  such  as  would  require  an  ac- 
cent of  much  higher  power  to  indicate  it  in  a  more 
advanced  portion  of  the  same  clause.  These  accents, 
moreover,  have  not  a  fixed  value  hke  the  stops  in  other 
languages;  their  power  is  not  absolute  but  relative,  and 


g  37,  38    CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.         51 

varies  endlessl}'  with  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 
Athnahh  in  Gen.  1 :  1  marks  the  greatest  division  in  the 
verse,  but  that  is  not  sufficient  to  require  a  comma.  In  the 
next  verse  Zakeph  Katon  is  equal  to  a  semicolon  in  the 
first  clause  and  less  than  a  comma  in  the  second.  In 
Gen.  27:  16  the  separation  indicated  by  R'bhr  is  whoUy 
rhythmical. 

a.  Those  accents  which,  as  above  described,  mark  the  limits  of  clausei 
and  sections,  are  denominated  pause  accents. 

§  37.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are 
disposed  relatively  to  the  Disjunctive  wliich  marks  its 
close.  Each  ruler  has  his  servant  and  subordinate  officer, 
whose  function  it  is  to  wait  upon  him.  In  other  words, 
each  Disjunctive  is  regularly  preceded  by  a  particular 
Conjunctive  and  inferior  Disjunctive;  and  the  train  of 
accents  in  each  section  is  formed  by  arranging  the  Dis- 
junctives in  their  fixed  order  of  succession  with  or  with- 
out their  regular  Conjunctives  imtil  aU  its  words  are 
supphed.  The  trains  proper  to  the  diff'erent  sections  are 
shown  in  the  following  table  (p.  52). 

a.  Accents  of  like  forms  are  readily  distinguishable  in  the  table  by  the 
column  in  which  they  stand.  Where  perspicuity  requires  it  the  distinction 
will  hereafter  be  made  by  appending  their  initial  letters,  thus:  Kadhma  * 
Pashta  '^,  Mahpakh  <»i,  Y'thibh  .  y. 

§  38.  Ex2)lanation  of  the  Table. — The  trains  preceding 
the  three  principal  accents  are  exhibited  in  the  hori- 
zontal hnes  of  the  uppermost  division;  those  of  the 
ordinary  dependent  sections  in  the  middle  division,  and 
those  of  rare  occurrence  at  the  bottom. 

1.  Train  of  Silluk. — If  SiUuk  be  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  a  Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Merka;  if  a  Disjunctive 
precede  it  in  the  same  section,  with  or  without  an  inter- 
vening Merka,  it  will  be  Tiphhha,  Gen.  1:1.  If  there  be 
a  Conjunctive  before  Tiphhha,  it  wdll  be  Merka,  Gen.  1:1; 
if  two  Conjunctives,  which  occurs  but  fourteen  times, 


52 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§38 


Primatit 

SeCXiOSS. 

> 
u 

s 

>-s 
'A 

o 

n 

i 

O 

o 

o 
o 

b  M 
P 

Conjunctives. 

> 

4 

'v. 

/,.) 

» 

.uV 

'(') 

'C)"(J. 

A 

J 

..(,) 

~ 

/;"(.)' 

Secondary 

Sections. 

' 

J  J 

"(.) 

<gX)* 

:i 

• 

.j.)j.) 

F 

'    JJJJ 

9 

UWtlSUAL 

Sectioss. 

1 
1 

V 

Vj  J  J  J  J 

they  will  be  Merka  Kli'phula  and  Darga,  Gen.  27:  25, 
Lev.  10:  1,  2  Chron.  20:  30.  The  next  Disjunctive  before 
Tiphhha,  in  the  same  section,  will  be  T'bhir,  Gen.  1:4.  If 
T'bliir  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Darga, 


§  33       CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.         53 

Gen.  1:  12,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:  26;  if  by  two,  the  second 
will  be  Kadhma,  1  Sam.  15:  33,  or  Munahli,  Gen.  2:4; 
and  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna,  Gen. 
2:  19.  The  next  Disjunctive  before  T'bliir,  in  the  same 
section,  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  26:11,  27:4,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  23:  4.  If  Geresh  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive, 
it  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  Munahh,  Isa.  60:  17; 
if  by  a  second,  it  will  be  T'hsha  K'tanna,  Gen.  2:  5,  or 
Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  28:  9;  if  by  a  third,  it  will  be 
Munahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34;  if  by  a  fourth,  it  will  also  be 
Munahh,  Deut.  1:  19. 

a.  The  parentheses  of  the  table  contain  alternate  accents.  Thus,  Merka 
is  substituted  for  Darga  and  for  Mahpakh  (before  Pashta  in  the  clause  of 
Zakepli  Katon)  if  no  more  than  one  vowel  intervenes  between  the  Con- 
junctive and  the  king  which  it  precedes,  e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  22;  Gen.  1:  24,  26; 
Gen.  5:  17;  Deut.  1 :  2,  35.  Munahh  is  also  regularly  substituted  for 
Kadhma,  whenever  the  accent  stands  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word.  Gen. 
25:  8;  Gen.  19:  35;  1  Kin.  19:  7;  Deut.  1:  28;  Gen.  19:  12;  Eccl.  5:  7,  un- 
less T'lisha  K'tanna  precedes  Gen.  2:  5.  G'rashayim  takes  the  place  of 
Geresh  provided  the  accent  is  on  the  ultimate  and  it  is  not  preceded  by 
Kadhma  either  on  the  same  or  the  previous  word,  Ex.  16:  23,  36:  3.  When 
two  accents  are  included  in  a  parenthesis  the  meaning  is  that  if  an  ad- 
ditional accent  is  required,  these  two  will  take  the  place  of  the  one  before 
the  parenthesis.  P'sik  has  no  separate  place  in  the  consecution,  but  is 
joined  with  the  other  accents  to  modif}-  their  power.  It  is  constantly 
associated  with  the  Disjunctive  Shalsheleth  to  add  to  its  strength,  and 
occasionally  with  the  different  Conjunctives  to  reduce  their  strength,  but 
without  disturbing  tlie  order  of  their  consefution,  e.  g.  with  Merka  Ex.  16:  c, 
Munahh  Gen.  22:  11,  Mahpakh  Ex.  30 :  34,  Kadlima  Lev.  11 :  32,  Darga  Gen. 
42:  13,  T'lisha  K'tanna  1  Sam.  12:  3.  It  is  frequently  used  to  indicate  a 
slight  pause  between  closely  related  words,  as  Avhere  the  same  word  is 
repeated.  Gen.  22:  11,  46:  2,  Ex.  16:  5,  or  before  or  after  the  name  of  God 
Gen.  1:  5,  10,  27. 

2.  Train  of  Atlmalih. — If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a 
Conjunctive,  it  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:1;  if  by  a  Dis- 
junctive in  its  own  section,  it  will  be  Ti23hhha,  Gen.  1:1. 
The  accents  which  precede  Tiphhha  have  already  been 
mentioned  in  explaining  the  train  of  Silluk. 

3.  Train  of  S'ghoUa. — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
S'gholta  vn.]l  be  Munahh,  Gen.  3 :  3 ;  if  there  be  two,  the 


54  OETHOGEAPHT.  §  38 

second  will  be  Munahh,  Lev.  8:  31,  or  Merka,  Gen.  3: 14. 
The  first  Disjunctive  in  its  section  will  be  Zarka,  Gen. 
1: 28;  and  if  this  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:7,  or  Merka,  1  Chron.  5:  18;  if  by 
two,  the  second  will  be  Kadhma,  Gen.  30:  16,  31:  32,  or 
Munahh  Ex.  20:  9;  if  by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'hsha 
K'tanna  Gen.  3:  14,  or  the  second  may  be  Munahh  and 
the  third  Kadhma,  Lev.  4:  35.  The  next  Disjunctive  be- 
fore Zarka  wiU  be  Geresh,  Gen.  24:  7,  or  G'rashayim, 
Ex.  39:  3.  The  accents  preceding  these  have  been  ex- 
plained in  1. 

4.  Train  of  Zdkeph  Katon. — The  first  Conjunctive 
before  Zakeph  Katon  will  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  2,  the 
second  hkewise  Munahh,  Gen.  3:  12,  27:  45.  The  first 
Disjunctive  will  be  Pashta,  Gen.  1:2;  or,  if  the  proper 
place  of  the  accent  be  the  first  letter  of  the  word,  Y'thibh, 
Gen.  1:  11,  2:  11.  The  first  Conjunctive  before  Pashta 
will  be  Mahpakh,  Gen.  1:9,  or  Merka,  Gen.  1:  2;  the 
second,  Kadhma,  Gen.  39:  19,  or  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  12; 
the  third  will  be  T'hsha  K'tanna,  Ezr.  3:11.  The  Dis- 
junctive before  Pashta  will  be  Geresh,  Gen.  1:  24,  or 
G'rashayim,  Gen.  1:  11;  the  further  consecution  is  ex- 
plained in  1. 

a.  In  some  instances  Pashta  is  found  not  in  the  train  of  Zakeph  Katon, 
but  seeming  to  govern  an  independent  section,  e.  g.  Gen.  27:  37,  Ex.  29:  20, 
Deut.  9:  6,  Josh.  10:  11,  1  Sam.  14:  45,  2  Sam.  14:  7,  1  Kin.  18:  21,  2  Chron. 
18:  23. 

5.  Zakeph  Gadhol  is  mostly  used  instead  of  Zakeph 
Katon  when  no  other  accent  precedes  it  in  its  own 
section,  whether  upon  the  same  word  or  one  before  it. 

6.  Train  of  E'bh'i". — The  first  Conjunctive  before 
E'bhi*  wiU  be  Munahh,  Gen.  1:  9;  the  second,  Munahh 
commonly  with  P'sik,  Gen.  2:  5,  or  Darga,  Gen,  6:15; 
the  third,  Munahh  with  P'sik,  Gen.  7:  23,  19:  14,  31:  29, 
or  Merka,  Ex.  14:10.  The  Disjunctive  before  R'bhl*  will 


R  38       CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.         55 

be  aeresh,  Ex.  16:  3,  or  G'rashayim,  Deut  1:  11,  which 
are  preceded  as  in  1. 

7  Train  of  Fazer.—Pazer  may  be  preceded  by  one 
Munahh,  1  Sam.  14:  34,  by  two,  Ezek.  9:  2,  by  three, 
1  Sam.  14:  34,  or  by  four,  Isa.  66:  20. 

8.  Train  of  Tlisha  GK dliola.--T\i^\i^  Gh^dhola  is  the 
weakest  of  the  Disjunctives  which  are  ever  set  to  rule 
independent  sections.    Its  weakness  is  in  fact  such,  that 
it  is  sometimes  drawn  into  the  section  of  a  stronger  Dis- 
junctive; thus,  in  Gen.  1:  12,  Lev.  4:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  51, 
Isa  9-  5  Neh.  5: 18,  it  takes  the  place  of  T'hsha K'tanna 
among  the  antecedents  of  Pashta,  standing  between  it 
and  Geresh  or  G'rashayim;  in  Gen.  13:  1,  21:  14,  Deut. 
26:  12,  it  stands  similarly  between  T'bhir  and  Geresh  or 
G'rashayim.   And  in  many  cases,  perhaps  in  most,  when 
it  rules  a  section  of  its  own,  this  is  a  mere  subsection, 
not  so  much  a  division  of  one  of  the  principal  clauses  as 
a  fragment  broken  ofF  from  one  of  the  larger  sections  at 
a  point  where  T'hsha  K'tanna  would  have  stood  had  the 
connection  been  sufficiently  close  to  require  a  Conjunc- 
tive, e.  g.  Gen.  19:  2,  1  Kin.  20:  28.    That  this  is  not 
always  so  appears,  however,  from  examples  like  Gen.  7 : 7, 
37:  7,   1  Sam.  17:  51,   2  Sam.  14:  32,  Isa.  66:  19,    Jer. 
39-5    T'hsha  Gh'dhola  may  be  preceded  by  one  Munahh, 
Gen.  27:  46,  by  two.  Josh.  2:  1,  by  three,  or  by  four, 

9  Shalsheleth  occurs  but  seven  tunes,  viz.,  (jen.iy .  i  o, 
24-  12,  39:  8,  Lev.  8:  23,  Isa.  13:  8,  Am.  1:2,  Ezr.  5:  12, 
and  in  every  instance  stands  upon  the  initial  word  of  the 
verse,  and  is  accompanied  by  P'sik.  It  has  consequently 
no  antecedents. 

10.  Kaine  Phara  is  only  used  sixteen  tunes.  Its  section 
never  contains  less  than  three  words:  its  immediate  prede- 
cessor is  always  Yerahh  ben  Yomo,  to  which  may  be 


56  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  39 

added  oneMimalih,  Num.  35:  5,  Neh.  5: 13,  13:  5,  2  Cliron, 
24:  5;  two,  2  Kin.  10:  5,  Jer.  38:  25,  Est.  7:  9,  Neh.  1:  6, 
2  Chron.  35:  7;  three,  Josh.  19:51,2  Sam. 4: 2,  Jer.  13: 13; 
fom-,  1  Chron.  28:  1;  or  five,  Ezek.  48:  21. 

§39.  1.  The  complete  trams  of  the  several  accents  con- 
tain one  Disjunctive  from  each  of  the  inferior  orders,  dis- 
posed in  due  succession  of  rank,  with  one  Conjunctive 
immediately  preceding  the  first  class  of  Disjunctives,  two 
Conjunctives  preceding  the  second  class,  three  the  third 
class,  four  or  more  the  fourth  class.  These  trains  are 
adapted  to  sections  of  different  length  and  character  by 
omitting  such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by 
repeating  such  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations 
of  the  words  may  seem  to  require,  and  brec  Idug  off  the 
series  as  soon  as  every  word  in  the  section  is  supplied. 
Thus,  wliile  the  general  order  of  consecution  is  fixed  and 
invariable,  there  is  the  utmost  liberty  and  variety  in 
particular  cases. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  Conjunctives  go  beyond  the  number 
here  assigned.  Thus,  Athnahh  is  preceded  by  two  Munahhs  in  Gen.  40:  16, 
Ex.  3:  4,  1  Sam.  17:  39,  Isa. 48:  11.  T'bliir  is  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives, 
Josh.  10:  11,  2  Chron.  22:  11,  Isa.  66:  20;  Pashta  by  four,  Ex.  5:  8,  1  Sam. 
15:  9,  2  Kin.  5:  1,  and  even  by  five,  Jos.  19:  51,  1  Sam.  7:  10. 

2.  If  a  section  consists  of  but  a  single  word,  this  will 
receive  the  appropriate  Disjunctive,  the  entire  antecedent 
series  of  the  table  being  then  omitted  as  unnecessary 
thus,  Silluk  :h/2^'1  Gen.  5:5;  Athnahh  n^Jj^^l  Gen.  24:  34 
Zakeph  Katon  rk^^  Isa.  1:  30;  R'bhi^  D^Xsni  Gen.  7:19 
Pazer  T^^^'^l  Gen.' 22:  2;  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  pn  Gen.  19:8. 
This,  as  has  been  already  said,  is  the  regular  length  of 
the  sections  of  Zakeph  Gadhol  andShalsheleth;  but  those 
of  S'gholta  are  never  composed  of  less  than  two  words, 
and  those  of  Karne  Phara  never  of  less  than  three. 

3.  In  sections  of  greater  length  there  is  a  disposition 
towards  a  regular  alternation  of  Disjunctives  and  Con- 


§  39  CONSECUTION  OF  ACCENTS  IN  PROSE.  57 

junctives  upon  successive  words,  e.  g.  Gen.  23:  11,  24:  7, 
and  consequently  though  two  or  more  Conjunctives  may 
be  allowed  before  a  particular  Disjunctive,  only  the  first 
of  these  is  in  the  majority  of  cases  employed.  The  actual 
relations  of  words  may,  however,  so  interfere  with  this 
regularity  as  on  the  one  hand  to  cause  the  intervening 
Conjunctives  to  be  dropped  entirely,  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  22, 
1  Chron.  15:  18,  or,  on  the  other,  to  introduce  as  many 
Conjunctives  as  the  table  will  admit,  e.  g.  Gen.  3:  14. 
But  if  either  of  the  three  primary  sections  consist  of  but 
two  words,  the  first  must  have  a  Disjunctive  accent, 
however  close  its  relation  may  be  to  the  second,  e.  g. 
:D-3  ::t2^1  Gen.  9:  20,  U^j^Z'^  sinp£-j1  Gen.  3:  5,  'bsd^  D-t2 
Gen.  19:4. 

a.  Sometimes  an  excluded  term  of  the  series  will  take  the  pl-^ce  of  the 
secondary  accent  Methegh,  §  44.  Tiphhha  is  thus  five  times  written  upon 
the  same  word  with  Silluk,  e.  g.  Num.  15:  21,  and  eleven  times  with  Ath- 
nahh,  e.  g.  Num.  28:  26.  Munahh,  Gen.  21:  17,  often  stands  upon  the  same 
word  with  Zakeph  Katon;  if  the  accent  stands  upon  a  mixed  sellable  and 
upon  another  than  the  initial  letter  Kadluna  will  take  its  place,  Gen.  18:  20, 
44:  24,  45:  14.  Kadhma  is  also  joined  in  this  manner  with  Darga,  Job  1 :  15, 
Munahh,  Lev.  10:  12,  Merka,  Judg.  21 :  21,  Neh.  12:  44,  Mahpakh,  Lev.  25:  46, 
and  Geresh,  Ex.  16:  15,  21:  22,  35.   Mahpakh  with  Munahh,  Lam.  4:  9. 

4.  Occasionally  a  subordinate  Disjunctive  or  its  alter- 
nate is  repeated  in  the  same  section  with  or  without  its 
antecedents.  Thus,  T'bhir,  Deut.  26:  2  ,^^,,/'., ,  '',  so 
Deut.  30:  20,  1  Sam.  20:  21,  2  Kin.  17:  36.' ZarkaV2  Kin. 
1-  ^6  ■■■//  ~.  ''  so  ver.  6,  Gen.  42:  21,  eJer.  21:  4,  Neh. 
2:  12.  '  Pashta,  Gen.  24:  14,  42,  48,  65;  1  Kin.  20:  9. 
Pashta,  Pashta  and  Y'thibh,  2  Kin.  10:  30,  Ezr.  7:  25. 
Geresh  and  G'rashayim,  Gen.  28:  9. 

a.  There  is  a  double  accentuation  of  a  part  of  Gen.  35:  22,  and  of  the 
entire  decalogue,  both  in  Ex.  20:  2-17,  and  Deut.  5:  6-21,  which  involves 
a  double  vocalization  in  certain  words,  e.  g.  fJS  Ex.  20:  3,  i.  e.  either 
;^:q  or  '^33.  Single  words  also  occur  with  alternative  accents,  e.  g.  with 
G'rashayim  or  Geresh  and  T'Hsha  Gh'dhola  n]'  Gen.  5:  29,  ^Z'p  Lev.  10:  4, 
aa'  2  Kin.  17:  13,  n^xb^  Ezek.  48:  10,  rxi'  Zeph.  2:  15. 


58  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  40 


Poetic  Consecution. 

§  40.  1.  The  principle  of  the  consecution  is  the  same 
in  the  poetic  as  in  the  prosaic  accents,  although  there  is 
considerable  diversity  in  the  details.  There  is  a  like 
division  of  verses  into  clauses  and  sections  ruled  by  a 
Disjunctive  at  the  end,  which  imposes  upon  them  its  own 
special  train  of  accents.  The  sections  are  fewer,  however, 
and  the  trains  shorter  than  in  prose,  on  account  of  the 
greater  brevity  of  the  sentences  in  poetry  for  the  most 
part.  But  this  reduction  is  more  than  compensated  by 
the  new  complexity  arising  from  the  latitude  allowed  in 
the  choice  of  Conjunctives. 

a.  The  numerous  errors  in  the  poetical  accents  as  found  in  ordinary 
Hebrew  Bibles  have  been  carefully  corrected  by  Baer  in  his  edition  of  Job, 
Psalms  and  Proverbs;  and  the  laws  of  their  consecution  are  elaborately 
stated  by  him  in  the  Appendix  to  Delitzsch's  Commentary  on  the  Psalter 
(1860)  and  by  Dr.  William  Wickes  in  his  Treatise  on  the  Accentuation  of 
the  three  so-called  Poetical  Books  of  the  Old  Testament  (1881). 

2.  Verses  may  consist  of  one,  two,  or  three  clauses, 
distinguished  by  the  three  Disjunctives  of  the  first  class. 
If  the  verse  contain  but  one  clause,  Silluk  will  be  written 
upon  the  last  word,  Ps.  4:  1,  29:  7;  if  it  contain  two 
clauses,  the  division  will  be  made  by  Athnahh,  Ps.  1 :  4, 
5,  6,  or  by  Olev'yoredh,  Ps.  1 :  2,  3:  3,  upon  the  last 
word  of  the  first  clause;  if  it  contain  three,  the  last  word 
of  the  first  will  have  Olev'yoredh,  the  last  word  of 
the  second  Athnahh,  and  the  last  word  of  the  third 
Silluk,  Ps.  1 :  1,  2:  7,  3:  6.  Clauses  may  consist  of  a  single 
section  when  no  subdivision  of  them  is  necessary;  or 
they  may  consist  of  two  or  more  sections,  when  the  sub- 
division is  effected  by  R'bhi",  Pazer,  Great  Shalsheleth 
or  L'gharmeh. 

a.  Thus  the  Silluk  clause  is  subdivided  by  B'bhl*  and  L'gharmeh  in 
Ps.  18:  51,  and  by  Pazer  Ps.  18:  2;  the  Athnahh  clause  by  R'bhi*  (twice), 


§41 


POETIC  CONSECUTION. 


59 


Pazer,  and  L'gharmeh  (3  times)  in  Prov.  30:  4;  the  Olev'yoredh  clause  by 
Pazer  Ps.  5:  10  and  by  E'bhP  and  L'gharmeh  Ps.  5:  11.  Great  Shalsheleth 
is  rarely  used  and  only  to  subdivide  the  clause  of  Silluk,  Ps.  34:  8,  Job 
32:  6;  except  in  Job  11:  6  it  is  only  found  on  the  fourth  word  from  the 
end  of  the  verse. 

§  41.  The  order  of  the  accents  in  the  various  sections 
is  exhibited  in  the  following  table: 


Disjunctives. 
Class  I. 

CONJUNCTIVKS. 

go 
a 

OONmNOTIVEB. 

PrINCIPAIi 

Sections. 

* 

a:: 

•1 

«    i   4 

S 

J  J  3 

V 

•!:■ 

< 
> 

.0 

«» 

*     < 

Secosdaby 

Sections. 

^ 

• 

< 

^ 

I 

1 

J       W 

l< 

1 

60  OBTHOGRAPHY.  §  41 


Explanation  of  the  Table. 

The  accents,  -which  are  disposed  horizontally,  exhibit  the  series  hy  which 
any  given  Disjunctive  may  be  preceded.  Alternate  accents  are  disposed 
vertically  or  inclosed  in  parentheses.  lUuy  is  represented  thus  •<*,  in  dis- 
tinction from  Munahh  ^. 

a.  (1)  Traiyi  of  Silluk.  If  Silluk  is  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunctive, 
this  is  almost  invariably  Munahh,  provided  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable, 
Ps.  1;  1,  2:  10;  otherwise  it  is  Merita,  Ps.  2:  7,  12,  to  which  Tsinnorilh  will 
be  added,  if  a  simple  syllable  precede  in  the  same  word  Ps.  3 :  2,  4,  or  in 
an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  18:  8,  20;  if  L'gharmeh  precede,  it  will  be 
lUuy,  Ps.  3:  1,  10:  14.  If  it  he  preceded  by  two  Conjunctives,  they  will  be 
Munahh,  Tarhha,  Ps.  2:  9,  3:  6,  or,  (as  Baer  affirms,  but  Wickes,  p.  71  denies) 
if  they  are  on  adjacent  syllables,  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps.  12:  8,  Job  15:  22;  in 
the  inscriptions  to  ei^ht  Psalms  (36,  44,  47,  49,  61,  69,  81,  85)  they  are  two 
Illuys,  and  in  three  exceptional  instances  they  are  Illuy  and  Azla,  Ps.  109:  16, 
Prov.  8:  13  or  lUuy  aud  Mahpakh  with  Zinnorith  Ps.  68:  20.  If  it  be 
preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  the  first  two  will  be  Munahh  and  Tarhha, 
and  the  third  Mahpakh,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24: 10,  39: 12, 
or  Mahpakh  with  Tsinnorith,  if  the  tone  is  preceded  by  a  simple  syllable  in 
the  same  word,  Ps.  3:  5,  28:  8,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  25:  15; 
otherwise  it  will  be  Azla,  Ps.  25:  8,  Prov.  3:  27;  the  occurrence  of  Illuj-, 
Ps.  4:  8  is  exceptional,  and  Wickes,  p.  72,  esteems  it  incorrect.  Four  Con- 
junctives only  occur  in  the  following  instances,  Ps.  3:  3,  32:  5,  42:  2,  47:  6, 
and  in  some  editions  54:  5. 

(2)  E'bhl"'  Mngrash.  If  Silluk  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own 
section,  it  will  be  R'bLi*  Mugrash.  Silluk  sections  cannot  have  less  than 
two,  nor  more  than  five  words.  If  there  be  but  one  word  before  Silluk  in 
its  own  section,  this  must  have  E.'bhi''  Mugrash,  however  closely  it  may  be 
connected  with  that  which  follows  Ps.  4:  6,  7:  11;  unless  it  have  three 
vowels  or  two  vowels  and  a  vocal  Sh'va,  in  which  case  it  may  have  Merka, 
Ps.  9:  17,  11 :  5,  19:  10,  21 :  10.  If  there  be  two  or  more  words  before  Silluk, 
these  may  according  to  the  nature  of  the  case  all  have  Conjunctives,  or 
R'bhi^  Mugrash  may  stand  on  the  next  before  Silluk  Ps.  5:  4.  8,  or  on  the 
second  with  Munahh  or  Merka  intervening  Ps.  3:7,  4:  4,  or  on  the  third 
with  Illuy  and  Mahpakh  L'garmeh  between  Ps.  3:1,  10:  14.  Two  Conjunc- 
tives never  come  between  Silluk  and  E.'blil"  Mugrash;  Baer  excepts  only 
Ps.46:8,12,  Wickes  admits  no  exception.  Il'blii' Mugrash  may  be  preceded 
by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka  Ps.  5:  4,  with  Tsinnorith  on  a  previous  simple 
syllable  in  the  same  word,  Ps.  5:  7,  or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps. 
12:  2;  by  two  Conjunctives  Merka,  Tarbha  Ps.  5:  8,  18:  3;  or  by  three, 
Merka,  Tarhha,  Mabpakh,  Ps.  47:  8,  66:  20,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there  he  a 
simple  syllable  before  the  tone  Ps.  119:  52;  Ps.  18:  1,  34:  8,  68:  15,  137:  9 
are  exceptional. 

b.  (1)  Train  of  Afhnahh.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  single  Conjunc- 
tive this  is  commonly  Munahh,  if  it  come  after  D'hhi,  Ps.  2:  7,  3:  2,  other- 


§  41  POETIC  CONSECUTION.  61 

wise  it  is  commonly  Merka,  Ps.  3 :  9,  5:  9.  10.  If  it  be  preceded  by  two 
Conjunctives,  these  will  both  be  Munahhs,  Ps.  2:4,  3:  8,  or  with  P'sik  they 
will  be  Merka,  Tarhha,  Ps.  5:  2,  18:  50.  If  by  three,  the  first  two  will  be 
as  before,  and  the  third  will  be  Mahpakh  Ps.  2 :  5,  with  Tsinnorith  if  there 
be  a  simple  s5i]able  before  the  tone,  whether  in  the  same  word,  Prov.  17: 12. 
or  in  an  antecedent  monosyllable,  Ps.  5:5;  if,  however,  there  be  two  vowels 
or  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sli'va  before  the  tone,  the  third  Conjunctive  will 
be  Illuy,  Ps.  32:  2,  40:9.  Ps.  72:  3,  Prov.  1 :  9,  6:27  are  exceptional. 
Athnahh  is  twice  preceded  by  four  Conjunctives,  Ps.  65:  2,  96:  4;  and  once 
by  five,  Prov.  3:  12. 

(2.)  UIM.  If  Athnahh  be  preceded  by  a  Disjunctive  in  its  own  section, 
this  will  be  D'hhi.  The  section  of  Athnahh  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  if  Olev'3'oredh  immediately  precede  Ps.  3:  6,  5:  13,  29:  9,  otherwise 
of  not  less  than  two.  In  a  section  of  two  words  Athnahh  is  sometimes 
preceded  by  D'hhi  Ps.  7:  11,  11:  3,  more  commonly  by  Merka  Ps.  4:  6, 
10:  10,  which  with  the  sole  exception  of  Job  33:  9  is  always  used  after 
Olev'yoredh  Ps.  10:  18,  14:  3.  In  sections  of  three  or  more  words  D'hhi 
may  stand  on  the  first  word  before  Athnahh,  Ps.  2:  8,  5:  11,  or  on  the 
second,  Ps.  2:7,  3:4,  but  never  at  a  greater  remove.  D'hhi  may  be  pre- 
ceded by  one  Conjunctive,  Munahh,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:6;  or  by  two,  when  the 
first  will  be  Munahh  and  the  second  will  follow  the  same  law  as  the  third 
Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  thus  it  may  be  Mahpakh,  Ps.  4:  3,  5:  3,  with 
Tsinnorith,  Ps.  6:  11,  32:  5,  or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  35:  15,  78:  45  It  is 
once  preceded  by  three  Conjunctives,  Job  34:  37;  Baer  finds  two  other 
examples  Ps.  23:  6,  56:  1,  which  Wickes  disputes.  In  a  very  few  instances 
D'hhi  occurs  before  Silluk  in  place  of  R'bhi^  Mugrasb,  Ps.  25:  4,  31:  17, 
109:  16,  Prov.  8:  13;  more  frequently  before  E,'bhi^  Mugrash  in  verses 
which  have  no  Athnahh  clause,  this  being  in  a  manner  thus  replaced,  Ps. 
4:  5,   6:  1,  7:  10,  11:  6,  22:  1. 

c.  (1.)  Train  of  Olev'yoredh.  Olev'yoredh  may  be  preceded  by  one  Con- 
junctive, and  one  onlj-,  which  is  almost  always  Galgal,  Ps.  1:  1,  3:  3;  but 
three  times  before  P'sik  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps.  68:  20,  85:  9,  Prov.  30:  15,  and 
three  times  Merka  after  Small  R'bhP,  Ps.  35:  10,  42:  5,  Prov.  30:  9.  The 
section  of  Olev'yoredh  never  has  less  than  two  words.  If  it  has  but  two, 
the  first  must  receive  the  Disjunctive  Small  E'bhi«,  Ps.  4:  5,  9:  21.  If  it  has 
three  or  more,  and  a  Disjunctive  stand  on  the  word  next  preceding  Olev'- 
yoredh, it  will  be  Small  E'blu%  Ps.  3:6,  35:  20;  if  one  stands  on  the  second 
word  before  Olev'yoredh,  whether  followed  by  R'bhi^  or  by  Galgal,  or  on 
any  previous  word  of  the  section,  it  will  be  Tsinnor  Ps.  3:3,  22:  15,  28:  7. 
Small  R'bhi*  is  in  but  three  instances  written  on  the  second  word  before 
Olev'yoredh  viz.  those  in  which,  as  above  stated,  it  is  followed  by  Merka. 
Tainnor  is  Avith  like  infrequency  written  immediately  before  Olev'yoredh, 
Ps.  55:  22,   106:  47,  Prov.  8:  13. 

(2.)  Small  KhW^.  R'bhP,  when  it  immediately  precedes  Olev'yoredh 
and  is  included  in  its  section,  is  called  Small  R'bhi^  in  distin^ction  from 
Great  R'bhi^  or  R'bhi^^  proper,  which,  though  it  has  the  sam§  sign,  fulfils 


62  OBTHOGEAPHT.  §  42 

quite  a  different  function,  viz.  that  of  dividing  the  principal  clauses  of  a 
verse,  and  governing  a  section  of  its  own,  §  40.  2.  Small  R'bhP  may  be 
preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  Merka,  Ps.  9:  7,  15,  or  by  two,  Merka, 
Mabpakh,  Ps.  18 :  1,  Prov.  6 :  26,  to  which  Tsinnorith  may  be  added, 
Prov.  23:  5. 

(3.)  Tsinnor.  Tsinnor  may  be  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  which  will 
be  Merka,  if  the  tone  is  on  the  first  syllable,  Ps.  24:  8,  32:  9,  or  if  the 
letter  under  which  it  stands  has  Daghesh  either  lene  or  forte,  Ps.  6:3, 
16:  4;  otherwise  it  is  Munahh,  Ps.  12:  7,  18:  7.  If  it  have  two  Conjunctives, 
the  second  will  be  Mabpakh,  Ps.  24:  10.  27:  4. 

cl.  Train  of  R'bhi"'.  R'bhP,  when  governing  an  independent  section  of 
its  own,  i.  e.  Great  E'bhP  may  be  without  any  antecedent,  its  section  con- 
sisting of  but  a  single  word,  Ps.  4:  4,  5:4,  or  it  may  have  one  Conjunctive, 
which  is  commonly  Mabpakh,  Ps.2:  8,  Prov.  7:  7,  unless  Pazer  or  L'gharmeh 
precede,  when  it  is  mostly  Illuy,  Ps.  2:  12,  17:  14,  though  if  a  simple  syllable 
stand  immediately'  before  the  tone  it  will  be  Mabpakh  with  Tsinnorith, 
Ps.  4:  2,  15:  5;  the  Conjunctive,  however,  is  Merka,  when  another  E'bhi" 
precedes,  Ps.  17:  1,  Prov.  4:  4,  and  in  a  few  other  individual  cases,  Ps.  1:  1, 
32:  2,  Job  14:  19.  It  has  two  Conjunctives  according  to  Baer  in  Ps.  65;  24, 
86:  14;  though  Wickes  points  differently. 

e.  Train  of  Pazer.  The  section  of  Pazer  may  consist  of  but  a  single 
word,  when  it  will  have  no  antecedent,  Ps.  17:  14,  18:  2.  If  it  have  one  Con- 
junctive, this  will  be  Galgal,  Prov.  23:  29,  except  in  a  very  few  instances 
with  P'sik,  where  it  is  Mahpakh,  Ps,  50:  1,  59:  6.  If  it  have  two  Con- 
junctives, the  first  will  be  as  before,  and  the  second  Mahpakh  if  its  place 
is  on  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  Ps.  11:  2,  31:  11,  otherwise  it  will  be 
Azla,  Ps.  13:  3,  31:  12.  If  it  have  three  Conjunctives,  the  second  and  third 
will  be  Azla  and  Mahpakh,  Ps.  22:  25,  23:  4,  Prov.  6:  3,  in  all  of  which 
Wickes  changes  the  pointing, 

f.  Train  of  Great  Shalsheletk,  Shalsheleth  is  preceded  by  Conjunctives 
in  but  three  passages;  it  has  Merka  Ps.  89:  2,  and  Merka,  Tarhha  Job  32:  6, 
37:  12. 

ff.  Train  of  Vgharmeh.  The  section  of  Mahpakh  L'gharmeh  never 
consists  of  more  than  one  word.  The  Conjunctive  before  Azla  L'gharmeh 
follows  the  same  rule  as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  Athnahh,  see  h  (1); 
thus  it  maybe  Mahpakh,  Ps.  8:  3,  12:  5,  with  Tsinnorith,  Ps.  3:  8,  9:  21, 
or  it  may  be  Illuy,  Ps.  7:  10,  9:  14.  When  it  has  two  Conjunctives,  the 
second  is  Merka;  of  this  there  are  two  examples,  Ps,  117:  2,  143:  3. 

§  42.  The  trains  of  these  several  accents  are  adjusted 
to  sections  of  varying  length  by  expedients  similar  to 
those  employed  with  the  prose  accents,  viz.:  1.  Omitting 
the  Conjunctives  in  whole  or  in  part.  2.  Repeating  the 
Disjunctives,  e.  g.  "  Ps.  14:  1   (in  some  editions),      Ps. 


§  43  makk:eph.  63 

17:  14,  or  their  equivalents,  e.  g.  D'hlii  before  *'  Ps. 
7:  10,  9:  1  §  41.  h  (2).  3.  Writing  two  accents  upon 
the  same  word,  Drrnii::i2-:i  Ps.  5:  11,  ^Dnin  Ps.  27:  11, 
^i<'}'!.']  Ps.  18:  16.  4.  Uniting  two  or  more  words  by 
Makkeph,  so  that  they  require  but  a  single  accent. 
5.  Writing  the  different  parts  of  a  compound  accent 
upon  separate  words;  thus,  Olev'yoredh  "DSi  b^US!  Ps. 
6 :  3,  Merka-Tsinnorith  yEH  -^3  Ps.  22 :  9,'  Mahpakh- 
Tsinnorith  n5<n  ^3  Prov.  6:  3. 


Makkeph. 

§  43.  Makkeph  (vij?^  joining)  is  a  horizontal  stroke 
by  which  two,  three,  or  even  four  words  may  be  united. 
■^Hr^^^  "r"'T?ri-D5<  Gen.  30:  31,  bb-^b-UJ':  Gen.  33:  11, 
ib-nTiw^-brnsi  Gen.  12:  20,  25:  5,  Ex.  20: 11,  riS'^nrbrb? 
Ex.  22:  8,  '^rf&^l^ir^iTby  Job  41:  26.  It  belongs  properly 
to  the  accentual  system,  words  which  are  closely  related 
being  often  connected  in  this  manner  in  order  to  obviate 
the  necessity  of  unduly  multiplying  Conjunctive  accents. 
Thus,  the  first  fifteen  words  of  Ex.  22:  8  are  in  this 
manner  reduced  to  eight.  Monosyllables  are  frequently, 
and  some  almost  constantly,  linked  with  the  succeeding 
or  preceding  word,  to  which  they  are  closely  related. 
Examples  are  not  wanting,  however,  of  longer  words 
similarly  united,  e.  g.  D^li^Tlajb'iD  Deut.  19:  15,  "b^r'^TiD 
1  Kin.  17:  21,  r!inp".:s<  Isa.  31:  4.  This  use  of  Makkeph 
is  not  to  be  confounded  with  that  of  the  hyphen  in 
modern  languages  between  the  members  of  a  compound, 
as  self-same,  master-huilder.  Words  united  by  Makkeph 
are  still  as  separate  as  ever  in  character  and  signification; 
but  they  are  pronounced  together  and  are  accented  as 
though  they  formed  but  one  word.  Hence,  whatever 
number  of  words  be  thus  joined,  the  last  only  wiU  receive 


64  OETIIOGEAPnY.  §  44 

an  accent.  And,  as  a  further  consequence,  if  a  word  pre- 
ceding Makkepli  properly  ends  in  a  long  mixed  syllable, 
its  vowel,  if  mutable  will,  by  the  loss  of  the  accent,  be 
shortened,  ^?.lp"ni^,  v]irb3,  rj'r'qVrinr!,  otherwise  it  will 
commonly  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  ClpV'D'r, 

nx-^-rx,  mn"2n3,  nTrrayn. 

-      ;  .       I      ,..  7  T    _  IT    :    '  V     -  IT     T 

a.  The  particles  ^X,  bx,  tx,  nx,  '(2,  h'J,  'O  are  almost  invariably  followed 
1)3'  Makkeph,  so  are  the  nouns  "3,  rs  and  Vs  when  in  the  construct  state; 
ihe  particle  XS  is  commonly  preceded  by  it.  Before  monosyllables  or  dis- 
syllables accented  on  the  penult  Makkeph  is  inserted  after  the  particles  ix, 
"3,  xb  and  the  pronoun  ^^,  as  well  as  sometimes  after  larger  words  which 
do  not  admit  of  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  e.g.  Q'ni;"'^  Ex. 22:4,  nnx-'^'a 
Gen.  27:  32,  ak"'nn^ir'l  Hos.  8:  14,  "ip-nii)"^]  Gen.  15:  10.  The  pronoun  n^ 
is  followed  by  Makkeph  before  words  whose  initial  letter  admits  Dagliesh- 
forte  Conjunctive,  n''i;;-!TQ!l  Siij-nri  Ps.  133:1.  DX-^S  are  joined  together  bj 
Makkeph  in  Gen.  15:4,  Num.  35:  33,  Neh.  2:  2;  in  all  other  passages  QX  is 
followed  but  not  preceded  by  Makkeph,  nnins-CX  ^S  Ps.  1:  1.  "ils—i'^X  aip 
joined  by  Makkeph  but  never  X^  1";;x,  the  xb  being  always  linked  to  thi 
following  word.  xb""'3  are  united  by  Makkeph  before  a  word  bearing  tl* 
disjunctive  accent  Tiphhha,  provided  it  has  Sh'va  under  its  initial  letter*, 
otherwise  the  Makkeph  follows  xb,  thus  nbn  xb-"i3  but  Drxn-xb  i3. 

h.  Tsere  remains  before  Makkeph  in  dx,  '3,  1i,  It',  Y'i'i  i*  sometimes 
remains  and  is  sometimes  shortened  in  sV,  td,  "CV  six,  ry  e.  g.  Gen.  16:  13 
«ilVi"n"J,  bat  ver.  15  "illi'D'r.  It  once  remains  according  to  some  editions  in 
"X  Job  41:  26,  a  word  which  is  three  times  Avritten  riX  without  Makkeph, 
Ps.  47:  5,  60:  2,  Prov.  3:  12.  Methegh  remains  in  the  place  of  the  accent 
on  n|3";  and  similar  words  ending  in  Pattahh  and  a  guttural,  when  they  are 
united  by  Makkeph  to  words  having  a  disjunctive  accent  on  the  first  syllable 
!i:b-n|3  5  Gen.  34:  16,  '•^b-"3";.^5  Gen.  24:  7. 

c.  Makkeph  is  occasionally  found  in  the  middle  of  a  long  word,  wliicL 
has  been  erroneously  divided  into  two,  e.  g.  IT^S"!!;:"]  Jer.  46:  20,  and  per- 
haps tjipTiiTQ  Isa.  61:  1.  Sometimes  words  are  thus  divided  without  a 
Makkeph  to  unite  the  sundered  parts,  e.  g.  'O'^ZV  "iz  Lam.  4:  3,  Criirh  ^n^l 
2  Chron.  34:  6,  and  probably  ^b.tl  ?irnx  Hos.  4:  18,  n'.'nQ  "I'^n^  Isa.  2:  20. 
(See  Dr.  Alexander's  Commentary  on  this  passage.)  The  last  two  examples 
are  plainly  intended  by  the  punctuators  to  be  read  as  separate  words.  This 
might  likewise  be  done  in  the  preceding  examples  if  they  were   pointed 

D  "is  "^s  and  D^ipia  ina. 


Methegh. 

§  44.   Methegh  (:.n"^  bridle),  a  small  perpendicular 
stroke  under  the  initial  letter  of  the  syllable  to  which  it 


R  45  METHEGH.     -  65 

belongs,  is  a  secondary  accent  denoting  a  stress  of  voice 
inferior  to  the  main  accent.    As  tliis  latter  ahvays  has 
its  place  in  Hebrew  either   upon  the  ultimate  or  the 
penult,  distmctness  was  promoted  and  monotony  reheved, 
especially  in  long  words,  by  gi^dng  prominence  to  one 
or  more  of  the  antecedent  syllables.    There  is  a  natural 
tendency  to  heighten  the  force  of  the  accent  by  passing 
hghtly  over  the   immediately  preceding  syllable,    this 
dhninished  force  creating  in  its  turn  a  new  stress  upon 
that  next  beyond  it,  and  so  on  m  alternate  elevations 
and  depressions  to  the  beginning  of  the  word.   Agree- 
ably to  the  principle  just  stated,    Methegh  regularly 
stands  in  polysyllables  upon  the  second  syllable  before 
the  accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth  if  the  word  have 
so  many,  e.  g.  SiJ^r^,  r;:>::.,  ■:i?;'-4'i:,  ^'^^^  urrvT^Z^^, 
riiiST.nr^.   And  so  upon  two  or  more  words  connected 
by  Makkeph,  which  are  pronounced  as  one,  e.  g.  i^'HS^; 
Gen.  22:  8,  Dr;y□^i-■;  1  Sam.  21:  7. 

a  When  the  nature  of  the  syllables  requires  it,  §  32.  1,  Methegh  takes 
,he  place  of  the  principal  accent  before  Makkeph  irrespective  of  the  position 
of  the  accent  upon  the  following  word,  TV-^Strn  Kum.  21:  3o,  ir^TT,^^ 
Num.  21:  33,  Vh3~^^  Jer.  34:  1. 

b  It  is  to  he  observed  that  the  position  of  Methegh  is  determined  by 
that  of  the  tone-svllable,  not  by  that  of  the  accentual  sign  ^vhen  these  are 
not  coincident,  as  frequently  happens  with  prepositives  and  post  positives, 
^  g_  Vn-"r.  Deut.  4:  26,  nrri-^7  Josh.  22:  27,  where  the  tone  falls  on  the 
penult  ;*n^i^;'iri^  Jer.  26:  21,  where  the  tone  is  upon  the  ultimate. 

§  45.  The  secondary  accent  is  hable  to  be  sliifted 
from  its  normal  position  for  the  followmg  reasons,  viz.: 

1.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  it 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple 
syllable,  e.  g.  rr^lZT^^  2  Sam.  22:  24,  l^irr^^  Job  1:  7, 
ni:n-Fn-f.  Ezek.  42:  5,  ^krrbi^  Gen.  43:  7;  or  if  none 
such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  altogether,  e.  g.  Cbi^'I^.I 
Jer.  33:  24,    '''^^r^V.  1  Kin.  21:  1,    r.ir^rj-bs-n^  Deut. 


66  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  43 

6:  25,  except  in  certain  cases  whicli  require  it,  e.  g. 
n^Snnp.  Ex.  l:  lO,  ^n^^nrini  Lev.  26:  12. 

a,  Methegh  regularly  stands  (see  Baer  in  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  On  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  (except  Kamets  Hhatuph)  in 
words  having  a  disjunctive  accent,  provided  it  be  separated  from  the  accent 
or  an  antecedent  Methegh  by  both  a  vowel  and  a  vocal  Sh'va  (other  than 
Eholem  before  a  guttural  with  Hhateph  Pattahh),  ^iJ'p'r'^il  Gen.  3 : 8,  t]V'^i?^) 
Gen.  7:  2,  :  nn"'n'i"iJp5?n3  Ps.  18:  46,  nicOIDn^  Zech.  9:  16,  but  mhX'i'n  Gen. 
24:  11. 

(2)  On  e,  ?  or  w  in  the  first  of  two  mixed  syllables,  immediately  pre- 
ceding a  disjunctive  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  is  a  or 
i,  rcfenr^n  Gen.  3:  24,  )i~^'^'^.  Gen.  4:  26,  T)^,"Pi!<  Gen.  30:  31.  Initial  ^ 
followed  by  simple  Sh'va  is  reckoned  a  short  mixed  syllable  in  the  appli- 
cation of  both  the  foregoing  rules  Oa^DitV-l  Gen.  47:  24,  r.b^n^  Jer.  3:  25. 

(3)  On  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  sing,  of  perfect  verbs,  when 
the  second  vowel  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  before  Makkeph, 
1'i^S-,3"l3n  Job  3:  .5,  but    bin-JQ-:;-:  Ps.  9:  9. 

(4)  With  the  first  syllable  of  T^V-il  and  DDy"iT,  when  they  have  a  dis- 
junctive accent,  asGen,3:  15,  Lev.  26:  16;  but  j^vnTtJ  Gen.  17:  12,  daynrnx"! 
Gen.  9:  9,  j]?'^]2^  Deut.  28:  46  and  the  like  follow  rule  (1). 

A  very  few  isolated  instances  are  not  embraced  in  the  preceding  rules, 
e.  g.  bxJJ^aa':^^  Gen.  17:  20,  STitan-'i^  Gen.  SO:  16,  nslSin-bs  Ex.  29:  21. 

2.  It  is  always  given  to  a  long  vowel  when  followed 
by  a  vocal  Sh'va,  whether  simple  or  compound;  also  to 
a  short  vowel  followed  by  compound  Sh'va  or  a  vowel 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  the  shght  pronunciation 
proper  to  the  Sh'va  or  its  derivative  giving  new  pro- 
minence to  the  preceding  vowel,  ^T::^^,  ^^riS";,  ^i^Jsb, 
nlpp^ira  Gen.  30:  38,  ^520  Isa.  9:  17,  10:  34,  ^i-i'n;.;  some- 
times to  other  intermediate  syllables,  §  20.  2,  e.  g.  ^Dira 
Ex.  12:  21,  rr\h^^.  Num.  31:  12  (but  nin"^?X]  Deut.  34:  1, 
where  a  simple  syllable  precedes),  "^icn  Isa.  63:  7,  ^1^? 
Obad.  ver.  11,  particularly  before  the  first  radical  of 
njn  to  be  and  njln  to  live  when  pointed  with  Sh'va  Jl^n';, 
^'b''''-^')'  ^"^""nV'  I'^i'sly  and  only  as  an  exception  to  a  mixed 
syllable  standing  in  the  first  place  before  the  principal 
accent,  e.  g.  ^i&T\  Gen.  1:  11,  D^nnn  Ex.  12:  7,  Zcch. 
14:  2,  n3i$  Jon.  1:  14,  4:  2. 


g   45  METHEGH.  G7 

a.  Monosyllables  ending  in  a  long  vowel,  when  followed  by  Makkepli, 
take  Methegh  in  the  first  place  before  the  accent,  provided  a  vocal  ShVa 
intervenes,  Tjb-^^  Gen.  19:  12,  XT^^S  Gen.  22:  12,  n3":J-^::x  Gen.  34:  6:  With 
dissyllables  this  is  rare  and  exceptional  •(SikrX"^';!^'!  1  Kin.  1:  19,  •in-ntb'j 
1  Chron.  28  :  9. 

b.  Methegh  is  regularly  attached  to  intermediate  syllablei  in  the  follow- 
ing cases  (See  Baer  in  Merx  Archiv  for  1868): 

(1)  To  the  article  ti  or  the  inseparable  prepositions  3,  3,  b  with  the 
vowel  of  the  article,  before  a  vowelless  consonant  (other  than  Yodh)  from 
which  Dagbesh  forte  has  been  omitted,  provided  they  stand  in  the  second 
place  before  the  accent,  fihz^r:  Lev.  3:  3,  rjU^'^b  Ps.  4:  1,  but  Q'^nVri  Gen. 
33:  5,  2^p>  Ps.  144:  1. 

(2)  To  He  Interrogative  pointed  with  Pattahh  (except  before  Yodh  or 
a  dagheshed  letter),  provided  it  stands  in  the  second  place  before  the  ac- 
cent, the  Methegh  in  this  case  preceding  the  vowel  for  the  sake  of  distinc- 
tion, ne=^n  Gen.  IS:  17,  T^^xn  Ex.  2:  7,  but  Cr!^-n-;n  Gen.  29:  5,  bi'^n  Judg. 
9:  2.  In  the  books  of  Psalms,  Proverbs  and  Job  Methegh  follows  the  vowel, 
as  otherwise  it  might  be  confounded  with  D'hhi  CiBi^'^n  Ps.  85:6.  Before 
Daghesh-forte,  which  sufficiently  shows  the  following  Sh'va  to  be  vocal, 
Methegh  is  omitted  as  unnecessary,  ns'isri  Isa.  27 :  7. 

(3)  To  the  first  syllable  of  ih-;l  or  "H";!  before  Makkeph  or  with  the 
accent  Pashta,  "I'^-^nil  Gen.  1:  3,  "'■^ri'il  Gen.  4:  8,  nij-in":;!  Gen.  5:  6.  If 
a  simple  syllable  precedes  Methegh  will  in  all  cases  be  transferred  to  it, 
sirsn-Na  2  Kin.  9:11. 

c.  It  hence  appears  how  Methegh  comes  to  be  of  use  in  distinguishing 
the  doubtful  vowels,  §  19,  and  to  what  extent  it  can  be  relied  upon  for  this 
end.  As  it  invariably  accompanies  the  vowel  of  a  simple  syllable  when 
followed  by  vocal  Sh'va,  it  must  always  be  found  \vith  «,  t,  and  u  preced- 
ing Sh'va,  inasmuch  as  this  will  necessarily  be  vocal.  Initial  1  ii,  the  un- 
emphatic  conjunction,  is  an  exception  with  which  it  is  not  written,  e.  g. 
ni:;r:!|  Gen.  6:  19,  nxVbl  Gen.  31:  4,  unless  the  Sh'va  be  compound,  e.g. 
^■'^.rb^l  Gen.  1:18,  nr^in  Judg.5:12,  or  it  be  required  by  the  rules  under  1.  a. 
The  absence  of  Methegh  except  in  the  case  just  mentioned,  is  consequently 
conclusive  evidence  of  the  shortness  of  the  vowel.  As,  however,  short 
vowels  in  intermediate  syllables,  and  in  a  few  rare  instances  even  in  mixed 
syllables,  may  receive  Methegh,  the  presence  of  this  sign  does  not  of  itself 
determine  the  vowel  to  be  long;  the  ultimate  decision  must  in  this  case 
depend  on  other  considerations. 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  preceding  rule  Me- 
thegh comes  to  stand  in  the  first  place  before  the  accent, 
another  Methegh  is  nevertheless  occasionally  found  in 
the  second  place,  the  two  thus  standing  in  immediate 
succession,  e.  g.  TTjTjm  Gen.  32:  22,  ^Bp)  Gen.  45:  25; 
and  even  three  occur  upon  successive  syllables,  e.  g. 


68  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  45 

rirZ'JIZ'-!^  Isa.  22:  19  in  some  editions.  But  commonly 
\Yiiere  tliere  is  more  than  one  Methegli,  their  position 
relatively  to  each  other  is  governed  by  the  same  rules 
as  the  position  of  Methegh  generally  with  relation  to 
the  principal  accent,    e.  g.  ^jn^^aj^b,    ^^'ll'^"),    '!^f}^'^n^l% 

4.  Methegh  is  sometimes  written  under  an  initial 
letter  with  Sh'va,  e.  g.  i^^^"^3'";|  Job  19:  6,  nj:n:D  Ps.  2:  3, 
nbEnrS  Jer.  49:  18. 

a.  A  Methegli  so  situated  is  called  Gaya  (X^n  helloioing)  by  Jewish 
grammarians,  and,  according  to  Elias  Levita,  it  occurs  eighty-four  times, 
the  number  yielded  by  its  name  arithmetically  reckoned.  The  traditional 
rule  was  that  the  Sh'va,  on  which  it  stands,  should  be  pronounced  as  a 
full  vowel.  Baer  and  others  give  the  name  of  Gaya  likewise  to  Methegh  in 
mixed  syllables.  Methegh  upon  a  short  vowel  before  a  compound  Sh'va  was 
called  Ma^ilkh  (~p~.N-a  prolonging),  with  a  short  Hhirik  it  was  called  Hhiriik 
(p^-rn  yyiuslting). 

5.  The  place  of  Methegh  is  frequently  supplied  by 
an  accent  chosen  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  consecution, 
§  39.  3.  «.,  e.  g.  D5-:n:s;  Isa.  66: 13,  Dh-ribi^b  Dent.  12:  31, 
n'^}::z^^  Zech.  7:  14,  ^'4-^:^1  Num.  10:  23,  ^bK^^^  Josh. 
22:12. 

a.  Methegh  with  Sh'va  occurs  chiefly  in  connection  with  the  poetic 
accents,  and  has  relation  to  the  intoning  which  it  is  one  of  their  functions 
to  direct.  It  indicates  that  the  vowelless  letter,  upon  which  it  stands,  is  to 
be  dwelt  upon  and  thus  additional  space  gained  for  the  various  modulations 
of  the  voice  that  are  prescribed.  Baer  gives  the  following  rules: 

(1)  When  Methegh  would  regularly  fall  upon  an  initial  simple  syllable 
beginning  with  two  consonants,  in  words  having  a  strong  disjunctive  accent 
not  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  it  is  transferred  from  the  vowel  to  the 
antecedent  vocal  Sh'va,  ^r'i;:;j~lnC3  Ps.  4:7.  If  the  Sh'va  is  compound, 
Methegh  is  intei-posed  between  its  two  constituents,  Dli'^ii'^X  Ps.  79:  10. 

(2)  The  divine  names  nSni,  ijSx,  ts'^fl'bx,  "^n'^X,  when  accented  with 
R'bhP  not  preceded  by  a  Conjanctive,  take  Methegh  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
e.  g.  Ps.  2:  7,   25:  2,   68:  8,   90:  1. 

(3)  Words  accented  with  Olev'yoredh,  R'bhP  or  D'hhi  not  preceded 
by  a  Conjunctive  take  Methegh  on  initial  Sh'va,  provided  there  is  at  least 
one  vowel  between  it  and  the  accent,  ai^d  this  is  without  Methegh  "TJ^^ 
Ps.  1:  3,  D'n'^rnb  Ps.  106:  23.    The  Methfegh  necessarily  due  to  a  following 


§  46  k'ki  and  k'thibh.  69 

compound  Sh'va  is  not  reckoned  in  this  and  the  subseqiieiit.  rules,  ^k  '^■ina 
Ps.  36:  7,  iirrL.-xi  Ps.  91:  15. 

(4)  ""SX  with  Munahh  before  D'hhi  takes  Methegb  on  the  initial  Sh'va, 
Ps.  17:  6,  116:  16. 

Methegh  falls  on  initial  Sh'va  with  the  prose  accents 

(1)  When  the  word  has  G'rashaAim  or  Pazer  not  preceded  by  a  Con* 
junctive,  provided  there  are  at  least  two  vowels  before  the  tonesyllable  and 
the  first  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  a'pnnsTX'l  Gen.  10:  14, 
Q'>^;3'JO  Ex.  25  :  33. 

(2)  When  the  word  has  Darga  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  K'bhi*, 
or  Kadhma  as  the  second  Conjunctive  before  Pashta  or  T'bhir,  or  Munahh 
as  the  third  Conjunctive  before  T'lisha,  provided  a  vowel  precedes  the  tone- 
syllable  and  is  without  Methegh,  (see  rule  (3)  above),  ^irriX  cn  a''-Vj  Gen. 
34:  21. 

Methegh  in  these  cases  requires  a  more  vigorous  pronunciation  of  the 
vowelless  letter,  which  if  slightly  uttered  might  be  inaudible. 


K*Ei  AND  K'thibh. 

§  46.  Various  notes  extracted  from  the  Massora 
(fi'lis'^  tradition),  a  collection  of  remarks  upon  the  text, 
are  found  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  are 
explained  in  the  glossary  at  the  end  of  most  editions. 
The  most  important  of  these  are  the  various  readings 
known  as  the  K'ri  ("'^p  read),  and  K'thibh  (3'ri3  tvritten). 
If  in  any  instance  traditional  usage  sanctioned  a  reading 
different  from  that  which  was  written  in  the  text  or  the 
K'thibh,  the  punctuators  did  not  venture  to  alter  the 
text  itself  for  the  sake  of  making  the  correction;  they 
went  no  further  than  to  connect  with  the  letters  of  the 
text  the  vowels  of  the  word  to  be  substituted  for  it  in 
reading  or  the  K'ri,  with  a  reference  to  the  margin  where 
the  letters  of  the  substitute  might  be  found.  Thus,  with 
the  word  1^52i^^*  Josh.  6:  7  is  connected  the  marginal  note 
^-p  "i:ii<^1.  The  vowels  here  attached  to  the  K'thibh  be- 
long not  to  it  but  to  the  unpointed  word  in  the  margin, 
wliich  is  accordingly  n52J^''\  The  proper  vowds  for  the 
pronunciation  of  the  K'thibh  are  not  written,  but  must 


70  OBTHOGEAPHY.  §  47 

be  supplied  from  a  knowledge  of  the  form  indicated  by 
tlie  letters,  which  in  this  case  is  ^nttS^I.  Again,  in  ver.  9, 
lypri  in  the  text  refers  to  'p  ^^pn  in  the, margin;  the  K'ri 
is  iiere  ^3;pri,  and  the  K'thibh,  whose  vowels  are  left  to 
be  determined  by  the  reader,  ^3>pri.  Jer.  42:  6  has  ^.3&5 
where  the  marginal  note  is  "^np  1DnD5<;  the  K'ri  is  accord- 
ingly ^jm5j«,  and  the  K'thibh  ^IDIS!.  In  order  to  indicate 
that  a  given  word  was  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  was 
left  unpoiated,  and  the  note  ''"ip  i<bl  n^n^,  written  hut  not 
read,  placed  in  the  margin,  e.  g.  l2J7jn  Ezek.  48:  16,  W 
2  Kin.  5:  18,  -jlT  Jer.  51:  3.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word  was  to  be  supphed,  its  vowels  were  inserted  in  the 
text  and  its  letters  placed  m  the  margin,  with  the  note 
S^riD  i^bl  ''Hp,  read  but  not  written,  e.  g.  Judg.  20:  13  in 
the  text  .  and  in  the  margin  "'Sn,  to  be  read  ^pS;  so 
Jer.  31:  38   D^i^n.     In  1  Kin.  21:  8    the  first  letW  of 

•      T 

D^"SCn  is  left  unpointed  as  superfluous,  and  in  Job  2 :  7 
n?  is  explained  by  the  margin  to  stand  for  1?1:  so  Jer. 
18':  23  m^^  for  Tm. 

a.  The  number  of  these  marginal  readings  differs  in  different  editions. 
Elias  Levita  states  that  there  are  848.  Others  have  computed  them  to  be 
1,000;  others  still,  1,200. 

§  47.  Sometimes  a  different  reading  from  that  of  the 
text  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone  without  a  marginal 
note  being  added  in  explanation,  as  when  a  particular 
word  or  orthography  is  regularly  substituted  for  another 
of  frequent  occurrence.  These  cases  are  presumed  to  be 
so  lanuliar  to  the  reader  as  to  require  no  other  index  of 
their  existence  than  the  presence  of  the  appropriate 
vowels.  Thus,  the  divine  name  Hin^,  which  the  Jews  had 
a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  was  and  stiU  is 
read  by  them  as  if  it  were  "Dltj;  Lord,  whose  points  it 
accordingly  receives,  tTiTi'],  unless  these  two  names  stand 
in  immediate  connection,  when,  to  avoid  repetition,  it  ia 


§  48  k'ei  and  k'thibh.  71 

read  U'Hb^  and  pointed  nVn;]  Gen.  15:  2,  Hab.  3:  19. 
The  antiqmty  of  tliis  superstition  is  attested  by  the 
K-vpiog  of  the  Septuagint,  followed  in  the  Enghsh  as 
well  as  in  other  modern  versions  by  the  rendering 
LoED.  The  true  souiid  of  the  name  never  having  been 
noted,  is  now  lost;  the  only  clue  that  is  left  being  its 
etymology  and  the  form  which  it  assumes  in  compo- 
sition, §  62.  1,  from  which  the  conclusion  has  been 
drawn  that  it  was  T'^^ri'^  Yahve.  The  common  pronun- 
ciation Jehovah  is  manifestly  founded  upon  the  error 
of  combining  the  consonants  of  this  word  with  the 
vowels  of  another  and  an  entirely  different  one. 
Other  standing  K'ris,  unnoted  in  the  margin,  are  I^IH, 
which  is  read  i^""",  though  the  sound  indicated  by  the 
letters  is  i^^n.     So  ^bllliS^  read  ^Di2\   and  D^OT^  read 

TT»  TT"'  '-t: 

§  48.  In  the  absence  of  definite  information  respect- 
ing the  origin  and  sources  of  these  various  readings,  it  is 
difficult  to  determine  with  absolute  precision  the  weight 
to  which  they  are  respectively  entitled.  The  cm-rent 
opinion  of  the  ablest  Hebraists,  based  upon  a  careful 
scrutiny  of  their  internal  character  and  the  relation  w^hich 
ordinarily  appears  to  subsist  between  them,  is  that  while 
the  K'ri  may  perhaps,  in  a  few  cases,  correct  errors  in 
the  K'thibh,  and  so  restore  the  original  reading,  it  is  in 
the  great  majority  of  instances  an  explanatory  gloss 
rather  than  an  emendation.  With  the  rare  exceptions 
already  suggested,  the  K'thibh  is  esteemed  the  true  read- 
ing, the  object  of  the  K'ri  being  to  remove  orthograpliical 
anomahes,  secure  grammatical  uniformity,  substitute 
usual  for  unusual,  prevaihng  for  obsolete  words  and 
forms,  and  occasionally  to  introduce  euphemistic  ex- 
pressions. While  the  K'ri  is  probably  not  to  be  esteemed 
the  original  reading,  therefore,  it  deserves  attention  as 


72  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  49 

the  grammatical  or  exegetical  comment  of  a  steadfast 
tradition. 


ACCUEACY  OF  THE  PoiNTS. 

§  49.  1.  All  the  Massoretic  additions  to  the  text  de- 
signed to  facilitate  its  reading  have  now  been  considered. 
The  correctness  of  the  pronunciation,  which  they  yield, 
is  vouched  for  not  only  by  the  esteem  in  which  they  are 
universally  held  by  the  Jews,  but  by  the  scrupulous 
mmuteness  of  the  system,  its  consistency  with  itself  and 
with  the  vowel-letters  of  the  text,  its  affinity  with  and 
yet  independence  of  the  vocalization  of  the  kmdred 
languages  the  Arabic  and  Syriac,  and  the  veneration  for 
the  already  established  text  which  evidently  characterized 
its  authors,  since  they  did  not  venture  to  change  the 
text  even  in  the  shghtest  particular. 

2.  The  only  additional  information  which  has  come 
down  to  us  respecting  the  true  sound  of  Hebrew  words, 
is  furnished  by  the  mode  of  writing  proper  names  in  the 
Septuagint  version,  and  the  few  Hebrew  words  preserved 
by  ancient  authors,  particularly  Origen  and  Jerome. 
These  have  been  subjected  to  an  elaborate  comparison 
with  the  Massoretic  punctuation,  and  the  result  has  been 
to  establish  their  substantial  agreement  in  the  main,  with, 
however,  not  a  few  remarkable  points  of  divergence.  In 
relation  to  this  subject  it  should  be  observed,  that  the 
Hebrew  pronunciation  of  the  Seventy  is  inferred  entirely 
from  their  mode  of  spelhng  proper  names,  not  from 
words  in  living  use  in  the  language.  The  chances  of  in- 
accuracy, on  the  part  of  the  translators,  are  here  pecuh- 
arly  great.  Many  names  were  not  famihar  and  were  of 
rare  occurrence;  and  as  no  system  of  vowel  notation  then 
existed,  they  were  left  entirely  to  their  independent  know* 


§49  ACCURACY  OF  THE  POINTS.  73 

ledge  of  the  sound  of  each  individual  word.  These  words 
were  written  by  them  in  a  foreign  alphabet,  whose 
sounds  did  not  coincide  precisely  with  those  of  the 
Hebrew,  and  in  which  the  proper  equivalents  varied 
somewhat  according  to  their  combinations.  The  true 
sound  was  also  departed  from  sometimes  because  the 
laws  of  Greek  euphony  forbade  its  exact  reproduction. 
The  negligence  with  which  they  are  chargeable  else- 
where was  also  probably  aggravated  here,  and  in  fact 
there  are  many  instances  in  which  they  not  merely  de- 
viate from  the  vowels  but  transpose  or  change  the  let- 
ters. Leaving  out  of  view,  therefore,  such  incidental  dis- 
crepancies as  are  to  be  accounted  for  in  the  ways  now 
suggested,  a  thorough  and  extended  examination  of  the 
subject  reveals,  with  all  the  general  agreement,  a  number 
of  regular  and  systematic  deviations. 

a.  These  are  thus  stated  by  EAvald,  Lehrbuch,  p.  71.  (1)  An  e  or  *  de- 
rived fi'om  a  is  written  d,  as  JTiri  Qapa,  C"b3  BaXaa/*,  '"i"::;'  Fa^Saaiv,  0""!^: 
Mapiafjt.;  and  on  the  other  hand,  a  is  sometimes  written  e,  n'0'2-')>irtn 
(yki^sfia,  "ip  KfVc!^,  rr.  YsQ,  especially  before  n  as  JT^'p  Ko/3f,  n^"  Xaps. 
(2)  e  is  written  for  i  and  o  for  ii,  "Z'TO  Xerraioi,  CJn^Ji  Tee^ycc,  "irns  Tehexy, 
Or^yi^  Mscpai/x,  rins  OxoXa^,  ri;-T^"  OXi«x.  (3)  For  the  diphthongal  e  and  o 
their  constituents  ai  and  au  are  substituted,  "D"^)?  Ka/vav,  133  '^a^av.  (4)  The 
vowel  letters  are  softened  into  their  homogeneous  vowels  N"~*1  oviKpoc, 
"'3'?'?^  o'Jiha^rjp.  (5)  Vocal  Sh'va  is  Aviitten  as  a  full  vowel,  commonly  a, 
or  if  an  o  follow,  o,  nix^U  Za^xoi^,  bxil^'")  VayovTjX,  fni":  Xcpou^i//.,  DTp 
Zoho/Jia;  the  final  vowel  of  Segholates  is  also  written  o  if  o  precedes,  T\rjQ 
Mo'kox,  "I'^i"  '(Ojj.00. 

3.  The  regularity  of  these  deviations  seems  to  be  best 
accounted  for  by  the  assumption  that  the  pronunciation 
represented  in  the  Septuagint  is  that  which  prevailed 
among  the  Jews  in  Egypt,  which  would  naturally  be  less 
pure  than  that  of  Palestme  represented  in  the  vowel 
points,  and  which,  moreover,  betrays  in  the  particulars 
recited  above  a  strong  leaning  to  Aramaean  forms  and 
sounds.  Accordingly  the  view  now  commonly  entertained 
is  that  the  vowel  notation  of  the  Massorites  is  correct, 


74  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  50 

at  least  in  all  essential  particulars,  and  that  it  is  properly 
to  be  made  the  basis  of  all  investigations  into  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  language. 


Orthographic  Changes. 

§  50.  The  signs  thus  far  described  represent  all  the 
sounds  of  the  Hebrew  language.  Its  stock  of  words  is 
formed  by  combining  these  in  various  significant  ways. 
The  laws  of  such  combinations,  and  especially  the  mu- 
tations to  which  they  are  subject,  or  which  they  occasion, 
next  demand  attention.  When  a  particular  idea  has 
been  attached  to  a  certain  combination  of  sounds,  its 
different  modifications  may  naturally  be  expressed  by 
sUghtly  varying  those  sounds.  This  may  take  place, 

1.  By  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another 
of  hke  character,  and  for  the  most  part  of  the  same 
organ,  e.  g.: 

nin  to  be,  exist,  n^n  to  live;  53:  to  pour  forth,  N33  the  same  idea  ap- 
plied to  words,  to  prophesy;  p;^  to  encircle  the  neck  ivith  an  ornament,  p3n 
to  strangle,  p3X  applied  to  sounds  uttered  in  strangulation,  to  groan;  bsi  to 
go  about  as  a  spy,  bs"!  to  go  about  as  a  merchant;  D33  to  collect,  B"'t3a 
treasures ;  ^"'25  a  cup,  S'yo  or  "l^ip  a  helmet  (of  similar  shape) ;  T^'n  tender, 
delicate,  p"^  thin;  "ipFi  to  make  straight,  '{2V\  to  straighten  the  beam  of  the 
balance,  to  iveigh;  "lisii  first  horn,  "il32  first  ripe,  "ip3  the  first  portion  of 
the  day,  the  morning;  nbn  to  suspend,  rtb^  applied  to  a  bucket,  to  let  down; 
■i]5  to  cut,  is;:?  to  reap;  nrjT  gold,  :ih^  yellow;  "i^'J  to  conceal,  "Sband  'S^ 
to  hide  aivay  as  treasures,  ",50  to  cover  with  hoards;  yn  to  destroy  by  tear- 
ing down,  lans  to  destroy  by  uprooting;  fiau  to  slay,  ri2t  to  sacrifice;  ban 
to  hind,  baa  to  bound;  n^a  to  break  up,  flee,  JTns  to  break  out,  blossom,  p^a 
to  break  in  pieces;  3^p  to  cut  off,  a^n  to  hew  stone,  a;:n  to  cut  wood;  ins 
to  surround,  "iraJ  to  encircle  the  head  with  a  crown ;  T^ti3  to  pour  out,  '^03  to 
pour  in  libation  or  in  casting  metals;  "ins  to  shine,  "in::  to  be  pure;  n'nn  to 
engrave,  ;:J'in  to  plough;  "iPia  to  prove,  "ina  to  approve,  choose;  nniy  to  drink, 
its  causative  n|^Ti"n;  "inn  to  break  through,  "ipn  to  investigate;  a^3  to  place, 
its  reflexive  3s;;inn. 

2.  By  the  transposition  of  letters,  e.  g.: 

'j'tis  to  deal  violently,  "i^Q  to  urge;  "iS]^  to  cut  with  the  sickle,  reap,  y^ 


§  51  ORTHOGEAPHIC  CHANGES.  75 

to  cut  with  the  teeth,  bite;  Cjoj  to  blow,  \rS3  breath;  Djs  to  collect,  033  riches, 
nizsp'a  storehouses. 

3.  By  the  addition  of  a  letter: 

Thus,  from  the  letters  IS,  in  which  inheres  the  idea  of  compression 
are  formed  n'n:j  to  bind,  isii^-  to  press  together,  -:!:x  to  heap  up,  -i^i  to  be 
straitened,  -1^3  to  guard,  besiege,  '■\'4'J  to  restrain,  -^in  an  enclosure;  from  T5 
are  formed  ^n  to  cut,  T^a  to  cut  of,  wa  to  cut  loose,  go  aivay,  tTa  to  shear, 
Vt3  to  plunder,  r^T5  hewn  stone;  C-Q  to  unfold,  make  distinct,  lirna  to  spread 
out;  dns  a  vineyard,  bg"i3  a  garden. 

§  51.  Such  hteral  changes  as  those  just  recited  not 
only  serve  to  express  new  shades  of  meaning,  but  even 
where  the  meaning  remains  precisely  the  same,  they  may 
represent  diversities  of  other  sorts.  Thus,  the  distinction 
may  be, 

1.  In  point  of  currency  or  style:  One  form  of  the 
word  bemg  in  more  common  and  familiar  use,  the  other 
more  rare  and  savoring,  perhaps,  of  the  elevated  or  poetic 
style,  e.  g.: 

-iS3  to  guard,  Vjj  poetic;  ^i-a  cypress,  niia  once  in  poetry;  -lao  to  shut, 
rare]y  naO;  nnsa  storm,  rr^i'b  rare  and  poetic;' Ti=0  to  cover,  once  l^rb;  "ri 
to  be  quenched,  once  Tj^J;  3>n  to  abhor,  once  ^m]  b?o  to  be  foolish^  one  J 
bos;  nbl?  iniquity,  once  ml??. 

2.  Of  antiquity:  The  pronunciation  of  a  word  or  its 
form  may  undergo  changes  in  the  lapse  of  time.  Of  the 
few  mstances  of  this  sort,  which  our  imperfect  data 
enable  us  to  fix  upon  with  some  measure  of  confidence, 
the  followmg  may  be  taken  as  specunens,  e.  g.: 

To  laugh  in  the  Pentateuch  pna,  in  other  books  (Judg.  16:  25  ex- 
cepted) p'n'C;  to  cry  out  in  the  Pentateuch  prs,  only  once  (Es.  2:  23)  prt 
which  is  the  more  frequent  form  in  other  books;  ::r2,  n^rs  a  lamb,  occur 
in  the  Pentateuch  interchangeably  with  'Cl^,  n-rns.  which  are  the  only 
forms  found  in  other  books;  a  sceptre  1251^,  but  in  the  book  of  Esther  ::'^rir; 
Damascus  pir^t!,  in  Chronicles  piUp"!?;  hoiv  1  Chron.  13:  12,  Dan.  10:  17 
""^"1,  in  earlier  books  T^'^Ni. 

3.  Of  Dialect:  The  same  word  may  come  to  be 
pronounced  differently  by  those  who  speak  distmct 
though  related  languages.  Thus,  the  cognate   dialeclS; 


76  ORTHOGEAPHT.  §  52 

particularly  the  Biblical  Aramaean  and  Syriac,  in  very 
many  words  regularly  substitute  5<  for  tlie  Hebrew 
final  n,  and  the  corresponding  Unguals  for  the  Hebrew 
sibilants,  :2  being  sometimes  still  further  weakened  by 
the  loss  even  of  the  hngual  sound  to  that  of  the  gut- 
tural y,  e.  g.: 

Heb.  nrn  to  wander,  Aram.  Ni'i:,  Syr.  \Ui\  Heb.  SriT  gold,  Aram. 
Si!]'^,  Syr.  |.S(5i?;  Heb.  n^ia  a  rock,  Aram,  -i^io,  Syr.  jja.^ ;  Heb.  dVd 
ihree,   Aram,  rtn,    Syr.  2>^Z,    Arab,  v^^';   Heb.  ■j^'iX  the   earth,    Arab. 


<>   -t 


'f,  Aram.  S.nx,  Syr.  X^h].  Other  consonaiit  changes:  Heb.  '3  a  son, 
Arab.  ^\^,  Aram.  ^3,  Syr.  j-S ;  Heb.  b:;:;^  ^o  Ai7Z,  Arab.  jJls  >  Heb. 
^bp";,  Syr.  '^a.^oJ ;  Heb.  KM  o  throne,  Aram.  ''Ci">i3,  Syr.  U-icias,  Arab. 
^5^'$";   Heb.  n;r^n  a  field,  Aram.  N^pn,   Syr.  UaI,  Eth.  (h^dii. 

4.  Of  simple  euphony:  An  alternate  form  of  a  word 
may  be  produced  to  facihtate  its  pronunciation  or  make 
its  sound  more  pleasing,  e.  g.: 

T?5")>?)  ))y^.^  P^i'>'ple ;  cub,  "j-jb  to  hate;  MSb^,  tisb?  chamber;  "sr,  "i::^ 
Achan;  -iax:n=faD,  -iss"!-!:!!:?  Nebuchadnezzar;  SXi,  S'^'iT  Doe^/  tJi^'ajx, 
ca^ii^s  almug  or  algum  trees;  niyn^p,  nis^n^  fee/A. 

o.  Mere  varieties  of  orthographj'  must  not  be  mistaken  for  consonantal 
changes,  e.  g.  xb  occasionally  for  "lb  and  vice  versa,  probably  ri^lbab  for 
wbsp,  and  such  permutations  of  gutturals  as  abound  in  the  manuscripts 
of  the  Samaritans,  who,  making  no  distinction  in  the  sounds  of  these  letters, 
perpetually  confounded  them  in  Avriting,  Gesen.  Sam.  Pent.  p.  62.  A  like 
faulty  pronunciation  has  been  attributed  to  the  Galileans,  to  which  there  is 
&  probable  allusion  in  Matt.  26 :  73.  Buxtorf  Lex.  Chald.  p.  434. 

8  52.  The  chanQ;es  thus  far  described  result  in  the 
production  of  distinct  words,  and  belong  to  the  domain 
of  the  lexicon  rather  than  of  the  grammar.  The  lexico- 
grapher regards  such  words  as  cognate,  and  traces  them 
back  to  their  common  source;  but,  in  the  view  of  the 
grammarian,  they  are  totally  distinct.  The  mutations 
with  which  the  latter  concerns  himself  are  such  as  take 
place  in  the  direct  derivation  and  inflection  of  words, 
These  are  altogether  euphonic,  are  more  restricted  in 


§  53  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  77 

their  character,  and  take  place  within  far  narrower  limits, 
than  those  heretofore  considered.  When  words  are  sub- 
jected to  gTammatical  changes  their  sounds  are  brought 
into  new  connections,  attended,  it  may  be,  with  a  diffi- 
culty of  utterance  which  demands  some  measure  of  rehef, 
or  they  pass  readily  and  naturally  into  other  sounds, 
which  are  easier  of  pronunciation  or  more  agreeable  to 
the  ear.  The  mutations  thus  induced  are  of  three  sorts, 
viz.:  Consonant  Changes,  the  Conversion  of  Consonants 
into  Vowels,  and  Vowel  Changes.  These  will  require  to 
be  considered  separately. 

Consonant  Changes. 

§  53.  The  first  class  of  changes  embraces  those  which 
affect  the  consonants.  These  mostly  arise  from  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants,  creating  a  difficulty  in  the 
pronunciation  or  yielding  a  sound  displeasing  to  the  ear. 
This  may  take  place  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  close 
of  a  syllable.  Syllables  in  Hebrew  may,  and  often  do, 
begin  with  two  consonants,  §  18.  1;  but  the  necessity  of 
this  is  avoided  in  certain  cases  by  the  following  ex- 
pedients: 

1.  In  the  beginning  of  words  the  weak  letter  H  is 
sometimes  prefixed  with  a  short  vowel,  thus  creating  a 
new  initial  syllable  to  which  the  first  consonant  may  be 
transferred. 

a.  The  only  instances  of  this  are  afforded  by  the  second  and  seventh 
conjugations  of  verbs,  the  Niphal  and  Hithpael,  e.  g.  '^I5r:=bu;^3r3  for  bu;f:3; 
bii^rn  probably  for  bi:;rp,  comp.  Arab,  iakattala.  In  w'-.'nx  Ezek.  14:3  X  is  pre- 
fixed instead  of  n.  Prosthesis  is  more  common  in  the  domain  of  the  lexicon, 
where  X  is  always  the  letter  used,  e.  g.  ri^T,  rin|Xrt?-m;  bitri,  V?:rN  yexfer- 
Hay.  A  prefixed  X  is  even  occasionally  employed  to  soften  the  pronunciation 
without  the  necessity  stated  aboATe,  e.  g.  D"n::^X,  S"e;x,  S"'3"1jX,  B"|3;X.  So 
in  Chaldee  cnx  blood,  Heb.  Ci;  "jJX  garden,  Heb.  is.  In  Arabic  the  con- 
currence of  two  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  is  regularly  obviated 
by  prefixing  ^.    Comp.  Greek  x6ig,  ex^ig. 


78  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  53 

2.  The  first  of  the  concurrent  consonants,  if  it  has  a 
comparatively  feeble  sound,  is  sometimes  dropped. 

a.  This  occurs  regularly  in  verbs  whose  first  radical  is  "^  or  3,  and  in 
nouns  derived  from  such  verbs,  e.g.  2^  fortliij'^,  nSJl  for  fiS^'^,  ^^3  for  b^lS"^, 
•|ri  for  'ifiD,  "^n  Ezek.  2:  10  for  -ifiD,  hiytri  Ezek.  1:  4  for  ^i^n:,  and  perhaps 
^X3  Am.  8 :  8  for  IX";?. 

X  is  thus  dropped  in  ^Dni  for  'isnix,  ^  for  ^'iJX ;  also  in  a  few  instances 
from  the  beginning  of  the  second  syllable  of  words,  e.  g.  '^I?^,^  Ezek.  28:  16 
for  ?^"!3XNl;  -pTX  Job  32:  11  for  '|"'TX5<;  QiniiDln  Eccl.  4:  14  for  t]i'n!iO>5n; 
rr^yzy^  2  Chron.  22:  5  for  C^^nxri;  nnoa  Ezek.  20:  37  for  n-^Di<^ ;  fiVi? 
1  Kin.  5:  25  with  Daghesh-forte  conservative  for  n'^is-a;  anx  Prov.  8:  17 
for  ansK;  "pip  Prov.  17:  4  for  'pTS^;  T^nbiy  1  Sam.  1:  17  for  "n;X'J.  These 
e.xamples  likewise  admit  of  a  different  explanation;  X  may  give  up  its  con- 
sonantal power,  losing  its  sound  in  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  agreeably 
to  §  57.  2  (2),  after  Avhich  it  may  readily  be  dropped  altogether. 

^  is  occasionally  dropped  from  the  participles  of  the  Pual  or  fourth 
conjugation,  as  nj??  for  n^l^-S;  h  in  np  for  nj^b;  n  in  nab  Ex.  3:  2  fornhnb; 
cfi^-jb  Ex.  7:  22  for  cn"!^!!^  Ex.  7:  11;  and  perhaps  S  in  nnlO  Gen.  49:  11, 
which  appears  to  be  for  HhlDS. 

h.  The  rejection  of  a  consonant  from  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  when 
rot  immediately  followed  by  another  consonant,  is  exceptional;  as  Tn  Judg. 
9:  11  for  in'i;  nnn  2  Sam.  22:  41  for  nnnj;  in  Ezek.  33:  30  for  IJlX; 
niS'lin  Neh.  3:  13  for  nisrsn;  ^nbnnn  Judg.  9:  9  for  ■'Pibinnn,  and  per- 
haps ii^y  Jer.  42:  10,  which  seems  to  be  for  3'il!a\ 

3.  The  second  consonant  is  sometimes  dropped,  if  it 
is  a  letter  of  feeble  sound. 

a.  This  is  regularly  the  case  with  M  of  the  article  and  of  verbal  pre- 
fixes, and  "^  as  the  final  radical  of  verbs,  e.  g.  JTisb  for  n";3rf?;  Vb;?";  for 
b-Jisn-; ;  Vij  for  rbs. 

It  occurs  besides  in  a  few  sporadic  examples  with  these  same  letters, 
and  more  rarely  still  with  X,  1,  and  3,  e.  g.  ^^^  for  int,  ^S  Ezek.  2:  10  for 
TiS,  liB'Ji"'  for  i^rJiiTi,  !i3b::p'i  and  inVjp  with  Daghesh-forte  conservative 
for  inDVip'i  and  '^inni-jp;  '^iri^l  Lam.  3:^53  for  ^^T"!^^  ^{t^'V-  ^^^-  ^'  ^^  ^'^^ 
r^iii^n;  >i:slr-a  Job  35:\l  for  i:sbxp,  D-'fert  Ex.  26:  24  for  n'^-/2Xn,  bn^  Isa. 
13:  20  for  bf-.X"!,  '^:b!5D:}  2  Sam  22:  40  for  "^sbl^!?.^;  ''^  Isa.  3:  24  for  ">13,  ""S 
for  •'IS,  D'^iii  for  Q''ibni ;  ''S  as  a  particle  of  entreaty,  probably  for  "^Sa,  'n'p'a'^ 
Am.  8:8  (K'thibh)  for  nijp":;?;  ba  the  name  of  a  Babylonish  deity  for  b?3 
is  a  foreign  contraction.  The  conjecture  that  "iDa  Mic.  1:  10  is  for  ib'a  in 
Accho  is  ingenious  and  favoured  by  the  occurrence  of  HSa  in  Gctth  in  the 
parallel  clause;  but  it  is  at  variance  with  the  points,  which,  upon  this  hypo- 
thesis, should  bo  iaa. 

6.  In  rare  cases  this  rejection  occurs  even  after  a  mixed  syllable,  whose 
final  consonant  is  thus  drawn  forward,   e.  g.  n^X  for  Mn-^X,   rr^n  Job  29 :  « 


§  51  CONSONANT  CHANGES.  79 

for  nx -n,  skrn  Ex.  2 :  4  for  Sa"nn  and  probably  p^X  Ps.  139 :  8  with  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative  for  ptes. 

§  54.  When  the  concurrence  takes  place  at  the  close 
of  a  syllable,  whether  the  second  consonant  belongs  to 
the  same  syllable  with,  the  first  as  at  the  end  of  words, 
or  to  a  different  syllable  as  in  the  middle  of  words,  the 
following  changes  may  be  produced. 

1.  An  aspirate  following  another  consonant  loses  its 
aspiration,  §  21;  or  if  it  be  brought  into  juxtaposition 
with  its  like  so  as  to  form  a  doubled  letter,  the  aspiration 
of  both  will  be  removed,  §  23.  2,  unless  the  combination 
occurs  at  the  end  of  a  word,  where  the  reduphcation  is 
not  expressed,  §  25.  Thus,  TJ^  for  tTp2,  Diariri  for  D'iarrin, 

■,rjSb  for  "tlrro  b^*  ^-  froi^  -^"^5  ^-^^  1  I^i^-  1:  15  foi 

nn^_TD7j  or  ir^t)'-^^,  nin?^  Ezek.  4: 3  for  nni"^,  r\h'j:'2  Mai. 
1:  i4  for  nnn^".:. 

2.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  in  certain 
cases  assimilated  to  the  second,  the  doubhng  thus  oc- 
casioned being  expressed  as  in  the  case  of  letters  origin- 
ally alike  by  Daghesh-forte,  except  at  the  end  of  words, 
§  25,  where  Daghesh  disappears  or  is  only  virtually  pre- 
sent, being  resumed  upon  the  addition  of  a  fresh  vowel 
or  syllable.  This  is  most  frequently  the  case  with  the 
liquid  D,  rarely  with  b  and  1  and  only  in  particular 
words;  so  T\  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  before  1.  and  t:, 
and  in  a  few  instances  before  sibilant  and  other  letters, 
and  1  at  the  end  of  a  few  words  before  ti.  Thus,  "jri* 
for  -r):":,  t\r\-2  for  ri:pj^;  nj?^  for  npb:,  nb  Ezek.  27:  23 
for  riDbS  Am.  6:  2;'  "blfl  for  ^b  niax';  ^i<3T.  for  "SSiin:, 
«i2t2:  for  xi2t:n';,  Ji3-Tn'for  ^3Tnn",  nt?i^n  for  oatjjnp, 
tosn  for  M5<n:nn,  riDsn  for  nfesnn;  th  for  nnb,  nns 
forFinnti. 

a.  So  perhaps  D  in  tiB^  according  to  Gesenius  for  nbsp  and  Ca  for 
pM.  Compare  Greek  avyysvric  for  avvysT^c,  rirv/x^jLat  for  TSTvir/ji.at,  and  Eng. 
il-loffical,  ir-religion,  im-niafure  formed  by  the  negative  prefix  in. 


80  OETHOGRAPHT.  §  Sfi 

3.  A  few  isolated  cases  occur  of  the  reverse  process 
more  common  in  Biblical  Arameeic  and  Syriac,  by  which  a 
doubled  letter  is  resolved  into  two  different  consonants  by 
the  change  of  the  first  or  the  second  member  of  the  redupli- 
cation to  a  Hquid  "i  or  5,  e.  g.  bia'^lD'^  for  ^^^Q,  picb"]"!!  for 
p\z:i!3"l,  ri^:'T'2  Isa.  23:  11  for  n^ba,  ^k5p  Job  18:  2  in  the 
judgment  of  some  for  ''isp  ends,  though  others  make  the 
3  a  radical,  and  give  the  word  the  sense  of  snares.  The 
conjecture  that  ^D"^ri  Ps.  64:  7,  Lam.  3:  22  is  for  TOFl  is 
unnecessary  and  unwarranted. 

4.  When  T\  of  the  Hithpael  of  verbs  would  stand  be- 
fore a  sibilant,  it  is  transposed  with  D  and  123,  and  with  12 
it  is  in  addition  changed  to  t:.  Thus,  ^riPC^^  for  '^ripriia, 
nian^^  for  ^i2dn^  nyr^^  for  ^^'zry^,  pit::^:  for  priT\':. 

o.  In  nrj^idrfl  Jer.  49 : 3  the  transposition  does  not  take  place  in  con- 
sequence of  the  number  of  similar  letters  which  would  thus  be  brought 
into  proximity.  In  the  cognate  languages  n  is  likewise  transposed  with  T 
and  changed  to  1:  thus,  Aram.  "S^TIi  for  "'btriri;  so,  also,  in  SjTiac  and 
Arabic.  The  only  example  of  a  Hebrew  verb  whose  first  letter  is  1  appearing 
in  this  conjugation  is  siS-rti  Isa.  1:  16,  where  ri  is  assimilated  agreeably  to  2. 
Compare  with  these  transpositions  the  frequent  Doric  change  of  ^  (=  Sj) 
into  c\  as  avplaha  for  avpiXu. 

§  55.  The  occurrence  of  a  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
word  may,  inasmuch  as  the  succeeding  word  must  ne- 
cessarily begin  with  one,  be  regarded  as  an  additional 
case  of  the  concurrence  of  consonants.  As  the  contact  is 
less  close,  however,  than  when  they  meet  in  the  same 
word,  it  is  less  fruitful  of  changes  than  in  the  cases  al- 
ready considered. 

1.  There  are  three  instances  in  which  it  has  been 
doubtfully  conjectured  that  a  final  "j  has  been  assimilated 
to  a  following  initial  'C;  viz.  D^li'iT';  Isa.  35:  1  presumed  to 
be  for  |W^-;  Qr-jS?  Num.  3:  49  for  'frip,  Ex.  21:  30,  Ps. 
49:  9;  Die  Gen.  28:  12. 

a.  Final  consonants  are  in  Sanskrit  perpetually  modified  by  the  initial 

letter  of  the  following  word.    But  it  is  by  no  means  clear  that  this  is  so  in 


§56  CONSONANT  CHANGE3.  81 

Hebrew,  even  in  the  examples  alleged,  as  the  forms  admit  of  a  different 
explanation.  See  in  regard  to  the  first  passage,  Dr.  Alexander's  Com- 
mentary. 

2.  A  few  cases  occur  of  the  rejection  of  a  letter,  chiefly 
1  and  D,  from  the  end  of  a  word. 

a.  )  of  the  verbal  endings  'yi  and  "p,  is  almost  ahvaj's  dropped,  being 
only  retained  as  an  archaic  or  emphatic  form,  and  chiefly  at  the  end  of  a 
clause,  e.  g.  -il^i;^  Deut.  8:  16,  but  mostly  l^n^;  "'rirnri  Gen.  32:  20,  com- 
monly ^"natin;  '"^^ytn  Kuth  3:  4,  commonly  -''b'J'r\.  So,  too,  in  some  proper 
nouns,  "-i^J-a  Zech.  12:  11,  inS^  Josh.  12:  21 ;  fi-^d,  whose  original  "i  is  sho^vn 
in  the  derivative  '''f^^^  and  is  perpetuated  in  the  modern  name  Seililn. 

b.  In  like  manner  D  is  rejected  from  the  dual  and  plural  terminations 
of  nouns  upon  their  entering  into  the  close  connection  of  the  construct 
state  with  the  following  word,  "'iTS  from  C]';i5TX,  "^na  from  a"^n3. 

c.  If  the  feminine  endings  n_  and  n^  have,  as  is  probable,  a  common 
origin,  this  may  be  best  explained  by  the  assumption  tliat  r.  is  in  many 
cases  rejected  from  the  termination,  leaving  only  the  voAvel,  though  it  is 
always  retained  when  any  addition  is  made  to  the  word :  thus,  the  con- 
struct state  r'hgn,  absolute  H^3n,  but  with  a  suffix  "^ro:";  -^^^^  (^o^^P' 
rpTX  Deut.  32:  36),  "^irsiip.  It  is  to  be  observed  here,  that  this  phenomenon 
does  not  establish  the  possibility  of  an  interchange  between  the  consonants 
n  and  n,  because  f\  in  this  case  represents  not  h  but  the  vowel  a. 

§  56.  A  few  other  changes  remain  to  be  mentioned 
which  are  due  to  special  causes. 

1.  ISTun  is  often  inserted  in  certain  forms  of  verbal 
suffixes  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between  two  vowels,  iin2"|;Ziy,';; 
Jer.  5:  22,  or  §  53.  3.  a  ^irnr  Isa.  33:  21  for  ^Ti^ZT, 
siM±-;hs;  Ex.  15:  2  for  ^i^•;ph^5!..  Comp.  Gr.  dvo^iog  and 
the  Enghsh  indefinite  article  an. 

2.  Vav  at  the  beginning  of  words  is  changed  to  ^ 
e.  g.  nr  for  n?5,  -ib;;  for  ^bl,  btip^  for  bb])\  The  only  ex- 
ceptions are  the  four  words  11,  ^Tl  Prov.  21:  8,  "bl  Gen. 
11:  30,  "ibl  2  Sam.  6:  23  (K'ri),  and  the  prefixes  Vav 
Conjunctive  and  Vav  Conversive. 

3.  Vav,  though  capable  of  being  reduphcated,  e.  g 
lyiS  is  in  most  instances  reheved  from  this  necessity  ]3y 
the  substitution  of  ^  or  by  doubling  the  following  letter 
in  its  stead,  e.  g.  D^.i:S  or  D'^ipK  for  □•"ipi;?,. 


82  OETHOaRAPHY.  §  57 

a.  In  one  instance  after  such  a  change  of  1  to  %  a  following  ^  sufferu 
the  contrary  change  to  1  to  prevent  the  triple  recurrence  of  the  same 
letter,  T]l-l!ix  Isa.  16:  9  for  T^:^^. 

4.  Yodh  before  the  plural  termination  D**.  is  in  a  few 
cases  changed  to  55  to  prevent  the  conjunction  of  hke 
sounds,  D^U^^bn  Hos.  11:  7  for  D^^bn  Josh.  10:  26;  D^^inrs 
Hos.  11:  8  for  D^n:?  Gen.  10:  19;  D-^ij!";^^  from  ^n^^;  D"t?2i2 
(also  nixiif)  for  n^\2-l;  ^Nibn  Jer.  38:  12  for  ^jbn  (or  as 
some  read,  "'.'^'ib^)  ver.  11. 

a.  In  like  manner  1  is  changed  to  X  before  T\i  in  the  word  ri1X3  for 
niia  from  n.'ij;  it  is  consequently  unnecessary  to  assume,  as  Gesenius  does, 
a  singular  nxD  Avhich  never  occurs. 

Change  or  Consonants  to  Vowels. 

§  57.  The  second  class  of  changes  is  the  conversion 
of  consonants  into  vowels,  or  the  substitution  of  the 
latter  for  the  former.    This  occurs, 

1.  Occasionally  in  reduplicated  syllables  or  letters, 
n5i3  for  n332;  niS'Jit:  for  nistist:;  bin  for  bnbn  Gen. 
11:  9;  triub'l  2  Chron.  35:  13  from  nnb:2  Prov.  19:  24. 

2.  Much  more  frequently  with  the  quiescents. 

(1)  A  prefixed )  is  softened  to  its  homogeneous  vowel 
tl  before  other  labials  or  vowelless  letters,  e.  g.  n^n^,  ^i"ii ; 
the  softening  of  an  initial  "^  to  z  only  occurs  in  ""ib'S; 
1  Chron.  2:  13  for  "iz?:  ver.  12,  m  2  Sam.  14:  19,  Mic. 
6:  10  for  ^\ 

(2)  Medial  or  final  quiescents  without  vowels  of  their 
own  often  lose  their  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel. 
This  is  invariably  the  case  with  1  and  "^  folloAving  their 
homogeneous  vowels,  e.  g.  Ti^H  for  I^Tl  §  59,  Tn^n^Sfor 
ni^n'^,  unless  they  are  doubled,  as  ''illj')^,  H^^,  and  oc- 
casionally even  then,  e.  g.  ""i^^^S  for  ^b'^'^.  Final  U<  always, 
and  medial  5<  frequently,  gives  up  its  consonant  sound 
after  any  vowel  whatever,  e.  g.  ^5i:■9,  il(±2,  t\i^^'U  for  W^r, 


§  57       CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS  TO  VOWELS.        83 

a.  Medial  X  regularly  loses  its  consonantal  power  in  the  future  Kal  of 
Pe  Aleph  verlis,  e.  g.  ^bx'^;  in  "itx  preceded  b}'  b,  thus  '^'ix]?;  in  S"H-x 
and  certain  forms  of  '"inx  preceded  by  the  prefixes  3  b  3  1,  thus,  Cl^•^■2^<5, 
iribsb  but  wbxb;  "^pxVi,  i"^inxb,  "^inxb  but  Tiixs,  "^inxb,  !lr:^^{b.  The  follow- 
ing examples  are  of  a  more  individual  character,  e.  g.  n'X3  for  nix?,  HiyX] 
1  Kin.  11:  39  for  nb-xi,  tllbsosn  Num.  11:  4,  cfrixa  Jer.  40:  1,  n-rxi;:s-j 
Isa.  14:  23.  In  a  few  cases  this  has  led  to  a  change  of  orthography,  the  X 
which  is  no  longer  heard  being  dropped,  or  another  vowel  letter  substituted 
for  it,  e.  g.  ibzi-i  Ezek.  42:  5,  and  b-irix  Hos.  11:  4  from  b^N,  y'::^^  Job  8:  8 
for  •iirX"!,  ^ril  Deut.  32 :  32  for  dx"i,  and  the  examples  cited  §  53.  2,  a. 

h.  The  consonant  n  never  loses  its  sound  in  that  of  a  preceding  vowel 
like  the  rest  of  the  quiescents.  The  letter  n  is  often  used  to  denote  a  vowel, 
but  if  in  any  word  it  properly  expresses  a  coiisonaiit  this  is  never  converted 
into  a  vowel,  or  vice  versa.  The  exceptions  are  apparent  not  real,  as  in  the 
frequent  abbreviation  of  the  ending  flfi^  in  proper  names  to  iTJ,  thus  ^f^^pTn, 
n^prm.  The  change  here  does  not  consist  in  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  1 
and  the  softening  of  the  consonant  n,  but  the  syllable  ^n  is  dropped,  where- 
upon final  Kamets  is  written  by  its  appropriate  vowel  letter,  §  11.  1,  fl,  just 
as  in"2ia  after  the  rejection  of  >l!TJ  becomes  "D^'i.  So  in  those  rare  cases  in 
which  >l  is  substituted  for  the  suffix  Pt,  e.  g.  Ji'-.yb  Lev.  13:  4  for  ~n>J. 
The  proper  name  bxrija  Num.  34:  28  is  derived  not  from  triB  but  nns,  a 
root  of  kindred  meaning,  of  whose  existence,  though  othei'wise  unattested, 
this  word  is  itself  a  sufficient  voucher. 

(3)  Medial  U<  often  gives  its  vowel  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  letter  and  rests  in  its  sound;  ^  occasionally 
does  the  same  witli  a  homogeneous  vowel,  when  preceded 
bj  a  vowelless  prefix. 

a.  Thus,  K:  rr-rx'i  for  D'^iiix"!,  nxart  for  rx-jri;  rfjxiy  Ezek.  25:  6  from 
•C^t:  ver.  1.  ;  NVi.  fs.  139:  20  for  ilX'w":,  so  XVJs'^  Jer.  10:  5;  ■'i;:^X"i  from 
•,bxn;  nxVs  Meh.  6:  8  for  CX'tia;  Xin  Isa.  51  :  20,  ixn  Deut.  14:  5;  S'^xip'ri 
1  Sam.  14:  33  for  D^X'jH;  "'''2X3  Isa.  10:  13  for  "i"ii?X3;  "liilr'XI  Zech.  11:  5 
for  ^'i;"xv,  this  even  occurs  after  mixed  syllables,  e.  g.  i^iixb'a  for  fiixb^; 
"Xr  for  '(■"'X:^;  rx^pb  for  rx'npb,  particularly  in  proper  nouns  bxi."':r";  for 
bxrpa-:,  bxy-;-"!  for  bx"'nT\  So,'"^:  "linr'^S  Eccles.  2:  13  for  Ti'nn^S;  r3b"'1  Jer. 
25:  36  for  rbb';n;  rh'^'h  Prov.  30:  17  for  rir!;?-b.  There  is  no  instance  of 
this  with  1,  on  the  contrary,  ris"!?  Cant.  5:  2,  12. 

(4)  At  the  end  of  words  1  and  *',  when  without  a 
vowel  of  their  own  and  preceded  by  a  vowelless  letter, 
invariably  quiesce  in  their  homogeneous  vowels,  1  in  an 
unaccented  u,  *  in  2,  which  draws  the  accent  upon  itself 
and  frequently  causes  the  dissolution  of  a  previous  syl- 
lable and  the  rejection  of  its  vowel,  ^ni  for  'inia,  ^nriTi" 

for  innir^;  ^fr  for  ^n\  ^^e  for  ""^b,  ^is^  for  ^"a^ 

6* 


84  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  58 

(5)  When  preceded  or  accompanied  by  heterogeneous 
vowels,  1  and  "'  are  sometimes  dropped,  or  if  the  vowel 
be  a,  they  not  unfrequently  combine  with  it,  forming  the 
diphthongal  o  and  e,  §  62.  1,  e.  g.  pk^H  for  pi^'lH,  Jlba 

for  ''"bs,  nbs  for  -"%  Dj^  for  Dip,  Cl^pn  for  Dipn?  J^'r?  for 

w:a;  n-iiiin  for  n-izjin,  iiiiis  for  12:115,  ni)^  construct  state 
of  t\)i2,  n^n  const,  of  r\%  \^^^t\  for  b^^n,  nb::  for  ^b:^ 

«.  Vav  rarely  remains  Avith  a  heterogeneous  vowel  unless  accompanied 
by  weak  letters,  by  contrast  with  which  it  becomes  comparatively  strong, 
«•  g«  f^U'^i  ■'!!?)  n!'^ 


Vowel  Changes. 

§  58.  1.  The  third  class  of  changes  embraces  those 
which  take  place  in  the  vowels.  The  primary  office  of 
the  vowels  is  to  aid  in  pronomicing  the  consonants,  to 
which  consequently  they  are  quite  subordinate,  merely 
occupying,  so  to  speak,  the  interstices  between  them. 
Their  number  and  variety  being  greater,  however,  than 
is  demanded  for  this  single  purpose,  they  have  besides 
to  a  certain  extent  an  independent  value  and  meanmg  of 
their  own  in  the  constitution  of  words.  (1)  Changes  of 
vowels,  while  they  cannot  like  a  difference  of  consonants 
create  distinct  verbal  roots,  are  yet  fruitful  of  those 
minor  modifications  of  which  etymology  takes  cognizance, 
such  as  the  formation  of  derivatives  and  grammatical  in- 
flexions, e.  g.  bis  to  he  great,  bji  greatness,  bil3  great;  bbp 
he  killed,  bibp  to  kill,  blip  kill  thou,  bbp  killing,  b^bp 
killed;  C^O  a  horse,  rib'D  a  mare.  (2)  They  may  indicate 
differences  in  the  forms  of  words  which  have  arisen  in 
the  lapse  of  time;  ^7:  in  the  Pentateuch  means  indifferently 
girl  or  hoy,  in  later  books  girl  is  Mnyp.;  5<^n  in  the  Penta- 
teuch he  or  she,  in  other  books  she  is  always  J^'^Jl;  the 
form  of  the  demonstrative  riTbn  is  found  only  in  Genesis, 
Tbn  in  writers  after  the  time  of  Moses,  ^Tbn  in  PJzekiel; 


g  58  VOWEL  CHANGES.  85 

the  plural  of  the  demonstrative  in  the  Pentateuch  bi^  or 
rtj<,  elsewhere,  with  a  single  exception,  rhk  The  im- 
perfect notation  of  the  vowels  in  the  original  mode  of 
writing  by  letters  alone  has,  however,  left  us  without 
the  means  of  ascertaining  to  what  extent  such  changes 
may  have  taken  place.  (3)  They  may  indicate^  diversity 
of  dialect,  e.  g.  bbjD  to  kill,  Aram.  bt:p,  Syr.  ^4^,   Arab. 

jJci,  Ethiop.  *tA:. 

2.   The  vowel  changes  with  which  orthography  is 
concerned,  on  the  other  hand,  are  purely  euphonic,  being 
in  themselves  void  of  significance,  and  springing  solely 
from  the  natural  preference  for  what  is  easier  of  utter- 
ance or  more  agreeable  to  the  ear.    Orthographically 
considered,  vowels  are  either  mutable  or  immutable,  the 
latter  being  unaffected   by  those  circumstances  which 
occasion  changes  in  the  former.    A  vowel  may  be  im- 
mutable by  nature,  or  made  so  by  position.    A  short 
vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  before  the  accent  is  ordinarily 
immutable  by  position,  being  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
common  causes  of  mutation,  e.  g.  "St;,  MnE'JJ-^.    Long 
vowels  are  mimutable  by  nature  in  certain  words  or 
classes  of  words;  but  they  are  only  distinguishable  as 
such  by  a  knowledge  of  the  etymological  forms  which 
require  them.  It  may,  however,  be  observed,  as  a  general 
though  not  an  invariable  rule,  that  the  vowels  of  such 
words  and  forms  as  are  prevaihngly  witten  vdth  the 
vowel  letters  are  less  hable  to  mutation  than  those  which 
are  prevaihngly  written  without  them.    Mutable  vowels 
are  Uable  to  changes  both  of  quantity,  from  long  to  short, 
and  the  reverse,  and  of  quality  from  pure  to  mixed  (u  to 
0,  i  to  e,  a  to  e)  and  the  reverse,  these  changes  being 
confined,  except  in  rare  mstances,  to  the  cognate  forms; 
thus,  i  never  passes  into  u  or  o,  nor  these  mto  a.    Only 
as  e  stands  in  relation  to  both  i  and  a,  it  serves  to  mediate 


86  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  59,  60 

the  interval  between  them,  and  thus  accounts  for  the 
occasional  changes  of  i  to  a  or  the  reverse,  e.  g.  b'tipH, 

nbbpri;  ^^  fo^*  ^54  ^ri^;  d^,  Db;^"!  comp.  t,  ddt. 

a.  The  exceptional  change  from  w  or  o  to  e  occurs  only  in  the  pro- 
nouns, e.  p«  trnV:j~,  before  suffixes  !in'~:;:~;  and  in  the  particle  rx,  before 
suffixes  ris.  There  are  also  a  few  examples  of  the  change  of  short 
vowels  in  mixed  syllables  before  the  accent,  e.  g.  nii3"ip,  construct  na3"iT3, 
plural  n'ih3"i?. 

§  59.  The  mutations  of  vowels  are  due  to  one  or 
other  of  the  following  causes,  viz.:  1.  Syllabic  changes. 
2.  The  influence  of  consonants.  3.  The  influence  of  vowels. 
4.  The  accent.  5.  The  shortening  or  lengthening  of  words. 
As  the  vowel  of  unaccented  mixed  syllables  is  always 
short,  and  that  of  simple  syllables  long,  §  18.  2,  it  is 
evident  that  a  change  in  the  character  of  a  syllable  will 
involve  a  corresponding  change  in  its  vowel,  unless  the 
accent  interfere  to  prevent.  Accordingly,  when  for  any 
cause  a  mixed  syllable  becomes  simple,  its  short  vowel 
will  be  converted  into  a  long  one;  and  when  a  simple 
syllable  becomes  mixed,  the  reverse  change  will  take 
place,  e.  g.  ^t],  Dnin;  n!a]b,  7\'dp_.  In  the  case  of  the  vowels 
i  and  u  there  is  frequently  an  additional  change  of  quahty, 
viz.,  of  2  to  e  and  u  to  o,  e.  g.  D^j^H  for  D^ipri;  "jiiS  for  "jilD 
in  place  of  "j^S  §  56.  3. 

a.  Daghesb-forte  is  thus  resolved  by  the  prolongation  of  the  previous 

vowel  in  ir'.r;?,  cik'^p;  r^'is,  ir^Bis;  "'t^n,  '^ii^'ari;  d^i"i'io,  d-ijiniD;  ipn, 
■ipiin;  tli-r;r!li  Eccles.  9:  12  for  C-'i'is^'tl  §  53.  2.  a;  1^r?S~r'  ^or  1n|53nri;  nn-'3 
Lam.  1:8,  if  this  is  for  mtj3  see  ver.  17;  and  if  the  conjecture  of  Gesenius 
(Thesaurus,  p.  483)  be  correct  as  to  the  true  reading  in  1  Chron.  23:  6, 
24:  3  cg;ni  for  C]t^^^l^ 

§  60.  Contiguous  consonants  may  give  rise  to  vowel 
changes  by  their  individual  pecuharities,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  gutturals,  or  by  their  concurrence.  The  pecuh- 
arities of  the  gutturals  are  fourfold,  viz.: 

1.  A  preference  for  the  vowel  Pattahh  of  the  same 
organ,  into  which,  consequently,  a  preceding  or  acoom- 


§  60  VOWEL  CHANGES.  87 

panying  vowel  is  frequently  converted,  e.  g.  nbir  for 

ribir;  D?S  for  DJS;  P:3^l  for  M'irr;  y^aic  for  yi3^;  ?]S]ia 
from  iiiir. 

a.  The  instances  in  which  this  permutation  occurs  cannot  easily  be 
embraced  under  any  general  rules.  In  some  cases  it  was  optional;  in  othei-s, 
usage  decides  for  it  or  against  it  without,  however,  being  absolutely  uni- 
form. The  following  statements  embrace  what  is  of  most  importance. 
(1)  The  stability  of  the  vowel  often  depends  upon  the  weight  attached  to 
it  in  the  etymological  form ;  thus,  3-'^'^  in  the  imperative  but  not  in  the  in- 
finitive for  "tr ;  "r-i"";  for  sh^"],.  but  ?^a  not  sh'd  for  yriu.  (2)  The  vowel 
preceding  the  guttural  is  more  liable  to  change  than  that  which  succeeds 
it,  e.  g.  "h-:ii  always,  but  bris";  and  bysn;  wni  but  onni;  ^p"l  but  ^'iriS. 
(3)  An  accented  vowel  is  sometimes  retained  where  one  unaccented  would 
suffer  change,  e.  g.  13n^  but  "ri'';  "i""..;  tnb.  (4)  0  and  u  are  less  subject 
to  alteration  than  i  and  e,  e.  g.  b"Q  for  b~'D;  a  which  is  alreai^y  cognate 
with  the  gutturals  is  mostly  retained,  though  it  occasionally  becomes  a 
before  H,  e.  g.  B'^nX  from  nx,  "•ri^S'O  Job  31:24  (in  most  copies)  from  ni:^i:, 
t^TS]  from  Mna";.  (5)  !><  in  many  cases  prefers  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  and 
0,  thus  biipx,  "rK-j-2:,  ;,x^';r,  -ox;;  but  WnpN^;  xh;,  bix\  (6)  ^  partakes 
of  this  preference  for  a  to  a  limited  extent,  e.  g.  "iD'l  for  "iD^i  or  "iD']; 
iXr^)  from  nki";. 

2.  The  reception  of  Pattalih  furtive,  §  17,  at  the  end 
of  a  word  after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  (i.  e.  any 
other  than  a),  or  before  a  vowelless  final  consonant,  e.  g. 

a.  This  is  necessai'y  when  the  vowel  preceding  a  final  guttural  cannot 
be  converted  into  Pattahli.  Sometimes  the  form  with  Pattalih  and  that  with 
Pattahh  furtive  occur  interchangeably,  e.  g.  tjidb  and  ri|tjb,  or  with  a 
slight  distinction,  as  r^ioN,  in  pause  :riidX;  V.z'/O,  construct  nsTTa.  In  a 
few  instances  a  guttural  preceding  a  final  vowelless  letter  takes  simple 
Sh'va  instead  of  Pattahh  furtive,  e.  g.  rir]^3  1  Kin.  14:  3,  and  in  most 
editions  Pm^'IJ  Jer.  13:  25.  As  final  X  is  alwaj's  either  quiescent  or  otiant, 
it  never  receives  Pattahh  furtive.  The  letter  "1  never  takes  it  unless  it  be 
in  a  single  instance,  and  that  in  a  penultimate  syllable  Tj^j"^  Ps.  7:  6,  which 
is  probably  to  be  read  yi^rdoph;  though  it  might  be  pronounced  yiraddoph, 
which  some  conceive  to  be  an  anomalous  form  for  *p^^,,  after  the  analogy 
of  'p^'^r^  <^en.  21:  6,  the  compound  Sh'va  being  lengthened  into  a  vowel 
followed  hy  euphonic  Daghesh,  as  in  the  related  words  iT^^zn  Isa.  1:  6, 
and  ■"''^211  Isa.  53:  5,  while  others  adopt  the  explanation  of  the  old  Jewish 
Grammarians,  that  it  is  a  peculiar  combination  of  the  Kal  ^'^T'.  *Qd  the 
Piel  7(rn\ 

3.  A  preference  for  compound  rather  than  simple 
Sh'va,  §  16.  3,  whether  silent  or  vocal,  inasmuch  as  the 


88  OETHOGKAPHY.  §  60 

gutturals  are  more  readily  made  audible  at  tlie  beginning 
than  at  the  close  of  a  syllable,  and  the  hiatus  accompany- 
ing them  assumes  more  of  the  complexion  of  a  voweJ 
than  is  usual  with  stronger  consonants. 

a.  The  gutturals  occasionally  retain  simple  Sh'va  when  silent.  This 
is  regularly  done  by  a  final  radical  fi,  n  or  2>,  followed  by  a  servile  letter, 
e.  g.  PHe^,  ^3S"i^,  Cn"'!';,  Dm'pp^.  innpuja ,  with  few  exceptions  as  ~(^i>^'^ 
Hos.  8:  2,  ^i^liy^?  Gen.  26:  29,  c^lbijrin  2  Sam.  21  :  6.  Other  cases  have 
more  of  a  casual  or  sporadic  character,  and  occur  chiefly  with  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  n,  iil'n'^,  T\k^h  i^'^";:,  Vinin,  ^icn^'r'ri,  nihrn^  but  nihdn-a, 
t'hn^  but  'lii'Sn^,  n3ri3  a  x>ossessio7i,  but  t\hn  from  hn  a  brook;  more 
rarely  with  Nand  l^'t:^3.^3  Lev.  4:  13,  vSrs"?  Tkin.  15:  16,  d^S"?  Isa.  11:  15, 
rr^ili:  Deut.  25:  7  but  in  pause  '^"^"'^  Isa.  28:  6,  i^^xa  Ex.  15:  6;  "i  has  for 
the  most  part  simple  Sh'va  nih"!,  Cw"^5'',  though  in  a  few  instances  it  has 
compound  'ib'^3,  iri5t}5"]> 

6.  (l)  Among  the  compound  Sh'vas  the  preference,  unless  there  is  some 
reason  for  choosing  another,  is  ordinarily  given  to  Hhateph  Pattahh,  as 
the  simplest  and  most  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of  the  guttui-als,  and 
to  this  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  when  unessential  to  the  form,  is  commonly 
made  to  correspond,  e.  g.  ^h",  Iris;'^  for  "it2-"\  Sometimes,  particularly  with 
N  (see  1.  a.  5.)  miateph  Seghol  is' taken  n^^^X,  f^J^^i*,  ^^l^,,  J'i^.  "''2N, 
fi-lX,  dn'^in,  l^'rJ,  nyj,  T\^'\2  Joel  2:  5,  Tj^inx^  Jer.  13:  21,  which  not  in- 
frequently becomes  Hhateph  Pattahh  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word 
ir^'i^N,  -1?ox  Prov.  25:  7,  IPi^X,  "liilX,  ^iniirns'i  Judg.  10:  2,  or  the  carrying 
forward  of  its  accent  "Tiinxin,  ■^n-inxri'i,  ''M'^nn,  "ino-innv 

(2)  If,  however,  *  or  o,  characteristic  of  the  form,  precede,  this  commonly 
determines  the  Sh'va  to  be  selected,  e.  g.  T'ii:;!!  for  T'iiyri,  'i^'-!;;  for  Tb"';, 
ilfi3.;Q  for  "^BrQ ;  though  sometimes  Hhateph  Pattahh  is  retained  and  the 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  resolved  into  a  simple  one  by  prolonging  the 
vowels,  e.  g.  0"^?"^!  Josh.  7:  7,  «i^rh,  "iSrs  Isa.  1:  31.  Hhirik  may,  how- 
ever, remain  short,  e.  g.  T\?^'^,  "'rruj,  si'inilj  Job  6:  22,  particularly  if  a 
Daghesh-forte  has  been  omitted  from  the  guttural,  e.  g.  "^EXjj  Jer.  3:  8, 
though  even  in  this  case  the  assimilation  sometimes  takes  place,  e.  g. 
^hr}2  Gen.  30:  39  for  si^Fi';,  ^nnx  Judg.  5:  28  for  ^inx.  If  a  vowel  has  been 
rejected  from  the  form,  the  corresponding  Hhateph  is  generally  preferred, 
e.  g.  dinsy  from  ^bH?,  d^B^in,   '^in^rin  Ezek.  16:  33,  "iNl  Gen.  16:  13;   ih^'in 

O  •  tt:  V     '  •  T  t:  J  •  t:    ;    ■  '  •  t:  ^  '  •   '-t 

1  Kin.  13:  20  from  S'^^^tl;  '1-''^"^  Gen.  37:  22  from  ^"'iTli.  There  are  oc- 
casional instances  of  the  same  word  being  variously  written  in  this  respect, 
e.  g.  •'Tnx  Euth  3:  15,  ^rnx  Cant.  2:  15;  ^iri-ixn";  and  'ifrnxn';  Isa.  44:  13; 
!nri-irn  Job  16  :  16  (K'ri  in  some  copies),  ^t^JSlpn  Lam.  1 :  20,  inxh  Isa.  52: 14, 
l^sn  1  Sam.  28:  14. 

C.  Before  another  guttural  the  compound  Sh'va  is  frequently  replaced 
by  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  e.  g.  Tj^xn  for  T^bxin,  "in'-iiSli  for  ''nT''i'n, 
Cs'^PNii  for  dDinxii;  and  occasionally  under  X  by  a  long  vowel  before 
other  letters  as  well  as  gutturals,  or  by  a  short  vowel  with  Daghesh,  e.  g. 


§  61  VOWEL  CHANGES.  89 

O'^^nx  for  ^"'i^^.,  "'"^rrTiS,  Wrx  for  Dlrx,  Titx  for  -lirx,  ifcx  for  "IDX.  This 
disposition  to  render  the  gutturals  more  audible  by  the  aid  of  a  vowel  is 
further  shown  by  their  attracting  to  themselves  the  vowel  of  another  letter, 
particularly  in  triliteral  monosyllables,  e.  g.  V^l  for  "~}^  (V^'i),  ""I'n.  vb'i, 
ci-'2,  rh-;^  2  Kin.  12:  9,  '>:Ji<2  for  CX3,  1X3,  also  'k"]]^  Ex.  2:  20  for /,Xn'p 
Ruth  1:  20,  ^iznXPi  Prov.  1:  22  for  ^inxp,  sin'irxn  Job  20:  26  8ee§111.2.e', 
r:~^;csi  Zech.  7:  14  for  B"i^"GN^,  and  by  their  sometimes  causing  an  ante- 
cedent or  accompanying  vowel  to  be  retained  where  analogy  would  require 
its  rejection,  e.  g.  ''X^J'i^  for  "^ksi^  from  xii',^,  "'X'jn,  ''V'J'Q,  sinxs":^  Deut. 
32:  10;  PO'^'?,  r'irn. 

4.  An  incapacy  for  being  doubled,  whence  they  never 
receive  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  previous  syllable  thus 
becoming  a  simple  one,  its  vowel  is  generally  lengthened, 
§  59,  a  to  a,  ^  to  e,  u  to  b,  e.  g.  '■^'l  for  ")k7J,  '^1  for  '^i2^ 
Tliz":  for  'q^^':,  ^nx,  jim 

a.  Sometimes  an  intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3,  is  formed,  and  the  vowel 
remains  short,  (l)  This  is  commonly  the  case  before  n,  frequently  be- 
fore n,  less  often  before  5J,  rarely  before  X,  never  before  *i,  e.  g.  tro, 
"rtw,  "ino,  Syri,  I'X?.  (2)  It  is  more  likely  to  occur  in  the  body  of  a  word 
than  after  a  prefix,  e.  g.  T'^H";  Ps.  119:  43  from  "^rr,  hut  p^n-  Job  38:  24 
from  p'iri.  (3)  When  the  guttural  comes  to  stand  at  the  end  of  the  word 
the  short  vowel  is  often  resumed,  e.  g.  "ipPi  Prov.  22:  24  from  nyirri,  ivri 
Ps.  141:  8  from  iT^rri  but  "lyrPi  Deut,  2:  9.  There  are  a  very  few  in- 
stances in  which  Daghesh-forte  is  found  in  "i,  e.  g.  Tyf^  ^iiS  Ezek.  16:  4, 
rr-2  Prov.  14:  10,  "'b"'^?"^  Prov.  15:  1  (in  some  editions),  ''irx'^'j  Cant.  5:  2, 
fee  also  §  24.  6, 

§  61.  The  concurrence  of  consonants  gives  rise  to  the 
following  vowel  changes,  yvl.\ 

1.  When  two  vowelless  letters  come  together  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable  in  contravention  of  the  law  in 
§  18,  the  impossible  combination  is  relieved  by  giving  to 
the  first  of  them  a  short  vowel.  This,  if  there  be  no  reason 
for  preferring  another,  will  be  the  briefest  of  the  vowels, 
Hhirik,  e.  g.  --Zl  for  ^"il'l,  ^n"Z  for  nn-S,  ^ipTH  for  ^pjri. 
If  a  vowel  has  been  omitted  from  the  word,  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel  is  frequently  employed,  e.  g.  ^5b^  for 
^irz  from  ?]b52  (l]b-^);  -bb:c  from  ^'1;  ^^nn  from  bnn,  T^T^^ 
for  tirn"  from  ■jn\  Or  if  one  of  the  consonants  be  a  gut- 
tural, the  vowel  mostly  conforms  to  the  compound  Sh'va, 


90  OETHOGRAPHY.  §  61 

which  it  has  or  might  have,  e.  g.  ^'["2^^  for  ^^^^J,  ^i>) l'^.  for 
^p7n-,  ^bnb  for  ^br^b,  -'Snb  for  -^knb,  nb"5  for  nb^s.  " 

a.  Vav  before  a  guttural  follows  the  rule  just  given;  before  "^j  and 
sometimes  before  tn  or  n  followed  by  "i,  it  takes  Hhirik;  before  other 
voAvelless  letters  it  gives  up  its  consonant  sound  and  quiesces  in  its  homo- 
geneous vowel  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (1),  thus  "i^^ri,  ^hil,  rriT  and  n^ni,  ni?!), 

nnn. 

6.  In  triliteral  monosyllables  or  final  syllables  with  the  vowel  Pattahh, 
the  first  letter  sometimes  receives  an  accented  Seghol,  to  which  the  fol- 
lowing Pattahh  is  then  assimilated,  e.  g.  tpb  for  Cirs  construct  of  ^irS, 
rDlio'O  for  r?^^P,  the  Seghols  being  liable  to  be  changed  to  Pattahhs  by 
the  presence  of  a  guttural  rns'^'a  for  nns'^p. 

c.  In  cbx'jib  Gen.  32:  20  for  n=J<^"9  the  vowelless  letters  belong  to 
different  syllables,  and  the  introduction  of  the  new  vowel  makes  it  neces- 
sary to  lengthen  the  one  before  it. 

2.  Although  two  vowelless  letters  are  admissible  at 
the  end  of  a  word,  §  18,  the  harshness  of  the  combination 
is  commonly  reheved  by  the  insertion  of  Seghol,  e.  g.  zy^ 
for  ^"i";,  rijb  for  rijb.  If  either  letter  is  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  mostly  used  instead,  e.  g.  nilil,  by's,  ""^  If  either  letter 
is  '',  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hhirik  is  used;  if  the  second 
letter  is  1,  it  will  rest  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4.),  e.  g.  T\% 
^b3,  iinn,  but  n^?j. 

a.  The  only  instances  in  which  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  the 
end  of  a  word  are  the  pron.  PX,  the  2  fem.  sing.  pret.  of  verbs  ri"~v;^,  certain 
jussive  and  Vav  Conversive  forms  of  n"b  verbs  §§  174.  4,  177.  3,  Tipin 
§  153.  2,  the  nouns  'n"]3,  u^p  and  forms  Avith  otiant  Aleph. 

b.  When  the  penultimate  letter  is  n  or  Ji,  it  in  a  few  instances  takes 
Seghol,  as  IstjN,  'rti,  CrB,  Cti"}.  When  the  final  letter  is  N,  it  eitljer  remains 
otiant,  §  16.  1,  or  requires  Seghol,  ii.''C,  X'-l,  X^';',  S4';iB;  a  penultimate  X  either 
quiesces  in  the  antecedent  vowel  or  attracts  it  to  itself,  §  60.  3.  c,  rif.'^',  rixiU 
or  nx'w,  dX"!.  The  alternate  mode  of  facilitating  the  pronunciation  of  gut- 
turals  before  a  vowelless  letter  at  the  end  of  a  word  by  means  of  Pattahh 
furtive,  has  been  explained  §  60.  2. 

3.  When  the  same  letter  is  repeated  with  or  without 
a  mutable  vowel  intervening,  there  is  often  a  contraction 
into  one  doubled  letter,  and  the  vowel  is  rejected  or 
thrown  back  upon  the  preceding  consonant,  e.  g.  ^inD'  for 

^-135';,  ^b^  for  nine"  (Daghesh-forte  disappearing  at  the 
end'of  the  woid), -b  for^'-ilb,  ^:  Job  31:  15  for  ^ilT^' 


§  61  VOWEL  CHANGES.  91 

(see  4.  below);  if  anotlier  consonant  immediately  follow 
the  contracted  letters,  a  diphthongal  vowel  "'..  or  i  may 
be  inserted  to  render  the  reduplication  more  audible 
and  prevent  the  concurrence  of  three  consonants,  ""t^iiC; 

4.  In  accented  syllables  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  and 
0  are  employed  before  two  consonants  or  a  doubled  con- 
sonant in  preference  to  the  pure  i  and  u,  e.  g.  -"iri, 

npiirr;  D^p,  TT/ip;  b"ppn,  n:bbpn,  so  ^^iri,  "c'^zp,  jjnj'i. 

This  is  still  the  case  when  at  the  end  of  a  word  an 
auxiliary  Seghol  or  Pattahh  has  been  inserted  between 
the  letters  (according  to  2.),  e.  g.  "Sil,  ^20,  b^B,  t\J^y^. 
from  p'i^'r.?  or  the  reduplication  of  the  doubled  letter  is 
no  longer  heard  and  the  Daghesh-forte  does  not  appear, 
§  25,  e.  g.  2ttl  comp.  b^ppri. 

a.  The  vowel  e  is  in  like  circumstances  often  reduced  to  one  of  its  con- 
stituents a,  e.  g.  t^js'in  from  T\?^,  "^Jl?!?,  !^51?jn,  ^3'?D)  ^^nd  occasionally 
to  its  other  constituent  i,  e.  g.  tP'r^irrri  from  ^ni^rrj,  Cina*)'^  from  "Cn^. 
In  "^FiV^P  from  biip  and  "'rirapn  from  V^bpn,  a  is  tiie  original  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable,  of  which  e  and  i  are  modifications.  The  only  example 
of  Shurek  in  a  Segholate  form  is  n^Trri  Lev.  5:  21. 

5.  In  unaccented  syllables  t  and  il  are  preferred  to  e 
and  0  before  doubled  letters,  TiN,  "'rS;  TiP,  'rir;  riwM 
from  2trr,  nc^l,  ^rsC";  'Xu'2  comp.  bbp"3,  "pn,  'pn,  though 
such  forms  as  ^;-",  ?I-Ty,  ri^3,  rn!a  Hkewise  occur;  so  bk'-T^ 

•••t'|:t'         — t'  tt  '  N 

but  "bs^T^. 

6.  A  vowel  is  occasionally  given  to  a  final  consonant 
to  soften  the  termination  of  the  word,  and  make  the 
transition  easier  to  the  initial  consonant  of  that  which 
follows;  thus,  b-b,  rib'b;  nnb|  for  nbs;  DH,  r,^h;  bi^,  r;:>S; 
^5?,  n^:5<;  Ti^r^,  ^bzn-,  r\±-^i2,' ^h%^^2;  n^n,  ih^n;  v*D3  Ex. 
15:  10;  ^i-j:c5"Ex.  15:  5*. 

a.  These  paragogic  vowels  have  established  themselves  in  the  current 
forms  of  certain  words,  as  n\-o,  nsh,  nrk,  "^SX,  "ri*,  ''k-  But,  with  these 
exceptions,  they  are  chiefly  found  in  poetry.  The  vowels  "'.  and  i  are 
mostly  attached  to  words  in  what  is  called  the  construct  state,  ti^  to  words 


92  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  62 

in  the  absolute;  and  all  of  them  to  the  feminine  ending  n.  Examples  of 
■i:  SSS  Num.  23:  18,  24:  3,  15,  "in-n  several  times,  iii"'-?  Ps.  114:  8.  Examples 
of  1.:  ■'P^riX  Hos.  10:  11,  ''^pN  Gen.  49:  11,  i33  ibid.,  "in^DS  Gen.  31:  39, 
'in'12^  Ps.  'llO:  4,  ^D&l  Ps.  114-  8,  ■^rr';'  Ps.  123:  l',  "'fi'ia:'?  Ps.'ilS:  5,  "^^ffa? 
ver.  6,  •^i""^  ver.  7,  '■'n"'^'in  ver.  8,  "'h'^iai^  ver.  9,  ''nxbri  Isa.  1:  21,  "^nnxi 
Ex.  15:  6,  lity  Zech.  11:  17,  ■•na-i  Lam.  l':  1,  ^nVa  ibid.,  lirilJ  Deut.  33:  16. 
It  is  also  attached  to  the  first  member  of  the  compound  in  many  proper 
names,  e.  g.  ^X^"i3|i,  p'ik~''2v>^,  to  certain  particles,  as  "^P'S,  "^n^^if,  "^i^a,  and 
perhaps  to  such  participial  forms  as  ''nni;-'  Jer.  22:  23.  Of  Ti/.  rirh-'i<  Ex. 
15:  16,  n^nxlsa.  8:  23,  Job  34:  13,  37:  12,  nonn  Judg.  14:  18,  i^'V"':;':  Ps. 
3:  3,  80:  3,  Jon.  2:  10,  Tih''^  almost  constantly,  T^T^]^  Ps.  116:  15,  tlhn  Num. 
34:  5,  Ps.  124:  4,  tirV::  Ps.  92:  16  (K'ri),  125:  3,  Ezek.  28:  15,  Hos.  10:  13, 
nr^i;  Job  5:  16,  nr'^'l?  Ps.  44:  27,  63:  8,  94:  17,  nPEy  Job  10:  22,  tini^ 
JoVh.  19:  43,  Judg.  14:  1,  and  regularly  in  the  third  person  feminine  of  the 
preterite  of  il"h  verbs.  In  modern  Persian  t  is  similarly  appended  to 
nouns  in  close  connection  with  a  following  word,  to  remove  the  obstruc- 
tion of  the  final  consonant  and  serve  as  a  uniting  link.  And  in  Hebrew 
they  seem  to  be  traces  of  forms  once  current  but  which  became  obso- 
lete §  201.  e. 

§  62.  The  changes  due  to  the  influence  of  vowels  may 
arise  from  their  concurrence  or  proximity. 

1.  Concurring  vowels  may  coalesce;  a  uniting  with  a 
forms  a,  uniting  with  i  or  u  it  forms  the  diphthongal  e 
or  0,  e.  2-.  niSTH  Neh.  3:  13  from  niS3"J:J^n  after  the  re- 

'  O  ;     IT  :     ~    IT 

jection  of  5<  by  §  53.  2.  &;  n^^n  after  the  softening  of "  to 
i  becomes  n^la;  ^nbt^p  by  the  rejection  of  n  becomes  i!it2p; 
in^  prefixed  to  proper  names  is  from  ^Ti^  for  IH^,  §  57. 2  (4), 
an  abbreviation  of  n^H'',  §  47. 

2.  One  of  them  may  be  hardened  into  its  correspond- 
ing semi- vowel;  /  ^.  with  ?  ^.  may  form  i  ^.,  or  the  first 
I  may  be  changed  to  «/,  which,  upon  the  reduplication 
of  the  ^  to  preserve  the  brevity  of  the  antecedent  vowel, 
§  24.  3,  becomes  ^^.,  e.  g.  "'ni^  with  D\  becomes  D^^l^  or 
0"^;"]:::;.  So,  ^.  before  n^  forms  H^.,  and  before  i  forms  i*., 
e.  g.  n^'^n^',  rii^"]^-:';  in  like  manner  ^  is  changed  before  i 
into  uv,  forming  i\,  which,  by  §  56.  3,  becomes  i'^^,  e.  g. 
Wbb?^,  by  the  substitution  of  ni  for  n,  ni^^b'J.  /  ^  fol- 
lowed by  u  il  forms  w,  ^n'nbt:p,  rt})^^;  ^ri'B,  rs;  rb-qt] 
for  ^^C/J"  Josh.  14:  8.  E  ^    before  i  ""   or  w  ^  is  resolved 


5<  63  VOWEL  CHANGES.  93 

into  ay,  which,  joined  with  the  appropriate  semi-vowels, 
becomes  \  and  1\,  the  virtual  reduplication  of  the  final 
consonant  in  the  one  case  preserving  the  short  vowel, 
which  is  lengthened  in  the  other;  thus  "D^C  with  \  be- 
comes '^C^D,  and  vdth  ^ri,  Vb^C.  The  same  resolution  of 
^.  occurs  before  final  ^,  formmg  r\]_,  and  by  §  61.  2  ?|":_, 
thus  "n^>D  with  1\  becomes  t^'^n'iyD. 

a.  Grammarians  have  disputed  whether  in  such  words  as  C'^'^";:;^, 
nrDb-g  the  point  in  i  is  Daghesh-forte  or  Mappik,  §  26,  and  accordins^ly 
whether  they  are  to  he  read  ibhriyyim,y>ialkhuyybtli,  ovibhriyun,malkhuyoth. 
If  the  explanation  given  above  be  correct,  it  is  Daghesh-forte  Conserva- 
tive. Comp.  ~^]:;,  t~p.  ^  ^  ^ 

b.  Such  forms  as  "^'^.-iD,  "i^"!?,  D^"i3  from  "^"iS  are  only  apparent  excep- 
tions to  the  above  rules.  '  The  word  is  properly  r^G,  and  to  this  the  addi- 
tions are  made,  the  auxiliary  Hhirik  being  dropped  with  the  cessation  of 
the  cause  from  which  it  originated,  §  57.  2.  (4).  In  n'X^::-!?  2  Chron.  17:  11 
from  lili"  and  D"i .  the  vowels  are  kept  separate  by  an  interposed  X.  ^ 

c.  In  words  of  n"b  formation,  such  as  ni'S,  ^B",  f^CS  from  ri'-i'J  and 
n  ,  i,  f  ,  it  might  appear  as  though  one  voAvel  were  rejected  before 
another.  But  the  correct  explanation  is  that  ^  is  the  true  final  radical,  and 
the  forms  above  given  are  for  n^p",  V-::v,  C^^.is"  (like  C'V-iP)  fi"«'"  ^^^li^l^ 
1  is  rejected  by  §  53.  3.  In  the  same  way  ^lir,  r,'r:;,  etc.,  from  Ji-V  are  for 
l^irs,  rpi^.  In  .such  alternate  forms  as  n^nb  from  nrfa,  the  radical  "^  is 
retained  by  preserving  the  antecedent  vowel,  which,  before  Daghesh-forte 
Conservative,  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  5. 

§  63.  The  following  euphonic  changes  are  attribut- 
able to  the  proximity  of  vowels,  viz. : 

1.  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  is  often  changed  to  Seghol 
if  another  a  follows,  and  the  same  change  sometunes 
occurs  after  a  guttural  if  another  a  precedes. 

The  particular  cases  are  the  following: 

a.  When  (.)  stands  before  a  guttural  with  (J  always  before  H,  e.  g. 
:r;n  for  ;nn,  nr-jrx:  Prov.  2i:  22,  nbnn,  "^n-cnin  (also  when  n  has  Hhateph 
Kamets,  eVg.  tr'Jnnri,  ^n^nnn  Judg'.  9:  9),  often  before  n  and  V,  particul- 
arly if  it  receives 'tiie  secondary  accent,  e.  g.  t^-^y^ri  for  n"}nn,  nrno  but 
p-n5,  !i^n-jri;  n'irn,  r:^'&J  no,  rarely  before  N  and  n,  nnn  Gen.  14  10,  risXJ 
Neh.  9:  18,  26  but  "pnillN:  Ezek.  35:  12. 

b.  When  (  )  before  a  guttural  is  followed  by  another  consonant  with 
(  )  or  (  )  h'r\rr,  sibnn;:  but  6nn:,  nzn  but  rxkriD,  X'ljr;;;,  once  before  the 
liquid  h,  e.'g^T^z^'kx.  33:  s'for  t^Wx,  and  once  before  3,  e.  g.  n::n3 
for  S:;rt. 


94  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §  64,  65 

c.  In  ini5'*pX1  1  Sam.  28:  15  and  the  combination  IJ^l  t^i"  a  similar 
change  takes  place  after  a  guttural  to  prevent  the  repetition  of  the  vowei 
d;  so  in  tnilin-i  Ps.  20:  4,  and  njkl  n.SX  after  the  liquid  5. 

2.  Pattalih  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  a  following 
Seghol,  or  to  a  preceding  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

a.  The  assimilation  to  („)  takes  place  regularly  in  what  are  called 
Segholate  forme,  in  which  an  auxiliary  Seghol  has  by  §  61.  2  been  intro- 
duced between  two  vowelless  letters,  "r^b?a  for  T\?v,  S'^D  for  ^"i^,  y^ii  for 
■j^^k,  but  n";a,  WB;  only  before  1,  which  can  combine  with  a  and  not 
with  e,  a  is  retained  and  lengthened  to  (^)  by  §  59,  "iN,  "IP.  Rarely  in 
other  cases  da"!^  for  ob'l^,  where  the  change  is  facilitated  by  the  pre- 
ceding \ 

b.  The  assimilation  to  (^)  occurs  in  a  few  cases  after  a  guttural  with 
n  prefixed,  e.  g.  obn  for  Dyn,  'nnn  for  nhn;  and  in  'j'nk  (from  .ynx)  uni- 
formly after  Kamets  yi^ll,  Y'M^>  'HH)- 

c.  The  assimilation  to  ( . )  occurs  in  the  Kal  future  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs 
where  the  alternate  forms  are  Sdi  and  yp^"]. 

§  64.  The  following  vowel  changes  are  due  to  the 
accent,  viz.: 

1.  If  a  long  vowel  in  a  mixed  syllable  be  deprived  of 

its  accent,  it  will  be  shortened,  §  18,  e.  g.  ^i^^'ll^ri,  ^52'i^r; 

n6^  2t^y,  nib^,  dtt^v,  yis^,  -3T>"\ 

t'  TT-  '  •■  t'  VT-'  —.1-'  T  -.'l- 

a.  If  a  vowel  preceding  Makkeph  is  incapable  of  being  shortened,  it 
will  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  agreeably  to  §  43. 

2.  The  accent  prefers  to  be  immediately  preceded  by 
a  simple  syllable  and  a  long  vowel.  Accordingly  an 
antecedent  vowelless  letter  often  receives  what  may  be 
called  a  pretonic  vowel.  This  is  commonly  the  simplest 
of  the  long  vowels  a,  e.  g.  bbj^,  l6^,  nnpb,  "j^^'^^i.'^,  occasion- 
ally e,  e.  g.  bp.';',  nib'JJ,  'yiib^,  "i^inxri,  rarely  6,  e.  g.  "(^nizip";. 
Such  a  vowel  is  sometimes  inserted,  even  though  a  pre- 
existing mixed  syllable  is  thereby  destroyed,  e.  g.  in  the 
plurals  of  Segholates  and  of  feminine  nouns  derived  from 
them,  D^bb7J  from  ^b"^,  t^^bb'2  from  nsb^a. 

'  't;  :I:-'  t:  t;- 

§  65.  The  special  emphasis,  with  wliich  the  last  word 
of  a  clause  is  dwelt  upon,  gives  rise  to  certain  vowel 
changes  in  connection  -^^dth  the  pause  accents,  §  36.  2.  a. 


§  66  VOWEL  CHANGES.  95 

TLese  are  (1)  lengthening  short  vowels,  viz.,  (_)  and  not 
infrequently  ( .)  which  has  arisen  from  (_)  to  (J,  e.  g. 

r;:x,  n-:s;  ranis,  nnrS;  r%  •p^^;  lai?,  nny,  and  brino-inff 

-  t'         at  t  '        T   :   -  t'      t  :  m  t  '      1    v  v'     J    v^t  '  "••  •  vat  '  o        O 

back  Kamets  Hhatuph  shortened  from  Hholem  to  its 
original  length  fipjl,  f^53^\  (2)  Restoring  vowels  which 
have  been  dropped  in  the  course  of  inflection,  e.  g.  ^^^5, 

inn  J;  Jinn-n,  ^na-n;  ™3?,  ^nb:;?.  (3)  Changing  simple  Sh'va 
in  triliteral  syllables  and  before  the  suf&x  ?j  to  Seghol, 

e.  g.  ?in-'n,  -n;n;  ^n-;,  ^n^;  nisir,  nrij.  (4)  Changmg  com- 
pound Sh'va  to  the  corresponding  long  vowel,  e.  g.  ^^t, 

•*l  '         •  -:    ^        :   v"        'A"'        •  T»'        'A 

a.  Paitahh  sometimes  remains  without  change,  1?  Ps.  132:  12,  tn"i3?. 
2  Sam.  2:  27,  wbs?  Jer.  7,  10,  "'PiDSa  Prov.  30:  9,  '^Plp;^^  Job  34:  5,  i'^P^rx 
Neh.  5:  14,  and  once  restored  in  a  simple  syllable  VJjtn  2  Sam.  3:  34. 
Seghol  more  frequently,  ~b^,  'p^'S,  B'^p_,  TQ"^  and  "'n'n.  Long  vowels  are 
mostly  unaltered;  only  Tsere  is  in  mixed  syllables  occasionally  changed 
to  Pattahh,  ttnn  Isa.  18:  5  for  Tnn,  so  ;3irn  Isa.  42:  22,  :"i£n  Gen.  17:  14, 
^5-;' -J  C^en.  21:  8,  T^^.'^l  Gen.  25:  34;  in  one  word  of  Segholate  formation  it 
is  converted  to  Seghol,  "l^"),  "'wji,  and  in  another  to  Kamets,  u^d,  li^ia. 
Where  the  same  word  has  alternate  forms,  one  is  sometimes  selected  as  the 
ordinary  and  the  other  as  the  pausal  form,  thus  yDfl^,  'TBH!]  j  ^-D"^!  ^^n;^ ; 
Cl'i-J%  Ci;^-J":;  ''7})'-^,  '''^^•5^  Gen.  43:  14;  '^'^\'^  Eccl.'l2:llj  t'a'^f  1  Sam. 
13:  21 ;  IS,  '.rj  Gen.  49:  3,  napn,  ninpri  Lev.  26:  34,  35;  IJCS'^,  I'Ji'S".  Some- 
times, instead  of  changing  the  Sh'va  before  Tj  to  Seghol,  its  vowel  is  shifted, 
thus  r,2,  "2;  Tib,  T\^l',  "nx,  and  in  Ex.  29:  35  H:rx.  The  position  of  the 
pause  accent,  so  far  as  it  differs  from  that  of  the  ordinary  accent,  has  been 
explained  §  35.  2. 

b.  Of  the  pause  accents,  or  those  which  mark  the  limits  of  clauses 
and  sections,  the  first  class,  viz.,  Silluk,  Athnahh  and  Olev'yoredh  almost 
always  give  rise  to  the  vowel  changes  which  have  been  described;  the 
second  and  third  classes,  S'gholta,  Zakeph  Katon,  Zakeph  Gadhol,  B'bhi* 
and  Shalsheleth,  e.  g.  'lVn23'i  Isa.  13:8,  do  so  frequentl}';  the  fourth 
class,  Pazer,  e.  g.  2  Kin.  3 :  25,  Prov.  30 :  4,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  e.  g. 
Ezek.  20:  21,  but  seldom.  Pausal  forms  are  occasionally  found  with  other 
Disjunctives,  thus,  Tiphhha  ^sbn  Deut.  13:  5,  Pashta  ^"iSi'H  ibid.,  Geresh 
S»"r  Ezek.  40:  4,  and  even  with  Conjunctives,  e.  g.  "^SX  Isa.  49:  18,  rts-^Jn 
Ezek.  17:  15,  ^m  2  Chron.  29:  31. 

§  66.  1.  The  shortening  and  lengthening  of  words 
has  an  efl'ect  upon  their  vowels.  The  shortening  may 
take  place 

(1)  At  the  end  of  a  word  by  the  rejection  of  a  vowel. 


96  OETHOGEAPHY.  §  66 

This  occurs  only  with  (..)  or  (.. )  in  certain  forms  of  n"b  verbs,  e.  g. 

^'P\  from  r!^:,ri,  is'll  for  n^iS'iS,  ir"]1  l  Sam.  21:  14  for  n^n';^,  'n-a}^  fornnO';!. 
In  the  last  two  examples  the  short  vowel  is  lengthened  upon  its  receiving 
the  accent,  comp.  §  64.  1.  If  the  rejected  vowel  was  preceded  by  two  con- 
sonants, these  will  now  stand  together  at  the  end  of  the  word,  and  be  liable 
to  the  changes  described  §  61.  2,  e.  g.  Cl"n  for  SiS'nri. 

(2)  In  the  body  of  a  word  by  shortening  a  long  vowel 
in  a  mixed  syllable,  which  must,  of  course,  be  the  one 
bearing  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  or  rejecting  a  long  vowel  in 
a  simple  syllable  before  the  accent  (the  pretonic  vowel, 

§  64.  2),  ^i^,  ^n^/,  r{%  p2',  izi^i^?;,  ir^_p2. 

a.  This  is  in  general  the  only  reduction  possible.  The  vowel  of  a 
mixed  syllable,  if  short  already,  is  capable  of  no  further  abbreviation, 
though  a  and  e  are  in  a  very  few  instances  attenuated  to  ?,  '|''S"iti  const. 
ra"!^,  nnS'O  const,  nnsr),  bxpm";  but  lirj^'Tn";;  and  it  cannot  be  rejected, 
or  there  would  be  a  concurrence  of  vowelless  consonants  which  the 
language  seeks  to  avoid  (Clpiti  Prov.30:  6  is  an  exception).  And  the  vowel 
of  a  simple  syllable,  if  short,  must  have  the  accent,  §  32.  1,  which  pre- 
serves it  from  rejection.  The  changes  above  recited  are  confined  to  the 
last  two,  or,  in  case  the  accent  is  upon  the  penult,  the  iast  three  syllables 
of  the  word;  for  the  antecedent  portions  of  polysyllables  are  already  ab- 
breviated to  the  utmost.  Contractions  due  to  the  peculiarities  of  certain 
letters,  as  the  gutturals  and  quiescent^,  which  have  been  before  ex- 
plained, are  not  here  taken  into  the  account,  e.  g.  ?ba,  ~^'^,  ril72,  ni^ ; 

b.  Where  the  last  vowel  cannot  be  shortened,  it  sometimes  experiences 
a  change  of  a  quality  from  pure  to  diphthongal,  such  as  is  produced  by  the 
pressure  of  two  following  consonants,  §  61.  4,  e.  g.  ^"'^a;;!,  ^ti3:1;  ^'^''in, 
sriri;  p.i-r;:,  rrdy,  ii^'::^,  n6;;  d^wo,  "^wo. 

2.  If  a  word  be  lengthened  by  additions  at  the  end, 
its  vowels  ara  hable  to  changes  in  consequence. 

(1)  Such  additions  create  a  tendency  to  shorten  the 
previous  part  of  the  word  in  the  manner  just  described. 
For  the  normal  length  of  words  in  Hebrew  being  dis- 
syllabic, the  genius  of  the  language  is  opposed  to  trans- 
cending this  limit  any  further  than  is  absolutely  necessary. 
If  the  addition  is  not  of  sufficient  weight  to  affect  the 
position  of  the  accent,  no  abbreviation  results.  But  if  it 
is  of  weight  enough  to  remove  the  accent,  an  abbreviation 


§  66  VOWEL  CHANGES.  97 

follows  if  it  is  possible  for  one  to  be  made,  e.  g.  ^"n, 
n^nar,  nr^.::'^.  for  Di:;i3i  by  §  61. 1. 

(2)  They  produce  changes  in  an  ultunate  mixed  syl- 
lable. If  the  appendage  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
antecedent  vowel  will  now  be  succeeded  by  two  con- 
sonants and  be  liable  to  the  changes  consequent  upon 
such  a  position,  §  61.  4,  e.  g.  njbtip^n  from  b^i:pn;  r^TCp 
from  D^p;  'r!:t:pri  from  b'bpri;  "n!:t3p  from  btpp.  If  the 
appendage  begin  with  a  vowel,  it  wiU  attach  itself  to  the 
final  consonant,  which  will  in  consequence  be  drawn  away 
from  its  own  syllable  to  begin  the  new  one.  This  may 
occasion  the  following  changes: 

(a)  If  the  preceding  vowel  is  an  auxiliary  Seghol  or 
Pattahh,  introduced  to  facilitate  the  pronunciation  of  the 
second  of  two  vowelless  consonants,  §  61.  2,  it  wiU  be 
rejected,  inasmuch  as  it  is  no  longer  required  for  this 
purpose,  e.  g.  ^i)b)2  from  T]b"^,  inrc  from  irb. 

(b)  If  it  be  a  short  vowel,  it  must  either  be  lengthened 
to  adapt  it  to  the  simple  syllable  in  which  it  now  stands, 
or  rejected  on  account  of  the  disposition  to  abbreviate 
words  upon  their  receiving  accessions  at  the  end,  e.  g. 
?:ibt:p  and  nb-^p  from  bbp.    The  cases  are  very  rare  in 

T  T ' :  T  :  'it  't 

which  a  short  vowel  remains  unchanged  in  consequence 
of  its  having  the  accent,  §  18.  2,  e.g.  Tn^~p.  1  Kin-  19: 1^ 
from  ^3T^,  nb^Jtr:  Ezek.  8:  2  from  b'Ji'n. 

(c)  If  it  be  a  long  vowel,  it  may  be  rejected,  as  ^tiz^^"", 
from  btip":,  "iDlT  from  DlT,  or  retained  either  unaltered,  as 
M-b^pn  from  ti^pn,  "iS"^':;  from  "jST?^,  or  with  a  change 
of  quahty  from   pure  to   diphthongal  or  the  reverse, 

np^n-o  from  pih7^,  ^r'i^oD  from  jio:,  ^:apn  from  D^pn, 
D'bbe  from  t:^bB. 


98 


OETHOGRAPHT. 


§66 


TABLE  SHOWING  THE  CHARACTER  AND  AFFINITIES  OF  THE 
VOWELS  AND  THE  ORDINARY  LIMITS  OF  EUPHONIC  CHANGES. 


QUALITY. 


Long, 


G-uttural,  .    .    .  pure  a 

f  diphthongal    e 
I 


Palatal,     .     ,     A 

[pure 


Labial,      •    •    .. 


diphthongal    o 


pure 


Short. 


a 


PART  SECOND. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Roots  op  Wokds. 

§  67.  Etymology  treats  of  the  various  kinds  of  words, 
their  formation  and  inflections.  Three  successive  stages 
are  here  to  be  distinguished.  The  first  is  the  root  or 
radical  portion  of  words.  This  embraces  those  funda- 
mental sounds,  in  wliich  the  essential  idea  originally  in- 
heres. Koots  do  not  enter,  in  their  nude  or  primitive  form, 
into  the  current  use  of  language,  but  they  constitute  the 
basis  upon  which  aU  actually  occurring  words,  with  the 
exception  of  the  inorganic  interjections,  are  constructed. 
The  second  stage  is  the  word  itself  m  its  simple  unin- 
flected  state;  this  is  formed,  if  a  primitive,  directly  from 
the  root,  if  a  derivative,  from  a  pre-existing  primitive,  by 
certain  changes  or  additions,  which  serve  to  convert  the 
radical  idea  into  the  precise  conception  intended,  which 
is  as  yet,  however,  expressed  absolutely.  The  third  and 
only  remaining  stage  is  the  word  as  it  appears  in  the  ac- 
tual utterances  of  speech,  so  modified  by  inflections  as  to 
suggest  the  definite  qualifications  of  the  idea,  such  as  the 
tense  of  verbs,  the  gender  and  number  of  nouns,  and  the 
degree  of  adjectives,  or  its  relations  whether  of  agree- 
ment or  subordination,  such  as  the  persons  and  modes 
of  verbs  and  the  cases  of  nouns. 

§  68.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  most  languages,  two 

7* 


100  ETYMOLOGY.  §  68 

classes  of  roots,  which  may  be  denominated  respectively 
pronominal  and  verbal.  Pronominal  roots  form  the  basis 
of  such  words  as  express  the  relations  of  things  to  the 
speaker  or  to  one  another,  viz.,  pronouns  and  certain 
prepositions,  adverbs,  and  other  particles.  From  verbal 
roots,  which  are  by  far  the  more  numerous,  spring  words 
expressive  of  ideas,  viz.,  verbs,  nouns,  and  such  particles 
as  are  derived  from  them.  Verbal  roots  consist  exclusively 
of  consonants,  and  are  almost  invariably  trihteral.  The 
introduction  of  a  vowel  or  vowels,  even  for  the  sake  of 
pronouncing  them,  destroys  their  abstract  radical  cha- 
racter, and  converts  them  into  specific  words  of  this  or 
that  description.  Nevertheless,  for  reasons  of  convenience, 
the  letters  of  the  root  are  usually  pronounced  by  the  aid 
of  the  vowels  belonging  to  them  in  the  simplest  form  of 
the  corresponding  verb,  which  is  mostly  the  third  person 
singular  of  the  preterite,  e.  g.  bb]^,  ^^'Z  Tliis  must  not 
be  suffered,  however,  to  lead  to  the  confusion  of  identifj''- 
ing  that  particular  verbal  form  with  the  proper  radical, 
nor  of  supposing  the  verb  to  be  the  radical  part  of  speech 
from  which  nouns  in  aU  cases  are  derived:  verbs  and 
nouns  are  rather  to  be  regarded  as  co-ordinate  branches 
springing  from  a  common  root. 

a.  The  few  quadriliterals  and  quinqueliterals  which  occur  are  mostly 
formed  from  pre-existing  triliterals  by  the  addition  of  a  weak  letter,  or  a 
letter  similar  to  one  of  the  original  radicals,  e.  g.  tp"i3  to  lay  tcaste  comp. 
COS;  tiVbl  to  burn  comp.  5)^7;  riE?")0  a  branch  comp.  rtcrp;  Ci^Ei""i"L3 
thoughts  comp.  d'Eyil';  U'^hld  a  sceptre,  comp.  1:511';  'Jw^^iy  tranquil  comp. 
"3Nir;  Tii"]Q  to  spread  comp.  liJ'HQ;  or  by  blending  two  diffex"ent  roots,  e.  g. 
"CSi;"!  to  be  fresh  composed  of  aii'l  and  ii"k:J;  "'ib^Q  a  certain  o«e  =  "^i'"?3 
■'itbx;  y'n"!?^  a  frog  from  "lE^  to  leap  rnn  (in  Arabic)  a  marsh.  Some, 
which  are  not  thus  reducible,  may  perhaps  be  of  foreign  origin. 

b.  Many  of  the  triliteral  roots  appear  to  be  based  upon  pre-existing 
biUterals.  Thus,  the  cognates  "ih,  bia,  th,  iiT5,  1^3,  M5,  have  in  common 
the  two  letters  Ta  with  the  associated  idea  of  cutting,  §  50. 3.  The  fre^iuent 
examples  of  this  description,  together  with  the  fact  of  the  existence  of  a 
few  biliterals,  e.  g.  ax  father,  JiX  brother,  CX  mother,  have  suggested  the 
thought  that  the  ultimate  roots  may  in  all  cases  have  been  biliterals,  and 


§69 


ROOTS  OF  WORDS.  101 


that  the  triliterals  were  a  secondary  formation.  Various  ingenious  but  un- 
successful attempts  have  been  made  to  demonstrate  this  position  hy  an 
actual  analysis,  and  to  effect  the  reduction  of  all  roots  to  two  primitive 
letters.  Still  more  extravagant  and  fanciful  is  the  endeavour,  which  hag 
actually'  been  made,  to  explain  the  origin  of  roots  from  the  individual  letters 
of  which  they  are  composed,  and  to  deduce  their  meanings  from  the  names, 
the  shapes,  or  other  peculiarities  of  those  letters.  The  existence  of  roots 
and  the  meanings  attached  to  them  must  be  accepted  as  ultimate  facts. 
Some  have  arisen,  no  doubt,  from  the  imitation  of  sounds  in  nature;  but 
in  most  cases  no  satisfactory  reason  can  be  given  why  a  given  combination 
of  sounds  has  that  particular  sense,  which  is  in  fact  connected  with  it. 

§  69.  The  formation  of  words  and  their  inflection  are 
accompUshed  partly  by  internal  changes  and  partly  by 
external  additions.  The  internal  changes  are  the  insertion 
of  vowels  and  the  reduplication  of  consonants  in  various 
significant  ways,  e.  g.  bbj:,  btp,  bt^p,  bt:p.  The  external 
additions  are  significant  syllables  welded  to  the  root  or 
to  the  word,  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end,  e.  g. 
bbj:,  nbbp,  btip:,  -iSb^prn. 

a.  The  triliteral  and  exclusively  consonantal  character  of  Semitic  roots 
is  their  most  remarkable  peculiarity  in  distinction  from  those  of  the  Indo- 
European  languages  which  are  as  prevailingly  monosyllabic,  the  vowel 
being  an  essential  constituent,  while  the  number  of  consonants  is  variable. 
The  fact  of  the  vowel  being  an  integral  part  of  the  root  in  these  languages 
interferes  with  their  employment  of  internal  changes  for  purposes  of 
derivation  and  inflection,  and  confines  them  almost  entirely  to  external 
additions,  e.  g.  voco,  vocaham,  vocatio,  vocahulum,  vocito,  etc.  The  compo- 
sition of  words  of  which  such  large  use  is  made  in  the  Indo-European 
tongues,  e.  g.  ad-voco,  in-voco,  etc.,  is  almost  unknown  in  Hebrew  except  in 
the  formation  of  proper  names. 

b.  Different  languages  differ  greatly  in  their  flexibility,  that  is  to  say, 
in  the  variety  of  words  which  may  spring  from  a  common  root,  and  the 
number  of  forms  which  the  same  word  may  assume  to  express  the  various  re- 
lations into  which  it  enters.  Relations,  which  in  some  languages  are  expressed 
by  flection,  as  the  cases  of  nouns,  tenses  of  verbs,  concord  of  adjectives,  are 
in  others  indicated  by  additional  words,  as  prepositions,  auxiliary  ver^s,  etc., 
or  suggested  b}'  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence. 

c.  Formative  syllables,  added  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end  of 
words  for  the  sake  of  inflection,  are,  in  the  ordinary  consciousness  of  those 
who  use  the  language,  completely  amalgamated  with  them,  so  that  their 
separate  origin  and  signification  is  never  thought  of.  They  are  thus  to 
be  distinguished  from  those  words  which,  by  reason  of  their  dependent 
character,  are  attached  to  others  as  prefixes  or  suflSxes,  but  yet  preserve 


102  ETYMOLOGY.  §  70,  71 

their  separate  identity  as  prefixed  conjunctions  and  prepositions  and  suf* 
fixed  pronouns. 

§  70.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Hebrew  are  either  de- 
cHnable  as  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns  (including  adjec- 
tives); or  indecKnable,  as  the  article,  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions,  and  interjections.  As  most  if  not  all  of  the 
syllables  employed  in  the  formation  and  inflection  of 
verbs  and  nouns  are  of  pronominal  origin,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  consider  the  pronouns  first. 

a.  The  classification  usual  with  the  Jewish  grammarians  is  into  verba 
(D'^lisa  actions),  nouns  (niaia  names),  and  particles  (d''^a  words). 

Peonouns. 

PEBSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

§  71.  The  Hebrew  pronouns  are  personal,  demon- 
strative, relative,  and  interrogative  or  indefinite.  The 
personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz.: 


SINQUIjAB. 


^MJts.  1-    I  ^-^^1   i^      ^^       ^5n55<,  m,  !i5x 


yirA^cyx^n  f  Thou  m.  nrii^ 


^■1 


PIiOBAIi. 

We       iiinii^., 

W5, 

Ye  m.       Dnj? 

Ye  /.         "(IDl?, 

T    ■•    - 

They  m.     DH, 

r    •• 

They/.       in, 

nsn 

T      •• 

'-^^>U<oU.     *  I  Thou/.     r.5<,  "rii§ 

fHe  X^n 

I  She         i<-n 

There  are,  it  will  be  perceived,  distinct  forms  for 
singular  and  plural  in  the  three  persons,  and  for  mascu- 
line and  feminine  in  the  second  and  third.  There  is  no 
form  for  the  neuter,  as  that  gender  is  not  recognized  in 
Hebrew. 

a.  (1)  The  alternate  forms  of  the  first  person  singular  "^s'jS  (in  pause 
■'DJS  with  the  accent  on  the  penult  except  Job  33:  9),  and  ■i:>5  (in  pause 
"i^X)  are  used  interchangeably  and  with  perhaps  equal  frequency.  It  has 
been  observed,  however,  that  while  the  former  is  the  more  common  in  the 
Pentateuch,  it  never  occurs  in  the  books  of  Chronicles,  and  but  once  in 
Ezekiel,  viz..  36':  28,  a  passage  borrowed  from  the  Pentateuch.     The  usual 


PEONOUNS.  103 

plural  of  this  person  is  >l3ri5X;  ^3P!3  occurs  but  six  times,  viz.,  Gen.  42:  11, 
Ex.  16:  7.  8,  Num.  32:  32,  2  Sam.  17:  12,  Lam.  S:  42;  ^lIX  though  common 
in  later  Hebrew,  occurs  but  once  in  the  Old  Testament,  viz.,  Jer.  42:  fi 
K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  substitutes  the  usual  form. 

(2)  The  second  person  masc.  sing.  tiPX  (in  pause  occasionally  >irx  Ps 
2:  7,  25:  27,  40:  18,  70:  6,  but  .mostly  «1RX)  is  in  five  instances  written  nx 
without  the  final  He,  which  is  however  restored  in  the  K'ri,  viz.,  1  Sam. 
24:  19,  Ps.  6:  4,  Job  1:10,  Eccles.  7:  22,  Neh.  9:  6,  and  in  three  instances 
r,X  without  the  final  vowel  Num.  11:  15,  Deut.  5:  24,  Ezek.  23:  14.  The 
feminine  Fix  is  occasionally  written  "^OX  Judg.  17:  2,  1  Kin.  14:  2,  2  Kin. 
4:  16,  23,  8:  1,  Jer.  4:  30,  Ezek.  36:  13;  the  K'ri  invariably  retrenches  the 
superfluous  '^,  though  it  is  probable  that  the  original  pronunciation  proper 
to  this  orthography  was  "^riX.  The  feminine  plural  "hx  occurs  only  Ezek. 
34:  31,  where  a  few  manuscripts  read  "(f^X;  the  alternate  foi'm  JiJFiX  occurs 
Gen.  31:  6,  Ezek.  13:  11,  34:  17;  in  Ezek.  13:  20  most  editions  have  nshx. 

(3)  The  third  person  fern.  sing.  X''rt  occurs  but  eleven  times  in  the 
books  of  Moses,  viz..  Gen.  14:  2,  20:  5,  38:  25,  Lev.  11:  39,  13:  10.  21, 
16:31,  20:  17,  21:  9,  Num.  5:  13,  14.  In  its  stead  is  found  Xin  a  combination 
of  the  letters  of  the  masculine  with  the  vowel  of  the  feminine.  The  ex- 
planation of  this  is  that  Xlil  hu  was  at  that  early  period  of  common  gender 
and  used  indiflferently  for  both  masculine  and  feminine.  As  this  primitive 
usage  subsequently  became  obsolete,  the  word,  when  used  for  the  feminine, 
was  read  X^^fl  hi  according  to  the  uniform  practice  of  the  later  books,  and 
the  punctuators  have  suggested  this  by  giving  it  the  corresponding  vowel, 
§  47.  According  to  Kimchi  'r.  Buth  1 :  13  and  tlSri  2  Sam.  4:  6,  Jer.  50:  5, 
stand  for  the  masculine  plural;  this  assumption  is  unnecessary,  however,  as 
in  the  first  passage  the  feminine  may  have  the  sense  of  the  neuter  "these 
things,^'  and  in  the  last  two  it  is  an  adverb  of  place,  meaning  here. 

h.  "Words  in  such  constant  and  familiar  use  as  the  pronouns  are  sub- 
ject to  more  or  less  irregularity  in  all  languages.  The  original  plural 
termination,  as  will  be  shown  more  fully  hereafter  in  the  case  of  verbs  and 
nouns,  is  C^l  or  '1  §§  85.  1.  a  (1),  201.  e.  In  the  first  person  the  nasal  is 
omitted  12X,  'isrox.  The  plurals  of  the  second  and  third  persons  were  origin- 
ally CWX,  Din,  which  are  still  preserved  in  the  Arabic,  and  have  left  their 
traces  in  the  inflections  of  verbs,  e.  g.  '|l3::p'^,  "iS'Sih^vp-  The  vowel  m  how- 
ever, which  in  the  plurals  of  masculine  nouns  has  been  converted  into  ?, 
has  in  the  pronouns  undergone  a  still  further  modification  into  the  diph- 
thongal e  cn  or  e  CtlX.  The  distinction  of  gender  is  indicated  in  the  plural 
not  by  afifixing  the  characteristic  termination  of  that  gender  as  in  nouns, 
but  by  a  change  of  the  final  nasal.  An  unaccented  n^  is  often  added  by 
§  61.  6,  to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  consonantal  ending. 

c.  In  the  technical  language  of  the  Jewish  grammarians  pronouns  are 
called  Q"'';^i3  cognomina;  the  first  person  is  '^inp  the  speaker,  the  second 
xkp?  present,  the  third  "rC2  hidden  or  absent 

§  72.  When  the  pronouns  are  used  in  their  separate 
form  as  distinct  words  they  have  the  forms  abeady  given, 


104  ETYMOLOGY.  §72,73 

When,  however,  they  stand  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
to  verbs,  nouns,  and  particles,  they  are  appended  to  them 
in  the  followmg  abbreviated  forms,  called  the  pronominal 
suffixes:  (See  Paradigm  I,  at  the  end  of  the  volume.) 


■I 


BINOULAB. 

FLUBAIi. 

Com. 

".         '5 

^D 

Masc. 

^ 

D5 

Fern. 

^ 

1? 

Masc. 

Jin 

Q       on 

Fem. 

m       n 

1       in 

3. 


In  the  first  person  singular  *•.  is  attached  to  nouns, 
and  "5  to  verbs.  In  the  second  person  the  palatal  ID  is 
substituted  for  the  lingual  T\  of  the  separate  pronoun. 
For  a  similar  change  in  the  first  person  see  §  85.  a.  (1). 
The  modifications  in  the  forms  of  the  suffixes,  occasioned 
by  the  endings  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  attached, 
wiU  be  considered  hereafter,  §§  101, 222.  The  third  plural 
forms  DH,  "ri  are  used  with  plural  nouns;  D,  "j  with  verbs 
and  singular  nouns. 

The  suffixes  of  the  second  and  third  persons  plural 
D5,  15,  DH,  "ri  are  called  grave,  the  rest  are  light  The 
former  being  mixed  syllables,  always  receive  the  accent, 
§  33.  3,  and  tend  more  strongly  to  shorten  the  words  to 
which  they  are  attached  than  the  latter. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
§  73.  1.  The  ordinary  demonstrative  is — 

Masc.         Fem.  Common. 

Singular,    HT     nST  this.    Plural,    bi<     n\k  these. 

The  poetic  form  ^7  is  sometimes  a  demonstrative,  Ps. 
12:  8,  Hab.  1:  11,  but  more  frequently  a  relative  (like 
the  English  timt),  in  which  case  it  is  used  without  change 


jlj  74  PK0N0UN3.  10! 

for  both  genders  and  numbers.  The  feminine  is  occasion- 
ally written  without  the  final  in  and  with  a  different 
vowel  letter  r^i  or  il.  The  plural,  coming  from  a  different 
root,  is  sufficiently  distinguished  without  the  usual 
termination;  bs  occurs  eight  times  in  the  books  of  Moses 
and  once  in  1  Chron.  20:  8;  in  all  other  places  the  con- 
sonantal termination  is  softened  by  an  appended  H  . 

2.  The  singular  of  this  pronoun  is  in  a  few  instances 
compounded  with  b  either  without  any  change  of  mean- 
ing, or,  as  Ewald  and  Nordheimer  follow  Jarchi  in  sup- 
posing, in  the  sense  of  the  remote  demonstrative  that. 
Thus  (with  the  article  H  prefij?:ed) — 

Masc.  Fern.  Com, 

Sing,  this  or  that    nibn  ^iTbn  i^n 

V  T     -  ••     -  T     - 

a.  The  first  form  occurs  twice  in  Genesis  (24:  65,  37:  19),  the  third  six 
times  in  the  post-Mosaic  books  as  a  masculine  (Judg.  6:  20,  1  Sam.  14:  1, 
17:  26,  2  Kin.  23:  17,  Dan.  8:  16,  Zech.  2:  8),  aad  once  as  a  feminine  (2  Kin 
4:  25),  the  second  once  in  Ezekiel  (36:  35). 

3.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  i^Tl  ia 
used  for  the  remote  demonstrative  that. 


Relative  Pronoun. 

§  74.  The  relative  ivho,  zuhich  is  nir^i;,  which  may  be 
employed  as  a  separate  word,  or  may  be  shortened  to  a 
prefix  '4  with  Daghesh-forte  compensative  in  the  follow- 
ing letter,  unless  it  be  a  guttural  and  consequently  in- 
capable of  receiving  it,  §  23.  1.  In  a  few  instances  the 
prefix  T2J  takes  the  vowel  (_)  followed  by  Daghesh-forte, 
Judg.  5:  7,  Cant.  1:  7,  Job  19:  29;  once  it  has  Q  before 
X  Judg.  6:  17,  and  twice  (.)  Eccl.  2:  22  (in  some  copies), 
3:  18.  The  relative  suffers  no  change  for  gender  or 
number  either  in  its  separate  or  its  prefixed  state.  Its 
objective  relation  to  verbs  and  particles  and  its  possessive 
relation  to  nouns  are  expressed  without  changing  the 


106  ETYMOLOGY.  '  §  75 

relative  itself,  or  removing  it  from  its  position  at  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  by  appending  the  appropriate 
pronominal  suffix  to  the  governing  word,  e.  g.  inblp  TaiSi 
tvlio  he  sent  him,  i.  e.  whom  he  sent,  ii?"!!  T^ry;  which  its 
seed,  i.  e.  whose  seed.  It  may  also  receive  an  adverbial 
sense  from  being  followed  by  the  pronominal  adverb  D"0 
there,  e.  g.  &i:— ^Ti:x  where,  VTBt — Tj:s  whither,  Q^a — nirs 
whence. 

a.  The  prefix  \J3  occurs  to  the  exclusion  of  the  full  form  of  the  relative 
in  the  Song  of  Solomon,  and  with  great  frequency  in  Ecclesiastes,  There 
are  besides  occasional  examples  of  it  in  other  books,  e.g.  Judg.  5:7,  6:  17, 
7:  12,  8:  26,  2  Kin.  6:  11,  1  Chron.  5:  20,  Job  19:  29,  Ps.  122—124,  129, 
133—137,  144,  Lam.  2:  15,  16.  The  word  tips  Gen.  6:3  is  in  several 
ancient  versions  and  in  the  common  English  translation  rendered  as  though 
it  were  made  up  of  the  preposition  3,  the  relative  \y  and  the  particle  DJ 
for  that  also;  but  the  most  recent  interpreters  derive  it  from  the  verb  SSd 
to  err,  and  translate  in  their  erring. 

b.  "i^X  or  u:  is  also  used  for  the  conjunction  that.    Comp.  Lat.  quod. 


Inteeeogative  and  Indefinite  Peonouns. 

§  75.  1.  The  pronouns  '?J  who?  or  whoever  relating  to 
persons,  and  T'Z  ivhat?  or  tuhatever  relating  to  things,  are 
employed  both  as  interrogatives  and  in  an  indefinite 
sense.  They  experience  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

The  vowel  of  n?J  is  regulated  by  the  initial  sounds  of 
the  succeeding  word.  Before  a  letter  capable  of  receiving 
Daghesh-forte  it  is  pointed  Tl'D  and  the  following  letter 
is  doubled,  e.  g.  iblETi"^  Ex.  3:  13.  Before  the  stronger 
gutturals  n  and  "  it  also  commonly  receives  (_),  e.  g. 
5<Trn'J  Ps.  39:  5,  ^n^^t^n  n'2  Gen.  31:  36.  Before  the 
weaker  gutturals  X,  y  and  i,  it  commonly  takes  (J,  e.  g. 
rtk-H/J  Zech.  1:  9,  ^"-2?  Ht  2  Kin.  8:  13,  Di^\S^  H-  Judg. 
9:  48.  Before  H,  n  and  ^  wath  Kamets  it  takes  (  ),  §  63. 
1.  a,  e.  g.  ib  n'lh-n'2  Ex.  32:  1,  TJ^lbrrn^a  Gen.  20:  9, 
ri^'iryn"^  ib.;  and  occasionally  before  other  letters  especi- 
ally when  it  has  a  disjunctive  accent  bip  n'^  1  Sam.  4: 14, 


§  76  SPECIES  OF  VEEB3.  107 

i:btl2  n"9^  2  Kin.  1 :  7.  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel 
letter  is  omitted  and  the  interrogative  is  joined  with  the 
following  word,  e.  g.  nrj  Ex.  4:  2,  nb^l'2  Isa.  3:15,  n^brra 
Mai.  1:  13,  nr^Z  Ezek.  8:  6  K'thibh.'' 

2.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  '«  to  the  pronoun  HT,  ni<7,  tlius  HT  \S5  tvhich?  or 
tvhaf?  1  Kin.  13: 12,  Eccles.  11;  6,  ni^ib  ^X/or  what?  why? 
Jer.  5:7. 

3.  The  words  ^bbx  ^ibs  which  are  always  used  in 
combination,  or  contracted  into  one  ^ibbs,  are  in  usao-e 
equivalent  to  an  indefinite  or  indeterminate  pronoun, 
Eng.  a  certain  one,  Lat.  quidam,  Gr.  o  lsivoc\  they  are,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  pronominal  but  verbal  roots. 

Veebs. 

THEIR   SPECIES. 

§  76.  1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms 
which  have  been  denominated  species  or  conjugations 
(D^i^S!!!  buildings).  These  represent  as  many  modifications 
of  the  verbal  idea,  and  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  bJ5       Kal  Simple  active.    K^^i^ 

2.  bySD       Mphal  „      passive,  ivti^^ 

3.  bys       Piel  Intensive  active.  \i)CtWi 

4.  bbB       Pual  „      passive.    \i;;JlU^ 

5.  b^i'Sri       Hiphll  Causative  active.   ^-^"^'^^ 

6.  bi^'sn       Hophal  „  passive.  HVeKiX 

7.  bi?snn       Hithpael      Reflexive.  ^^tioM 

a.  The  term  conjugations  was  introduced  by  Reuchlin,  and  is  very 
generally  employed  in  Hebrew  grammars  and  in  those  of  the  cognate  lan- 
guages. It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  Hebrew  conjugations 
are  totally  unlike  the  conjugations  of  Latin  and  Greek.  The  latter  denote 
the  various  modes  of  inflection  adopted  by  different  roots.  The  former  are 
modifications  of  the  same  root,  vhich  differ  in  meaning  while  their  inflec- 
tions are  substantially  alike.  They  correspond  rather  with  voices  or  with 
derivative  verbs,  such  as  frequentatives  and  causatives,  although  they  not 


108  ETYMOLOGY.  §  77 

infrequently  require  to  be  translated  by  words  radically  distinct.  The 
term  species  proposed  by  Schulteus,  though  less  commonly  adopted,  la 
more  descriptive. 

2.  Kal  means  ligJif,  and  denotes  that  species  in  which 
no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and  these 
only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  species  are  called 
heavy  (D^^ns),  because  burdened  by  the  reduplication  of 
the  radicals  or  the  addition  of  other  letters.  Their  names 
are  derived  from  bJ'S  to  do,  which  was  the  model  for  in- 

-     T  ' 

flection,  the  form  assumed  by  this  verb  in  each  species 
serving  as  its  designation.  Unusual  verbal  forms  are  in 
hke  manner  denoted  by  the  corresponding  forms  imposed 
upon  its  radicals. 

3.  Other  technical  expressions,  such  as  the  names  of 
the  various  classes  of  verbs,  are  also  to  be  traced  to  this 
source.  A  verb  whose  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  a  Nun, 
or  a  Yodh,  is  called  a  Pe  Guttural,  Pe  Nun  (ys),  or  Pe 
Yodh  (""'2)  verb,  Pe  as  the  initial  of  b?5  becoming  the 
technical  designation  of  a  first  radical  generally.  So  a 
verb  whose  second  radical  is  Vav  is  called  an  Ayin  Vav 
(Y'y);  one  in  which  He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical, 
a  Lamedh  He  (!T'b);  one  whose  second  and  third  radicals 
are  alike  an  Ayin  Doubled  (p"T),  etc. 

§  77.  The  general  idea  of  the  several  species  already 
stated  is  liable  to  certam  modifications  in  the  variety  of 
cases  to  wliich  it  is  applied. 

1.  The  Niphal  is  commonly  the  passive  of  Kal  or  of 
the  simple  idea  of  the  verb,  133  to  steal,  Ni.  to  be  stolen; 
nriS  to  ivrite,  Ni.  to  he  written. 

2.  Sometimes,  like  the  Greek  middle  voice  which 
coincides  with  the  passive  in  certain  of  its  forms,  it  has 
a  reflexive  signification,  ")"!2t3  to  hide,  Ni.  to  hide  one^s  self; 
n^biT  to  keep,  Ni.  to  keep  one^s  self,  (puXdrrsaQai}  DnD  Ni.  to 
repent,  ht.  to  grieve  one's  self,  jusrajuiXscdai;  or  expresses 


§  78  SPECIES  OF  VERBS.  109 

reciprocal  action,  *C^1  to  counsel,  Ni.  to  take  counsel  together; 
Dnb  Ni.  to  ff/ht,  [xa.yzrjfio(.i^  lit.  to  devour  one  cuwther.  In 
some  verbs  it  has  both  a  passive  and  a  reflexive  sense, 
^bri  Ni.  to  he  sold  and  to  sell  one's  self;  Tiki  Ni.  to  be  seen 
and  to  let  one's  self  be  seen,  to  appear. 

3.  Sometimes  when  the  Kal  is  intransitive  and  does 
not  admit  of  a  proper  passive,  the  Niphal  is  either  iden- 
tical with  it  in  signification,  Z^'\)  K.  and  Ni.  to  approach, 
or  retains  a  shade  of  its  original  force  by  representing 
the  state  or  condition  not  absolutely  as  in  Kal,  but  as 
something  effected  and  involving  a  change  from  another 
previous  condition,  )^12  to  be  full,  Ni.  to  be  filled,  Trj]  to 
be,  Ni.  to  become. 

§  78.  1.  The  Piel  gives  new  intensity  to  the  simple 
idea  of  the  verb,  by  which  its  meaning  is  variously  modi- 
fied according  to  the  nature  of  the  case,  'd'J'l  to  be  few, 
Pi.  to  be  very  feio;  V)!'^  to  folloiv.  Pi.  to  folloiv  ardently,  to 
pursue;  1TB  to  fear,  Pi.  to  fear  constantly,  to  be  timid;  bk'i 
to  ask.  Pi.  to  ask  repeatedly  and  earnestly,  to  beg;  ^^^^  to 
create,  as  God,  Pi.  to  form  with  pains  and  labour,  as  man; 
:2n3  to  ivrite.  Pi.  to  write  much  with  the  implication  that 
it  is  to  httle  purpose,  to  scribble;  "inj^  to  bury.  Pi.  to  bury 
great  numbers. 

2.  The  energy  resident  in  this  species  displays  itself 
by  signifying  the  producing  or  causing  of  that  which  is 
denoted  by  the  sunple  idea  of  the  verb,  thus  quickening 
intransitive  verbs  into  transitives,  and  making  such  as 
were  transitive  before  to  be  doubly  so.  In  this,  which  is 
the  more  frequent  case,  it  becomes  virtually  equivalent 
to  a  causative,  ib.'^  to  perish,  Pi.  to  make  to  perish,  to 
destroy;  TJb  to  learn.  Pi.  to  teach,  i.  e.  cause  to  learn.  Both 
these  senses  are  occasionally  found  united  in  the  same 
verb,  nnj:  Pi.  to  be  very  rear  and  to  bring  near;  Tt:^  Pi 
to  be  very  corrupt  and  to  corrupt  or  destroy. 


110  ETYMOLOGY.  "  §79,80 

a.  If  the  action  be  directed  to  the  removal  of  its  object,  the  Piel  be- 
comes privative,  nhri  to  sin,  Pi.  to  free  from  sin,  expiate,  1:^5  to  stone,  Pi, 
to  free  from  stones. 

3.  Pual  is  the  passive  of  Piel,  and  therefore  can  only 
exist  when  the  sense  of  the  latter  is  such  that  a  passive 
is  possible. 

§  79.  1.  The  Hiphil  denotes  the  causing  or  producing 
of  that  which  is  signified  by  the  simple  form  of  the  verb, 
and,  as  in  the  corresponding  case  of  Piel,  intransitive 
verbs  become  transitive,  and  such  as  admitted  of  one  ob- 
ject before  are  now  capable  of  receiving  two:  IT  to 
descend,  Hi.  to  cause  to  descend,  bring  down;  ^^13  to  come, 
Hi.  to  bring;  n'iO  to  see,  Hi.  to  show. 

a.  The  causative  sense  in  both  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  sometimes  weakened 
into  a  simple  permissive,  tX^T\  2Jermit  to  live  Ex.  22:  17,  Deut.  20:  16,  t^yj 
perhaps  permit  to  suffer  Ex.  22 :  21,  in^sn  permit  to  he  redeemed  Ex.  21:  8. 

2.  In  some  verbs  Hiphil  has  an  intransitive  sense,  but 
in  most  of  these  cases  there  is  either  an  ellipsis  of  the 
object  or  the  idea  of  production  and  causation  can  still 
be  obscurely  traced,  ziDj^  Hi.  to  be  attentive,  prop,  to  make 
{one's  ear)  attend;  ]:b'2  Hi.  to  be  sweet,  prop,  to  cause  sweet- 
ness; bj'i2  Hi.  to  be  tvise,  prop,  to  act  wisely,  exhibit  wisdom; 
ybs  Hi.  to  be  brave,  prop,  to  act  bravely;  "pj  Hi.  to  groiv 
old,  prop,  to  acquire  age.  In  a  few  instances  both  senses 
are  found  united  in  the  same  verb,  vhB  Hi.  to  cause  to 
bud  and  to  x>ut  forth  buds;  'T]''^5J  Hi.  to  prolong  and  to  be 
long;  ^'ii^'  Hi.  to  enrich  and  to  grow  rich;  '^y^  Hi.  to  make, 
fat  and  to  become  fat  (comp.  ^ng.  fatten)^ 

3.  Hophal  is  the  passive  of  Hiphil. 

a.  When  Kal  has  both  a  transitive  and  an  Intransitive  sense,  Hiphilj 
as  the  causative  of  the  latter,  becomes  substantially  identical  with  the 
former,  ni:D  K.  to  extend  or  to  bend,  trans,  and  intrans.,  Hi.  id,  trans.  In 
Job  23:  11,  Ps.  125:  5,  Isa.  30:  11,  where  the  Hiphil  of  this  vei-b  appears  to 
be  used  intransitively  in  the  sense  of  turning  aside,  there  is  an  ellipsis  of 
its  proper  object,  to  bend  {the  steps). 

§  80.  1.  The  Hithpael  is  reflexive  or  reciprocal  of  the 
idea  of  the  verb,  mostly  as  this  is  expressed  in  the  P'lel 


g  80  SPECIES  OF  VERBS.  Ill 

species  (from  which  it  is  formed,  §  82.  5),  the  particular 
shade  of  meaning  being  modified  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case.    (1)  It  indicates  that  the  subject  is 
likewise  the  direct  object  of  the  action,  di,12  Pi.  to  deliver, 
Hith.  to  escape,  deliver  one's  self  ;  p^.::  Y\.  to  justify,  Hitli.  to 
justify  one's  self;  irsn  Pi.  to  seek,  Hith.  to  disguise  one's 
self,  prop,  to  let  one's  self  be  sought  for;  H^n  Pi.  to  make 
sick,  Hith.  to  make  one's  self  sick  whether  in  reahty  or  in 
the  esteem  of  others,  i.  e.  to  feign  sickness;  ub'  Hith.  to 
show  one's  self  ivise  whether  in  reality  or  in  his  own  con- 
ceit.   (2)  Or  that  he  is  the  indirect  object  of  the  action, 
which  is  for  his  benefit,  or  relates  entirely  to  him,  nriB 
Pi.  to  open,  Hith.  to  open  for  one's  self;  b-^:  Hith.  to  inherit 
{for  one's  self);  "|5n  Pi.  to  make  gracious,  Hith.  to  implore 
favour,  prop,  to  make  to  he  gracious  to  one's  self    (3)  Or 
that  the  action  is  mutual  between  two  or  more  parties, 
niDp  Pi.  to  hind,  Hith.  to  conspire,  prop,  to  hand  together; 
M^T  to  see,  Hith.  to  look  upon  one  another. 

^^2.  This  species  is  sometimes  a  mere  passive  hke  the 
Niphal  nbiT  to  forget,  Hith.fo  he  forgotten;  nSS  Pi.  to  atone, 
Hith.  to  he  atoned;  ir\y  Pi.  to  prepare,  Hith.  to  he  prepared. 
In  a  few  instances  the  reflexive  and  the  passive  senses 
are  found  in  the  same  verb,  nD?J  Hith.  to  sell  one's  self  and 
io  he  sold. 

a.  (1)  The  affinity  between  tte  Piel  and  Hiphil  species  is  such  as  in 
very  many  verbs  to  render  it  unnecessary  to  retain  them  both,  and  one  or 
the  other  has  been  allowed  to  fall  into  disuse.  Where  both  exist,  they  are 
often  nearly  or  quite  synonymous,  and  are  used  mdiscriminately,  irn;5  Pi. 
and  Hi.  to  sanctify,  or  differ  only  in  the  frequency  of  their  employment, 
n^d  Pi.  and  Hi.  (rare)  to  send,  V^^d  Pi.  (rare)  and  Hi.  to  cau^e  to  hear.  In 
other  cases  they  are  distinguished  by  adhering  to  those  significations  of  the 
species  in  which  they  depart  palpably  from  one  another,  r,?:i  Pi.  (mtens.) 
to  grow  luxuriantly,  Hi.  (caus.)  to  make  to  groiv,  b;D  Pi.  (caus.)  to  make 
foolish,  Hi.  (intrans.)  to  act  foolisJily ;  or  by  developing  them  from  different 
sign  fications  of  the  root,  biis  Pi.  to  cook  (food).  Hi.  to  ripen  (fruit);  Tpa 
Pi.  to  bless  (prop,  to  kneel  in  worship),  Hi.  to  cause  to  kneel  (as  a  phys-cal 
act),  zk-J  Pi.  to  break  the  bones  (a:i->),  Hi.  to  render  strong;  or  by  restricting 
them  to^pecial  applications,  ^bp^  Pi.  to  burn  incense  (to  idols).  Hi.  t^  burn 


112  ETYMOLOGY.  §  80 

incense  (to  God);  v;^n  Hi.  to  change,  Pi.  to  change  (the  clothes);  ::ii:c  Hi. 
to  strip,  Pi.  to  strip  (the  slain  in  battle). 

(2)  It  is  still  less  common  to  find  both  Niphal  and  Hithpael  in  the  same 
verb.  Where  this  does  occur  they  are  sometimes  used  interchangeably,  at 
others  a  distinction  is  created  or  adhered  to,  "S'J  Ni.  and  Hith.  to  be  poured 
out;  "151  Ni.  and  Hith.  to  talk  with  one  another;  T\b^  Ni.  to  be  blessed,  Hith. 
to  bless  one's  self;  irnn  Ni.  to  be  ploughed,  Hith.  to  keep  {one's  self)  quiet; 
"lirp  Ni.  to  be  bound,  Hith.  to  conspire. 

(3)  When  in  particular  verbs  two  species  have  substantially  the  same 
sense,  it  sometimes  happens  that  parts  only  of  each  are  in  use,  one  supple- 
menting the  deficiencies  of  the  other,  or  that  one  of  the  active  species, 
losing  its  proper  passive,  is  supplied  by  another  whose  corx-esponding  active 
is  wanting.  Thus  bb'^  to  be  able  has  a  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive;  but  its 
future  is  Hophal  (strictly,  to  be  made  able,  but  in  usage  the  equivalent  of 
Kal);  CiPS  to  be  pale,  HTj  to  draio  near,  "rij  to  be  poured  out,  have  their 
futures  in  the  Kal  but  their  preterites  in  the  Niphal ;  Vib's  to  stumble,  has  a 
Kal  preterite  but  future  Niphal  (Ni.  pret.  only  in  Daniel);  tinj  to  lead  has 
the  preterite  and  imperative  Kal,  but  future  and  infinitive  Hiphil  (Hi.  pret. 
twice);  nip  to  wait  for  is  used  in  the  Piel  except  the  participle  which  is 
Kal;  tjpi  to  add  has  both  a  Kal  and  a  Hiphil  preterite,  which  are  synonymous, 
but  only  a  Hiphil  future.  Again,  in  'hh'z  to  separate  and  ip":i  to  destroy,  the 
Kal  has  yielded  to  the  Hiphil  (strictly,  to  cause  separation,  destruction)  but 
the  Niphal  is  retained  as  its  passive;  yxy^  to  bathe  and  pnj  to  sprinkle,  have 
in  the  active  the  Kal  form  and  iu  the  passive  the  Pual. 

(4)  All  verbs  are  found  in  one  or  more  of  these  species  or  conjugations, 
but  very  few  in  the  whole  of  them.  Of  the  1,332  triliteral  verbs  in  the 
Hebrew  Bible,  530  appear  in  some  one  species  only,  360  in  two  species, 
235  in  three,  118  in  four,  70  in  five,  12  in  six,  and  but  7  in  the  entire  num- 
ber, viz.:  ypa  to  cleave  asunder,  n3a  to  uncover,  nBn  to  be  sick,  i'n^  to 
knoiv,  'iBi-.  to  bring  forth,  lp£  to  visit,  D^n  to  be  high.  The  number  of 
species  in  which  a  given  verb  appears,  is  sometimes  limited  by  the  ne- 
cessity of  the  case,  as  when  its  meaning  will  not  admit  of  the  modifications 
denoted  by  all  the  species;  or  by  usage,  as  when  certain  species  are  dropped 
as  unnecessary,  the  ideas  which  they  would  convey  being  expressed  iu 
another  manner;  or  by  the  circumstance  that  in  the  small  volume  of  the 
Old  Testament,  examples  may  not  occur  of  all  the  species  which  actually 
were  in  use. 

b.  Instances  occur  in  which  the  active  species,  and  less  frequently  the 
passives,  derive  their  meanings  not  directly  from  the  root,  but  from  some 
noun  which  has  sprung  from  it.  These  are  called  Denominatives.  Thus, 
t^yj  K.  to  break  the  neck  (q-iJ);  ^-b'J  K.  to  tithe  (r::b  ten);  "jib  to  make 
bricks  (ni^b);  33^3  Ni.  to  be  possessed  of  understanding,  or,  according  to 
others,  to  be  devoid  of  understanding  (nib  heart) ;  'HS  Pi.  to  act  as  priest 
(1D3);  "i.?!^  Pi'  fo  build  a  nest  ("ip);  i'S-a  Pu.  part,  square  (vh."'^  four);  ifs^'J 
Pu.  almond-shaped  (ni^'xj);  ^\r.-o  Pu.  rhjed  scarlet  (i'bin);  :"3"::n  Hi.  to  snow 
(sVr);  "pTsn  Hi.  to  give  ear  (".Vx);  ^k^  Hi.  to  snare  (ns);  nbon  Ho.  to  he 
salted  (nb^i;  "nrpri  Hith.  to  make  one's  self  a  Jeiv  C^nirr;);  i^-jsn  Hith.  to 


§  81;  82  PERFECT  VEBBS.  113 

supply  one's  self  with  provision  (i"a).  A  verbal  form  may  occasionally 
arise  even  from  an  adverb,  '^X;!^,?  Ni.  part,  removed  far  away  ("Stsn),  or 
an  interjection,  DiTl  Hi.  and  he  stilled  (on  hush  I), 


Perfect  Verbs. 

§  81.  There  is  one  normal  standard  for  the  formation 
of  these  several  species  and  their  further  inflection,  to 
which  aU  verbs  conform  unless  prevented  by  the  character 
of  their  radicals.  There  are  no  anomalous  or  irregular 
deviations  from  this  standard,  such  as  are  found  in  other 
languages,  for  which  no  explanation  can  be  given  but 
the  fact  ol  their  occurrence.  Whatever  deviations  do 
occur  result  from  the  presence  of  letters  in  the  root  which 
do  not  admit  ol  certain  combinations  and  forms,  and 
compel  the  adoption  of  others  in  their  stead.  Verbs  are 
hence  distinguished  into  perfect  and  imperfect.  They  are 
styled  perfect  when  their  radical  letters  are  capable  of 
entering  into  all  those  combinations  and  exhibiting  all 
those  forms  which  conformity  with  the  standard  requires. 
They  are  imperfect  when  the  root  contains  a  weak  letter, 
§  7.  2,  or  is  otherwise  so  constituted  as  to  lead  to  a  de- 
parture from  the  standard  inflections. 

§  82.  1.  In  perfect  verbs  the  Kal  is  formed  by  giving 
Pattahh,  or  more  rarely  one  of  its  compounds,  Tsere  or 
Hholem,  to  the  second  radical  as  its  essential  or  cha- 
racteristic vowel,  and  to  the  first  radical  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  §  64.  2,  thus:  bbj^,  123,  "tij:. 

a.  The  number  of  verbs,  perfect  and  imperfect,  whose  second  radical 
has  Tsere  or  Hholem  or  as  they  are  technically  called  middle  e  and 
middle  o,  is  quite  inconsiderable.  They  are  mostly  of  an  intransitive 
Bignification. 

(1)  The  following  have  Tsere,  viz.: 

l^ij   to  be  old.  asn  to  hew.  Kaa  to  be  unclean. 

yin  to  delight  nn::  to  be  clean.  "Cz^  to  be  dry. 


114  ETYMOLOGY.  §  82 

^"'?  to  fear.  it5^  trans,  or  mtrans.(Esth.  Xp2  to  thirst. 

123   (Isa.  24:  20  123)  fo  7:5  x3^ trans.)  <0/?W  bi;[5   (Isa.  33:  9   bp;r) 

6e  heavy.  or  ie  /m/?.  fo  wither. 

Tiis  fo  iie  r/o/i^.  na  <o  die.  VCW  to  hate. 

irib  and  ^iWo  ^M<  ow.    ^23  to  fade.  bso  to  be  brought  low. 

(2)  The  following  have  Tsere  in  pause,  §  65,  or  as  a  pretonic  vowel, 
§  64.  2,  before  a  suffix,  but  Pattalih  in  other  cases.  Such  as  only  occur  in 
pause  or  with  suffixes  are  printed  with  Tsere. 

2nx  to  love.  iprj  to  lack.  oip  to  be  holy. 

Di'N  to  be  guilty,  lEP  to    blush    (distin-  2115  to  come  near. 

p;i3  to  swell.  guished  from  IBH  2^1   to  be  hungry. 

"125  to  prevail.  to  dig).  S2b  to  be  sated. 

^-5  to  be  ov  become  great.  Cjy^  to  be  tveary.  T.T2'::  to  rejoice. 

p2i  to  cleave  to.  c^"^  to  j^ossess.  tiid  to  forget. 

*i\yi  to  grow  fat.  ci'D  to  be  pleasavt.  'z'^  to  dwell. 

^nn  to  cease.  cir"  to  be  strong.  ap-r  to  be  desolate. 

■j'in  to  be  leavened.  n^:i  to  come  upon,  to  vh'O  to  hear. 

rjin  to  be  profaned.  prosper. 

Several  others  are  marked  with  Tsere  in  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius,  in 
which  that  vowel  does  not  occur. 

(3)  The  following  have  Hholem: 

"lix  to  shine.  ^i;:  to  be  able.  S'-i  (Ps.  18:  15  ai)  fo 

TTia  to  be  ashamed.  uip^  to  snare.  shoot. 

2"iu  to  be  good.  Vl';  (see%86.a)to  flow,  ii^a  (Gen.43:  U-^riVp;^) 

li^  to  dread.  )h';?  to  be  small.  to  be  bereaved. 

2.  The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  p  to  the  letters 
of  the  root;  thus,  bt:pD,  which  by  §  61.  1,  becomes  bbpD. 

3.  The  Piel  and  Pual  are  formed  by  doubhng  the 
second  radical  and  attaching  the  appropriate  vowels; 
thus,  btop,  btj). 

4.  The  Hiphil  and  Hophal  are  formed  by  prefixing 
n  with  the  proper  vowels;  thus,  b'ppn,  bbpH. 

5.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing  TJl  to  the  con- 
struct infinitive  of  the  Piel;  thus,  btsprn.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  sibilants  D,  12J  or  TT,  the  T\  of  the  pre- 
fixed syllable  will  be  transposed  with  it,  b^rcri,  TjBri'i'ri, 
:i^PTrr7.  If  the  first  radical  be  iS,  the  T\  will  be  transposed, 


§  82  PERFECT  VERBS.  1  ]  5 

and  in  addition  changed  to  t:,  e.  g,  plti'ir.  If  the  first 
radical  be  one  of  the  hnguals  "I,  t:  or  ri,  the  T\  will  be 
assimilated  or  united  to  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  p^'^Ti,  "iniur], 

a.  In  one  instance  MSa^rarri  Jer.  49:  3  n  remains  before  ^  without 
transposition,  which  would  bring  three  linguals  in  close  connection,  and 
once  it  is  assimilated  to  la,  Eccl.  7:  16  ci?!;!"';,  elsewhere  CriFld"^;  n  is  like- 
wise assimilated  to  the  sibilant  7  in  the  only  Hithpael  form  in  wliich  that 
letter  is  the  initial  of  the  root  ^k^f}  Isa.  1:  16;  in 'the  Aramaean  "iH^fri  the  n 
is  transposed  and  changed  to  ^.  In  one  instance  D^pQ'in^a  Judg.  19:22  n 
remains  without  assimilation  before  1.  The  r  may  either  be  assimilated  or 
not  to  the  initial  3  of  two  verbs  N^3,  NC:,  and  the  initial  3  of  two  "13,  "S^. 
It  is  assimilated  to  the  3  of  033,  which  occurs  but  twice  in  the  Hithpael, 
to  the  5  of  yii^,  which  only  occurs  once  and  in  one  instance  to  "i,  viz.  CJ9'1N 
Isa.  33:  10  but  daiin^  Dan.  11:  36. 

b.  The  seven  species  may,  agreeably  to  their  formation,  be  reduced  to 
three  with  their  derivatives,  viz.: 

Active  1.  Kal  2.  Piel  3.  Hiphil 

Passive  Pual  Hophal 

Middle  Niphal  Hithpael 

(1)  The  prefixed  letters  of  the  Niphal  and  Hithpael  3  and  T\  (with  tl 
prosthetic,  §  53.  1.  a)  are  probably  in  their  origin  fragmentary  pronouns 
signifying  self.  The  idea  primarily  suggested  is  that  of  performing  an 
action  upon  one's  self;  but  in  the  Niphal  usually,  and  in  the  Hithpael 
occasionally,  the  reflexive  signification  has,  as  in  certain  tenses  of  the  Greek 
middle  and  in  the  reciprocal  verbs  of  some  modem  languages,  given  place 
to  the  passive.  In  the  Aramaean  the  forms  with  a  prefixed  TN  have  not 
only  quite  lost  their  original  character  as  reflexives,  but  have  superseded 
all  other  passives. 

(2)  The  idea  of  causation  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal,  is  not  due,  as  in 
the  Indo-European  causatives,  to  the  introduction  of  a  syllable  directly 
suggesting  it.  It  appears  to  be  primarily  another  intensive  form,  with  which 
usage  has  ordinarily  connected,  as  it  frequently  has  with  the  Piel,  the  notion 
of  productive  energy  or  the  quickening  of  an  intransitive  into  a  transitive 
As  in  the  Piel  and  its  derivatives,  the  idea  of  intensity  is  suggested  by 
giving  a  doubled  and  consequently  more  intense  pronunciation  to  the  central 
radical;  so  in  the  Hiphil,  by  a  like  symbolism,  the  power  of  the  root  is 
augmented  by  the  accession  of  a  new  initial  syllable,  the  weak  letter  n 
merely  supporting  the  vowel,  like  the  corresponding  X  in  Aramaean  and  Arabic. 

(3)  The  distinction  between  active  and  passive  in  the  intensive  and 
causative  species  is  made  by  the  vowels  alone.  In  Arabic  all  the  active 
forms  have  the  vowel  a,  katala,  kattala  etc.,  and  the  passives  tt  and  i,  kutila, 
kuttila  etc.  So  in  Hebrew,  as  is  obvious  from  their  inflections,  a  was  orig- 
inally the  vowel  not  of  Kal  only  but  of  all  the  active  species,  Vip?  and 


1. 

Kal 

bb]^ 

2. 

Niphal 

-t2i>? 

3. 

Piel 

'^p 

4. 

Pual 

^^p 

5. 

Hipliil 

^'ppn 

6. 

Hophal 

bbj^n 

7. 

Hithpael 

bbj^nn 

116  ETYMOLOGY.  §  83 

b'ipn  being  modifications  of  Jcattal  and  halctal.  "When  in  Arabic  i  or  u,  ai 
in  Hebrew  e  or  o,  is  the  second  vowel  of  the  first  or  Kal  species,  it  has  an 
intransitive  signification. 

§  83.  If  bpJD  to  kill  be  taken  as  the  representative  oi 
the  regular  verb,  the  various  species  with  their  signifi- 
cations will  be  as  follows,  viz.: 

to  kill. 

to  he  killed. 

to  kill  many  or  to  massacre, 

to  he  massacred. 

to  cause  to  kill. 

to  he  caused  to  kill. 

to  kill  one's  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite 
which  is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification  therefore  is  he  has  killed, 
etc.  These  being  the  simplest  forms  of  the  various  species,  however,  and 
destitute  of  any  sign  of  tense  or  person,  are  commonly  used  to  represent 
the  species;  and  in  this  sense  the  proper  equivalent  is  the  infinitive,  which 
is  the  form  used  for  designating  verbs  in  English. 

b.  The  verb  bl?)^  is  well  fitted  for  a  model,  and  is  now  genei'ally  so 
employed.  The  consonants,  which  compose  its  root,  have  no  peculiarities 
to  interfere  with  its  inflection,  it  has  a  signification  capable  of  being  car- 
ried through  all  the  species,  and  as  it  exists  lilcewise  in  the  cognate  lan- 
guages, it  ofl'ers  a  good  basis  for  their  comparison.  It  occurs,  indeed,  but 
three  times  in  the  Bible,  Job  13:  15,  24:  14,  Ps.  139:  19,  and  in  but  one 
species;  still  the  very  rarity  of  its  occurrence  only  restricts  it  more  com- 
pletely to  its  use  as  a  reijresentative  or  typical  verb.  The  old  Jewish  model 
V^Q,  §  76.  2,  is  objectionable  on  account  of  its  weak  letter  'S,  and  on  ac- 
count of  the  twofold  sound  of  its  initial  radical  Q,  which,  with  its  Daghesh- 
lene,  might  prove  perplexing  to  beginners. 

c.  (I)  The  existence  of  other  and  less  usual  species  is  a  needless  as- 
sumption. The  Poel,  Pilel,  Pilpel  and  the  like,  are  not  additional  species 
but  identical  in  character  and  signification  with  those  already  named.  The 
more  copious  Arabic,  with  its  nicer  shades  of  distinction,  has  greatly  mul- 
tiplied the  number  of  its  species  or  conjugations,  incorporating  into  its 
standard  paradigm  forms  corresponding  to  some  of  these  which  the  Hebrew 
only  occasionally  employs.  In  the  latter  language,  however,  they  are  at  the 
utmost  alternate  forms  substituted  in  place  of  the  ordinary  ones,  and 
found  for  the  most  part  in  the  imperfect  verbs,  to  the  nfcture  of  whos« 
radicals  they  owe  their  peculiarities  of  structure.  When,  as  is  the  case  in 
a  very  few  instances,  there  is  a  double  form  to  a  particular  species  in  the 
same  verb,  usage  has  mostly  created  an  arbitrary  distinction  between  them, 


§  84  PERFECT  VEBR8.  117 

e.  g.  Pi.  -yj  to  uproot  and  dVi  to  tal;e  root;  Pi.  C'p  to  caus*  to  stanrl, 
applied  to  covenants  and  oaths,  to  ratify,  and  C^Jlp,  in  a  physical  sense,  to 
raise  up;  Hi.  n'^in  to  cause  to  rest,  to  set  down,  and  ITl'Ti  to  leave,  to  Id 
alone.  There  is  no  objection  to  the  employment  of  these  names  as  con- 
venient designations  of  particular  modes  of  formation,  provided  it  is  under- 
stood that  they  mean  nothing  more. 

(2)  There  are  very  few  instances  of  what  may  be  called  compound 
species:  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  "3x^3  Isa.  59:  3,  Lam.  4:  14,  to  he  exceed- 
ingly defiled,  stronger  than  the  simple  Niphal  bx;:;  Niphal  of  Hithpael 
«|-,B-3  Ezek.  23:  48,  1325  Deut.  21:  8,  :rijr."d:  Prov.  27:  15. 

§  84.  To  each  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  or 
perfect  and  future  or  imperfect,  two  forms  of  the  in- 
finitive, an  absolute  and  a  construct,  a  participle,  and, 
except  to  the  Pual  and  Hophal  which  as  pure  passives 
cannot  express  a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  has 
both  an  active  and  a  passive  participle,  one  more,  con- 
sequently, than  the  other  species.  The  preterite  or 
perfect  of  each  species  is  the  form  already  described, 
§  83.  The  remaining  parts  are  formed  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  formed  by  changing  the 
last  vowel  in  Hiplul  and  Hophal  to  Tsere,  and  in  each  of 
the  other  species  to  Hholem,  obser\dng  likewise  that 
Hhirik  in  the  penult  of  Piel  and  Hiphil  is  to  be  changed 
to  Pattahh.  (See  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect  Verb.)  This 
rule  gives  to  Niphal  the  infinitive  bDpp,  which  form  actu- 
ally occurs,  §  91.  Z^.  If,  however,  the  original  Sh'va  be 
suffered  to  remain  after  the  prefixed  D,  §  82.  2,  thus, 
bbp3,  a  prosthetic  H  will  be  required  in  order  to  its  pro- 
nunciation, §  53.  1.  a,  after  which  3  will  be  assimilated 
to  the  following  letter,  §  54.  2,  and  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  64.  2,  added  to  the  p  in  order  to  give  full  effect  to  the 
reduplication;  thus  bib|Sn,  which  is  the  form  written  in 
the  paradigm. 

2.  The  construct  infinitive  is  formed  from  the  absolute 
in  the  Kal  by  rejecting  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §  82.  1,  in 


118 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§84 


Niplial  by  changing  the  last  vowel  to  Tsere,  and  in  the 
remaining  species  by  making  the  last  vowel  conform  to 
the  corresponding  vowel  of  the  preterite. 

3.  The  future  or  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  con- 
stract  infinitive  by  the  appropriate  personal  prefixes;  if 
the  first  letter  of  the  infinitive  be  H,  it  is  rejected,  §  53. 3, 
and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix. 

a.  As  the  pretei'ite  tense  is  in  certain  cases  used  of  the  present  or  the 
future,  and  the  future  of  the  present  or  the  past,  it  has  been  supposed  that 
primarily  and  radically  they  denote  the  mode  of  an  action  as  complete  or 
incomplete  rather  than  the  time  of  its  occurrence.  It  has  hence  become 
customary  to  designate  them  as  the  Perfect  and  the  Imperfect. 

h.  (1)  Some  verbs  take  Pattahh  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  Kal  future 
instead  of  the  Hholem  of  the  construct  infinitive.  This  is  particularly  the 
case  with  intransitive  verbs.  Such  as  have  Tsere  in  the  preterite  regularly 
take  Pattahh  in  the  future;  of  the  list  given  §  82.  1.  a.  (1)  and  (2)  but  three 
-isH,  bzs ,  'p'::  take  Hholem,  and  two  ySH  and  ciia  take  indifferently 
Hholem  or  Pattahh.  Of  verbs  with  middle  o  in  the  preterite  three  btj, 
"tip?  and  bi'ij  take  Pattahh  in  the  future;  the  rest  either  do  not  occur  in 
the  future,  or  have  imperfect  letters  in  their  root  which  obscure  their  tru« 
formation. 

(2)  The  following  verbs  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  Pattahh 
likewise  in  the  Kal  future.  Those  which  do  not  occur  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
or  occur  only  in  forms  which  do  not  reveal  the  character  of  the  voAvel  fol- 
lowing the  second  radical,  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk.  Verbs  having 
a  Pattahh  in  the  future,  which  is  due  to  imperfect  letters  in  the  root, 
(e.  g.  Pe  Yodh,  Ayin  (iuttural,  Lamedh  Guttural),  are  not  included  in 
this  list. 


^isj  to  mourn. 
*Ci^X  to  learn. 
*YV^  to  be  strong. 
*7^^  to  be  angry. 
*bhin  to  become  vain. 

pin  to  be  strong. 

fiin  to  he  tvise. 

•qt'ti  to  be  dark. 

*bp3  to  be  foolish. 

^b  to  learn. 

pTO  to  be  stoeet 


11353  to  come  near. 

ViiJJ  (intrans.)  to  fall  off. 

piJ3  to  kiss. 
*7^n3  to  be  poured. 

p^D  (§  86.  b.)  to  ascend. 

aiiy  to  love. 

'ITS  to  smoke. 
*pr©  to  be  removed. 
*pn:£  to  be  righteous. 

i^;5  to  be  lightly  es- 
teemed. 


*2t3)5  to  he  attentive. 

yi'i  to  lie  doivn, 

li'n  to  rage  or  tremble, 

*3'bi  to  be  wet, 

Dd"!  to  ride. 

*n£'i  to  spread, 

*np'n  to  rot, 

abia  to  lie  down. 

B^d  to  rule. 

*n^d  to  be  complete. 

'■jpa  to  grow  fat. 


(3)  The  following  with  Pattahh  in  the  preterite  have  both  Pattahh  »ni 
Hholem  in  the  future. 


§85 

PERFECT  VERB3. 

119 

-ir  to  deal  treacher- 

tin to  he  hot. 

T^'ijj  to  lite. 

ously. 

*in  to  be  gracious. 

bvQ  fo  do. 

"lb  fut,  0,  to  tear,  fut. 

*>ynn  fut.  0,  to  plough, 

::"i;s  fo  s/ri;?  o^. 

a,  to  resolve. 

fnt.  a,  to  be  silent. 

nop  to  use  divination. 

"Bin   (mostly  fut.  e)  <0^0. 

Tiy.2  to  tear. 

"s;^  fut.  0,  fo  cut  off,  flit. 

z.b'i   to  curse. 

■li;;  to  form. 

a,  fo  be  short. 

*tbr  to  hind. 

^^"9  to  trespass. 

nri3  <o  resf. 

*"C?r  fut.  0,  to  subdue, 

1^3  to  flee. 

nrri  fo  6e  finished. 

fut.  a,  to  he  weak. 

"IT 3    to  voio. 

c.  Some  imperfect  verbs,   chiefly  Pe  Yodh,  take  Tsere  in  the  second 
eyllable  of  the  Kal  future,  e.  g.  ac",  iri"]. 

4.  The  imperative  has  the  same  form  with  the  con- 
struct infinitive  except  in  Hiphil,  where  the  last  vowel  is 
Tsere  as  in  the  infinitive  absolute. 

a.  Where  the  Kal  future  has  Pattahh  or  Tsere  the  imperative  takes 
the  same. 

5.  The  Kal  active  participle  takes  the  form  bpp  and 
the  passive  b^b]^.  The  participle  of  the  Niphal  lengthens 
the  last  vowel  of  the  preterite  from  Pattahh  to  Kamets; 
those  of  the  other  species  are  formed  by  prefixing  '2  to 
the  construct  infinitive,  rejecting  tl  where  this  is  the 
initial  letter,  §  53. 3,  and  lengthening  the  last  vowel  where 
this  is  short. 

§  85.  1.  The  preterite  and  future  are  inflected  through 
three  pt^rsons,  the  imperative  only  in  the  second  person, 
a  command  presupposing  the  form  of  direct  address. 
There  are  also  distinct  forms  for  the  singular  and  plural 
numbers  and  for  the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 
Verbal  inflections  are  made  by  means  of  pronominal  frag- 
ments added  to  the  end  of  the  preterite  and  imperative, 
and  for  the  most  part  prefixed  to  the  future. 

a.  Tlie  following  are  the  fragments  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  various 
parts  of  the  verb: 

Preterite  or  Perfect  (^i^). 

(1)  SixGtHiAB.  'drd  pers.  masc.  The  third  person  alone  has  no  per- 
sonal ending  in  any  of  its  forms;  as  each  of  the  others  has  such  a  termi- 


1 20  ETYMOLOGY.  §  85 

nation,  none  was  needed  for  the  sake  of  distinction.  Nothing  more  was 
required  than  to  indicate  the  gender  and  number.  The  masculine  singular 
is  expressed  by  the  simple  form  of  the  species  with  no  appended  sign 
whatever. 

3  /Vm.  The  original  feminine  termination  is  n_ ,  which,  appended  to 
the  masculine,  would  give  ^i^^p^,  a  form  used  before  suffixes,  §  101.  1,  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  §  86.  b.  Commonly,  how- 
ever, in  verbs  as  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  the  final  ri  is  dropped,  §  55.  2.  c 
and  the  previous  vowel,  which  thus  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  ii 
lengthened,  <^^^ip. 

2  masc.     The  appended  Pi  is  derived  from  nnx, 

2  fern.     PI  from  PiX. 

1  com.  "ipi  changed  from  "'S  of  "^rJX;  compare  the  similar  relation  of 
the  suffixes  ?],  CD  to  the  pronouns  tinx,  nnx  §  72.  The  Ethiopic  retains  the 
k  unaltered,  Jcatalku. 

Plural.  2  com.  The  original  plural  termination  §  71.  6.  is  a  nasal  D 
or  )  preceded  by  the  vowel  A.  The  full  ending  '|1  is  still  found  in  a  very 
few  instances,  §  86.  b,  generally  the  )  is  dropped  §  55.  2.  a. 

2  masc.  CPi  from  CPiX. 
2  fern.    '|Pi  from  )r^. 

1  com.    «  from  >iix. 


Future  or  Imperfect  (i^ny). 


(2)  In  the  inflections  of  this  tense  the  signs  for  person  are  prefixed, 
those  for  gender  and  number  are  mostly  affixed;  the  fragmentar}-  pronoun 
stands  first  as  the  subject  and  the  verbal  predicate  assumes  the  appropriate 
forms  of  gender  and  number  to  agree  with  it. 

Singular.  3rd  per s.  masc.  The  prefixed  1  is  from  X^lPl;  the  vowel  u, 
which  distinguishes  the  masculine  pronoun,  is  changed  to  the  correspond- 
ing semivowel  1,  and  this  at  the  beginning  of  words  becomes  i,  §  56.  2. 

3  fem.    PI,  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  is  here  prefixed. 

2  masc.  and  fem.  The  prefixed  Pi  is  from  tipS,  ''Pix,  from  the  latter  of 
which  is  derived  the  appended  "> ,  of  the  feminine. 

1  com.    The  prefixed  X  is  from  "^iX. 

Plueal.  3  masc.  and  2  masc.  The  same  plural  termination  as  in  the 
preterite  is  appended  to  the  corresponding  singular  forms. 

3  fem.  and  2  fem.  The  feminine  plural  is,  as  in  the  pronouns  HSn, 
njPiX,  denoted  by  Pi5  appended  to  the  singular,  the  2  fem.  sing,  termina* 
tion  "'.  being  dropped  as  superfluous. 

1  com.    The  prefixed  3  is  from  lix. 


§  85  PERFECT  VETIBS.  121 

hnperative  (''^^^),  etc. 

(3)  No  designation  of  the  person  is  here  necessarj'  ae  the  second  is  the 
only  one  in  use.  Gender  and  number  are  indicated  by  the  same  termina- 
tions as  in  the  corresponding  person  of  the  future.  The  future  forms  will, 
in  fact,  in  every  case  directly  yield  those  of  the  imperative  by  rejecting 
the  prefixed  Fl,  the  sign  of  the  second  person,  and  restoring  the  tl  in  those 
cases  in  which  it  has  been  suppressed. 

(4)  The  Infinitive  ("ripo  fountain,  whence  other  forms  are  derived)  is 
an  abstract  verbal  noun  commonly  masculine,  but  sometimes  with  a  femi- 
nine termination. 

(5)  The  Participle  ("'3'13'^a  intermediate  between  the  preterite  and  the 
future)  shares  the  inflections  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  The  "O  prefixed  in 
several  of  the  species  is  from  the  indefinite  pronouns  "^o  or  n^. 

2.  The  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb  in  all  the  species 
are  shown  by  Paradigm  II  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

a.  In  order  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  paradigm,  it  should  be 
observed  that  certain  changes  result,  from  attaching  the  personal  inflections 
to  the  verb,  which  are  to  be  explained  by  the  general  laws  of  sounds  and 
syllables. 

(1)  The  prefixes  of  the  future  occasion  no  changes  unless  they  stand 
before  n  which  is  rejected,  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  prefix,  §  53.  3,  e.  g. 
^i:i3";  for  ^bi^n"?  01"  stand  before  a  vowelless  letter  when  the  Sh'va  of  the 
prefix  becomes  Hhirik,  §  61.  1,  thus  forming  a  new  syllable  to  which  the 
initial  radical  is  attached,  e.  g.  btip'^  for  bBp%  Where  X  of  the  first  person 
singular  would  receive  Hhirik,  it  takes  the  diphthongal  Seghol  instead, 
§  60.  1.  o  (5),  e.  g.  ^tijpx,  ^i:;3N. 

(2)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  vowel,  viz.,  rt^  and  "^^  of  the  feminine 
singular  and  ^  of  the  plural,  occasion  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  in  the 
ultimate,  §  66.  2,  which  is  no  longer  needed,  except  in  the  Hiphil  whose 
long  "1.  is  retained  in  the  preterite  and  future,  and  takes  the  place  of  {  ) 
in  the  imperative,  e.  g.  "^^^J^,  "^^^pn  but  tl^'^upfi.  In  the  Kal  imperative 
the  rejection  takes  place  although  it  creates  a  necessity  for  the  formation 
of  a  new  syllable,  "^rjp,  ^^-Jp  for  ""b-Jp,  sib'jp  from  btip,  §  61.  1. 

(3)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  consonant  Fi  or  of  a  simple  syllable 
Fi,  ipl,  13,  n:  occasion  no  change,  except  the  compression  of  the  antecedent 
vowel,  which  now  stands  before  two  consonants,  to  (_)  in  the  preterite,  and 
from  ■!_  to  (..)  in  the  future,  ri^i?p<7,  '^5't?P^i  §61.4.  But  verbs  with  middle 
0  retain  the  Hholem  in  the  Kal  preterite,  "^Fil'ii"'. 

(4)  Terminations  consisting  of  a  mixed  syllable  dFl,  'ri  occasion  the 
same  compression  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate,  and  inasmuch  as  they 
always  receive  the  accent,  §  33.  3,  they  likewise  cause  the  rejection  from 
the  penult  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  the  pretonic  Kamets,  which  ow-es  its  ex- 
istence to  the  proximity  of  the  tone  syllable,  §  82.  1,  Cnlp^jp  from  Vafs. 


122  ETYMOLOGY,  §  86 


Remaeks  on  the  Peefect  Veebs. 

KAL. 

§  86.  a.  Preterite.  Verbs  with  middle  Tsere  exchange  this  for  Pattahh 
upon  the  accession  of  a  personal  affix  beginning  with  a  consonant.  Those 
with  middle  Hholem  retain  this  vowel,  unless  it  be  deprived  of  the  accent 
when  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  Trrj?,  ^tTiil,  ^ri'-i^,  i^^,^";,  "'"'^^V 
The  second  vowel,  whatever  it  be,  is  regularly  dropped  before  affixes 
beginning  with  a  vowel,  but  here,  as  elsewhere  throughout  the  paradigm, 
is  restored  and  if  need  be  lengthened  on  the  reception  of  a  pause  accent, 
e.  g.  ^nirs,  !!^:jE.n,  !lbb\  The  words  "Bn  Judg.  5:  5,  nrj;  Isa.  63:  19,  64:  2, 
are  by  Kimchi,  Mikhlol  fol.  5  regarded  as  Kal  preterites  from  VtJ  flowed,  in 
which  case  the  second  must  be  added  to  the  list  of  forms  with  Daghesh- 
forte  emphatic,  §  24.  c?,  by  Gesenius  as  Niphal  preterites  from  b^T  shook, 
comp.  n3n3  Gen.  11:7,  ^T'i:  Am.  3:11  from  b^3,  113. 

6.  Sing.  3  fern.  The  old  form  with  n  is  found  constantly  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  occasionally  in  Lamedh  Aleph,  and  in  two  instances  besides,  rbli< 
Deut.  32 :  36  (with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  of  a  following  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1),  and  nh'^j  Ezek.  46:  17  from  3Tr.  The  vowel  letter  X  is 
once  written  in  place  of  n,  xnns  Ezek.  31:  5  Klhibh,  §  11.  1.  a. 

2  masc.  The  voAvel  letter  n  is  sometimes  appended  as  in  the  pronoun 
npiN;  from  which  the  termination  is  taken,  nnniia  Mai.  2:  14,  nn-jid  Jer. 
17:  4;  so  in  other  species  besides  Kal,  tiREOSS  Gen.  31:  30,  I^P"?"]  Job 
38:  12  Kthibh,  t\T\i2'S.T}  Ps.  73:  27.  In  the  last  example  the  n  of  the  root 
is  united  by  Daghesh- forte  with  the  n  of  the  personal  affix;  this  union 
regularly  occurs  between  roots  ending  with  n  and  affixes  beginning  with 
the  same  letter  •^ni:i3  Job  23:  17,  nxpn  Ps.  89:  45,  ^nSJ^n  Isa.  16:  10, 
Cnacin  Ex.  5:  5,  iiPp  Ezek.  28:  8,  "^iTiii  Gen.  19:  19,  "^f^nnni.  Jer.  49:  37. 

2  fern.  The  full  termination  "^ri  of  "^nx  is  frequently  added  in  Jeremiah 
and  Ezekiel  and  occasionally  elsewhere,  "'P'^bj  Ezek.  16:  22,  and  repeatedly 
in  the  same  chapter,  '^7r\h^^  Euth  3:3;  so  in  other  species  '^Pi'iz'^  Jer.  3:  5, 
"Fi-iiab  Jer.  13:  21.     See  also  Jer.  4:  19,  22:  23,  46:  11. 

1  com.  The  vowel  letter  "^  is,  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule,  §  11.  1.  o, 
omitted  in  four  instances  in  the  K'thibh,  though  it  is  supplied  b}^  the  K'ri, 
n:'-^  Ps.  140:  13,  Job  42:  2,  n-^ia  1  Kin.  8:  48,  pbr;  Ezek.  16:  59;  and  per- 
haps Pi"irN  Ps.  16:  2  may  in  like  manner  be  for  '^ri'ipit. 

Plur.  3  com.  The  full  ending  "I  only  occurs  in  '^V^'^  Deut.  8:  3,  16, 
'!ip:£  Isa.  26:  16,  and  "TTp";  Isa.  29:  21  from  iTp;,  the  restoration  of  the 
Hholem  before  the  pause  accent  causing  the  rejection  of  the  Kamets,  which 
is  a  pretonic  vowel  and  can  onl3'  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the 
accent;  the  form  is  thus  sufficiently  explained  without  the  necessity  of 
assuming  it  to  be  the  future  of  a  verb  'C'p  which  nowhere  else  occurs.  An 
otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  is  twice  added  to  this  person,  as  is  regularly  the  case 
in  Arabic,    Nili^n   Josh.  10:  24,    X13X   Isa.  28:  12.     The   forms   of  similar 


§87,88  BEMARKS  ON  THE  PERFECT  VEEBS.  123 

appearance  X^l'ij  Ps.  139:  20,  Xlibr  Jer.  10:  5,  are  in  reality  of  different 
character  as  the  ^t  is  in  these  a  radical,  whose  vowel  has  been  shifted  to 
the  preceding  letter,  §  57.  2.  (3).  The  occasional  omission  of  the  vowel 
letter  ^  from  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  n^X  1  Sam.  13:  19,  ^2p  Esth.  9:  27,  iiipE'J 
Deut.  21:7,  n'^'n  Josh.  18:  12.  U.  19,  n-^-O'i  Ezek.  35:  12  indicates  a 
difference  of  reading.  The  words  of  the  text  are  in  the  singular,  and 
i-equire  the  pointing  "irx  etc.  "^^E",;;  etc.;  the  K'ri  has  substituted  ^'^'3X, 
"rE'J  etc.  for  the  sake  of  a  more  exact  concord  of  the  verbs  with  their  sub- 
jects, §  48. 

2  masc.  and  fern.  There  is  no  example  of  a  verb  middle  o  in  the  second 
person  plural;  the  forms  in  the  paradigm  are  inferred  from  analogy,  to 
indicate  which  they  are  enclosed  in  parentheses.  In  njniirn  Am.  4:  3,  f1^ 
is  added  to  the  2  fern,  as  to  the  corresponding  pronoun. 

1  com.  "When  the  last  radical  is  "]  it  combines  with  the  3  of  this  person 
by  Daghesh-forte,  ^ih  Gen.  34:  16,   ^d"::?  2  Chron.  14:  10,  A^l  Judg.  19:  13. 

§  87.  iNFiNrrivB.  The  Hholem  of  the  construct  is  usually  written  with- 
out 1,  153  Isa.  33;  1,  though  not  invariably,  "pUJ  and  "pb^,  C^3  and  dihs, 
and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  64.  1,  "~3"a  Gen. 
36:  31,  -CDp  Ezek.  21:  26.  28.  34,  — n^y  Nah.  2:  1.  The  Hholem  of  the 
absolute  infinitive  is  usually  though  not  invariably  written  with  1,  e.  g.  1153 
Isa.  48:  8  but  '2y:i  Lev.  15:  24,  and  is  immutable.  The  construct  infinitive 
has  Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem  in  2i':3  1  Kin.  1:  21  et  passim  and  1;D"J 
Eccles.  12:  4.  The  feminine  form  of  the  construct  infinitive  occurs  repeat- 
edly in  imperfect  though  it  is  of  rare  occurrence  in  perfect  verbs,  e.  g. 
n^3^  Deut.  11:  22,  Innro  Ex.  29:  29,  ni-iJD  Ex.  36:  2,  Irj-io  Ezek.  21:  16, 
nia-i  Lev.  20:  16,  riX3b,  nir;X,  nx"i^  nix^  Jer.  31:  12,  n'irn  Ezek.  16:  5, 
iiSt^::  Lev.  15:  32.  The  prep,  b  is  invariably  prefixed  to  infinitives  of  this 
description  with  the  exception  of  iiifr^'-li'  Hos.  5:2.  In  Pe  Yodh  and  Lamedh 
He  verbs  the  feminine  is  the  customary  form. 

§  88.  Fdtuee.  3  masc.  The  Hholem  is  commonly  written  without  Vav, 
though  often  with  it  T\i'01,  lli:'^  and  sinz"],  and  before  Makkeph  is  shortened 
to  Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  64.  1,  ~T\?'>2']  Isa.  32:  1,  the  Vav  being  in  such  cases 
rejected  by  the  K'ri  if  found  in  the  K'thibh,  e.  g.  "^'rirx  Hos.  8:  12;  in 
-b"i35";  Josh.  18:  20  the  Hholem  remains.  The  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is 
rejected,  as  is  the  case  throughout  the  paradigm,  upon  the  reception  of  a 
vowel  affix,  §  66.  2,  unless  retained  or  restored  by  the  pause  accent,  §  65.  2, 
i^rbp";  Prov.  8:  15,  ^ll^^ri  Jer.  10:  2;  twice,  hoAvever,  instead  of  rejection 
Hholem  is  changed  to' Shurek  ^h^S^I  Ex.  18:  26,  "^n^i^-jn  Ruth  2:  8.  A  like 
form  appears  in  the  K'thibh,  Prov.  4:  16  ■ibld3\ 

3  fern.  The  s'gn  of  the  feminine  is  in  two  instances  added  both  at  the 
beginning  and  the  end  of  the  verb,  viz.:  nrxiin  Deut.  33:  16,  T^n^'i^n  Job 
22:  21,  paragogic  n^  being  appended  to  the  former,  §  97.  1,  and  a  pro- 
nominal suffix  to  the  latter.  A  like  duplication  of  the  sign  of  the  second 
person  feminine  occurs  in  Pxin  1  Sam.  25:  34  K'ri,  where  the  K'thibh  hai 
the  fuller  ending  TX^n,  comp.  §§  168.  1,  171.  1. 


124  ETYMOLOGY.  §  88 

2  fem.  1  is  sometimes  added  to  the  long  vowel  with  which  this  person 
ends  'pira-jn  Ruth  2:  8,  T^ibsPi  Euth  3:  4,  'j'l'nSSl'^ri  1  Sam.  1:  14,  'plJinri  Isa. 
45:  10.  Occasionally  the  feminine  ending  is  omitted  and  the  mascuUne 
form  used  instead,  e.  g.  "Hialri  Isa.  57 :  8. 

1  com.  p&X  Ps.  139:  8,  though  by  some  grammarians  referred  to  pO:, 
is  probably  for  'p^'O'^  from  p3o,  the  liquid  b  being  excluded,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  conservative  inserted  in  the  previous  letter,  §  53.  3. 

Plur.  2  mase.  and  3  masc.  The  full  plural  termination  "Jl  is  of  more 
frequent  occurrence  here  than  in  the  preterite,  the  vowel  of  the  second 
radical  being  either  retained  or  rejected,  'f^'iiJp']  Ruth  2:  9,  'j^'^b^J^)  Josh. 
24:  15,  "I'lb'nn;!  Ex.  9:  29,  •|^3ni:3'^  Josh.  4:  6,  'j'l'Opb-;,  'it'Sa'^  Ps.  104:  28^  )^'2':i-] 
1  Sam.  2:  22,  Josh.  2:  8,  "iin^'ZJn  Deut,  11:  22,  "I'^^xn  Jer.  21:  3;  so  in  other 
species,  IliiriS-j  Job  19:  23,  I'i^S;?";  Job  21:  24,  ')inann  Gen.  32:  20  aad 'j^inain 
Ps.  58:  2,  'liiirpsn  2  Kin.  6:  19,  '  "iVjirSPi  Mic.  2:  8,'  !'ii:f^En'^  Job  9:  6.  It  is 
chiefly  found  at  the  end  of  a  clause  or  verse,  the  pausal  emphasis  delight- 
ing in  lengthened  forms,  or  before  words  beginning  with  a  weak  letter, 
to  separate  the  final  vowel  more  completelj'  from  that  of  the  following 
initial  sj'llable.  In  the  judgment  of  Nordheimer  BVili'IJ";  Isa.  35 :  1  preserves 
this  ending  in  a  still  older  form;  Ewald  thinks  the  final  "j  has  been  assimil- 
ated to  the  initial  33  of  the  following  word,  §  55.  1;  possibly  however, 
D  may  here  be,  as  it  usually  is,  the  3  plur.  suffix,  and  may  be  rendered  as 
in  the  common  English  version  shall  he  glad  for  them. 

3  fem.  In  a  very  few  cases  the  initial  "^  of  the  masculine  form  is  re- 
tained, the  distinction  of  gender  being  sufficiently  marked  by  the  termina- 
tion HD-iiir^  Dan.  8:  22,  nj'^ni  Gen.  30:  38,  nsnt:-;  1  Sam.  6:  12;  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  termination  ^  of  the  masculine  is  retained,  the  gender  being 
sufficiently  indicated  by  the  prefixed  H  ;  SirTI32in  Jer.  49:  11,  ^lilpn  Ezek. 
37:  7;  sometimes  the  gender  is  neglected  entirely  and  the  masculine  form 
used  for  the  feminine,  e.  g.  'l-wi^  Hos.  14:  1.  The  assumption  that  the 
3  fem.  plur.  is  used  for  the  3  fem.  sing,  in  tiSN'npri  Ex.  1:  10,  riS^'^ri  Job 
17:  16,  flipinn  Isa.  28:  3,  nni^'n  Isa.  27:  11,  njPiB'in  Judg.  5:  26,  is  un- 
necessarj';  in  the  first  passage  ninbp,  the  subject  of  the  verb,  is  used  in 
a  collective  sense,  wars  shall  occur.  Comp.  1  Kin  5:  17;  the  others  are  to 
be  similarl^^  explained  with  the  exception  of  the  last,  where  fi:  maj'  be  the 
suffix  with  Nun  epenthetic  in  place  of  the  more  usual  form  Hinbdn  her 
hand — she  puts  it  forth.  Comp.  Obad.  ver.  13. 

2  and  3  fem.  The  vowel  letter  n  is  occasionally  in  the  Pentateuch,  an  J 
more  rarely  in  other  books,  omitted  from  the  termination  ns,  particularly 
when  there  are  other  vowel  letters  in  the  word,  ^'J'^naril  Gen.  27:  1,^'jxir! 
Gen.  30:  38,  ^rin;]  Gen.  33:  6,  j"}rj!n  Ezek.  3:  20,  ^(""^ro^,,  nine  times  in  the 
Pentateuch,  three  times  in  Ezekiel,  and  once  in  1  Samuel. 

When  the  root  of  the  verb  ends  with  "  this  is  united  by  Daghesh-forte 
with  the  affix  nj,  iiiS'^n  Ezek.  17:  23,  tijiipn  Ezek.  32: 16,  or  without  Da- 
ghesh,  §  25,  T'^ivvs^  Ruth  1:  13,  Jf^J^xn  Isa.  60:  4,  njhn  Ps.  71:  23  in  nost 
editions.    So  in  the  fem.  plur.  imperative,  t^iixti  Gen.  4:  23. 


§  89,  90  EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PEKFECT  VERBS.  125 

§  89.  Ijjperative.  Sing.  masc.  The  Hholein  of  the  last  syllfcble,  as  in 
the  future  and  infinitive  construct,  is  mostly  written  without  1,  e.  g.  ip^ 
yet  not  always,  T\h^  and  "'s'^;  before  Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  Kamets 
Hhatuph  ""^"2  Judg.  9 :  14.  It  may  perhaps  be  similarly  shortened  without 
Makkeph  in  l"p  Judg.  19:  5,  comp.  ver.  8,  §  19.  2.  6,  or  the  vowel  may  be 
Kamets  lengthened  from  Pattabh  by  the  accent,  which  does  occur,  though 
rarelj',  with  conjunctives,  §  65.  h. 

Fern.  sing,  and  masc.  plur.  The  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  commonly 
Hhirik,  Inr  under  the  influence  of  the  rejected  Hholem  it  is  occasionally 
Kamets  Hhatuph,  §  61.  1,  '^rb'a  Judg.  9:  10,  tiir^  Ezek.  32:  20  (but  ilD'^-a 
Ex.  12:  21,  for  the  Methegh  see  §  45.  2),  ij^r  Zeph.  3:  14,  'h-j:  Mic.  1:  16, 
and  (with  1  retained  in  the  K'thibh)  "'^^Cp  1  Sam.  28:  8,  Judg.  9:  12.  Upon 
the  restoration  of  the  original  vowel  by  the  pause  accent,  the  vowel  under 
the  first  radical  is  dropped  as  no  longer  necessary,  ^'Jt':i  Zech.  7:  9,  iiiiS 
Nah.  2 :  9.  When  the  third  radical  is  an  aspirate  it  rarely  receives  Daghesh- 
lene  in  this  mood  though  preceded  by  Sh'va,  §  22.  a.  (1);  such  cases  as 
•^C'rn  Isa.  47:  2,  "'CpX  Jer.  10:  17,  are  exceptional. 

Fern.  plur.  The  final  vowel  n^  is  dropped  in  '^h':i  Gen.  4:  23,  §  61.  2; 
occasionally  n  is  not  written  though  the  vowel  remains,  ^")5<s?a  Kuth  1:  9, 
/|Xnp  Ruth  1 :  20. 

§  90.  Parxiciples.  Active.  The  Hholem  of  the  first  syllable  is  written 
indifferently  with  or  without  Vav,  n^3  and  l.^is,  mostly  without  when  addi- 
tions are  made  to  the  word.  In  r"irn^  Prov.  25:  19  Shurek  is  substituted 
for  Hholem,  unless,  as  Ewald  suggests,  it  is  a  Pual  participle  with  "2  omitted; 
or,  as  others  propose,  it  is  to  be  taken  as  an  abstract  noun.  The  Tsere  of 
the  second  syllable  is  written  without  "^  except  ^'■'ZO  2  Kin.  8:  21;  it  is 
shortened  to  Seghol  in  cVn  Isa.  41 :  7,  upon  the  recession  of  the  accent, 
and  to  Pattahh  in  InX  Deut.  32:  28.  Tpoin  Ps.  16:  5  and  ofeii  Isa.  29:  14, 
38:  5,  Eccles,  1:18  have  been  improperly  regarded  as  participles  with  Hhirik 
in  place  of  Tsere.  The  former  is  the  Hiph.  fut.  of  the  verb  "^",  which  is 
found  in  Arabic  though  it  occurs  only  in  this  place  in  Hebrew,  and  means 
thou  icilt  enlarge;  the  latter  is  the  ordinary  Hiphil  future  of  rc* ,  and  the 
construction  is  elliptical,  I  {am  he  ivho)  ivill  add.  Participles  are  rarely 
formed  from  neuter  verbs,  yet  ba:  fading,  C^'^  desolate,  t.vs,V  strong;  verbal 
adjectives  of  the  same  form  with  the  preterites  middle  e  and  0  being  mostly 
used  instead,  X^^a  full,  "(jbt  old,  "ij'""  afraid. 

Passive.  This,  in  the  few  cases  in  which  it  is  in  use  in  intransitive 
verbs,  has  the  sense  of  the  active,  11^3  and  uilib  icearing,  "(ruj  and  '\^Z'S 
dicelling,  raua  trusting;  there  are  occasional  instances  of  the  same  thing 
in  transitive  verbs,  ""iT  remembering,  '^hn  holding.  The  last  vowel  is  with 
few  exceptions  as  cis  Deut.  32 :  34,  np'J,  CX3  written  with  Vav. 

There  are  a  very  few  instances  in  which  participles  appear  to  be  in- 
flected in  the  diff'erent  persons  by  means  of  the  terminations  proper  to  the 
preterite.  This,  although  common  in  Syriac  and  Palestine  Aramseic,  occurs 
in  Hebrew  only  in  the  following  examples. 


126  ETYMOLOGY.  §  91 

2  fern.  sing.  ri*iVi  Gen.  16:  11,  Judg.  13:  5.  7;  and  with  the  fuller  end- 
ing 'M-'',  "^P?!?^  Jer.  22:  23,  "'Pisiili  Jer.  51:  13.  The  punctuators  must 
have  regarded  these  terminations  as  personal  inflections,  because  the  simple 
form  of  the  feminine  participle  and  that  which  it  always  has  when  joined 
with  a  noun  of  the  third  person,  is  m^^  Gen.  17:  19,  and  with  "^  paragogic 
■'Rznx  Hos.  10:  11  or  in  the  K'thibh  '^nni:-'  Ezek.  27:  3. 

2  masc.  plur.  tspiwn^'?  Ezek.  8:  16,  the  Hithpael  participle  of  iififfl. 
The  prophet  instead  of  simply  describing  their  act,  may  be  supposed  to 
repeat  the  language  of  the  idolaters  themselves  regarding  it,  thus  indicating 
their  complacency  in  their  iniquitous  worship,  and  they  (said  to  one  an- 
other) ye  are  tvorshipping ;  the  anomalous  word,  which  is  less  surprising  in 
Ezekiel  than  it  would  be  elsewhere,  being  indicative,  as  Lightfoot  and 
others  suggest,  of  the  anomalous  character  of  the  transaction.  Such, 
however,  is  the  abruptness  and  the  difficulty  of  the  construction  that  the 
greater  number  of  interpreters  assume  an  error  of  the  text  for  CinnTT^  the 
proper  plural  of  the  participle. 

3  plur.  !i3lbb|2'a  they  are  cursing  me,  Jer.  15:  10.  Kimchi  explains  this 
word  as  a  compound  of  the  roots  ^Bj?  to  curse,  and  n^;^  to  treat  as  vile; 
Gesenius,  as  a  confusing  of  two  distinct  readings,  the  participle  "^S^^i^ia  and 
the  preterite  "'SsiP^p;  and  EAvald  changes  the  text  to  '•^fih^^,  though  his 
conjecture  is  unsustained  by  a  single  manuscript,  and  Nun  epenthetic  never 
occurs  with  participles.  The  word  may  be  regarded  as  the  plural  of  the 
participle  inflected  after  the  manner  of  the  preterite,  with  the  added  suffix, 
so  that' the  proper  pointing  would  be  i:6p;?'3.  It  has  been  plausibly  suggested 
that  the  initial  "0  belongs  to  the  preceding  word,  comp.  2  Sam.  23:  6,  and 
that  the  verb  is  a  preterite. 

NIFHAL. 

§  91.  a.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  Some  copies  have  5^3  Jer.  50:  23 
with  Seghol  under  the  prefixed  Nun  for  "ti^?. 

b.  Infinitive.  The  following  may  be  mentioned  as  examples  of  the 
shorter  form  of  the  absolute  ClBs.?  Gen.  31 :  30,  trib?  Judg.  11:  25,  rihi  1  Sam. 
2:  27,  6<''lp3  2  Sam.  1:6;  of  the  longer  form  given  in  the  paradigm  'jnsri 
Jer.  32:  4,  which  once  appears  with  prosthetic  X  in  place  of  n  Ezek.  14:  3 
;ZJ",'n5<,  §  53.  1.  a.  The  construct  infinitive  usually  has  Tsere  T|S"i"n  Ezek. 
16:'36,  but  is  in  one  instance  Cjirn  Ps.  68:  3,  formed  as  in  Kal  by  rejecting 
the  pretonic  Kamets  from  the  absolute.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the 
construct  form  used  for  the  absolute  -1,"??^  1  Kin.  20:  39,  Tc^'n  Deut.  4:  26. 
The  prosthetic  n  is  commonly  retained  after  prefixed  prepositions  Hirans 
which  are  less  closely  connected  with  the  word  than  the  formative  prefixes 
of  the  future;  it  is,  however,  rejected  in  "ili'lisa  Prov.  24:  17,  comp.  C^':33in2 
Dan.  11  :  34,  three  times  in  niN"ib  Ex.  34:  24,  Deut.  31:  11,  Isa.  1:  12 
(where  some  suspect  that  the  infinitive  is  Kal  and  propose  to  point  nix"]!?) 
but  nisnrt  2  Sam.  17: 17,  and  in  niVV  Ex.  10:  3.  The  Tsere  of  the  last  syl- 
lable of  the  construct  infinitive,  as  well  as  of  the  future  and  imperative 
which  are  firmed  from  it,  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon  losing  its  accent. 


§92  EEMAEKS  ON  THE  PERFECT  VERBS.  127 

-risri  Job  34:  22,  cKin  Judg.  9:  38,  irS";  Eccles.  7:  26,  rarely  to  Pattahh, 
Iji'n  Job  18:  4.  In  the  Imperative  "ipi"!!  the  form  with  Seghol  is  the  usual 
one,  that  with  Tsere  only  occurring  in  Isa.  7 :  4.  The  px-etonic  Kamets  of 
this  species  is  singular  in  not  being  liable  to  rejection  on  the  shifting  of  the 
tone,  e.  g.  cinr^n  Ezek.  21:  29,  ]'^r<-}3'^  Ps.  37:  9. 

c.  Future  Sing.  1  com.  The'prefixed  X  occasionally  has  Hhirik,  wS'i'X 
Ezek.  20:  36,  1  Sam.  12:  7,  ^S'nx  Ezek.  14:  3,  niprx,  Mn^SX  but  "li-DX. 

Plub.  feni.  Tsere  rarely  remains  in  the  second  syllable  niirn  Ruth 
1  :  13,  being,  as  in  the  Piel  preterite,  commonly  changed  to  Pattahh  before 
the  concurring  consonants,  nsbixPl  Jer.  24:  2,  so  with  a  pause  accent, 
n:nDTL"n  Isa.  13:  16  K'ri,  Zech.  14:  2  K'ri,  i^JPj'^P!  Isa.  28:  3;  the  first,  as 
the  original  form,  is,  however,  placed  in  the  paradigm. 

d.  Imperative.  Ewald  regards  lij3p3  Isa.  43:  9,  Joel  4:  11,  11^5  Jer. 
50:  5,  as  imperatives  without  the  usual  n  prosthetic;  Bottcher  as  preterites 
used  in  a  precative  sense  j  both  assumptions  appear  to  be  needless  and  un- 
warranted. 

e.  Participle.  In  1  Sam.  15:  9  ntn^J  contemptible,  is  in  form  a  Niphal 
participle  from  the  noun  HJao  contempt. 

PIEL. 

§  82.  a.  The  intensive  species  is  usually  formed  by  doubling  the  second 
radical;  in  Vis:  Ezek.  28:  23,  and  the  passive  form  -^'SX  the  third  radical 
is  doubled  instead,  an  expedient  resorted  to  repeatedly  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs 
and  occasionally  in  Ayin  guttural.  In  "'Jirra^  Ps.  88:  17  both  radicals  are 
doubled;  the  entire  second  syllable  is  repeated  in  "in"irip  Ps.  38:  11,  'n^n^rj 
Lam.  2:11,  1 :  20  a  passive  form,  as  shown  by  the  Hbateph-Kamets,  §  82. 
6.  b  (3),  and  in  idffianx  Hos.  4:  18,  which  is  probably  to  be  read  as  one 
word,  §  43.  b;  according  to  the  division  in  the  Massoretic  text,  ^isn  is  a 
separate  word,  and  is  the  imperative  of  SlH'J  to  give,  though  this  is  alwaj's 
elsewhere  pointed  >l3fi.  In  f|!"'S^S^  Ps.  45:  3,  the  first  syllable  might  seem 
to  be  repeated;  but  as  such  a  formation  would  be  unexampled,  it  is  more 
probably  a  passive  (hence  o  under  the  first  letter)  of  Hs'^S'^,  which  redupli- 
cates the  last  syllable  of  n£^  =  iEi  §  170. 

b.  Intensity  may  likewise  be  denoted  without  a  reduplication  by  insert- 
ing the  long  vowel  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  root.  This  is  often 
done  in  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  but  only  in  the  following  instances  in  others, 
pret.  ■^nr'n'i'^  1  Sam.  21:  3,  ffi'niu  Isa.  40:  24,  ^hit  Ps.  77:  18,  "^ryhys  Isa. 
10:  13  fut.  "isb-;  Hos.  13:  3  inf.  abs.  "iih  and  inh  Isa.  59:  13,  inf.  const. 
Dsp'^aia  Am.  5:  ll,  part.  "^'JEilJ^  Job  9:  15,  "iJirJlb^  Ps.  101 :  5  K'thibh.  These 
are  called  Poel  forms,  and  those  in  the  preceding  paragraph  Pilel,  Pulal, 
Pealal,  etc.  to  denote  their  peculiar  formation.  They  are  in  reality,  however, 
only  modified  forms  of  the  Piel,  whose  signification  they  share. 

c.  Preterite  Sing.  3  masc.  The  original  Pattahh  of  the  first  syllable 
§  82.  5.  b  (3)  is  preserved  in  "^ir^  Gen.  41:  51.     The  second  syllable  has 


128  ETYMOLOGY.  §  93 

Seghol  in  na'n  (in  pause  "iS'n),  ^S3,  DrS  (twice  eks),  Pattalih  in  "irx,  V-J 
(b-ij  in  pause),  pjr},  :|s,  ir'np,  ti;fp,  c|lU  (in  pause  n^^r  Isa.  19:  21),  yjsV, 
Hnd  before  Makkeph  in  "ISI^,  ~^^p  ('^"?.'?  iii  pause);  a  appears  likewise  in 
the  pausal  form  1^"^2;^  Mic.  1:  7.  The  Tsere  is  always  retained  in  the  infini- 
tive construct  and  future,  and  with  the  exception  of  5|5)  Ps.  55:  10,  in  the 
imperative;  though  throughout  the  species  it  is  shortened  to  Seghol  upon 
losing  the  accent,  f,:i2p  Deut.  30:  3,  -cnp  Ex.  13:  2,  -D^ia":  Deut.  7:  10. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  primitive  form  of  the  infinitive  absolute  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  e.  g.  ^Ji^  Ps.  118:  18,  X'Sp  1  Kin.  19:  10,  Xan  Ex.  21:  19,  ';^'i"l2 
Josh.  24:  10.  Most  commonly  it  has  Tsere  in  the  second  syllable  like  the 
infinitive  construct,  'ISX  Jer,  12:  17,  Tab  Jer.  32:  33,  '^l-g  Jer.  39:  18,  yb]^ 
Mic.  2:  12,  c|"d  Ex.  21:  36;  and  in  one  instance  it  has  Hhirik  in  the  first 
syllable  like  the  preterite  yk^  2  Sam.  12:  14,  There  is  no  need  of  assum- 
ing a  similar  form  for  the  infinitive  construct  in  y^tl  Lev.  14:  43,  which  can 
readily  be  explained  as  a  preterite.  Tsere  of  the  construct  is  shortened  to 
Seghol  before  Makkeph,  ~"I2^  Isa.  59:  13,  or  on  the  recession  of  the  accent 
priU  Gen.  39:  14,  17,  and  in  one  instance  besides,  tfib  Jndg.  5:  8.  There 
are  a  few  examples  of  the  construct  infinitive  with  a  feminine  termination, 
n^ls;;'  Lev.  26:  18,  nnST  Ps.  147:  1,  ri=|a  Isa.  6:  13,  TiS^p?:!  Ezek.  16:  52. 

e.  Future  Sing.  loom.  X  is  commonly  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh; 
it  has,  however,  the  diphthongal  Hhateph-Seghol  in  fT^TX  Lev.  26:  33, 
§  60.  3.  b,  and  draws  to  itself  the  full  vowel  which  has  hence  arisen  to  a 
preceding  1,  in  E^-OXI.  Zech.  7:  14  for  cb?9^,!)  §  60.  3.  c. 

Plur.  2  and  3  fem.  Tsere  under  the  second  radical  is  sometimes  changed 
to  Pattahh,  though  not  with  the  same  frequency  as  in  the  Niphal,  (ijffib'^ri 
Isa.  13:  18,  but  riJ'^s^Fi  Job  27:  4,  and  in  pause  Prov.  24:  2. 

PUAL. 

§  93.  a.  Of  the  vowels  proper  to  the  first  syllable  of  the  passive,  §  82. 
5.  b  (3),  Pual  ordinarily  has  ii,  which  is  preferred  before  a  doubled  con- 
sonant ^i'd,  §  61.  5,  and  Hophal  o  before  concurrent  consonants  ^I^£f7•  Tliis 
distinction  is  not  steadfastly  adhered  to,  however,  and  Pual  occasionally 
appears  with  Kamets  Hhatuph,  rtiS  Ezek.  16:  4,  H'i'n'::  Nah.  3:  7,  ^iz  Ps. 
72:  20,  fl5)3  Ps.  80:  11,  Prov.  24:  31,  Tj-i^n";  Ps.  94:  20,  dnx^?  pansim.  Tliis 
seems  to  furnish  the  best  explanation  of  the  disputed  words  ^ins'^ri  or  Ti^J'iri 
Ps.  62:  4,  "^iibo  Ps.  101:  5  K'ri,  ^nb=NPi  Job  20:  26.  Gesenlns  regards  these 
as  Piel  forms  with  (.)  lengthened  to  (J)  on  the  omission  of  Dagliesh  foit^-, 
§  59.  a;  but  the  absence  of  Methegh,  which  Gesenius  inseris  without 
authority,  shows  the  vowel  to  be  0  not  a.  Others  think  that  !inB3Xn  is  the 
Kal  future  for  inbsNFl,  the  vowel  being  attracted  to  the  guttural  from  the 
previous  letter,  §  60.  3.  C  There  is  no  difficulty,  however,  in  regarding 
them  all  as  Pual  forms,  and  translating  severally  nia^  yon  be  slain,  armed 
with  the  tongue  (of  a  slanderer),  shall  be  made  to  consume  him.  In  Ps.  62:  4 
the  reading  of  Ben  Naphtali  >inS'nn  is  probably  to  be  preferred  to  that  of 
Ben  Asher,  which  is  found  in  the  common  text;    the  former  is  a  Piel  and 


94 


EE^ilABKS  ON  THE  PERFECT  VERBS.         129 


has  an  active  sense:  (how  long)  will  ye  slay  or  murder?  In  Ps  101:  5  the 
K'thibh  is  "'ri'i^^  an  active  Poel  form,  slandering. 

b  The  vowel  u  of  the  first  syllable  is  occasionally  written  with  Vav, 
n:^:  Ezek.  16:  34,  :6bW  Ps.  78:  63,  n|^^  Judg.  18:  29,  13:  8,  Job  5:  7,  Vnx^ 
Ezek.  27:  19,  but  mostly  without  it. 

c  Pretebite  Sinq.  3  nmsc.  An  instance  of  paragogic  n..  appended  to 
the  preterite  is  found  in  nclj^  Ezek.  31: 15,  unless  it  may  better  be  regarded 
as  a  verbal  adjective. 

d.  Infinitive.  The  absolute  form  occurs  in  nh  Gen.  40:  15;  there  i8 
no  example  of  the  construct. 

e.  Participle.  As  ',r=^,  "trna,  -ifj'rp;  in  a  few  instances  the  initial  ^ 
is  omitted,  ^3X  Ex.  3:  2'for  ^X-^i  n^b  2  Kin.  2:  10  for  n^;^,  r^^'^t  (with 
Daahesh-fortJ  euphonic)  Ezek.  21:  15,  16,  T^iij^^  Eccles.  9:  12  for  tr::^;o, 
§  59.  a.  Some  of  the  forms  in  which  this  has  been  aUeged  may  however  be 
better  explained  as  preterites. 


HIPHIL. 


§  94  a.  Preterite.  The  first  vowel  is  usually  Hliirik  but  occasionally 
Seghol'e.  g.  Wi^b=n  1  Sam.  25:  7,  particularly  in  Pe  guttural  and  a  few 
Lamed'h  He  verbs.'  Once  it  is  prefixed  instead  of  n,  :^ri5X:X  Isa.  63:  3;  m 
Isa  19-  6  ^n^i^xn  is  not  a  double  Hiphil  Avith  both  X  and  n  prefixed,  but 
is  a  denominative  from  njTX,  a  derivative  of  n?;,  which  does  not  indeed 
occur  in  its  simple  form  but  is  justified  by  the  analogy  of  StdX  from_  tltS. 
n  takes  the  place  of  n  in  -a^^^^  Hos.  11:  3;  so  likewise  the  future  nnpr,n 
Jer.  12:5,  and  participle  nnnn^  Jer.  22 :  15,  though  the  corresponding 
preterite  is  n-^^rn  Neh.  3:  20. 

Sing  3  masc.  The  I  of  the  second  syllable  is  almost  always  written 
with  Yodh,  rarely  without  it,  e.  g.  bn:n  1  Sam.  12:  24,  but  in  every  other 
place  b-^i^n.  So  inf.  const.  P^S^n  1  Sam.  1:6;  fut.  d^j?:  Lev.  27:  14,  T,^'?? 
2  Kin.  10-  5,  nr?^-=n  l  Sam.  1:7;  part,  h^.^^  Vs.  18:  51,  Db=p  Job  11:  3. 

b  Infinitive.  Absolute.  The  Tsere  of  the  second  syllable  which  before 
Makkeph  is  shortened  to  Seghol  -nrn  Prov.  24:  23,  28:21,  is  mostly  written 
without  n,  thus  bnnn,  ^s=n,  iTBbn.  Vr-^n,  -ssn,  ^nPD,  =5^;  "^^'^^'S^ 
sometimes  with  it  ^dn  Am.  9:  8  but  n^^n  Isa.  14:  23,  ^7f^  and  ^^ri, 
twice  n-rrn,  nine  times  =2^n,  -^b^r^,  n-^rrn.  Hhirik  in  this  syllaWe  1^ 
rare  and  exceptional,  Vfe-n  Ezek.  21:  31,  ^^^ri  Josh.  7:  7.  X  is  prefixed 
instead  of  n  in  C-^zrx  Jer.^S:  3  and  -,:::i<  Gen.  41:  43,  provided  the  latter 
is  a  Hebrew  and  not  a  Coptic  word. 

Construct.  The  second  vowel  is  commonly  Hhirik  written  with  ^ 
^^i,--,  -ii-:;n  rarelv  and  as  an  exception  without  ^  I'S'^  Isa.  23:  11,  or 
with  Tsere 'bhrn  Dei^t.  32:  8,  ni.b  Deut.  26:  12,  Keh.  10:  ^^;j(^^''''^' 
-rhh  Dan.  I1V35.  In  a  few  instances  the  first  vowel  is  Hhirik  as  m  the 
;^eterite  rp-n  Deut.  7:  24,  28:  48,  Job.  11:  14,  1  Kin.  15:  29,  ^^^  J- 
50:  34,  ni^nnn' Jer.  51:  33,  ni^pn  Lev.  14:  43.  The  initial  n  is  mostly 
retained  after  prefixed  prepositions,    though    it  is  sometimes  rejected,    a. 


130  ETYMOLOGY.  §95,96 

niai^^  Am.  8:  4  but  ri"'3"iri^  Ps.  8:  3,  'lid?  once  but  T'rcrnl?  fifteen  times, 
ninob  Isa.  3:8. 

c.  Future  Sing.  Tsere  is  substituted  forHhirik  in  T^in  Ex.  19:3,  V'^lnp!^ 
2  Chron.  h:  2,  and  without  Yodh  hh'^^  1  Kin.  8:  1,  tlp^  Num.  22:  19,  "1N'>^3 
1  Sam.  14:  36,  prnx  Isa.  42:  6. 

Plur.  In  a  very  few  instances  Hbirik  is  rejected  upon  the  addition  of 
the  masculine  phiral  termination  >ip3i;^;i  1  Sam.  14:  22,  31:  2,  ^-"^l!]!  Jer. 
9 :  2.  There  is  no  example  of  this  without  the  presence  of  Vav  conversive 
unless  it  be  "I'^SDri  Job  19:  3,  which  may  be  regarded  as  Kal. 

d.  Imperative  Sing.  masc.  The  second  syllable  usually  has  Tsere  with- 
out Yodh  ::prri,  ~l?':3n,  and  before  Makkeph,  Seghol  -"jscri  Job  22:  21,  -ISti, 

1  Sam.  23:  11,  ~:32ri  Isa.  64:  8.  There  are  a  very  few  examples  with  Hhirik 
in  pause,  :?"'S'in  iPs.  94:  1,  to  which  some  would  add  N'^ilin  Isa.  43:  8,  but 
see  Alexander,  n"':'in  Prov.  19:  25,  X'^irt  Jer.  17:  18. 

e.  Participle.  In  N^ii  Ps.  135:  7,  Tsere  is  taken  in  place  of  Hhirik 
upon  the  recession  of  the  accent;  ^fnO"?  Isa.  53:  3  is  not  a  participle  but  a 
noun,  Alexander  in  loc.  Hhirik  is,  in  a  feAV  exceptional  cases  occurring  in 
the  later  books,  rejected  in  the  plural,  d'^pbn^  Zech.  3:7  for  Q'^D'^^ri??, 
tr^hhnz  Jer.  29:  8,    D"^nT3."ri   2  Chron.  28:  23,    tlin:in-a  1  Chron.  15:  24   K'ri, 

2  Chron.  7 :  6  K'ri.     Comp.  Chald.  "f  i?bnp  Dan.  3 :  25. 

HOPHAL. 

§  95.  a.  The  first  vowel,  though  mostly  Kamets  Hhatuph  Tj^^t^,  ^■^^^fi, 
in?2^u3ri,  is  occasionally  Kibbuts,  both  vowels  even  appearing  in  the  same 
verb,  2rrn  Ezek.  32:  32,  «^i2-'"  ver.  19,  33"r?3  2  Kin.  4:  32;  T^'J;r^  Dan. 
8:  11,  n=^rn  Isa.  14:  19,  "^ibrn  Ezek.  16:  5,  r^;:^'0  2  Sam.  20:  21;  iTJpn 
Lev.  6:15,  "n-jp^a  Mai.  1:11,  ■'p3f^,  ^IpS^;  ti'^\^z-o,  pai^,  H'np^a  Ezek. 
29 :  18. 

h.  Preterite.  In  '^Fi'b'irin  am  1  obliged  to  leave?  Judg.  9:  9.  11.  13,  the 
characteristic  rt  is  rejected  after  n  interrogative. 

C,  Infinitive.  The  absolute  has  Tsere  in  the  second  syllable,  'Pnn  Ezek. 
16'.  4,  lit}  Josh.  9:  24.   The  construct  has  Pattahh,  "fel^  Ezr.  3:  11. 

d.  Imperative.  This  mood  occurs  twice,  tinsnin  Ezek.  32  :  19,  listn 
Jer.  49 :  8. 

e.  Participle.  In  iriy^lpn^  Ezek.  46:  22  fi  remains  after  the  preforma- 
tive  a. 

HITHPAEL. 

§  96.  a.  Preterite.  In  two  instances  nx  is  prefixed  instead  of  in!!,  viz., 
^isnnx  2  Chron.  20:  35,  ^l^biwiix  Ps.  76:  6.  In  the  verb  ipD  Daghesh-forte 
is  omitted  in  the  second  radical  and  the  previous  vowel  lengthened  §  ,'i9.  a, 
il-ipanri,  I'ipcn'^  Judg.  20:  is.  17,  'ipsn-^  Judg.  21:  9,  in  addition  to  which 
the  vowel  of  the  prefixed  syllable  is  6  in  ^'ipsnn  Num.  1:  47,  2:  33,  26:  62, 
1  Kin.  20:  27.  In  three  verbs  upon  the  assimilation  of  n  to  the  first  radical. 


§  97  PAKAGOGIC  FUTURE,  ETC.  131 

the  prefix  takes  u,  §  61.  5,  HJ^'n!!  (the  accentuation  is  rtnusual)  Isa.  34:  6, 
nxtv!^  Deut.24:  4  (but  in  the  future  always  nk^'i  Lev.  21:1  and  repeatedly 
elsewhere),  D?3n  (inf.  const.)  Lev.  13:  55.  56.  These  are  sometimes  called 
Hothpaal  and  regarded  as  passives  of  Hithpael.  Where  both  forms  exist 
in  the  same  verb,  however,  as  in  *ipQ  and  sitJ,  there  appears  to  be  no 
distinction  in  their  meaning;  they  seem  rather  to  have  arisen  from  a  dis- 
position to  give  to  the  Hithpael,  where  it  has  a  passive  signification,  §  80.2, 
the  vowels  of  a  proper  passive  species,  §  82.  5.  b.  (3).  In  Iwi'frri  Jer.  25:  16, 
tl'rrJr";  Jer.  46:  8  (elsewhere  siirr;"";),  and  Jl'^'s^  Isa.  62:  5,  5  prolonged  from 
u  on  account  of  the  absence  of  Daghesh-forte,  is  for  a  Uke  reason  given  to 
the  first  radical. 

b.  The  last  vowel  of  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future,  impera- 
tive and  participle,  is  Tsere  written  without  Yodh,  which  before  Makkeph 
is  shortened  to  Seghol,  -'U'nprn  Isa.  30:  29,  "^nnfi  Gen.  6:  9,  "C^rn-;  Job 
6:  16.  Frequently,  however,  Pattahh  is  used,  or,  with  a  pause  accent, 
Kamets,  C]Sprri  ^^rei.,  p^nrn  pret.  and  imper.  (but  inf.  const,  and  part,  with 
e,  fut.  a  and  e),  bs^rx,  P^r"-^?,  I^^Pr^"!.  'Y^^'^  Isa.  52:  5.  Pattahh  is  also 
sometimes  found  in  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future,  Mia^^irri  Zech.  6:  7 
hut  nirferiw'tn  Lam.  4:  1,  where  some  copies  have  tisrQCT^n.  Hhirik  occurs 
instead  of  Pattahh  in  the  preterites,  "^nb'nr.nrn ,  ^Pd^pnni  Ezek.  38:  23, 
Cnr'nprti'i  Lev.  ll:  44,  20:  7,  each  of  which  has  Vav  conversive,  throwing 
the  accent  more  strongly  on  the  final  syllable. 

c.  Thei'e  is  no  example  of  the  infinitive  absolute.  The  infinitive  con- 
Btruct  once  has  a  feminine  ending  nn^nrri  Dan.  11:  23,  comp.  §  128. 


Paeagogic  and  Apocopated  Futuke  and  Imperative. 

§  97.  The  paucity  of  moods  in  Hebrew  is  partially 
compensated  by  modifications  of  the  future,  known  as  the 
paragogic  and  apocopated  futures. 

1.  The  paragogic  or  intentional  is  formed  from  the 
ordinary  future  by  appending  the  termination  H^  to  the 
first  person  singular  or  plural,  and  in  a  very  few  instances 
to  the  third  person  singular,  thus  converting  it  from  a 
simple  declaration  of  futurity  to  an  expression  of  desire 
or  determination,  ^"'Doix  I  shall  keep,  ^^53^^'^5 1  will  surely 
keep  or  let  me  keep,  Ps.  39:  2 ;  nj^PjD  let  us  hreak,  Tu'h'Z'j  let 
us  cast  away,  Ps.  2:3;  tl^'n^  let  him  hasten,  Isa.  5:  19. 

a.  The  name  "intentional"  proposed  by  Bottcher  seems  more  appro- 
priate than  "cohortative",  which  though  commonly  adopted  is  only  applic- 
able to  the  plural  forms.    The  third  person  of  the  paragogic  future  occurs 

9* 


132  ETYMOLOGY.  §  97 

besides  the  example  just  given,  in  nxirri  let  it  come  Isa.  5:  19,  ^'zb'n  be  it 
dark  (by  some  explained  as  a  noun,  darkness)  Job  11:  17,  iii^i"!";  may  he 
accept  (as  fat),  or,  according  to  Kimchi,  may  he  reduce  to  ashes,  Ps.  20:  4, 
nsSn  Prov.  1:  20,  8:  3,  and  after  Vav  conversive  ni:r.S"ni  Ezek.  23:  20,  and 
ver.  16  K'ri.  It  has  also  been  suspected  in  iiri"ip'^  Lev.  21:  5  K'thibh. 

b.  Instead  of  H^,  n.  is  appended  in  •ik'^pX'l  1  Sam.  28:  15,  Jiiia'l'^  Ps. 
20:  4,  §  63.  1.  c;  so  in  the  imperative  SiS^  or  W?i  Prov.  24:  14. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  an  abbreviation 
of  the  second  or  third  person  singular  and  expresses  a 
wish  or  command,  or  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or  pro- 
hibition. In  the  perfect  verb  it  has  a  separate  form  only 
in  the  Hiphil  species,  the  "'.  of  the  ultimate  being  changed 
to  (..),  or  before  Makkeph  to  (..),  p^kT.  ^^6  will  cause  to 
cleave,  pii1|]  may  lie  or  let  him  cause  to  cleave;  b^3'"ir37i  thou 
wilt  understand,  biDirri  thoit  mayest  understand  or  under- 
stand thou,  Dan.  9:  25,  "l^bir^'b^^  may  it  not  or  let  it  not 
rule,  Ps.  119:  133.  In  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  as 
in  the  Ayin-Vav  and  particularly  the  Lamedh-He,  it  is 
used  in  other  species  still. 

a.  The  2nd.  pers.  of  the  Jussive  is  rare  except  with  Vx.  The  1st.  pers. 
of  the  future  is  abbreviated  in  a  very  few  instances,  1  Sam.  14:  36,  2  Sam. 
17:  12,  Job  23:  9.  11,  Isa.  41:  23  K'thibh,  28. 

6.  The  paragogic  and  apocopated  futures,  which  have  been  aptly  de- 
nominated voluntatives,  may  be  regarded  as  mutually  supplementary,  and 
as  forming  together  something  like  a  complete  Optative  or  Subjunctive 
mood.  The  apocopated  future  has,  it  is  true,  no  separate  form  for  the 
second  fern.  sing,  or  the  second  and  third  pers.  plur.,  in  which  the  verb  has 
terminal  inflections,  but  it  maj'  be  regarded  as  coinciding  in  these  with  the 
ordinary  future,  except  that  it  never  has  the  final  '(.  See  Ruth  2:  8  and 
comp.  Deut.  20:  3  with  1 :  29.  So  in  those  species  in  which  it  is  indistinguish- 
able from  the  ordinary  future,  it  may  yet  be  regarded  as  included  under  it. 
Neither  the  apocopated  nor  the  paragogic  futures  occur  in  the  strictly 
passive  species,  viz.,  the  Pual  and  Hoplial,  self-determination  and  command 
both  implying  that  the  subject  is  the  originator  of  the  action.  The  more 
flexible  Arabic  has  three  varieties  of  the  future  in  addition  to  the  ordinary 
one,  to  express  as  many  modifications  or  moods. 

c.  The  apocopated  future  derives  its  name  from  the  apocopation  of  the 
final  letter  by  which  it  is  characterized  in  n"^  verbs;  the  brevity  of  its 
form  is  adapted  to  the  energy  and  rapid  utterance  of  a  command.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  speaker  dwells  upon  the  word  expressive  of  his  own 
desire  or  determination,  thus  giving  rise  to  the  prolonged  form  of  th« 
paragogic  future.     The  appended  n^  may  perhaps  be  identical  with  a  like 


§  98  PARAGOGIC  FUTURE,  ETC.  133 

termination  added  to  nouns  to  indicate  motion  or  dire'ction,  dei.oting  as  it 
does  the  direction  of  the  speaker's  will  or  wishes  towards  that  which  the 
verb  expresses. 

§  98.  1,  Paragogic  H^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the 
masculine  singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  com- 
mand into  an  earnest  entreaty  or  expression  of  strong 
desire,  y^ir  hear  (thou),  ny^p'^r  oli,  hear!  or  pray,  hear! 
nis'pn  listen,  HT^^T]  pray,  listen!  The  addition  of  this 
vowel  to  the  imperative  and  to  the  future  causes,  as  in 
the  regular  inflections  of  the  paradigm,  §  85.  2.  a.  (2), 
the  rejection  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  syllable,  except 
in  the  Hiphil  where  ''.  remains  in  the  future  and  is 
restored  in  the  imperative.  Li  the  Kal  imperative  this 
rejection  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowelless  con- 
sonants, the  first  of  which  must  accordingly  take  a  short 
vowel,  §  61.  1;  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hholem  this 
will  be  Kamets-Hhatuph,  otherwise  it  will  be  the  briefest 
of  the  vowels,  Hhirik,  "liy,  Til}^  Jer.  49:  11;  ^'ij,  rnpT 
2  Chron.  6:  42,  nbifl,  Tq'y^  Gen!  39:  7.  12.  When  tlie 
vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  restored  by  a  pause  ac- 
cent the  inserted  vowel  falls  away  IHTTV  Deut.  33:  23, 
rnv^  1  Kin.  13:  7;  so  in  the  ^'b  form  Hksn  Ps.  41:  5.  In 

T  AT  T:  '  T    T     : 

the  Hiphil  bbpH  becomes  nb''r2pn. 

a.  In  a  few  instances  the  vowel-letter  remains  in  the  K'thibh  though 
invariably  thrown  out  in  the  K'ri,  e.  g.,  nsn:!  K'thibh,  nsi.:i  K'ri  Ps.  26:  2, 
n3lb^  K'thibh,  ni^^  K'ri  Judg.  9:8;  rtpUJXI  K'thibh,  ri'ii^dsi  K'ri  Ezr. 
8:  25;  nialpttJX  K'thibh,  n^l^ax  K'ri  Isa.  18:  4.  This  may  not  indicate, 
however,  the  retention  of  the  full  vowel  but  only  of  an  audible  remnant  of 
it,  §  13.  a,  which  is  likewise  attested  by  the  occasional  appearance  of  Hha- 
teph  Kamets,  "fil^Ti"!!^  1  Kin.  19:  20,  Hiy^dxi  Dan.  8:  13  (in  some  copies)  or 
Hhateph  Pattahh  n^2":3NJ  Ezr.  8:  26,  Jer.  32:  9,  and  by  the  fact  that  the 
resulting  Sh'va,  even  when  simple,  is  alway*  ^ocal,  §  22.  a.  (1).  Occasion- 
ally Kamets-Hhatuph  is  found  in  the  paragogic  imperative  when  the  vowel 
of  the  ordinary  imperative  is  Pattahh;  thus,  nnp  Lev.  9:  7,  nnn;?  Ps.  69:  19, 
and  on  the  contrary,  tr^z-q  Gen.  25:  31,  fut.  'O^''.  Ex.  21:  7,  n^:i3  (with 
Daghesh  separative)  Ps.  141:  3,  though  Delitzsch  regards  it  as  a  noun. 

2.  As  the  imperative  is  itself  a  shortened  form  there 
■s  httle  room  for  further  abbreviation;  it  sometimes,  how- 


134  ETYMOLOGY.  §  99 

ev(jr,  suffers  apocopation  of  the  final  H^  of  the  femmine 
lolural,  ]tQ^  Gen.  4:  23  for  riD>±"«r,  §  61.^2,  "N-p  Ex.  2:  20 
for  nj^'ip,  §  60.  3.  c,  and  in  Lamedh  He  verbs  of  final  H . 
of  the  mascuhne  singular,  "T]!j  2  Kin.  6:18  for  nipri  Ezek. 
6:  11,  bs  Ps.  119:  18  for  n^5;  CiT}  Deut.  9:  14  for  nsiH 
Judg.  11:37,  but  without  any  evident  change  of  meaning. 


Vav  Conversive  or  Consecutive. 

§  99.  1.  The  primary  tenses  the  preterite  and  the 
future  are  supplemented  by  two  secondary  tenses,  formed 
in  a  pecuhar  manner  by  what  is  called  Vav  Conversive 
C^^bn  1^)  or  Vav  Consecutive.  This  prefix  has  the  remark- 
able effect,  from  which  its  name  is  derived,  of  converting 
the  ordinary  future  into  a  preterite  and  the  ordinary 
preterite  into  a  future.  The  following  appear  to  be  the 
reasons  of  this  singular  phenomenon.  Past  and  future 
are  relative  and  depend  for  their  signification  in  any 
given  case  upon  the  point  of  time  from  which  they  are 
reckoned.  This  may  be  the  moment  of  speakmg,  when 
all  anterior  to  that  moment  will  be  past,  and  all  posterior 
to  it  future.  Or  by  some  conventional  method  under- 
stood between  the  speaker  and  his  hearers,  an  ideal  pre- 
sent may  be  fixed  distinct  from  the  real  present  and  the 
measurements  of  past  and  future  made  from  the  former. 
Now  Vav  Consecutive  placed  before  a  future  indicates 
that  its  tense  is  to  be  reckoned  not  from  the  actual  pre- 
sent but  from  the  time  denoted  by  some  previous  word, 
whether  verb,  noun,  or  adverb.  And  when  the  stand- 
point is  thus  taken  in  the  past,  events  may  be  described 
as  future  with  reference  to  it,  though  they  have  actually 
taken  place  at  the  time  of  narration.  Vav  is  properly 
the  copula  and;  when  th:s  is  prefixed  to  the  future  for 
the  purpose  already  designated,  it  is  followed  by  Pattahh 


§  99  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  135 

and  Dngliesli-forte,  which  give  to  it  the  force  of  and  then 
or  and  so,  indicating  that  what  follows  is  the  sequel  of 
what  precedes.  Consequently  a  narration  begun  in  the 
preterite  may  be  continued  in  the  future  with  Vav  Con- 
secutive, the  opening  words  fixing  the  initial  point  from 
which  all  that  come  after  proceed  in  regular  succession; 
and  the  future  so  employed  is  converted  into  what  may 
be  called  a  continuative  preterite.  Thus,  in  the  account 
of  the  creation  in  Gen.  1,  the  original  condition  of  things 
is  described  in  the  preterite,  ver.  2,  the  earth  ivas  nri'.ri 
without  form  and  void.  The  subsequent  scene  is  then  sur- 
veyed from  this  point.  The  next  statement  is  accordingly 
made  by  a  future  with  Vav  Consecutive,  ver.  3,  "n'^^^li 
and  God  said,  in  its  primitive  import,  and  then  God  says 
or  will  say,  his  speaking  being  future  to  the  state  of 
things  previously  described.  This  fixes  a  new  stand- 
point from  which  the  next  step  in  the  process  is  a  fresh 
advance;  it  is  hence  followed  by  another  future  with  Vav 
Consecutive,  ver.  4,  U^^l^l  and  he  saiv;  and  so  on,  b'i^^l  ^^^^ 
he  divided,  ver.  5,  JJ^'lp^.l  and  he  called,  etc. 

a.  The  nature  of  this  prefix  is  more  precisely  expressed  by  calling  it 
Vav  Consecutive,  as  Ewald  and  others  propose.  But  as  Vav  Conversive  is 
the  name  in  common  use,  and  as  this  sufficiently  characterizes  its  most 
striking  effect,  there  is  no  impropriety  in  retaining  it.  There  have  been 
various  conjectures  respecting  its  origin.  Some  have  fancied  that  ^  is  an 
abbreviation  of  the  verb  n^rt  was,  hence  "i^k'l  he  teas  or  it  was  (so  that) 
he  will  say  i.  e.  he  was  about  to  say  or  was  saying,  which  is  then  likened 
to  the  Arabic  combination  of  the  preterite  of  the  substantive  verb  with  the 
future  tense  to  express  past  action;  but  1  evidently  has  the  sense  of  the  con- 
junction and,  ^'sk'^l  dues  not  mean  he  said,  but  and  he  said.  Others  have  re- 
garded it  as  an  abbreviation  of  '^^'^1  and  he  ivas;  Ewald  of  TNI  and  then. 
Schultens,  Instit.  p.  424,  conjectured  that  "I'^X'I  may  be  for  "ipx'rn,  by 
§  53.  3-,  fl  prefixed  to  a  noun  is  the  definite  article,  and  points  it  out  as 
one  previously  known;  its  use  in  this  particular  case  might  be  to  define 
the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  before  which  it  stands  by  pointing  it  out 
as  known  from  what  preceded.  The  vowel  of  this  pi-efix  would  upon  this 
hypothesis  be  analogous  both  in  its  origin  and  its  effects  to  the  augment  t 
in  Greek,  or  a  in  Sanskrit,  by  which  a  preterite  is  formed  from  a  present 
or  a  future,  rvirra,  Itvtttov;  tuii^cu,  ervipa,  and  which  is  traced  by  Bopp  to 


136  ETYMOLOGY.  §  99 

a  pronominal  root  having  a  demonstrative  sense,  Vergleichende  Grammatik 
pp.  786  fif.  The  fact  that  the  Samaritan  Pentateuch  sometimes  substitutes 
f\  for  1  consecutive  might  seem  to  lend  confirmation  to  this  theory  of  its 
derivation.  But  as  T^  stands  with  equal  frequency  for  1  copulative,  and  " 
for  the  article  il,  it  is  probable  that  these  commutations  are  to  be  classed 
with  the  other  numerous  inaccuracies  of  this  edition.  Perhaps  the  best 
suggestion  is  that  of  Eodiger,  who  attributed  no  inherent  significance  to 
the  vowel,  but  thought  that  it  was  attached  to  Vav  Consecutive  on  account 
of  the  emphasis  of  its  jieculiar  use. 

2.  Vav  Consecutive,  it  has  already  been  stated,  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  future  with  Pattahh  and  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
following  letter,  yMpI,  ^D-^BtcPII,  T^5l.  If  the  first  letter 
of  the  future  be  Yodh  with  Sh'va,  Daghesh  is  commonly 
omitted,  §  25,  but  rarely  if  it  be  D,  and  never  if  it  be  ri, 
since  its  removal  in  this  case  would  change  the  sound  of 
the  letter  by  restoring  its  aspiration,  "i^l*!!,  ^tt')  but 
*4"ri55  "^SCS^  Before  1?^  of  the  first  person  singular,  which 
cannot  receive  Daghesh,  §  23.  1,  Pattahh  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  ?]bsl,  ^iilSSil  In  the  Hiphil  \  is,  with 
few  exceptions,  e.  g.  1]^^"^^  Ps.  105:  28,  compressed  to  (J 
as  in  the  apocopated  future,  niljp^l,  b'^irtp'l,  and  before 
Makkeph  it  is  shortened  to  ( _)  "1^31.  In  the  first  person 
singular,  however,  ""^  remains  in  the  Hiphil,  and  a 
paragogic  H^  is  not  infrequently  appended  in  all  the 
species,  e.  g.  t|^V^'!^*>  ^^^^?r  ^^  *^T^.'^^Tr  "^^^,3  or  "I5S1; 
^^i2T2:i^V,  nbbiasV.  ^ians^^  or  n^nnj^^^;  paragogic  n^  also 
occurs  though  more  rarely  in  the  first  pers.  plur.  n^-^bnsi 
Gen.  41:  11,  t]'C^^->\  ri'lrpasi  Ezr.  8:  23,  ni?D31  ver.  31.' 

a.  The  tendency  to  abbreviation  produced  by  Vav  Consecutive  is  much 
more  apparent  in  some  classes  of  imperfect  verbs.  Thus,  final  n .  is  re- 
jected from  n"b  verbs  as  in  the  apocopated  future  n^r*"^,  ^5*1,  i'\ip_,  '^']^; 
the  accent  is  drawn  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult  in  the 
Kal  and  Hiphil  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs  and  of  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
for  their  first  or  second  radical,  in  consequence  of  which  the  vowel  of  the 
last  syllable,  if  long,  is  shortened,  §  64.  1,  20^,  SD'^l;  ^DXi,  brx'l;  2'i:.:, 
n"i:*1 ;  yb^'^,  aUJ'i'''^ ;  t^lp;,  Dj^il ;  Q^f>1,  DiT^n,  The  same  drawing  back  of  the 
accent  and  shortening  of  the  ultimate  syllable  occurs  in  the  Piel  of  the 
following  verbs,  whose  middle  radical  is  "i,  T^'ib'^i,  TiJ'!!'^'^!! ,  '^O^'!!'  *"t,  not  in 
"b^^i!;  so  in  Ti'i^':!  Hab.  3:  6,  and  the  Hithpael  D?crril  Dan.  2:1.    It  oc- 


§100  VAV  CONSECUTIVE.  137 

curs  also  in  the  Niphal  of  a  few  verbs,  ■which  form  the  exception,  however, 
not  the  rule,  t^rh^,  cnl''^,  ~CX'1  or  "fax*!,  cycni  but  -nsfl,  ir^'^i,  T\^'>2''^, 
^'^'i^^t  M?'*^;""^!  etc.  The  first  person  singular  is  mostly  exempted  from 
shortening  or  change  of  accent,  ^3X1,  ^ix",  Wpxi  or  CpXI,  C'pxi,  though 
it  sometimes  suffers  apocopation  in  tT'b  verbs  X"iNj,  "'^Xl.  The  prolonged 
plural  ending  )1  is  very  rarely  used  after  Vav  Consecutive;  it  does,  how- 
ever, occur,  e.  g.  'I'ln'ipni  Deut.  1:  22,  •,^T"2:'ri1  Deut.  4:  11,  ')lin|;;l  Judg. 
11:  18. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Vav  Consecutive  takes  Pattahh  before  N,  its 
vowel  being  conformed  to  the  compound  Sh'va,  which  follows,  e.  g.  IIJ^^XI 
Judg.  6:  9,  iinrrbxi  2  Sam.  1:  10,  "05x1  Ezek.  16:  10  but  nszxn  ver.' 8, 
'^^D>^^  Job  30:  26,  nri-nxi  Ps.  73:  16. 

§  100.  1.  Vav  Consecutive  prefixed  to  the  preterite 
makes  of  it  a  continuative  future  or  imperative,  by  con- 
necting with  it  the  idea  of  futurity  or  command  ex- 
pressed in  a  preceding  verb.  It  is  properly  the  conjunc- 
tion 1.  a7id,  whose  pointing  it  takes,  its  pecuhar  force 
being  derived  from  its  connecting  power.  Accordingly, 
in  speaking  of  coming  events,  the  stand-point  is  first 
fixed  in  the  future  by  the  opening  words,  and  the  de- 
scription is  then  continued  by  the  preterite  with  Vav 
Consecutive.  Thus,  in  Samuel's  recital,  1  Sam.  10:  1 — 8, 
of  what  w^as  to  happen  to  Saul,  he  first  refers  the  whole 
to  the  future  by  the  word,  ver.  2,  ^Pipbin  ujjon  thy  dejyart- 
ing,  and  then  proceeds  with  preterites  with  Vav  prefixed, 
rnk'D^  thou  shalt  find,  ^^'-^Xl  and  they  shall  say,  ver.  3, 
risbr'!  and  thou  shalt  pass  on,  etc.  etc.  In  Hke  manner  in- 
junctions begun  in  the  imperative  are  continued  in  the 
preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive.  Thus  the  Lord  directed 
Elijah,  1  Kin.  17:  3  tjb  (imper.)  go,  n'ia^  (pret.)  and  turn. 
ri"ir!pD1  (pret.)  and  hide,  nS"']  (pret.)  and  it  shall  be. 

2.  This  prefix  commonly  has  the  effect  of  removing 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate  m  those  forms  in  w^hich  it 
ordinarily  stands  upon  the  penult;  and  if  the  penult  be 
a  long  mixed  syllable,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  of  verbs 
with  Hholem,  it  wiU  in  consequence  be  shortened,  ribs", 
hbs-'i. 


138  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

a.  The  shifting  of  the  accent,  which  served  in  some  measure  to  indicate 
to  the  ear  the  alteration  in  the  sense,  takes  place  chiefly  in  the  following 
cases,  viz.: 

(1)  It  occurs  with  great  regularity  in  the  first  and  second  persons  sin- 
gular of  every  species,  n^^f^  thou  hast  gone,  fJs^fTi  and  thou  shalt  go, 
''vph'r^^  and  I  ivill  go,  so  n"i21'i,  "^nh'::!!!,  ipiD^rinni,  though  '^nn^ini  Zeph. 
1:  17,  except  in  X"b  and  n"b  verbs,  where  the  accent  usually  remains  in 
its  original  position  although  the  usage  is  not  uniform,  "^niiBil  Lev.  26 :  9, 

"inx^si  1  Kin.  18: 12,  Tpky)'^,  1  Chron.  4:  10,  iniinrnium  1  Sam.  15:  30,  "^niarn. 

Isa.  8:  17  but  n-'SNI  Lev.  24:  5,  rXS>l  Gen.  6:  1 8, '"ih"^1Sni  "^fT^ln-ini  Lev.  26:  9! 

T        •    IT    :  '        T  T  J  ...........    .  1 

rKSri")  Ex.  26 :  33.  In  the  first  person  plural  of  all  verbs  the  accent  generally 
remains  upon  the  penult,  IJni'TI  Ex.  8:  23,  i^D^ni,  sisnibbl  Gen.  34:  17. 

(2)  It  occurs,  though  less  constantly,  in  the  third  feminine  singular  and 
third  plural  of  the  Hiphil  of  perfect  vei'bs,  and  of  the  various  species  of 
Ayin-Vav  and  Ayin-doubled  verbs,  n^i'nnnn  Ex.  26:  33,  tlNiarri  Lev.  15:  29. 
nnjl  Isa.  11:  2,  '^'gy,  si'nn'l  Hab.  l:  8  but  ^2"'^'rm  Ezek.  43:  24,  ilds^l  Hab.  1:  8. 


Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

§  101.  Pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to  the  verbs 
of  which  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of  the  suffixes 
have  already  been  given  §  72.  It  only  remains  to  con- 
sider the  changes  resulting  from  their  combination  with 
the  various  parts  of  the  verb. 

1.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  undergo 
the  following  changes: 

Preterite. 
SmG.    3 /em.   The  old  ending  n.,  §  85.  1.  a  (1),  takes 
the  place  of  n^ . 
2  masc.    T\  sometimes  shortens  its  final  vowel 

T 

before  the  suffix  "'D  of  the  first  person. 
2  fern.  The  old  ending  ^ri,  §  86.  h,  instead  of  P. 
Plue.  2  masc.  ^P  from  the  old  pronominal  ending 
D^n,  §  71.  &,  takes  the  place  ui  Dn.  The 
feminine  of  this  person  does  not  occur 
with  suffixes. 


§  101  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  139 

FuUire. 
Plub.  2  and  3  fern.    The  distinctive  feminine  termina- 
tion is  dropped,  and  that  of  the  masculine 
assumed,  ^'iitspn  for  {IDbthpn. 

a.  In  several  of  these  cases  it  would  be  more  correct  to  say  that  it  is 
the  uncompounded  state  of  the  verb  in  which  the  change  has  taken  place, 
and  that  before  suffipces  the  original  form  has  been  preserved,  the  added 
syllable  having  as  it  were  protected  it  from  mutation. 

2.  (1)  Changes  in  the  suffixes:  The  suffixes  are  joined 
directly  to  those  verbal  forms  wliich  end  in  a  vowel; 
those  forms  which  end  in  a  consonant  insert  before  the 
suffixes  of  the  second  pers.  plur.  DD,  "5,  and  the  second 
masc.  sing.  T|,  a  vocal  Sh'va,  and  before  remaining  suf- 
fixes a  full  vowel,  which  in  the  preterite  is  mostly  a  and 
in  the  future  and  imperative  mostly  e. 

(2)  The  3  fem.  sing,  preterite  inserts  a  before  the  suf- 
fixes of  the  third  pers.  plural,  and  e  before  the  second 
fem.  singular;  when  it  stands  before  the  third  sing,  suf- 
fixes "^t^,  'Tl,  there  is  frequently  an  ehsion  of  PI,  requiring 
Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  the  verbal  ending  T\  to 
preserve  the  quantity  of  the  previous  short  vowel,  ^pbt^p 
for  ^nn^t:p,  nnbt^JD  for  ^ribtjp,  see  §  57.  2.  &. 

(3)  When  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  ^H  is  preceded 
by  (^),  the  H  may  be  elided  and  the  vowels  coalesce  into 
\  ilbtip  for  ^ri5t:p;  when  it  is  preceded  by  ''.,  Shurek  may 
be  hardened  to  its  corresponding  semi-vowel  1,  Tribi^p 
for  ^M^nbpl?  §  62.  2. 

(4)  When  the  third  fem.  suffix  H  is  preceded  by  (J, 
final  Kamets  is  omitted  to  prevent  the  recurrence  of  the 
same  sound,  Tbxip  for  nbt:p. 

(5)  When  ^H,  T\  of  the  third  pers.  singular  are  pre- 
ceded by  (J,  the  vowel  of  union  for  the  future,  a  D,  called 
Nun  Epenthetic,  is  sometimes  inserted,  particularly  in 
emphatic  and  pausal  forms,  to  prevent  the  hiatus  between 
the  two  vowels,  (,.)  being  at  the  same  time  shortened  to 


140  ETYMOLOGY.  §  101 

(J;  n  is  tlien  commonly  elided  and  a  euphonic  Dagliesh- 
forte  inserted  in  the  Nun,  ^j^JpI^"]  for  ^n^pp";.  The  same 
shortening  of  the  (.,)  and  insertion  of  Daghesh  may  occur 
in  the  first  person  singular  and  plural  and  the  second 
masculine  singular;  this,  hke  the  preceding,  takes  place 
chiefly  at  the  end  of  clauses. 

a.  The  Nun  Epenthetic  of  the  future  and  the  Preterite  vowel  of  union 
a,  which  is  abbreviated  to  Sh'va  before  T^,  fiD,  'p,  maybe  relics  of  old 
forms  of  the  verb  still  represented  in  the  Arabic,  where  the  preterite  ends 
in  o,  and  one  mode  of  the  future  has  an  appended  Nun.  Daghesh-forte  in 
the  suffixes  of  the  first  and  second  persons  may  be  explained,  as  is  usually 
done,  by  assuming  the  insertion  and  assimilation  of  Nun  Epenthetic,  "j^tiip''; 
for  y^lilJp'^;  or  it  may  be  Daghesh-forte  emphatic,  §  24.  6,  and  the  few 
cases  in  which  Nun  appears  iu  these  persons  may  be  accounted  for  by  the 
resolution  of  Daghesh,  §  54. 3,  instead  of  the  Daghesh  having  arisen  from  the 
assimilation  of  Nun,  so  that  Ti^^isp";  may  be  for  ^i^'^P^  instead  of  the  reverse. 

b.  The  suffixes,  since  they  do  not  in  strictness  form  a  part  of  the  word 
with  which  they  are  connected,  are  more  loosely  attached  to  it  than  the 
pronominal  fragments  which  make  up  the  inflections;  hence  voweLs  of 
union  are  employed  with  the  former  which  serve  to  separate  as  well  as  to 
unite.  Hence  too  the  vocal  ShVa,  inserted  before  the  suffixes  of  the  second 
person,  does  not  so  completely  draw  the  final  consonant  of  the  verb  to  the 
appended  syllable  as  to  detach  it  from  that  to  which  it  formerly  belonged ; 
this  latter  becomes,  therefore,  not  a  simple  but  an  intermediate  syllable, 
§  20.  2.  A  like  distinction  exists  between  prefixed  prepositions,  etc.,  and  the 
personal  prefixes  of  the  future.  The  latter  form  part  and  parcel  of  the  word, 
while  the  former  preserve  a  measure  of  their  original  separateness.  Hence 
when  they  form  a  new  initial  syllable  by  the  aid  of  the  first  consonant  of 
the  word,  this  is  properly  a  mixed  syllable  after  a  personal  prefix  but  intti - 
mediate  after  a  preposition,  Sirir";  but  Sinsa,  §  22.  a.  Hence,  too,  a  liability 
to  contraction  in  one  case  which  does  not  exist  in  the  other,  VilJ|3'^.  but 
hb^rh,  h'fii  but  ^533. 

3.  Changes  in  the  body  of  the  verb: 

(1)  Except  in  the  Kill  preterite  those  forms  which 
have  personal  terminations  experience  no  further  change 
from  the  addition  of  suffixes;  those  which  are  without 
such  terminations  reject  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable 
before  suffixes  requiring  a  vowel  of  union  and  shorten  it 
before  the  remainder,  ^3^]^^,  ^J^l^t:]?:,  bt)]:':,  ^j^tiip";,  ^b^]^'; 
but  "^    of  the  Hiphil  species  is  almost  always  preserved, 


§102  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  141 

(2)  In  the  Kal  imperative  and  infinitive  the  rejection 
of  the  vowel  occasions  the  concurrence  of  two  vowellesa 
letters  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  impossible 
combination  is  obviated  by  the  insertion  of  Hhirik  to 
form  a  new  syllable;  or,  if  the  rejected  vowel  was  Hho- 
lem,  by  the  insertion  of  Kamets  Hhatuph. 

(3)  In  the  Kal  preterite,  where  both  vowels  are  hable 
to  mutation,  a  distinction  is  made  by  rejecting  the  first 
before  suffixes  and  the  second  before  personal  inflections 
where  this  is  possible,  e.  g.  bbj^,  Titxz^,  ^^p|5  but  ?^^i^P, 
ilJ'Cp.  Accordingly  upon  the  reception  of  a  suffix  the 
vowel  of  the  second  radical,  whether  it  be  a,  e,  or  o,  must 
be  restored,  and  if  need  be  lengthened,  whenever,  in  the 
course  of  regular  inflection,  it  has  been  dropped,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  first  radical,  wherever  it  remains  in  the 
regular  inflection,  must  be  rejected. 

a.  Final  imxed  syllables,  as  shown  in  2  b,  ordinarily  become  interme- 
diate upon  appending  05,  "jS,  ?],  and  consequently  take  a  short  vowel  not- 
withstanding the  following  vocal  Sh'va.  This  is  invariably  the  case  before 
BD  and  ',3,  unless  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached  has  a  long  im- 
mutable vowel  in  the  ultimate  which  is  of  course  incapable  of  being  short- 
ened; it  is  also  usually  the  case  before  ?],  the  principal  exception,  so  far  as 
verbal  forms  are  concerned,  being  the  a  and  e  of  the  Kal  preterite,  a  of  the 
Kal  future,  and  *  of  the  Hiphil,  TjSns,  r,^:ca,  ^nni<,  rj^ij'^^,  ^(?\3?!?.  '^T'4^.  ^"* 

^12=^3,  ?7??P.  m1^?- 

§  102.  1.  The  first  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do 
not  receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves, 
for  when  the  subject  is  at  the  same  time  the  object  of 
the  action  the  Hithpael  species  is  employed  or  a  reci- 
procal pronoun  is  formed  from  the  noun  llJiS  soul,  self, 
as  "irSD  myself.  Suffixes  of  the  third  person  may,  how- 
ever, be  attached  to  the  third  person  of  verbs,  provided 
the  subject  and  object  be  distinct. 

a.  There  is  a  single  example  of  a  verb  in  the  first  person  with  a  suffix 
of  the  first  person,  but  in  this  case  the  pronoun  expresses  the  iniiirect  ob~ 
ject  of  the  verb,  "^JTicr  I  have  made  for  me,  Ezek.  29:  3. 


142  ETYMOLOGY.  §  ^03 

2.  Neuter  verbs  and  passive  species,  whose  significa- 
tion does  not  admit  of  a  direct  object,  may  yet  receive 
suffixes  expressive  of  indirect  relations,  such  as  would 
be  denoted  by  the  dative  or  ablative  in  occidental  lan- 
guages, *jrp2:i  ye  fasted  for  me  Zech.  7:  5,  ""jilJin  thou  shall 
he  forgotten  by  me,  Isa.  44:  21. 

3.  The  infinitive  may  be  viewed  as  a  noun,  in  which 
case  its  suffix  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  possessive,  and  re- 
presents the  subject  of  the  action;  or  it  may  be  viewed 
as  a  verb  when  its  suffix  represents  the  object,  '''S^'n  my 
sjteaking,  "nblD  my  sending,  ''?5in  to  kill  me,  ^TQU).  to  com- 
fort me.  The  participle  may  also  receive  the  suffix  either 
of  a  verb  or  a  noun,  the  pronoun  in  either  case  denoting 
the  object,  ^:i<'1  seeing  me  Isa.  47:  10,  ^k:TL  hating  me,  lit. 
my  haters,  Ps.  35:  19. 

a.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  a  verbal  suffix  with  the  infinitive  repre- 
sents the  subject  "^IlTra  at  my  returning  Ezek.  47:  7,  or  a  nominal  suffix 
the  object  "^hv}  to  permit  me  Num.  22: 13,  "'oa;;' Deut.  25 :  7,  "^aas  lChron.4:10. 

§  103.  Paradigm  III.  exhibits  certain  portions  of  the 
regular  verb  bbj^  with  all  the  suffixes. 

a.  The  parts  of  the  verb  selected  are  sufficient  representatives  of  all 
the  rest,  and  by  the  aid  of  the  rules  already  given  will  enable  the  student 
to  determine  any  other  required  form  for  himself.  The  third  person  sin- 
gular of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  which  undergoes  no  change  in  the  body  of 
the  verb,  will  answer  mutatis  mutandis  for  all  the  forms  in  that  species 
ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  third  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite, 
which  suffers  a  change  in  its  last  syllable  only,  will  in  like  manner  answer 
for  all  the  foi'ms  in  that  species  ending  with  the  final  radical.  The  Kal 
preterite  is  given  in  all  the  persons,  both  on  account  of  the  peculiarity 
of  that  tense,  which  suff'ers  changes  in  both  its  vowels,  and  in  order  to 
exhibit  the  changes  in  the  personal  terminations  which  apply  equally  to 
the  preterites  of  the  other  species.  The  Kal  infinitive  and  imperative  are 
peculiar  in  forming  a  new  initial  syllable  which  echoes  the  rejected  vowel. 
The  third  person  singular  of  the  Kal  future  affords  a  type  of  all  the  forms 
in  that  tense  which  end  with  the  final  radical;  and  the  third  plural  of  the 
same  tense  is  a  type  of  all  the  future  forms  in  this  and  in  the  other  species 
which  have  personal  terminations  appended.  The  participles  undergo  the 
same  changes  in  receiving  suffixes  with  nouns  of  like  formation  and  are 
therefore  not  included  in  this  table. 


§104 


PERFECT  VEEBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  143 


Remarks  on  the  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

PRETERITE. 

§  104.  a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  (.)  as  the  union  vowel  of  the 
preterite,  '^s'^S-]  Isa.  8:11,  T^i<':i  4:  20,  1  Sam.  25:  32,  Ezek.  27:  26,  Daghesh- 
forte  euphonic  is  twice  inserted  in  the  suffix  of  the  first  pers.  sing.,  "li^S"" 
Ps.  118:  18,  irh  Gen.  30:  6. 

'  ■-    T 

b.  The  suffix  of  the  second  masc.  sing,  is  occasionally  "n  in  pause  '.TpXS 
Isa.  55:  5,  so  with  the  infinitive,  Ti]^p^i'■^  Deut.  28 :  24.  45;  and  a  similar 
form  with  the  future  may  perhaps  he  indicated  by  theK'thibh  in  Hos.  4:  6 
■jXDX-ax,  §  11.  1.  a,  where  the  K'ri  has  ^ipX^X.  With  X"b  and  n"b  verbs 
this  form  of  the  suffix  is  of  frequent  occurrence,  tT^S?  Isa.  30:  19,  Jer.  23:37, 
"S'lnn  Ezek.  28:  15.  In  a  few  instances  with  the  future  and  infinitive  the 
final  a  is  represented  by  the  vowel  letter  it,  and  the  suffix  is  written  ns, 
n3x:i^'^,  !^=":|?;:  1  Kin.  18  :  10.  44,  Prov.  2  :  11,  Ps.  145:  10,  Jer.  7  :  27, 
Ezek.  40 :  4. 

c.  The  suffijx  of  the  second  fem.  sing,  is  commonly  "r^  ,  T^N"ip  Isa.  54:  6, 
TjnXB  Isa.  60:  9,  except  after  the  third  fem.  sing,  of  the  verb,  when  it  is 
'^.. )  "(SD^^'i!*  Ruth  4:  15,  TinisaViy  Isa.  47:  10;  sometimes,  especially  in  the 
later  Psalms,  it  has  the  form  "^D  corresponding  to  the  pronoun  ''RX,  ''^nSTX 
Ps.  137:  6,  i^yjyTin  Ps.  103:  4. 

d.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  sing,  is  written  with  the  vowel  letter 
n  instead  of  1  in  iiins  Ex.  32:  25,  il.'i'Q  Num.  28:  8,  and  in  some  copies  n'lsDX 
1  Sam.  1:  9,  where  it  would  be  feminine;  this  form  is  more  frequently  ap- 
pended to  nouns  than  to  verbs. 

e.  In  a  few  instances  the  fi  of  the  third  fem.  suffix  is  not  pointed  with 
Mappik,  and  consequently  represents  a  vowel  instead  of  a  consonant,  ri"ib'j 
(with  the  accent  on  the  penult  because  followed  by  an  accented  syllable) 
Am.  1:  11,  so  with  the  infinitive,  •Tip,^""}  Ex.  9:  18,  ^3^?!^  Jer.  44:  19,  and 
the  future,  nSrinni  Ex.  2 :  3. 

f.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plur.  receives  a  paragogic  "i  once  in  prose, 
'iari'r'15  Ex.  23:  31,  and  repeatedly  in  poetry,  i^x^ori,  •iis-ijinin  Ex.  15:  9; 
once  1  is  appended,  I^^P?"!  Ex.  15:  5;  Qfi  is  used  but  once  as  a  verbal  suffix, 
Cn-ixax  Deut.  32 :  26.  ' 

g.  The  suffix  of  the  third  fem.  plur.  ")  is  seldom  used,  T^nS'i"^  Isa.  48 :  7, 
34:16,  Hab.  2:17,  Zech.  11:5;  more  frequently  the  masculine  d  is  substituted 
for  it,  W^bnp  Gen.  26:  15,  18,  tailjn:';!  Ex.  2:  17,  tJil-ipx;^]  1  Sam.  6:  10,  so 
Num.  17:  3,  4,  Josh.  4:  8,  2  Kin.  18:13,  Hos.  2:  14,  Prov.  6:  21;  ',n  is  never 
used  with  verbs.  When  attached  to  infinitives  a  paragogic  Fl^  ia  sometimes 
added  to  ),  nrxia  Ruth  1:  19,  rtifm^  Job  39:  2. 

'  '  T     T  '  T     T     :    • 

h.  Verbs,  which  have  Tsere  for  the  second  vowel  in  the  Kal  preterite, 
retain  it  before  suffixes,  Tjanx  Deut.  7:  13,  Dir^b  Lev.  16:  4,  nxJb  Deut. 
24 :  3,  !in^j<n-i  Job  37 :  24.  The  only  example  of  a  suffix  apr ended  to  a 
preterite  whose  second  vowel  is  Hholem,  is  I'^nbs^  Ps.  13:  5  from  "^T^z', 


144  ETYMOLOGY.  §  105 

the  nholem  being  shortened  to  Kamets  Hhatuph  by  the  shifting  of  the 
accent.  Tsere  of  the  Piel  species  is  mostly  shortened  to  Seghol  before  Tj. 
as,  -J,  fj-jap  Deut.  30:  3,  ^(^i?!?'^  ver.  4,  but  occasionally  to  Hhirik,  n=:irNS 
(the  Methegh  in  most  editions  is  explained  by  §  45.  2)  Job  16:  5,  t^a-^'PN 
Isa.  25:  1,  QD'rip'a  Ex.  31:  13,  ti'li'JQ  Isa.  1:  15;  before  the  Seghol  in- 
troduced by  a  pause  accent  it  is  rejected,  "(3^3"^.  Gen.  49:  25,  "^nb'iJX  2  Sam. 
11:  12.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  species  is  retained  before  all  suffixes  with  very 
few  exceptions,  liVrj'^  1  Sam.  17:  25,  Ps.  65:  10;  in  T^'lh  Deut.  32:  7,  the 
verb  has  the  form  of  the  apocopated  future. 

i.  The  third  fem.  preterite  sometimes  takes  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix 
in  its  full  form,  'lUr^^ri  Prov.  31:  12,  Ezek.  15:  5,  so  in  pause  iinn^ns 
1  Sam.  18:  28,  'it^f^^^N  Gen.  37:  20,  :!inr2":S  Isa.  59:  16,  and  sometimes  con- 
tracted by  the  exclusion  of  n,  !in3^a  1  Sam.  1:  24,  iinnb'i  Ruth  4:  15,  inbiS 
Job  21:  18.  The  third  fem.  suffix  is  always  contracted,  i^^lTf^X  Jer.  49:  24, 
nnf^^n  isa,  34:  17,  nnb"3  l  Sam.  1:  6.  The  suffix  of  the  third  masc.  plural 
is  d, ,  notd^,  with  this  pei-son  of  the  verb,  the  accent  falling  on  the  penult, 
firnrs  Gen.  31:  32,  Cnij^'a  Ex.  18:  8,  ^rS:^:  Ps.  119:  129,  arsnj  Isa.  47:  14. 
In  the  intermediate  syllable  before  ?j  the  vowel  is  usually  short  in  this 
person,  ^r^i^"^  Jer.  22:  26,  ^P^SX  Ezek.  28:  18,  though  it  is  sometimes  long, 
Virtiri  Cant.  8:5,  as  it  regularly  is  in  pause  !^r''7^'^  ibid.;  so  before  "^S  and 
S|3  of  the  first  person,  "^ir^^X  Ps.  69:  10,  tlJrN^jri  Num.  20:  14. 

j.  The  second  masc.  sing,  preterite  usually  takes  Pattahh  before  "^S  ex- 
cept in  pause,  "^Jnij^n  Ps.  139:  1,  "'Jnriri  Job  7:  14,  ^^'^^^^l?  Ps.  22:  2.  It 
takes  the  third  masc.  sing,  suffix  either  in  its  full  form,  {^insniSS  Ezek. 
43:  20,  or  contracted,  iriEpX  2  Kin.  5:  6,  -irio^J  Hab.  1:  12,  "inai^  (accent 
thrown  back  by  §  35.  1)  Num.  23:  27,  intl^n  Ps.  89:  44. 

k.  The  second  fem.  sing,  preterite  assumes  (  ),  commonly  without  Yodh, 
§  11. 1.  a,  before  suffixes,  and  is  accordingly  indistinguishable  from  the  first 
person  except  by  the  suffix  which  it  receives,  §  102. 1,  or  by  the  connection 
in  which  it  is  found,  "^ihih"]  Jer.  15:  10,  S'llnnillj?;  Ex.  2:  10,  Judg.  11:  35, 
1  Sam.  19:  17,  Cant.  4:  9,  Jer.  2:  34,  Ezek.  16:  19.  58;  once  it  takes  •(  ), 
siDn'i'n'in  Josh.  2:  18,  and  in  a  few  instances  the  masculine  form  is  adopted 
in  its  stead,  tsimysrti  Josh.  2:  17,  20,  Cant.  5:  9,  ^ihph']  Jer.  2:  27  K'ri, 
•inxan  2  Sam.  14:  10. 

I.  The  plural  endings  of  the  verb  may  be  written  fully  1  or  defectively 
(J,  thus,  in  the  third  person,  "^Sld^p  Ps.  18:  6,  "^ibap  Hos.  12:  1;  the 
Becond  ^2n^^  Zech.  7:  5,  Wn"ibrn  Num.  20:  5,  21:5;  and  the  first  iniilJnT 
1  Chron.  13:  3. 

FUTURE. 

§  105.  a.  The  union  vowel  a  is  sometimes  attached  to  the  future,  thus 
"•?.>  '';p^1^  Gen.  19:  19,  '^shris;;'.  Gen.  29:  32,  Ex.  33:  20,  Num.  22:  33,  Isa. 
56:  3,  Job  9:  18;  «^,  ^2;^"'^:'  Isa.  63:  16;  i  (for  ^n^),  ib'n'n';  Hos.  8:  3,  Ps. 
35:  8,  Eccles.  4:  12,  1  Sam.  21:  14,  so  in  the  K'thibh,  1  Sam.  18:  1  inns'^'i, 
where  the  K'ri  has  ^inrnxi'l;  n^  (for  n  J,  (nn-^S^n  Gen.  37  :  33,  2  Chron. 
20:  7,  Isa.  26:  5;  D^,  DCS'p-^Ex.  29:  30,  Deut.  7:  15,  Num.  21:  30,  Ps.  74:  8, 


§  106 


PERFECT  VEKBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  145 


Ps.  118:  10;  "j^,  *,r^"i?  Ex.  2:  17.  In  1  Kin.  2:24  the  K'ri  has  "^sh'^r'i^  -while 
the  K'thibh  has  the  vowel  letter  "^  representing  the  ordinarj'  e,  ":"'S■w"'l^ 
The  union  vowel  a  is  also  occasionally  found  with  the  imperative,  <^^i<5 
Ps.  69:  19,  Deut,  31:  19,  Isa.  30:  8,  Am.  9:  1. 

b.  The  suffixes  with  Daghesh  inserted  occur  chiefly  in  pause;  thus  ''S  , 
•'Sni'i-'  Jer.  50:  44;  "'S.,  "'32-i2n  Gen.  27:  19,  Job  7:  14,  9:  34;  13.  (1st  plur.), 
IrhD-i  Job  31:  15;  ^^..,  tT-fJiaV^  Isa.  43:  5,  44:  2,  Ps.  30:  13;  !13..  (3  masc. 
sing.j,  Jl3np2n  Job  7:  18,'  41:  2  K'ri,  Hos.  12:  5;  US  _,  nsn-rrri  Ps.  65:  10, 
(once  with  an  infinitive  ns^H^  Gen.  30:  41),  or  without  Daghesh,  ti;nSian 
Judg.  5:  26,  Obad.  ver.  13;  the  unemphatic  form  of  the  suffix  and  that 
with  Daghesh  occur  in  conjunction,  RP^3'i"^  ni"i"'S'r^  I.sa.  26:  5.  There  are 
a  verj'  few  examples,  found  only  in  poetry  of  3  inserted  between  the  verb 
and  the  suffix  without  further  change,  ""iS^^S?-]  Ps.  50:  23,  !"(3;f.PiX  Jer. 
22:  24,  ^^3^3?;;  Jer.  5:  22,  :1i^:2■l5■;  Ps.  72:  15,'-n3n:i-;  Deut.  32:  10,  :\-l3^?'"iX 
Ex.  15:  2.  *"  '  "" 

C.  The  plural  ending  ",>1  is  in  a  few  instances  found  before  suffixes,  chiefly 
in  pause,  '^::^<'^p^  '^??^n''i^"!.  !"'??!^^P":  Prov.  1  :  28,  !r,:ir:3'a-'  Ps.  63:  4,  rjriN-JS"; 
Ps.  91:  12,  Ti^^ri")!^":  isa.  60:  7,  10,  :^n3n;ir^  Jer.  5:  22,  : riD^ixri-;'^  Jer.  2:  24: 
twice  it  has  the  union  vowel  a,  "^sisiXSin  Job  19:  2,  "iiisV.  Prov.  5:  22. 

d.  When  the  second  vowel  of  the  Kal  future  is  o,  it  is  rejected  before 
suffixes  requiring  a  union  vowel,  compound  Sh'va  being  occasionally  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  the  place  of  simple,  D^&X  Hos.  10:  10,  =133^.^1;^  Num.  35:20, 
'.ns-nax  Isa.  27:  3,  ilS^I?.':  Isa.  62:  2,  ~^^T.  Ezek.  35:  6,  t^ij^px  Jer.  31:  33; 
once  the  vowel  remains,  but  is  changed  to  Shurek,  !Q"'.1^'iri  Prov.  14:  3;  a, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  ''I'.^isb";  Job 
29:  14,  Cr^V"]  Ex.  29:  30,  Cant.  5:  3,  Gen.  19:  19;  and  even  restored,  where 
it  is  dropped  in  the  regular  inflection,  "^^^'^"^  Isa.  62 :  5,  'Jflfi;?";  Gen.  37 :  24, 
Job  3:  5,  Jer.  13:  17;  so  in  the  Imperative  "^Jyo^  Gen.  23:  11,  Ps.  6:  3, 
"'jsr^'::  Gen.  23:  8,  1  Chron.  28:  2.  Hholem  is  shortened  before  T],  D3,  "3, 
though  the  vowel  letter  1  is  occasionally  written  in  the  K'thibh,  ^"^iSX 
Jer.  1:5. 

e.  The  following  are  examples  of  feminine  pluralf  with  suffixes :  2  fem. 
phir.  '^?N"in  Cant.  1:  6,  3  fem.  i^liir.  ''sirnn  Job  19:  15,  T\r:z^r\  Jer.  2:19. 
The  masculine  form  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  feminine,  ■^^■'it'X'^,  ^Jl^^Sn"; 
Cant.  6:9. 

INFINITIVE  AND  IMPERATIVE. 

§  106.  a.  Kal  infinitive.  Before  ?],  fis,  '(5,  Hholem  is  shortened  lo  Ka- 
mets  Hhatuph,  f,>:x  Gen.  2:  17,  rp^-Q'J  (Methegh  by  §  45.  2)  Obad.  ver.  11, 
fib^N  Gen.  3:  5,  cinax  Mai.  1:  7.  Pattahh  remains  in  the  single  example, 
C53:n  Isa.  30:  18;  sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  is  rejected 
before  these  as  it  is  before  the  other  suffixes,  and  a  short  vowel  given  to 
the  first  radical,  commonly  Kamets  Hhatuph,  7j"!^^'  Deut.  29:  11,  r|"^"j 
2  Kin.  22:  19,  ci-i^^'  Deut.  27:  4,  rarely  Kibbuts,  C=-;-j:;?  Lev.  19:  9,  23:  22, 
sometimes  Hhirik,  nhs'r  Gen.  19:  33.  35  but  ir^'l"  Ruth  3:  4,  'i:::r  Zech. 
3:  1,   i3e:  2  Sam.  1:  10,    "iriPQ  Neh.  8:  5,    and  occasionally  Pattahh,  r,riri 

10 


146  ETYMOLOGY.  §  l^"? 

Ezelc.  25:  6.  In  the  feminine  form  of  the  infinitive,  as  in  nouns  the  old 
feminine  ending  T\  is  substituted  for  H,  'in:;^ri';3  Isa.  30:  19,  irS'^ri  Hos.  7:  4, 
Ex.  30:  32.  The  Niphal  infinitive  retains  its  pretonic  Kamets  before  suffixes, 
nin^Tn  Ezek.  21 :  29,  Deut.  28:  20,  Ps.  37:  33.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  Infinitive 
becomes  Pattahh  before  Eesh  in  CsDnsin  Ezek.  21:  29. 

b.  Kal  Imperative.  The  first  radical  commonly  receives  Kamets  Hhatuph 
upon  the  rejection  of  Hholem,  "^3^3^,  "^STpS  Jer.  15:  15,  but  occasionally  it 
takes  Hhirik,  M^SS  (with  Daghesh-forte  euphonic)  Prov.  4:  13.  In  the  Hiph. 
imp.  2  masc.  sing.  Hhirik  is  restored  before  suffixes  i3n"'21rt  Isa.  43:26. 


Impeefect  Yeebs. 

§  107.  Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the 
standard  already  given,  as  the  nature  of  their  radicals 
may  require.   They  are  of  three  classes,  viz.: 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

in.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel  letter  in  the  root. 

These  classes  may  again  be  subdivided  according  to 
the  particular  radical  affected.  Thus  there  are  tliree 
kinds  of  guttural  verbs: 

1.  Pe  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
a  guttural. 

2.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs: 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun, 
and  is  liable  to  be  contracted  by  assimilation  with  the 
second. 

2.  Ayin  doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and  third 
radicals  are  ahke,  and  are  liable  to  be  contracted  into  ona 


§  108  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  147 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs : 

1.  Pe  Yodli  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is 
Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Ijamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  a  quiescent 
He  takes  the  place  of  the  third  radical. 

The  guttural  differ  from  the  perfect  verbs  in  the 
vowels  only;  the  first  division  of  the  contracted  verbs 
difi'er  only  in  the  consonants;  the  quiescent  and  the 
second  division  of  the  contracted  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  verbs  in  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

o.  The  third  class  of  imperfect  verbs  may  either  be  regarded  as  hav- 
ing a  quiescent  letter  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is  changed  into 
a  vowel,  or  as  having  a  vowel  in  the  root,  which  in  certain  forms  is 
changed  into  a  quiescent  letter.  As  the  settlement  of  this  question  is  purely 
a  matter  of  theory,  the  usual  name  of  quiescent  verbs  has  been  retained 
as  sufficiently  descriptive. 

b.  The  origin  of  these  various  technical  names  for  the  different  kinds 
of  imperfect  verbs  is  explained  §  76.  3. 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  108.  Gutturals  have  the  four  following  peculiarities, 
§  60,  viz. : 

1.  They  often  cause  a  preceding  or  accompanying 
vowel  to  be  converted  mto  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh  furtive  at  the  end  of  a  word 
after  a  long  heterogeneous  vowel  or  before  a  vowelless 
final  consonant. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  preference  to  simple  ShVa. 

4.  They  are  incapable  of  being  doubled,  and  conse- 
quently do  not  receive  Daghesh-forte. 

10* 


148  ETY3I0L0GT.  §  1'^^ 

§  109.  Pe  guttural  verbs  are  affected  by  these  pe- 
culiarities as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  preformatives  is  changed  to  Pat- 
tahh  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal  future,  if  the  second 
vowel  be  Hholem,  ilQT  for  "1*53"';;  but  if  the  second  radical 
has  Pattahh  this  change  does  not  occur,  because  it  would 
occasion  a  repetition  of  the  same  vowel  in  successive 
syllables,  §  63.  1.  5.  In  the  Kal  future  a,  therefore,  in 
the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  where  the  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  is  hkewise  a,  and  in  the  Hiphil  prete- 
rite, where  7  is  characteristic  and  therefore  less  subject 
to  change,  Hhirik  is  compounded  with  Pattahh,  or,  in 
other  words,  is  changed  to  the  diphthongal  Seghol,  pin'', 
"/JJD ,  T/l^^ll.  Seghol  accompanying  5<  of  the  first  person 
singular  of  the  Kal  future,  §  60.  1.  a  (5),  and  Kamets 
Hhatuph,  characteristic  of  the  Hophal  species,  suffer  no 
change.  The  same  is  true  of  Hholem  in  the  first  syllable 
of  the  Kal  participle,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite,  and 
Kibbuts  of  the  Pual  species,  for  the  double  reason  that 
these  vowels  are  characteristic  of  those  forms,  and  that 
their  position  after  the  guttural  renders  them  less  hable 
to  mutation,  §  60.  1.  a  (2);  the  second  reason  applies 
likewise  to  the  Hhirik  of  the  feminine  singular  and 
masculine  plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  which,  as  the 
briefest  of  the  short  vowels,  is  besides  best  adapted  to 
the  quick  utterance  of  a  command,  ''1^2^,  ^112^. 

2.  As  the  guttural  does  not  stand  at  the  end  of  the 
word,  there  is  no  occasion  for  applying  the  rule  respect- 
ing Pattahh  furtive;  this  consequently  does  not  appear 
except  in  'nri'],  apocopated  future  of  H^n,  and  in  one  other 
doubtful  example,  §  114. 

3.  Wherever  the  first  radical  should  receive  simple 
Sh'va  the  guttural  takes  compound  Sh'va  instead;  this, 
if  there  be  no  reason  for  preferring  another,  and  especi- 


§  110  PE  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  149 

ally  if  it  be  preceded  by  the  vowel  Pattahh,  will  be  Hha- 
teph  Pattahh,  whose  sound  is  most  consonant  with  that 
of  the  gutturals;  this  is  the  case  in  the  Kal  second  plural 
preterite,  construct  mfinitive,  future  and  imperative  with 
Hholem,  and  in  the  Hiphil,  infinitives,  future,  imperative, 
and  participle,  DPT^y,  il2?\  If,  however,  the  guttural  be 
preceded  by  another  vowel  than  Pattahh  the  compound 
Sh'va  will  generally  be  conformed  to  it;  thus,  after  Seghol 
it  becomes  Hhateph  Seghol  as  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative  a,  the  Mphal  preterite  and  participle,  and 
the  Hiphil  preterite,  pin;',  l^b^n,  and  after  Kamets  Hha- 
tuph  it  becomes  Hhateph  Kamets  as  in  the  Hophal 
species,  ^y^'*}-  If  this  compound  Sh'va  in  the  course  of 
inflection  comes  to  be  followed  by  a  voweUess  letter,  it 
is  changed  to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  §  61.  1, 
thus,  (..)  becomes  (.)  in  the  second  feminine  singular  and 
the  second  and  third  masculme  plural  of  the  Kal  future ; 
(  )  becomes  ()  in  the  third  femmine  singular  and  the 
third  plural  of  the  Niphal  preterite;  and  (^)  becomes  (  ) 
in  the  corresponding  persons  of  the  preterite  and  future 
Hophal,  ^T:?P,  •^7^?:,  ^Tt^D- 

a.  The  simple  Sh'va  following  a  short  vowel  thus  formed,  remains 
vocal  as  in  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  perfect  verb,  the  new  syllable 
being  not  mixed  but  intermediate,  and  hence  a  succeeding  aspirate  will 
retain  its  aspiration,  thus  I'l'O?^  yaam'dhu,  not  l^"?""!  yaamdil,  §  22.  a.  In 
like  manner  the  Kal  imperative  has  ''i'a?,  'IT'??  "^ot  "^^^j!,  W^r,  showing 
that  even  in  the  perfect  verb  ''"iwp,  ^IsiJp  were  pronounced  hitHl,  kit'lii,  not 
kitll,  kitlu. 

4.  The  reduplication  of  the  first  radical  being  im- 
possible in  the  infinitive,  future  and  imperative  Niphal, 
the  preceding  vowel,  which  now  stands  in  a  simple  syl- 
lable, is  lengthened  in  consequence  from  Hhirik  to  Tsere, 
.S  60.  4,  '^-niorityn. 

O  '  T  r"  T    • 

§  110.  1.  The  verb  Tb;?  to  stand,  whose  inflections  are 
shown  in  Paradigm  IV,  may  serve  as  a  representative  of 


150  ETYMOLOGY.  §  Hi 

Pe  guttural  verbs.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  are  omit- 
ted, as  they  present  no  deviation  from  the  regular  verbs. 
The  Niphal  of  T/2^  is  not  in  use,  but  is  here  formed 
fr^m  analogy  for  the  sake  of  giving  completeness  to  the 
paradigm. 

2.  TheKal  imperative  and  future  of  those  verbs  which 
have  Pattahh  in  the  second  syllable  may  be  represented 
by  pin  to  be  strong  in  the  same  Paradigm. 

3.  Certain  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  5^,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future  after  the 
following,  which  is  distinctively  called  the  Pe  Aleph  (i<"S) 
mode. 

FuTUEE  OF  Pe  Aleph  Verbs. 

3  masc.  3  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing.      bb.s^        bbij^n        bii^n       ^biij^n         by^ 
pluk.    tibial     nDbi&^Fi       sibsb^n     nDbb^^n       bb^k: 

Five  verbs  uniformly  adopt  this  mode  of  inflection, 
viz.:  "Qt^  to  perish,  fh)^  to  he  willing,  bi5<  to  eat,  T^X  to 
say,  !~£i<  to  hake;  a  few  others  indifferently  follow  this  or 
the  ordinary  Pe  guttural  mode,  IHiJ  to  love,  in^  to  take 
hold,  rps  to  gather. 

Eemaeks  on  Pe  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  111.  1.  The  preformative  of  the  Kal  future  a  has  (_)  in  one  instance, 
S5"ri1  Ezek.  23:  5.  That  of  the  Kal  future  o  has  (J  in  tfhty^^  Prov.  10:  3, 
t'^rr,  Ps.  29:  9.  Three  verbs  with  future  o,  n^n,  G^n,  lin  liave  Pattahh 
in  the  first  syllable  when  the  Hholem  appears,  but  Seghol  in  those  forms 
in  which  the  Hholem  is  dropped,  ttr^rr^  Job  12:  14,  ^D'"in^  2  Kin.  3:  25  but 
'h-ry^,  Ex.  19:  21,  24;  so  with  suffixes,  "^sii^n";  Ps.  141:  5,  T]D"in:;  Isa.  22:  19, 
^iriyro  Isa.  53  :  2.    "isn  has  r^^ty^  but  ^"13  n\ 

2.  a.  If  the  first  radical  be  X,  the  preformative  takes  Seghol  in  most 
verts  in  the  Kal  future,  whether  a  or  o,  pix";,  CiON";,  ^is'sn,  iHsF)  as  well  a« 
•j'tix;;;,  ThtX^,,  ^ixn,  q^xn;  in  a  few  with  future  a,  §  110.  3,  it  takes  Hholem, 
the  (.)  of  the  second  syllable  usually  becoming  (..)  in  pause,  and  in  a  few 


§111 


EEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTUEAL  VEEBS.        151 


instances  without  a  pause  accent,  ibx'^,  l^it"^,  113X"',  Tnx"^,  but  I'^si'^;  in  two 
verbs  it  becomes  (.)  after  Vav  conversive,  "lax'l,  tnx'l,  but  with  a  pause 
accent  ^5i<*!!,  "'^^'D  or  in  tbe  first  verses  of  several  chapters  of  Job  :'"i"2X'1. 
Hholem  in  these  verbs  is  probably  modified  from  a,  so  that  bsx^  is  for 
Vz^l  from  bix;^,  §  201.  e. 

b.  As  N  is  always  quiescent  after  Hholem  in  this  latter  form  of  the 
future,  §  57.  2.  (2)  a,  Pe  Aleph  verbs  might  be  classed  among  quiescent 
verbs,  and  this  is  in  fact  done  by  some  grammarians.  But  as  X  has  the 
double  character  of  a  guttural  and  a  quiescent  in  different  forms  sprung 
from  the  same  root,  and  as  its  quiescence  is  confined  almost  entirely  to  a 
single  tense  of  a  single  species,  it  seems  better  to  avoid  sundering  what 
really  belongs  together,  by  considering  the  Pe  Aleph  as  a  variety  of  the 
Pe  guttural  verbs.  In  a  few  instances  X  gives  up  its  consonantal  character 
after  (..),  which  is  then  lengthened  to  (J,  Hnstri  Mic.  4:  8.  When  thus 
quiescent  after  either  Tsere  or  Hholem,  St  is  always  omitted  in  the  first 
person  singular  after  the  preformative  X,  ^nx  Gen.  32:  5  for  ^nxs,  nnx 
Prov.  8:  17  for  2nxx,  b?X  Gen.  24:  33  for  bixx,  and  occasionally  in  other 
persons,  "^BiTn  Jer.  2:  36  for  "^biXF);  so  Nni  Deut.  33:  21,  xh'n  Prov.  1:  10, 
C;bh  Ps.  104:  29,  !l-iriri  2  Sam.  19:  14,  mni  2  Sam.  20:  9,  inEni  1  Sam.  28:  24; 
in  a  few  instances  the  vowel  letter  T  is  substituted  for  it,  ^ibsii  Ezek.  42:  5 
for  ^^DX;',  -mix  Neh.  2  :  7,  Ps.  42:  10, 

C.  A  like  quiescence  or  omission  of  X  occurs  in  b^tX^I  Num.  11:  25  Hi. 
fut.  for  bix*n,  b-bn  Ezek.  21:  33  Hi.  inf.  for  biiNnl  ^tx  Job  32:  11  Hi. 
fut.  for  "iXX,  'pip  Prov.  17:  4  Hi.  part,  for  'ptN^,'  §  53.  2.  a,  ^rbs"?  Job 
35:  11  Pi.  part,  for  13Ebxp,  §  53.  3,  "iDTTn  2  Sam.  22:  40  Pi.  fat.  for  ■'iniXn, 
:r\\'\  1  Sam.  15:  5  Hi.  fut.  for  Snx^l,  rnn  Isa.  21:  14  Hi.  pret.  for  'I'nxf^, 
brn  Isa,  13:  20  Pi.  fut.  for  bnX";,  and  after  prefixes  nixb  for  "i^xb,  the 
Kal  infinitive  of  "ipx  with  the  preposition  b,  ^"12X1  Ezek,  28:  16  Pi.  fut. 
with  Vav  conversive  for  r^liXXI ,  "ii"X1  Zech,  11:5  Hi.  fut,  with  Vav  con- 
junctive for  "i'ItJ'XI,  Dinsion  Eccles,  4:  14  Kal  pass.  part,  with  the  article 
for  D'^'nTOxn, 

d,  Hholem  is  further  assumed  by  Pe  Aleph  roots  once  in  the  Niphal 

preterite,  linxj  Num,  32:  30  for  ^ITHX;,  and  five  times  in  the  Hiphil  future, 

nn-^hx  Jer.  46:  8  for  JTiiiXwS,  biiix  Hos,  11 : 4  for  biixx,  nn:i"X  Neh.  13:  13 

for  nn-'^XX,  bx'l  l  Sam,  14:  24  abbreviated  from  nbx'T  for  nbx*1,  "inial 

2  Sam.  20^  5  K'ri  for  nflX^'l. 
..  -., — 

e.  X  draws  the  vowel  to  itself  from  the  preformative  in  1Sl!)xri  ProT. 
1:  22  Kal  fut.  for  ^dnxn  in  pause  l^nxn  Zech.  8:  17,  Ps.  4:  3,  §  60,  3.  c. 
Some  so  explain  ^inb^XPl  Job  20 :  26,  regarding  it  as  a  Kal  future  for  inbsxn 
with  the  vowel  attracted  to  the  X  from  the  preformative;  it  is  simpler, 
however,  to  regard  it  as  a  Pual  future  with  Kamets  Hhatuph  insteiad  of 
Kibbuts,  §  93,  a,  as  Cnx?3  Nah,  2  :  4,  rp^n-]  Ps.  94:  20. 

3,  a.  Kamets  Hhatuph  for  the  most  part  remains  in  the  Kal  infinitiva 
and  imperative  with  suffixes  or  added  vowels,  as  i^"]3?)  "H^^-i'"  "^''Tt'  b®i°8f 
rarely  changed  to  Pattahh,  as  in  ^nbrn  Prov.  20:  16,  or  Seghul.  as  "HEtpx 
Num,  11:  16,   rt="ir  Job  33:  5.     In  the  inflected  imperative  Seghol  occurs 


152  ETYMOLOGY.  §  112 

once  instead  of  Hhirik,  ""'Q'iJti  Isa.  47 :  2,  and  Kamets  Hhatuph  twice  in 
compensation  for  the  omitted  Hholem,  ''T^^  Zeph.  3:  14  but  >lib3J  is.  68:  5, 
^iS'in  Jer.  2:  12  but  ^3"in  Jer.  50:  27,  though  the  0  sound  is  once  retained 
in  the  compound  Sh'va  of  a  pausal  form,  "^l^^ri  Isa.  44:  27.  Ewald  explains 
dnnrn  Ex.  20:  5,  23:  24,  Dent.  5:  9,  and  t]'^3r3  Deut.  13:  3  as  Kal  futures, 
the  excluded  Hholem  giving  character  to  the  preceding  vowels;  the  forms, 
however,  are  properly  Hophal  futures,  and  there  is  no  reason  why  the 
■words  may  not  be  translated  accordingly  be  induced  to  serve.  In  a  few  Kal 
infinitives  with  a  feminine  termination  H  has  (  ),  tiB^n  Ezek.  16:  5,  "inisan 
Hos.  7:  4. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  Pattahh  is  found  in  the  first  sj'llable  of  the 
Nipbal  preterite  and  participle  and  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  <lw?3 ,  'lii?3, 
ii'as:  but  nnas3,  vnys  Ps.  89:  8,  ohinn  Judg.  8:  19. 

§  112.  1.  The  guttural  invariably  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  place  oi 
simple,  where  this  is  vocal  in  the  perfect  verb;  and  as  in  these  cases  it 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  it  is  more  at  liberty  to  follow  its  na- 
tive preferences,  and  therefore  usually  takes  (_ ).  In  tn'^'^ii  2  plur.  pret., 
n'i"'ln  inf.,  i~i2'2  imper.  of  iT^n,  the  initial  rt  has  (.^)  under  the  influence  of 
the  following  ^;  X  receives  (. /^  in  the  second  plui'al  of  the  Kal  preterite, 
and  in  the  feminine  and  plural  of  the  passive  participle,  Dn"!2X,  Cribsx, 
C^D^iax,  but  commonly  (  )  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive,  §  60.  3.  b,  bix 
imper.,  ^rX  and  bbx  inf.,  thx  and  "hx  inf.,  'f^^.  imper.,  "ibX  inf.  and  imper. 
(but  "ibNrt  Job  34:  18  with  ii  interrogative),  p-X,  C]bx  (with  tl  paragogie 
nSGX),  and  in  a  very  few  instances  the  long  vowel  (_),  §  60.  3.  c,  ISX  Ex. 
16:  23  for  ^SX,  rnx  Isa.  21:  12. 

2.  Where  the  first  radical  in  perfect  verbs  stands  after  a  short  vowel 
and  completes  its  syllable,  the  guttural  does  the  same,  but  mostly  admits 
an  echo  of  the  preceding  vowel  after  it,  inclining  it  likewise  to  begin  the 
syllable  which  follows.  In  the  intermediate  syllable  thus  formed,  §  20.  2, 
the  vowel  remains  short,  only  being  modified  agreeably  to  the  rulea 
already  given  by  the  proximity  of  the  guttural,  which  itself  receives  the 
corresponding  Hhateph.  The  succession  is,  therefore,  usually  (...),  (_,^.)  or 
(^  ).  In  a  very  few  instances  this  correspondence  is  neglected;  thus,  in 
tj^nn  3  fem.  fut.  of  ~^li  to  go  (comp.  pb'4^.  from  pm  to  laugh)  the  Hhirik 
of  the  preformative  remains  and  the  guttural  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh;  in 
n3sn  (once,  viz.,  Hab.  1:  15  for  t^^^".?]!!)  and  <^^?i7  Hiphil  and  Hophal  prete- 
rites of  n^JJ  to  go  up,  and  Pi";??^  (once,  viz..  Josh  7:  7  for  R'liyii)  Hi,  pret. 
of  "i?S  to  pass  over,  the  guttural  is  entirely  transferred  to  the  second  syl- 
lable, and  the  preceding  vowel  is  lengthened.  The  forms  ni'^rib,  >l^f7|;, 
Dn"^"]!!;!,  n^lri3  from  iT^rj  to  be,  and  like  forms  from  ti^n  to  live,  are  peculiar 
in  having  simple  vocal  Sh'va. 

3.  "Where  (^)  or  (^  )  are  proper  to  the  form  these  are  frequently 
changed  to  (.  )  or  (_  )  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  word  or  the  removal 
of  its  accent  forward.  Thus,  in  the  Kal  future,  CiOXi  2  Kin.  5:  3,  !|£t)Xi  Ex. 

4:  29,  ''SepXi  Ps.  27:  10,  "^SOxn  Josh.  2:  18;  ili'nx';;  Isa.  59:  5,  '^J'lxn  Judg. 
16:  13;  the  Niphal,  D^:?.3  1  Kin.  10:  3,  nibyD  Nah.''3:  11,  ts"^^^;;,?  Psr26:  4; 


§112 


EEMAEKS  ON  PE  GUTTUEAL  VEEBS.  153 


and  especially  in  the  Hipliil  preterite  with  Vav  conversive,  Pi^^sn  Job 
14:  19,  n~?Nni  Deut.  7:  24,  cnnrsni  Deut.  9:  3  (comp.  onbaxn  Ps.  80:  6), 
•ipi-iaxni/  Lev.  23:  30;  "^Filsrxr]"!  Isa.  49  :  26;  ''npTnn  Neh.  5:  16,  '^npTnn'l 
Ezek.  30:  25;  rprn^i^in  Isa.  43:  23,  T^"'rii:;?.:!l1.  Jer.  17:  4;  -pixn  Deut.  1:  45, 
prixni  Ex.  15:  26,  ''rirrri'i  Jer.  49:  37;  after  Vav  conjunctive,  however, 
the  vowels  remain  unchanged,  ''I^l^inv!!  1  Sam.  17:  35,  '^rnynnn'l  Ps.  50:  21, 
Neh.  10:  33,  Ezek.  37:  2.  The  change  from  (..^  ..)  to  (.  __)  after  Vav  con- 
versive occurs  once  in  the  third  person  of  the  Hiphil  preterite,  Vtxtni  Ps. 
77:  2,  but  is  not  usual,  e.  g.  rf"i".ni.  •  •  •  "i^'r^lvil  I^ev.  27:  8.  There  is  one 
instance  of  („.  .)  instead  of  (..  J  in  the  Hiphil  infinitive,  '^f:'^'[^t^  Jer.  31 :  32. 

4.  A  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  in  consequence  of  the  rejec- 
tion of  the  vowel  of  a  following  consonant,  will  be  dropped  in  guttural  as 
in  perfect  verbs  upon  the  latter  vowel  being  restored  by  a  pause  accent, 

^h-os^,  iiby;^;  !inps,'!nri». 

5.  Sometimes  the  sUent  Sh'va  of  the  perfect  verb  is  retained  by  the 
guttural  instead  of  being  replaced  by  a  compound  Sh'va  or  a  subsidiary 
vowel  which  has  arisen  from  it.  This  is  most  frequent  in  the  Kal  future, 
though  it  occurs  likewise  in  the  Kal  infinitive  after  inseparable  preposi- 
tions, in  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  in  the  Hiphil  species,  and  also 
though  rarely  in  the  Hophal.  There  are  examples  of  it  with  all  the  gut- 
turals, though  these  are  most  numerous  in  the  case  of  ti,  which  is  the 
strongest  of  that  class  of  letters.  In  the  majority  of  roots  and  forms  there 
is  a  fixed  or  at  least  a  prevailing  usage  in  favour  either  of  the  simple  or 
of  the  compound  Sh'va;  in  some,  however,  the  use  of  one  or  the  other  ap- 
pears to  be  discretionary. 

a.  The  following  verbs  always  take  simple  Sh'va  under  the  first  radical 
in  the  species  whose  initial  letters  are  annexed  to  the  root,  viz.: 

Q'lX  Hi.  to  be  red.  *i=rj  'K.towjure,ivound.  "^cn  K.  to  spare. 

"inx  Ni.  Hi.  to  he  illus-  stsn  Ni.  Hi.  Ho.  to  hide,  'ch'n  K.  Ni.  to  do  vio- 

trious.  ain  K.  to  beat  of.  lence  to. 

ti:!t  Hi.  to  close.  ^in  Hi.  to  join  together.  Ifhn  K.  to  be  leavened. 

♦lisx  K.  to  shut.  "lin  K.  to  gird.  "npn  K.  to  ferment. 

Cl^X  K.  to  learn.  ^nn  K.  (not  Ho.)   to  "in  K.  to  dedicate. 

ISX  K.  to  gird  on.  cease.  ^bn  K.  to  devour. 

OtBx  K.  Ni.  (not  Hi.)  S'jn  K.  to  cut.  ten  K.  to  muzzle. 

-T  ^  '-T  "T 

to  be  guilty.  n^n  K.    (not   Hi.)   to       npn  K.  Hi.  to  lack. 

"bb-i  K.  Hi.  to  be  vain.  live.  nsn  Ni.  to  cover, 

'ni.'n  K.  Hi.  to  meditate,   cin  K.  Hi.  to  be  wise.      teh  K.  Ni.  to  be  panic- 

T    T  -     T  T 

Cjnn  K.  to  thrust.  *M3n  K.  meaning  doubt-  struck. 

nnn  K.  Ni.  to  honour.  ful.  ybn  K.  to  delight. 

t\^ri  K.  Ni.  to  be.  iibn  K.  Ni.  to  desire.         "isn  K.  to  dig. 

IT  -   T  r  '^ 


154  ETYMOLOGY.  §113 

"sn  K.  Hi.  to  blush.       Dinn  K.  Ni.  Hi.  to  seal,  bfej  Hi.  to  be  presump' 

ii'sn  K.  Ni.  to  search.      t\'n'n  K.  to  seize.  tuous. 

zkn  K.  (notRi.)  to  hew.  "i!nn  K.to break  through,  ttip^  K. 'Ni.  to  pervert. 

t"ij;n  K.  Ni.  to  investi-    ^h  K.  to  love,  dote.  ^'vV  K.  Hi.  to  tithe. 

gate.                      tins  K.  to  put  on  as  an  *Dihy  Ni.  to  be  burnt  itp. 

*5'nn  K.  to  tremble.                    ornament.  pin^  K.  Hi.   to  be  re- 

nhn  K.  to  take  up.  t}xs  Hi.  to  gather  much.  moved. 

"rn  Ni.  to  be  destined,     "nv  Ni.  to  be  wanting.  '^h'S  K.  Ni.  Hi.  to  en, 

bin  Ho.  to  be  swaddled,   'nbs'  K.  Ni.  to  trouble.  treat. 

-    T  -    T 

6.  The  following  are  used  with  both  simple  and  compound  Sh'va,  eithei 
in  the  same  form  or  in  different  forms,  viz.: 

nbx  to  bind.  rtbn  to  trust.  iihv  to  wear. 

Tj^n  to  turn.  T\^n  to  withhold.  "li:^  to  encircle. 

bin  to  take  in  pledge.        Cjiin  to  uncover.  cby  to  conceal. 

cin  to  bind.  DiBn  to  think.  "ik:!  to  shut  up,  restrain. 

pin  to  be  strong.  T\^'n  to  be  dark.  3pr  to  supiAant. 

nbn  to  be  sick.  "ihs  to  pass  over.  '|i'S  to  smoke. 

pbn  to  divide.  "ijs  to  help.  "ife  to  be  rich. 

c.  The  following  have  simple  Sh'va  only  in  the  passages  or  parts  al- 
leged, but  elsewhere  always  compound  Sh'va,  viz.: 

anjj  2  Chr.  19:  2,  Pr.  15:  9,  to  love,  "i^rj  Ezek.  26:  18,  to  tremble. 

■nis  Ps.  65:  7,  to  gird.  niiin  Hi.  part,  to  be  silent. 

Tipx  Ps.  47:  10,  to  gather.  rhn  Jer.  49:  37,  to  be  dismayed. 

r^bn  Ps.  109:  23,  to  go.  lis  Eccl.  5:  8,  fo  serve. 

5nn   2  Kin.  10:  9,  fo  slay.  lb?  Jer.  15:  17,  Ps.  149:  5,  and 

c3n  Job  39:  4,  Jer.  29:  8,  to  dream.  yVj  Ps.  5:  12,  to  exult. 

T^n  Job  20:  24,  to  change,  pierce.  T^'S  Isa.  44:  7,  to  set  in  order. 

All  other  Pe  guttural  verbs,  if  they  occur  in  forms  requiring  a  Sh'va 
under  the  first  radical,  have  invariably  compound  Sh'va. 

The  use  or  disuse  of  simple  Sh'va  is  so  uniform  and  pervading  in  cer- 
tain verbs,  that  it  must  in  all  probability  be  traced  to  the  fixed  usage  of 
actual  speech.  This  need  not  be  so  in  all  cases,  however,  as  in  other  and 
less  common  words  its  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  may  be  fortuitous; 
additional  examples  might  have  been  pointed  differently. 

§  113.  1.  The  Hhirik  of  the  prefix  is  in  the  Niphal  future,  imperative 
and  participle,  almost  invariably  lengthened  to  Tseie  upon  the  omission  oi 
Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical,  lOn-],  "liij^.,  Isa.  23:  18,  '^:iW  (the  retro- 
cession of  the  accent  by  §  35.  1)  Isa.  28:  27,  pbn"i  Job  38:  24,  y^m  Num. 

*  scffotl  Xsyifisvov.  f  Except  Ps.  44 :  22. 


§114-116  ATIN  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  155 

32:  17,  psn^l  2  Sam.  17:  23,  which  is  in  one  instance  expressed  by  the 
vowel  letter  "^j  n"i;r"'n  Ex.  25:  31.  The  only  exception  is  5"n2  (two  accents 
explained  by  §  42.  a)  Ezek.  26:  15  for  5'nn2;  Baer's  edition  has  a^na. 
According  to  some  copies,  which  differ  in  this  from  the  received  text,  Seghol 
likewise  occurs  in  rT:i'X  Job  19:  7,  'ir'i-^f^  Ezek.  43:  18,  Cp.^n;;:  1  Chroa. 
24:  3,  ri:r2  Lam.  2:11.  In  Job  34:  31  "^t^!]]  is  neither  the  infin.  nor  the 
imper.  Niph.,  as  it  has  sometimes  been  explained,  but  the  Kal  pret.  "i^X  with 
He  Interrogative,  §  232.  4. 

2.  The  initial  n  of  the  Hiphil  infinitive  is,  as  in  perfect  verbs,  rarely 
rejected  after  prefixed  prepositions,  as  p^tTS  Jer.  37:  12  for  pBnns,  X'^urt 
Eccles.  5  :  5,  n^b^b  2  Sam.  19  :  19,  lir?b  Deut,  26  :  12,  ^ii^"?  Neh,  10:  39, 
•n'^Tsb  2  Sam.  18:  3  K'thibh;  and  still  more  rarely  that  of  the  Niphal  infin- 
itive, ribra  Lam.  2:  11  for  t:i:rn3,  i^na  Ezek.  26:  15. 

§  114.  The  letter  1  resembles  the  other  gutturals  in  not  admitting 
Daghesh-forte,  and  in  requiring  the  previous  vowel  to  be  lengthened  in- 
stead, D'T"''1  Jon.  1:5,  ^35"i'^1  Ps.  106:  25.  In  other  cases,  however,  it  causes 
no  change  in  an  antecedent  Hhirik,  '^i'Tl  Deut.  19:  6,  ll'T]  2  Sam.  7:  10, 
r~5~ri  Ps.  66:  12,  except  in  certain  forms  of  the  verb  nkn  to  see,  viz.,  S<i*j 
Kal  future  with  Vav  conversive,  shortened  from  nx"i%  iii<~n  which  alter- 
nates with  nx"iri  as  Hiphil  preterite,  and  once  with  Vav  conversive  prete- 
rite, '^n"'N~<i'l  Nah.  3:5.  It  is  in  two  instances  preceded  by  Hhirik  in  the 
Hiphil  infinitive,  ?"'a~f7.  ''■'?'!n  Jer.  50:  34.  In  the  Hophal  species  the 
participles  rj'n'ip  Isa.  14:  6,  rz2"ip  Lev.  6:  14  take  Kibbuts  in  the  first  syl- 
lable, but  nk'i,  31''^  have  the  ordinary  KametsHhatuph.  Resh  always  retains 
the  simple  Sh'va  of  perfect  verbs  whether  silent  or  vocal  C]"n  Gen.  44:  4, 
■^r^ET)  Ps.  129:  86,  except  in  one  instance,  tp"^"^  Ps.  7:  6,  where  it  appears 
to  receive  Pattahh  furtive  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule  which  restricts  it 
to  the  end  of  the  word  §  60.  2.  a. 

§  115.  The  verb  bbx  reduplicates  its  last  instead  of  its  second  radical 
in  the  Pual,  bbwX;  "ihn  reduplicates  its  last  syllable,  ii'^^'ipn  Lam.  2:  11, 
§  92.  a. 

bnfi  is  a  secondary  root,  based  upon  the  Hiphil  of  bBn.    See  ""S  verbs. 

For  the  peculiar  forms  of  r,DJ<  and  Ti^n  see  the  "^'t  verbs,  t]Cn  and  T^3^ 


Attn  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  116.  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a 
guttural  for  their  second  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
peculiarities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  follo^vdng 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  influence  of  the  guttural  upon  a  following 
vowel  being  comparatively  shght,  this  latter  is  only  con- 
verted into  P-attahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal, 


156  ETYMOLOGY.  §117,118 

and  the  feminine  plural  of  the  future  and  imperative 
Niphalj  Piel,  and  Hithpael,  where  the  like  change  some- 
tunes  occurs  even  without  the  presence  of  a  guttural 

bi<T  for  bib^  nsbssn  for  riDbs-tn. 

2.  No  forms  occur  which  could  give  rise  to  Pattahh 
furtive. 

3.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  sunple 
Sh'va,  it  takes  Hhateph  Pattahh  instead  as  the  compound 
Sh'va  best  suited  to  its  nature;  and  to  this  the  new  vowel, 
formed  from  Sh'va  in  the  feminine  singular  and  mas- 
culine plural  of  the  Kal  imperative,  is  assimilated,  ^bNli 
for  ^1:5<5. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  either  remain  short  as  in  an  inter* 
mediate  syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere, 
Pattahh  to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem,  §  60.  4, 

§  117.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  gTittural  verbs  may  be 
shown  by  the  example  of  bk^,  (Paradigm  V.)  which  in 
some  species  means  to  redeem,  and  in  others  to  pollute. 
The  Hiphn  and  Hophal  are  omitted,  as  the  former  agrees 
precisely  with  that  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  latter  differs 
only  in  the  substitution  of  compound  for  simple  Sh'va  in 
a  manner  sufficiently  illustrated  by  the  foregoing  species. 

a.  The  Pual  infinitive  is  omitted  from  the  paradigm  as  it  is  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  there  is  no  example  of  it  in  this  class  of  verbs.  As  the 
absolute  infinitive  Piel  mostly  gives  up  its  distinctive  form  and  adopts  that 
of  the  construct,  §  92.  d,  it  is  printed  with  Tsere  in  this  and  the  following 
paradigms. 

Remarks  on  Ayin  Guttueal  Verbs. 

§  118.  1.  If  the  second  radical  is  "i,  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  com- 
monly have  Hholem;  but  the  following  take  Pattahh,  "TX  to  be  long,  T\^3 
to  kneel,  inn  to  be  dried  or  desolate,   Tnn  to  tremble^   Cinn  to  reproach,  to 


§  1 1 9  REMARKS  ON  AYIN  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  1  5  7 

whiter,  y^rt  to  sharpen,  tl^iS  (I'n:?)  to  he  sweet,  t^n;^  to  cnme  near,  ~-i;r  to 
cover;  Ci'^i:  to  tear  in  pieces,  has  either  Hholem  or  Pattabh;  ^  ^n  to  ploxigh 
has  fut.  0,  to  he  silent  has  fut.  a. 

2.  With  any  other  guttural  for  the  second  radical  tlie  Kal  future  and 
imperative  have  Pattahh;  only  cnj  to  roar,  and  tn'i  to  love,  have  Hholem, 
nil  to  curse,  hv'O  to  trespass,  andbi's  to  do,  have  either  Pattahh  or  Hho- 
lem ;  the  future  of  THi*  to  grasp,  is  insi;  or  inx"^. 

3.  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  is  as  in  perfect  verbs  commonly  prolonged 
to  Kamets  before  suffixes,  where  Hholem  would  be  rejected,  rjttrj^  ^^o'* . 
4:  6,  Q^i-jrip'^  2  Kin.  10:  14,  CJjirnm  2  Sam.  22:  43,  "'S^^Xir  Isa.  45:  11,  "^^er;^" 
Gen.  29:  32. 

4.  The  feminine  plurals  of  the  Niphal  and  Piel  futures  have  Pattahh 
with  the  second  radical  whether  this  be  "i  or  another  guttural,  nisran  Ezek. 
7:  27,  i-i:EK->an  Prov.  6:  27,  !^:;b!^ri  Ezek.  16:  6,  :n:2X:n  Hos.  4:  13,  but 
Tsere  occasionally  in  pause,  •^J^ii^ri  Jer.  9:  17. 

§  119.  1.  With  these  exceptions  the  vowel  accompanying  the  guttural 
is  the  same  as  in  the  perfect  verb;  thus  the  Kal  preterite  mid.  e  ;Sns 
Gen.  27:  9,  Ti^nx  Deut.  15:  16;  infinitive  ph  1  Sam.  7:  8,  -np  Jer.  15:  3, 
with  Makkeph,  Tins  l  Kin.  5:  20;  Niphal  infinitive,  tfibn  Ex.  IT:  10,  with 
suffixes,  ^(:?T2n  2  Chron.  16:  7,  8,  with  prefixed  3,  C'm?  Judg.  11:  25,  Vx'i"? 
1  Sam.  20:  6,  28,  and  once  anomalously  with  prefixed  St,  d"i^X  Ezek.  14:  3 
(a  like  substitution  of  N  for  n  occurring  once  in  the  Hiphil  preterite  :"^ri-X?X 
Isa.  63:  3);  future  Cni"^  Ex.  14:  14,  with  Vav  conversive,  :'2N:a*l  Job  7:  5, 
Vnp'iT  Ex.  32:  1,  P^;T^1  Judg.  6:  34,  nnSPlI  Ex.  9:  15,  ]'r'5ni  Num.  22:  25, 
or  Avith  the  accent  on  the  penult,  ^T;^^'^.'^  Ex.  17:  8,  t:;.;Bni  Gen.  41:  8; 
imperative,  Sn^ri  1  Sam.  18:  17,  or  with  the  accent  thrown  back,  "i~sn 
Gen.  13:  9;  Hiphil  infinitive,  ^"X^ir;  1  Sam.  27:  12,  prnri  Gen.  21:  16,  C^nn 
Deut.  7:  2,  apocopated  future,  cri^  1  Sam.  2:  10,  rncn  Deut.  9:  26,  nn;^  Ps. 
12:  4,  with  Vav  conversive,  cis:*1  1  Kin.  22:  54,  ^n:xi  Zech.  11:8;  impera- 
tive, rs^pn  Ex.  28:  1,  with  Makkeph,  -"nnn  Ps.  81:'  11,  -p"]r\  2  Sam.  20:  4, 
-Vilpri  Deut.  4:  10,  with  a  pause  accent  the  last  vowel  sometimes  becomes 
Pattahh,  pri'-ri  Job  13:  21,  :"i?^^^  Ps.  69:  24,  though  not  always,  't^.~n  Lev. 
8:  3.  Hophal  infinitive,  ^bOvJ  ^  ^^°*  ^'  ^^'  Tsere  is  commonly  retained  in 
the  last  syllable  of  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  which  upon  the  retrocession  or 
loss  of  the  accent  is  shortened  to  Seghol,  tins  Lev.  5:  22,  irnb";  Hos.  9:  2, 
pnk>  Gen.  39: 14,  -pndb  Ps.  104:  26,  ti:\h]  74: 10,  nnc-^i  Gen.  39:4,  nrerni 
Dan.  2:  1,  S'^'y^n  2  Kin.  18:  23,  and  occasionally  before  suffixes  to  Hhirik, 
Cibip-iQ  Isa.  1:  15,  i^irny^ri  (fern,  form  for  r|rir,r5T2,  §  61.  6)  1  Sam.  16:  15  but 
CZ'an'nb  Isa.  30:  18,  CrrTO  Ezek.  5:  16;  in  a  few  instances,  however,  as  in 
the  perfect  verb,  Pattahh  is  taken  instead,  thus  in  the  preterite,  i;~b  Mai. 
3:  19,  tn-j  Ps.  103:  13,  ph-\  Isa.  6:  12,  irnX  Deut.  20:  7,  -"b?  Gen.  24:  1 
("•^2  rarely  occurs  except  in  pause),  rns  Isa.  25:  11,  and  more  rarely  still 
in  the  imperative,  2^;^  Ezek.  37:  17,  and  future  ^-lyn"]  Prov.  14:  10,  hk-^TT], 
:bX5r7  Dan.  1:  8. 

2.  bxD,  which  has  Kamets  in  pause,  bXTy,  siVxia,  but  most  commonly 
Tsere  before  suffixes,   r,bN;Tr,   'iJ^'iSTa,    exhibits  the  peculiar   forms,    Cinbx"^ 


158  ETYMOLOGY.  §  120,  121 

1  Sam.  12:  13    :i''tn^xa    1  Sam.  1:  20,    siiT^in^tj;^   Judg.  13:  6,    sin^n^srn 
1  Sam.  1 :  28. 

3.  Kamets  Hhatuph  sometimes  remains  before  the  guttural  in  the  Kal 
imperative  and  iufiuitive  with  suffixes  or  appended  fl,  DhfiX  Hos.  9:  10, 
•r^'iNy  Ruth  3:  13,  DDS^  Am.  2:  4,  CsijpXTa  (by  §  61.  1)  Isa.  30:  12,  obn-np^ 
Deut.  20:  2  (the  alternate  form  being  DD-inp  Josh.  22:  16),  f^^r^■^  Ex.  30: 18, 
rijrn"  Ezek.  8:  6,  and  sometimes  is  changed  to  Pattahh,  "ib"l  Isa.  57:  13, 
d'iy?  Ezek.  20:  27,  n-jn'^  Hos.  5:  2,  iih^J?  Deut.  10:  15,  nhx-i  Jer.  31:  12, 
or  with  simple  Sh'va  under  the  guttural,  T^'l?^  Ps.  68 :  8,  is"]  2  Chron. 
26:  19.  In  iih'j\  Num.  23:  7,  Kamets  Hhatuph  is  lengthened  to  Hholem  in 
the  simple  syllable.  Once  the  pai-agogic  imperative  takes  the  form  M^X"^' 
Isa.  7:11,  comp.  Mn^D,  W^0  Dan.  9:  19,  riNS"!  Ps.  41:  5. 

4.  Hhirik  of  the  inflected  Kal  imperative  is  retained  before  1,  ^rTlS 
Josh.  9:  6,  and  once  before  n,  ^h'n'ci  Job  6:  22;  when  the  first  radical  is  i< 
it  becomes  Seghol,  ^dnx  Ps.  31:  24,  "^TPix  Cant.  2:  15;  in  other  cases  it  is 
changed  to  Pattahh,  "'prT  Isa.  14:  31,  ip^T  Judg.  10:  14. 

§  120.  1.  The  compound  Sh'va  after  Kamets  Hhatuph  is  (^.),  after 
Seghol  (.,.),  in  other  cases  (_  ),  as  is  sufficiently  shown  by  the  examples  al- 
ready adduced.  Exceptions  are  rare,  '^friX  Ruth  3:  15,  "'in/wiri  Ezek.  16:  33, 
!inixni  y^thaPrehu  Isa.  44:  13. 

2.  The  letter  before  the  guttural  receives  compound  Sh'va  in  pri^^ 
Gen.  21:  6;  in  "iX'^N?  Ezek.  9:  8,  this  leads  to  the  prolongation  of  the 
preceding  vowel  and  its  expression  by  the  vowel  letter  N,  §  11,  1.  a.  This 
latter  form,  though  without  an  exact  parallel,  is  thus  susceptible  of  ready 
explanation,  and  there  is  no  need  of  resorting  to  the  hypothesis  of  an  error 
in  the  text  or  a  confusion  of  two  distinct  readings,  ikiy?  and  "iXpX. 

3.  Resh  commonly  receives  simple  Sh'va,  though  it  has  compound  in 
some  forms  of  T^na,  e.  g.  ^li^an  Num.  6:  23,  iins  Gen.  27:  27. 

§  121.  1.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  from  the  second  radical 
the  previous  vowel  is  alwaj's  lengthened  before  "l,  almost  always  before 
X,  and  prevailingly  before  2?,  but  rarely  before  n  or  n.  The  previous  vowel 
remains  short  in  ns'S  to  terrify,  0^3  to  provoke,  'Sv-o  to  he  feio,  "i53  to 
shake,  and  ps:s  to  cry.  It  is  sometimes  lengthened,  though  not  always,  in 
•nxa  to  make  plain,  v]k3  to  commit  adultery,  ]^X3  to  despise,  ^ki  to  reject, 
ixiy  to  ask;  1^3  to  consume,  "lyb  to  stveep  away  by  a  tempest,  ^V7\  to  abhor; 
bna  to  affright,  nn3  to  be  dim,  hhi  to  lead.  It  is  also  lengthened  in  iinp 
to  he  dull,  which  only  occurs  Eccl.  10:  10.  The  only  instances  of  the  pro- 
longation of  the  vowel  before  M  are  Qn^  Pi.  inf.  Judg.  5:  8,  )TJZ  Pu.  pret. 
Ezek.  21:  18,  ^T\i  Pu.  pret.  Ps.  36:  13,  '^n::n"ini-i  Job  9:  30,  the  first  two  of 
which  may,  however,  be  regarded  as  nouns.  Daghesh-forte  is  retained  and 
the  vowel  consequently  remains  short  in  ri^iS  Ezek.  16:  4,  i^Jji'i  Job  33:  21, 
unless  the  point  in  the  latter  example  is  to  be  regarded  as  Mappik,  §  26. 

2.  When  not  lengthened,  Hhirik  of  the  Piel  preterite  commonly  re- 
mains  unaltered  before   the  guttural,    siTns  Job  15:  18,   ^'nn:i  Jer.  12:  10, 


§  122,  123     LAMEDH  GUTTURAL  VERBS.  159 

though  it  is  in  tAvo  instances  changed  to  Seghol,  ^^ni<  Jmig.  5 :  28,  ''Srrr" 
Ps.  51:  7. 

3.  "When  under  the  influence  of  a  pause  accent  the  guttural  receives 
Kamets,  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  converted  to  Seghol,  §  63.  1.  a,  "^P'criri 
Ezek.  5:  13,  nn:ni  Num.  23:  19,  :!inn-jn  Num.  8:  7. 

§  122.  1.  ■jJsn  and  "j^xui  are  Piel  forms  with  the  third  radical  redupli- 
cated in  place  of  the  second;  "ir"ir;p  doubles  the  second  syllable;  and  1-'!!>< 
isri  Hos.  4:  18,  is  by  the  ablest  Hebraists  regarded  as  one  word,  the  last 
two  radicals  being  reduplicated  together  with  the  personal  ending,  §  92.  a. 

2.  ir  j"J  and  'ni'O  have  two  forms  of  the  Piel,  "cy^  and  d'n'i,  nyo  and 
^yb,  §  92.  6.;  and  ^i'a  two  forms  of  the  Hithpael,  1->3n':,  ^-elp'?  Jer.  46: 
?.  8;  :7X's-3  Isa.  52:  5,  follows  the  analogy  of  the  latter;  •f'Xr  Eccl.  12:  5, 
is  sometimes  derived  from  yi<:  to  despise,  as  if  it  were  for  yx:^)  such  a 
form  would  however  be  unexampled.  The  voAvels  show  it  to  be  the  Hiphil 
future  of  "13  or  rather  "('ij  to  flourish  or  blossom,  the  X  being  inserted  as 
a  vowel  letter,  §  11.  1.  a,  ^I'ixij  Isa.  59:  3,  Lara.  4:  14  is  a  Niphal  formed 
upon  the  basis  of  a  Pual,  §  83.  c.  (2).  i:ii"'"'ii  Ezra  10:  16  is  an  anomalous 
infinitive  from  dSi,  which  some  regard  as  Kal,  others  as  Piel. 


Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs. 

§  123.  Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have 
a  guttural  for  then*  third  radical,  are  affected  by  the 
pecuharities  of  these  letters,  §  108,  in  the  following 
manner,  viz.: 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes 
Pattahh  in  the  future  and  unperative  Kal,  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  Piel,  Hipliil, 
and  Hithpael,  r5t\ 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical,  as  in  the  Piel 
and  Hithpael  and  in  some  forms  of  the  other  species, 
may  either  be  changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the 
latter  case  the  guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive,  §  1 7,  after 
the  long  heterogeneous  vowel,  e.  g.  nlir''  or  nbTT^. 

3.  Hhirik  of  the  Hiphil  species,  Hholem  of  the  Kal 
and  Niphal  infinitives,  and  Shurek  of  the  Kal  passive 
participle,  suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural, 
which  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive,  ^^V^~j  ^j^^- 


160  ETYMOLOGY.  §124,125 

4.  The  rnttural  retains  tlie  simple  SliVa  of  the  per- 
fect verb  before  all  afformatives  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  Sh'va  is  substituted  for  it  be- 
fore suffixes,  which  are  less  closely  attached  to  the  verb, 

5.  When,  however,  a  personal  afformative  consists  of 
a  single  vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  sin- 
gular of  the  preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh- 
furtive  to  aid  in  its  pronunciation  without  sundering  it 
from  the  affixed  termination,  Dnbu:. 

a.  Some  grammarians  regard  this  as  a  Pattahli  inserted  between  the 
guttural  and  the  final  vowelless  consonant  by  §  61.  2,  and  accordingly 
pi-onounce  flH^'j  shdlahhat  instead  of  shdla'^hJd.  But  as  these  verbs  do 
not  suffer  even  a  compound  Sh'va  to  be  inserted  before  the  affixed  per- 
sonal termination,  it  is  scarcely  probable  that  a  full  vowel  would  be  ad- 
mitted. And  the  Daghesh-lene  in  the  final  Tav  and  the  Sh'va  under  it 
show  that  the  preceding  vowel  sign  is  not  Pattahh  but  Pattahh-furtive, 
§  17.  a. 

6.  There  is  no  occasion  in  these  verbs  for  the  apphca- 
tion  of  the  rule  requiring  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte 
from  the  gutturals. 

§  1 24.  The  inflections  of  Lamedh  guttural  verbs  may 
be  represented  by  fb'j:  to  send  (Paradigm  VI).  The  Pual 
and  Hophal,  w^hich  agree  with  perfect  verbs  except  in 
the  Pattahh-furtive  of  the  second  feminine  preterite  and 
of  the  absolute  infinitive,  are  omitted  from  the  paradigm. 
The  Hithpael  of  this  verb  does  not  occur,  but  is  here 
formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed 
with  n  of  the  prefix,  according  to  §  82.  5. 

a.  Instead  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute  with  prefixed  H,  which  does 
not  happen  to  occur  in  any  verb  of  this  class,  the  alternate  form  with  pre- 
fixed D,  §  91.  6,  is  given  in  the  paradigm,  'ni'si^  being  in  actual  use. 


Remarks  on  Lamedh  Gtuttueal  Verbs. 

§  125.  1.  The  Kal  future  and  imperative  have  Pattahh  except  nil:  Gen. 
43:  16;  in  one  instance  the  K'thibh  inserts  1,  ni^DX  Jer.  5:  7,  where  the 


§126 


EEMAEKS  ON  LAMEDH  GUTTUHAL  VERBS.       161 


K'ri  is  TiVpX.  The  vowel  a  is  retained  before  suffixes,  remaining  short 
in  cy^3  Am.  9:  1,  but  usually  lengthened  to  Kamets,  fiwpr;"]  2  Chron.  21 :  17, 
'';y'2"^  Gen.  23:  11.  It  is  also  retained  in  pause  before  paragogic  n  ,  np":iS 
Ps.  77:  2,  nnVp,  reo'i  Dan.  9:  19;  elsewhere  it  is  rejected  nnbp^  2  Sam. 
14:  32,  and  in  the  imperative  Hhirik  is  given  to  the  first  radical,  "n"':d 
Job  32:  10,  r\rh^  Gen.  43:  8.  Hhiril<  appears  in  nnsp  Gen.  25:  31,  but 
verbs  whose  last  radical  is  "1  commonly  take  Kamets  Hhatuph  like  perfect 
verbs  both  before  paragogic  ti^,  and  suffixes,  "iTn^aiy  1  Chron.  29:  18,  fi^l'l^ 
Prov.  3:3. 

2.  The  Kal  infinitive  construct  mostly  has  o,  ?''^~^  Jon.  2:  1,  :?'5^  Num. 
17:  28,  -nys  Isa.  54:  9,  rarely  a,  rfid  Isa.  58:  9,  y_ia  Num.  20:  3,  ^|™-2  1  Sam. 
15:1.  With  a  feminine  ending,  the  first  syllable  takes  Kamets  Hhatuph, 
ntina  Zeph.  3:  11;  so  sometimes  before  suffixes,  "iririT  2  Sam.  15:  12,  ""yrid 
Neh.  1:  4,  tisp'^  Josh.  6:  5,  but  more  commonly  Hhirik,  cijpa  Am.  1:  13^ 
iy;Q  Num.  35:  19,  ilirs  Neh.  8:  5,  rarely  Pattahh,  r|Vpn  Ezek.  25:  6. 

3.  Most  verbs  with  final  "I  have  Hholem  in  the  Kal  future  and  impera- 
tive. But  such  as  have  middle  e  in  the  preterite  take  Pattahh,  §  82.  1.  a; 
and  in  addition  the  following,  viz.:  ^^X  to  shut,  IBN  to  say,  "I'in  to  honour, 
^^n  to  grow  pale,  "ihs  to  shake,  "^'cis  to  be  rich,  ^ny  to  entreat,  "liiG  to  slip 
aioay,  "I'^s  to  press,  lr>^  to  drink  or  he  drunken.  The  following  have 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  ^ia  to  decree,  "in3  to  votv,  "iSp  fut.  o,  to  reap,  fut.  a, 
to  be  short. 

§  126.  1.  Tsere  is  almost  always  changed  to  Pattahh  before  the  guttural 
in  the  preterite,  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative;  but  it  is  re- 
tained and  Pattahh-furtive  given  to  the  guttural  in  pause,  and  in  the  in- 
finitive absolute  and  participle  which  partake  of  the  character  of  nouns 
and  prefer  lengthened  forms.  Thus,  Niphal:  infin.  constr.,  S^^'H  Esth. 
2:  8,  rircn  isa.  51:  14,  future,  Tib-dl  Vs.  9:  19,  :yprn'i  Job  17:  3,  impera- 
tive, even  in  pause,  I^i^Jv}-  Piel:  preterite,  ril;  Lev.  14:  8,  i']i5  2  Chron. 
34:  4,  infin.  constr.,  ylz  Hab.  1:  13,  y|3  Lam.  2:  8,  future,  nlS'^  Job  16:  13, 
:yprn  2  Kin.  8:  12,  'fiynsn  Deut.  7:  5,  imperative,  n|d  Ex.  4:  23.  Hiphil: 
apocopated  future,  ni:3;;i  2  Kin.  18:  30,  fut.  with  Vav  consecutive,  1*33^5 
Judg.  4:  23,  fem.  plur.,  nry^n  Ps.  119:  171,  imperative,  rinn  Ps.  86:  2, 
and  even  in  pause,  Tri'ST}  1  Kin.  22:  12,  Hithpael:  y'55ri7  Prov.  17:  14, 
nJrni,  Dan.  11 :  40,  riZP^'n  Ps.  106:  47;  this  species  sometimes  has  Kamets 
in  its  pausal  forms,  !l"|5rrri  Josh.  9:13,  :i'|Sn!n  Ps.  107:  27.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  absolute  infinitives:  Piel,  n|'J  Deut.  22:  7,  Hiphil,  <?25n  Isa. 
7:  11,  Hophal,  r;'i":n  Ezek.  16:  4.  Participles:  Kal,  rrjia  Deut.  28:  52,  but 
occasionally  in  the  construct  state  with  Pattahh,  t"j:  Ps.  94:  9,  y;H  Isa, 
61:  15,  ypn  Isa.  42:  5,  ypiy  Lev.  11:7,  Piel,  n?T'3  1  Kin.  3:  3,  Hithpael, 
yawria  1  Sam.  21 :  15.  Tsere  is  retained  before  suffixes  of  the  second  person 
instead  of  being  either  changed  to  Pattahh  or  as  in  perfect  verbs  short- 
ened to  Seghol,  Pi.  inf.  const.  r,n^;J  Deut.  15:  18,  fut.  rj-^.'^S  Gen.  31:  27. 
There  is  one  instance  of  Pattahh  in  the  Hiphil  inf.  const.,  ni^H  Job  6:  26, 
and  one  before  a  grave  suffix  BDnsin  Ezek.  21:  29,  comp.  fut.  tDiyd">  Isa. 
35:  4;  n^sn   1  Sam.  15:  23  Hiph.  abs.  inf.  in  pause  is  by  §  65.  a. 

11 


162  ETYMOLOGY.  §  127-129 

2.  In  verbs  with  final  "i  Pattahh  takes  the  place  of  Tsere  for  the  most 
part  in  the  Piel  preterite  (in  pause  Tsere),  and  frequently  in  the  Hithpael 
(in  pause  Kamets);  but  Tsere  (in  pause  Tsere  or  Pattahh,  §  65.  a)  is  com* 
monly  retained  elsewhere,  "ir:3  Ps.  76:  4,  nauj  Ex.  9:  25,  "irinnn  Prov.  25:  6, 
n.Txnn  Ps.  93:  1,  1^X1  Gen.  22:  14,  ^tX"'  Gen.  10:  19,  :"iryn  Zeph.  2:  4. 
Two  verbs  have  Seghol  in  the  Piel  preterite,  *ia'i  (in  pause,  "lai.)  and  "1C3. 

§  127.  1.  The  guttural  almost  always  has  Pattahh-furtive  in^  the  second 
fem.  sing,  of  the  preterite,  nrrO  Ruth  2:  8,  :n?2'a  Ezek.  16:  28,  nrsn  Esth. 
4:  14,  ri)j^-:n  Ezek.  16:  4,  scarcely  ever  simple  Sh'va,  rnpb  1  Kin.  14:  3, 
rininj  Jer.  13:  5,  and  never  Pattahh  (which  might  arise  from  the  concur- 
rence of  consonants  at  the  end  of  a  word,  §  61.  2),  unless  in  rH~3  Gen. 
30:  15,  and  innSD  Gen.  20:  16,  the  former  of  which  admits  of  ready  ex- 
planation as  a  construct  infinitive,  and  the  latter  may  be  a  Niphal  participle 
in  the  feminine  singular,  whether  it  be  understood  it  is  rectified  or  thou 
art  righted,  i.  e.  justice  is  done  thee  by  this  indemnification.  Pattahh  is 
once  inserted  before  the  abbreviated  termination  of  the  feminine  plural 
imperative,  "J''y^  Gen.  4:  23  for  n:"r'r. 

2.  The  guttural  takes  compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes, 
not  only  when  it  stands  at  the  end  of  the  verb,  ^("3'2  Num.  24:  11,  "("^'ii^l 
Prov.  25:  17,  but  also  in  the  first  plural  of  the  preterite,  "Sro':;  Ps.  44:  18 
(^wnbiy  ver.  21),  Isa.  59:  12,  Ps.  35:  25,  2  Sam.  21:  6,  Ps.  1S2:  6;  ^i  retains 
simple  Sh'va  before  all  personal  terminations  and  suffixes,  Pi~^X  Judg.  4:  20, 
cb-ii2S  Mah  1:  7,  oii^:^"  Josh.  4:  23. 

8.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  the  letter  before  the  guttural  receives 
compound  Sh'va,  i^^bE^«  Isa.  27:  4,  'tlUp^h  Gen.  2:  23. 

§  128.  The  Hiphil  infinitive  construct  once  has  the  feminine  ending  W, 
Piiiy^'an  Ezek.  24:  26;  nrnaSW  Ezek.  16:  50  for  njf^bni  perhaps  owes 
its  anomalous  form  to  its  being  assimilated  in  termination  to  the  following 
word,  which  is  a  Lamedh  He  verb.  In  nplTJ  Am.  8:  8  K'thibh  for  ^ijl^^? 
the  guttural  »  is  elided,  §  53.  3. 

Pe  Nun  (fs)  Verbs. 

§  129.  Nun,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two 
peculiarities,  viz.: 

1.  At  the  end  of  a  syllable  it  is  assimilated  to  the 
following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written  as  one, 
and  the  doubhng  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  This  oc- 
curs in  the  Kal  future,  Niphal  preterite  and  participle, 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  throughout;  thus, 
thT.  becomes  iLy.r,  written  thi,  so  ^333  for  U:^:3,  izi^iri  for 
■C^bri.  In  the  Hophal,  Kamets  Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts 
before  the  doubled  letter,  §  61.  5,  ITSH  for  Trajn. 


§  130,  131     REMARKS  ON  PE  NUN  VERBS.  163 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  from  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel,  123  for  "i'i:,  §  53. 2. 
A  like  rejection  occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of 
a  few  verbs,  the  abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compens- 
ated by  adding  the  feminine  termination  Jn;  thus,  tviih 
for  ri^3  (by  §  63.  2.  a),  the  primary  form  being  "^riD. 

a.  In  the  Indo-European  languages  likewise,  n  is  frequently  conformed 
to  or  affected  by  a  following  consonant,  and  in  certain  circumstances  it  is 
liable  to  rejection,  e.  g.  eyypatpm,   ijuijSccWco,  av7Tpi(pcji. 

§  130.  1.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  may  be 
represented  by  iriD  to  apiwoacli  (Paradigm  VII).  In  the 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  they  do  not  differ  from  perfect 
verbs.  The  last  column  of  the  paradigm  is  occupied  by 
the  Kal  species  of  "^3  to  give,  which  is  pecuhar  in  assi- 
milating its  last  as  weU  as  its  first  radical,  and  in  having 
Tsere  in  the  future. 

a.  The  Kal  of  CJS  is  used  only  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative, 
the  preterite  and  participle  being  supplied  by  the  Niphal,  which  has  sub- 
stantially the  same  sense :  the  missing  parts  are  in  the  paradigm  supplied 
from  analog}'. 

h.  The  future  of  '\h\  has  Pattahh  in  one  instance  before  Makkeph,  ~n3 
Judg.  16:  5. 

Kemarks  on  Pe  Nun  Verbs. 

§  131.  1.  If  the  second  radical  be  a  guttural  or  a  vowel  letter,  Nun  be- 
comes strong  by  contrast  and  is  not  liable  to  I'ejection  or  assimilation, 
VHl?  Num.  34:  18,  5n3  2  Kin.  4:  24,  i:r3n  Gen.  24:  48,  !inl3X  Ex.  15:  2.  It 
is,  however,  always  assimilated  in  Cn?  the  Niphal  preterite  of  cnj  to  repent, 
and  occasionally  in  nns  to  descend,  e.  g.  rni  Jer.  21:  13,  rinn  Prov.  17:  10, 
^nnj  Ps.  38:  3  but  nfijn  ibid.,  nnjn  Joel  4:  11. 

2.  Before  other  consonants  the  rule  for  assimilation  is  observed  with 
rare  exceptions,   viz. :    :  Ti'SDn  Isa.  58  :  3,   Ti'nsn  Ps.  68  :  3,   nrjr   Jer.  3 :  6, 

j^l'^;"^  Deut.  33:  9  (and  occasionally  elsewhere),  '^i^S";  Job  40:  24,  :12^?5'I 
Isa.'  29:  1,  TsV^ll^  Ezek.  22:  20,  bsjb  (for  hh'irh)  Num.  5:  22,  ViP^?3  (for 
f,n'b5ri3  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  5)  Isa.  33: 1,  ^iprnjH  Judg.  20:  31. 

8.  Nun  is  commonly  rejected  from  the  Kal  imperative  with  a,  ca  2  Sam. 
1:  15  (once  before  Makkeph,  "da  Gen.  19:9,  in  plural  Tiia  1  Kin.  18:  30  and 
in  order  to  permit  the  retrocession  of  the  accent,  §  35.  1,   T::5  Josh.  3:  9, 

11* 


164  ETYMOLOGY.  §  132 

1  Sam.  14:  38),  "^tJ  Ex.  3:  5,  ??  Job  1:  11,  ^iti  Deut.  2:  24,  -f;5  Ezek.  37:  9, 
"np'dl  Gen.  27:  26,  though  it  is  occasionally  retained,  lius  2  Kin.  19:  29, 
NC3  Ps.  10:  12,  or  by  a  variant  orthography,  tnbs  Ps.  4:  7  but  alwaj's  else- 
■\vhere  Xto.  In  imperatives  with  o,  and  in  Lamedh  He  verbs  which  have  S 
in  the  imperative,  Nun  is  invariably  retained,  TlJiw  Prov.  17:  14,  "I33  Ps. 
24:  14,  C'p?  Num.  31:  2,  yw  Ps.  58:  7,  nip;  Gen.  30:  27,  nr:3  Ex.  8:  1.' 

4.  The  rejection  of  Nun  from  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  occurs  in  but 
few  verbs;  viz.:  H'w^  (with  suffix,  iPl^^)  from  "SJii,  rriB  from  HBi,  VS^  (twice) 
and  ^'53  from  sis,  nra  (once)  and  S'b}  from  51:3,  Xi^S  has  niiip  (by§  60.  3.  c), 
with  tlie  preposition  \,  V.i<6))  by  §  57.  2.  (3),  once  niu  (§  53.  3)  Job  41:  17, 
once  without  the  feminine  ending,  xiiU  Ps.  89:  10,  and  twice  i<'6':;  )h^  has 
commonly  riPi  (for  1^3^),  with  suffixes  "'ihri,  but  )h'i  Num.  20:  21,  and  "'irs 
Gen.  38:  9. 

5.  The  absolute  infinitive  Niphal  appears  in  the  two  forms  linSfn  Jer. 
32:  4,  and  ^lib  Judg.  20:  39. 

6.  The  n  of  the  prefix  in  the  Hithpael  species  is  in  a  few  instances 
assimilated  to  the  first  radical,  §  82.  5.  a,  "'riprjsri  Ezek.  5:  13,  •'rx?|ri  Ezek. 
37:  10,  Jer.  23:  13,  xii'lB  Num.  24:  7,  Dan.  11:  14,  '-y^^"^  Isa.  52:  5. 

§  132.  1.  The  last  radical  of  'hs  is  assimilated  in  the  Niphal  as  well  as 
in  the  Kal  species,  QnPS  Lev.  26:  25.  The  final  Nun  of  other  verbs  remains 
without  assimilation,  P)3E:i,  Pisir,  tinss.  In  2  Sam.  22:  41  npipi  is  for  ntjnj 
which  is  found  in  the  parallel  passage  Ps.  18:  41.  "|lnPi  1  Kin.  6:  19.  17:  14 
K'thibh,  is  probably,  as  explained  by  Ewald,  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
without  the  feminine  ending  ("Fi)  prolonged  by  reduplication,  which  is  the 
case  with  some  other  short  words,  e.  g.  >1372T3  from  ip,  "^XJ'^p  for  "^p;  others 
regard  it  as  the  infinitive  TPl  with  the  3  fem.  plur.  suffix  or  with  )  paragogic ; 
Gesenius  takes  it  to  be,  as  always  elsewhere,  the  2  masc.  sing,  of  the  Kal 
future,  risri  is  the  imper.  with  parag.  ti^  except  in  Ps.  8:  2,  where  it  is  the 
Kal  const,  inf.  with  the  fem.  ending  il^  instead  of  n,  comp.  ITTl  Gen.  46:  3. 

2.  The  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs  are  shared  by  njbb  to  take,  whose 
first  radical  is  assimilated  or  rejected  in  the  same  manner  as  3,  Kal  inf. 
const,  rrp  (with  prep,  h,  ritnpb,  to  be  distinguished  from  riripb  2  fem.  sing, 
pret.),  once  Trip  (by  §  60.  3.  c)  2  Kin.  12:  9,  with  suffixes  innp,  fut.  np";, 
imper.  np,  "^np  rarely  Mpl?,  "^rp!?,  Hoph.  fut.  Hp^,  but  Niph.  pret.  ri)b!=3.  In 
Hos.  11:3  tDnp  is  the  masculine  infinitive  with  the  suffix  for  dfnnp;   the 

T  '  T  T      I  '-   ' 

same  form  occurs  without  a  suffix,  np  Ezek.  17:  5,  or  this  may  be  explained 
with  Gesenius  as  a  preterite  for  Mpb. 

3.  In  Isa.  64:  5  b^il  has  the  form  of  a  Hiphil  future  from  hh'Z,  but  the 
sense  shows  it  to  be  from  ^33  for  ^isi,  Daghesh-forte  being  omitted  and 
the  previous  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  §  59.  a. 

Ayin  Doubled  (?":>)  Veebs. 

§  133.  The  imperfect  verbs,  thus  far  considered,  differ 
from  the  perfect  verbs  either  in  the  vowels  alone  or  in 


§134,135  ATIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  165 

the  consonants  alone;  those  which  follow,  differ  in  both 
vowels  and  consonants,  §  107,  and  consequently  depart 
much  more  seriously  from  the  standard  paradigm.  The 
widest  divergence  of  all  is  found  in  the  Ayin  doubled 
and  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  in  both  of  which  the  root  gives  up 
its  dissyllabic  character  and  is  converted  into  a  mono- 
syllable; a  common  feature,  which  gives  rise  to  many 
striking  resemblances  and  even  to  an  occasional  inter- 
change of  forms. 

§  1 34.  1.  In  explaining  the  inflections  pecuUar  to  Ayin 
doubled  verbs,  it  wiU  be  most  convenient  to  separate  the 
mtensive  species  Piel  and  Pual  with  their  derivative  the 
Hithpael  from  the  other  four.  That  which  gives  rise  to 
aU  their  peculiar  forms  in  the  Kal,  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and 
Hophal  species,  is  the  disposition  to  avoid  the  repetition 
of  the  same  sound  by  uniting  the  two  similar  radicals 
and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  the  previous  letter, 
thus,  no  for  nzc,  -b  for  nio  §  61.  3. 

2.  In  the  Kal  species  this  contraction  is  optional  in 
the  preterite;  it  is  rare  in  the  infim'tive  absolute  though 
usual  in  the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  parti- 
ciples. With  these  exceptions,  it  is  universal  in  the  spe- 
cies already  named. 

§  135.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both 
in  the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the 
preceding  syllable. 

1.  When  the  first  radical  has  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
§  82. 1,  as  in  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitive  absolute,  and 
in  the  Niphal  infinitive,  future  and  imperative,  this  is 
simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  thrown  back  from  the 
second  radical,  thus  nio,  HD,  niio,  20;    niOH,  li^H; 

••   T     •    '  •■      ■ 

2.  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable  as  in 
the  Kal  future,  the  Niphal  preterite,  and  throughout  the 


166  ETYMOLOGY.  §  135 

Hiphil  and  Hophal,  tliis  will  be  converted  into  a  simple 
syllable  by  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  whence  arise  the  foUowuig  mutations: 

In  the  Kal  future  n'iC";  becomes  lb";  with  i  in  a  simple 
syllable,  contrary  to  §  18.  2.  This  may,  however,  be  con- 
verted into  a  mixed  syllable  by  means  of  Daghesh-forte, 
and  the  short  vowel  be  retained,  thus  -b^;  or  the  syllable 
may  remain  simple  and  the  vowel  be  lengthened  from 
Hhirik  to  Tsere,  §  59,  thus,  in  verbs  fut.  a,  'i>T  for  "i^^";; 
or  as  the  Hhirik  of  this  tense  is  not  an  original  vowel 
but  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  §  85.  2.  a  (1),  it  may  be 
neglected  and  a,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  given 
to  the  preformative,  which  is  the  most  common  expedient, 
thus  '2b\  The  three  possible  forms  of  this  tense  are  con- 
sequently s6^,  not  ancl  "^IT. 

In  the  Niphal  preterite  n3C3  becomes  by  contraction 
nc?.  In  a  few  verbs  beginning  with  n  the  short  vowel  is 
retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  thus  inD  for  "iSn^ ; 
in  other  cases  Hhirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  'hD  for  "jD"3, 
or  as  the  Hhirik  is  not  essential  to  the  form  but  has 
arisen  from  Sh'va,  §  82. 2,  it  is  more  frequently  neglected, 
and  Kamets,  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  substituted 
in  its  place,  thus  ncp.  The  forms  of  this  tense  are,  there- 
fore, Up:,  "|n:,  "^hD. 

In  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species  the  vowels  of  the 
prefixed  H  are  characteristic  and  essential.  They  must, 
therefore,  either  be  retained  by  inserting  Daghesh-forte 
in  the  first  radical,  or  be  simply  lengthened;  no  other 
vowel  can  be  substituted  for  them,  3cn  for  H^SDH,  20;^  or 
nc^  for  '2.''%'0^_,  nbn  (Kibbuts  before  the  doubled  letter  by 
§  61.  5)  or  '3.bT\  for  nSCP. 

3.  The  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  stands  no  longer  before  a  single  con- 
sonant, but  before  one  which,  though  single  in  appear- 


§  136,  137  AYIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  167 

ance,  is  in  reality  equivalent  to  two.  It  is  consequently 
subjected  to  the  compression  which  affects  vowels  so 
situated,  §  61.  4.  Thus,  in  the  Niphal  future  and  impera 
tive  Tsere  is  compressed  to  Pattahh,  lis;*,  20';  nisn, 
nDH  (comp.  bbp,  Pbtop)  though  it  remains  in  the  infini- 
tive which,  partaking  of  the  character  of  a  noun,  prefers 
longer  forms.  So  in  the  Hiphil  long  Hhirik  is  compressed 
to  Tsere,  n'scn,  ncn  (comp.  b^Dp^*,  ri:bii:pn). 

§  136.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second 
and  third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two 
consonants,  the  doubling  cannot  be  made  to  appear  at 
the  end  of  the  word.  But 

1.  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  preceding  vowel, 
even  where  it  would  be  dropped  in  perfect  verbs,  is  re- 
tained to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  33.  1,  Pi^O,  ^SC''. 

2.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  inserting  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels, 
0  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e  (^ .)  in  the  future.  By  the 
dissyllabic  appendage  thus  formed  the  accent  is  carried 
forward,  §  32,  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  is 
shortened  in  consequence  as  much   as  possible,   ZCH, 

T  •    -: '  t'  t      V  •..    : 

3.  When  by  the  operation  of  the  rules  already  given, 
§  135. 2,  the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplica- 
tion of  the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to 
relieve  the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters.  In  this  case 
the  retention  of  the  vowel  before  the  last  radical,  con- 
trary to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs,  and  the  insertion 
of  a  vowel  after  it,  are  ahke  unnecessary,  and  the  accent 
takes  its  accustomed  position,  ^iS";,  nrisri. 

§  137.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  pre- 


168  ETYMOLOGY.  §  138,  139 

serve  the  regular  form,  as  bin,  b^H,  bbrinn.  The  triple 
repetition  of  the  same  letter  thus  caused  is  in  a  few 
instances  avoided,  however,  by  reduplicating  the  con- 
tracted root  with  a]Dpropriate  vowels,  as  t]yjp,  bjbbprin. 
Or  more  commonly,  the  reduplication  is  given  up  and 
the  idea  of  intensity  conveyed  by  the  simple  prolongation 
of  the  root,  the  long  vowel  Hholem  being  inserted  after 
the  first  radical  for  tliis  purpose,  as  liiic,  bblirri. 

§  138.  Li  Paradigm  YIII  the  inflections  of  Ayin 
doubled  verbs  are  shown  by  the  example  of  niD  to  sur- 
round. The  Pual  is  omitted,  as  this  species  almost  in- 
variably foUows  the  inflections  of  the  perfect  verb;  certain 
persons  of  the  Hophal,  of  which  there  is  no  example,  are 
hkewise  omitted.  An  instance  of  Piel,  with  the  radical 
ayllable  reduplicated,  is  given  in  Tjipp  to  excite. 

a.  The  Hithpael  of  sho  does  not  actually  occur;  but  it  is  in  the  para- 
digm formed  from  analogy,  the  initial  sibilant  being  transposed  with  the  n 
of  the  prefix,  agreeably  to  §  82.  5. 

Remaeks  on  Ayin  Doubled  Yeebs. 

S  139.  1.  The  uncontracted  and  the  contracted  forms  of  the  Kal  preterite 
are  used  with  pex'haps  equal  frequency  in  the  third  person;  the  former  is 
rare  in  the  first  person,  "'R'aiiT  Zech.  8:  14.  15,  JlSlis  Deut.  2:  35,  and  there 
are  no  examples  of  it  in  the  second;  13 'i  Gen.  49:  23  and  ^531  Job  24:  24 
are  preterites  with  ffiiolem,  §  82.  1.  In  Ps.  118:  11,  iJia^D-na  ^DdD  the 
uncontracted  is  added  to  the  contracted  form  for  the  sake  of  greater  em- 
phasis. Compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  used  with  these  verbs  instead  of 
simple  to  make  its  vocal  character  more  distinct,  §  16. 1.  h,  ^i^bj  Gen.  29 :  3,  8, 
'^h;i  Ex.  15:  10,  r^^hri  Isa.  64:  10,  "^335  Gen.  9:  14,  ^Tp^f}  Num.  23:  25. 

2.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  contracted  infinitive  absolute, 
np  Num.  23:  25.  VlJ  Ruth  2:  16,  "ilQ  Isa.  24:  19,  n?n  (with  a  paragogic 
termination)  ibid.;  of  the  uncontracted,  Ti^X,  'iis,  'pjn,  r|"is:3,  nins,  nina, 
'iSh-Q;  of  the  infinitive  construct,  ii%  and  75,  nit)  and  30,  tjferi,  I'lTi:,  tin,  dh, 
once  with  u  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "I13  Eccles.  9:  1,  and  occasionally  with 
a,  -in  Isa.  45:  1,  T|iiJ  Jer.  5:  26,  0^3  (with  3  plur.  suf.)  Eccl.  3:  18,  disin 
Isa.  30:  18  (Piisn  Ps.  102:  14);  Crn^  Isa.  17:  14,  though  sometimes  explained 
as  the  noun  cn^  with  the  suffix  their  bread,  is  the  infinitive  of  B^H  to  grow 
warm;  cio2  Gen.  6:  3  Eng.  ver.  for  that  also,  as  if  compounded  of  the 
prep.  2,  the  abbreviated  relative  and  DJ,  is  by  the  latest  authorities  regarded 


^140 


BEMABKS  ON  AYIN  DOUBLED  VEBB3.  169 


as  the  infinitive  of  55'^  in  their  erring;  i^n  Job  29:  3  has  Hhirik  befoie  the 
suffix.  The  feminine  termination  Sli  is  appended  to  the  following  infinitives, 
rntn  Ps.  77:  10.  Job  19:  17,  rSk\2  Ezek.  36:  3,  ■'nbT  Ps.  17:  3.  The  impera- 
tive, which  is  alwaj's  contracted,  has  mostly  Hholem,  130,  Qi'n  and  S^  but 
sometimes  Pattahh,  ^3,  Ps.  119:  22  (elsewhere  b-H),  n:3  Ps.  80:  16.  Piirst 
regards  Tin  as  a  contracted  participle  from  r\rin,  analogous  to  the  Ayin  Vav 
form  dfs. 

3.  The  following  uncontracted  forms  occur  in  the  Kal  future,  'irv  Am. 
6:  15,  l^^l  and  nnn  from  Tnj;  in  the  Niphal,  ■2-i\l  Job  11:  12;  Hiphil,  cirn 
Mic.  6:  13,  f^irp  Ezek.  3:  1.5,  '^nnnni  Jer.  49:  37,  and  constantly  in  -in  and 
b^";  Hophal,  Thl'  Job  20:  8  from  1t3.  In  a  few  instances  the  repetition  of 
the  same  letter  is  avoided  by  the  substitution  of  S  for  the  second  radical, 
10X53')  =  ICpa')  Ps.  58:  8  and  perhaps  also  Job  7:  5,  ^"^X"?"?  =  "'"^'i??  Ezek. 
28:  24,  Lev.  13 :  51,  52,  "j'^DN'r  =  Ti'lDp'ir:  Jer.  30:  16  K'thibh.    Comp.  in  Syriac 

^xij?  part,  of  v-o?.  According  to  the  Babbins  IS^'tS  —  ''^15  ^^*"  ^^'  ^'  ^^*  ^^® 
Alexander  in  loc. 

§  140.  1.  Examples  of  different  forms  of  the  Kal  future:  (1)  With 
Daghesh- forte  in  the  first  radical,  t,^1,  nsx,  no"i,  np";,  Cii'),  ^h"];  or  with  a 
as  the  second  vowel,  hisi,  ^5"],  J^^Pi';.  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  personal 
prefix,  Cn^,  nri|),  "lii,  T\b^,  ^pP,  ^~r:.?>  ^  being  once  written  by  means  of  the 
vowel  letter  '',  or^'^X.  (3)  With  Kamets  under  the  personal  prefix,  "in^,  30", 
iy"^,  "li^,  pn;i,  ^'n^,  n=i3^;  this  occurs  once  with  fut.  a,  nrp  Pi-ov.  27:  17.  With 
Vav  Consecutive  the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult  syllabe  in 
this  form  of  the  future,  and  Hholem  is  consequently  shortened,  §  64.  1,  tJ'^l, 
l^'l,  U'ri;i,  CITsi,  'fP^  There  are  a  few  examples  of  u  in  the  future  as  in 
Ayin  Vav  verbs,  'jTi"^  Prov.  29:  6,  f'n'^  Isa.  42:  4,  Eccles.  12:  6,  CriPi  Ezek. 
24:  11  and  perhaps  li^  Gen.  49:  19,  Hab.  3:  16,  'i>lb';  Ps.  91:  6,  though 
Gesenius  assumes  the  existence  of  'TIS  and  1TO  as  distinct  roots  from  "it; 
and  "^l"^. 

2.  The  Niphal  preterite  and  participle:  (1)  With  Hhirik  under  the 
prefixed  3,  nins?  Job  20:  28,  bro,  -in3,  nn3.  (2)  With  Tsere  under  the  prefix, 
•^njrij  Jer.  22:' 23,  0"'"iX3  Mai.,  3:  9,  'D'^hm  Isa.  57:  5.  (3)  With  Kamets 
under  the  prefix,  isfe;,  "in3,  "123;  sometimes  the  repetition  of  like  vowels  in 
successive  syllables  is  avoided  by  exchanging  a  of  the  last  syllable  for  Tsere, 
^;^3  and  h^:,  Or3  and  0^3,  11203  Ezek.  26:  2,  or  for  Hholem  as  in  Ayin  Vav 
verbs,  yn3  Eccl.\2:  6,  ^^ii  Am!  3:  11,  wis  Nah.  1:  12,  ^hh  Isa.  34:  4. 

3.  The  Niphal  future  preserves  the  Tsere  of  perfect  verbs  in  one  ex- 
ample, ^nri,  Lev.  21:  9,  but  mostly  compresses  it  to  Pattahh,  bs"],  h^l,  TO";, 
*TE'),  -■?";,  Cs";,  nt'-),  vjtx;  like  the  preterite  it  sometimes  has  Hholem,  Tiin 
Isa.  24:  3,  pikn  ibid.  If  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  and  incapable  of 
receiving  Daghesh,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  "in';;,  bns, 
fi^..  y^^^y  ''^■^?.'  The  Kal  and  Niphal  futures,  it  will  be  perceived,  coincide 
in  some  of  their  forms;  and  as  the  signification  of  these  species  is  not 
always  clearly  distinguishable  in  intransitive  verbs,  it  is  often  a  matter  of 
doubt  or  of  indifference  to  which  a  given  form  should  be  referred.     Thus. 


170  ETYMOLOGY.  §  141 

h^l,  T\^1,  n4"1  are  in  the  Niphal  according  to  Gesenius,  while  Ewald  makes 
them  to  be  Kal,  and  Fiirst  the  first  two  Niphal  and  the  third  Kal. 

4.  The  Niphal  infinitive  absolute:  tiatl  Isa.  24:  3,  pi  all  ibid,  or  with 
Tsere  in  the  last  syllable,  'oh'n  2  Sam.  17:  10.  The  infinitive  construct: 
Cin  Ps.  68:  3,  bnln  Ezek.  20:  9,  and  once  with  Pattahh  before  a  suffix, 
'Inri  Lev.  21:  4.    The  imperative:  si^isn  Isa.  52:  11,  siS'^ri  Num.  17:  10. 

5.  In  the  Hiphil  preterite  the  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  compressed 

to  Tsere,  3pri,  ^Ert  (in  pause  ^E^},  so  ;'53'i5ii,  i'l'sril),  or  even  to  Pattahh, 
PIT},  ^k'^,  "^tv',  "i^r?,  T\T!\},  ^'y?>  *^i"D.  ^Srn,  szCvi.  Both  infinitives  have 
Tsere,  thus  the  absolute:  p^n,  ^^T},  D?".  "^Srt,  ^^^7;  the  construct:  ^h'n, 
T\gr\,  "lEfi  (1''Ef7  Zech.  11:  10),  ^kr\,  b^n,  Cirn,  in  pause  !"l^f^,  piD?  "^vith 
a  final  guttural,  Snri,  S'nn.  The  imperative:  non,  ^Stl,  bprt,  ^nn,  S>irn; 
'53'i3n  Job  21:  5  is  a  Hiphil  and  not  a  Hophal  form  as  stated  by  Gesenius, 
the  first  vowel  being  Kaniets  and  not  Kamets  Hhatuph.  Futures  with  a 
short  vowel  before  Daghesh- forte  in  the  first  radical:  33^,  tipi^,  "i^^i  '"^3- 5 
with  a  long  vowel,  'i;,  ^h'^,  ^h"^,  bn^  or  hrr,  hh-^,  inn  and  ?n';,  Tjon,  yajii 
{e  expressed  by  the  vowel  letter  X,  §  11.  1.  a)  Eccles.  12:  5.  When  in  this 
latter  class  of  futures  the  accent  is  removed  from  the  ultimate,  whether  by 
Vav  Consecutive  or  any  other  cause,  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Seghol,  ^5*1, 
?l\^>  ^?t^>  T'j^j  TjO^,  bnn,  and  in  one  instance  to  Hhirik,  "j^^ni  Judg.  9:  53 
(']'"npj1  would  be  from  y^l)  before  a  guttural  it  becomes  Pattahh,  'Sy^'^,  iri^, 
— 1^\  Participles:  Dpr,  ibp,  bnp,  bkp  Ezek.  31:  3,  rn^  Prov.  17:  4.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  retained  in  the 
last  syllable  of  this  species  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs,  "Tppp  Judg.  3:  21,  d'^t" 
Jer.  49:  20,  Q-itsi  Num.  21:  30. 

6.  Hophal  preterites :  hmn,  trnffln,  lian;  futures:  ubv^,  "iX!l"i,  ph^"^,  1^^ 
■^sri,  Ti^'l'^,  a&ii"',  rsi,  "pi';  participles;  'k^'O,  "13^  or  in  some  copies  Ijp 
2  Sam.  23:  6;  infinitive  with  suffix,  nat'n  Lev.  26:  34,  with  prep.,  -i^dna 
ver.  43. 

§  141.  1.  Upon  the  addition  of  a  vowel  aflfix  and  the  consequent  inser- 
tion of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  last  radical,  the  preceding  vowel  and  the  posi- 
tion of  the  accent  continue  unchanged,  13] ,  ^-lib^ ,  •^SJ'wJ  (distinguished  from 
the  fern.  part,  tii:;:),  ^sh"^;  if  the  last  radical  does  not  admit  Daghesh-forte 
a  preceding  Pattahh  sometimes  remains  short  before  H,  but  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  bef*  Te  other  gutturals,  n'^h,  ^ini.  (100.  2),  ^'-^'z'n,  nnb  and  ^h^. 
When  the  first  radical  is  doubled,  Daghesh  is  omitted  from  the  last  in  the 
Kal  fut.  0  ^h-T],  'np";,  ^rO"^,  and  occasionally  elsewhere  ilhs;:  Hi.  fut.  lian 
Ho.  pret.  Other  cases  are  exceptional,  whether  of  the  shifting  of  the 
accent,  "s'n  Ps.  3:  2,  >13'1  Ps.  55:  22,  ^^p  Jer.  4:  13,  and  consequent  short- 
ening of  the  vowel,  "'•TJ  Jer.  7:  29  for  ^'jl,  "^h,  >lh  for  ''f),  ^isS,  JinTO  Jer. 
49:  28  (with  the  letter  repeated  instead  of  being  simply  doubled  by  Daghesh, 
so  likewise  in  cilli";  Jer.  5:  6,  "^i.^'H  Ps.  9:  14)  for  lib';  the  omission  of 
Daghesh,  iiri:  1  Sam.  14:  36,  nji;!!  Prov.  7:  13,  ^l^jiri  Cant.  6:  11,  7:  13, 
.^ipni  Job  19:  23,  -naj:  Num.  22:  11,  17  (Kal  imper.  with  n^  parag.  for 
■map,  shorten2d  fcy  Makkeph  from  naji,  so  '^"^Vt  ord  Num.  23:  7),  or  in 
addition,  the  rejection  of  the  vowel,  >lT3n  K.  fut.  Gen.  11:  6  for  tiar,  n3^: 


§142 


REMARKS  ON  AYIN  DOUBLED  VERBS.  171 


Gen.  11:  7  K.  fut.  for  nVlS,  n^23  Tsa.  19:  3  Ni.  pret.  for  ni?h5  or  nn^i::, 
naC3  Ezek.  41:  7  Ni.  fut.  for  t^SCJ;  ^^in  Judg.  5:  5  according  to  Gesenius 
for  ii'sh  Ni.  pret.  of  b^T  to  shake,  according  to  others  K.  pret.  of  Vt3  to  flow; 
^ibspr  Ezek.  36:  3  for  ^rrn;)  (Ewald)  from  hh'J  to  enter,  or  for  iBirrn  Ni.  fut. 
of  n3>'  to  go  up,  !llin3  Ezek.  7:  24  Ni.  pret.  for  Jl^np,  -nns  Cant.  1:6  Ni. 
pret.  for  "linj.  Once  instead  of  doubling  the  last  radical  "»  is  inserted,  '.''^bTi 
Prov.  26:  7  for  ^ib^,  comp.  Uii^nn  Ezr.  10:  16  for  d'.'nn;  or  it  may  he  for  ^-'b'n 
from  n3n  §  174.  1. 

2.  Upon  the  insertion  of  a  vowel  before  affixes  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, the  accent  is  shifted  and  the  previous  part  of  the  word  shortened 
if  possible;  thus,  with  0  in  the  preterite,  niip,  "ln'i~X'l  (Kamets  before  "! 
which  cannot  be  doubled),  cri"S5,  II^T?,  "'"5*3,  cfnjsp?,  Pipitn,  ''T^'i'n  (the 
vowel  remaining  long  before  "i),  Pnnn  (Pattahh  instead  of  compound  Sh'va 
on  account  of  the  following  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c),  "'r'^nn,  once  with  u,  !i:'n'r3 
Mic.  2:  4;  with  e  in  the  future,  niiion,  nrrriO,  firsnn.  If  the  first  radical 
be  doubled,  Daghesh  is  omitted  from  the  last,  and  the  customary  vowel  is 
in  consequence  not  inserted,  n:pOT,  njlpiin;  other  cases  are  rare  and  ex- 
ceptional, nn-^sn,  r^ns,  "P^n;,  crb-ss,  ^rpn  which  is  first  plur.  pret.  for 
't:'SFl  not  third  plur.  for  sisPi  (Ewald),  §  54,  3;  i^iirij  Deut.  32:  41,  "'n'an 
Isa.  44:  16,  '^fi^?  Ps.  116:  6  have  the  accent  upon  the  ultimate  instead  of 
the  penult. 

3.  Before  suffixes  the  accent  is  always  shifted,  and  if  possible  the  vowels 
shortened,  "^rkDI,  IPi^a"!  from  -b';,  ^ilb^,  ^^rLJ")  from  ^^"i,  'il^tti  from  Dnn, 
C^iSn  from  ^sn';  in  Tj3riT  Gen.  43:  29,  Isa.  30:  19,  from  ',n;;,  Drnsn  Lev.  26:  15 
from  "iBH,  the  original  vowels  have  been  not  only  abbreviated  but  rejected, 
and  the  requisite  short  vowel  given  to  the  first  of  the  concurring  conso- 
nants, §  61.  1.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  form  resembling  that  of  Ayin  Vav 
verbs  is  assumed,  Daghesh  being  omitted  from  the  last  i-adical  and  the 
preceding  vowel  lengthened  in  consequence,  "ipsin  Prov.  8 :  29  for  "ipn  ver.  27, 
r,^"<rii  Isa.  33:  1  for  T^'fZT'n,  sirr^ri-^'i;!!  Ezek.  14:  8  for  ^'r\'T\^'z-:i:'n' ,  n^i'i^Tn 
Lam.  1:  8  for  n^'ivn  Hi.  pret.  of  h\\,  ',r''ni  Hab.  2:  17  for  -(nn-;  Hi.  fut.  of 
Pinn  with  3  fern.  plur.  suf.,  Djb-TN  2  Sam.  22:  43  in  a  few  editions  for  Ci^nx. 
Nun  is  once  inserted  before  the  suffix  in  place  of  doubling  the  radical,  "1331^ 
Num.  23:  13  for  "isp;. 

§  142.  1.  Of  the  verbs  which  occur  in  Piel,  Pual,  or  Hithpael,  the  fol- 
lowing adopt  the  forms  of  perfect  verbs,  viz.: 
"nx  to  curse.  si'j  to  cry.  *|3;3  to  make  a  nest. 

TJa  to  plunder.  Tr'z  to  smite,  break.  yk^^  to  cut  off. 

"1^3  to  purify.  aab  to  take  away  the  33n  to  he  many. 

UC5  to  grope.  heart,  T(5"^  to  be  tender, 

ppT  to  refine.  pjb^  to  lick.  inb  to  harrow. 

cif^  to  warm.  iiJi'a  to  feel,  to  grope.  "i^b  to  rule. 

ykn  to  divide,  fis  to  leap.  "^y::  to  sharpen. 

nnn  to  be  broken.  b|Q  to  judge,  to  inter-  oin  to  be  perfect. 

bVj  to  covet  cede. 


172 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§143 


2.  The  following,  whicli  are  mostly  suggestivj  of  a  short,  quick,  re- 
peated motion,  reduplicate  the  radical  syllable,  viz.: 

inn  to  burn.  Pn^  to  linger. 

"ins  to  dance.  T]=0  to  excite. 

wnb  to  be  mad.  Ciss  to  chirp. 


55?^  to  sport,  delight, 

pp^  to  run. 

S-'jn  to  mock. 


3.  The  following  insert  Hholem  after  the  first  radical,  viz.: 


113  to  fig. 
fc03  to  lift  up. 
C]lbo  to  occtipg  the  thres- 
hold. 

"Tn:!  to  bind. 
Cop  to  cut  off. 
Taiijp  to  gather. 

4.  The  following  employ  two  forms,  commonly  in  different  senses,  viz 


lix  to  complain. 
b^a  to  mix. 
pp3  to  empty. 
in  5  to  cut. 
^■ia  to  sweep  aioay. 
oi'n  to  be  still. 
rnn  to  break  loose. 


^b'^  to  break. 

nn^a  to  sink. 

V^j  to  spoil. 

ch-a  to  be  desolate  or 

amazed. 
tjsn  to  beat. 


■JSJ  to  gather  clouds,  liis  ^o  prac- 
tise sorcery. 
nnis  io  burst,  "iQ"!Q  ^o  s7jai:e  <o  pieces. 

b|p  io  curse,  ^P^p  ^o  r<;7ie<. 

yk"i  and  ■j^^in  to  crush. 

I'^^li  and  Ti'UJ  to  treat  with  violence. 


hiht  and  "blv^  to  roll. 

bin  to  praise,  b^iin  fo  ma/lre  mad. 

'bin  to  profane,  VBin  to  ivound. 

•jln  ^   »waZ:e  gracious^    'jiin   fo    6« 

b|^  ^0  speat,  bBii^a  ^o  mow. 

330  fo  change,  naio  fo  swrroMWf?. 

5.  The  following  use  different  forms  in  different  species,  viz.: 

ppn  Pi.  to  decree,  Pu.  ppn.  I.?")  Pi.  to  shout,  Hith.  "liiinn.* 

nnp  Pi.  to  measure,  Hith.  iliarif7-  ^^"'  I*!-  ^o  SreaA;,  Pu.  UJa"i. 

nn?3  Pi.<omaA:e6iffer,  Hith.^^"ipnn.  1*12?  Pi.  <o  inculcate,   Hith.  "jiiniL'rr 

bpbo  Pi.  fo  exalt,  Hith.  b^inpn.  <o  pierce, 
W(S  Pi.   fo   maltreat,   Hith.   b|?nn 
and  b^'i^'n?:, 

6.  The  following  examples  exhibit  the  effect  of  gutturals  upon  redupli- 
cated forms:  Preterite,  rfeilj  Isa.  11:  8;  Infinitive,  ~"in"inVi  Prov.  26:  21, 
i^tn-apn  Ex.  12:  39;  Future,  5.*i'?n':3!!?  Ps.  119:  47,  sii^p?!^"^  Ps.  94:  19;  Impe- 
rative, ^i-irs'n'jn  Isa.29:  9;  Participle,  ?lnS5na  Gen. 27:  12,  i^2'^h7\-q  Prov. 26: 18. 

§  143.  1.  The  Pual  species  adheres  to  the  analogy  of  perfect  verbs  with 
the  exception  of  the  preterites,  iniD  Nah.  3:  17,  Ws  Lam.  1 :  12,  the  future 
J !i2?\ari3n  Is«.  66:  12,  and  the  participles,  '>^b^yq  Isa.  9:  4,  V>^'nri  Isa.  53:  5. 

*  li'>ina  Ps.  78:  65  is  not  from  ")1"i  (Gesenius)  but  from  ')i"i,  see  Alexander 
in  loc. 


g  144  PE  YODH  VERBS.  173 

2.  "^^Pi^i  2  Sam.  22:  7  is  contracted  for  *|^^rr'  Ps.  18:  27;  in  regard  to 
tVenn  in  the  same  verse,  Nordheimer  adopts  the  explanation  of  Alting  that 
it  is  a  similar  contraction  of  the  Hithpael  of  VBiQ  thou  wilt  show  thyself  a 
judge,  but  as  it  answers  to  t^riDrri  Ps.  18:  27,  the  best  authorities  are  almost 
unanimous  in  supposing  a  transposition  of  the  second  radical  with  the  first 
and  its  union  with  r\  of  the  prefix. 

3.  brn  and  Vin.  The  prefixed  tl  remains  in  the  Hiphil  future  of  V^P, 
e-  S-  ^J?'!'?)  'I't^i'^i  *'-t\''?  a-n<i  in  the  derivative  nouns  ffrli,  r'ilrti'a, 
whence  these  forms  are  in  the  lexicons  referred  to  the  secondary  root  brn. 


Pe  Yodh  (^"3)  Veebs. 

§  144.  In  quiescent  verbs  one  of  the  original  radicals 
is  ^5,  1  or  ■'.  which  in  certain  forms  is  converted  into  or 
exchanged  for  a  vowel.  As  &<  preserves  its  consonantal 
character  when  occupying  the  second  place  in  the  root, 
and  also  (with  the  exception  of  the  Pe  Aleph  future, 
§  110.  3,  and  a  few  occasional  forms,  §  111.  2)  when  it 
stands  in  the  first  place,  verbs  having  this  letter  as  a 
first  or  second  radical  belong  to  the  guttural  class;  those 
only  in  which  it  is  the  third  radical  (Lamedh  Aleph)  are 
properly  reckoned  quiescent.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the 
first,  second,  or  third  radical  be  either  Yodh  or  Yav,  the 
verb  is  classed  as  quiescent.  All  verbs  into  which  either 
1  or  ^  enter  as  a  first  radical  are  promiscuously  called  Pe 
Yodh,  as  the  modes  of  inflection  arising  from  these  two 
letters  have  been  blended,  and  Yodh  in  either  case  ap- 
pears in  the  Kal  preterite  from  which  roots  are  ordinarily 
named,  §  83.  a.  In  the  second  radical  the  Yav  forms 
(Ayin  Vav)  preponderate  greatly  over  those  with  Yodh 
(Ayin  Yodh).  In  the  third  radical  the  Yodh  forms  have 
ahnost  entirely  superseded  those  with  Vav,  though  the 
current  denomination  of  the  verbs  is  derived  from  neither 
of  these  letters  but  from  He  (Lamedh  He),  which  is  used 
to  express  the  final  vowel  of  the  root  m  the  Kal  preterite 
after  the  proper  radical  has  been  rejected. 


174  ETYMOLOGY.  §  145.  146 

a.  Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  the  consonant  M  belong  to  the  guttural 
class,  e.  g.  fn^5 ,  ?l^ri  and  are  quite  distinct  from  the  quiescent  verbs  tT'b  in 
which  n  always  represents  a  vowel,  e.  g.  nBw,  iiDS. 

§  145.  1.  In  Pe  Yodh  verbs  the  first  radical  is  mostly 
Yodh  at  the  beginning,  §  56.  2,  and  Vav  at  the  close  of 
a  syllable.  It  is  accordingly  Yodh  in  the  Kal,  Piel,  and 
Pual  species,  and  commonly  in  the  Hithpael,  iid^,  H"©";, 
uiD';',  nts'nn.  It  is  Vav  in  the  Niphal  and  commonly  in 
the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  3"i:iD,  Tizjin,  2.tTi. 

2.  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained,  it  will 
quiesce  in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the 
second  radical  will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  llJi"'';;  if  the  first 
radical  be  rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly 
lengthened  to  Tsere,  ijb'^,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syl- 
lable being  sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond 
with  it,  §  63.  2.  c,  e.  g.  zifiy,  in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is 
preserved  by  giving  Daghesh-forte  to  the  second  radical 
as  m  Pe  Nun  verbs,  the  following  vowel  being  either 
Pattahh  or  Hholem,  nk";,  p-2\ 

3.  Those  verbs  wliich  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct, where  it  would  be  accompanied  by  Sh'va  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  §  53.  2.  a,  the  infinitive  being- 
prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs  by  the  feminine  termina- 
tion, n^,  r\zw. 

§  146.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle  Vav 
quiesces  in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholem,  UTTID,  mris*, 
in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled 
by  J3aghesh-forte,  it  retains  its  consonantal  character, 

••T      •  '  "T  • 

2.  In  the  Hipliil  Yav  quiesces  in  Hholem,  n^^in,  H^'isi^; 
a  few  verbs  have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  Ii"t:^n,  2'X^^y, 
more  rarely  still,  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the 


§  147,  148  PE  YODH  VEEBS.  175 

preceding  short  vowel  is  preserved,  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs, 
by  doubling  the  second  radical,  yktl,  Tk\ 

3.  In  the  Hophal  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek,  nic'^Jl,  itJV; 

occasionally  the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh- 

forte  inserted  in  the  second  radical,  jk''. 

'     -\ 

a.  The  Hholem  or  Tsere  of  the  Hiphil  arises  from  the  combination  of 
a,  the  primary  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  in  this  species,  §  82.  5.  b.  (3),  with 
w  or  i,  into  which  the  letters  1  and  "^  are  readily  softened,  §  57.  2.  (5).  The 
Hholem  of  the  Niphal  is  to  be  similary  explained:  the  Hhirik  of  this  species, 
which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va  and  cannot  combine  with  Vav,  is  exchanged 
for  the  simplest  of  the  vowels  a  (comp.  3D3 ,  nips),  and  the  union  of  this 
with  ^  forms  o.  The  Hophal  retains  the  passive  vowel  u,  which  is  occasio- 
nally found  in  perfect  verbs,  §  95.  a. 

§  147.  The  inflections  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs  may  be  re- 
presented by  those  of  ^ir^  to  sit  or  dtvell,  (Paradigm  X).  The 
Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  are  omitted  as  they  do  not 
differ  from  perfect  verbs.  The  alternate  form  of  the  Kal 
future  is  shown  by  the  example  of  ^'i^  to  he  dry. 


Remaeks  on  Pe  Yodh  Yeebs. 

S  148.   1.  The  following  verbs  retain  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future,  via.: 

ttJr^  to  be  dry,  X^l  to  he  poured.  K'l^  to  fear. 

ra^  to  toil.  1?^  to  appoint.  nn^  to  cast. 

*in^  to  delay.  t\yi  to  be  iveary.  ttJn^  to  possess, 

tii^  to  oppress.  yv"^  to  counsel,  ci^  to  put. 

pi^  to  suck.  iiS^  to  be  beautiful.  )'gi  to  sleep. 

The  concurrence  of  Yodhs  in  the  third  person  of  the  future  is  some- 
times prevented  by  omitting  the  quiescent  iri"],  'IX")^,  ^3'i^'[],  the  long  vowel 
receiving  Methegh  befoi'e  vocal  Sh'va,  and  thus  distinguishing  the  last  two 
words  from  the  Lamedh  He  forms,  siX"!"^  ^'^om  MX^  and  ^y::^  from  ni'd, 
§  45.  2. 

2.  The  following  have  Tsere  under  the  pref ormative ;  those  in  which 
the  second  vowel  is  likewise  Tsere  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk: 

sni  to  know.  *  "n^"  to  bear.  SP'^  to  be  dislocated 

-T  -T  '"T 

nn^  to  be  joined.  *  ^k^  to  go  out.  *  ^^"^  to  go  down. 

cfii  to  conceive.  "isi  to  be  straitened.       *  a'iJ"'  to  sit,  dwell. 


176  ETYMOLOGY.  §  149 

The  second  syllable  has  Pattahh  in  TiPi  Jer.  13:  17,  Lam.  3:  48,  and 
in  the  feminine  plurals,  Hn^n,  njl^P};  fijxin  has  Seghol  after  the  analogy 
of  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs;  nDa'a"^n  (with  the  vowel-letter  ^  for  e)  occurs  only 
in  the  K'thibh,  Ezek.  35;  9,  and  of  course  has  not  its  proper  vowels.  In 
jyiii  pg.  138:  6  the  radical  Yodh  remains  and  has  attracted  to  itself  the 
Tsere  of  the  preformative.    Comp.  §  60.  3.  c. 

3.  The  following  insert  Daghesh-forte  in  the  second  radical,  viz,:  10^ 
to  chastise,  histrud,  nk'^  to  burn.  In  iirtin  Isa,  44:  8  short  Hhirik  remains 
before  a  letter  with  Sh'va;  '^iii'^']  Job  16:  11  is  explained  by  some  as  a  Kal 
future,  by  others  as  a  Piel  preterite. 

4.  The  following  have  more  than  one  form:  "^h"^^  to  be  good  fut.  '^.h'^l, 
once  ''i?r!"^^.  Nab.  3:  8;  p^^  to  pour  pii'^,  once  p^'j'^  1  Kin.  22:  35;  ik^  to 
form,  "I'Si-;  'and  "isi^l;  'ip^  to  burn,  ip^  Isa.  10:  16,  and  'ipip  Deut.  32:  22; 
yp^  to  aivake,  Y^'^l  o^^e  yp")  1  Kin.  3:  15;  "ip;;i  to  be  precious,  ^pi-i  and 
"ipi,  or  with  a  vowel  letter  for  e,  "ip'^.'?;  Q'ii^  to  be  desolate,  drn  once  nj'S'Jin 
Ezek.  6:6;  ^li?;  to  be  rigid,  ^tO^I  ,  once  nj-.t'l  (3  fem.  plur.,  §  88)  1  Sam. 
6:  12.    Some  copies  have  siya'i  Isa.  40:  30  for  !|3J5\ 

5.  In  futures  having  Tsere  under  the  preformative,  the  accent  is  shifted 
to  the  penult  after  Vav  Consecutive  in  the  persons  liable  to  such  a  change, 
viz.:  3  sing.,  2  masc.  sing.,  and  1  plur.,  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  being  in  con- 
sequence shortened  to  Seghol,  3>t?.'!]i  "'^'??i  '^'!!'.?^  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate 
becomes  Seghol  in  '^^y^,  ^^''^'^  (with  a  postpositive  accent)  Gen.  2:  7^  19, 
ZV'^\^  Gen.  50:  26;  but  aii^^Jl,  \IJni'=;l,  '|i3''*1,  yp"''^!!,  only  once  before  a  mono- 
syllable, §  35.  1,  'rp'''.5  Gen.  9:  24.  The  accent  remains  on  the  ultimate  in 
the  Lamedh  Aleph  form  X^.'^l,  unless  the  following  word  begins  with  an 
accented  syllable,  e.  g.  X^^l  Gen.  4:  16,  8:  18.  The  pause  restores  the  accent 
in  all  these  cases  to  its  original  position,  :3ia.'^^  Ruth  4:  1,  :5>^ri1  Ps.  139:  1, 
"in*!  Ps.  18:  10,  §  35.  2. 

§  149.,  1.  Kal  construct  infinitives  with  Yodh:  V'2']  and  with  a  feminine 
ending  ndh"^,  rVi"^,  li6']  with  suf.  '^'ip^,  once  with  prep.  "T^h-b  2  Chron. 
31:  7,  Daghesh  conservative  after  t,  §  14.  a;  ■^N'^'^,  §  87,  once  NT]  Josh. 
22:  25  and  with  prep.  X"i^  1  Sam.  18:  29  from  Xn^ ;"  ni'Ti  once  itin";  2  Chron. 
26:  15  from  nn;;,  '^^V"]. 

2.  Infinitives  without  Yodh:  n?^  (with  suf.  •'ni^t').  ^^,'1}  Ex.  2:  4,  and 
without  the  feminine  termination  in,  rri^  (with  suf.  "'O'lb)  and  iTi^,  once 
r^  1  Sam.  4:  19,  §  54.  2.  nx^  (with  suf.  ''hiq:),  npk,  nnn  (with  suf.  ■'tni']), 
once  nin  Gen.  46:  3,  nttJn  (with  suf.  Pnp-;),  M'B  (nnrj,  with  suf.  "'nnia  once 
''nyd  Ps.  23 :  6).  Yodh  is  perhaps  dropped  from  the  absolute  infinitive  yvii 
Jer.  42:  10,  which  is  usually  explained  to  be  for  niii'J;  it  may,  however,  be 
derived  from  the  Ayin  Vav  verb  ^lia. 

3.  Imperatives  with  Yodh:  J|T,  ^y!,  ^T.-  Without  Yodh:  51  (with 
n  parag.  ni"n  Prov.  24:  14),  nn  (with  h  parag.  nan;  for  lin  Hos.  4:  18, 
see  §  92.  a),'  N^  (nxi,  fem.  plur.  fi^'^k^i  Cant.  3V11),  aiy  ("3^3,  na^). 
With  both  forms:  p^'and  pi"]  (^p^^),  "i!?  (iri";),  twice  '^T.  Judg.  5:  13,  \^T 


§  150-152  REMARKS  ON  PE  YODH  VERBS.  177 

§  150.  1.  The  Niphal  of  ni^  has  u  instead  of  o,  ''i"3  Zeph.  3:18,  nwa 
Lam.  1:4;  ^h^^:  1  Chron.  3:  5,  20:  8  has  it  followed  by  Daghesh.  rks, 
which  according  to  Gesenius  is  from  nk^,  has  t;  Ewald  assumes  the  root 
to  be  V-t'-^,  and  refers  to  it  likewise  the  Kal  future  and  the  Hiphil  ascribed 
to  nk^,  §  148.  3.  and  §  151.  4.  In  that  case  the  Daghesh  in  ^iri^-;  Isa.  33: 12, 
Jer.  51:  58,  Avill  not  require  the  explanation  suggested  in  §  24.  c,  but  the 
K'thibh  rr^n^Iiin  2  Sam.  14:  30  will  be  unexplained.  IT^'is  Ps.  9:  17  is  not 
the  Niphal  preterite  or  participle  of  TT^^,  but  the  Kal  participle  of  UJJ?3. 

2.    Yodh  appears  in  the  Niphal  future  of  two  verbs  instead  of  Vav,  ' 
bni'sl  Gen.  8:  12,   1  Sam.  13:  8   K'ri,  nV^   Ex.  19:  13.     In  the  first  person 
singular  X  always  has  Hhirik,  "i;N,  ^;•|X,  "iDJX,  ^a^JX,  ?i';X,  "itjX. 

§  151.  1.  In  the  Hiphil  the  following  verbs  have  Yodh  preceded  by 
Tsere,  viz.:  n-j^  to  be  good,  Vi^  to  hoivl,  "■b;  to  go  to  the  right,  "li;;  to 
change,  pr  to  srtck.  Yodh  is  likewise  found  in  "^Zir-a^n  Judg.  16:  26  K'thibh, 
and  in  the  following  instances  in  which  the  prefix  has  Pattahh  as  in  per- 
fect verbs,  C^'^p-^N  Hos.  7:  12,  n-^l'":  Prov.  4:  25,  ".i'-ri  Ps.  5:  9  K'ri  (K'thibh 
rr'i-!,  conip.  Isa.  45:  2  K'thibh  -'-"X,  K'ri  T>^:X),'  xk";!!  Gen.  8:  17  K'ri 
(K'thibh  x:nn),  C-ii?-^  l  Chron.  12:  2. 

2.  In  ^^i^"!'  Job  24 :  21  (elsewhere  j'^^V.  and  h"'}'}'^^  (once  hVi3"'X  Mic. 
1:8),  the  radical  Yodh  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  pref )ruiative, 
coinp.  §  148.  2.  He  remains  after  the  preformative  in  ^^"^^^i^^  Isa.  52:  5, 
T^^^-'T^^  Neh.  11:  17,  Ps.  28,  7,  T'^-lT^  1  Sam.  17:  47,  Ps.  116:  6.  'Both  Yodh 
and  A'av,  quiescing  in  their  appropriate  vowels,  are  liable  to  omission, 
•prri,  ^P'-T},  ^^Bh,  l^r'an,  and  once  the  vowel  Tsere  is  dropped  before  a 
suffix,  iinp-^in  Ex.  2:  9  for  sinpirn. 

3.  Vav  consecutive  draws  the  accent  hack  to  the  penultimate  Tsere  or 
Hholem  of  the  Hiphil  future  in  the  persons  liable  to  be  affected  by  it, 
§  148.  5,  and  shortens  the  final  vowel,  3wi"!^,  P}'b^,  Srvi,  n'rsi,  i'Snl;  hut 
with  a  pause  accent  :"rnl  Euth  2:  14. 

4.  The  following  verbs  insert  Daghesh  in  the  second  radical  in  the 
Hiphil,  viz.:  5^^  to  set,  place,  5^^  to  spread,  pk^  to  pour,  except  :rpu'i"3 
2  Kin.  4:  5  K'ri  (K'thibh  nps-i^S),  ni;  to  burn,  except  ninisn  2  Sam.  14:  30 
K'thibh,  see  §  150.  1. 

5.  In  the  Hophal  a  few  examples  occur  of  u  followed  by  Daghesh,  iS" 
Ex.  10;  24,  ra;^  isa.   14:  11,  Esth.  4:  3,  lE^-O  Isa.  28:  16,  pil-a  Job  11;  15 
and  a  few  of  Hholem,  snin  Lev.  4:  23,  28,'x7.i'i  Prov.  11:  25  for  nnii  from 
rrn^.    The  construct  infinitive:   ic^in  Ezr.  3:  11,  and  with  the  feminine  ter- 
mination n-'f^n  Ezek.  16:  4,  nn|ri  Gen.  40:  20,  Ezek.  16:  5. 

§  152.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  Yodh  is  once  dropped,  T^  Judg.  19:  11 
for  T^i .  Hhirik  occurs  with  the  second  radical  of  "^1  and  11""^  in  the  first 
and  second  persons  singular  with  suffixes,  and  in  the  second  person  plural, 
which  is  perhaps  due  to  the  assimilating  power  of  the  antecedent  Yodh, 
e.  ff.  "^rr's"!,  ppd-i"^,  cfrr-ii. 

S.  In  the  Piel  future  the  prefix  Yodh  of  the  third  person  is  contracted 

12 


178  ETYMOLOGY.  §  153,  154 

with  the  radical  after  Vav  consecutive,  'I'tI"?*^  Nah.  1 :  4  for  ^liii's^"'! ,  >ia?3 
Lam.  3:  33,  !|'h*;i  Lam.  3:  53,  tD^t"*^  2  Chron.'  32:  30  K'ri  (K'thibh  nmr'^'il). 

3.  Three  verbs  have  Vav  in  the  Hithpael,  niirn,  SJ'hirri,  n2irr7;  n 
is  assimilated  to  the  following  1  and  contracted  with  it  in  1^513  Ezek. 
23:  48  for  1"&"r3  a  pecuUar  Niplial  formed  on  the  basis  of  a  Hithpael, 
§  83.  c.  (2).  In  aarn  Ex.  2;  4  for  as^npi  Yodh  is  rejected  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preceding  letter,  §  53.  3.  b. 

§  153.  1.  fj^rt  and  T\?1.  "^^  to  go  in  the  Hipbil  and  for  the  most  part 
in  the  infinitive  construct,  future  and  imperative  Kal  follows  the  analogy 
of  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  as  though  the  root  were  Tj^^.  Thus,  Kal  inf.  const. 
rs^  (vzh ,  with  suf.  "^P^b)  rarelj^  T\^^, ;  fut.  "^"^  (once  with  the  vowel  letter 
"^  fore,  niVx  Mic.  1:8,  fern.  pi.  n::^ri),  occasionally  in  poetry  Ti'^rt"'  (3  fern, 
sing.  "^Ciri);  imper.  T\i>  (with  n^  parag.  Hsb,  or  without  the  vowel  letter 
f3,  fem.  pi.  nSD^  and  '^Ji)  once  ^zhTi  Jer.  51;  50.  Hiphil:  Ti'^^'^  once  in 
the  imper.  "^^'^liiln  Ex.  2 ;  9,  and  once  in  the  participle  D'^isn^  Zech.  3 :  7 
for  D-iij^^pnp,  §  94.  e. 

2.  r]6i<  to  gather  and  irjo^  to  add  are  liable  to  be  confounded  in  certain 
forms.  In  the  Hiphil  future  of  V|C^,  o  is  twice  represented  by  the  vowel 
letter  S,  CjON'T  1  Sam.  18:  29.  "(SlSSxn  Ex.  5:  7;  CiDX  drops  its  X  in  the 
Kal  future,  when  it  follows  the  Pe  Alepb  inflection,  §  110.  3,  which  it  does 
only  in  the  following  instances,  ClD*S  2  Sam.  6:  1,  ?]bri  Ps.  104:  29,  nspijt 
Mic.  4:  6,  5^2&'n  1  Sam.  15:  6,  where  the  Hhirik,  being  abbreviated  from 
Tsere,  is  short,  notwithstanding  the  Methegh  in  the  intermediate  syllable, 
§  45.  2.  The  apoc.  Hiph.  fut.  of  v]D^  when  joined  with  the  uegativa 
particle  bx  is  accented  on  the  penult,  ^Dirrbx  Deut.  3:  26,  and  in  one  in- 
stance the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  dropped  entirely,   pjOirrbx  Prov.  30:  8. 

3.  d'^niS'IJiti  Zech.  10:  6  is  probably,  as  explained  by  Gesenius  and 
Hengstenberg,  for  Cnzdin  from  ^'iJ^  to  dtvell,  though  Ewald  derives  it 
from  3TO  to  return,  as  if  for  Cnia-^n,  and  Kimchi  supposes  it  to  be  a 
combination  of  both  words  suggesting  the  sense  of  both,  in  which  he  ia 
followed  by  the  English  translators,  I  will  bring  them  again  to  place  them. 

ly'^Xnh  Isa.  30:  5  "is  regarded  by  Gesenius  as  an  incorrect  orthography 
for  ^•^hin;  but  Maurer  and  Knobel  read  it  ^■'Xan  and  assume  a  root  ^X3 
synonymous  with  UJia".    Alexander  in  loc. 

rpaiPi  P8.  1«:  6,  see  §  90. 

Ayin  Vav  {i'^)  aih)  Ayin  Yodh  {^"Tj  Verbs. 

§  154.  Yodh  and  Vav,  as  the  second  radical  of  verbs, 
have  the  following  peculiarities,  viz.: 

1.  They  may  be  converted  into  their  homogeneous 
vowels  i  and  u. 

2.  They  may  be  rejected  when   accompanied  by  a 


§155  AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.  179 

heterogeneous  vowel,  which  is  characteristic  of  the  fonn. 
Yodli  forms  are  confined  to  the  Kal  of  a  few  verbs;  in 
the  other  species  Vav  forms  are  miiversal. 

a.  Yodh  is  never  found  as  a  quiescent  middle  radical  in  any  species 
but  Kal:  it  enters  as  a  consonant  into  the  Piel  of  two  verbs,  and  the  Hith- 
pael  of  two,  §  163.  1,  the  Niphal  of  trr\  to  he,  and  the  Hiphil  of  H^n  to  live. 

§  155.  1.  In  the  Kal  preterite  and  active  participle 
and  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  species,  the  quiescent  is 
rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to  the  preceding  radical. 
Thus, 

Kal  preterite:  D|5  for  Di|^  where  a,  which  arises  from 
blending  a  with  the  pretonic  Kamets,  §  62. 1,  is  in  partial 
compensation  for  the  contraction,  t^'2  for  T\'\12,  123  for  IT'^, 
2'1  for  ^l\   For  an  exceptional  formation,  see  §  160.  1. 

Active  participle:  DJ^  for  oi]:,  T\'2  for  t\V2,  llin  for  'ij^!!, 
y\  for  nj"^,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  super- 
seded by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative,  as  is  the  case 
in  some  perfect  verbs  of  a  neuter  signification,  §  90. 

Hiphil  and  Hophal:  Q'pn  for  Di):pn,  D^p^  for  C^":P:, 
Ujyfi  for  Dipn,  the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  pro- 
longed in  a  simple  syllable,  §  59. 

-  2.  In  the  Kal  construct  infinitive,  future,  imperative 
and  passive  participle,  the  quiescent  is  softened  into  its 
homogeneous  vowel,  D^p,  1^"];  in  the  future  the  preforma- 
tive  commonly  takes  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  c?, 
n^iii);,  tV,  comp.  nb\ 

3.  In  the  Kal  absolute  infinitive  and  in  the  Niphal 
species  a  similar  softening  of  1  occurs,  which,  with  the 
accompanying  or  preceding  a,  forms  6,  §  57.  2.  (5),  C'lp 
(k6m  =  kaum)  for  DTi]);  Dip3  for  Dip:,  the  prefix  usually 
taking  the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a;  Dip";  for  p.pt- 

4.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites  o  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  affixed  ter- 
mmation  in  order  to  preserve  the  long  vowel  of  the  root 

12* 


180  ETYMOLOGY.  §  156,  157 

from  the  compression  incident  to  standing  before  two 
consonants,  §  61.  4;  in  the  feminine  plurals  of  the  Kal 
future  e  ("^.J  is  sometimes  inserted  for  a  similar  reason, 
this  prolongation  of  the  word  being  attended  by  a  shift- 
ing of  the  accent  and  a  consequent  rejection  of  the  pre- 
tonic  vowel  of  the  first  syllable,  Dni'JipD,  r)ib''i:?j,  Hj^/J^pP. 
In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  inserted  i  receives  the 
accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euphony  changed  to  5,  e.  g. 

5.  In  the  Kal  and  Hipliil  species  the  apocopated 
future  takes  the  diphthongal  vowels  o  and  e  in  distinc- 
tion from  the  ordinary  future,  which  has  the  pure  vowels 
u  and  f ,  §  66. 1.  (2)  b,  thus  nii:;,  nir^  With  Vav  Conversive 
the  accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  2ldj!l,  nUJjl. 

§  156.  1.  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of 
perfect  verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  ap- 
pearing as  1,  e.  g.  n-]^',  or  as  ■•,  e.  g.  D^p. 

2.  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduphcated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  D'^ip, 

Pu.  D'^ip,  Hith.  Qbiprn. 

a.  In  the  Pual  o  is  the  passive  vowel  here  adopted  in  preference  to  ».* 
in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael  it  arises  from  the  combination  of  u,  to  which  1  is 
softened,  with  the  antecedent  a,  tih'p  for  tiBlj5 ,  §  82.  5.  b  (3). 

3.  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resultmg  bihteral  is  reduphcated,  Pi  biibs, 
Pu.  b3b3. 

a.  The  two  forms  of  the  intensive  species,  which  depart  from  the  regu- 
lar paradigm,  precisely  resemble  in  appearance  those  of  Ayin  doubled  verbs, 
though  constructed  Upon  a  different  principle,  as  already  explained. 

§  157.  The  inflections  of  Ayin  Vav  verbs  are  shown 
in  those  of  n^p  to  stand  or  rise,  in  Paradigm  IX;  the 
divergent  forms  of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  in  the  Kal  species 
are  exhibited  by  2^1  to  contend. 


§158,159      AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.  181 

a.  Aj'in  Vav  and  Ayin  Todh  verbs  are  named  not  from  the  Kal  pre- 
terite, in  which  the  quiescent  is  rejected,  but  from  the  construct  infinitive, 
tlie  simplest  form  in  which  all  the  radicals  appear. 

h.  No  Hophal  forms  occur  in  those  persons  in  which  the  inflective  ter- 
minations begin  with  a  consonant.  The  same  ii  true  of  the  Ayin  Yodh 
imperative. 

Kemarks  on  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs. 

§  158.  1.  Medial  Yodh  and  Vav  remain  without  quiescence  or  rejection 
in  a  few  verbs,  whose  root  contains  another  feeble  consonant  by  contrast 
with  which  these  letters  acquire  new  strength.  This  is  always  the  case  in 
Lamedh  He  verbs,  e.  g.  T^'-p^,  ni?;  so  likewise  in  the  following  guttural 
verbs  and  forms,  ris  to  expire,  nnin;!  Isa.  29:  22,  :  ^n;;^-;  Isa.  42:  11,  =:x 
to  be  a»  enemy,  'Qrl \  Sam.  18:  9  K'ri  (K'thibh  "pr),  nb^;?  Jer.  4:  31,  which 
are  confined  to  the  Kal  species,  and  in  nin  to  be  airy  or  refreshing,  whicli 
is  besides  found  in  the  Pual  participle. 

2.  The  Kal  preterite  has  Pattahh  in  two  instances  as  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
13  Zech.  4:  10,  na  Isa.  44:  18  but  rrj  Lev.  14:  42.  It  has  Tsere  in  HE 
to  die,  1.3  Isa.  17:  11  (unless  this  is  a  noun  as  explained  by  Delitzsch  and  in 
the  common  English  version)  but  ^lli  Jer.  50:  3,  and  Hholem  in  "Tix  to  shine, 
uia  to  be  ashamed,  srj  to  be  good,  §  82.  1.  a,  and  in  ^xa  Jer.  27:  18,  elsewhere 
!lX3,  r<^  Isa.  1:  6,  Ps.  58:  4,  elsewhere  ^ilT.  Hhirik  once  occurs  instead  of 
Pattahh  in  the  second  person  plural,  Dtnps  Mai.  3:  20.  The  following  par- 
ticiples have  Tsere,  tnh,  -,'>,  fp,  nxjVn?;  the  following  have  Hholem, 
C'^D'ia,  B-^t-ia,  D-^iip  2  Kin.  16:  7  (comp.  cn-'^ap  Ex.  32:  25  in  the  Sama- 
ritan copy),  elsewhere  D-^^ID,  n^in  Jer.  4:  31  if  from  ^in  and  not  from  ri^r, 

3.  The  vowel  letter  K  is  written  for  a,  §  11.  1.  a,  once  in  the  preterite, 
DSp  Hos.  10:  14,  and  occasionally  in  the  participle,  'JXb  Judg.  4:  21,  nitlX"; 
ProV.  24:  7,  irx-i  2  Sam.  12:  1,  4,  Prov.  10:  4,  13:  23,  U^b^"^^  despisit^g 
Ezek.  16:  57,  28:^24,  26,  to  be  distinguished  from  D-ii-d  rotving  Ezek.  27:  ><, 
26.  The  consonant  K  is  once  introduced  in  place  of  the  omitted  1,  frax" 
Zech.  14:  10  for  noi;  the  ancient  versions  favour  the  assumption,  that 
■i-NS  Ps.  22:  17  is  in  like  manner  for  D-'ns  piercing,  though  the  most  recent 
and'ablest  expositors  take  it  to  be  a  preposition  and  noun  like  the  lion. 

4.  The  accent  regularly  remains  upon  the  radical  syllable  before  affixes 
consisting  of  a  vowel  or  a  simple  syllable,  though  with  occasional  exceptions, 
e.  g.  nitp  Lev.  18:  28,  131  Gen.  26:  22,  W2  Gen.  40;  15,  ^-n  Num.  13:  32. 
In  a  few  instances  it  is  shifted  by  Vav  conversive  preterite,  §  100.  2,  isb-i 
Obad.  ver.  16,  ^lEDn  Am.  3:  15,  tTiJl  Isa.  11:  2,  *31  Isa.  7:  19  but  ^Xa>i  ibid., 
nsa^  Zech.  5:  4,  n;5l  ibid.,  where  the  feminine  ending  is  n^  instead  of  n^; 
80^ in  the  passive  participle,  frn/t  Isa.  59:  5  for  nn^t. 

§  159.  1.  Hholem  is  in  a  few  instances  found  instead  of  Shurek  in  the 
construct  infinitive,  xia,  \i:ia  Judg.  3:  25,  lii^,  Hi  and  ra,  Sii  Isa.  7:  2, 
elsewhere  ?«,  lis  Isa.  SO:  2,  which  is  not  from  lh,  a\i;  Josh.  2:  16,  else- 


182  ETYMOLOGY.  §  160 

where  S^lii,  and  witli  suf.  fail  Ezek.  10;  17,  '^t'ia  Ps.  71:  6,  which  is  not 
the  participle  from  fh  (Gesenius),  "^nii  mi/  breaking  forth,  i.  e.  the  cause 
of  it  Ps.  22:  10,  see  Alexander  in  loc;  Gesenius  explains  this  fornr  as  a 
participle,  but  is  obliged  in  consequence  to  assume  a  transitive  sense  which 
nowhere  else  belongs  to  the  verb. 

2.  The  following  imperatives  have  Hholem,  "^'^'ix  Isa.  60:  1,  K3,  ^is, 
"iriil  Mic.  4:  10,  "^ci^  Mic.  4:  13.  "With  paragogic  n,  nop  or  n^^ip,  nil>ld 
or  ri-S'j.    Examples  of  the  feminine  plural,  nj'sp,  n33'J, 

3.  The  following  futures  have  Hholem,  i<'ii;^,  'i'lT';  Gen.  6;  3,  elsewhere 

lini,  sic:  Ps.  80:  19,  Cin^  and  D'fT^,  "C^h^  where  the  Hhirik  of  the  perfect 
paradigm  is  leni;tliened  to  Tsere  under  the  preformative.  Examples  of  the 
feminine  phual:  nD'xhjn  and  n:K'in,  n3''i:i1on,  nrkisn  and  Zech.  1:  17 
nsi^lEn  (in  Baer's  edition  without  Daghesh),  nj'^iiTOn  and  nD2'i'n,  nnsPI, 
nsn^l'sri  Ezek.  13:  19  (Baer  no  Daghesh).  The  accent  is  shifted  and  Kamets 
rejected  from  the  preformative  upon  the  addition  of  a  suffix  or  paragogic 
Nun,  the  latter  of  which  is  particularly  frequent  in  this  class  of  verbs  both 
in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  future.  "^r^Tr-;,  f,'r^H ,  n^^iTO,  WzS-),  '(lilp'?,  "j^niiTsn, 
tii^rri  Ezek.  4:12,  with  Daghesh  euphonic  in  the  5  and  5  which  Baer  omits. 
Apocopated  future:  r'6'^,  ^C"^  and  "2"^';,  1-ri,  yp-ri,  'C^'n,  Cp';>  with  the  ac- 
cent thrown  back  to  the  penult  ";r^.  Future  with  Vav  consecutive:  IHTDJI 
(in  pause  Tia^j),  2C^n  (-i^t-)'  ^"^t-'  '^kI->  T'i^r-'  ^"^Tr-'  the  last  vowel  is 
changed  to  Pattahh  before  a  final  guttural,  r:^1 ,  n:jl,  and  sometimes  be- 
fore "1  or  after  an  initial  guttural  ^j^l  but  15^1,  t'J^^  he  waft  iveary,  t\^S^^^ 
he  fleic,  GHRI;  the  vowel  of  the  preformative  is  likewise  changed  to  Pattahh 
in  Uinni  Job  31:  5,  'CVl'\  l  Sam.  14:  32,  ::^'Fl1  1  Sara.  15:  19  but  -Ji'jl  1  Sam. 
25:  14. 

§  160.  1.  The  verbs  which  exhibit  peculiar  Ayin  Yodh  forms  in  Kal, 
with  unimportant  exceptions,  either  do  not  occur  in  the  Hiphil  or  retain 
the  same  signification  in  both  these  species.  This  has  led  some  gram- 
marians to  entertain  the  opinion  that  these  are  not  Kal  but  abbreviated 
Hiphil  forms,  while  others  suppose  that  the  Hiphil  in  these  verbs  is  a 
secondary  formation,  and  has  arisen  from  the  Kal  future  having  the  form 
of  the  Hiphil.  Only  three  examples  occur  of  quiescent  Yodh  in  the  Kal 
preterite,  riin'^'l  Job  33:  13  (Tpr\  Lam.  3:  58),  "^n'^a  Dan.  9:  2  (npi;2  Ps. 
139:  2)  wi'i'n  Jer.  16:  16;  '""a  Dan.  10:  1  has  been  variously  explained  as 
3  pers.  preterite,  imperative  or  infinitive. 

2.  The  following  verbs  have  "^  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative,  'j'^a 
to  understand,  XT^i  (once  '■ril  Mic.  4:  10)  to  break  forth,  h'''^  (once  h^V^  Prov. 
23:  24  K'thibh)  to  exult,  "i^^  (once  'j'ii';  Gen.  6:  3)  to  judge,  'p'i?  to  lodge, 
a"'"i  to  contend,  ri"'i  to  muse,  C^p  (once  Wr^  Ex.  4:  11)  to  put,  b"ib  (once 
cvi'b"^  Isa.  35:  1)  to  rejoice,  I'^O  (once  I'i"';  Job  33:  27)  to  sing,  ni^  to 
place;  h'^n  or  b'^r?  to  twist,  tvrithe,  has  both  Yodh  and  Vav.  To  these  are 
to  be  added  ^^^i  Jer.  4:  3,  Hos.  10:  12,  triin  Ps.  71:  12  K'thibh,  K'ri  niUiir 
as  always  elsewhere;  |"'N^  to  urge,  yii-^  to  flourish,  'J^n';  to  wander,  are  iu 
the  Hiphil  according  to  Gesenius:  but  as  the  corresponding  preterites  ar«j 
not  Hiphil  but  Kal,  and  there  are  no  other  forms  of  the  Kal  future,  they 


§  161,  162   AYIN  VAV  AND  AYIN  YODH  VERBS.         183 

might  with  equal  propriety  be  regarded  as  Kal  futures  of  Ayin  Yodh  roots ; 
the  second  of  them  is  so  regarded  by  Ewald.  Apocopated  futures:  )b.'^, 
V:;;  and  b^,  nfi'i,  U'b'^,  ra-^^,  'i^n  and  t'l^ri.  With  Vav  consecutive:  b:'^i, 
'(zh,  Cii^l,  '|-Pi,  -nni,  n;pi,  "irinl.  With  paragogic  Nun  and  suffixes: 
"5^;."^,  "fP'rin,  D^'C";.   Feminine  plural:  njbin. 

3.  The  infinitives  show  a  sjtronger  disposition  to  adopt  Vav  forms, 
Yodh  is  only  retained  in  the  following  absolute  infinitives:  "pa  Prov.  23:  1, 
n-i  and  r;:.,  b'^J  Prov.  23:  24  K'ri  (bl5  K'thibh),  y^n  Jer.  50:  34,  elsewhere 
S'"i.  Construct  infinitives:  '("''n,  "pb  Gen.  24;  23,  elsewhere  '^b,  l'^")  once  SI"! 
Judg.  21:  22  K'thibh,  ri'^'h  and  ma,  C-^b  Job  20:  4,  2  Sam.  14:  7  K'ri,  else- 
where Wb,  "T^-JJ  1  Sam.  18:  6  K'ri  (K'thibh  irr),  n-^d,  also  with  suf.  Tr^n 
Deut.  25:  4,  elsewhere  Tl'^n.  In  the  difficult  verse  Hos.  7:  4  '^''V'g  has  been 
variously  explained,  as  the  Kal  infinitive  preceded  by  the  preposition  )'0  or 
as  the  Hiphil  participle.  The  only  certain  instance  of  a  Kal  passive  pai-- 
ticiple  of  Ayin  Yodh  verbs  is  niv::  2  Sam,  13:  32  K'ri  (K'thibh  n^^^b); 
some  explain  a"'b  Num.  24:  21,  Obad.  ver.  4,  as  a  passive  participle,  others 
as  an  infinitive. 

4.  Aj'in  Yodh  verbs  adopt  the  Vav  forms  in  all  the  derivative  species, 
e.  g.  '^ri'i:^:,  "jiilJ,  sinbiu"!,  "^^'ispr')  f^'^^'l"^;  ""i?  cooked,  i.  e.  pottage,  is  the 
only  instance  of  a  Niphal  participle  Avith  Yodh. 

§  161.  1.  Examples  of  the  Niphal  pi-eterite:  Siis,  aioD,  "'^23,  '^'ix:;  the 
accidental  Hhirik  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  preserved  in  bla3  by  means 
of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical;  in  "li"?  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere  be- 
fore the  guttural;  in  ',"•'2^  Jer.  48^  11  the  radical  1  is  rejected,  which  gives 
it  the  appearance  of  an  Ayin  doubled  verb.  Inflected  forms:  J^jisj  (part, 
fem.  rii-::),  '.rii:,  ^i;?::,  r^'i^,  ^ibas,  "^niwi,  "^ri^is:,  cin'i:jiE3,  crbpa. 

2.  Infinitive  absolute:  bisiri.  Construct:  biaii,  ri'"::!!,  with  M  rejected 
after  the  preposition  "lisb  Job  33:  30,  §  91.  b;  once  it  has  Shurek,  TT^l'^n 
Isa.  25:  10.    Imperative,  'psfi,  'iban. 

3.  Future:  ^^i";,  tjifi":,  biffl":,  'j'iil'^  Ps.  72:  17  K'ri  (K'thibh  pi),  ^i^-i, 
rih,  -iN-i,  iirx';',  ^rh.    Participle:  'pi;,  tiba,  d''ii'i33,  c^i'^o:,  Q^in:,  dibia;. 

§  162.  1.  The  short  vowel  of  the  perfect  paradigm  is  in  a  few  in- 
stances preserved  in  the  Hiphil  by  doubling  the  first  radical,  thus  ri^in 
and  n^in,  n^sn  and  n^cri,  rSi,  '{^h,  and  'pbi,  '-TT}'^  and  ^n'l  2  Sam.  22:  33. 

2.  Hiphil  preterite  inflected:  n;rikri,  ^iJirli,  W^n  and  Wnri;  with 
syllabic  affixes:  nii^sn,  ni'rinri,  Piwnin  and  r^i'^n,  crs^-iri  and  oiris'^n, 
B^h^rin,  ^H^IiSni,  or  when  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  ^^'''^'^\},  rn-»ri 
and  nnn^'n,  or  without  the  inserted  Hholem,  J^sin,  inn|n  and  inirii:!!, 
fi::n  and  ^;'ir=n,  onx^n  and  onxisn,  inbn  and  nn-an,  §  ei.  4.  a.  With 
suffixes,  irsn,  tn^ioin,  '^s>'"2C!>  ''?^"''-?^!',  'iJ^i^I^ri- 

3.  Hiphil  future  inflected:  151=';,  iidi^n,  feminine  plural  t^J^iTl,  HS^^hP', 
njpitiri.  With  Nun  paragogic  and  suffixes:  '(^i'l^i,  d^i^i.  Apocopated 
future:"  I'SJi,  2ci,  nsi,  r:ni .  With  Vav  consecutive:  rT2^1 ,  C^ri,  Di^H,  lifXI 
and   1ii:x\  if  the  last  radical  be  a  guttural,  r^%",  nr^T,  nn^l,   or  X,   xi;^' 


184  ETYMOLOGY.  §  163 

once  Sf^i"}  and  once  S'^^^l;  upon  the  reception  of  a  suffix  the  Towel  is 
restored  tc  its  original  length,  DhilU'^l,  ins"^?"]]). 

4.  Hiphil  infinitive  absolute:  :2'i3n,  nin ,  Dpn  once  Q'^pn  Jer.  44:  25; 
construct,  h^br,,  rr^hri,  n^cn,  D-^pn,^  with  suffix  "'^^'in,  'rfj^cn,  ^^IV^.^ 
fiisiStn  and  once  with  a  feminine  termination  t^SJ!!]  Isa.  30:  28. 

5.  In  a  few  instances  ii  is  found  in  the  Hophal  before  Daghesh-forto 
or  Sh'va,  'nr\'>:f}  Zech.  5:  11,  nSD  Ezek.  41:  9,  11  but  niw  Lam.  5:  5,  and 
in  some  editions  Cjsn  2  Sara.  23:  1,  jlsa'J  Job  41:  1,  inrin  2  Sam.  21:  9, 
though  others  read  Qi^n,  i^lJ'J,  ^'^'^•^t 

§  163.  1.  The  following  verbs,  which  are  only  found  in  one  or  mor« 
of  the  three  reduplicated  species,  double  the  middle  radical  either  as  Vav 
or  as  Yodh,  viz.:  2'Jn  to  render  liable,  bh  to  do  wickedly,  ib  to  blind,  m? 
to  pervert,  rv:3  to  cry  for  help,  '^:'iT^^^^  Josh.  9:  12,  ^"^^'^T,  Josh.  9:  4;  so 
also  S'p  fut.  C'lpi  and  Q^'ip';,  "^^i"  fut.  Tii''],  which  have  quiescent  Vav  In 
other  species,  and  T^-i"},  which  has  consonantal  Vav  likewise  in  the  Eal. 

2.  The  following  omit  the  quiescent  in  the  Piel  and  double  the  result- 
ing biliteral,  hz7'3  to  sustain,  n^riN-^X-J  Isa.  U:  23,  T^V"??'^"?  ^^^-  22:  17, 
Tjii-TrTa  Hab.  2:  7,  ■i?"JS:i3'^  Job  16:  12  but  ]'ks":  Jer.  23;  29,  "ip-ip  Num. 
24:  17  "and  ^p"}p^  Isa.  22;  5,  '^Siiiiian  Isa.  17:  11;  il'^ri'"]  Isa.  15;  5  is  for 
:!l1S'1?"i,  §  57.  1;  11"^?")  Job  39:3  is  perhaps  for  ^3:;b"";  from  h^S ,  comp. 
pijX  Ps.  139:  8  for  p^pX,  §  88,  thovigh  Gesenius  conjectures  that  it  is  an 
erroneous  reading  for  ^iS'^rbi  from  ?*l3.  The  only  Hiihpael  formed  by  a  like 
reduplication  is  bn?rirri  Esth.  4:  4,  elsewhere  bBinnn. 

3.  Other  verbs  double  the  third  radical  in  the  Piel  and  Hithpael.  Ex- 
amples of  the  feminine  plural;  ninni^Fi,  Injpipn,  injSsiTarn,  tirj-jrjrr. 
Hholem  is  changed  to  H  before  the  doubled  letter  in  the  contracted  form, 
tisbail  Job  31:  15  for  ^353'iw'^:],  §  61.  3.  Fiirst  explains  !i:i>l^t^1  Isa.  64:  6  as 
in  like  manner  for  «i5'i"2ri1 ,  while  Gesenius  makes  it  a  Kal  future,  used  in 
this  single  instance  in  a  transitive  sense.  DzD'^ia  Am.  5:  11  is  probably'  a 
v^ariant  orthography  for  diccia,  §  92.  6. 

4.  The  following  are  the  only  examples  of  the  Pual  in  Ayin  Vav  verbs, 
viz.:  With  1  doubled,  rh-q  Eccles.  1:  15,  B^nj'nti  Jer.  22:  14.  Keduplicated 
biliteral,  l^sVa  1  Kin.  20:  27.  The  third  radical  reduplicated,  b^in  to  be 
born,  :!i33'i3'Ezek.  28:  13,  Ps.  37:  23,  nj^-binn  Ps.  75:  11  and  diila  Neh. 
9:  5,  rr"")':  isa.  16:  10,  'lES'i"!';  Job  26:  11,  naiira^  Ezek.  38:  8. 

5.  ai'^ri'i^J'isn  Jer.  25:  34  is  an  anomalous  preterite  from  'j'lS  to  scatter, 
with  n  prefixed  and  inflected  after  the  analogy  of  Niphal;  some  copies  have 
the  noun  D3"'n'i:i'iSFi  your  dispersions. 

In  "'nb::!!'!  Ezek.  36:  11  for  inhatill  from  21::,  Tsere  is  retained  under 
the  prefix  as  though  the  word  were  from  the  related  Pe  Yodh  verb  2:^^, 
e.  g.  'in;ia''n'.  On  the  other  hand,  in  ^inpijri]  Ex.  2:  9  from  pi^,  Tsere  if 
rejected  as  though  it  were  from  an  Ayin  Vav  verb. 


I 


§  164,  165  LAMKDH  ALEPH  VEERS.  ]85 

Lamedh  Aleph  (5<"b)  Verbs. 

§  164o  1,  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains 
its  consonantal  character  only  when  it  stands  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable,  HNJI"^ ,  ^X'iian. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in 
the  preceding  vowel,  §  57.  2.  (2),  i<i2a,  i<k'Z,  i<"^2-.  If 
this  vowel  be  Pattahh,  as  in  the  Kal  and  Niphal  prete- 
rites and  in  the  Pual  and  Hoplial  species,  it  is  in  the 
simple  syllable  lengthened  into  Kamets,  §  59,  Xi"J  for 
^'2,  ^i^'2Z  for  t<:i"r?;  so  likewise  in  the  Kal  future  and 
imperative,  where  i^  as  a  guttural  requires  a,  i^'21  for 
jd'P:,  5<":"^  for  i^^.  A  hke  prolongation  of  Pattahh  to 
Kamets  occurs  before  medial  J^  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  TJ^^'J'  ^P.^^^- 

3.  With  the  single  exception  just  stated,  medial  &< 
quiesces  in  the  diphthongal  vowel  e  before  syllabic  affixes; 
thus,  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  in  Tsere,  nj^k'^j,  "rii^'^n,  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  all  the  futures  and  imperatives  in 

Seghol,  nii^r^n,  n:^±iQ. 

o  '        TV:"'        T       V    : 

a.  This  e  may  arise  from  the  diphthongal  preferences  of  X,  §  60.  1.  a  (5), 
or  it  may  be  borrowed  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  n  b  verbs,  between 
which  and  x'b  verbs  there  is  a  close  affinity  and  a  strong  tendency  to 
mutual  assimilation.  In  Palestine  Aramaeic  and  Syriac  no  distinction  is 
made  between  them. 

§  165.  This  class  of  verbs  is  represented  in  Para- 
digm XI  by  55 ii'J  to  find;  the  Piel  and  Hithpael,  though 
wanting  in  this  verb,  are  supplied  from  analogy.  The 
Pual  and  Hophal  are  omitted  because  they  are  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  they  present  no  peculiarities  but  such 
as  are  common  to  the  other  species. 

a.  In  their  ordinary  inflection  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  differ  from  the 
perfect  paradigm  in  the  vowels  only. 


186  ETYMOLOGY.  §  166,  167 


Eemaeks  on  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs. 

§  166.  1.  Verbs  having  Tsere  as  their  second  vowel,  §  82.  1.  a,  retain 
it  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Kal  preterite,  J^^^'I^'J  (but  dini<"li 
Josh.  4:  24),  nx^-J,  T^.V^* 

2.  Quiescent  !!<  is  occasionally  omitted  from  the  body  of  the  word, 
e.  g.  Kal  pret.  "^^k^  Job  1:  21  for  T^ii^,  T^^  Num.  11:  11,  "^npS  Judg. 

4:  19,  ir^'3  Job  32:  18,  132  1  Sam.  25:  8'for  !i:X3:  fut.  nj'^^ri  and  ri3X'd:n; 
ni^  Deut.  28:  57  part.  fern.  sing,  for  nxk''^;  '.T^-ii-o  Job  41:  17  for  inx-^^ 
const,  inf.  ^^ith  prep,  and  suf.  from  xis.  Niph.  pret.  Qr^2ri3  Josh.  2:  16, 
nrpos  Lev.  11:  43.  Otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  may  in  like  manner  be  dropped  from 
the  end  of  the  word  after  quiescent  Vav  or  Yodh,  e.  g.  ""i^ii  Gen.  20:  6  for 
Ni-Jn,  id^l  1  Kin.  12:  12  for  Nld^l,  ^br^_  2  Kin.  13:  6,  "'■jnti  Jer.  32:  35, 
•^i^  Ps.  14^1:  5,  i-a'!'  Ps.  55:  16,  "^ix  \  Kin.  21 :  29,  Mic.  1 :  15,  ii;p  2  Sam.  5:  2, 
and  in  three  other  passages;  "'rri  Ruth  3:  15  is  Hiph.  imper.  fem.  for  "^X'^nrj, 
§  62.  2. 

3.  The  vowel  following  X  is  in  a  few  instances  given  to  a  preceding 
vowelless  consonant,  and  the  X  becomes  otiant  or  quiescent,  §  57.  2  (3), 
Xrij  Ps.  139:  20  for  sji^J,  xri'S'i  Jer.  10:  5  for  ^ixbr,  ^IX"!-:  imp.  for  ixn-;, 
Xs'i  Eccles.  10:  5  Kal  part.  fem.  for  Six:?'-;,  b^nbh  1  Sam.  14:  33  for  ti'^X-jn, 
nX'Hia  Neh.  6:  8  Kal  part,  with  suf.  for  CXiia,  !|XD"13  Ezek.  47:  8  for  ^i<Q-i3; 
and,  on  the  contrary,  quiescent  X  attracts  to  itself  the  vowel  of  the  pre- 
ceding consonant  in  'k''^^  Ex.  2:  20  Kal  imp.  for  MJX'np  and  iirxis  Cant. 
3:  11  for  riDxk  from  Xsr 

4.  Final  X  resumes  its  consonantal  character  upon  the  addition  of 
suffixes  ix'1'3 ,  receiving  (..)  before  Tj ,  C5  and  13 ,  in  consequence  of  which 
a  previous  Tsere  or  Sh'va  is  converted  into  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  7]Xb3,  TjX3il3, 
rjx;iin,  ?|Xnsn,  r^-^r\-g  Pi,  inf.,  tsixri?,  dixisb  Kal  inf.  for  n=x:i'3,  §  61. 1.  c. 

5.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  mostly  retained  before  suffixes  and  para- 
gogic  n,  TiXis^-^,  nxs-i  Ps.  41:  5,  nx-ipxi  1  Sam.  28:  15,  but  nx253  Isa. 
56;  12.  Tsere  is  rejected  nx:i£X  Neh.  2:  13,  2  Chron.  1:  10,  or  retained  only 
in  pause  !nx:i  Judg.  9:  29. 

§  167.  1.  He  is,  in  a  few  instances,  substituted  for  X,  i'ih"}  Ps.  60:  4  for 
ft^'O"},  '^?7v'.  Jer.  19:  11  for  XS'nn,  fiC?  Ps.  4:  7  for  xi3,  §  3.  1.  a,  tizm  Jer. 
49:  10  for  xiriS,  nhnn  1  Kin.  22:  25,  2  Kin.  7:  12  for  xhnn,  n'f?";  Job 
8:  21  for  xlp^. 

2.  Sometimes  X  remains,  but  the  vowels  are  those  of  il"h  forms,  "'PiX^S 
Ps.  119:  101   for  ^X^?,   ><'r=."  Eccl.  8:  12,  9:  18,  Isa.  65:  20  for  xi:'n,   xi:: 

1  Sam.  22:  2,  Isa.  24:  2,  xitlD  Eccl.  7:  26,  X'i-3  1  Kin.  9:  11,  Am.  4:2  Pi. 
pret.  for   X">a3,   XS^  Ps.  143:  3   for   X3n,    x|p  Jer.  51:  34   for   X:ri,   T'^S'n 

2  Kin.  2:  21  for  T»<l?"^.  ^^i^kl  Jer.  51:  9  for  13xa'l,  "XaS'^  Job  39:  24  for 
-X»5i,  X^Sn  Deut.  28:  59  Hiph.  pret.  for  X"i!3Eri,  xkio  Ps.  135:  7  Hiph. 
part,  const,  for  X^kia  from  xk'J;  to  which  may  be  added  iiS'^X'yari  Ezek. 
23:  49,  nj-^xiaan  Jer.  50:  20,  with  "^  inserted  as  in  n"b  verbs. 


§168-170  LA3IEDH  HE  VEKBS.  187 

3.  Sometimes  the  tn'^  form  is  adopted  both  in  consonants  and  vowels, 
i3t3  Ezek.  28:  16  for  ^ixbo,  fl^S  1  Sam.  6:  10,  rr:  Ezek.  39:  26,  ^srVs  1  Sam. 
25:  33  for  ''?ri<b3,  ni^  Ruth  2:  9  for  nx^:i ,  riSzi  Gen.  23:  6  for  N^O"^ , 
n:-E"in  Job  5:  18  for  <i2SQ-}n  comp.  Jer.  8:  11,  51 :  9,  2  Kin.  2:  22,  :i^p 
Jer.  25:  27  is  2  pi.  imp.  of  xip,  "■^'h  Ps.  32:  1  for  xri:,  r.'^ki  Jer.  26:  9  for 
rsb,  r"^23rri  i  Sam.  lO:  6,  riiiDrn  l  Sam.  lO:  13,  ^n-':i"an  2  Sam.  3:  8, 
n-^r::  Isa.  29:  7  for  ti'^xril;  nip^  Ezek.  8:  3  is  by  some  interpreters  thought 
to  be  for  i<''3p^  provohivg  to  jealousy,  and  by  others  explained  in  the  sense 
of  the  n"b  verb  selling  (Israel  to  their  foes). 

§  168.  1.  The  3  fem.  preterite  has  the  old  ending  n^,  §  86.  h.  in  l^it'Jn 
Ex.  5:  16  for  tix-jn,  nxnp  Deut.  31:  29,  Isa.  7:  14,  Jer.  44:  23,  rxLl  Gen. 
33:  11  Hoph.  ivom  xia,  rxisB?  Ps.  118:  23  (n^<^s:  Deut.  30:  11  is  \he  fe- 
minine participle),  to  which  the  customary  ending  n^  is  further  added  in 
nrsbE?  2  Sam.  1:  26,  tirxanri  Josh.  6:  17  for  nN-^irn. 

2.  A  feminine  termination  n  ,  H,  or  as  in  n'b  verbs  W,  is  occasionally 
added  to  the  construct  infinitive,  e.  g.  Kal,  i^^T-?,  "^XTi  f^^^'^ri  "^'^P  irora. 
X~ip  to  meet,  distinguished  from  X^p  and  nx'ip  Judg.  8 :  1  from  X^p  to 
call,  rxi'?  and  n-X^i-o  never  x3'2,  rxib  Prov.  8:  13,  with  suf.  irx-jn  Ezek. 
33:  12.  Niphal,  "irxarn  Zech.  13:  4.  Piel,  nxfri  and  n|-3,  'inx-p  2  Sam. 
21:2;  niX'Ja^  Ezek.  17:  9  is  a  Kal  inf.  const.,  formed  as  in  Chaldee  by  pre- 
fixing "O. 

3.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  Niphal  infinitive  absolute,  X'ip? 
2  Sam.  1:  6  and  X'katl  Ex.  22:  3:  the  analogy  of  the  former  has  been  re- 
tained in  the  paradigm  for  the  sake  of  distinction  from  the  construct.  Piel 
infinitive  absolute:  N:p,  Nsn,  X^a.    Hiphil  inf.  abs.:  xisn,  N'rn. 

4.  The  Hiphil  future  with  Vav  consecutive  commonly  has  Tsere  in  the 
ultimate,  though  Hhirik  also  occurs  xnpni ,  Np^n ,  X'jn^l ,  xann.l ,  xii'l  and 
xiji'l,  xi-l,  once  X-i?*!  Ezek.  40:  3,  and  once  X^hl^n  Neh.  8:  2. 

5.  Kamets  sometimes  occurs  in  the  ultimate  of  the  Hithpael  future, 
X-.g?:-'^  Num.  23:  24  but  ^'^TTT}  Ezek.  29:  15,  so  5<t:rir^,  i<^'4'\,  5<|Enn, 
:  "l^X^^r.'i. ;  more  rarely  in  the  preterite,  fiX^aLiln. 

§  169.   1.   The  folloAving  are  the  only  Pual  forms  which  occur.     Pret.: 

'iXSi,  >iX3n,   xVp.     Put.:  NSii.     Part.:   xsn^,  nxr-j^,  tjiNsnia,  C\yrD'2, 
rixrjo,  with  suf.  •^xnpo. 

2.  The  following  are  the  only  Hophal  forms:  Pret.  'lX3f7f7,  !^X:^in, 
xitin,  nshn,  nrxin,  iiiir^n.    rut.:  xhi"^,  ixz^ii.    Part.:  xh^i^,  rxi^^. 

3.  For  the  anomalous  forms,  nrxidn  Deut.  33:  16,  i^rx'ian  Job  22:  21, 
Pxin  1  Sam.  25:  34  (K'thibh  "^rxan),  see  §  88  (sing.  3  fem.). 

Lamedh  He  (tl"b)  Verbs. 

§  170.  In  these  verbs  the  third  radical,  which  is  Todh 
or  Vav,  does  not  appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except 


188  ETYMOLOGY.  §  171 

in  tlie  Kal  passive  participle,  e.  g.  ''^^S;  in  all  other  cases 
it  is  rejected  or  softened,  the  resultmg  vowel  termination 
being  usually  expressed  by  the  letter  n,  §  11.  1.  a. 

In  the  various  j)reterites  H  stands  for  the  vowel  a, 
and  is  hence  pointed  n^. 

In  the  futures  and  participles  it  stands  for  e,  and  is 
pointed  n  . 

In  the  imperatives  it  stands  for  e,  and  is  pointed  H... 

In  the  absolute  infinitives  it  stands  for  o  or  e;  in  the 
Kal  it  is  pointed  IT,  in  the  Hiphil  and  Hophal  tl.;  in  the 
x'^iphal  and  Piel  H  *  or  n„.  There  are  no  examples  in  Pual 
and  Hithpael. 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  T\\ 

a.  In  this  class  of  verbs  the  Yodh  forms  have  almost  entirely  super- 
seded those  with  Vav.  The  latter  are  confined  to  the  construct  infinitive 
where  ni,  occurring  in  all  the  species,  is  best  explained  by  assuming  1  to 
be  radical  (comp.  ^ij^t^  Ezek.  28:  17  as  an  alternate  of  riix"))  and  to  a  few 
other  sporadic  cases,  viz.:  a  single  Kal  preterite,  "^ri'^lU  Job  3:  25,  the  re- 
duplicated foi-ms  of  three  verbs,  f^Js5,  ''iniJp,  STinriar!,  and  the  peculiar 
form,  "i^'^X  Isa.  16:  9. 

h.  In  the  Kal  preterite,  Yodh  is  rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  vowel 
Pattahh,  §  57.  2.  (5),  which  is  then  prolonged  to  Kamets  in  the  simple 
syllable,  fiBj  for  ""By.  As  Pattahh  is  likewise  the  regular  vowel  of  the  ulti- 
mate in  the  preterites  of  Niphal  and  Hophal,  and  besides  was  so  originally 
in  all  the  active  species,  as  is  shown  by  the  Arabic  §  82.  5.  h  (3),  the  final 
Kamets  of  these  species  may  be  similarly  explained.  Yodh  is  in  like  manner 
rejected  after  the  heterogeneous  Hholem  of  certain  infinitives,  while  it 
leaves  the  homogeneous  Tsere  of  fibers  unmodified. 

c.  The  futures,  imperatives,  and  participles  of  certain  of  the  species, 
(including  the  Hiphil  as  shown  by  some  of  its  inflections)  have  e  (Arabic  t) 
as  the  normal  vowel  of  their  ultimate;  in  this  Yodh  can  quiesce,  leaving 
it  unchanged.  Those  of  the  other  species  have  or  may  have  a  in  the  ulti- 
mate; this,  combined  with  the  i  latent  in  '',  will  again  form  e.  In  the 
future  this  becomes  ^  (  )  in  distinction  from  the  ending  e  (_)  of  the  more 
energetic  imperative;  and  the  absolute  is  distinguished  from  the  construct 
state  of  the  participle  in  the  same  way. 

§  171.  1.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a 
vowel  the  last  radical  is  occasionally  retained  as "',  particu- 
larly in  prolonged  or  pausal  forms,  H^Dm,  ^^CH,  I'j'l'Cn^.;  it 
is,  however,  commonly  rejected  and  its  vowel  given  to 


i 


^5  172,  173         LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  189 

the  antecedent  consonant,  ^^j  for  ^^b3,  '^br.n  for  ^^^bjp;  so 
in  the  preterite  3  fern.,  which  in  these  verbs  retains  the 
primary  characteristic  T\^,  §  86.  &,  n^S  for  H^b^,  to  which 
is  further  appended  the  softened  ending  H  ,  thus  Hrby, 
in  pause  Hrbs. 

■"-  Tat  t 

a.  The  rt  of  the  3  fem.  pret.  is  frequently  explained  as  a  second  fem- 
inine ending  added  -after  the  first  had  lost  its  significance  in  the  popular 
cuusciousne>s.  It  might,  perhaps  with  equal  propriety,  be  regarded  as 
paragogically  appended,  §  61.  6,  comp.  such  nouns  as  nrrT^i,  !^~^':?. 
iir^"^J<,  in  order  to  jjroduce  a  softer  termination  and  one  more  conformed 
to  that  which  obtains  in  the  generality  of  verbs.  Nordheimer's  explanation 
of  the  M  as  hardened  from  ti,  Mp';y  for  nnbs,  labours  under  the  double 

'  T    :   T  T    ;   T   ' 

difficulty  that  there  is  neither  proof  nor  probability  for  the  assumption  that 
the  consonant  n  could  be  exchanged  for  n,  and  that  H  in  the  preterite  of 
these  verbs  is  not  a  radical  nor  even  a  consonant,  but  simply  the  represen- 
tative of  the  vowel  a. 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  third  radical  ■•  remains  but  is  softened  to  a  vowel,  so 
that  in  the  Kal  preterite  it  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  in  the 
Pual  and  Hophal  preterites  in  Tsere,  m  the  Niphal,  Piel, 
Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  preterites  in  either  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 
and  in  the  futures  and  imperatives  of  all  the  species  in 
Seghol,  n'bn,  ^n^b:.:,  n3^b:n. 

3.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose 
their  final  vowel  before  suf&xes,  e.  g.  "ibs,  Tjbj,  from  nbi, 
-■(!?;<';  from  nbzs^^,  '^brtn  from  nbrtn.  The  preterite  3  fem. 
takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  ^Hnba  or  ^nbs,  and  in  pause 

§  172.  The  Lamedh  He  verbs  will  be  represented  in 
Paradigm  XH  by  Jibs  to  uncover,  reveal,  which  is  used  in 
all  the  species. 

SHORTENED  FUTURE  AND  IMPERATIVE. 

§  173.  1.  The  final  vowel  n„  is  rejected  from  the 
futures  when  apocopated  or  when  preceded  by  Yav  con- 
secutive. The  concurrence  of  final  consonants  thence  re- 


190  ETYMOLOGY.  §  174 

suiting  in  the  Kal  and  Hipliil  is  commonly  relieved  by 
inserting  an  miaccented  Seghol  between  them,  §  61.  2. 
to  which  the  preceding  Pattahh  is  assimilated  in  the 
Hipliil,  §  63.  2.  a,  the  Hhirik  of  the  Kal  either  remain- 
ing unchanged  or  being  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple 
syllable. 

KAL.  NIPHAL.        PIEL.        HIPHIL.      HITHPAEL. 

Future.      T^T  Tby    nb";    nbr    n^.^ni 

Apoc.  Fut.      b:r  or  b^J;      b^^      bi":      b::^.      b^n^ 
vav  consec.  bz^^  or  b;j^i     b^^5     ^T^     VJ^^     b^n^i 

2.  The  final  vowel  H..  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g. 
Pi.  b5  for  n|5,  Hiph.  brjn  for  nb:,n,  Hith.  b'^m  for  uh}iT\r). 

Remaeks  on  Lamedh  He  Verbs. 

§  174.  1.  Kal  preterite:  The  third  person  feminine  rarely  occurs  with 
the  simple  ending  n^,  trbs  Lev.  25:  21,  n^n  2  Kin.  9:  37  K'thibh;  so  in 
the  Hiphil,  nx?n  Ezek.  24:  12,  r^in  Lev.  26:  34,  and  Hophal,  n^:!!  Jer. 
13:  19.  Yodh  is  occasionally  retained  before  asyllabic  affixes,  ri^bn  Ps. 
57 :  2,  the  on)}'  instance  in  which  the  feminine  has  the  ending  usual  in 
other  verbs,  rbn  Deut.  32:  37,  ri;  Ps.  73:  2  K'ri,  and  perhaps  ^''5'ii  Prov, 
26:  7,  see  §  141.  1;  so  in  the  imperative,  rnx,  sii^n  Isa.  21:  12;  future, 
',!i^33:,  ■|!i^^3':,  'I'l^w;.,  "yt'rsn^.,  l^^n'::":,  -(Si^an;;,  V??^V  "i^^-i^.  'i!|1T.'  '^''\'^^^ 
511ns;;,  Niphal  preterite,  l-b? ,  Piel  future,  "(^I'^'a^n,  ^i^^p?";,  Hipliil  future, 
'(SlisPl,  imperative,  rrn  for  ^"^nxn. 

2.  Infinitive:  Vav  is  sometimes  -written  for  the  final  vowel  of  the  in- 
finitive absolute  instead  of  n,  iia,  ijj,  'iirt,  inn,  in^,  ia^,  "iij?,  'iii'i,  irid, 
and  in  a  few  instances  the  feminine  termination  is  added,  m35< ,  nN^ ,  riind. 
There  are  also  examples  of  the  omission  of  this  termination  from  the  con- 
struct infinitive,  nir  and  fr?  (with  suf.  ^inby  Ex.  18:  18),  nj'p,  nx-l,  iriffl, 
once  it  has  the  form  <^j5<^  Ezek.  28:  17. 

3.  Future:  There  are  a  very  few  examples  of  Tsere  as  the  last  vowel 
of  the  future,  nx'r,  Dan.  1:  13,  nirn  Josh.  7:  9,  9:  24,  2  Sam.  13:  12, 
-r^y)7\  Jer.  17:  17;  so  in  the  Piel,  n|.5P  Lev.  18:  7  if.,  Nah.  1:3;  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  there  is  one  instance  of  an  imperative  ending  in  Seghol,  viz., 
the  Piel,  tiST  Judg.  9:  29.  The  radical  "^  remains  and  rests  in  Hhirik  in 
■^imT  (3  fem.)  Jer.  3:6,  in  the  Hiphil,  "^ri'iri  (2  masc.)  Jer.  18:  23,  and  in 
the  Kal  imperative,  "ihr;  (2  masc.)  Isa.  26:  20.  Yodh  appears  once  as  a 
consonant  before  a  suffix,  ''I'^rN;''"  Job  3:  25,  and  once  before  M  paragogic, 


§  175,  176     REMARKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.        191 

'""tS-?  ■'^^-  ^^=  ^'  "^"^'iiich  is  very  rare  in  these  verbs,  but  perhaps  displaces 
the  final  vowel  in  Myrx  Ps.  119:  117,  and  the  Hithpael,  nrnr?  Isa.  41:  23 
In  a  few  instances  "^  is  restored  as  a  quiescent  before  suffixes,  nr'n*"  Hos 
6:  2,  •'p?n  1  Kin.  20:  35,  in-'S?'^  Ps.  140:  10  K'ri,  nn-^XEX  Deut.  32:  26. 
Examples  of  the  feminine  plural:  nj'isan,  ri:!5-in,  'j'^nnm,  ni'^^rni,  nD"'b'P 
and  nsirrn,  ns-^x-ipi  Mic.  7:  10.    ■ 

4,  The  future  of  a  few  verbs  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav 
consecutive  simply  drops  its  last  vowel,  either  retaining  Hhirik  under  the 
personal  prefix  or  lengthening  it  to  Tsere,  nz\^,  2'i'.1,  "?h.  '^'^^'i,  MIT^, 
niU'l;  so  in  the  Pe  Nun  forms,  ri  and  ri,  a*;,  and  Pe  Yudh  q"''.n,  with 
Pattahh-furtive  under  the  first  radical  of  the  Pe  guttural,  'nn\  §  17.  1,  or 
the  vowel  of  the  personal  prefix  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  60.  1,  nx'1,  ifijl 
but  xn";,  5<";ri_1.  Most  commonly  Seghol  is  inserted  between  the  concurring 
consonants,  Tn'^,  '"i^,  bs^,  "npi,  h^\  and  hot,  y^i^^,  )ti\^  and  ■,Er.i,  ra^_,  •,;5';i, 

"li^'.L  ^l^h,  ^T-  ^"'^  ^v^-^'  ^T.5.  7'}^'^'  ^i''y  ^^.^^^  ^.%  or  Pattahh  if  one 
of  the  consonants  is  a  guttural,  §  61,  2;  thus,  in  Ayin  guttural  verbs,  r'rsi, 
•^?b^,  S-ni,  rnn,  in  Pe  guttural  'rpl  from  itm"^,  §  60.  1.  a.  (3),  -in^,  from 
•^ti"!^'  ^^  ^it^  the  additional  change  of  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  to  Pattahh, 
"'f^P?!!,  '"!?P  from  ntnn,  ytP^  from  r\:ir2>  "^^P?,  '^'A'H  Isa.  59:  17  (in  1  Sam. 
15:  19,  14:  32  K'ri,  this  same  form  is  from  UW  or  'l^'^V ,  §  159.  3),  by^l,  ]vii, 
Vyi\  The  rejection  of  the  final  vowel  takes  place  frequently  even  in  the 
first  person  singular,  which  in  other  verbs  is  commonly  exempt  from  short- 
ening, §  99.  3.  a,  "iSNi,  N^x,  nrNi,  ms,  -jx  (from  iib:),  brsi,  ",:-ni,  briti 
and  nirs'XV  In  a  few  instances  the  final  vowel  is  retained  in  other  persons 
after  Vav  consecutive,  e.  g.  f^h",'^_^  1  Kin.  16:  25,  fiyj^^  2  Km.  1:  10,  niin 
Josh.  19:  50,  n?::ri;!  l  Sam.  1:  9,  n^s;;^1  l  Kin.  16:  17,'nxn*:.  l  Sam.  17:42, 
^^.^  2  Kin.  6:  23,  "'^n  Deut.  32:  18  is  fut.  apoc.  of  ri^D  as  in]  or  ^'^■; 
ofhin. 

5.  The  passive  participle  drops  the  final  i  in  ^S}£  Job  15:  22  for  ''lE^i , 
liis  Job  41:  25  for  "^rr:? ,  and  fern.  plur.  mvj:  Isa.  3:  16  K'thibh  (K'ri  nii-j?), 
rrnbS  1  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh. 

§  175.  1.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  Yodh  may  quiesce  in  either  Tsere  or 
Uhirik,  though  the  former  is  more  frequent,  T^^fsl  and  ''ri''J5?,  T"^???  and 
«''l35D,  Dnp-J?  and  IS'^a^J?,  ^''^33  and  irlisD. 

2.  Examples  of  the  infinitive  absolute:  iTB:?,  nTS"!?,  n^sn.  Construct; 
riBsn  and  nip;?,  rr.zr:,  nix-n  and  nji'^n;  with  suiffixes,  'irbffn,  'iri'i-li"^', 
once  as  though  it  were  a  plui-al  noun,  cb'^riiljn  Ezek.  6 :  8,  so  the  Kal 
infin.,  Ti'iri^a  Ezek.  16:  31. 

3.  Future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  Isjn,  ri^jni,  ^BX", 
ynpi,  iri;n,  i<^;'1,  '^i?.'],  and  in  one  verb  with  Pattahh  before  ri,  n^'T  Gen. 
7:  23,  Ps.  109:  13,  though  Baer's  edition  omits  the  Daghesh-forte  in  the 
former  passage,  thus  making  it  a  Kal  future. 

§  176.  1.  Piel:  Two  verbs,  Jix:  to  be  becoming  and  nnij  to  draw  (the 
how),  having  a  guttural  for  their  second  radical,  double  the  third  mstear., 
which  in  the  reduplication  appears  as  Vav,  though  the  general  law  is  -o-C- 


192  ETYMOLOGY,  §  177 

hered  to  requiring  its  rejection  from  the  end  of  the  word  and  the  substitu- 
tion of  the  vowel  letter  ti.  The  only  forms  which  occur  are,  of  the  former, 
the  preterite  lnis3  Ps.  93:  6,  ^lixs  Cant.  1:  10,  Isa.  52:  7,  and  of  the  latter 
the  participle  plur.  constr.  "'.'iTO'a  Gen,  21:  16.  There  are  three  examples 
of  Hholem  inserted  after  the  first  radical,  §  92.  b,  ipibi^  Isa,  10:  13  from 
nb"c3,  the  ir  being  an  orthographic  equivalent  for  D,  §  3.  1.  a,  and  in  the 
infinitive,  "iih,  "inn  Isa,  69:  13. 

2.  In  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Piel  preterite  "^  sometimes  quiesces 
in  Tsere;  in  all  the  other  persons,  however,  and  even  in  the  first  singular, 
when  a  suffix  is  added,  it  invariably  quiesces  in  Hhirik,  "'n'^SJ  and  ''ri'^l^, 

3.  Infinitive  absolute:  ri-lp  and  n^p,  n|3,  tl^i,  nb,  'iah,  inh,  n'i'lS. 
The  construct  always  ends  in  til  with  the  exception  of  n|p  also  nils,  and 
''3'n  Hos,  6:  9. 

4.  Future:  in  T|!i.*''N  Isa.  16:  9  from  til'n,  the  second  radical  is  doubled 
as  •',  §  166.  1,  and  the  third  appears  as  1,  §  170.  a;  T^33i<  Ex.  33:  3  is  for 

^?=>?.  §  63,  1.6.  With  Vav  consecutive:  bi";i,  bb-^l,  ob";^,  ik-^l,  Vi^^'T}^, 
'^yni,  so  in  the  first  person  singular,  '^^?,^,  '^?'v?,^i  once  Pattahh  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets,  in'^J  1  Sam.  21:  14;  so  in  pause,  :bjn  Prov.  25:  9. 

6.  The  imperative  has   Seghol  in  a  single  instance,   tisn  Judg.  8:  29 

aud  sometimes  drops  its  final  vowel  ^5,  bn,  "jP,  G3,  1^  and  n^S. 

6.  Pual  infinitive  construct  with  suffix:  inii^  Ps.  132:  1. 

§  177.  1.  Hiphil  preterite:  The  prefixed  f1  has  occasionally  Seghol, 
n"i;n  and  n^jifi,  riibn,  nnsn,  nk^n,  ^"^r^Jfiri.  Yodh  may  quiesce  in 
Hhirik  or  Tsere,  ri^i^^i,  "^r""]?-'?!,  J^'.^ir",  '^'/'^^r''  Yodh  once  remains  as  a 
quiescent  in  the  3  masc.  sing,,  ""^Hn  Isa.  63:  10,  and  once  in  the  3  masc. 
plur.,  rb^n  Josh.  14:  8  for  ^"'DTan,  §  62.  2. 

2,  The  infinitive  absolute  has  Kamets  in  l^3"li^  by  way  of  distinction 
from  ni"iti  and  ^3"!^'  Jer,  42:  2,  which  are  always  used  adverbially.  Con- 
struct: The  prefixed  ti  has  Hhirik  in  one  instance,  nisprt  Lev.  14:  43; 
nirn?  2  Kin.  19:  25  K'thibh  is  for  nisi^n^. 

3,  The  future,  when  apocopated  or  preceded  by  Vav  consecutive,  some- 
times simply  rejects  its  final  vowel,  PiE^i,  HTfl^,  'n'l^,  piT^l ,  "ii'1  from  nn;, 
t^r  from  iih,  'c^)  from  ni:3 ,  ~^1  from  nbs;  commonly,  however,  Seghol  is 
inserted  between  the  concurring  consonants,  bx^T  from  i^bx,  §  111,  2.  a, 
^5!!!!)  '}hf  0^^^.  ^?J!}L  ">?!!].  ^"!'.!!>  ^Z^^  o""  Pattahh  if  one  of  the  consonants 
is  a  guttural,  "iH^I,  n^Pi,  by^D,  3!n-;;i.  Occasionally  the  final  vowel  remains, 
i-^V^'i  1  Kin.  16:  17,  18:  42,  ^i'^ni  Ezek,  23:  19,  once  the  radical  "^  appears 
quiescing  in  Hhirik,  inpn  (2  masc.  apoc.  for  nrip)  Jer.  18:  23,  The  reten- 
tion or  rejection  of  the  vowel  is  optional  in  the  first  person  singular, 
ninxi,  nf^rxi,  nsxj  and  "x;;  from  n:D,  brit;,  ::x  from  nijj. 

4,  The  imperative  is  sometimes  abbreviated,  nk'ntt  and  3'nn  nfe'iti  and 
Cl'?!^,    ^t^"   for   ri^Vii,   n-jn  and   ::n,   nsn  and  Tjri;   SJ^an    (acctut  on  the 


§  178,  179        KEMARKS  ON  LAMEDH  HE  VERBS.  193 

ultimate)  Ps.  39:  14  is  for  Mi;"l"ti,  the  same  word  Isa.  6:  9  i«  from  5rr, 
§  140.  5. 

5.  Hophal  infinitive  absolute:  il^sn  Lev.  19:  20. 

§  178.  1.  Hithpael:  One  verb  nn;y  reduplicates  its  third  radical,  which 
appears  as  1,  nirnrri  to  worship,  fat.  t^ini!?"'^""! ,  with  Vav  conv.  irnr'l  for 
1"^''^'-'  §  ^^-  2>  P^""^-  ^''tl^l"^"';! .  infin.  ^T:^'^^,  and  once  with  suf.  T'^linnrn 
2  Kin.  5:  18,  the  accent  being  thrown  back  by  a  following  monosyllable. 
For  the  inflected  participle,  triinnc^  Ezek.  8:  16,  see  §  90,  page  126. 

2.  In  the  preterite  "^  mostly  quiesces  in  Tsere  in  the  first  person  singu- 
lar,  and  in   Hhirik  in  the  other  persons,   in^^lNnrj,    iriijnnrri,    r'^inw^'?? 

^t'"^i'n?''pr'.  J;!"'??r?'7,  f^'^Btif???!  r^''i>r''7,  f^ip^yn. 

3.  The  future  apocopated  and  with  Vav  consecutive:  ^^r,"^!,  Dsr.'l, 
^nrPi,  hyrn,  rVFi,  rnrn,  or  with  Kamets  in  the  accented  syUable,  li$n*j, 
"lanri,  so  always  in  pause,  ^nn'l,  iDSnPiT  Gen.  24:  65. 

4.  The  shortened  imperative:  ^isrirt,  innri. 

§  179.  1.  ii'l'n  to  be,  fut.  n^n;;,  Hhirik  being  retained  before  the  guttural 
under  the  influence  of  the  following  Yodh,  whence  the  Sh'va,  though  vocal, 
remains  simple;  so  in  the  inf.  const,  with  prep,  ri'^'ria,  ni^nb,  ri'^fi^,  though 
without  a  prefix  it  is  Tfl"'!!,  once  M'jri  Ezek.  21:  15.  The  apocopated  future 
^■^■]  (in  pause  %"i;!)  and  with  Vav  consecutive  ''nil,  is  for  in^,  and  "fin  Nali. 
3:  11  is  apoc.  2  fern.  sing,  for  "'"iiPl,  the  vowel  of  the  prefix  returning  to 
the  Sh'va  from  which  it  arose,  §  85.  2.  a  (1),  when  the  quiescence  of  the 
middle  radical  gives  a  vowel  to  the  first.  The  same  thing  occurs  in  the 
peculiar  form  of  the  future  N^ini  Eccl.  11:  3,  where  the  second  radical  ap- 
pears as  1,  which  it  sometimes  does  in  the  imperative,  n^li  and  fi\n  Gen. 
27:  29  or  N.-iri  Job  37:  6,  and  in  the  participle  riin  Neh.  6:  6,  Eccl.  2:  22, 
fern,  njin  Ex.  9:3. 

2.  frn  to  live.  The  root  i^n  is  usually  inflected  as  a  Lamedh  He  verb 
pret.  d^n,  fut.  ii^rii,  apoc.  ^ni,  with  Vav  consecutive  "'n';'!,  though  in  the 
preterite  3  masc.  it  occasionally  takes  an  Ayin  doubled  form,  "n,  e.  g.  Gen. 
3:  22,  5:5,  and  once  in  the  3  fem.  an  Ayin  Yodh  form  !n"n  Ex.  1:  16,  or  it 
may  be  explained  as  an  Ayin  doubled  form  with  Daghesh-forte  omitted,  §  25. 

3.  In  a  few  instances  5<  is  substituted  for  the  third  radical  in  Lamedh 
He  verbs,  irxii-i  Ezek.  43:  27,  xrx  Isa.  21:  12,  Xr3  Jer.  23:  39,  xi"^' 
2  Chron.  26:  15,  nzn  Prov,  1:  10  from  ni:X,  KP'l  Deut.  33:  21  from  nrx, 
^^J^ii!!!!  2  Chron.  16:  12,  Nrr^  Lam.  4:  1,  w^rr  2  Kin.  25:  29,  xrr";  Eccl.  8:  1, 
Ciixbn  2  Sam.  21:  12  K'ri  for  n^lbn,  a-S'bri  Hos.  11:  7,  Dear.  28:  66  for 
C'^.^bri,  §  56.  4,  D'^Xnijan  !ix-i'1  2  Sam.  11:  24  from  nni;  the  vowels  are 
those  of  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  in  IJPX  Jer.  3:  22  for  >irrx,  fOZT\  1  Kin. 
17:  14  for  n3=Pi,  nnpi  Dan.  10:  14  for  ri^'PI;  and  the  full  Lamedh  Aleph 
fonn  is  adopted  in  X'^^S^  Hos.  13:  15  for  nns^. 


13 


194  etymology.  §  180,  181 

Doubly  Impeefect  "V^kbs. 

§  180.  Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the 
root,  or  which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two 
different  classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit 
the  peculiarities  of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or 
limit  one  another.  Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  ^"3  and 
n"b  will  follow  the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former 
in  its  initial  and  the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in 
verbs  which  are  both  Y'>'  and  ti'b  the  1  is  invariably 
treated  as  a  perfect  consonant,  and  the  n"b  pecuharities 
alone  preserved.  All  such  cases  have  been  remarked  upon 
individually  under  the  several  classes  of  verbs  to  which 
they  respectively  belong. 

Defective  "ViiEBS. 

§  181.  1.  It  has  been  seen  in  repeated  instances  in  the 
foregoing  pages  that  verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  im- 
perfect verbs  may  occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another 
and  closely  related  class.  Thus  a  H"b  verb  may  appear 
with  a  T^''^  form,  or  an  i'$  verb  with  an  >'"3?  form  or  vice 
versa.  The  occurrence  of  an  individual  example,  or  of  a 
few  examples  of  such  divergent  forms,  may  be  explained 
in  the  manner  just  suggested  without  the  assumption  of 
an  additional  verb  as  their  source.  Sometimes,  however, 
the  number  of  divergent  forms  is  so  considerable,  or  the 
divergence  itself  so  wide,  that  it  is  simpler  to  assume  two 
co-existent  roots  of  the  same  signification,  and  differing 
only  in  the  weak  letter  which  they  contain,  than  to  refer 
all  to  a  single  root. 

a.  Thus,  nBs  means  to  shut  up  or  restrain,  and  n53  to  be  finished:  yet 
a  few  ii"b  forms  occur  in  the  sense  not  of  the  latter  but  of  the  former  verb. 
They  are  accordingly  held  to  be  from  N^3,  but  assimilated  in  inflection  to 
the  n  "b  paradigm.  On  the  other  hand,  N^;^  means  to  call,  and  nn|5  to 
meet;  but  so  many  x'b  forms  are  found  with  this  latter  signification  that. 


§182  QUADRILITEEAL  VERBS.  195 

it  seems  necessary  to  assume  a  second  root  K^p  having  that  meaning.  Th« 
verb  to  run  is  ordinarily  yvi;  but  t<i:in  Ezek.  1:  14  is  too  remote  from  an 
1  5  form  to  be  referred  to  that  root;  hence  it  is  traced  to  another  verb 
X3"^  of  the  same  sense.  No  clear  line  of  distinction  can  be  drawn  between 
the  cases  in  which  divergent  forms  are  to  be  traced  to  a  single  root,  and 
those  in  which  the  assumption  of  a  second  is  admissible  or  necessary.  This 
must  be  decided  in  detail,  and  the  best  authorities  not  infrequently  differ 
in  their  judgment  of  particular  examples. 

2.  "WTiere  two  verbs  exist  which  are  thus  radically 
connected  and  identical  in  signification,  it  not  infrequently 
happens  that  they  are  defective  or  mutually  supple- 
mentary, that  is  to  say,  that  one  of  them  is  in  usage  re- 
stricted to  certain  parts  or  species,  the  remainder  being 
supplied  by  the  other. 

a.  The  following  are  examples  of  defective  verbs:  Sii:  to  be  good,  used 
in  the  Kal  species  only  in  the  preterite,  the  corresponding  future  is  from 
si:^;  "ij;^  Kal  pret.  to  fear,  the  fut.  and  imper.  from  "115>;  pni  Kal  pret.  and 
inf.  to  spit,  fut.  from  PPI);  yss  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  break  or  disperse,  fut. 
and  imp.  from  y^S;  SpJ  Kal  pret.  to  be  alienated,  fut.  from  Sjb^;  tiyr  Kal 
pret.  to  be  a  prince,  fut.  from  "iTU;  2h"i  Kal  pret.  and  inf.  to  be  many,  fut. 
from  nr"i  which  is  used  thi'oughout  the  species;  Oni  Kal  fut.  to  be  hot, 
pret.  and  inf.  from  D^n,  which  is  also  used  in  the  future;  "J'?^  to  counsel, 
borrows  its  Kal  imper.  from  "J'W;  ]'p^  Kal  fut.  to  aivake,  pret.  from  the 
Hiphil  of  "j'lp,  which  is  also  used  in  inf.  imper.  and  fut.;  2^3  to  place,  the 
reflexive  is  expressed  by  SS^rri  from  sk^;  I'ih'ii  to  drink,  the  causative  is 
npian  from  npia;  la'^hin  from  ;yhi  is  used  as  the  causative  of  013  to  be 
ashamed,  as  well  as  t3">3ri;  T\?r\  to  go,  derives  many  of  its  forms  from  T|?^; 
an"'  to  give,  is  only  used  in  the  Kal  imperative,  it  is  supplemented  by  "(i^j 
of  totally  distinct  radicals. 

QUADEILITEEAL  YeRBS. 

§  182.  Quadrihteral  verbs  are  either  primitives  formed 
from  quadrihteral  roots,  whose  origin  is  explained,  §  68.  a, 
or  denominatives,  the  formative  letter  of  the  noun  or  ad- 
jective being  admitted  into  the  stem  along  with  the  three 
original  radicals.  The  former  class  adopt  the  vowels  and 
inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual  species,  while  the  latter 
foUow  the  Hiphil. 

a.  The  only  examples  of  quadrihteral  verbs  are  the  following,  viz.. 
Piel  pret.  Ta"iS  he  spread.  Job  26:  9,    where  the  original  Pattahh  of  the 

13* 


196  ETYMOLOGY.  §  183 

initial  syllable  of  the  Piel,  §  82.  5.  h  (3),  is  preserved;  fut.  with  suf.  tistp"]?'^ 
he  shall  tvaste  it,  Ps.  80:  14.  Pual  pret.  TTE'-;"!  it  freshened,  Job  33:  25,  the 
Methegh  and  the  Hhateph  Pattahh  being  used  to  indicate  that  the  Sh'va 
is  vocal,  and  that  the  form  is  equivalent  to  t^EIpti;  part.  Cspnp  scaled  off 
or  resemblitig  scales,  Ex.  16:  14,  l3in"iD?3  clothed,  i  Chron.  15:  27.  Hiphil 
pret.  ^n-iiyxn  the^/  stank,  Isa.  19:  6  for  ^iniiixri  as  ^'f^y,}.  for  !T^^:SD,  derived 
from  njTX  putrescent,  which  is  simpler  than  to  make  it  with  G*«enius  a 
double  or  anomalous  Hiphil  from.  niiT,  §  94.  a,  comp.  Alexander  in  loc; 
fut.  rt-'i<T:'rN  I  will  turn  to  the  left,  Gen.  13:  9;  ^b-iik-abri  Isa.  30:  21,  part. 
cBiNlS'irp  1  Chron.  12:  2  from  bxrb  the  left  hand,  elsewhere  reduced  to  a 
triliteral  by  the  rejection  of  X,  ^"^^'wtib  2  Sam.  14:  19,  "'b'^b'^n  Ezek.  21:  21. 
To  these  may  be  added  the  form,  which  occurs  several  times  in  the  K'thibh 
Biia::n?3  1  Chron.  15:  24,  etc.,  and  Di-i-i:ino  2  Chron.  5:  12,  for  which  the 
K'ri  substitutes  Ci''"»ir:p  or  D^n^in^.  As  it  is  a  denominative  from  !Tn::ijn  a 
trumpet,  it  has  been  suspected  that  the  form  first  mentioned  should  be 
pointed  d^iriSTOj  the  other,  if  a  genuine  reading,  is  probably  to  be  read 
Din"i:ina. 


Nouns. 

THEIR  POEMATiON  (See  Paradigm  XIII). 

§  183.  Nouns,  embracing  adjectives  and  participles 
as  well  as  substantives,  may  be  primitive,  i.  e.  formed 
directly  from  their  ultimate  roots,  or  derivative,  i.  e.  formed 
from  preexisting  words.  Those  which  are  derived  from 
verbs  are  called  verbals;  those  which  are  derived  from 
nouns  are  called  denominatives.  The  vast  multiplicity  of 
objects  to  which  names  were  to  be  applied  and  the  di- 
versity of  aspects  under  which  they  are  capable  of  being 
contemplated,  have  led  to  a  variety  in  the  constitution 
of  nouns  greatly  exceeding  that  of  verbs,  and  also  to  con- 
siderable laxity  in  the  significations  attached  to  indivi- 
dual forms.  But  whatever  complexity  may  beset  the  de- 
tails of  this  subject,  its  mam  outlines  are  sufficiently  plain. 
'All  nouns  are,  in  respect  to  their  formation,  reducible  to 
certain  leading  types  or  classes  of  forms,  each  having  a 
primary  and  proper  import  of  its  own.  The  derivation 
of  nouns,  as  of  the  verbal  species,  from  their  respective 
roots  and  themes  calls  into  requisition  aU  the  expedients, 


§184  FORMATION  OP  NOUNS.  197 

whether  of  internal  or  external  changes,  known  to  the 
language,  §  69.  Hence  arise  four  classes  of  nouns  accord- 
ing as  they  are  formed  by  internal  changes,  viz.: 

1.  The  introduction  of  one  or  more  vowels. 

2.  The  reduplication  of  one  or  more  of  the  letters  of 
the  root.    Or  by  external  changes,  viz.: 

3.  The  prefixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  root. 

4.  The  affixing  of  vowels  or  consonants  at  the  end. 

a.  The  mass  of  nouns  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitives  and  not  as  de- 
rived from  their  cognate  verbs.  Many  roots  are  represented  by  nouns 
alone,  without  any  verbs  from  which  they  could  have  sprung,  e.  g.  -X 
father,  y^k  earth.  And  where  verbs  of  kindred  meaning  do  exist,  it  is 
probable  that  they  are  not  the  source  or  theme  of  the  nouns,  but  that 
both  spring  aUke  directly  from  their  common  root,  as  T\?'0  to  reign,  and 
~5b  kivff  from  the  root  "jb^s.  Since,  however,  these  roots  or  elemental 
themes  are  destitute  of  vowels,  and  consequently  are  incapable  of  being 
pronounced  in  their  primitive  or  abstract  state,  it  is  customary  and  con- 
venient in  referring  to  them  to  name  the  verb  which  though  a  derivative 
form  has  the  advantage  of  simplicity  and  regularity  of  structure,  and  is 
often  the  best  representative  of  the  radical  signification.  Accordingly,  Tisb 
kivg  may  be  said  to  be  derived  from  the  root  T|^T3  to  reign,  that  is,  it  is 
derived  from  the  root  ~^^  of  which  that  verbal  form  is  the  conventional 
designation,  §  68. 

b.  Infinitives,  participles,  nouns  which  follow  the  forms  of  the  secon- 
dary or  derived  species,  §  189.  2.  a,  and  some  others,  are  evidently  verbals. 
Most  nouns  of  the  fourth  class,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  denominatives. 

Class  I. — Nouns  formed  by  the  insertion  of  vowels. 

§  184.  The  first  class  of  nouns,  or  those  which  are 
formed  by  means  of  vowels  given  to  the  root,  embraces 
three  distinct  forms,  viz.: 

1.  Monosyllables,  or  those  in  which  the  trihteral  root 
receives  but  one  vowel. 

2.  Dissyllables,  in  which  the  second  is  the  principal 
vowel  and  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere. 

3.  Dissyllables,  in  which  the  first  is  the  pnncipal 
vowel  and  ^he  second  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere. 


198  ETYMOLOGY.  §  185,  186 

1.  Triliteral  Monosyllables. 

§  185.  The  formative  vowel  may  be  given  either  to 
the  second  radical  bt:jp,  b'bp,  bibp,  b^bp,  or  to  the  first, 
btpp,  bpp,  bpp;  in  the  latter  case  an  unaccented  Seghol 
is  commonly  interposed  between  the  concurring  con- 
sonants, §  61.2,  to  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  assimilated, 
§  63.  2.  a,  bpp,  bpp,,  bt:p.  Forms  thus  augmented  by  the 
introduction  of  an  auxiliary  vowel  are  termed  Segholates. 

a.  In  this  and  the  following  sections  bap  is  used  as  a  repi-esentative 
root  in  order  more  conveniently  to  indicate  to  the  eye  the  formation  of  the 
different  classes  of  nouns.  No  root  could  be  selected  which  would  afford 
examples  in  actual  use  of  the  entire  series  of  derivative  forms ;  b::p  has  but 
one  derivative  h'^p,  slaugliter,  and  this  only  occurs  in  Obad,  ver.  9. 

h.  As  ?,  0  and  u  rarely  or  never  occur  in  mixed  accented  syllables, 
§  19,  they  are  excluded  from  monosyllabic  nouns.  Every  other  vowel  is, 
however,  found  with  the  second  radical,  thus  a,  ui'p  a  little  prop,  paucity, 
TTS'i  honey,  l^a  man;  a,  b^x  strength,  2nsi  writing,  is'j  residue;  e,  D:ij 
shoulder,  'ni'oHiush;  e,  bb"!  howling,  2X3  grief,  zk]  a  icolf;  especially  i,  o, 
and  u,  which  occur  with  greater  frequency  than  any  others.  When  the 
first  radical  receives  the  vowel,  I  and  u  are  likewise  excluded,  in  as  much 
as  they  rarely  or  never  stand  before  concurrent  consonants,  §  61.  4.  Few 
of  these  nouns  remain  without  the  auxiliary  Seghol  X';«  a  valley,  NIJ^ 
vanity,  Xlin  'sin,  'n'la  spikenard,  p'rp  truth.  Kamets  is  only  found  before 
Vav,  §  63.  2.  a,  Ts'fo,  and  in  pause,  §  65,  "i^S,  tro. 

c.  When  the  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  there  is  a  concurrence 
of  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  is  sometimes  relieved 
by  prefixing  X,  §  53.  1.  a,  with  a  short  vowel,  mostly  e,  §  60.  1.  a  (5),  but 
occasionally  a,  ra^ix  finger  for  sh'S,  aiox  lattice,  liisx  belt,  Si'i'iX  and  si-iT 
arm,  ^'i^rx  and  bi^n  yesterday, 

§  186.  These  nouns,  standing  at  the  first  remove  from 
the  root,  express  as  nearly  as  possible  its  simple  idea 
either  abstractly,  e.  g.  b^by;  emptiness,  biiiT  bereavement, 
T^TSJ.  strength,  p"i:  righteousness,  ^Ti?  help,  b  j'a  greatness,  or 
as  it  is  realized  in  some  person  or  object  which  may  be 
regarded  as  its  embodiment  or  representative,  ^^ns  lord 
from  "^is  to  he  mighty,  "diix  man  from  iriij  to  be  sick,  b^z2 
boundary,  T]Dp  libation  prop,  pouring  out,  p!a?  valley  prop. 
depth,  Y'^n  vinegar  prop,  sourness. 

a.   That  the  position  of  the  formative  vowel  before  or  after  the  second 


§186 


FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  199 


radical  does  not  materially  affect  the  character  of  the  form,  appears  from 
the  following  considerations:  (1.)  The  sameness  of  signification  already 
exhibited,  and  which  may  be  verified  in  detail.  (2.)  The  occasional  ap- 
pearance of  the  same  word  in  both  forms,  e.  g.  ^Sa  and  "iS5  man,  yj3  ^^^ 
vb;  plant,  iCpb  and  i<'^B>3  iMson,  "nin  and  "lilia  thumb,  roj'  and  rvv'j.':  bright- 
vess.  (3.)  The  concurrence  of  both  forms  in  the  Kal  construct  infinitive 
Vbp  and  r^Vi^i  §  87,  •'li::^^  and  cib'jp.  (4.)  The  fact  that  Segholates  may 
arise  alike' from  hbp  and  V-ri?,  §  61.  1.  b.  (5.)  The  cognate  languages; 
monosyllables  in  Arabic,  whose  vowel  precedes  the  second  radical,  answer 
to  those  whose  vowel  succeeds  the  same  radical  in  Aramaean,  and  both  to 
the  Hebrew  Segholates,  e.  g.  I^S  servant,  Aram.  ISS,  Arab.  *>--^. 

b.  The  presence  of  imperfect  letters  in  the  root  may  occasion  the  fol- 
lowing modifications: 

k's  roots.  Aleph,  as  a  first  radical,  sometimes  receives  a  long  vowel 
(J  instead  of  Sh'va  (.J,  §  60.  3.  c,  ',1-bs  fidelitt/  for  "(^ix,  liTX  girdle  for  "liTSt. 

3?  Guttural  and  b"  Guttural.  If  the  third  radical  be  a  guttural,  Pattahh 
is  substituted  for  the  auxiliary  Seghol,  §  61.  2,  n-J3  confidence,  VZ'^  hear- 
ing, n'zi  height ;  if  the  second  radical  be  a  guttural,  the  preceding  vowel  if 
Hholem  remains  unchanged,  otherwise  it  also  commonly  becomes  Pattahh 
^53  young  man,  X'ii  youth,  ins  fear  but  h^yk  tent,  nn3  bread. 

•I's  and  I's  roots.  A  vowelless  "^  or  3  is  in  a  few  instances  rejected  from 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  §  53.  2.  a,  b^iS  produce  for  b'lil':,  "I'D  familiarity 
for  Tib"^,  St'^b  elevation  for  K'^C?,  ''n  lamentation  for  "ins,  particularly  in 
feminines  and  secondary  derivatives;  thus,  rrari,  trnr,  Ti'SV,  T'J^t  drop  an 
mitial  Yodh,  and  t\yp,  "'^'^S  an  initial  Nun.  Nun  may  also  experience  as- 
nmilation  when  it  is  a  second  radical,  C]S  anger  for  ?i3X,  Dis  cup  for  CDS. 

^"s  and  ''"'S  roots.  In  Segholates  ":  is  preceded  by  Kamets  ^1^  (accord- 
ing to  Baer  \>'\b  in  Ezek.  28:  18)  wickedness,  ^'h  midst,  unless  the  last 
radical  is  a  guttural,  n;)^  space;  "^  is  preceded  by  Pattahh  and  folloAved  by 
Hhirik,  b";^  night,  'i.?  eye.  These  letters  frequently  give  up  their  conso- 
nantal character  and  become  quiescent,  §  57.  2.  Vav  is  rejected  in  a  few 
words  as  "^3  brand  for  "'is,  "'X  island  for  I'.X,  "^  watering  for  "'i";,  §  53.  3. 

ii"b  roots.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  proper  final  radical  is  rejected, 
as  it  is  in  verbs,  and  the  final  vowel  ^vritten  ti,  as  nio  bush,  nD3  weeping, 
njn  thought.  "When  "^  appears  as  the  radical,  it  prefers  the  form  "^ia  iveep- 
iiig,  "^"S  fruit,  "^33  vessel;  1  retains  its  consonantal  character  in  iro  winter, 
l3b  quail,  or  it  may  be  changed  to  its  cognate  vowel  ii,  which  combines 
with  the  preceding  a  to  form  o,  §  62.  1,  i"'^  (for  d'yarl)  ink,  "ixn  antelope. 
In  Segholates  1  quiesces  in  Shurek,  §  57.  2.  (4),  sinii:  swimming  for  in'i*, 
*in3  emptiness;  the  lexicon  of  Gesenius  contains  the  forms  nis  garment, 
1S:{^  eM(?,  I^ii:  security,  but  these  words  only  occur  in  the  plural  or  with 
suffixes,  and  the  absolute  singular  is  quite  as  likely  to  have  been  >l"ia,  isfs, 
fh^if  and  "i^an  may  similarly  be  referred  to  15n  cleft. 


200  ETYMOLOGY.  §  187 

2.   The  nunn  voivel  in  the  ultimate. 

§  187.  1.  The  second  form  of  this  class  is  a  dissyl- 
lable with  one  of  the  long  vowels  in  the  second  which  is 
its  principal  syllable,  and  in  the  first  a  pretonic  Kamets, 
for  which  Tsere  is  occasionally  substituted  when  the 
second  vowel  is  Kamets,  thus  bbjj  or  bbp,  bbj^,  b^'bjD, 
bibp,  b-,bp. 

't  '  'T 

2.  These  are  properly  adjectives,  and  have  for  the 
most  part  an  intransitive  signification  when  the  vowel  of 
the  ultimate  is  a,  e,  or  o,  and  a  passive  signification  when 
it  is  i  or  u,  ]b])  and  "tijD  small,  'j'ij'^  fat,  iZJ^hj  made  of  brass, 
■i^ns  cJiosen.  Those  with  a  and  i  in  the  ultimate  are,  how- 

T  ' 

ever,  prevaihngly  and  the  others  occasionally  used  as 
substantives,  and  designate  objects  distinguished  by  the 
quality  which  they  primarily  denote,  pV  herbs  prop. 
green,  ^DiiJ  strong  drink  prop,  intoxicating,  "lb]  leojmrd 
prop,  spotted,  Tpi^  and  t^^yi  turban  prop,  wound  around, 
lit'3  glory,  that  which  is  glorious. 

a.  The  intransitive  adjectives  supply  the  place  of  Kal  active  participles 
to  neuter  verbs,  §  90,  and  in  13>  verbs  they  have  superseded  the  regular 
formation,  §  155.  1,  B|5  for  Dip.  Kal  passive  participles  are  verbals  with  u. 
r  his  formation  Avith  I  in  the  ultimate  is  adopted  in  several  names  of  sea- 
sons, 3"'iii<  Abib,  the  time  of  ears  of  corn,  ^"px  ingathering  prop,  the  being 
gathered,  i"'i22  vintage,  ^'^^^  pruning-time,  Vi'^^'n  ploughing-time,  "i"'Si^  har- 
vest, Comp.  §  203.  1.  6. 

b.  Adjectives  with  5  commonly  express  permanent  qualities,  those  with 
e  variable  ones,  ^iTJ  great,  bnj  growing  great;  pin  strong,  pin  becoming 
strong;  ninf?  near,  -np  approaching;  pirrn  remote,  prr\  receding.  Hence 
the  former  are  used  of  those  physical  and  moral  conditions  which  are  fixed 
and  constant,  such  as  figure,  colour,  character,  etc.,  ~^5J  tong,  Vyj  rounds 
pT;:^  deep,  n'is  high;  Dnx  red,  ^'"^3  spotted,  lp3  speckled,  pin^  green,  Ip3 
striped,  "in:2  ichite,  p'^i;:  bay,  "I'ri'J  black;  pin^  sweet,  nin::  pure,  "O^^P^  holy. 
And  the  latter  are  employed  of  shifting  and  evanescent  states  of  body  and 
of  mind,  Np:£  thirsty,  nin  hungry,  "hb  sated,  Cj^'j  weary,  bhx  grieving, 
I'sn  desiring,  Inn  fearing,  ili?  exulting. 

c.  The  active  signification  asserted  for  the  form  ^iiil^  in  a  few  instances 
cannot  be  certainly  established;  'irx  architect,  prop,  reliable  (in  building) 
is  intransitive  in  Hebrew  conception;  so  perhaps  is  lU'ip';  or  \l3^p"J  fowler, 
comp.  Lat.  aucupari,  aucupatus.     Other  alleged  cases  are  probably  not 


§  188  FOKilAlION  OF  NOUNS.  201 

noun«  but  absolute  infinitives  of  Kal,  '"ins  Jer.  6:  27  may  as  well  be 
rendered  I  have  set  thee  to  try  as  for  a  trier  (of  metals);  yi"!:n  Isa.  1 :  17  is 
not  oppressor  noi-  oppressed  but  ivrong-doing,  to  doixeiv,  see  Alexander  in 
loc;  and  even  pill'S  Jer.  22:  3  may  in  like  manner  be  oppression  instead 
of  oppressor. 

d.  nb  roots  are  restricted  to  forms  -with  i,  in  which  the  radical  "^ 
quiesces,  "^Vj  fresh,  "'iV  afflicfei,  "'p;  or  N'^pj  with  otiant  X,  §  16.  1,  pure, 
or  with  a  which  combines  with  it  to  form  e,  n. ,  "^"Ha  and  Mnu  field,  ns'; 
fair,  ilSii  high;  in  a  few  nouns  this  final  vowel  is  dropped,  5^  fish  for  na"n, 
in  mark  for  nin,  yv  tree  for  ni:r,  "2  son  for  nia,  ns  wom^/j  for  n^s,  un- 
less, indeed,  these  and  the  like  are  to  be  regarded  as  primitive  biliterals. 
Vav,  as  a  final  radical,  may  be  preceded  by  a,  1335  meek,  or  e,  l3"^  secure. 

3.  The  main  vowel  in  the  penult. 

§  188.  1.  The  third  form  of  tliis  class  is  a  dissyllable 
having  an  immutable  vo\\'el,  mostly  Hholem,  though  oc- 
casionally Shurek  or  Tsere  in  the  first,  which  is  its  prin- 
cipal syllable,  and  a  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the 
second,  thus  bt:ip,  bbip,  bb^p,  bb^p,  bb^p. 

2.  These  indicate  the  agent,  and  are  either  active  par- 
ticiples, bb^p  killing,  or  substantives,  Utfx^  signet-ring  prop. 
sealer,  '2'^^'i^  enemy,  one  iwactising  hostility,  bi^^^fox  prop. 
digger,  C]b''3  liammer  prop,  jpounderf  bb%"l  morning  star 
prop,  shining  one, 

a.  A  number  of  nouns,  indicative  of  occupation,  follow  the  participial 
form,  which  thus  serves  to  express  permanent  and  professional  activity, 
"ijbl'a  herdsman,  hzu  sailor  prop,  rope-handler,  d^in  ploughman,  '^'JL'i''  potter 
prop,  former,  0313  fuller,  "ns  priest,  n""3  vine-dresser,  '^nio  merchant,  "isio 
scribe,  brii  trafficker,  rti.n  shepherd,  HZ'i physician,  nibi  dealer  in  unguents, 
cpS  embroiderer,  ni:li:  tvatchman,  ^V'':J  paier  T^rop.  gate-keeper,  ::z'C  judge, 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  u  in  the  first  syllable  is  shortened  and  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh-forte  conservative,  25*15  and  DSS  pipe,  yiz'^  pit, 

c.  S?  roots.  The  contraction  of  53?  and  the  quiescence  of  IS"  roots,  by 
reducing  them  to  biliteral  monosyllables,  obliterates  to  a  considerable  ex- 
tent the  distinctions  which  have  been  described  and  which  are  possible 
only  in  triliterals.  The  contracted  forms  which  arise  from  "5  roots  am 
20,  2p,  20,  2b,  §  185.  b.  Of  these  2b  =  22b  belongs  to  the  monosyllabic 
formation,  and  is  chiefly  used  of  abstracts,  i'3  purity,  2'-i  multitude,  nn  in- 
tegrity, bs  yoke;  and  20  =  220  to  the  first  species  of  dissyllables,  embracing 
adjectives  and  concrete  nouns,  On  perfect,  5n  feast;  while  20  and  20 
may  arise  indifferently  from  either,  p-a  rottenness  is  an  abstract  noun  for 
JSp?,  but  -,"  tender  is  an  adjective  for  "^",  Kamets  being  compressed  to 


202  ETYMOLOGY.  §  189 

Pattahh  before  the  doubled  letter,  comp.  §  135.  3;  Sb  heart  is  for  the  di«- 

BvUable  ^a!?,  and  np  fat  for  nrna,  but  "ri  favour  for  the  monosyllable  .liin. 
I'r  and  '^"r  roots.  Nouns  from  quiescent  IS  and  "^'s  roots  may  be  divided 
into  three  pairs  of  forms,  d;^,  n-i;  Dp,  ai");  Qfip,  n'^n.  Of  these  the  last 
pair  (with  the  exception  of  Kal  passive  participles)  belong  to  the  primitive 
monosyllabic  formation,  a"""!  strife,  '2'^'^  goodness;  the  first  pair  to  the  first 
species  of  dissyllables,  iIJi  poor,  It  proud,  ix  God  prop,  the  mighty  one;  and 
the  second  pair  may  belong  to  either,  TTin  =  'C''^  poverty,  p^^  =  'py^  empty 
•jix  =  iJ-iN  strength,  ni::  =  Si6  ^ooc?. 

Class  II. — Nouns  with  reduplicated  radicals. 

§  189.  1.  The  simple  form  proper  to  adjectives  is  ex- 
plained §  187;  it  may  be  converted  into  an  intensive  by 
doubling  the  middle  radical,  retaining  the  long  vowel  of 
the  second  syllable  and  giving  a  short  2  or  a  to  the  first. 
This  reduplicated  or  intensive  form  denotes  what  is 
characteristic,  habitual,  or  possessed  in  a  high  degree. 
Adjectives  of  this  nature  are  sometimes  used  as  de- 
scriptive epithets  of  persons  or  things  distinguished  by 
the  quahty,  wliich  they  denote,  ^'1"  very  weak,  nj^S  seeing 
prop,  (having  eyes)  wide  open,  p"^.J?  righteous,  TDS  mighty 
man,  '^lufull  of  grace,  UTV^  merciful. 

a.  As  a  general  though  not  an  invariable  rule,  the  first  syllable  has 
Pattahh  when  a  pure  vowel  a,  l,  or  H  stands  in  the  ultimate,  but  Hhirik 
when  the  ultimate  has  one  of  the  diphthongal  vowels  e  or  6.  Several  nouns 
with  d  in  the  second  syllable  are  descriptive  of  occupations  or  modes  of 
life,  comp.  §  188.  2.  a,  isx  husbandman,  5^^  fisherman,  1^'n  judge,  d^n 
(=  D"nn)  workman,  nino  cook,  nsp  seaman  (from  n^^  salt),  V'Z'D  bearer  of 
burdens,  1^^  hunter,  Tik'g  boivman,  22J  thief,  not  a  mere  equivalent  to  issia 
one  who  steals,  but  one  who  steals  habitually,  who  makes  stealing  his  oc- 
cupation. 

b.  Since  the  idea  of  intensity  easily  passes  into  that  of  excess,  the  form 
hbp  is  applied  to  deformities  and  defects,  physical  or  moral,  DiSt  dumb,  "aJ 
hump-backed,  lunn  (=  Vi'^Ti)  deaf,  "^h  blind,  nsa  lame,  ri'np  bald,  dp;.? 
perverse. 

c.  In  a  few  instances  instead  of  doubling  the  second  radical,  the  pre- 
vious Hhirik  is  prolonged,  §  59.  a,  lUliip  and  ^1^2^  nettle  prop,  badly  prick- 
ing, I'ib'^p  smoke,  nifr^d  the  Nile  prop,  very  black,  pii'^S  prison,  ■Jii">3  spark, 
ni'113  battle,  y^k^i  spark. 

d.  The  following  double  the  third  radical  in  place  of  the  second,  nn"ia 
brood,  'D^;p  green,  "ix'O  quiet,  Si'x;  comely  from  nitD,  the  last  radical  ap- 


§  190  FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  203 

pearing  as  1,  §  170,  bB^X  feeble,  where  the  long  vowel  Tsere  is  inserted  to 
prevent  the  concurrence  of  consonants. 

e.  5?  and  more  rarely  13?  roots  reduplicate  the  biliteral  formed  by  their 
contraction,  bibs  and  bJba  ivheel  prop.  7-oller,  rnrn  frightful,  "i"^t-it  girt, 


probably  n3lb  =  ibnb)  tvinding  stairs  from  nib  =  lib ;  a  root  bib  is  need- 
lessly assumed  by  Gesenius.  Sometimes  the  harsh  concurrence  of  consonants 
is  prevented  by  the  insertion  of  a  long  vowel,  bkb:£  (const,  bkbs)  cymbal 
prop,  tinkling,  nijiy  and  iHn?  stark  naked,  totally  destitute,  ^^f:''^' despicable, 
or  the  softening  of  the  former  of  the  two  consonants  to  a  vowel,  §  57.  1, 
2=13  star  for  3333,  n'iE::rj  bunds  worn  on  the  forehead  for  niE::s-j,  "ibpip 
(with  the  ending  ■p  added)  ignominy  for  "jibj^bp,  bra  Babylon  for  bzba/or 
its  assimilation  to  the  succeeding  consonant,  133  something  circular,  a  cir- 
cuit for  "13*13.  The  second  member  of  the  reduplication  suffers  contraction 
or  change  in  tic'^ir  chain  for  iTniynd  and  Sp"!!?  floor  for  ip"i]5. 

2.  Abstracts  are  formed  with  a  doubled  middle  radical 
by  giving  u  to  the  second  syllable  and  t  to  the  first,  pin 
folding  the  hands,  Ui^ti  retribution,  y'lp^  abomination,  and 
in  the  plural  D^n£3  atonement,  D^i^ps  commandments, 
D"ni>UJ  divorce, 

a.  These  may  be  regarded  as  verbals  formed  from  the  Piel.  A  like 
formation  is  in  a  few  instances  based  upon  other  species,  e.  g.  Hiphil  Tjirin 
melting  from  T\t':,  riisEn  cessation  from  the  *h  root  ;iQ,  Niplial  c-^binas 
wrestlings;  tD'^'bin?  when  derived  from  the  Niphal  means  repe7itings,  when 
from  the  Piel  consolations, 

b.  TV  roots  reduplicate  the  hiliteral  to  which  they  are  contracted,  "in-n 
inflammation,  d^yir^;'::  delight. 

c.  A  few  roots,  which  are  either  IS  or  ^  guttural,  or  have  a  liquid  for 
their  third  letter,  double  the  last  radical  with  it  in  the  final  syllable,  y^kv: 
thorn-hedge,  "flni<S  (=li-ij{s)  ruddy  gloiv,  Cnl^tiri  upright  columns  des\gned 
for  way-marks,  ■T';|1-irc3  horror,  B"'E1EX3  adulteries,  C^hs;  ridges,  also  with 
0  or  z  in  the  last  syllable,  Ijli'^J  acquiescence,  bbris  pasture,  Ti'iSS  shower, 
-ii^feS  obscuration,  i^'nBd  (K'thibh  -niEir)  tapestry,  b-ibin  whence  ^b-'b;n 
darA:.  The  concurrence  of  consonants  is  relieved  in  b'bsd  (in  some  editions) 
snail  by  Daghesh-forte  separative. 

§  190.  A  few  words  reduplicate  the  two  last  radicals. 
These  may  express  intensity  in  general,  "ip'npB  comjjlete 
opening,  n^ITlS"^  very  beautiful,  or  more  particularly  re- 
petition, TjBDiri  tivisted  prop,  turning  again  and  again, 
r^p^n  slip2)ery,  ^febpy  crooked,  ^Trbxi'B  perverse,  "fcscx  mixed 


204  EimoLOGY.  §  191 

multitude  prop,  gathered  here  and  there,  !nin^1in  spots  or 
stripes,  minBi.sn  moles  prop,  incessant  diggers.  As  energy 
is  consumed  by  repeated  acts  or  exhibitions  and  so  gradu- 
ally weakened,  tliis  form  becomes  a  diminutive  when 
appUed  to  adjectives  of  colour,  D^plX  reddish,  V^^T- 
greenish,  ITiinu?  blackish. 

a.  The  first  of  two  concurring  consonants  is  softened  to  a  vowel  in 
nn::'sn  trumpet  for  nn^I'^^n,  and  probably  Mi^TS  Lev.  16:  8  for  h}hrs . 

b.  "I's  roots  drop  their  initial  radical,  Ci'^hnnn  gifts  from  ani,  QiitSK:: 

jy  .  .  1  -t:-^'  -t'  -tv:* 

offspring,  issue  from  x:ii. 

Class  III. — Nouns  formed  by  prefixes. 

§  191.  The  third  class  of  nouns  is  formed  by  pre- 
fixing either  a  vowel  or  a  consonant  to  the  root.  In  the 
following  instances  the  vowel  a  is  prefixed  with  a  in  the 
ultimate  to  form  adjectives  of  an  intensive  signification, 
lTp&<  utterly  deceitful,  "nTlDi^  violent,  'h^s  (=  ■n';Si)  perennial, 
ri"5<  (only  represented  by  a  derivative,  §  94.  a)  very  foul, 
fetid,  "'b'CX  exceedingly  gross  or  thick  (applied  to  dark- 
ness, Isa.  59:  10),  or  verbal  nouns  borrowing  their  mean- 
ing from  the  Hiphil  sj)ecies,  H^STS  memorial,  njn5$  de- 
claration. 

a.  This  form  corresponds  with  ,JJo  \  the  Arabic  comparative  or  super- 
lative. Its  adoption  for  Hiphil  derivatives  corroborates  the  suggestion, 
§  82.  5.  b  (2),  respecting  the  formation  of  the  Hi^jhil  species  and  the  origin 
of  its  causal  idea. 

6.  The  letter  K  is  merely  the  bearer  of  the  initial  vowel  and  has  no 
significance  of  its  own  in  these  forms;  ti  is  substituted  for  it  in  ^b"'n 
(=  ^^"^l;?)  palace,  temple  prop,  very  capacious  from  br^  in  the  sense  of  its 
cognate  bl3  to  C07itain.  So,  likewise,  in  a  few  verbals  with  feminine  ter- 
minations, Ms'^rn  Ezek.  24:  26  causing  to  hear  used  for  the  Hiph.  infin., 
§  128,  n^^n  deliverance  from  bij ,  nnjn  grant  of  rest  (=  iini:ri)  from  n:, 
nnsn  aspect  from  133;  ni'i'^in  praises  from  nn^  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as 
a  like  formation  with  the  passive  vowel  u,  corresponding  to  the  Hophal, 
§  95,  a,  and  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  In  some  rare  instances  a 
Bibilant  is  prefixed  instead  of  X  or  tn,  as  in  the  Shaphel  species  in  Aramaeic, 
rianbo  flame  from  2nb,  b^iis'^  snail  from  bba,  nii^nrp^d  depressions  from  ^bp. 

c.  The  short  vowel  prefixed  with  N  to  monosyllables  of  the  first  spe- 
cies, as  explained  §  185.  c,  has  no  eff'ect  upon  the  meaning,  and  does  not 
properly  enter  into  the  constitution  of  the  form. 


§192 


FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  205 


§  192.  The  consonants  prefixed  in  the  formation  of 
nouns  are  ?J,  n,  and  \  They  are  sometimes  prefixed  with- 
out a  vowel,  the  stem  letters  constituting  a  dissyllable  of 
themselves,  %741,  ni:iD52,  b}2V),  n^is^n;  more  commonly 
they  receive  a  or  ^  followed  by  a  long  vowel  in  the  ulti- 
mate, e.  g.  bpip"^,  bbpa. 

a.  Pattahh  commonly  stands  before  e,  t  and  u,  and  Hhirik  before  a  and 
0,  unless  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural  or  an  assimilated  Nun  when  Pattahh 
is  again  preferred,  b=X^  food,  vi^-q  planting,  nri^  saiv,  cinn  a  species  of 
bird,  t3n;_  a  kind  of  gem.  Seghol  is  occasionally  employed  before  a  gut- 
tural or  liquid  followed  by  a,  §  63.  1.  6,  ^j^n-a  depth,  a3"io  chariot,  ::^hf:>-2 
pair  oftovgs.  These  rules  are  not  invariable,  however,  as  will  appear  from 
such  forms  as  n2|-3,  "iSSp,  nsDo,  T!Jipb-a,  qip-r^.  A  few  Avords  have  a  in 
the  ultimate,  r!ino  harp,  piq^  strangling.  The  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte 
separative  in  the  first  radical  it  exceptional,  dnp^  Ex.  15;  17,  fiinHsp  Job 
9:  18,  ninsap  Joel  1:  17.  -^'"  '    '" 

6.  I's  roo^s.  The  first  radical  appears  as  "^  resting  in  Hhirik  or  Tsere, 
Tiir-'p  and  ni'-a  rectitude,  irin^n  wew  wme,  "^•^n  soi«</t,  or  as  ^  resting  in 
Hholem  or  Shurek,  'rii^  appointed  time,  -ic^i-a'  correction,  rl'-n  sojourner, 
n;w  sorroic.  In  a  few  instances  it  is  rejected,  ihn  worW,  or  assimilated  to 
the  following  radical,  rk?  ier/,  S^p  knoioledge. 

15  awrf  ir  roofs.  The  root  is  reduced  to  a  monosyllabic  biliteral  by  the 
quiescence  or  rejection  of  the  second  radical,  the  prefix  receiving  Sh'va, 
TJ-Q  citadel,  Cn-a  sound  place,  Binn  ocean,  n^p  living  thing,  or  more  com- 
monly a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  -lix^  luminary,  fio,  '^-1:3  and  "pia 
sfn'/e,  |"inp  race,  ni^-;  adversary.  The  feminine  form  is  almosValways  ad- 
opted after  n,  nrrrn  salvation,  n^-inn  oblation. 

SS  roofs.  The  root  is  mostly  contracted  to  a  biliteral  and  the  vowel 
compressed  to  a,  a,  e  or  0,  §  61.  4,  the  prefix  sometimes  receiving  Sh'va 
which  gives  rise  to  a  Segholate  form,  §  61.  1.  b,  D2^  tribute  for  D=-a,  nab 
bitterness  for  n^-a,  b?^  defilement  for  Vhn,  T^j^  fear  for  ri'np,  T^n  masf  for 
'pn ;  more  frequently  it  receives  a  pretonic  Kamets  or  Tsere,  T(3'2  covering, 
■,:-2  s/iie/fZ,  iii'^  fortress,  nkp  anguish.  In  pi;-?  running,  the  short  vowel  of 
the  perfect  root  is  preserved  by  means  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  radical. 
n  is  almost  always  followed  by  the  feminine  ending,  i^"^^^^  folly,  n^nn  be- 
ginning, MiSri  prayer. 

T^h  roots.  The  ultimate  has  n,  1^\l;o  disease,  iib'^'O  pasture,  which  is 
apocopated  in  a  few  words,  hvj-i  lifting  ttp,  b^h  higher  part,  'vh  and  'V2  on 
account  of,  and  always  disappears  before  the  feminine  ending  n  ,  §  62.  2.  e, 
nB25^  ascent,  n^^-o  commandment,  nipri  hope,  nxbn  iveariness.  Before  the 
feminine  termination  n  the  final  radical  appears  as  quiescent  "^  or  1,  n''3"in 
interest,  rJiDTn  whoredom,  riinn  encamping,  r^'^b'^^  pasture.  Todh  is  retained 
as  a  consonant  after  w,  d'^'^bna  diseases. 


206  ETYMOLOGY.  §  193 

§  193.  The  letter  13  is  a  fragment  of  the  pronoun  ^12 
who  or  n^  what  Nouns,  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  denote 

1.  The  agent  who  does  what  is  indicated  by  the  root, 
as  the  participles,  §  84.  5,  formed  by  an  initial  12,  and  a 
few  substantives,  b"'3ir"'3  didactic  psalm  prop,  instructor, 
bb'l  (from  bsD)  chaff  ^vo^.  what  falls  off. 

2.  The  instrument  hy  which  it  is  done,  fjF13"'J  key  from 
rbB  to  oj)en,  ibbia  goad  from  ibb  to  learn,  'niiS"^  saw  from 
"liri  to  saw. 

~   T 

3.  The  place  or  time  in  which  it  is  done,  tti},^  altar 
from  TO,]  to  sacrifice,  Y2"]73  lair,  liri7J  period  of  residence. 

a.  Several  denominatives  are  formed  by  prefixing  a  in  a  local  sense, 
ni'x-ia,  rvi;x"^-3  place  at  the  head  from  ^rxi,  Pi'iBnp  p/ace  at  the  feet  from 
bsn,  nip"!?  chmghill  from  'foy\,  "iibri  brickHln  from  f^33^,  !T^^5|^  storehouse 
from  IT^iiJis,  bb'p  wagon  rampart  from  n'i^?,  "i^??  j)/ace  of  fountains  from 
T!?,  f^''^"P?  /^eW  o/"  cucumbers  from  Niirp,  "linri  /tertj)  o/"  straw  from  'nn. 

4.  The  action  or  the  quality  which  is  expressed  by 
the  root,  tut^'Z  slaughter,  nSp'J  mourning,  nj~53  sickness, 
ny^'Z  error,  liz:^"^  straightness.  Verbals  of  this  nature 
sometunes  approximate  the  infinitive  in  signification  and 
construction,  as  JlDSH/J  overturning,  rii^s^l?  Ezek.  17:  9, 
§  168.  2.  In  Palestinian  Aramaeic  the  infinitive  reg- 
ularly takes  this  form,  e.  g.  bppJ  to  kill. 

5.  The  object  upon  which  the  action  is  directed  or 
the  subject  in  which  the  quality  inheres,  bi'i^'^2  food  from 
bis  to  eat,  nT!2T7j  psalm  from  'in}  to  sing,  nipblQ  booty  from 
n^b  ^0  ^aA:e,  D'3'r"^*4  fat  things  from  "i^QiT  to  be  fat,  ^^^^12 
that  which  is  small,  pT^yz  that  which  is  remote. 

a.  These  different  significations  blend  into  one  another  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  is  not  always  easy  to  distinguish  the  precise  shade  of  meaning 
originally  attached  to  a  word :  and  not  infrequently  more  than  one  of  these 
senses  co-exist  in  the  same  word.  Thus,  11X12  luminary,  may  suggest  the 
idea  of  agency,  dispenser  of  light,  or  of  place,  reservoir  of  light  \  r^.^^^^^ 
knife,  may  be  so  called  as  an  agent,  a  devourer,  or  as  an  instrument,  used 
in  eating;  UJ^plD  means  both  a  holg  thing  and  a  holy  place;  "i^^?  sale  and 
something  sold  or  for  sale;  nibp^  royal  authority  and  kingdom;  xkia  tht 


§  194,  195        FOKMATION  OF  NOUNS.  207 

act,  place,  and  time  of  going  forth  and  that  uhich  goes  forth;  'z'^i'O  the  place 
and  time  of  sitting  or  dtcellivg  as  well  as  theg  who  sit  or  dicell. 

§  1 94.  Nouns  formed  by  prefixing  "^  or  t^  denote  per- 
sons or  things  to  which  the  idea  of  the  root  is  attached. 

1.  "^  is  identical  in  origin  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  masc. 
future  in  verbs,  and  is  largely  used  in  the  formation  of 
names  of  persons,  p'^^ii''.  Isaac,  rii^S";  Jeplithali^  but  rarely 
in  forming  appellatives,  S^V  adversary  prop,  contender, 
n^C"  a])ostate  prop.  de;parter,  t:^pb^  hag  prop,  gatherer,  D^p") 
living  thing  prop,  that  (tvhich)  stands,  "ij^^,  fresh  oil  prop. 
that  (which)  shines. 

2.  r,  probably  the  same  with  the  prefix  of  the  3  fem. 
future  of  verbs,  which  is  here  used  in  a  neuter  sense,  is 
employed  in  the  formation  of  a  few  concrete  nouns,  "^TT^V) 
oak  prop,  that  (zchich)  endures,  t]^"^.-^!!]  cloak  prop,  that 
(which)  tvraps  up,  'liLT]  furnace  prop,  that  (tuhich)  burns, 
n'BT]  apple  prop,  that  (which)  exhales  fragrance.  But  it 
more  frequently  appears  in  abstract  terms  hke  the  femi- 
nine ending  in  other  forms,  "j^iri  understanding,  *^'T\'2T\ 
bitterness,  j^T^'^'r\  delight.  It  is  very  rarely  found  in  de- 
signations of  persons,  and  only  when  they  occupy  a 
relation  of  dependence  and  subordination,  and  may  con- 
sequently be  viewed  as  things,  "i'^^^b'Ti  learner^  Dirin  one 
dwelling  on  another's  lands,  tenant,  vassal. 

a.  The  great  majority  of  nouns  with  T\  prefixed  have  likewise  a  femi- 
nine ending,  nT:ii"}ri  deep  sleep,  n^^iirn  salvation,  n^ssn  beaufg,  T'^^'yn  fraud. 

b.  The  few  nouns  formed  by  prefixing  Nun  are  originally  Niphal  parti- 
ciples, 233  handle  of  a  dagger  from  -^3,  nib  excrement  from  the  crop  of  a 
bird  from  SS'^,  ^303  turn,  course  of  things  from  220. 

Class  IV.— Nouns  formed  hy  affixes, 

§  195.  The  nouns  formed  by  means  of  an  afiixed 
letter  or  vowel  are  chiefly  denominatives.  The  consonant 
1  appended  by  means  of  the  vowel  o,  or  less  frequently 
a,  forms 


208  ETYMOLOGY.  §  196 

1.  Adjectives,  'p'^rii^  last  from  '^nssi  after,  "jiirb^*)  first 
from  lID5<n  head,  'pb^ri  middle  from  Tjlri  midst,  "ri'^rnD  brazen 
from  ri'airip  &r«ss.  A  very  few  are  formed  directly  from 
the  root,  "i^Z^^.^;(9or,  "p^b^  mos^  7^^^/^,  "'bbii  widowed. 

2.  Abstract  substantives,  the  most  common  form  ol 
which  is  "i^^p,  e.  g.  "in^:^  Uindness,  '"iMt^^  cofifidence,  "iiS? 
_^am,  "pp"^!!  paleness,  though  various  other  forms  hkewise 
occur,  e.  g.  "pi^^^  and  "('ins  destruction,  'jiT'nS  dominion, 
"jiiiriD  success,  ■i"ip  offering. 

a.  In  a  few  words  the  termination  "i  has  been  thought  to  be  intensive, 
nsd  sabbath,  '"inad  a  ^reai  sabbath,  IT  proud,  )'i'H^}  exceedingly  proud,  and 
once  diminutive  ©''X  »Maw,  '|ic''i<;  little  man,  i.  e.  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  so 
called  from  the  image  reflected  in  it.  The  word  '^^"C^,  Jeshurun  from  ^"i:^ 
upright,  is  by  some  explained  as  a  diminutive  or  term  of  endearment,  while 
others  think  that  the  termination  '|>i  has  no  further  meaning  than  to  make 
of  the  word  a  proper  name,  comp.  "327.    See  Alexander  on  Isaiah  44:  2. 

b.  '  is  occasionally  affixed  with  the  vowel  e,  'H^  axe,  )'^Q'^  nail. 

c.  A  few  words  are  formed  by  appending  D,  e.  g.  D'i"''iQ  and  'pl3  ran' 
som,  d|p  ladder  from  V3o  to  lift  up,  ntinn  sacred  scribe  from  Xi'^h  stylus, 
C'in'n  south  from  Tn'n  to  shine;  or  b,  e.  g.  bi^S  garden  from  Cns  vineyard, 
byas  crt^ya;  or  cm^  o/"  a  floiver  from  ^'^n^  cmj9,  bG")!?  o«A:/e  from  Cnp  jomf, 
brlin  locust  from  ^"1/1  indicative  of  tremulous  motion,  bs^5  ^^i^Z:  darkness 
from  Cl'^'^i:^  cZoMc?,  bHs  iron  probably  from  Tna  ^0  fierce. 

§  196.  The  vowel ''.  forms  adjectives  indicating  rela- 
tion or  derivation. 

1.  It  is  added  to  proper  names  to  denote  nationality 
or  family  descent,  ""125  Hehretv,  't^^^,  Jebusite,  ''rillJbB  Fhi- 
listine,  ■i2")5<  Aramcean,  ''^^^  Egyptian,  ^^^?")'irt  Israelitish, 
an  Israelite,  ^D"^  Danite,  "nnp  Kohathite,  ■'311^13  Gerslionite. 

2.  It  is  also  added  to  other  substantives,  ^iis^  north- 
erner, ■'^.!I3  foreigner,  ''I'B  villager,  ^5*0  footman,  ^ri^  timely, 
^!b^;5  m^ier  from  the  plural  D'iS;  to  a  few  adjectives, 
''^TDi^  and  nips  violent,  ^^IX  and  b^ii^  foolish,  and  even  to 
prepositions,  ''rnri  lowest  from  rnn,  ^DSb  /?^ow^  from 
^i£b  +  \,  §  62.  2.' 

a.  The  feminine  ending  n^  is  dropped  before  this  ending,  "'"'/•T^  Jip?tf 
from  iTiiit;,  '^^■'■13  Beriite  from  ini"'1S,  or  the  old  ending  n^  takes  its 
place,  "'fi::^""?  Maachathite  from  n^^'o,  or  5  is  inserted  between  t>e  vowels, 


§   197,  198       GENDEE  AND  NXBIBER  OF  NOUNS.  200 

'ih'^  Shelanife  from  n^*^.    Final  ">_  combines  with  the  appended  ■<    into  i, 
§  62.  2,  "hh  Levite  and  Levi,  "^ii"::  Shunite  and  Shuni. 

h.  In  a  very  few  instances  "'_  takes  the  place  of  "^  ,  e.  g.  ""Sir  whUe 
stuffs,  ■'T'n  basket,  "^^"^  loop,  and  perhaps  "'liilj,  in  a  collective  sense  wind- 
oics,  "'b-n  uncovered,  '^b'^s  (for  "'Vs:)  craft//. 

MULTILITERALS. 

§  197.  1.  Quadriliteral  nouns  are  for  the  most  part 
evenly  divided  into  two  syllables,  lip?  scorpion,  "iSTa 
treasurer,  T)T\T\_  sickle^  "l^^^5  barren.  Sometimes  the  second 
radical  receives  a  vowel,  that  of  the  first  radical  being 
either  rejected,  pil3'/bT  damask,  h'l'jn  frost,  ^T-2D  vine  blossom, 
or  preserved  by  the  insertion  of  Daghesh-forte,  aJ^b>7j 
flint,  "oi'is?  spider,  ^333  and  it^Vb  concubine.  Occasionally 
the  third  radical  has  Daghesh-forte,  Ti'it::?  bat,  ""SX  fin. 

2.  Words  of  five  or  more  letters  are  of  rare  occurrence 
and  appear  to  be  chiefly  of  foreign  origin,  "("b^^i?  purple, 
'Jl^I'lfrog,  7p.p?T2J  cloth,  pnir-Jj?  mule,  '|B";'n'u2-s  satrap. 

3.  Compound  words  are  few  and  of  doubtful  cha- 
racter, n^j^bs?  shadow  of  death,  Hlb^S'J  anything  prop,  what 
and  tvhat,  ""-^"'b^  nothing  prop,  no  tvhat,  b?^b^  worthless- 
ness  prop,  no  j^^^ofit,  ^li;bE^5'J  darkness  of  Jehovah,  n^rztTjb'j: 
flame  of  Jehovah,  except  in  proper  names,  plfsL'^^b"-?  Melchi- 
zedek,  king  of  righteousness,  ^inJ|"D'y  Obadiah,  serving  Je- 
hovah, D^p^iri'J  Jehoiakim,  Jehovah  shall  establish. 

Gender  and  Number. 

§  198.  There  are  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  other  Semitic 
languages,  but  two  genders,  the  mascuhne  ("^^t)  and  the 
feminine  (nip;).  The  mascuhne,  as  the  primary  form,  has 
no  characteristic  termination;  the  feminine  ends  in  H^  or 
n,  e.  g.  bi:p  inasc,  nbpp  or  vbbpfem. 

a.  The  only  trace  of  the  neuter  in  Hebrew  is  in  the  interrog-ative,  ifz 
tchnt  being  used  of  things  as  "^p  ivho  of  persons.  The  function  assigned  to 
the  neuter  in  other  languages  is  divided  between  the  masculine  and  the 
feminine,  being  principally  committed  to  the  latter. 

14 


210  ETYMOLOGY.  §  199 

b.  The  original  feminine  ending  in  nouns  as  in  verbs,  §  85.  1.  A  (1),  ap« 
pears  to  have  been  H,  which  was  either  attached  directly  to  the  word, 
rbusp  which,  by  §  61.  2,  becomes  T\h'Jp,  or  added  by  means  of  the  vowel  a, 
r?::]:?  or  n^i:]:?,  which  by  the  rejection  of  the  consonant  from  the  end  oi 
the  woi'd,  §  55.  2.  c,  becomes  f^^^rp-  The  termination  ri_  or  r^  is  still  found 
in  a  very  few  words,  rp-a  emerald,  nxp  pelican,  n^sd  company  2  Kin. 
9:  17,  ri'^^n^  morrow,  rio  j)ortion,  nap  end,  nasg  Josh.  13:  13,  and  the 
poetic  forms,  T\'^'Q]  song,  Ton  inheritance,  HTtj?  help,  n^b  fruitful,  'ny:i  sleep. 
Two  other  words,  V^n  Ps.  74:  19  and  ri"!??  Ps.  61:  1,  have  been  cited  as 
additional  examples,  but  these  are  in  the  construct  state,  which  always 
preserves  the  original  r  final;  it  is  likewise  always  retained  before  suffixei 
and  paragogic  letters,  §  61.  6.  a,  ^TCVa"],  nrijiillJ';,  in'^ri. 

c.  The  feminine  ending  M^  receives  the  accent  and  is  thus  readily  dis- 
tinguished from  the  unaccented  paragogic  M^.  In  a  few  instances  gram- 
marians have  suspected  that  forms  may  perhaps  be  feminine,  though  the 
punctuators  have  decided  otherwise  by  placing  the  accent  on  the  penult, 
e-  g-  '^'7?2  burning  Hos.  7:  4,  f^^'^^'J  Galilee  2  Kin.  15:  29,  n^Sp  destruction 
Ezek.  7:  25,  n^an-n  vulture  Deut.  14:  17,  nbep  low  Ezek.  21:^31! 

d.  The  vowel  letter  X,  which  is  the  usual  sign  of  the  feminine  in 
Aramaeic  takes  the  place  of  n  in  N'B'i  threshing  Jer.  50:  11,  Nsn  terror 
Isa.  19:  17,  X'bn  icrath  Dan.  11:  44,  x^3^  lioness  Ezek.  19:  2,  K'^ii?  mark 
Lam.  3:  12,  X"n^  bitter  Euth  1:  20,  i<n"ip  baldness  Ezek.  27:  31,  uro  sleep 
Ps.  127:  2.  No  such  form  is  found  in  the  Pentateuch  unless  it  be  XnT 
loathing  Num.  11:  20,  where,  however,  as  Ewald  suggests,  N  may  be  a 
radical  since  it  is  easy  to  assume  a  root  kSt  cognate  to  "i^t.  The  feminine 
ending  in  pronouns  of  the  second  and  third  persons,  and  in  verbal  futures 
is  »  ■'.;  an  intermediate  form  in  e  appears  in  irnlT  Isa.  59:  5  and  iT^'^5  the 
numeral  ten,  or  rather  teen,  as  it  only  occurs  in  numbers  compounded  with 
the  units.  For  like  unusual  forms  in  verbs  see  §  86.  b,  and  §  158.  4. 

e.  The  sign  of  the  feminine  in  the  Indo-European  languages  is  a  final 
vowel,  corresponding  to  the  vowel-ending  in  Hebrew;  the  Latin  has  a,  the 
Greek  «  or  yj,  the  Sanskrit  t.  And  inasmuch  as  the  feminine  in  Hebrew 
covers,  in  part  at  least,  the  territory  of  the  neuter,  its  consonantal  ending 
fi  may  be  compared  with  t,  the  sign  of  the  neuter  in  certain  Sanskrit  pro- 
nouns, represented  by  d  in  Latin,  id,  illud,  istud,  quid;  in  English  it, 
what,  that. 

§  199.  It  is  obvious  that  this  transfer  to  all  existing 
things,  and  even  to  abstract  ideas,  of  the  distinction  of 
sex  found  in  Hving  beings,  must  often  be  purely  arbitrary. 
For  although  some  things  have  marked  characteristics 
or  associations  in  virtue  of  which  they  might  readily  be 
classed  with  a  particular  sex,  a  far  greater  number  hold 
an  indeterminate  position,  and  might  with  quite  as  much 
or  quite  as  little  reason  be  assigned  to  either.    It  hence 


§  199 


GENDER  AND  NUBIBEE  OF  NOUNS. 


211 


happens  that  there  is  no  general  rule  other  than  usage 
for  the  gender  of  Hebrew  words,  and  that  there  is  a 
great  want  of  uniformity  in  usage  itself. 

a.  The  following  names  of  females  are  without  the  proper  distinctive 
feminine  termination: 


dx  mother. 


'."inx  she-ass.         UJ;5"^Q  concubine. 


I'ifs  horn. 
^5^  foot. 
\^  tooth. 
pid  leg. 


rp  morsel. 

iJiii  light. 
Nib"!  myriad. 
bin  world. 


Vyo  queen. 

So  the  names  of  double  members  of  the  body,  whether  of  men  or  ani- 
mals, which  are  feminine  with  rare  exceptions: 

IJX  ear.  sint  arm.                 C]?  palm. 

S3ax  finger.  1^  Jiand.  ^h'3  shoulder, 

'na  thumb.  T\b''^  thigh.  T^i  eye. 

T|';ia  knee.  tfljs  wing.  S^^  side* 

The  following  nouns  are  also  feminine: 
MX  brazier.        S~n  sicord.  "i"^?  cifi/. 

"iTiis  footstep.        ois  cup.  C^.r   Great  Bear, 

"1X3  well.  to's  brightness.      C'hI;  couch. 

ySii  belly.  \v\  shoe.  ri^  workmanship. 

b.  The  following  nouns  are  of  doubtful  gender,  being  sometimes  con- 
strued as  masculine  and  sometimes  as  feminine.  Those  •which  are  com- 
monly masculine  are  distinguished  thus  (*);  those  which  ar«  c«>*>»»Tionly 
feminine  are  distinguished  thus  (f). 

♦"ISM  fortress. 
*n3T'2  altar. 
nin^  camp. 
*n-j"a  rod. 
'cip";  place. 
nrn:  brass, 
tCEJ  soul. 

"l^D  pot. 

tnVo  flour. 
">  cloud. 
*rhr  cord. 
*cr  people. 


nx  sign. 

n^N  path, 
iy^h  earth. 
tdx  fire. 
*i;3  garment. 
*Tyi^  house. 
"115  ?{7aZ^. 
K"^?  valley. 
•a  garden. 
t"£5  vfwe. 
*'i'nK  threshing' 
floor. 
frt^  door. 


*^="^ri  temple. 
•"jiin  multitude. 

■jfrT  beard. 

)yzr\  toindoio. 

"lan  cowrf. 

^ri"^  jubilee. 

t"i23  circuit. 

*fi"iiD  vineyard. 

*3b  /teari. 

ens  fcreai. 

tlT*:^  tongtK. 


I'ni?  evening. 
fns  <me  (dwra- 
fion). 
♦c^ie  face. 


jarij  lime  (rep*- 

tition). 
*»b:j  *os^ 
■jiE'j  north. 

fn"T  spirit, 
fnni  sfreef. 
*cnn  wom6. 
*cn'n  juniper. 
V'ikp  S/jeoZ. 
*C3"i:  sceptre. 
ni'r  sabbath. 
«ip'r  sun. 
"i;.'r  ^afe. 
C'nn  ocean. 
"l^'^n  sottfA. 
*i5n  razor. 

14* 


212  -  ETYMOLOGY.  §  200 

Gesenius  ascribes  only  one  gender  to  a  few  of  these  words,  but  '2);  is 
once  fern.  Prov.  12:  25;  so  ^bx^  fern.  Hab.  1:  16,  ^iinri  fern.  Hab.  1:  10, 
nzTri  fern.  Ezek.  43:  13,  Ci^!?  masc.  Ezek.  24:  10.  The  list  might  be  re- 
duced by  referring  the  vacillation  in  gender,  wherever  it  is  possible,  to  the 
syntax  rather  than  the  noun.  Yerbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  which  be- 
long to  feminine  nouns  may  in  certain  cases,  as  will  be  shown  hereafter, 
be  put  in  the  masculine  as  the  more  indefinite  and  primary  form.  While, 
on  the  other  hand,  those  which  belong  to  masculine  names  of  inanimate 
objects  are  sometimes  put  in  the  feminine  as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter. 

c.  Some  species  of  animals  exhibit  a  distinct  name  for  each  sex,  the 
feminine  being  formed  from  the  masculine  by  the  appropriate  termination, 
-IS  bullock,  nns  heifer,  h'^b  calf,  fern.  ri3:s,  iuns  lamb,  fern,  i^ins,  or  being 
represented  by  a  word  of  different  radicals,  "litll  ass,  fern.  "IPX.  When 
this  is  not  the  case,  the  name  of  the  species  may  be  construed  in  either 
gender  according  to  the  sex  of  the  individual  spoken  of,  as  b^^  camel,  "iJ^Ja 
cattle,  "lisa  bird,  or  it  may  have  a  fixed  gender  of  its  own  irrespective  of 
the  sex  of  the  individual;  thus,  S^3  dog,  SNT  wolff  ■litj  ox,  are  masculine, 
rai'iN  hare,  tniii  dove,  bn^  sheep,  are  feminine. 

d.  The  names  of  nations,  rivers,  and  mountains  are  commonly  mascu- 
line, those  of  countries  and  cities  feminine.  Accordingly,  such  words  as 
Ciix  Edom.,  sxin  Moab,  nn^irri  Judah,  dl'b^??  Egypt,  QiTO?  Chaldees,  are 
construed  in  the  masculine  when  the  people  is  meant,  and  in  the  feminine 
when  the  country  is  meant. 

§  200.  The  feminine  ending  is  frequently  employed 
in  the  formation  of  abstract  nouns,  and  is  sometimes  ex- 
tended to  the  formation  of  official  designations  (comp. 
Ms  Honour,  his  Excellency,  his  Reverence),  TlhB  governor, 
TrO'3  colleague,  ribhp  preacher,  and  of  collectives  (comp. 
humanity  for  mankind),  jr\  a  fish,  ni'l  fish,  'f}^  a  doted, 
{13:2?  clouds,  V^  (I  ^^ee,  nk>"  timber,  irn^  a  traveller,  nnix 
caravan,  nbVs  Zeph.  3:10  the  halting,  Sltj^bsi  the  escaped. 

a.  (1)  The  feminine  ending  added  to  Segholates  gives  new  prominence 
to  the  originally  abstract  character  of  this  formation,  "^n  and  '^^^'^ 
tvickedness,  distinguished  by  Ewald  as  to  aliKov  and  dliKia,  riE"in  shame, 
n^a?  slothfulness. 

(2)  So  to  monosyllables  whose  second  radical  receives  the  vowel,  i^J^'^^ 
righteousness,  which  is  more  abstract  and  at  the  same  time  used  more  ex- 
clusively in  a  moral  sense  than  the  Segholate,  p"!^  rightness,  fi^SN  dark- 
ness, equivalent  to  ^SX,  nnJ3  (=  Pisb)  brightness,  iiWci"!  (=  TCi^)  salvation. 
Or  nouns  of  this  description  might  be  supposed  to  have  sprung  from  the 
adjectives  belonging  to  the  second  form  of  Class  I.,  the  pretonic  vowel  fall- 
ir.g  away  upon  the  addition  of  the  feminine  ending,  bsx  dark,  n^SX  the 
dark,  to  aKoretvov,  fii'^'ii''^  the  being  saved  from  ?*ii::^,  '^^'^cP  justice  frcm 


§  201  GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  213 

b-'PQ  judge.  The  following  nouns,  descriptive  of  the  station  or  functions  of 
a  particular  class,  follow  this  form,  T\?.^  ^i^ff,  i^^l^"?  kingly  office  or  stcay, 
N^a;  prophet,  nxsn:  prophecy,  ins  priest,  T^rri  priesthood  or  priestly  duty, 
Vz~\  merchant,  nsw"!  traffic. 

(3)  The  feminine  ending  occasionally  gives  an  abstract  signification  to 
reduplicated  forms,  nb  blind,  vrh  blindness,  nb  having  a  bald  forehead, 
rri25  baldness  in  front,  xibn  sinner,  V)f.i:T\  and  ^^'^n  sin,  nnra  terror, 
T\zr^  scoffing,  n'inbn  anguish,  or  to  those  which  have  a  prefixed  letter  a, 
nisnp  overthrow,  '^^^■?'?  dominion,  irb^nri  confusion,  or  particularly  n, 
rtirnrri  salvation,  t\yrj7\  testimony,  HJpn  hope,  nx^n  weariness. 

(4)  It  is  likewise  added  to  forms  in  ^  ,  TV^Vh^  judgment,  n'lpibsj  ivork' 
ivg,  n-'-rxn  beginning,  n^nnx  end,  ri\s;d  remnant,  the  termination  n  being 
often  found  in  place  of  n"^.,  n^^JSn  2  Chron.  26:  21  K'ri,  HTi^En  K'thibh, 
disease  prop,  freedom  from  duty,  "^rsn  /ree;  rflBszH  redness,  •'^■'3:n  red; 
n^in-s  bitterness,  "^n^-i^a  fci^fer;  nnas  heaviness,  n^i-abx  widowhood.  In  a 
very  few  instances  the  termination  TO  is  superimposed  upon  "^  viz.:  W''11ZX, 
^'l'?"9'l?'  The  termination  n^.  or  W  in  abstracts  derived  from  ri'b  roots  is 
of  a  different  origin  from  that  just  explained  and  must  not  be  confounded 
with  it;  •'.  or  si  is  there  the  final  radical  softened  to  a  vowel,  §  170,  as 
n'^ho  or  whir  captivity  from  in  to  to  lead  captive. 

b.  In  Arabic,  nouns  of  unity,  or  those  which  designate  an  individual, 
are  often  formed  by  appending  the  feminine  termination  to  masculines 
which  have  a  generic  or  collective  signification.  This  has  been  thought  to 
be  the  case  in  a  few  words  in  Hebrew,  "^ix  fleet,  iT^JX  ship,  ^rb  hair,  Sr'^S'b 
a  hair,  ^>  swarm,  tinin'n  a  bee. 

c.  Some  -names  of  inanimate  objects  are  formed  from  those  of  animated 
beings  or  parts  of  living  bodies,  which  they  were  conceived  to  resemble, 
by  means  of  the  feminine  ending,  taken  in  a  neuter  sense,  CX  mother,  ri"2S: 
metropolis,  'r\~^;^^  thigh,  nbn^  hinder  part,  extremity,  rs  'palm  of  the  hand, 
nes  palm-branch,  ir^p  forehead,  r\hs.-2  greave,  nc  mouth,  n^s  edge. 

§  201.    There   are  three  numbers  in  Hebrew,   the 

singular  {Trr  -pizib),  dual  (py^  -piiib),  and  plural  (C^sn  -p'iDb). 
The  plui-al  of  masculine  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  D^., 
or  defectively  written  D.,  to  the  singular,  C^C  liorse,  D^C^O 
horses,  p"'^S  righteous  {man),  Q^p^^S  or  Dp^'n^  righteous 
{men).  The  plural  of  feminine  nouns  is  formed  by  the 
addition  of  fii,  also  written  r\*,  the  feminine  ending  of 
the  singular,  if  it  has  one,  being  dropped  as  superfluous, 
since  the  jDlural  termination  of  itself  distinguishes  the 

gender,  ci3  cup,  nibb  cups,  nb^nn  virgin,  mib'nn  and  rib^nn 
virgins,  n^5t3^  sin,  niktan  sins;  in  two  instances  the  vowel- 


214  ETYMOLOGY.  §  20:i 

letter  !f5  takes  the  place  of  1,  §  11. 1.  a,  m'is  Ezek.  31:  8, 
nK21S  Ezek.  47:  11. 

a.  The  masculine  plural  sometimes  has  'p^  instead  of  d''.,  e.  g.  'J'^l^a 
oftener  than  C'^^ri  in  the  book  of  Job,  "pbb^  Prov.  31:  3,  "pi:"^  2  Kin.  11:  13, 
'■I'y  Mic.  3:  12,  'C^h-QW  Lam.  1:  4,  -fiin  Ezek.  4:  9,  "pi;;  Dan!  12:  13.  This 
ending,  wliicli  is  the  common  one  in  Aiamaeic,  is  chiefly  found  iu  poetry  or 
in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible. 

b.  Some  grammarians  have  contended  for  the  existence  of  a  few  plurals 
in  ^,  without  the  final  D,  but  the  instances  alleged  are  capable  of  another 
and  more  satisfactory  explanation.  Thus,  "^^3  2  Kin.  11:  4,  ''nnsi,  ^r^B 
2  Sam.  8:  18,  •^hi'h'Si  2  Sam.  23:  8,  and  ^sn  I'sam.  20:  38  K'thibh  (K'ri 
ckn),  are  singulars  used  collectively;  "'k^  2  Sam.  22:  44,  Ps.  144:  2,  Lam. 
3:  14,  and  ''i'is-}  Cant.  8:  2,  are  in  the  singular  with  the  suffix  of  the  first 
person;  "^iti  Ps.  45:  9  is  not  for  tt'^l^  stringed  instruments,  but  is  the  poetic 
form  of  the  preposition  '"0  from;  ''".N3  Ps.  22:  17  is  not  for  D'^ns  piercing, 
but  is  the  noun  I'nN  with  the  preposition  3  like  the  lion,  §  158.  3. 

c.  There  are  also  a  few  words  which  have  been  regarded  as  plurals  in 
^  .  But  "inn  Zech.  14:  5  and  "i^::  Judg.  5:  15,  are  plurals  with  the  suffix 
of  the  first  person.  In  •'',J'in  2  Chron.  33:  19,  which  is  probably  a  proper 
name,  and  "ihs  Am.  7:  1,  Nah.  3:  17,  which  is  a  singular  used  collectively, 
final  "i  is  a  radical  as  in  *inb  =  Jiniu.  i'^^'in  Isa.  19:  9  is  a  singular  with 
the  formative  ending  \,  §  196.  h\  ''ii^n  Jer.  22:  14  and  "'b'^h  Isa.  20:  4, 
might  be  explained  in  the  same  way,  though  Ewald  prefers  to  regard  the 
former  as  an  abbreviated  dual  for  d'^iiiH  double  (i.  e.  large  and  shoivy) 
windoios,  and  the  latter  as  a  construct  plural  for  "'Elil'li;  the  diphthongal  e 
being  resolved  into  ay,  conip.  §  57.  2  (5).  "^n"^  Ezek.  13:  18  is  commonly 
regarded  as  an  absolute  dual  for  D'^T'^,  though  it  is  always  elsewhere  my 
hands  with  1  pers.  suf.,  and  may  be  so  explained  here.  The  divine  name 
"'^d  Almighty  is  best  explained  as  a  singular;  the  name  "'iix  Lord  is  a 
plural  of  excellence,  §  203.  2,  with  the  suffix  of  the  first  person,  the  original 
signification  being  my  Lord. 

d.  In  a  few  words  the  sign  of  the  feminine  singular  is  retained  before 
the  plural  termination,  as  though  it  were  one  of  the  radicals,  instead  of 
being  di-opped  agreeably  to  the  ordinary  rule,  rtn  door  pi.  nin^n.  So,  ros 
pillow,  nrp  boiv,  T\pp  trough,  n'^in  spear,  r?!:-^^  widotvhood,  nh'n'S  divorce, 
rflitn  whoredom,  tih'::  lip  pi.  nipSb.  To  these  must  be  added  ri"'nil3,  pro- 
vided it  be  derived  from  tinb  in  the  sense  of  pit;  it  may,  however,  signify 
destruction,  from  the  root  nnd,  when  the  final  fl  will  be  a  radical. 

e.  The  Arabic  noun  has  three  case-endings,  nom.  un,  gen.  in,  ace.  an, 
which  drop  their  nasal  in  the  construct  nom.  u,  gen.  i,  ace.  a.  Although 
these  have  become  obsolete  in  Hebrew,  there  are  traces  of  their  existence 
in  "i  and  "i.  occasionally  added  to  the  construct,  §  222,  and  in  In  ^  or  D^  ad- 
ded to  nouns  in  an  accusative  sense  to  indicate  direction,  §  223,  or  to  form 
adverbs,  §  236.  2  (1).  The  plural  endings  are  formed  by  lengthening  those 
of  the  singular,  nom.  Una,  gen.  tna.  The  former  is  identical  with  tha 
plural  ending  in  verbs,  in  Heb.  "jl;  the  latter  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew* 


§  202 


GENDEE  AND  NUMBER  OP  NOUNS. 


215 


plural  in  t3^..  In  Arabic  the  fem.  sing,  ending  is  af,  plur.  ai  =  ni,  a  as  in 
the  Kal  part.  {Itdtil  =  bi;p),  the  Piel  of  V'J  verbs  (a^io  =  Arab.  3  conj.  lio- 
tala)  and  the  N3  fut.  (yakul  =  biX'^)  answering  to  d  in  Heb. 

§  202.  The  gender  of  adjectives  and  participles  is 
carefully  discriminated,  both  in  the  singular  and  m  the 
plural,  by  means  of  the  appropriate  terminations.  But 
the  same  want  of  precision  or  miiformity  which  has  been 
remarked  in  the  singular,  §  199,  characterizes  hkewise 
the  use  of  the  plural  terminations  of  substantives.  Some 
mascuhne  substantives  take  tli  in  the  plural,  some  femi- 
nines  take  D"*.,  and  some  of  each  gender  take  indifferently 
n\  or  ni. 

a.  The  following  masculine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  ni:  those 
which  are  distinguished  by  an  asterisk  are  sometimes  construed  as  feminine. 


nx  father. 
*iis;  bowl. 
2ix  familiar 
spirit. 
"isix  treasure. 
*n'ix  sign. 
'rrn'x  path. 
"I'i'b'ix  palace. 
bisox  cluster. 
"lia  pit. 
ja  roof. 
bnia  lot. 


*)~j^  threshing- 
floor. 
■jh"!^  goad. 
aij  tail. 
y^n  street. 
nin  breast. 
•jrjn  vision. 
Dilin  dream. 
"jis^'n  invention. 
Tzb  hand- 
breadth. 
KSS  throne. 
roS  tablet. 


''^i?  night. 

*n3T^  altar. 

"ii:i3  rain. 

T    T 

^i'Sl?  tithe. 

*"T!ip  summit. 

♦n'ip'a  place. 

bpo  staff. 

1XD  bottle. 

15  lamp. 

"lis  sJcin. 

^h'j  dust. 

*n'nr  evening, 

aiajj  herb. 


S'ns  leader. 

"ip;^  tube. 

*i"ins  bundle. 

bip  voice. 

-(•ip  wall. 

anp  war. 

♦aip!")  sireef. 

pirri  chain. 

nd  name. 

"lETJ  trumpet. 

niy  pillar. 

*n'ir;ri  deep. 


t.  The  following  feminine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  d'^.:  those 
marked  thus  (f)  are  sometimes  masculine: 


flSk  stone.  iT\2h  way. 

n3x  terebinth.  Tfl  ^rtiw. 

Pfli^bx  tvidoivhood.  nniiat  branch. 

rtna  coaZ. 


n:a33  speZi. 

n|o  word. 
rail  whoredom,    n^^?  an^ 
MkH  wheat.  nxD  tweaswre. 


M^5'n  fig-cake. 


n=Wi  darkness. 
^^^:^^'  dove. 

T 

f?  pitcher. 


T5  she-goat. 
^"^S  city. 
TTSiB  concubine. 


rp  morsel. 
brn  sAeep. 
ir'^sb  barley. 
Th'i:6  ear  of  corn 
ni:'j  acacia. 


Also  fS''?  e^^s  which  is  not  found  in  the  singular. 


216  ETYMOLOGY.  §  20.1 

c.  Tlie  following  nouns' form  their  plural  by  adding  either  O^^  or  P^l; 

MASCULINE   NOUNS. 

C^'^x  porch.  sh^  heart.  llr?."^  delicacy.  yjh  breach. 

inx  lion.  "lik-D  liffht.  '{I'S-g  fountain.  ix-i:^  neck. 

"i"i^  (feneration.  ^^?"o  tower.  !23"^"?  6e(i.  "^^fe  grave. 

M3T  sacrifice.  loiia  foundation,  "{y^"^  dwelling.  ni;^  reei. 

'jinsT  memorial.  '"O'i'a  6owf?.  "inD  river.  B^IP  oa;e. 

ni"'  fZrt^.  D"iji'3  seaf.  CiD  basin.  f^^■:J  /jeZdf. 

"|?2  forest.  p^l"^  boivl.  ')l^  iniquity.  ^'i-ilj  ^t'eei. 

li'S  /rtrer.  S'lN??  ^Jaiw.  :i^:j  Aee/.  i^i^^ri?  delight. 

FEMININE  NOUNS. 

nr'^X  terror,        >^i^""''^"i<  grope-cahe.      hv\  shoe.  ^^o"?  hoof. 

ns?x  s/iea/".  •^7y'X  Astarte.        >^^';!'2  ^ieo/?.  MJ'ij  year, 

niax  people.  n"'3n  spear. 

NOUNS    CONSTRUED   IN   EITHEB    GENDER.  j 

Ci^^nx,  riiliirix  aloes,   "pirn  window,  rii;p  rod.  D^ci.;  &onc.            ! 

153  garment.        "i-jn  coi«rf.  trsi  sott^..  n2>  iime.            i 

35  rim.                 ^33  circle.  "Y^D  thorn.  t3?Q  /bof. 

^z'^ln  temple.         ^ii^"?  fortress.            as?  cZottdf.  xb:i  /ios^. 

Si^l  arw.             i^?'!)'^  camp.  Kis  core?.  s>^:2  side. 

d.  The  two  forms  of  the  plural,  though  mostly  synonymous,  occasion- 
ally differ  in  sense  as  in  Latin  loci  and  loca.  Thus  G"'^33  is  used  of  round 
masses  of  money,  talents,  ninss  of  bread,  round  loaves;  Q'^.'^G  thorns,  nin'^O 
hooks;  tT'Z'^V  heels,  T\'\~.'^'J  foot-prints;  Di'bi'Q  footsteps  of  men,  m"i>s  feet 
of  articles  of  furniture.  Comp.  §  200.  c.  Sometimes  they  differ  in  usage 
or  frequency  of  employment:  thus  T'i'a^  days,  nild  years,  are  poetical  and 
rare,  the  customary  forms  being  D'^TD^,  D"'3'd. 

e.  Nouns  mostly  preserve  their  ijroper  gender  in  the  plural  irrespective 
of  the  termination  which  they  adopt;  though  there  are  occasional  excep- 
tions, in  which  feminine  nouns  in  C^.  are  construed  as  masculines,  e.  g, 
C^ira  toomen  Gen.  7:  13,  ^"''i'g  tvords  Job  4:  4,  D'^^'aj  ants  Prov.  30:  25,  and 
masculine  nouns  in  ni  are  construed  as  feminines,  e.  g.  H'lJS'J'a  divellings 
Ps.  84:  2. 

§  203.  1.  Some  substantives  are,  by  their  signification 
or  by  usage,  limited  to  the  singular,  such  as  material 
nouns  taken  in  a  universal  or  indefinite  sense,  'Zi^fa^ey 
-mT  gold,  nhnyt  ground;  collectives,  ~|t:  children,  Z^y  fowl, 
t2";i^'  birds  of  prey,  ^j^^  large  cattle  (noun  of  unity  "liTlJ  an 
ox),  'ji<:2  small  cattle  (noun  of  unity  Jl'iT  a  sheej)  or  goat); 


§  204        GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  217 

many  abstracts,  Tx''^  salvation,  tH^_^  hlindness.  On  the  other 
hand  some  are  found  only  in  the  plural,  such  as  nouns, 
whose  singular,  if  it  ever  existed,  is  obsolete,  D'b  ivater^ 
D"is  face  or  faces,  D';ig"i  heaven,  D'i^ia  hoivels,  Q^n:::  men, 
TSy^'^yz  adjacent  to  the  head,  and  abstracts,  which  have  a 
plural  form,  D^^n  life,  D^inyt  love^  triyrTi  mercy,  nibinnri 
government. 

o.  The  intimate  connection  between  a  collective  and  an  abstract  is 
shown  by  the  use  of  the  feminine  singular  to  express  both,  §  200.'  In  like 
manner  the  plural,  whose  office  it  is  to  gather  separate  units  into  one  ex- 
pression, is  used  to  denote  in  its  totality  or  abstract  form  that  common 
quality  which  pervades  them  all  and  renders  such  a  summation  possible, 
comp.  TO.  ViKccta  right,  to.  ahiKa  ivrong.  Some  abstracts  adojit  indifferently 
the  feminine  or  the  plural  form.  H3!i'2X  and  D'^il'iX  fidelift/,  nirxJ  and  C"'!i'xa 
redemption,  n^n  and  D"^',!!  life,  nb'^Jn  and  Q'^idn  darkness,  nkb'a  and  D'^X^'? 
setting  of  gems. 

b.  The  form  Q'^3i:2p  is  adopted  by  certain  words  which  denote  periods 
of  human  life,  ni-i!iS'3  childhood,  Q"^i)^br  youth,  D'^nna  adolescence,  D"i3!in2 
virginity,  ni^^ibs  period  of  espousals,  Qiipf  old  age. 

c.  Abstracts,  which  are  properly  singular,  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
plural  to  denote  a  high  degree  of  the  quality  which  they  represent,  or  re- 
peated exhibitions  and  embodiments  of  it,  irnaii  might,  r'i'n^n5  deeds  of 
might,  vSh^n  exalted  tvisdom,  ni^bin  intense  folly. 

2.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  the  employment  ot 
the  plural  form  when  a  single  individual  is  spoken  of,  to 
suggest  the  idea  of  exaltation  or  greatness.  It  is  thus 
intimated  that  the  individual  embraces  a  plurality,  or 
contains  within  itself  what  is  elsewhere  divided  amongst 
many.  Such  plurals  of  majesty  are  D^nbs*  God,  the  supreme 
object  of  worship,  ''ilJJ;  Supreme  Lord  prop,  my  Lord., 
§  201.  c,  and  some  other  terms  referring  to  the  di^ane 
being,  ?J"S"]in  Eccles.  12:  1,  D'hinB  Eccles.  5:  7,  ^id'S  Isa. 
54:  5,  D^bilp  Hos.  12:  1;  also,  D^ini^  (rarely  with  a  plural 
sense)  lord,  D'^^^ln  (when  followed  by  a  singular  suffix) 
master,  rii'in!!l  Behemoth,  great  beast,  and  possibly  D"5'^n 
Teraphim,  which  seems  to  be  used  of  a  single  image, 
1  Sam.  19:  13,  16. 

§  204.  The  dual  is  formed  by  adding  D^.  to  the  sing- 


218  ETYMOLOGY.  §  205 

ular  of  both  genders,  T\  as  the  sign  of  the  feminine  re- 
maining unchanged,  and  H^  reverting  to  its  original  form 
n  ,  8  198.  &,  T  hand  du.  D^i\  rib^  door  du.  D^hb^,  ns\z:  Up 

t'O  't  •-t'vv  •-t:'ttJ- 

du.  D^nSTT. 

•  -  T   : 

a.  The  dual  ending  in  Hebrew,  as  in  the  Indo-European  languages, 
Bopp  Vergleich.  Gramm.  §  206,  is  a  modified  and  strengthened  form  of  the 
plural  ending.  The  Arabic  goes  be3'ond  the  Hebrew  in  extending  the  dual 
to  verbs  and  pronouns.  The  Aramaeic  scarcely  retains  a  trace  of  it  except 
in  the  numeral  two  and  its  compounds. 

§  205.  The  dual  in  Hebrew  expresses  not  merely  two, 
but  a  couple  or  a  pair.  Hence  it  is  not  employed  with 
the  same  latitude  as  in  Greek  of  any  two  objects  of  the 
same  kind,  but  only  of  two  which  belong  together  and 
complete  each  other.    It  is  hence  restricted  to 

1.  Double  organs  of  men  or  animals,  C^ij^J  ears,  D'^5i< 
nostrils,  D'.?"]!?  horns,  D'StS  wings. 

2.  Objects  of  art  which  are  made  double  or  which 
consist  of  two  corresponding  parts,  D'^b^D  pair  of  shoes, 
D'DTi^'D  pair  of  scales,  DTij^b^J  pair  of  tongs,  D';hb'n  folding 
doors. 

3.  Objects  which  are  conceived  of  as  constituting  to- 
gether a  complete  whole,  particularly  measures  of  time 
-)T  quantity,  U^iTC"  period  of  two  days,  hiduum,  ^^^y^  two 
weeks,  fortnight,  'O^iyy^  two  years,  hiennium,  D';nSD  two 
measures,  D'^'b^^  tivo  talents,  ^'j-V^  Pro  v.  28:  6,  18  double 
way  (comp.  in  Enghsh  double  dealing),  tl'n'n}  pair  of  rivers, 
i.  e.  the  Tigris  and  Euphrates  viewed  in  combination. 

4.  The  numerals  D^ri  tivo,  C^bss  double,  W^h^'2  two 
hundred,  D";Bbs<  ttvo  thousand,  D^^lis";  two  myriads,  D^nynilJ 
sevenfold,  D";j<b3  of  tivo  sorts. 

5.  A  few  abstracts,  in  which  it  expresses  intensity, 
D";i^bs?  double-slothf Illness,  W'byz  double-rebellion,  D^in^ 
double-light,  i.  e.  noon,  D';n:?P"]  double-wickedness. 

a.  Names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs  take  the  dual  form  even  when  & 
higher  number  than  two  is  spoken  of,   t3";:Tl'ri  ;aSna   1  Sam.  2:  13  the  three 


S  20G,  207   GENDER  AND  NUMBEiv  OP  NOUNS.         219 

teeth,  t:-:b?  rz-iX  Ezek.  1:  6  four  wings,  Q^bs  t^-j  isa.  ^:  2  six  wings, 
=:r?  "^=f''^  Zech.  3:  9  seven  eyes,  d-iina-^i  D^n^n-bD  all  the  hands  and 
all  knees  Ezek.  7:  17.  Several  names  of  double  o'rgans  of  the  human  or 
animal  body  have  a  plural  form  likewise,  which  is  used  of  artificial  imita- 
tions or  of  inanimate  objects,  to  which  these  names  are  applied  by  a  figure 
of  speech,  §  200.  c,  B-^in;?  horns,  niinp  horns  of  the  altar,  t^bs  wings, 
r-bs  extremities,  Q^sns  shoulders,  rikrs  shoulder-pieces  of  a 'garment,' 
=T?  eyes,  r-ir?  fountains,  tD^B:^  feet,  D^^;t  times  prop,  beats  of  the  foot. 
In^a  few  instances  this  distinction  is  neglected,  n";nEi::  and  nirsib  lips, 
D'^n;  and  nin;;  si^ies,  d'^rs'i:  extremities. 

b.  The  dual  ending  is  in  a  very  few  words  superadded  to  that  of  the 
plural,  nir-n  tvalls  of  a  city,  Dirth  (7oi<6/e  tt>a//s,  rnh})  boards,  n':bnb 
ffoM^/e  boardi»g  of  a  ship,  Q-nnns  name  of  a  town  in  Judah,  Josh.  15:'36.  ^ 

c.  The  words  f^^  tcater  and  E-.^i  /teaim  have  the  appearance  of  dual 
forms;  they  are,  however,  commonly  regarded  as  plurals,  and  compared 
with  such  plural  forms  in  Aramaeic  as  )i:':i  Dan.  5:  9  from  the  singular  xi'j. 
In  C-'i:;?!'^.^^  Jerumlem,  or  as  it  is  commonly  written  without  the  Yodh 
cBi-ri"]':,  the  final  Mem  is  not  a  dual  ending  but  a  radical,  and  the  pronun- 
ciation is  simply  prolonged  from  Sp'in";,  comp.  Gen.  14:  18,  Ps.  76:  3, 
though  in  this  assimilation  to  a  dual  form  some  have  suspected  an  allusion 
to  the  current  division  into  the  upper  and  the  lower  city. 

§  206.  It  remains  to  consider  the  changes  in  the  nouns 
themselves,  which  result  from  attaching  to  them  the 
various  endings  for  gender  and  number  that  have  now 
been  recited.  These  depend  upon  the  structure  of  the 
nouns,  that  is  to  say,  upon  the  character  of  their  letters 
and  syllables,  and  are  governed  by  the  laws  of  Hebrew 
orthography  already  unfolded.  These  endings  may  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  viz.: 

1.  The  feminine  n,  which,  consisting  of  a  single  con- 
sonant, causes  no  removal  of  the  accent  and  produces 
changes  in  the  ultimate  only. 

2.  The  feminine  H^,  the  plural  D\  and  ni,  and  the 
dual  ni_,  which  remove  the  accent  to  their  own  initial 
vowel,  and  may  occasion  changes  in  both  the  ultimate 
and  the  penult. 

§  207.  Nouns  which  terminate  in  a  vowel  undergo  no 
change  on  receiving  the  feminine  characteristic  n,  "is:i"3 
Moabite,  n"Zi<ia  Modbitess,  ^1X2  finding,  fern,  nsib,  x'^n 


220  ETYMOLOGY.  §  208 

sinner,  X^iXb'r,  sin,  §  200.  Nouns  which  terminate  in  a  con- 
sonant experience  a  compression  of  their  final  syllable, 
which  upon  the  addition  of  t\,  ends  in  two  consonants  in- 
stead of  one,  §  66. 2,  and  an  auxiliary  Seghol  is  introduced 
to  relieve  the  harshness  of  the  combination,  §  61.  2.  In 
consequence  of  this  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  changed 
from  a  or  a  to  e,  §  63.  2.  a,  from  e  or  t  to  e,  or  in  a  few 
words  to  e,  and  from  o  or  t^  to  ti,  §  61.  4.  "iSo:;  broken 
fem.  n'^iili::,  DT^^iit  reddish  fem.  n■^.TI■;^*,  il^yr]  going  fern. 
riSBn,  ^^25  master,  n^iis  ynistress,  tibTifive  fem.  ntt:~,  IT"^ 
onan,  t^^k  woman,  §  216.  1.  &,  'pkl  scattered  fem.  rilsiisD, 
H'l^^nj  and  rniinp  brass.  When  the  final  consonant  is  a 
guttural,  there  is  the  usual  substitution  of  Pattahh  for 
Seghol,  ^jnin  hearing  fem.  T\>i2W,  Th'2  touching  fem.  T^yh'U. 

a.  In  many  cases  the  feminine  is  formed  indifferently  by  n  or  by  n  ;  in 
others  usage  inclines  in  favor  of  one  or  of  the  other  ending,  though  no  ab 
solute  rule  can  be  given  upon  the  subject.  It  may  be  said,  however,  that  ad- 
jectives in  '^_  almost  always  receive  ri;  active  participles,  except  those  of  !•"", 
l"s  and  (1  b  veibs,  oftener  take  in  than  n  ;  n  is  also  found,  though  less  frequently, 
with  the  passive  participles  except  that  of  Kal,  from  which  it  is  excluded. 

b.  A  final "],  "i  or  ri  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  feminine  characteristic 
n  and  contracted  with  it,  §  54,  ?13  for  r33  dmighter,  rino  for  Tl.rr^gift,  nis 
for  HjiiN  truth,  nnx  for  P'lnx  one,_nni;3^3  l  Kin,  1: 15  for  nn^njp  ministeritig, 
nnc^  Mai.  1:  14  for  rirnd'a  corrupt,  rrzno  for  rirhn^  jmn.  Tlie  changes  of 
the  ultimate  vowel  are  due  to  its  compression  before  concurring  consonants. 

c.  The  vowel  ii  remains  in  ri*2!liri  Lev.  5:  21  deposit,  and  the  proper 
name  H^n^ri  Tanhumeth.  From  US  brother,  Dfj  father-in-law  are  formed 
ninx  sister,  iriisn  mother -in-laio,  the  radical  ^,  which  has  been  dropped 
from  the  masculine,  retaining  its  place  before  the  sign  of  the  feminine, 
comp.  §  101.  1.  a;  TnBis:  difficult  Deut.  30:  11  is  for  ns^s?  from  N^Si. 

§  208.  The  changes  which  result  from  appending  the 
feminine  termination  il^,  the  plural  terminations  D^.  and 
ri,  and  the  dual  termination  D*_,  are  of  three  sorts,  viz.: 

1.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  is 
a  mixed  syllable. 

2.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  ultimate,  when  it  i? 
a  simple  syllable. 

3.  Those  which  take  place  in  the  penult. 


§  209 


GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  221 


§  209.  When  the  ultimate  is  a  mixed  syllable  bearing 
the  accent,  it  is  affected  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  Tsere  remains  unchanged,  if  the  word  is  a  mono- 
syllable or  the  preceding  vowel  is  Kamets,  otherwise  it 
is  rejected;  other  vowel's  suffer  no  change,  ini2  dead  fem. 
Hint:,  pi.  U't'l]  t]V  thigh  du.D':i"]";,  D^r  complete  fem.  rfnzt. 
pi.  D'i^bTr,  f.  pi.  niijb^T;  !;:n  going  fem.  riDbn,  pi.  n^rbn, 
f.  pi.  niibh. 

a.  The  rejection  of  Tsere  is  due  to  the  tendency  to  abbreviate  words 
which  are  increased  by  additions  at  the  end,  §  66.  1.  It  is  only  retained 
as  a  pretonic  vowel,  §  64.  2,  when  the  word  is  otherwise  sufficiently  abbre- 
viated, or  its  rejection  would  .shorten  the  word  unduly.  Tsere  is  retained 
contrary  to  the  rule  by  CrrJ,  C^i-'S"!  children  of  the  third  and  fo\irth 
generations,  by  a  few  exceptional  forms,  e.  g.  i^^^a  Jer.  3:  8.  11,  n^?'^? 
Ex.  23:  26,  nVjj  Cant.  1:  6,  nTapriJ  Isa.  54:  1,  and  frequently  with  the 
pause  accents,  §  65,  e.  g.  '^'j^'^'l  Isa.  21:  3,  B'^pi'J  Lam.  1:  16,  : ri-^^'i":: 
Isa.  49:  8,  C-^'J.:2S;  Ex.  28:  40,  Q"'';;.'i:D  Gen.  19:  11,  2  Kin.  6:  18  (once  with 
Tiphhha),  :D''£'^V?  Isa.  2:  20,  D"'O^^E  Eccles.  2:  5,  ninpT^  Isa.  2:4.  It  also 
appears  in  several  feminine  substantives,  both  singular  and  plural,  e.  g. 
nrsri^  overthrotc,  niii^io  counsels,  rthsin  abomination.  !i;"'A3p  staff,  nk"i"3'2 
loitch.  On  the  other  hand,  the  following  feminines  reject  it  though  pre- 
ceded by  Kamets,  b?"'  wild-goat,  fem.  nis^,  "il"^  ostrich,  fem.  inx;;^,  "n^ 
thigh,  fem.  ns^^.  It  is  also  dropped  from  the  plural  of  the  monosyllable 
•3  son,  and  its  place  supplied  by  a  pretonic  Kamets,  D"^:3  sons,  n"3  daugh- 
ters, the  singular  of  the  feminine  being  na  for  nD3,  §  207.  h\  so  S^T"?  fork 
pi.  nSilpTp. 

6.  Kamets  in  the  ultimate  is  retained  as  a  pretonic  vowel,  "a'i  ivhife, 
fem.  nin^,  pi.  C'i^b,  f.  pi.  niinb;  nkn^  fortress,  pi.  n"i7.i3-3  and  n^:i:;-2, 
only  disappearing  in  a  few  exceptional  cases,  "i^iiJ  hair,  fem.  n"r.|;,  'iw 
quail,  pi.  C!"''iV4?i  rnnarp  and  ninasa  fords,  tss  talent  du.  C'~_^^  but  in 
pause  G-nss,  "in3  river  du.  DIT'^l^,  wns^a  pasture,  pi.  aiins"?  once  nrrijo 
(with  Hholem).  So  in  the  x'b  participles  K33  prophesying  pi.  C^xs? ,  Nr::? 
polluted  pi.  CN-aiip,  xkr?  found  pi.  CNSts;;  but  with  the  pause  accents 
Kamets  returns,  0"^X3:  Ezek.  13:  2,  !n"'N".J'a?  Ezr,  8:  25.  The  foreign  word 
"3'^Q  suburbs  forms  its  plural  irregularly  c^ni'isi. 

c.  Hholem  and  Hhirik  commonly  suffer  no  change;  but  in  a  few  words 
Shurek  takes  the  place  of  the  former,  and  in  one  Tsere  is  substituted  for 
the  latter,  §  66.  2  (c),  ^iiia  terror  pi.  Cinn^-a,  )^b•2  habifaHon  pi.  =":"r"2, 
p-T-2  sweet  fem.  n^nnp  pi.  C'f^m^,  pis  di-^tn-ss  fem.  nj^ns,  -ps-a  lodging 
fem.'niib-a,  oii^  flight  fem.  Hcnj-;,  mi's  rest  fem.  nnn:TD,  n-^-a  fortification 
fem.  ■ini:!i'2,  p-33  (7eej9  fem.  nf^^o^  Prov.  23:  27  and  nf^-2^',  p"nn  c/iain  pi. 
r-pinn  l  kin.  6:  21  K'ri;  a"^ljs  escaped  pi.  n^i:^?3  or  "'S?.^  fem.  n-j-ps  or 


222  ETYMOLOGY.  §209 

d.  Hholem  is  dropped  from  the  plural  of  "liea  bird  pi.  O'^^ca ,  as  well 
as  from  the  plural  of  nouns  having  the  feminine  characteristic  O  in  the 
singular;  thus  nbj'bj  skull,  by  the  substitution  of  the  plural  ending  ni  for 
n. ,  §  201,  becomes  V.'^ibi^,  rp^n^  course,  pi.  nipbnp,  or  with  Hhateph- 
Kamets  under  a  doubled  letter,  §  16.  3.  b,  ri:Fi2  coat  pi.  ni'ns,  n?3"d  ear  of 
corn,  pi.  fi"i!i3d;  in  two  instances  a  pretouic  Karnets  is  inserted,  n"isi3 
drought  pi.  nin^?,  trynw  Astarte  pi.  ninn'::?. 

e.  Seghol  in  nouns  with  the  feminine  characteristic  H  affixed  mostly 
follows  the  law  of  the  vowel  from  which  it  has  sprung,  §  207;  if  it  has 
been  derived  from  Tsere  it  is  rejected,  if  from  any  other  vowel  it  is  still  in 
some  instances  rejected,  though  more  commonly  it  reverts  to  its  original 
form  and  is  retained,  ri^^D'i'i  sucker  (from  pii"')  pi.  nipsii,  T'^Jx  epistle  (from 
"i?N)  pi.  ninSN,  rb=xi2  knife  (from  h'z^-2)  pi.  ni^sx^a,  nis^p'ix  reddish  (from 
^^P^i^?)  pl-  5^'i^'!?r^^'  ^i^.r?  nurse  (from  p'lp^)  pi.  nipr^a,  nipbp  scale  pi. 
D'^'i'piTp  and  nibp'^p .  Pattahh,  which  has  arisen  from  a  Seghol  so  situated 
under  the  influence  of  a  guttural,  follows  the  same  rule,  jH^'ZlJ  ring  pl. 
rii^Sb:,  ri"a;  (from  ?.i:)  touching  pl.  rsj:b. 

f.  A  few  nouns  with  quiescents  in  the  ultimate  present  apparent  ex- 
ceptions which  are,  however,  readily  explained  by  the  contractions  which 
thej-  have  undergone.  Thus  riin  for  mn,  §  57.  2  (5),  thorn,  has  its  plural 
D^fjin  or  C^r^n;  or  (ni^)  day,  pl,  Qiri';  (Q^r'i'i);  "pn^  ("i"!'?)  strife,  pl.  Q-'ii'i^; 
^^tl  (-lid)  ox,  pl.  Q-inrj;  i^ti  for  ^^r\  or  lyh,  §  188.  2.  c,  pot,  pl.  d-^ili  or 
d"^"!;^.  §  210.  3;  pTJ  (p-.ia  or  pVt)  sW^,  pl.  Q'^pVw";  T^^'  ("."li;  or  "i"]!?)  c%. 
pl.  once  Q'^n^3J  Judg.  10:  4  usually  contracted  to  tT'^V;  t^X"l  (dx'n)  ^earf, 
pl.  C^i'ST  (Q"^i;N"").  So  riNp  measure  becomes  in  the  dual  Q"^nX!3  for  d'nxp 
and  nx^a  one  hundred,  du.  Ci";rix^  for  C"]'nN-a;  n^xbia  (nisxb^,  §  57.  2  (3)), 
work,  probably  had  in  the  absolute  plural  riixVp,  whence  the  construct  is 

2.  The  final  consonant  sometimes  receives  Daghesh- 
forte  before  the  added  termination,  causing  the  preced- 
ing vowel  to  be  shortened  from  a  to  cl,  from  e  or  e  to  «, 
and  from  o  or  u  to  it,  §  61.  5.  This  takes  place  regularly 
in  nomis  which  are  derived  from  contracted  ^"^  roots, 
DP;  perfect  fem.  T^iSP,  D^  sea  pl.  D"^^;  ]tsD  (from  ';5)  shield, 
pl.  U'h'.y2  and  riiic»13;  ph  statute  pl.  D^{?",  fem.  mj5",  pl.lnipn, 
or  in  whose  final  letter  two  consonants  have  coalesced, 
TiX  for  P;:n  du.  n-Ei<  nose;  V  for  73^  she-goat  pl.  Q-b";  n:; 
for  r^^y  time  pl.  D'PS'  and  l^in^;  Tli'J^  for  lr:^?  maw,  m^X 
woman,  and  it  not  infrequently  occurs  in  other  cases. 

a.  Nouns  with  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  with  few  exceptions  double 
their  final  letter  being  either  contracted  forms,  b'n  weak  pl.  C^H  fem.  n^^ 
pl.  ri's^,  or  receiving  Daghesh-forte  conservative  in  order  to  preserve  th« 


§209 


GENDER  AND  NUMBEE  OF  NOUNS.  223 


short  vowel,  ois  pool  pi.  f^JX;  so  ',Eix  wheel,  b'lri  myrtle,  ui"2  fete,  rhrr. 
frightful,  pbp:'?  greenish,  "lix-?  desire.  Before  n  Pattahh  may  be  retained 
in  an  intermediate  syllable,  nb  fresh  pi.  Ci"^rb;  before  other  gutturals  it  is 
lengthened  to  Kamets,  §  60.  4,  ^b  prince  pi.  D'''S"r  fem.  n^i;  so  niy^^JX 
fingers,  nrsnx  /b?<r,  U^'^'^'is  helmets,  n'^-^-3  siraiYs  and  n"'X';!in  baskets,  rUib 
loops,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular,  but  are  commonly  referred  to 
•'•in,  "^Bl?,  §  196.  h,  "^  being  changed  to  X  as  in  §  210.  3.  d;  also  n^3  breast, 
■which  omits  Daghesh  du.  try:D.  Pattahh  is  in  the  following  examples 
changed  to  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter,  §  58.  2,  1^  prey  fem.  nT3,  m 
fear  fem.  nrn,  m  wine-press  pi.  n'.hj,  Td  garment  pi.  Q""^.^  and  Di^,^,  D'O 
tribute,  r;0  ftastM,  na  morsel,  IS  s/rfe,  broj,  u'/jee^,  ri'fabo  baskets,  tiipro 
palm-branches,  a^i^a  threshing-sledge  pi.  C"in"i^  or  by  the  resolution  of 
Daghesh-forte,  §  59.  a,  D'^i'iniri.  It  is  rejected  from  V-^VS.  cymbal  pi.  fi'ill^i:, 
')t  sori  pi.  D"i;i,  D'^n^'iS  berries,  probably  from  "ijnj  and  n'^r'a  men,  from  the 
obsolete  singular,  Dp.  The  plural  of  C?  people  is  Di-b?  and  in  a  very  few 
instances  with  the  doubled  letter  repeated,  D"^'b':;J;  so  111  mountain  pi.  C^n 
and  d'^^'^ri  Deut.  8:  9,  h'l  shadoio  pi.  n"^i?';:i,  pn  statute  pi.  n"^j?n,  and  twice 
in  the  construct,  ""^ppn  Judg.  5:  15,  Isa.  10:  1,  which  implies  the  absolute 
form  D'^jrjrn. 

h.  The  final  letter  in  doubled  after  Kamets  in  the  following  words  be- 
sides those  from  'SV  roots,  C^^iX  porch  pi.  Cs^X;  so  'irx  hire,  br;  camel, 
TaT  time,  'T(~7)'o  darkness,  "ph-yci  distance,  "iji^  small,  'isn  green,  'ixd  quiet, 
'(O^a  lily,  '{s.':i  coney,  to  which  should  perhaps  be  added  S'^p?  Deut.  8:  15 
scorpion,  though  as  it  has  a  pause  accent  in  this  place  which  is  the  only 
one  where  it  is  found  with  Kamets,  its  proper  form  may  perhaps  have  been 
^■^p?!  §  65.  The  Niphal  participle  'iSr?  honored  has  in  the  plural  both 
D'in233  and  &^1233 .  Several  other  words,  which  only  occur  in  the  plural, 
are  in  the  lexicons  referred  to  singulars  with  Kamets  in  the  ultimate;  but 
the  vowel  may,  with  equal  if  not  greater  probabilit3',  be  supposed  to  have 
been  Pattahh.  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh  before  n,  which  does  not 
admit  Daghesh-forte,  in  the  plurals  of  nx  brother  pi.  tiinx,  nn  hook,  rtsip 
confidence,  §  60.  4.  a. 

c.  The  following  nouns  with  Hholem  in  the  ultimate  fall  under  this 
rule,  in  addition  to  those  derived  from  ^'S  roots,  '^.Z^  peak  pi.  C^i22;,  Gt:"in 
sacred  scribe,  -^^n  hand,  Dxb  nation,  dT^s  naked,  and  several  adjectives 
of  the  form  biip,  which  are  mostly  written  without  the  vowel-letter  1, 
§  14.  3,  e.  g.  C^x  red  fem.  niaix,  n-^iinx,  d^'x  terrible,  'qnx  long,  etc.;  nscx 
dunghill  takes  the  form  Wns'^x  in  the  plural. 

d.  There  are  only  two  examples  of  doubling  when  the  vowel  of  the 
ultimate  is  Shurek,  d"^'f~in  Prov.  24:  31  nettles  or  brambles  from  b>l~.n,  ni'xn 
Esth.  2:  9  from  i^licn  Kal  pass.  part,  of  nx"!. 

e.  la'^X  (T^'JX)  man  is  not  contracted  in  the  plural  d"r:x  men;  in  the 
feminine,  for  the  sake  of  distinction,  the  initial  weak  letter  is  dropped, 
D"'ii;D  women,  which  is  used  as  the  plural  of  rttx  woman;  C^'r^x  men  and 
P»ix  u-omen  are  rare  and  poetic,  rx  ploughshare  Lm  either  D"'rx  or  C^fnx 
in  the  plural. 


224  ETYMOLOGY.  .         §  210 

§  210.  1.  Segholate  nouns,  or  those  wliicli  have  an 
unaccented  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  drop  it  when  any 
addition  is  made  to  them,  §  66.  2.  (a).  As  this  vowel 
arose  from  the  concurrence  of  voweUess  consonants  at 
the  end  of  the  word,  the  necessity  for  its  presence  ceases 
when  that  condition  no  longer  exists.  Segholates  thus 
revert  to  their  original  form  of  a  monosyllable  ending  in 
concurrent  consonants,  §  185. 

2.  Monosyllables  of  this  description  receive  the  femi- 
nine ending  with  no  further  change  than  the  shortening 
due  to  the  removal  of  the  accent,  in  consequence  of  which 
0  becomes  o  or  more  rarely  u,  e  becomes  ^  or  more 
rarely  e;  e  may  be  restored  to  a  from  which  it  has  com- 
monly arisen,  §  185,  or  hke  e  it  may  become  i  or  e, 
n^'S  (p:2S')  strength  fem.  nblfy,  iZJiH  (irsn)  fern,  ntzri  free- 
dom, "i:^^^  (yni^)  saying  fem.  ny2i^  and  nn7^^,  r(:t  (Tjb?^) 
king,  n3b?J  queen,  Tzb  slaughter  fem.  HnntD. 

a.  Nouns  having  either  of  the  forms  t^^i^p,  n^zs]?,  ii^::p,  <^^t2p,  iib::p, 
are  consequently  to  be  regarded  as  sprung  from  monosyllables  with  the 
vowel  given  to  the  first  radical. 

3.  Before  the  plural  terminations  a  pretonic  Kamets 
is  inserted,  and  the  original  vowel  of  the  monosyllable 
falls  away,  1\V2  i"^)'^)  king  pi.  D^Dbl2,  nsb'^  queen  pi.  T\ibbl2, 

']'nk  (795<)  saying  pi.  D^nrs,  rn'2i^  id.  pi.  ninrs,  b?s  (b:;2) 
work,  pi.  D^b:^s,  i<pn  sin  pi.  D^J<t:r;. 

a.  Pretonic  Kamets  is  not  admitted  by  the  numerals  D'^niTS  twenty 
from  'y^y.  ten,  D"^^"3'>:3  seventy  from  snij  seven,  D'^S'i^Jn  ninety  from  vch  nine. 
The  words  tn^"^  pistachio-nuts,  ti'\'yr\  ebony,  D"'3Na  Job  40:  21.  22,  D'^^n 
mercies,  Q"'^|r">:3  and  ni^pia  sycamores,  which  do  not  occur  in  the  singular, 
have  been  regarded  as  examples  of  a  like  omission;  though  the  first  is 
derived  by  Fiirst  from  >13::3,  and  the  second  by  Gesenius  from  "'inin.  The 
plural  of  i^^^n  wisdom  is  not  niisn  but  ni^sn.  Quadriliteral  Segholates 
also  receive  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural  "i^JS  pi.  D"'3i'33  merchants,  un- 
less the  new  letter  creates  an  additional  syllable,  in  which  case  the  intro- 
duction of  Kamets  would  prolong  the  word  too  much,  UJ53S  concubine  pi 
t2"'i::|B,  'I'ls^j  nail  ti"'i"iaa. 

b.  The  superior  tenacity  of  Hholem,  §  60.  1.  a  (4),  is  shown  by  the 


§  211  GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  225 

occasional  retention  of  fl,   not  only  as  a  compound  Sh'va  nnder  gutturals 

nnii  icd?/  pi.  r-rnx,  so  -c-in  month,  'j'^n  thicket,  "i^i"  sheof,  "^zi  fatvn;  but 
as  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kainets-Hhatuph  in  '"iK  fhreshitig-floor  pi.  with  art. 
nii~i:n,  r-p  holiness  pi.  C-i^i]^  and  witli  art.  nir-jsn,  ir-ir  root  pi.  f'liii'a, 
§  19.  2.  rt,  or  as  a  long  vowel  in  bni<  feni  pi.  C'^'inx,  nnx  stall  pi.  nHnx, 
§  60.  3.  e,  or  shifted  to  the  following  letter  so  as  tu  take  the  place  of  the 
pretonic  Kamets  in  'tia  thumb  pi.  r.ii'na,  ro':  brightness  pi.  nins:,  §  186.  a. 
Comp.  bCQ  (^Cs)  graven  image  pi.  D^iiiDQ.  In  the  other  nouns  it  is  rejected, 
ijriii  morning  pi.  c^nj^a;  so  "i"]:!  threshing-floor,  "isis  cypress,  y^jp  handful, 
npn  spear,  cnn  juniper,  brii:  hollow  of  the  hand. 

c.  Middle  Vav  quiesces  in  the  plural  of  the  following  nouns:  nis  death 
pi.  DTi^,  n^l?  iniquity  pi.  ri5"i?.  Gesenius  regards  D'^i'ix  Prov.  11:  7, 
Hos.  9:  4,  as  the  plural  of  )'\i<,  while  others  derive  it  from  'pX,  translating 
it  riches  in  the  former  passage  and  sorrow  in  the  latter,  the  primary  idea 
out  of  which  both  senses  spring  being  that  of  toil.  Middle  Yodh  quiesces 
in  the  plural  of  b^k  ram  pi.  C^'i^X ,  n"^T  olive  pi.  D'^nij,  b";^  night  pi.  rflb'^b, 
but  not  in  b'h  strength  pi.  n^b^n,  ''^_b  fountain  pi.  n'irr,  "i"^l'  ass-colt  pi. 
cn^r,  ■z-'n  goat  pi.  n^"i""n.  The  plural  of  N";?.  valley  is  T'S'^l  by  trans- 
position from  the  regular  form  niX"i5  which  is  twice  found  in  the  K'thibh 
2  Kin.  2:  16,  Ezek.  6:3;  n";3  house  has  as  its  plural  S'fns  Idtfim  §  19.  2.  a, 
whether  this  be  explained  as  for  D'lnia  from  1133  to  build  or  for  D'^hra  from 

•  :  T  T  T  •    :   T 

r!'3  #0  lodge.  Middle  Yodh  always  quiesces  before  the  feminine  and  dual 
endings,  ~i''4  provision  fem.  l^^■^;!J,  ',"];"  eye  du.  D']i"'2J. 

d.  Monosyllables  in  "^  from  fib  roots  belong  properly  to  this  forma- 
tion, §  57.  2  (4)  and  §  186.  b,  and  follow  the  rules  given  above  both  in  the 
fem  nine  '^bn  (";bn)  necklace  fem.  IT^btl,  and  the  plural  ■^■HwS  C"]"!^)  /ion  pi. 
fi^nx  and  ri^'iS,  inr.  HtZ  pi.  D^^.^a ,  or  with  the  change  of  "i  to  N,  §  56.  4, 
which  also  occurs  in  verbs,  §  179.  3,  "bn  necklace  pi.  C^sbn,  "rs  simple  pi. 
D^V-?,  nVs  and  C^.X"?,  ""i^^  gazelle  pi.  S"^";3:i,  C^xaii  and  r"j<3:i;  in  hke 
manner  C'XZ^;  branches,  csab  lions  are  referred  to  ^S"  and  ""hb  though 
these  singulars  do  not  occur;  "^bs  ("^b?)  utensil  does  not  receive  Kamets  in 
the  plural  C^ba.  No  absolute  plurals  occur  of  Segholates  with  final  Vav, 
only  the  construct  forms  "'IJf'l,  ^iSp. 

4.  The  dual  sometimes  takes  a  pretonic  Kamets  like 
the  plural,  but  more  frequently  follows  the  feminine  in 
not  requiring  its  insertion,  tib'^  (rb^l)  door  du.  U'bb%  "^"^i 
(T]")-!)  way  du.  D^bn^,  -j-^p  (-|-)]5)  horn  du.  D::7P  and  D:i"ip, 
"rb  cAeeA:  du.  D^^'b,  t^ni  (t|-i3)  A:?2ee  du.  D:3~3,  so  D^iP'J, 
D-b:  J,  n-:ii-;>',  c-^r;:;. 

§  211.  When  the  ultimate  is  a  simple  syllable,  the 
following  cases  occur,  viz: 

1.  Final  n_  is  rejected  before  the  feminine  and  plural 

15 


226  ETYMOLOGY.  8  211 

endings,  nE^  beautiful  fern.  mS^  f.  pi.  nii^,  ^^2?."-?.  work  pi. 

D"ib?_'-3;  so  ripn"^.  mm_2?  du.  D^JTO- 

a.  Tlie  last  radical  in  words  of  this  description  is  properly  '^,  which  is 
rejected  after  a  vowelless  letter,  §  62.  2.  c,  so  that  TtZ^  is  for  M^S^  and 
D"'C?B  for  D"'^!:;?.;^.  in  a  very  few  instances  the  radical  "^  remains,  e.  g. 
t^yc'y  Cant.  1 :  7  from  nis"  ('•h's)  O^T:^^  Isa.  25 :  6  from  nn-ari  C^nri^)  and  is 
even  strengthened  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  209.  2,  n^ais  Lam.  i:  16  from  MD'ia, 
n^-;s  and  nnb,  §  196.  b,  fem.  of  nVs,  ni'-in  Hos.  14:  1,  elsewhere  ninn, 
ns  month,  edge  pi.  Q-iQ,  nrs  and  ni^ig,  or  changed  to  X,  §  56.  4,  n'ii:  C^^z:) 
ynwng  lamb  n"'kba  (n^^ba),  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  a  singular 
"^3::  which  no  where  occurs;  nsbn  Ps.  10:  8  has  as  its  plural  Q"'iobn  ver.  10. 

2.  Final "'.  may  combine  with  the  feminine  and  plural 
endings,  so  as  to  form  H^ , ,  D"'^ . ,  rii^ . ,  or  it  may  in  the 
masculine  plural  be  contracted  to  n^. ,  §  62.  2,  ^^i:?  Hebreiv 
pi.  D^nny  and  D^^.-^ny  fem.  riHn:?  f.  pi.  ni^":n:j?;  ^i?  sliip  pi 
D'22  and  U"^^,  "irs"  /ree  pi.  D^iijin,  yi  pure  pi.  Dip3.  So 
nouns  in  TP^  upon  the  exchange  of  the  feminine  singular 
for  the  plural  termination  n^iis?  Ammonitess  pi.  ni^ji^?, 

nv.n  Hittitess  n'^nn. 

a.  In  n^N'':;"]?  2  Chron.  17:  11  Arabians  from  "^i;")?  an  X  is  interposed, 
elsewhere  t2"'i:"i";  ni'^i  branches,  ni'lT  corners  and  rTi'pJ^a  bowls,  which  do 
not  occur  in  the  singula!-,  are  assumed  to  be  from  H^?^,  H'^IT  and  ri"'|3DTD. 

b.  A  few  monosyllables  in  "^^  form  their  feminines  in  this  manner, 
though  in  the  masculine  plural  they  follow  the  rule  before  given,  §  210.  3.  d, 
inj  kid  fem.  n^-iS,  ih^  lion,  K^nb  lioness,  §  198.  d,  "^hs  gazelle  fem.  n^niil 
(n"'::"4  and  N"^:;^  are  used  as  proper  names),  '^ryd  drinking  fem.  H^nd. 

3.  There  are  few  examples  of  final  ^  or  i  with  added 
endings.  The  following  are  the  forms  wliich  they  assume : 
^p'jj  drink  pi.  D'ipaj,  n^rba  kingdom  pi.  rii^Sb'C,  §  62.  2, 
Ml?  testimony  pi.  nil^;,  nins  sister  pi.  riinij  and  ni^ns;  for 
nr.rs,  iia"]  and  5<in-:  myriad  pi.  niin,  risiiin  and  niwsin":;  the 
dual  D'nin";  inserts  the  sign  of  the  feminine,  or  as  others 
think  of  the  plural  §  205.  b. 

a.  ni'^Jlj  or  rr:n  Jer.  37:  16  cells  is  referred  to  the  assumed  singular 
win:   mi:33  Isa.  3:  'l6  K'thibh  and  nilbSJ  1  Sam.  25:  18  K'thibh  are  formed 

T  ' 

from  ii::;,  -hy  abbreviated  Kal  passive  participles,  §  174.  5,  but  in  the  ab- 
sence of  the  appropriate  vowel  points  their  precise  pronunciation  cannot 
be  determined. 

b.  Nouns  ending  in  a  quiescent  radical  X  may  be  regarded  as  terminating 


§  212  GENDER  AND  NUMBER  OF  NOUNS.  227 

in  a  consonant,  since  this  letter  resumes  its  consonantal  power  upon  at. 
addition  being  made  to  the  word.  Comp.  §  164.  nk'o:  found  fem.  ni<:i"3:, 
itr^h  wild  ass  pi.  c^ii;;?. 

§  212.  The  changes,  which  occur  in  the  penult,  arise 
from  the  disposition  to  shorten  the  former  part  of  a  word, 
when  its  accent  has  been  carried  forward  by  accessions 
at  the  end,  §  66.  2.  They  consist  in  the  rejection  of 
Kamets  or  Tsere,  bii3  great  fem.  n'iiiS  pi.  WOTij  f.  pi. 
riiiiii5,  "^b.!  tvord  pi.  D"''!^;',  "jinST  memorial  pi.  fiiil",  ris 
iving  du.  0*^33,  niTw  restoring  pi.  D"i''u:^  fem.  rin^lljj:,  "k*^ 
distress  pi.  C^".:i*.2,  ''ib  Levite  pi.  D^^.lb,  except  from  nouns 
in  M  in  which  the  place  of  the  accent  is  not  changed  b^; 
the  addition  of  the  terminations  for  gender  and  number, 
§211. 1,  ns^  beautifuHem.  Hs^pl.  T\'\ki,  rn;<L  field  pi.  f^iiiz;, 
nirp  hard  pi.  D^'iji:,  ni?7j  pi.  D'i'S  and  nii'H  loiuels,  ~53 
smitten  pi.  D''i:.  Other  penultimate  vowels  are  mostly 
exempt  from  change. 

a.  Kamets,  which  has  arisen  from  Pattahh  in  consequence  of  the  suc- 
ceeding letter  not  being  able  to  receive  Daghesh-forte,  as  the  form  pro- 
perly requires,  is  incapable  of  rejection.  Such  a  Kamets  is  accordingly 
retained  without  change  before  "i,  e.  g.  ^^n  for  'vU";)!,  §  189.  1,  workman 
pi.  Qiir'^n,  so  "C^JQ  horseman,  n^^a  fugitive,  Qino  (const.  D"''nD)  eunuch, 
yins  terrible^  7"*^.?  violent,  yi^n  diligent,  or  shortened  to  Pattahh  before 
n,  §  60.  1.  a  (4),  nina  young  man  pi.  n'^^ina.  Kamets  is  also  retained  in 
certain  ys,  15  and  H'b  derivatives  as  a  sort  of  compensation  for  the  reduction 
of  the  root  by  contraction  or  quiescence,  e.  g.  "i.:;^  shield  pi.  ^''Y^'^  and  rr::;^, 
'^^b•o  fortress  pi.  Q'T^'p,  r."'"i'^  branch  pi.  rv^^,  rriij  corner  pi.  ni'iT,  rrb'n 
(from  W-i)  height,  du.  C'r'^^.  Other  instances  of  its  retention  are  rare  and 
exceptional,  ^"iia  treacherous  fem.  ir'i'isa,  snr:j  (const.  ?air)  z<?eeA:  pi.  fi"'i?2U 
and  niirnp  but  du.  D'^i-r:;,  ^■'^•j  ivarrior  pi.  :"b''?w' 

t.  wiien  Kamets  following  a  doubled  letter  is  rejected,  and  Daghesh- 
forte  is  omitted  in  consequence,  §  25,  the  antepenultimate  vowel  is  in  a  few 
instances  changed  from  Hhirik  to  Seghol,  §  61.  5,  '^vrn  vision  pi.  niirin, 
'(r\'Ji"_  a  tenth  pi.  C^inr:?,  but  "linST  memorial  pi.  nii'iri. 

c.  Tsere  is  not  rejected  if  it  has  arisen  from  Hhirik  before  a  guttural 
in  a  form  which  properly  requires  Daghesh-forte,  "Oy^  for  ^l^n,  §  189.  \.h, 
deaf  pi.  C^'!:J"]n,  or  if  it  is  commonly  represented  by  "i,  §  14.  3,  r3"'3  or  r5"'3, 
§  188,  hammer  pi.  risViiSi,  or  a  radical  "^  quiesces  in  it,  "r'X  or  irx  (from 
•|r%  §  191)  perennial  pi.  D'^in'^^  or  d'^inx,  bb-'H  te^nple  pi.  C'^^'v'.  and  rnPD-^n, 
aniiu:"'52  and  D-'nca  rectitude,  D^DIT'T  (from  l^T  or  T^])  proud.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional,  e.  g.  n-'Bb^X  Neb   3 :  34  feeble. 

15* 


228  ETYMOLOGY,  §  213 

d.  Hholem  is  almost  invariably  retained  in  the  penult,  yet  it  yields  to 
the  strong  tendency  to  abbreviation  in  the  following  trisyllables;  IT'ii^TlJx 
Ashdoditess  pi.  rih-inx  Neh.  13:  23  K'ri  (K'thibh  nrTiTrx),  n"^ii73?  Aiu- 
monitess  pi,  nv:;p?  id!  (K'thibh  m-iSI^Si,  1  Kin.  11:  1  ri'lisa?),  '^ih^:i  Sido- 
nian  f.  pi,  rfii^^.^  where  long  Hhirik  becomes  Tsere  before  concurrent  con- 
sonants, §  61.  4. 

e.  When  the  penult  is  a  mixed  syllable  containing  a  short  vowel,  it  is 
ordinarily  not  subject  to  change,  §  58.  2.  The  tendency  to  the  greatest 
possible  abbreviation  is  betrayed,  however,  in  a  few  examples  by  the  re- 
duction  of  the   diphthongal   Seghol   to   Pattahh,   corap.   §  60.  3.  b.      ^^l^X 

cluster  pi.  nferx  Cant.  7:  8,  nsTa  chariot  fern.  J^^S-^p  pi.  nihs")^,  pTnXi 
distance  pi.  n"jsn"]Ta  and  C^jsn"}^,  or  of  Pattahh  to  the  briefest  of  the  slurt 
vowels  Hhirik,  comp.  §  209.  2  a,  •'^tv'b}  fury  pi.  m'sr^T ,  s'i"?  fork  pi.  niibj^, 
§  192.  a,  rnH  dish  pi.  ninbs  by  the  resolution  of  Daghesh-forte  for  nini::, 
§  59.  a;  "inX  for  ^HN  other  has  in  the  plural  D'^nnx,  ninnx  as  if  from  "inx, 
rtm  coal  has  pi,  Cvrj  by  §  63.  1. 

§  213.  As  precisely  the  same  changes  result  from  ap- 
pending the  feminine  H^  and  the  plural  endings,  except 
in  the  single  case  of  Segholate  nouns  or  monosyllables 
terminating  in  concurrent  consonants,  8  210,  nouns  in  H 
become  plural  with  no  further  change  than  that  of  their 
termination  nbb"^^  kingdom  pi.  T^ibb'D^l',  only  in  the  excep- 
tional case  referred  to  a  pretonic  Kamets  must  be  inserted 
nsb'^  queen  from  Tjb"^,  pi.  by  §  210.  3.  flibb^a.  Nouns  in  n, 
after  omitting  the  feminine  ending,  are  liable  to  the  re- 
jection or  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  in 
forming  the  plural,  as  explained  §  209.  1.  d.  and  e,  n';ijs; 
epistle  (from  ^h^)  pi.  ninS^*,  ri"]t?iiJ53  ohservance  (from  I'b'i:"::) 
pi.  rii""^^".:.  As  the  dual  ending  is  not  substituted  for  that 
of  the  feminine  singular,  but  added  to  it,  it  is  simjoly 
necessary  in  applying  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the 
dual,  to  observe  that  the  old  ending  tn^  takes  the  place 
of  n^,  §  204.  Thus  ni'iT  (T\y^)  year,  by  §  212,  becomes  in 
:he  dual  D-nD'^  nb^  door  by  8  210.  4,  du.  D^nb'n,  nirn] 
hrass  du.  D^'nirr]. 

a.  In  the  folloAving  examples  a  radical,  whieli  has  been  rejected  from 
the  singular  i«  restored  in  the  plural,  firX  (for  tin'px)  maid-servant  pi, 
r""r!?3X,  n-q  (for  nji?  from  ni^)  portion  pi.  rrj-a  and  nixJp,  conip.  §  210,  3.(^ 


§  214-216       THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  229 

nkp  (for  '"i'-ir  from  i^Si^)  pi-  ^"'^P;  in  like  manner  r"':3  colleagues  is  re- 
ferred to  the  assumed  singular  nis.  iinQ  (njtns)  governor  has  in  the  plural 
both  niins  (const,  niine)  and  iririD. 

The  Construct  State. 

§  214.  When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  depend- 
ence on  another,  the  second  or  specifying  noun  is,  in  occi- 
dental languages,  put  in  the  genitive  case;  in  Hebrew,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  second  noun  undergoes  no  change, 
but  the  first  is  put  into  what  is  commonly  called  the 
construct  state  (T]^'ic  or  T^'iic:  supported).  A  noun  which 
is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one  is  said  to  be  in  the 
absolute  state  (n''^!?^":3  cut  off).  Thus,  "li"!  word  is  in  the 
absolute  state;  but  in  the  expression  Tjbiarj  "lil.  verhiim 
regis,  the  word  of  the  king,  '^u'l  is  in  the  construct  state. 
By  the  juxtaposition  of  the  two  nouns  a  sort  of  compound 
expression  is  formed,  and  the  speaker  hastens  forward 
from  the  first  noun  to  the  second,  which  is  necessary  to 
complete  the  idea.  Hence  results  the  abbreviation,  which 
characterizes  the  construct  state. 

a.  The  term  absolute  state  was  introduced  by  Reuchlin;  he  called  the 
construct  the  state  of  regimen. 

§  215.  The  changes,  which  take  place  in  the  formation 
of  the  construct,  affect 

1.  The  endings  for  gender  and  number. 

2.  The  final  syllable  of  nouns,  which  are  without  these 
endings. 

3.  The  syllable  preceding  the  accent. 

§  216.  The  following  changes  occur  in  the  endings  for 
gender  and  number,  viz ; 

1.  The  feminine  ending  H^  is  changed  to  T\_,  M^iiu? 
handmaid  const.  riMiu;;  the  ending  n  remains  unchanged, 
ir^^biT"^  observance  const.  n";^'i"2. 

a.  The  explanation  of  this  appears  to  be  that  the  construct  state  re- 
tains the  old  consonantal  ending  ri_ ,  the  close  connection  with  the  following 


230  ety:\';ology.  §  217 

noun  preserving  it  as  if  in  the  centre  of  a  compound  word,  §  55.  2.  c\ 
whereas  in  the  isolation  of  the  absolute  state,  the  end  of  the  word  is  mora 
liable  to  attrition  and  the  consonant  falls  away. 

b.  Some  nouns  in  il  preceded  by  Kamets  adopt  a  Segholate  form  in 
the  construct,  nb^'op  kingdom  const.  Polpori  instead  of  r^bb^ap  §  61.  1.  b, 
n'fd^p  dominion  const,  rtii'ap,  iibx^lD  ivork  const.  nbN^Ta,  nbS'i'O  chariot 
const.  rS3~?3,  trni:?  croivn  const,  f^l^i??,  f^^inb  flame  const,  ri^nb,  m"i"'  ten 
const.  r~£r,  or  with  the  Seghols  changed  to  Pattahhs  under  the  influence 
of  a  guttural,  nnsr^  family  const,  nns'ij^,  Mb3"i>{  four  const.  rS'snX;  sa 
<^%rr]  fig-cake  const,  nbb'i;  rirs  tvoman,  though  it  occurs  in  the  absolute, 
Deut.  21:11,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  Ps.  58:  9,  is  mostly  used  as  the  construct  of  titx. 
On  the  other  hand,  T\^h  bottle  has  in  the  construct  Ti'ch  Gen.  21:  14  (the 
accent  thrown  back  by  §  35.  1)  as  if  from  nisr;;  riitw^  portion  const,  rxi-o. 

2.  The  ending  Q".  of  the  mascuHne  phiral  and  D";.  of 
the  dual  are  ahke  changed  to  ■•_  ,  D^ia?  nations  const.  "^T, 
Q*?"l|^  horns  const,  ^i.lp;  tli  of  the  feminine  plural  suffers 
no  change  ni!ip  voices  const,  tlilip. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  vowel  ending  of  the  masculine  plural 
construct  is  added  to  feminine  nouns  "^TOS  (the  accent  invariabh'  thrown 
back  by  §  35.  1),  commonly  in  the  K'thib  '^ni^S  const,  of  H'i'^S  high-places, 
■'rrx^p  1  Sam.  26:  12;   this  takes  place  regularly  before  suffixes,  §  219.  2 

§  217.  1.  In  a  mixed  final  syllable  Kamets  is  com- 
monly shortened  to  Pattahh:  so  is  Tsere  when  preceded 
by  Kamets;  other  vowels  remain  without  change,  T 
hand  const.  T',  lir'i";2  seat  const.  li2:"i7j,  ^j^^^i  neck  const. 

-'  r  -  '  T  - 

"J^iiSZ,  "|bT  old  const.  ")j5T,  sb  heart  const,  nb,  *ii3B  mighty 
man  const.  liilS. 

o.  Kamets  remains  in  the  construct  of  B^^X  porch,  Sns  writing,  "!ng 
gift,  2r  cloud  (once  const.  3?  Ex.  19:  9),  cjro  decree  and  D^  sea,  e.  g. 
nb^tj~D;;  sea  of  salt,  except  in  the  phrase  C|TO  t;]  sea  of  weed,  i.  e.  Red  Sea; 
ho  too  in  TVO  portion,  and  r^ip  end,  which  are  contracted  from  rib  roots, 
§  213. a;  sin  milk  becomes  3^n,  and  "bb  whife  ~"2b  Gen.  49 :  12  in  the  construct. 

b,  Tsere  remains  in  "il"i:n  five  const,  uiin,  l]"!  mire  const.  \'i"^,  ns^ 
breathing  const.  tiE"^,  "Z^'J  heel  const.  -p>,  in  the  y's  derivative  la's  shield 
const,  "a'a  and  in  bbx  found  in  several  proper  names.  It  is  occasionally 
shortened  to  Seghol  before  Makkeph  in  bbx  mourning  const.  "VriX,  Ti'  time 
const,  rs,  "py  and  ~7\'J,  td  name  const.  tDiy,  "Dia  and  ~D1l3;  '3  son,  which  in 
the  absolute  retains  Tsere  before  Makkeph,  Gen.  30:  19,  Ezek.  18:  10,  has 
in  the  construct  "2,  ""ja  or  "'3.  Tsere  is  shortened  to  Pattahh  in  a  few 
cases  not  embraced  in  the  rule,  viz.:  "jp  nest  const,  "p,  b|?5  rod  const.  bp'Q 
and  bpia,  13X  Deut.  32:  28  perishing  const,  of  Tbx,  the  Kal  participles  of 
Lamedh  guttural  verbs,  §  126.  1,  and  the  following  nouns  with  prefixed  y 


§218 


THE  CONSTEUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  231 


in  several  cf  which  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  likewise  chanj^ed  to  Hhirik, 
§  192.  a,  "I-?'?  tithe  const,  "^kv"^,  "iBPr  mourning  const.  "lEOx:,  rhzy  key  c^nst. 
nns-?  and  nns^,  7?")'?  Inir  const.  "('?1^,  np,?  c7omo«r  const,  ri--?,  -rrr> 
matrix  const.  Vr::-?^  l^U'^^  corruption  const,  nn'^o,  nsio  o/^«r  const.  n^T-a. 

c.  Hholem  is'  shortened  to  Kamets-Hliatuph  before  Makkeph  in  the 
construct  of  monosyllables  from  SS  roots,  ph  statute  const,  pn  and  "pn 
rarely  in  other  words  -^"j?  Prov.  19:  19,  Ps.  145:  8,  Nah.  1:3  (in  the  last 
two  passages  the  K'thibh'has  Vti5),  "^n-J  Job  17:  9,  Prov.  22:  11,  -'{Z^^ 
Ex.  30:  23,  -"r-TT  Ex.  21:  11;  this  becomes  Pattahh  before  the  guttural  in 
-r05  for  tnbJ  cJnstruct  of  ^i\  hiffh.  b'3  Jcol  construct  of  bb  all  occurs  twice, 
viz.:  Ps.  35:  10,  Prov.  19:  7,'  without  a  Makkeph  following,  §  19.  2.  b;  it 
must  not  be  confounded  with  ^2  Ml  Isa.  40: 12  he  comprehended  pret.  of  b«. 

d.  The  termination  1.  becomes  "»_  in  the  construct,  §  57.  2  (5),  "''n 
enough  const,  "i^,  "^n  /i/e  const,  "^n. 

e.  Three  monosyllabic  nouns  form  the  construct  by  adding  a  vowel, 
3X  father  const.  UX  Gen.  17:  4,  5,  elsewhere  "^ix,  nx  brother  const.  ^nJ<, 
Sn  friend  const.  ni;n  2  Sam.  15:  37,  1  Kin.  4:  5,  or  ni;:.  2  Sam.  16:  16, 
Prov.  27:  10  K'thibh.  These  may  be  relics  of  the  archaic  form  of  the 
construct,  §  222,  or  the  monosyllables  may  be  abridged  from  ri'b  roots, 
§  187.  2.  d. 

2.  In  a  simple  final  syllable  H..  is  changed  to  H..,  n'la 
sheep  const.  HIT,  nn  shepherd  const.  ri?n,  rr^  field  const. 
rniT ;  other  vowels  remain  unchanged. 

a.  This  is  an  exception  to  the  general  law  of  shortening,  which  obtains 
in  the  construct.  It  has,  perhaps,  arisen  from  the  increased  emphasis  thrown 
upon  the  end  of  the  word,  as  the  voice  hastens  forward  to  tbat  which  is 
to  follow.  In  like  manner  the  brief  and  energetic  imperative  ends  in  Tsere 
in  ri'b  verbs,  Avhile  the  future  has  Seghol,  §  170.  c.  An  analogous  fact  is 
found  in  the  Sanskrit  vocative.  The  language  of  address  calls  for  a  quick 
and  emphatic  utterance;  and  this  end  is  sometimes  attained  by  shortening 
the  final  vowel,  and  sometimes  by  the  directly  opposite  method  of  length- 
ening it.     Bopp  Vergleich.  Gramm.  §  205. 

b.  iiQ  mouth  has  '^53  in  the  construct. 

c.  Nouns  ending  in  quiescent  N  preserve  their  final  vowel  unchanged 
in  the  construct,  K^^  fearing  const,  itnn,  xha  host  const.  K3S. 

§  218.  1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  commonly  rejected 
from  the  syllable  preceding  the  accent,  Dip'^  j^?rtce  const. 
np2,  niTT  year  const,  ti'^,  n^'i;  years  const,  "i;!:,^  niTiis 
treasureV const  nS^^i«,  t3:T  hands  const,  i";,  ztb  heart 
const,  zhb,  ni^n  tvraih  const,  ntn. 

a.  Kamets  preceding  the  accented  syllable  is  retained  (1)  when  it  has 
arisen  from  Pattahh  before  a  guttural  in  consequence  of  the  omi.ssion  of 
Daghesh-forte,  t'^n  (for  t^  workman  const.  C^n,  •i'-^S  (•--?)  horseman 


232  ETYMOLOGY.  §  218 

const,  ttjnts,  na'iQ  (nsViQ)  vail  const.  na'-iQ,  n^S  (ti^S)  distress  const.  n'-S; 
(2)  in  words  from  i>"  and  ij  roots,  d^'i^  (from  I'^S')  cities  const,  ^ny,  d^xa 
(from  K'is)  coming  const,  "^xa;  so  likewise  where  Kamets  quiesces  in  N, 
D^rxn  heads  const,  '^tx'n;  (3)  under  a  prefixed  to  53?  roots,  r)b'a  (from 
r(=S)  covering  const.  T^b^,  'i^  (from  'is)  s/iie^fZ  const,  'i^,  TiSD  (from  ITS') 
fortress  const,  lii?^;  (4)  in  ri'b  derivatives  of  the  form  n^i^J  (from  njs)  ea;i/e 
const.  n*i3a,  wart  meditation  const,  n^in.  (5)  in  the  construct  dual  and 
plural  of  triliteral  monosyllables  or  Segholates  from  Kb  and  ri'b  roots,  D'^inb 
(from  "in?)  cheeks  const,  '•^tf:),  d''^.'ia  (from  I'lS)  A:i(Zs  const.  i.^'iS,  CN'^n  (from 
Xun)  sins  const.  ■'Kiiri;  (6)  in  the  following  nouns  in  most  of  which  it  stands 
immediately  before  or  after  a  guttural,  §  60.  3.  c,  n3x  curse,  tinr'^a  cave, 
^\"T\  conduit,  and  the  plurals,  "xnil,  "'C'^rt,  "'is'lP  Lev.  7:  38,  "'^t;:iX^,  "^X^lia, 
"i-r-ir!,  ^b-^-Q,  inrp  2  Kin.  12:  8,  "^n^-a  EzeL  27^:  9^,  "^ia??  Job  34:' 25,  "^Nnp^, 
i'i2?  Eccles.  9:  1,  "lirin. 

6.  Tsere  is  retained  in  words  in  which  it  quiesces  in  the  vowel-letters 
l!<  or  "^j  tr^rx"!  begin?wig  const.  rit/'X"!,  hb-'ii  temple  const,  bi'^ri,  and  in  ad- 
dition in  the  following,  C^ibx  crib,  ^ITX  girdle,  'flhvi  thread,  "ib?  foreign 
land  const.  ""i?3,  iTi^X  /oss  const.  SnnSX,  so  nbsx  Isa.  58:  10  darkness, 
nzna  ^ooZ,  nbn  robbery,  niia  Ex.  22:  2  theft,  nsa^  plague,  iibsn"?  over- 
throic,  !Tnri3  Gen.  49:  5  sivord,  ^irS?  molten-image,  nn"in  Job  16:  13  gall, 
ifh'-jV  heap,  tix^  excrement,  nixtn  fig-tree,  I'ih'^^T}  deep  sleep,  and  the  plurals 
''b^N  mourning  from  dbsx  (bhx),  so  "^ksri  desiring,  "^.id";  sleeping,  "^npiD  and 
"■'h'^b  rejoicing,  ^nrir  forgetting,  "^hNt  wolves  from  C^bxt  (^Xl);  d''?5'^  weary 
becomes  *^5"^5";  in  the  construct,  and  d''i3ba  escaped  '•is'^h^.  Tsere  also  re- 
mains in  the  const.  ni'T  sweat,  ''np  from  nri  de«(f,  ^tS'  from  1?  ivitness, 
which  are  from  IS*  roots,  and  in?"n,  "^y^!  from  5'n  friend,  root  iir"i. 

c.  Hholem  is  rejected  from  the  syllable  before  the  accent  in  ri'i3p'iN 
const,  pi.  of  ■('iilX  palace,  vnil'CiVi  and  MbSTTX  const,  pi.  of  b'S'rx  cluster, 
irixn  Cant.  4:  5  and  '^him  Cant.  7:  4  twins,  "'Ppa  from  nii:2  high-places, 
see  §  216.  2.  a;  it  is  changed  to  M  in  ''ipup  from  Ci'^itipp  treasures,  comp.  §  88. 

d.  Medial  Vav  and  Yodh,  though  they  may  retain  tteir  consAiantal 
power  in  the  absolute,  quiesce  in  Hholem  and  Tsere  $n  thfe  construct,  Ti^n 
midst  const.  TiiPi,  ^'il'rfP  cups  const,  pifeip,  fr^in  house  const,  ir^a,  Pi'is;^?  foun- 
tains const,  niiiy,  N']ri  valleg  const,  nrji.,  pi.  nrxs,  §  210.  3.  c,  const,  nik'^a 
Ezek.  35:  8.  Exceptions  are  rare,  h^V  (according  to  Kimchi  and  Baer  hyj) 
Ezek.  28:  18  iniquity,  '^i'^ip  Prov.  19:  13  contentions,  "ixja  neck  const.  ^K-is 
and  "^^xn^,  Vi'^  iniquity  const,  "j'w. 

e.  A  few  nouns  of  the  forms  biji^,  bi:|5,  biji?  have  buJp  or  ^lJi?  in  the 
construct  instead  of  bbp,  §  61.  1.  b,  "17a  ?<;aZ/  const.  Tia,  hh  robbery  const. 
bia,  T)!^"^  thigh  const.  Ti'^l) ,  ''M  /jeary  const,  lbs  and  133,  ?iri3  shoulder 
const.  Cjriis,  bny  uncircumcised  const,  b'l?  and  h'^b,  'hi^  smoke  const,  "jto 
and  yiib,  i'bk  si(7e  const,  i'bk  and  "b:s;  Ti~!!<  long  is  only  found  in  the  con- 
struct, the  corresponding  absolute  was  probably  T\^i<;  ^'his  helmet  simply 
shifts  its  accent  in  the  construct,  jJ^is.  On  the  other  hand,  while  most 
Segholate  nouns  suffer  no  change  in  the  construct,  a  few  adopt  the  form 
bap,  *i'in  chamber  const,  "inn,  y^i  seed  const,  once  "SJ'i'T  Num.  11:  7  else- 


§  218  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  OF  NOUNS.  233 

where  5^1.1,  5:^3  plant  const.  yJ5,  "ivb  foetus  const,  "ns'^j,  y^'i  .spivn  const, 
siir,  y^tn  m'ne  const,  rirn;  in  like  manner  h'zh  vanity  const,  brn. 

2.  "When  this  rejection  occasions  an  inadmissible  con- 
currence of  vowelless  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a 
syllable,  §  61.  1,  it  is  remedied  by  inserting  a  short  vowel 
between  them,  commonly  Hhmk,  unless  it  is  modified  by 
the  presence  of  gutturals,  bi;b:2  tinlding  const.  b:ib:i  for  b'^'l. 
D^nni  words  const,  ^nn"!  for  ^^n'l,  'T^^'Z  righteousness  const. 
Tpyi^  pl.  Jnip"!^  const,  riipii:,  lizrci  least  const.  ^iu^5 
D^b^n  ivise  const,  "'iipn.  In  the  construct  plural  and  dual 
of  Segholates,  however,  the  vowel  is  frequently  regulated 
by  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  singular  which  has 
been  dropped,  comp.  §  210.  2,  D^bbp  from  ^12  ("bi?)  kmgs 
const.  ^bb/J,  cbrj:  (i:ri:.)  tribes  const.  ^i:3Ti:,  tiii";:.  ('("^'i) 
threshing-fioors  const. riii"^S,  inis'^n  (ns^n)  reproaches  (zon^t. 
niS'in,  D:nb^.  (nb'n  or  nb'^)  folding  doors  const,  ^hb^;  yet 
not  invariably  D^b:^^  (b^iiJ)  handfuls  const,  ^byii:,  np/ij 
trough  (pl.  t^iinp'i")  const,  ninpir. 

o.  When  in  the  construct  plural  the  introduction  of  a  new  vowel  is 
demanded  by  the  concurrence  of  consonants,  the  syllable  so  formed  is  an 
intermediate  one,  so  that  the  following  Sh'va  is  vocal,  and  the  next  letter, 
if  an  aspirate,  does  not  receive  Daghesh-lene,  thus,  "^ib";,  '■'zh'g,  Tt'h'':'^, 
nibin  not  "i^i?";  etc.  §  22.  a,  3.  Exceptions  are  infrequent  as  nHrx  Deut.  3:  17, 
■^tcn  Lam.  3:  22  (in  some  editions)  but  ''n'pn  Ps.  89:  2,  nis-n  Ps.  69:  10, 
iB"ia  Ezek.  17:  9,  -^"^-q^.  Isa.  5:  10,  ^t:i~i  Cant.  8:6  but  -"^S'j"]  Ps.  76:  4; 
so  with  grave  suff.  tn'^SC?  Gen.  42:  25,  35,  tn^SO;  Lev.  23:  18  and  in  some 
editions  Cn'^rhrp  Neil.  4:7.  In  a  few  instances  Daghesh-forte  separative 
is  inserted  to  indicate  more  distinctly  the  vocal  nature  of  the  Sh'va,  §  24.  5, 
''^bn  Isa.  57:  6,  ^ZiV  Lev.  25:  5,  ^pl'J  Isa.  58:  3,  "ibp?  Gen.  49:  17,  n'ii;?^' 
Ps.  89:  52,  rib'S^SJ  Prov.  27:  25,  or  compound  Sh'va  is  taken  instead  of  simple 
for  the  same  reason,  nini^'i  Gen.  30:  38.  The  presence  or  absence  of 
Daghesh-lene  in  the  dual  construct  depends  upon  the  form  of  the  absolute, 
thus  "^rSb  from  C"r3b  lipa  but  i3"]a  from  C";3"i3  knees.  When  the  con- 
curring consonants  belong  to  different  syllables  a  new  vowel  is  not  needed 
between  them;  one  is  sometimes  inserted,  however,  after  a  guttural,  "^i"?'^, 
nii-isp  but  nirrn-a.  In  the  opinion  of  Ewald  ^€-]^-0  Ezek.  7:  24  is  for 
•'i'Tipa  from  t:ii-np-2,  and  ri"-"4pT3  Ex.  26:  23,  36:  28  for  P'i'ijp^;  they  may 
be  better  explained,  however,  as  Piel  and  Pual  participles. 

6.  The  second  syllable  before  the  accent  rarely  undergoes  any  change. 
In  a  very  few  instances  Seghol  becomes  Hhirik  or  Pattahh,  the  pure  vowels 


234  ETYMOLOGY.  §  219 

being  reckoned  shorter  than  the  diphthongal,  comp.  §  212.  e.  •^33"!^  cAa- 
riot  const,  n^s^ri.  The  changes  in  nirt^  flame  const.  Hinb  pi.  riihtilfi  const. 
hisrib,  ff^'iriii  coals  const.  "'BnJ  are  due  to  the  influence  of  the  proximate 
vowels,  §  63.  1;  those  in  '|i"^jn  vision  const,  "ji'^fn,  riiiriS  coats  const.  riiiriS 
are  consequent  upon  the  dropping  of  Daghesh-forte,  §  61.  5;  that  in  D"'!inx 
(from  ^fix)  tents  const,  "^l^f^x  arises  from  the  conversion  of  a  simple  into  an 
intermediate  syllable,  §  18.  3. 

Nouns  with  Suffixes. 

§  219.  The  pronominal  suffixes,  whose  forms  are  given 
§  72 ,  are  appended  to  nouns  in  the  sense  of  possessive 
pronouns,  "^  hand,  ''T  my  hand,  etc.  They  suffer,  in 
consequence,  the  following  changes,  viz: 

1.  Of  the  suffixes,  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  ^, 
DID,  "jlD  of  the  second  person  are  connected  with  nouns  in 
the  singular  by  a  vocal  ShVa,  ^D  of  the  first  person  plural 
and  T{  of  the  second  fem.  singular  by  Tsere,  and  ^n,  H,  D, 
1  of  the  third  person  by  Kainets;  ^H^  is  invariably  con- 
tracted to  i,  rarely  written  H*,  §  62.  1,  and  H^  to  »n^, 
§  101.  2. 

a.  There  is  one  example  of  a  noun  in  the  construct  before  the  full  form 
of  the  pronoun,  X'^ri  li;'^  /ier  dai/s  Nab.  2:  9;  but  this  is  best  explained  as 
an  abbreviated  relative  clause  the  days  that  she  has  existed. 

h.  First  person:  >13  is  in  a  few  instances  preceded  by  Kamets,  !l5n3."niD 
Ruth  3:  2,  !i:i-'p  Job  22:  20. 

Second  person.  The  final  vowel  of  ?|  is  occasionally  expressed  by  the 
vowel  letter  n,  ni'n^^  Ex.  13:  16,  rtz^arn  Jer.  29:  25.  In  pause  the  Sh'va 
before  T]  becomes  Seghol,  §  65,  '."'j!^?'  Gen.  33:  5,  :ri:si  Ps.  139:  5,  or 
Kamets  may  be  inserted  as  a  connecting  vowel,  particularly  after  nouns 
in  il  ,  whereupon  the  final  Kamets  is  dropped  to  prevent  the  recurrence 
of  like  sounds,  "3n  Ps.  53:  6.  In  the  feminine  the  connecting  vowel  e  is 
rarely  written  "i,  Tj'^riw'Vj  Ezek.  5:  12;  ">  ,  which  belongs  to  the  full  form 
of  the  pronoun,  §  71.  a  (2),  is  sometimes  added  to  the  suffix,  "^lii^yi  Jer. 
11:  15,  '^=='in2  Ps.  116:  19,  i2"iC3  2  Kin.  4:  7  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has 
"■^liis.  Sometimes  the  distinction  of  gender  is  neglected  in  the  plural  and 
tq  is  used  in  place  of  the  feminine  ")5,  cb^SX  Gen.  31:  9,  Dr^l^iJ,  D?T^3 
Jer.  9:19;  n^  is  sometimes  added  to  the  feminine  suffix  as  to  the  fuU  pro- 
noun, njrraT  Ezek.  23:  49. 

Third  person.  The  connecting  vowel  before  1M  and  n  is  occasionally  e^ 
^nrris  Gen.  1:  12,  *inB?^^D  Judg.  19:  24,  ^iTJTa  Nah.  1 :  13,  ^inniX  Job  25:  3, 
so  ^fi>'";)   from  ?'n  and  ^!^>"j'S  from  ?^a  and  frequently-  with  nouns  in  «i...i 


§219 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  235 


^nknp  and  n^n^  from  f^^"^?,  'inyj  from  nn'r,  ^firro,  ini:;?;  e  does  not 
occur  before  the  plural  S  unless  it  is  represented  by  the  vowel-letter  ^  in 
=-mn=T:3  2  Chron.  34:  5  K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  has  nh'nsf!;;  it  is  once 
found  in  the  fern,  plural  ^J^'p  Gen.  41 :  21.  The  form  n  in  the  masc.  sin?, 
is  commonly  reckoned  an  archaism,  i^^I^X  Qen.  12;  8,  tri'd  Ps.  42:  9,  liis 
Jer,  2:  21,  so  several  times  in  the  K'thibh  n"iiS,  nno  Gen.  49:  11,  n-rra 
Ex.  22:4,  nn-D3  Ex.  22:  26,  nsOS  Lev.  23:  13,  rrrbd  2  Kin,  9:  25,  nPNian 
Ezek.  48:  18,  where  the  K'ri  in  each  instance  substitutes  i.  In  a  few  in- 
stances the  consonant  is  rejected  from  the  feminine,  tl  being  retained  simply 
as  a  vowel-letter;  where  this  occurs  it  is  commonly  indicated  in  modern 
editions  of  the  Bible  by  Kaphe,  t^^^'i^  Lev.  13:  4,  Hx-jn  Kum.  15:  28,  or  by 
a  Massoretic  note  in  the  margin,  tirrrx  Isa.  23:  17.  18  for  TCrP^?;  once  K  is 
substituted  for  n,  i<|3  Ezek.  36:  5.  The  longer  forms  of  the  plural  suffixes 
nn,  'rt  are  rarely  affixed  to  nouns  in  the  singular,  'innab  Gen.  21:  28,  "insr^a 
Ezek.  13:  17,  "nnar  Ezek.  16:  53,  or  with  the  connecting  vowel  Kamets, 
cri'f3  2  Sam.  23:  6,  or  with  n^  appended,  n;n33  1  Kin.  7:  37,  nrnbipi  Ezek. 
16:  53.  The  vowel  il^  is  also  sometimes  added  to  the  briefer  form  of  the 
fem.  plural,  nn:;!?  Gen.  21 :  29,  n:r3  Gen.  42:  36.  The  distinction  of  gender 
is  sometimes  neglected  in  the  plural,  D  or  tfi  being  used  for  the  feminine, 
r:|3  Cant.  4:  2,  6:  6  for  "ils,  Bni^-i  Job  1:  14  for  'nin']. 

c.  The  nouns  2X  father,  nx  brother,  tis  mouth  take  the  ending  "'_  be- 
fore suffixes,  as  they  do  likewise  in  the  construct  state,  ""^ix ,  fii'^N;  so 
too  Cn  father-in-laiv  Tfxn,  '7'^^';;  "'.  of  the  first  person  coak'sces  with  this 
vowel,  ■'hx,  "rx,  "^3  and  ^in  of  the  third  person,  commonly  becomes  1  §  62.  2, 
nihsj,  rnx,  "T^E  more  frequent  than  'llT'rX,  'iJT'nx,  ^liTB.  In  ^.ia  Zeph.  2:  9 
the  vowel-letter  "^  of  the  first  person  suffix  is  dropped  after  the  final  "^  of 
the  noun. 

2.  The  masculine  plural  teraiination  D",  and  the  dual 
C;,  are  changed  to  "  before  suffixes  as  in  the  construct 
state;  the  same  vowel  is  likewise  inserted  as  a  connective 
between  suffixes  and  feminine  plural  nouns  §  216.  2:  a. 
This  ■'..  remains  unchanged  before  the  plural  suffixes; 
but  before  ^  the  second  masc.  singular  and  T\  third  fem. 
singular  it  becomes  "^  _,  and  before  the  remaining  suffixes 
the  diphthongal  vowel  is  resolved  into  "'_,  which  combined 
with  •'^  the  first  singular  forms  ^_,  with  TJ  the  second 
fenunine  'T  ,  and  with  ^n  the  third  masculine  V  ,  S  62.  2. 

1 •-'  t'    O 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  suffixes  are  appended  to  feminine  plurals 
•without  the  vowel  "^^  or  its  modifications,  "rinn  2  Kin.  6:  8  for  "PXP, 
inHr  Ps.  132:  12  for  ^nny,  T^TI-o  Deut.  28 :  59  for  ?^"n'-^,  "viiTX  Ezek.  16 :  52 
for  ~"rrrx,  oHax  and  nn^ri^x,  nnrix  Ps.  74:4,  :rxt;n,  cr-r-r,  trrrT?3, 
Gnaa^.     On  the  other  hand,  suffixes  proper  to  plural  nouns  are  occasionally 


236  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

appended  to  feminine  nouns  in  the  singular,  perhaps  to  indicate  that  they 
are  used  in  a  plural  or  collective  sense,  I'^niT^n  Lev.  5 :  24,  :|in^r!n  Ps.  9 :  1 5, 
Vj-'nNri:;  Ezek,  35:  11,  rpr;:^:?  Isa.  47:  13. 

b.  The  vowel-letter  i  is  not  infrequently  omitted  after  plural  and  dual 
nouns,  t^bn-:!  Ex.  33:  13  for  ^''='^^,  0=^  Ps.  134:  2  for  fi3"i:i\  IT'^  Ex.  32:  Ifl 
K'thibh  (K'ri  T^n^ri),  liaS'  1  Sam.  18:  22  K'thibh  (K'ri  1'^^n?r),  tih^^il^  Gen 
10:  5  for  Cini.'^iJ,  ''h'^'^T\  Gen.  4:  4  for  "|n''3>n. 

c.  Second  person.  The  vowel  "i.  remains  unchanged  before  the  feni. 
sing.  T^  in  T]"''b'^N  Eccl.  10:  17  and  with  ti  appended  inrDXbp  Nah.  2:  14. 
Sometimes,  as  in  the  full  pronoun,  '^.  is  appended  to  the  fem.  sing,  suffix 
and  n^  to  the  plural,  : li-^ij^i^nr!  Ps.  103:  3,  :'^3i*ri  ver.  4,  njiininps  Ezek. 
13:  2o] 

Third  person.  The  uncontracted  form  of  the  masc.  sing.  IIT^  occurs  in 
sini^'ias  Nah.  2:4  for  1"'^'i35,  !in^n;i  Hab.  3:  10,  ^Ti'^'p?  Job  24:  23;  elm  = 
aihu  by  transposition  of  the  vowels  becomes  auhi  =  ohl  ifii  which  is  found 
once  "^rnpl^'iri  Ps.  116:  12,  and  is  the  ordinary  form  of  this  suffix  in  Palestine 
Aramaeic.  The  final  a  of  the  fem.  sing,  is  once  represented  by  N,  XiTii5"'PiX 
Ezek.  41 :  15.  In  a  few  instances  n  is  appended  to  the  plural  of  either  gender, 
'^'??^'''='?<.  Ezek.  40:  16,  HSnir^lJ  Ezek.  1:11,  and  i  to  the  abbreviated  masc. 
D,  iriinbx  Deut.  32:  37,''i'^in3'T  ver.  38,  i^'^QS  Job  27:  23,  ib^SQ  Ps.  11:  7. 

3.  The  suffixes  thus  modified  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

Appended  to 

Ic. 

Sing.  Nouns      "^ 

Dual  and   )    ^ 
Plur.  Nouns  j 

§  220.  Certain  changes  likewise  take  place  in  nouns 
receiving  suffixes,  which  arise  from  the  disposition  to 
shorten  words,  which  are  increased  at  the  end,  §  66.  2. 
These  are  as  follows,  viz.: 

1.  The  grave  suffixes,  §  72,  DID,  "ji,  DH,  fn  shorten  the 
nouns,  to  which  they  are  attached,  to  the  greatest  possible 
extent.  Before  them,  therefore,  nouns  of  both  genders 
and  all  numbers  take  the  form  of  the  construct,  sib  heart, 

^  T   •' 

Dbiinb  yotir  heart,  'ju^nb  their  hearts;  n2ir  lip  du.  Dh''I]a;i2: 
pi.  Dn''iniri3ir  their  lips. 

a.  D'n  blood  becomes  obpn  and  l^  hand  ttb'i'i,  §§  58.  2,  63.  2.  a. 

2.  Feminine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  take  the 
construct  form  before  the  light  suffixes  likewise,  with 


SmGULAB. 

PLURAL. 

2  m.    2f.  3  m.  3f. 

ic. 

2  m. 

2  /■.      3  m. 

sf. 

*!:       ^       ■<        «, 

15.. 

DID 

P       D 

I 

T,  ^^■-  •'%  "', 

^3\. 

^T.. 

1^'..     ^n'.. 

rr 

§  220  NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  237 

the  exception  that  in  the  singular  the  ending  5n_ becomes 
n^  in  consequence  of  the  change  from  a  mixed  to  a  simple 
syllable,  §  59,  HSTT  Up,  insic  his  lip,  ^t\t'Z  their  lip, 
^^niniir  thy  lips,  rninsb  his  hps. 

a.  If  the  construct  has  a  Segholate  form  it  will  experience  the  change 
indicated  in  5,  nrr'O'S  const.  nVr^^  suf.  inVipxJ.  If  two  consonants  have 
coalesced  in  the  final  letter,  it  will  receive  Daghesh-forte  agreeably  to  6, 
■iha  from  ra,  ■in:2X  from  nix,  :?im'2?a  lSam.l6: 15  from  the  fern,  of  r^vyq, 
§  207.  b. 

b.  In  a  few  exceptional  instances  the  absolute  form  is  preserved  before 
suffixes,  ■'rbrs  Isa.  26:  19  from  n'in?  but  Tin^::;,  "inbn? ;  ^rs^  Cant.  2:  10 
from  r.E"^  const,  nbi;  so  "^ribx,  iinS-ij,  rriTni'  di'^nyn-a  but  const,  nyiniij, 

TT  ~    •      I  •   T  IT  '  T       r*:  '  T        I"  !  ■•■       "    •     \   T  :    ' 

comp.  Cn^>"3  const.  ''V'O. 

3.  Masculine  nouns,  both  singular  and  plural,  on 
receiving  light  suffixes  take  the  form  which  they  assume 
before  the  absolute  plural  termination,  zib  heart,  ^ilb 
my  heart,  ^^l^b  thy  heart,  ^rizb  our  hearts. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  is  shortened  to  Hhirik  or  Seghol  before  T^, 
E?.  '?.  e.  g.  r,53,  nrii.I^a,  ob^;?^,  or  with  a  guttural  to  Pattahh,  r^Ty<, 
nibxa,  though  with  occasional  exceptions,  Tj:::2X  Isa.  22:  21,  '~^':>p  1  Sam. 
21:  3,  r^XpS  from  NB3.  Before  other  suffixes  it  is  rejected  from  some  mono- 
syllables, which  retain  it  in  the  plural,  lip  from  D'j  plur.  niilU,  133  from  "jS 
plur.  Qiis  but  "lb,  Tjia,  isn  ,  r,>n..   DCI-^n  Ezek.  5:  7  from  'pin  is  exceptional. 

4.  Dual  nouns  retain  before  light  suffixes  the  form 
which  they  have  before  the  absolute  dual  termination, 

'hiir  my  lip)s,  ^3"r)S'iD  our  lips,  ''3T1^  my  ears,  ^j'iiTi^  our  ears', 
D^i^p  and  D^inp  horns,  VD^p  and  vb^p  his  horns. 

5.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  dual  and  plural  follow  the 
preceding  rules,  but  in  the  singular  they  assume  before 
all  suffixes,  whether  light  or  grave,  their  original  mono- 
syllabic form  as  before  the  feminine  ending  H^,  §  210, 
^bb  king,  ^ib"^  my  king,  Dbsb'J  your  king',  "^  ear,  ".''A  my 
e«r ;  in  like  manner  Hpii''  sucker,  iripDi]'  his  sucker. 

a.  Tsere  in  the  first  syllable  of  Segholates  is  commonly  shortened  to 
Hhirik  before  suffixes,  §  210.  2,  but  if  the  first  radical  be  n  or  r  it  usually 
becomes  Seghol  e.  g.  3bn,  "isVin;  "153  and  n=3  retain  the  Seghol  of  the  first 
syllable.  Hholem  is  commonly  shortened  to  o,  but  in  a  few  instances  to  u, 
•^k^p,  'ft'ia  and  iS"!?  ;  "iO'3,  'yin  and  Vdi  irregularly  take  Hhirik  before  "i 
3  pers.  suf.  ii:in  but  "^i^i".     When  the  middle  radical  is  a  guttural  it  takes 


238  ETYMOLOGY.  §  220 

compound  instead  of  simple  Sh'va  before  suffixes,  which  before  ?J  and  D3  ie 
changed  into  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  '^'^V^,  T^'^?3.  When  the  first 
radical  has  Hholem  in  the  absolute,  Hhateph-Kamets  or  Kamets-Hhatuph 
is  sometimes  given  to  the  second  radical  before  suffixes,  'iBi'Q  and  'iBivS  from 
bi'b,  ^p^|5  Hos.  13:  14,  with  Daghesh-forte  separative,  "i's^p  Ezek.  26:  9, 
4l^)5  1  Kill.  12,  10,  "iBirD  Isa.  9:  3,  ihzp  Jer.  4:  7;  X?  garment  has  ^nsa, 
11^3  instead  of  i^.:a,  i^?3. 

b.  Middle  Yodh  and  Vav  mostly  quiesce  in  e  and  o  before  suffixes,  "^S'^y 
from  •■;?  ej'e,  "^ni^  from  ni^  f?e«^/j;  but  nn'^Si  Gen.  49:  11  from  "i"^?  2/o?t«9 
ass,  iry^J  Isa.  10:  17  from  n-iia  </iorw,  ■i?)'!?  Ezek.  18:  26,  33:  13  from  b'li? 
htiquify.  Final  Yodh,  which  quiesces  in  the  abs.  sing,  resumes  its  con- 
sonant character  before  suffixes  ">'^1Q  from  ''"iQ,  vbn  from  "i^ri;  so  Vav  "hh'd, 

c.  Triliteral  monosyllables  sometimes  shift  their  vowel  from  the  second 
radical  to  the  first,  thus  assuming  the  same  form  with  Segholates,  comp. 
§  186.  a,  ipnn  from  dnn,  liiD^r  from  nba,  but  "iiliins  from  bSs;  T^h-2  from 
•^PS;  i^^iD,  T]-]"iQ,  Di'i-B,  n^-iQ  but  Cn-i-iB  from  i^Q;  "i^n^,  T}":^';:  but  DD-^rJ 
from  '•''y^.  By  a  like  transposition  0333^  Ezek.  36:  8  is  for  tsbsiy  from  r]32. 

d.  The  noun  "ill'X  blessedness,  which  only  occurs  in  the  plural  construct 
and  with  suffixes,  preserves  before  all  suffixes  the  construct  form,  Jji^UiX, 
l^nm  not  ^■'n^3i<,  "I'l'^l^^S*. 

6.  Nouns  in  whose  final  letter  two  consonants  have 
coalesced,  or  which  double  their  final  letter  in  the  plural, 
§  209.  2,  receive  Daghesh-forte  likewise  before  suffixes, 
the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  being  modified  accordingly, 

"jy  and  ^t::?  from  fi  (root  TU') ,  DDnn  from  nn  (PD^),  H3;n^5 
from  "ir.N  (pi.  D^hriJ^). 

a.  23'w'N  lattice,  hh'-]'3  garden,  a5b?2  refuge,  which  do  not  occur  in  the 
plural,  take  Daghesh-forte  before  suffixes;  nii^  has  in  the  plural  nina'IJ 
but  before  suffixes  ina'^J,  n=Piaiy;  "i?  (root  '33)  base  has  ^b,  "ib.  Pattahh 
becomes  Hhirik  before  the  doubled  letter  as  in  the  fern,  and  plur.,  §  209.  2.  a, 
in  the  following  from  ^'s  roots,  Tin  fear,  iri  garment  (i^p  and  i^p),  vjO  5o- 
sin,  ns  morsel,  1^  si(7e. 

b.  In  a  very  few  instances  a  final  liquid  is  repeated  instead  of  being 
doubled  by  Daghesh,  comp.  §  209.  2.  a,  ''n'nr!  Jer.  17:  3,  "^nnn  Ps.  30:  8, 
an-in  Gen.  14:  6  from  in;  'i3'b:i  Job  40:  22  and  iSs  from  blS;  "^1^  Ezek. 
16:  4  and  "t^'J'iJ  Cant.  7:  3.  Once  Daghesh-forte  is  resolved  by  the  insertion 
of  :,  tl^-ifVO  Isa.  23:  11  for  ni-b^,  §  54.  3. 

7.  Nouns  ending  in  H^  drop  this  vowel  before  suffixes 
as  before  the  plural  terminations,  §  211.  1,  Til^  field  "^Y^j 
ti~\c,  i^iii;;  nip'J  cattle  ^jPpa. 

a.  The  vowel  e  commonly  remains  as  a  connecting  vowel  before  suf- 


§  221  NOUiiS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  239 

fixes  of  the  third  person  singular,  §  219.  1.  b;  and  in  a  few  instances  the 
radical  ">  is  restored,  giving  to  singular  nouns  the  appearance  of  being 
plural,  n-i'ris  Isa.  22:  11,  H'^i^S'S  Hos.  2:  16,  Cni'jij  Isa,  42:  5,  nb  sheep  he- 
comes  V'^  or  1>^2'^• 

§  221.  As  the  changes  produced  by  the  terminations 
for  gender  and  number,  the  construct  state  and  suffixes 
are  thus  dependent  upon  the  character  of  the  syllables, 
of  which  the  nouns  so  affected  severally  consist,  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  may  be  best  represented  by  dividing 
them  according  to  their  syllabic  structure.  Hence  results 
the  foUowmg  scheme. 


A.  MAScuLmE  Nouns. 

Declension  1.  Segholates. 

Segholates  drop  their  unessential  vowel  and  revert 
to  their  primary  monosyllabic  form  in  the  singular  be- 
fore suffixes;  if  the  second  radical  is  a  guttural,  it  will 
take  compound  Sh'va,  which  before  ^ .  tD^ .  becomes  a 
short  vowel  §  220.  5;  in  the  plur.  (as  other  nouns  in  both 
numbers)  they  take  with  light  suffixes  the  same  form  as 
before  the  abs.  plur.  ending,  with  grave  suffixes  the  form 
of  the  construct,  §  220.  1  and  3.  In  the  plur.  abs.  they 
drop  their  principal  vowel  and  take  pretonic  Kamets 
§  210.  3;  this  too  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  const.,  which 
gives  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218.  1  and  2.  Medial  Yav 
and  Yodh  quiesce  except  in  the  sing.  abs.  §  210.  3.  c, 
218.  1.  d,  220.  5.  b. 

Declension  2.  Mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  may  be  dissyllables  or  poly- 
syllables whose  first  vowels  are  unchangeable  as  "ji^ST. 

These  vowels  are  dropped  in  the  const.  §  2 1 8,  before 
fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212,  and  suffixes.  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  and  Tsere  preceded  by  Kamets  are  in  the 
const,  sing,  changed  to  Pattahh,  §  217. 1,  and  in  the  const. 


240  ETYMOLOGY.  •  §  221 

plur.  rejected,  thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable  §  218. 
.1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate  and 
no  other  mutable  vowel. 

Nouns  belonging  to  this  declension  may  be  mono- 
syllables or  may  have  in  the  penult  either  a  long  un- 
changeable vowel  as  ^i:V  or  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed 
syllable  as  T]b."2.  The  few  words  in  wliich  Kamets  in 
the  ultimate  is  unchangeable  as  zhs,  t6i2,  rip  §  217.  1.  a 
do  not  belong  to  this  declension. 

Kamets  becomes  Pattahh  in  the  const,  sing.  §  2 1 7.  1, 
and  is  dropped  in  the  const,  plur.  §  218.  1.  Tsere  com- 
monly becomes  -^  or  -^  before  "rj,  WD_  and  "i^)  §  220.  3.  a; 
it  is  dropped  in  the  plur.  and  before  light  suffixes  except 
from  monosyllables,  which  retain  it  in  the  abs.  plur., 
§209. 1,  and  sometimes  also  before  light  suffixes,  §220.  3. a. 

Declension  4.  With  final  H    (accented). 

These  nouns  are  from  T/'b  roots;  n_.  becomes  H,  in 
the  const,  sing.,  §  217.  2,  and  is  dropped  before  fem.  and 
plur.  endings,  §  211,  and  before  light  suffixes.  Kamets 
or  Tsere  in  the  penult,  though  rejected  in  the  const., 
§  218.  1,  is  retained  before  fem.  and  plur.  endings,  §  212. 

Declension  5.  Nouns  which  double  their  final  con- 
sonant. 

These  are  mostly  from  f^  roots  and  shorten  their  last 
vowel  (if  long)  before  the  doubled  letter. 

a.  The  first  three  declensions,  as  above  given,  correspond  remarkably  with 
the  three  divisions  of  Class  I  of  nouns  according  to  their  formation,  §  184. 
Declension  1  is  identical  with  the  first  division.  Declension  2  embraces  the 
second  division  and  in  addition  all  other  nouns,  of  whatever  class  they  may 
be,  which  have  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult.  Declension  3  em- 
braces the  third  division  and  in  addition  all  other  nouns  which  have  but 
one  mutable  vowel  and  that  a  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  ultimate.  The  twc 
remaining  declensions  include  peculiar  forms  arising  from  imperfect  roots. 
Those  belonging  to  4  are  from  n  b,  and  a  large  proportion  of  5  are  from  5> 
roots.  Declension  1  in  feminine  nouns  answers  to  masc.  declension  1;  fem.  9 
and  3  embrace  to  a,  certain  extent  forms  derived  from  masc.  2  and  S. 


§222  PAKAGOGIC  VOWELS.  241 

B.  Feminine  Nouns. 

Declension  1.   The  feminines  of  Segholates. 

This  embraces  the  forms  nbtpp,  H^Pp,  H^pp,  n^pj^, 
nbpp,  which  reject  theirfirst  vowel  in  the  plur.  abs.  and 
insert  pretonic  Kamets  §§  210.  3,  213,  which  in  its  turn 
is  rejected  in  the  construct  thus  causing  the  return  of 
the  original  vowel,  §  218.  1  and  2.  Nouns  in  H^  have  T\_ 
in  the  const,  sing.,  §  216.  1,  and  Hi  in  the  plur.  §  201; 
before  suffixes  they  take  the  form  of  the  const,  ex- 
cept that  they  have  r\^  in  the  smg.  before  hght  suffixes 
§  220.  2. 

Declension  2.  Nouns  in  H^  with  pretonic  Kamets 
or  Tsere. 

These  are  rejected  in  the  const,  and  before  suffixes, 
thus  giving  rise  to  a  new  syllable,  if  an  mitial  vowelless 
consonant  precedes  §  218.  1  and  2. 

Declension  3.  Nouns  with  the  fem.  ending  n. 

See  §§  213,  209.  1.  d  and  e. 

These  declensions  are  shown  in  Paradigms  XIV,  XV 
and  XVI.  Nouns  not  embraced  in  these  declensions 
undergo  no  change  in  the  body  of  the  word,  whether  in 
the  construct  or  on  recei\dng  fem.  and  plur.  endings  or 
suffixes;  they  may  be  represented  by  C^D  and  HC^D,  which 
are  shown  in  all  the  forms  that  they  assume  in  both  num- 
bers and  with  suffixes  in  Paradigm  XV. 

Paragogic  Vowels. 

§  222.  The  termination  ^.  or  i  is  sometimes  added  to 
nouns  in  the  construct  singular,  §  61.  6,  "33.  Gen.  49:11 
for  -fZi,  'h^b'2  Isa.  1:21  for  nsbp,  'vbn  Lam.  1:1  for 
nin,  ^VS'^^  Ps.  113:6  for  b'btl^,  ip-n  Gen.  1:24  for 
n^n.    This  occurs  cliiefly  in  poetry  and  is  regarded  as  an 

16 


242  ETYMOLOGY.  §  223,  224 

archaism,  §  201.  e.  These  vowels  for  the  most  part  receive 
the  accent,  and  commonly  occasion  the  rejection  of 
Pattahh  or  Tsere  from  the  ultimate. 

a.  Examples  of  this  antique  formation  of  the  construct  are  likewise 
preserved  in  proper  names,  as  pys~'^'3h^  Melchizedek,  nVci^riD  Methuselah. 

8  223.  1.  The  unaccented  vowel  H    added  to  nouns 

O  T 

indicates  motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  §  201.  e, 
niii^  northtvard,  HS'O  southivard,  tVTJZ'^  heave^nvard, 
nri';in  to  the  house,  oIkovos  rPihn  to  the  mountain,  whence 
it  is  called  He  directive  or  He  local.  The  subsidiary- 
vowel  of  Segholates  is  rejected  before  this  ending,  §  66. 
2  (2)  a,  but  other  vowels  are  mostly  unaffected,  nS"]^  from 
-pi  n^jnk  from  -pji,  rrtr02  from  -±1^2,  nnnia  1  Kin.  19:15 
from  the  construct  state  1!5"|^' 

a.  He  directive  is  appended  to  the  adverb  Q'la  there,  MTSia  thither,  and 
to  the  adjective  V*^^n  profane  in  the  peculiar  phrase  •^^'^^n  ad  profanum 
i.  e.  be  it  far  from,  etc.  It  is  rarely  used  to  indicate  relations  of  time, 
nn'^i'^  d'^k'53  1  Sam.  1 :  3  from  days  to  days  i.  e.  yearly,  nn"ij"'l3T23  Ezek. 
21:  19  for  the  third  time,  iiP\V  now  prop,  at  (this)  time.  For  the  sake  of 
greater  force  and  definiteness  a  preposition  denoting  direction  is  sometimes 
prefixed  to  words,  which  receive  this  ending,  so  that  the  latter  becomes  in 
a  measure  superfluous,  nbj'^b  uptvards,  Ti^hh  downwards,  Mn^fab  2  Chron. 
31:  14  to  the  east,  nbix'rb  Ps.  9:  18  fo  Sheol,  comp.  djro  ixaKpohev. 

h.  The  ending  M  rarely  receives  the  accent  finn'ta  Deut,  4:  41;  in 
B"i!St  ns^S  it  receives  in  some  editions  an  alternate  accent,  §  39.  4.  a,  in  others 
the  secondary  accent  Methegh,  §  35.  1.  In  iTin  Gen.  14:  10  and  Hjr.Q  a 
is  changed  to  e  before  this  ending,  §  63.  1,  in  fi5'7^  Ezek.  25:  13,  il^i  1  Sam. 
81:  2  the  vowel  of  the  ending  is  itself  changed  to  e. 

2.  Paragogic  H^  is  sometimes  appended  to  nouns, 
particularly  in  poetry,  for  the  purpose  of  softening  the 
termination  without  affecting  the  sense,  §  61.  6. 

NUMEEALS. 

§  224.  1.  The  Hebrew  numerals  (^BCialn  niblD)  are 
•)f  two  kinds,  cardinals  and  ordinals.  The  cardinals  from 
iHQ  to  ten  are  as  follows,  viz.: 


224 

NUMERALS. 

2^ 

Mas 

OULINE. 

Femininr. 

Absol. 

Constr, 

4680^. 

Constr. 

Om 

T    V 

nh« 

r\n!!< 

nns 

Two 

n-;]^ 

^?.^ 

D-^plS 

"P)!^ 

Three 

T      : 

•  nirbia 

T 

TTblZJ 

2 

Four 

T   T  :  - 

n^i*!^ 

5n"^i< 

yn"^^i« 

Five 

f^^^n 

•'    T 

mn 

Six 

nisTs 

^^^ 

tTD 

ISW 

Seven 

T  :     • 

n?2is 

ynia 

yniD 

Eight 

T          ; 

ni'a^ 

ni'aii 

niaiD 

Nine 

ni^irn 

nyian 

itiri 

yirn 

Ten 

ni'i? 

rni:? 

*lTCi> 

iTDi? 

a.  inx  is  for  ins,  §  63. 1.  a;  the  Seghol  returns  to  Pattahh  from  which 
it  has  arisen,  upon  the  shortening  of  the  following  Kamets  in  the  construct 
and  in  the  feminine,  nnx  for  ri'ifiX,  §  54.  2,  but  in  pause  nnx;  ^inx  occurs 
in  the  absolute  in  Gen.  48:  22,  2  Sam.  17:  22,  Isa.  27:  12,  Ezek.  33:  30, 
Zoch.  11:  7,  and  once  in  Ezek.  33:  30.  The  plural  Q^inx  is  also  in  use  in 
the  sense  of  one  or  the  same,  Gen.  11:  1,  joined  in  one  Ezek.  3T:  17,  or 
some,  Gen.  27:  44,  29:  20.  Comp.  Span.  unos. 

D'^Fiiy  is  for  ff^naiy;  for  the  Daghesh  in  n  see  §  22.  6;  this  is  once 
omitted  after  Daghesh-forte,  "'ris^  Judg.  18:  28. 

A  dual  form  is  given  to  some  of  the  units  to  denote  repetition,  d'^tn^S'nx 
fourfold,  D"^n52ia  sevenfold. 

nsa^  occurs  once  with  a  paragogic  syllable,  Mil^aia  Job  42:  18,  and 
once  with  a  suffix  in  the  form  dnssiu  2  Sam.  21:  9  K'ri. 

2.  In  all  the  Semitic  languages  the  cardinals  from 
three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the  singular  number,  and  have 
a  feminine  termination  when  joined  to  masculine  nouns, 
but  omit  it  when  joined  to  feminine  nouns.  The  expla- 
nation of  this  curious  phenomenon  appears  to  be  that 
fchey  are  properly  collective  nouns  like  triad,  decad,  and 
as  such  of  the  feminine  gender.  With  masculiae  nouns 
they  appear  in  their  prnnary  form,  with  feminine  nouns, 
for  the  sake  of  distinction,  they  undergo  a  change  of 
termination. 

a.  An  analogous  anomaly  meets  us  in  this  same  class  of  words  in  Indo- 
le* 


244 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  225,  226 


European  tongues.  The  Sanskrit  cardinals  from  five  to  ten,  though  they 
agree  in  case  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  helong,  are  in  form  of  the 
neuter  gender  and  in  the  nominative,  accusative  and  vocative  they  are  of 
the  singular  number.    In  Greek  and  Latin  they  are  not  declined. 

§  225.  The  cardinals  from  elevm  to  nineteen  are 
formed  by  combining  "lib:^  or  TT}W  modifications  of  the 
nmneral  ten  with  the  several  units,  those  which  end  in 
n^  preserving  the  absolute  form  and  the  remainder  the 
construct.   Thus, 


MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

Eleven 

K                T  T          ••    :  - 

Twelve 

T  T       "   ; 

Thirteen 

nib:?  nizjb-^j 

T  T           T      : 

xii^y  ^5t2 

Fourteen 

nib:?  nysnx 

T    T                  T     T     J    - 

trjw  y^nji 

Fifteen 

lib:?  nts'jn 

tH^I  ttn 

Sixteen 

nib:?  n'la-j: 

T  T                    T     • 

r":ir^  TTizJ 

Seventeen 

FT            T   :    • 

TTJw  ynir 

Eighteen 

nib:?  niair 

T  T         T       : 

nnir^  nib'oj 

Nineteen 

nicy  ny'^rn 

nniry  y%T\ 

a.  There  have  been  many  vain  conjectures  as  to  the  origin  of  ^W^'S, 
the  alternate  of  '^^^^  in  the  number  eleven.  R.  Jona  thought  it  to  be  an 
abbreviation  for  ^ia^  "^nd  1?  next  to  twelve.  Comp.  Lat.  undeviginti,  nine- 
teen. Kimchi  derived  it  from  Pir^  to  think,  ten  being  reckoned  upon  the 
finger,  and  eleven  the  first  number  which  is  mentally  conceived  beyond.  It 
has  how  been  discovered  to  be  another  form  of  the  numeral  one,  of  which 
this  is  the  only  trace  in  Hebrew,  but  which  has  been  preserved  in  the  As- 
syrian istin  =  one. 

^cr  n-^rin  fifteen  occurs  Judg.  8;  10,  2  Sam.  19: 18,  and  "ii::s  nib^  eigJi- 
teen  Judg.  20:  25. 

§  226.  1.  The  tens  are  formed  by  adding  the  masculine 
plural  termination  to  the  units,  D^^.tt:^  tiventy  being,  how- 
ever, derived  not  from  two  but  from  ten  niri?. 


Twenty 
Thirty 


Forty 
Fifty 


NUMERALS. 

Q. 

W'^m 

Eighty 

D'ib'j 

U^^2TL 

Ninety 

u^yzr\ 

§  227,  228 

Sixty 

Seventy 

a.  These  nnmbers  have  no  distinct  fonn  for  the  feminine,  and  are  used 
indifferently  with  nouns  of  either  gender.  Hnt'S  Ex.  18:  21,  25,  Deut.  1:  15 
means  not  hoenty  but  tens. 

2.  The  units  are  added  to  the  tens  by  means  of  the 
conjunction  1  and]  the  order  of  the  precedence  is  not  in- 
variable, though  it  has  been  remarked  that  the  earhest 
writers  of  the  Old  Testament  commonly  place  the  units 
first,  e.  g.  ^*%t^  D^n^  tivo  and  sixty  Gen.  5:18,  while  the 
latest  writers  as  commonly  place  the  tens  first,  D',:"£^  D^ia"*^ 
sixty  and  two  Dan.  9:25. 

§  227.  Numerals  of  a  higher  grade  are  fk'l  one  hun- 
dred,  v|bk  one  thousand,  m^^"),  "ii^")  or  Kiial  ten  thousand. 
These  are  duplicated  by  affixing  the  dual  termination 
D"hi<:j  two  hundred,  D^Bb^5  two  thousand,  D'lhiS"]  or  ^Fi'^ 
nin'n  twenty  thousand.  Higher  multiples  are  formed  by 
prefixing  the  appropriate  miits  nik"^  ^bT2  three  hundred, 
d■^b^5  tiirb'^r  three  thousand,  riixn")  tlt_  sixty  thousand,  lIjbN 
D^abx  one  million. 

•  r  -: 

§  228.  1.  The  ordinals  are  formed  by  adding  ■".  to 
the  corresponding  cardinals,  the  same  vowel  being  like- 
wise inserted  in  several  instances  before  the  final  con- 
sonant; ''f\-::)^'^,  first  is  derived  from  t'i^^  head. 


First 

"|iiii<"3 

Sixth 

^^ 

Second 

i^ 

Seventh 

^T~'^ 

Third 

^izj'^biD 

Eighth 

i'"r'^ 

Fourth 

^T'Tl 

Ninth 

^Ttr\ 

Fifth 

^^^"rn  oj"  ^^'-y^. 

Tenth 

^¥^?. 

The  feminine  commonly 

ends  in  H"'., 

occasionally 

in  n*  . 

T  • 

a.  There  are  two  examples  of  the  orthography  fij-xn 
Job  15:  7,  and  one  of  'ji'ia"''!  Job  8:8,  in  all  of  which  the  K' 

Josh.  21:  10, 
ri  restores  the 

customary  form. 

240  ,;■  ETYMOLOGY.  §229,230 

2.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

3.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine 
ordinals,  r^ir^bTT  one  third,  TT'TZi'^  one  fourth,  etc.,  and  by 
the  following  additional  terms,  '"isn  one  half,  y^n  and  ^2^ 
one  quarter f  xaish  one  fifth,  "jin^?  one  tenth. 

Peefixed  Particles. 

§  229.  The  remaining  parts  of  speech  are  indeclin- 
able, and  may  be  comprehended  under  the  general  name 
of  particles.    These  may  be  divided  into 

1.  Prefixed  particles,  which  are  only  found  in  com- 
bination with  a  following  word,  viz.  the  article,  He  inter- 
rogative, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Yav  con- 
junctive. 

2.  Those  particles,  which  are  written  as  separate 
words,  and  which  comprise  the  great  majority  of  adverbs, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections. 

o.  No  word  in  Hebrew  has  less  than  two  letters ;  all  particles  of  one 
letter  are  consequently  prefixes.  There  is  one  example  of  two  prefixes  com- 
bined constituting  a  word  brt  Deut.  32:  6,  though  editions  vary;  three  are 
combined  in  b^'B  Eccles.  8:  17. 

The  Aeticle. 

§  230.  1.  The  Definite  Article  {riTT^  ^H)  consists 
of  n  with  Pattahh  followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first 
letter  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  ?jb"b  a  king, 
T]b53n  the  king. 

a.  As  the  Arabic  article  ^\  is  in  certain  cases  followed  by  a  like 
doubling  of  the  initial  letter,  it  has  been  imagined  that  the  original  form 
of  the  Hebrew  article  was  ^ri  and  that  the  Daghesh-forte  has  arisen  from 
the  assimilation  of  h  and  its  contraction  with  the  succeeding  letter.  Since, 
however,  there  is  no  trace  of  such  a  form,  it  seems  better  to  acquiesce  in 
the  old  opinion,  which  has  in  its  favour  the  analogy  of  other  languages, 
that  the  article  ri  is  related  to  the  personal  pronoun  Sin,  whose  principal 
consonant  it  retains,  and  that  the  following  Daghesh  is  conservative,  §  24.3. 


§  230  THE  AETICLE.  247 

The  Arabic  article  is  supposed  to  be  found  in  the  proper  name  "itt^^x 
Gen.  10:  26.  U;■^i^bx  hail,  the  equivalent  of  d"'35,  and  possibly  in  Clfr'^S 
Prov.  30:  3i.         ' 

b.  There  is,  properly  speaking,  no  indefinite  article  in  Hebrew,  although 
the  numeral  ins  one  is  so  employed  in  a  few  instances,  as  inx  X'^is  a  pro- 
phet 1  Kin.  20:"  13. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh'va,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  25, 

"x;n,  ^sT^n  but  "D-inn,  nrhsn. 

a.  Daghesh-forte  though  usually  omitted  in  this  case  is  occasionally 
retained  e.  g.  S-'vixpn  2  Kin.  9:  11,  ^liss^sn  Jer.  6:  2,  D"'V^'^s:in  Ex.  8:  1  but 
yn-S^in  ver.  2,  n'ES'n  Judg.  8:  15,  n-is'^n  l  Sam.  24:  3J  and  it  is  always 
written  in  '^'iitT'n  the  Jew  and  D'^'nliT"!!  tlie  Jews. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  60.  4,  Pattahh  is  lengthened  to  Kamets;  the  short 
vowel  Pattahh  is,  however,  commonly  retained  before  H 
and  n,  and  sometimes  before  :?,  the  syllable  being  con- 
verted into  an  intermediate,  §  18.  3,  instead  of  a  simple 
one,  bM^n,  ^hn,  ti'j'n  Gen.  15:11,  3?i2"^n  but  TiinH,  )X^hr^, 

'  Vt'  TT'  '-T  '  TTIT  IV-'  -' 

t::yn  Jer.  12:  9. 

a.  The  article  very  rarely  has  Kamets  before  t\,  ''nrt  Gen.  6:19,  CJ^irirt 
Isa.  17:  8;  in  a  very  few  instances  initial  S  quiesces  in  the  vowel  of  the 
article,  riCSSxri  Num.  11:  4. 

4.  Before  H  with  Kamets  or  Hhateph-Kamets,  Pattahh 
is  changed  to  Segliol:  before  H  or  5  with  Kamets,  it  is 
likewise  changed  to  Seghol  if  it  stands  in  the  second  syl- 
lable before  the  accent,  and  consequently  receives  the 
secondary  accent  Metheg-h,  snn,  Dbrn,  D^ic'iMn,  D"'inn, 

•  T    IV 

a.  This  change  very  rarely  occurs  before  N,  "il^SI^  IMic.  2:  7.  When 
PI  is  followed  by  Kamets-Hhatuph,  Pattahh  remains  n^=rn. 

h.  The  article  does  not  usually  affect  the  vowels  of  the  word  before 
which  it  stands;  in  "iJl  mountain  and  cr  people,  however,  Pattahh  is  changed 
to  Kamets  to  correspond  with  the  vowel  of  the  article  '^^^■,  n^rj>  so  y*|)i< 
earth  but  ^"Stn.  The  plurals  of  bnx  tent  and  Tl"-i"p  holiness  without  the 
article  are  f^^nx  Gen.  25:27,  ^""^IP^  Ex.  29:  37,  but  with  the  article  C"^'if7X3 
(for  d^'&nxria)  Judg.  8:  11,  D'^C^i'n  Ex.  26:  33,  §  210.  3.  h.  rx;?  pelican 
Isa.  34:  llVzeph.  2:  14,  is  pointed  nx^n  Lev.  11-.  18,  Deut.   14:  17   upon 


248  ETYMOLOGY.  §  231 

receiving  the  article;  so  ^B  Num.  7:  15,  but  "icn  Judg.  6:  26.  28.  The  em- 
phasis due  to  the  article  has  in  these  few  instances  an  effect  analogous  to 
that  of  the  pause  accent  in  prolonging  the  principal  vowel  of  the  word. 

5.  When  preceded  by  the  inseparable  preposition? 
the  letter  H  of  the  article  is  mostly  rejected,  and  its  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  §  53.  3,  D"7^^5  for  Dl'/blSHS,  see 
§232.5. 

He  Interrogative. 

§  231.  1.  The  letter  H  (nbij^:-  XH)  may  also  be  pre 
fixed  to  words  to  indicate  an  interrogation;  it  is  then 
pointed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh,  !j5jn  shall  we  go?  iXTTikbTj, 
is  he  not? 

2.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  becomes  Pattahli, 
§  61.  1,  niiTrn  Gen.  34:  31,  ^syrbn  Job  18:  4,  ^n^in  Jer. 
8:  22,         '    ' 

a.  The  new  syllable  thus  formed  is  an  intermediate  one,  §  22,  and  the 
succeeding  Sh'va  remains  vocal,  as  is  shown  by  the  absence  of  Daghesh- 
lene  in  such  forms  as  CFl^'i'^ri  Gen.  29 :  5.  In  order  to  render  this  still  more 
evident  recourse  is  frequently  had  to  Daghesh-forte  separative,  §  24.  5,  'h^Tl 
Gen.  17:  17,  t:iri:??:i2n  18:  21,  Methegh,  §  45.  2,  bi"pn  Judg.  9:  2,  uixbTU 
Job  38:  35,  or  compound  Sh'va,  §  16.  3.  b,  S^^";??]  Gen.  27:  38. 

b.  He  interrogative  has  Pattahh  and  Daghesh-forte  in  one  instance  be- 
fore a  letter  with  a  vowel  of  its  own,  si"^*!!  Lev.  10:  19. 

3.  Before  gutturals  it  likewise  usually  becomes  Pat- 
tahh, 1\)_i^ri  Ex.  2:  7,  nirxn  2  Kin.  6:  22,  Tb^nn  Jer.  2;  11, 
r\yn  Hag.  l:  4,  yEnn  Job  22:  3. 

a.  There  are  a  few  examples  of  He  interrogative  with  Kamets  before  X, 
Tr-^kn  Num.  16:  22,  Neb.  6:  11,  Cnxn  Judg.  6:  31,  ''n'isxn  12:  5,  !^in%'n  Jer. 
8:  19  (in  some  editions)  pointed  as  if  before  ''JIX:  so  too  most  probably 
tjiijri  Deut.  20:  19. 

4.  Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to 
Seghol,  nixri  Ezek.  28:  9,  rinVH  Joel  1:  2,  DDrn  Eccles. 
2:  19;  see  also  Num.  11:  12,' 13:  18,  2  Sam.  19:43,  Jo]? 
13:  25,  21:  4. 

a.  This  rule  does  not  apply  to  Resh,  riB"in  Num.  13:  18,  r-^Nnn  1  Kin, 
20:  13. 


§  232  msepaeable  prepositions.  249 

Inseparable  Prepositions. 

§  232.  1.  The  prepositions  1  in^  D  according  to,  b  to, 
are  regularly  prefixed  with  Sh'va,  JTi'^i^'^^  in  the  heginning, 
bis  according  to  all,  DJl'ili!!<b  to  Abraham, 

2.  Before  vowelless  letters  this  Sh'va  is  changed  to 
Hhirik,  rp-;n  for  Tp^'^^,  biD"Jb  for  bib'jpb,  inns  for  nins,  in 
which  Yodh  quiesces  nn^n''3,  liib^D. 

3.  Before  gutturals  with  compound  Sh'va  it  is  chan- 
ged to  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  ^'^^^.^  bi5<b,  '^'^ns. 

a.  Occasionally  b  takes  Pattahh  or  Seghol  before  an  infinitive,  whose  first 
letter  is  a  guttural  with  simple  Sh'va,  nox^  Ps.  105:  22,  sinb  Deut.  19:  5. 
Initial  X  quiesces  in  the  following  words  after  the  inseparable  prepositions, 
§  57.  2.  (2)  a,  "pTN  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes,  ''inx  Lord, 
n-'n^X  God,  and  also  in  the  inf.  const.  I^X  to  say  after  b,  "^j'txa,  i"'pX3, 
'7i^5<^.  'V^}-^  °'''i''5''<3.  for  n^nbxa  the  Seghol  lengthened  to"  Ts'ere  in  the 
simple  syllable,  xb^h  but  W^xb,  nrixb  but  "1^X3,  "153X3.  Before  the  divine 
name  mrTi  the  inseparable  prepositions  are  pointed  as  they  would  be  be- 
fore •'inx  or  Q"'nb5<,  whose  vowels  it  receives,  §  47,  niiTib  Gen.  4:  3,  nVnib 
Pa.  68^:  21. 

6.  In  a  very  few  instancea  S<  with  Pattahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up 
their  vowel  to  the  preposition  and  become  quiescent,  "T^aXS  Isa.  10:  13  for 
"\i3X3,  'p^n^3  Eccles.  2:  13  for  •)nn':3,  §  57.  2.  (3). 

4.  Before  monosyllables  and  before  dissyllables,  ac- 
cented upon  the  penult,  these  prepositions  frequently  re- 
ceive a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  64.  2,  nbX3,  tii^is,  '^zisib. 

a.  This  regularly  occurs  with  the  Kal  construct  infinitive  of  "jS,  "^3, 
rs,  'l"s>  and  I's'  verba  when  preceded  by  b,  e.  g.  Hirib,  nrb,  n'l'^b,  n'nb,  n'^'^ib; 
also  with  different  forms  of  the  demonstrative  tTT  and  with  personal  suf- 
fixes; and  with  monosyllabic  or  Segholate  nouns  when  accompanied  by 
disjunctive  and  especially  pause  accents.  Before  the  pronoun  Ira  what  they 
are  commonly  pointed  lnJ23,  nH3,  nxsb  or  followed  by  a  guttural,  i^^b;  Irsi 
occurs  three  times,  all  in  the  same  verse  1  Sam.  1 :  8. 

5.  Before  the  article  its  H  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition,  ^2'n3  for  ^Q'^HS,  Yl^^  ^^^  T'D'^J'7^' 

D^nrin  for  Q'^nna. 

a.  n  remains  eight  times  in  ti'ns  e.  g.  Gen.  39:  11;  also  in  such  indi- 
vidual instances  as  D":r'i"n3  Ps.  36:  8,  "T^j^nzi  Neh.  9:  19,  nijnns  Eccles.  8:  1, 
nii'^nns  Ezek.  40:  25,  Dija-n^isrib  l  Sam.  13:  21,  n^innb  Neh.  12:  38,  cijnb 


250  ETYMOLOGY.  §  233,  234 

2  Chron.  10:  7,  1^nsn>  25:  10,  naianl?  29:  27,  d^'nan^  Ezek.  47:  22,  tirt 
Dan.  8;  16.  The  initial  fl  of  theHiphil  and  Niphal  infinitives  is  occasionally 
rejected  in  like  manner,  n-iauib  Am.  8:  4  for  Jnii^yn^,  "1^032  Prov.  24:  17 

for  "iSr 31-13. 

§  233.  The  preposition  "|!a/rom,  though  used  in  its 
separate  form,  may  also  be  abbreviated  to  a  prefix  by  the 
assimilation  and  contraction  of  its  final  Nun  with  the 
initial  letter  of  the  following  word,  which  accordingly 
receives  Daghesh-forte,  1\y}p2  for  T]'n^.  y2.  Before  H  Hhirik 
is  commonly  retained  in  an  intermediate  syllable,  but  be- 
fore other  gutturals  it  is  for  the  most  part  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  y^ri^j  for  y^in  ]-)2,  but  i^tbn^,  biri^5  1  Sam.  12:  23; 
Y^^'^t,  £'p>™j  ^^V.,  but  niTC,  tf-ij^i, 

a.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh'va,  Daghesh-forte  may  be 
omitted.  This  is  occasionally  the  case  even  when  it  is  an  aspirate  "T^:i3^ 
Judg.  8:  2,  dh"i>l25^  Ezek.  32:  30.  Daghesh-forte  is  twice  retained  in  an 
initial  vowelless  Yodh,  T^nii^-i^^  2  Chron.  20:  11,  "'3^*13  Dan.  12:  2,  but  com- 
monly it  is  dropped  and  the  Jodh  quiesces  DjiaiQ,  inia,  ^h'^^,  "^t'"''?.  1^ 
is  sometimes  poetically  lengthened  to  ""S^,  and  once  has  the  form  of  a  con- 
struct plural,  ■'Sa  Isa.  30:  11. 

§  234.  These  prepositions  are  combined  with  the  pro- 
nominal suffixes  in  the  following  manner: 

•     /- 

3  m.  iSl 

af,       na  nb  nibs  nsb^^ 

•  T  T  T  T  'TV* 

Plural. 

ift         ^±  !l5b  siDibS  813527; 

2  m.     Din  cib  d53,  nii^ii  ni'2 

2/^       id  t>r     ''      "—  li^ 

3m.      on,  Dnn  iiab,  nnb  ana,  oni^^si  Dnj^,  nrf2 

3f.      ihn,  ihn     '    irib    '^      "  —  frn 

a.  The  syllable  ia  inserted  between  3  and  the  suffixes,  and  which  is  in 


SiNGULAE. 

^'b           -Jfe 

ia,    -la, 

^?^'^ 

^^.  *i^          'T'^? 

^F' 

?;^?j 

* 

^^'^ 

■ib          !iniii3 

:  V  '           -   •  ' 

il3i2;j 

§  235  VAV  coNJUNCTrvijj.  251 

poetry  sometimes  added  to  3,  5  and  b  without  suffixes  to  convert  tliem 
into  independent  words,  'i'Qa,  'i'as,  ^^o'b,  is  commonly  thought  to  be  related 
in  its  origin  to  the  pronoun  JTS  what,  so  that  "'S'iis  would  in  strictness  de- 
note like  what  I  am,  i.  e.  like  me.  The  preposition  '{O,  -with  the  exception 
of  some  poetical  forms,  reduplicates  itself  before  the  light  suffixes,  ""r^"?  = 
''I'SS^.  Comp.  a  similar  reduplication  of  a  short  word,  "^pi^  or  "^o  construct 
of  Di?  water. 

Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  235.  The  conjunction  and  is  expressed  by  1  pre- 
fixed with  Sh'va,  TjICni,  Y"]<^r31-  Before  one  of  the  labials 
i,  ^3,  5,  §  57.  2  (1),  or  before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav 
quiesces  in  Shurek,  "pn^,  T]bi3/l,  D^'is^,  b'''n2rjb|l.  Before  a 
vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in  which  the  Yodh 
quiesces,  Dnpr^.,  ''7'p^,.  Before  a  guttural  with  compound 
Sh'va  it  receives  the  corresponding  short  vowel,  ^ilS;l, 
T^T^;'!.,  ""briV  Before  a  monosyllable  or  a  dissyllable  ac- 
cented on  the  penult  it  frequently  receives  a  pretonic 
Kamets,  particularly  if  it  be  the  second  of  two  closely 
connected  words,  ^nhl  Tt\  Gen.  1:  2,  ^^)  ^ii:  2:  9,  "np"} 
nb^bj  DTI  qnnl  y-fel  niij  8:  22.  See  also  12:  19,  41:  11* 
Num.  16-  16,  beut.  32:  7,  Job  4:  16,  Ps.  55:  18,  63:  6, 
Eccles.  4:  8;  and  Pro  v.  24:  21,  25:  3,  Isa.  65:  17,  where 
a  word  is  interposed. 

a.  After  Vav  with  Shurek,  compound  Sh'va  is  sometimes  substituted 
for  simple  Sh'va  in  order  to  indicate  more  distinctly  its  vocal  character, 
ann  Gen.  2:  12,  "^iypsrn  Ezek.  26:  21,  nnro^  1  Kin.  13:  7,  T^^?  Jer.  22:  20. 

6.  Vav  receives  Hhirik  before  He  or  Hheth  followed  by  Yodh  in  the 
forms  Cri"i"^_rn,  ^Til,  Cni'^rn,  ITii  2  plur.  preterite  and  imperative  of  the 
verbs  ti^n  to  be  and  iTjn  to  live;  before  the  2  masc.  sing,  imperative  of  the 
same  verbs  it  has  Seghol,  n^fil,  m.7nTI.  for  '^'^yy^,  !^.'?ni. 

c.  The  short  vowel  appropriate  to  thp  guttural  is  taken  in  a  very  few 
instances,  even  when  the  latter  has  simple  Sh'va,  B'1^51  Gen.  32:  16,  "iS"* 
Job  4:2.  5<  quiesces  after  Vav  conjunctive  as  after  the  inseparable  prepo- 
sitions, §  232.  3.  a,  in  "plX  master  when  connected  with  singular  suffixes, 
■'inx  Lord  and  niHsx  God,  "'pi*'!,  'i^Xl,  ^■^■^i<1,  =U^'^■^^<^  the  Seghol  being 
lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable.  Hence  also  TT,yn:^'\  when  tVTV* 
has  the  vowels  of  '^3''N.  A  very  few  instances  occur  in  which  K  with  Pat- 
tahh  and  "^  with  Hhirik  give  up  their  vowel  to  Vav  conjunctive  and  becoma 
luiescent,  "li'SKI  Zech.  11 :  5  for  IBSXI,  T^Y).  Jer.  25:  36  for  n^b^"!. 


252  ETYMOLOGY.  §  236 

d.  The  rule  for  pretonic  Kamets  is  sometimes  extended  to  the  last  of 
three  connected  words,  T^J  3^21  lia  Lev.  7:  23,  Ci'nl  nni.  bin  a  Deut.  2:  10. 
21,  and  even  the  last  two  ^'ik)  "i^arn  TIJZITI  Ezek.  27:  17;  and  to  Vav  con- 
versive  of  the  Preterite  at  or  near  the  end  of  a  clause  nil  Gen.  44:  9.  22.  31, 
niJll  Ex.  1:  16,  Lev.  18:  5,  2  Kin.  7:4,  Prov.  24:  16,  Isa.  6:  10.  Other  cases 
are  rare  and  exceptional  e.  g.  yii^l  Isa.  26:  19,  the  first  vowel  of  V^^X  heing 
as  usual  assimilated  to  a  preceding  Kamets,  §  63.  2.  b. 


Sepaeate  Pakticles. 

ADVERBS. 

§  236.  1.  A  few  adverbs  of  negation,  place  and  time, 
are  commonly  classed  as  primitive,  although  they  are 
probably  related  to  pronominal  roots,  as  bi$  and  ikb  not, 

nt  there,  T5^  then. 

T  '  T 

a.  It  is  natural  to  suspect  that  the  pronominal  root  h,  which  gave  rise 
to  the  near  demonstrative  bx ,  nVx  these  and  to  the  prepositions  indicative 
of  nearness  or  approach,  h  to,  h'^  unfo,  and  which  has  a  remote  demonstra- 
tive force  in  Msbn  yonder,  beyond,  may  also  be  the  basis  of  iih  and  bx  the 
idea  of  remoteness  taken  absolutely  forming  a  negation.  The  same  idea,  in 
a  less  absolute  sense,  may  be  traced  in  the  conditional  conjunction  >lb  if. 
The  pronoun  fi},  of  which  probably  iS  is  originally  only  a  modification 
(comp.  the  relative  use  of  ^t,  §  73.  1),  is  plainly  connected  with  TX  at  that 
time  and  Dia  in  that  place. 

2.  Derivative  adverbs  are  formed 

(1.)  By  affixing  the  terminations  D^  or  D*,  §  201.  e, 

D352N1  and  ^^'C^  truly  from  "IS  truth,  Din  gratuitously  from 
""  grace,  U^2T  by  day  from  □i"'  day,  Djb"'"]  in  vain  from  p^T 
empty,  DsriS  suddenly  from  :?rs  moment,  DirbiT  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday  from  'ob'O  three. 

(2.)  By  abbreviation,  as  T]i^  surely,  only  from  "jDSi. 

(3.)  By  composition,  as  ?^TJ  why?  from  ?^T  n"J  quid 
edodus,  Tibyhb'^  froin  above  from  "2,  b  and  tlb^h. 

3.  Besides  those  adverbs,  which  are  such  originally 
and  properly,  other  parts  of  speech  are  sometimes  used 
as  adverbs.   Thus 

(1.)  Nouns,  ^\ff2  mightily,  exceedingly  prop,  might,  H^nD 
around  prop,  circuit,  li?  again  proj).  repetition,  D3ik  no 


§  237  SEPAEATE  PARTICLES.  2o3 

more  prop,  cessation;  with  a  preposition,  TN'^a  exceedingly, 
"nb  o^jflr^  prop,  to  separatioyi,  or  a  suffix  1"i~"  together  prop, 
w  zYs  union.  Compare  the  adverbial  accusative  and  ad- 
verbial phrases  of  Greek  and  other  languages. 

(2.)  Absolute  infinitives,  which  are  really  verbal  nouns, 
ib^Jl  tvell  prop,  recte  faciendo,  M:n"]n  much,  nn'J  quickly. 

(3.)  Adjectives,  particularly  in  the  feminine,  which  is 
used  as  a  neuter,  nitJ  ivell,  ^)>'^  fully,  nitX"]  cd  first,  n"iuj 
the  second  time,  Hi'^  and  ini'i  much,  n^i^in';  «n  Jewish  i.  e. 
Hehrew,  5n^'4"!!<  m  Aramceic,  riisbsD  tvonderfully. 

(4.)  Pronouns,  IIT  /zere,  ?ioz^  prop,  f/i/s  ^Z«ce,  f/i?s  ^zme, 
nin  7nY/ier  prop,  to  these  places,  with  a  preposition  1"^  thus 
prop,  according  to  it,  "S  so  perhaps  for  "iHS  according  to 
these  things,  though  others  explain  it  as  an  adverbial  of 
the  participle  "j3  right,  true,  tlB  here  probably  for  is  in 
this  (place). 

§  237.  A  few  adverbs  are  capable  of  receiving  pro- 
nominal suffixes,  as  "H  or  riiH  behold,  li'J  yet,  "1^  tchere, 
to  which  may  be  added  1^j<  there  is  not  prop,  non  existence 
and  12*  there  is  prop,  existence.  As  the  idea  of  action  or 
of  existence  is  suggested  by  them,  they  take  the  verbal 
suffixes,  frequently  with  3  epenthetic.    Thus 

1.  ni}!!.  First  person  'irrj,  "SiH  and  "Im;  ^::ri,  ^iin  and 
^j2rj.   Second  person  masc.  T|2n  once  MiSH;  DDiTl,  fem.  ?iin 
Third  person  iir!  and  ^m2h;  Diri. 

2.  lis?.  First  person  ''I'^^'S  and  ''li:'*;  once  with  ^/wr 
^riis?  Lam.  4:  17  K'ri.  Second  person  masc.  ^"15'  fem.  Tj'ii:?. 
Third  person  masc.  ^31^3',  D'liy  fem.  HB^i^. 

3.  ■'55,  Second  person  Td^)^.    Tliird  person 'y^)^,U\)^. 

4.  ']';i<.  i^zVs^^erso^  "'rrj*.  /S'eco;?cZ^;ersoM  masc.  ?|j'lS5, 
Dzp^X,  fem.  Tjri?.  Tliird 'person  masc.  ^ii)"t5,  ci'N  and  i'-^5"N 
fem.  n2ri<. 

5.  11J\  Second  person  ^'Z'^,,  Diir^  and  Dd'^\  Tliird  per* 
son  iiizj". 


254  ETYMOLOGY.  §  238,  230 


Prepositions. 

§  238.  1.  The  simple  prepositions  in  most  common 
use,  besides  the  inseparable  prefixes,  §  232,  are  chiefly 
^hiK  behind,  after  "bi<  to,  unto,  b'lk  beside,  t^i^,  with,  1^2^ 
between,  "rb^  without,  i^_1i  through,  t6^1  except,  '^T  on  ac- 
count of,  bi^j  or  b^7J  over  against,  tJ:^  in  presence  of,  Tdi  in 
front  of,  before,  1?  unto,  b^  upon,  D:?  tvith,  T\T\t\  under. 
Most  of  these  appear  to  have  been  originally  nouns ;  and 
some  of  them  are  still  used  both  as  nouns  and  as  prepo- 
sitions. 

2.  Other  prepositions  are  compound,  and  consist  of 

(1.)  Two  prepositions,  as  "'nni^a/rom  after,  Tk''2  and 
d$i2  from  ivith,  bi?^  from  upon,  nnri^j  from  under,  "j/Jb 
from,  "ijpb  and  nsiib  before,  b^i3"bj^  toward. 

(2.)  A  preposition  and  a  noun  "lib  and  ^ib^a  besides 
from  n^  separation,  "isb  before  and  ^?B^,  ^psb?'?  from  be- 
fore from  U^^Bface,  bbjiSl  and  n^n52l/or  the  sake  of,  "i^S  by 
prop,  by  the  hand  of,  ^5?"b5<  beyond,  b  ^ni>'^  from  beyond, 
T\W^  in  conjunction  with,  "j^igb  and  nj^^'b?  on  account  of 
''SS,  "2b  and  'E"b>'  according  to  prop,  a^  ^/^e  mouth  of 

(3.)  A  preposition  and  an  infinitive,  X^5<il>b  toward 
prop,  to  meet. 

(4.)  A  preposition  and  an  adverb,  ^'lybs  and  ^l^bS-^ 
without  from  bin  wo^  1?  t«?2to,  b  H^jbh'.:  beyond,  ^bss  without. 

§  239.  The  prepositions  take  suffixes  in  the  same 
manner  as  singular  nouns,  e.  g.  "b^"!^^  beside  me,  ^hb^T,  ^"JJ^D, 
"53>',  except  nns  after,  "b^^  ^o,  "r?  unto,  b?  w^o;^  and  nnn 
under,  which  before  suffixes  assume  the  form  of  nouns  in 
the  mascuHne  plural,  e.  g.  ^nns,  ^^^T\)^,  T'lHi^.;  ^n  &e^i<;eew 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine  plu- 
ral, and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  e.  g.  ^rii,  13^21 

and  rrn,  ^rrn  and  ^rinirn. 


§  240,  241  CONJUNCTIONS.  255 

a.  The  plural  form  ""nnx  occurs  without  suffixes  more  frequently  than 
■"jl??;  "'^i*!  "'is,  ■'35  also  occur  in  poetry;  "^iay  from  the  absolute  nbr,  which 
appears  only  in  this  single  form,  is  used  as  an  alternate  of  "'HS  from  03 
with  and  the  1  pers.  sing,  suffix. 

b.  rnn  in  a  very  few  instances  takes  a  verbal  suffix,  ''iFiTiri  2  Sam.  22 : 
37,  40,  48,  and  once  has  Nun  Epenthetic  before  the  suffix  nsrinn  Gen.  2:  21 ; 
with  the  3  masc.  plur.  suffix  it  is  cnnn  oftener  than  Dn"^nrin. 

§  240.  The  preposition  ns  with  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  nx  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  is  prefixed 
to  a  pronoun  or  definite  noun,  to  indicate  that  it  is  the 
object  of  an  active  verb.  With  pronominal  suffixes  the 
n  of  the  preposition  is  doubled  and  its  vowel  shortened 
to  Hhirik,  thus  "ns,  ^nx,  r^)^  (once  l^nx  Isa.  54:  10), 
DDrilS;;  the  sign  of  the  accusative  becomes  riix  before 
sufiixes  or  before  grave  suffixes  commonly  tn^,  thus  "'ri^, 
^r)'$.,  Dpns  rarely  DD.nii^,  Dnj^  (rarely  Dnnis)  and  Drjrx. 

a.  Sometimes,  particularly  in  the  books  of  Kings,  Jeremiah,  and  Eze- 
kiel,  the  preposition  takes  the  form  ""hix,  ^iN, 

Conjunctions. 

§  241.  1.  In  addition  to  the  prefixed  copulative  *1, 
§  235,  the  following  are  the  simple  conjunctions  in  most 
common  use,  ii^  or,  t^^  also,  DS  and  '^  if,  1T23N  and  "'S  that, 
because,  ]B  lest. 

2.  Compound  conjunctions  are  formed  by  combining 

(1.)  Two  conjunctions  Di$  ''S  hut,  ^3  ~,i$  how  much  more 
prop,  also  that. 

(2.)  The  conjimction  ^^  or  itjy?  with  a  preposition,  as 
n^ss  as,  Tiryj  "jrbb  in  order  tJmt,  n-ijs  -,?!  and  "i-i>J5  -j^i?  be- 
cause, "3  15  until,  ^3  Ttjt]  because. 

(3.)  An  adverb  with  a  preposition  or  conjunction, 
D"^bS  beforCf  "pb  or  "jS^b?  therefore,  '''^i^b  unless  from  ^b  if 
^b  not. 


256  etymology.  §  242 

Inteejections. 

§  242.  The  Hebrew  interjections,  like  those  of  other 
languages,  are  of  two  sorts,  viz.: 

1.  Natural  sounds  expressive  of  various  emotions,  as 

nj^,  nn,  nns  ah!  oh!  rkn  aha!  ^in  ho!  woe!  ^i5<,  n^ix, 

T  '  T  '  T    -:  TV  '  T  ' 

^iniJt,  ^5<  woe!  ^3bs;  alas!  DH  hush! 

2.  "Words  originallybelongingto  other  parts  of  speech, 
which  by  frequent  use  were  converted  into  interjections, 
T^Zih  come!  prop,  give,  nib  come!  prop,  go,  T\Ti  behold! 
prop,  a  demonstrative  adverb,  nb^bn  far  be  it!  ^^  ^ray.- 
from  ''i?2i  entreaty,  5<D  now!  I  pray  thee! 


PART  THIRD. 

SYNTAX. 

§  243.  1.  Syntax  treats  of  sentences  or  of  the  manner 
in  which  words  are  employed  in  the  utterance  of  thought. 
Its  office,  therefore,  is  to  exhibit  the  several  functions  of 
the  different  parts  of  speech  in  the  mechanism  of  the 
sentence,  the  relations  which  they  sustain  to  each  other, 
and  how  those  relations  are  outwardly  expressed. 

2.  Sentences  may  be  simple  or  compound.  A  simple 
sentence  is  the  expression  of  an  individual  mental  judg- 
ment. Two  or  more  such  judgments  united  in  one  con- 
nected utterance  form  a  compound  sentence,  the  several 
clauses  of  which  accordingly  consist  of  or  may  be  re- 
solved into  as  many  separate  simple  sentences. 

3.  Every  simple  sentence  must  embrace  first  a  sub- 
ject or  the  thing  spoken  of,  and  secondly,  a  predicate  or 
that  which  is  said  about  it.  Upon  these  two  elements  is 
built  the  entii'e  structure  of  human  speech. 

The  Subject. 

§  244.  The  subject  of  every  sentence  must  be  either 
a  noun,  as  D^h'bs  ^5^n  God  C7'eated  Gen.  1 :  1,  or  a  pronoun, 
as  ^jN  liJii)^  I  (am)  holy  Lev.  11:  44.  This  includes  infini- 
tives, which  are  verbal  nouns,  nii2  xb  p'Tlh  \Li2S  to  punish 
the  just  is  not  good  Prov.  17:  26,  and  adjectives  and  par- 
ticij)les  when  used  substantively,  i^'2Z^  i<i2^"5<b  an  unclean 

17 


258  SYNTAX.  §  245 

(person)  sJiall  not  enter  2  Cliron.  23:19,  r^f  ^bb^';  D^n^n  !Sb 
the  dead  shall  not  praise  the  Lord  Ps.  115:  17. 

a.  The  subject  of  a  sentence  may  be  a  noun  preceded  by  a  preposition 
e.  g.  p  in  a  partitive  sense,  t:rri~",*2  in:i^  there  went  out  (some)  of  the  people 
Ex.  16:  27,  2  Kin.  10:  10,  Ezr.  2:  68,  Neh.  5:  5,  Dan.  11:  5;  or  in  a  local 
sense  rj^ia  ^'i^z^  those  proceeditig  from  thee  shall  build  Isa.  58:  12;  or  the  par- 
ticle of  comparison  HX"]?  i'^is  (something)  like  a  plague  has  appeared 
Lev.  14:  35,  Ps.  74:  5.  'nisD  ti;!^"^^  "I'i"!??  t^^f-  ^*^e  of  which  has  vot  been 
Ex.9:  18,  11:  6,  2  Kin.  7:  19,  Dan.  10:  16,  18;  or  lyi  . . .  "Jia  in  the  sense 
of  both  . . .  and  ^I'ii:  n^n3-n?i  tD-iiirn  Cjivp  both  the  fowl  of  heaven  and  the 
beasts  have  fled  Jer.  9 :  9. 

6.  Wlien  tlie  subject  is  an  infinitive,  it  is  sometimes  as  in  English,  pre- 
ceded by  the  prepositimi  h  to,  niiinl?  Hia  (it  is)  good  to  give  thanks  Ps. 
92:  2,  2  Chron.  26:  18,  Eccies.  7:  5,  Mic.  3:1  or  it  may  be  witliout  a  pre- 
position rrna]  nia  (it  is)  good  to  make  melody  Ps.  147:  1,  Prov.  25:  7,  28:  21, 
Ezek.  11:  3,  18:  3;  the  latter  is  necessarily  the  case  when  the  infinitive  is 
in  tlie  construct  before  a  folloAving  noun  'i'n^b  cnxt^  nrn  n'iL}-xb  ma7i^s 
being  alone  (is)  not  good  Gen.  2: 18,  Ps.  133:  1.  Both  constructions  occur  in 
successive  clauses  1  Sam.  15:  22,  Prov.  17:  26,  18:  5,  and  even  in  the  same 
phrase  Prov.  21:  9,  19. 

c.  The  subject  is  very  rarely  an  adverb,  d2:fi~'|ri  Vs3  in?"]!!!  many  (prop, 
much)  of  the  people  have  fallen  2  Sam.  1 :  4. 

§  245.  The  subject  may  be  omitted  in  the  following 
cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  it  is  sufficiently  plain  from  the  connection, 
^'$  "fbt]  is  there  yet  ivith  thee  (a  corpse)?  Am.  6:  10,  or 
is  obvious  in  itself,  nib^  *i!ni^  (his  mother)  lare  him  1  Kin. 
1:  6,  Num.  26:  59,  1  Chron.  7:  14. 

a.  When  the  subject  of  a  sentence  or  clause  is  continued  from  the  pre- 
ceding it  is  ordinarily  not  repeated  Joel  2:  1  unless  in  passages  of  more 
than  usual  solemnity  and  emphasis  e.  g.  C^H'^X  in  Gen.  1:  3flf.  Sometimes 
the  subject  is  suggested  by  a  preceding  object  either  direct  Gen.  15:  13, 
16:  6,  19:  11,  37:  15,  39:  4,  44:  22,  Deut.  4:  9,  1  Sam.  17:  25,  Ps.  16:  8,  34:  1 
or  indirect  2  Chron.  19:  6,  Job  21:  19,  Ps.  22:  29,  Isa.  40:  14,  Am.  6:  2,  or 
by  a  noun  in  a  genitive  relation  Gen.  9:  6,  14:  2,  2  Sam.  20:  10.  Sometimes 
it  can  only  be  generally  inferred  from  the  preceding  context  he  put  forth 
i.  e.  one  of  the  children  Gen.  38:  28;  they  brought  him  hastily  i,  e.  those 
sent  by  Pharaoh  41:  14;  it  is  turned  unto  me  i.  e.  what  formerly  passed 
through  the  gate  of  the  nations  Ezek.  26:  2,  Judg.  13:  19;  or  is  evident 
from  the  nature  of  the  case  as  in  the  frequent  ellipsis  of  God  as  the  sub- 
ject in  poetic  passages  Isa.  38:  12,  13  and  particularly  in  the  book  of  Job 
17:  6,  20:  23,  21:  17,  23:  3  and  occasionally  even  in  prose;  or  is  first  ex- 
pressed in  a  subsequent  clause  or  sentence  Isa.  23:  1.  A  change  of  subject, 


§245  THE  SUBJECT.  259 

where  the  sense  plainly  requires  it  is  often  left  to  be  inferred  hj'  the  in- 
telligence of  the  reader  or  hearer  Gen.  24:  32,  29:  3,  Ex.  10:5,  34:  28, 
Deut.  33:  12,  2  Sam.  11:  13,  1  Kin.  9:  8,  9,  Mic.  2:6;  or  it  may  be  inti- 
mated by  the  insertion  of  a  personal  pronoun  Num.  35:  23,  Job  21:  22.    In 

1  Sam.  24:  11  the  subject  is  dropped  from  a  familiar  phrase,  OnPl  sell.  "'S'^S. 
Comp.  Deut.  7:  16,  13:  9,  Ezek.  20:  17. 

2.  When  it  is  indefinite;  thus,  if  an  action  is  spoken 
of  and  it  is  not  known  or  is  not  stated  by  whom  it  is 
performed.  The  third  person  plural  may  be  so  employed, 
b'^i^'^b  Tih^^  and  they  told  Saul  1  Sam.  18:  20,  or  third  per- 
son singular,  comp.  the  French  on  and  German  nuin,  !}<^)^ 
bz.lL  M'^d  one  called  its  name  Babel,  i.  e.  its  name  tvas  called 
Babel  Gen.  11:  9,  or  the  second  person  singular,  particu- 
larly in  laws  or  in  proverbs,  the  language  of  direct  ad- 
dress being  employed  while  every  one  who  hears  is  in- 
tended, bcs  ^b'nb^r!"5<b  thou  shalt  not  maJce  unto  thee  a 
graven  image  Ex.  20:  4,  23:  1,  Deut.  16:  1  £F.,  28:  1  ff., 
?]zb  '^tMz'b  T'i^'^tri  apply  thine  heart  unto  instruction  Prov. 
23:  12,  2:  Iff.,  Eccles.  11:  1. 

a.  Sometimes  ;:5iX  man  is  used  as  an  indefinite  subject,  C^X  bz^i'^-SS 
rii'ib  if  a  man  (i.  e.  any  one)  can  count  Gen.  13:  16,  23:  6,  41 :  44,  Ex.  21 :  7, 
34:  24,  Deut.  11:  25,  1  Sam.  24:  20,  2  Sam.  16:  23  K'ri  (but  not  in  K'thibh), 
Ps.  49:  8,  17,  Prov.  6:  27,  28,  Eccles.  1:  8,  Cant.  8:  7,  Isa.  36:  6,  or  the  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person,  Job  28:  3,  Eccles.  7:1,  10:  10,  or  the  participle 
of  the  accompanying  verb  "i'i'H  "^'l"l  and  the  hearer  shall  hear  2  Sam, 
17:  9,  ti-iTii-in  vii-in  ploughers  ploughed  Ps.  129:  3,  Gen.  7:  16,  Deut.  22:  8, 
Isa.  28:  4,  Jer.  9:  23,  31 :  5,  Ezek.  33:  4,  39:  15,  or  a  cognate  noun  T\ph  -^^1 
a7id  a  king  shall  reign  Jer.  23:  5,  Am.  9:  1,  comp.  n'^n  nio  the  death  of 
him  that  dieth  Ezek.  18:  32.  By  a  like  idiom  the  indefinite  object  may  be 
expressed  in  terms  of  the  governing  verb  "ih'n  13^^  "itx  nx  "lanx  I  shall 
speak  tvhatever  ivord  I  shall  speak  Ezek.  12:  25,  Ex.  16:  23,  1  Sam.  23:  15, 

2  Sam.  15:  20,  2  Kin.  8:  1,  or  with  the  accessory  idea  of  the  sovereignty  of 
the  actor  Ex.  4:  13,  33:  19,  or  of  his  self  consistency  Ex.  3:  14,  comp. 
Deut.  9 :  25. 

b.  The  plural  is  used  where  the  action  is  one  in  which  several  are  en- 
gaged Gen.  41 :  14,  43:  32,  Lev.  14:  40,  20:  27,  Num.  10:  3,  4,  17  :  3,  Deut. 
25:  1,  Josh.  10:  27,  24:  30,  Judg.  16:  7,  11,  2  Sam.  5:  17,  11:  20,  or  which 
may  be  predicated  of  people  generally',  where  we  would  say  men  or  use  a 
passive  construction  Lev.  27:  9,  11,  2  Sam.  23:  6,  Isa.  1:  29,  64:  3,  Jer.  51:  26, 
Ezek.  12:  23,  Hos.  12:  9,  Mai.  2:  7.  The  3d  sing,  is  used  of  an  action  which 
is  regarded  as  the  work  of  a  single  agent  Lev.  16:  32,  27:  8,  Num.  6:  13, 

17* 


200  SYNTAX.  §  245 

19:  3,5,  35:  25,  30,  2  Kin.  9:  21,  21:  26,  Prov.  22:27;  and  likewise  of  actions, 
in  which  many  are  really  engaged,  but  attention  is  directed  to  some  repre- 
sentative actor  or  to  each  individual  agent,  as  we  might  use  the  indefinite 
one  or  ant/  one  Ex.  10:  5,  21,  34:  15,  Lev.  7:  11,  Num.  35:  23,  2  Sam.  15:  32, 
Job  27:  23,  28:  3,  Isa.  7:  24,  Jer.  51:  33,  Am.  6:  12,  Mic.  7:  12;  so  as  the 
subject  of  an  infinitive  Eccles.  7:1.  In  recording  the  name  given  to  a  place 
or  person  it  is  usual  to  employ  the  singular  Xip,  X'Jp'^5  one  called,  respect 
being  had  to  its  original  imposition  or  to  subsequent  individual  utterances 
of  it  Gen.  19:  22,  21:  31,  33:  17,  Ex.  17:  7,  Num.  11:  3,  34,  although  the 
plural  'ii<"}i;5,  lX'ip'^1  thei/  called  also  occurs  Judg,  18:  12,  1  Sam.  23:  28, 
1  Chron.  11:7,  14:  11  (the  parallel  2  Sam.  5 :  20  has  the  sing.).  The  singular 
is  often  used  in  comparisons,  whose  vividness  is  increased  by  individualizing 
t]h'^'1  TCNS  as  one  hunts  the  partridge  1  Sam.  26:  20,  2  Sam.  16:  23  K'thibh, 
1  Kin.  14:  10,  2  Kin.  21:  13,  Jer.  19:  11;  but  the  plural  in  such  passages  as 
Isa.  9 .  2  where  joint  action  is  involved.  The  indefinite  singular  and  plural 
are  sometimes  interchanged  as  equivalents  Gen.  25:  25,  26,  Lev.  4:  24  comp. 
7:  2,  1  Kin.  18:  23,  26,  Job  28:  4,  Jer.  8:  4,  9:  7,  Ezek.  48:  14,  and  some- 
times suggest  distinct  agents  Gen.  18:  10,  19:  17,  Lev.  7:  2,  3,  16:  27.  Suc- 
cessive plurals  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  some others  Job  24 :  2  flf. 

c.  The  indefinite  construction  is  often  employed  in  Hebrew  from  a 
preference  for  the  active  form,  where  the  passive  would  be  used  in  English; 
and  in  some  cases,  as  it  would  seem,  without  any  thought  of  the  real  agency 
concerned.  So  3  plur.  Prov.  9:  11,  and  with  special  frequency  in  the  book 
of  Job,  "^^"^iO  hw  T\^'h  tvearisome  nights  are  appointed  to  me  lit.  they  have 
appointed  7:3,  4:  19,  18:  18,  19:  26,  20:  8,  34:  20;  3  sing.  1  Sam.  2:  20, 
Isa.  6:  10,  8:  4,  53:  9.  Sometimes  the  indefinite  form  alternates  with  the 
passive  Job  6:  2,  Isa.  29:  11,  12,  Jer.  16:  6,  7,  Ezek.  15:  3,  Neb.  7:  3. 

d.  The  2  pers.  sing,  indefinite  is  most  frequent  in  precepts  and  apho- 
risms, but  is  also  found  in  topographical  descriptions  in  the  current  phrase 
nbx'a  as  thou  earnest  to  Gen.  10:  19,  30,  13:  10,  25:  18,  1  Sam.  15:  7,  27:  8, 
or  ?^N3  ^'J  Judg.  6:  4,  11:  33,  1  Sam.  17:  52,  1  Kin.  18:  46,  and  in  the  tech- 
nical expression  of  the  Levitical  law  TJS'i^  thy  valuation  i.  e.  that  of  the 
officiating  priest  Lev.  5:  15,  27:  2  ff.  It  is  comparatively  rare  in  other  con- 
nections xisn  Isa.  7:  25.  It  is  sometimes  used  collectively,  the  whole  ijeople 
being  addressed  as  a  unit  Deut.  19:  1 — 3,  22:  21;  or  the  2  plur.  may  be  used 
instead  Ex.  22:  21,  30,  Lev.  19:  2  ff.,  20:  7,  8,  or  the  2  sing,  and  plural  may 
be  interchanged  in  the  same  context  Ex.  13:  4,  5,  22:  20,  23:  9,  25,  Lev, 
19:  15,  19,  Deut.  6:  1,  2,  9:  7,  18:  15,  27:  4.  The  2  sing,  indefinite  inter- 
changes with  the  3d  sing.  Prov.  19:  25;  the  2d  plur.  with  3d  plural  Num. 
10:  3 — 6;   2d  plur.  with  3d  sing.  Mai.  2:  15. 

3.  When  the  construction  is  impersonal;  in  this  case 
the  third  person  singular  masculine  is  the  form  commonly 
adopted,  'Tj'^rS':!!  5'i'^'bj^  let  it  not  he  grievous  in  thy  sight 
Gen.  21:  12,  bn^H  TiJ  then  it  teas  begun  i.  e.  men  began, 
Gen.  4:  26,  though  the  feminine  is  also  employed  on  ac- 


§  246  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN  AS  SUBJECT.  2G1 

count  of  its  special  affinity  with  the  neuter,  bik'l'iE';!?  "i::riT 
and  Israel  was  distressed  lit.  it  was  strait  to  Israel  Judg 
10:  9. 

a.  The  masculine  as  the  more  indefinite  and  primary  form  is  commoulj 
emploj'ed  when  the  subject  is  altogether  indeterminate,  as  when  a  state  or 
condition  is  affirmed  to  exist  with  no  thought  of  any  particular  subject  in 
which  it  inheres  J^^ni  and  it  shall  be  or  come  to  pass  Gen.  4:  14,  '^n";^  Gen. 
12:  11,  nn  it  is  enough  Deut.  3:  26,  fTiip-]  it  is  hard  Deut.  15:  18,  In;'^  and 
it  was  light  2  Sam.  2:  32,  "^  iTin  it  burtied  to  thee,  i.  e.  thou  wert  angry 
Gen.  4:  6,  the  person  aff'ected  being  preceded  by  "b  to,  so,  "b  '^'J'^l  Gen. 
40:  14,  -i^  Ta  Ruth  1 :  13,  lis  nvj'l  b^K^b  n"S  l  Sam.  16:  23,  ib  cn  1  Kin.  1: 1,  2, 
•lb  nr  Job  3:  13,  b  n?5"i  Prov.  24:  25.  So  in  passive  verbs  "isn-i  Cant.  8:  8, 
>n^}.  it  is  done,  all  is  over  Mic.  2:  4,  "i:";  it  is  sifted,  one  sifts  Am.  9:  9, 
!i:b  xc"i3  it  is  healed  to  us,  we  are  healed  Isa.  53 : 5,  "b^b  v'i'Z'^^  the  king  shall 
be  su^alloiced  up  2  Sam.  17:  16;  when  the  object  of  the  action  is  expressed, 
it  is  regarded  as  not  the  subject  but  the  object  of  the  impersonal  passive 
§  283.  4.  a,  hence  d-i'2  n-jp^  Mai.  1:  11  (though  followed  by  nnj^),  and  so 
when  the  object  is  a  clause  l-bx;*  Gen.  22:  14,  yiij  41:  21,  "sn  Nah.  2:  8, 
Esth.  1:  19.  Once  the  impersonal  it  is  represented  by  a  suffix  "15203  ichen  it 
is  hot  Job  6:  17. 

b.  When  the  subject,  though  not  distinctly  expressed,  is  something 
vaguely  suggested  in  the  context  or  by  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  the 
impersonal  verb  takes  the  feminine  form  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter.  Thus 
ib  "i:j;»t  there  was  distress  to  him  Gen.  32:  8  simply  declares  the  existence  of 
the  distress,  while  "i^ni  it  was  distressing  Judg.  10:  9  contains  an  implied 
reference  to  its  cause  previously  stated;  tT^.v'in  it  shall  be  viz.  the  act  just 
mentioned  Gen.  21:  30;  pn"''riril  and  it  became  a  custom  viz.  what  is  im- 
mediately added  Judg.  11:  39;  bbpil  2  Sam.  13:  39,  whether  b  be  supplied 
it  ceased  to  David  viz.  his  hostihty  to  Absalom,  or  nbs  be  taken  in  the 
sense  of  xbs  it  withlield  David  from  his  hostility  that  he  was  comforted  etc.; 
so  r-jip  Ps.  69:  32,  nrb^  Jer.  7:  31,  nav^  10:  7,  "i'Hri  Ezek.  12:  25,  which 
in  ver.  28  takes  as  its  object  '^^3'n;  Job  4:  5,  18:  14,  Ps.  69:  11.  In  the 
following  verbs  relating  to  natural  phenomena  the  feminine  form  occurs 
nns'y":  it  is  tempestuous  Ps.  50:  3,  sbrn  it  snoios  68:  15,  I'^ii'sn  it  rains 
Am.'*:  7. 

The  Personal  Pronoun  as  Subject. 

§  246.  1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  rarely  used  be- 
fore verbal  forms,  which  of  themselves  indicate  the  per- 
son, ^n^bx  I  said,  ^^'!:^5  thou  saidst,  unless  with  the  view 
of  expressing  emphasis  or  opposition,  ^>f5l  ^^"^5  '^^*^ 
*i:^ib  ^jnisi|i  they  are  brought  down  and  fallen,  but  we  are 
risen  Ps.  20:  9. 


262  SYNTAX.  §  246 

a.  Except  in  circumstantial  clauses  as  1  Kin.  1 :  41,  the  personal  pro- 
noun as  an  emphatic  subject  always  implies  a  tacit  contrast  even  when 
this  is  not  directly  expressed,  as  it  mostly  is,  in  the  context  P"!^  nnx  thou 
Inowest  (whether  others  do  or  not)  Ps.  69:  6,  20,  Ti's^X  "'ix  I  will  be  king 
(and  not  some  other  aspirant  to  the  throne)  1  Kin.  1 :  5,  tHi  "^bix  I  my- 
self gave  (it  was  my  own  act  not  that  of  others)  Gen.  16:  5.  It  may  be 
made  still  more  emphatic  by  a  periphrasis  comp.  "^nsi:!!  "^iix  I  have  sinned 
'z  Sam.  24:  17  with  "inxin— irx  Xlri" 'JX  it  is  I  that  have  sinned  1  Chron. 
21 :  17,  or  by  inserting  the  particle  Da  also  Gen.  20:  6,  21 :  26,  44:  9,  48:  19 
Num.  18:  28,  Hos.  4:  6,  qx  too  Lev.  26:  24,  or  pn  only  Job  1:  15  fif.  Tht 
emphatic  pronoun  regularly  pi^^edes  the  verb  Gen.  15:  15,  19:  19,  21:  26, 
24:  45,   28:  16,   33:  14,  Ex.  18:  21,   Num.   22:  32,   Judg.   11:  35,  Euth  4:  4, 

1  Sam.  1:  28,  10:  18,  19,  2  Sam.  2:  6,  17:  8,  1  Kin.  1:  17,  8:  32,  18:  12,  21:  7, 

2  Chron.  13:  11,  Neh.  1:  8,  Ps.  2:6,  7,  Isa.  37:  16,  49:  15,  53:  4,  Ezek.  16:  33, 
Hos.  8:  4,  12:  11,  Am.  7:  17,  Mic.  6:  13-15.  If  special  emphasis  is  to  bti 
thrown  upon  the  verb  or  its  adjuncts,  it  may  precede  the  pronoun  Judg. 
15:  12,  so  particularly,  when  it  is  accompanied  by  an  absolute  infinitive 
Ex.  4:  14,  or  is  in  an  energetic  modal  form,  such  as  the  imperative  Ex. 
18:  19,  Deut.  5:  24,  1  Sam.  28:  22,  jussive  or  future  with  bx  Jer.  17:  18, 
Obad.  ver.  13,  (but  see  2  Chron.  20:  15),  intentional  (paragogic  future) 
2  Sam.  18:  22  or  has  Vav  Consecutive,  to  which  the  verb  must  be  imme- 
diately attached  Ezek.  17:  22  (comp.  ver.  3),  or  stress  is  laid  upon  its  suffix 
Judg.  9:  28.  No  emphasis  is  involved  in  the  use  of  a  pronoun,  when  per- 
spicuity requires  it,  as  when  it  is  joined  with  a  participle  Gen.  15:  14, 
2  Chron.  13:  11  or  with  any  other  predicate  than  a  verb  2  Sam.  17:  8,  Jer. 
1 :  6,  7,  17:  17.  The  unemphatic  use  of  the  pronoun  with  the  persons  of 
the  verb  is  rare  except  in  Ecclesiastes,  where  it  occurs  with  remarkable 
frequency  and  generally  follows  the  verb  e.  g.  1:  16,  2:  1,  llflp. ;  see  also 
Cant.  5:  5,  Ps.  41:  5,  116:  10,  11,  Isa.  38:  10. 

2.  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  may  be  added  to 
the  subject  to  render  it  emphatic,  D'^ribxH  iX^Tl  nirr;  Je- 
hovah, he  is  the  God  1  Km.  18:  39,  i^'^Tl  "ih!J<  the  Lord  him- 
self will  give  Isa.  7:14,  1  Sam.  17:14,  Gen.  25:  16,  34:  21, 
Mai.  1 :  7,  12,  and  tliis  even  when  it  is  a  pronoun  of  the 
hrst  or  second  person,  Hra  J^^n  ^bb^  I,  this  person  and  no 
other,  equivalent  to  I  myself  am  blotting  out  Isa.  43:  25, 
51: 12;  Tti^lT)  npD  S^Jl  rirN  shalt  thou,  such  an  one  as  thou 
art,  he  altogether  unpunished?  Jer.  49:  12,  14:  22,  2  Sam. 
7:  28,  Neh.  9:  6,  Ps.  44:  5,  Isa.  37: 16,  Zeph.  2:  12.  Comp. 
in  Chald.  Ezr.  5:11. 

a.  This  seems  to  be  a  better  explanation  than  to  regard  Xlrt  as  a  co> 
pida,  §  261.  2,   or  such  constructions  as  abbreviated  relative  clauses  e.  g 


§24  7  THE  PEESONAL  PRONOUN  AS  SUBJECT.  263 

I  am  he  who  Uotteth  out  etc.  after  the  analogy  of  1  Chron.  21:  17.  The 
pronoun  so  used  may  stand  before  the  predicate  as  in  most  of  the  instances 
adduced  above,  or  after  it  Gen.  41:  25,  26,  Job  3:  19,  Ps.  50:  6,  Ezek.  18:  4. 
and  even  before  the  subject  when  the  predicate  is  emphatically  prefixed 
Ex.  12:  42,  or  after  the  subject  Num.  18:  23.  In  any  case  it  commonly 
agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  subject,  w"S:ri  X^in  D'nri  the  blood,  it 
is  the  life  Deut.  12:  23,  Ex.  3:  5;  though  sometimes  it  agrees  in  preference 
witli  the  predicate,  tDnjnx  xin  D'.l^n  "'ny  "ina  the  houses  of  the  cities  of  th" 
Levites,  this  is  their  possession  Lev.  25:  33,  Jer.  10:  3. 

h.  Various  pronominal  ideas  for  which  no  distinct  pronoun  exists  in 
Hebrew,  are  expressed  by  substantives  or  other  appropriate  words;  thus  the 
indefinite  pronoun  one  or  avy  one  by  csi  a  soul  or  person,  d"^X  a  man,  nnx 
or  DTSn  a  man;  the  reflexive  self  by  rs:  with  the  proper  suffix  irEJ  my- 
self etc.  or  by  an  emphatic  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  Hos.  4:  14  or  suffix 
Lev.  19:  18,  Ps.  49:  19,  Lsa.  45:  23,  Jer.  7:  19;  the  reciprocal  one  another 
by  rnx  "r^iX  a  man  his  brother  or  in^"";  ia"'i<  a  man  his  friend;  correlatives, 
one...the  other  by  n't...m  Ex.  17:  12,  1  Km.  3:  23,  Eccles.  6:  5,  or  nnx...lrx 
Ex.  18:  3,  4,  1  Kin.  3:  25,  comp.  2  Kin.  4:  35;  the  same  by  WJib  bone  or  sub- 
stance nin  crn  C'SV  the  very  same  day  Lev.  23:  14,  and  in  a  very  few  pas- 
sages as  some  suppose  by  an  emphatic  Xin  Deut.  32:  39,  Ps.  102:  28,  though 
even  here  as  in  Isa.  41:  4,  43:  10,  the  pronoun  may  retain  its  ordinary  sense 
he,  i.  e.  the  being  or  person  referred  to;  others,  as  introducing  a  new  class 
in  an  enumeration,  is  in  Job  24:  16  expressed  by  n^an  lit.  they  or  those 
distinguished  from  such  as  had  been  previously  mentioned. 

§  247.  1.  The  subject  may  be  extended  by  connect- 
ing two  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns  and  thus  forming 
what  is  called  a  compound  subject  Y"]J<ri^.  D'b"£n  ^i'D"^ 
Ukz'l'b'z^  and  the  heavens  and  the  earth  and  all  their  host 

T    T     ;  T    ! 

were  finished  Gen.  2:  1,  Hibj  "^yiT}]  ^DSi  and  I  and  the  lad 
will  go  Gen.  22:  5. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  extended  by  adding  to  the  noun  an 
article,  adjective,  demonstrative  pronoun,  pronominal 
suffix,  or  another  noun  with  which  it  may  be  either  in 
apposition  or  in  construction.  When  thus  united  with 
other  qualifying  words  the  noun  alone  is  called  the  gram- 
matical subject,  the  noun,  together  with  its  adjuncts,  is 
called  the  logical  subject. 


264  SYNTAX.  §  248 

The  Aeticle. 

§  248.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in 
other  languages  to  particularize  the  object  spoken  of, 
and  distinguish  it  from  all  others.  It  may  either  specify 
individual  objects  in  distinction  from  others  of  like  char- 
acter, or  designate  a  particular  class  in  distinction  from 
other  classes  of  objects.  In  the  latter  case  it  is  called 
the  generic  article.  Thus  n^"]5<  a  lion,  one  of  the  species, 
Gen.  49:  9;  nJl'^sn  the  particular  lion,  singled  out  from 
the  rest  of  his  kind,  Judg.  14:  8,  or  the  lion  in  general, 
distinguished  from  other  species  of  animals  Isa.  31:4. 
It  is  accordingly  prefixed  in  the  following  cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  the  thing  referred  to  is  one  which  has  been 
mentioned  before,  and  God  said,  Let  there  be  Tp^"^  a  fir- 
mament, etc.,  and  God  made  TJ^y^  ^^^^  firmament  Gen. 
1 :  6,  7,  11 :  4,  5,  rni^an  the  altar  Gen.  13:4  with  allusion 
to  T]3.V2  an  altar  12:8;  irx....-;:?  Ex.  13:  21,  but  mr!....-b'n 
ver.  22,  first  brk  then  brkn  Num.  19:  14;  TZJ^JJ  Judg.  1: 24, 
but  t^kn  ver.  25. 

•      T 

2.  When  it  is  defined  by  accompanying  words,  as  a 
relative  clause,  '31  Tibn  ^5b  ^^i^  "ai^kn  ^'h'lTi^  blessed  is  the 
man  who  has  not  tvalked,  etc.,  Ps.  1:  1,  an  adjective  T^i^sri 
bl^Tl  the  greater  light,  "t2|>n  'ni^i^sn  the  lesser  light  Gen. 
1 :  16,  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  ^tl  a  mountaiyi,  riTn  ""hJl 
this  mountain,  S^fin  *inn  that  mountain,  or  any  descrip- 
tive phrase  wy'^'^tl  b?^  b^.^Tl  the  two-horyied  ram  Dan. 
8:  6,  n-^inn  brn  ^S'b?  ^\^)^r}  the  ^porch  before  the  tem;ple 
1  Km.  6:  3.  ' 

a.  In  this  case  the  article  is  sometimes  generic,  as  is  shown  in  the  first 
of  the  examples  above  given;  "^/ie  man  who  has  not  tvalked  in  the  counsel 
of  tvicJced  persons"  does  not  denote  an  individual  but  represents  a  class  and 
the  affirmation  is  made  of  every  one  included  in  that  class.  The  article  in 
1  Sam.  9:  9  is  best  explained  by  supposing  that  the  noun  is  limited  by  the 
following  words  '31  in^^a  and  is  hence  conceived  definitely  as  the  man^ 


g  248  THE  AETICLE.  265 

whoever  he  might  be,  who  went  to  consult  God,  comp.  Dent.  18:  19,  1  Sam, 
17:  25.  Ewald  is  of  the  opinion  that  the  second  word  defines  the  first  in 
tlie  phrase  ~n^  rr3  Ex.  9:  18  and  elsewhere,  and  that  it  means  about  the 
time  to-niorrotv  i.  e.  when  it  is  to-morrow;  the  true  sense,  however,  appears 
to  be  about  this  time  to-morroiv,  see  3.  c  below. 

3.  "When  it  is  obviously  suggested  by  tlie  circum- 
stances, or  may  be  presumed  to  be  well  known:  she  emp- 
tied her  pitcher  into  npisr.  tlie  trough  Gen.  24:  20,  viz.,  the 
one  which  must  have  been  by  a  well  used  for  w^atering 
cattle;  Abimelech  looked  through  '(^Tjr\  the  windoiv  Gen. 
2G:  8,  i.  e.  of  the  house  in  which  it  is  taken  for  granted 
that  he  was;  let  us  go  to  TliTiT]  the  (well  known)  seer 
1  Sam.  9:9. 

a.  The  article  thus  used  adds  to  the  vividness  of  a  description  and  often 
affords  incidental  evidence  of  the  writer's  familiarity  with  the  features  of 
the  locality  or  the  circumstances  of  his  narrative.  Thus  rTi:^'H3..."in3  in  the 
(not  a)  mountain  ...in  the  (not  a)  cave  Gen.  19:  30,  y^^i^i  the  interpreter 
necessary  for  Hebrews  in  Egj'pt  Gen.  42;  23,  "iNSfi  the  tcell,  known  to  have 
been  there,  or  characteristic  of  every  inhabited  place  Ex.  2:  15,  M3Sn  the 
thorn-btish  such  as  grew  in  the  desert  Ex.  3:  2,  ^tixfi  the  tent,  viz.  the  one 
used  for  the  purpose  Ex.  33 :  7,  "i"|n  the  young  man  present  to  the  writer's 
mind  as  the  one  who  brought  the  message  Num.  11 :  27,  though  some  judge 
the  article  to  be  generic  and  take  the  noun  in  a  collective  sense  as  equi- 
valent to  young  men;  rrc^ri  the  Cushite  tcoman,  whom  Moses  had  married, 
as  is  exi^lained  in  the  next  clause  Num.  12:  1;  iir;2"i"n  the  maid  of  the  high 
priest  2  Sam.  17:  17,  and  ver.  19  "T^St-^  the  woman  who  belonged  in  the 
house,  "can  the  cover  which  she  had  or  which  was  commonly  used  for  the 
purpose;  "~:isn  d"xn  the  well  known  Egyptian  1  Chron.  11:  23,  Certain 
names  of  diseases  may  receive  the  article,  being  well  known  physical  con- 
ditions, as  we  say  the  cholera  or  the  plague;  thus  the  leprosy  r^na  Lev.  13:  2 
or  n>isn  ver.  12,  with  blindness  C'i\']3B3  Gen,  19:  11,  "p^J^S  Zech,  12:4, 
and  various  other  ailments  Lev,  14:  54-56,  Deut,  28:  27;  so  mental  states 
•jisja  and  "pSSTt'ii  madness,  "I'injsn  and  "nariri  astonishment. 

h.  The  article  is  accordingly  used  as  in  Greek  and  in  some  modern 
languages  in  place  of  an  unemphatic  possessive  pronoun:  she  took  ""'i/an 
tfie  veil  Gen.  24:  65,  i,  e.  the  one  which  she  had,  or,  according  to  the  Eng- 
lish idiom,  her  veil;  David  took  "iliSn  the  harp  i.  e.  his  harp  1  Sam.  16:  23, 
so  the  LXX.   ekafJi^avB  Aav)l  t/jv  Kivvpexv.    See  also  Num.  22:  32,  1  Kin.  1:  47. 

c.  With  words  denoting  time  it  expresses  the  present  as  that  which 
would  most  readily  occur  to  the  mind,  ci'ti  the  day  i.  e.  that  which  is  now 
passing,  to-day  Gen.  4:  14,  rib'^n  the  night  i.  e.  to-night  Gen,  30:  15,  ni^'fi 
the  year  i,  e.  this  year  Jer.  28:  16,  n"Qn  the  time  i.  e.  this  time  Gen.  29:  35, 
so  in  the  fuller  phrase  crferi  nnr  Gen.  29:  34;   unless  another  idea  is  more 


266  SYNTAX.  §  248 

naturally  suggested  by  the  context,  e.  g.  rii"3  at  this  time,  now  Judg.  13:  23, 
but  at  the  time  of  the  action  here  supposed  i.  e.  then,  in  that  case  Judg. 
21:  22,  at  the  proper  time  Num.  23:  23,  the  article  having  its  distributive 
sense,  see  No.  4. 

4.  When  it  is  referred  to  as  a  specimen  of  its  class, 
so  that  the  article  has  a  distributive  sense  and  is  equi- 
valent to  each,  he  offered  a  bullock  and  a  ram  TjiiT'E^  on 
the  altar  i.  e.  on  each  of  the  seven  altars  Num.  23:  2, 
/  hid  a  hundred  men  fifty  by  fifty  H*!^^^  in  the  cave 
i.  e.  in  each  cave  1  Kin.  18:  13,  llj'xb.^o  the  man  i.  e.  each 
man  Gen.  45:  22,  ln"^b  for  the  house  i.  e.  each  house  Ex. 
12:  3,  Di^b /or  the  day  i.  e.  every  day  Ezek.  46:  13;  see 
also  45:  15,  24,  Num.  28:  14,  20,  2  Chron.  8:  13. 

a.  Occasionally  indefinite  nouns  are  used  distributively,  ui'^k^  to  a  man 
i.  e.  each  man  2  Sam.  6:  19. 

5.  When  it  is  distinguished  above  all  others  of  hke 
kind  or  is  the  only  one  of  its  class,  T\'%T]  the  house  viz. 
of  God,  the  temple  Mic.  3:  12,  or  of  the  king,  the  palace 
2  Kin.  10:  5,  "|i^5jn  the  Lord  Isa.  1:  24,  D^hb.sn  the  (true) 
God,  D":"bisri  the  heavens,  '^'}y^Ti  the  earth  Gen.  1:1,  timT] 
the  sun  Gen.  15:  12. 

6.  When  it  is  an  appellative  noun  used  in  a  generic 
or  universal  sense,  l^nH  the  sword  devour eth  one  as  well 
as  another  2  Sam.  11:  25;  they  shall  mount  up  with  wings 
D-"n;^:3  as  the  eagles  Isa.  40:  31,  Ex.  22:  1,  Ps.  147:  10, 
and  sometimes  when  it  is  a  material  or  abstract  noun,  in 
which  case  the  English  idiom  does  not  admit  the  article, 
where  there  is  -H-tn  gold  Gen.  2:11  LXX.  to  xpua/ov;  the 
king  made  ",C3ri"ln5!^  silver  like  stones  1  Kin.  10:  27;  swal- 
lowed up  "^TT"2  of  ivine,  led  astray  "'bfiT\"12  by  strong 
drink  Isa.  28:  7;  where  shall  roi^iy)  wisdom  be  found? 
Job  28:  12  LXX.  yj  Is  co(j)ia;  there  is  a  superiority  ^'b^nb 
Wb^crj""]"^  to  tvisdom  above  folly  like  the  superiority  liisb 
T^iijnn"?^  of  light  above  darkness  Eccles.  2:  13. 


§248 


THE  ARTICLE.  267 


o.  The  article  is  used  with  abstracts  as  with  other  nouns  both  in  a 
particular  and  generic  sense.  Thus  ^"CZT^  denotes  wisdom  in  any  relation, 
multitude  of  years  shall  teach  «T^:n  xvisdom  Job  32:  7,  38:  36,  "^:nn  is 
either  wisdom  in  some  particular  relation  e.  g.  2  Chron.  1:12  the  ivisdom 
which  Solomon  had  asked  for  vs.  10:  11;  1  Kin.  7:  14  the  wisdom  to  do  all 
work;  or  wisdom  in  general,  as  an  attribute  distinguished  from  other  attri- 
butes e.  g.  ST^^n^i  icisdom  giveih  life  to  its  possessor  Eccles.  7:  12,  19.  More 
frequentlj',  however,  the  article  is  dropped  Avith  this  class  of  words  as  un- 
necessary, e.  g.  i^^rT}  u-isdom  to  do  all  work  Ex.  36:  1,  ^^r^  wisdom,  the 
attribute  in  general,  shall  die  tvith  you  Job  12:  2,  15:  8,  28:  18. 

h.  The  article  is  used  with  adjectives  and  participles  to  denote  the  class, 
which  they  describe,  either  in  the  plural  D"i*r!n  the  living,  C^ran  the  dead 
Isa.  8:  19,  Eccles.  9:  5,  or  in  the  singular  in  a  collective  sense,  God  shall 
judge  rw~rjTN'i  pi^un-rx  the  righteous  and  the  wicked  Eccl.  3:  17;  the 
proverb  of  "'ib"';?!!  the  ancients  1  Sam.  24:  14,  LJ"'32n  the  escaped  Gen.  14:  13, 
Snixrj  the  Hers  in  wait  Josh.  8:  19;  so  with  Gentile  nouns,  which  are 
properly  adjectives,  §  196.  1,  '^''l'35<\J  the  Amorite,  ''i^iSti  the  Canaanite, 
Gen.  15:  21.  Sometimes  a  singular  noun  with  the  generic  article  is  equi- 
valent to  an  indefinite  plural,  stress  being  laid  upon  the  species,  though 
some  only  of  those  included  under  it  are  intended,  D"i'rt  the  bird  of  prey 
i.  e.  birds  of  prey  came  doicn  Gen.  15:  11;  as  one  pursues  X^pti  the  part- 
ridge i.  e.  partridges  in  the  moimtains  1  Sam.  26:  20;  n'^riw^afi  the  one  de- 
stroying i.  e.  destroyers  1  Sam.  13:  17;  "T^i^^?  like  the  sheaf  i.  e.  sheaves 
Mic.  4:  12;  d"^3nxi.  ...  "i'i»nr?'l  ...  C^Sv]  2  Kin.  7:  10;  p'^'ian  is  contrasted  with 
Ciixn  Ps.  37:  16.  So  some  explain  '""iti  Num.  11:  27  as  equivalent  to  ^''yj} 
but  it  may  more  naturally  be  the  young  man  present  to  the  writer's  mind 
as  the  one  who  brought  the  message. 

c.  The  Hebrew  infinitive  does  not  receive  the  article;  T^V'^y^  Gen.  2:  9 
and  elsewhere,  nntn  1  Kin.  10:  19,  2  Chron.  9:  18  and  Sipna  Ezek.  7:  14 
may  be  regarded  as  nouns.  In  a  verj'  few  instances  the  article  is  prefixed 
to  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  with  the  force  of  a  relative  pronoun,  X^ibbfiri 
who  ivent  Josh.  10:  24,  ir^'^n  that  shall  be  born  Judg.  13:  8,  Tii'^^.pfif]  which 
he  sanctified  1  Chron.  26:  28,  ix:i":in  toho  are  present  1  Chron.  29:  17,  Tr^^ 
into  (the  place)  which  he  prepared  2  Chron.  1:  4,  "i^-nbisri  Gen.  21 :  3,  f^X^n 
Gen.  18:  21,  46:  27,  Job  2:  11,  nni^ti  Euth  1:  22,  2:  6,  4:  3,  'n^'il'n  l  Kin. 
11:  9,  t^Vt^'v!  ^'^^^-  26:  17;  so  also  2  Chron.  29:  36,  Ezr.  8:  25,^0:  14,  17, 
Isa.  56:  3,  Jer.  5:  13,  Dan.  8:1.  It  is  once  prefixed  to  a  preposition,  irii-'n 
what  (was)  upon  it  1  Sam.  9;  24. 

d.  Nouns  in  the  vocative  are  governed  by  the  same  rules  in  the  re- 
ception of  the  article,  as  when  not  the  object  of  address;  thus  with  the 
article,  c-;r-;^n  O  heavens,  7"iS<f7  0  earth  Deut.  32:  1,  C^inin  O  priests  Mai. 
1 :  6,  nsViTar;  0  queen  Esth.  5:  3,  £-i""ir;ti  ye  deaf,  C"T.?v?  ^^  blind  Isa.  42;  18, 
na-iirri  thou  that  dwellest  Cant.  8:  13;  so  Ps.  123:  1,  Ezek.  34:  9,  37:  4,  9; 
or  without  the  article,  when  indefinite,  ^^5  0  man  Isa.  22:  12,  (or  it  may 
Btand  absolutely  and  qualify  the  preceding  word  a  manly  cast)  niSJX'iJ  D'^'i^J 
O  careless  women  Isa.  32;  9,  Q"'"135<  0  ye  husbandmen  Joel    1:  11,  C'ia 


2G8  SYNTAX.  §  249 

ye  children  Prov.  4;  1,  Y';]k   0  land  Eccles.  10;  16,  17,  nnj^S   0  barren 
Isa.  54:  1. 

e.  Like  the  GreiBk  irdg,  when  followed  by  a  definite  noun  1=3  means  the 
XL-hole  or  all  ynxn-bs  the  whole  earthy  cirn-bs  all  the  people,  n^iyn-bs  all 
the  nations,  so  with  singular  nouns  in  a  collective  sense  d'^Nn"53  all  the 
men  Deut.  4:  3,  nii;n-p3  all  the  cities  Jer.  4:  29,  Ex.  1:  22,  1  Sam.  3:  17, 
Ps.  150:  6,  Prov.  19:  6  or  participles  used  collectively  Isa.  4:  3,  43:  7; 
followed  by  an  indefinite  noun  it  means  every  or  any  rr^s-bs  every  house 
Isa.  24:  10,  t'n-^s  any  blood  Lev.  17:  10,  or  every  sort  of,  'f?"^  every  sort 
of  a  tree  Gen.  2:  9,  7:  14;  though  here  as  elsewhere  the  poets  may  omit 
the  article  §  250  Ci<"i~b3  the  u'hole  head  Isa.  1:  5  and  it  is  occasionally 
dropped  even  in  prose  Jer.  52:  30.  Connected  with  a  negative  adverb  it 
forms  a  universal  negation  no,  or  if  the  words  be  rendered  separately  our 
idiom  requires  us  to  translate  b"  by  a7ty,  riwj^*^  xb  nDXb^"b3  no  ivork  shall 
be  done  Ex.  12:  16,  irnn-bs  ""^X  there  is  no  neiv  thing  Eccles.  1:  9,  bi^i'^  sils 
ni^ix'bs  neither  can  any  god  2  Chron.  32;  15.  Comp.  ov  %tK(xiai%y;GSTai  itd'^a 
aap^  Rom.  3:  20. 

f.  The  Hebrew  article  is  sometimes  found  where  the  English  requires 
the  indefinite  article  or  none  at  all;  but  it  must  not  on  that  account  be 
supposed  that  it  ever  loses  its  proper  force  or  becomes  equivalent  to  an 
indefinite  article.  The  diff'erence  of  idiom  is  due  to  a  diff"erence  in  the 
mode  of  conception.  Thus  in  comparisons  the  Hebrew  commonly  conceived 
of  the  whole  class  of  objects  of  which  he  spoke,  while  Ave  mostly  think  of 
one  or  more  individuals  belonging  to  the  class,  "is?  as  (the)  a  nest,  Isa.  10: 
14,  ^ES3  as  (the)  a  scroll  Isa.  34:  4,  like  rending  ■'i^Li  (the)  a  kid  Judg. 
14:  6,  as  C'^nb'nri  (the)  bees  do  Deut.  1:  44,  dii^lL'S  as  (the)  scarlet,  sbt"?  as 
(the)  snow,  "Bins  as  (the)  crimson,  "i^iis  as  (the)  loool  Isa.  1:  18;  so  Gen. 
19:  28,  2  Sam.  17:  10,  Isa.  24:  2  but  this  is  not  invariably  the  case  n'iii:*ia3 
like  foxes  Ezek.  13:  4,  £^X3:i3  as  roes  1  Chron.  12:  8.  Cases  also  not  in- 
frequently occur  in  which  the  article  may  either  be  inserted  or  omitted 
with  equal  propriety  and  without  any  material  change  of  sense,  according 
as  the  noun  is  to  the  mind  of  the  speaker  definite  or  indefinite.  In  speak- 
ing of  the  invasion  of  his  father's  flocks,  David  says,  ''"ixin  the  lion  and 
Si^ri  the  bear  came  1  Sam.  17:  34,  because  he  thinks  of  these  as  the  enemies 
to  be  expected  under  the  circumstances,  comp.  Am.  5:  19;  had  he  thought 
of  them  indefinitely  as  beasts  of  prey  he  would  have  said,  without  the 
article,  a  lion  and  a  bear.  It  is  said.  Gen.  13:  2,  that  Abram  was  very  rich 
3r;J51  ClOx?  tiipr^za  in  (the)  cattle,  in  (the)  silver,  and  in  (the)  gok\  since 
these  are  viewed  as  definite  and  wellknown  species  of  property;  but  in 
Gen.  24:  35  he  hath  given  him  Snn  Ciobl  lf33!|  'iS::  flocks  and  herds  and 
silver  and  gold,  these  are  viewed  indefinitely  in  Hebrew  as  in  English.  In 
the  phrase  cvn  "n"''  and  it  came  to  pass  on  a  day  1  Sam.  1:  4,  14:  1,  2  Kin. 
4:8,  11:  18  the  article  is  used  to  distinguish  it  as  the  day  in  which  the 
event  occurred,  comp.  '''iiirt  Jer.  49:  36. 

§  249.  Nouns  are  definite  without  the  articJt  in  the 
following  cases,  viz.: 


§249  THE  ARTICLE.  269 

1.  Proper  nouns,  which  are  definite  by  signification, 
Dh"'nx  Abraham,  ",:■■: 3  Canaan,  DboJ^T^  Jerusalem. 

tt;-  '1--:  ''-t: 

a.  Proper  names,  oi-iginally  applied  in  an  appellative  sense,  sometimes 
retain  the  definite  article,  b"in  the  lord,  Baal,  'i^'Ji'ti  the  adversary,  Satan, 
"inirt  the  river,  the  Euphrates,  •|^"l*n  the  descending  (stream),  the  Jordan, 
once  poetically  "'n'l^  Ps.  42:  7,  §  250,  and  once  indefinitely  a  Jordan,  a 
stream  like  the  Jordan  Job  40:  23,  "pnTi'ii  the  plain,  Sharon,  "iiniri  the 
white  (mountain),  Lebanon,  so  always  in  prose,  but  in  poetry  with  or  with- 
out the  article,  V~^'!l  always  in  prose,  and  sometimes  in  poetry,  Bashan, 
"^vhtti  and  tbh^  GiUad,  bi:"!rri  the  garden,  Carmel,  isrri  the  circuit  of  the 
Jordan,  frb^iKn  the  u-atch-toicer,  Mizpah,  Cnxn  and  cix  the  (first)  man, 
Adam,  ^'"'rC-^'}  and  f^nbx  the  (true)  God,  In  T\'::;i'!Z'r\  an'i:  "'in  the  half  tribe 
of  Manas seh  Deut.  3:  13  and  often  elsewhere,  the  article  makes  more  pro- 
minent the  definiteness  of  the  entire  expression:  it  also  occurs  without  the 
article,  e.  g.  Num.  ;.2:  33.  Proper  names  of  nations  rarely  admit  the  article 
C'nr?  '^e  Chaldeans,  but  CTrrri  Jer.  37:  8,  9,  C-'p-crc  the  Philistines,  but 
C-'r'rbEn  1  Sam.  17:  52;  C'^i:'^X  is  used  as  a  proper  name  2  Kin.  8:  28,  but 
in  2  Chron.  22:  5  has  the  article  as  a  Gentile  noun  t:"''a~ri,  §  53.  2.  a.  Sym- 
bolical like  real  names  do  not  receive  the  article,  nn";3  Treacherous  J«r. 
3:  7,  nh'jp  Apostate  ver.  6,  2^^  'T^^h.  Hos.  5:  13. 

2.  Nouns  with  suffixes,  Tvhich  are  rendered  definite 
by  the  appended  pronoun,  ^j^2i<  our  father,  i7!2UJ  his  name, 
but  in  Greek  6  Trarijp  tj/Ukv,  to  ovojua  aCroO. 

a.  There  are  a  few  instances  in  which  the  article  is  prefixed  to  nouns 
having  suffixes.  It  is  emphatic  in  'i"':jrifi  the  (other)  half  of  them  Josh.  8:  33, 
opposed  to  a  preceding  T'sn  one  half  of  them;  see  also  nn-":?  Isa.  24:  2, 
T|3-rn  Lev.  27:  23,  ^i''yJ2L  (in  some  editions)  Ezra  10:  14;  '^riNri  rpra  in 
the  midst  of  mg  tent  Josh.  7:  21,  'iTS'nri  T\'~3.  in  the  midst  of  its  fold  Mic. 
2  :  12,  rj'^r'i-inn-bs  the  tvhole  of  its  women  ivith  child  2  Kin.  15:  16;  in  ^ni^a^ 
Prov.  16:  4  it  distinguishes  the  noun  ri,3f!?  from  the  preposition  '\"^ ,  In 
CDX'^^S  Num.  12:  6  the  suffix  is  to  be  taken  objectively  and  the  expression 
is  indefinite  a  prophet  to  you. 

b.  A  suffix  which  is  the  direct  object  of  a  participle  does  not  supersede 
the  necessity  of  the  article,  in?^li  the  (one)  smiting  him  Isa.  9:  12,  T^x'sri 
the  (one)  bringing  thee  up  Ps.  81:  11,  '^3'i::?^ri  the  (one)  crowning  thee  Ps. 
103:  4,  Deut.  13:  6,  Dan.  11:  6. 

3.  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  before  a  definite  noun, 
whether  this  has  the  article  D'^'illl'n  ''iipiS  the  stars  of 
heaven  Gen.  26:  4,  cinisH  ''bro  the  feet  of  the  priests  Josh. 
3:  13;  is  a  proper  name,  bis;"^"ict  '^-'^  i^^^  tribes  of  Israel 
Ex.  24:  4,  ri^h"  ^i'n  the  word  of  Jehovah  Gen.  15:1;  has 
a  pronominal  suffix,  ^^ir^'J  "''7,^321  the  first  fruits  of  thy  la- 


270  SYNTAX.  §  249 

boiirs,  1^in"^^3  the  wives  of  Ms  sons  Gen.  7:13;  or  is  itself 
definite  by  construction,  H^B^^an  uYiT  tT\T)2  the  cave  of 
the  field  of  Machpelah  Gen.  23:  19,  nih";-n^"]:n  "jS\s;  the  ark 
of  the  covenant  of  Jehovah  Josh.  3:  3,  niiny  ns^^li  1iby$ 
Ti^TT'TT'i  the  doer  of  the  ivork  of  the  service  of  the  house  of 
Jehovah  2  Chron.  24:  12. 

a.  "When  the  governed  noun  is  indefinite,  the  whole  expression  will  be 
indefinite,  ^^X-CjS  a  man's  hand  1  Kin.  18:  44,  d"5<ri  CjSi  the  hand  of  the 
man  2  Sam.  14:  16;  rt3n3  nzT-a  an  altar  of  brass  2  Chron.  4:  1,  n^'riirt  natTS 
the  altar  of  brass  2  Chron.  7:7.  So  Qir^iix  d-^X  a  man  of  God  1  Kin.  13:  1, 
C2"^n3i<n  •iT'^x  the  man  of  God  ver.  4;  d'^ri'bx  "i<^?  an  angel  of  God  1  Sam. 
29:  9,  D^'^■^X!^  ~i<>p  Judg.  6:  20,  nirT)  T^k'k^  ver.  21  </je  aw^e/  of  God  or  o/ 
Jehovah.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  expression  is  commonly  reckoned  in- 
definite notwithstanding  the  definiteness  of  the  governed  noun,  but  most, 
if  not  all  of  these  can  be  otherwise  explained;  thus  in  Gen,  9:  20  the  article 
is  generic,  as  we  might  say  began  to  play  the  husbandman,  comp.  also  Lev. 
14:  34,  Deut.  22:  19,  1  Sam.  4:  12,  Jer.  13:  4, 

b.  Nouns  in  the  construct  are  occasionally  found  with  the  article.  There 
is  but  one  example  of  this  in  which  the  construct  differs  in  its  letters  from 
the  absolute,  and  in  this  instance  the  governed  noun  is  preceded  by  a  pre- 
position so  that  the  expression  could  be  made  definite  in  no  other  way, 
D'l^nxn  "^i^i^'i'ti  T\2h  ^^^^  ^<^<^y  of  the  dwellers  in  tents  Judg.  8:11.  In  the 
remaining  iu.stances  the  sense  is  sometimes  complete  without  the  governed 
word,  which  is  added  as  if  by  an  afterthought,  rrnia  nbsixn  to  the  tent  viz. 
Sarah's  Gen.  24:  67,  5^X11  in-in  the  pin  viz.  of  the  iveb  Judg.  16:  14,  2  Kin. 
16:  17,  2  Chron.  15:  8  (if  the  text  is  correct),  Ps.  123:  4,  or  may  have  been 
coordinated  by  a  loose  sort  of  apposition,  §  256.  2,  Tl^d  rilrQii  the  coat  of 
linen  Ex.  28:  39,  39:  27,  nrrisri  nsTrn  the  altar  of  brass  2  Kin.  16:  14, 
Zech.  4:7,  or  subordinated  in  a  general  way,  §  256.  3,  bN~n"i3  S^??'?'!?  the 
altar  of  (or  at)  Bethel  2  Kin.  23:  17,  Gen.  31:  13,  1  Chron.  15:  27,  Isa.  36:  8, 
Jer.  48:  32,  Ezek.  47:  15.  Sometimes  the  definiteness  of  the  entire  ex- 
pression is  thus  more  clearly  marked,  as  when  several  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct occur  together  C^n^xn  dix  ^r;?n  the  grave  of  the  man  of  God  2  Kin. 
23:  17,  2  Chron.  8:  16,  Ezr.  8:  29,  Ezek.  46:  19,  particularly  when  one  com- 
pound phrase  precedes  another  "t"ii<fi"^  'pnX  2^"'^?'!'  V"^^  Josh.  3:  11,  Esth. 
6:  1;  80  after  bis  Josh.  8:  11,  1  Kin.  14:  24,  Jer.  25:  26,  Ezek.  45:  16,  Zeph. 
3:  19,  and  before  an  infinitive  which  is  equivalent  to  a  relative  clause 
2  Sam.  19:  25,  Ex.  9:  18.  See  also  1  Sam.  26:  22  K'thibh,  2  Kin.  7:  13 
K'thibh,  where  the  K'ri  omits  the  article.  It  is  once  found  with  a  parti- 
ciple in  the  construct  state  before  its  object,  Ezek.  17:  15;  the  article  in 
nip52n  "iSsn  the  bill  of  the  purchase  Jer.  32;  12  identifies  it  with  the  one 
spoken  of  in  the  preceding  verse. 

c.  Gentile  nouns,  derived  from  a  compound  proper  name,  receive  the 
article  before  the  second  member  of  the  compound,  'i3^ri";fi""|a  the  Bevjamite 


§250 


THE  ARTICLE.  271 


Judg.  3:  15,  'i"ir:"in  n'^a  the  Bethshemife  1  Sam.  «:  14,  "^trkri  n-'a  the  Beth- 
Itheoiite  1  Sam.  16:  18,  ''y,".>^  '''zii  the  Abiezriie  Judg,  6: 11,  though  this  word 
also  appears  in  the  ahbreviated  form  ■^";]?"'S<!7  Num.  26:  30 j  "^Bxii  n-^a  the 
Bethelife  l  Kin.  16:  34,  '^nnran  "^sn  l  Chron.  2:  54. 

§  250.  The  article  is  frequently  omitted  in  the  brief 
and  emphatic  language  of  poetry,  where  it  would  be  re- 
quired in  prose,  Y"5<"5V^- /i"«!'^^s  0/ (the)  earth  Ps.  2:  2, 
•\L'>2^_  ^iib  in  the  ^presence  o/(the)  sitn  Ps.  72:  17,  "i:iTi:"  ^'Z"^ 
ipi  SPX  (the)  tuatchman  says,  (the)  morning  comes  Isa. 
21:  12;  ^0  ^zve  ij^i'^l  "dipl.  Z^o^/*  sanctuary  and  host  to  he 
tramjjied  Dan.  8:13. 

a.  Thus  the  article  is  almost  entirely  wanting  in  Ps.  72.  It  is  also 
omitted  from  certain  poetical  or  archaic  phrases  n'^i'JI.  y^'^  Gen.  2:  4, 
Ps.  148:  13,  :y-5<i  n-;t"^  nip  Gen.  14:  19,  22,  ynx  in-in  but  y-;i<n  ni;n, 
y;j<  iQSX  except  Ps.  59:  14;  or  words  "'lb  but  nn';ari;  several  of  these 
seem  to  have  assumed  almost  the  character  of  proper  names  i;;!^  brtx  the 
Tent  of  meeting,  "pr^a  the  DivelUng-place  1  Sam.  2:  29,  32,  ri'lix  Gof7,  "^r'hp, 
the  most  High,  'C^Sp^  the  Holy  One  Job  6:  10,  Isa.  40:  25,  Hab.  3:  3,  "i^d 
the  Almighty,  nisa::  •'nbx ,  only  four  times  nixasn  in'bx  the  God  of  hosts, 
bix'i  the  region  of  the  dead,  ban  the  world,  ciriri  the  abyss,  )^h'S  and  TisUli 
<Ae  north,  "i'^n  only  once  '^"nn  Zech.  6:  6  the  south.  In  the  parallels  of 
poetry  the  article  is  sometimes  omitted  in  one  clause  and  retained  in  the 
other  Nah.  1:  5,  Zeph.  1:  3,  Ps.  148:  9,  10. 

b.  The  article  is  often  dropped  from  familiar  and  frequently  repeated 
expressions  in  prose,  a"iij  vvb  at  evening-time  Gen.  24:  11,  :i!3p'^  nni?3  sun- 
rise Deut.  4:  47,  ni'j  rpnnx  is  to  (the)  year's  end  Deut.  11:  12,  XaS  ^b 
(the)  captain  of  (the)  7ios^  1  Kin.  16:  16,  and  such  phrases  as  shake  iL'iiT 
(the)  head  Isa.  37:  22,  put  forth  T^  the  hand  Gen.  37:  22,  foy  np-^?  i;i  the 
/land  it/Jon  the  mouth  Mic.  7:  16,  "i'^'z  tcith  the  7ia?i(Z  1  Sam.  19:  9,  pounce 
trz'z  upon  the  shoulder  i.  e.  assail  the  Philistines  Isa.  11:  14,  turn  C)'ii>  the 
5«cA:  and  not  c^is  the  /bee  Jer.  2:  27,  /v/i  «^  T;ip  the  /ior«  1  Chron.  25:  5. 
uiXTny'i  b:~;-ri-a  /j-om  the  sole  of  the  /oof  to  the  /leaff  Isa.  1 :  6,  Gen.  3:  15, 
Lev.  11:  3,  Ps.  119:  2,  Ezek.  25:  6,  r"'rjt'^a  in  the  beginning  Gen.  1:  1, 
LXX  h  apxTJ,  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  assume  that  this  is  in  the  con- 
struct before  the  following  clause,  ri"''rN|n'g  from  the  beginning  Isa.  46:  10; 
also  in  t'eographical  and  architectural  details,  from  such  technical  terms  as 
Via^i  and  the  border  Josh.  13:  23,  ann  the  breadth,  n^p  the  height  Ex, 
27:  18,  2  Chron.  3:  3;  likewise  in  adverbial  phrases  '.^'S~'^  C^SX  with  the 
face  to  the  ground  Gen.  19:  1.  Comp.  in  English  from  head  to  foot,  at-m- 
in-arm,  etc.   So  C^is-'bx  D-^dq  Gen.  32:  31,   n3-bx  ns  Num.  12:  8  etc. 

c.  Ill  enumerations,  where  attention  is  exclusively  directed  to  the  pro- 
per meaning  of  the  words  irrespective  of  their  particular  relations,  the 
thought  may  be  generalized  by  omitting  the  article  and  putting  each  noun 
in  the  singular,  thus  giving  both  conciseness  and  vigour  to  the  expression, 


272  SYNTAX.  §  251,  252 

liini  niai  "ii\a  ^?'i  'i^T-'i?'!  "irii?  nt'x-'isi  C"^s<"a  waw  awr?  ivoman,  yoking  awd 
oW,  flnrf  ox  and  sheep  and  ass  Josh.  6:  21,  Isa.  9:  13,  Jer.  44:  7,  Ezek.  39:  9. 
lu  this  and  othei"  cases  the  indefinite  singular  in  a  collective  sense  is  used 
instead  of  the  plural  i!?S"i  Ui'^N  footmen  Judg.  20:2,  b'^n-d'^X  men  of  strength 
1  Chron.  26:  8,  Ex.  35:  22,  Deut.  3:  5,  1  Sam.  21:  5,  2  Chron.  14:  7,  Ezek, 
6:7,  11:  6,  Prov.  11 :  14,  and  interchanging  with  it  Ps.  12  :  2,  Pro  v.  16:  12-15. 
In  Gen.  19;  12  "prj  Son-in-law  is  indef.  sing,  because  the  speaker  was  un- 
certain whether  there  was  one  or  more  or  none  at  all. 

d.  When  two  definite  nouns  are  connected  by  and  the  article  is  com- 
monly repeated  Deut.  7:  19;  it  may  however,  particularly  in  poetry,  stand 
only  before  the  first  and  be  understood  with  the  second  ivoe  unto  Cppnn 
the  (persons)  decreeing  unrighteous  decrees  C^nns^^  and  ivriting,  etc.  Isa. 
10:  1,  "libl  bnrn  0  psaltery  and  harp  Ps.  67:  9,  ^Dni  n^nzin  Neh.  1:  5 
comp.  Deut.  7:  9,  12,  n^'^'l  lIJ?i;n  (though  in  different  clauses)  Josh.  10:  13, 
Ps.  19:  11,  34:  13;  in  Jer.  40:  4  it  is  omitted  from  the  former  of  two  words 

§  251.  There  is  no  indefinite  article  in  Hebrew;  in- 
definite nouns  are  sufficiently  characterized  as  such  by 
the  absence  of  the  article.    Thus,  "iriD  a  river  Gen.  2:  10, 

'  TT  ' 

D''ii;"D'DS  jSi-Qii  hoth  chariots  and  horsemen  Gen.  50:  9, 

•    T   IT  -  V   V  -  ' 

"^11^  2>r;  milk  and  honey  Ex.  3 :  8,  D''b|;  b^S*  an  infant  of 
days  Isa.  65:  20. 

a.  The  numeral  inx  one  is  occasionally  employed  in  the  sense  of  an 
indefinite  article,  *inx  bo  a  basket  Ex.  29:  3,  inx  d"'N  a  man  Judg.  13:  2, 
1  Sam.  1:  1,  1  Kin.  22:  9,  Dan.  8:  13,  or  in  the  construct  before  a  plural 
noun,  niliarri  rnx  one  of  the  foolish  tvomen  i.  e.  a  foolish  woman  Job  2:  10, 
Gen.  21:  15,  22:  2,  37:  20,  Judg.  19:  13.  In  some  passages,  however,  which 
are  commonly  explained  in  this  manner,  inx  may  retain  its  proper  nu- 
meral force,  as  inx  X^hs  one  prophet  1  Kin.  13:  11,  alone  remaining  in 
Bethel,  nnx  urn  l  Kin.  19:  4,  5,  not  a  cluster  but  a  solitary  shrub,  dS"!? 
nnx  a  single  flea  1  Sam.  24:  15,  26:  20. 

Adjectives  and  Demonstratives. 

§  252.  1.  Attributive  adjectives  and  participles  are 
commonly  placed  after  the  noun  to  which  they  belong 
and  agree  with  it  not  only  in  gender  and  number  but  in 
definiteness,  that  is  to  say,  if  the  noun  is  indefinite  they 
remain  without  the  article,  but  if  the  noun  is  made  de- 
finite, whether  by  the  article  or  in  any  of  the  ways  spe- 
cified in  §  2  i9,  they  receive  the  article.  Din  '^"3.  a  wise  son 


§  252 


ADJECTIVES  AND  DEMONSTEATIVES.  273 


Pro V.  10:  11,  J^i'"'  "h^t  a  bridegroom  going  out  Ps.  19:  6, 
riiian  ynj^r;  the  good  land  Deut.  1:  35,  D'ill""  ^^'^."7.  tJt?j 
manifold  mercies  Neh.  9:19,  niton  nin";  2  Chron.  30:  18. 
If  more  than  one  adjective  accompany  a  definite  noun, 
the  article  is  repeated  before  each  of  them,  n3!D2n  Disn 
t^^isni  the  glorious  and  fearful  name  Deut.  28:  58,  10:  17. 

a.  The  adjective  D'^3'^  many  is  in  a  few  instances,  for  the  sake  of 
greater  emphasis,  prefixed  to  the  noun  which  it  qualifies,  d^D3  D"'S1  many 
sons  1  Chron.  28:  5,  D'^n^"  Piib-i  many  times  Neh.  9:  28,  so  Ps.  32:  10,  89:  51, 
Jer.  16:  16.  Other  instances  are  laie,  ^nbra  "iT  his  strange  ivork,  n^naD 
•innbs  Jiis  strange  task  Isa.  28:  21,  '^'hn^'  p"^^.^  my  righteous  servant  Isa. 
53:  11,  and  are  mostly  susceptible  of  a  different  explanation;  thus  each  of 
the  examples  above  given  may  be  regarded  as  forming  a  brief  clause  Ms 
work  is  strange,  my  servant  as  a  righteous  person. 

b.  Some  exceptional  cases  occur,  in  which  an  adjective  qualifying  a 
definite  noun  does  not  receive  the  article,  the  whole  expression  being  made 
definite  by  the  article  which  precedes  the  noun,  H'iinn  nl3:;"n  the  neiv  cart 
2  Sam.  6:  3,  !^p.?5  "SJn  the  strange  vine  Jer.  2:  21,  Ezek.  39:  27,  Dan.  8:  13, 
11:  31,  or  when  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  a  suffix,  "inS  t33"^riX  your 
other  brother  Gen.  43:  14,  Ezek.  34:  12,  Hag.  1 :  4,  or  is  a  proper  name 
"i"'i;s  ■p'^?3  Ps.  68:  28.  In  nb"!  crST  an  evil  report  respecting  them  Gen. 
37:  2,  the  suffix  denotes  the  object  and  the  noun  is  really  indefinite.  Comp. 
§  249.  2.  a.  In  biia  S^n  Ps.  104:  25  the  adjective  does  not  directly  qualify 
the  noun,  but  is  in  apposition  with  it,  or  it  may  even  be  viewed  as  a  pre- 
dicate, not  tlie  great  sea  but  the  sea,  great  and  ivide,  equivalent  to  which  is 
great  etc.  So  ciji  nT3?23  '^^i<^52n  the  property  that  was  despicable  and  re- 
fuse 1  Sam.  15:  9,  ri^ns  yi^xn  the  land,  another  than  this,  where  etc.  Jer. 
22:  26. 

c.  On  the  other  hand  the  article  is  sometimes  dropped  from  the  noun, 
but  retained  before  the  adjective,  ti^iiyn  T^n  the  great  court  1  Kin.  7:  12, 
-iiliiyn  C1X  the  rich  man  2  Sam.  12:  4,  ^i'nsri  "liia  the  great  well  1  Sam.  19:  22, 
GenVl:  21,  41:  26,  Num.  11:  25,  2  Kin.  20:  4  K'ri,  Neh.  9:  35,  Ps.  104:  18, 
Isa.  46:  12,  Jer.  6:  20,  32:  14,  Ezek.  9:  2,  21:  19,  40:  31,  47:  16,  Zech.  4:  7. 

d.  A  participle  with  the  article  thus  joined  to  a  definite  noun  is  equi- 
valent to  a  relative  clause  1^3-'!^  llJ^kn  the  man  ivho  stood  Zech.  1 :  10,  Ex. 
36:  4,  Num.  5:8;  so  with  proper  nouns  f^X"]?'^  n'h"^  Jehovah,  who  appeared 
Gen.  12:  7,  13:  5,  16:  13,  Ex.  11:  5,  Esth.  7:  6,  Ps.  103:  3-5,  Isa.  45:  3,  Jer. 
37:  10;  so  sometimes  even  with  indefinite  nouns  r"^;^in  ^'Tr-'Z  every  least 
that  moves  Gen.  1:  28,  1  Sam.  25:  10,  Ps.  62:  4,  Jer.  27:  3,  Dan.  9:  26,  while 
on  the  other  hand  the  participle  without  the  article  may  be  used  in  the 
same  sense  with  definite  nouns  r5"ip  UJixrj  the  man  who  made  the  earth 
tremble  Isa.  14:  16,  1  Kin.  11:  8,  2  Kin.  10:  6.  In  "Bin  "lir^n  he  who  walk- 
fUh  uprightly  Mic.  2:  7  the  article  properly  belonging  to  the  participle  it 

18 


^74  SYNTAX.  §  252 

attached  to  a  closely  related  word  which  forms  with  it  one  compound  ex» 
pression. 

e.  In  a  few  instances  a  participle  belongs  to  a  preceding  suffix  •T'^?^ 
nxis  pedes  ejus  introeimtis,  her  feet  as  she  came  in  1  Kin.  14:  6,  2  Kin.  11:5, 
Ps.  69:  4;   so  an  adjective  Eccles.  4:  10. 

f.  Adverbs  are  sometimes  used  as  attributive  adjectives  l^^ft  nflJa 
a  continual  meat-offering  Lev.  6:  13  (but  in  the  construct  Num.  4:  16, 
§  257.  6.  c),  tkn  niBi?  burnt-offerings  that  cost  nothing  2  Sam.  24:  24,  Ps. 
69:  5,  Lara.  3:  52,  1N^  •^k'l'J  ri'isaVj  veri/  many  garments  Josh.  22:  8,  Deut. 
3:  5,  2  Sam.  8:  8,  12:  2;  so  i:r3  Isa.  10:  7,  Eccles.  9:  14,  which  twice  as- 
Bumes  a  plural  form,  Ps.  109:  8,  Eccles.  5:  1;  they  also  occur  as  predicate 
adjectives  Gen.  15:  1,  47:  9,  Jer.  42:  2.  A  phrase  may  also  be  joined  to 
nouns  as  an  attributive  t^E:a  '^^'^X  mg  enemies  in  soul  i.  e.  cordial  haters 
Ps.  17:  9,  ynxn-'ia  ^iis  man  of  the  earth  Ps.  10:  18,  dna  tini3p3  tJieir 
drink  offerings  of  blood  Ps.  16:  4,  7:  9,  Pro  v.  26:  1. 

2.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  of 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  they  qua- 
hfy  are  invariably  definite,  §  248.  2,  Tl^Tl  UT'tl  this  day 
Gen.  7:13,  nkHH  D^'^n'^^n  these  things  Gen.  15:  1,  D^jsrj 
Ti'Bh'n  those  men  Num.  9:7.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a 
demonstrative  quahfy  the  same  noun,  the  demonstrative 

is  placed  last,  nj^TH  niii^r;  Y"^j$n  Deut.  9:  6,  niibn  n^iisn 

rifjkin  rikjiri  these  good  years  that  (are)  coming  Gen.  41:  35, 
1  Sam.  17:  25,  2  Chron.  20:  15. 

a.  The  demonstrative  tiT  occasionally  stands  emphatically  before  its 
noun,  tih-Q  !Tt  this  Moses  Ex.  32:  1,  where  it  is  probably  contemptuous  like 
the  latin  iste,  i:iinb  riT  this  our  bread  Josh.  9:  12,  Judg.  5:  5,  1  Sam.  17: 
55,  56,  Ps.  34:  7,  48:  15,  104:  25,  ttbti  til  this  people  Isa.  23:  13,  Hab.  i:  11; 
80  Siin  e.  g.  T\?Mr}  ^'^^  ff'^t  f^i'»ff  ^^^(i^  2  Chron.  28:  22,  fiin  tiVrn  x^n  this 
same  night  Ex.  12;  42.  The  demonstrative  both  follows  the  noun  and  is 
repeated  after  the  adjective  in  H^Nrt  D^'^N^rsiri  ii^xn  fiijn  these  nations 
these  that  remain  Josh.  23:  7,  12;  it  precedes  attributives  linked  with  fol- 
lowing words  in  S'^H  fiTn  dijn  this  people  that  is  evil,  that  refuse  etc.  Jer. 
13:  10. 

6.  The  article  is  sometimes  omitted  from  the  demonstrative,  ^^  "Wn 
this  generation  Ps.  12:  8,  X^in  nb^a  in  that  night  Gen.  19:  33,  30:  16,  32:  23, 
1  Sam.  19:  10,  particularly  if  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  means  of  a 
suffix  nj»'  "T^'^^'-J  ff'is  my  oath  Gen.  24:  8,  n^x  "^rhx  these  my  signs  Ejl 
10:  1,  Ij:  %  Deut.  11:  18,  Josh.  2:  14,  20,  Judg.  6:  14,  1  Kin.  22:  23,  2  Chron. 
18:  22,  24;  J 8,  Jer.  31:  21. 

c.  The   article  is  stiU  more  rarely  dropped  from  the  noun,  123  h^  vb"^ 


§  253  NUMERALS.  275 

n^Xf  this  small  quantify  of  lioney  1  Sam,  14:  29,  nfn  "^n^EX  d-'S  that  Ephra- 
thite  17:  12,  17,  Jer.  40:  3  K'thibh,  HT  "Bn  this  sickness  2  Kin.  1:  2,  8:  8, 
Pa.  80:  15,  XW  tjii  Mic.  7:  12,  see  ver.  11. 


Numerals. 

Cardinal.  Numbers, 

§  253.  1.  The  numeral  ini<  owe  is  treated  like  other 
adjectives,  and  follows  the  rules  of  position  and  agree- 
ment already  given,  "ns  Dip'J  owe  place  Gren.  1 :  9,  »li?''"}';r3 
t^n^n  the  one  curtain  Ex.  26:  2. 

-    -    IT 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  noun  is  in  the  construct  before  the  nu- 
meral one,  irx  '^b'::^  one  law  Lev.  24:  22,  inx  •."inx  a  chest  2  Kin.  12:  10. 
''?"i??  "^1??  *"ir:i<  nnp  one  prefect  of  the  servants  of  my  master  Isa.  36:  9, 
comp.  §  257.  6.  c;  :  Cib5<"i"i"!n  Ps.  50:  10  in  like  manner  may  mean  a  thou- 
mnd  mountains  or  it  may  mean  mountains  of  a  thousand  i.  e.  where  cattle 
rove  by  thousands.  Jer.  52:  20  K'ri,  2  Chron.  4:  15  omit  the  article  from 
ins  though  joined  to  a  definite  noun,  after  the  analogy  of  other  numerals. 
In  other  cases  the  article  is  omitted  because  the  numeral  is  really  indefinite, 
inx  B?"'nN  one  brother  of  yours  Gen.  42:  19,  the  particular  person  not 
being  determined;  but  when  the  fact  is  reported  to  Jacob  ver.  33,  the 
selection  had  been  made,  and  the  article  is  accordingly  employed;  so  b^rn 
nnx  Num.  28:  4,  nnx  irxnn  l  Sam.  13:  17,  18,  Jer.  24:  2,  Ezek.  10:  9.  In 
inx  TUisfi  Num.  16:  22,  the  numeral  is  a  predicate,  not  the  one  man  but 
the  man  Korah  alone  (lit.  being  one)\  or  He  may  be  interrogative  §  231.  3.  a. 

b.  The  article  may  be  attached  to  inx  in  various  senses;  thus  "inxn 
means  the  one  Gen.  19:  9  i.  e.  this  one  man  in  implied  contrast  with  the 
entire  community;  the  first  in  a  series  Gen.  2:  11,  42:  27;  the  remaining 
one  Gen.  42:  13,  the  other  one  Lev.  14:  22,  15:  15;  the  well  known  one 
Gen.  42:  32,  44:  28;  the  one,  who  performed  the  action  referred  to,  defini- 
tely conceived,  2  Kin.  6:3,  5;  with  the  generic  article  one  considered  in 
relation  to  other  numbers  Eccles.  4:9,  or  it  may  be  tlie  one  spoken  of  in 
ver.  8. 

c.  inx  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  the  partitive  "l^a,  which  appears 
to  be  r';dundant  T^'^nx  "inx"3  'p^zx  a  poor  man  of  one  of  thy  brethren  Deut. 
15:  7,  Lev.  4:  2  (see  vs.  13,  22,  27),  5:  13,  Ezek.  18:  10. 

2.  The  other  cardinal  numbers  are  joined  to  nouns 
as  follows,  \\z.: 

(1.)  They  commonly  stand  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  belong  and  in  the  absolute  state,  D^i?b^  TiS'Ii'y^  four 
Icings  Gen.  14:  9,  TV  D^TS'aJ  sixty  cities  Deut.  3:  4,  HJ^- 

18* 


276  SYNTAX.  .  §  254 

C*j:)^"aiS  a  hundred  cakes  of  raisins  2  Sam.  16:1,  D^Sby?  trii^ 
C'lzi'^D  six  thousand  horsemen  1  Sam.  13:5. 

•    T    IT 

(2.)  Such  as  have  a  distinct  form  for  the  construct 
(viz.  2-10,  T\k'2  hundred,  *'£bs  thousands)  may  also  stand 
before  the  noun  in  the  construct  state,  D^in  'DTIJ  two  sons, 
prop,  two  of  sons  Gen.  10:  25,  WIT  Xy'^yyi^  foicr  days  Judg. 
1 1 :  40,  D^ny?  ni<7^  a  hundred  sockets  Ex.  38:  27,  '•sbx  X\t}^ 
U'^^^zy  three  thousand  camels  Job  1:  3. 

a.  It  should  be  observed  that  the  partitive  relation  is  expressed  not  by 
the  construct  form  of  the  numeral  trnitjari  "^JTU  not  tivo  of  the  lights  but  the 
two  lights  Gen.  1:  16,  0*^3 |5n  mi""ij  the  six  braiiches  Ex.  25:  33,  but  by  the 
preposition  'fQ,  e.  g.  D'i'nSiri~")'a  Inx  one  of  the  young  men  2  Kin.  4:  22,  TKt'^ 
CntTl"^  six  of  their  names  Ex.  28:  10. 

h.  The  numbers  two,  three,  four,  and  seven,  occur  with  the  suffixes  of 
pronouns  which  are  in  apposition  with  them,  13ri3N  ^3^.3"^  we,  both  of  us 
1  Sam.  20:  42,  also  Isnix-Q'^np  we  two  1  Kin.  3:  18,  "iH-'P.d  theg  two  or  both 
of  them  1  Sam.  25:  43,  Dbnapiy  ye  three,  ti^'iJ'b^  they  three  Num.  12:  4, 
Ctnranx  they  four  Dan.  1:  17,  on?nu3  they  seven  2  Sam.  21:  9  K'ri.  The 
following  numerals  occur  with  pronominal  suffixes  having  a  possessive  sense, 
'^C'kV^.  i^W  fiff^y^  I'^'ij?':!  '"S  fiPy  2  Kin.  l:  10,  Dn-iTaan  their  fifties  ver.  14, 
•'Sbx  my  thousand  Judg.  6:  15,  DD-'SIjX  your  thousands  1  Sam.  10:  19,  T^rihan 
his  ten  thousands  1  Sam.  18:  7. 

(3.)  Less  frequently  the  numerals  stand  after  the  noun 
in  the  absolute  state,  yniD  t^i^TZ  seven  steps  Ezek.  10:  22, 
D^Vte:?  n!ihi<  twentij  she-asses  Gen.  32:  16,  r|bJ<"n^7J  D^'h33  a 
hundred  thousand  talents  1  Chron.  22:  14. 

§  254.  1.  The  units  (including  ^e^z),  whether  they  stand 
singly  or  are  compounded  with  other  numbers,  agree  with 
their  nouns  in  gender,  riinb'H  irbir  three  leaves  Jer.  36:  23, 
nn  ^5D  nizib^r  three  baskets  of  bread  Gen.  40:  16,  n^n'^^i 
C^irniD  'ibsfourteot  laynbs  Num.  29:15;  the  other  numerals 
observe  no  distinction  of  gender. 

a.  When  the  units  quaUfy  nixp  hundreds  or  C^I^N  thousands,  their 
gender  is  determined  by  that  of  these  words  respectively.  In  ■|ii3~"'t^3  nd^ia 
the  three  wives  of  his  sons  Gen.  7:  13,  the  masculine  adjective  is  probably 
to  be  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  noun,  though  in  reahty  feminine  has 
a  masculine  termination. 

2.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  units  (2-10)  are  almost 


§  254  NUMERALS.  277 

invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  precerleJ  by  the 
tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  with  them  (21,  etc.), 
are  commonly  put  in  the  singular,  nb'^b  D"'yS"iS1  UT  C'i?:n";i< 
forty  days  and  forty  nights  Gen.  7: 4,  niiT  C^irblS^  ^%'-'^four 
and  thirty  years  Gen.  11:  16,  Q-iia  >*n^1  ni'^  D"'i'^^  twenty 
years  and  seven  years  Gen.  23:  1;  1  Kin.  14:  20,  16:  29. 

a.  This  phenomenon  is  probably  to  be  accounted  for  upon  a  principle 
analogous  to  that  by  which  the  anomalous  terminations  for  gender  in  the 
numerals  has  been  explained,  §  224.  2.  When  the  numeral  has  itself  a 
plural  form,  as  it  has  in  the  tens,  the  plurality  of  the  entire  expression  is 
sufficiently  indicated  without  giving  a  plural  ending  to  the  noun  likewise. 
But  with  the  units  which  have  a  singular  termination,  the  noun  must  take 
a  plural  form.  It  may  be  observed,  however,  that  this  peculiarity  chiefly 
affects  a  certain  class  of  nouns,  viz.  those  which  are  most  frequently  num- 
bered, and  in  which,  consequently,  the  tendency  to  abbreviate  the  expres- 
sion by  retrenching  the  plural  ending  is  most  strongly  manifested,  and  in 
which,  moreover,  each  unit  is  like  every  other,  so  that  plurality  is  but  the 
repetition  of  the  same  thing.  These  are  such  as  d""!*  man^  iaS3  soul,  "'B';^ 
footman  and  various  measures  of  time,  space,  weight,  etc.,  e.  g.  nr;3  year, 
ci"*  day,  <i:3X  cubit,  bj^'i:  shekel.  These  nouns  are  also  found,  though  less 
constantly,  in  the  singular  with  hundreds  and  thousands,  nr:3  nixp  "i'n 
nine  hundred  years  Gen.  5:  5,  ti^ax  Cj^k  a  thousand  cubits  Num.  35:  4,  and 
with  the  numbers  from  11  to  19,  h'^b  li":?  i^^-an  fifteen  shekels  Lev.  27:  7, 
Comp.  in  German  hundert  Fuss  lang,  funfzig  Pfund  schwer,  and  in  English 
ttcenty  head  of  cattle,  a  ten  foot  pole.  Other  nouns  are  similarly  affected, 
but  with  less  regularity  "r~)b  Cnrr  twenty  planks  Ex.  26:  18,  19  but  C"^";':?'? 
cii;";p  Ex.  36:  23-25,  "i"i3  nnt"!"^'V^  thirteen  cities  Josh.  21:  33,  "|ii£n  rj^j^ 
Cant.  4:  4,  nb  CijnXO  2  Chron.  9:  15. 

h.  The  numbers  from  2  to  10  are  very  rarely  found  with  singular  nouns, 
r.i'i  nifd  eight  years  2  Kin.  22:  1,  HTDX  dbd  three  cubits  25:  17  K'thibh 
where  the  K'ri  has  ri^SX,  'rqb'n  rd  Ex.  16:  22,  ;:]bx  nyr?  Ezek.  45:  1.  The 
tens  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  plural  0"'^"!^.  ""'rba  thirty  companions 
Judg.  14:  11,  l='?n""'.?3  f^ii^-r  eighty  sons  of  valour  2  Chron.  26:  17,  n-'i-'snx; 
ci?"^  ""^'^^  forty-two  children  2  Kin.  2:  24,  ^loi'^ns  Q-'iaiX  Ex.  26:  19; 
see  also  (Sen.  18:  24,  26,  28,  Ex.  15:  27,  Josh.  7:  21,  Judg.  1:7,  12:  14, 
2  Sam.  9:  10,  1  Kin.  4:  13,  2  Kin.  10:  1,  13:  7,  15:  20;  in  Ezra  8:  6-14 
C^HD-jTri  is  in  explanatory  apposition  with  the  numerals.  When  the  noun 
precedes  the  numeral  it  is  always  put  in  the  plural,  iaE3  excepted  Gen. 
46:  26,  27,  Num.  31:  40,  46,  Jer.  52:  29,  30. 

c.  In  enumerations  of  familiar  objects  the  noun  is  sometimes  omitted, 
when  the  meaning  is  sufficiently  plain  from  the  connection,  SnT  nn"i'>  ten 
(shekels)  of  gold  Gen.  24:  22,  ~cr  niiip  aba  three  hundred  (shekels)  of 
silver  Gen.  45:  22,  cnV-'n-j  tivo  (loaves)  of  bread  1  Sam.  10:  4,  c^-irb-ra 
six  (ephahs)  of  barley  Ruth  3:  15.     In  measurements,  the  word  iik^  cubit 


278  SYNTAX.  §  254 

is  occasionally  preceded  by  the  preposition  3,  thus  1152X3  2'2'iN  four  hy  the 
cubit  i.  e.  four  cubits. 

d.  The  attributive  with  a  noun  in  the  singular  after  the  tens  or  higher 
numerals  may  be  in  the  singular  Judg.  18:  17,  20 :  2,  1  Sam.  22:  18,  1  Kin 
20:  16,  Cant.  4:  4,  or  in  the  plural  Judg.  18:  16,  1  Kin.  1:  5,  20:  30. 

3.  Compound  numbers  may  either  proceed  from  the 
higher  to  the  lower  denomination,  D'lis'^n  C^ri^^  tf^k 
ni^^'lli^'l  a  thousand  tivo  Inmdred  fifty  and  four  Neh.  7:  34, 
or  the  reverse,  niis  rii<"^^  D'^irbui^  y^ir  seven  and  thirty  and 
a  hundred  years  Ex.  6:16.  The  noun  sometimes  stands 
at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  entire  series  as  in  pre- 
ceding examples,  and  sometimes  it  is  repeated  after  each 
numeral,  U^2t  :fJ.iL^  niir  n^"^i2:51  roTi3  tli<^2  a  hundred  years 
a7id  twenty  years  and  seven  years  Gen.  23:  1. 

4.  Numeral  adjectives  may  receive  the  article  when 
they  represent  an  absolute  number,  or  the  noun  is  not 
expressed;  but  when  they  are  joined  to  a  definite  noun 
the  latter  alone  receives  the  article,  D';iT2rj  (the)  two  are 
better  than  *'>T\^y}  {the)  one  Eccles.  4:  9,  D^i?S"iNrj  the  forty 
Gen.  18:  29,  Dib^isn  D^^i?7;n  the  fifty  righteotis  ver.  28, 
rnbl  ^n^  his  tivo  daughters  19:  30,  Di^n  D^ira^x  the  forty 
days  Deut.  9:  25;  Judg.  7;  7,  22,  18:  17,  1  Sam.  17:  14, 
2  Sam.  23:  22,  23,  1  Kin.  7:  41-44,  2  Cliron.  25:  9. 

a.  The  rule  is  the  same  when  the  noun  is  made  definite  by  a  suffix 
r.'^n-i'a  din  her  five  damsels  1  Sam.  25:  42,  Job  42:  7  or  by  being  in  the 
construct  state,  Gen.  49:  28,  1  Sam.  17:  18,  Job  2:  11.  The  article  may  be 
attached  to  a  noun  in  apposition  "Dsn  cibp  the  thirty  shekels  of  silver 
Zech.  11:  13,  n^jtn  Di'n>';ar!  ly-jj  these  six  ephahs  of  barley  Euth  3:  17.  It 
is  joined  both  to  the  numeral  and  to  an  accompanying  participle  in  ntli'tl 
f'^n'sri  Ex.  28:  10.  In  a  few  instances  it  is  given  to  the  numeral  and  not 
to  the  noun  d'^N  C^rxo^  Qiiv^^rti  the  two  hundred  and  fifty  men  Num.  16 :  35, 
nil::  D'^i'^nv!  ^--^  ^^'^  S'f"^  of  fifty  years  i.  e.  the  fiftieth  year  Lev.  25:  10,  11, 
where  the  article  is  used  to  give  definiteness  to  the  preceding  noun  in  the 
construct.  In  Cn"2'i5<  ii2J<n  n'^ib'^tn  these  four  children  Dan.  1:17,  the  nu- 
meral following  a  definite  noun  receives  a  pronominal  suffix  referring  to  it. 
When  numerals  are  joined  to  demonstrative  pronouns  both  may  receive  the 
article  n?N;in  'aibli'ri  Deut.  19:  9,  but  more  commonly  it  is  given  to  neither 
n|X-Tr^ia  Ex.  2I:  ll,  Gen.  22:  23,  Zech.  4:  10.    In  Ex.  38:  28  the  article  la 


§  255  NUMERALS.  279 

attached  to  the  thousands  and  hundreds  of  a  compound  number,  but  not  to 

the  tens  and  units  cijfii-j"!  n-i-^ani  nix^n  sh'-Tsi  rjbkn. 

6.  When  compound  numbers  11,  12,  etc.,  receive  tlie  article,  it  may  be 
given  to  the  first  member  of  the  compound,  "ibv  0"?ii"v?  the  twelve  1  Chron. 
25:  19,  27:  15,  1  Kin.  6:  38,  t'^ni:;?'!  inxii  Ex.  12:  18;  or  to  the  second, 
ir"":*;  ^'i"'n  B"?.":3  the  twelve  me7Z  Josh.  4:  4,  1  Kin.  19:  19.  In  the  example 
just  cited  the  article  is  given  to  the  numeral  instead  of  to  the  noun,  but 
in  "ii::-2'^:'j  "if^sn  the  tivelve  oxen  1  Kin.  7:  44,  2  Chron.  4:  15  the  general 
rule  is  observedt 

Ordinal  Numbers,  etc. 

§  255.  1.  The  ordinal  numbers  follow  the  general 
law  of  adjectives  in  position  and  agreement  with  the 
substantive,  to  which  they  belong,  "D^  "11  a  second  son 
Gen.  30:  7,  n^lb^blSn  nilSn  in  the  third  ijear  1  Kin.  18:1. 

a.  Instances  occur  of  expressions  rendered  definite  by  the  article  be- 
fore the  adjective  only  '^■!v"'^V^"r!  ^'i-"3  the  third  entry  Jer.  38:  14,  Judg.  6:  25, 
Zech.  14:  10,  or  before  the  noun  only  "^id  D"^"C30  n^a  Esth.  2:  14.  The  de- 
nominations of  time  often  stand  in  the  construct  before  the  ordinal ;  thus 
T\va  year,  P.-^-Jia-in  rii::  the  fourth  year  Jer.  46:  2,  51:  59,  28:  1  K'thibh, 
32:^1  K'thibh,  2  Kin.  17:  6,  25:  1,  Ezr.  7:  8;  UJ-in  month,  Ezr.  10:  9;  nii 
day,  Gen.  1:  31,  2:  3,  Ex.  12:  15,  20:  10,  Lev.  19:  6,  22:  27,  Deut.  5:  14. 
Ordinals  are  in  a  few  instances  used  in  the  plural  with  plural  nouns  ex- 
pressed 1  Sam.  19:  21,  or  understood  Gen.  6:  16,  Num.  2:  16,  24,  or  pre- 
ceding them  in  the  construct  state  2  Kin.  10:  30,  15:  12,  or  with  cardinal 
numbers  2  Kin.  1 :  13. 

6.  In  enumerations  the  cardinal  inx  is  sometimes  used  for  first,  Gen. 
1:  5,  2:  11,  Ex.  28:  17,  39:  10.  If  only  two  persons  or  things  are  spoken  of 
the  next  may  be  called  'i'rn  the  second,  Ex.  2.5:  12,  32,  2  Sam.  4:  2,  1  Kin. 
6:  26,  27,  34;  nrx  or  insn  the  remaining  one  Ex.  17:  12,  Lev.  14:  22,  15:  15, 
2  Sam.  12:  1,  14:  6;  or  "inxn  the  other  1  Kin.  3:  17,  22,  2  Cliron.  3:  11,  12, 
Ezek.  41:  24. 

2.  The  lack  of  ordinals  above  ten  is  supplied  by  using 
the  cardinals  instead,  which  are  then  commonly  preceded 
by  the  noun  in  the  construct  state,  "li^  ^'">3>  ^j'*^  the 
twenty-seveiith  year  1  Kin.  16:  10,  D'i^'in'^^r;  ri'i;  the  fortieth 
year  Num.  33:  3S,  although  this  order  is  not  always  ob- 
served, nils  nn"iry"tb"d  thirteenth  year  Gen.  14:  4,  "Pls:? 
IClfin  ^ir:?  the  eleventh  month  1  Chron.  27:  14,  15. 

V  -  T  T 

a.  A  fuller  form  of  expression  is  sometimes  employed,  e.  g.  tl'^l'b*::  rrra 


280  SYNTAX.  §  255 

ni'a  niisTai  in  the  thiriy-eigMh  year  prop,  in  the  year  of  thirty-eight  years 
1  Kin.  16:  29,  2  Kin.  9:  29,  15:  1. 

b.  In  dates  the  cardinals  are  used  for  the  day  of  the  month  and  some- 
times for  the  year,  even  though  the  number  is  below  ten;  the  words  day 
and  month  are  also  frequently  omitted;  sno  r'vq  the  seventh  year  2  Kin. 
12:  1,  Esth.  2:  16,  nhv;  ni^li  Ezr.  1:  1,  Dan.  9:  1,  2,  D"^nd  ryd  Hag.  1:  1,  15, 
Ci'i'j  ri'ii:  Dan.  8:  1,  but  with  the  article  Sa'ii^  nailj  the  regularly  recurring 
seventh  year  Deut.  15:  9;  "^i^'inn  "O'yh  n^3"!!!<  the  fourth  (day)  of  the  ninth 
month  Zech.  7:1,  "^iji^li'?  in  the  seventh  (month)  ver.  5. 

3.  Fractional  parts,  whether  expressed  by  the  femi- 
nine ordinals  or  by  special  terms,  §  228.  3,  may  either 
stand  alone  or  in  the  construct  before  the  noun  to  which 
they  are  joined,  which  then  receives  the  article  unless 
otherwise  made  definite  ^krin'l...Di^ri  "^n  the  half  of  the 
people...ancl  the  other  half  1  Kin.  16:  21;  they  read  T\'^y''Zr\ 
Di^n  the  fourth  part  of  the  clay,  T^'^TZT^  and  a  fourth  part 
they  were  confessing  Neh.  9:3;  the  hundredth  part  is  de- 
noted by  the  use  of  the  cardinal  number  TiCSn  T\K2  the 
hundredth  part  of  the  silver  Neh.  5:11. 

O.  Measures  of  distance,  capacity  and  weight  regularly  take  the  article 
when  preceded  by  fractional  parts,  though  not  requiring  it  otherwise  traiSi 
^%^^  ""iin^  a  cubit  and  the  half  of  a  cubit  Ex.  26:  16,  1  Kin.  7:  31,  32, 
Num.  28:  14,  2  Kin.  6:  25,  Neh.  10:  33,  Ezek.  45:  13,  46:  14;  exceptions  are 
rare  1  Kin.  9:  8,  comp.  1  Sam.  14:  14.  The  only  examples  of  the  plural 
form  of  fractional  parts  are  Q"'?"'''^?  '^.?^  ^'"^0  tenths,  D''i"iirs  nibcJ  three  tenths 
and  rn'ij'an  the  fifth  parts  thereof  Lev.  5 :  24. 

4.  Distributive  numbers  are  formed  by  repeating  the 
cardinals,  W^t  WTj:  two  hy  tivo  G-en.  7:  9,  ni'n^  ny^T?  hy 
sevens  ver.  2.  The  numeral  adverbs  once,  tivice,  etc.,  are 
expressed  by  the  feminme  of  the  cardinals,  rins  once,  D^ri'lJ ' 
twice  2  Kin.  6:10,  Job  40:  5,  3?n'i:  seven  times  Lev.  26:  18, 
21  or  by  means  of  the  noun  W$b  stroke  or  heat,  C^'J^S 
tiuice  Gen.  27:  36,  t]r::ys  niri;  ten  times  Job  19:  3  or  D'^^n 
steps,  D"'3^"l  TCb'^r  three  times  Ex.  23:  14,  a  form  of  speech 
which  has  arisen  from  the  method  of  counting  by  beats 
or  taps  with  the  hand  or  foot. 

a.  The  article  may  be  attached  to  numerals  in  a  distributive  sense, 
§  248.  4,  D'lxrsri  lyj  the  two  princes  1.  e.  every  two  princes  Num.  7 :  3, 


§256  APPOblTION  OR  SUBORDINATION.  2S1 

*insn  -::^^  for  the  one  Iamb  i.  e.  each  lamb  Num.  15:  5;  or  the  same  \de^ 
may'  be  expressed  without  the  article  when  the  connection  requires  it, 
D-^^^  rrci'd^  every  three  days  Am.  4:  4,  inx  'j^kb  for  each  man  2  Kin. 
15:  20.  In  1  Kin.  4:  7  K'thibh  nnx  means  each,  where  the  K'ri  inserts  the 
article.  Fractional  numbers  may  also  be  used  distributively  "pl'>a<  "'"''■^?  " 
tenth  part  severally  for  each  lamb  Num.  29:  10.  Alternative  numbers  are 
put  together  without  a  connective  n\ab'r  C^i'::  ttco  or  three  i^i^•Qn  ^^^^l^ 
four  or  five  Isa.  17:  6,  Am.  4;  8. 

b.  The  feminine  ordinals  are  also  used  adverbially  niiias*';;  first  or  in 
the  first  place  Lev.  5:  8,  n-'rr  in  the  second  place  2  Sam.  16:  19,  or  a  second 
time  Gen.  4l;  5,  Num.  10;  6,  ni'j-'VJ  a  third  time  1  Sam.  3:  8,  Ezek.  21:  19. 

Apposition  or  Subordination. 

§  256.  Nouns  may  be  joined  to  the  subject  either  in 
the  coordinate  relation  of  apposition,  or  in  a  subordinate 
relation  whether  absolutely  or  in  the  close  connection  of 
the  construct  state.  When  one  noun  serves  to  define  or 
to  describe  another  it  may  be  put  in  apposition  with  it. 
This  construction,  of  which  a  more  extended  use  is  made 
in  Hebrew  than  in  occidental  languages,  may  be  em- 
ployed in  the  following  cases,  viz.: 

1.  When  both  nouns  denote  the  same  person  or  thing; 
DbiT  "^'2  pnk'^sb"'^  Melchizedek  the  king  of  Salem  Gi-en.  14: 
18,  D"h"byn  UJ^i<  T'\'^'2  Moses  the  man  of  God  Deut.  33:  1, 
ni'^bx  niis  a  woman  (who  was)  a  widow  1  Kin.  7:  14, 
?jn:ill?  '(6'2  D'b^n  heaven  thy  dwelling-place  1  Kin.  8:  49, 
D''j?"2:n  ^i3S[  my  servants  the  prophets  2  Kin.  9:  7,  '^'^b  ^y_ 
Job  11;  12V 

a.  Where  proper  are  in  apposition  with  common  nouns,  either  may 
precede  accoidmg  as  prominence  is  given  to  the  individual  or  to  the  class 
-li'n  r^kn  2  Sam.  3;  31,  1  Sam.  3:  1,  more  rarely  Ti^^"  ll"?  13:  39  king 
David,  and  only  exceptionally  nn;;  -^"b  Hos.  5:  13,  10:  6,  and  -^"b  ^X1"35 
Prov.  31:  1;  such  combinations  as  "inn  "in  mount  Eor  Num.  20:  22,  in:n 
i<^^nx  the  river  Ahava  Ezr.  8:  21,  ^k-^-;  Cii;n  the  people  Israel  Ezr.  9:  1  are 
mostly  replaced  by  the  construct  relation  §  257.  3.  A  noun  may  also  be  in 
apposition  with  a  pronoun  Inirr;  "^DX  I  Jehovah  Isa.  45:  19,  i\2'j  IdTOX  we 
thy  people  Ps.  79:  13,  r(^72n  X^n  he  the  king  2  Chron.  28:  22,  Ezr.  7:  6,  or  a 
pronominal  suffix  ia"^kn  ixi^n  when  he,  the  man  tvent  in  Ezek.  10:  3,  Lev, 
27:  12,  Jer.  27:  8,  or  a  pronoun  with  a  noun  Jehovah  thy  God,  133  Xin  he 
is  going  over  before  thee  Deut.  31:  3. 


282  •  SYNTAX.  §  256 

2.  When  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the 
material  of  which  it  consists,  its  quantity,  character  or 
the  hke,  ntinin  ^j^^n  the  oxen  the  brass  i.  e.  the  brazen 
oxen  2  Kin."  16:  ItVi  Ohron.  15:  19,  Deut.  16:  21,  irVj 
M/^p  D'NiD  three  measures  (consisting  of)  meal  Gren.  18:6, 
Ruth  2:  17,  2  Kin.  4:  2,  7:  1,  ni^n  D^iiT-J'au:  seven  years 
(of)  famine  2  Sam.  24:  13,  1  Chron.  21:  12,  ps  D^'i^r: 
rows  (of)  stones  Ex.  28:  17,  1  Kin.  7:  42,  2  Chron.  1:  3,  13, 
^SCli  D'^b^  days  (which  are)  a  member,  i.  e.  such  as  can  be 
readily  numbered,  a  few  Num.  9:  20,  ribj;^  n^n'js^  ivorcls 
(which  are)  truth  Pro  v.  22:  21,  Zecli.  1:13,  Lam.  4:  17, 
Esth.  9:30. 

a.  Kimchi  thinks  that  there  is  a  partial  assimilation  to  the  construct 
in  CiP5  Q"b23  (instead  of  Q'^^33)  two  talents  (of)  silver  1  Kin.  16:  24,  2  Kin. 
5:  23;  other  examples  of  apposition  are  such  as  D^J2^  ^I^JP  tico  years  days 
i.  e.  two  full  years,  embracing  all  the  days  which  constitute  that  period 
Gen.  41:  1,  so  C^i^  ^""k"^'^  J^^'^'^  ^/"'^e  full  weeks  Dan.  10:  3;  nf?n  nipa 
possession  consisting  in  cattle  Eccles.  2:  7;  <^^'iJ<  O"'!'^?"''?"^  ^^?  a  pair  of 
mules'  burden  (of)  earth  2  Kin.  5:  17;  V^>  Q"!33n  N^-a  double  Jumdful  (of) 
toil  Eccles.  4:  6,  nnb  TO'S,  fiiV'O  a  phving  strip  (of)  an  acre  of  land  1  Sam. 
14;  14.  So  probably  the  nuicli  d  »pated  passage  the  destined  possessor  of 
my  house  is  ^.'.""^'^  P'vM'i}  Damascus  (in  the  person  of  its  citizen)  Eliezer 
Gen.  15:  2.  A  noun  may  be  separated  from  that  with  which  it  is  in  appo- 
sition by  intervening  words  ti^inx  'inx  xk^ili  that  ivhich  tvas  fowid  9cith 
each  (of)  stones  i.  e,  whatever  precious  stones  each  had  1  Chron.  29:  8, 
Q-^a  . . .  V>i3^n  Gen.  7:  6,  14:  12,  Ex.  22:  30,  niin  "ina'n  . . .  nis-^  Deut.  17:  8, 
28:  64,  Jer.  41:  8.  Sometimes  the  added  noun  agrees  in  definiteness,  with 
that  which  it  specifies  ^njr]  i^ri^rr!  the  golden  cords  Ex.  39:  17  (the  parallel 
passage  Ex.  28:  24  has  the  construct  ^r\^^^  r>rbr),  nbrill  T^fn  Jer.  25:  15, 
b'^ian  "^kn  Zech.  4:  10,  but  this  is  not  always  the  case  ^3  ii'O  his  linen 
garment  Lev.  6:  3  (where  as  in  Prov.  22:  21  the  construct  relation  and  that 
of  apposition  both  occur  in  the  same  verse),  "03  ^inNti  nn^'pri  the  one  silver 
dish  Num.  7:  85,  'z^l  Dn"'n'"i;  their  golden  lamps,  1  Chron.  28:  15.  Preposi- 
tions may  be  repeated  before  nouns  and  pronouns  in  apposition  Gen.  40:  1, 
43:  28,  Lev.  7:  8,  Josh.  1 :  2,  1  Sam.  2:  34,  15:  1,  2  Sam.  6:  21,  18:  32, 
1  Kin.  2:  5,  8:  30,  1  Chron.  4:  42,  2  Chron.  26:  14,  Ps.  18:  51,  74:  14,  or  not 
Gen.  2:  19,  9:  4,  10:  21,  44:  24. 

6.  V3  is  sometimes  made  more  emphatic  by  being  placed  after  a  noun  and 
in  apposition  with  it  instead  of  before  it  in  the  construct  ui'2  Snib^l'^a  your 
idols,  all  of  them  Ezek.  14:  5,  Mic.  1 :  2,  hut  probably  not  Eccles.  12: 13,  which 
may  be  read  "the  end  of  the  matter,  after  the  tvhole  has  been  heard,  is  etc., 
oor  Ezra  10:  17  they  finished  in  all  i.  e.  entirely,  in  toto,  the  men  ivho  etc. 


§  256  APPOSITION  OE  SUBOEDINATION.  283 

3.  A  noun,  which  stands  in  some  general  relation  to 
another,  may  by  a  loose  kind  of  subordination  be  added 
to  it  to  modify  its  meaning,  the  first  noun  remaining  in 
the  absolute  state,  CS^n  Wi2  ivater  reachinj?  the  knees 
Ezek.  47;  4,  "•"'■^nn  "i'~n  the  vision  concerning  the  con- 
tinual service  Dan.  8:  lo,  "ci  D'^i'C  dross  (of)  silver  Ezek. 
22:  18,  J3!a  "i:bi^'  "IJ«^  icltole  stone  (from  the)  quarry 
1  Kin.  6:  7,  D^i'ttJn  irbi^  'j^l'llT]  the  fork  (with)  three  tines 
1  Sam.  2:13. 

o.  This  subordination  is  a  free  sort  of  substitute  for  the  closer  con- 
nection of  the  construct  state  ti'P"}  "i"-^  tongue  (of)  fraud  Ps.  120:2  (where 
the  parallel  clause  has  the  construct),  "':j"i  "ifrs  pastured  cattle  1  Kin.  5:  3, 
bread  of  affliction  and  "j^n?  C";i  water  (of)  affliction  i.  e.  prison  fare  1  Kin. 
22 :  27,  *i:*^  nS^x  rams  (of)  ?fOO^  i.  e.  wool-bearing  rams  or,  as  others  sup- 
pose, the  first  word  niaj-  denote  the  quantity  and  the  second  the  material, 
as  much  wool  as  rams  have,  fleeces  2  Kin.  3:  4,  n3i"in  "j^^  Ps.  60:  5,  a"'n";x 
rbs  Jer.  10:  10;  especially  where  the  first  noun  has  the  article  for  the 
sake  of  emphasizing  the  definiteness  of  the  expression  "'ij'^X  fsniH  the 
streams  (of)  the  Arnon  Num.  21:  14,  2  Sam.  24:  5,  n"''12n  "linxn  the  ark  (of) 
the  covenant  Josh.  3;  14,  n'^ii^niri  nia-iJan  the  chariot  (of)  the  cherubim 

1  Chron.  28:  18,  Ini'  nsajn  the  proi)hec\/  (of)  Oded  2  Chron.  15:  8,  Neh. 
3:  19,  Jer.  38:  6,  Ezek.  45:  16;  or  has  a  suffix,  "lir'ij  'NDb  my  false  enemies 
Ps.  38:  20,  nS^n  ''tpyi  my  covenant  concerning  the  day  Jer.  33:  20,  Lev. 
26:  42,  Num.  25:  12,  2  Sam.  22:  33,  Ps.  71:  7,  Ezek.  16:  27,  18:  7,  Hab.  3:  8, 
but  not  Ps.  45:  7;  or  is  a  proper  noun  f^."^"?  "i?^  Zoan  (in)  Egypt  Num. 
13:  22,  Gen.  35:  27,  Deut.  23:  5,  Judg.  17:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  12,  2  Chron.  32:  5, 
Mic.  1;  14,  compare  in  English  Princeton,  New  Jersey,  P'iX-:i  trh"^^  Jehovah 
(of)  hosts  1  Sam.  1:  3.  Xr^^jC.^,  DinlJNPs.  59:  6,  80:  5,  8,  15,  20^  84:  9.  In 
some  instances  like  those  above  given,  the  first  noun  is  repeated  in  the 
construct  rnjfrj  "i?':;^  I^"^""?'!'  the  tabernacle,  the  tabernacle  of  the  testimony 
Ex.  38:  21,  (Gen.  15:  18,  Deut.  11:  24,  2  Kin.  18:  19,  28,  or  a  common  is 
inserted  after  the  proper  noun  ri'ix^^  "'v-'?*  !T"n"^  Jehovah  the  God  of  hosts 

2  Sam.  5:  10,  Ps.  72:  18;  and  ^his  may  be  mentally  done  in  other  cases.  In 
csrj  "I'^'-i'^'l^  2  Kin.  11:  13  a  conjunction  should  be  supplied,  the  guards  and 
the  people;  this  may  also  'oe  done  in  cy  D'^^i'^x  Judg.  5:  13,  though  more 
probably  it  means  noblefi  (of)  the  people;  in  C^ir^r-cn  rbrs  Ezr.  2:  62, 
Neh.  7:  64  the  relation  may  be  that  of  subordination  their  book  (of)  {he 
registered  or  of  apposition  their  book  entitled  "the  registered". 

b.  This  subordination  likewise  occurs  when  a  familiar  phrase  is  ab- 
breviated ~"3w  ^z'::  '•'4'J  "?  ^he  second  bullock  seven  years  (old)  for  r j(r""a 
C"3'j  Judg.  6;  25,  or  where  a  series  of  nouns  in  the  construct  is  interrupted 
by  the  insertion  of  one  in  the  absolute,  expressing  some  quality  of  the 
preceding  r2S<"i"3  b'pi  '•Z''-'-t  wien  of  strength  (for)  the  work  of  the  service  of 


284  SYNTAX.  §  257 

the  house  of  God  1  Chron.  9:  13,  2  Chron.  8:  5,  T^,rir}^  "i-^b  np115  the  hairy 
crown  (of)  Mm  that  goeth  etc.,  or  the  verb  may  have  a  double  object  smite 
on  his  hairy  crown  him  etc.  Ps,  68;  22,  Isa.  28:  1,  32:  13;  or  by  the  intro- 
duction of  some  other  word  ^^iNd""^  ^"^fi  Bi'i!nr""i";"J  tivo  men  captains  of 
bands  there  tcere  (of)  the  son  of  Said  2  Sam,  4:  2,  hv^h^  i]zzh-u^  "ihTi  a  base 
thought  in  thy  heart  though  it  might  be  a  thought  iti  thy  base  heart  Deut. 
15:9,  ninn^  n^Din  n'3Ha  a^^yj  great  cities  (with)  rvalls  and  bars  1  Kin.  4:  13, 
Deut.  3 :  5,  B^"rn";  nw  ubri  this  people  (of)  Jerusalem  Jer.  8 :  5. 

c.  The  word  n.3TIJ^,  as  Ewald  suggests,  affords  a  good  illustration  of 
the  various  constructions  possible  in  Hebrew  in  the  relation  of  nouns  to 
nouns;  thus  it  may  stand  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  ri30:3ri  ''itys  the 
priests  of  the  second  rank  2  Kin.  23 :  4,  or  itself  in  the  construct  before  a 
noun  T\?.^T}  i^?.''^^  the  second  in  rank  to  the  king  i.  e.  next  to  him  2  Chron. 
28:  7,  or  in  apposition  Avith  a  preceding  noun  i^i'^P"?  "'"''IvJ"^?  over  the  se- 
cond division  of  the  city  Neh.  11:  9  (or  it  may  mean  second  over  the  city), 
or  assuming  almost  the  character  of  an  attributive,  agreeing  in  number 
and  defiuiteness  n^id^ri  crT^nx  their  brethren  of  the  second  rank  1  Chron. 
15:  18. 


The  Constkuct  State  and  Suffixes. 

§  257.  When  one  noun  is  limited  or  restricted  in  its 
meaning  by  another,  the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state; 
if  the  hmiting  word  be  a  personal  pronoun  it  is  suffixed 
to  the  noun.  The  relation  thus  expressed  corresponds, 
for  the  most  part,  to  the  occidental  genitive  or  to  that 
denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  of.  The  primary 
notion  of  the  grammatical  form  is  simply  the  juxtaposi- 
tion of  two  nouns,  or  the  union  of  a  noun  and  a  pronoun, 
to  represent  the  subordination  of  one  to  the  other  in  the 
expression  of  a  single  idea,  §  214.  The  particular  rela- 
tion, which  it  suggests,  is  consequently  dependent  on  the 
meanings  of  the  words  themselves,  and  is  in  each  case 
that  which  is  most  naturally  suggested  by  their  combi- 
nation. Thus,  the  second  noun  or  the  pronominal  suffix 
may  denote 

1.  The  possessor  of  that  which  is  represented  by  the 
preceding  noun,  nih";  bb"n  the  temple  of  Jehovah  1  Sam. 
1:  9,  Cl!b^3^  their  substance  Gren.  12:  5.  This  embraces  the 


§  257  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  285 

various  degrees  of  relationsliip,  Dfl'^Zi^"'^  the  son  of  xAhra* 
ham  G-en.  25:  12,  ^n-is^%j^/e_Gen.  1 2 :  5.^^' •^- ^ •,  ^ -- ^ '^ '  ^' 

a.  So  a  few  proper  names,  as  Oibeah  of  Saul  1  Sam.  11:  4,  Gath  of  th4 
Philistines  Am.  6:  2,  Zion  of  the  Holy  One  of  Israel  Isa.  60:  14. 

2.  The  whole,  of  which  the  preceding  word  denotes 
apart,  '"hv  ^rns  the  poor  of  thy  jyeople  Ex.  23:  11,  1  Sam. 
17:  40,  Y"^g"'!!^P?  ihe  honourahle  of  the  earth  Isa.  23:  9, 
rijia  n|n  a  cake  of  unleavened  bread  Lev.  8:  26,  Isa.  11:  12. 

a.  So  "liQiI  ::■'»  izVfZs  of  prey  lit.  preying  of  birds  Ezek.  39:  4,  DiX  h'b^ 
fool  of  man  i.  e.  foolish  man  Prov.  15:  20,  DTX  XTQ  ivild  ass  of  man  Gen. 
16:  12,  ^^X  "insj  sacrificers  of  men  i.  e.  the  men  that  sacrifice,  not  as 
others  explain  according  to  96  they  that  sacrifice  men  Hos.  13:  2.  A  few 
instances  occur  of  adjectives  used  substantivelj-  in  the  construct  before  the 
nouns  to  which  they  belong  ^j^piT  ^"la  the  greatness  of  thy  arm  or  thy  great 
arm  Ex.  15:  16,  Ps.  46:  5,  65:  5,  145:  7;  so  the  adverb  zi'-q  for  the  most 
part  with  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  D^'b  i:v^  a  little  tcater  Gen.  18:  4, 
43:  2,  11,  1  Kin.  17:  12,  Prov.  6:  10,  "ifcbin  -jio  the  feio  sheep  1  Sam.  17:  28, 
while  with  men  except  Dan.  11 :  23  it  follows  6.  c  or  §  252.  1.  f.  Abstract 
nouns  may  be  thus  used,2"w^  p"n|;  greenness  of  herb  i.  e.  green  herb,  Gen. 
1:  30,  3:  24,  Job  15:  26,  Tj'npn  n'"i  ab^mdance  of  thy  mercy  i.  e.  thy  abundant 
mercy  Ps.  5:  8,  37:  2,  Jer.  22:  7,  23:  22,  Obad.  vs.  3.  20,  Zech.  11:  13,  and 
sometimes  in  an  emphatic  sense  indicating  that  the  part  singled  out  from 
the  whole  possesses  the  quality  referred  to  in  an  eminent  degree  r^'p 
T^Hx  the  height  of  his  cedars  i.  e.  his  highest  cedars  2  Kin.  19:  23.  Here 
too  belong  the  superlative  expressions,  D'^Clp  unp  holy  of  holies,  D"'~;"^'i"ri  T'd 
the  song  of  songs,  n'^n^S  isi;  servant  of  servants,  one  that  is  a  servant  by 
way  of  eminence  when  compared  with  all  others;   see  besides  Deut.  10:  17, 

1  Kin.  8:  27,  Eccles.  1:  2,  Ezek.  16:  7,  26:  7,  Dan.  8:  25;  or  cognate  in- 
stead of  identical  words  may  be  thus  combined  D'>"n"iiO  i~i5  most  rebellious 
Jer.  6:  28. 

3.  An  individual  of  the  class  denoted  by  the  pre- 
ceding noun,  thus  ser\dng  the  purpose  of  a  more  exact 
designation,  'OT^'l'Z  yij^  the  land  of  Egypt  Gen.  41:  19, 
t^nS-^HD  the  river  (of)  Euphrates  Gen.  15:  18,  Ex.  19:  11, 

2  Sam.  19:  41,  D^j'^y;  ^'l'J_  cedar  trees,  2  Chron.  2:  7,  n^Mn 
zf/j;^_  ivorm  (of)  Jacoh  Isa.  41:  14,  D^^.P"  "i;:x  men  (who 
are)  merchants  1  Kin.  10:  15. 

a.  So  'P'^Ta  n^fiP3  virgin  daughter  Zion  Isa.  37:  22,  47:  1,  Jer.  14:  17, 
n''il"^Ty  "^ra  children  of  the  third  getieration  (not  according  to  1  those  des- 
cended from  them)  Gen.  50:  23,  Judg.  19:  22,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  2  Kin.  10:  6, 
Jer.  24:  2.     It  is   unusual   to  find  such  constructions  as  "1*33  yiSJi^  Num. 


286  SYNTAX.  §  257 

84:  2,   C^'r^"!^  P\sn  Lam.  2:  13;  inn  "ih  is  the  standing  phrase  for  mount 
Hor,  but  this  is  exceptional,  §  256.  1.  a. 

4.  The  material  of  which  the  preceding  noun  is  com- 
posed, HmT  DTD  a  ring  of  gold  Gen.  24:  22,  Y?"^bl)  vessel  of 
wood  Lev.  11:  32,  D^Tyn  1"^?  the  flock  of  goats  Cant.  4:  1, 
■jn^  n^t:  rows  of  stones  Ex.'39:  10,  1  Kin. '6:  36. 

5.  The  measure  of  its  extent,  vakie,  duration,  etc., 
D'b^  t\''£'b-j:  1p__T]12  a  journey  of  three  days  Jon.  3:  3,  bpir^J 
"■^23  ^/?e  weight  of  a  talent  1  Chron.  20:  2,  ^SC"J  "^h'^  mew 
of  numher  i.  e.  readily  numbered,  few.  Gen.  34:  30,  wriN; 
Dbi:?  a  possession  of  jjeiyetuity  Gen.  17:  8. 

6.  An  attribute,  by  which  it  is  characterized,  'b^'h  ^i33 
mighty  man  of  valour  Judg.  11:  1,  "^^B  y:^  ^ree  of  fruit 
Gen.  1:11,  "p^Tin  i^^3  valley  of  vision  i.  e.  distinguished  as 
the  one  where  visions  are  received  Isa.  22:  1,  ni^Mn  "ji^JI 
the  flock  of  slaughter  i.  e.  which  is  to  be  slaughtered  Zech, 
11:  4. 

a.  So  in^:J  ''n^X  God  (who  is)  wy  roch  2  Sam.  22 :  3,  bkiipi  Qil^  "if?  <^c 
high  mountain  of  Israel  Ezek.  17:  23,  Ps.  59:  6,  Cant.  7:  3,  Isa.  5:  7,  6:  13, 
17:10.  A  period  of  time  may  be  characterized  by  what  occurs  in  it  WlIJ 
T^^53n  n"i^  the  year  of  the  death  of  the  king  Isa.  6:1,  ir^n  n2J  a  time  of 
favour  Ps.  69:  14,  Isa.  49:  8,  61:  2. 

b.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  Hebrew  uses  nouns  to  express  many  of 
the  ideas  for  which  adjectives  are  employed  in  other  languages;  thus,  in 
the  examples  under  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6,  vessel  of  zvood  for  loooden  vessel,  pos- 
session of  perpetuity  for  pe^yetual  possession,  mighty  man  of  valour  for 
valiant  mighty  man,  flock  of  slaughter  for  grex  mactanda;  see  also  2.  a, 
§  256.  2  and  2.  a.  This  both  arises  from  and  explains  the  comparative 
paucity  of  adjectives  in  Hebrew:  though  even  where  corresponding  ad- 
jectives exist  the  otl-»r  construction  is  frequently  preferred,  V'}p  "^iJiS  gar- 
ments of  holiness  Lx.  28:  2,  pnk" 'n::]  sacrifices  of  righteousness  Ps.  4:  6, 
lainp  holy  and  p"^^.^  righteous  being  used  with  less  latitude  and  with  a 
stricter  regard  to  the  ethical  idea  which  they  involve.  Abstract  nouns  may 
even  be  linked  with  attributives  by  the  conjunction  atid  Q'Q'il^'^  Tj'iIlS  Dd 
thy  name  glorious  (lit.  of  glory)  and  exalted  Neh.  9:  5,  Isa.  57:  15.  Attri- 
butives are  frequently  formed-  by  prefixing  such  words  as  d"X  man,  bra 
lord,  'S  sow,  rs  daughter,  to  abstract  nouns  or  other  substantives,  thus, 
IK'n  r'i<  a  man  of  form  i.  e.  comely  1  Sam.  16:  18,  Cna'^  IT'^N  man  of  words 
i.  e.  eloquent  Ex.  4:  10,  ni'bbnn  hv%  the  possessor  of  dreams  i.  e.  dreamer 
Gen.  37:  19,  C^"?^  nib'j— |2  soti  of  eight  days  i.  e.  eight  days  old  G-en.  17:  12, 


§  257  THE  CONSTKUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.  287 

n",^""|a  son  of  death  i.  e.  deserving  to  die  1  Sam.  20:  31,  br'^5""^:3  S07is  of 
icorthlessness  i.  e.  wicked  Deut.  13;  14,  tii'r  C'irrrrrn  daughter'  of  ninety 
years  i.  e.  ninety  years  old  Gen.  17:  17;  and  in  application  to  an  inanimate 
object  :",'2'r""|3  ''}p_  a  fertile  hill  lit.  a  peak  a  son  of  fatness  Isa.  5:  1. 

c.  In  the  following  examples  the  noun  is  in  the  construct  before  its 
adjective  c^'^.'^n  "^p  the  bitter  wafers  Num.  5:  18,  19,  23,  24,  niin  "'isbx!  evil 
i.  e.  destructive  angels  Ps.  78:  49,  TZS  h'Tl  a  strong  force  Isa.  36:  2,  rH'O 
nr3"i  a  square  doorpost  Ezek.  41 :  21,  but  not,  as  Kimchi  adds,  D'^spr  "iibn 
C"'t:!1wN  1  Kin.  6:  4.  Occasionally  and  for  the  most  part  in  poetry  the  ad- 
jective instead  of  agreeing  with  its  substantive  is  treated  as  though  it  were 
an  abstract  noun,  "|wi5n  ilis  vessels  of  small  (capacity)  Isa.  22 :  24,  xBo  ip 
waters  of  fulness  Ps.  73:  10,  biisri  ria-bs  perhaps  et^ery  house  of  great 
(size),  though  others  render  every  great  (man's)  house  Jer.  52:  13,  Deut. 
19:  13  (but  see  21:  8,  9),  Ps.  74:  15,  Prov.  6:  24,  Cant.  7:  10,  Eccles.  1:  13 
(in  the  common  text),  Ezek.  23:  14.  So  sometimes  an  adverb,  ZiV^  "'rp  feto 
men  Deut.  26 :  5,  "i^^n  n3i>  continual  burnt-offering  Num.  28 :  6,  c:n  ''pn 
blood  (shed)  causelessly  1  Kin.  2:  31,  cir  ^ns  enemies  in  the  day  time  Ezek. 
30:  16,  b'bw  ■rx  dumb  stone  Hab.  2:  19,  Jer.  1:  15,  or  adverbial  phrase, 
n^|5p  "iln'bx  a  God  nigh  at  hand,  piint  "^Hbvt.  a  God  afar  off  Jer.  23:  23,  Isa. 
U:  6,  Neh.  13:  4. 

7.  The  source  from  which  the  preceding  noun  is  de- 
rived, M^ni  n":in  the  law  of  Jehovah  Ex.  13:9,  niD'O  "^SO 
the  hook  of  Moses  2  Chron.  25:  4,  nitjS  ribin  sick  from 
^oveCant.  2:  5,  Isa.  22:  2. 

8.  The  subject  by  which  an  action  is  performed,  or  in 
which  an  attribute  inheres,  n^rr;  rcn5<  the  love  of  Jehovah 
i.  e.  exercised  by  him  1  Kin.  10:  9,  H-bblfl  r^'^QP^  the  ivisdom 
of  Solomon  1  Kin.  5:  10. 

9.  The  object,  upon  which  an  action  is  directed,  ni<'^'^ 
n^hbs  the  fear  of  God  Gen.  20:  11,  DTn  nbir'OS?  the  rule 
of  the  day  Gen.  1:  16,  "is  bix  the  mourning  for  my  father 
Gen.  27:  41;  or  the  purpose  for  which  any  thing  is  in- 
tended T\~^T'\  ~C3  the  silver  for  the  field  Gen.  23:  13,  iZ'i: 
Dj/ri^  "p-?"?-  grain  for  the  famine  of  your  houses  Gen.  42: 19, 
^^J"]!  nt:"J  the  rain  for  thy  seed  Isa.  30:  23. 

a.  After  nouns,  which  express  or  imply  action,  the  following  noun  or 
suffix  denotes  the  subject  or  the  object  as  the  sense  or  the  connection  may 
demand,  ir\h''^  f^NSp  the  zeal  of  Jehovah,  which  he  feels  Isa.  37:  32,  oir-nxjp 
zeal  of  the  people,  which  is  felt  for  them  Isa.  26:  11;  Dnp  r.pv\  the  cry 
against  Sodom  Gen.  18:  20,  b^-n;ryT  the  cry  of  the  poor  Prov.  2) :  13;  C^""?)? 


288  SYNTAX.  §  257 

the  tool/  of  the  sea  i,  e.  leading  to  it  1  Kin.  18:  43,  Oi'^"^"^  Tp'^  the  way  of 
Jeroboam  i.  e.  in  which  he  walked  1  Kin.  16:  26;  "ioisn  his  icropg  i.  e.  done 
by  him  P.s.  7:  17,  "^C^n  my  xvrong  i.  e.  done  to  me  Gen.  16:  5;  "'sbp  my 
king  established  by  me  Ps.  2:  6,  ruling  over  me  Ps.  5:3;  so  iii:Ti':a  Avith 
the  suffix  of  the  subject  Jer,  2:  19,  of  the  object  Hos.  11:  7;  553  subj. 
Ps.  39:  11,  obj.  Ps.  38:  12;  n^i  subj.  Ps.  116:  14,  obj.  Ps.  56:  13;  rn=in 
subj,  Prov.  3:  11,  obj.  Ps.  73:  14;  1^  (in  the  figurative  sense  of  a  divine 
inrliction)  subj.  Ps.  32:  4,  obj.  Job  23:  2.  In  ''Hsn  VT'^  Isa.  56:  7  the  suffix 
denotes  not  the  object  the  house  of  prayer  to  me,  but  the  possessor  my 
house  of  prayer,  §  259. 

h.  Active  participles  are  frequently  put  in  the  construct  state  before 
their  object,  irSJ^  '"^"'i^''?  restoring  the  soul  Ps.  19:  8,  T^b'li  '^''^T^'^  loving  thy 
name  Ps.  5:  12,  n?i!;3  "^Na  entering  the  gate  Gen,  23:  10,  Ex.  3:  8,  1  Chron. 
12:  1,  Isa.  1:  28,  Ezek.^3:  11,  19,  Am.  5;  12,  Ilab,  2:  15,  Mai.  1:6;  so 
even  before  a  pronoun  "^rx  ''H'l'j'a  serving  me  Jer,  33:  22,  or  an  infinitive 
which  they  govern,  tp  ip'^S'iTp  being  early  to  rise  Ps.  127:  2.  They  very 
rarely  in  the  construct  indicate  possession  "5n^Ta  ''^^X  the  eaters  at  (be- 
longing to)  thy  table  1  Kin.  2:  7,  or  apposition  dVn  "^naT  Hos.  13:  2  (2  a); 
but  nn^ifTi  in-ibi  Isa.  11:  13  means  the  adversaries  of  Judah,  not  those  of 
Judah  who  are  adversai-ies  to  Ephraim.  Participles  of  intransitive  verbs 
may  be  put  in  the  construct  or  receive  a  suffix  in  the  vivid  language  of 
poetry,  which  conceives  of  the  indirect  as  though  it  were  the  direct  object 
^k'-i  """^^l  'Deut.  32;  24,  Mic,  7:  17,  Ps,  40:  5,  88:  5,  6,  T^hrh^  "^STO  Mic.  2:  8, 
''^l^  Ps,  18:  40,  "'r^ipno  Ps,  59:  2,  Passive  participles  may  be  in  the  con- 
struct before  the  subject  of  the  action,  d'^nSN  nsp  smitten  of  God  Isa.  53:  4, 
nt'S  'liiBi'^  born  of  a  woman  Job  14:  1,  rjC'S  ipnb  devoured  by  pestilence 
Deut.  32:  24,  or  before  the  secondary  object,  if  the  verb  is  capable  in  the 
active  of  having  a  double  object,  pbTi'n^n  girded  ivith  sackcloth  Joel  1 :  8, 
a'^han  t-^iiib  the  man  clothed  with  linen  Ezek,  9:  11,  Mrnb^  T\^^"  arrayed 
for  battle  Joel  2:  5.  When  a  noun  follows  the  infinitive  it  may  be  in  con- 
struction with  it  as  its  subject,  "T^^l?  i<'^pa  on  the  king''s  reading  2  Kin,  5:  7, 
'io"i"i'iri  his  driving  out  Num,  32:  21,  Ezra  10:  1,  or  be  governed  by  it  as  its 
object,  Vx^"3"d-X'np  to  call  Samuel  1  Sam.  3:8,  ni'^'i'iri  to  drive  them  out 
Deut.  7:  17;  or  both  subject  and  object  may  be  expressed  T^rk  ir'iia  his 
destroying  thee  2  Sam.  24:  17. 

10.  The  respect  in  wliicli  a  preceding  attribute  holds, 
so  that  it  answers  the  purpose  oi  specification,  D^riSX"i<'^Q 
unclean  as  to  lips  Isa.  6:  5,  nV^irp  hard  hearted  Ezek.  3:  7, 
D^ljn  ^?np  rent  as  to  garments  2  Sam.  13:  31,  D^5:o  nbp 
2  Sam.  9:' 3,  Ps.  7:  11,  32:  1,  Isa.  1:  30,  3:  3,  33:  24. 

a.  This  answers  to  what  is  known  as  the  Greek  accusative,  irohac  w^y^; 
the  English  has  in  certain  cases  adopted  the  Hebrew  idiom,  so  that  we  can 
say  swift  of  foot,  blind  of  an  eye,  etc. 

h.  When  an  idea  is  expressed  by  two  words  in  the  construct  state,  it« 


S  258     THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUFFIXES.       289 

plural  is  commonly  denoted  by  giving  a  plural  form  to  the  first  noun;  this 
is  sometimes  the  case  even  with  compound  proper  nouns  ^:^T,  ^?.^  Bcnja- 
mites  1  Sam.  22:  7.     In  a  few  instances  both  nouns  are  put  in  the  plural 

^^pj.-,^^^ nn-'C53   ni-i'-iS   Gen.  42:  35,   0^X^3  "^ra   Isa.  42:  22,  •^^'125 

n-i-Ti  1  Chron.  7:  5^  Josh.  6:  6;  or  the  second  noun  only  Crbx  tr^?  their 
clam  or  fathers'  houses  1  Chron.  7:4,  nihsri  n^a  the  high  place-houses  2  Kin. 
17:  29,  1  Sam.  31:  9,  10,  Ex,  29:  20;  so  nouns,  particularly  such  as  denote 
members  of  the  body  may  be  in  the  singular  with  plural  suffixes,  cbn^ 
your  ha7id  Gen.  43:  12,  c!i:n  their  foot  Ps.  9:16,  ^23^1?  our  tongue  Ps.  12:  5, 
Josh.  2:  19,  Judg.  7:  6,  Ps.  5:  10. 

8  258.  1.  Wlien  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is 
expressed  by  an  intervening  preposition,  the  first  com- 
monly remains  in  the  absolute  state:  it  may,  however, 
particularly  in  poetry,  be  put  in  the  construct,  ^sbsn  "in 
mountains  in  Gilhoa  2  Sam.  1:  21,  Dn'?^]  "N^nD  iwophets  out 
of  their  oivn  heart  Ezek.  13:2,  ^±  "13  according  to  the  abil- 
ity in  us  Neh.  5:8. 

o.  The  most  frequent  examples  in  prose  are  "in.v:  one,  which  is  often 
found  before  the  partitive  '(O,  Gen.  3:  22,  2  Sam.  1:  15,  and  words  denoting 
direction  such  as  -p-O^  right,  -isa  north,  nki:?  end  before  >  Josb.  8:  11,  15:  21, 
Judg.  2:  9,  2  Kin.  23:  13,  Ezek.'lO:  3.  The  combination  of  the  construct 
with  >  in  other  instances  also  is  facilitated  by  their  close  relationship,  §  260, 

1  Chron.  6:  55,  23:  28,  Job  18:  2,  Ps.  58:  5,  Prov.  24:  9,  Lam.  2:  18,  Hos. 
9;  6,  Mic.  4:  8.  With  other  prepositions  the  construct  occurs  more  rarely 
Isa.  9:  2,  Hos.  7:  5,   except  in  the   case  of  participles   Judg.  5:  10,  8:  11, 

2  Sam.  10:  9  K'thibh,  Neh.  9:  5,  Job  24:  5,  Ps.  2:  12,  84:  7,  Isa.  5:  11, 
9:  1,  14:  19,  28:  9,  56:  10,  Jer.  8:  16,  Nah.  1:  5. 

2.  A  noun  is  sometimes  put  in  the  construct  before 
a  succeeding  clause  with  which  it  is  closely  connected: 
thus,  before  a  relative  clause,  nir^Jt  Dip^J  the  place  where, 
etc..  Gen.  39:  20,  ^irs  "i^'b?  for  the  reason  that  Deut. 
22:  24,  particularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbirr-l'S  ly  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou  ivilt  send  Ex. 
4"  13,  nVn'.'^S'n  nbnn  the  beginning  of  (what)  Jehovah 
spake  Hos.  1:  2,  or  before  the  conjunction  ■;  and,  n^iisn 
n?7;  icisdom  and  knoivledge  Isa.  33:  6,  35:  2,  Ezek.  26:  10, 
r'^JS  i^bl  nnjii:  drunken  and  not  ivith  wine  Isa.  51:  21. 

a.  So  before  MT  used  as  a  relative,  nj-in  the  mountain  that  his  right 
hand  has  acquired  Ps.  78:  54,  nj  Cip-a  Ps.  104:  8.    Words  denoting  time  and 


290  SYNTAX.  §  258 

place  often  stand  in  the  construct  before  a  clause  with  the  relative  under- 
stood; thi;s  ni-i  Deut.  4:  15,  Job  29:  2,  Ps.  56:  4,  10,  88:  2,  102:  3;  DS 
2  Chron.  29:  27;  cipri  Job  18:  21.  Some  would  so  explain  riil23x"i3  Gen. 
1 :  1,  in  tJie  beginning  when  God  created  etc.  ver.  2  parenthetic,  ver.  3  ihen 
God  said  etc.  But  this  assumes  a  complexit}'  foreign  to  Hebrew  construc- 
tion, §  250.  b.  Other  examples  are  infrequent  and  exceptional  Ps.  16:  3, 
65:  5,  81:6,  Isa.  29:  1,  Jer.  23:  26,  48:  36.  The  construct  is  once  used  where 
a  noun  is  repeated  ns"^  nsd  everi/  sabbath  1  Chron.  9:  32. 

3.  Three,  four,  or  even  five  nouns  are  sometimes  joined 
together  in  the  relation  of  the  construct  state,  Ti^n  'viiXl 
Drhs;  the  heads  of  the  houses  of  their  fathers  Ex.  6:  14, 
bJ<"^ir';"^5iL  ^blir  '^BZ'^  the  number  of  the  tribes  of  the  children 
of^Israei  Josh.  4:  5,  Gen.  41 :  10,  47:  9,  Lev.  10: 14,  Num. 
6:  13,  2  Kin.  10:  6,  Job  12:  24,  Eccles.  6:  12,  zhb  b'li-^'iD 
■"i^lSJjs'Tjb'j  the  fruit  of  the  greatness  of  heart  of  the  king  of 
Assyria  Isa.  10:  12,  2  Chron.  2^:  12,  Jer.  34:  1. 

a.  When  one  noun  of  the  series  is  an  attribute  of  that  which  precedes  it 
the  two  together  stand  in  joint  relation  to  the  noun  that  follows  Ci"i^  "^nn 
^N'lr'^  the  high  mountains  of  Israel  Ezek.  34:  14,  Gen.  14:  13,  Deut.  31:  16, 
2  Sam.  8:  10,  23:  1,  2  Chron.  36:  16,  Ezek.  28:  14. 

h.  A  noLin  limited  by  two  or  more  nouns  maj'  be  repeated  in  the  con- 
struct before  each  of  them,  when  these  are  regarded  separately  or  are 
distinctly  emphasized  nsp";  '^bs'i  ii3bTa~"'3X  Haran  the  father  of  Milcah  and 
the  father  of  Iscah  Gen.  11:  29,  14:  13,  24:  3,  "in'5S  onnax  -^n'^s  ni-^rhx  inrx 
2p?-  ''ri'^^l  Pr?^"!  '^*^  ^0^  of  your  fathers,  the  God  of  Abraham,  the  God  of 
Isaac  and  the  God  of  Jacob  Ex.  3:  6,  15,  Jer.  8:  1,  19:  13,  1  Chron.  28:  1.  If, 
however,  they  together  constitute  one  idea  or  are  viewed  in  combination  the 
first  noun  will  not  be  repeated  2'pj.'|^'i  pn^J'^  ^'1'?^^  "v?^^  ^^'^  ^^'^^  of  Abra- 
ham, Isaac  and  Jacob  Ex.  3:  16,  Gen.  14:  11,  19,  18:  20,  19:  28,  Ex.  3:  8, 
32:  2,  Lev.  6:  13,  Num.  26:  64,  Judg.  1:  6,  7,  1  Sam.  17:  52,  1  Chron.  28:  21, 
29:  2,  18,  2  Chron.  30:  6,  Neh.  5:  11,  Job  28:  3,  Ps.  72:  10,  107:  10,  Isa. 
11:  2,  36:  19,  37:  13,  Ezek.  38:  2,  39:  1:  so  a  construct  infinitive  Jer.  29:  2, 
2  Chron.  7:  3.  This  is  sometimes  the  case  even  where  the  construct  must 
be  repeated  mentally  before  the  second  noun  2Sn  anr  dxl  the  head  of 
Oreb  and  the  head  of  Zeeb  Judg.  7:  25,  comp.  Gen.  40:  20,  fi^tv^  DTp  T^Vb 
the  king  of  Sodom  and  the  king  of  Gomorrah  Gen.  14:  10,  comp.  ver.  8. 
When  one  of  the  limiting  terms  is  a  pronominal  suffix  the  noun  is  neces- 
sarily repeated  T^ia  "^^y^  T'is  Gen.  46:  7,  19:  16,  Ex.  10:  6. 

c.  If  two  or  more  nouns  are  Umited  by  the  same  noun,  the  latter  is 
usually  expressed  with  the  first  and  an  appropriate  suffix  attached  to  the 
rest  "i^'^rfl  1"'"l""i£^  ii'ij"iQ  3:^  the  chariots  of  Pharaoh  and  his  horsemen  and 
his  army  Ex.  14:  9,  39:  40,  1  Kin.  16:  26,  27,  2  Kin.  2:  12,  though  the  suffix 
is  occasionally  omitted  Gen.  40:  1.    If  the  limiting  word  be  a  pronoun,  the 


§  259  THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  SUEFIXE8.  291 

suffix  must  be  repeated  with  each  of  the  nouns  Gen.  7:7,  31:  28,  36:  6, 
Ex.  32:  2,  Deut.  12:  6  with  only  rare  exceptions  Ex.  15:  2,  Isa.  12:  2,  Ps. 
118:  14,  2  Sam.  23:  5.  In  a  very  few  instances  two  words  are  in  construct 
relation  to  the  same  noun  Vs'n'r";  '^il^X  "^b^ibp  the  peaceable,  the  faithful  of 
Israel  2  Sam.  20:  19,  Ezek.  Z\\  16,  Dan.  1:  4,  irinT  ""sriS  innJ  rivers,  brooks 
of  honey  Job  20:  17,  n'.a;p^— ipin  libdis  Ps.  78:  9,  if  rendered  as  it  is  by  some 
armed  tvith,  shooting  the  bow,  though  ''I^'iJ'is  may  be  in  construction  not 
with  nirp  but  with  ''■qy^  armed  ones  of  those  who  shoot  the  bow,  armed  bow- 
men. This  assumption  is  unnecessary  in  Isa.  53:  3,  4,  55:  4,  where  the  first 
noun  is  agreeably  to  the  vowels  in  the  absolute  state. 

§  259.  When  two  or  more  words  are  in  the  construct 
relation  they  must  stand  in  immediate  conjunction,  and 
no  other  word  can  be  suffered  to  come  between  them  as 
it  would  obscure  the  sense.  Hence  an  adjective,  parti- 
ciple or  demonstrative,  qualifying  a  noun  in  the  construct 
state,  cannot  stand  immediately  after  it,  but  must  be 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  bilBn  nlh^  n'^T^"^  the 
great  ivork  of  Jehovah  Judg.  2 :  7,  n5ii:i  nnj  Ti-^bZ^  a  great 
crown  of  gold  Esth.  8:  15.  So  an  article  or  suffix,  be- 
longing to  a  noun  in  the  construct,  must  be  attached  not 
to  it  but  to  the  governed  noun,  b';nn  ^niSB  the  mighty  men 
of  valour  Josh.  1:  14,  iiHT  ^yb5<  his  idols  of  gold  Isa.  2:  20, 
"irip  Di^  my  name  of  holiness  i.  e.  my  holy  name  Lev.  20:  3. 

a.  When  an  attributive  thus  follows  a  series  of  nouns  in  the  construct 
relation  its  particular  reference  will  be  indicated  by  its  gender  and  number; 
"inxn  a^-isn  ris  2  Chron.  3:  ll,  since  Cjis  is  fein.,  means  the  wing  of  the 
other  cherub,  not  the  other  wing  of  the  cherub,  niDTi'n  "|3i:3"3n-y^^  iii3np  the 
hoards  of  the  second  side  of  the  tabernacle  Ex.  26:  27,  Deut.  28:  58,  Josh. 
1:  8,  1  Sam.  17:  18,  2  Chron.  32:  30,  31,  Jer.  25:  26.  When  the  governing 
and  the  governed  noun  are  of  the  same  gender  and  number  it  may  be 
doubtful  to  which  of  them  the  following  adjective  is  to  be  referred,  thus 
^iTjri  TE^  "HN  Gen.  10:  21  may  either  mean  the  elder  brother  of  Jajjhcth  or 
the  brother  of  Japheth  the  elder.  In  Jer.  25:  15  an  attributive  stands  after 
a  noun  in  apposition  with  the  governed  noun.  In  a  very  few  instances  an 
adjective  is  inserted  in  a  series  of  constructs  to  prevent  it  from  being  too 
widely  separated  from  its  noun  Ezek.  6:  11,  Jer.  4:  11.  In  the  following 
passages  a  brief  word  intervenes  between  Vs,  which,  though  properly  a 
noun  signifying  totality,  is  in  usage  equivalent  to  a  pronominal  adjective 
all,  every,  and  the  noun  which  it  governs,  V"'^  xi'n-^S  take  aicay  all  ini- 
quity Hos.  14:  3,  80  2  Sam.  1:  9,  Job  27:  3,  and  perhaps  Isa.  38:  16;  but 
see  Alexander  in  loc.     Other  exceptions  are  extremely  rare  as  when  the 

19* 


292  SYNTAX.  §  260 

direct  object  of  a  participle  is  preceded  by  the  indirect  fisri  ^ix"^?  "'i'^ViJg 
Isa.  19:  8,  or  the  construct  infinitive  is  separated  from  its  subject  by  its  ob- 
ject Jer.  34:  9,  mostly  a  pronominal  suffix  Gen.  4:  15,  Isa.  5:  24  or  by  an 
adverb  Job  34:  22. 

b.  There  are  two  principal  cases,  in  which  an  article  or  a  snffix  at- 
tached to  a  noun  properlj'  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  the  preceding  construct. 
1.  When  the  governed  noun  simply  qualifies  that  which  stands  before  it^ 
denoting  an  attribute,  its  material  or  after  fractional  numbers  a  measure 
of  quantity,  §  255.  3.  a,  ip^n^^  "^^3  his  weapons  of  war  Deut.  1:  41,  Judg. 
18:  16,  Ezek.  9:  2,  "^nlNS  ''P^?  nil/ proud  exulters  Isa.  13:  3,  Ps.  2:  6,  Obad. 
ver.  16,  Eccles.  12:5,  -.n:!*?!— i.:s  the  sons  of  oil  i.  e.  the  anointed  ones  Zech. 
4:  14,  Gen.  37:  19,  Snjn'n3T53  the  golden  altar  Ex.  40:  26,  naixti  rrnw  the 
tenth-pnrt  of  an  ephah  Num.  5:  15;  ipi:?  "inbx  Ps.  4:  2  may  mean  either 
the  God  of  my  right,  who  defends  my  righteous  cause,  or  niy  righteous  God; 
comp.  Ps.  59:  18.  2.  When  an  attributive  in  the  construct  belongs  to  a 
definite  noun  expressed  or  understood  and  consequently  requires  the  ar- 
ticle, thus  rik"ip  nis'^  nins  but  nxnsn  niki'i  nnsn  Gen.  4i:  2-4,  Lev.  ii:  4, 
Num.  35:  19,'  Deut.  20:  8^,  Neh.  1:  5,  Jer.  23:  26,  Ezek.  9:  11,  Dan.  9:  4, 
12:  6,  7;  if  it  is  in  the  construct  before  a  proper  noun  the  article  is  of 
course  unnecessary,  §  249.  3,  Ps.  25:  12.  For  exceptional  examples  of  con- 
struct nouns  with  the  article,  see  §  249.  3.  b,  and  of  subordination  to  nouns 
with  suftixes  as  a  substitute  for  the  construct  relation  §  256.  3.  a. 

c.  He  paragogic  may  be  attached  to  a  noun  in  the  construct  state, 
Cp':J  i^rriTo  toward  the  rising  of  the  sun  Deut.  4:  41,  Gen.  24:  67,  47:  14, 

1  Kin.  19:  15;  even  in  compound  proper  names  Sailj  iT^X3  to  Beersheba 
Gen.  46:  1. 

§  260.  The  preposition  b  to,  helonging  to,  with  or  with- 
out a  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for 
the  construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  "^'iTX  "Nkn 
ri^2S;b  her  father's  sheep  prop,  the  sheep  which  belonged  to 
iter  father  Gen.  29:  9,  40:  ft,  1  Sam.  17:  40,  21:  8,  1  Kin. 
15:  20,  comp.  Dn'ny;  -)5<::  Gen.  37:  12,  y^^bs<b  Jn^in  the 
house  ofElisha  2  Kin.  5:  9,  1  Sam.  14: 16,  2  Chron.  19:11, 
comp.  Latin  pater  mihi.   This  is  particularly  the  case 

1.  When  the  first  noun  is  omitted  Tllb  (a  psalm)  of 
David  Ps.  11:  1,  D?rns;b  "piax  Amnon  (son)  of  Ahinoam 

2  Sam.  3:  2,  Gen.  8:  5,  Ex.  12:  2,  their  letters  n^li-iib  nujsi 

7  1  ?  T    •  :  V  -:f- 

and  those  of  Tohiah  Neh.  6:  17,  or  is  remote  Lev.  7:  26, 
Am.  5:  3. 

a.  In  1  Sam.  2:  29  a  noun  in  apposition  with  one  preceded  by  a  con- 
struct receives  h  to  suggest  more  distinctly  its  relation  to  the  governing 


§  261  THE  PREDICATE.  293 

noun,  the  offerings  of  Israel  "'ks^  viz.  of  my  •people  so  1  Kin.  6:  5;  and 
after  a  suffix  Esra  9:1. 

2.  Wlien  the  first  noun  is  indefinite  and  the  second 
definite,  *TD":b  "jS  a  son  of  Jesse  1  Sam.  16:18  C'^?":""^  2  Sam. 
20:  1  is  the  son  of  Jesse,  §  249.  3),  D'nntDn  nibb  n:^;  a  ser- 
vant of  the  captain  of  the  guard  Gen.  41:  12. 

a.  Hence  the  frequent  use  of  h  (Lamedh  audoris)  in  the  titles  of  the 
Psalms  and  other  compositions  'ni'ib  "li'STTD  a  psalm  of  David  i.  e.  beloiigiug 
to  him  as  its  author,  P^ip^nV  n'f  sn  a  prayer  of  Hahaklcuk. 

3.  When  the  first  noun  is  accompanied  by  a  numeral 
adjective,  especially  in  dates,  TD'fib  Di"*  n'iL':^'"n\2"^ri  the  fif- 
teenth day  of  the  month  1  Kin.  12-  32,  tjbiab  n^iar^rri  r.:T23 
in  the  fifth  year  of  the  king  1  Kin.  14:  25,  i^C^jb  tit  ni^"n 
in  the  third  year  of  Asa  1  Kin.  15:  33. 

4.  "When  several  genitives  are  connected  together, 
T'nTi'',  ■'bb'rb  D'/J^n  ''nn'^,  "So  the  book  of  the  Chronicles  of 
the  kings  of  Judah  1  Kin.'  15:  23,  Num.  16:  22,  32:  28, 
36:  1,  Josh.  19:  51,  21:  1,  1  Chron.  26:  26,  Ezra  1:  5. 

5.  When  for  any  reason  the  construct  could  not  be 
employed,  as  with  a  negative  Dnb  ^ib  ynJi  a  land  not  theirs 
Gen.  15:  13,  or  a  suffix  bhjsn'bjb  ^irnis  our  princes  of  the 
whole  congregation  Ezra  10:  14,  1  Chi'on.  7:  5. 

The  Predicate. 

§  261.  1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substan- 
tive, adjective,  or  pronoun,  may  be  connected  with  its 
subject  without  an  intervening  copula,  their  mutual  re- 
lation being  sufficiently  suggested  by  simply  placing  them 
together,  DibiT  n^ni3"n3"b3  all  her  paths  (are)  peace  Prov. 
3:  17,  Y^n  li'J  the  tree  (was)  good  Gen.  3:  6,  r\'^yir^  HT  this 
(is)  the  way  Isa.  30:  21. 

2.  Or  the  pronoun  J^^H  of  the  third  person  may  be 
used  as  a  copula,  tnz  iX^n  *y^^";n  nnin  the  fourth  river  is 
Euphrates  prop,  it  (is)  Euphrates  Gen.  2:  14,  Jer.  50:  25, 


294  SYNTAX.  §  261 

»"i'>j<  MrnTI'J  ivhat  are  these?  ZecL  4:  5,  ^sb^  Mrrnnx 
thou  art  my  king  Ps.  44:  5,  Dn  D^bbip  nbxH  Q"ilj:5?n  ^/^ese 
?;im  are  ])eaceahle  Gren.  34:  21. 

a.  In  all  the  instances,  in  which  it  is  commonly  explained  as  a  copulfv 
the  pronoun  may  with  greater  propriety  be  regarded  as  an  emphatic  repe- 
tition of  the  subject,  §  246.  2. 

3.  Or  the  verb  njri  to  he  may  be  employed  for  a  like 
purpose,  particularly  if  the  idea  of  past  or  future  time 
is  mvolved,  ^Hh  tnh^n  V^sn  the  earth  loas  desolate  Gren. 

T   :   IT        )     V    T     T 

1:  2,  riii5"n  ^^n  ^I^sn  the  oxen  were  ploughing  Job  1:  14, 
Ex.  9:  3;  though  rarely  in  a  circumstantial  clause,  as 
Judg.  8:  11,  since  the  time  is  sufficiently  indicated  by 
the  connection. 

a.  Verbs  which  denote  some  modification  of  being  are  sometimes  em- 
ployed in  the  same  way;  thus,  his  eyes  niriD  ^Vntn  began  (to  be)  dim  1  Sam. 
3:2;  •Ta'^NO  "^""^  ^'^  -"^t^  ^^^  Noah  began  (to  be)  a  husbandman  Gen.  9:  20; 
iniw  v^p^rns  ivhen  thou  ceasest  spoiling  Isa.  33:  1,  the  hair  "li:^  T|Sf^  has 
turned  tvhite  Lev.  13:  3,  Gen.  38:  11,  Isa.  47:  8;  so  to  be  called,  to  be 
esteemed,  etc. 

b.  Simple  existence  is  predicated  by  means  of  the  particle  "02,  ^XJi  i^.? 
there  is  a  kinsman  Ruth  3:  12,  Gen.  18:  24^  and  non-existence  by  •]']k, 
which  retains  its  absolute  form  at  the  end  of  a  clause  ^JN;  Cjil  there  is  no 
one  pursuing  Lev.  26:  37,  1  Sam.  9:  4,  10:  14,  1  Kin.  18:  10,  Prov.  17:  16, 
or  section  of  a  clause  "j"^!!*  DTN  there  teas  not  a  man  to  till  the  ground  Gen. 
2:  5,  Num.  20:  5,  Isa.  37:  3;  otherwise  it  takes  the  construct  form  "|^S, 
whether  it  precedes  the  subject  l3"i  pb  "px  Gen.  11:  30,  C]Y-i  -(is  Lev.  26:  36, 
Judg.  21:  25,  1  Sam.  9:  2,  Ps.  38:  8,  Ezek.  13:  10,  15,  16,  or  follows  it  "ir's 
1'rk  "ps  there  was  no  one  interpreting  it  Gen.  40:  8,  19:  31,  Judg.  13:  9, 
1  Sam.  9 :  7,  Ezek.  37 :  8.  These  particles  may  also  be  used  as  copulas 
Gen.  31:  29,  Ex.  5:  16,  Judg.  6:  13,  especially  with  the  personal  pronouns, 
when  the  predicate  is  a  participle,  n?^'?  ^?''^  thou  art  not  letting  go  Ex. 
8:  17,  r^'ci^  Tj'^;^  thou  art  saving  Judg.  6:  o6.  In  a  few  instances  in  the 
later  books  '"N  degenei-ates  into  a  mere  auxiliary  verb  Dan.  8:  5.  Once  ly^ 
is  doubled  for  a  strong  affirmation  2  Kin.  10:  15,  and  ui^  "ix  occurs  twice 
as  a  strong  negation  Ps.  135:  17,  1  Sam.  21:  9.  "px  is  not  is  never  equi- 
valent to  the  simple  negative  xb  not;  in  the  few  instances  in  which  it 
stands  before  a  verb,  a  conjunctive  or  relative  must  be  supplied  libs  "pN 
it  is  not  so,  that  his  ivrath  has  visited  Job  35:  15,  bi>ii  "bisn  'px  the  king 
is  not  he  that  can  etc.  Jer.  38:  5j  in  Ex.  3:  2  :^3X  is  a  participle  with  a 
omitted  §  93.  c* 


§  262  PEEDICATE  NOUK,  295 


Peedicate  Noun. 

§  262.  1.  The  prominence  due  to  the  predicate  as  the 
affirmation  to  be  made,  and  to  wliich  therefore  attention 
is  to  be  strongly  directed  is  in  Enghsh  indicated  for  the 
most  part  simply  by  the  stress  of  the  voice;  but  in  Hebrew 
it  is  further  suggested  by  the  position  of  the  words.  Ac- 
cordingly as  a  rule  the  predicate,  if  a  verb  or  adjective, 
precedes  its  subject.  If,  however,  the  predicate  be  a  noun 
or  personal  pronoun,  in  which  case  there  might  be  a 
doubt  which  is  the  subject  and  which  the  predicate,  the 
logical  order  is  observed  and  the  subject  precedes,  nVri"] 
D^ribsn  iX^n  Jehovah  is  the  God  1  Kin.  18:  39,  "d-j;:  ^'is 
iTbnb:j  thy  father  is  a  man  of  war  2  Sam.  17:  8,  Deut. 
10Vi7,  1  Sam.  1:  26,  Isa.  1:  7,  23,  7:  8,  9,  8:  13,  48:  12. 

a.  Sometimes  for  the  sake  of  special  emphasis  the  predicate  noun  pre- 
cedes the  subject  noun,  Deut.  26:  5,  Isa.  6:  3,  13,  or  pronoun  Gen.  43:  12, 
Isa.  6:  5,  Jer.  1 :  6,  7.  Or  while  the  subject  is  prefixed,  the  predicate  noun 
may  emphatically  precede  a  pronoun  which  repeats  the  subject,  nh^'in  tT^ap 
N"^!"!  {license,  it  is  an  abomination  Isa.  1:  13,  or  the  order  may  be  reversed 
in  successive  clauses  Isa.  5:  7.  Participles  in  general  follow  the  order  of 
nouns  Gen.  7:  4,  37:  19,  Num.  22:  34,  1  Sam.  14:  8,  Prov.  22:  15,  Isa.  3:  1, 
5:  28,  Ezek.  37:  28,  though  liable  to  the  changes  due  to  emphasis  Gen.  3:  5, 
14,  17,  41:  32,  42:  9,  23,  Num.  35:  16,  Judg.  15:  11,  Isa.  2:  22,  3:  13,  48:  13, 
Jo.  4:  4,  Am.  6:  8,  7:  4.  In  Gen.  41:  2,  18  the  order  of  the  words  graphi- 
cally depicts  the  successive  Impressions  made  upon  the  eye  of  the  beholder, 
from  the  river  coming  up  seven  kine  fair  etc.:  the  place  and  movement  first 
attract  attention,  then  the  number  of  moving  objects,  then  the  objects  them- 
selves are  recognized  and  their  qualities  perceived.  Predicate  participles 
belonging  to  definite  nouns  are  distinguished  from  attributives,  by  not  re- 
ceiving the  article  Deut.  2:  4,  Jer.  44:  15. 

2.  Material  and  abstract  nouns  are  used  in  the  pre- 
dicate to  denote  qualities,  which  in  other  languages  would 
be  expressed  by  adjectives  V"?  Vh'Tp  its  walls  2uere  wood 
i.  e.  made  of  wood  Ezek.  41:  22;  the  vale  of  Siddim  nnxn 
was  pits,  full  of  pits,  as  it  were,  composed  of  them,  Gen. 
14: 10;  thy  shoes  shall  be  n^JJrij^  bnn  iron  and  hra/is  Deut. 


296  SYNTAX.    ,  §  2G3 

33:  25,  Ps.  1.05:  15;  the  camj)  was  nt:ii  security  i.  e.  se- 
cure Judo:.  8:  11. 

o.  A  like  use  of  nouns  for  adjectives  occurs  in  apposition  §  256.  2,  and 
in  the  construct  state  §  257.  2.  a  and  6.  b.  Other  examples  of  material 
nouns  so  employed:  Gen.  11: 1,  Ex.  9:  31,  Ezra  10:  13,  Cant.  2:  15,  Isa.  5:  12, 
7:  24,  Jer.  2:  28,  24:  2.  Abstracts  often  convey  the  idea  more  strongly, 
than  would  be  done  by  an  adjective,  thy  judgments  are  p'li  righteousness 
Ps.  119:  75,  more  expressive  than  "righteous";  they  not  merely  possess  the 
quality  but  are  so  to  speak  identical  with  it;  Gen.  12:  2,  Job  19:  29,  23:  1, 
26:  13,  Ps.  109:  4,  110:  3,  Eccles.  10:  12,  Isa.  11:  10,  Jer.  44:  2,  Ezek.  27:  36, 
Dan.  9:  23.  An  adverb  is  similarly  used  as  a  predicate  Job  8:  9  'ISTOX  bi^n 
we  are  yesterday  i.  e.  of  yesterday.  Sometimes  these  brief  and  emphatic  ex- 
pressions alternate  with  other  forms  of  speech,  I  am  m"?'j  peace,  they  are 
i^h'rh'nh  for  icar  Ps.  120:  7;  is  your  father  health?  i.  e.  well  Gen.  43:  27, 
2  Sam.  20:  9  but  is  health  lb  to  him?  Gen.  29:  6,  2  Sam.  18:  32;  thou  art 
rrinsi^n  delights  i.  e.  much  delighted  in  Dan.  9:  23,  equivalent  to  nlirn  d"'5< 
Dan.  10:  11,  19. 

3.  A  noun  in  the  predicate  may  receive  the  same  ad- 
juncts as  in  the  subject,  §  247. 


Peedicate  Adjectives  and  Demonstratives. 

§  263.  Adjectives  and  demonstrative  pronouns  in  the 
predicate  agree  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  relate  in 
gender  and  number,  but  differ  from  attributive  adjectives 
and  demonstratives,  §  252,  in  standing  before  the  noim 
and  in  not  receiving  the  article,  though  the  noun  be  de- 
iinite,  ■^h'^n  nii:  the  word  is  good  Deut.  1:  14,  Tt'n^,  D^ti 
his  mercies  are  great  1  Chron.  21:  13,  DTbTBH  niibin  nb8< 
these  are  the  generations  of  the  heavens  Gen.  2 :  4. 

a.  In  circumstantial  clauses,  the  predicate  adjective  stands  regularly 
after  the  noun;  it  may  also  take  this  position  in  other  cases  when  the  em- 
phasis requires  it  P^^  ahb-bs  the  whole  heart  is  faint  Isa.  1:  5. 

h.  If  the  sense  require  the  predicate  to  be  made  definite,  it  will  re- 
ceive the  article,  'lif'sn  "'S  «'y  mouth  is  the  (one)  speaking  Gen.  45:  12, 
pi^jin  nih"!  Jehovah  is  the  righteous  one  i.  e.  is  in  the  right,  and  I  and  my 
people  are  D^SJ^^inn  in  the  tvrong  Ex.  9:  27,  Gen.  2:  11,  1  Kin.  18:  25,  Ps. 
19:  11,  Isa.  14:^27,  Zech.  7:  6;  but  ia  1  Kin.  3;  22,  23  ''nn  and  P:gn  are 
subjectg. 


§  264  comparison  of  adjectives.  297 

Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

§  2C4.  1.  Adjectives  have  no  distinct  form  for  the 
comparative  or  superlative.  Comparison  is  expressed  by 
means  of  the  preposition  "2  from  placed  after  the  ad- 
jective, D"":S'^  •"'Tr"  "i^'i^  u'isdom  is  letter  than  rubies 
prop,  is  good  from  rubies,  differs  from  them  and  by  im- 
plication is  superior  to  them  in  point  of  goodness,  Prov. 
8:  11;   "^siS'J  nril^  p^i'l  thou  art  more  righteous  than  J, 

1  Sam.  21:  17,  Lev.  13:  4,  2  Sam.  13:  16,  2  Chron.  29;  34, 
Eccles.  4:  9. 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  be  expressed 

(1.)  By  adding  bii  all  to  the  comparative  particle  ]'2, 

Dlp'^j^'bs^  biia  great  from  all  the  sons  of  the  east  i.  e.  the 

greatest  of  all,  etc.,  Job  1:  3,  2  Sam.  19:  8. 

(2.)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 

the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree,  'p\> 

vis  the  least  of  his  sons  prop,  the  little  (one)  2  Chron. 

21:  17,  D^'Ci'l^  Mi^Jj  0  fairest  among  ivomen  Cant.  1:  8, 

"(b]?"  the  least,  biisn  the  greatest  1  Chron.  12:  14,  Diii: 

the  lest  of  them  Mic.  7:  4. 

a.  When  the  predicate  is  a  verb  instead  of  an  adjective,  comparison 
may  be  expressed  in  the  same  manner,  '^\^^  ^^?X  I  icill  be  greater  than 
thou  prop,  great  from  thee  Gen.  41:  40,  19:  9,  32:  11,  Ex.  36:  5,  Judg.  2:  19, 

2  Sam.  6:  21,  22,  20:  6,  1  Kin.  5:  10,  Job  3:  21,  6:  3,  Ps.  69:  32,  "^S?  nsn^l 
rnxP  a7id  he  was  the  7visest  of  all  men  1  Kin.  5:11,  Gen.  37:  3,  1  Sam.  18:  30, 
1  Kin.  14:  9.  So  after  adverbs  2  Chron.  25:  9,  Deut.  7:7.  In  a  few  pas- 
sages, chiefly  occurring  in  the  book  of  Ecclesiastes,  comparison  is  made  by 
means  of  the  adverb  "ini'i  more,  "in"i  tit  "^ix  "^ri"??!!  I  was  then  more  ivise 
Eccl.  2:  15. 

b.  The  construction  with  "^  may  also  be  used  to  denote  excess,  bi'ia 
xi-l"?  "'i'y  my  iniquity  is  too  great  to  be  forgiven  prop,  greater  than  (it  is 
possible)  to  forgive  Gen.  4:  13,  ^^"^  'S'jyi  too  little  for  thee  Job  15:  11,  Gen. 
18:  14,  Num.  16:  9,  Ruth  1:  12,  Isa.  7:  13;  and  this  usage  once  estabhshed 
was  extended  to  cases,  which  seem  incapable  of  being  logically  resolved 
Isa.  49:  6,  Ezek.  8:  17. 

c.  A  comparative  sense  is  commonh-  ascribed  to  '{0  in  the  following 
passages,  in  which  an  adjective,  suggested  by  the  context,  must  be  suppUed, 


298  SYNTAX.  §  265 

rciiSaia  lia^  the  upright  (is  sharper)  than  a  thorn-hedge  Mic.  7:  4,  csk'a 
less  than  nothing  Isa.  40:  17,  41:  24,  Ps,  62:  10,  Isa.  10:  10,  Job  11:  17;  in 
some  of  these  cases,  however,  )'>2  may  have  the  sense  of  from  or  of,  and 
denote  that  from  which  any  thing  is  derived  or  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

d.  The  name  of  God  has  been  supposed  to  be  used  in  certain  passages 
simply  to  enhance  the  magnitude  of  that  with  which  it  is  connected  and 
thus  to  form  a  sort  of  superlative.  But  in  all  such  cases  there  is  a  direct 
reference  to  the  divine  Being,  nih";  "^isb  T;^  1125  Gen.  10:  9  is  not  merely 
a  very  valiant  hunter,  one  so  to  speak  upon  a  superhuman  scale  or  in  the 
divine  estimation,  but  with  the  superadded  thought  of  attracting  the  notice 
and  displeasure  of  Jehovah;  d"!!!'^?*  f^'^lll  1  Sam.  14:  13  is  not  merely  a  very 
great  trembling  but  a  trembling  sent  of  God;  Q^n^Nb  nBi'ilii-"!"':^  Jon.  3:  3  is 
not  simply  an  exceedingly  great  city,  but  one  which  in  its  greatness  is  an 
object  of  the  divine  regard,  comp.  4:11. 

e.  Comparisons  are  sometimes  made  with  objects  in  a  general  way, 
without  stating  the  particular  aspect  compared,  when  this  is  sufficiently  ob- 
vious, joy  in  my  heart  TVJC  more  than  their  joy  at  the  time  when  etc.  Ps. 
4:  8,  making  my  feet  niB^xs  like  the  feet  of  the  hinds  Ps.  18:  34,  Job  35:  2, 
Isa.  5:  29,  10:  10.  Cant.  1:  15,  Ps,  45:  7  are  not,  as  some  have  alleged,  to 
be  explained  after  this  analogy.  The  comparison  is  fully  stated  in  Prov. 
3:  14  r|D3"in&?2  nitiD  nio  the  gain  of  it  is  better  than  the  gain  of  silver. 

Verbs. 

§  265.  1.  The  doctrine  of  the  Hebrew  tenses  rests 
upon  a  conception  of  time  radically  different  from  that 
which  prevails  in  our  own  and  in  other  Indo-European 
languages.  Time  is  conceived  of,  not  as  distributed  into 
three  portions,  viz.:  past,  present,  and  future,  but  as  con- 
sisting of  the  past  and  future  only.  The  present  is,  in 
this  view,  an  inappreciable  moment,  without  extension 
or  cognizable  existence,  the  mere  point  of  contact  between 
two  boundless  periods  of  duration,  or  the  ever  shifting 
instant  of  transition  from  one  to  the  other,  and,  as  such, 
not  entitled  to  be  represented  by  a  distinct  verbal  form. 
Every  action  or  state  of  being  is  accordingly  viewed  as 
belonging  to  the  past  or  to  the  future;  and  such  as  do 
not  belong  exclusively  to  one,  may  be  referred  indiffer- 
ently to  either. 

2.  Within  these  two  grand  divisions  of  time  no  ac- 


§  265  VERBS,  299 

count  is  made  of  those  minuter  distinctions,  in  the  ex- 
pression of  which  we  are  accustomed  to  employ  such  a 
variety  of  tenses,  nor  of  those  modal  differences  which 
are  with  us  indicated  by  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  and 
potential,  except  to  that  hmited  extent  to  which  these 
may  be  regarded  as  covered  by  the  paragogic  and  apo- 
copated futures,  §  270.  Whatever  is,  or  is  conceived  of 
as  past,  must  be  put  in  the  preterite;  the  future  is  used 
for  all  that  is,  or  is  conceived  of  as  future,  while  all  sub- 
ordinate modifications  or  shades  of  meaning  are  either 
suggested  by  accompanying  particles,  or,  without  being 
precisely  indicated,  are  left  to-  be  inferred  from  the  con- 
nection. 

3.  Another  peculiarity  still  more  foreign  to  our  us- 
ages and  modes  of  thought  is  that  the  time  denoted  by 
the  Hebrew  tenses  is  frequently  to  be  estimated  not  from 
the  actual  position  of  the  speaker  but  from  some  ideal 
position  in  the  past  or  in  the  future  to  which  he  men- 
tally transports  himself.  This  subjective  use  of  the  tenses 
may  be  quite  at  variance  with  their  objective  employ- 
ment. Thus  the  preterite  tense  may  be  used  of  that  which 
is  in  reality  future  to  the  moment  of  speaking,  because 
the  speaker  has  in  thought  taken  his  station  at  a  point 
yet  more  remotely  future,  from  which  he  looks  back  upon 
that  which  he  describes  as  though  it  had  already  taken 
place.  In  like  manner  the  future  tense  may  be  used  of 
events  in  the  past,  because  the  speaker  transports  liim- 
self  in  thought  to  a  period  prior  to  their  occurrence  and 
surveys  them  from  that  point. 

a.  No  part  of  Hebrew  Grammar  has  occasioned  more  perplexity  than 
the  seeminglj  arbitrary  and  promiscuous  use  of  the  tenses,  and  the  dif- 
hculty  of  establishing  for  them  any  fixed  and  clearly  defined  temporal  mean- 
ing. The  denominations  Preterite  and  Future  appear  to  ba  incongruous, 
when  so  far  from  being  limited  respectively  to  the  division  indicated  by 
the  name,  either  tense  may  upon  occasion  be  employed  of  the  paet,  pre- 


300  SYNTAX.  §  265 

sent  or  future  and  both  may  occur  in  application  to  the  same  period  of 
time  and  even  be  intermingled  in  the  same  description.  Hence  other  names 
have  been  proposed  as  Present  (Lee)  or  Aorist  (De  Sacy)  instead  of  Future. 
And  it  hcis  been  seriously  questioned  whether  the  so  called  tenses  are  really 
such,  and  should  not  rather  be  considered  modes.  Ewald  at  one  time  called 
them  the  First  and  Second  Mode.  And  the  most  eminent  grammarians  at 
present  incline  to  call  them  the  Perfect  and  Imperfect  on  the  assumption 
that  primarily  and  properly  they  have  no  relation  to  succession  in  time  at 
all,  but  only  to  the  quality  of  an  action  or  state  of  being;  the  Perfect  being 
assigned  to  that  which  is  regarded  as  complete,  and  the  Imperfect  to  that 
which  is  regarded  as  incomplete,  irrespective  of  the  period  of  time  to  which 
they  may  severally  belong.  These  names  properly  defined  and  understood 
correspond  in  a  striking  manner  with  certain  marked  uses  of  these  tenses, 
and  their  employment  has  much  to  recommend  it.  But  with  all  deference 
to  the  weight  of  authority  arrayed  in  their  favour,  tbey  seem  on  the 
whole  less  simple  and  less  appropriate  than  the  old  designations  Preterite' 
and  Future,  and  appear  to  indicate  derived  and  secondary  qualities  rather 
than  such  as  are  original  and  fundamental.    For 

(1)  It  is  very  improbable  a  priori  that  a  language  should  have  no 
method  of  denoting  time  except  the  indirect  one  which  this  new  theory 
supposes,  and  no  forms  which  in  their  original  and  native  import  are  in- 
tended for  its  expi-ession.  The  time  of  an  action  is  and  must  always  have 
been  regarded  as  so  important  a  part  of  what  is  to  be  stated  about  it,  that 
the  strong  antecedent  presumption  is  that  some  direct  provision  must  have 
been  made  for  its  notation.  If  any  equally  satisfactory  explanation  can  be 
made  of  the  facts  on  the  assumption  that  the  Hebrew  tenses  are  properly 
such  and  that  they  denote  the  time  and  not  merely  the  mode  of  an  action, 
this  is  clearly  entitled  to  the  preference. 

(2)  That  such  a  satisfactory  explanation  exists  will  be  shown  hereafter 
in  detail.  The  whole  mystery  of  the  matter  disappears,  as  soon  as  it  is 
perceived,  that  the  tenses  have  a  subjective  as  well  as  an  objective  use; 
that  is  to  say,  the  time  which  they  denote  is  not  invariably  measured  from 
the  moment  of  speaking,  but  quite  frequently  from  some  ideal  position 
taken  in  thought  by  the  speaker  and  suggested  by  the  context.  This  sub- 
jective employment  of  the  tenses,  which  must  necessarily  be  assumed  to  an 
equal  extent  in  the  modal  hypothesis,  reallj'  renders  that  hypothesis  alto- 
gether unnecessary.  The  notion  that  the  elemental  ideas  of  past  and  future 
are  only  expressed  in  Hebrew  indirectly  through  the  medium  of  the  ideas 
of  the  complete  and  the  incomplete,  is  not  only  a  philosophical  abstraction, 
which  it  is  not  easy  to  verify,  but  it  imposes  lapon  the  student  a  most 
serious  difficulty  at  the  outset  by  requiring  of  him  an  exceedingly  abstruse 
process  of  thought  to  attain  a  very  simple  result,  which  can  be  made  per- 
fectly perspicuous  in  a  far  readier  and  more  natural  manner.  For  purposes 
ijf  instruction  the  time-theory  of  the  tenses  has  the  great  advantage  of 
clearness  and  simplicity  over  the  modal  theory,  even  were  the  latter  to  be 
considered  the  more  profound  and  philosophical. 

(3)  In  the  most  common  use  of  the  tenses  anrl  especially  when  they 


§265 


VEEBS.  301 


are  contrasted  in  the  same  sentence,  the  distinction  !•  not  one  of  mode  but 
of  time.  The  like  IT'n  icere  not  before  them  and  TX^T-ir^  shall  not  he  after 
them  Ex.  10:  14;  the  covenant  which  '■TT'Z  I  made  tvith  your  fathers  Jer. 
31:  32,  tchich  r"n:x  I  will  make  after  those  days  ver.  33;  what  T\'r\  has  been 
is  that  tchich  ri^ri'^  shall  he,  and  what  n'r"2  has  been  done  is  that  which 
niar;;  shall  he  done,  Eccles.  1:  9,  Cant.  5:  3,  1  Kin,  21:  19.  In  the  absence 
of  decisive  reasons  to  the  contrary,  this  may  fairly  be  regarded  as  an  index 
to  the  real  nature  of  the  radical  and  primal  distinction  between  them. 

(4)  "When  a  series  of  verbs  occurs,  whose  tenses  are  apparently  used 
promiscuously  e.  g.  Ps.  18:  5  flf.,  Hab.  3:  3  ff.,  the  first  verb  is  ordinarily 
regulative  of  the  rest,  being  used  in  its  proi^er  tense  signification,  and  the 
time  of  the  others  is  determined  by  it;  which  shows  that  the  apparent 
fluctuation  of  meaning  in  the  tense  is  due  to  the  connection  in  which  it 
stands  and  not  to  the  inherent  signification  of  the  form;  in  other  words  it 
grows  out  of  its  subjective  use  as  indicated  by  its  surroundings  and  not  out 
of  modal  distinctions  attaching  to  the  form  itself.  And  in  general  when- 
ever there  is  a  departure  from  the  strict  objective  meaning  of  the  tense  as 
measured  from  the  time  of  speaking,  the  explanation  is  found  in  some  sug- 
gestion of  the  context  fixing  a  new  point  from  which  the  measurement  is 
to  be  made.  All  which  tends  to  show  not  that  these  tenses  have  a  meaning 
independent  of  time,  but  that  the  time  which  they  denote  is  often  reckoned 
from  a  subjective  standpoint. 

(5)  This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  the  seeming  fluctuation 
in  the  use  of  the  tenses  is  much  more  marked  in  poetry  than  in  prose,  the 
fancy  of  the  poet  leading  him  to  transport  himself  to  ideal  positions  other 
than  that  which  he  actually  occupies  and  thus  making  the  use  of  the  tenses 
more  than  ordinarily  subjective.  We  are  thus  again  led  to  look  for  the 
cause  of  the  phenomenon  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker  himself,  rather  than 
in  some  modal  distinction  inherent  in  the  form. 

(6)  The  names  Perfect  and  Imperfect  do  not  adequately  describe  the 
functions  of  the  tenses  to  which  they  are  applied.  Imperfect  is  inapplicable 
to  a  tense  which  is  predominantly  used  to  denote  future  action,  not  as  of 
this  or  that  quality  but  simply  and  solely  as  future;  it  is  an  abuse  of  lan- 
guage to  call  that  incomplete  which  has  as  yet  no  existence  but  is  to  come 
to  pass  hereafter.  The  unsuitableness  of  the  name  "Imperfect"  is  confessed 
and  urged  by  Bottcher,  who  proposes  instead  "Fiens"  (becoming);  in  which 
he  is  followed  by  Driver,  who  suggests  "Inchoate"  or  "Incipient".  Bottcher 
fancifully  enough  claims  that  the  one  tense  denotes  the  termination  of  an 
action,  and  the  other  the  beginning  of  it,  while  the  participle  represents  it 
as  ir  progress.  All  that  is  correct  in  this  is  that  the  preterite  looks  back 
upon  an  action  as  belonging  to  the  past  and  the  future  looks  forward  to  it, 
from  the  assumed  point  of  observation,  whether  the  actual  present  or  some 
ideal  position  in  which  the  speaker  in  thought  places  himself;  the  parti- 
ciple, as  a  verbal  noun,  simply  sets  forth  the  active  performance  or  passive 
endurance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb  or  the  possession  of  the  quality 
which  it  expresses,  out  of  all  relation  to  time  except  as  this  is  inferred 
from  the  connection.     In  J  Kin.  1:  11,  13,  18,  22:  41,  52,  2  Kin.  9:  13  and 


302  SYNTAX.  §  266 

many  similar  passages  the  preterite  Tj|^  indicates  the  beginning  of  a  reign, 
and  in  1  Kin.  22:  42  the  term  of  its  continuance.  In  Gen.  14:  4  the  tern? 
during  which  the  king  of  Sodom  continued  to  serve  Chedovlaomer  as  well 
as  the  initial  point  of  the  rebellion  are  expressed  by  preterites  ^13^,  1"''^^. 
In  1  Kin.  1 :  46  2'*;^  represents  an  action  not  at  its  termination  but  its  com- 
mencement; so  naiy  Kuth  l:  15,  xa  Dan.  1:1.  In  Gen.  11:  5  ^lia  does  not 
imply  that  the  children  of  men  had  completed  their  work  of  building  when 
Jehovah  went  down  to  see  their  city  and  tower.  It  is  plain  from  number- 
less examples,  that  tbe  tense  form  has  nothing  to  do  with  suggesting  whether 
the  beginning,  middle  or  end  of  an  action  but  simply  the  action  as  a  whole; 
and  it  is  not  limited  to  one  quality  of  the  action  whether  as  complete  or 
incomplete.  These  modifications  may  be  suggested  by  the  nature  of  the 
case  or  by  attendant  circumstances  but  not  by  the  tense  form  as  such. 

(7)  Add  to  this  the  remarkable  manner  in  which  the  Preterite  under 
any  of  its  aspects  may  be  continued  by  the  Future  with  Vav  consecutive, 
and  the  Future  by  the  Preterite  with  Vav  consecutive,  shewing  the  sub- 
stantial equivalence  between  the  two  tenses  in  all  varieties  of  their  em- 
ployment, when  subjected  to  the  modifying  influence  of  Vav  consecutive. 
The  effect  of  this  particle  is  simply  to  mark  the  close  connection  between 
two  acts  so  that  the  second  is  not  conceived  independently  but  as  the  se- 
quence of  the  first.  The  standpoint  of  measurement  is  mentally  shifted  so 
that  events  actuallj'  x^ast  become  future  from  this  new  post  of  observation 
and  vice  versa.  There  is  no  change  in  the  modality  of  the  act,  but  only 
in  the  point  of  time  from  which  it  is  subjectively  regarded. 

The  Primary  Tenses. 
The  Preterite  (Perfect). 

§  266.  1.  The  preterite  or  perfect  is  accordingly  used 
of  the  past,  whether  our  idiom  would  require  the  abso- 
lute past,  i.  e.  the  historical  tense,  in  the  beginning  God 
\IC3.  created,  etc.,  Gen.  1:  1,  God  HOD  tempted  Abraham 
Gren.  22:  1;  or  one  of  the  relative  tenses,  viz.  the  past 
viewed  in  relation  to  the  present,  i.  e.  the  perfect,  what 
is  this  that  n""i;y  thou  hast  done  Gen.  3:13,  thee  ^n'lj^n  have 

T  •    T  '  •  •    T 

I  seen  righteous  Gen.  7:1;  the  past  in  relation  to  another 
past,  1.  e.  the  pluperfect,  God  ended  his  work  tvhich  rhv 
he  had  made  Gen.  2*2;  and  they  did  so  as  Jehovah  Tkl 
had  commanded  Ex.  7:  10;  or  the  past  in  relation  to  a 
future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  ivhen  Jehovah  Xrr\  shall 
have  ivashed  aivay,  etc.,  Isa.  4:  4,  until  the  time  that  she 


§   2G6  THE  PRIMARY  TENSES.  303 

tvhich  travaiJefh  rrib*  shall  have  hroitght  forth  Mic.  5:  2; 
or  a  conditional  mood,  except  Jehovah  of  hosts  had  left 
unto  lis  a  very  small  remnant  ^D'^^H  we  should  have  heen  as 
Sodom  Isa.  1:9,7  tvould  there  tvere  a  szvord  in  mine  hand, 
for  noiv  T]*ri:0~  I  tvould  have  killed  thee  Num.  22:  29;  or 
an  optative,  denoting  something  which  was  to  have  been 
desh'ed  but  w^hich  nevertheless  did  not  occur,  ^rr'i'^b  0 
that  we  had  died  Num.  14:  2,  ^7-pn  ^ib  0  that  they  had  heen 
ivise  Deut.  32:  29,  or  a  subjunctive  (the  Jordan  was  dried 
up),  that  Dlii^'^";  ye  migldfear  the  Lord,  at  that  time  and 
thencefonvard /orever  Josh.  4:  24. 

a.  In  all  these  cases  the  verbal  form  merely  expresses  in  the  general 
that  the  action  belongs  to  the  past,  but  whether  this  is  to  be  taken  abso- 
lutel}',  relativelj',  or  conditionally,  must  be  learned  from  the  circumstances 
of  the  case  or  from  accompanying  words.  The  Hebrew  preterite  may  cor- 
respond to  the  historical  tense  whether  this  is  used  of  an  act  performed  or 
a  condition  existing  at  some  specified  time  in  the  past,  in  that  day  all  the 
fountains  etc.  "rpn;  xoere  hurst  open  Gen.  7:  11,  so  8:  5,  14,  14:  5,  15:  18, 
17:  26,  19:  5,  34,  35,  44:  3,  Ps.  27:  2;  or  at  some  particular  time  not  spe- 
cified, Esau  nibb  took  his  tvives  Gen.  36:  2,  so  Gen.  3:  19,  14:  18,  15:  7,  19: 
11,  21:  1,  26:  28,  Judg.  10:  12,  Job  1:  21,  Ps.  8:  4,  57:  7,  Cant.  5:  4-7;  or 
at  any  time  indefinitely,  blessed  is  the  man,  who  T\^'n  iih  has  not  ivalked  etc. 
Ps.  1:  1,  so  14:  1,  26:4,  27:  9,  Prov.  23:35,  30:4,  Job  12:  9,  38:  12,  41:  3,  5, 
Isa.  1:  12,  40:  12-14,  Num.  12:  2,  23:  10;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times 
^::ir  ivent  about  (day  after  day)  Num.  11:  8;  ^^TJ'^J  they  kept  (habitually) 
Num.  9:  23,  a  summation  of  numerous  particulars  previousl3'  recited;  so 
lis  Deut.  12:  31  (illustrated  by  the  following  frequentative  ^S"i"y'^),  Judg. 
2:  15,  17,  18,  Ruth  4:  7,  1  Kin.  11:  8,  2  Kin.  13:  25,  17:  7  (^iX-jn  embraces 
the  whole  series  of  acts  in  the  verses  that  follow),  vei*.  13  "^nnid,  ver,  23 
l?'n,  2  Chron.  12:  11,  ^i?  24:  11,  Job  7:  13,  Ps.  88:  10,  129:  l-'3,"lsa.  1:  1, 
Jer.  5:  31,  32:  29,  44:  17,  Mic.  6:  12;  or  a  continued  action  or  state,  Noah 
tT^jn  was  perfect  in  his  generations;  Noah  "T^^virin  ivalked  with  God  Gen. 
6:9;  Solomon  fiia  ivas  building  his  house  thirteen  years  1  Kin.  7:  1,  ao 
Ex.  12:  40,  Deut.  2:  10,  Josh.  11:  18,  2  Sam.  5:  4,  Ps.  22:  5,  90:  1. 

6.  The  preterite  may  correspond  to  the  English  perfect,  whether  this 
is  used  to  describe  an  action  just  performed  and  belonging  to  the  imme- 
diate past  lo,  now  n[?b  he  hath  taken  my  blessing  Gen.  27:  36;  mine  eyes 
!lN"i  have  seen  the  king  Isa.  6:  5,  so  Gen.  14:  20,  16:  11,  46:  31,  Judg.  11:  7, 
1  Sam.  14:  29;  or  an  action  performed  in  the  past  but  whose  effects  still 
continue,  Jacob  nj?^  hath  taken  all  that  ivas  our  father's  Gen.  31:  1,  so 
14:  23,  24,  15:  3,  16':  2,  19:  19,  Judg,  10:  10,  Ps.  2:  6,  22:  2,  44:  10,  Isa, 
1:  2,  4,  2:  6,  3:  14,  5:  4,  24;  or  an  action  performed  at  any  time  in  the  in- 


304  SYNTAX.  §  266 

definite  past,  considered  as  extending  up  to  the  present  (see  examples  under  a). 
It  is  often  difficult  to  decide  particularly  in  the  Psalms  and  in  other  poe- 
tical passages,  where  the  precise  situation  is  uncertain,  whether  the  pre- 
terite may  be  more  properly  rendered  by  the  absolute  past  (English  im- 
perfect) or  by  the  perfect  tense.  Ps.  3:  8  r"'2f7  thou  smotest  all  my  enemies 
(on  some  well  remembered  occasion),  or  thou  hast  smitten  them  (with  a 
more  general  and  vague  allusion  to  the  indefinite  past);  so  4;  2,  9:  5,  6; 
fir'^Dj?  Ps.  22:  22,  not  thou  answeredst  me,  as  though  an  argument  were 
drawn  from  foinner  deliverances,  but  thoii  hast  answered  me  expressing  a 
confident  assurance  that  his  prayer  is  now  granted. 

c.  When  the  connection  suggests  priority  to  another  event  in  the  past, 
the  preterite  has  the  sense  of  the  pluperfect,  thus  very  frequently  in  rela- 
tive clauses,  he  placed  there  the  man  i^^"!  "ids  whom  he  had  formed,  Gen. 
2:  8,  so  3:  17,  23,  7:  5,  8:  6,  12:  5,  13:  4,  16:' 15,  18:  8,  26:  15,  Ex.  5:  14, 
1  Kin.  11:  10;  after  ncsa  Gen.  12:  4,  17:  23,  18:  33;  after  "^3  Gen.  2:  5, 
6:  6,  8:  11,  14:  14,  1  Sam'.  6:  19,  1  Kin.  5:  15,  11:  9,  12:  1;  after  n:ni  Deut. 
9:  16,  Judg.  6:  28,  Jer.  13:  7;  in  circumstantial  or  explanatory  clauses  Gen. 
24:  1,  31:  34,  1  Sam.  3:  2,  2  Sam.  18:  18,  1  Kin.  1:41,  2  Kin.  9:  16,  Job  32:4, 
Jon.  1:5;  and  in  other  combinations  1  Sam.  1:  5,  4:  18,  1  Kin.  1:  6.  Some- 
times the  preterite  as  a  pluperfect  stands  before  the  verb  to  which  it  is 
related,  the  sun  5<k^  had  risen  and  Lot  sn  had  entered  Zoar,  ivhen  Jehovah 
rained  etc.  Gen.  19:  23,  so  27:  30,  1  Sam.  9:  15.  The  connection  may  be 
such  as  to  imply  that  one  past  action  was  contemporaneous  with  another, 
he  looked  and  lo,  the  smoke  of  the  land  ii'^S  ivent  up  i.  e.  was  then  going  up 
Gen.  19:  28;  ^lia  Gen.  11:  5  not  had  built  but  were  building,  comp.  ver.  8. 
The  preterite  may  be  used  in  this  case,  where  no  stress  is  laid  upon  the 
conjunction  in  time  or  it  is  sufficiently  obvious  in  itself.  But  the  pi'oper 
form  to  express  contemporaneous  action  is  the  participle,  which  then  an- 
swers to  the  English  progressive  imperfect,  Jehovah  appeared  to  him,  x^lni 
n^r"!  while  he  was  sitting  Gen.  18:  1,  2  Kin.  8:  29,  Job  1:  16. 

d.  When  the  connection  is  such  as  to  suggest  the  relation  of  priority 
to  some  future  action,  the  preterite  answers  to  our  future  perfect;  thus 
after  "^'J  until,  I  xoill  draiv  until  I'f  3  theg  shall  have  finished  drinking  Gen. 
24:  19,  so  ver.  33,  Num.  32:  17,  Buth  2:  21,  2  Sam.  17:  13,  Isa.  6:  11;  "'Sns 
after  Lev.  25:  48;  CN  if,  if  "^ir"'?'!  thou  rememberest  me  (lit.  shalt  have 
remembered),  as  I  trust  thou  wilt  Gen.  40:  14,  Buth  3:  18,  Job  11:  13;  in 
a  relative  clause  Gen.  48:  6,  ff^ti  Num.  19:  18,  Deut.  31:  18,  2  Sam.  17:  12; 
after  "I'l^SS  ivhen  Gen,  43:  14,  Esth.  4:  16;  and  in  other  constructions  2  Sam. 
5:  24,  1  Chron.  17:  11,  Isa.  16:  12.  In  most  of  these  passages  the  English 
perfect  could  be  similarly  used.  The  Hebrew  may  substitute  the  future 
for  the  preterite  in  such  connections,  when  it  is  not  important  to  express 
the  relation  of  priority,  comp.  rnk^^n  Gen.  43:  9  with  liN'^^^  ^■^'  32;  also 
nmx  and  iiS"^  in  successive  clauses  of  Job  19:  27,  "J'n'i  and  H^^.^  Isa.  4:  4, 
siso'and  nxOT  6:  11,  'pi'in  and  n'fs  Buth  3:  18. 

e.  After  a  conditional  clause  the  preterite  is  used  in  a  conditional  sense, 
except  we  had  lingered,  surely  now  n:"'!;:  ice  would  have  returned  Gen.  43: 10, 
Num.  22:  3^,  Judg.  13:  23,  14:  18,   1  Sam.  13:  13,  14;  30,   2  Kin.  13:  19;  or 


§  266  THE  PRIMAKY  TENSES.  305 

the  condition  may  be  suggested  by  tbe  context,  thus  (assuming  the  promise 

to  be  fultilled)  t^n"!n  there  uwnld  have  been  pleasure  to  me  Gen.  18:  12,  Vi^a  "^13 
not  merely  irho  ever  said  but  who  would  have  said  (in  any  supi)osable  case) 
Gen.  21:  7,  Zz'd  -i"33  almost  lay  i.  e.  might  easily  have  lain  Gen.  26  :  10. 

f.  Ewald,  Bottcher  and  others  have  maintained  that  the  preterite  in 
Hebrew  as  in  Arabic  is  occasionally  used  as  a  precative  i.  e.  in  the  sense 
of  a  praj-er  or  entreaty.  This  assumption,  however,  finds  no  support  from 
the  Arabic  analogy  in  the  passages  alleged,  and  is  moreover  needless  since 
the  proper  meaning  of  the  preterite  invariably  yields  a  good  sense.  Thus 
nrw^n  S"b  Isa.  48:  18  has  been  rendered  Oh,  hearl<en  and  nrnp-x^ib  63:  19 
Oh,  rend  the  heavens,  whereas  they  should  be  read  Oh  that  thou  hadst 
hearkened,  Oh  that  thou  hadst  rent  etc.;  '^iri'iwT  Gen.  40:  14  has  not  the 
sense  of  an  imperative  but  fut.  perf.  see  d;  the  counsel  of  wicked  men 
HJrnn  Job  21;  16,  22:  18  not  be  far,  but  has  been  and  is  far  from  me, 
nrn-n  Ps.  4:  2,  Pnr.S  II6:  16  and  the  preterites  in  Lam.  3:  56-61  are  not 
petitions  but  reminiscences  of  former  benefits,  while  "^ir'^is  Ps.  22:  22  ex- 
presses a  confident  assurance  of  present  favour,  see  under  b. 

g.  It  is  not  necessary  to  substitute  the  conjectural  reading  Grx"i'^  (inf. 
and  suf.)  for  -nX'J'^  Josh.  4:  24;  for,  though  this  is  the  only  instance  in 
which  a  preterite  follows  1^"2^,  the  language  is  retrospective  to  be  used 
subsequently  by  fathers  to  their  sons,  and  the  combination  of  n'ii^b  with  a 
preterite  has  analogies  in  Ps  10:  11,  37:  28.  The  preterite  also  occurs  as 
a  subjunctive  after  other  panicles  such  as  'iQ  e.  g.  N".i":"",3  lest  he  may  have 
found  2  Sam.  20:  6,  ixcn?  2  Kin.  2:  16. 

2.  The  preterite  (perfect)  is  further  used  of  the  pre- 
sent, regarded  as  the  continuation  or  natural  sequence 
of  a  pre-existing  action  or  condition.  Anything  begun 
in  the  past  and  continued  in  the  present  may  be  con- 
sidered to  belong  to  the  past  and  accordingly  spoken  of 
in  the  preterite,  give  me  a  little  water  for  ''T\'2:i  lam  thirsty 
Judg.  4:  19  prop.  I  have  been  thirsty  and  (it  is  implied) 
I  am  so  still;  the  earth  Hlkb'^S  is  full  of  violence  prop,  has 
been  and  still  is  fidl  Gen.  6:13;  noiv  'ri<^^  /  know  that 
Jehovah  is  the  greatest  of  all  the  gods  Ex.  18:  11,  prop. 
I  have  knoicn,  the  knowledge  being  in  fact  contempora- 
neous with  the  information  upon  which  it  was  based. 
Comp.  in  Latin  novi,  memini,  odi. 

a.  The  preterite  is  accordingly  used  in  a  present  sense  of  acts  begun 
in  the  past  and  continued  in  the  present,  N^p  they  call  (have  called  and 
still  call)  Gen,  19:  22,  Jerusalem  n^"::2  totters  and  Judah  hz'.  falls  Isa.  3:  8, 
^T^jn  they  have  declared  and  still  declare  ver.  9,  iB'r^  they  have  ruled  and 

20 


306  SYNTAX.  §  266 

still  ride  ver.  12,  ^-iri5  tJiey  have  been  and  are  recTxoned  5:  28,  Ps.  38:  9. 
102:  8-10.  This  is  particularly  the  case  with  acts  begun  in  the  immediate 
past,  thus  Jehovah  ^2^  speaks,  Isa.  1 :  2  with  reference  to  the  utterance  just 
begun  and  still  proceeding;  "i^X  nb  thus  saith  Jehovah  Isa.  7:  7  and  re- 
peatedly, but  in  Gen.  3:  1  God  hath  said  at  some  former  time.  Jehovah 
saith  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  future  "liji"'  Isa.  1:  11,  40:  1  when  in 
the  action  now  going  forward  respect  is  had  to  its  continuance  in  the  fu- 
ture rather  than  to  its  beginning  in  the  past.  So  with  tlili,  lo  this  sis 
toucheth  (lit.  hath  touched)  thy  lips  Isa.  6:7;  and  nn?  noiv  mine  eye  ?jrix"l 
seeth  (ht.  hath  seen)  thee  Job  42:  5,  2  Chron.  2:  12;  T'^"i!i  I  lift  my  hand 
to  Jehovah  Gen.  14:  22  in  the  act  of  swearing  what  then  follows;  'i:3'n3  we 
bless  you  Ps.  129:  8,  "'Pi::-^;  I  counsel  2  Sam.  17:  11  (Ex.  18:  19  has  the  fut. 
in  a  like  connection),  "'ri'isn  7  hereby  announce  Deut.  26:  3,  30:  18,  "rrr'JTi 
I  call  to  tvitness  Deut.  4:  26;  ■^Jnir-'hrs  I  swear  Gen.  22:  16;  T^'O  reigneth 
1  Kin.  1:  13;   Job  33:  2,  3. 

h.  This  use  of  the  preterite  is  especially  frequent  with  neuter  verbs, 
which  describe  a  state  or  condition  and  which  Bottcher  for  this  reason 
proposes  to  call  stative  vei'bs,  when  the  connection  implies  that  the  con- 
dition still  continues.  These  are  such  as  (1)  express  some  quality  of  being, 
thus  n^rt  is  (prop,  has  become)  Gen.  3:  22,  Judg.  11:  35,  I"')!  have  been  and 
are  Gen.  46:  32,  Ezek,  13:  4,  but  Gen.  1:2,  6:4  was,  were,  and  the  fut.  ni;ir!5< 
am  Ruth  2:  13;  fi^'n  is  like  Ps.  102:  7,  Ezek.  31:  2,  18  but  ver.  8  teas  like; 
'bh'n  ceases  Job  3:  17;  bii^  is  able,  can  Ps.  36:  13,  40:  13,  more  commonly 
in  the  future  as  contemplating  an  action  yet  to  be  performed  Gen.  31:  35, 
Deut.  1:  9,  31:  2;  b;i?3  it  is  a  light  thing  2  Kin.  20:  10,  Isa.  49:  6;  ?ii"i  are 
many  Ps.  3:  2.  (2)  Denote  a  phj-sical  condition,  b^^X  languishes  Isa.  19:  8, 
nhj  is  high  Isa.  55:  9,  bns  is  great  Gen.  19:  13,  "libj  is  old  (has  become  old) 
Gen.  18:  13,  Josh.  13:  1,  T|i"n  is  dark  (has  become  dark)  Isa.  5:  30,  ^ZZ2  are 
goodly  Num.  24:  5,  ^no  is  clean  Prov.  20:  9,  v'z"^  is  (has  become)  dry  Joel 
1  :  12,  20,  nfc^  is  fair  Cant.  7:  2,  123  has  been  and  is  grievous  Gen.  18:  20, 
ii^-o  is  full  Gen.  6:  13  (but  past  1  Sam.  18:  26,  fut.  perf.  1  Chron.  17:  11), 
pkv  is  deep  Ps.  92:  6,  "ir:^'  is  rich  Hos.  12:  9,  1T|D  has  soiled  clothing  as  a 
mourner  Jer.  8:  21,  'flp^  is  small  Gen.  32:  11,  W"i  Deut.  32:  27.  (3)  Mental 
states  or  affections,  including  even  those  of  an  active  nature  b^Js  mourns 
Joel  1:  9,  nnx  loves  Gen.  22:  2  (but  past  Deut.  4:  37,  fut.  as  present  Prov. 
3:  12),  d'ia  is  ashamed  Ezr.  9:  6  (but  past  Ezr.  8:  22,  fut.  as  present  Job 
19:  3),  rii:3  trtists  2  Kin.  18:  19  (but  past  ver.  5,  fut.  as  present  Jer.  17:  5,  7), 
■1=7  remembers  Num.  11:5  (but  past  Judg.  8:  34,  fut.  as  present  Jer.  31:  20), 
nsn  toaits  Ps.  33:  20,  n^n  desires  Prov.  1:  22,  ti^n  (anger)  burns  Gen.  4:  6, 
n-;n  confides  Ps.  7:  2,  yen  delights  in  Isa.  1:  11,  bn^  Hi.  hopes  Ps.  38:  16, 
rn^'  knoics  Gen.  4:  9,  12:  11  (but  past  Gen.  28:  16,  Hos.  8:  4,  fut.  as  pre- 
sent but  always  with  a  suggestion  more  or  less  distinct  of  futurity  or  pos- 
sibility Ex.  10:  26,  2  Sam.  3:  38,  1  Kin.  8:  39,  Job  8:9,  15:  9,  42:  3,  Isa. 
40:  21),  nxb3  is  tveary  Isa.  1:  14,  Dntd  loathes  Job  7:  16,  yl'J  exults  1  Sam. 
2:1,  pis  is  righteous  Job  34:  5,  sbb  has  enough  Isa.  1:  11,  rii:ia  rejoices 
1  Sam.  2:  1,  Stib  hates  Isa.  1:  14,  ')ixd  is  at  rest  Job  3:18. 

c.  In  speaking  of  what  is  already  resolved  upon,  though  not  yet  per« 


§  266 


THE  PRIMARY  TENSES.  307 


formed,  the  pretei'ite  is  sometimes  employed,  because  regard  is  had  to  the 
mental  act  or  purpose  rather  than  its  outward  execution ;  so  frequently  in 
promises,  contracts  etc.  unto  thy  seed  ^Pinj  I  do  noiv  give  (lit.  have  given) 
tliis  land  Gen.  15:  18,  the  grant  was  made,  though  they  had  not  j-et  been 
put  in  possession ;  accordingly  when  the  latter  idea  is  prominent,  the  future 
is  used  of  the  same  transaction,  unto  thy  seed  '(RX  /  xcill  give  this  land 
Gen.  12:  7,  26:  3.  Comp.  Gen.  23:  11,  13,  1  Kin.  3:  12,  13,  1  Chron.  21 :  23, 
2  Chron.  2:  9,  Jer.  31:  33;  RVa^a  thou  drivest  me  out  (lit.  hast  driven)  Gen. 
4:  14,  •'r^pn  I  establish  9:  17,  vxir;  I  accept  19:  21,  "^nr^d  I  put  forth 
Ex.  9:  15,  n^i'Q  selleth,  is  resolved  to  sell  Ruth  4:  3,  ''firij^b  Jam  determined 
to  take  it  1  Sam.  2:  16. 

d.  It  is  comparatively  a  matter  of  indifference  whether  the  preterite 
or  the  future  be  used  to  designate  the  present.  That  which  now  exists 
may  either  be  regarded  as  continued  from  the  past  or  as  perpetuated  in  the 
future;  and  as  it  is  contemplated  under  one  or  the  other  of  these  aspects, 
will  the  tense  be  determined  accordingly.  Thus,  the  question  lohence  come 
ye  is  in  Gen.  42:  7  Cnx3  'I'lXp  whence  have  ye  come,  hut  in  Josh.  9:  8  y^k'O 
vXhn  whence  are  ye  coming  or  tvill  ye  come;  because,  in  the  former  in- 
stance, the  past  action  of  coming  is  uppermost  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker, 
and  in  the  latter  this  action  is  regarded  as  having  not  yet  ceased.  Comp. 
Isa.  39:  8.  The  questions  ivhither  goest  thoxi?  Gen.  16:8,  ivhat  seekest  thou? 
Gen.  37:  15  are  expressed  in  the  future  T\?7\,  liJi^^Pi,  for  to  the  qiiestioner 
the  action  of  which  he  has  just  become  aware  extends  indefinitely  onward, 
comp.  Gen.  32:  18,  Judg.  19:  17,  Isa.  40:  27.  To  the  person  addressed, 
however,  the  action  is  a  continuous  one,  both  preceding  and  following  the 
question;  accordingly  it  is  the  participle,  which  is  used  in  the  reply,  I  oni 
fleeing  r.n^in,  I  am  seeking  uii?^^,  comp.  Judg.  19:  18.  JVJiy  doest  thou  so? 
is  Ex.  5:  15  expressed  in  the  future  rtii;"?!,  because  it  was  feared  that  this 
new  course  of  treatment  would  continue,  so  1  Sam.  2:  23;  but  2  Sam.  16:  10 
in  the  preterite  nr^'Li-J  because  regard  is  had  to  what  was  already  done. 
Hazael  asks,  tchy  iveex>est  thou?  using  the  part.  ii23  2  Kin.  8:  12,  since  he 
is  curious  as  to  the  cause  of  the  spectacle;  Elkanah  Avho  is  concerned 
about  its  continuance  uses  the  fut.  "^i^iri  1  Sam.  1 :  8,  comp.  11:5.  Dr.  Driver 
(Use  of  the  Tenses  in  Hebrew,  2nd  Edit.  p.  52)  thinks  that  the  future  as 
more  indefinite  was  often  preferred  in  questions  on  the  score  of  courtesy  to 
the  categorical  preterite  Whence  may  you  he  coming?  rather  than  ^^llence 
have  you  come? 

3.  The  preterite  (perfect)  is  likewise  used  in  the  state- 
ment of  permanent  facts  or  general  truths;  these,  though 
true  for  all  time,  are  gathered  from  experience  and  ob- 
servation, and  hence  may  be  appropriately  referred  to 
the  past,  an  ox  5T  knotveth  his  oivner  Isa.  1 :  3,  oxen  al- 
"waj^s  have  done  so  and  it  is  impUed  that  they  always 
will;  Jeliovah  trr\  pitiefh  them  that  fear  him  Ps.  103:  13. 

20* 


308  SYNTAX.  §  267 

a.  The  future  is  used  in  this  case  with  the  same  frequency  and  pro« 
priety  as  the  preterite.  An  ox  tvill  know  his  owner  expresses  the  same 
general  truth  as  an  ox  has  known  his  owner;  only  in  the  former  case  at- 
tention is  chiefly  drawn  to  its  future,  and  in  the  latter  to  its  past  realiza- 
tions, i;  267.  3.  As  illustrations  of  the  gnomic  preterite,  as  it  has  been  appro- 
priately called  when  so  used,  see  1  Sam.  2:  3-5,  Ps.  10:  11,  14;  1,  3,  33:  13, 
14,34:  11,  69:34,  103:11,  13,  Prov.  6:8  (fut.  in  parallel  clause),  13:  1,8,  14:  6, 
19,  21:22,  22:  12,  26:  13,  15,  27:  12,  28:1  (fut.  in  parallel  clause),  29:9,  13. 

4.  The  preterite  (perfect)  may  also  be  used  of  the 
future,  when  viewed  as  past;  that  which  is  imminent  and 
certain  is  sometimes  spoken  of  as  though  it  had  ah'eady 
taken  place,  being  the  sure  result  of  existing  causes  and 
as  irreversible  as  that  which  has  actually  occurred  "'t^^i^'lD 
I  am  destroyed  meaning  my  ruin  is  accomplished,  I  shall 
certainly  perish  Isa.  6:5;  and  particularly  the  prophets, 
in  their  inspired  descriptions  of  events  which  had  not 
yet  come  to  pass,  often  transport  themselves  to  the  time 
when  they  shall  have  been  accomplished:  and,  surveying 
the  future  from  this  ideal  point  of  view,  they  give  to 
their  predictions  the  form  of  a  recital  of  what  has  al- 
ready taken  place,  Babylon  n^s;  has  fallen  Isa.  21:  9,  he 
i^bz  hath  borne  our  griefs  Isa.  53;  4,  for  I  ^rsibn  have 
made  Esau  bare  Jer.  49:  10. 

a.  The  counterpart  of  this  preterite  of  certainty  or  prophetic  preterite 
18  the  use  of  the  future  in  vivid  descriptions  of  the  past,  in  Avhich  the 
writer  appears,  in  imagination,  to  live  over  again  what  has  already  taken 
place,  §  267.  5.  The  preterite  is  thus  used  of  the  certain  and  inevitable 
future  in  Gen.  30:  13,  Judg.  4:  14,  r|"!Q  Job  5:  20  (which  is  preceded  and 
followed  by  futures),  11:  20,  18:  6,  Ps.'lO:  16,  20:  7,  110:  5,  6.  So  by  the 
prophets  Isa.  2:11,  5:  13,  9:  1-5,  19:  7,  28:  2,  32:  14,  53:  4-10,  Ezek.  31: 
15-18,  Uos.  10:  15,  Joel  4:  15,  Mic.  1:  16,  2:  13. 

The  Future  (Imperfect). 

§  267.  1.  The  future  or  imperfect  is  used  in  speaking 
of  the  future,  whether  absolutely,  '?j"1^:^^^  I  tvill  make  of 
thee  a  great  nation  Gren.  12:  2,  or  relatively  to  something 
in  the  past,  he  took  his  eldest  son  who  '^^12'',  was  to  have 
reigned  2  Kin.  3:  27,  EUsha  was  fallen  sick  of  his  sickness 


§  267  THE  PRIMARY  TENSES.  309 

whereof  T\^b'^  he  ivas  to  die  2  Kin.  13:  14;  or  conditionally, 
(would  that  I  had  died)  for  i:ip"i"5<  /  ivould  he  at  rest  Job 
3:  13;  hut  (if  it  were  my  case)  ^n"]S  /  ivould  seek  tinto 
God  Job  5 :  8 ;  or  optatively  in  the  various  grades  of  de- 
sire, determination,  permission,  or  command,  so  ^1Z!J<"' 
may  all  thine  eneinies  perish  Judg.  5:  31;  0  that  my  grief 
bj;;'©'^  migld  he  iveighed  Job  6:  2;  all  that  thou  commandest 
us  nu;?j  we  tvill  do  Josh.  1:  16;  deeds  that  '^'LT  ought  not 
to  he  done  Gen.  20:  9;  of  the  fruit  of  the  trees  of  the  gar- 
den  bbi^b  ive  may  eat  Gen.  3:  2,  ^b^i^h  5<b  ye  shall  not  eat 
ver.  3,  mine  ordinances  ^"iT^Tri  ye  shall  keep  Lev.  18:  4; 
or  as  expressing  what  is  possible  or  necessary  and  con- 
sequently limits  or  determines  what  shall  actually  take 
place,  "liall  he  can  speak  (prop,  he  will  do  so,  if  he  w^ishes, 
there  is  nothing  to  hinder  him)  Ex.  4:  14,  nVJD  ive  must 
die  (prop,  we  shall,  it  is  inevitable)  2  Sam.  14:  14;  or 
subjunctively,  especially  after  conjunctions  signifying 
that,  in  order  that,  lest,  etc.,  (bring  the  venison)  "^P"^?]  "("^b 
in  order  that  my  soul  may  hless  thee  Gen.  27:  25,  against 
thee  I  sinned  that  \M'2;T\  thou  mightest  he  justified  Ps.  51:  6. 

a.  The  future  may  be  used  of  an  action  or  state  belonging  to  some 
specified  time  in  the  futui'e  Gen.  18:  14,  Ex.  9:  5,  Josh.  3:  5,  Ps.  2:  5,  Isa. 
1:  15,  2:  20,  3:  18,  7:  8,  18,  20,  22:  13;  or  at  some  particular  time  not  spe- 
cified Gen.  2:  18,  6:  17,  Ex.  6:  1,  Isa.  2 :  3,  6:  8,  7:  17 ;  or  to  any  time  in- 
definitely Gen.  4:  7,  9:  5,  Ex.  13:  14,  22:  1,  Lev.  1:  2,  Deut.  18:  18,  31:  29, 
Ps.  23:  1,  4;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times  Gen.  3:  14,  16,  18,  Ps.  1:  2, 
3,  4:  9,  5:  4,  23:  2-6,  Isa.  7:  15;  or  a  continuous  action  or  state  Gen.  1:  29, 
5:  29,  8:  22,  1  Kin.  1:  13,  Isa.  1:  29,  30,  3:  4.  These  various  applications 
are  not  different  senses  denoted  by  the  tense,  but  grow  out  of  the  signifi- 
cation of  the  verb,  or  accompanying  words  or  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 

h.  Or  it  may  express  that  which  was  future  not  to  the  time  of  speaking 
but  to  something  in  the  past,  D;^7  icas  to  be  avenged  Gen.  4:  24,  as  had 
been  promised  ver.  15,  MJ'^spn  subsequently  stood  around  Gen.  37 :  7,  "n^X"! 
was  going  to  say  Gen.  43:  7,  lisx^i  were  to  eat  ver.  25,  T\'^hl  was  about  to 
place  48:  17,  n"i^  ivould  tell  1  Sam.  22:  22,  xid^  was  then  coming  or  sub- 
sequently came  2  Sam.  15:  37,  1  Kin.  7:  7,  8,  Neh.  3:  14,  15  (cump.  ver.  13), 
Esth.  4:  3,  Ps.  73:  17,  Prov.  24:  32  (the  reflection  was  subsequent  to  flie 
sight),  Eccles.  4:  15.  Or  it  may  denote  an  act  which  was  in  the  course  of 
accomplishment  contemporaneously  with  something  in  the  past,  yiz'^S']  i<b 


310  SYNTAX.  §  267 

tvas  not  heard  1  Sam.  1:  13,  tvhere  "^.inn'P"!  ^*  *^^s  ivorsliipping  or  was  on 
the  point  of  worshipping  or  indefinitely  and  in  a  habitual  sense,  §  267.  4, 
where  men  used  to  worship  2  Sam.  15:  32,  ^ii-"n?1  they  ivere  loatching  for  an 
cinen  1  Kin.  20:  33,  n'tj-;  was  repairing  1  Chron.  11:  8,  Job  32:  11,  12  ("pix 
and  "P'isnx  denote  his  attitude  of  body  and  mind  while  waiting),  Isa.  42:  14, 
he  fell  into  the  pit  tvhich  b^'S")  he  tvas  making  Ps,  7:  16,  nx'ix  tvhen  I  saio 
73:  3,  nc?";  he  ivas  covering  (as  seen  in  vision)  Isa.  6:  2,  the  house  N^^'^ 
icas  filling  with  smoke  ver.  4,  1"i3.'p'^  whilst  they  ivere  rushing  on  as  a  tem- 
pest Hab.  3:  14.  The  participle  might  have  been  used  in  these  and  similar 
passages  with  equal  propriety  and  with  only  this  slight  shade  of  difference 
in  conception  that  the  participle  is  suggestive  of  continuity,  a  present 
existence  with  the  implication  of  both  past  and  future,  whereas  in  the 
future  tense  all  priority  to  the  time  specifically  referred  to  is  lost  from 
sight  and  the  attention  is  directed  solely  to  that  point  of  time  and  an  in- 
definite extension  onward.  Hence  the  futures  above  cited  from  Isa.  6:  2,  4, 
where  the  prophet  is  describing  a  vision  just  as  it  had  burst  upon  his  sight, 
and  which  consequently  had  no  past. 

e.  It  has  been  already  remarked  §  266.  1.  d,  that  the  future  tense  is 
sometimes  used  of  an  event  prior  to  another  event  in  the  future,  where  the 
preterite  might  have  been  employed  instead  in  the  sense  of  the  future  per- 
fect; so   W^^  Gen.  11:  6,   N^';;   15:  4,  ^ECXI  29:  8,   nk"]"!   Deut.  4:  42,   ^^'^r}'^_ 

1  Kin.  8:  33,  35,  Dii--n';n;;;  Isa.  7:  23,  d'^ij';  42:  4,  D"'qn  53:  10,  In  such  cases 
the  preterite  explicitly  expresses  the  pi'iority  of  the  one  event  to  the  other, 
though  a  doubt  might  sometimes  arise  whether  it  was  used  absolutely  of 
what  Avas  past  at  the  time  of  speaking  or  relatively  of  what  preceded  the 
other  verb.  The  future  simply  refers  both  events  alike  to  the  time  to  come, 
leaving  the  question  of  the  relative  priority  of  either  out  of  the  account. 

d.  The  future  may  have  a  conditional  sense  where  doubt  or  contingency 
is  expressed  or  imj^lied,  l^'buw'^  ^ib  if  Joseph  should  hate  us!  Gen.  50:  15,  if 
psx  I  should  ascend  Ps.  139:  8;   so  after  n^,  Vrp"]  tl^^  rvhy  should  he  curse 

2  Sam.  16:  9,  ivhat  is  man  that  ^J'lS'fn  thou  shouldest  remember  him  Ps.  8:  5, 
Job  21:  15,  or  5^^p,  why  ^"'00^  should  my  father  hide  1  Sam.  20:  2,  Judg. 
9:  28;  in  the  apodosis  after  conditional  particles  ^DlS  Num.  22:  18,  24:  13, 
Buth  1:  13,  Job  9:  16,  20,  16:  4,  5,  Ps.  44:  22,  50:  12,  66:  18,  Jer.  22:  24, 
Am.  9:  2-4,  or  where  the  condition  is  suppressed  Job  3:  16,  6:  27,  14:  14,  15, 
32:  22. 

c.  Simple  futurity,  as  denoted  by  the  future  tense,  is  liable  to  various 
subjective  modifications  from  the  feelings  of  the  speaker  or  actor.  Thess 
are  more  distinctly  expressed  by  the  modal  forms  viz.  the  paragogic  and 
apocopated  futures  and  imperative,  but  they  are  likewise  to  a  certain  ex- 
tent represented  by  the  ordinary  form  of  the  future.  When  the  action  re- 
ferred to  is  dependent  on  the  will  of  the  speaker,  this  naturally  affects  the 
sense  of  the  words,  and  the  future,  while  not  so  emphatic  a  declaration  of 
purpose  as  its  paragogic  form  would  be,  would  nevertheless  be  rendered  in 
English  by  will,  rather  than  shall,  n3:x  I  will  inform  thee  Kuth  4:  4,  J'tx 
I  will  not  know  Job  9:  21,  Ps.  101:  4,  D^px  I  will  arise  Isa.  33:  10.    Or  the 


§267 


THE  PEIMAET  TENSES.  311 


futnre  may  express  the  wishes  and  hopes  of  the  speaker  nit  her  than  the 
objective  certainty  of  the  event,  X^^X  I  shall  find  (I  hope)  i.  e.  may  I  find 
Gen.  34:  11,  'y^'^'^'P.I  lei  them  hum  1  Sam.  2:  16,  nrr;i_  20:  13,  Jer.  28:  6, 
ISa"^  (joined  with  imperatives)  1  Kin.  21 :  7,  "Ti;^  shall  it  return,  equivalent 
to  do  you  tvish  it  to  return  2  Kin.  20:  9,  "iPi-;  1  Chron.  22:  12,  Isa.  5:  19 
(joined  with  paragog.  fut.),  so  after  ^b  0  if  n^n^  he  might  live  Gen.  17:  18, 
Deut.  32 :  29,  Job  6 :  2.  When  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb  is  to  be  per- 
formed by  the  party  addressed,  a  declaration  of  what  he  shall  do  or  shall 
not  do  readily  becomes  a  command  Gen.  6:  14-16,  7:  2,  17:  9,  24:  4,  Ex. 
21:  15,  Prov.  22:  17  (joined  with  imperatives),  Isa.  8:  13,  38:  21  or  a  pro- 
hibition Gen.  2:  17,  3:  1,  3,  17,  9:4,  17:  15,  Ex.  20:  4,  5,  7,  Deut.  22:  4,  5 
Isa.  1:  13,  8:  12.  Or  if  it  be  less  urgently  expressed  and  regard  be  had  to 
the  pleasure  of  the  actor,  it  will  be  permissive,  bzxn  thou  niayest  eat  Gen. 
2:  16,  14:  24,  42:  37,  i^p"!  Ex.  12:  48,  Lev.  21:  22,  22:  23,  Deut.  12:  20,  22, 
T\^'2  20:  5,  or  with  reference  to  a  past  transaction  ^^"2  xb  might  not  go  up 
i.  e.  were  not  allowed  to  do  so  2  Kin.  23:  9,  Ps.  24:  3.  Or  regard  may  be 
had  to  duty  or  propriety,  when  shall  becomes  equivalent  to  should  or  ought, 
therefore  a  man  "yrJi  shall  leave  Gen.  2:  24,  9:  6,  nir";  ixb  it  ought  not  to 
he  done  34:  7,  Lev.  4:  2,  Num.  23:  8,  T^ax  Judg.  14:  16,  1  Sam.  20:  5,  r^i-a; 
should  Ahner  die  2  Sam.  3:  33,  13:  12,  1  Kin.  22:  6,  dn"!'^  Isa.  8:  19,  n]-;; 
Ezek.  16:  16,  Mic.  6:6.  Or  to  possibility,  when  shall  or  shall  not  means 
can  or  cannot,  niri  shall  he  numbered,  will  be  capable  of  being  numbered 
Gen.  13:  16,  2JnD  could  we  know  43:  7,  Num.  23:  13,  "ipxn  thou  canst  he 
hound  Judg.  16:  6,  13,  1  Sam.  13:  19,  >ltiC!i<:i  2  Sam.  14:  14,  1  Kin.  7:  15,  26, 
8:  5,  27,  18:  10,  Ps.  91:  7,  119:  9,  137:  4,  Prov.  20:  9,  Eccles.  11:  2,  Isa. 
49:  15,  Jer.  24:  2,  8,  29:  17,  Lam.  3:  7,  Ezek.  47:  5.  Or  to  inevitable  ne- 
cessity, vhen  shall  means  must,  Svl'n  thou  shalt  return  Gen.  3:  19,  "nn  thoii 
mud  give  1  Sam.  2:  16,  a"^i"2<  I  had  to  restore  Ps.  69:  5,  X"'!;^  had  to  bring 
Cant.  8:  11. 

f.  The  future  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  the  subjunctive  present  or 
imperfect  (according  as  it  is  referred  by  its  connection  to  the  future  or  the 
past)  after  such  conjunctions  as  'vhh,  subj.  pres.  in  order  that  ^'^"^1  it  may 
be  well  Gen.  12:  13,  18:  19,  Ex.  4:  5,  Num.  17:  6,  Deut.  4:  1,  Josh.  3:  4, 
1  Kin.  2:  3,  4,  Isa.  5:  19,  Ezek.  14:  11,  36:  30,  Zech.  12:  7;  imperf.  in  order 
that  !id'"iri  ye  might  know  Deut.  29:  5,  Neh.  6:  13,  Ps.  78:  6,  Ezek.  20:  26. 
After  "^^ir;2,  pres.  in  order  that  <iinn  it  may  be  Gen.  21 :  30,  27:  4,  Ex.  9:  14; 
imperf.  Ps.  105:45.  After  ',Q,  pres.  Gen.  3:  22,  Ex.  5:  3,  34:  15,  Lev.  10:  7, 
Ps.  2:  12,  38:  17;  imperf.  Gen.  31:  31.  After  1?  imperf.  Josh.  10:  13,  Jon. 
4:  5.  After  "'S  pres.  Gen.  38:  16,  imperf.  1  Sam.  22:  22,  Job  36:  10.  After 
Til^X  as  a  conjunction  pres.  Gen.  11:7,  Deut.  4:  40,  imperf.  Esth.  2:  10;  or 
as  a  relative  used  in  an  indefinite  sense  Judg.  17:  8;  or  after  "iil"X3  as  if 
*^  •'^^n'r  ^(-'ere  Ezek.  1:  16.  So  in  clauses  preceded  by  the  simple  copulative 
Vav,  where  the  connection  of  thought  suggests  the  idea  of  the  design  or 
result,  pres.  what  shall  we  do  to  thee  pwr"";  that  the  sea  may  he  quiet  (lit. 
and  the  sea  will  be  quiet)  Jon.  1:  11,  Ex.  28:  3^,  43,  Deut.  17:  17,  Neh.  6:  9, 
Jer.  10:  4;  imperf.  I  took  a  bribe  C^'is'Xl  that  I  might  hide  my  eyes  (lit. 
and  I  shall  hide)  1  Sam.  12:  3,  2  Chron.  23:  19,  I  called  him  flnb-tZNi,  that 


312  SYNTAX.  §  267 

I  might  bless  him  (or  and  I  subsequently  blessed  him,  see  note  b  above) 
Isa.  51:  2,  53:  2,  Lam.  1:  19,  Dan.  1:5;  also  vhere  the  imperf.  subjunctive 
would  be  used  in  English  to  indicate  not  past  time  but  contingency,  Qod 
is  not  man  aT3'i|i  that  he  should  lie  (lit.  and  he  loill  perhaps  lie)  Num.  23: 19, 
1  Kin,  12:  9.  Also  in  a  like  connection  with  no  preceding  conjunction,  pres. 
it  shall  have  a  margin  etc.  ^'^i^';  xb  that  it  be  not  rent  Ex.  28:  32,  Ps.  10:  18, 
Isa.  41:  7;  imperf.  Neh.  13:  19,  Job  9:  32. 

g.  When  employed  in  requests,  the  future  is  frequently  accompanied 
by  the  particle  N3,  thus,  5<; — i2'ii^  let  thy  servant  speak,  I  prny  thee  Gen. 
44:  18,  Ki""ia3i";  let  the  wickedness  of  the  ivicked  cease,  I  pray  Ps.  7:  10. 

h.  The  future  is  idiomatically  used  with  C'^'b  and  D"ii:3  not  yet,  before, 
whether  the  period  referred  to  is  past,  present  or  future  the  time  denoted 
by  the  particle  being  antecedent  to  the  action  of  the  verb.  Thus,  referring 
to  the  past,  I  ate  of  all  xiin  D"il:3  before  thou  earnest  Gen.  27 :  33,  the  lamp 
of  God  fi'^^l  ^yji  had  not  yet  gone  out  1  Sam.  3:  4;  to  the  present  B'^ii^n 
ynpi  dost  thou  not  yet  know  Ex.  10:  7;  to  the  future,  that  my  soul  may  bless 
thee  W^ax  fi'n-ja  before  I  die  Gen.  27:  4,  'ilX^p"]  nyj>  before  they  call,  I  icill 
anstver  Isa.  65 :  24.  There  are  four  examples  of  the  use  of  the  preterite 
with  these  particles,  the  i-eference  being  to  past  time,  Gen.  24:  15,  1  Sam. 
3:  7,  Ps.  90:  2,  Prov.  8:  25;  in  the  last  two  passages  the  verb  is  removed 
from  the  influence  of  the  particle  by  the  interposition  of  the  subject.  In 
every  other  instance  the  verb  follows  this  particle  immediately,  except  Isa. 
28:  4  where  there  is  an  ellipsis  of  the  verb,  and  Zeph.  2:  2  where  xb  ia 
added  to  strengthen  the  particle.  The  infinitive  is  once  used  with  Dfr!^ 
Zeph.  2:  2  and  once  with  D"ii?^  Hag.  2:  15. 

2.  The  future  (imperfect)  may  be  used  of  the  present, 
when  it  is  conceived  of  as  extending  into  the  future,  com- 
fort my  ijeople  ^iz'^'^  saith  your  God  Isa.  40:  1,  the  divine 
utterance  though  begun  is  not  yet  finished;  ^3?"?;^  5<3ri  do 
ye  not  knoiv?  ver.  21,  are  you  ignorant,  and  is  this  igno- 
rance to  continue?  ivliy  ''Slir  weejjest  thou?  1  Sam.  1:  8. 

a.  The  future  is  chiefly  used  to  represent  the  present  when  the  action 
referred  to  has  just  begun,  or  has  just  come  to  the  notice  of  the  speaker 
and  consequently  has  no  past;  or  when  for  any  reason  his  attention  is 
particularly  directed  to  it  as  then  going  forward  and  likely  to  continue, 
rather  than  to  any  previous  occurrence  of  it,  Gen.  44:  7,  Num.  11,  13, 
1  Sam.  17:8,  ^IX";-?!  you  see  (now,  if  never  before)  . . .  rvhy  'iH^'z'r\  do  you  per- 
sist in  bringing  1  Sam.  21:  15,  2  Sam.  3:  8,  1  Chron.  21:  3,  Job  3:  20,  32:  19, 
Ps.  3:  5,  7,  7:  14,  15,  59:  5,  8,  88:  15,  Isa.  3:  15. 

3.  The  future  (imperfect)  is  used  in  the  statement  of 
general  truths  or  permanent  facts,  when  the  attention  is 
directed  to  their  vahdity  for  all  tune  to  come,  righteous' 


§  2G7  THE  PRI3IARY  TENSES.  313 

ness  D'^iTi  exalteth  a  nation  Prov.  14:  34,  it  does  so  no-w- 
and always  will;  a  son  135"  honoiiretli  his  father  Mai.  1:  6. 

a.  See  Dent.  32:  11,  1  Sara.  2:  8,  16:  7,  Job  4:  17-20,  6:5,  32:  9,  Ps.  1:4, 
42:  2,  104:  15,  Prov.  10:  1  ff.,  26:  U,  20,  Eccles.  7:  7,  8: 1,  10:  8,  Ezek.  18:  2 
(comp.  Jer.  31:  29),  Hos.  4:  11,  Mai.  1:  6. 

4.  The  future  (imperfect)  is  likewise  used  of  that 
which  is  customary  or  often  repeated.  That  which  will 
occur  may  be  regarded  as  liable  to  occur  and  hence  as 
occurring  frequently.  A  single  event  in  the  past  is  na- 
turally described  in  the  preterite;  but  if  the  speaker  con- 
templates a  series  of  events,  stretching  indefinitely  for- 
ward from  an  initial  point  at  which  in  imagination  he 
places  himself,  he  employs  the  future ;  a  mist  rbT  used 
to  go  u])  from  the  earth  Gen.  2:6,  i.  e.  not  only  at  the 
moment  of  time  previously  referred  to  but  from  that  on- 
ward; thus  Job  n'i;?''.  did  contimially  Job  1:  5;  the  daugh- 
ters of  Israel  Hj^lin  icere  in  the  habit  of  going  from  time  to 
to  time  Judg.  11:  40;  so  Gen.  29:  2,  Ex.  13:  22,  Num. 
11:  5,  9,  1  Sam.  2:  19. 

a.  In  this  remarkable  use  of  the  future  as  a  frequentative  past  it  cor- 
responds to  one  of  the  senses  of  the  Greek  and  Latin  imperfect,  a  circum- 
stance which  first  suggested  the  name  "imperfect"  for  this  tense,  though 
the  term  is  now  used  by  grammarians  in  a  much  wider  application.  For 
additional  examples,  see  Gen.  6:  4,  Ex.  40:  36  flf.,  Num.  9:  15-23,  10:  36, 
Deut,  11:  10,  Judg.  14:  10,  17:  6,  1  Sam.  1:  5,  7,  2:  22,  9:  9,  14:  47,  21:  12, 
2  Sam.  4:  2,  12:  3,  31,  13:  18,  1  Kin.  3:  4,  4:  7,  5:  25,  28,  6:  8,  10:  5,  28,  29, 
21:  6,  2  Kin,  3:  25,  4:  8,  12:  14,  13:  20,  1  Chron,  12:  22,  2  Chron.  24:  11, 
25:  14,  Esth.  2:  12,  13,  Job  5:  14,  22:  6,  7,  29:  2,  3,  Ps.  78:  40,  95:  10,  Isa. 
1:  21,  Jer.  36:  8,  Am.  4:  7. 

6.  The  future  is  similarly  used  of  customary  action  in  the  present, 
Gen.  6:  21,  10:  9,  29:  26,  44:  5,  Ex.  33:  11,  Num.  11:  12,  Deut.  1:  31,  44, 
3:  9,  28:  29,  32:  11,  1  Sam.  5:  5,  2  Kin.  21:  13,  Job  33:  29,  Ps.  3:  6,  6:  7, 
104:  26,  Eccles.  10:  16,  Isa.  1:  23,  2:  6,  8,  3:  16,  5:  8,  7:  25,  31:  4,  55:  10, 
Jer.  9:  3,  13:  11,  12,  Hos.  4:  12,  13.  That  it  may  be  used  of  that  which 
will  be  often  repeated  in  the  future  was  stated  under  1.  a. 

5.  The  future  (imperfect)  may  be  used  of  the  past, 
when  the  speaker  or  writer  assumes  an  ideal  point  of 
vision  prior  to  its  occurrence,  and  so  regards  it  as  future. 


3U  SYNTAX.  §268 

Thus,  a  liistorian  in  animated  description,  as  we  miglit 
use  the  present,  mID'^'i-tt^  TiJ  then  sings  Moses  Ex.  15:  1 ; 
or  a  poet,  who  lives  in  the  midst  of  that  of  which  he 
sings,  Balak  ""^nr  brings  me  from  Aram  Num.  23:  7,  in^^"' 
i:a  "b-iS!  Di"*  let  the  day  2^erish  on  which  I  am  to  be  born 
Job  3:  3,  where  the  speaker,  by  a  bold  figure,  places 
himself  before  his  birth,  and  prays  that  the  day  which 
was  to  give  him  existence  might  be  annihilated,  so  that 
he  might  be  saved  from  the  misery  of  living;  ifb  Piisb 
riT!:i<  Dnnt?  tuhy  may  I  not  die  from  the  womb?  ver.  11, 
where  his  position  is  shifted  to  the  time  immediately 
after  his  birth;  ti^'db  TD^l  TIT  he  makes  known  his  ways 
unto  Moses  Ps.  103:  7. 

a.  This  use  of  the  future  to  represent  the  past  vividly  conceived  as 
though  it  were  passing  now  or  were  just  on  the  jjoint  of  occurring  belongs 
chiefly  to  poetry  and  to  the  elevated  style  Deut.  32:  10,  12,  Judg.  5:  8, 
Job  4:  12,  15,  16,  10:  10,  11,  I'iw  15:  7,  38:  21,  Ps.  18:  7,  78:  15,  29,  45, 
80:  9,  106:  18,  19,  126:  2,  Isa.  51:  2,  63:  3,  Hos.  8:  12,  13;  when  occurring 
in  continuous  passages  it  is  \Qvy  commonly  joined  with  or  passes  into  pre- 
terites in  the  proper  sense  Ps.  44:  3,  10-16. 

h.  In  ordinary  prose  it  occurs  repeatedly  after  tX  then,  Num.  21:  17, 
Deut.  4:  41,  Josh.  8:  30,  10:  12,  22:  1,  1  Kin.  3:  16,  9:  11,  11:  7,  16:  21, 
2  Kin.  12:  18,  15:  16,  16:  5,  2  Chron.  5:  2;  other  instances  are  rare  Ex. 
33:  7,  Judg.  2:  1. 

The  Preteeite  and  Futuee  in  Combination. 

§  268.  There  is  considerable  variety  in  the  employ- 
ment of  the  tenses,  when  both  are  combined  in  the  same 
passages  according  as  they  are  used  in  a  simple  objective 
manner  and  their  time  estimated  from  the  moment  of 
speaking,  or  are  used  subjectively  and  estimated  from 
some  other  point  of  time  to  which  the  speaker  is  in 
thought  transported,  and  which  is  either  suggested  by  the 
context  or  readily  inferred  from  the  nature  of  the  case. 

a.  Judged  by  an  occidental  standard  the  employment  of  the  Hebrew 
tenses  seerms  bewildering  and  capricious  in  the  extreme;  but  it  is  in  fact 
governed  by  fixed  and  easily  intelligible  principles.    There  is  less  definiteness 


§2G9 


TUE  PRETERITE  AND  FUTURE  IN  COMBINATION.        3  I  5 


and  precision  in  the  notation  of  time  than  in  Indo-European  tongues,  which 
possess  a  much  greater  number  of  tenses,  each  having  its  own  specific  value. 
More  is  left  to  be  supplied  by  the  imagination  or  knowledge  of  the  heai-er 
or  reader.  But  there  is  for  the  most  part  no  indistinctness  in  the  impres- 
sion left  on  the  native  mind,  and  no  failure  to  convey  the  shade  of  thought 
intended.  A  certain  amount  of  ambiguity  in  some  instances,  mostly  occur- 
ring in  poetry,  arises  from  our  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  situation  of  the 
■writer:  but  this  can  be  reduced  by  the  general  usage  of  the  language  within 
clearly  defined  limits.  The  principal  difficulty  arises  when  the  attempt  is 
made  to  transfer  the  statement  to  another  language,  which  proceeds  upon 
a  diflerent  conception  and  introduces  into  the  relations  of  time  distinctions 
which  the  Hebrew  does  not  recognize.  The  Hebrew  tenses  are  never  em- 
ployed at  random  nor  treated  as  equivalents.  Their  proper  sense  is  never 
capriciously  disregarded.  There  is  alwaj-s  a  reason  why  one  tense  is  used 
rather  than  the  other,  which  the  original  hearers  must  have  felt,  and  which 
in  the  vast  majority  of  cases  there  is  little  difficulty  in  ascertaining  now. 
The  interpreter  is  not  at  liberty  to  confuse  the  distinction  between  the 
tenses  or  arbitrarily  to  substitute  one  for  the  other  or  to  impose  upon  them 
whatever  rendering  may  suit  his  fancy  in  place  of  their  own  genuine  signi- 
fication, thus  attributing  to  the  writer  what  the  interpreter  thinks  that  he 
should  have  said  instead  of  what  he  actually  did  saj'.  Thus  b"3"rip  Ps. 
11:3  means  not  tvhat  can  the  righteous  do,  but  what  has  he  done,  he  has 
thus  far  accomplished  nothing,  implying  indeed  but  not  directly  saying  that 
there  is  no  prospect  of  his  doing  any  better  in  the  future,  "^r^^^.i?  >T3  39:8 
not  what  can  I  hope  for,  but  ivhat  have  I  hoped  and  do  I  hope  for.  "^zm  "^^ 
60:  11  not  ^vho  shall  lead  me  but  tvho  has  led  me  as  an  already  accomplished 
fact  or  one  which  is  so  certain  that  it  is  spoken  of  as  though  it  were  ac- 
complished. "^ri^Tn!!  Judg.  9:  9,  11,  13  not  should  I  cease  but  have  I  been 
made  by  this  choice  of  me  as  king  to  cease.  All  the  days  that  tT^n  1  Sam. 
1 :  28  not  he  shall  live  but  he  has  been  i.  e,  from  his  birth  he  has  been  in 
the  intention  of  his  parents  surrendered  to  Jehovah,  hkn  "Btn  2  Kin.  20:  9 
not  shall  the  shadoiv  go  but  the  shadow  has  gone  ten  degrees;  shall  it  return 
ten  degrees?  (comp.  Isa.  38:  8).  The  king's  answer  ver.  10  does  not  justify 
an  impossible  rendering  of  the  question;  it  is  directed  to  the  alternative 
involved  though  not  expressed  "or  shall  it  go  forward?" 

§  269.  1.  When  the  preterite  and  the  future  stand  in 
contiguous  or  related  clauses,  both  may  be  used  abso- 
lutely to  denote  respectively  past  and  future  time,  ^"'^Jri 
ye  shall  pass  ...  DF"^?  ye  have  passed  Gen.  18:  5,  ^'-^pi"! 
shall  cover  them  in  all  time  to  come  ...  ^l"^|^  they  went 
doivn  Ex.  15:  5,  ^B""  have  ceased  (past)  ...  ^^;^i^  shall  rest 
(continuous  future)  Job  3:  x7,  Ps.  9:  8,  fliC";  he  founded 
it  (original  creation)  ...  Milij*^  he  shall  make  it  firm  (per- 


316  SYNTAX.  §  269 

manent  preservation)  Ps.  24: 2,  26: 4,  88: 14  (have  prayed 
and  will  continue  to  do  so),  Isa.  6:7,  26:  9,  Eccles.  5: 14, 
15,  6:  4. 

a.  Thus  in  the  parallelisms  of  poetry  greater  emphasis  and  compass 
are  often  given  to  the  statement  made  by  asserting  it  successively  of  both 
the  grand  divisions  of  time,  the  work  of  Jehovah  TJi'^'z'^  i^^  they  will  not 
consider  and  the  deed  of  his 'hands  ^ix'^  K^  they  have  not  regarded,  Isa.  5:  12, 
26:  9,  Ps.  1:  1,  2,  17:  9,  44:  9,  59:  4,  Prov.  1:  22,  14:  18  (inheriting  without 
effort  as  past,  the  result  of  prudent  conduct  as  future),  28:  1,  Ezek.  18:  6,  9, 
Joel  2:  3.  Much  of  the  force  and  beauty  of  such  passages  is  lost  if  the 
distinction  of  tenses  is  disregarded  or  both  are  merged  in  the  vague  and 
colorless  present.  In  this  combination  of  tenses  each  may  of  course  have 
the  various  shades  of  meaning  properly  belonging  to  it  §§  266,  267.  Thus 
the  preterite  in  the  sense  of  the  present  with  the  future  ^D"i3i  xbl  ^5?"]^  X^ 
they  do  not  know  and  will  not  understand  Isa.  44:  18,  Am.  5:  21;  or  the 
future  as  a  frequentative  or  as  a  vivid  past  with  the  preterite  Job  24:  2, 
28:  24,  25.  The  participle  in  the  sense  of  a  continuous  present  is  sometimes 
joined  with  the  preterite  and  future  Ps.  119:  2,  3,  Jer.  5:  6. 

2.  Or  one  of  these  tenses  may  be  used  relatively  to 
the  time  denoted  by  the  other,  at  which  the  speaker 
mentally  takes  his  stand,  and  looks  forward  or  backward 
from  this  ideal  position. 

a.  Following  a  future  the  preterite  may  denote  (1)  an  act  prior  not  to 
the  time  of  speaking  but  to  the  event  before  spoken  of,  if  a  thief  shall  he 
found  . ...  if  the  sun  nn'i]^  has  risen  (before  he  is  found)  Ex.  22:  1,  2,  Lev. 
5:  1,  Ps.  54:  9,  Prov.  21:  7,  Isa.  11:  9,  Lam.  3:  8  (his  ear  is  closed  against 
my  prayer  before  it  is  offered);  so  with  a  noun  indicating  time,  in  the 
harvest  i^^5X  she  has  gathered  her  food  Prov.  6 :  8.  (2)  Or  one  involved  in 
the  preceding  statement  his  spirit  shall  go  forth  . . ,  his  thoughts  ^i"!*  have 
consequently  perished  Ps,  146:  4,  so  after  a  participle  T]'!!'?  ???^  making  un- 
just gain  he  has  thereby  taken  leave  of  Jehovah  Ps.  10:  3,  Prov.  14:  31, 
17:  5.  (3)  Or  an  act  that  is  either  identical  or  contemporaneous  with  that 
expressed  by  the  future,  the  narrator  now  looking  back  upon  that  as  ac- 
complished which  he  before  regarded  as  future  expectation  "ihxn  shall  perish, 
yes,  hope  fTJ^x  has  perished  Prov.  1 1 :  7 ;  is  i^  good  that  p'btjr.  thou  shouldest 
oppress  etc.  and  that  ni'Sin  thou  hast  meanwhile  shined  uiwn  the  counsel 
of  the  wicked  Job  10:  3,  Ps.  37:  20,  Isa.  43:  17  iinias  ...  li^S";  44:  15,  T^^n 
. . .  D'i^-;  Ezek.  33:  15,  Joel  2:  6,  "ITIX  . . .  x'i";  Mic.  2^4,  Hab.  3:  3,  4,  12,  13. 
(4)  Or  a  later  stage  in  the  same  transaction,  an  interval  being  assumed, 
•,;ii-i-^^-;  they  are  bending  the  boiv,  and  now  liDiD  they  have  fitted  the  arrow 
Pa.'il:  2,  22:  22,  Job  20:  25,  Isa.  18:  5;  so  after  a  noun  clause  T^dn  Isa. 
5:  30.  (5)  Or  a  sequence  from  it  *lt<2ri  they  have  hidden  themselves  (in  con- 
sequence of  the  deeds  of  violence  before  described)  Job  24:  4;  "jni"  favouf 


§  2G9   THE  PRETERITE  AND  FUTURE  IN  COMBINATION.    317 

may  he  shown  to  the  wicked,  ^7^~'b'^  he  has  not  learned  righteousness  thereby 
Isa,  26:  10. 

b.  Following  a  preterite  or  any  reference  to  past  time  the  future  may 
denote  (1)  an  act  which  though  past  at  the  time  of  speaking  was  subsequent 
to  or  a  consequence  of  the  event  before  spoken  of,  the  Horites  formerly 
"ir^  dwelt  in  Seir,  and  the  children  of  Esau  Cnrni-i  subsequently  dis- 
possessed them  Deut,  2:  12;  they  tvere  both  naked  Vr'Jari"  jibl  and  were  not 
ashamed  in  consequence  Gen.  2:  25;  so  Ex.  8:  20,  13:  22,  'ti'r^-',  I  Sam. 
2 :  25,  3:2  (so  that  he  could  not  see),  13:  17,  18,  20:  2  K'thibh,  27:  4  K'thibh, 
2  Sam.  2:  28,  23:  10,  1  Kin.  1:1,  5:7,  8:8,  2  Kin.  12:  13-16,  Ezr.  9:  4, 
Jer.  13:  7  (so  as  to  be  good  for  nothing),  52:  7  (consequently  fled).  This  is 
very  frequent  in  poetry  Ex.  15:  12,  Job  28:  11,  Ps.  66:  6,  69:  33,  73:  22, 
77:  17,  78:  44,  90:  5,  103:  16,  104:  5-9,  105:  44,  107:  6,  13,  14,  Isa.  44:  13, 
48:  3,  Hab.  3:  10.  So  after  participles  and  nouns  Gen.  2:  10,  Ex.  39:  23, 
Judg.  17:  6,  1  Sam.  1:  13,  Esth.  4:  3,  Ps.  107:  5.  Or  (2)  an  act  contempo- 
raneous with  that  expressed  by  the  preceding  preterite,  the  future  being 
used  in  the  sense  of  a  progressive  present.    See  examples  under  §  267.  1.  b. 

c.  The  tenses  are  often  intermingled  in  the  vivid  descriptions  of  poetry. 
The  poet  places  himself  in  the  midst  of  that  which  he  describes,  shifting 
his  position  as  successive  scenes  pass  before  his  mind,  part  being  conceived 
as  having  already  taken  place,  and  part  as  yet  to  come;  thus  in  Ex.  15: 
14,  15,  the  nations  ^ixi'd  have  heard,  '|1T5"1"^  they  will  he  afraid;  pangs  Trx 
have  seized  upon  the  inhabitants  of  Philistia;  then  the  dukes  of  Edom 
lliiia?  were  troubled,  the  mighty  men  of  Moab  trembling  i^.tnxi  shall  seize 
them,  all  the  inhabitants  of  Canaan  laiij  have  melted.  So  Ezek.  13:  11,  12 
(the  fall  is  first  viewed  as  impending;  the  storm  which  is  to  effect  it  has 
already  come,  with  its  promise  of  hail  and  of  wind;  then  the  wall  is  re- 
garded as  having  fallen  whereupon  the  reproaches  of  the  spectators  will 
follow).  Job  19:  6-16,  30:  12  ff.,  Ps.  7:  13,  14,  Isa.  10:  28-32,  44:  14,  16,  17, 
Hab.  3:  3,  7flf. 

d.  The  subjective  use  of  the  tenses  is  not  infrequently  associated  with 
their  objective  use  in  the  same  passage.  After  viewing  an  event  from  an 
ideal  standpoint  a  writer  may  indicate  his  actual  position  by  employing  the 
tenses  either  occasionally  or  continuously  with  strict  reference  to  the  mo- 
ment of  speaking.  Thus  the  preterite  may  be  used  in  its  proper  sense  in 
connection  with  futures  relating  to  the  past,  whether  they  are  so  employed 
in  the  way  of  vivid  description  Job  31:  7,  16-18,  Ps.  18:  9,  12,  13,  32:  6, 
80:  9-14,  106:  12,  13,  or  of  customary  action  2  Kin.  23:  9,  Job  24:  9-16.  In 
like  manner  the  future  may  be  used  in  its  proper  sense  in  connection  with 
preterites  referring  to  the  future  Job  5:  19,  20,  11:  20,  18:  5,  6,  27:  19,  20, 
Ps.  49:  15,  110:  5-7,  Isa.  13:  10.  Sometimes  it  is  doubtful  which  tense  is  to 
be  understood  objectively,  and  consequently  whether  the  passage  relates  te 
the  past  or  the  future  e.  g.  Ps.  18:  37-46 


318  SYNTAX.  §  270 


The  Modal  Forms. 

§  270.  1.  Of  the  two  divisions  of  time  recognized  by 
Hebrew  conception  the  past  is  unalterably  determined; 
no  vohtion  can  change  what  has  already  taken  place. 
But  the  future  is  contingent  and  is  the  only  domain 
witliin  which  the  will  of  free  agents  can  operate  or  over 
which  it  can  exert  any  influence.  Hence  while  the  pre- 
terite has  but  one  invariable  form,  there  are  certain  mod- 
ified forms  of  the  future  viz.  the  paragogic  or  intentional, 
§  97.  1,  the  apocopated  or  jussive,  §  97.  2,  and  the  im- 
perative, §  84.  4,  which  are  employed  to  express  not 
simple  futurity  but  the  desire  or  wiU  of  the  speaker. 
There  is  no  special  form  for  the  expression  of  other  re- 
lations than  those  which  arise  out  of  the  feeling  of  the 
speaker,  the  simple  future  being  used,  as  has  been  al- 
ready stated,  to  denote  contingency,  possibihty,  obhga- 
tion,  dependence  etc.  as  well  as  futurity;  and  in  such 
cases  the  precise  modification  of  the  thought  is  either 
suggested  by  accompanying  particles  or  left  to  be  in- 
ferred by  the  hearer  or  reader  from  the  circumstances 
and  the  nature  of  the  case. 

a.  Accordingly  the  law,  -which  is  not  the  utterance  of  personal  feeling 
but  the  declaration  of  what  is  required  as  a  matter  of  general  and  abiding 
obligation,  for  the  most  part  uses  the  future  rather  than  the  imperative  or 
jussive,  "lii'^ri  thoit  shall  keep  the  feast  of  unleavened  bread  Ex.  23:  15;  xb 
"ISSn  1/e  shall  not  afflict  any  widow  22:  21;  X'^h^  he  shall  bring  his  offering 
Lev.  7:  29.  The  commandment  with  promise  is  the  only  one  in  the  de- 
calogue, which  departs  from  the  strictly  objective  form  and  adopts  the 
imperative,  T23  Ex.  20:  12,  Deut.  5:  16.  Compare  the  mandate  of  the  law 
with  the  creative  fiat  n^li|]  there  shall  be  a  holy  convocation  Lev.  23:  7,  but 
"^ti";  let  there  be  light  Gen.  1:3;  or  with  the  exhortation  of  the  prophet 
M;;f7^  Lev.  19:  36  but  ^Tp^  Ezek.  45:  10;  or  with  the  counsel  of  the  sage 
rsn  xb  Deut.  19:  14,  but  53ri"biS;  Prov.  22:  28;  or  with  the  injunction  ad- 
dressed particularly  to  an  individual  l^^^"^;j■;  xb  Num.  6:  3  but  P':;n"bx  Lev. 
10:  y.  The  imperatives  of  the  book  of  Deuteronomy  are  chiefly  due  to  iti 
hortatory  character,  see  Deut.  4:  1,  9,  23,  5:  1.     The  jussive  is  almost  un* 


§  271  THE  MODAL  FORMS.  310 

exampled  in  strictly  legal  sections  with  the  excepti  »n  of  re""'  in  one  standing 
phrase  Lev.  5:  16,  24,  27:  31,  Num.  5:  7;  but  see  Ex.  23:  1. 

2.  While  the  fundamental  meaning  expressed  alike 
by  all  these  modal  forms  is  desire  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker,  this  is  susceptible  of  indefinite  variation  in  parti- 
cular cases,  arising  out  of  the  relation  of  the  speaker  to 
the  party  addressed  or  to  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of,  out  of  the  substance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb 
or  out  of  attendant  circumstances.  Furthermore  in  the 
intentional,  which  is  with  few  exceptions,  §  97.  1.  a,  hm- 
ited  to  the  first  person,  this  desire  is  directed  to  some- 
thing in  which  the  speaker  is  the  actor.  In  the  impera- 
tive, which  is  limited  to  the  second  person  and  an  afiirma- 
tive  sense,  the  desire  is  directed  to  something  to  be  done 
by  the  person  or  persons  addressed.  The  use  of  the  jus- 
sive is  confined  almost  entirely  to  the  third  person,  or 
to  the  second  person  in  a  negative  sense;  in  the  few  in- 
stances in  which  it  is  employed  affirmatively  in  the  se- 
cond person,  it  differs  little  from  the  imperative,  except 
that  the  latter  is  briefer  and  was  uttered  in  a  more  ex- 
clamatory tone. 

§  271.  The  intentional  or  paragogic  future  may  ex- 
press a  determination,  n^^T^^  I  will  celebrate,  lam  resolved 
to  do  so,  Ps.  7:  18,  nbbD  we  will  go  with  you  Zech.  8:  23; 
or  (in  the  plural  only)  an  exhortation  to  carry  into  effect 
a  common  purpose,  nipD  let  us  appoint  a  head,  and  nz^TlD 
let  us  return  to  Egypt  Num.  14:  4;  or  a  request  or  en- 
treaty more  or  less  earnest  rinps  let  me  fetch  a  morsel  oj 
bread  Gen.  18:  5,  rnSJJ^  let  me  pass  throtigh  thy  land 
Num.  21:  22;  or  an  inward  desire  nb-ji  I  would  like  to 
eat  Deut.  12:  20;  or  simply  consent  noio  mPiT-S  let  me 
die,  I  am  willing  to  die,  since  I  have  seen  thy  face  Gen. 
46:  30,  Isa.  36:  8,  and  even  in  a  few  instances  that  re- 
luctant consent,  which  is  born  of  necessity,  TZ^)^  I  must 


320  SYNTAX.  §  272 

go  into  the  gates  of  Sheol  Isa.  38:  10,  rii"!"!*?  we  have  to 
gro;pe  like  the  blind  Isa.  59:  10. 

a.  Thus  Isa.  1 :  24  proceeds  from  a  declaration  of  futurity  bnSX  I  shall 
he  eased  of  my  adversaries  to  one  of  purpose  n'bpJX  I  will  be  avenged  of 
my  enemies;  "lat"^  ""??<  I  s/mW  speak  to  my  father  myself  1  Sam.  19:  3  as 
something  that  will  certainly  take  place,  but  Ni"!Tn3'iX  come  noic,  I  will 
speak  to  the  king  2  Sam.  14:  15  as  something  resolved  upon  if,  as  the  particle 
of  entreaty  politely  suggests,  she  were  permitted  to  do  so;  n"'^3"n'n33  we 
shall  make  a  covenant  Ezr.  10:  3  simply  declarative,  but  n^^n  nnnrs  with 
urgency  come!  let  us  make  a  covenant  Gen.  31:  44;  nr\'i~!i<-n:;J  until  I  can 
tvink  as  a  voluntary  act  Prov.  12:  19.  Examples  of  the  paragogic  future  to 
express  a  determination  Gen.  13:  9,  22:  6,  27:  4,  41,  Ex.  14:  4,  20:  19, 
Deut.  17:  14,  Job  7:  11,  Isa.  18:  4,  55:  3  occasionally  with  X3  as  a  particle 
of  self  incitement  Gen.  18:  21,  Ex.  3:3;  exhortation  to  combined  action, 
commonly  with  particles  of  incitement  as  Hnn,  nsb  etc.  Gen.  11:  3,  37:  17, 
Ex.  1:  10,  Judg.  19:  11,  13,  1  Sam.  9:  9,  10,  Ps.  2:  3,  95:  1,  2,  6;  request, 
very  frequently  with  StS  I  pray  thee  Gen.  19:  20,  Ex.  3:  18,  4:  18,  Judg. 
11:  19,  Num.  21:  22,  1  Sam.  28:  22,  2  Sam.  16:  9;  desire,  perhaps  rt^S3X  1 
may  atone  as  I  would  like  to  do  Ex.  32:  30;  yielding  to  constraint  Ps.  42: 
5,  57:  5,  88:  16,  Jer.  3:  25,  4:  19,  21,  Mac.  1:  8. 

b.  Negatives  rarely  occur  with  the  paragogic  future;  ^X  is  once  found 
in  an  exhortation  Jer.  18:  18,  and  a  few  times  in  petitions  2  Sam.  24:  14, 
Ps.  25:  2,  31:  2,  18,  69:  15,  71:  1,  Jer.  17:  18,  Jon.  1:  14;  the  use  of  xb 
necessitates  a  return  to  the  simple  form  of  the  future  Gen.  43 :  4,  5,  8,  Job 
7:  11,  Ps.  101:  2,  3,  119:  46. 

c.  The  paragogic  future  does  not  occur  in  the  books  of  Leviticus, 
Joshua,  Esther  or  Ezra  and  but  once  in  Ezekiel,  Ezek.  26:  2. 

§  272.  The  jussive  or  apocopated  future  may  accord- 
ing to  circumstances  express  a  command,  let  the  earth 
^^']T\  brill g  forth  grass  Gen.  1:11,  bnin  do  thou  wait  or 
thou  shalt  wait  1  Sam.  10:  8;  or  advice  let  Pharaoh  J^H"; 
look  out  a  man,  *ifes;;'1.  and  let  him  a])]point  G-en.  41:  33,  34; 
or  entreaty,  let  thy  loving-kindness  ^H"^  he  upon  us  Ps.  33: 
22,  -"jh  do  thou  increase  Ps.  71:  21;  or  a  wish  may  Jer- 
hovah  C]b^  establish  his  ivord  1  Sam.  1:  23;  or  permission 
"bT  let  him  go  up  or  he  may  go  up,  "jl^.l.  and  build  Ezra  1:  3. 

a.  Examples  of  the  jussive  in  the  sense  of  a  command.  Gen.  1 :  3,  6  etc., 
Deut.  15:  3,  2  Sam.  5:  24,  1  Chron.  14:  15,  Isa.  55:  7,  61:  10,  2nd  pers. 
Ezek.  3:3;  such  jussives  occurring  in  the  course  of  a  prediction,  where 
God  is  the  speaker,  indicate  the  divine  will  that  such  results  should  follow, 
Lev.  26:  43,  Ps.  81:  16,  Isa.  27:  6,  50:  2,  Jer.  13:  10,  Hos.  14:  6.  Advice 
or  exhortation  Judg.  15:  2,  1  Kin,  1:  2,  22:  13,  2  Chron.  18:  12,   19:  7. 


§273 


THE  MODAL  FORMS.  321 


Request  or  entreaty  Gen.  26:  28,  44:  33,  Judg.  6:  39,  2  Sam.  19:  38,  1  Kin 
17:  21,  20:  32,  2  Kin.  2:  9,  Neh.  1:  6,  11,  Ps.  80:  18,  90:  17,  119:  76,  Dan. 
9:  16.  Wish,  Gen.  30:  24,  31:  49,  Ex.  5:  21,  Num.  23:  10,  1  Sam.  24:  16, 
26:  19,  1  Kin.  8:  57,  1  Chron.  12:  17,  16:  31,  2  Clnon.  24:  22,  Job  6:  9,  9:  34, 
Ps.  13:  6,  14:  7,  27:  14,  31:  25,  96:  11,  97:  1,  104:  31,  119:  80,  172,  Jer.  43:  5, 
2nd  pers.  Dan.  9:  25;  jussives  introduced  in  predictions  whether  of  good 
or  evil  indicate  the  concurrence  of  the  speaker  and  his  approval  of  the  event 
foretold  Gen.  9:26,  27,  49:  17,  Deut.  28:  8,  21,  36,  1  Sam.  2:  10,  Job  15:  33, 
18:  9,  12,  36:  14,  15,  Ps.  9:  10,  11:  6,  25:  9,  69:  33,  72:  8,  15,  17,  Prov.  1:  5, 
15:  25,  Isa.  35:  1,  Mic.  3:4,  5:  8,  7:  10,  Zeph.  2:  13,  Zech.  9:5,  10:  7. 
Permission,  Gen.  30:  34,  33:  9,  Deut.  20:  5,  8,  32:  38,  Judg.  6:  31,  7:3, 
16:  30,  2  Sam.  18:  22,  24:  17,  2  Kin.  2:  10,  1  Chron.  21:  17,  23,  2  Chron. 
36:  23. 

b.  The  poet  blends  his  personal  feeling  with  what  he  utters  and  also 
prefers  briefer  forms;  for  both  these  reasons  the  jussive  is  often  employed 
in  poetry,  where  prose  would  require  the  unabbreviated  future.  Thus  there 
is  no  umpire  bettveen  us,  nir^  who  may  lay  his  hand  as  I  wish  he  might 
Job  9 :  33,  my  eye  'i^n  shall  rest  or  must  rest,  a  volition  determined  by  con- 
straint 17:  2,  who  is  loise  "h^'i  and  can  consequently  understand  as  I  would 
have  him  do  Hos.  14:  10,  Jer.  9:  11,  Lam.  3:  50;  in  some  instances  in  which 
the  desire  of  the  speaker  does  not  seem  to  enter,  the  jussive  becomes  a 
mere  substitute  for  the  simple  future  Job  13:  27,  24:  14,  25,  27:  8,  22, 
33:  11,  34:  37,  39:  26.  This  use  of  the  jussive  is  exceeding!}'  rare  in  prose 
1  Sam.  10:  5;  though  repeated  instances  of  it  are  found  in  the  book  ot 
Daniel  8:  12,  11:  4,  10,  16-19,  25,  28. 

c.  The  negative  Vx  is  prefixed  to  the  jussive  in  deprecation  or  dis- 
suasion; thus  with  the  second  person  Gen.  45:  5,  Ex.  10:  28,  23:  1,  Deut.  2:  9, 
Josh.  7:  3,  Judg.  19:  20,  Ps.  22:  12,  27:  9,  Prov.  7:  25,  24:  17,  Isa.  41:  10, 
Jer.  40:  16  K'thibh;  with  the  third  person  Gen.  31:  35,  37:  27,  45:  20, 
Ex.  8:  25,  16:  19,  32:  22,  1  Sam.  18:  17,  2  Sam.  13:  33,  Job  15:  31,  Isa. 
36:  15,  Hos.  4:  4.  X^  is  rarely  found  with  the  jussive  Gen.  24:  8,  1  Kin. 
2:6;  and  bs  but  rarely  with  the  simple  future  Gen.  19:  17,  Josh.  1:  7, 
Job  3 :  9,  Ps.  141 :  5,  Jer.  46 :  6,  except  in  those  species  and  forms  in  which 
the  jussive  is  not  distinguished  from  the  simple  future  and  accordingly 
may  be  considered  as  embraced  in  it  or  identical  with  it,  §  97.  2.  6,  "bx 
rMV}  Gen.  22:  12,  xk^-bx  Ex  16:  29.  The  future  with  xb  and  the  jussive 
with  bx  are  sometimes  used  in  successive  clauses,  friendly  dissuasion  or 
remonstrance  being  added  to  legal  prohibition,  Ex.  23:  1,  ?4:  3,  Lev.  10:  6, 
11:  43,  Judg.  13:  14;  comp.  Prov.  27:  2.  In  the  vivid  language  of  poetry 
prediction  may  assume  the  form  of  exhortation,  and  bx  with  the  jussive 
may  stand,  where  the  thought  might  have  been  prosaically  expressed  bj 
sib  with  the  simple  future,  ^isn;i-bx  let  not  their  faces  blush  (i.  e.  they  shall 
have  no  occasion  to  do  so)  Ps.  34:  6;  Xn'^n-bx  fear  not  (thou  needst  not 
fear)  Prov.  3:  25;  xtn'bx  forgive  them  not  (thou  wilt  not  forgive  them) 
Isa.  2:  9;  Job  20:  17,  40:  32,  Ps.  41:  3,  50:  3. 

§  273.  The  imperative  may  denote  a  command,  ^%y\ 

21 


322  SYNTAX.  §  273 

speak  unto  the  children  of  Israel  Lev.  1 :  2,  ^'2  fill  the 
men's  sacks  G-en.  44:  1 ;  exhortation  or  advice  "r^"^^  forget 
thyjpeople  Ps.  45:  10,  ^i'i  dwell  in  the  land,  'Ti'2.T\  and  serve 
the  king  of  Babylon  2  Kin.  25:  24;  a  wish  or  entreaty 
^DP  give  me  a  possession  of  a  hurying -place  Gen.  23:  4, 
ntsti  incline  thine  ear  to  me  "3^2271  deliver  me  Ps.  31:  3; 
permission,  where  it  is  good  in  thine  eyes  IIT  dwell  Gen. 
20:  15,  nnii:  drink,  my  lord  Gen.  24:  18;  or  assurance, 
where  a  person  is  directed  to  do  what  it  is  thereby  in- 
timated that  he  will  certainly  do,  "I'^UJn  make  fat  the  heart 
■  of  this  people  i.  e.  this  would  be  the  inevitable  result  of 
the  prophet's  ministry  among  them  Isa.  6:  10,  "ilT^  '^1'^ 
come  doivn  and  sit  in  the  dust,  0  virgin  daughter  of  Ba- 
bylon i.  e.  she  shall  assuredly  do  so  Isa.  47: 1,  Mic.  1 :  11-16. 
Increased  urgency  of  desire  is  expressed  by  the  para- 
gogic  form  of  the  imperative,  §  98. 1,  in  which  the  vowel 
n^  is  appended  to  the  2  masc.  sing.  H^pSJI.  HisliD  p)ray,  sit, 
or  do  sit  and  eat  Gen.  27:  19,  Th'!^  0  keep  my  soul  Ps. 
25:  20,  0  Lord  H^'i^ir  do  hear,  0  Lord  m^^P  do  forgive, 
0  Lord  ni""j:jpn  do  hearken  Dan.  9:  19.  The  imperative 
is  never  used  with  negatives,  as  a  command  implies  some 
positive  action  to  be  performed.  A  substitute  for  the 
negative  imperative  is  found  in  the  jussive  with  the  ne- 
gative particle  bi<  prefixed,  ^ricn  hide....'rxxn  blot  out...i^^jl 
create ....t^n  renew ....^ZD'^b^Vrbi^  cast  me  not  away^.n^Vrbi^ 
takenotV%.  51:  11-13. 

a.  The  imperative  expressing  a  wish  is  once  preceded  by  '^  Gen.  23:  13 
and  once  by  SX  Job  34:  16,  unless  n3"i3  notwithstanding  the  accent  is  to 
be  considered  a  noun.  Examples  of  the  permissive  imperative  2  Sam.  18:  23, 
Jer.  26:  14,  49:  11;  with  an  ironical  sense  1  Kin.  2:  22,  Judg.  9:  19,  Job 
40:  10,  Isa.  47:  12,  Joel  4:  11.  The  imperative  conveying  assurance  2  Kin. 
18:  32,  Ps.  110:  2,  Isa.  10:  30,  13:  6,  23:  1,  4,  37:  30,  60:  1,  65:  18. 

6.  A  few  verbs,  whose  meaning  naturally  leads  to  urgent  expression 
invariably  adopt  the  paragogic  form  in  the  masc.  sing,  of  the  imperative 
e.  g.  nirin  make  haste,  rinJi^-,  rr^.'^rn  awake,  n^n  lift  ihyftelf,  '^'■{'^'^'^  swear, 
STr"^Jin  bring  near,  nn'^rpri  attend,  only  once  -i"pn  Job  33:  31  iu  a  quieter 


§274 


THE  MODAL  FORMS.  323 


tone,  asking  not  so  much  for  instant  as  patient  attention;  some  other  verbs, 
which  occur  less  frequently,  adopt  when  thej'  do  occur  the  parai;()gic  form 
n:"^TNn  hearken,  nfa^.n  spare,  niisn,  ni;3'?,  nij'?3  deliver,  Mn"i:r  rouse;  T^'zri, 
nbb  -when  used  as  particles  of  incitement  come!  invariably  have  the  para* 
gogic  n  ;  nn,  "^Is  alwaj-s  have  their  proper  verbal  force,  which  may  how- 
ever be  expressed  by  the  prolonged  form  likewise, 

c.  The  difference  of  tone  and  feehng  between  the  paragogic  and  the 
simple  imperative  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  examples:  Isaac  re- 
questing his  son  Esau  says  i^X'^i^i^  Gen.  27:  7,  but  Joseph  giving  direction 
to  his  steward  xin  Gen.:  43:  16;  God  said  to  Moses  under  the  provocation 
of  Israel's  great  offence  riH"'?'n  let  me  alone,  that  my  anger  may  hum  against 
them  Ex.  32:  10,  but  Moses  to  Aaron,  rk'n  lay  up  the  pot  of  manna  before 
Jehovah  Ex.  16:  33;  the  trees  said  to  the  olive  !^^^"9  do  thou  reign  over  us 
Judg.  9:  8,  but  with  less  urgency  to  the  bramble  T\>'Q  reign  thou  ver.  14; 
Joel  persuasively  to  Sisera  n"il6  do  turn  aside  Jiidg.  4:18,  Abner  to  Asahel 
"^10  turn  thee  aside  from  folloiving  me  2  Sam.  2 :  22 ;  the  people  earnestly 
to  Samuel  iTS^ii  set  a  king  over  tis  1  Sam.  8:  5,  Samuel  courteously  to  the 
cook  n:n  give,  please,  the  portion  which  I  bid  you  Cb  set  aside  (author- 
itative direction)  1  Sam.  9:  23;  Samuel  courteously  to  Jesse  "^rjV-r  *f**^> 
please,  and  fetch  David  1  Sam.  16:  11,  Saul  authoritatively  to  Jonathan 
n^d  1  Sam.  20:  31;  a  messenger  to  Saul  reporting  an  invasion  !i:'ii  iT^ni? 
make  haste  and  go  1  Sam.  23:  27,  direction  to  a  stranger  inquiring  his  way 
"ina  1  Sam,  9:  12;  the  captain  of  fifty  to  Elijah  peremptorily  rrin  come 
down!  2  Kin.  1:  9,  11,  the  angel  calmly  1"i  go  doicn  ver.  15;  Abner  to  David 
nnns  make  a  covenant,  which  he  desired  2  Sam.  3:  12,  but  the  men  of 
Jabesh  to  Nahash  "T^'S  make  a  covenant  distasteful  to  them  1  Sam.  11:  1; 
the  people  in  distress  appeal  to  God  H-cip  arise  and  save  us  Ps.  44:  26, 
Jehovah  directs  Jeremiah  D"p  arise  and  take  thy  girdle  to  the  Euphrates 
Jer.  13:  4;  Elihu  summons  Job  to  immediate  action  ni^^'rri  stand  vp,  if 
thou  canst  ansiver  me  Job  33 :  5,  Balaam  directs  Balak  3Srr'7  stand  patiently 
and  quietl}-  by  thy  burnt-offering  Num.  23:  3,  15;  Nehemiah  in  urgent 
petition  nr;">i:in  prosper  thy  servant  Neh.  1:11,  Micaiah  ironically  to  Ahab, 
go  up  n'irini  and  prosper  1  Kin.  22:  15, 

d.  As  the  simple  future  may  express  a  command,  xV  with  the  future  is 
used  in  like  cases  to  denote  prohibition;  so  generally  in  the  law  Ex,  20:  3ff., 
and  elsewhere  ^S^pn  Nb  thou  shalt  not  curse  him  Num.  23:  25,  ri5"n  Kb 
thou  shalt  not  go  up  2  Sam.  5:  23;  but  the  proper  negative  imperative  is 
formed  as  above  stated  by  Vs  with  the  jussive  ^irca  2  Kin.  18:  28  but 
srri'r-bx  do  not  hear  ver.  31,  Gen.  47:  29,  Ps.  4:  5,  Prov.  1: 15,  4:  5,  13,  27, 
Job  10:  2. 

§  274.  To  express  a  still  greater  urgency  of  desire 
the  precative  particle  5<:  is  emplo^-ed  in  connection  with 
the  various  modal  forms  or  with  the  simple  future  espe- 
cially though  not  exclusively  in  those  species  or  inflec- 
tions which  have  no  separate  forms  for  the  intentional 

21* 


324  SYNTAX.  §  275 

or  the  jussive  §  97.  2.  h;  iX2  follows  the  verb,  except  in 
negative  clauses  when  it  is  prefixed  with  b^,  &<2  i^T'^'^  ^ 
tvould  like  to  sing,  please  Isa.  5:1,  so  ver.  5;  let  this  child's 
soul  ^^5":i^"r]  return,  I  pray  thee  1  Kin.  17:  21,  nn^.  i<D"bs 
29ray  let  not  my  lord  he  angry  Gen.  18:  30,  b<:"i22ir]  look,  1 
pray  thee  Isa.  64:  8.  Or  a  still  higher  intensity  of  feeling 
may  be  denoted  by  the  additional  particle  5535<  or  nii^ 
prefixed  to  the  verb  or  to  the  person  addressed  S'lfl  NSJ^ 
J<5  ah!  forgive,  I  pray  thee  Gen.  50:  17,  5<2"njT  nj'ST'.  Tt^ 
ah!  Jehovah,  remember,  I  pray  thee  2  Kin.  20:  3. 

a.  K3  is  used  both  with  the  paragogic  Gen.  27:  26,  1  Sam.  25:  8,  2  Kin. 
8:  4  and  with  the  simple  imperative  Josh.  7:  19,  1  Kin.  22:  5,  Job  1:  11. 
In  Nmn.  12:  13  N3  both  precedes  and  follows  the  imperative.  N3  with  the 
simple  future,  N3-ni5^  Gen.  18:  4,  r\j>?  N3-bs  2  Sam.  13:  25,  X2-n;;n;;  2  Sam. 
14:  17,  N3  nil"'  Jer.'SB:  4,  NH^'^;]  Cant.  7:  9,  Gen.  44:  18,  Judg.  6:  39, 
2  Kin.  5:  17,  Ps.  7:  10. 

6.  Examples  of  the  use  of  XiN  or  iiJiJ  Isa.  38:  3,  Jon.  1:  14,  4:  2,  Ps. 
118:  25,  Neh.  1:5.  In  Ps.  116:  4  it  occurs  without  N3,  but  with  the  para- 
gogic form  of  the  imperative.  In  Ps.  116:  16,  Dan.  9:  4  it  stands  before  a 
vocative  with  no  verb  following;  in  Ex.  32:  31  there  is  an  ellipsis  both  of 
<  he  petition  and  of  the  person  addressed. 

The  Primaey  Tenses  with  Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  275.  1.  When  the  same  relation  of  time  is  expressed 
in  successive  clauses,  this  may  be  either  in  the  way  of 
coordination  by  repeating  the  same  primary  tense,  whe- 
ther preterite  or  future,  and  connecting  the  clauses  some- 
what loosely  by  Vav  Conjunctive,  the  simple  copulative 
and]  or  in  the  way  of  subordination  by  means  of  the 
secondary  tenses,  §  99.  ],  which  are  attached  to  the 
preceding  by  the  closer  connection  of  Vav  Consecu- 
tive, which  is  equivalent  to  and  so  or  and  then,  and 
indicates  a  dependence  upon  or  a  sequence  from  the 
statement  previously  made.  As  Vav  Consecutive  must 
always  be  joined  immediately  to  the  following  verb,  the 
Bubordination  resulting  from  the  use  of  the  secondary 


§  275     THE  PRIMARY  TENSES  WITH  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.         325 

tenses  can  only  occur  when  the  verb  is  the  first  word  in 
its  clause.  "V\nien  for  any  reason  this  is  not  the  case,  Vav 
Conjunctive  only  can  be  employed,  and  a  coordination 
rendered  necessary  by  the  collocation  of  words  may  have 
no  special  significance.  When,  however,  the  verb  imme- 
diately follows  the  conjunction,  either  construction  is 
possible;  and  then  the  employment  of  Vav  Conjunctive 
and  the  primary  tense  in  preference  to  the  other  and 
closer  combination  allows  each  statement  to  stand  as  it 
were  by  itself,  as  a  distinct  and  separate  item,  whereas 
the  use  of  Vav  Consecutive  and  the  secondary  tense  in- 
dicates a  more  intimate  relationship  and  links  all  that 
are  thus  joined  together  into  oiie  gradually  developing 
series.  Accordingly  preterites  may  be  coordinated,  ""wH 
he  removed... '^%'&\  and  he  brake... Th'yy.  and  he  cut  doivn... 
nrilDl  and  he  crushed  2  Kin.  18:  4;  so  futures  and  volun- 
tatives,  Dh3X  I  shall  comfort  myseJf ....  f\n'\>l^^  and  tvill 
avenge  m?/se(/'....!l2''i2;5<1  and  luill  bring  hack....Z\^'4^^  and 
shall  imrge  ....  HTcn;'!  and  will  take  atvay  ....  M^'^iriJI  and 
will  restore,  Isa.  1:  24-26;  (the  individualizing  effect  of 
tliis  construction  is  represented  in  the  translation  by  re- 
peating the  pronoun  before  each  preterite  and  the  auxi- 
liary before  each  future).     So  too  imperatives,  "TB  he 

fruitful,  ^i*l^  and  multiply,  ^.^to  and  fill rji'^^^l  (^f^nd 

subdue  it,  ^l"i^  and  rule.  Gen.  1 :  28. 

c.  This  use  of  the  preterite  with  Vav  Conjunctive  is  comparativelj'  rare, 
particularly  in  the  earlier  books  of  the  Bible.  It  is  employed  to  give 
distinctness  to  (1)  separate  particulars  in  the  same  transaction,  Gen.  21:  25, 
28:  6,  Ex.  36:  38,  38:  28,  Deut.  33:  2,  1  Sam.  17:  34,  35,  1  Kin.  6:  32,  35, 
2  Kin.  14:  7,  2  Chron.  29:  19,  Jer.  37:  15,  Ezek.  9:  7;  (2)  an  emphatic  ac- 
cumulation of  identical  or  equivalent  expressions,  Judg.  6:  3,  1  Sam.  12:  2, 
Isa.  1:  2,  9:  7,  41:  4,  44:  8,  Jer.  10:  25,  Ezek.  37:  11,  Dan.  9:  5,  Esth.  9:  27, 
Eccles.  1;  16  or  an  enumeration  of  various  acts  of  like  character  2  Sam. 
7:  9—11,  2  Kin.  21:  6,  Ps.  37:  14,  Isa.  43:  12,  Jer.  19:  4,  5;  (3)  a  clause  oi 
paragraph  introduced  by  the  formula  ti^ni  and  it  came  to  pass,  1  Sam: 
25:  20,  2  Sam.  6:  16,  Jer.  3:  9,  37:  11.  (4)  This  loose  coordination  is  espe« 
cially  found,  where  reference  is  had  not  to  a  definite  and  specific  act  but 


326  SYNTAX.  §  275 

more  indefinitely  to  tliat  which  may  take  place  at  any  time,  f^^>7^.  and  it 
came  to  pass,  if  (i.  e.  whenever)  the  serpents  bit  a  man,  w'^sni.  and  he  looked 
...  "^ni  then  he  lived,  Num.  21:  9,  Gen.  30:  41,  Ex.  17:  11,  Judg,  12:  5, 
19:  30,  Ruth  4:  7,  1  Sam.  13:  22,  26:  9,  Ps.  27:  2,  84:  11,  78:  34.  Isa.  40:  12, 
Mic.  5:  7;  or  which  has  occurred  repeatedly  at  various  times,  thet/  gathered 
it  morning  by  morning  Dni  and  the  sun  grew  hot  C^:i  and  it  melted,  Ex. 
16:  21,  ^:in^1  Ex.  40:  81  (see  the  frequentative  future  "^n-i"i  ver.  82),  Num. 
11:  8,  ^rpri  continued  to  blow  Josh.  6:  8,  Judg.  2:  18,  n^ri  used  to  go  up  ... 
•jrSI.  used  to  give  1  Sam.  1:  3,  4,  7:  16,  16:  23,  2  Sam.  12:  16,  15:  2,  1  Kin. 
4:  7,  18:  10,  2  Kin.  6:  10,  12:  10,  12,  Job  1:  4,  5,  Isa.  5:  14,  X^r^l  kept 
calling  ...  "ibx"!  6:  3,  8:  11,  Ezek.  37:  2,  7,  8,  10.  Dr.  Driver  (Hebrew 
Tenses,  2d  Ed.  p.  172)  explains  in  like  manner  the  numerous  preterites  with 
Vav  Conjunctive  employeJ  in  tracing  the  limits  of  the  tribes  Josh.  15:  3-11 
and  elsewhere,  as  "descriptive  of  the  course  which  the  boundary  used  to 
take".  In  a  few  instances  occurring  especially  in  the  later  books  of  the 
Bible  the  loose  construction  appears  to  be  used  indiscriminately  along  with 
the  more  usual  and  stricter  construction  with  Vav  Consecutive,  2  Kin.  23: 
4,  5,  8,  10,  12,  14,  15,  Jer.  18:  4. 

b.  Futures  united  by  Vav  Conjunctive  may  give  distinctness  to  the 
recital  of  separate  particulars,  Cnb'isi  and  I  will  send  them  I'Opll'i  and  they 
shall  arise  ^z\'^^\'^^  and  shall  go  ...  liris'^'l  and  shall  describe  . . .  iNli^l  and 
shall  come  to  me,  the  issue  which  is  the  proper  sequel  to  all  these  prelimi- 
naries being  then  expressed  by  Vav  Consecutive  with  the  preterite  'ipJIinri'l 
and  divide  it  Josh.  18:  4;  b'^np;^'!  'i4p;:i.  tp'n'^.  he  shall  intervene  and  shall 
imprison  and  shall  bring  to  trial  Job  11:  10,  13:  26,  27,  38: 14,  15,  Ps.  5:  12, 
22:  28,  69:  36  (the  issue  added  by  Vav  Consec.  pret),  107:  20-22,  Eccles. 
12:  6,  Isa.  41:  20,  42:  6,  21,  44:  7,  17,  2  Chron.  7:  14;  or  to  the  emphatic 
combination  of  substantially  equivalent  expressions,  tvhy  wilt  thou  say 
"isnrfl  and  wilt  thou  speak  Isa.  40:  27,  41:  11,  Ps.  37:  29.  A  like  eflfect  may 
be  produced  by  a  series  of  futures  without  Vav  Ps.  72:  2-7,  Isa.  14:  13,  14, 
16,  42:  14,  44:  11.  The  modified  forms  of  the  future  may  be  similarly 
united  by  Vav  Conjunctive;  thus  the  intentional  2  Sam.  3:  21,  17:  1-3  (issue 
added  by  Vav  Consec.  pret.),  2  Kin.  7:  13,  Job  16:  4,  Ps.  2:3,  50:  21,  77:  4, 
145:  2;   Cant.  1:  4;  the  jussive,  1  Sam.  2:  10,  Ps.  81:  16,  Prov.  15:  25. 

c.  Imperatives  may  be  continued  by  imperatives  with  Vav  Conjunctive 
in  order  to  give  greater  distinctness  to  each  separate  particular,  ^iBIitcJ  .... 
^irp->i  "5"!^  . .  ^Xl'i  run  . .  and  see  . .  and  knoio  and  seek  Jer.  5:  1,  Gen.  24: 
61,  27:  13,  19,  26,  Deut.  32:  49,  50,  Josh.  18:  8,  1  Sam.  20:  31,  23:  22,  23, 
2  Sam.  13:  7,  17:  16,  Ps.  25:  5,  16,  18,  28:  9,  34:  15,  Prov.  9:  5,  Jer.  15:  15, 
Ezek.  9:  5,  7;  or  to  add  emphasis  to  equivalent  expressions.  Dent.  4:  9, 
31:  6,  Josh.  1:  7,  24:  14,  2  Kin.  5:  7,  Ps.  37 :  3,  8,  45:  11,  Isa.  1:  2,  Ezek. 
17:  2,  Am.  5:  15.  For  greater  brevity  and  force  Vav  is  sometimes  omitted, 
Judg.  9:  15,  2  Sam.  13:  15,  2  Kin.  9:  25,  Neh.  9:  5,  laa.  21:  12,  Jer.  49:  8, 
51:  27,  28. 

2.  When  successive  clauses  are  thus  coordinated,  a 
relation  of  subordination  or  dependence  may  neverthe* 


I 


§   275    THE  PRDIAEY  TENSES  WITH  VAV  CONJUNCTIVE.         327 

less  be  established  by  the  connection  of  the  thought. 
Thus  a  second  clause  frequently  states  the  result  of  the 
first,  Israel  loved  Joseinh  nibri  and  consequently  he  made 
for  Mm  a  coat  Gen.  37:  3;  or  if  its  verb  be  a  voluntative 
(either  a  paragogic  or  apocopated  future),  it  will  indi- 
cate the  design,  let  the  counsel  of  the  Holy  one  of  Israel 
come  Mi?i31,  that  we  may  know  it  Isa.  5:  19,  (ht.  and  let 
us  knotv),  1  is  here  parallel  to  ]ybb  in  order  that  in  the 
previous  clause. 

a.  The  preterite  -with  Vav  Conjunctive  denotes  the  result  of  a  pre- 
ceding action  in  1  Sam.  27:  12,  1  Kin.  9:  25,  2  Kin.  18:  7,  2  Chron.  7:  12, 
25:  19,  Ps.  22:  6,  28:  7,  34:  5,  6,  80:  13,  Prov.  22:  3,  Isa.  6:  7,  49:  6,  Jer. 
40:  3;  and  sometimes  a  result  different  from  that  which  might  have  been 
expected,  tJwu  didst  these  things  "^wJnnlil  and  yet  I  was  silent  Ps.  50:  21. 
The  same  relation  may  be  suggested  by  simple  juxtaposition  without  a 
conjunction,  Ps.  57:  7,  Hab.  3:2;  or  "3  so  may  be  inserted  to  intimate  that 
the  effect  is  instantaneous  liTsn  "3  "X"^  as  soon  as  they  saw,  they  loondered 
Ps.  48:  6,  or  invariably  repeated  ^libli  '{3  uhh  >ix"i|r  as  often  as  they  called 
them,  they  tvent  from  them  Hos.  11:  2. 

b.  The  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  may  likewise  indicate  the  result 
of  a  preceding  action,  they  shall  hear  IXI"^"!  and  shall  fear  in  consequence 
Deut.  17:  13,  19:  20,  2  Kin.  7:  12,  Neh.  6:  13  (the  further  consequences  in- 
volved being  expressed  by  preterites  with  Vav  Consecutive),  Ps.  2:  12, 
58:  12,  104:  32,  Isa.  41:  15,  58:  9,  Jer.  6:  10,  20:  10,  Zech.  9:  5.  So  after 
an  imperative,  delight  thyself  in  Jehovah  ^i?""^'!'!  ow(Z  he  will  give  thee  etc. 
Ps.  37:  4,  Prov.  3:  9,  10,  4:  6,  8,  10,  16:  3,  Isa.  8:  10.  The  result  may  be 
suspended  on  a  condition  not  fulfilled,  God  is  not  man  -*5"l  that  he  should 
lie  Num.  23:  19;  Tlioti  desirest  not  sacrifice  njriNI  else  I  icould  give  it 
Ps.  51 :  18;  Ji5  is  not  an  enemy  that  reproached  me  xirsi.  else  I  would  bear  it 
Ps.  55:  13. 

c.  The  voluntative  forms  of  the  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  commonly 
express  the  design;  thus  the  intentional,  I  shall  go  up  Hn'MX"!  to  tell  or  that 
I  may  tell  Pharaoh  (lit.  and  I  ivill  tell)  Gen.  46:  31,  18:  30,  Jiulg.  6:  39; 
and  the  jussive  let  me  escape  thither  "inffl  that  my  soul  may  live  (lit.  and 
let  my  soul  live)  Gen.  19:  20,  24:  51,  Ex.  7:  9  (without  Vav),  9:  22,  1  Sam. 
18:  21,  2  Chron.  18:  19,  Ps.  85:  14,  Isa.  63:  3,  Ezek.  14:  7.  So  very  fre- 
quently after  an  imperative:  the  intentional,  ^iw  w?e  etc.  n~2;rj<-  that  I  may 
bury  Gen.  23:  4,  27:  4,  Judg.  11:  37,  1  Sam.  28:  7,  2  Kin.  4:  22,  Ps.  41:  11, 
90:  14,  Isa.  41:  22;  the  jussive,  entreat  Jehovah  ""p'"  to  remove  or  that  he 
may  remove  Ex.  8:  4,  Num.  17:  2,  25,  21:  7,  25:  4,  Judg.  14:  15,  1  Sam. 
5:  11,  29:  4,  1  Kin.  13:  6,  21:  2,  10,  2  Chron.  30:  6,  8,  Isa.  30:  8.  Those 
forms  of  the  future  which  are  not  liable  to  be  apocopated,  may  yet  be  used 
in  a  jussive  sense,  §  97.  2.  b,  and  hence  may  also  upon  occasion  be  employed 


328  SYNTAX.  §  27G 

with  Yav  Conjunctive  to  indicate  the  design,  JiearJcen  to  the  voice  of  Je- 
hovah  ni:"'";l  that  it  may  he  ivell  with  thee  (that  this  is  intended  as  a  jussive 
in  fact  though  not  in  form,  appears  from  the  jussive  in  the  next  clause) 
''hn  and  that  thy  soul  may  live,  Jer.  38:  20,  Ex.  5:  1,  8:  16,  14:  2,  Num. 
19:  2,  2  Kin.  2:  16,  5:  8,  Job  32:  20.  So  even  unabbreviated  forms  of  the 
future,  which  might  have  been  apocopated,  inasmuch  as  the  simple  future 
may  have  an  optative  signification,  §  267.  1,  shall  I  call  thee  a  tmrse  P^^ril 
that  she  may  nurse  Ex.  2:7;  particularly  in  a  negative  clause,  as  xb  is  the 
only  negative  that  can  be  used  in  this  construction  and  it  requires  the 
simple  future,  §  272.  c,  Send  away  the  arh  ao;*!  that  it  may  return^  ~^^ 
niis^  end  that  it  may  not  slay  1  Sam.  5:  11;  so  forms  with  suffixes,  which 
are  precluded  from  taking  the  paragogic  termination  put  thy  hand  etc. 
TlSiami  that  I  may  make  thee  swear  Gen.  24:  3,  1  Kin.  18:  44.  If  there  be 
a  reference  to  past  time  or  contingency  be  implied,  the  English  idiom  re- 
quires the  imperfect  instead  of  the  present  subjunctive,  he  used  to  consecrate 
whoever  would  in"'1  that  they  might  be  priests  1  Kin.  13:  33,  0  that  my  head 
were  waters  ^isnx"!  that  I  might  weep  Jer.  8:  23,  9:  1,  Job  6:  9,  Ps.  49:  10. 
This  subjunctive  use  of  the  future  with  Vav  Conjunctive  to  indicate  design 
may  further  occur  after  an  infinitive  1  Sam.  7:  8,  2  Chron.  29:  10,  or  after 
a  preterite,  2  Kin.  19:  25,  Isa.  37:  26,  Jer.  23:  18,  Job  16:  21.  When  the 
event  is  certain  or  the  obligation  imperative  the  thought  cannot  be  fully 
expressed  in  English  by  a  dependent  construction,  and  we  are  obliged  toi 
surrender  the  statement  of  the  design  which  still  lies  in  the  Hebrew  for  the 
sake  of  making  a  positive  and  unconditioned  affirmation.  Thus,  bathe  in 
the  Jordan  aB'^'l  not  merely  that  thy  flesh  may  return,  which  would  leave 
the  issue  in  douljt,  but  and  thy  flesh  shall  return  2  Kin.  5:  10;  the  full  sense 
of  the  Hebrew  is  that  the  bathing  is  to  be  performed  with  this  design  and 
the  design  shall  be  accomplished.  Plead  tvith  your  mother  ibrci  not  merely 
that  she  sliould put  atvay,  as  though  the  pleading  might  prove  ineffectual,  but 
cmd  let  her  put  away  Hos.  2:4.     So  Lev.  9:  6,  Deut.  32:  1,  7,   1  Sam.  7:  3, 

1  Kin.  18:  1,  2  Kin.  6:  19,  Job  12:  7,  Ps.  26:  6,  50:  7,  66:  16,  119:  146, 
Prov.  9:  9,  Isa.  55:  3,  Hos.  14:  3,  Mai.  3:  7. 

d.  An  imperative  joined  to  a  preceding  imperative  by  Vav  Conjunctive 
may  denote  the  assured  result  of  that  action,  do  this  ITil  and  live  i.  e.  then 
you  shall  live  Gen.  42:  18,  Ex.  14:  13,  2  Kin.  5:  13,  2  Chron.  20:  20,  Job 
22:  21,  Ps.  34:  9,  Prov.  4:  4,  9:6,  20:  13  (without  Vav),  Isa.  8:  9,  37:  30, 
45:  22,  Am.  5:  6.  Less  frequently  after  a  future,  Jehovah  grant  you  ^"(i^i^" 
that  ye  may  find  (Ut.  and  find  ye)  Euth  1:  9,  Gen.  12:  2,  20:  7,  2  Sara.  21: 3, 

2  Kin.  6:  10. 

The  Secondary  Tenses. 

§  276.  T^Tien  successive  acts  are  not  viewed  separately 
but  as  closely  linked  each  to  its  immediate  predecessor 
from  first  to  last,  this  relation  is  indicated  by  means  of 


§  276  THE  3EC0NDAEY  TENSES.  329 

Vav  Consecutive  and  the  secondary  tenses.  The  entire 
series  is  regarded  as  unfolding  from  its  initial  act,  which 
is  accordingly  expressed  in  its  appropriate  primary  tense; 
the  succeeding  members  of  the  series  are  then  viewed 
not  from  the  point  of  time  occupied  by  the  speaker  but 
from  that  of  this  initial  act,  from  which  all  the  others 
proceed  step  by  step  in  regular  order.  Thus  in  narrating 
that  which  has  already  taken  place,  the  first  verb  is  put 
in  the  preterite  or  perfect,  thereby  assigning  the  whole 
to  the  domain  of  the  past.  Then  as  viewed  from  this 
starting  point  all  that  follows  Hes  in  the  future.  The  se- 
cond verb,  representing  the  dii^ect  sequence  of  the  first 
is  accordingly  expressed  in  the  future  or  imperfect  with 
Vav  Consecutive,  §  99.  1,  which  thus  forms  a  secondary 
or  continuative  preterite;  this  establishes  a  new  stand- 
point, from  which  the  next  act  is  surveyed  and  so  on  to 
the  end.  It  is  essential  to  this  construction  that  each  verb 
should  stand  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause  and  in  im- 
mediate connexion  with  Vav  Consecutive;  if  any  word 
or  particle  is  interposed  between  Vav  and  the  verb,  the 
latter  must  revert  to  the  primary  tense.  Thus,  Gen.  39:1, 
Joseijh  "iyCi  was  brought  down  . . .  ^nip^^l  and  Poti])lia7' 
bought  him  (ht.  according  to  the  original  sense  of  this 
tense  form  and  then  he  buys  or  tvill  buy  hini)  . . .  ■'ri';i  and 
Jehovah  was  ..  ^n"]^  and  he  ivas  ....  ij^n^l  and  his  master 

saiv  ...  U^k^p'^'i  and  Joseph  found  ...  T'liiJ^I  and  served 

iirripi'l  and  he  made  him  overseer '|h3  ib"U3^'bsi  and  all 

that  he  had  he  gave  (pret.)  into  his  hand. 

a.  The  Vav  Consecutive  future  or  imperfect  is  the  ordinary  historical 
tense,  and  is  used  in  narratives  almost  to  the  exclusion  of  the  preterite  or 
perfect,  which  is  only  occasionally  introduced,  when  the  coUocation  of  words 
requires  it.  Being  thus  a  substitute  for  the  preterite  it  has  the  same  ranp-e 
of  signification  that  is  inherent  in  the  primary  tense.  Thus  following  a 
preterite,  it  will  ordinarily  conform  to  the  sense  of  that  preterite,  whether 
as  a  definite  act  in  the  absolute  past,  David  returned  . .  3'ir^  and  dwelt 
2  Sam.  1 :  1 ;  or  repeated  acts  at  various  times,  whithersoever  they  went 


330  SYNTAX.  §  276 

out  . .  *a^i  they  were  distressed  . .  tsj^'l  and  JeJiovah  raised  up  judges  Judg. 
2:  15,16;  a  perfect,  I  have  hearkened  i"bpX1  and  heard  Jer.  8:6;  pluperfect, 
had  gone  dotvn  tl'^i'^^'^^  33'r'^l  atid  lain  and  slept  soundly,  Jon.  1:5;  1  Sam. 
iiS:  34,  Job  9:16;  future  perfect,  he  shall  not  have  taken  ivarning  . . .  X'i-ril 
sifinpril  and  the  sioord  shall  have  come  and  taken  him  away  Ezek.  33:  4; 
optative,  0  that  tee  had  been  C07itent  211':^  and  dtvelt  Josh.  7:7;  subjunctive, 
lest  the  spirit  may  have  taken  him  up  ^inizVi^l  and  cast  him  2  Kin.  2:  16;  a 
general  statement  that  may  be  verified  at  any  time,  thou  chastisest  man 
CaPI  and  dissolvest  Ps.  39:  12,  Prov.  21:  22,  22:  12;  prophetic  preterite, 
Isa.  5:  14-16  (alternating  vv^ith  the  fut.  in  ver.  15  and  changing  to  the  fut. 
ver.  17),  9:  5  (see  fut.  ver.  6),  Joel  2:  23,  Mic.  2:  13,  Ps.  22:  30  (fut.  in 
second  clause).  It  may  even  have  this  prophetic  sense  when  attached  to  a 
preterite  referring  to  the  past;  thus  the  prediction  in  Isa.  2:  9  is  linked  to 
the  historical  statements  in  vs.  6-8  as  though  it  were  already  accomplished; 
in  9:  7-13  the  series  passes  imperceptibly  from  the  historical  to  the  pro- 
phetic, the  latter  in  its  assured  certainty  being  classed  with  the  former. 
Or  a  Vav  consec.  fut.  thus  connected  may  reach  from  the  past  into  the 
present.  Thou  didst  establish  the  earth  ^'oi'P})  and  it  stood  then  and  still 
stands  Ps,  119:  90,  or  into  the  future,  Jehovah  sat  enthroned  at  the  flood 
S;r;»T  and  he  has  sat  and  sits  king  for  ever  Ps.  29:  10. 

b.  In  like  manner  the  Vav  Consecutive  future  or  imperfect  may  carry 
forward  a  narrative  of  the  past,  whatever  be  the  verbal  form  Avith  which  it 
began,  or  in  whatever  way  the  initial  reference  to  the  past  may  have  been 
made.  Thus  it  may  be  attached  to  a  future  or  imperfect,  when  it  is  used 
in  the  vivid  description  of  what  has  already  taken  place  "I'^^zi^  IX  then  sang 
(lit.  sings)  Moses  ....  !i'ipj','='1  and  they  said  Ex.  15:  1,  Gen.  37:  7,  1  Kin. 
20:  33  (§  267.  1.  b),  2  Kin.  16:  5,  Job  31:  27,  Ps.  18:  19,  24,  52:  9,  78:  15, 
26,  45,  95:  10,  106:  17,  19,  or  as  a  frequentative  past  n^^P^  n:6"=n  she 
used  to  provoke  her  so  that  she  ivept  l  Sam.  1:  7,  Judg.  12:  5,  "is^X  I  have 
repeatedly  spoken  . .  ib  ipxi  and  said  to  him  1  Kin.  21:  6,  Ps.  78:  40,  41, 
which  may  continue  into  the  present  1  Sam.  2:  29,  Ps.  3:  5.  Or  it  may  be 
attached  to  an  infinitive  referring  to  the  past,  rfsiaa  when  Jehovah  sent  . . . 
ti'ippil  ye  rebelled  Deut.  9:  23;  or  to  a  participle  the  Philistities  D"^'2nbD  were 
fighting  ...  ^oi''^  and  Israel  fled  1  Sam.  31:  1;  or  to  a  noun  clause  Shem 
(was)  one  hundred  years  old  'ibi*!  and  he  begat  Gen.  11:  10;  or  a  statement 
of  time  on  the  third  day  xia*3  then  Abraham  lifted  Gen.  22:  4. 

c.  As  the  Vav  Consecutive  future  indicates  a  sequence,  its  time  is 
regulated  by  that  which  precedes  and  upon  which  it  is  dependent.  Ac- 
cordingly if  it  be  attached  to  what  is  present,  it  must  itself  be  rendered  as 
a  present.  Thus  when  linked  to  a  future  or  imperfect  with  a  present  signifi- 
cation, now  X'dn  it  comes  to  thee  N^PT  and  thou  faintest  Job  4:  6,  Ps.  50:  6 
(connecting  with  ver.  4),  64:  8,  77:  7,  or  denoting  what  is  true  at  all  times, 
for  which  we  likewise  use  the  present,  "ht":  he  prayeth  to  God  irTJ"i»1  and 
he  accepfefh  him  Job  33:  26,  34:  24,  39:  l.i,  Ps.  49:  15,  107:  28-30;  or  to 
a  participle  b^xr"!;"  ilia  the  king  is  weeping  and  mourning  2  Sam.  19:  2, 
Tnia  He  brings  down  . . .  by|jT  and  brings  up  1  Sam.  2 :  6,  Job  1 2 :  22-24, 
14:  20,  Ps.  18:  33,  34:  8,   104:  32,  Prov.  20:  26;   or  to  an  infinitive  a^nys 


§276 


THE  SECONDARY  TENSES.  331 


when  a  wicked  man  returns  ...  cr^"  and  does  Ezek.  18:  27;  or  any  phrase 
or  expression  that  is  suggestive  of  present  time,  who  (art)  thou  ''X'^'^n]  that 
thou  art  afraid  Isa.  51:  12,  Gen.  49:  14,  15,  a  land  of  gloom  ...  ysni  and 
when  it  shines  it  is  like  darkness  Job  10:  22,  7:  18,  Ps.  8:  5,  6,  144:  3. 
This  departure  from  the  ordinary  historical  use  of  this  tense  is  chiefly  to 
be  found  in  poetry.  So  is  also  a  still  rarer  construction  in  which  it  is  linked 
to  a  future  having  a  future  signification,  phi"'  he  shall  deride  evert/  strong' 
hold  "izri""  and  shall  heap  up  earth  "^"r^i  and  take  it  Hab.  1:  10,  Job 
24:  20,  Ps.  55:  18;  Deut.  17:  2,  3  occurring  in  simple  prose  must  be  differ- 
ently explained;  if  Nks";  there  shall  he  found  a  man  who  i"iw;"^  shall  do 
that  which  is  evil,  the  doing  is  not  future  to  the  finding  but  antedates  it 
and  might  with  equal  propriet}'  have  been  expressed  by  the  pret.  n"i;>  in 
the  sense  of  the  future  perfect,  shall  have  done,  §  267.  1.  c.  The  act  being 
thus  conceived  of  as  alreadj'  performed  at  the  time  supposed  is  farther 
described  by  the  secondary  preterites  iSi"*!  "^^1  and  has  gone  and  served 
other  gods;  while  the  sequel  to  the  finding  is  expressed  in  ver.  4  by  the 
secondary  future  "ifni  and  it  shall  be  told  thee.  In  Hab.  2:  1,  2  a  pause 
intervenes,  in  which  a  preterite  is  to  be  supplied,  I  tvill  tcatch  to  see  what 
he  tvill  speak  ....  ''^i'^^'y  and  (after  I  had  thus  watched)  Jehovah  an- 
swered me. 

d.  The  sequence  indicated  by  Vav  Consecutive  is  not  always  that  of 
time,  but  may  simply  represent  the  order  of  thought  in  the  mind  of 
the  writer  or  speaker;  thus  the  second  verb  may  be  explanatory  of  the 
preceding  God  tempted  Abraham  ^":N'1  and  said  1.  e.  tempted  him  by  say- 
ing etc.  Gen.  22:  1,  they  did  so  ^Z'O'::'^^  that  is  to  say  they  cast  (lit.  and  they 
cast)  Ex.  7:  11,  12,  Josh.  7:  20,  21 ;  or  synonymous  with  it  they  ivere  fruit- 
ful ''h'S.V''^  ^2"}'^^  "^""^""l^  and  increased  and  multiplied  and  greiv  strong  Ex. 
1 :  7,  1  Sam.  15:  17,  2  Sam.  14:  5,  Job  14:  10,  Ps.  16:  9.  18:  8;  or  an  iden- 
tical repetition  whether  for  emphasis  Vz^^  Gen.  2:  2,  n";.''1  Ezek.  18:  28,  by 
way  of  resumption  ^zh'^,^  Josh.  18:  8,  9,  Z:::-;^'^  Judg.  17:  3,  4.  xid*!  1  Sam. 
4:  12,  13,  Tj-:!!  6:  19,  nli-pNI  Ezr.  8:  25,  26,  r^'b^l  10:  6,  or  for  the  sake  of 
adding  further  particulars  cvl'sb:"  2  Chron.  28:  15;  or  a  contrasted  thought 
there  is  a  snare  for  the  ivicked  Nk;l  but  the  righteous  comes  out  Prov.  12:  13, 
Job  8:  26;  or  the  positive  alternative  answering  to  a  preceding  negative 
ihey  walked  not  in  his  ways  ^6'^  but  turned  aside  1  Sam.  8:  3,  13:  22, 
Ex.  33:  4,  6,  Judg.  19:  10;  or  the  summing  up  of  an  antecedent  paragraph 
"fzil  thus  were  finixh^d  Gen.  2:  1,  "n";i  so  it  was  19:  29,  cp^l  so  was  con- 
firmed 23:  17,  20;  or  a  particular  in  a  preceding  more  general  statement  these 
are  the  kings  who  reigned  . . .  T^^^'^  viz.  there  reigned  Gen.  36:  31,  32,  2  Kin. 
1 :  12,  13  {answered  and  spake,  besought  him  and  spake),  18:  28,  Job  10:  8, 
Jer.  39:  4;  or  the  order  of  time  may  be  disregarded,  the  succession  of  ideas 
being  determined  by  some  other  principle  of  association  Gen.  2:  7-9,  15, 
6:  10,  11,  8:  1-3,  11:  32-12:  1,  Ex.  32:  29  (prior  to  ver.  28),  Josh.  2:  3,  4, - 
2:  22,  18:  8,  1  Sam.  17:  16,  17,  23:  1  (prior  to  22:  20  ff.,  see  23:  6),  Jon. 
2:  4,  Zech.  7:2;  or  the  proper  sequence  may  lie  in  a  remoter  term,  that 
which  is  first  stated  being  preliminar}'  and  subordinate  the  people,  believed 
''T?';!  •••  W^'^'^1  and  heard  ...  and  baved  themselves  Ex.  4:  31,  where  of 


332  SYNTAX.  §  27G 

course  the  hearing  preceded  the  believing,  and  the  meaning  is  inasmuch  as 
they  had  heard  they  bowed;  so  Gen.  2:  19  he  formed  ...  and  brought  is 
equivalent  to  he  brought  . . .  which  he  had  formed;  Deut.  31:  9. 

e.  Vav  Consecutive  future  may  indicate  the  result  of  a  preceding  action 
Joshua  commanded  Diin^'n^l  and  they  took  them  doicn  Josh.  10:  27,   n^bril 

1  Sam.  19:  5,  "iiplj  and  each  one  burned  incense  not  expressive  of  design 
as  though  it  were  "ii?p"'1.,  §  275.  2.  c,  that  he  might  burn  incense  2  Kin.  23:  5, 

2  Chron.  24:  8,  Neh.  13: 19  (where  design  is  expressed  by  following  futures), 
Job  11:  3,  Ps.  33:  9,  69:  11,  12,  78:  20,  97:4,  109:  17,  Prov.  11:2,  Isa.  2:  9, 
40:  14,  51:  15,  r-s^i  and  he  is  dead  i.  e.  is  as  good  as  dead,  certain  to  die 
Jer.  38:  9,  Am.  9:  5,  Nah.  1:  4,  Hab.  3:  16;  so  also  a  result  different  from 
that  which  might  have  been  expected  ''5n"'DriT  and  yet  thou  incitedst  me 
Job  2:3,  10:  8,  32:  3,  Deut.  4:  33,  Ps.  73:  14,  or  suspended  upon  a  con- 
dition that  -was  not  fulfilled  thoii  didst  not  tell  me  'ht\^^::ii^  or  I  would  have 

I  -:|"  -  -:rr 

sent  thee  axcoy  Gen.  31:  27. 

f.  As  the  fundamental  idea  of  the  secondary  tenses  is  that  of  sequence, 
and  as  the  combination  of  Vav  with  the  verbal  form  is  an  essential  el- 
ement of  their  formation,  a  return  to  the  primary  tense  may  be  rendered 
necessary  by  either  of  two  reasons,  viz.:  if  the  thought  to  be  stated  is  not 
regarded  by  the  writer  or  speaker  as  the  sequel  of  that  which  precedes,  or 
if  the  verb  is  not  immediately  attached  to  Vav.  Thus  at  the  beginning  of 
a  narrative  Gen.  1:  1,  Job  1:1,  or  when  a  new  subject  is  introduced  Gen. 
15:  1,  21:  1,  37:  2,  1  Sam.  2:  22,  or  a  subject  is  resumed  after  a  longer  or 
shorter  interruption  Gen.  13:  14,  39:  1,  1  Sam.  5:  1,  or  an  explanatory  state- 
ment is  made  1  Sam.  5:  7  (comp.  without  Vav  Judg.  20:  5,  43,  Ps.  78:  19), 
or  a  parenthesis  inserted  1  Sam.  13:  21,  22,  2  Chron.  12:  10,  or  after  a 
parenthesis  1  Sam.  1:  3,  4:  13,  or  when  the  action  does  not  continue  the 
preceding  but  belongs  before  it  1  Sam.  4:  18,  6:  15.  So  also  when  there  is 
no  Vav  in  the  clause  Hab.  3:6,  or  when  any  word  or  particle  comes  be- 
tween Vav  and  the  verb  Gen.  1:  2,  5,  10,  27,  26:  22,  27:  23.  Vav  Consecu- 
tive future  occurs  in  a  preterite  sense  at  the  beginning  of  certain  books, 
because  they  were  regarded  by  their  authors  as  supplements  or  continua- 
tions of  preceding  histories,  "^Vf^^  And  it  came  to  pass  Josh.  1:  1,  Judg.  1 :  1, 
1  Sam.  1:  1  etc.  etc. 

g.  In  a  very  few  instances  only  occurring  in  elevated  poetry  the  apoc- 
opated future  is  used  in  the  recital  of  what  is  past.  These  are  sometimes 
explained  on  the  assumption  that  Vav  Consecutive  has  been  omitted  by 
poetic  license,  thus  sk^  Deut.  32:  8,  "^lyn  ver.  18,  nb~}^  2  Sam.  22:  14  (where 
Ps.  18:  14  has  Dir-]!;!),  b^\  Job  33:  21,  niT^  Ps.  18:  12  (where  2  Sam.  22:  12 
has  P^H),  Ps.  68:  15,  78:  26,  90:  3,  107:  29,  33,  Hos.  6:1,  or  that  the  Vav 
is  still  operative  though  separated  by  an  intervening  word  Job  23:  11,  12. 
But  it  may  quite  as  readily  be  supposed  that  the  apocopated  is  poetically 
used  for  the  simple  future,  §  272.  b,  which  is  here  employed  in  the  vivid 
description  of  the  past,  §  267.  5,  particularly  when  this  is  conceived  of  as 
contemporaneous  with  or  continuous  from  that  which  had  previously  been 
spoken  of,  comp.  a  like  use  of  the  simple  future  Ps.  69:  13,  22,  78:  15,  29, 
72,  81 :  7,  8,  13,  and  of  the  paragogic  future  Ps.  73:  16,  17,  Prov.  7:7,     In 


§  277  THE  SECONDARY  TENSES.  .     333 

Ezek.  16:15  '."^ii^  may  have  its  proper  jussive  force,  as  the  language  of  the 
person  referred  to,  let  it  be  his. 

h.  It  is  difjficult  to  explain  satisfactorily  the  singular  fact  that  the  first 
person  of  the  future  with  Vav  Consecutive  in  many  instances  adopts  the 
paragogic  form,  §  99.  2.  It  has  with  some  plausibility  been  suggested  that 
it  may  express  the  voluntary  nature  of  the  act,  nnVixl  and  I  sent  of  my 
own  accord  Gen.  32:  6,  nn-srirxi  a7id  I  kept  m^se//"' carefully  and  of  set 
purpose  2  Sam.  22:  24,  Judg.  6:  9,  10,  njinxi  and  I  carefully  inspected 
Ezr.  8:  15,  t^^"]":^!  and  I  plucked  out  violently,  with  hearty  good  will  9:  3, 
Neh.  1:  4,  5:  7,  8,  13,  13:  7-13,  21,  Ps.  7:  5,  119:  55,  and  even  a  quasi  sort 
of  unconscious  spontaneity  and  self  abandon  may  be  suspected  in  such 
cases  as  n:i-\v<i  Ps.  3:  6,  n^bnri  Gen.  41:  11,  which  Dr.  Driver  not  inaptly 
proposes  to  render  I  slept  away,  we  dreamed  away,  H^lixi  I  was  heartily 
sick  Ps.  69:  21. 

§  277.  In  like  manner  when  a  succession  of  acts, 
either  announced  or  enjoined  in  the  future,  is  conceived 
of  as  closely  related  throughout,  the  first  verb  is  put  in 
the  future  (imperfect)  or  in  the  imperative,  as  the  case 
may  be,  to  fix  the  starting  point  as  well  as  the  modal 
aspect  of  the  series;  the  verbs  that  follow,  provided  they 
stand  each  at  the  beginning  of  its  own  clause,  are  put 
in  the  preterite  (perfect)  with  Vav  Consecutive,  the 
writer  or  speaker  passing  successively  forward  in  thought 
to  the  time  when  they  shall  have  been  performed  and 
\^ewmg  each  as  accompHshed  in  its  turn.  But  if  any 
word  or  particle  comes  between  Vav  and  the  verb,  the 
secondary  tense  must  give  place  to  the  appropriate  pri- 
mary. Thus  Lev.  4:  13-21  If  Israel  ^ii'ij^  shall  err,  ntTJ^ 
and  it  he  hid  (strictly  'shall  have  been  hid'  at  the  time) '. .  .* 
^r^l  a7id  they  do  ....  TiizJXI  and  shall  be  guilty  ...  rrjT\Z^ 

and  it  shall  become  knoivn ^n^ipn"]   then  they  shall 

offer ....  ^i^^zri'l  and  shall  bring  ....  ^155201  and  shall  lay .... 
t:rT31  and  one  shall  slay  ....  K^in'i  and  the  priest  shall 
bring  ....  bit:"]  ayid  shall  dip....  n-in")  and  shall  sprinkle  .... 
'pT.  °^u"")5;^  fut.  and  shall  put  of  the  blood]  1  Sam.  15:  3 
!]b  go  thou  nn^Sni  and  smite  (strictly  'thou  shalt  hi.ve 
smitten'  i.  e.  I  require  and  expect  this  to  be  done)  ... 


334  .  SYNTAX.  §  277 

Dn'a'irt?^'^  and  devote  ye  ....  '^hTt\  Ij^bl.  fut.  and  thou  shall 
not  spare  . . .  fiTCZ'T}^,  pret.  hut  shalt  slay  etc. 

a.  The  secondary  tenses  have  precisely  the  same  varietj'  of  usage  as 
their  respective  primaries  and  are  substitutes  for  them  in  any  sense  in 
which  they  can  be  employed.  Thus  the  preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive  may 
be  conformed  in  its  meaning  to  a  preceding  future  used  in  a  future  sense 
God  n^ri"^  will  be  ivlth  me  '•':~\iy::^  and  keep  me  etc.  etc.  Gen.  28:  20,  21, 
Lev.  7:  20,  21,  1  Sam.  1:  22,  9:  16,  2  Kin.  5:  11,  Ps.  37:  5,  6,  Isa.  2:  4, 
Jer.  18:  7-10,  Ezek.  11:  8-10,  14:  13-15,  33:  2,  3,  36:  27-31  (with  occasional 
futures  in  the  series),  Zech.  13;  1-6,  Dan.  11:  29,  30;  in  a  conditional  sense, 
every  man  xin^  should  come  to  me  . . .  i'^rih!!^'71  (^'^^^^  I  would  do  him  justice 
2  Sam.  16:  4,  Jer.  37:  10,  Am.  9:3;  in  a  subjunctive  sense  after  "D  lest 
Gen.  3:  22,  32:  12,  Ex.  1:  10,  or  "i?^!?  in  order  that  Gen.  12:  13,  18:  19, 
Deut.  4:  1,  Neb.  6:  13;  or  in  the  sense  of  a  command  ^P"'ri"in"bx  go  not  far 
aivay  ...  tTr^^T]^  and  be  ye  all  ready  Josh.  8:  4,  Ex.  12:  5-8,  Num.  19:  2-7, 
16-19,  Deut.  5:  13,  15,  so  when  the  future  has  the  jussive  form  Gen.  1:  14, 
Deut.  28 :  8,  1  Kin.  1 :  2,  the  following  preterite  if  in  the  2d  person  becoming 
equivalent  to  an  imperative  1  Chron.  22:  11,  2  Chron.  18:  12,  or  when  the 
future  has  the  cohortative  form  Judg.  19:  13,  comp.  ver.  11;  or  expressing 
desire  N3  "^S";  may  thy  word  be  verified  . . .  ri"'i3^  and  do  thou  turn  . . . 
nridl  and  hearken  1  Kin.  8:  26,  28,  30,  permission  Pii^XT^  nrinn  thou 
mayest  give  it  and  he  may  eat  it  Deut.  14:  20,  or  necessity  'I'^o;:?'!  'D^'^ 
they  must  go  and  get  straiv  Ex.  5:  7;  or  denoting  a  general  fact  irrespective 
of  time  sii'SiUi,  they  have  enough  . . .  sirT'Srn  and  leave  their  abundance  Ps. 
17:  14,  Eccles.  3:  13,  Jer.  3:  1,  18:  7-10,  Am.  5:  19,  Nah.  3:  12;  or  custo- 
mary action  in  the  past  vapour  n^^^  used  to  ascend  . . .  •^i^'l■^I'l  and  watered 
Gen.  2:  6,  6:  4,  29:  2,  3,  Ex.  33:  8-11,  Num.  9:  21,  Deut.  11:  10,  Judg.  2:  19, 
1  Sam.  1:6,  2:  15,  19,  20,  2  Sam.  17:  17,  2  Kin.  3:  25,  or  in  the  present 
Jer.  20:  9.  In  1  Kin.  18:  23  the  future  is  continued  in  one  clause  by  futures 
and  in  the  other  by  Vav  Consec.  pret.  in  precisely  the  same  sense,  except 
that  in  the  former  case  greater  stress  is  laid  upon  each  separate  item, 
§  275.  1. 

b.  Vav  Consecutive  Preterite  may  also  be  used  after  the  preterite  when 
this  suggests  what  is  future;  thus  wlien  it  has  the  sense  of  the  future 
perfect  "'^ri'^jT'CX  if  thou  remember  me  (lit.  shalt  have  remembered)  .  .  . 
Nj-n"'CS"!  then  pray  shew  kindness  Gen.  40:  14,  43:  9,  Lev.  13:  56,  2  Sam. 
15:  33',  20:  6,  2  Kin.  5:  20,  1  Chron.  17:  11,  Job  11:  13,  Isa.  16:  12,  Ezek. 
14:  9;  or  denotes  the  certainty  of  that  which  has  not  yet  taken  place,  the 
so  called  prophetic  preterite,  '^'^'>y~'i  their  judges  have  been  thrown  down 
(i.  e.  shall  surely  be  thrown  down)  . . .  'li'r"'^"  ^'^'^  ^^'^J/  *^*"^^  ^'^^^  Ps.  141:  6, 
Isa.  2:  11,  5:  17,  Joel  2:  23-27;  or  expresses  a  purpose  already  formed  to 
be  carried  into  efl'ect  hereafter,  so  frequently  ""rin;,  I  have  set  my  boiv  in 
the  cloud  (i.  e.  I  intend  to  do  so)  nri-;rni  and  it  shall  be  Geu.  9:  13,  17:  5,  6, 
16,  Ex.  31:  6,  Josh.  8:  1,  2,  Ezek.  15:  6,  7,  and  other  verbs  which  are 
similarly  prospective  Gen.  17:  20,  Deut.  15:  6,  7,  Isa.  43:  14,  Zech.  8:  3;  or 
belongs  to  the  present,   and  its   sequences  in  the  future  are  added  by  Var 


§  278  PARTICIPLES.  335 

Consecutive  with  the  preterite  -'^n'lri  iirr*  Jehovah  has  notv  made  room  fot 
us  !)3'1'Se!1  and  we  shall  he  fruitful  Gen.  26:  22,  Dent.  4:  5,  6,  39,  30:  19, 
Judg.  11:8,  %vho  is  David  . . .  ''nr;j?5'i  that  I  should  take,  or  interrogatively 
and  khall  I  take  1  Sam.  25:  11,  1  Kin.  2:  6  (r^^'>:i>":  connects  with  T^yH"^  ver.  5), 
"'^'^'^''^  ^  hereicith  send  . . .  iriEOXl  ayid  thou  ivilt  recover  him  or  tJiat  thoi* 
mayest  recover  him  2  Kin.  5:  6,  Ezek.  3:  17,  Atnos  6:  8,  9;  or  involves  the 
idea  of  contingency  which  is  closely  allied  to  that  of  futurity  ~r^  ^i'^sa 
might  easily  have  lain  (lit.  almost  lay)  . . .  rx:;;?!'!  and  thus  thou  mighiest 
have  brought  Gen.  26:  10.  Sometimes  futurity  is  only  suggested  by  the 
circumstances  or  by  the  general  context  cn"i"3'J31  and  ye  shall  take  heed 
(as  determined  by  the  hortatory  aim  of  the  whole  passage,  comp.  "i^atrfl 
ver.  9)  Deut.  4:  15,  29:  8,  !n"!"?i<':  Jer.  13:  12,  13,  Ezek.  13:  13-15,  17:  19,20, 
Zech.  1:  3,  Mai.  2:  15,  16;  so  n^H"!  Isa.  2:  2  links  itself  in  a  general  way 
with  antecedent  prophecies;  and  it  must  often  be  determined  by  the  drif; 
of  the  connection  rather  than  by  the  immediate  consecution  whether  tT^iHT 
means  and  it  ivill  come  to  imss  Gen.  12:  12,  Deut.  26:  1,  or  and  it  came  to 
pass  §  275.  1.  o.  (3). 

c.  Vav  Consecutive  of  the  preterite  has  the  same  pointing  with  Vav 
Conjunctive,  but  a  distinction  is  made  in  certain  forms,  chiefly  in  the  first 
and  second  persons  singular  by  the  shifting  of  the  accent  from  the  penult 
to  the  ultimate,  §  100.  "When  this  is  not  the  case  it  is  only  the  connection 
that  can  decide.  If  it  is  linked  to  a  future  or  to  any  expression  referring 
to  the  future,  it  is  Vav  Consecutive;  otherwise  it  is  almost  invariably  Vav 
Conjunctive. 

Paeticiples. 

§  278.  The  participles  being  properly  verbal  nouns, 
do  not  in  strictness  involve  any  definite  notion  of  time, 
and  the  connection  must  decide  whether  they  are  to  be 
referred  to  the  past,  present,  or  future,  thus  bsb  means 
falling  Num.  24:  4,  fallen  Judg.  4:  22,  or  about  to  fall 
Jer.  37:  14.    Their  principal  uses  are  the  following,  viz.: 

1.  They  may  express  what  is  permanent  or  habitual, 
as  general  truths  vahd  for  all  time,  (Jehovah)  n^:b5  loveth 
7'ighteousness  Ps.  33:  5;  a  generation  T]Vn  goeth,  and  a  gen- 
eration t^S  Cometh  and  the  earth  H'jb':?  abideth  for  ever 
Eccles.  1:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  6-8,  Job  5:  9-i3,  20:  27,  Ps.  22: 
29,  Prov.  8:  9,  21:  23;  also  a  condition  which  is  con- 
tinuous or  a  course  of  action  which  is  customary  for  a 
longer  or  shorter  period,  he  "i^bpS^  ^3!"2  sacrificed  and 


336  SYNTAX.  §  278 

burned  incense  habitually  1  Kin.  3:  3,  4:  20,  Gen.  39:  23, 
Ex.  18:  14,  2  Chron.  17:  11,  Ps.  19:  2,  Jer.  37:  4.  Passive 
participles  so  used  suggest  not  only  a  constant  experience 
of  what  is  denoted  by  the  verb,  but  in  addition  a  per- 
manent quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  like  the  Latin  fut. 
pass.  part,  in  dus,  5^ni3  not  only  feared  but  worthy  to  be 
feared,  Vin"2  worthy  to  be  praised,  'ibnD  desirable,  bb^)fit 
to  be  eaten  Ley.  11:  47,  Prov.  16:  16,  Isa.  2:  22. 

2.  Where  a  particular  time  is  intended  the  active 
participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  present  tirii^'n^I 
nir\  what  seest  thou  Jer.  1:  11,  Gen.  4:  10,  27:  42,  Ex. 
18: 14,  Judg.  9:  37  (with  n^H),  2  Sam.  3:  13,  1  Kin.  6: 12, 
or  to  the  proximate  future,  in  which  sense  it  is  frequently 
preceded  by  TliTl,  S^i'^  ^33^1  behold,  I  am  about  to  bring 
the  flood  Gen.  6:  17,  7:  4,  19:  13,  48:  21,  Ex.  10:  8,  Isa. 
3:  1,  5:5,  Jer.  28:  16;  and  passive  participles  to  the  past, 
■)^riD  given,  zk'^'2  restored,  n"b^7-3  slain,  ^^^tt  kejyt,  "'Vi:^  done, 

a.  The  active  participles  of  neuter  verbs,  which  have  no  passive  forms, 
are  used  in  a  past  as  well  as  in  a  present  or  future  sense,  Hp  dead  more 
frequently  than  dying  or  about  to  die,  ti^k:^^^  tlmt  toent  forth  Gen.  9:  18, 
D'^itaii  that  came  Josh.  2 :  3.  This  is  occasionally  the  case  with  active 
verbs,  when  it  is  demanded  by  the  connection  who  then  is  he  T^^'ISIli  that 
hath  hunted  venison  Gen.  27:  33;  these  are  the  gods  D"'3an  that  smote  Egypt 
1  Sam.  4:  8,  Gen.  48:  16,  2  Kin.  22:  18.  Interpreters  are  not  agreed  whether 
■^np'^  Gen.  19:  14  means  who  were  to  marry  or  ivho  had  married  Lot's 
daughters.  Participles  of  passive  form  but  active  sense  may  be  used  of  the 
present  or  proximate  future,  ffllis  trusting,  §  90,  &ri53  fighting  or  about  to 
fight,  but  rarely  those  which  are  strictly  passives,  Gen.  19:  15,  Ex.  5:  16, 
1  Chron.  22  :  19. 

3.  In  narrations  and  predictions  the  time  of  the  par- 
ticiple is  reckoned  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking  but 
from  the  period  spoken  of.  They  very  commonly  denote 
that  which  is  contemporaneous  with  the  event  described, 
particularly  in  circumstantial  clauses,  the  two  angels  came 
...  lic^  t^ib"!  and  Lot  (was)  sitting  in  the  gate  of  Sodom 
Gen,  19:  1;  he  came  to  Shiloh  ...  D''3?'ip  VT^^  with  his 
clothes  rent  1  Sam.  4:  12;  thou  shalt  meet  a  company  of 


§  278  PAETIClPLEfl.  337 

prophets  CiT  coming  dozen  1  Sam.  10:  5;  tJiey  shall  de- 
dare  his  righteousness  unto  a  people  ibis  (who  shall  then 
be)  horn  Ps.  22:  32,  Gen.  29:  9,  41:  17,  42:  23,  Dent.  4: 
11,  Josh.  6:  1.  Judg.  13:  9,  Ps.  102:  19;  though  they  may 
upon  occasion  denote  the  relatively  past,  David  said  to 
the  young  man  ""^i^n  ivho  had  told  him  2  Sam.  1 :  13  or 
the  relatively  futmi-e  he  did  not  tell  him  that  he  nnh  tvas 
about  to  flee  Gen.  31:  20. 

4.  The  verb  TCT]  to  he  is  connected  with  active  parti- 
ciples to  form  progressive  tenses,  which  are  more  fre- 
quently employed  in  the  later  than  in  the  earlier  books 
of  the  Old  Testament,  Moses  rii?h  rcT)  was  keeping  the 
flock  Ex.  3:  1;  it  is  also  occasionaUy  connected  with  pas- 
sive participles  to  indicate  the  time  to  which  they  are  to 
be  referred  or  the  aspect  under  which  they  are  to  be 
conceived,  his  throne  "jib]  TcT^l  shall  he  estahlished  for  ever, 

1  Chron.  17:  4,  "iriri  let  their  hahitation  he  Tth'O'j  desolated 
Ps.  69:  26. 

a.  Other  examples  with  active  participles,  Gen.  37:  2,  42:  11,  Ex.  37:  9, 
Judg.  1:  7,    1  Sam.  2:  11,   2  Sam.  3:  6,    1  Kin.  5:  15,   20:  40,   2  Kin.  17:  28, 

2  Chron.  24:  12,  Esth.  9:  21,  Job  1:  14,  Ps.  122:  2,  Isa.  3:  7.  The  passive 
participle  with  rtTi  indicates  a  condition  as  existing  rather  than  an  act  aa 
perfuruied  at  the  time  referred  to,  differing  thus  from  the  meaning  of  the 
primary  tenses  in  the  passive  species,  all  the  people  that  came  out  I'Tn  D^^p 
were  aheady  circumcised  Josh.  5:5;  this  distinction  which  cannot  be  re- 
presented in  English  on  account  of  the  peculiar  formation  of  the  passive 
voice,  is  familiar  in  German,  sie  waren  heschnitten,  not  sie  u-urden  be- 
schnitfen,  comp.  Ex.  19:  11,  15,  Deut.  28:  29,  Josh.  8:  4,  Ps.  73:  14,  Isa.  2:  2. 
In  Esth.  6 :  1  this  combination  has  lost  its  proper  force  and  has  become 
simply  a  compound  tense  Cx'^pj  l"''7Jlj  ond  they  toere  read  before  the  hing. 
The  jussive  ''Tp,  which  is  sometimes  connected  with  participles  Deut.  33:  24, 
Job  1:  21,  is  to  be  understood  with  TjliS,  "i=l~ix  and  in  a  few  other  cases. 
Jer.  2:  17  ~=3'i^  n?2  seems  best  explained  by  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  in 
the  time  that  he  was  leading  thee,  so  Ezek.  27:  34,  Gen.  38:  29,  40:  10. 

h.  The  negative  "fX,  which  includes  in  its  signification  the  substantive 
verb,  is  constantly  used  with  participles,  "iHs  "px  there  was  no  on£  inter- 
preting Gen.  41:  8,  "inii  "^ji'^X  I  am  not  giving  Ex.  5:  10,  "iP?  "px  pn  straw 
is  not  given  ver.  16.  The  simple  negative  xb  not  is  very  rarely  found  with 
them  "ijirxb  Job  29:  12;  where  it  would  be  required,  the  preterite  or  fu- 

22 


338  SYNTAX.  §  279 

ture  tense,  as  the  case  may  be,  must  ordinarily  be  employed,  all  going 
down  to  the  dust  and  njn  xb  not  saving  alive  Ps.  22:  30. 

Infinitive. 

§  279.  The  infinitive  is  an  abstract  verbal  noun,  and, 
like  the  participles,  partakes  of  the  character  both  of  a 
noun  and  a  verb.  As  a  noun  it  may  be  the  subject  or 
the  predicate  of  a  proposition,  or  it  may  be  governed  by 
a  verb,  and  in  its  construct  form  by  a  noun,  or  preposi- 
tion; it  may  also  be  put  in  the  construct  state  before  a 
noun  denoting  either  its  subject  or  its  object. 

a.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  in  a  very  few  instances  used  as  a  subject, 
fiS'a  ribin  n^iv-na  what  doth  your  reproof  reprove?  Job  6:  25,  bix  to  eat 
much  honey  is  not  good  Prov.  25:  27,  Eccles.  4:  17,  or  a  predicate  the  effect 
of  righteousness  shall  be  riani  '^j^'^'T}  quietness  and  confidence  Isa.  32:  17; 
the  construct  more  frequently,  either  without  b,  :;Dw'3  nfj^  to  do  justice 
is  a  joy  to  the  righteous  Prov.  21:  15,  13:  19,  Gen.  2:  18,  or  with  it,  Esth. 
5:  8,  Ps,  92:  2,  Prov,  21 :  9  comp.  25:  24;  Esth.  1:  7,  tJie  words  of  the  wicked 
are  D'n-3'^x  to  lie  in  wait  for  blood  Prov,  12:  6.  In  apposition  with  the  sub- 
ject 2  Sam.  13:  16,  Pronouns  and  predicates  referring  to  an  infinitive  may 
be  in  the  masc.  as  the  more  primary  form,  §  198,  Jer,  2:  19,  or  in  the  fem. 
as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter,  §  198.  a,  1  Sam,  18:  23,  25:  31,  2  Sam.  3:  37, 
Isa,  1:  12,  Jer,  2:  17,  9:  23,  23:  14. 

b.  The  mfinitive  retains  its  absolute  form,  when  separate  and  uncon- 
nected, but  the  construct  form  is  assumed,  when  it  is  in  close  relation  with 
other  Avords.  The  latter  is  accordingly  used  not  only  as  in  nouns,  which 
may  be  in  the  construct  relation  with  following  nouns,  but  commonly  also 
when  governed  by  a  verb,  noun  or  preposition.  The  absolute  infinitive  ia 
rarely  governed  by  a  verb,  31:'^^  ^n^b  learn  to  do  tvell,  ^i^n  >l~na5<  redress 
tcrong  Isa.  1 :  17,  until  he  knoics  tJ'ix'a  to  refuse  the  evil,  '^\^h'z^  and  to  choose 
the  good,  7:  15,  Tp'^J  I'^^n-js  siiix-sbl  and  they  would  not  walk  in  his  ways, 
42:  24,  thou  wilt  make  us  off  scouring  Oijca^  and  refuse  Lam,  3:  45,  Job  13:  3, 
Isa.  57:  20,  Jer.  9:  4;  still  more  rarely  by  a  noun  bsbn  T^nTt  the  way  of 
understanding  Prov.  21:  16,  1:3,  and  almost  never  by  a  preposition  1  Sam. 
1 :  9.  The  construct  infinitive  when  governed  by  a  verb  or  noun  is  usually 
though  not  invariably  preceded  as  in  English  by  the  preposition  b  to,  bs'lX 
ia  crxnb  I  shall  be  able  to  fight  with  him  Num.  22:  11,  but  see  Gen.  37:  4, 
Ex.  2:  3,  etc.;  nhh  nrl  mbb  n^'  a  time  to  be  born  and  a  time  to  die  Eccl, 

3:  2ff.;  b  is  less  frequently  omitted  in  prose  than  in  poetry,  I  know  not  "i 

(how)  Ni::  nx;i  to  go  out  and  to  come  in  1  Kin.  3:  7,  cbrrt  ri:ix^  thou  hast  ' 

refused  to  be  ashamed  Jer.  3:  3,  Mai,  2:  16,  Job  33:  32,  "I'ni?  D^nvs  ready 
to  rou£e  leviathari  Job  3:8.  b  is  not  prefixed  to  an  infinitive,  which  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state  X3  nirn  in  the  year  of  Tartan's 


§279 


INFINITIVR  339 


coniwg  Isa.  20:  1,  Tip"^  t'j']  lisb  r?  a  time  of  mourning  amJ  a  time  of 
dancivg  Eccl.  3:  4.  Such  verbs  as  Jirs  fo  finif^h,  N"^  fo  /Vrtr,  "ik:^'  fo  hivder, 
and  nj:£  used  negatively  ^0  comnmnd  not  to  do  anything,  may  be  followed 
by  "i^  from  with  the  infinitive.  Thus  Moses  finished  ^?f "?  speakivg  lit.  /'/•o»» 
tpeahhig  Ex.  34:  33,  so  Lev.  16:  20,  Josh.  19:  51  (but  b  ver.  49),  1  Sam. 
10:  13,  2  Sam.  6:  18,  1  Chron.  16:2,  Ezek.  43:  23,  but  "lan^  n^3  he  finished 
speaJcing  lit.  to  speak  Gen.  18:  33,  which  is  the  more  usual  construction. 
vz'ch  xn;  he  feared  to  dtvell,  Gen.  19:  30,  but  nnn^  xn-^n-bx  fear  not  to  go 
down  Gen.  46:  3,  Ex.  3:6,  34:  30;  he  hath  restrained  me  nira  from  hearing 
Gen.  16:2;  I  shall  command  "i"'i:"3ri"2  not  to  rain  lit.  from  raining  Isa.  5:  6, 
though  the  more  usual  construction  would  be  "i'^CJ"2tn  ""rbn?  not  to  rain 
Gen.  3:  11,  Ruth  2:  9,  1  Kin.  11:  10,  2  Kin.  17:  15,  Jer.  35:  14.  "i^  is  also 
used  with  the  infinitive  in  other  connections  in  a  negative  sense  his  eyes 
were  dim  rxnp  so  as  not  to  see  lit.  from  seeing  Gen.  27:  1,  nijjj'a  not  doing 
thy  ways  xikao  not  finding  thy  pleasure  Isa.  58  :  13,  56:  6,  Job  34:  30,  2  Kin. 
23:  33  K'ri  (once  even  before  a  future  "i^ip"^""?  Deut.  33:  11);  or  to  in- 
dicate comparison,  §  264,  to  trust  in  Jehovah  is  better  riSia^  than  to  confide 
in  man  Ps.  118:  8,  9,  Eccles.  4:  17,  though  h  may  likewise  be  retained  be- 
fore the  infinitive  and  comparison  be  suggested  by  the  connection  rather 
than  expressed,  rivnb  n">i":i  too  little  to  be  I^Oc.  5:  1. 

e.  The  preposition  b  is  used  with  the  infinitive  to  express  (1)  design  or 
purpose,  he  went  up  naibl  ninnrrib  to  worship  and  to  sacrifice  1  Sam.  1:  3, 
Ex.  21:  14,  32:  29,  Lev.  10:  10,  11,  Deut.  4:  38,  Job  5:  11,  3S:  30,  Ezek. 
17:  14.  (2)  the  result,  thou  shalt  keep  the  charge  of  Jehovah  ris'ib  so  as  to 
walk  in  his  tvays  "lirb  to  keep  his  statutes  1  Kin.  2:  3,  4,  14:  8,  1  Sam. 
19:  5,  Ezek.  17:  15,  18;  this  may  be  practically  equivalent  to  a  Kmit  of 
time  ?te  shall  eat  butter  and  honey  "iP^ffV  until  he  knows  Isa.  7:  15;  or  to 
the  Latin  gerund  in  do  "liixl?  12^  spoke  saying  lit.  so  as  to  say,  Lev.  10:  3 
(but  Num.  6:  23  "li^X  by  §  280.  2),  ntj^b  X^a  created  so  as  to  make,  made 
by  a  creative  act  Gen.  2:  3,  34:  7,  Lev.  21:  9,  Deut.  11:  19,  1  Chron.  10:  13, 
Ps.  103:  20,  Jer.  11:  17,  44:  17,  Ezek.  14:  13.  (3)  the  time  of  an  action 
nirb  at  JoaVs  sending  i.  e.  ivhen  Joah  sent  2  Sam.  18:  29,  Gen.  24:  63, 
Ex.  14:  27,  Deut.  23:  12.  (4)  a  periphrastic  future,  nrnb  Trs*  that  which  is 
to  be  Eccles.  3:  15,  nii-jJiTi^  ivhat  is  there  to  do  i.  e.  tvhat  shall  I  do  Isa. 
5:  4,  5,  37:  26,  38:  20,  2  Chron.  12:  12,  36:  19,  Prov.  18:  24,  d^'rn  in-;] 
xizb  the  sun  teas  about  to  set  Gen.  15:  12,  Josh.  2:  5,  nrnb  Iran  they  came 
to  he  1  Sam.  14:  21.  This  form  of  expression  may  be  suggestive  of  an  in- 
tended action,  Ti'nslp  one  is  to  cut,  intends  to  cut  Isa.  44:  14,  2  Sam.  14:  16, 
2  Chron.  11:  22,  Esth.  7:  8,  Prov.  20:  25,  Hos.  12:  3;  or  of  possibility,  'jiX 
r|"'cinb  it  is  not  possible  to  add  to  it  and  "in.}b  "px  there  cannot  be  taken 
from  it  Eccles.  3:  14,  2  Chron.  20:  6;  necessity,  Ephraim  N'^ikinb  is  to  bring 
out  i.  e.  must  bring  out  Hos.  9:  13,  "i"^ZTn3  xb  one  must  not  make  mention 
Am.  6:  10,  Job  30:  6;  propriety  or  duty  'CrTT!rh  xb  is  not  to  he  registered 
1  Chron.  5:  1,  9:  25,  lT'"b  should  one  help  the  tvicked  2  Chron.  19:  2,  nisinb 
you  ought  to  smite  2  Kin.  13:  19.  In  some  instances  it  is  doubtful  whether 
b  with  the  inf.  is  a  periphrastic  future  or  is  to  be  otherwise  explained 
Eccles.  9:1,  Jer.  17:  10,  Hab.  1:  17,  Job  36:  20.    Various  other  preposition* 

22* 


340  SYNTAX  §  280 

may  precede  the  infinitive,  as  3  in,  3  like,  at,  IS  until,  ^S  upon,  '""b^  in 
order  to,  )'S'2  because  of,  "'isb  before,  etc.  Their  occurrence  before  fiuita 
forms  of  the  verb  in  lieu  of  conjunctions  is  rare  and  exceptional,  Gen.  31: 
20,  There  is  an  occasional  ellipsis  of  the  infin.  ni'^'n  to  be  after  a  preposi- 
tion, he  removed  her  tin'^nrn?  from  being  queen  1  Kin.  15:  13,  Isa.  7:8,  17;  1, 
25:  2,  Jer.  48:  2,  Job  34:  30. 

d.  The  infinitive  in  the  construct  before  its  subject.  ck'^SlnS  in  their 
being  created  i.  e.  when  they  were  created;  in  the  day  Q'^n'sx  i^J'T?  ^"i-? 
of  Jehovah  God's  making  earth  and  heaven  Gen.  2:  4;  there  loas  no  water 
cyn  nnkj^  for  the  drinking  of  the  people  Ex.  17:1,  2  Kin.  14:  22;  compound 
subject  Jer.  29:  2;  pronominal  suffix  as  subject,  Lev.  16:  1,  Num.  30:  16, 
Deut.  12:  30,  2  Sam.  5:  13;  the  infin.  and  suf3fix  instead  of  a  finite  tense, 
•'rSTyi  and  my  dwelling  (shall  be)  i.  e.  I  shall  dwell  Ps.  23:  6,  so  Job  9:  27, 
Zeph.  3:  20,  Dan.  11:1.  Before  its  object,  STb'^"'2Q  ni<b  the  accepfing  of  the 
person  of  the  wicked  Prov.  18:  5,  Pins-nn  to  yield  its  strength  Gen.  4:  12, 
1  Kin.  16:  21.  Construct  before  its  subject  and  governing  an  object,  Gen. 
5:  4,  13:  10,  41 :  39,  46:  30,  50:  14,  Ex.  7:  25,  Deut.  1:  4,  4:  14,  2  Sam.  14:  13, 

1  Kin.  13:  31,  2  Kin.  5:  7,  2  Chron.  34:  19,  Isa.  29:  13,  Jer.  24:  1,  28:  12, 
32:   16,   34:  8,  36:  2  ,  40:  1.      The  object  interposed   before  the  subject, 

2  Sam.  18:  29;  a  par  cle  so  interposed  Job  34:  22.  The  infinitive  preceded 
by  a  noun  in  the  cc  struct  gtate  receives  the  article  properly  belonging  to 
the  noun  in  Gen.  '>    ^  Num.  4:  12,  §§  248.  6.  c,  259. 

e.  The  ^^'ti'y^  dverb  ordinarily  used  with  the  infinitive  is  Tl^a  ,  1 
commanded  H^e/^^  '^^^'^riba^  not  to  eat  Gen.  3:11,  Deut.  4:21,  12:  23,  17:  20, 
1  Kin.  11:  10,  ou.^^*^:  8,  38:  26,  Ezek.  13:  22,  17:  14,  Dan.  9:  11;  once 
h  ^hh-^h  2  Kin.  23:  10;  with  the  prep.  )->2,  '^th^'9  Num.  14:  16,  Ezek.  16:  28, 
if^^nb  occurs  before  the  pret.  or  fut.  Ex.  20:  20,  2  Sam.  14:  14,  Jer.  23:  14, 
27:  18,  Ezek.  13:  3;  ""n^a'n?  four  times  before  a  pret.  in  the  same  phrase, 
Num.  21:  35,  Deut.  3:  3J  Josh.  8:  22,  11:  8. 

§  280.  1.  The  absolute  infinitive,  expressing  simply 
the  essential  idea  of  the  verb  apart  from  all  modifica- 
tions of  tense,  number  and  person,  may  be  introduced 
without  logical  connection  as  an  exclamation,  jHti  Min 
V^  Tl^ir\•J:^  ^irn  bij^  "|i<:2  tihir^  npn  lo!  slaying  oxen!  and 

IVT  T  :  T    T  T        )  T   :  't    T  o  u 

killing  shee_p!  eating  flesh!  and  drinking  wine!  Isa.  22:  13, 
21:  5,  59:  4,  13,  Jer.  7:  9,  Hos.  4:  2,  2  Chron.  31:  10, 
Job  15:  35,  or  in  apposition  to  some  preceding  word  by 
which  attention  is  directed  to  it,  I  tvill  tell  you  what  I 
will  do  ""cn  take  away  the  hedge,  JIB  break  down  the  fence 
Isa.  5:  5,  5^8:  6,  7,  Jer.  9:  23,  23:  14. 

a.  In  a  very  few  instances  the  construct  infinitive  is  similarly  used, 
Ezek.  21  :  31,  Mai.  2:  13. 


§  280  INFINITIVE.  341 

2.  Or  it  may  be  used  in  an  explanatory  clause,  de- 
fining the  mode  of  a  preceding  action  or  the  circum- 
stances attending  it,  as  the  Latin  gerund  in  do  or  the 
Enghsh  participle,  they  tare  me  p'^ri  gnashing  their  teeth 
at  me  Ps.  35:  15,  16,  I  will  perform  all  rfi::!  bl^ri  he- 
ginning  and  ending  1  Sam.  3:  12,  Gen.  30:  32,  Ex.  30:  36, 
Deut.  9:  21,  13:  16,  27:  8,  2  Sam.  8:  2,  Job  15:  3,  Isa. 
30:  14,  57:  17,  Hab.  3:  13,  Zech.  7:  3.  The  principal 
verb  may  be  thus  repeated  for  the  sake  of  a  fuller  state- 
ment, we  devoted  them  . . .  C^nji  devoting  every  city,  men, 
ivonien  and  children  Deut.  3:  6,  which  is  commonly  made 
by  adding  another  verb  in  the  absolute  infinitive,  Jeho- 
vah will  smite  Egypt  J^'!*'^']  t'p^}  smiting  and  healing  Isa. 
19:  22,  1  Kin.  20:  37,  2  Kin.  4:  43,  2  Ch-on.  36:  15,  Jer. 
11:  7,  12:  17,  Joel  2:  26. 

a.  Infinitives  are  thus  used  as  explanatory  of  -  eceding  absolute  in- 
finitive, Jer.  32:  33,  or  imperative  Isa.  7:  11.  A  f  rb  is  added  to  each 
infinitive,  Isa.  31 :  5.  The  subject  of  the  inf  •  rs  from  that  of  the 
principal  verb,  Jer.  22:  19,  31 :  2.  Some  abso.  -ves  are  so  frequentl3- 
employed  in  this  subsidiary  manner,  that  they  aie  practically  reduced  to 
adverbs,  e.  g.  pn'n  Josh.  3:  16,  rik"}n,  n-ip-^n,  §  236.  3  (2). 

3.  Continuing  a  principal  clause  it  may  be  used  in- 
stead of  the  finite  form  represented  in  the  preceding 
verb,  and  borrow  its  complexion  as  to  tense  and  other 
relations  from  it,  ^•pr^^^l  and  they  blew  ivith  trumpets  V'ii;"! 
and  brake  the  p)itchers  prop,  there  was  breaking  pitchers 
Judg.  7:  19;  all  this  ^ilb-nx  ■,in:i  ^Trk)  I  have  seen  and 
applied  my  heart  Eccl.  8:  9;  ^lip";  they  sJiall  buy  fields  for 
money  uihS"]  and  write  the  pcqjers  Dihn']  and  seal  (them) 
ni'ni  and  take  witnesses  Jer.  32:  44. 

••  T  : 

a.  It  may  thus  continue  a  past  tense,  Gen.  41:  43,  Ex.  8:  11,  1  Sam. 
2:  28,  1  Kin.  9:  25,  1  Chron.  5:  20  (change  of  subject),  2  Chron.  28:  19, 
Neh.  8:  8,  9:  8,  13,  Esth.  3:  13,  9:  6,  12,  16-18,  Eccl.  9:  11  (but  see  4:  1,  7), 
Jer.  14:  5,  19:  13,  37:  21,  Zech.  3:  4,  7:  5,  Dan.  9:  5,  11;  or  a  future,  Lev. 
25:  14,  Num.  30:  3,  Deut.  14:  21,  Josh.  9:  20,  Zech.  12:  10;  a  jussive  fu- 
ture, Esth.  2:  3,  6:  9;  imperative  Am.  4:  5;  present  Ezek.  11:  7;  participle, 
Hab.  2:  15;  construct  infinitive  Ex.  32:  6,   1  Sam.  22:  13,  25:  26,  33.     A 


342  BYNTAX.  §  2S1 

verbal  noun  i»  Bimilarly  used,  Isa.  8:6;  and  occasionally  a  construct  infini' 
tive  e.  g.  for  the  pret.  2  Chron.  7:  3,  fut.  1  Chron.  21:  24,  2  Chron.  7:  17, 
Obad.  ver.  4,  part.  Jer.  44;  19. 

b.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  for  a  finite  form,  when  no 
verb  precedes  in  the  same  sentence,  "lis";  'iVi-ny  S"in  (shall)  tJie  fault-finder 
contend  tvith  the  Almighty  Job  40:  2.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  ex- 
pressed in  this  instance,  as  in  others  when  perspicuity  requires  it,  so  ni'Ttl 
:nr!r1  Nik"!  the  living  creatures  ran  and  returned  Ezek.  1 :  14,  '^2^t  nriJ  1 
praised  Eccl.  4:  2,  Gen.  17:  10,  Lev.  6:  7,  Num.  15:  35,  Esth.  9:  1,  Ps.  17:  5, 
Prov.  17:  12. 

4.  At  the  beginning  of  a  clause  it  may  be  a  substi- 
tute for  the  imperative,  liit  remember  the  sahhath-day 
Ex.  20:  8,  Tjibr;  go  and  say  2  Sam.  24:  12,  Ex.  13:  3,  Deut. 
1:  16,  5:  12,  16:  1,  31:  26,  2  Kin.  3:  16,  5:  10,  Neli.  7:3, 
Isa.  37:  30,  Jer.  2:  2,  19:  1. 

§  281.  1.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
the  finite  forms  to  add  emphasis  or  intensity  to  the  idea, 
which  ma}^  be  variously  expressed  in  English,  n"-Fi  T\T2 
tJiou  shalt  surely  die,  Gen.  2:  17,  ^D^N'i  ikn  we  ^plainly  saw 
Gen.  26:  28,  the  man  bi^iT  biJ^iT  asked  very  strictly  Gen. 
43:  7,  T^i^'tin  T^y)  I  have  done  very  wickedly  1  Chron.  21: 
17,  TbiTS  l^buin  U^b  Itvill  not  utterly  destroy  Am.  9:  8. 

a.  Ewald  distinguishes  the  following  cases;  when  there  is  (1)  a  con- 
trast with  what  precedes,  thou  shalt  not  conceal  him  but  ^ii"inri  sSri  shalt 
surely  kill  him  Deut.  13:  10,  Judg.  1:  28,  2  Sam.  24:  24,  Lam.  5:  22,  Ezek. 
16:  4,  or  follows  Gen.  2:  16,  Deut.  30:  18,  Ps.  118:  13,  18,  or  both  the  con- 
trasted acts  are  emphasized,  Num.  30:  15,  16,  Ps.  126:  6.  (2)  Implied  con- 
trast, as  when  something  is  not  what  might  have  been  expected,  Am.  3:  5, 
or  a  conditional  suggestion  is  tacitly  opposed  to  its  opposite,  Ex.  19:  5, 
Num.  12:  14,  Judg.  14:  12,  1  Sam.  12:  25,  or  a  particle  of  limitation  as  p'^ 
or  ">?  only  sets  an  act  over  against  every  thing  beside.  Gen.  27:  30,  44:  28, 
Judg.  7:  19.  (3)  A  question,  which  involves  its  own  answer,  and  is  rhetori- 
cally stronger  than  a  direct  statement  Gen.  37:  8,  Judg.  11:  25,  1  Sam.  2:  27, 
Isa.  50:  2,  Ezek.  14:  3,  Zech.  7:  5.  (4)  An  act  regarded  as  absolutely  cer- 
tain or  as  possessing  a  high  degree  of  intensity  or  completeness,  Deut.  31: 
29,  Judg.  15:  2,  1  Sam.  14:  28,  22:  22,  24:  21,  25:  28,  2  Kin.  5:  11,  18:  30, 
Job  27:  22,  Jer.  20:  15,  37:  9,  Hos.  4:  17,  Joel  1:  7,  Am.  5:5.  (5)  An 
earnest  asseveration,  remonstrance,  command  or  threatening.  Gen.  15:  13 
Ex.  19:  12,  13,  Ruth  2:  16,  Job  13:  5,  Am.  7:  17,  Zech.  11:  17. 

b.  The  infinitive  is  mostly  of  the  same  species  with  the  finite  verb  to 
which  it  is  added,  Num.  16:   13,   22:   17,  Josh.  24:  10,  2  Sam,  17:  10,  11, 


§281 


ENTINITIVE.  343 


2  Kin.  18:  S3,  although  this  is  not  always  the  case.  Thus,  the  Kal,  on 
account  of  its  greater  simplicitj-  of  form,  may  be  joined  with  a  derivative 
species,  e.  g.  Niphal  Vjrs-]  bipo  Ex.  19:  13,  21:  22,  22:  11,  12,  2  Sam.  23:  7, 
Job  6:  2,  PielJosh.  24:  10(?),  Pualri^t:  Cl'-^-J  Gen.  37:  33,  Hiphil  Q-:^':  cnr  1  Sam. 
23  :  22,  Hophal  r^^^''  ni-Q  Ex.  19  :  12,  Hithpael  n-j-j-^rn  ziix:  Isa.  24:  19 ;  or  one 
derivative  species  with  another  of  like  signification,  nnS3  xb  iTHSn  Lev. 
19:  20,  nbrjn  xb  bnnn  Ezek.  16:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  16,  2  Kin.  3:  23.  Occasionally 
the  infinitive  is  borrowed  from  a  cognate  verb,  ri^X  "bs  Zeph.  1 ;  2,  Jer 
8:  13  (rox  and  riW),  ^st^T^  dinx  Isa.  28:  28  (rnx  and  C^n),  Jer.  48:  9. 
For  the  sake  of  greater  emphasis  the  prolonged  form  of  the  plural  ending 
in  the  future  '*!  is  sometimes  adopted  in  verbs  joined  with  the  abs.  inf. 
',>l",-;rri  "I'i^'j  Deut.  6;  17,  11:  22,  1  Sam.  2:  16.  The  negative  adverb  com- 
monly stands  before  the  finite  form  of  the  verb  ^ib^^r.  xb  ~"!3  Num.  23:  25, 
Jer.  13 :  12,  rai-ely  before  the  infinitive  and  only  when  special  emphasis  is 
laid  upon  the  negative,  )^h^7\  ni^-^b  Gen.  3:  4,  2  Kin.  8:  10  K'thibh,  Ps. 
49:  8,  Jer,  3:  1,  Am.  9:8. 

c.  The  construct  infinitiYe  is  very  rarely  used  in  such  combinations  in- 
stead of  the  absolute,  siJbin  Vin  Neh.  1:  7,  n-rtS-nrn  Ps.  50:  21  ;  once  it 
is  added  in  a  varied  form  to  a  preceding  construct  infin  tive,  rniss  nii^fis 
2  Bam.  6:  20.  The  finite  verb  is  repeated,  ''i^'V'}  n^O  2  Sam.  15:  8  K'thibh, 
Gen.  48:  19,  Judg.  5:  7,  1  Sam.  17:  13,  to  which  another  verb  is  added 
Jef.  10 :  25,  Obad.  ver.  16.  Imperatives  of  the  same  species  Judg.  4:18,  1  Sam. 
24:  12,  2  Sam.  20:  16  or  of  diff"erent  species  are  combined,  Isa.  29:  9,  Hab. 
1:  5,  Zeph.  2:  1.  A  verbal  noun  takes  the  place  of  the  infinitive,  ^1"ri  ri"i"]:y 
Hab.  3:  9,  or  is  added  to  it  Isa.  22:  18. 

2.  When  the  absolute  infinitive  follows  the  verb  it 
sometimes  expresses  continuance  or  repetition  partic- 
ularly with  verbs  of  motion  and  when  two  infinitives  are 
connected  together,  Hiirl  Kl'ii^  5<ii:);i  and  it  went  out  going 
and  returning  i.  e.  it  kept  going  to  and  fro  Gen.  8:  7,  so 
ver.  3,  12:  9,  'i^Jj^  Tj'!iri  ibbn  they  ivent  on  lowing  as  they 
went  1  Sam.  6:12,  "lil'l'i  bs-^l  oi^^iS!  ^i"St1  and  I  spake 
to  you  acting  early  and  speaking  L  e.  continuously  and 
earnestly  Jer.  7:  13. 

o.  Thus,  'c^z'S  :;sr'^l  he  judges,  judges  i.  e.  is  always  judging  Gen.  19:  9, 
5"iN"D:<  bhx'sl  he  is  also  forever  devourifig  Gen.  31:  15,  "'1"^:^  T^-r^  he  has 
gone  on  refining  Jer.  6:  29,  xl3  xri  and  he  shall  come  repeatedly  Dan.  11 :  10, 
Num.  11:  32,  16:  13,  Judg.  14:  9,  2  Kin.  2:  11,  Jer.  23:  17,  29:  19.  This 
order  of  the  words,  however,  quite  frequently  has  the  same  signification  as 
when  the  infinitive  precedes  the  verb,  and  simplj'  expresses  certaint3'  or 
intensity.  Thus  I  will  go  down  with  thee  to  Egypt  and  I  nP"-C5  ?];:"N  will 
also  surely  bring  thee  vp  Gen.  46:  4,  so  Josh.  7:  7,  2  Kin.  5:  11.  In  Num. 
24:  10,   Josh.  24:  10   "'"'la  ""i"!!  might  mean  kept  on  b'essing  these  threfl 


344  SYNTAX.  §  282,  283 

times,  but  not  Num.  23:  11  when  it  had  been  clone  but  once.  "When  used 
with  the  imperative,  the  abs.  infin.  always  follows:  Th':i  V^'ii  may  mean 
hear  attentively  Job  13:  17,  37:  2,  or  hear  on,  continue  to  hear,  Isa.  6:  9, 
Num.  11:  15,  Judg.  5:  23,  Jer.  22:  10.  The  absolute  infinitives  denoting 
Continuous  action  in  a  few  instai.ces  precede  tlae  finite  verb  rpS^T  Tp^rj 
n::^rn  they  ivalk,  mincing  as  they  tvalk  Isa.  3:  16,  Jer.  50:  4. 

b.  When  two  verbs  are  connected  together  to  express  continuous  ac- 
tion, a  participle,  §  278.  1,  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  absolute  infini- 
tive in  the  case  of  one  or  both,  nbi^si  nBi?  ...  n'ii!  ^^■^  2  Sam.  15:  30,  T\^h 
ilzZ'i  T|'3li  Jer.  41:  6,  2  Sam.  16:  5;  an  adjective  may  even  take  the  place 
of  the  second,  V'iji.  "i3n  T\^h  Gen.  26:  13,  2  Sam.  5:  10,  1  Chron.  11 :  9, 
ntpl  Tp^vJ  ...  T(^l?l  Judg.  4:  24;  tlie  finite  verb  is  omitted  in  ~^n  '^b'n-iia 
^1151  Esth.  9:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  26,  Jon.  1:  11;  tlie  substantive  verb  takes  its 
place,  "niDni  T^iBrt  rn  Gen.  8:  5,  bn:!  "^h  ■J£":3'i!7";  "'n"]1  2  Chron.  17:  12. 
The  second  verb  may  also  be  put  in  one  of  the  finite  tenses,  Tj'i''f7  C^^n 
Jiypni  Josh.  6:  13,  Vil;^']^  Tjilirj  ...  T\?p  2  Sam.  16:  13,  13:  19,  or  even  both 
verbs  2  Kin.  21:  13. 

§  282.  Constructions  begun  with  a  participle  or  in- 
finitive are  not  infrequently  continued  in  the  preterite 
or  future,  since  these  tenses  are  the  fundamental  forms 
of  the  verb  and  include  within  their  scope  all  the  rela- 
tions of  time  and  mode,  T\TTib  in  order  to  widows'  being 
their  prey  and  ^ti^  that  they  may  plunder  orphans  Isa.  10: 
2,  T]'l?i7J  leading  counsellors  atvay  spoiled  and  bbirr;  he 
maketh  judges  fools  Job  12:  17. 

a.  The  absolute  infinitive  may  thus  be  continued  by  the  preterite, 
Josh.  6:  13,  Jer.  23:  14,  or  the  future  Job  15:  35,  Isa.  58:  5-7.  The  con- 
struct infinitive  by  the  preterite  1  Sam.  4:  19,  2  Chron.  16:7,  Ezek.  13:  8, 
16:  31;  Vav  consec.  pret.  Gen.  9:  14,  Josh,  23:  16,  1  Kin.  2:  37,  2  Kin. 
18;  32;  future,  1  Kin.  8:  35,  Job  11:  5,  33:  17,  Isa.  1:  15;  Vav  consec.  fut. 
Ps.  50:  16,  92:  8,  Isa.  30:  12,  Ezek.  25:  15.  Participles  by  the  preterite, 
2  Sam.  3:  34,  Ps.  15:  2,  3,  22:  30,  Am.  5:  7,  8;  future  Ps.  49:  7,  104:  32, 
Isa.  5:  8,  31:  1;  Vav  consec.  fut.  Gen.  27:  33,  1  Sam.  2:  6,  Job  3:  21, 
Jer.  13:  10. 

§  283.  The  dependence  of  one  verb  upon  another  is 
most  distinctly  expressed  by  putting  the  second  verb  in 
the  infinitive.  The  second  verb  may,  however,  be  in  form 
coordinated  with  the  first  by  being  put  in  the  same  or 
an  equivalent  tense  with  or  without  a  copulative,  the 
true  relation  between  the  verbs  being  left  to  be  inferred 


§  284  OBJECT  OF  VERBS.  345 

from  their  obvious  signification,  Tj*fri  b^kin  he  tvas  tvilling, 
walked  i.  e.  Jie  was  iviUiag  to  lualk  or  ivalked  willingly 
Hos.  5:11,  Dnns;  IV  Ci^bix  Kb  Ituill  no  more  add  to  pity 
i.  e.  will  not  again  pity  Hos.  1:  G,  T]bn  D^S'I?"^  being  early 
to  go  or  going  early  Hos.  6:  4,  lioto  -n'j^")'!  bi^i^  shall  1 
endure  and  see  i.  e.  endure  to  see  Estli.  8:  6,  «/?/e  Affve  dealt 
truly  ^j^b^r*!  aJzcZ  ^;iac?e  Abimelech  king  i.  e.  in  making 
him  king  judg.  9:  16,  Deut.  1:5,  31:  12,  Job  6:  9,  19:  3, 
?rov.  23:  35,  Cant.  2:  3,  Isa.  42:  21,  52:  1,  Lam.  4:  14, 
Zeph.  3:  7,  Zech.  4:  10. 

a.  This  coordination  most  frequently  occurs,  when  the  second  verb  ex- 
presses the  principal  idea  and  the  first  simply  qualifies  it,  and  might  con- 
sequently he  rendered  by  an  adverb,  ^"iS'nri  i3"in  bx  do  not  multiply  speak 
i.  e.  speak  much  1  Sam.  2:  3,  Ps.  51:  4,  "nn'j  ^ipiirn  they  have  deepened 
irrupted  i.  e.  deeply  corrupted  Hos.  9 :  9,  "j'"^^!  ""D?"?!)  ow<^  ^*^  hastened  and 
ran,  ran  hastily  1  Sam.  17:  48,  16:  16,  Ps.  37:  7,  Isa.  3:  26.  In  other  in- 
stances of  this  sort  the  second  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  n|'j  CjO'l  Gen. 
8:  10  a7id  he  added  to  send  or  ripir'_l  vja'T  1  Sam.  19:  21  and  he  added  and 
sent,  for  he  sent  once  more;  Sn'is'ib  avrn  Job  7:  7  return  to  see  or  "^riS^ 
ni<"ixi  Eccl.  4:  7  return  and  see  for  see  again;  xiiV  3''^pn  brought  near 
to  come,  came  near  Gen.  12:  11,  Vn'zb  rNkn:  didst  hide  thyself  to  flee,  flee 
secretly  31:  27,  b'Nial?  ^"'''-j'pr'  t^^ou  hast  been  hard  in  asking,  asked  what  is 
hard  2  Kin.  2:  10,  i  Kin.  14:  9,  Ps.  33:  3,  126:  2,  127:  2,  Joel  2:  20,  Am. 
4:  4,  Jon.  4:  2,  Mic.  6:  8,  13.  This  order  is  sometimes  reversed  and  the 
qualifying  verb  put  in  the  infinitive,  thus  wg  find  both  IpTib  N^^Stl  he 
was  wonderfully  helped  2  Chron.  26:  15  and  X''^Eri3  i^'hv  he  did  wonderfully 
Joel  2:  26. 

b.  In  the  following  instances  the  verbs  thus  co-ordinated  have  different 
-nbjects,  ih-nSD  bi^ist  I  shall  be  able,  tee  shall  smite  him  i.  e.  I  shall  with 

Dur  aid  be  able  to  smite  him.  Num.  22:  6,  ~^"1!!<"ip";  '^B^b'^n  xb  thou  shalt 
not  add  fhty  shall  call  thee  i.  e.  thou  shalt  no  more  be  called  by  them,  Isa. 
47:  1,5;  or  are  in  different  tenses,  fiiZX  "'ri"'il|  xb  I  knotv  not  (how)  I  shall 
flatter  i.  e.  how  to  flatter.  Job  32:  22;  0  that  !ini<:i'2X1  inrn''  I  knew  and 
might  find  him  i.  e.  how  to  find  him.  Job  23:  3. 

Object  op  Verbs. 

§  284.  When  the  predicate  is  a  verb  it  may  be  ex- 
tended by  the  addition  of  a  direct  or  indirect  object,  an 
adverb  or  some  other  quahfying  expression.  The  object 
of  a  transitive  verb  ordinarily  stands  after  both  the  verb 


346  SYNTAX.  §  284 

and  its  subject,  and  if  it  is  an  indefinite  noun  is  distin- 
guished simply  by  its  position  or  by  its  relation  to  the 
verb  as  determined  by  its  meaning;  if  a  definite  noun, 
or  a  demonstrative,  relative,  or  interrogative  pronoun, 
it  may,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  writer,  be  further  distin- 
guished by  prefixing  to  it  ni>  the  sign  of  the  definite  ob- 
ject; if  a  personal  pronoun,  it  is  suffixed  either  to  tllS!  or 
to  the  governing  verb. 

a.  The  usual  order  of  words  in  Hebrew  is  verb,  subject,  object,  Gen. 
1:  1,  21;  but  in  a  circumstantial  clause,  §  309,  the  subject,  to  which  atten- 
tion is  specially  drawn,  precedes  the  verb  1:  2,  2:  5,  6.  Of  two  objects  the 
near  will  precede  the  remote  3:  20,  5:  2,  and  the  direct  the  indirect  2:  20, 
21;  and  subsidiary  expressions  follow  1:  24,  26,  2:  8,  3:  8.  If  the  object, 
whether  direct  or  indirect,  be  a  pronoun,  it  will  immediately  follow  the 
verb  1:  17,  22,  29,  2:  19,  4:  15,  25.  The  order  is,  however,  liable  to  such 
modifications  as  emphasis  may  requii-e.  Thus,  if  stress  be  laid  upon  the 
subject,  it  may  precede  the  verb  3:  13,  4:  15,  Ps,  3:  6,  from  emphasis  of 
contrast  Ps.  1:  6  or  of  parallelism  Ps.  2:  1,  2.  10.  So  the  object  may  pre- 
cede the  verb,  whether  direct.  Gen.  3:  10,  15,  18,  (emphasis  of  parallelism) 
Ps.  3:8,  or  indirect  (emphasis  of  contrast)  Gen.  1:  5,  3:  16,  17  comp.  ver. 
14  4:  5  comp.  ver.  4;  the  remote  object  may  precede  the  near  (emphasis 
of, parallelism)  Ps.  2:8,  or  the  indirect  may  precede  the  direct  Gen.  1:  6, 
8,  10,  3:  21.  The  time,  place  and  manner  of  an  action  belong  properly  at 
the  end  of  a  clause  Gen.  1:  9,  20,  3:  8,  14;  though  they  may  be  placed  at 
the  beginning  1:  1,  3:  19,  or  wherever  persjjicuity  or  emphasis  may  seem 
to  demand  3:  24,  4:  24.  The  removal  of  a  word  from  its  natural  position 
to  the  end  of  a  clause  is  also  sometimes  emphatic,  thus  the  subject 
Ps.  34:  22,  the  indirect  pronominal  object  Ps.  4:  4,  and  the  vocative  ni.T' 
ver,  7. 

h.  A  noun,  which  is  the  direct  object  of  a  verb,  may  receive  ns, 
whether  it  is  definite,  §  249,  by  signification,  as  a  proper  noun,  God  tempted 
DniliX-nN  Alraham  Gen.  22:  1,  or  is  made  so  by  the  article,  God  saw 
"liknTN  the  light  Gen,  1:  4,  a  pronominal  suffix,  take,  now,  "insna-ns  my 
blessing  Gen.  33:  11,  or  construction  with  a  definite  noun,  Jacob  called 
Dipati  D^TK  tAe  name  of  the  place  Gen.  35:  15.  The  particle  nx  is  not 
essential  in  any  of  these  cases  and  is  often  omitted,  particularly  in  poetry. 
If  several  definite  nouns  are  connected  together  as  the  object  of  a  verb  or 
if  a  verb  has  more  than  one  definite  object,  nx  may  be  repeated  before  each 
of  them,  I  have  given  nxTn  7';;|^5f^■^l^t  this  land  . . .  "'rjTJn-nx  the  Kenite 
'^■i?Ku""2<'i  and  the  Kenizzite,  etc.,  etc..  Gen.  15:  18-21;  they  stripped  "ns 
tjbi'i  Joseph  ■insns-nx  of  his  coat  d'^ean  rDrs-nx  the  full-length  coat  Gen. 
37:  23,  Ex.  35:  11-19,  Lev.  7:  3,  4,  2  Chron.  29:  18,  19;  (r  it  may  stand 
before  a  part  of  them  only,  Ex.  33:  2,  Deut.  12:  6,  1  Kin.  1:  44,  or  it  may 
be  omitted  altogether,  Deut.  11:  14.     In  a  very  few  instances  the  article  is 


§  281 


OBJECT  OF  VERBS.  347 


dropped  after  rx,  which  of  itself  indicates  the  definiteness  of  the  noun,  he 
reared  up  for  himself  rril^T^  the  pillar  2  Sam.  18:  18;  ayul  carver 
strengthened  t^ysmf.  gilder  Isa.  41:  7,  where  the  omission  of  the  article  is 
poetic,  §  250;  nnx  rir-E-rx  1  Sam.  26:  20  is  definite  in  thought,  if  not  in 
form,  as  David  meant  himself;  Lev.  20:  14,  Judg.  7:  8,  2  Sam.  4:  11,  Job 
18:  25,  Eccl.  7:  7,  Ezek.  16:  32. 

e.  Pronouns  with  nx:  HJ-nx  this  ye  shall  eat  Lev.  11:  9;  put  nTTX 
this  (fellow)  in  the  prison  1  Kin.  22:  27,  Gen.  44:  29,  Ps.  92:  7;  — ir5<  rx 
vhom  they  have  cast  info  the  prison  Jer.  38:  9;  he  kneiv  niyi'^x  rx  what 
his  youngest  son  had  done  to  him  Gen.  9:  24;  Pie^n  ■''a"nx  whom  hast  thou 
reproached?  Isa.  37:  23.  It  does  not  occur  before  the  neuter  1T3;  Jer. 
23:  33  is  only  an  apparent  exception,  since  it  stands  before  the  entire  ex- 
pression quoted  from  the  words  of  the  people.  It  is  also  extended  some- 
times to  the  following  words,  which  partake  to  a  certain  degree  of  the 
pronominal  character,  Vs  all,  every,  Gen.  1:  29,  8:  21,  9:  3,  41:  48,  56,  d'^X 
any  one,  each  Ex.  21:  28,  Num.  21:  9,  nnx  one  1  Sam.  9:  3.  With  pergonal 
pronouns,  cnrx  ""^ij"]!  Gen.  32:  1,  or  nb"^"]]  Gen.  48:  20  and  he  blessed  them. 

d.  A  noun,  about  which  a  statement  is  to  be  made,  sometimes  stands 
absolutely  and  is  preceded  by  the  sign  of  the  object,  "bzi  ^Haij"*^^  os  for 
the  iron,  it  fell  2  Kin.  6:  5;  b-^n  ^i-rx  nsx-bSTX  as  for  all  these  (they 
were)  men  of  valour  Judg.  20:  44;  "inpnTX  as  for  my  statutes  they  did 
not  icalk  in  them  Ezek.  20:  16,  17:  21,  35:  10,  43:  7,  44:  3,  Dan.  9:  13,  Hag. 
2:  5,  Zech.  8:  17;  so  also  in  a  sort  of  loose  apposition  to  preceding  state- 
ments Ex.  1:  14,  1  Kin.  6:  5,  Ezek.  14:  22.  h  occasionally  stands  in  a  similar 
manner  before  a  noun  placed  absolutely,  CiVrb  Isa.  32:  1,  Ex.  27:  3,  19, 
2  Chron.  7:  21,  Eccl.  9:  4.  Some  regard  rx  as  the  sign  of  the  object  in 
such  passages  as  I'l'^rTTX'!  "^nxn  X3  1  Sam.  17:34,  and  refer  to  the  fact 
that  the  Arabic  conjunction  is  followed  bj'  the  accusative  when  it  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  together  with;  more  probably,  however,  rx  is  the  preposi- 
tion with,  §  240,  and  the  passage  is  to  be  rendered  the  lion  came  and 
(that  too)  icith  the  hear,  so  Gen.  49:  25,  Num.  3:  26,  Josh.  17:  11,  1  Sam. 
26:  16,  1  Kin,  11:  25,  etc. 

e.  By  an  impersonal  construction  of  passive  verbs  their  subject  is  some- 
times converted  into  the  object,  which  in  fact  it  logically  is,  'i^'^xriTX  "r.i 
danduni  est  terram,  let  the  land  be  given  Num.  32:  5,  "'^a^-nx  npa"ib  ih^ 
TJ2  and  there  teas  told  to  Rebekah  (i.  e.  some  one  told  her)  the  loords  of  Esau 
Gen.  27:  42,  so  Gen.  4:  18,  17:  5,  Ex.  10:  8,  21:  28,  25:  28,  27:  7,  Lev.  10:  18, 
13:  56,  14;  48,  16:  27,  Num.  14:  21,  26:  55  (but  see  ver.  53),  Deut.  12:  22, 
20:  8,  Josh.  7:  15,  2  Sam.  21:  11,  22,  1  Kin.  2:  21,  Esth.  2:  13,  Ps.  72:  19, 
Prov.  16;  33,  Jer.  35:  14  (but  active  construction  ver.  16),  38:  4,  50:  20, 
Ezek.  16:  4,  Hos.  10;  6,  Am.  4:  2.  This  construction  is  sometimes  extended 
to  neuter  verbs  in  familiar  phrases,  which  have  become  associated  with  an 
active  idea,  "n'nn'nx  ?i'i'?2  "n.?  ^X  let  not  be  evil  in  tlmie  eyes  (i.  e.  do  not 
regard  as  evil)  the  thing  2  Sam.  11;  25,  h  'bn'^  and  there  was  to  him  (he  had) 
•^rJ^-rx  Josh.  17:  ll,  l  Sam.  20,  13,  Josh.  22:  17,  Neh.  9:  32,  so  with  "px 
Hag.  2:17.  In  2  Kin.  18:  30  nii"n-rx  "irrn  the  city  shall  be  given,  the  verb 
agrees  with  T"  notwithstanding  its  reception  of  the  sign  of  the  object  (nx 


348  SYNTAX.  §  285 

it  omitted  in  the  parallel  passage,  Isa.  36:  15),  so  Num.  5:  10.  This  im- 
personal construction  is  often  indicated  without  nx  hy  the  lack  of  agree- 
ment between  the  verb  and  the  noun,  which  shows  that  the  latter  is 
regarded  not  as  the  subject  but  as  the  object.  So  with  passives  Gen.  2:  23, 
10:  25,  35:  26,  Ex.  12:  16,  13:  7,  31:  15,  Lev.  2:  8,  Num.  26:  62,  28:  17, 
Job  22:  9,  Ps.  87:  3,  Isa.  21:  2,  Dan.  9:  24.  With  t^^^r\  tliere  teas,  •^■$":"'b3  "'n'^l 
Gen.  5:  23,  31  (but  r'r^\'^^  vs.  14,  17,  27),  15:  17,  Ex.  12:  49,  28:  32,  Num. 
9:  6,  Dent.  21:  3,  Josh.  18:  12  K'thibh,  19:  33  (but  see  ver.  29),  Eccl.  2:  7, 
Isa.  8:  8. 

f.  The  object  of  a  verb  is  often  omitted  when  it  can  be  easily  supplied 
from  the  context,  Nr^l  and  he  brought  (them)  Gen.  2:  19.  Sometimes  the 
object  is  a  pronoun  referring  to  something  not  yet  mentioned,  13X"!N  I  shall 
see  him,  viz.  the  star  spoken  of  afterwards  Num.  24:  17,  or  Avhich  is  em- 
phatically suppressed  altogether  lii'^w'X  xb  I  will  not  turn  it  hack  Am.  1 :  4, 
leaving  the  imagination  to  supply  what  it  is.  In  the  language  of  the 
Hebrew  grammarians  an  intransitive  verb  is  ^ili^  h'S'B  a  verb  that  stands 
still;  a  transitive  is  xkii  bra  a  verb  that  goes  out;  if  it  has  one  object,  it  is 
"^i'db  xki"*  going  out  to  a  second,  another  than  its  subject;  if  it  has  two 
objects,  it  is  ^'ii^V-'r'  '*¥'i'^  ffoi^ig  out  to  a  third. 

g.  Derivatives  from  verbs  that  govern  a  direct  object,  may  do  the 
same.  t-iDTX  C-n''bx  nban-c3  lihe  God^s  overthrow  of  Sodom  Isa.  13:  19, 
Tjn^ir-i-rs  :"J"^  for  the  salvation  of  thine  anointed  Hab.  3:  13,  Gen.  2:  9, 
Ex.  9:  20,  1  Kin.  1:  40,  Isa.  22:  2,  Ezek.  34:  12. 

§  285.  Many  verbs,  which  are  not  properly  transi- 
tive, are  nevertheless  capable  of  a  transitive  construc- 
tion; thus 

1.  Verbs  signifying  plenty  or  want:  Q'^izj^s^n  ^'2  XS'%T'\ 
the  lioiise  tvasfuU  (of)  men  Judg.  16:27,  D^Vyi  nibb?  ^^^^'^ 
I  am  sated  (with)  hurnt-offerings  of  rams  Isa.  1:  11,  '^Ttr^ 
bi  we  lacked  every  thing  Jer.  44:  18,  Gen.  27:  45,  Prov. 
3:  10.  Here  belongs  that  peculiar  Hebrew  idiom,  which 
expresses  abundance  by  such  phrases  as  the  following: 
the  hills  nbr  r;:;bri  shall  run  (with)  milk  Joel  4:18,  Ezek. 
7:  17,  Ex.  3:  8,  mine  eye  D^b  frrf  runneth  down  (with) 
water  Lam.  1:  16;  D^ii'£l2p  ibs  T\y$  it  had  all  come  wjj 
(with)  thorns  i.  e.  was  overgrown  with  them,  Prov.  24:  31, 
Gen.  40:  10,  Isa.  5:  6. 

a.  In  these  and  similar  phrases  the  result  of  an  action  is  regarded  as 
its  oliject;  so,  a  forest  ^'"ZV  Tfll'rs  groiving  up  with  trees  i.  e.  producing 
trees  Eccles.  2:  6;  o  righteous  man's  mouth  iib:n  nii"'  buddeth  forth  wis- 


§  285  OBJECT  OF  VERBS.  349 

dom  Prov.  10:  SI;    5*3"^2'i  I'^n?  thct/  overflow  with  deeiJs  of  mcledness 
Jer.  5:  28;  n"i."'^~E"4  ']''~-''^'-  ^"^  ^^  shall  creep  i.  e.  swarm  with  frogs  Ex.  7:  28. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  motion  may  have  for  their  object 
the  place  which  it  immediately  concerns,  whether  it  be 
directed  upon  it,  to  it,  or  from  it,  "iiL"ll2rrb3  nx  T^bs^l  and 
ice  went  (through)  all  the  tvilderness  Deut.  1:  19,  and 
figuratively,  T\'\pl'l  ■qVn  ivalking  (in)  righteousness  Isa.  33: 
15,  TVT]  ^i^h^l  and  they  came  into  the  city  Josh.  8:  19, 
"^i'nTS  ^5<:2,^  they  went  out  (of)  the  city  Gen.  44:  4,  ^b^ 
IZJ.^I  they  icent  up  (to)  the  top  of  the  moimtain  Ex.  17:  10, 
biSiT  -ni^.  they  shall  go  down  (to)  Sheol,  Ps.  55:  16,  ^"n^") 
niri*^ir;  they  hasten  (to)  /zer  wall  Nah.  2:  6,  Gen.  13:  10, 
Deut.'2:  27,  Judg.  19:  18,  Job  29:  3,  Isa.  57:  2,  Jer.  16: 
8,  18:  2,  3,  44:  14,  Ezek.  17:  12. 

3.  Intransitive  verbs  may,  as  in  other  languages, 
govern  their  cognate  noun,  0^3"  "ri'-Zb"  I  have  dreamed 
a  dream  Gen.  37:  9;  'bZ'2  □•!r"""EC^1  and  they  lamented 
there  a  lamentation  Gen.  50:  10;  ^bsnri  ^"zh  ye  icill  he 
vain  a  vanity  i.  e.  utterly  vain  Job  27:  12;  or  even  one 
from  a  different  root  if  it  be  related  or  analogous  in 
signification,  *'T\'^'^^,  ^^^'')  »^"^"  I  have  been  zealous  a  great 
fury  Zech.  8:  2,  fi^'.ian  "C'X  I  shall  sleep  death  i.  e.  the 
sleep  of  death,  Ps.  13:  4,  Isa.  6:  11. 

a.  For  additional  examples  see  Gen.  1:  11,  27:  34,  43:  16,  Lev.  26:  36, 
Josh.  22:  20,  Judg.  8:  24,  2  Sam.  12:  16,  1  Kin.  1:  12,  40,  Ps.  14:  5,  144:  6, 
Prov.  1:  19,  17:  27,  Isa.  1:  13,  5:  1,  6,  8:  10,  42:  17,  Jer.  17:  18,  23:  20, 
E/ek.  18:  3,  21:  5,  22:  29,  27:  35,  Hos.  10:  4,  Jon.  1:  10,  16,  4:  1,  6,  Zech. 
1 :  2.  Sometimes  the  expression  is  made  more  emphatic  by  placing  the 
noun  before  the  verb,  1  Kin.  2:  16,  20,  Ps.  139:  22,  Jer.  30:  14.  In  several 
instances  the  verb  governs  a  relative  which  has  a  cognate  noun  as  its  ante- 
cedent, Gen.  27:  41,  Deut.  28:  53,  1  Kin.  3:  28,  Ps.  89:  51,  52,  Zech.  13:  6. 

4.  Any  verb  may  take  as  its  object  a  noun  which 
defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  Tbji^TS  nb"  he  tvas 
diseased  in  his  feet  1  Kin.  15:  23;  only  b'ir-S  sbsri  in  the 
throne  will  lie  greater  than  thou  Gen.  41:  40;  let  us  look 
one  ayiother  D'is  in  the  face  2  Kin.  14:  8,  11. 


350  3TNTAX.  §  286 

a.  This  like  the  Greek  accusative  of  specification  applies  to  any  part 
or  possession  of  the  snhject,  which  is  particularly  concerned  in  the  action 
of  the  verb,  X^pX  "'^p  I  cry  as  to  wy  voice,  with  my  voice  Ps.  3:  5,  Thou 
Ti'!"'  as  to  thy  hand,  by  thy  hand,  didst  cast  out  nations  Ps.  44:  3,  which  is 
better  than  to  regard  these  as  cases  of  explanatory  apposition,  I  viz.  my 
voice,  thou  viz.  thy  hand;  thou  didst  tread  in  the  sea  "pcTO  as  to  thy  horses, 
with  thy  horses,  Hab.  3:  15,  Ex.  6:  3,  1  Sam.  25:  26,  33,  Ps.  17:  10,  13, 
"^i"'"  32:  8,  60:  7,  Isa.  10:  30,  26:  9;  or  to  any  circumstance  which  stands  in 
general  relation  to  it,  ye  perish  ""I'tl  «s  to  the  tvay  Ps.  2:  12,  impoverished 
•TCil^n  in  respect  to  oblation  Isa.  40:  20.  Comp.  after  adjectives  Job  11:  [', 
15:  10.  Sometimes  this  limitation  or  specification  is  made  by  the  preposi- 
tion h  1  Kin.  10:  23,  Jer.  30:  12,  or  a  2  Chron.  16:  12. 

§  286.  1.  When  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  regarded  as 
the  indirect  object  of  a  verb,  the  relation  is  indicated  by 
means  of  the  appropriate  preposition. 

a.  The  various  prepositions  with  which  different  verbs  may  be  con- 
strued and  the  consequent  efi'ect  upon  the  meaning  of  the  latter  can  be 
learned  in  detail  from  the  lexicon.  A  few  peculiar  usages  may  here  be 
noted:  e.  g.  the  use  of  a  in  (1)  after  such  verbs  as  tnx  (also  direct  object) 
to  seize  or  hold,  P"^tnn  (also  direct  object)  to  lay  hold  of  or  hold  fast,  ph'n 
(also  with  h  or  bx)  to  cleave  to,  "ina  (also  direct  object)  to  choose,  'pixH 
(with  h  to  believe)  to  believe  in,  niaa  (with  ^X  to  trust  to)  to  triist  in;  the 
preposition  in  all  these  cases  suggesting  penetration  of  the  object  and  ad- 
hering to  it.  (2)  After  certain  verbs  of  sense  i'j^  (also  with  direct  object, 
bx,  h'J  or  "1?)  to  touch,  t'b':i  (also  with  direct  object,  h,  Isx  or  hv)  to  hear, 
hearken  to;  with  f}"^'^  to  smell,  tiX"!  or  njn  to  see  it  suggests  that  the 
eense  is  delightedly  fixed  upon  its  object,  to  smell  ivith  pleasure,  to  gaze 
upon  with  delight,  (3)  After  verbs  of  motion  it  may  have  the  sense  of 
association  icith,  3  Nia  to  come  with  i.  e.  to  bring,  Ps.  66:  13,  a  T\^T\  to  go 
with  i.  e.  to  take,  Ex.  10:  9,  so  a  lar  to  perform  service  ivith  or  by  means 
of  any  one  i.  e.  to  imp)ose  service  upon  him  Ex.  1:  14.  (4)  In  a  partitive 
sense  (the  part  being  contained  in  the  whole)  after  bix  to  eat,  Ex.  12:  43-45, 
Lev.  22:  11,  Judg.  13:  16,  Cnb  to  eat  Ps.  141:  4,  nra  to  drink  Prov.  9:  5, 
np'in  to  give  to  drink  Ps.  80:  6  and  the  like;  'ri  may  be  similarly  used 
(the  part  taken  from,  the  whole)  Lev.  7:  21,  Deut.  26:  14,  Ezr.  2:  63. 
(5)  After  verbs  denoting  hostility  (violent  collision  and  penetration),  a  *lia 
to  deal  treacherously  tcifh,  a  tnbn  to  fight  tvith,  a  bi"^  to  tresjmss  against, 
a  nn^  (also  with  direct  object)  to  rebel  against,  a  nnn  (also  with  bx  or  br> 
anger  burned  against, 

b.  Verbs  denoting  fear  or  shame  are  followed  by  "|a  from,  since  one 
instinctively  turns  away  from  that  which  excites  these  emotions,  so  ^15, 
i:S,  SXT,  X^i^,  Y^^,  which  also  take  ft  direct  object,  and  CJia,  "isn, 
Qbs:  etc. 

c.  Any  verb  may  be  followed  by  V>  to  indicate  the  indirect  object  to 
which  something  is  done,  he  said  cnb  to  them  Gen.  1:  28,  I  have  giten  cib 


§  28G  OBJECT  OF  VERBS.  351 

to  you,  ver.  29,  or  for  which  something  is  done  (dative  of  advantage)  e.  g. 
i>is  to  fear  for  or  on  behalf  of  Hos.  10:  5,  xi;?  to  be  zealous  for,  zrh":  to 
fight  for,  "ivsn  to  pray  for,  n"*"!  plead  for  etc.  It  is  thus  used  pleonastic- 
ally  with  suffixes  referring  to  the  subject  of  the  verb  rjb  "^  go  for  thee 
i.  e.  go  thou,  T^b  rr^a  flee  thou,  ^'A  ^3"ih3  roe  are  cut  off  for  us  i.  e.  so  far  as 
we  are  concerned  Ezek.  37:  11.  The  verb  fT^iri  to  be  with  h  may  mean 
(1)  to  be  or  belong  to  any  person  Tjb  n;;ni;  it  shall  be  or  belong  to  thee  i.  e. 
thou  shalt  have  it  Josh.  17:  18.  (2)  to  be  for  or  serve  as  any  thing  fi^ni 
r.'ixb  anil  it  shall  be  for  a  sign  Ex.  13:  16,  or  -with  "b  both  of  the  person 
and  the  thing,  it  shall  be  r'isl?  r^  to  thee  for  a  sign  ver.  9,  Gen.  1 :  29, 
47:  24,  Ex.  4:  16,  10:  7.  (3)  to  be  unto  or  to  become  -'^'Jh  'rS'rp^  he  shall  be- 
come a  nation.  Gen.  18:  18,  2:  7,  10,  24,  Ex.  4:  3,  4,  Isa.       21. 

d.  Pronominal  suffixes  attached  to  verbs  ordinary  represent  the  direct 
object,  but  are  occasionally  used  when  the  objective  relation  is  indirect, 
■'Jnn:  thou  hast  given  me  the  land  of  the  south  Judg.  1 :  15  for  "^b  ^7\H  thou 
hast  given  to  me,  which  occurs  in  the  same  verse;  dnix  ^IMn  grant  them 
to  us  Judg.  21:  22;  >ij'7.''5i<  I  ivould  declare  to  him  Job  31:  37.  So  in  a  few 
instances  after  intransitive  verbs,  "jBnj  he  grew  up  to  me  as  to  a  father 
Job  31:  18,  !ri"i5"^  shall  dwell  with  thee  Vs.  5:5,  13:  5,  "3^n  encamping  against 
thee  53:  6,  perhaps  Isa.  35:  1,  see  §  55.  1,  Isa.  65:  5,  Jer.  20:  7,  comp.  §  102.  2. 

2.  Many  verbs  vary  their  construction  without  any 
material  difference  of  meaning  according  to  the  form  of 
the  conception  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker  or  vv^riter, 
being  followed  by  one  preposition  or  by  another  or  by 
none  at  all,  as  he  views  the  relation  as  direct  or  indirect, 
and  if  the  latter,  under  one  aspect  or  another:  thus,  tJiey 
luent  out  from  the  city  may  be  expressed  by  the  direct 
relation,  Ti'rrns  ^^^IS;  Gen.  44:  4,  or  by  the  indirect, 
n-yn--^  ^-iSJ^:?;  Josh.  8:  22;  DnbD  to  fight  is  followed  by  D2? 
tcith  Josh.  10:  29,  by  ^  in  (n^  in  earn)  ver.  31,  by  b? 
against  ver.  38,  by  I^iJ?  Judg.  12:4. 

a.  A  number  of  verbs  may  be  construed  either  with  a  direct  object  or 
with  h  to,  in  reference  to,  thus,  Snx  to  love  any  one  and  to  have  love  to  any 
one,  NET  to  cure  and  to  perform  a  cure  for  any  one,  S'"i;in  to  save  and  to 
grant  salvation  to  any  one,  vxyd  to  destroy  and  to  bring  destruction  to  any 
one,  'pTxri  to  hear  and  to  give  ear  to;  Ti^n  to  tell  Avith  or  without  1?;  P"''^.i£n 
to  justify  takes  a  direct  object  except  Isa.  53:  11  where  it  has  V,  b''Sl7  to 
deliver  has  h  once  Jon.  4:  6;  so  "IS3  to  honour  Ps.  86:  9,  Dan.  11:  38.  Both 
constructions  occur  with  the  same  verb  in  the  same  sentence  1  Kin.  1 :  9, 
Ps.  21:  9,  47:  7;  see  also  2  Chron.  16:  12.  By  a  usage  which  belongs  for 
the  most  part  to  the  later  books  b  is  sometimes  prefixed  to  nouns  explana- 
tory of  a  direct  object  1  Chron.  6:  26,  29:  20,  2  Chron.  25:  10,  Ezr.  8:  24, 


352  SYNTAX.  §  287 

Neh.  9:  32,  and   sometimes  to  the  direct  object  itself,  Ps.  69:  6,   116:  It'., 
Isa.  11:  9,  Jer.  40:  2,  Lam.  4:  5,  Ezek.  26:  3,  1  Chron,  16:  37,  29:  12,  22. 

b.  As  the  object  of  an  action  may,  in  certain  cases,  be  regarded  as  the 
instrument  with  which  it  is  performed,  some  transitive  verbs  also  admit  a 
construction  with  3  tcith,  thus  "isid  *i-pri  blow  the  trumpet  Hos.  5:  8,  S-'pr*] 
"ib'iv^'3  and  he  blew  with  the  trumpet  Judg.  3:  27;  fii'i'ri  irns  to  spread  forth 
the  hands  Ps.  143:  6,  but  followed  by  3  to  spread  forth  with  the  hands  Lam. 
1:  17;   see  also  2  Chron.  26:  15,  Prov.  25:  20. 

3.  By  a  condensed  style  of  expression  (constructio 
praegnans)  prepositions  are  sometimes  connected  with 
verbs,  to  whose  meaning  they  are  not  strictly  conformed; 
thus,  motion  may  be  suggested  by  the  preposition  though 
the  verb  of  itself  implies  no  such  idea,  V"]!^^  rjVt"  ^^^ou 
hast  profaned  to  the  ground  i.  e.  profaned  by  casting  to 
the  ground,  Ps.  89:  40,  74:  7,  Ezr.  2:  62,  'b^  t'^  ^lins 
^nb^  they  trembled  one  unto  another  i.  e.  one  turned 
tremblingly  to  another,  Jer.  36:  16  ^jin^:^  nr!:-i  "Vr^'q 
tho2i  hast  anstvered  (by  saving)  me  from  the  horns  of  the 
wild-oxen  Ps.  22:  22.  Different  objects  may  also  be  at- 
tached to  a  verb,  whose  meaning  is  in  strictness  adapted 
only  to  one  (zeugma)  thou  hast  shown  me  {life  and)  favour 
Job  10:  12. 

a.  Zeugma  may  also  occur  in  the  case  of  subjects  of  a  verb,  the  roar' 
ing  of  the  lion,  the  voice  of  the  fierce  lion  and  the  teeth  of  the  young  lions 
are  broken  Job  4:  10. 

§  287.  Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  object,  viz.: 
1.  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs:  "DSji  ^hb^i^.O'l 
Dnbni'rs}^  T]'.ii'^  and  I  ivill  make  thy  oppressors  eat  their 
oivn  flesh  Isa.  49:  26;  ^f.i<":i"t^^^  ^'JJiri  5<b  he  would  not 
have  caused  us  to  see  all  these  things  Judg.  13:  23;  n2bnr 
bi<'^ir';"n!5<  he  shall  cause  Israel  to  inherit  it  Deut.  1:  38, 
3:  24,  ^W  20:  26,  Judg.  1:  24,  Ps.  25:  4,  45:  5,  Jer. 
23:  22. 

a.  This  applies  to  the  causatives  of  verbs  of  plenty  or  want,  Gen.  42. 
25,  Ps.  8:  6,  Jer.  13:  13,  Ezek.  9:  7,  or  of  mot'on,  §  285,  Deut.  1:  22,  2  Sam. 
15:  25,  Job  28:  11,  Cant.  1:  4. 


§  287  OBJECT  OF  VERBS.  353 

2.  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  differ- 
ent aspects  as  terminating  upon  different  objects,  or 
which,  under  the  rules  already  given,  may  take  a  dii*ect 
object  of  more  than  one  kind,  all  iPK  r;J:i  "^"liJ^  which  God 
commanded  him  Gen.  6:  22;  "53  ^^5  bk^^^  "isTi^  n^.inb 

'  T  ••  ••  T    :  •       •■    :  V  ; 

C'l^"!!  to  teach  the  children  of  Israel  all  the  statutes  Lev. 
10:  11;  ^rb  "i'bs'bS'nx  ri'iri  thou  hast  shiitten  all  my  ene- 
mies on  the  cheek  Ps.  3:  8;  iiJ~p  □ij'i'^i^ir  lift  iqj  your  hands 
to  the  sanctuary  Ps.  134:  2;  royr:z  D'!:"']  and  lie  shall  dis- 
comfit them  a  discomfiture  Deut.  7:  23. 

a.  Some  verbs  take  a  dii'ect  object  of  both  person  and  thing  as  hi^'ii 
to  ask  Deut.  14:  26,  Isa.  45:  11,  Hag.  2:  11,  ^b"]  to  instruct  Prov.  31:  1, 
njs  to  command  Ex.  4:  28,  Deut.  1:  18,  trrj  to  answer  1  Sam.  20:  10,  Job 
9:  3,  ^ra  to  treat  well  or  ill.  Gen.  50:  15,  1  Sam.  24:  18  (comp.  C!j;r  Ps.  21:  4, 
"inp  Prov.  13:24),  and  the  like.  Or  the  second  object  may  be  that  of  place 
after  verbs  implying  motion  2  Chron.  6:  38,  Nali.  1:8;  or  of  a  noun  coamate 
to  the  verb,  Gen.  49:  25,  Ex.  3:  9,  1  Sam.  1  :  6,  1  Kin.  12:  8,  Isa.  14:  6,  22:  17; 
or  of  specification.  Gen.  3:  15,  37:  21,  Deut.  22:  26,  33:  II,  1  Kin.  19:  21, 
Ps.  17:  11,  perhaps  68:  22,  §  256.  3.  h,  Jer.  2:  16,  40:  14.  A  verb  may  even 
have  three  objects  of  different  kinds  Judg.  15:  8. 

3.  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  product,  or  its  result,  is  often  re- 
garded as  its  secondary  or  remote  object,  'Z^  iri<  ^iS'*/,'! 
and  they  overwhelmed  him  tvith  stones  Lev.  24:  23;  r)"15~l 
t25li<  Dni«  and  thou  shalt  gird  them  tvith  a  belt  Ex.  29:  9; 

%seed  fiizmrrrii^  y"7n"nii*J^  tvith  ivhich  thou  shalt  sow 
the  ground  Isa.  30:  23;  ^2!^  Dii^rj-n^^  ^i:-!!::.  and  he  formed 
the  man  of  dust  Gen.  2:  7;  VnrjbTIJ  rir5<  ybr  wliich  I  have 
sent  it  Isa.  55:  11;  Ti^'.'Q  D";2i<ri"n>$  niz^.^  cind  he  huilt  the 
stones  into  an  cdtar  1  Kin.  18:  32. 

a.  The  instrument  of  an  action  regarded  as  its  remote  object:  Num. 
24:  8,  2  Chron.  14:  6,  Ps.  5:  13,  18:  33,  32:  7,  104:  6,  Isa.  37:  6,  41:  2,  Ezek. 
13:  22,  18:  7,  Mai.  2:  13.  The  material:  Ex.  24:  5,  25:  39,  26:  ;-.l,  37:  10, 
38:  3,  39:  30,  1  Kin.  6:  21,  22,  7:  48-50,  Ezek.  13:  10.  The  product:  Gen. 
27:  37,  rirp'2  Num.  10:  2,  ''•J'^-)  17:  3,  -.i:>?  Df-^t.  15:  14,  pix  23:  24,  =-rS-i 
Judg.  7:  16,  nii-^z  Ps.  21:  7,  -jrr  74:  2,  Isa.  37:  26,  vp  iizek.  4:  3.  The 
result:  I  will  make  all  thine  enemies  tl'i'i'  back,  oblige  thein  to  turn  iheir 
backs  in  flight  Ex.  23:  27,  Ps.  18:  41,  21:  13;  I  tvill  not  make  you  n'is 

23 


354  SYNTAX.  ■     §  287 

destrncfitin,  destroy  j'ou  Jer,  5:  18,  46:  28,  Ezek.  11:  13,  20:  17.  The  in- 
strument may  likewise  be  indicated  by  the  preposition  3  by  or  tuith  Lev.  8 :  32, 
Josh.  10:  11;  the  material  by  '|"a  from  or  out  of  Gen.  2:  19,  Ex.  39:  1;  the 
product  by  h  to,  into  Isa.  41:  15,  Jer.  1:  18. 

,  4.  Some  verbs  may  govern  the  subject  and  predicate 
of  a  subordinate  clause,  bC3  :?ii:n  ti2nb  to  knoiv  wickedness 
(to  be)  folly  Eccl.  7:25,  the  latter,  if  it  be  an  adjective 
or  participle,  will  remain  without  the  article,  §  263, 
Tiijr^j  □■;^£^5  ^P^'^^ir  I  have  heard  Ephraim  bemoaning 
himself  Jer.  31:  18,  p"'^.!S  "'n^ik'^  !?jri|i  thee  have  I  seen  right- 
eous Gen.  7:  1.  Or  they  may  govern  two  nouns  in  appo- 
sition, the  second  of  which  suggests  a  comparison  or  is 
explanatory  of  the  aspect  under  which  the  first  is  viewed, 
they  lend  Qriirp  DiiTibTli^  their  tongue  as  their  botv  Jer. 
9:  2,  1  Kin.  11:  19,  Isa.  42:  25,  Hos.  14:  3,  Am.  5:  1. 

a.  The  predicate  object  frequently  indicates  a  state  or  condition,  eat  it 
rikp  unleavened  Lev.  10:  12,  talce  the  king  "^n  alive  Josh.  8:  23,  9:  12,, 
1  Sam.  8:  1,  2  Kin.  8:  13,  Prov.  1:  12.  The  presence  of  the  article  in  such 
cases  Avould  show  that  the  word  was  not  a  predicate,  ichen  he  saw  TX 
nsHti  TiX^Jsri  the  angel  that  smote  2  Sam.  24:  17;  ns?  would  mean  that  he 
saw  the  angel  smiting,  in  the  act  of  so  doing,  Gen.  21:  9,  27:  6,  37:  17, 
Ex.  14:  30,  Num.  7:  89,  11:  10,  22:  6,  23,  31,  2  Kin.  2:  10,  8:  12,  19:  8, 
1  Chron.  15:  29,  Esth.  5:  13.  In  2  Kin.  9:  25  C-^i?='"^  ^.X  rtPXI  ^ix  ibl  re- 
member me  and  thee  riding  the  pronouns  are  in  their  separate  form  and 
rx  is  attached  to  the  predicate  participle.  Such  a  clause  may  be  sub- 
ordinated to  bip  uttered  as  an  exclamation  or  to  bip-nx  "'y:i  as  well  as  to 
sr:J  itself,  pElT  "^ii^  h'lp  the  sound  of  my  beloved  knocking!  equivalent  to 
hark!  or  I  hear  my  beloved  knocking  Cant.  5:  2,  Gen.  4:  10,  1  Kin.  1:  41; 
r'snri^  tD'^n'bx  nih";  bip"PX  li'ri'r'.l  and  they  heard  tJie  sound  of  Jehovah  God 
ivalking  Gen.  3:  8J  Deut.  4:  33,  5:  23,  Isa.  6:  8.  nx";  to  see,  when  the  pre- 
dicate is  an  adjective,  admits  a  twofold  construction,  either  he  saiv  ~nx 
nizj-iS  "lixn  the  light  that  it  was  good  Gen.  1:4,  12:  14,  13:  10,  or  saw 
y-JTi  nia  "13  that  the  tree  was  good  3:  6. 

5.  If  an  active  verb  is  capable  of  governing  a  double 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them, 

Cpnb*^^'  ^'ib^  ri!J5  Orib^?^  and  ye  shall  be  circumcised  in  the 
flesh  of  your  foreskin  Gen.  17:11,  Dni<  y-iw^r;  xb^ni  aitd 
the  land  ivas  filled  ivith  them  Ex.  1:  7,  niaj:  rab'i  sent  (or 
charged)  with  a  painful  message  1  Kin.  14:  6. 


i^  288  ADVEEBIAL  EXPRESSIONS.  '  SdI 

a.  Thus  the  passive  of  a  causative,  Job  7:3;  of  a  verb  implyiiio;  mo 
tion,  Gen.  12:  15;   of  a  verb  of  plenty  or  want,  Isa.  2:  7,  8;   a  passive  liav 
ing  as  its  object  a  thing,  Ex.  34:  34;   a  cognate  noun,  Jer.  14:  17;   oliject 
of  specification,  2  Sam.  15:  32,  Dan.  9:  25;  instrument,  1  Sam.  17:  5,  1  Kin 
22:  10,  Isa.  1:  20;   material,   1  Kin.  6:  7,  Hab.  2:  19;  product,  Ex.  25:  31 
npn  Lev.  10:  14,  Isa.  24:  12,  Mic.  3:  12;  a  predicate,  it  shall  be  eaten  r'ii^ 
'xnleavened  Lev.  6 :  9.    Sometimes  the  more  remote  object  is  made  the  sub 
ject  of  the  passive  verb  which  then  governs  the  nearer  object,  "PN  nx'fni 
"inirri  and  it  shall  he  shown  the  priest  Lev.  13:  49,  but  on  the  other  hand 
P^Nnn  -it-N  which  thou  toast  shown  Ex.  26:  30. 

6.  The  agent  of  a  passive  verb  may  be  indicated  by  b  as  the  one  to 
whom  the  action  belongs,  ib  i3jtn3  we  are  accounted  hy  him  strangers 
Gen.  31:  15,  14:  19,  Ex.  12:  16,  1  Sam.  2:3  K'ri,  15:  13,  23:  21,  Neh.  13:  26, 
"ib  b^n^  probably  shall  he  held  imder  pledge  by  it  as  its  debtor  Prov.  13:  13, 
14:  20,  T'byi^b  "i!io':3  kept  by  its  oivner,  Eccl.  5:  12  (but  "b— i^od  kept  for 
thee  1  Sam.  9 :  24),  Jer.  8:3;  or  less  frequently  by  ""2  as  the  one  from 
whom  the  action  proceeds,  ichy  are  times  'isa'JS'xb  "'iCv^'O  not  reserved  by 
the  Almighty?  Job  24:  1,  28:  4,  Ps.  37:  23,  Eccles.  12:  11,  Dan.  8:11  K'ri. 
It  is  only  in  the  later  books  of  the  Bible  that  the  passive  construction  is 
adopted  to  any  extent  as  a  substitute  for  the  active,  Neh.  6:  1,7,  Esth.  4:  3. 


Adverbial  Expressions. 

§  288.  The  predicate  of  a  proposition  may  be  further 
quahfied 

1.  By  adverbs,  which  commonly  stand  after  the  words 
to  which  they  refer,  lk'2  ^itb'nsrjl  and  behold  (it  was) 
very  good  Gen.  1:31;  nil  "in  C?j^1  and  he  was  greatly  2^'^^- 
voked  Neh.  3:  33;  I  arn  iif^  nzi"iri  '^'^^'C  thy  exceeding 
great  reward  prop,  thy  reward  very  much  Gen.  15:  1. 

a.  Adverbs  may  for  emphasis  precede  the  words,  to  which  they  be- 
long, Ps.  47 :  10.  Adjectives  belonging  to  the  subject  may  of  course  be 
qualified  in  the  same  manner  as  though  they  were  found  in  the  predicate. 

2.  By  nouns  used  absohitely  to  express  the  relations 
of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manner. 

a.  Thus  time  when:  D'^^tiS",  "ij?'ii  2nr  evening  and  morning  and  noon 
will  I  j)ray  Ps,  55: 18;  tarry  here  nb^sn  to-night  Num.  22:  8;  Gideon  came 
n-iiarxn  ^rs-i  at  the  beginning  of  the  tvatch  Judg.  7:  19,  Ex.  34:  22,  Deut. 
4:  10,  1  Kin.  19:  8,  Ps.  74:  2,  Jer.  18:  7,  9,  28:  16,  Hos.  7:  5,  Zech.  1:  8; 
once  in  the  phrase  from  generation  "h  to  generation  Ex.  17:  16.  Time  how 
long:  and  he  shall  shut  up  the  house  d"'^"'  nrn'r  seven  days  Lev.  14:  38:  the 
land  rested  fi:v  diji^'ij  eighty  years  Judg.  3:  30,  Gen.  5:  3,   14:4,  Lev, 

23* 


35G  BTNTAX.  §  289 

26:  34,  35,  Deat.  4:  9,  2  Sam.  20:  4,  Ps.  45:  7,  fometimes  with  nx  when 
definite  Ex.  13:  7  comp.  ver.  6,  Deut.  9:  25. 

b.  The  place  where:  the  absohite  use  of  nouns  in  this  sense  is  most 
frequent  in  the  famihar  words,  V.r.h  at  ilie  door  of  Gen.  18:  1,  Judg.  9:  35, 
r"2  at  the  Jiouse  of  Gen.  38:  11,  Num.  80:  11,  1  Kin.  16:  32,  and  a  few 
proper  names  compounded  with  the  latter,  DIjVn"i2  at  Bethlehem  2  Sam. 
2:  32,  ^XTi'^a  at  Bethel  Hos.  12:  4;  other  examples  ai'e  more  sporadic 
Josh.  1:  4,  1  Sam.  2:  29,  1  Kin.  8:  43,  Job  22:  12,  C^n^Jri  Lam.  5:  6,  appear 
^BTS  at  the  face  of  the  Lord  Ex.  34:  23  (comp.  23:  17  "'is'l'X).  The  place 
whither:  Gen.  31:  21,  mostly  after  verbs  of  motion,  §  285.  2,  Gen.  43:  18, 
1  Sam.  5:  12,  Ps.  139:  8. 

c.  Measures  of  space:  P'ij  n'ias;  C'iBuJ  three  cubits  high  Ezek.  41:  22; 
"■I'x  niax  din  five  cubits  as  to  (in)  lenffth  Ex.  27:1;  he  went  nii  T]'^^  a 
day's  journey  1  Kin.  19:  4.    Weight:  2  Sam.  14:  26. 

d.  Number:  ti'^irs  snii:  2'^  return  seven  times  1  Kin.  18:  43;  he  offered 
sacrifices  tls  '^Ep'S  according  to  the  number  of  them  all  Job  1:  5. 

c.  Manner,  answering  to  the  Greek  adverbial  accusative:  ye  shall  dwell 
n^3  in  security  Deut.  12:  10;  ye  shall  not  go  ni"."i  loftily  Mic.  2:  3;  the 
tribes  went  up  ^k"^b';Vi  T'^hv  according  to  a  law  of  Israel,  or  this  may  be  in 
apposition  with  what  precedes,  it  is  a  lajv  of  Israel  Ps.  122:  4;  thou  shalt 
not  go  there  *■"'■!:•:.■  rx"^'^  for  fear  of  briers  Isa.  7:  25;  to  serve  him  "nx  crj 
u-ifh  one  consent  prop,  shoulder  Zeph.  3:  9,  2  Sam.  23:  3,  2  Kin.  5:  2,  Ps. 
144:  12,  Prov.  10:  4,  Jer.  31:  7,  32:  11,  Lam.  1:  9,  Hos.  12:  15,  14:  5, 
Zech.  2:  8. 

3.  By  nouns  preceded  by  a  preposition  forming  a 
qualifying  phrase. 

a.  When  successive  nouns  are  governed  by  the  same  preposition,  the 
preposition  will  be  repeated  before  each,  if  the  particulars  are  regarded 
separately,  Ex.  7:  28,  29,  9:3,  33:  1  (hence  the  sing,  suff.).  Num.  19:  16, 
18,  19,  1  Sam.  14:  15,  2  Sam.  6:  5,  2  Kin.  23:  4,  5,  2  Chron.  8:  13,  Jer. 
9:  24,  25,  29:  18,  but  not  if  they  are  viewed  together  in  the  mass,  1  Sam. 
27:  8,  2  Chron.  8:  7,  Ezr.  3:  12,  Job  19:  24,  Dan.  9:  6.  The  preposition 
maj"^  be  repeated  before  nouns  in  apposition  n'ili'^nNb  "ij.'|b  2  Sam.  18:  5,  or 
not  "i^n  .  .  C^2  Hab.  3:  15;  and  in  poetry  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied  from 
a  parallel  clause,  Job  34:  10,  Isa.  15:  8,  61:  7,  Mic.  7:  12, 

Neglect  or  Ageeement. 

§  289.  The  general  rule  that  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to 
which  they  respectively  relate,  is  subject  to  some  re- 
markable exceptions.  These  are  for  the  most  part  due 
to  two  principal  reasons.    First,  regard  is  had  to  the 


§289  NEGLECT  OF  AGKEEMENT.  357 

sense  rather  than  to  the  form.  And  secondly,  when  the 
predicate  precedes  its  noun  or  is  separated  from  it  by 
intervening  words,  the  accidents  of  gender  and  nmnber 
in  the  subject  may  not  have  engaged  the  thoughts  be- 
fore it  is  uttered,  or  attention  may  have  been  diverted 
from  them  by  words  spoken  since;  in  this  case  there  is 
a  natural  tendency  to  adopt  a  primary  in  preference  to 
a  secondary  form,  that  is  to  say,  the  singular  may  be 
used  where  strict  conformity  to  the  subject  would  re- 
quire the  plural,  and  the  masculine  may  in  hke  manner 
take  the  place  of  the  feminine. 

1.  When  a  plural  subject  is  viewed  in  its  totality, 
rather  than  in  its  several  parts,  related  words  may  be 
put  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  ~in^-!  N'i^  let  thy  words  come  to  pass  Judg.  13:  12,  tI'^ 
ti-^iiad-?  uprigld  are  thy  jiulgments  Ps.  119:  137,  n"^Hs-a  tTr^:x  her  ivounds 
are  incurable  Mic.  1:  9,  1  Kin.  10:  12,  Isa.  32:  11,  59:  12,  Jer.  4:  14,  12:  4, 
51:  48,  Zech.  6:  14.  When  a  predicate  consists  of  several  verbs  or  ad- 
jectives, one  of  which  precedes  and  the  rest  follow  the  noun,  the  latter 
commonly  agree  with  it  in  number,  while  the  first  may  be  put  in  the 
singular,  ""5:5  n"i^>=i-n  KHf?';!  and  tJie  porters  called  and  told  2  Kin.  7:  11, 
Esth.  9:  23,  Ezek.  14:  1. 

2.  Or  if  a  plural  subject  is  viewed  distributively  and 
regard  is  had  to  each  particular  included  in  it,  related 
words  may  be  put  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  Tjinn  ?^"'D'n?P  t^^y  t^O'^  bless  thee  shall  each  be  blessed  Num. 
24:  9,  n'^T'  ri-a  ■I'^^bn^  tJiey  who  profane  it  shall  every  one  he  put  to  death 
Ex.  31:  14,  !i:'3"9  ^'y^h'i  'CT'^'^-^is.  H^l^  ihey  take  away  the  righteousness  of  the 
righteous  from  each  of  them  Isa.  5:  23.  Examples  in  verbs,  "1^2  Deut.  18:3, 
Job  6:  20,  Prov.  14:  1,  Isa.  34:  13,  Jer.  48:  41,  Ezek.  39:  15,  Nah.  3:  7, 
Hab.  2:  6,  Zech.  11:  5.  Pronouns,  Josh.  2:  4,  1  Chron.  29:  8,  Ps.  62:  5, 
Jer.  44:  9,  Zech.  14:  12. 

3.  Nouns,  which  are  plural  in  form  but  singular  in 
signification,  commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives  and  pro- 
nouns agreeing  with  them  in  the  singular. 

a.  Thus,  a'^nbx  x^3  God  created  Gen.  1:1,  r^^i"'  T^Bra  its  owner  shall 
be  put  to  death  Ex.  21:  29,  ii'c^p^  "'pi<  o,  hard  master  Isa.  19:  4,  ■::^r,rri 
•'""Sir;  thy  youth  is  rtnewed  Ps.  103:  5.     When  the  Avord  C^n'bx  refers  to 


358  SYNTAX.  §  281^ 

false  deities,  the  sense  is  plural  and  it  is  construed  accordingly,  "|>lL"y'"t^3 
C^nbx  so  may  the  gods  do  1  Kin.  19:  2.  This  polytheistic  plural  is  used 
even  where  a  single  idol  is  referred  to  Ex.  32:  4,  8;  but  see  Neh.  9:  18. 
But  where  it  refers  to  the  true  God,  it  is  with  few  exceptions  construed  in 
the  singular.  Yet  see  Gen.  20:  13,  35:  7,  Ex.  22:  8,  Deut.  5:  23,  Josh.  24: 
19,  1  Sam.  17:  26,  36,  2  Sam.  7:  23,  Jer.  10:  10,  23:  36;  here  and  in  some 
similar  passages  there  is  a  formal  agreement  in  the  plural,  perhaps  because 
attention  is  directed  to  the  supreme  Being  in  general  and  to  the  fulness 
and  variety  of  the  divine  perfections  without  specific  reference  to  the  di- 
vine unity.    Comp.  Gen.  1 :  26,  11:  7,  Ps.  11:  7,  58:  12,  Isa.  6:  8. 

4.  Plural  names  of  irrational  objects  of  either  gender 

may  be  joined  with  the  feminine  singular. 

a.  Thus,  sinrn  nn'a  n'irnr  fhe  beasts  of  the  field  pant  Joel  1:  20,  Ci'd'rn 
n'^fi-'Sd  its  floods  wash  away  Job  14:  19,  nriinx  Ci^izn  i)aiigs  have  seized 
her  Jer.  49:  24,  t^kz^-j  n-\r\  jackals,  their  lair  Isa.  35:  7,  Gen.  49:  22,  1  Sam. 
4:  15,  Job  12:  7,  27:  20,  Ps.  18:  35,  37:  31,  44:  19,  73:  2  K'thibh.  In  ob- 
jects devoid  of  personality  the  individual  is  of  small  account  and  may  be 
easily  sunk  in  the  mass.  A  plnralis  inliumanus  may  consequently  he  re- 
garded as  equivalent  to  a  collective  and  construed  with  the  singular,  the 
feminine  being  adopted  as  a  substitute  for  the  neuter,  §  198.  a.  The  same 
principle  prevails  in  the  construction  of  neuter  plurals  in  Greek,  ra 
^Koc  rpi'/Bt. 

5.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives  and 
pronomis  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

a.  Thus,  1^b":j  D^^fi  ''"'iD'^^^  ^t^d  the  people  hasted  and  passed  over  Josh. 
4:  10,  niirx  '(X^j  lost  sheep  Jer.  50:  6,  C"i"i3ip  c|3  n^sn-bs  all  the  congrega- 
tion, all  of  them  are  holy  Num.  16:  3,  27:  3,  35:  25,  1  Sam.  17:  28,  2  Sam. 
24:  17,  Jer.  8:3,  13:  10,  48:  36.  Where  a  collective  is  regarded  as  one 
bod}-,  it  is  construed  as  a  singular;  when  it  is  contemplated  with  reference 
to  the  individuals  embraced  within  it,  all  related  words  are  put  in  the 
plural,  Drfi  !ixsnn'_1  Di."i"i  irb  the  people  was  oppressed  and  the  people  hid 
themselves  1  Sam.  13:  6,  Ezek.  14:  22.  Nouns  not  properly  collectives,  used 
in  a  collective  sense,  are  similarly  construed,  Ex.  1:  10,  Judg.  7:  7,  1  Sam. 
12:  21,  1  Kin.  5:  17,  2  Kin.  7:  10,  Job  39:  19,  21,  Pa.  119:  103,  Prov.  28:  1, 
Isa.  14:  11,  28:  3,  Ezek.  17:  23. 

b.  When  a  predicate  consists  of  more  than  one  verb  or  adjective,  the 
first  sometimes  agrees  with  it  formally  in  the  singular  and  the  rest  logic- 
ally in  the  plural,  C^ip-nx  ^lin'^J  'n'lytT-))^  N"^m  and  all  the  congregation 
lifted  up  and  uttered  their  voice  Num.  14:  1;  li'""20"]  ni:n  "i^X'l  and  the 
people  believed  and  they  heard  Ex.  4:  31,  Gen.  46:  26,  Judg.  1:  4,  1  Kin. 
16:   16. 

C.  The  noun  ^"iX  land,  earth,  which  is  properly  a  feminine  singular, 
may,  when  it  is  put  for  its  inhabitants,  be  construed  with  the  masculine 
plural.  Gen.  41:  57,  1  Sam.  14:  25,  2  Sam.  15:  23,  Ps.  66:  4.    Names  of  na- 


§  290 


NEGLECT  OF  AGREEMENT.  359 


tions  borrowed  from  those  of  their  progenitors,  as  Israel,  Edom,  Amalek, 
uiay  be  strictly  coustx-ued  in  the  masculine  singular,  Ex.  17:  11,  Am.  1:  11, 
or  as  a  collective  in  the  masculine  plural,  Hos.  8:  2,  Ob.  ver.  6,  2  Sam. 
10:  17,  or  again  in  the  feminine  singular,  whether  this  arises  from  a 
prominent  reference  to  the  land  or  from  the  frequent  personification  of  a 
people  as  a  maiden,  2  Sam.  10:  11,  Jer.  13:  19,  49:  17,  Nah.  2:  1,  cump. 
1  Sam.  27:  8;  so  C^'  i^eople  in  the  following  examples,  ~r~  ri<i:ri  thy  people 
has  done  ivrong  Ex.  5:  16,  nnijii  fii;n  the  people  dwelling  Judg.  18:  7,  Jer. 
8:  5.  Different  constructions  may  be  united  in  the  same  passage,  Jer.  48: 
15,  Hos.  14:  1.  In  1  Sam.  17:  21  the  verb  agrees  not  with  ^x^'r^  but  with 
nbiy^,  which  is  in  apposition  with  it. 

6.  Masculine  verbs,  adjectives  and  pronouns  are 
sometimes  used  when  females  are  spoken  of,  or  when 
the  nouns  to  which  they  refer  are  feminine,  from  a  neg- 
lect to  note  the  gender  where  no  stress  is  laid  upon  it. 

a.  Thus,  n^iP^nil  and  they  (queens  and  concubines)  praised  her  Cant. 
6:  9;  Jehovah  deal  kindly  ci:^;'  with  you  (Euth  and  Orpah)  as  cHrr  ye 
have  dealt  Ruth  1:8;  '^rp  my  dead  (Sarah)  Gen.  23:  4.  This  neglect  of 
gender  is  most  frequent  in  i^ronouns  both  as  referring  to  females,  Ex.  1:  21, 
2:  17,  Num.  36:6,  Judg.  11:  34,  19:24,  21:  12,  22,  1  Sam.  6:  7,  2  Sam.  6:  22, 
and  to  feminine  nouns,  Ex.  11:  6,  22:  25,  Lev.  6:  8,  27:  9,  Num.  3:  27,  33, 
Deut.  27:  2,  5,  1  Sam.  10:  18,  Isa.  34:  17.  It  is  comparatively  rare  in  verb.*!, 
(many  apparent  instances  are  impersonal  constructions,  §  284.  e),  bNT:3  1  Sam. 
2:  20,  25:  27,  1  Chron.  2:  48,  "nnrri^  Isa.  37:  8,  br^irn  Jer.  3:  5,  xiin;!  Ezek. 
22:  4,  Job  3:  24,  16:  22,  unless  they  precede  the  subject,  Y~'M^  ^k^  xrj-xb 
the  land  could  not  bear  them  Gen.  13:  6,  riiDX'J  *iTin  tremble  ye  careless 
ivonien  Isa.  32:  11,  1  Kin.  8:  31,  22:  36,  2  Kin.  3:  26,  i3:  20,  Eccl.  7:  7,  Isa. 
14:  11,  47:  11,  Jer.  51:  46.  In  Isa.  14:  9,  33:  9  the  nearer  verb  agrees  with 
itg  noun,  while  the  more  remote  does  not;  so  in  adjectives  1  Kin.  19:  11, 
but  the  reverse  Dan.  1 :  15.  Both  gender  and  number  neglected,  2  Kin. 
12:  14,  Job  42:  15,  Ps,  57:  2,  Blic.  2:  6.  Lack  of  agreement  in  adjectives 
and  participles,  1  Kin.  22:  13,  Ps.  119:  137,  2  Chron.  3:  11.  A  feminine  pre- 
dicate attached  to  a  masculine  noun  Eccl.  8:  11,  10:  15  is  anomalous. 

§  290.  1.  When  a  compound  subject,  §  247.  1,  is  re- 
garded as  forming  one  whole  the  predicate  is  put  in  the 
smgular ;  otherwise  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural  referring 
to  them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  noun  or 
with  the  principal  w^ord  to  which  the  rest  are  sub- 
ordinate. 

a.  Singular  predicate:  tiz"!"^  -HTI  ?C3  silver  and  gold  is  multiplied 
Deut.  8:  13,  Gen.  9:  2,  1  Sam.'20:  31,  T\:tr^_  1  Kin.  5:  8,  6:  7,  Neh.  6:  12, 
Esth.  4:  3,  Jer.  14:  15,  49:  24,  Hos.  4:  11,  so  attributive  Josh.  11:  4  and 


360  SYNTAX.  §  291-293 

pronoun  Gen.  10:  12.  Plural  predicate:  Ex.  5:  1,  7:  20,  17:  10,  Judg.  8:  12, 
!inb  1  Sam.  31:  7,  even  after  nouns  connected  by  ix  or  Dent.  22:  1,  4,  st 
pronouns  Lev.  13:  38.  Agreement  with  nearest  noun:  i/e  and  your  tvives 
nS'ii'i'^J  ^'«^"«  spoTx-en  Jer.  44:  25,  Num.  12:  1,  Deut.  13:  7,  Job  19:  15,  28:  18. 
With  principal  word:  cvkx  ■'^^^31.  "^ii*  I  and  mi/ maidens  will  fast  Esth. 
4:  16,  K3  3k'i"'1  1)1  I'ilS?  the  servants  of  David  and  Joab  came  2  Sam.  :-i:  22, 
16:  18,  20:  10,  Gen.  3:  8,  7;  7,  14:  15,  Ex.  1:  6,  21:  4,  1  Sam.  25:42,  1  Kin. 
1;  41,  2  Kin.  4:  7,  2  Cbron.  11:  14,  Jer.  41:  16.  Singular  predicate  before 
a  compound  subject  and  plural  after:  Gen.  9:  23,  14:  8,  33:  7,  Ex.  4:  29, 
7:  10,  10:  3,  1  Sam.  27:  8,  Jer.  39:  1,  4,  43:  2,  comp.  Gen.  11:  29,  Num.  3:4. 

2.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  differ- 
ent genders,  it  will  be  put  in  the  masculine  in  preference 
to  the  feminine,  tD^ipT  H'l'ir']  Dh"):i5<  Abraham  and  Sarah 
were  old  Gen.  18  ll,"24r55,  E:L'9:  19,  Lev.  3:  1,  Esth. 
4:  14,  Ps.  55:  6,  Prov.  27:  9,  Jer.  22:  26,  30:  19,  Joel 
1:  9,  13;  if  they  a^' •  of  different  persons, .  the  predicate 
will  be  put  in  ther  >nd  in  preference  to  the  third,  and 
in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the  others,  "is 
nS'13  ^i!S  "|fJ5V1  I  and  Jonathan  yny  son  will  he  1  Sam.  14: 

40,  20:  23,  DrH^T.  T'^^  ^"^-1  •^^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^  Aaron  thy 
brother  and  ye  shall  speak  Num.  20:  8.  , 

§  291.  The  plural  is  sometimes  used  indefinitely, 
where  only  one  is  intended. 

a.  Thus,  they  hated  him  for  T^nb'^ti  his  dreams,  though  he  had  told 
them  but  one  Gen.  37:  8,  nilipa?  tvith  staves,  a  staff  1  Sam.  17:  43,  Gen. 
8:4,  13:  12,  19:  29,  21:  7,  T^niDS  46:  15,  nin^-i  Ex.  21:  22,  Num.  26:  8, 
Judg.  12:  7,  ni^'^N  14:  5,  2  Chron.  16:  14,  JoId  19:  1,  21:  32,  Zech.  9:  9. 
The  singular  may  also  be  used  distributively,  where  the  plural  is  intended, 
they  tivo  dreamed  Bi?n  a  dream,  Gen.  40:  5. 

§  292.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns,  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural,  riisT  Vikb  ^i"? 
the  eyes  of  Leah  were  tender  Gen.  29:  17. 

§  293.  If  two  or  more  nouns  are  united  in  the  con- 
struct state  the  predicate  ordinarily  agrees  with  the  first 
as  the  leading  word  in  such  combinations:  it  may,  how- 
ever, agree  with  the  second,  if  that  is  the  more  impor- 
tant, or  the  predicate  might  with  propriety  bs  referred 


§  294,  295      NEGLECT  OF  AGEEEMENT.  361 

directly  to  it,  b^^N;  "ji^ajn  ni^'iT  the  fields  of  Heslibon  lan- 
guish Isa.  16:8,  D^V^i*  n^'iliSD  0"^  ^^'OD  is  found  the  hlood 
of  the  souls  of  the  poor  Jer.  2:  34,  1  Kin.  17;  16,  Job  21: 
21,  29:  10,  38:  21. 

a.  The  predicate  agrees  generally  though  not  invariably  with  the  se- 
cond noun  when  the  first  is  V3,  or  an  abstract  expressing  a  quality  of  that 
which  follows,  nU"'^p'i"b3  ^i^n^l  and  all  the  days  of  Seth  were  Gen.  5:  8, 
CiiriO"^3  ^"(Nkril  and  all  the  icomen  tvent  out  Ex.  15:  20,  siiJS::  "^■'"^"V'^  ""7^"? 
the  choice  of  his  captains  were  drowned  ver.  4,  Job  32:  7,  33:  21  K'thibh, 
Isa.  22:  7,  Hab.  2:  8. 

§  294.  The  abrupt  changes  of  the  person  from  the 
third  to  the  first  or  second,  and  vice  versa,  which  are 
especially  frequent  with  the  prophets  and  psalmists,  Isa. 
1:  29,  Ps.  81:  15-17,  are  due  to  the  boldness  and  vivid- 
ness of  their  conceptions,  in  virtr  of  which  they  often 
pass  in  the  course  of  the  same  e  ice  from  speaking 
of  Grod  to  speaking  in  his  name,  and  from  describing 
men  to  directly  addressing  them. 

a.  Examples  of  change  of  person  referring  to  God,  Ps.  18:  48,  49,  Isa. 
44:  24,  25;  to  men,  Kuth  4:  4,  1  Sam.  6:  4,  Ps.  49:  19,  20,  91:  13,  14,  Isa, 
5:  8,  31:  7,  33:  2,  Jer.  12:  13,  Ezek.  13:  4-7,  Hab.  2:  15;  the  same  person 
used  successively  of  God  and  man,  Ex.  7:  17,  Zech.  2:  13-15.  The  lan- 
guage of  address  may  be  continued  in  the  third  person,  when  a  noun  or 
participle  is  introduced  as  a  vocative,  take  you  censers,  'ih'iS'bD'"  n"ip  Korah 
and  all  his  company  Num.  16:  6,  1  Kin.  22:  28,  Job  17:  10,  18:  4,  Ps. 
18:  51,  65:  7,  Isa.  10:  5,  22:  16,  48:  1,  54:  1,  Dan.  9:  4,  Obad.  ver.  3,  Mic. 
1:2;  a  superior  may  be  respectfully  addressed  in  the  third  person  2  Sam. 
14:  17.  So  a  person  may  speak  of  himself  in  the  third  person  Job  12:  4, 
18:  28,  especially  in  polite  phrase  as  'thy  servant',  'thy  handmaid'  2  Sam. 
17:  38,  1  Kin.  1:  17,27.  Change  of  person  may  also  be  occasioned  by  intro- 
ducing the  language  of  others  with  no  formula  of  citation  Job  21:  19,  or 
bj'  passing  from  direct  to  indirect  quotation  Job  19:  28,  22:  17,  35:  3. 
The  occasional  combination  of  the  pronoun  of  the  first  person  with  a  verb 
in  the  third  is  to  be  explained  by  an  ellipsis,  ^^'^  "'ijln  behold  I  (am  he  who) 
has  laid  Isa.  28:  16,  C|bi"'  "^isri  behold  I  (am  he  who)  will  add  29:  14,  38:  5, 
Ps.  6:3. 

b.  A  different  turn  is  sometimes  given  to  a  sentence  from  that  which 
was  apparently  intended  at  first,  so  that  there  is  a  lack  formal  correspon- 
dence between  one  part  and  another  (anacoluthfm),  Gen.  3:  22,  23,  23:  13, 
Num.  15:  29,  35:  23,  Job  11:  13. 

§  295.  In  Hebrew  as  in  other  languages  there  is  the 


3G2  SYNTAX.  §  296 

occasional  ellipsis  of  a  word  whicli  can  be  readily  sup- 
plied from  the  context,  bxTJ'u3  TJJJS;  'Vil^for  the  appohdcd 
time  which  Samuel  appointed  1  Sam.  13:  8,  Deut.  11:2, 

1  Kin.  11:  25,  2  Kin.  25:  10  comp.  Jer.  52:  14,  2  Clu'on. 
34:  22,  Zeck  7:  7. 

a.  In  poetry  one  parallel  clause  is  frequently  to  be  supplied  from  an- 
other, Job  20:  2,  22:  23,  27:  U,  39:  27,  42:  3,  Ps.  18:  42,  20:  8,  113:  5.  6, 
127:  3,  Prov.  23:  17,  Isa.  48:  11  (or  supply  EW  from  ver.  9),  63;  18  (or  f'5i<^^), 
Dan.  12:  3,  Zecli.  9:  17. 

Repetition  of  Words. 

§  296.  The  repetition  of  nouns  may  denote 

1.  Distribution,  niiS  nil^  year  by  year  Deut.  14:  22, 
•tjDiii^  ^piii^  i^i  the  morning,  in  the  morning  i.  e.  every  morn- 
ing 2  Sam.  13:  4,  2  Chron.  13:  11,  Isa.  28:  19,  nns-ir^N 
t:n^b  ";n55"d"J}<  one  man  for  each  tribe  Josh.  3:  12,  4:  2; 
SO  with  numeral  adjectives,  §  255.  4,  T\y2'Q  HJIiir  by 
sevens  Gren.  7:  2,  Num.  3:  47,  Zech.  4:  2,  and  adverbs, 
W2  d^:!  little  by  little  Ex.  23:  30. 

a.  So  also  nrin  rryd  year  hy  year  1  Sam.  1:  7,  MiTT  i^nx  niir  year 
after  year  2  Sam.  21:  1;  Cii'^  fiii  Gen.  39:  10,  ni^ii  tr  1  Chron.'  12:  22,  nii 
ci^l  Esth.  2:  11,  and  once  without  repetition  C'i"'  Jer.  7:  25  daily,  day  hy 
day:  the  breadth  (of  the  court)  C^t^ns  £"^i!r^)n  fifty  (cubits)  at  each  end 
and  so  on  throughout  Ex.  27:  18;  iT'iN  d^X  any  one  or  every  one  Ex.  36:  4, 
Lev.  18:  6,  20:  2,  22:  4,  18,  24:  15,  Num.  1;  4,  4:  19,  49,  Ezek.  14:  4.  Ad- 
ditional examples,  Num.  13:  2,  17:  17,  Josh.  21:  40,  22:  14,   1  Chron.  9:  27. 

2.  Plurahty,  ^ll'l^  generation  and  generation  i.  e. 
many  generations  Deut.  32:  7,  1)bb  1p  iph  1p  i^  1::  t:b  12: 
;precept  upon  precept,  precept  upon  precept,  line  upon  line, 
line  upon  line  Isa.  28:  10,  13,  nn5^.5  1^^^«IL  pits  on  pits 
Gen.  14:  10;  or  with  the  implication  of  diversity,  "jnx 
■jnij;!  a  weight  and  a  weight  i.  e.  weights  of  two  sorts  Deut. 
25:  13,  ::bi  nb  fl  double  heart  Ps.  12:  3. 

a.  So  also  "i''n  ""h  generation,  generation  Ex.  3:  15,  Prov.  27:  24  K'thibh, 
Cni^  ^'y^  generation,  generations  i.  e.  many  generations  Ps.  72:  5,  102:  2.5, 
Isa.  51:  8.     Additional  examples,   Gen.  25:  23,  Judg.  5:  22,   1  Kin.  6:  27, 

2  Kin.  3:  16,  21:  16,  1  Chron.  28:  14-17,  2  Chron.  11:  12,  Ezr.  10:  14.  Esth, 


§297 


REPETITION  OF  WORDS.  3G3 


1:  7,  3:  12,  4:  13,  8:  17,  Eccl.  1:  4,  Ezek.  40:  41,  Joel  4:  14;  "'hi  "^  who 
and  tcho  i.  e.  what  ditferent  persons  Ex.  10:  8.  Phrase  repeated  to  indicate 
repetition,  Ex.  26:  21,  25,  28:  34,  Num.  7:  11,  17:  21,  Jer.  51:  46, 

3.  Emphasis  or  intensity,  pik  p'\iz  justice,  justice  i.  e. 
nothing  hut  justice  Deut.  IG:  20,  pbv  pll'^^  exceeding  deep 
Eccl.  7:  24;  so  with  adverbs,  "J^'J  "S"^  mightily,  mightily 
Gen.  7:  10,  and  even  a  conjunction,  "j?2Ii^  "j?2  because  even 
heccLUse  Lev.  26:  43. 

a.  The  name  repeated  in  urgent  calling,  Gen.  22:  11,  46:  2,  Ex.  3:  4, 
Empliatic  repetitions,  Deut.  2:  27,  28:  43,  Judg.  11:  25,  2  Sam.  13:  25  (bs), 
20:  20,  2  Chron.  4:  3,  Jer,  44:  9,  Lam,  1:  16,  Ezek.  40:  5,  with  the  sug- 
gestion of  inevitable  certainty.  Gen,  43:  14,  Esth,  4:  16,  Isa,  8:  9,  Plirase 
repeated,  2  Sam.  16:  16,  1  Kin.  18:  39,  Ps,  92:  10,  93:  3,  130:  6,  Eccl.  4:  1, 
Isa.  27:  1,  5,  28:  1,  3,  4,  53:  7,  Ezek.  14:  22,  16:  6,  Zech,  12:  12-14,  by  way 
of  resumption  after  a  parenthesis  or  interruption,  Judg.  9:  16,  19,  Ps.  56:  5, 
11,  12.  Eefrain  in  poetry,  Ps.  42:  6,  12,  43:  5;  Cant.  2:  7,  3:  5  etc;  Isa, 
2:  11,  17;  9:  11,  16,  20,  10:  4;  48:  22,  57:  21.  Sometimes  a  word  is  repeated 
without  special  emphasis  for  the  sake  of  adding  a  further  description  r"zri 
n"'--]  r"'3  the  house  viz.  the  house  of  Jehovah  2  Chron.  5:  13,  Gen.  35:  14, 
2  Sam.  6:  2,  Ezek.  44:  19, 

'  h.  Sometimes  the  second  word  is  put  in  a  different  gender  from  the 
first,  Miri^il  '\b'C'q  all  kinds  of  support  Isa.  3:  1,  comp.  Jer.  48:  19,  or  a 
different  number,  Q";n~i2n  "liin  a  heap,  two  heaps  Judg.  15:  16,  niTJi  nVj 
Eccl.  2:  8,  Judg,  5:  30,  Ps,  19:  7.  Or  a  cognate  word  may  be  emploj'ed, 
n^r'2!i  nr-cr  u-aste  and  desolate  Ezek.  6:  14,  33:  29,  'pri'J  nzd  Lev.  23:  3, 
Job  30:  3,  Nah.  3:  17.  Words  of  like  sound  ma}'  be  thus  emphatically 
joined  together  (paronomasia)  ^n'ri  ?nn  Gen.  1:  2,  18:  27,  Isa,  24:  1,  3,  4, 
29:  2,  6,  Zeph,  1:  15;  three  words  Nah.  2:  11;  in  successive  clauses  and 
opposed  in  sense  Isa.  5:  7, 

c.  Instances  occur  of  triple  repetition,  Tl'lT)^  ^"'i^i^  -"'^i^  holy,  holy,  holy, 
Isa.  6:  3,  y^x  'f-^^  y^^i^  0  earth,  earth,  earth,  Jer.  22:  29,  Jer,  7:  4,  Ezek, 
21:  32,  Ex.  '25:  35. 

§  297.  A  separate  pronoim  may  be  added  to  a  pro- 
nominal suffix  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  "^is  "n^*J  my 
dying,  mine  2  Sam.  19:  1,  Tyhr  np.S  thee,  thee  shall  they 
■praise  Gen.  49:  8,  or  to  a  noun  to  which  it  refers,  T\izb 
ii.'^rm^  to  Seth,  to  him  also  Gen.  4:  26,  10:  21;  and  in 
various  other  ways  beside,  which  are  more  or  less  signi- 
ficant, pronouns  may  be  repeated,  or  may  stand  in  the 
same  clause  with  the  nouns  which  they  represent. 

a.  PronouD  added  to  a  suffix,  Num.  14:  32,  Deut.  5:  3,   1  Sam,  25:  14, 


364  SYNTAX.  §  298 

1  Kin.  1:  26,  2  Chron.  35:  21,  Ps.  9:  7,  Dan.  8:  1,  IT?i?.  1:  4,  Zecli.  7:  5; 
with  ns  before  the  pronoun,  Gen.  27:  34,  1  Sam.  19:  23,  2  Sam.  17:  5, 
1  Kin.  21:  19,  Prov.  23:  15,  Eccl.  2:  15,  Jer.  25:  14,  27:  7,  with  qs  Prov. 
22:  19.  Separate  pronoun  as  a  subject  repeated.  Gen.  20:  5,  Ps.  76:  8,  Isa. 
43:  11,  or  followed  by  nsn  with  a  suffix,  Gen.  9:  9,  Ex.  14:  17.  Pronoun 
emphatically   prefixed  and  resumed  by  a  sviffix,    Gen.  17:  4,  Dent.  4:  4, 

1  Chron.  9:  22,  22:  7,  28:  2,  2  Chron.  28:  10,  Ps.  35:  13,  41:  13,  69:  14, 
Zech.  9:  11.  Pronoun  as  an  object  emphatically  prefixed  to  the  verb  and 
repeated  after  it,  1  Sam.  9:  13,  2  Kin.  9:  27.      ■• 

b.  Noun  as  a  subject  emphatically  prefixed  resumed  by  a  pronoun, 
Gen.  3:  12,  42:  11,  Num.  15:  30,  Prov.  10:  22,  24,  28:  10,  Jer.  12:  6,  Mic. 
7:  3.  Noun  as  an  object  emphatically  prefixed  resumed  by  a  suffix,  1  Sam. 
25:  29,  Isa.  8:  13,  or  by  the  noun  repeated.  Lev.  7:  8,  19,  27,  or  by  a  noun 
in  apposition  Lev.  7:  25,  Num.  35:  30.  Noun  governed  by  a  preposition 
resumed  by  a  suffix,  Gen.  2:  17,  2  Sam.  6:  22,  Neh.  9:  29,  Eccl.  1:11.  Noun 
emphatically  prefixed  standing  absolutely  and  resumed  by  a  suffix.  Num. 
14:  24,  Deut.  4:  3,   28:  54,   1  Sam.  2:  10,   2  Sam.  4:  10,   2  Kin.    10:  24,  29, 

2  Chron,  16:  9,  Ps.  11:  4,  46:  5,  Eccl.  2:  14,  Jer.  10:  3,  Nah.  1:3.  Or  a 
pronoun  may  be  followed  by  a  noun  in  apposition  with  it  by  way  of  ex- 
planation, Ex.  7:11,  1  Sam.  20:  29,  2  Sam.  17:  10,  2  Chron.  32,  30,  §256.  1.  a. 

c.  The  pleonastic  use  of  the  suffix  followed  by  the  noun  to  which  it 
refers  is  very  common  in  Syriac  and  in  Palestinian  Aramaeic,  but  occurs 
with  less  frequency  in  Hebrew,  *lb*ii~HX  sinx-iW  and  she  saw  if,  the  child 
Ex.  2:  6,  35:  5,  Lev.  13:  57,  Josh.  1:  2,  18:  19  K'thibh,  1  Sam.  21:  14, 
2  Sam.  14:  6,  1  Chron.  16:  42  (?),  2  Chron.  26:  14,  Ezr.  3:  12  (?),  9:  1,  Esth. 
3:  8,  Job  29:  3,  Ps.  83:  12,  Prov.  5:  22,  13:  4,  14:  13,  Cant.  1:  6,  3:  7,  Isa. 
17:  6,  Jer.  9:  14,  31:  2,  41:  3,  48:  44,  52:  20,  Ezek.  3:  21. 

d.  A  pronoun  may  be  added  in  apposition  to  a  personal  subject  or  ob- 
ject in  order  to  attach  other  associated  persons;  thus  to  a  subject,  the 
handmaids  came  near  '^h'^^Id^i  nsn  they  and  their  children,  Gen.  33:  6,  43:  8, 
50:  14,  Ex.  12:  4,  24:  1,  Deut.  2:  32,  3:  1,  5:  14,  6:  2,  12:  7,  12,  18,  Judg. 
19:  9,  Jer.  19:  4,  35:  8;  to  a  direct  object.  Gen.  41 :  10;  to  an  indirect  ob- 
ject, 1  Kin.  2:  22,  Ps.  115:  14;  though  the  addition  of  a  pronoun  is  not 
necessary  in  such  cases  Ex.  18:  5,  6,  Num.  16:  18,  27,  Judg.  7:  19,  Jer.  19:  1. 

Inteeeogative  and  Negative  Sentences. 

§298.  1.  A  direct  question  is  indicated  by  the  inter- 
rogative particle  H,  ^bbinrj  wilt  thou  go?  Gen.  24:  58, 
"rs*  D"i^'bs<  ^riririi  cim  I  in  the  2Jlcice  of  God?  Glen.  50:  19; 
an  indirect  question  by  H  or  DX  if,  to  know  D^itj.i^  Q?.*^tn 
ivhether  you  love  Deut.  13:  4,  inquire  TTr\i^'Wi^  whether  I 
shall  recover  prop,  if  I  shall  2  Kin.  1:2. 

a.  The  interrogative  particle  properlj'  stands  at  the  beginning  of  its 
clause,  and  may  precede  a  hypothetical  clause  on  which  the  question  de- 


§  298       ENTEEEOGATIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  SENTENCES.  3G5 

pends  Gen.  4:  7,  Job  4:2;  in  Ps.  94:  9,  10  it  is  for  greater  effect  repeated 
befoi-e  the  principal  word.  It  is  added  to  strengthen  another  interrogative 
Jer.  23:  26.  It  is  disputed,  whetlier  CXn  in  Num.  17:  28,  Job  6:  13  is  equi- 
valent to  an  emphatic  n  or  to  xbn  (=X  as  in  oaths  §  305.  rt).  The  force  of 
the  particle  !i  may  extend  to  subsequent  clauses  Ezek.  17:  15;  so  other 
words  of  interrogation  1  Sam.  15:  19,  Ps.  73:  11,  74:  1,  Hos.  11:8.  n  asks 
a  question,  whose  answer  is  uncertain,  Ci3"'2X  D'ilirn  is  your  father  icell? 
Gen.  43 :  27 ;  also  when  a  negative  answer  is  obviously  expected :  ■'nx  "'C-n 
"::x  am  I  my  brothers  keeper?  Gen.  4:  9,  2  Sam.  7:5,  as  on  the  other 
hand  N^n^ expects  an  affirmative  answer,  "'V"?-?  i^*'''^  ^'^^.  ^^^'^  '*^  "''^  ^'""' 
self  say  to  me  Gen.  20:  5,  2  Kin.  20:  19;  sometimes  n  demands  an  affirma- 
tive answer,  where  any  other  is  obviously  inadmissible  n~^~n  haf>t  thou 
murdered?  as  thou  certainly  hast  1  Kin.  21:  19,  h^ir\  tvas  it  a  light  thing 
i.  e.  since  it  was  in  his  estimation  a  light  thing  1  Kin.  16:  31,  1  Sam.  2:  27, 
Job  20:  4.  In  a  few  instances  H  introduces  an  indirect  question.  Gen. 
8:  8,  Ex.  4:  18,  Esth.  3:  4. 

2.  In  a  disjunctive  question  whether  direct  or  in- 
direct the  first  member  is  commonly  introduced  by  m 
and  the  second  by  DS  or  Ukv,  thus  direct  '^i'^Jj.  sJiall  I 
go  b^nt^  C^i;  or  shall  I  forbear?  1  Kin.  22:  6,  "1^:"  is  it 
any  pleasure  T^3rU)^^  or  is  it  gain?  Job  22:  3,  Num.  11: 
12,  Judg.  20:  28,  Job  7:  12,  40:  8,  9,  Isa.  10:  9,  Jer.  18: 
14,  Am.  3:  5,  6,  6:2,  Hab.  3:  8;  indirect,  to  knoiv  r,-r.inn 
tchether  Jehovah  had  prospered  his  luay  J^b'DS;  or  not  Gen. 
24:  21,  27:  21,  37:  32,  Num.  11:  23,  Judg.  2:  22. 

a.  The  second  member  is  more  rarely  introduced  by  "X  or,  ivho  knotceth 
hz^  "ix  n^n-  cbnn  whether  he  shall  be  a  ivise  man  or  a  fool  Eccl.  2:  19,  or 
by  rt  repeated  "E^rt  K'rt  pinrt  whether  they  be  strong  or  weak  Num.  13:  18, 
iiprt  !i;l3  crx"ip  ^;"l'"i">rt  have  ye  called  us  to  impoverish  us  or  not?  Judg. 
14:  15  or  i3y  rt  ix,  rt^rt:rt  hath  there  been  the  like  V^"^}'r\  "ix  or  hath  the 
like  been  heard?  Deut.  4;  32.  The  construction  of  the  second  clause  is 
interrupted  and  resumed  again  in  Gen.  17:  17. 

fc.  If  a  question  stand  in  a  disjunctive  relation  to  something  previously 
expressed  or  implied,  it  may  begin  with  CX,  "lii'rt  "Tsrs-rx  =:""  your  per- 
versity! or  is  the  potter  to  be  reckoned  as  the  clay?  Isa.  29:  16,  ^px  rx"?  CX 
or  is  this  thing  from  my  lord?  1  Kin.  1:  27,  2  Kin.  20:  9,  Prov.  27:  24,  Jer. 
48:  27.  Occasionally  in  poetry  CX  is  used  in  questions  which  are  neithei 
disjunctive  nor  indirect  Hos.  12:  12. 

3.  A  question  may  also  be  asked  by  means  of  the 
interrogative  pronouns  or  inten^ogative  adverbs.  Or  it 
may,  without  any  particle  of  interrogation,  be  indicated 


366  BTNTAX.  §  299 

simply  by  the  tone  of  voice  in  which  it  is  uttered,  03'^ 
ir^sis  tliy  coming  is  ])eaceful?  1  Sam.  16:  4,  ^T^_  DiB^  the 
ymng  man  is  safe?  2  Sam.  18:  29,  comp.  ver.  32. 

a.  '^'0  who  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  the  addition  of  a  demonstra- 
tive, thus  ni  10  who  then?  Job  38:  2,  Ps.  24:  8,  25:  12,  Jer.  46:  7;  Nin  i!2 
Job  13:  19;  HT  X^n  ia  Esth.  7:  5,  Ps.  24:  10,  Jer.  30:  21.  ^^  is  so  invari- 
ably used  substantively  that  it  is  probably  to  be  so  construed  even  in  such 
combinations  as  flin"'  "^"zi;  "^a  who  is  a  man  that  shall  live  Ps.  89:  49,  so 
Deut.  3:  24,  Judg.  !21:  8,  2  Sam.  7:  23;  n^  ivhat  on  the  other  hand  is  often 
used  attributively,  r^h-na  what  gain?  Gen.  37:  26,  Job  26:  J4,  Ps.  89:  48, 
Prov.  16:  16,  Mai.  1:  13.  ^"0  always  stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause 
unless  preceded  by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  ''^  "3  lohose  son?  1  Sam. 
17:  56,  58  or  by  a  preposition  I'D  I'^nx  after  whom?  1  Sam.  24:  15;  the 
subject  may  emphatically  precede  1153^3  for  what?  why?  2  Sam.  24:  3.  n  is 
in  a  few  instances  dropped  before  a  guttural  letter,  1  Sam.  22:  15,  2  Sam. 
15:  20,  19:  23,  1  Kin.  1:  24;  or  omitted  from  a  question  when  another  pi-e- 
cedes  introduced  by  H  Job  37:  18,  38:  18,  39:  2,  40:  30.  Question  with  no 
sign  of  interrogation,  Ex.  8:  22,  Judg.  l4:  16,  1  Sam.  22:  7,  27:  10,  Job 
40:  25,  Jer.  25:  29,  Zech.  8:  6,  Mai.  2:  15. 

§  299.  A  negative  prefixed  to  a  clause  negatives  like- 
wise those  that  follow,  if  they  are  regarded  as  continuous 
^:nb5^::rj  bib  tliou  hast  not  brought  us  ^DV'riFil  nor  given  us 
Num.  16:  14,  ^jH'lDin'bx  rebuke  me  not  ^j^p;;;n  T^n'^n^^  nor 
in  thy  ivrath  chastise  me  Ps.  38:  2,  1  Sam.  2:  3,  Job  4:  6, 
23:  17,  30:  25,  32:  9,  Ps.  44:  19,  75:  6,  Prov.  30:  3,  Isa. 
14:  21;  but  if  the  latter  are  considered  as  separate  and 
distmct,  they  are  unaffected  by  an  antecedent  negative, 
if  "^yiyzT)  !j<b  ye  will  not  hearken  Dn*^"::^  hut  rebel  1  SauL 
12:  15,  ^HMcrrbx  turn  not  aside  DFiinJ^I  but  serve  Jehovah 
ver.  20,  15:  9,  18:  17,  2  Sam.  14:  14.  which  must  be  re- 
peated, if  its  force  is  to  be  extended,  riTn"!j5b  he  hath  not 
despised  YJ>w  sbl  and  hath  not  abhorred  Tncri't^bl.  and 
hath  not  hidden  "^Vd  iJ^A'^^  (^nd  hath  heard  him  ivhen  he 
cried  Ps.  22:  25,  Josh.  1:  5^  9,  1  Sam.  12:  21,  Isa.  23:  4' 
38:  18,  40:  24. 

a.  When  a  condition  is  negatived,  whatever  was  suspended  upon  it  is 
negatived  as  to  actual  performance,  though  its  conditional  relation  remains, 
nrriX''  nh"  "j-'anr-sb  thou  desirest  not  sacrifice,  but  if  thou  didst  desire  it, 
ftcmdd  give  it  Ps.  51:  18,  55:  13.  '•40:  9,  Jer  5:  28,  Ezek.  11:  11,  §  275.  I.  b. 


§  300  RELATIVE  CLAUSES.  3  37 

In  a  few  instances  interpreters  are  not  agreed  whether  the  force  of  th« 
negative  extends  to  the  second  clause  or  not,  e.  g.  Deut,  33:  6,  Job  32:  3. 

b.  Negative  adverbs  precede  the  verbs  and  adjectives  which  they  qual- 
ify Gen.  2:  5,  18  and  commonly  stand  at  the  beginning  of  their  clause. 
fc<3  is  in  poetry  sometimes  prefixed  to  nouns  forming  a  sort  of  ne^^ative 
compound,  ^S<~X^  «  not-God,  incapable  of  being  regarded  as  God,  of  a  na- 
ture opposite  to  his,  n'v-^h  a  not-people  Deut.  32:  21,  Job  10:  22,  26:  2, 
Isa.  10:  15,  31:  8,  55:  2,  Jer.  5:  7;  Nb  and  bx  are  exceptionally  used  as 
nouns  in  Job  6:  21,  24:  25. 

c.  Therfe  is  an  ambiguity  in  certain  cases  in  the  use  of  negatives,  ac- 
cording as  they  qualify  the  verb  or  some  other  word  in  the  sentence.  Thus 
'in  ys  bs^  ^b^Nrrsb  Gen.  3:  1  may  negative  the  act  of  eating  with  respect 
to  a'l  the  trees  of  the  garden,  as  though  they  were  to  eat  of  none,  comp. 
Gen.  11:  6,  1  Sam.  U:  24,  Isa.  54:  17,  Ezek.  18:  22,  §  248.  6.  e;  or  the  ne- 
gative may  terminate  upon  "all"  and  indicate  that  the  eating  may  be  of 
some  but  not  of  all  the  trees,  comp.  Lev.  16:  2,  Num.  23;  13,  Josh.  7:  3, 
1  Kin.  11:  13.  So  in  dbirb  ::'iB";  xb  Ps.  15:  5  the  verb  is  negatived,  he  shall 
not  be  moved  for  ever,  he  shall  never  be  moved,  comp.  Ps.  10:  11,  30:  7, 
49:  20,  55:  23,  Jer.  50:  39,  Joel  2:  26;  but  in  nbissb  "ivL-x  xb  Jer.  3:  12  the 
negative  qualifies  Dbi"b  it  is  not  for  ever  but  only  for  a  season  that  God 
retains  his  anger.  Comp.  Job  7:  16,  Ps.  9:  19,  44:  24,  103:  9,  Prov.  27:  24, 
Isa.  28:  28,  Lam.  3:  31.  For  the  use  of  bx  and  xb  with  the  different  forms 
of  the  future,  see  §§  271.  b,  272.  e,  273,  273.  d,  275.  2.  e,  for  •"X  with  the 
participle  see  §  278.  4.  b,  for  "'nbs  with  the  infinitive  see  §  279.  e,  for  xb 
•with  the  emphatic  infinitive  absolute,  see  §  281.  1.  6. 


Relative  Clauses. 

§  300.  From  simple  sentences,  or  those  which  con- 
tain a  single  proposition,  we  now  pass  to  compound  sen- 
tences in  which  two  or  more  propositions  are  linked 
together.  These  several  propositions  constitute  as  many 
distinct  clauses,  which  are  for  the  most  part  united  by 
the  relative  pronoun  or  by  conjunctions.  As  the  relative 
regularly  occupies  the  first  place  in  its  own  clause,  and 
as  the  Hebrew  admits  of  no  inflections  to  represent  case, 
some  special  device  w^as  necessary  to  indicate  its  relation 
to  the  following  words.  Accordingly,  when  the  relative 
"•ib'X  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun,  or  preposition,  this  is 
shown  by  appending  an  appropriate  jDronominal  suffix 
to  the  governing  word,  §  74;  houses  of  clay  "iS^S  n^S 


368  BYNTx  t.  §  300 

Diic;  ivJiose  foundation  is  in  the  dubt  Job  4:  19;  the iMce 
Vb>" ...  nizy;  upon  ivliich  Ex.  3:  5;  thou  ti^rpr^;  ^.ti^J;  ivhom 
I  have  chosen  Isa.  41:  8;  thou  T|i;;b/£''i?  ivhose  king  Eccl.  10: 
17.  The  personal  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  added,  when 
the  relative  is  the  subject  of  its  clause,  §  246.  2,  t^^TnoiS! 
TXjX2  who  is  saving  you  1  Sam.  10:  19,  i<^n  '^?']-!'-r  ^'^  ^^^ 
loho  is  not  of  thy  seed  Gen.  17:  12,  7:  2,  9:  3,  Num.  17:  5, 
35:  31,  Deut.  20:  15,  2  Chron.  8:  7,  Ps.  16:  3,  but  never 
if  the  clause  contain  a  verb,  since  its  inflections  suffi- 
ciently indicate  the  antecedent. 

a.  The  relative  naturally  refers  to  the  nearest  noun,  whose  sense  will 
admit  of  such  a  reference,  or  to  one  in  the  nearest  group  of  nouns.  In  Isa. 
29:  22  the  remoter  noun  is  manifestly  the  antecedent,  but  such  instances 
are  rare.  In  a  few  cases  the  antecedent  is  a  pronominal  suffix  ^iix  'inx  by 
it  (the  altar)  loliich  was  1  Kin.  9:  25;  Ps.  31:  8  (where  some  regard  TiJX  as 
a  conjunction),  Eccles.  10;  15,  Zech.  12:  10.  The  antecedent  is  transferred 
to  the  relative  clause  in  Jer.  14:  1  n^n^  "iriT  tTTj  "lix  lit.  that  tvhich  was 
the  tcord  etc.  for  the  tvord  of  Jehovah  tvhich  loas  etc.;  so  46:  1,  47:  1,  49:  34, 
Ezek.  12:  25;  but  not  Lev.  4:  22,  Num.  5:  29  where  irx  is  a  conjunction, 
coiiip.  1  Kin.  8:  31.  In  Ps.  69:  27  the  relative  yields  the  first  place  in  its 
clause  to  a  word  emphatically  prefixed ;  so  in  all  probability  2  Chron.  8 :  9, 
where  ^liix  Vk'^b"^  "'pa  '(q  must  mean  those  ivho  tvere  of  the  children  of  Israel 
(in  the  parallel  passage  1  Kin.  9:  22  "idx  does  not  occur).  In  Eccles.  7:  24 
pirTn  does  not  belong  to  the  relative  but  to  the  principal  clause. 

6.  The  suffix  emploj'ed  to  indicate  the  government  of  the  relative  may 
be  in  the  first  or  second  person  corresponding  with  the  subject  of  the  prin- 
cipal clause,  even  though  the  relative  refers  more  directly  to  an  antecedent 
in  the  third  person,  I  am  Joseph  "*rj<  . . .  'liix  lohom  ye  sold  Gen.  45 :  4, 
Num.  22:  30,  Isa.  49:  3,  23,  Jer.  32:  19,  Ezek.  11:  12.  The  verb  attached 
to  the  relative  follows  the  person  of  its  antecedent  2  Sam.  3:8,  or  it  may 
in  like  manner  be  attracted  to  the  first  or  second  person  occurring  in  the 
principal  clause  I  am  Jehovah  who  Tj'rx^'n  have  brought  thee  out  Ex.  20:  2, 
1  Chron.  21:  17.  In  Deut.  30:  16  "^ii-X  '-iC><  is  not  the  relative  with  the 
first  person  pronoun  added  after  the  analogy  of  X'fl  in  other  places,  §  300, 
I  icho,  but  is  a  conjunctive  for,  inasmuch  as,  but  not  Ex.  3:  14.  The  ar- 
ticle, when  used  for  the  relative  §  248.  6.  c  is  in  like  manner  followed  by 
a  suffix  to  represent  the  oblique  cases  1  Chron.  29:  8.  Occasionally  for 
greater  perspicuity  or  emphasis  the  noun  itself  may  be  repeated  after  the 
relative  instead  of  a  sufHx  Gen.  13:  16  (or  TwX  a  conjunction  so  that)  49:  30, 
50:  13,  Jer.  31:  32.  In  Ps.  8:2  a  noun  explanatory  of  the  antecedent  is  in 
apposition  with  the  relative,  if  nsFl  is  impei-.  ivl rich  put  viz.  thy  glory,  but 
not  if  it  is  infln.  thoxi,  the  putting  of  whof<e  glory  i.  e.  who  hast  put  thy 
glory,  §  132.  1,     d'^X  when  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun,  §  246.  2.  b,  and 


§  301  RELATIVE  CLAUSES.  3G9 

standing  in  a  possessive  relation  to  nouns  often  follows  the  analogy  of  the 
relative,  in  being  prefixed  absolutely  and  then  represented  in  the  course  of 
the  sentence  by  a  pronominal  suffix,  coinp.  §  297.  b,  i'i'ibns  d'^X  according 
to  the  dream  of  each,  Gen.  41:12,  rnx  d"'N  ij'is  from  the  hand  of  each  one^s 
brother  Gen.  9:  5,  15:  10,  42:  25,  35,  Ex.  12:  4,  28:  21,  Num.  5:  10,  12, 
17:  17,  26:  54,  Judg.  21:  22,  2  Chron.  23:  10,  Cant.  3:  8;  though  it  may 
also  follow  the  usual  construction  of  nouns,  the  silver  of  each  may  be  vjoia 
TT-iX  Gen.  43:  21,  44:  1  as  well  as  "ibpS  diX  42:  35,  Prov.  12:  14,  13:  2, 
comp.  Zech.  7:  10  with  8:  17. 

c.  The  suffix  is  never  omitted  when  the  relative  is  governed  by  a  pre- 
position, and ^ only  once  when  governed  by  a  noun  Nah.  3:8:  but  though 
often  added  after  transitive  verbs  Isa.  29:  11,  Jer.  19:  4,  it  is  quite  as  fre- 
quently omitted  when  not  required  by  perspicuity  or  emphasis  Gen.  6:7; 
so  also  when  it  is  a  secondary  object  §  287.  3  ashes  ^irx  to  ivhieh  the  fire 
shall  consume  the  burnt-offering  Lev.  6:3;  and  sometimes  after  verbs  which 
usually  take  an  indirect  object,  thus  after  "inn,  §  286.  1.  a,  Num.  16:  7  (but 
see  ver.  5),  Gen.  6:  2,  Deut.  12:  5,  after  "ihlS  Deut.  29:  15.  It  may  also 
stand  absolutely  §  288.  2  to  denote  general  relation,  where  precision  would 
have  required  a  preposition  Gen.  22:  14  {in  respect  to  which  it  is  said,  or 
"lirx  may  be  a  conjunction  so  that),  Ex.  4:  28,  2  Sam,  11:  22,  Isa.  8:  12, 
31:  6,  Jer.  42:  5;  or  the  relations  of  time  {in  tvhich,  ivhen)  Gen.  6:  4,  Lev. 
4:  22,  2  Sam.  19:  25,  1  Kin.  8:  9,  Vs.  139:  15;  place  {ivhere  which  might 
be  more  fully  expressed  by  D'j  .  ,  .  ICX,  §  74)  Gen.  35:  13,  14,  39:  20, 
Deut.  1:  31,  or  {to  which,  whither  after  verbs  of  motion,  equivalent  to 
nab  ....  n-i'X)  Gen.  28:  15,  Num.  13:  27,  Josh.  1 :  7,  1  Kin.  12:  2,  Jer.  22:  12; 
manner  {in  which,  according  to  tchich,  as,  horv)  Gen.  30:  29,  Ex.  14:  13, 
1  Kin.  14:  19,  1  Chi'on.  13:  6  as  he  is  called  hy  name;  or  cause  {for  which, 
ichy)  1  Kia  11:  27  or  means  {by  tvhich,  with  ivhich)  Deut.  7:  19,  2  Kin. 
19:  6. 

§  301.  When  the  antecedent  is  expressed,  the  rela- 
tive clause  has  the  force  of  an  attributive,  the  man  tvhom 
the  Lord  loveth  being  equivalent  to  the  man  beloved  of  the 
Lord.  When  the  antecedent  is  not  expressed,  it  is  in- 
cluded in  "irs;,  which  then  resembles  the  English  com- 
pound relative  tvhat,  and  must  be  rendered  he  who  or 
that  which  \'T\^'2rb^  ^I'i'STi^^  Tii'^l  and  he  commanded  him 
who  was  over  his  house  Gen.  44:  1,  Jer.  15:2,  to  make 
thee  understand  ""'©^5  nx  that  which  shall  befall  thy  people 
Dan.  10:  14,  nirsb  to  those  who  Gen.  47:  24,  Ruth  2:  2, 
rj^piD  "tJX  "T'2  into  the  hand  of  them  whom  thou  hatest 
Ezek.  23:  28." 

a.  Eelative  clauses  may  accordingly  interchange  with  attributive  parti* 

24 


6i 


0  BYITTAX.  §  302 


ciples,  Isa.  48:  1,  or  with  participles  used  substantively  Ps.  15:  3-5.    So  the 
indefinite  pronoun  "'33  Eccles.  5:  9. 

b.  For  the  compound  relative  as  a  subject,  the  personal  pronoun  may 
be  expressed,  and  the  relative  omitted,  (instead  of  the  reverse)  "inTS  S<>lil1 
Ezek.  33:  5  (better  explained  §  309,  2.  a),  or  both  may  be  expressed  TrX  Sin 
1  Chron.  21:  17,  The  personal  pronoun  may  be  introduced  before  the  verb 
to  give  emphasis  to  a  relative  clause,  vi'hich  is  its  subject  lix  he  that  shall 
come  forth  etc.  Wti  he  shall  be  thine  heir  Gen,  15:  4,  Deut,  18:  22,  Ecch  3: 
14,  Job  6:  7  where  Trx  is  understood  in  the  first  clause.  The  sign  of  the 
definite  object  rx  or  a  preposition  preceding  a  relative  clause,  belongs  not 
to  the  relative  but  to  tbe  antecedent  understood  or  to  the  entire  clause 
"irx  bs  not  unfo  ivhom,  but  unto  him  who  etc.  Isa,  29:  12,  I  make  thee  to 
know  llTN  rx  that  which  shall  be  Dan,  8:  19,  ive  have  heard  ^t'Ji  rx  Aowetc. 
Josh.  2:  10.  Exceptions  are  extremely  rare  "li'S  Q"  ivifh  ivhom  Gen.  31:  32, 
■ntx  riN  tchom  Jer.  38:  9,  Zech,  12:  10;  Gesenius  finds  another  in  '^t?<3 
Isa,  47:  12,  but  this  can  be  otherwise  explained. 

§  302.  The  relative  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only 
as  in  English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  an  attributive 
clause,  ^zy  rinirs  into  the  pit  (which)  they  have  made  Ps. 
9:  16;  but  also  when  it  is  the  subject,  he  forsook  l^i5i;5 
iiniiy  God  (who)  made  him  Deut.  32:  15;  and  even  where 
it  would  stand  for  the  compound  relative  and  include 
its  antecedent  nba;?}""^^!  by  the  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou 
wilt  send  Ex.  4:  13;  (so  doth)  ^mr\  bij^'i  Sheol  (those  who) 
have  sinned  Job  24:  19. 

a.  Additional  examples  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  in  an  attributive 
clause,  when  it  is  the  direct  object  Ex,  13:  8,  1  Chron,  29:  3,  Ps.  7:  16, 
25:  12,  51:  10,  80:  18,  Isa.  10:  1,  42:  16,  rarely  when  the  antecedent  has 
the  article  Job  28:1;  occasionally  the  pronominal  suffix  is  added  to  the 
governing  word  Deut,  32:  17,  Job  4:  19,  13:  28,  28:  7,  Ps.  109:  19,  When 
the  relative  is  an  indirect  object  Ex.  18:  20,  Deut.  32:  37,  Isa.  48:  21,  When 
it  is  the  subject,  with  no  verb  expressed  Gen.  15:  13,  Deut.  7:  25,  Ptov. 
26:  17,  Hab.  1:  6,  with  ^^1  Gen.  39:  4  (but  see  ver,  5);  with  a  verb  Job 
13:  19,  20:  26,  Ps.  17:  12,  78:  6,  91 :  5,  6,  Isa,  30:  6,  in  a  very  few  instances 
when  the  antecedent  is  definite  Ps,  49:  13,  21.  When  the  relative  is  gov- 
erned by  a  noun  Ezr.  1:  5,  Isa.  43:  14.  When  the  relative  would  stand 
absolutely,  as  expressing  the  manner  or  means  Job  21:  27,  place  Job 
38:  19,  24,  or  time  Ps.  49:  6.  In  designations  of  time  the  antecedent  is 
usually  in  the  construct,  §  258.  2,  1  Sam.  25:  15,  2  Chron.  24:  11,  Job  6:  17, 
29:  2,  Ps,  4:  8,  56:  4,  88:  2,  90:  15,  Lam.  3:  57,  less  frequently  when  it  de- 
notes place  Isa.  29:  1.  Still  more  rarely  other  antecedents  may  by  poetic 
license  be  put  in  the  construct  before  an  attributive  clause  with  the  rela- 
tive  omitted,  Ps.   16:  3,   58:  5,  81:  6,  Jer.  48:  36   nir  n^r.-;   (but  in  the 


§  303 


BELATIVE  CLAUSES,  371 


parallel  Isa.  15:  7  rtis  n'^rr^,  Hos.  1:  2  -la'^:  nlnn  at  first  when  Jehovah 
spake;  a  like  construction  has  been  needlessly  assumed  Gen.  1:  1,  §  250.  b. 
Some  have  fancied  an  anomalous  ellipsis  of  the  relative  before  the  infinitive 
Jer.  10:  13  "inn  b'^pb  at  the  voice  of  his  uttering  i.  e.  which  he  utters;  it 
may,  however,  be  read  at  the  sound  of  his  giving  abundance  ofivater.  The 
nouns  oip^  place  and  Di"^  day  are  in  ordinary  prose  repeatedly  put  in  the 
construct  before  the  relative  clause  even  when  "i;x  is  expressed  Gen.  39:  20, 
40:  3,  Num.  9:  17,  1  Kin,  21:  19,  Eccles.  1:  7,  Ps.'l04:  8  (where  HT  is  used 
as  a  relative);  Deut.  4:  10,  Jer.  20:  14,  38:  28;  so  in  the  phrase  "irx  "i^T^? 
for  the  reason  that,  because  Deut.  22:  24,  23:  5,  2  Sam.  13:  22.  There  are 
occasional  examples  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  relative  after  the  adverbs  of  place 
and  time,  C"i"":  fr-om  the  place  where  Gen.  49:  24,  Tsp  from  the  time  when 
Ex.  4:  10,  5/23,  Kuth  2:  7,  Ps.  76:  8,  Jer.  44:  1.8. 

b.  When  the  antecedent  is  not  expressed,  there  may  be  an  ellipsis  of 
the  relative  in  a  clause  which  is  governed  by  a  noun  in  the  construct  state, 
Job  18:  21,  Ps.  65:  5,  Lam.  1:  14  where  there  is  great  brevity  of  expres- 
sion, Prov.  8:  32  where  the  verb  is  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  Ezek.  11:  21 
where  the  relative  clause  is  prefixed  absolutely  and  a  suffix  attached  to  the 
governing  noun,  Isa.  57:  3  where  it  is  connected  with  a  preceding  part'c'ple 
by  Vav  Consec.  n:Tr\i  "Sip  in?  seed  of  an  adulterer  and  of  one  who  j)layed  the 
harlot;  or  governed  by  a  preposition  Job  34:  32,  Lsa.  65:  1,  Jer.  2:  8,  11, 
51:  3,  Ezek.  13:  3,  Obad.  ver.  16,  Prov.  14:  14  where  '\'^b'-l'0  means  from  that 
which  is  incumbent  on  him  i.  e.  the  result  of  his  faithful  discharge  of  duty; 
this  construction  is  in  prose  almost  entirely  confined  to  Chronicles  1  Chron. 
15:  12,  2  Chron.  1:4,  16:  9,  30:  18,  19,  Neh.  8:  10.  Or  when  the  relative 
clause  is  the  object  of  a  verb,  I  give  to  theyn  fi!i^2"^  those  who  shall  pass 
through  them  Jer.  8:  13,  Hab.  2:  6,  possibly  Job  24:  9  where  some  render 
■'35-^5  that  which  is  upon  the  poor  i.  e.  his  clothing;  or  the  subject  Judg. 
5:  14,  Job  18:  15,  Ps.  22:  30,  Isa.  41:  24,  and  perhaps  48:  14  and  63:  19; 
in  Hab.  3:  16  it  is  the  subject  of  a  preceding  constinict  infinitive. 

c.  "Where  there  is  a  conscious  elUpsis  of  the  relative,  it  must  of  course 
be  supplied  in  thought.  But  there  is  a  strong  disposition  in  the  Hebrew  to 
coordinate  simple  sentences,  rather  than  to  build  up  compound  sentences 
by  means  of  dependent  clauses.  Relative  clauses  are  accordingly  in  many 
instances  resolved  into  or  exchanged  for  separate  sentences  whose  connec- 
tion with  the  preceding  is  merely  suggested  by  juxtaposition  1  Kin.  11:  14, 
Isa.  42:  1,  Jer.  5:  15,  49:  31,  or  by  the  loose  connection  of  the  copulative 
and,  Ri:-l  and  her  name  for  whose  name  icas  Gen.  16:  1,  2  Sam.  12:  30,  Job 
42:  3,  Isa.  41:  9,  Jer.  17:  5,  Ezek.  13:  22.  It  mars  this  venerable  simplicity 
of  the  language  to  assume  relative  constructions  or  complicated  sentences, 
where  this  is  unnecessary:  Ps.  45:  6,  for  example,  is  not  to  be  relieved  of 
its  apparently  disjointed  character  by  giving  a  relative  force  to  the  paren- 
thesis 0  thou,  under  whom  nations  fall. 

§  303.  The  demonstrative  mT  or  ^T  is  frequently  used 
in  poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  and  it  then,  like 
the  English  that,  suffers  no  change  for  gender  or  number, 

24* 


372  SYNTAX.  §  304,  305 

ri'w^  r;T  U^pl2  the  place  that  thou  hast  founded  Ps.  104:  8, 
^2 'in  ^iT  niiatS?  devices,  that  they  have  contrived  Ps.  10:  2. 

a.  riT  as  a  relative  Ps.  78:  54,  104:  26,  Prov.  23:  22;  plur.  Job  19:  19; 
governed  by  prep,  as  sbown  by  a  following  suf.  Ps.  74:  2 ;  !lt  Ex.  15:  13,  16, 
Ps.  32:  8,  68:  29,  142:  4,  143:  8;  fern.  Ps.  9:  16,  31:  6;  plur.  Ps.  17:  9; 
gov.  by  prep.  Isa.  42:  24;   "iT  fem.  plur.  Ps.  132:  12. 

§  304.  The  indefinite  pronoun  whoever,  whatever  may 
be  expressed  by  ^irij^  with  no  antecedent  n^ri  "^UJIS?  he 
whom  i.  e.  whomsoever  thou  cursest  Num.  22:  6  or  pre- 
ceded by  bb  Gen.  6:  2,  7:  22,  19:  12,  Isa.  19:  17  (when 
used  of  place  wherever  2  Sam.  7:7,  or  absolutely  to  de- 
note manner  however,  Zeph.  3 :  7)  or  by  some  other  in- 
definite antecedent  as  iTSi)  Lev.  5:  2  or  ir"54  Ex.  35:  21, 
23,  24;  ^'2  Gen.  19:  12,  Ex.  24:  14  and  n^2  2  Sam.  18:  22, 
Job  13:  13  are  used  both  as  indefinite  and  interrogative 
pronouns  §  75.  1.  ^liry;  iL^  ht.  there  were  those  who  is  re- 
peated Nell.  5:  2-4  in  the  sense  of  some others,  and 

Num.  9:  20,  21  in  apphcation  to  various  times  and  cir- 
cumstances sometimes at  other  times. 

a.  As  the  indefinite  pronoun  often  introduces  what  is  equivalent  to  a 
conditional  clause ;  it  may  in  like  manner  be  followed  by  an  apodosis  with 
1,  §  306;  thus  li"^  with  whomsoever  of  thy  servants  it  shall  be  found  (i.  e. 
if  it  be  found  with  any  one)  r.h^  he  shall  die  Gen.  44:  9,  Ex.  30:  33,  38, 
Lev.  22:  6,  Num.  5:  30,  31  (where  in  a  series  of  Vav  consec.  preterites  the 
beginning  of  the  apodosis  is  determined  by  the  sense  alone).  Josh.  15:  16, 
Ex.  9:  21  (with  Vav  consec.  future);  ^ri  Hos.  14:  10,  M^  1  Sam.  20:  4,  and 
the  combination  tip  "inn  which  only  occui-s  in  this  one  instance,  Num.  23:  3. 

b.  How  the  interrogative  comes  to  be  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun 
may  be  seen  in  such  passages  as  Ex.  32:  26,  Prov.  9:  4,  Isa.  50:  8  where 
either  rendering  is  admissible,  and  from  a  comparison  of  Judg.  7:  3  (indef.) 
with  Deut.  20:  8  (interrog.).  The  indefinite  pronoun  is  rendered  somewhat 
more  emphatic  by  the  addition  of  the  relative,  "iliix  "^Ta  whoever  there  is  that 
Ex.  32:  33,  2  Sam.  20:  11,  Eccles.  9:  4;  the  corresponding  TT  rr?  is  only 
found  in  Ecclesiastes,  see  1:  9,  3:  15  etc.  ^D  is  once  found  in  apposition  to 
a  vocative  iB~1"iriO  whoever  ye  be,  care  for  the  young  man  Absalom  2  Sam. 
18:  12. 

§  305.  When  the  relative  does  not  refer  to  a  pre- 
ceding noun  or  pronoun  expressed  or  understood,  but 
simply  marks  the  relation  between  clauses,  it  ceases  to 


§  305 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES.  373 


be  a  pronoun  and  becomes  a  relative  conjunction  as  the 
Lat.  quod  and  Gr.  on.  Tliis  is  the  case  to  a  limited  ex- 
tent with  TJilS:,  while  ^3  has  entirely  lost  its  original  pro- 
nominal character  and  is  only  used  as  a  conjunction. 

a.  After  "^S  or  "itx  that  with  verbs  of  speaking  the  language  of  direct 
quotation  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  indirect,  she  said  ni<n""^2  that 
Jehovah  hath  seen  my  affliction  Gen.  29:  32,  20:  11,  26:  22,  Ex.  4:  25,  Josh. 
2:  24,  Ruth  1:  10,  1  Sam.  10:  19,  15:  20.  After  the  formula  of  an  oath  its 
language  may  be  introduced  by  "O,  as  Jehovah  liveth  ''S  (I  swear)  that 

1  Sam.  20.*  3,  25:  34   (repeated  after  a  parenthetical  clause),   26:  16,  29:  6. 

2  Sam.  4:  9,  10;  so  after  ^ix  "^n  as  I  live,  Isa.  49:  18,  comp.  Gen.  42:  16, 
and  after  God  do  so  to  nie  and  more  also  Ruth  1:  17,  1  Sam.  14:  44,  1  Kin. 
2:  23.  In  other  connexionsr  also  "^3  maj-  have  the  sense  of  a  strong  affirma- 
tion equivalent  to  'it  is  so  that\  'I  affirm  thaf,  surely,  verily  Job  12:  2.  In 
oaths  and  protestations  CX  if  has  the  force  of  a  negative,  and  xb  CX  if  not 
that  of  an  affirmative,  God  do  so  to  me  if  I  do  is  the  same  as  saying  'I 
swear  that  I  will  not  do'  2  Sam.  3 :  35.  So  when  the  penalty  invoked  is 
not  expressed,  CX  1  Sam,  14:  45,  24:  7,  2  Sam.  11:  11,  20:  20,  2  Kin.  3:  14, 
Ps.  95:  11,  Cant.  2:  7,  Isa.  22:  14;  ^h  nx  Num.  14:  28,  Job  1:  11,  17:  2, 
22:  20,  31:  36,  Isa.  5:  9,  14:  24,  Ezek.  17:  16;  probably  it  is  to  be  similarly 
explained  Gen,  24:  38,  Ps.  131:  2,  Ezek.  3:  6,  where  the  affirmation  follow- 
ing a  negative  can  best  be  expressed  by  hid.  X^  is  substituted  for  DX  in 
an  oath  Ezek.  14:  18,  comp.  vs.  16,  20. 

h.  After  a  negative  clause  "^3  for  has  the  sense  of  hut,  whether  the 
contrast  suggested  affects  a  particular  word,  a  noun  or  adjective,  ye  did 
not  send  me  higher  C'^n^xn  "^3  hut  God  lit.  for  God  did  Gen  45:  8,  17:  15, 
19:  2,  Ex.  16:  8,  Deut.  8:  3,  1  Kin.  21:  15,  2  Chron.  20:  15,  26:  18,  Ezek. 
14:  18;  or  an  entire  clause  his  heart  doth  not  think  so  but  (lit. Yor)  to  de- 
stroy is  in  his  heart  Isa.  10:7,  Gen.  42:  12,  Jer.  2:  20.  The  Hebrew  regards 
the  affirmative  proposition  as  confirming  the  previous  denial  of  one  that 
is  inconsistent  with  it.  Occidental  usage  sets  the  two  propositions  in  ad- 
versative relation.  Frequently  fix  is  added,  when  the  relation  becomes  re- 
strictive instead  of  adversative,  he  hath  not  tvithheld  any  thivg  from  we 
T,f"'x-fiX  '■S  except  (lit.  but  when  he  withheld)  thee  Gen.  39:  9,  thy  name 
shall  no  more  be  called  Jacob  fix  ''S  htd  Israel  32:  29  (if  it  is  called,  or 
when  it  is  called,  this  shall  be  the  appellation),  28:  17,  Lev.  21:  14,  Deut. 
12:  14,  Esth.  2;  15,  Ps.  1 :  2,  4,  Jer.  7:  23.  The  signification  is  the  same 
after  a  question  requiring  a  negative  answer.  Can  a  man  benefit  God? 
•|'3C'""3  no!  but  a  tvise  man  benefits  himself  Job  22:  2;  tvho  is  blind  "^3 
^'"V'ZH  hilt  my  servant?  i.  e.  no  one  is  but  he  Isa,  42:  19,  Or  the  nega- 
tive maj-  be  suggested  by  other  constructions,  I  have  sent  to  thee  saying 
TJiOH  sJialf  give  me  thy  silver  etc.  and  not  this  only,  fix  '^'3  but  to  morrow 
I  tvill  send  etc.  1  Kin.  20:  5,  6;  Job  shall  pray  for  you  in  contrast  with 
the  offerings  which  they  were  to  present  T'l^fiif;  ""S  not  you  but  him  will 
I  accept  Job  42:  8.     Sometimes  a  missing  thought  must  be  supplied  to 


374  SYNTAX.  §  306 

make  the  antithesis  obvious,  tee  toill  not  hide  from  my  lord  CFi-QS;  13  hit 
the  silver  is  spent  Gen.  47:  18  i.  e.  not  conceal  but  confess  the  fact  that 
their  money  was  all  gone;  I  will  not  return  QN  ^2  but  2  Sam.  15:21  K'thibh; 
all  are  not  dead  DX  "^3  but  2  Sam.  13:  33  K'thibh.  In  the  last  two  ex- 
amples CX  is  omitted  from  the  K'ri  to  obtain  what  at  first  sight  seems  an 
easier  reading,  since  it  requires  nothing  to  be  supplied.  In  a  few  instances 
a  strong  contrast  is  expressed  by  CX  ''3  without  a  negative  Num.  24 :  22, 
Lam.  5 :  22.  When  the  particles  OS  "'S  belong  to  distinct  clauses,  each  re- 
tains its  own  proper  signification.  Thus  for,  if  Ex.  8:  17,  Josh.  23:  12, 
Prov.  19:  19,  Isa.  10:  22;  but,  if  Gen.  40:  14,  1  Sam.  20:  9,  2  Kin.  5:  20, 
Lam.  3:  32;  that,  if  Jndg.  15:  7,  Jer.  26:  15,  51:  14;  that,  not  (in  an  oath) 
2  Sam.  3-35;   surely,  if  {it  is  so  that,  if)  Ex.  22:  22,  Prov.  2:  3. 

c.  Tho  meaning  and  usage  of  other  conjunctions  can  best  be  learned 
from  the  lexicon.  Several  prepositions  are  converted  into  conjunctions  by 
the  addition  of  "ifcx  or  ''3,  thus  "t^^^,  '^^^'^t  ^tx  "^is-a,  TCX  b?,  "^D  h'J, 

"o  nnh. 


Hypothetical  Sentences. 

§  306.  As  the  condition  is  from  the  nature  of  tho 
case  j)rioi*  to  that  which  is  suspended  upon  it,  the  pre- 
terite tense  is  frequently  employed  in  conditional  clauses, 
not  only  where  they  refer  to  the  past  Ps.  7:  4,  5,  44:  21, 
73:  15,  but  to  the  future  or  to  what  is  valid  at  all  times 
or  may  happen  at  any  time.  The  apodosis  may  or  may 
not  be  introduced  by  Vav;  in  the  latter  case  its  verb,  if 
referring  to  the  future  and  standing  first  in  its  clause 
will  be  put  in  the  preterite  with  Vav  Consecutive,  §  277.  &, 
V^i^"l!j  i<b"2N:  if  I  shall  not  hring  him  (lit.  'shall  not  have 
brought  him'  prior  to  the  time  contemplated  in  the  apo- 
dosis) T'^'^\)1  I  shall  he  a  sinner  Gen.  43:  9,  comp.  44:  32; 
■^n^as^!  if  a  lion  ^mss  through  a  flock  "pt:']  cbni  he  will 
trample  and  rend  Mic.  5:  7. 

a.  The  future  may  be  used  in  a  conditional  clause  instead  of  the  pre- 
terite, when  the  thought  is  turned  to  its  actual  futurity  rather  than  to  its 
priority  to  what  follows  Ex.  22:  1,  Lev.  13:  35,  Judg.  6:  37,  13:  16,  Neh. 
2:  5,  Job  16:  6,  Ps.  132;  12,  Nah.  3:  12,  and  even  as  a  frequentative  past 
§  267.  4,  Gen.  31:  8  (but  see  pret.  for  acts  often  repeated,  Ps.  63:  8,  Isa. 
28:  25,  Jer.  14.  18).  Participles  are  also  used  of  the  present  or  proximate 
future  Judg.  9:  15,  11:  9,  1  Sam.  7:  3,  with  u;."i  Gen.  24:  42,  49,  Judg.  6:  36, 


§307 


HYPOTHETICAL  SENTENCES.  37 i 


•with  '"^k  Ex.  8:  17,  1  Sam.  19:  11.  An  Infinitive  with  a  suffix,  Job  9:  27. 
If  there  is  more  than  one  vei'b  in  the  conditional  clause,  those  that  follow 
a  preterite  may  be  in  the  Vav  consec.  fut.  "^r--"^.'  ''r^^i^'C^  f^'ew  if  I  called 
and  he  ansivered  me,  equivalent  to  'if  I  were  to  call  and  he  to  answer  me' 
at  anj'  time  hereafter  Job  9:  16,  Num.  35:  16-23  (one  future  ver.  20),  Job 
33:  23,  24,  Ps.  7:  5  (past  time),  or  with  a  more  distinct  expression  of 
futurity  in  the  Vav  consec.  pret.  r'i:''Dti"CX  if  thou  direct  (lit.  shalt  have 
directed)  tlmie  heart  ri~']S^  and  spread  forth  thine  hands  to  him  Job  11:  13, 
or  in  the  future  tense  Deut.  32:  41,  Isa.  4:  4. 

6.  The  apodosis  is  commonly  introduced  by  Vav,  Gen.  28:  20-22,  Ex 
4:  8,  9,  18:  23,  Lev.  4:  13,  14  (the  sense  only  determines  where  the  apo- 
dosis begins),  5:  1,  Num.  30:  16,  Judg.  14:  12,  13,  Job  10:  14,  21:  6;  though 
often  it  is  not  Gen.  30:  31,  1  Kin.  21:  6,  Job  9:  20,  23,  14:  8,  9,  Ps.  66:  18, 
Isa.  1:  20,  53:  10.  It  may  also  be  introduced  by  i3  swell/,  §  305.  a,  Gen. 
31:  42,  43:  10,  Num.  22:  29,  2  Sam.  2:  27,  Job  8:  6,  Isa.  7:  9.  Occasionally 
it  precedes  the  conditional  clause,  Gen.  42:  37,  1  Sam.  14:  30  C^S  ~X),  Isa, 
4:  3,  4,  and  possibly  Ps.  63:  6,  7.  When  the  apodosis  relates  to  the  past, 
its  verb  may  be  in  the  preterite  without  Vav,  Pro  v.  9:  12,  or  with  Vav 
Conjunctive  Num.  21:  9,  '^ri~icS'i  (observe  the  position  of  the  accent)  Job 
7:  4,  Ps.  78:  34,  or  in  Vav  consec.  future  Job  8:  4,  Ps.  50:  18;  though  the 
preterite  may  also  occur  of  an  act  already  resolved  upon  though  not  yet 
performed  1  Sam.  2:  16,  §  266.  2.  c,  and  in  the  sense  of  a  future  perfect, 
Ps.  127: 1.  The  apodosis  relating  to  the  future  and  the  verb  in  Vav  consec. 
preterite  Ex.  1:  16,  12:  4,  Lev.  13:  36,  Num.  35:  24,  Judg.  21:  21,  2  Sam. 
14:  32,  15:  25,  17:  13,  1  Kin.  3:  14,  Hoa.  9:  12,  Am.  6:  9,  but  very  rarely 
in  the  future  with  Vav  conjunctive  Jer.  5:  1,  23:  22;  of  course  if  the  verb 
does  not  stand  first  in  its  clau.se,  it  must  be  put  in  the  future  tense,  §  277, 
Ex.  22:  2,  Judg.  4:  8.  The  apodosis  an  imperative  Job  11:  14,  Isa.  21:  12, 
Jer.  14:  7;  in  the  form  of  a  question,  1  Sam.  2:  25,  Job  9:  19,  11:  10, 
14:  14,  31:  13,  14,  35:  6,  7,  Ps.  44:  21,  22,  Ecch  6:  6,  Jer.  3:1.  In  the  brief 
language  of  poetry  the  apodosis  is  sometimes  elliptical,  if  his  children  be 
multiplied,  (it  is)  for  the  sword  Job  27:  14,  Ps.  92:  8. 

C.  Successive  conditions  are  expressed  by  CX  ....  tX,  or  CXI  . . . .  BX 
Judg.  13:  16,  Ps.  7:  4,  5,  Am.  9:  2-4;  and  likewise  alternative  conditions, 
i^zi;^3-CX  '"^^'"CX  ivheiher  male  or  female  Lev.  3:  1,  Ex.  19:  13,  Deut.  18:  3, 
Josh.  24:  15,  2  Sam.  15:  21,  Ezek.  2:  5.  In  alternative  conditions  the  apo- 
dosis of  the  first  is  sometimes  omitted  as  sufficiently  obvious  from  the  tenor 
of  the  whole,  Ex.  32:  32,  1  Sam.  12:  14. 

§  307.  In  ordinary  usage  '"3  when  regards  a  case  as 
actual,  C>^  if  as  contingent  and  uncertain,  ^b  if  as  un- 
likely or  untrue,  where  in  English  the  imperfect  or  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  would  be  required;  ^iin  "3  wlien  thou 
comest  (as  thou  surely  wilt)  ^in^  !J<:"as;i  and  if  they  will 
not  give  (as  they  may  not)  Gen.  24:  41,  Num.  5:  19,  20; 


376  SYNTAX.  §  308 

'^rit'J.r!  ^^  '^f  you  had  saved  them  alive  (wMcli  you  did  not 
do)  Judg.  8:  19. 

a.  Hence  in  Ex.  21  classes  of  cases  are  introduced  by  "iS  vs.  2,  7,  18  etc. 
and  the  subordinate  possibilities  occurring  under  each  of  them  by  CX  vs.  3, 
4,  5  etc.  So  Lev.  1:  2,  3,  10,  2:  1,  4,  5,  7.  Very  unlikely  and  even  im- 
possible conditions  are  sometimes  joined  with  CS  and  are  thus  represented 
as  supposable,  S?")!!t"CX  ifltvere  Imvgry,  which  I  never  can  be  indeed,  but 
suppose  me  to  be  so  Ps.  50:  12,  139:  8,  Job  20:  6,  34:  14,  Cant.  8:  7,  Jer. 
15:  1,  22:  24,  Am.  9:  2,  3  (linked  with  ver.  4  and  thus  put  on  a  par  with 
what  is  quite  possible  and  probable),  Obad.  ver.  4.  In  all  these  cases  the 
verb  is  future ;  to  have  employed  the  preterite  (in  the  sense  of  a  future 
perfect)  would  have  been  to  suppose  the  impossible  actually  accomplished 
at  the  time  referred  to,  which  is  more  violent  than  to  assign  it  to  the  in- 
definite future.  CX  may  also  be  used  with  the  preterite  of  something  sup- 
posed in  the  past,  which  did  not  take  place,  sin'Dj^'-DX  if  they  had  stood,  as 
they  did  not  Jer.  23:  22,  37:  10;  so  ^l^N  (^h  BN)  Esth.  7:  4,  Eccl.  6:  6;  >h 
Num.  22:  29,  Judg.  13:  23,  2  Sam,  18:  12,  Ps.  81:  14,  Mic,  2:  11.  These 
particles  retain  their  proper  force,  when  combined  with  xb;  iib  dS  leaves 
the  matter  in  doubt  Gen.  43 :  9,  xb^lb  implies  the  reverse  of  the  negative 
supposition  that  is  made,  !i;niari"arri  sb^ib  if  ive  had  not  lingered,  as  we 
actually  did  ver.  10,  31:  42,  Deut.  32:  27,  Judg.  14:  18,  1  Sam.  25:  34,  2  Sam. 
2:  27,  2  Kin.  3:  14,  Isa.  1:  9. 

b.  When  the  apodosis  is  different  from  what  might  have  been  expected, 
BX  is  equivalent  to  even  if,  although;  ^"^tr-'d'i^  though  your  sins  be  as  scarlet, 
they  shall  become  white  as  snow  Isa.  1:  18,  10:  22,  Jer.  14:  7,  51:  14,  Hos. 
9:  12,  Job  9:  20.  When  the  apodosis  is  suppressed,  it  may  become  an  ex- 
pression of  desire  O  if!  Ps.  139:  19,  Prov.  24:  11  and  in  the  judgment  of 
the  majority  of  interpreters  Ps.  81 :  9,  95 :  7,  though  the  necessity  is  not  so 
obvious.  So  !|b  Gen.  17:  18,  23:  13,  Num.  14:  2,  20:  3,  Job  6:  2,  Isa.  63:  19; 
in  Gen.  50:  15  it  expresses  apprehension  what  if! 

§  308.  Conditional  clauses  occur,  in  which  the  con- 
ditional particle  is  not  expressed,  but  it  is  plain  from 
the  meaning  and  the  connection  that  the  statement  was 
meant  to  be  understood  hypotheticallj,  D^pSI^  and  if 
they  overdrive  them  ^fi'bl  all  the  flock  will  die  Gen.  33:  13; 
niyi.  and  if  he  leave  his  father  mini  he  mil  die  44:  22; 
^i^rinbiT  had  I  sent  thee  to  them,  they  would  hearken 
Ezek.  3:  6. 

a.  Additional  examples:  Ex.  33:  5,  Ruth  1 :  12,  2  Sam.  19:  8,  2  Kin. 
5:  13,  7:  2,  Neh.  1:  8,  Job  7:  20,  10:  16,  19:  4,  20:  24,  perhaps  23:  10,  Ps. 
69:  33,  189:  18,  Prov.  18:  22,  22:  29,  24:  10,  25:  16,  Isa.  26:  10,  Ezek.  14:  17 
(comp.  ver.  15).     The   modal   forms  of  the  verb,   §  270.  1,  may  sometimes 


§  3j0  circumstantial  clauses.  377 

su<:gest  a  conflition;  thus  the  intentional,  nr'-'kx  let  me  make  my  led  in 
Shcol  (i.  e.  if  I  make  etc.)  lo!  thou  art  there  Vs.  139:  8,  73:  16,  Job  11:  17, 
16:  6b,  19:  18,  30:  26;  the  jussive,  "inp;^  let  him  hide  his  face  and  who  can 
behold  him?  Job  34:  29,  2  Kin.  6:  27;  the  imperative,  Ps.  22:  9. 

b.  A  hypothetical  sense  should  not  he  gratuitously  given  to  a  passage, 
which  is  not  hypothetical  in  form.  Interpreters  have  frequently  gone  to 
unwarrantable  lengths  in  this  respect.  A  clause  is  not  necessarily  condi- 
tional in  the  intention  of  the  writer,  because  a  conditional  clause  might  be 
substituted  for  it  without  a  material  change  of  sense.  Num.  23:  20  is  not 
a  general  truth  'when  he  has  blessed,  I  cannot  reverse  it'  but  a  particular 
affirmation  'he  has  blessed  in  this  instance  etc'  Such  passages  as  1  Sam. 
25:  29,  31,  Ps.  104:  20,  22,  28,  146:  4,  Hos.  8:  12  are  declarative,  not  hypo- 
thetical. 

ClECUMSTANTIAL  ClAUSES. 

§  309.  1.  Circumstantial  clauses  describe  the  situa- 
tion attendant  upon  the  action  of  the  principal  clause. 
In  such  clauses,  contrary  to  the  ordinary  rule,  §  284.  a, 
the  subject  usually  stands  first,  inasmuch  as  attention  is 
particularly  directed  to  it,  and  even  though  it  has  been 
mentioned  before  it  must  be  repeated,  or  a  pronoun 
must  take  its  place,  and  lie  smote  the  camp  ri'Sh  npniSg'i 
nDi  tvhile  (ht.  and)  the  camp  was  secure  Judg.  8:  11, 
Gen.  1:  2,  1  Sam.  18:  17,  ^^5ii2:  nrij^l  whereas  thou  hatest 

'  '       T      ■■    T  T  -  : 

Ps.  50: 17,  Gen.  18:13,  r!3S^'£5n  l^b  Vljn^  without  his  clothes 

'  '        T   :  -   T   •  TT   : 

heing  burned  (lit.  and  his  clothes  shall  not  be  burned) 
Prov.  6:  27,  28,  Jer.  14:  15. 

a.  The  contents  of  this  section  are  adopted  with  some  unessential  mod- 
ifications from  the  very  thorough  treatment  of  this  subject  in  Ewald's 
Lehrbuch.  The  participle  as  suggestive  of  a  contemporaneous  action  or 
state  is  particularly  suited  to  circumstantial  clauses  and  is  very  commonly 
employed  in  them,  Jehovah  appeared  to  him  2i!;3i  Xllni  while  he  loas  sitting 
at  the  door  Gen.  18:  1,  13:  7,  15:  2,  24:  21,  Num.  10:  33,  Josh.  6:  1,  Judg. 
13:  9,  1  Sam.  4:  12,  2  Sam.  1 :  2,  2  Kin.  2:  12,  Ps.  35:  6,  6.  Clauses  with- 
out a  verb,  n'^ifn?  cn"i:S1  icith  their  faces  backward  Gen.  9:  23,  12:  6, 
Prov.  15:  16,  17:  1;  with  uJ^  Isa.  43:  8;  with  "px  Prov.  17:  16.  CJlher 
words  may  occasionally  precede  the  subject,  T^T}'^''^  'i^'l  Gen.  49:  10,  "^H  ISii^ 
2  Sam.  18:  14,  2  Kin.  10,  2,  Isa.  6:  6,  Am.  7:  7,  Zech.  2:  5;  or  the  subject 
itself  may  not  be  expressed,  I  have  uttered  'phx  xb"!  icithout  understanding 
Job  42:  3,  nr^il  2  Sam.  13:  20,  'Z.'^-^'i  Ps.  55:  20,  X-Jini  Hab.  2:  10,  even 
when  it  differs  from  that  of  the  principal  clause  Judg.  13:  19. 


378  SYNTAX.  §  309 

b.  Circumstantial  clauses  may  be  attached  without  Vav,  Jehovah  spake 
tvith  you  "it:35  "^bix  lohile  I  stood  Deut.  5:  5,  Ex.  26:  5;  he  pitched  his  tent 
C^2  I'k-n'^a  having  Bethel  on  the  tcest  Gen.  12:  8,  Ex.  12:  11,  1  Sam.  26:  13, 
Ps.  45:  14,  Jer.  30:  6,  virgins  ^Bp^D  'pN  ivithout  number  Cant.  6:  8,  Jer.  2;  32; 
whg  will  ye  be  stricken  further  nno  !i3"'pin  continuing  to  revolt  Isa.  1 :  5, 
^2"'c'T  "ll!!  tvine  inflaming  them  5:  11,  Ps.  4:  3,  62:  5. 

2.  A  participle  agreeing  with  the  principal  subject, 
to  which  it  stands  in  a  sort  of  predicate  relation,  may 
serve  the  purpose  of  a  circumstantial  clause,  they  catne 
out  D'iii|?  stationing  themselves  at  the  door  Num.  16:  27, 
Judg.  8:4,  Ezr.  10:  1,  Ps.  7:  3,  Jer.  41:  5,  6,  Hab.  2:  15, 
Mai.  1:7;  for  which  with  a  negative  a  finite  tense  must 
be  substituted,  §  278.  4.  h,  either  the  preterite,  he  went 
there  bb^'^b  Drib  not  eating  bread  Ezr.  10:  6,  Deut.  21:  1, 
Job  9:  25,  or  the  future,  they  planned  a  device  I^bsvb^ 
without  being  able  to  perform  it  Ps.  21:  12,  35:  8,  56:  5, 
12,  140:  11. 

a.  Such  a  circumstantial  participle  or  adjective  in  a  very  few  instances 
precedes  the  verb  biin";  ^£'i3""iii  a  mountain  falling  tvasfes  aivay  Job  14:  18, 
Prov.  20:  14;  or  is  included  in  a  larger  circumstantial  clause,  "iriTS  N^llT! 
while  he,  if  he  had  taken  warning,  would  have  saved  his  life  Ezek.  33:  5. 
It  may  agree  with  the  object  of  the  principal  clause,  I  used  to  deliver  "^iS 
I'Vi'p  the  poor  ivhen  he  cried  Job  29:  12,  or  with  a  noun  governed  by  a 
preposition,  ""ri  ib^jn  n^j2.;3  for  the  child  tvhile  living  2  Sam.  12:  21,  1  Chron. 
12:  1,  Jer.  14:  4,  or  with  a  suffixed  pronoun  Ps.  69:  4. 

3.  The  circumstantial  may  precede  the  f)rincipal 
clause  CN^  ^TJS  HSH  lo,  ivhen  we  come  into  the  land,  thou 
shalt  bind  Josh.  2:  18,  Num.  12:  14,  particularly  when 
something  unexpected  supervenes  upon  the  condition 
previously  described,  which  is  introduced  commonly  by 
a  preterite  with  the  subject  prefixed,  ^iinp  HT  li:?  while 
one  was  still  speaking,  i^'2  "Tl  another  came  Job  1 :  16;  i^in 
nxiTJ  while  she  was  being  led  forth,  nnb"0  S^Hi.  she  sent 
Gen.  38:  25,  1  Sam.  9:  11,  1  Kin.  14:\'7,  2  Kin.  2:  23, 
6:  5,  26,  9:  25,  Isa.  37:  38. 

a.  The  circumstantial  clause  in  such  a  combination  may  not  only  have 
a  participle  as  in  the  examples  already  given,  but  a  preterite  xk^  Xri^  TjS 


§  310,  311  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAV.  379 

Jacob  had  only  just  gone  out,  K3  liii")  tvhen  Eaau  came  Geu.  27 :  30,  Judg. 
3:  24,  or  a  future  with  =— J,  §  267.  1.  h,  Gen.  19:  4,  Josh.  2:  8,  or  a  Vav 
consec.  future  2  Sam.  24:  11,  or  an  infinitive  2  Kin.  4:  40,  2  Chron,  13:  15, 
26:  19,  or  it  may  be  witliout  a  verb,  Gen.  7:  6,  22:  1,  2  Kin.  10:  12,  13,  Ps. 
78:  30,  31,  Jon.  3:  4.  The  unexpected  event  may  also  be  expressed  by  the 
use  of  a  participle,  2  Kin.  8:  5,  Dan.  9:  21,  or  if  its  time  require  it  by  the 
future  tense,  1  Kin.  1:  14.  Or  if  there  is  no  suggestion  of  a  sudden  occur- 
rence, the  principal  clause  may  be  simply  linked  with  the  preceding  by 
Vav  con«ec.  future  Gen.  24:  1,  2,  Deut.  26:  5,  Judg.  4:  5,  2  Sam.  11:  4, 
1  Kin.  13:  11,  or,  if  it  belong  to  the  future,  by  Vav  consec.  preterite  Ex. 
3:  13j   or  Vav  may  be  omitted  altogether  Gen.  49:  29, 


The  Conjunction  Yav. 

§  310.  The  connective  in  most  common  use  is  Yav 
Conjmictive,  §  235,  which  Hnks  together  words  and 
clauses  in  a  coordinate  relation,  and  of  which  Yav  Con- 
secutive, §  99,  is  a  modification,  which  while  attached 
to  a  verb  to  form  a  secondary  tense  Hkewise  links  it  or 
its  clause  to  a  preceding  verb  or  clause  in  a  relation  of 
dependence  or  subordination.  The  particular  relations 
indicated  by  Yav  Conjunctive  in  different  connections 
are  exceedingly  various.  This  is  not  due  strictly  speak- 
ing to  any  diversity  of  meaning  in  the  particle  itself. 
Instead  of  employing  a  variety  of  conjunctions  to  ex- 
press the  several  relations,  which  one  clause  may  sustain 
to  another,  it  better  accords  with  the  venerable  simph- 
city  of  Hebrew  style,  merely  to  place  successive  clauses 
side  by  side,  allowing  the  relation  intended  in  any  given 
case  to  be  inferred  from  that  of  the  thoughts  themselves. 
Yav  is  a  sign  of  connection;  but  the  precise  nature  of 
the  connection  which  it  marks,  must  be  learned  not  from 
the  uniting  particle,  but  from  the  mutual  bearings  of  the 
conceptions  which  it  binds  together. 

§  311.  1.  The  simplest  relation  whether  of  words  or 
clauses  denoted  by  Yav  is  when  one  thing  is  simply 
added  to  another,  as  in  English  by  the  Conjunction  and, 


380  SYNTAX.  §  31] 

V^^^ni  D^b'^^n  the  heavens  and  the  earth  G-en.  2 :  1,  let  there 

(     V  T    T  :  •    -     T    -  ' 

he  a  firmament  "TT^  and  let  it  he  dividing  1 :  6. 

a.  In  enumerations  Vav  may  be  repeated  before  each  successive  item, 
Ex.  35:  5-9  (so  Vav  consecutive  Num.  33:  5-49);  or  before  the  greater 
number  with  occasional  omissions  Josh.  15:  21-62;  or  the  several  particu- 
lars may  be  divided  into  pairs  or  groups  by  its  insertion  or  omission  Ex. 
35:  11,  12,  16-19,  Prov.  1:  2-6,  Isa.  5:  12.  Vav  is  commonly  inserted  be- 
fore the  last  term  of  a  series,  Gen.  1:  12,  14:  1,  Neh.  10:  29,  Joel  1:  14, 
though  not  invariably,  Deut.  29:  22,  1  Kin.  6:  7,  Ps.  45:  9.  Sometimes  it  is 
omitted  altogether  Neh.  10:  3-28,  2  Kin.  11:  13,  Ps.  150:  1,  2,  5,  6,  Isa.  1:  1, 
n|ra  "yyj  Dan.  8:  14,  especially  in  certain  familiar  phrases,  C"i"V:;  bi"  yesttr- 
day  and  the  day  before  i.  e.  heretofore  Gen.  31 :  5,  n^'rVciin  ^n"3  to-morroiv 
or  the  day  after  1  Sam.  20: 12,  ntba  D-jid  two  or  three  Isa.  17:6,  Job.  33:  29. 

2.  "VMien  the  second  term  is  identical  with  the  first, 
or  restrictive  of  it  and  is  added  for  the  sake  of  explana- 
tion, Vav  is  equivalent  to  namely  or  to  iuit\  in  the  shejjherds^ 
eqvijnnent  ivlilcJi  he  had  tDpb^l^  and  to  speak  more  pre- 
cisely in  the  j^ouch  1  Sam.  17:  40;  in  Ramah  iT5:i^  that 
is  to  say,  in  his  city  1  Sam.  28:  3;  thy  hand  '^^^'r')  namely 
thy  right  hand  Ps.  74:  11,  Josh.  10:  7,  Judg.  10:  10,  Isa. 
57:  11,  Dan.  8:  10.  When  it  limits  an  action,  Vav  may 
be  rendered  ajid  that]  Jeliovah  set  the  sivord  of  each 
against  his  felloiv  npriXDrrbsn^  and  that  in  all  the  camp 
Judg.  7:  22,  nj^ib']  1  Chron.  9:  27,  DV-Z-a^  2  Chron.  8: 
13,  Eccl.  8:  2;  so  often  before  an  infinitive,  he  iv ill  fulfil 
all  7ny  i)leasure  n!bi<b']  and  that  so  as  to  say  Isa.  44:  28, 
2  Chron.  7:  17  (comp.  1  Kin.  9:  4),  Neh.  8:13,  Jer.  17: 
10,  44:  14. 

a.  This  differs  from  Isa.  1 :  1  Judah  and  especially  Jerusalem,  where 
the  second  term  rendei's  prominent  something  included  in  the  first,  but  does 
not  cover  all  that  is  intended  by  it;  so  Dan.  1:  3,  Num.  31 :  6  sacred  ves- 
sels and  particularly  the  trumpets;  Josh.- 9:  27  for  the  conyreyation  and 
especially  for  the  altar  of  Jehovah. 

3.  Vav  may  be  used  in  an  emphatic  sense  for  even, 
also;  from  Israel  teas  joH^^  even  this,  other  things  and  this 
too  astonishing  it  is  Hos.  8:  6,  Utfi'lZ'^  even  in  their  death 
2  Sam.  1:  23,  ^\^t)  ask  also  1  Kin.  2:  22,  Isa.  32:  7.  49:  6. 


§  311  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAV.  o81 

"When  one  noun  is  the  principal  and  the  others  subordi- 
nate or  less  adapted  to  the  verb  employed,  Vav  is  equiv- 
alent to  ivitli]  they  used  to  come  up  Dh':p^1  with  their 
cattle  Judg.  6:  5,  2  Kin.  11:8,  U\'l\  luith  fasting  Esth.  4:  3. 
•^inb*]  tvith  my  heart  Eccl.  7:  25,  H^Z^I  with  wrath  Isa.  13:9, 
the  earth  with  its  issues  42 :  5. 

a.  1  Sam.  14:  18  "331  with  the  children  of  Israel,  unless  as  seems  pro- 
bable there  is  an  error  in  the  text;  on  the  other  hand  ti'J  tvith  is  used  for 
1  1  Sam.  16:  12,  17:  42. 

4.  When  the  relation  suggested  is  that  of  contrast, 
limiting  or  qualifying  what  precedes,  Vav  is  equivalent 
to  the  adversative  hut]  of  every  tree  thou  mayest  eat  Ti"2.^ 
but  of  the  tree  etc.  Gen.  2:  16,  17,  yil  but  knoiv  Eccl.  11:  0, 
Job  14:  10,  Ps.  22:  7,  28:  3,  Eccl.  7:  4.  If,  however,  the 
contrasted  thought  does  not  hmit  but  completes  the 
sense,  Vav  should  be  rendered  by  and]  he  hath  torn 
^DX5'*''1  and  he  will  heal  us  Hos.  6:  1,  Gen.  1:  5,  Deut.  32: 
21,  39.  Vav  may  also  introduce  a  reason,  give  us  help 
^y&,  for  vain  is  the  deliverance  of  man  Ps.  60:  13;  or  an 
opposing  consideration,  from  which  a  different  conclu- 
sion might  have  been  anticipated,  ^ibsJ^l  although  I  teas 
their  husband  Jer.  31:  32;  or  an  inference  ^li"'i:~1  where- 
fore  turn  and  live  Ezek.  18:  32;  or  a  consequence,  he 
withholdeth  the  ivaters  ^^litl  ^^^  so  they  dry  up  Job  12 :  15, 
Ps.  42:  5,  91:  15,  103:  16;  or  after  a  negative  clause 
that  which  would  have  resulted  on  the  contrary  hypo- 
thesis, §  299.  a,  thou  desirest  not  sacrifice  nrriSI.  else  I 
would  give  it  Ps.  51 :  18,  perhaps  w4th  a  negative  under- 
stood Job  6:  14;  if  the  consequence  is  different  from 
what  might  naturally  have  been  expected,  ^"■!:::"T  and 
yet  they  prosper  (or  it  may  be  read  that  they  the  orphans 
may  jjrosper)  Jer.  5:  29,  T^i^i"^,  a7td  yet  the  righteous  shall 
hold  on  his  icay  Job  17:  9;  or  the  design  or  purpose, 
they  fasten  it  p"k^  &<bi  that  it  move  not  Jer.  10:  4,  11:  21; 


382  en, TAX.  §  312 

or  a  comparison,  man  is  horn  unto  troiible  Tj^^  '33^  as 
sparks  fly  ^ipivard  Job  5:  7,  11:  12,  12:  11,  Pro  v.  cli.  25- 
29,  or  if  the  comparison  precede,  waters  fail  '&iA)  so  a 
man  Job  14:  12,  19,  Prov.  25:  3,  20,  25,  26:  14;  or  a 
coexisting  act  or  condition,  Noah  was  six  Jmndred  years 
old  b^ii^ani  tvhen  the  flood  Gen.  7:6;  Vav  repeated  may 
be  equivalent  to  both  . . .  and,  !^2^1  ^'{p^.  both  sanctuary 
and  host  Dan.  8:  13,  Nmn.  9:  4,  Ps.  76:  7,  Nah.  1:  5. 

a.  Vav  is  never  precisely  equivalent  to  the  disjunctive  or,  which  is 
expressed  by  "is.  The  jjassages,  in  w^hich  it  apparently  has  this  sense,  are 
elliptical  or  are  to  be  otlierwise  explained;  there  was  not  found  sioord 
n"^in"  or  spear  (prop,  and  there  was  not  found  spear)  1  Sam.  13:  22,  25:  31, 
Gen.  41:  44,  Ex.  21:  17,  2  Kin.  7:  10;  i/e  shall  take  it  from  the  sheep  "Ol 
fiiT?n  avd  from  the  goats  Ex.  12:  15,  these  together  form  the  mass  out  of 
which  it  is  to  be  taken;  pnri  T^ni  not  whether  he  rage  or  laitgh,  but  mors 
exactly  both  when  he  rages  and  when  he  laiighs  ProT.  29:  9,  Ex.  21:  16. 

b.  When  a  speaker  begins  with  "i  there  is  a  tacit  allusion  to  something 
that  has  preceded,  or  to  a  thought  to  be  supplied,  you  rage  "^SST  but  I  have 
established  my  king  Vs.  2:  6,  Num.  12:  14,  20:  3,  2  Sam.  13:  26,  18:  22, 
24:  3,  2  Kin.  2:  9,  4:  41,  5:  6,  17,  7:  13,  10:  2,  1  Chron.  17:  10,  Job  19:  25, 
Isa.  3:  14,  Jer.  40:  5,  Ezek.  13:  11,  13,  17:  22. 

C.  The  omission  of  the  conjunction  sometimes  adds  to  the  force  or 
vivacity  of  a  sentence,  Ex.  15:  9,  10,  Deut.  32:  10,  11,  Judg.  5:  27,  Ps.  19: 
8-10,  Isa.  10:  28-32,  21:  2-5,  Jer.  31:  21. 

§  312.  1.  Vav  serves  to  introduce  the  apodosis  or 
second  member  of  a  hypothetical  sentence,  §  306,  if  God 
will  he  with  me  and  keep  me,  nih"]  njni  then  shall  Jehovah 
he  my  God  Gen.  28:  20,  21. 

2.  It  may  also  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun 
placed  absolutely,  with  the  clause  to  which  it  relates,  Di^in 
rD/?■n^^  UrrOi^  Sib-^  ^ilj'b^rj  on  the  third  day  Abraham 
lifted  np  his  eyes  Gen.  22:  4;  ^^i'^l.  Dn'l  ^T}Xgr\  thy  hope, 
(is  it  not)  the  integrity  of  thy  ways?  Job  4:  6.  Both  these 
uses,  which  are  whoUy  foreign  from  our  idiom,  are  com- 
bined in  2  Sam.  15:  34,  thy  father's  servant  ^is|^  /  have 
been  so  hitherto,  but  now  "iS;|i  I  will  he  thy  servant. 

a.  Examples  of  Vav  Conjunctive  after  a  noun  at  the  beginning  of  its 
clause  whether  placed  absolutelj-  or  governed  by  a  preposition,  1  Kin.  6:  32, 


§  312  THE  CONJUNCTION  VAY.  383 

Job  19:  23,  '23:  12,  25:  5,  36:  26,  Ps.  69:  33,  115:  7,  Trov,  9:  16  (comp. 
ver.  4),  Jer.  10:  23,  13:  10,  Ezek.  40:  42,  Dan.  11:  15,  (such  a  clause  gov- 
erned by  nxT  2  Sam.  10:  12).  Vav  consec.  future  similarly  used,  Gen. 
22:  24,  1  Sam.  14:  19,  2  Sam.  22:  41,  1  Kin.  15:  13,  Job  36:  7,  Jer.  6:  19, 
Dan.  1:  20.  Vav  consec.  preterite,  Ex.  12:  15,  19,  30:38,  Lev.  7:  20,  17:  10, 
Num.  14:  24,  1  Sam.  25:  27,  2  Sam.  6;  21,  2  Kin.  11:  7,  Ps.  25:  11,  Jer. 
23:  33,  Ezek.  17:  19. 

h.  Vav  Conjunctive  after  a  statement  of  time,  Ex.  12:  3,  Lev.  7:  16, 
Num.  16:  5,  Ps,  141:  5  (after  niy),  Jer.  8:  1  K'tbibb,  Dan.  10:  4  (comp. 
ver.  1).  Vav  consec.  future,  Judg.  19:  5,  1  Sam.  11:  11,  Jer.  7:  25,  Dan. 
1:  18.  Vav  consec.  preterite.  Gen.  3:  5,  Ex.  16:  6,  7,  17:  4,  Prov.  24:  2T 
(after  nriN;),  Ezek.  33 :  33,  Joel  4  • 


INDEX    L 

SUBJECTS  TREATED  FULLY  OR  INCIDENTALLY. 


T^e  numbers  in  this  and  the  following  Indexes  rpfer  to  the  Sections  of  the  Orammar, 


Abbreviations  9.  1. 

Absolute  infinitive.    See  Infinitive  abso- 
lute. 
Abstract  nouns,  feminine  200,  plural  203. 

1.  a,  c. 

Accents  28,  use  in  cantillation  28. 6,  forms 
and  classes  29,  meaning  of  names  29.  b, 
like  forms  distinguished  30,  position  of 
32-35,  aid  in  distinguishing  words  34, 
change  of  position  35,  effect  of  Vav 
consecutive  33.  4,  99.  2,  100.  2,  in  place 
of  Methegh  39.  3.  a,  45.  5,  give  sta- 
bility to  vowels  60. 1.  a,  vowel  changes 
produced  by  64. 

Accents,  consecution  of  in  prose  36-39, 
poetic  31,  consecution  of  40-42. 

Accents,  pause  36.  2.  a,  position  of  35.  2. 

Accentuation  double  39.  4.  a. 

Addition  of  letters  50.  3. 

Adjectives  in  place  of  participles  of  neuter 
verbs  90,  187.  a,  formation  of  187.  2, 
expressing  permanent  or  variable  q ual  i- 
ties  187.  b,  intensity  189. 1,  191,  defects 
189.  1.  b.  diminutives  of  color  190, 
declension  of  206,  qualifying  nouns 
252.  1,  qualifying  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct 259,  predicate  263.  2,  compari- 
son 264,  emphatic  use  with  verbs 
281.  2.  b. 

Adjectives  numeral  224-228,  253-255. 

Adverbial  idea  expres.sed  by  a  verb  283. 0. 

Adverbial  expressions  288. 

Adverbs  236,  with  suffixes  237,  as  the  sub- 
ject 244.  c,  numeral  255.  4,  position  of 
288. 

Affixes  33. 

Agreement  neglected  289-293. 

Aleph,  sound  of  .1  4,  used  as  a  vowel-letter 
11.  1,  in  a  few  verbal  forms  120.  2.  122. 

2,  158.  3,  once  in  3  f  s.  suffix  219.  1. 
b,  otiant  16.  1,  with  Mappik  26,  with 
Daghesh  forte  (?)  121.  1,  substituted  for 
He  ia  Aramaean  51.  3,  in  Ki^jhal  infini- 


tive 91.  b,  in  Hiphil  94.  a,  b,  in  Hith- 
pael  96.  a,  in  feminine  ending  of  verbs 
b6.  b,  and  nouns  198.  d,  for  Vav  in  fern, 
plur.  of  nouns  201,  prosthesis  of  53. 1. 
a,  185.  c,  omitted  53.  2,  3,  57.  2  (2)  a, 
111.  2.  b,  c,  153.  2,  166.  2,  quiescent 
57.  2,  after  prefixed  prepositions  232.  3. 
a,  b,  after  Vav  Conjunctive  235.  c,  ]>re- 
fi-rs  diphthongal  vowels  60.  1.  «,  110.  3. 
111.  2,  previous  vowel  rarely  short  if 
Daghesh  forte  omitted  60.  4.  a,  121.  1, 
230.  3,  added  to  3  pi.  preterite  86.  ft, 
prefixed  in  the  formation  of  nouns  191. 

Alphabet  2,  order  of  6,  Lepsius'  theory 
6,  a. 

Anacoluthon  294.  b. 

Animals,  names  of  199.  c 

Apocopated  future  97.  2,  272,  not  in  pas- 
sive species  97.  2.  b,  in  Ayin  Guttural 
verbs  119.  1,  Laraedh  Guttural  126.  1, 
Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  155.  5,  159. 
3,  160.  2,  162.  3,  Lamedh  He  173.  1, 
174.  4,  175.  3,  176.  4,  177.  3,  178.  3, 
uses  of  272. 

Apocopated  imperative  98.  2,  173.  1. 

Ajijjosition  of  nouns  256. 

Arabic  letters  3. 1.  a,  currently  read  with- 
out vowels  10.  a,  syllables  18.  2.  c, 
Teshdid  23.  3.  b,  accent  33.  4.  a,  Elif 
prosthetic  53.  1.  a,  conjugations  83.  c 
(1),  comparative  or  superlative  191.  a, 
nouns  of  unity  200.  6,  case  endings 
201.  e,  dual  204,  article  230.  1.  a,  con- 
junction with  the  accusative  284.  d. 

Aramaean  syllables  18.  2.  c,  words  modi- 
fied from  Hebrew  51.  3,  dual  204.  a. 

Article  definite  230,  use  of  248,  with  verbs, 
etc.  248.  6.  C,  300.  b,  with  proper  nouns 
249.  1.  a,  before  nouns  with  suffixes 
249.  2.  a,  before  nouns  in  the  construct 
249.  3.  b,  when  omitted  250,  252.  1.  b. 
c   252.  2.  b   c. 

Article  indefinite  230.  1.  b,  251.  9. 


INDEX  I. 


185 


Aspirates  3.  1,  7.  2,  receive  Baghesh  lene 
21,  their  orig-inal  sound  21.  6,  affected 
by  concurrence  of  consonants  or  doub- 
ling 54.  1. 

Athnahh  divides  verse  36.  1,  40.  2,  train 
of  38.  2,  41.  b  (1). 

Augment,  Greek  and  Sanskrit  99.  1.  a. 

Aj'in,  sound  of  3.  4,  Aramaean  substitute 
for  Tsadhe  51.  3,  elided  53.  3.  «,  1'28, 
previous  vowel  sometimes  short  when 
Daghesh  omitted  60.  4.  a,  230.  3. 

Ayin  doubled  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3, 
their  peculiarities  l.'i3-137,  remarks 
139-142,  paradigm  VIII. 

Ayin  Guttural  verbs  116,  remarks  118- 
122.  paradigm  V. 

Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Todh  verbs,  origin  of 
term  76.  3.  their  peculiarities  164-156, 
remarks  158-163,  paradigm  IX. 

Biliteral  roots  68.  b. 

Bohemian  accent  33.  4.  a. 
"Ordinal  numbers  224-227,  with  dual  end- 
ing 224.  1.  rt,  position  and   agreement 
2.53,  254,    with   suffixes  253.   2   (2)  b, 
254.  4.  a,  with  the  article  254.. 4. 

Changes  of  person  294. 

Circumstantial  clauses  309. 

Cities  names  of,  feminine  199.  d. 

Collectives  with  feminine  ending  200, con- 
strued with  the  plural  289.  5. 

Commutation  of  letters  50.  1,  Aleph  for 
He  86,  b,  91.  b,  94.  a,  96.  a,  198.  d,  He 
for  Aleph  191.  6,  Aleph  for  Yodh  56. 
4,  or  Vav  56.  4.  a,  201,  Vav  for  Aleph 
57.  2  (2)  fl,  111.  2.  b,  d,  Todh  for  Vav 
56.  2,  Teth  for  Tav  54.  4,  82.  5. 

Compari.'^on,  how  expressed  264. 

Compound  numbers  225,  226.  2,  with 
nouns  254.  3,  with  the  article  254.  4.  b. 

Compound  predicate  289.  1.  a,  289.  5.  b. 

Compound  sentences  243,  2,  300. 

Compound  species  83.  c  (2). 

Compound  subject  247.  1,  290.  1. 

Conjugations  76.  1. 

Conjunctions  241,  formed  from  relatives 
305,  from  prepositions  305.  e,  uses  of 
305.  a,  b,  307. 

Consecution  of  accents  in  prose  36-39,  in 
poetry,  40-42. 

Consonant  changes,  53-56. 

Consonants  changed  to  vowels  57,  vowel 
changes  orcasioned  by  contiguous  con- 
sonants 60,by  concurrent  consonants,  61. 

Construct  infinitive.  See  Infinitive  con- 
struct. 

Construct  state  of  nouns  214-218,  rela- 
tions denoted  by  257,  resolved  by  pre- 
position Lamedh  26j. 

Constructio  praegnans  286.  3. 

Contraction  of  two  similar  letters  61.  3, 
134.  1. 

Contracted  verbs  107. 

Copula  261.  2,  3. 

Countries  names  of,  feminine  199.  d. 

Daghe.sh  meaning  of  word  21.  2.  a. 

Daghe.sh-forte  23,  distinguished  from  Da- 
ghesh-lene  23.   2,   from   Shurek  23.  3, 


different  kinds  of  24,  conjunctive,  in- 
stances of  24.  a,  lb.  1,  separative  '24.  b, 
192.  a,  218.  2.  a,  220.  5.  a,  231.  2.  a, 
emphatic  24.  c,  86.  a,  150.  1,  orthopho- 
nic  24.  d,  omission  of  25,  resolved  by 
the  insertion  of  a  liquid  54.  3,  220,  6. 

b,  or  Yodh  141.  1,  or  by  prolonging 
the  previous  vowel  59.  a,  never  in 
gutturals  60.  4,  108,  rarely  in  Kesh  23. 
1,  60.  4.  a,  121.  1,  omitted  from  Hith- 
pael  96.  a,  in  suffixes  of  verbs  1<>4.  a, 
105.  b. 

Daghesh  lene  21,  22,  omitted  from  Kal 
imperative  89  (f.  s.  and  m.  pi.),  from 
gu  tural  forms  109.  3.  a,  from  construct 
plural  of  nouns  218.  2  a,  after  prefixes 
101.  2.  b. 

Daleth  assimilated  to  the  feminine  ending 
Tav  54.  2,  149.  2,  207.  b. 

Day  of  the  month  255.  2.  b. 

Declension  of  nouns,  adjectives  and  parti- 
ciples 221,  paradigms  XJV — XVI. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  73,  qualifying 
nouns  252.  2,  qualif3'ing  nouns  in  the 
construct  259,  predicate  263,  used  for 
relative  303. 

Dental  letters  7.  1. 

D'hhi  41.  b  (2). 

Dialects,  effect  upon  words  51.  S. 

Diphthongal  vowels  15. 

Distributive  numbers  255.  4. 

Distributive  sense  expressed  by  repetition 
255.  4,  296.  1. 

Division  erroneous,  of  words  43.  c. 

Divisions  of  Grammar  1. 

Dual,  ending  of  202,  signification  of  204^ 
superadded  to  the  plural  204.  5.  b, 
nouns  with  suffixes  220.  4,  joined  with 
the  plural  292. 

Ellipsis  295. 

Emphasis  exjressed  by  repetition  281, 
296.  3,  297. 

English  accent  33.  4.  a. 

Excess,  how  denoted  2^4.  2  (2)  b. 

Feminine  endings  198,  how  related  55.  2. 

c,  198.  b.  compared  with  Indo-European 
endings  198.  e,  used  to  form  abstracts, 
collectives,  official  designations  200,and 
nouns  of  unitj'  200.  b,  appended  to  in- 
finitive.   See  Infinitive  construct. 

Feminine  nouns  without  fem.  ending  in 

the  singular  199.  a,  with  masc.  ending 

in  plural  202.  b,  with  two  plural  forms 

202.  c,  with  suffixes  220.  2,  declensions 

of  221.  B. 
Feminine  sign  of,  duplicated  88  (3  f.),  169. 

3,  171.   1    a  (?),  neglected  88  (2  f.   s, 

3  f.  pL),  199.  a. 
Final  forms    of  letters  4,  in  middle  of 

words  4.  a. 
Flexil>ility  various,  of  different  languages 

69.  b. 
Formative  sjdlables  differ  from  prefixo.a 

and  suffixes  33,  69.  c,  101.  2.  b,  123.  4. 
Fractional  numbers  228.  3,  255.  3. 
Future,   formation  of  84.  3,  its  persona' 

endings  and  prefixes  85.  I.  a  (2),  with 
25 


386 


INDEX  I. 


suffixes  105,  uses  of  267,  shortened 
form.     See  Apocopated  future. 

Galilean  pronunciation  51.  4.  a. 

Grammar,  function  and  divisions  of  1. 

Grammatical  subject  247.  2. 

Grave  suffixes  7.i,  220.  1. 

Greek  alphabet  5.  a,  8.  6,  7.  2.  a,  accent 
33.  4.  a,  augment  99.  1.  a,  feminine 
198.  e,  numerals  224.  2.  a,  construction 
of  neuter  plurals  289.  4.  a. 

Guttural  letters  7. 1,  tlieir  peculiarities  60, 
108,  attract  or  preserve  vowels  60.  3.  c. 

Guttural  verbs  107. 

He  and  Hheth  3.  3. 

He  as  a  vowel  letter  11.  1,  57.  2  (2)  b, 
with  Mappik  26,  prosthesis  of  53.  1.  a, 
rejection  of  53.  2,  3,  85.  2.  a  (1),  95.  b, 
211.  a,  230.  5,  233.  5,  precedin.cr  vowel 
often  short  when  Dajihesh  omitted  60. 

4.  ff,  121.  1,  2.30.  3,  added  to  2  m.  g. 
and  2  f.  pi.  preterite  86.  b,  to  2  m.  s. 
suffix  104.  b,  219.  1.  b,  to  2  i.  s.  suffix 
219.  2.  c,  to  2  and  3  f.  pi.  suffix  104.  g, 
219.  1.  b,  219.  2.  c,  for  3  m.  s.  suffix 
1  4.  d,  219.  1.  b,  omitted  from  f.  pi. 
future  88  and  imperative  89,  omitted 
after  prefixes  85.  2.  a  (1),  91.  b,  94.  b, 
95.  b,  113.  2,230.5,  retained  in  excep- 
tional cases  95.  e,   143.  3,    151.  2,  232. 

5.  a,  for  Aleph  167.  1,  prefixed  in  the 
formation  of  nouns  191.  b. 

He  directive  223.  1. 

He  interrogative  231. 

He  paragogic,  eff'ect  on  accent  33. 1,  with 
Methegh  35.  2.  a,  examples  of  61.  6.  a, 
223.  2,  distinguished  from  feminine 
ending  198.  c,  added  to  preterite  93.  c, 
to  future.     See  Paragogic  future. 

Hhatt'ph  Seghol  in  1  sing,  future  Piel  92.  e. 

Hheth,  preceding  vowel  mostly  short, 
when  Daghesh  omitted  60.  4.  a,  121.  1, 
230.  3. 

^hirik,  quantity  of  14,  29.  1,  between 
concurring  consonants  61.  1,  85.  2.  a, 
218.  2,  232,  2,  235,  in  Segholates  61.  2, 
186.  b,  never  in  the  ultimate  of  Kal  ac- 
tive participles  90,  in  1  sing.  Niphal  fu- 
ture 91.  c,  150.  2,  in  Piel  before  suffixes 

104.  h,  in  penult  of  Piel  infinitive  92.  d, 
in  Hiphil  infinitive  94.  b,  rejected  from 
Hiphil  future  94.  c,  and  participle  94  e, 
in  the  inflected  preterite  of  Kal,  Hiphil 
119.  2,  and  Hithpael  96.  b,  retained  in 
Hiphil  before  suffixes  104.  h,  in  the  ul- 
timate of  nouns  209.  1.  c,  211.  2. 

Hholem,  stability  of  60.  1.  a  (4),  in  in- 
flected verbs  Ayin  doubled  61.  3,  136. 
2,  141.  2,  and  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin 
Yodh  155.  4,  161.  1,  162.  2,  shortened 
to  Kamets  Hhatuph  in  Kal  infinitive 
construct  87,  future  88,  and  imperative 
89,  once  retained  in  Kal  future  before 
Makkeph  88,  in  intensive  species  92.  &, 
rejected  from  Kal  future  before  suffixes 

105.  rf,  in  the  ultimate  of  nouns  209. 1. 
c,  d,  209.  2.  c,  217,  1.  c,  211.  3,  in  the 
penult  212.  d,  218.  1.  c. 


Hiphil,  signification  of  79,  relation  to  Vie\ 
bO.  2.  a  (1),  formation  of  82.  4,  origin 
of  prefixed  He  82.  5.  b  (2),  nouns  de- 
rived from  189,  2.  a,  191. 

Hithpael,  signification  of  80,  relation  to 
Kiphal  80.  2.  a  (2),  formation  of  82  5, 
origin  of  prefixed  syllable  82.  5.  b  (1), 
verbs  having  two  forma  of  122.  2, 142. 4. 

Hophal,  signification  of  79.  3,  formation 
of  82.  4,  origin  of  prefixed  He  82.  5.  b 
(2),  no  imperative  84,  except  in  two  in- 
stances 95.  d,  in  Ayin  doubled  verbs 
140.  6,  in  Pe  Yodh  verbs  150.  5,  in 
Ayin  Vav  verbs  162.  5,  in  Lamedh 
Aleph  verbs  169.  2,  in  Lamedh  He 
verbs  177.  5. 

Hj'pothetical  sentences  306-308. 

Imperative,  formation  of  84.  4,  its  per- 
sonal endings  85.  1.  a  (3),  Kal  with  suf- 
fixes 101,  3.  106.  b,  paragogic  98.  1, 
111.  3.  a,  125.  1,  132.  1,  149.  3,  159.2, 
apocopated  98.  2,  173.  2,  twice  in  Ho- 
phal 95.  d,  uses  of  273. 

Imperfect,  see  Future. 

Imperfect  verbs  classified  107. 

Impersonal  subject  245.3,  construction  of 
passive  and  neuter  verbs  284.  e. 

Inanimate  objects,  names  of  200.  c,  in  plu- 
ral 205.  5.  «,  plural  with  feminine  sin- 
gular 289.  4. 

Indefinite  pronouns  75,  304. 

Indefinite  subject  245.  2,  article  230.  1.  b, 
251.  a. 

Indo-European  roots  69.  a,  feminine  and 
neuter  198.  e,  dual  204.  a,  numerals  224. 
2.  a,  conception  of  time  265. 

Infinitive,  a  verbal  noun  279,  as  the  sub- 
ject 244.  b,  279.  a,  does  not  admit  the 
article  248.  6.  c,  except  in  a  special 
case  279.  d,  with  prepositions  244.  b, 
279.  a-c,  governed  by  verbs  or  nouns 
279.  b,  construction  changed  to  pret- 
erite or  future  282. 

Infinitive  absolute,  formation  of  84.  1, 
with  feminine  ending  162.  4.  as  an 
exclamation  280.  1,  explanatory  280.  2, 
for  preterite  or  future  280.  3,  for  im- 
perative  280.  4j   emphatic  use  of  281. 

Infiiiitive  construct,  formation  of  84.  2.  in 
Kal  usually  without  Vav  87,  with  femi- 
nine ending  in  perfect  verbs  87,  in  Piel 
92.  d,  in  Pe  Guttural  111,  3.  a,  in  Ayin 
Guttural  119.  3,  in  Lamedh  Guttural 
125.  2,  in  Hiphil  128,  in  Pe  Nun  131. 
4,  in  Ayin  doubled  139.  2,  in  Pe  Yodh 
149,  in  Hophal  151.  5,  in  Lamedh 
Aleph  verbs  168.  2,  in  Lamedh  He  170, 
with  suffixes  101.  3,  106.  a,  following 
noun  or  suffix  denote  subject  or  object 
102.  3.  257.  9.  b,  279.  (/,  emphatic  use 
of  281.  1,  c. 

Inseparable  prepositions  232-2.34, 

Intensit3'  expressed  by  repetition  281,296.3, 

Intentional,  see  Paragogic  Future, 

Interjections  242. 

Interrogative  and  indefinite  proGoan*  75, 
trace  of  neuter  in  198.  a- 


tN'DEa  L 


387 


Interroprative  sentonces  298. 
Iiitiansitive  verbs  construed  transitively 

285. 

Irrational  objects,  plural,  with  feminine 
singular  '2«9.  4. 

Jews  moiiern,  use  Rabbinical  letter  2, 
their  pronunciation  of  Ayin  3.  4,  use 
abbreviations  9.  1. 

Jussive,  see  Apocopated  Future. 

Kal,  meaning  of  term  76.  2,  formation  in 
perfect  verbs  82.  1,  remarks  upon  86-90. 

Kamt'tsandKamets-Hhatuph  distinguish- 
ed 19.  2. 

Kamets  in  the  ultimate  of  nouns  209. 1.  5, 
209.2.6,217.  1,  in  the  penult  212,  218  1. 

Kamets-Hl)atu])h  in  Kal  infin.  constr.  be- 
fore Makkt-ph  87,  before  suffixes  106, 
in  future  88,  in  imperative  89,  106,  in 
passive  species  93.  a,  95.  o,  in  Hith- 
pael  96.  a. 

EaT5iriuia~-Koph  3.  2. 

Kaph  initial  rejected  53. 2.  o,  assimilation 
of  54.  2.  a. 

Kame  Phara  38.  10. 

Kibbuts,  quantity  of  19.  1,  in  passive  spe- 
cies 93.  a,  95.  a,  in  Hitlipael  96.  a. 

K'ri  and  K'lhibh  •16-48,  number  of  46.  a. 

Kushoi  21.  2.  a. 

Labial  lette'-d  7.  1. 

Lamedh  initial  rejected  53.  2.  a,  132.  2, 
medial  rejected  53.  3.  b,  88  (1  c),  assim- 
ilated to  followiar  "onsonaut  54. 2,  132. 
2,  appended  in  foi^ation  of  nouns  195. 
2.  c. 

Lamedh  Aleph  verbs  164,  remarks  166-169, 
paradigm  XI. 

Lamedh  Guttural  verbs  123,  remarks 
125-128,  paradigm  VL 

Lamedh  He  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3, 
their  peculiarities  170,  171,  shortened 
future  and  imperative  173,  remarlcs 
174-179,  paradigm  XII. 

Latin  alphabet  6.  b,  accent  33.  4.  a,  fe- 
minine and  neuter  198.  e,  numerals 
224,  2.  a. 

Lazian  accent  33.  4.  a. 

Letters,  sounds  of  3,  double  forms  of  4, 
of  unusual  size  or  position  4.  a,  names 
of  5,  order  of  6,  classification  of  7,  nu- 
merical use  of  9.  2,  commutation  of  50. 
1,  transposition  of  50.  2,  addition  of 
50.  3. 

liCttish  accent  33.  4.  a. 

L'gharmeh,  clause  divided  by  40.  2,  train 
of  41.  g. 

Light  suffixes  72,  220.  2-4. 

I.inguals  7.  1,  substituted  for  sibilants  in 
Aramaean  51.  3. 

Liquids  7.  2. 
fc_  Logical  subject,  247.  £. 

Wakkeph  43. 

Manner  288.  2.  e. 

Mappik  26,  omitted  from  3f.8.  suffi"  104. 
e,  219.  1.  b. 

Masculine  for  feminine,  suffixes  104  g, 
■220.  1.  b,  future  88  (3  f.  pi.),  105.  e, 
predicate  and  prcMouns  28?.  6. 


Masculine  nor  js  with  suffixes  220, 3,  with 
fern,  endin^'  in  jilural  202.  «,  witli  two 
endings  iu  plural  202.  c,  declensions 
of  221.  A. 

Matres  lectionis  11.  1. 

Measure  288.  2.  c. 

Medial  letters  for  finals  4.  a. 

Medium  strength,  letters  of  7.  2. 

Mem  dropped  from  Pual  participle  53.2.0, 
93.  e,  final  rejected  55.  2,  216,  2,  ap- 
pendel  to  3  m.  pi.  future  (?)  88,  pre- 
fixed in  formation  of  nouns  193,  affixed 
195.  2.  c,  omitted  from  plural  ending 
(?)  201.  b. 

Wethegh  44,  45,  aid  in  distinguishing 
doubtful  vowels  19,  45.  2.  c,  with  He 
jiaragogic  35.  2.  a,  in  place  of  an  accent 
shifted  in  position  35.  1,  or  removed  by 
Makkeph  43,  44.  a,  64.  1.  a,  after  He 
interrogative  231.  2.  a,  its  place  sup- 
plied by  an  accent  39.  3.  a,  45.  5. 

Moilal  forms  of  verbs,  uses  of  270-274. 

Modern  Hebrew  read  without  vowel  points 
10.  a. 

Monosyllabic  nouns  185. 

Mountains,  names   of,  masculine  199.  d. 

Multiliteral  nouns  197. 

Mutes  7.  2,  a  p-mute  missing  (?)  7.  2.  a. 

Karnes  of  letters  5,  their  antiquity  5.  a, 
their  origin  and  .signification  5.  b. 

Nations,  names  of  199.  d,  289.  5.  c. 

Negative  particles  271.  b,  272.  c,  273,  273. 
d,  275.  2.  c,  278.  4.  b,  279.  c,  281.  1.  b, 
sentences  299,  ambiguity  of  299.  C. 

Neuter  gender,  trace  of  198.  a. 

Neuter  verbs  rarely  have  participles  90, 
with  suffixes  102.  2. 

Niphal,  signification  of  77,  relation  to 
Hithpaei  80.  2.  a  (2),  its  formation  82. 
2,  origin  of  the  prefixed  Nun  82.  5.  b 
(1),  participle  from  a  noun  91.  e,  from 
an  adverb  80.  2.  b,  nouns  derived  from 

187.  2.  a. 

Nouns,  formation  of  183,  Class  I  184-188, 
Class  II  189,  190,  Class  III  191-194, 
Class  IV  195,  196,  multiliterals  197, 
from  imperfect  roots  186.  b,  187.  2.  d, 

188.  2.  c,  189.  1.  d,  e.  189.2.  b,  c,  192. 
b,  plural  from  quiescent  roots  209.  1./. 
210.  3.  c,  with  suffixes  220.  5.  b. 

Nouns,  gender  and  number  of  198-213, 
construct  state  of  214-218,  with  suffixes 
219,  220,  declension  of  221,  paradigms 
XIII-XVL 

N  ouns,  feminine,  without  fem.  ending  199. 
a,  with  masc.  ending  in  plural  202.  b, 
masculine  with  fem.  ending  in  plural 
202.  a,  with  either  ending  202.  c,  of 
doubtful  gender  199.  b,  202.  c,  having 
but  one  number  203. 1,  definite  without 
the  article  249,  in  loose  subordination 
256.  8,  used  for  adjectives  257.  6.  b, 
in  construct  before  adjectives  253.  1. 
a,  257.  6.  c,  in  construct  1  efore  pre- 
positions 258.  1,  in  construct  before  a 
clause  258.  2.  predicate  262,  placed 
absolutely  284  d,  288. 2,  repeti  tion  of  298^ 
25* 


388 


INDEX  I. 


Nouns,  primitive  183.  a,  dem'ative  183.  b, 
of  unity  200.  b. 

Number,  relations  of  288.  2.  d. 

Numeral  adjectives  224-228,  253-255,  ul- 
verbs  255,  4. 

Numerical  use  of  letters  9.  2. 

Nun  rejected  53.  2.  a,  b,  55.  2,  from 
verbs  129.2,  131.3,4,  from  nouns  186. 
b,  196.  2.  b,  assimilated  to  a  following 
consonant  54.  2,  in  verbs  129.  1,  li-il.  2, 
132.  1,  in  nouns  186.  b,  192.  a,  207.  b, 
to  initial  Mem  (?)  55.  1,  88  (m.  pi.), 
inserted  in  lieu  of  reduplication  54.  3, 
220.  6.  b,  epenthetic  56.  1,  101.  2,  105. 
b,  added  to  3  pi.  preterite  86.  b,  to  fu- 
ture 88  (2  f.  8.,  m,  pi.),  before  suffixes 
105.  c,  in  Niphal  absolute  infinitive  91.  b, 
131.  5,  168.  3,  175.  2,  in  Niphal  impera- 
tive (?)  91.  f/,  appended  in  formation  of 
nouns  195,  in  masc.  plur.  ending  201.  a. 

Oath  305.  a. 

Object  definite,  sign  of  240,  284,  of 
transitive  verbs  284,  of  intransitive  verbs 
285,  indirect  286,  multiple  2S7. 

Occupations  188.  2.  a,  189.  1.  a. 

Office,  names  of  200.  a  (2). 

Official  designations  200. 

Olev'voredh  divides  verse  40.  2,  train  of 
41.  c  (1). 

Ordinal  numbers  228,  255. 

Orthograjjhic  symliols  1-49,  changes  50-66. 

Orthography,  various  11.  1.  b,  51.  4.  a. 

Palatal  letters  7.  1. 

Paradigm,  see  Verbs  paradigms  of,  and 
Nouns. 

Paragogic  future  97. 1, 271,  not  in  passive 
species  97.  2.  b,  in  Lamedh  He  verbs 
174.  3,  uses  of  271,  imperative  98,  1, 
273. 

Paragogic  letters,  effect  on  accent  33.  1, 
instances  of  61.  6.  a,  222,  223. 

Participles,  formation  of  84.  5,  of  neuter 
verbs  90,  with  personal  inflections  90, 
qualifying  nouns  252.  1,  qualifying 
nouns  in  the  construct  259,  in  the  con- 
struct before  nouns  and  infinitives  257. 
9.  b,  signification  of  278,  emphatic  use 
of  281.  2.  b,  construction  changed  to 
preterite  or  future  282,  as  circumstan- 
tial clause  309.  2. 

ParticL  s  jjrefixed  229-235,  separate  236- 
242. 

Parts  of  speech  70. 

Passive  sjiecies  with  suffixes  102.  2,  of 
doubl}'  transitive  verbs  287.  5. 

Pattahh  preferred  by  gutturals  60.  1,  108, 
changed  to  Seghol  63.  1,  assimilated  to 
Seghol  61.  1.  b,  63.  2,  to  Kamets  or 
Tsere  63.  2,  in  Segholates  61.  2,  with 
pause  accents  65.  a,  in  Kal  constr.  .mfin. 
87,  in  f.  pi.  future  Niphal  91.  c,  and  Piel 
92.  e,  in  preterite  and  imperative  Piel 
92.  c,  in  Ilithpael  96.  b,  in  the  ultimate 
of  nouns  209.  2.  a. 

Pattahh  furtive  17,  60.  2,  109.  2,  114  (?), 
123. 

Pausal  forms  with  inferior  accents  65.  b. 


Pause  accents  36.  2.  a,  position  of  35.  2, 
occasion  vowel  changes  65,  with  tho 
preterite  86.  a,  with  the  future  88,  with 
the  imperative  89  (t.  s.  and  m.  pi.),  with 
2  m.  s.  suffix  104.  b,  219.  1.  b,  with  Pe 
Guttural  verbs  112.  4,  with  Ayin  Guttu- 
ral 119.  1,  121.  3,  with  Lamedh  Guttu- 
ral 126.  1. 

Pazer,  clause  divided  by  86.  2,  40.  2, 
train  of  38.  7,  41.  e. 

Pe  Alepli  verbs  110.  3. 

Pe  Guttural  verbs,  origin  of  term,  76.  3, 
their  peculiarities  108,  109,  remarks 
111-115,  paradigm  IV. 

Pe  Nun  verbs,  origin  of  term  76. 3,  their 
peculiarities  129,  remarks  131,  132, 
paradigm  VII. 

Perfect,  see  Preterite. 

Perfect  verbs  81-85,  remarks  86-96,  with 
suffixes  101,  102,  remarks  104-106, 
paradigms  II,  III. 

Periods  of  human  life  203.  1.  b, 

Persian  construct  state  61.  6.  a. 

Personal  endings  and  prefixes  of  verbs  85. 
1.  a,  before  suffixes  101.  1,  more  closely 
attached  than  suffi.xes  or  prefixed  prepo- 
sitions 101.  2.  b. 

Personal  jironouns  71,  not  expressed  in 
the  subject  unless  emphatic  246,  third 
person  added  to  subject  246.  2. 

Pe  Yodh  verbs,  origin  of  term  76.  3,  pe- 
culiarities 144-146,  remarks  148-153, 
paradigm  X. 

Piel,  signification  of  78,  relation  to  Hiphil 
80.  2.  a  (1),  formation  of  82.  3,  unusual 
forms  of  92.  a,  b,  verbs  with  two  forms 
of  122.  2,  142.  4,  nouns  derived  from 
189.  2.  a. 

Pilel,  Pilpel,  Poel  not  distinct  species  from 
Piel  83.  c  (1). 

Place  where  or  whither  288.  2.  b. 

Plural  endings  201. 

Plural  for  singular  in  verbs  (?)  88  (3  f.  pi.), 
of  majesty  203.  2,  289.  3. 

Pluralis  inhumanus  289.  4.  a. 

Pluralit3'  expressed  by  repetition  296.  2, 

Points  extraordinary  4.  a. 

Points  Masoretic  10,  accuracy  of  49. 

Polish  accent  33.  4.  a. 

Precative  particle  274. 

Predicate  261,  compound  289.  1.  a,  289. 
5.  b,  agreement  with  nouns  in  the  con- 
struct relation  293. 

Prefixed  partichs  229-235,  two  constitut- 
ing a  word  229.  2.  a. 

Prepositions,  inseparable  232-234,  separate 
238,  with  suffixes  239. 

Preterite,  personal  endings  of  85.  1.  a  (1), 
•with  suffixes  101.  1,  104,  Kal  before 
suffixes  101.  3,  uses  of  266,  and  future 
in  combination  268,  269. 

Pretonic  vowels  64.  2,  in  Kal  preterite 
82.  1,  not  rejected  from  Niphal  91.  6, 
106.  a. 

Primary  preferred  to  a  secondary  form  289. 

Primary  Tenses  266,  267,  with  Vav  Con- 
junctive  275. 


INDEX  L 


389 


Pronominal  ideas   expressed   by    nouns 

246.  2.  &. 
Pronominal  roots  68,  the  basis  of  adverbs, 

prepositions  and  conjunctions  2;)6.  1.  a. 
Pronominal  suffixes  72.     .SVe  Suffixes. 
Pronouns,    personal   71,  as  suliject  246, 

repetition    of   297,    demonstrative    73, 

252.  2,  2.'ii»,  263,  relative    74,  300-303, 

interrogative  and  indefinite  75,  198.  a, 

298.  3,  304. 
Proper  nouns  with  the  article  249. 1.  a,  in 

loose  apposition  256.  3.  a, 
Pual,  signification  of  78.  3,  formation  of 

82. 3,  no  imi)erative  84,  in  perfect  verbs 
93,  Ayiu  Guttural  verbs  121.  1,  Ayin 
doubled  verbs  142,  14'!.  1,  Ayin  Vav 
verbs  163.  4,  Lamedh  AkpL  verbs  169, 

1,  Lamedh  He  verbs  176.  6. 
Pure  vowels  15. 

Quadriliteral  raots  68.  a,  verbs  182,  nouns 
197.  1,   Segholates   plural  of  210.  3.  a. 

Question,  direct  and  indirect  298. 1,  dis« 
Mmctive  298.  2. 

Quiescant  letters  11. 1,  their  two  uses  dis- 
tiuguisticd  13,  softened  to  vowels  57.  2. 

Quiescent  verbs  107,  144. 

Quinqueliteral  roots  68.  a,  nouns  197   2. 

Quotation,  direct  for  indirect  305.  a. 

Radical  letters  7.  3. 

Rajthe  27. 

R'bhi*,  clause  divided  by  36. 2,  40. 2,  train 
of  38.  6,  41.  (/. 

E'bhi^  Mugrash  41.  a  (2). 

R'bhi'*,  small  41.  c  (2). 

Reduplication  of  second  radical  in  verbs 
62.  3.  in  nouns  189,  of  third  radical  in 
verbs  92.  r/,  115,  122.  1,  156.  2,  163.3, 
176.  1,  178.  1,  in  nouns  189.  1.  d,  189. 

2.  c,  of  two  radicals  in  verbs  92.  a,  115, 
122.  1,  137,  142.  2,  156.  3,  163.  2,  in 
nouns  1S9.  1.  e,  189.  2.  b,  190,  of  a 
short  word  132.  1,  234.  a. 

Relative  clauses  300-304. 

Relative  pronoun  74,  its  government 
300,  antecedent  300.  a,  antecedent  not 
expressed  301,  omission  of  3u2. 

Repetition  of  verbs  281,  nouns  296,  pro- 
nouns 297. 

Re.sh,  sound  of  3.  3,  assimilated  to  a  fol- 
lowing consonant  54.  2,  inserted  in  lieu 
of  ru'lupliration  54.  3,  jjreference  for 
Pattahh  60.  l..'?,  with  Pattahh  furtive  (?) 
60.  2.  «,  114,  with  simple  or  compound 
Sh'va  60.  3.  a,  120.  3,  with  Daghcsh- 
forte  23.  1,  60.  4.  a,  previous  vowel 
lengthened  on  the  omission  of  Daghesh, 

60.4.  a,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs  114, 
as  the  second  radical  118.  1,  120.  3,  as 
the  third  radical  125.  3,  126.  2,  127.  2. 

Rivers,  names  of,  masculine  199.  d. 

Hoots  of  words  67,  68. 

Kukhokh  21.  2.  a. 

Samaritan  Pentateuch,  its  negligent  or- 
thography, 51.  4.  a,  99.  1.  a,  and  va- 
riant forms  156.  2. 

Samekb,  Shin  and  Sin  3.  1,  3.  1.  a. 


Sanskrit  laws  of  euphony  21.  2.  h,  55. 1.  a, 

accent  33.  4.  a,  augment  99.  1.  a,  femi- 
nine and  neuter  198.  e,  numerals  224. 
2.  a. 

Scriptio  plena,  defectiva  14. 

Seasons,  names  of  187.  2.  a. 

Seghol  inserted  between  concurring  con- 
sonants 61.  2,  173.  1,  in  Ayin  doubled 
verbs  61.  3,  1.16.  2,  141.  2,  in  Ayin 
Vav  verbs  155.  4,  159.  3,  162.  3,  final 
rejected  66.  1  (1),  173.  1,  with  pause 
accents  65,  in  Kal  active  participle  90, 
in  Niph.al  91.  a,  b,  in  Piel  92.  c,  (I,  126. 

2,  before  suffixes  104.  h,  in  Hi]iliil  94. 
a,  b,  in  Hitlipac-l  96.  b,  in  the  ultimate 
of  nouns  210,  211.  1,  217.  2,  in  the 
penult  of  feminine  nouns  209.  1.  e. 

Segholate  forms  from  triliteral  mono.syll- 
ables  or  final  syllables  61.  1.  b,  185,  186. 
a,  in  feminine  207,  construct  216.  1.  b. 

Segholate  nouns  185,  signification  of  186, 
their  feminine  210.  2,  plural  210.  3, 
dual  210.  4,  construct  218.  2,  with  suf- 
fixes 220.  5,  with  He  paragogic  223.  1. 

Segholta,  verse  divided  by  36.  1,  train  of 
38.  3. 

Sentence,  simple  or  compound  243.  2, 
elements  of  243.  3,  subject  of  244,  pre- 
dicate of  261.  1. 

Separate  particles  236-242. 

Septuagint,  equivalents  for  Aj'in  3.  4, 
mode  of  writing  Hebrew  words  49. 2, 3. 

Servile  letters  7.  3,  anagrams  of  7.  3.  a. 

Shalsheleth,  when  used  38.  9,  Great, 
clause  divided  by  40.  2,  train  of  41.y. 

Shin,  Sin,  and  Samekh  3.  1,  3.  1.  a. 

Shurek,  quantity  of  14,  19.  1,  in  the  ult- 
imate of  Segholates  61.  2,  in  the  penult 
of  Segholates  61.  4.  a,  207.  c,  in  Kal 
future  of  perfect  verbs  88,  before  suffix- 
es 105.  d,  in  Kal  active  participle  90,  in 
the  ultimate  of  nouns  209.  2.  d,  211.  3. 

Sh'va  16,  silent  and  vocal  16.  2,  20.  1, 
simple  and  compound  16.  3. 

Sh'va  compound,  with  gutturals  16.  3,  60. 

3,  108,  witb  Resh  60.  3.  a,  120. 3,  with 
strong  letters  16.  3.  b,  before  gutturals 
120.  2,  127.  3,  in  construct  plural  of 
nouns  216.  2.  a,  after  He  interrogative 
231.  2.  a,  after  Vav  Conjunctive  235.  a, 
which  is  selected  60.  3.  b,  109.  3,  112, 
changed  to  a  short  vowel  60.  3.  c,  witii 
pause  accent  to  a  long  vowel  65, 

Sh'va  simple  with  gutturals  60.  3.  a,  in 
Po  Guttural  verbs  112.  2,  5,  in  Lamedli 
Guttural  verbs  123.  4,  127. 1,  changed 
to  Seghol  by  pause  accent  65. 

Sibilants  7.  2. 

Silluk,  position  of  36.  1,  40,  2,  train  of 
38.  1,  41.  a  (1). 

Singular  predicate  or  pronoun  with  plural 
subject  289.  1-3. 

Sounds  of  the  letters  3. 

Species  of  verbs  76-80,  mutually  supple* 
mentarj'  80.  2.  a  (3),  what  number  in 
use  in  different  verbs  80.  2.  a  (4),  forma- 
tion of  82,  with  double  forms  in  distinct 


cJDO 


INDEX  L 


senses  83.  c  (1),  122.  2,  142.  4,  com- 
pound 83.  c  (2). 

Strong  letters  7.  2. 

Subject  244,  omitted  245,  indefinite  245. 
2,  impersonal  245.  3,  compound  247.  1, 
2y0.  1,  grammatical  and  logical  247.  2. 

Suffixes,  jn-onominal  72,  of  verbs  101.  2. 
ot  nouns  219.  3,  relation  denoted  by 
257,  more  looselj'  attached  than  affixes 
101.  2.  b,  with  neuter  verbs  and  passive 
species  102.  2,  with  infinitives  and  parti- 
ciples 102.  3,  with  cardinal  numbers  224. 

1.  a,  253.  2  (2)  6,  with  nouns  in  the 
construct  259,  pleonastic  use  of  297.  c. 

Superlative  degree  264. 

Syllables  18,  intermediate  20. 2,  mutations 
in,  a  source  of  vowel  changes  59. 

Syriac  currently  read  without  vowels  10. 
a,  aspirates  21.  a,  doubling  of  letters 
23.  3.  b,  words  modified  from  Hebrew 
51.  3,  dual  204.  a. 

Svstema  morarum  18.  ft, 

Tav  and  Teth  3.  2. 

Tav  unites  with  Tav  of  personal  affixes 
86,  b  (2  m.),  or  feminine  emiing  54.  1, 
207  b,  prefixed  in  anomalous  verbal 
forms  94.  a,  163.  5,  in  the  formation 
of  nouns  192,  194.  2,  in  Hithpael  assi- 
milated 54.  2,  54.  4.  a,  82.  5,  131.  6, 
transposed  54.  4,  82.  5. 

Tav  of  feminine  ending  rejected  55.  2.  c, 
198.  b,  origin  of  198.  e,  added  to  verbs 
86.  b,  168.  1,  171.  1,  174.  1,  in  nouns 
196.  a,  198.  b,  207. 

Tenses,  primary  84,  266,  267,  secondary 
99,  276,  277,  subjective  use  of  265.  3, 
past  and  future  not  promiscuously  used 
268.  a. 

Time,  conception  of  265. 

Time,  when  and  how  long  288.  2.  a. 

T'lisha  Gh'dhola,  clause  divided  by  36.  2- 
train  of  38.  8. 

Transitive  construction  of  intransitive 
verbs  285. 

Transposition  of  letters  50.  2,  54.  4, 
82.  5. 

Tsere  rejected  from  the  ultimate  of  verbs 
66.  1  (1),  173.  2,  in  Kal  preterite  86.  a, 
166.  1,  in  fem.  plur.  future  Js'iphal  91.  c, 
and  l-iel  92.  e,  in  Piel  iuf.  abs.  92.  a,  in 
Hiphil  94.  b,  e,  in  Hophal  iuf  abs.  95.  c, 
with  Aleph  in  place  of  Sh'va  60.  3.  c, 
92.  e,  112.  1,  184.  b,  as  union  vowel 
with  the  preterite  104.  a,  in  the  ulti- 
mate of  verbs  before  suffixes  104.  h, 
of  Lamedh  Guttural  verbs  126.  1,  of 
Lameilh  Aleph  verbs  166.5,  in  the  ult- 
imate of  nouns  209,217.1,  in  the  penult 
of  nouns  212,  218.  1, 

Tsinnor  41.  c  (3). 

Vav  rejected  alter  vowelless  consonants 
53.  3.  a,  186.  b,  initial  change!  to  Yodh 
56.  2,  145.  1,  rarely  reduplicated  56.  3, 
in  verbs  156.  1,  163.  1,  or   nouns  189. 

2.  c,  softened  or  rejected  57.  2,  154, 
186.  b,    188.  2.  c,  192.  b,  209.  1./,  210. 

3.  c,  213.  a,  218. 1.  d,  preceding  a  vow- 


elless consonant  61, 1.  a,  235,  paragogio 
61.  6.  a,  222,  omitted  from  b.  pi.  pre- 
terite 86.  b,  in  Kal  infinitive  87,  in  Kal 
future  88,  in  Kal  imperative  89,  in  Kal 
passive  participle  90,  in  Pual  93.  b, 
added  to  3.  m.  pi.  suffix  104.  f. 

Vav  in  K'thibh,  where  K'ri  has  Kamets- 
Hhatuph  13.  a,  88,  105.  d,  217.  1.  c, 
Pattahh  125.  1,  or  Hhateph-Kamets  13. 
a,  89  (f.  s.),  216.  2.  a. 

Vav  Conjunctive  235,  306.  b,  310-312. 

Vav  Consecutive  of  the  future  33.  4,  99, 
with  Ay  in  Guttural  verbs  1 1 9. 1 ,  Lamcdb 
Guttural  126.  1,  Ayin  doubled  140.  1,  5, 
Pe  Yodh  149.  5,  151.  3,  152.  2,  Ayin 
Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  155.  5,  159.  3, 
160.  2,  162.  3,  Lamedh  Aleph  168.  4, 
Lamedh  He  173.  1,  174.  4,  175.  3,  176. 
4,  177.  3,  178.  3,  time  denoted  by  276. 

Vav  Consecutive  of  tbe  preterite  33.  4, 
100,  with  Pe  Guttural  verbs  112. 3,  time 
denoted  by  277. 

Vav  Coiiversive,  see  Vav  Consecutive. 

Verbs,  their  species  76-80,  occurring  in 
all  the  species  80.  2.  a  (4),  denomina- 
tives S0.2.b,  perfect  «1-100,  with  suffix- 
es 101-106,  imperfect  107-17y,  doubly 
imperfect  180,  defective  181,  quadrilite- 
ral  182,  syntax  of  265-282,  coordinated 
283,  object  of  284-266,  with  more  tlian 
one  object  287,  passive,  object  of  287.  5, 
agent  of  287.  5.  b,  repetition  of  281. 

Verbs,  paradigms  of,  perfect  II,  with 
suffixes  III,  Pe  Guttural  IV,  Ayin  Gut- 
tural V,  Lamedh  Guttural  VI,  Pe  Nun 
VII,  Ayin  doubled  VIII,  Pe  Yodh  X, 
A3'in  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  IX,  Lamedh 
Aleph  XI,  Lamedh  He  XII. 

Verbs,  personal  endings  and  prefixes  of 

85.  1.  a,  85.  2.  a,  suffixes  of  101-106. 
Verbs,  middle  e  and  o  b2.  1.  a,  have  Pat- 
tahh in  Kal  future  84.  3.  b  (1),  inflected 

86.  a,  before  suffixes  104.  h. 

Verbs  with  Pattahh  in  Kal  future  84.  3. 6, 
111.  1,  116.  1,  123.  1,  140.  1,  ]45.  2, 
with  Tsere  in  Kal  future  84.  3.  c,  130, 
145.  2,  148,  174.  3. 

Voluntative  forms  of  the  future  97.  2.  6, 
275.  2.  c. 

Vowel  changes  58-66,  significant  58.  1, 
euphonic  58.  2,  causes  of  59,  due  to 
mutations  of  syllables  69,  to  contiguous 
gutturals  60,  to  concurrent  consoi.ants 
61,  to  concurring  vowels  62,  to  prox- 
imity of  vowels  63,  to  the  accent  64, 
to  pause  accents  65,  to  the  .shortening 
or  lengthening  of  words  66,  of  short 
vowels  in  mixed  penult  58.  2,  212,  e, 
218.  2.  b. 

Vowiil  letters  7,  2,  use  of  11.  1,  distin- 
guished from  their  consonantal  use  13. 

Vowels  10-17,  Massoretic  signs  for  12, 
different  modes  of  dividing  them  12.  a, 
meanings  of  their  names  12.  b,  mutual 
relations  of  their  notation  by  letters  and 
bj'  points  13,  14,  mutable  and  immuta* 
ble  14,  58.  2,  pure  and  diphthongal  lf| 


INDEX  L 


S9i 


ambiguity  of  certain  signs  19,  20,o  and 
U  more  stnble  than  i  and  e  60. 1.  «,  in- 
serted between  concurrent  consonants 
61.  1,  ^,  e  and  6  preferred  before  con- 
current consonants  61.4,  I  and  u  before 
doubled  letters  61.  o,  paragogic  61.  6, 
222,  22;{,  concurring  62,  proximity  of, 
a  source  of  changes  63,  pretonic  64.  2, 
rejected  or  shortened  66. 1,  2,  of  union 
before  suffixes  101.  2,  e  with  preti  rite 
104.  a,  sometimes  a  with  future  10"). 
a,  finall  of  verbs  before  suftixes  104.  k, 
I,  vowe  a  retained  in  ultimate  before 
suffixes  105.  d,  118.  3,  166.  5. 

Weak  letters  7.  2,  effect  of  upon  syllables 
18.  2.  c. 

Words  not  divided  in  writings,  ambiguity 
when  unpointed  10.  a,  sources  of  chan<i:e 
inSl,  thre  estages  in  theformationof  67, 
changes  in  formation  and  intleclion  69. 

Written  symbols  of  two  sorts  2. 

Yodh  aa  a  vowel  letter  11. 1,  in  Kal  active 


participle  90,  in  Nijihal  future  113.  1, 
before  suffix  105.  r/,  219.  1.  b,  initial  re- 
jected 53.  2.  a,  b,  145.  3,  149,  152.  1, 
186.   b,   190.  b,   medial  rejected  53,  3. 

a,  b,  152,  170,  171,  softened  or  rejected 
57.  2,  154,  186,  b,  188.  2.  c,  192.  b,  209. 
1./.  210.  3.  c,  213.  a,  218.  l.(/,  changed 
to  Aleph  56.  4,  parago^r'c  61.  6.  ", 
222,  added  to  2  f.  s.  preti-rite  86.  fj, 
to  2  f.  3.  suffix  104.  c,  219.  1.  6,  219. 
2.  c,  omitted  from  1  sing.  prt-t>  rite  &6. 

b,  from  lliphil  94,  in  Lauiedh  He  verbs 
171,  174.  1,  ])refixed  in  formation  of 
nouns  192,  194.  1,  appended  in  forma- 
tion of  nouns  196,  quiescent  after  pre- 
fixed prepositions  232.  3.  b,  alter  Vav 
Conjunctive  235.  c. 

Zakeph  Gadhol,  clause  divided  by  36.  2, 

when  used  38.  5. 
Zakeph  Katon,  clause  divided  by  36.  2, 

train  of  38.  4. 
Zeugma  286.  3. 


IISTDEX   II. 


TEXTS  OF  SCRIPTUEE  EXPLAINED  OR  REFERRED  TO. 


GENESIS. 

1  :    !....§  21.  1,  248. 

5,  250.  b,  258.  2. 

0,  266.  1,  276./, 
284.  a,  289.  3.  a, 
302.  a 

1,21.... 284.  a 
2.... 21.    1,      23.5, 

261.  3,   266.  2.b, 

284.  «,  296.  3.  «, 

309.  1 
2,5, 10,27.... 276,  / 
3.... 270.  1.  a 
3flf....245.  1.  a 
3,  6.... 272.  a 
4....284.6,3.S7.4.a 
5.... 35.1,  255.1.&, 

284.  rt,  311.  4 

5,  6.... 284.  a 
5,8,  10.... 284.  a 
6. ...311.  1 

6,  7.... 248.  1 
8.... 284.  a 

9,  20.... 284.  a 
11....24.a,4.5.2,257. 

6,  272,  285.  3.   a 
12....219. 1.  6,  311. 

1.  a 
14.... 277.  a 
16....  248.2,253.2(2) 

«,  257.  9 
17,22,  29.... 284.  a 
18.... 45.  2.  c 
21.... 252.  1.  c 
22.... 38.  1.  a 
24.... 222 
24,  26.... 38.  1.    a, 

284.  a 
26.... 289.  3.  a 
28.... 252.1. f^,  275.1 

28,  29.... 286.  1. c 

29.  ..267.  1.  a,  284. 
c,  286.  1.  c  (2) 

30.... 257.  2.  a 

31....  255.  l.ff,  288.1 

2:    1....276.  (/,  311.  1 

2.... 266.  1,  276.  d 

3  ...255.1.a,  279.C 

(2) 
4....4.a,24.a,  250. 

a,  279.  d 
5.... 261.  3.6,266. 

l.c 
6,  18  ...299.  b 
6  ...267.  4,  277.  rt 
7.... 148.  5,287.3 
7-9,15  ...276.  d 
7,10,  24.... 286. 1. 

c(3) 
8.... 306.  l.c 


2:    9.... §  235,248.6. c. 

4:    9. 

...§26P  2.6,298. 

7:  19.. 

§  296.  3 

e,  279.  d,  284.  g 

l.rt 

22.. 

.304 

10....269.  2.  & 

10 

...278.3,287.4.0 

23.. 

.175.  3 

11....  248. 6,253. 1.6, 

12. 

...279. 

8:    1-3 

...276.  d 

255.  1.  b,  263.  b 

13 

...264.  ;;,v2)6 

3,7 

....281.2 

12....  16.  3.6,  235.a 

14. 

...245.3.  rt,  248. 

4.. 

.291.  rt 

14. ...261.   2 

3.  c,  266.  2.  c 

5... 

.260.  1,281.2.6 

16.... 267.  l.e,  281. 

15 

...259.  rt,  284.  a 

5, 14.... 266.    1.  a 

1.  a  (1) 

15, 

2b.... 284.  a 

6... 

.266.  l.c 

16,  17..   .311.  4 

16 

. . .  148.  5 

8.. 

.298.  l.a 

17....106.rt,  267.1. 

17 

...35.  1 

10.. 

.283.  rt 

,e,  281.  1,  297.  6 

18. 

...284.  e 

11.. 

.266.  l.c 

18.... 244.    6,  267. 

23. 

...88     (f.    pi.), 

12.. 

.  150.  2 

1.  a,  279.  « 

89  (f.  pi.),  98.  2, 

17.. 

.151.  1 

19....148.5.256.2.a, 

127.  1 

18.. 

.148.5 

276.  f/,284.  a,/, 

24. 

...267.1.6,  284.a 

21... 

.284.  c 

287.  3.  a 

26. 

...245.3,297 

22... 

.235,  267.  1.  a 

20,  21.... 284.  a 

5:    2. 

...284. « 

9:      8.. 

.290.  1.  a 

21. ...239.6 

3 

...288.  2a 

3... 

.284.  c,  300 

23....  16.    3.   6,24. 

4. 

...279.  f^ 

4... 

.256.  2.  «,267. 

a,  127.  3.  284.  e 

5. 

...  179.2, 254.2.a 

1. 

e 

24.... 267.  l.e 

8. 

...293.  « 

5... 

.867.1.rt,300.6 

25.... 269.  2.6 

14, 

17,27...  284.  e 

6... 

.245.  l.rt,  367. 

3:    1....266.2.a,299.c 

17. 

...38.  l.a 

1. 

e 

1,3,  17.... 267.  l.e 

18. 

. . .226.  2 

9... 

297.  a 

2,3...  267.  1 

20. 

...39.  4.  rt 

13... 

.277.  6 

4. ...281.  1.6 

23, 

31.. ..284. c 

14... 

.1:^9. 1,282.  rt 

5....  106.a,  312.2.6 

29. 

...267.  1.  rt 

17... 

.266.  2.  c 

5,14,17....262.1.a 

6:     2. 

...300.  c,  304 

18... 

.278.2.  rt 

6....241.1,887.4.a 

3. 

...74.  rt,  139.2, 

20... 

.249.3.  a,  261. 

8....284.tt,  287.4. 

159.  3,  160.  2 

3. 

rt 

a.  290.  1.  a 

4. 

...266.2.6,267.4. 

23... 

.290.1.  a,  309. 

8,  14....2S4.  rt 

a,  277.  a,  300.  c 

1. 

a 

10,  15,  18....2S4.  a 

6. 

...266.  l.c 

24... 

.148.  5,  284.  c 

11...  279.  6,  e 

7. 

...300.  c 

26,  27.... 272.  8 

12.... 297.  6 

9. 

...96.6,  266.1.rt 

10:    5... 

.219.  2.  6 

13.... 266.  1,  284.  rt 

10, 

n....276.d 

9... 

264.  2  (2)  d. 

14.... 24.  a,  284.    a 

13. 

...266.2,2.  6 

267.4.6 

14,16,18.... 267.  l.« 

14-16....  267.  l.e 

12... 

.290.  l.rt 

15.... 30.   2,250.  6, 

16. 

...2.55.  l.rt 

19... 

.56.  4,  126.  2 

287.  8.  a 

17. 

...267.1.rt,  278.2 

19,  30.... 245.  2.d 

16.... 53.  3.  « 

18. 

...100.2.  rt(l) 

21... 

.259.  0,  297 

16,  17....284.  rt 

19. 

...45.2.c,230.3.rt 

25... 

.2.53.2(2),284.e 

17....16.  3.  6 

21. 

...267.4.6 

26... 

.230.  1.  rt 

17,  23.. ..266.  l.c 

22. 

...287.  2 

11:    1.. 

.2->4.  l.rt,  262. 

19....266.  l.rt,  267. 

7:    1. 

. .  .266.  1,  287.  4 

2. 

a 

1.  e,  284.  rt 

2. 

...255.4,  267,1. 

3... 

.871. a 

20....284.  rt 

«,  296.  1,  300 

4,5 

...248.  1 

21.... 284.  a 

4. 

...254.2,262.1.rt, 

5... 

.265.3.  « (6) 

22.... 21.  1,    179.2, 

278.2 

5,8 

...266.  l.c 

258.  1.  a,  266.  2. 

5. 

...266.  l.c 

6... 

.267.1.c,299.c 

6.267. 1/,  277.  rt 

6. 

...256.2.«,309.3. 

6,7 

...141.1 

22,  23...  294.  6 

a,  311.  4 

7  .. 

.86.  rt. 267.1. f. 

24....257.2.«,284.a 

7. 

...258.  3.  c,  890. 

289.  3,  rt 

4:    3.... 232.  3.  « 

l.rt 

9.. 

.57.  1,  245.  2 

4.... 219.  2.  6 

9. 

...2.55.4 

10... 

.276.  6 

4.5  ...284.  a 

11 

...266.  l.rt 

16... 

254.2 

6...  246.3.  rt,  206. 

13. 

...202.  e,849.3, 

29... 

.258.3.6,290. 

2.6 

254.  l.rt 

1. 

rt 

7.... 267. l.rt,  298. 

14. 

...248.  6.  e 

30... 

.56.2,861.3.* 

l.a 

16. 

...845.2.  a 

31... 

.22.6 

i5y4 

INDEX  11. 

11:  32-12:  1....§276.«Z 

16:    l....§302.  c 

19:  21.... §266.  2.  c 

24:  23....§160.  3 

12:    2.... 262.     2.      a, 

2....;;i66.1.6,  279.6 

22  . .  245.  2.  6,  266. 

32.... 245.  4.  a 

267.  1,  275.  2.  d 

5.... 4.  a,  246.    1. 

2.  a 

33. ...111. 2.6 

3.  ...16.  3.  & 

a,  257.  9.  a 

23.... 266.  1.  c 

35....  246./ 

4....10.a,266.1.c 

6.... 245.  1.  a 

28.... 248.  6./,  266. 

38.... 305.  a 

5.... 257.    1.    bis, 

8.... 266.  2.d 

l.c 

41 ....  307 

266.  1.  c 

11.... 90  (2  f.  s.). 

29.... 276,  (?,  291.  a 

42  ..  21.  1 

6....;309.  1.  a 

266.  1.  6 

30....248.3.a,254.4, 

42,  48,  65.... 39.  4 

7.... 252.1. rf,  266. 

12..    .257.  2.  a 

279.  6 

42,49  ...306.  a 

2.  c 

13.... 60.  3.   6   (2), 

31....261.3.  6 

45.... 246.  l.a 

8....219.1.6,  309. 

252.  1.  d 

33....252.  2.  6 

48. ...131.  1 

1.  b 

13,  15.... 43.  6 

33,  35....  106.  a 

51.  ...27.5.  l.c,2.  c 

9. ...281.  2 

16.... 266.  1.  c 

35.... 38.  l.a 

55.... 290. 2 

11....2J5.3.  a,266. 

17:    4.... 297. a 

20:    5....71.a.3,  297.a, 

58... 298.  1 

2.6,  283.  a 

4,  5.... 217.  l.e 

298.  1.  a 

63.... 279.  c(3) 

12.... 277.  6 

5.... 284.  e 

6... 166.     2,  246. 

65.... 73.  2.  a,  178. 

13....267.1./,277.a 

5,6,  16.... 277.  6 

l.a 

3,  248.  3.  6 

14...  287.4.  a 

8.... 60.  2,  257.  5 

7.   ..275.2.  d 

67...  249.3.6,259.0 

15...  287.  5.  a 

9.... 267.  l.e 

9.... 22.  6,    75.  1, 

25:    5.... 43 

19.... 235 

10....280.3.  6 

267.  1 

8.... 38.  l.a 

20... 43 

11.... 287.  5 

11.... 2.57.  9,  305.  a 

12.... 257.  1 

13:    2.... 248.  6./" 

12....  257.  6.  6,  300 

13....289.  3.  a 

16.... 246.  2 

4..   .248.    1,   266. 

14.... 65.  a 

15.... 273 

18.... 245.  2.  c? 

l.c 

15.... 267. l.e,  305.6 

16...   127.  1 

•     23  . .  296.  2.  a 

5.... 252.  l.d 

17....24.  6,231.2.a, 

21  :    1.... 266  l.a, 276./ 

25,  26.... 245.  2.  6 

6.... 289.  4.  « 

257.  6.  6,  289.2.a 

3.... 248.  6.  c 

27.... 2:30.  4.  6 

7.... 309.  l.a 

18....  267.1. f,  307.6 

6.... 120.  2 

31...  98. l.a,  125.1 

9.... 119.  1,  182.rt, 

19....90(f.  s.) 

7....266.1.C,  291.a 

34,... 6.5.  a 

271.  a 

20.... 277.  6 

8.... 65.  a 

26:    3.... 202.  1.  6,266. 

10....245.2.rf,279. 

23.... 266.  l.c 

9....287.  4.  a 

2.  c 

(i,  285.2,  287.4.a 

26.... 206.  1.  a 

12...  245.  3 

4.... 30.  2,  249.3 

12.... 291.  « 

18:    1...  266.  l.c,  288. 

14.... 216.  1.6 

6....36.  1 

14....5;76./ 

2.  6,  309.  1.  a 

15.... 251.  a 

8.... 248.  3 

16....245.2.a,  267. 

4....257.2.a,274.a 

16....  119.  1,  176.1 

10....266,l.c,277.6 

1.  e,  .300.  b 

5.... 269.  1,271 

17. ...39.  3.6 

13...  266.  l.c, 281. 

14:     1....311.  1.  « 

6  ...256. 2 

25.... 275.    1.    a(l) 

2.6 

2....  71.  ff.  3,  245. 

8. ...266.  1.  a 

26.... 246.  l.a 

15,  18.... 104.  7 

i.a 

10....245.  2.  6 

28,  29.... 219.    1.   6 

22....158.  4,  276./, 

4....255.  2,  265.3. 

11. ...290.  2 

30....245.  3.  6,267. 

277.  6,  305.  a 

a  (6),  288.  2.  a 

12.... 2(56.  l.c 

!•/ 

28     ..254.2.6,266. 

6.... 266.  1.  a 

13.... 266.     2.     6, 

31....245.  2.  6 

l.a,  272.0,  281.1 

6...  220.6.  b 

309.  1 

22:    1...  266.  1,276.  «Z, 

29....(i0.  3.  a 

8.... 290.  1.  a 

14....  267.  l.a,  264. 

284.  6,  309.  3.  a 

27:     1....88   (f.   pi.). 

9.. ..253.  2(1) 

2(2)6 

2....251.a,266.2.  6 

279.6 

10.... 63.1.ff,  223.1. 

18.... 286.  l.c  (3) 

4.... 276.  6,312.  2 

4.... 367.  1.  /,  h, 

6,258.3.6,  262. 2, 

19....267. 1./,  277. 

5.... 271.  a 

275.  2.  c 

296.  2 

a 

8.... 19.    1.  a,  44 

4,  41.... 271.  a 

11,19.... 258.  3.  6 

20.... 39.  3.  a,  257. . 

11.... 296.  3.  a 

6....287.  4.  a 

12.... 256.  2.  a 

9.  a,  258.  3.  6, 

12....272.C 

7....273.  c 

13....248.6.  6,  258. 

266.  2.  6 

14....  126.2,245.3.0, 

9..., 119.  1,278.3 

3.  rt,  6 

21.... 24.  6,231.2. 

300.  c 

12  . . .  142.  6 

14.... 266.  1.  c 

a,  248  6.  c,  256. 

16.... 266.  2.  a 

13,19,26.... 275.  l.c 

15.... 290.  l.a 

2.  a,  271.  a 

23....254.  4.  a 

16.... 36.  2 

18....2<;6.  1.  a 

24. ...254.  2.6,261. 

24.... 312.  2.  a 

19....  105.  6,273 

19....10.«,  287.5.6 

3.  a 

23:    1..   .254.2,3 

21.... 298. 2 

19,  22.... 250.  a 

27.... 296.  3.  6 

4....273,275.  2.  c, 

23.... 276./ 

20.... 266.    1.    6 

28,29...  254.4 

289.  6.  a 

25.    ..267.1 

22.... 266.  2.  a 

30.... 274,  275.  2.  c 

6....  167.3,245.2.  a 

26.... 24.  a,  131.3. 

2:^,24.... 266.    1.  6 

:i3.... 266.1.0,279.6 

8.... 105.  d 

274.  a 

24.  ..267.  l.e 

19:    1....250.  6,278.3 

10..   .257.  9.6 

27.... 120. 3 

15:    1.... 249.  3,252.1. 

2.... 24.  a,  305.6 

11....  105.  d,  125.1 

29.... 179.  1 

/,  276.  /•,  288.  1 

4....309.  3.  « 

11,  13...  266.    2.  c 

30.... 266.  l.c, 281. 

2.... 47,  256.  2.  a, 

5,  34,35....  266.1. a 

13.... 257.   9,     273. 

1.  a  (2),  309.  3.  a 

309.  1.  a 

9....l:n.3,2.-,3.  1. 

a,  294.  ft.  307.  6 

33  ..  267.  l./t,27'8. 

3.... 266.  1.6 

6,  264.  2  (2)  a, 

17,  20...  276.  </ 

2.  a.  282.  a 

4.... 267. 1.0,301.6 

281.  2.  a 

19.... 249.3 

34....285.3.a.297.a 

7.... 266.  1.  a 

11.... 209.  l.a,  245. 

24:    1  ...119. 1,266. l.c 

36....  255. 4, 266. 1.6 

10.... 300.  b 

l.a,  5,  248. 3.  a. 

1.2.... 309.  3.  a 

37.... 287.  3.  rt 

11.... 230.3,248.6.  6 

266.  1.  a 

3....  258.  3.  a,  275. 

38...  16.  3.  6,  231. 

12  ...248.5,  279.-; 

12....304bis,  2.50.C 

2.  c 

2.  a 

(4) 

13.... 266.2.6.  278.2 

4  .    267.  1.  e 

41....2.^>7.9,285.3.a 

13....245.  i.ff.aeo. 

14....24.a,  278.  2.a 

8....252.6,  272.  c 

42  ...278.  2,284.  e 

5,  281.  1.  «  (5), 

15.... 278.  2.  a 

9  ...35.  1.  a 

44.... 224.  l.a 

302.  a 

16.... 258.  3.  6 

11...  250.6 

45.... 285.  1 

14.... 246.  1.  a 

17.... 272.    c,    245. 

14.... 39.  4 

28:     6..     275.1.0(1) 

15.... 246.  l.a 

2.6 

15.... 267.  I.A 

9.... 39.  4 

17. ...284.  e 

19.... 86.   6  (2m.) 

18.... 273 

12.... 5,5.  1 

18....256.3.a,257.3, 

105.  a,  d,  246. 1. 

19,  33.... 266.   1.  d 

15....:300.  C 

266.  1.  ff.  2.  c 

a,  266.  1.  6 

20....  248.  3 

16.... 246.  1.  0,266. 

18-21..   .284.6 

20....258.3.6,271.a, 

21.... 298.2,  309.1.a 

2.6 

21.... 248.  6.  6 

275.  2.  c 

22....254.2.C.257.4 

17.... 305.  6 

INDEX   II. 

28:  20,21.... §277,312.1 

33:    5.... §24.  rt,  219. 

40:    ]....§  2,56.    2.    rt, 

20-22...  306.  b 

1.  6 

258.  3.  c 

29:    2.... 267.  4 

6.... 88    (f.    pi.). 

3.     .302.  rt 

'i,  3....139.1,27T.a 

297.  d 

5.... 260,  291.  rt 

a.... 245.  1.  a 

7  ...290.  l.rt 

7.... 22.  6 

5.... 22.  a,  231. 2.a 

9....272.  rt 

8.... 261.  3.  6 

6....  34.  262.  2.  a 

11.... 43,     168.     1, 

10....  278.4.rt,  285.1 

8....  139.1,  267.1.C 

284.6 

14....  245.3.0,266. 

9.... 64,  260 

13.... 308 

1.  rf,  /,  277.  6, 

10....  10.  a 

14.... 246.  l.rt 

305.6 

17....2!t2 

17....245.  2.  6 

15.... 9.3.  d,  158.4 

20 234.  1.   a 

34:    7....267.  l.«,279. 

16....39.1.rt,  254.1 

,      21 ....  35.  2 

c.  (2) 

20.  ...151.5,258.3.6 

23....10.  rt    ^---~. 

11.... 267.  l.e 

41:     1....256.  2.  « 

26.... 267.  4.   b 

\  16...  86.  6  dpi.) 

2-4  ...250.  6 

32....105.  a,  118.3, 

N^7  ...100.  2.  rt  (1) 

2, 18.... 262.  1.  a 

305.  a 

21.... 246.  2.261.2 

5..     16.3.  6,  255. 

34,  35.... 248.  3.  c 

30.... 257. 5 

4.6 

30:    1....24.   «,  *t 

31.... 231. 2 

8....  119.    1,   278. 

6.... 104.  a 

35:     7....2S9.  3.  rt 

4.6 

18.... 266.  4.  a 

13,  14...  :iOO.  C 

10....258.  3,  297.  d 

14.... 296.  3.  rt 

11....  U9.    2,    235, 

15.... 284.  6 

276.  h 

19. ...217.  1.6 

18.... .34 

12.... 260.  2,  300.  6 

24  ...272.   rt 

22.... 39.  4.  rt 

14. ...245.  l.rt, 2.  6 

27.... 131.  3 

26.... 284. 6 

17.... 278.  3 

29.... 300.  c 

27....256.  3.  rt 

19.... 257.  3 

31. ...43.  306.6 

29.... 22.  6 

21.... 219. 1.6,245. 

32.... 280.  2 

36:    2.... 266  1.  a 

3.  a 

34. ...272.  rt 

6.... 258.  3.  c 

25,  26.... 246.  2.  rt 

38....  45.2.88.  (f. pi.) 

31,  32.... 276.  d 

26.... 252.  1.  c 

bis,  218.  2.  a 

37:    2....  252.  1.6,276. 

32...  262.  1.  a 

39.... 60.  3.6(2) 

/,  278.  4.  rt 

33.... 35.  2 

41.  ...105.  6,275.1. 

3.... 264.  2  (2)  rt, 

33,  34.... 272 

rt  (4) 

275.2 

35.... 252.  2 

31 :    1 . . . .  266.  1.  6 

4.... 279.  6 

39.... 279.  d 

4.... 45.  2.  c 

7....  267. 1.6, 276.6 

40.... 264.  2  (2)  rt, 

5 311.  1.  a 

8.... 281.  l.rt  (3), 

285.  4 

6.... 71.  rt(2) 

291.  « 

43....94.6,280.  3.rt 

8.... 306.  a 

9.... 285.  3 

44.... 245.  2. rt, 311. 

9.  ...219.  1.  6 

12.... 260 

4.  rt 

13....19.  2.  6,  249. 

14....10.  rt 

48.  56.... 284.  C 

3.  6 

15....245.  l.rt,  266. 

51....92. c 

15....281.2.a,  287. 

2.  rf 

57.... 289.  5.  c 

5.  6 

17.... 271.   rt,  287. 

42:    7....266.  2. -« 

20.   ..278.  3,    279. 

4.  rt 

9, 23.... 262.  1.  a 

c(4) 

19.... 73.  2.  rt,  2£7. 

11....71.rt(l),278. 

21.... 288.  2.6 

6.  6,  259.  6,  262. 

4.  rt,  297.  6 

27....  126. 1,  276.  e, 

l.rt 

12.... 305.  6 

283.  a 

20....104.  2,251.  rt 

13.... 38.  1.  rt,  253. 

28....258.  3.  c 

21.... 287.  2.  rt 

1.6 

29....261.:3.  6 

22.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 

16.... 305.  rt 

30...  86.  6.  (2  m.), 

250.6 

18....275.  2.  fZ 

91.6 

23.... 284.  6 

19....253.1.rt,257.9 

31.... 267.  1./ 

24.... 105.  d 

21.... 39.  4 

32....  104.  z,  301.  6 

26.... 298.  3.  a 

23...  248.3.rt, 278.3 

34. ...266.  l.C 

27.... 272. c 

25.... 287.  1.  rt 

35....  266.2.6, 272.  c 

32  ...24.  6,298.2 

25,  35.... 218.  2.  rt, 

36 75.  1 

33.... 105.   rt,   281. 

300.  6 

39... 61.  6.  rt 

1.6 

27.... 25.3.  1.  6 

42...  306.  6,  307.  a 

38:    9. ...131.  4 

32.... 25.3.  1.6 

44.... 271.  rt 

11.... 261.     3.      rt. 

35.... 257.     10.     6, 

49. ...272.  rt 

288.  2.  6 

300.  6 

32:    1....284.  c 

16.... 267.  1./ 

36... 219.  1.  6 

5  ...111.  2.  6 

25.... 71.rt(3),  309.3 

37.... 267.1.«,  306.6 

6.... 276. /I 

28.... 24.5.  l.rt 

43:    2, 11.... 2.57.  2.  rt 

8....245.  3.  6 

29.... 278.  4.  rt 

4,5,  8.... 871.  6 

11. ...22.   6,  264.2 

39:    1... .276,  276./ 

7.... 45.  1,267.  1. 

(2)  n,  266.  2.  6 

4. ...119.    1,  245. 

6,  e,  281.  1 

12.... 277.  rt 

l.rt 

8  ..  125.  1,297 

16...  235.    c,    253. 

4,  5.... 302.  a 

9.... 266.     1.     d. 

2(3) 

7,  12.... 98.  1 

277.  6,  306 

18.... 19.  2.  rt,  266. 

9.... 305.  6 

9,  10.... 307.  rt 

2.  d 

10.... 296.  l.rt 

10....  266.  l.^  306.6 

20.... 55,  2.  rt,  61. 

11. ...232.  5.  rt 

12....  257.     10.    6, 

1.  c,  88  (pi.) 

12....22.  rt 

262.  1.  rt 

22.... 45.  3 

14.. ..119.  1 

14.... 65.  (U  82.  1. 

23.... 252.  2.  6 

14,  17... 92.  rf 

rt  (31,  252.  1.  6, 

29.... 305. 6 

20.... 258.  2,    300. 

266.    1.   d,   296. 

31. ...250.  6 

c,  302.  a 

3.  rt 

S3:    4.... 4.  a 

83.... 878.  1 

15. ...24.  a 

395 


43:  16.... 1 125.  1,  27:3. 
c,  285.  3.  a 
18. . .  288.  2.  6 
21.... 300.  b  . 
25.... 267.  1.  6 
26.... 26 
27.... 262.     2.      a, 

298.  1.  rt 
28.... 256.  2.  a 
29.... 141.  3 
32....245.  2.  6 
44:     I.... 273,    300.    6, 
301 
2.... .35.  2.  rt 
3....266. 1.  rt 
4.... 114,    285.   2, 

286.  2 
5. . .  .267.  4.  6 
7.... 267.  2.  rt 
9....246.1.rt,3(V4.rt 
9,  22,  31....  235.  d 
17.... 30.  2 
18....  267.1.(7,274.  a 
22.... 245.  l.rt,  308 
24.... 256.  2.  « 
28.... 253. 1.6,281. 

1.  rt  (2) 
29.... 284.  c 
32....266.1.rf,  306 
33.... 272.  rt 

45:  4.... 300. 6 
5....272.  c 
8.... 305.  6 

12.... 263. 6 

20.... 272. c 

22.... 248.4, 254.2. c 

85 45.  3 

46:    1...259. c 

2.... 38.  l.rt,  296. 

3.  rt 
3....149.  2,  279.  6 
4....281.  2.  rt 
7....258.  3.  6 

15....291.rt 

26.... 289.  5.6 

26,  27.... 254.  2.  6 

27....248.  6.  c 

28.... 22.  6 

30....271,279.  (? 

31....  266.  1.6,275. 

2.  <; 
32....266.  2.  6 

47:    9  ...252.1./,258.3 

14.... 259.  c 

18.... 305.  6 

24. ...286.  I.e.  (2), 
301 

29....273.  rf 
48:    6....266.  l.d 

16.   ..278.  2.  rt 

17.... 267.  1.6 

19...  246.  l.rt, 281. 

l.C 

20.... 284.  c 
81.... 2- 8.  2 
22.... 224.  1.  a 
49:    3.... 65.    rt 
5....218.  1.  6 
8        297 

lo!!."!  24.6, 309.  l.rt 
11.... 53.  2.  rt.  61. 
6.  rt,  219.  1.  6, 
220.  5.  6,  222 
12.... 217.  1.  rt 
14,  15.... 276. c 
17...  24.6,  218.  2. 

rt,  272.  a 
19.... 140.  1 
22....289.  4.  o 
23..  .1-39.1 
84.... 302.  O 


/    . 
\    \ 


^96 

INDEX   II. 

49:  25  ...§  104.  A,  284. 

5:    l....§275.     2.  c, 

12:  15....§255.1.a,311. 

17:  12... §  246.  2.  6, 

d,  287.  2.  a 

290.  1.  a 

4.  « 

255.  1. 6 

28.... 254.  4.  a 

3.... 267.  1./ 

15, 19.... 312.  2.  a 

16....288.  2.  a 

29.... 309.  3.  a 

5.... 86.  6  (2m.) 

16....248.  6.  <',284. 

18:     3,  4,... 246.  2.  6 

30  ...300.6 

7....  153.  2,277.  a 

e,  287.  5.  6 

5,  6.... 297.  d 

31....24.  « 

8.... 39.  1.  a 

18.... 254.  4.6 

8.... 104.  i 

50:  10...  285.3 

10,  16.... 278.  4.6 

21....89(f.s,m.  pi.) 

11.... 266.  2. 

13.... 300.  6 

14.... 266.  1.  c 

39.... 142.  6 

14  ...278.1,2 

14.   ..279.  (1,^17.  d 

15....266.  2.  d 

40....266.  1.  a 

18  ...174.2 

15....  2()7. 1.(^,287. 

16.... 108.    1,    261. 

42....  246. 2.  a,  252. 

19.... 246.  1.  a,  266. 

2.  a,  307.  b 

3.   6,  278.  2.  a. 

2.  a 

2.  a 

17.... 274 

289.  5.  c 

43-45....  286.1.  a  (4) 

20.... 302.  a 

19.... 298.  1 

21.... 272.  a 

48.... 267.  \.e 

21.... 246.  \.a 

23....  22.a,  257.3.  a 

23  ...302.  a 

49.... 284.  e 

21,  25.... 246.  1.  a 

26.... 148.  5 

6:    1....2G7.  1.  a 

13:     1....24.  a 

23.... 306.  6 

3  ...285.4.  a 

2....92. c 

26.... 88 

EXODUS. 

10,  29.... 24.  a 

3.... 280.  4 

19:    3....94.  c 

14.... 258.  3 

4,  5.... 245.2.  d 

5. ...281.  l.«(2) 

1:     l....§21.1 

16.... 254.  3 

6,  7.... 288.  2.  « 

9.. ..217.  l.a 

6 290.  1.  a 

29.... 10.  a 

7...  284.  e 

11.... 257.  3 

7....276.(;,  287.5 

7:    9..  .275.2.  c 

8.... 302.  a 

11,  15.... 278.  4.  a 

10.... 88  (3/-.  pi.), 

10.... 266.1,  290.1.a 

9...  257.7 

12.... 281.  1.6 

271.  a,  277.  «, 

11  ....,53.2.a.  297.6 

14.... 267.  1.  a 

12,  13...  281.1.a(5) 

289.  5.  a 

11,  12.... 276.  d 

16...  219.  1.6,286. 

13....150.  2,281.  1. 

14.... 284.  d,    286. 

17.... 294.  a 

l.c(2) 

6.  306.  c 

1.  «  (3) 

20.... 290.  1. « 

21,  22.... 248.  1 

21,  24.... 111.  1 

16.... 179.  2, 235,  rf, 

22..., 53.  2.  a 

22.... 267.4,  269.2.6 

20:     2.... 300.  6 

306.  b 

25.... 279.  f? 

14:    1....24.  a 

2-17....39.  4.  a 

21  ...289.6.  a 

28.... 285   l.« 

2.... 275.  2.  c 

3fif....2r2.  d 

22. . .  .248.  6.  e 

28,  29....288.  3.  rt 

4.... 22.  6,  271.  a 

4....27,  245.  2 

2:    3.... 24.  b,  104..', 

8:     1  ...131.3 

9  . .  258.  3.  c 

4,  5,  7.... 267.  \.e 

279.6 

1,3  ...230.2.  a 

13.... 275.     2.     d, 

5. ...111.  3.  a 

4... 53.  3.  6,  149. 

4....275.  2.  c 

300.  c 

8.... 280.  4 

2,  152.  3 

11.... 280.  3.  a 

14. ...119.1 

10.... 255.  l.a 

6...  297.  c 

16...  275.  2.  c 

17....22.  6,  297.  a 

11. ...43 

7.... 231.3,275.2.  c 

17....261.8.6,305. 

27.... 279.  c(3) 

12....270. 1.  a 

9.... 151. 2,  153.1, 

6,  306.  a 

30.... 287.  4.  a 

13.... 27 

163.  5 

20....269.  2.  6 

15:    1....22  6,  267.  5, 

19.... 271.  a 

10....  104.  X- 

22....298.  3.  a 

276.6 

20.... 279.  e 

15. . .  248.  3.  a 

2:i....l00.2.  a(l) 

2.... 56.  1,  105.  6, 

21:    2,  7,  18  ...307.  a 

17.... KM.  g,    105. 

25... 272.  c 

131.  1,  258.  3.  c 

3,  4,  5.... 307.  a 

«,  289.  6.  a 

9:    3.... 10.  a,  179.  1, 

4.... 293.  a 

4.... 290.  l.a 

20.... 60.  3.  c,  98. 

261.  3,  288.  3.  a 

5.... 61.  6,  104./, 

7.... 98.  1.  a,  245. 

2,  16(5.  3 

5.   ..267.  1.  a 

269.1 

2.  « 

23.... 51.  2 

14. ...267.1./' 

6....60.3.«,  61.6.a 

8.... 79.  l.a 

3:    1....278.  4 

15.... 119.1,  266.2.C 

9....  104./ 

9,  10...  311.4,  c 

11.... 217.  l.c,254. 

2....53.2.  «,93.  <•, 

18.... 27,     KM.    e, 

4.  a 

248.3.  «,  201.3.6 

244.  fl,  248.  2.  a. 

10.    ..11.  1.6,  61.6, 

14..  .279.  c(l) 

3. ...271.  a 

249.  3.  6 

139.  1 

15  ...267.  1.  e 

4.... 39.  1.  a,  296. 

19.... 290.  2 

11,  13.... 22.  6 

16....311.4.  a 

•A.  a 

20.... 284.  7 

12....269.  2,  6 

17  ...311.4.a 

5.... 131.  3,  246.2. 

21.... 304.  a 

13,  16.... 303.  a 

19.... 92.  d 

a,  300 

22.... 275.  2.  c 

14,  15.... 269.  2.  c 

22.... 19.2.  6,39.3. 

6.... 279.  6 

25.... 126.  2 

16.    ..22. 6, 61. 6. a, 

6,  281.1.6,  291.a 

6,  15....258.  3.  6 

27  ...263.6 

257.  2.  a 

28....284.  c,  6 

8....  257. 9.  6,  258. 

29.... 88  (pi.) 

17.... 24.  6,  192.  a 

29....289.  3.  a 

3.  6,  285.  1 

31.... 262.  2.  a 

20.... 293.  a 

30....55.  1 

9.... 287.  2.  n 

10:     1....252.  2.  6 

21  ...22.6 

31. ...24.  a 

13....  75. 1,309. 3.a 

3....91.6,290.1.a 

26.... 112.  3 

35....  19.  2.    6,39. 

14....245.2.a,3TO.{> 

5.... 245.  1.  « 

27....254.  2.  6 

3.6 

15.... 296.  2.  a 

5,  21.... 245.  2.  6 

16:    5....38. 1.  a 

36.... 92.  d 

16...  258.  3.6 

6....258.  3.  6 

6,7....312.  2.  6 

22:    1....248.  6,267. 1. 

18.... 271.  a 

7... 267. 1.^,286. 

7,8....71.rt(l) 

a,  306.  a 

4:    2..     24.  «,  75.  1 

l.c(2) 

8.... 305.  6 

1,2.... 269.  2.  a 

3,4....286.1.c(3) 

8.... 278.  2,284.  e, 

14.... 182.  a 

2.... 218  1.6,306.6 

5.... 267.  1./- 

296.  2.  a 

15....39.  3.  6 

3.... 108.  3 

8.9...  306.'6 

9....2S6. 1.  a  (3) 

19.... 272. c 

4. ...219.  1.  6 

10....2.i7.6.6,302.a 

14...  265.  3.  a  (3) 

21.... 275.  1.  n!(4) 

8.... 43,  289.  3.  rt 

11.... 160.  2 

24. ...151.  5 

22....254.  2.  6 

11, 12.... 281.  1.6 

13.... 258.  2,  245.2. 

26  ...266.2.6 

23.... 38.  1.  «,  112. 

17,  21.... 79.  l.a 

a,  302 

28.... 272. c 

1,  245.  2.  a 

20...  245.  2.  d 

14...  246.1.a, 267.1 

11:    5....252.  1.0? 

27.... 244. a 

21.... 270.  1.  rt 

16.... 286.  1.0(2) 

6....244.a,289.6.a 

29.... 272. c 

21,  30.... 245.  2.  rf 

18.... 271.   a,    298. 

8.... 252.  2.  6 

33.... 273.  6 

22.... 305.  6 

1.  a 

12:    2....260.  1 

17:     1....279.  (i 

25.... 289.  6.  a 

23.... 126.  1 

3.... 248.4, 312.2.6 

4.... 312.  2.  6 

26. ...219.  1.6 

25.... 305.  a 

4..   .297.^,300.6, 

7....245.  2.  6 

30....256.  2.  rt 

28....287.2.ff,300.c 

306.6 

8, 10.... 119.  1 

23:     1   ...245.2,270.  t 

29.... 112.3, 290.1.rt 

5-8.... 277.  a 

10....  285.2, 290.1. a 

rt,  272.  c  bis 

91.... 276.   d,    289. 

7.... 45. 2 

11..     275.  l.a(4), 

9.  25.... 245.  2.  c? 

6.6 

11.... 309.  1.6 

289.  5.  c 

11.... 257.  2 

S3:  14....§255.  4 
15.... 270.  1.  a 
17....288.  2.  6 
34. ...111.  Z.a 
26.... 209.  1.  a 
27....287.  3.  a 
30...  296.  1 
31....  104./ 

24:  1....297. d 
4.... 249.  3 
5.... 287.  3.  a 
14.... 304 

25:  12,  .32.... 255.  1.  b 
28.... 284. c 
31.... 11.  1.  6,  113. 

1,  287.  5.  a 
33....2.VJ.  2(2)a 
35.... 296.  3.  c 
39....2K7.  3.  a 

26;  5....:309.  1.6 
16.... 2.55.  3.  a 
18,  19.... 254.  2.  a 
19.... 254.  2.  b 
21,  25.... 296.  2.  a 
23....218.  2.  a 
24  . .  .53.  3.  a 
27.... 259.  a 
30  ...287.  5.  a 
31....287.  3.  a 
33....  100.  2.  a  (1), 
(2),  2.30.  4.  b 

27:  1....288.  2.  c 

3,  19.... 284.  c^ 
7....284.  e 

18....  250.6, 296.1.a 
28:  1. ...119.1 
2.... 257.  6.6 
10.... 253.  2  (2)  a, 

254.4.  a 
17.... 255.   1.  6, 

256.  2 
21  ....300.6 
%i   ...256.2.  a 
32....267.1./,284.(; 
34....2%.  2.  a 
35,  43.... 267.  1./ 
39.... 249.  3.  6 
40.... 209.  \.a 
29:  3.... 251.  a 
9.... 287.  3 
20.... as.  4.  «,  267. 

10.  6 
29.... 87 
30....  105.  a,d 
35.... 65.  a 
37....230.  4.  6 

30  :  18.... 119. 3 

23.... 217.  l.c 
32....106.a 
33,  38.... 304.  a 
S4....as.  1.  a 
36....2S0.  2 
38.... 312.  2.  a 

31  :  6- •■•277.  6 

13.... 104. A 
14.... 289.  2.  a 
15.... 284.  e 
32:  1....75.  1,119.  1, 
252.  2.  a 
2. ...258.  3.  6,  c 

4,  §....289.  3.  a 
6...  280.3.  a 

10.... 273.  c 
19....219.  2.  6 
22.... 272.  c 
25.... 104.  rf,  158.  2 
26.... 304.  6 
28,  29.... 276.  d 
29....279.  c(l) 
30...  272.  a 
31.... 274.  6 


INDEX   II. 

397 

32:  32  ...§306.  c 

5:  21....§61.4.o,207.C 

15:  20.... §100.  2.  ff  (2) 

3;j....304.  6 

22.... 119. 1 

24.... 87 

33:    1....288.  3.  a 

24.... 219.  2.0,255. 

32.... 87 

2.... 284.  6 

3.  a 

16:    1....279.  cZ 

3.... 63.1. 6,  176.4 

6:   3....256.2.a.300.c 

2....299.C 

4,  6.... 276.  (i 

7....280.  3.  6 

4....  104.  h 

5.... 308.  « 

8.... 289.  6.  a 

8....11.1.rt,  190.rt 

7....  248. 3.  a,  267. 

9.... 287.  5.  a 

27....  245.2.6,284.6 

5.  a 

13.... 252.1./,  258. 

29.... 279. 6 

8-11.... 277. a 

3.6 

31....71.«(3) 

n....267.  4.  6 

14. ...114 

32.... 245.  2.6 

».-.^219.  2.  6 
19..r?245.  2.  a 

15.... 95.  a 

17:  10  ...348.6.6,312. 

7:    2....315.  2.  6 

2.  « 

20....  10^.  a 

2,  3.... 245.  2.6 

18:     4....267.  1 

34:    3....272.  e 

3,  4.... 284.  6 

5....235.  rf 

13.... 279.  6 

8.... 256.  2.  a 

6... 296.  1.  a 

15.... 245.  2.6,267. 

8,  19,  27.... 297.  6 

7fE...  174.3 

1./ 

11.... 245.  2.6 

28.... 158. 4 

22....2S8.  2.ff 

16....312.  2.  6 

19:    2fE....245.  2.  cJ 

23....288.  2.  6 

20....312.  2.  a 

6.... 255.  1.  a 

24.... 91. 6,  245.2. a 

20,  21.... 277.  a 

9.... 106.  a 

28.   ..245.  1.  a 

21.... 286.  1.  a(4) 

15,  19.... 245.  2.  d 

30.... 279.  6 

23....235.  fi 

18.... 246.  2.6 

34.... 287.  5.  a 

25.... 297.  6 

20.   ..177.5,281.1.6 

35:    5....297.  c 

26.... 260.  1 

36.... 270.  1.  a 

5-9.... 311.  1.  a 

29....270.  l.« 

20:    2....296.  1.  a 

11,  12.... 311.  1.  a 

38.... 218.  I.  a 

3.... 2.59 

11-19.... 284.  6 

8:    3.. ..119.1 

7. ...96.  6 

16-19.... 311.  1.  a 

26.... 257.  2 

7,  8.... 245.  2.  d 

21,  23,  24.... 304 

32.... 287.  3.  a 

14. ...284.6 

22.... 250.  c 

9:    6.... 275.  2  C 

16.... 87 

36:    1  ...248.  6.  a 

7....98.  1.  a 

17.... 71.  rt  (3) 
27.... 245.  2.6 

2.... 87 

10:    3.... 279.  c (2) 

3. ...38.  \.a 

4.... 39.  4.  a 

21:    1....96.  a 

4....252.1.rf,296. 

6....272.  c 

4.... 140.  4 

1.  a 

7....267.  1./ 

5.... 97.  1.  a 

5.... 264.  2(2)  « 

9.... 270.  1.  a 

9.   .  71.  a  (3),  140. 

23-25.... 254.  2.  a 

10,  11....279.  c(l) 

3,  279.  c  (2) 

28.... 218.  2.  a 

11. ...287.  2 

14. . .  305.  6 

38.... 275.  1.  a(l) 

12..... 39.3.6,287. 4.« 

22.... 267.  l.c 

37:    9....278.  4.  a 

14...  258.3,  287.5.a 

22:    4,  18.... 296.  1.  a 

10.  ..287.3.  a 

18. ...284.  e 

6..., 304.  rt 

38  :   3...  287.3.  a 

19.... 331.  2.  6 

11.... 286.  1.  «(4) 

21. ...256.  3.  a 

11:    3. ...250.6 

23.... 267.  1.  e 

27.... 253.  2(2) 

4.... 259.  6 

27.... 255.  1.  a 

28....  254.  4.  a,  275. 

7.... 126.  1 

23:    3....296.  3.  6 

1.  a(l) 

9. ...284.  c 

7  ...270.  1.  a 

39:    1....287.  3.« 

18....2.30.  4.  6 

13.... 219.  1.  6 

10.... 255.1.6,  257.4 

32.... 257.  4 

14  ...246.2.6 

17....2.56.  2.  « 

39.... 71.  a  (3) 

17. ...26 

23.... 269.  2.  6 

42.. ..4.  a 

18  ...218.2.  a 

27....249.  3.  6 

43....  166.  2,  272,  c 

22.... 106.  a 

30....287.  3.  a 

44.... 96.  6 

30...  112.  3 

40...  258.  3.  c 

47.... 278.  1 

39.... 22.  a 

40:26.   ..259.6 

13:    2,  12.... 248.  3.  a 

24:    5....100.  2.  a{l) 

31,  32....275.1.fl(4) 

3. ...261.  3.  a 

15.... 296.  1.  a 

36  ff.... 267.  4.  a 

4.... 27,57.  2(2)6 

22.... 253.  I.  a 

219.  1.  6,  264.  1 

23.... 287.  3 

10,  21.... 71.  a  (3) 

25:    5....218.  2.  « 

LEVITICUS. 

35.... 306.  a 

10,  11... 254.  4.  a 

36.... 306. 6 

14  ...280.  3.  rt 

1  :    2....§267.1.«.  273 

38.... 290.  1.  a 

21   ...174.  1 

2,3,  10.... 307.  a 

49.... 287.  5.  a 

33...  246.  2.  o 

2:    1,4,  5, 7.... 307.  a 

51,  52.... 139.  3 

34.  ...16.  3.6 

8....284.  e 

55,  56...  96.  a 

46....39.  3.  6 

3  ;   1....290.  2,  306.  c 

56.... 277.  6,  284.  e 

48.... 266.  1.  d 

4:   2.... 253.  l.c,  267. 

57.... 297.  C 

53  ...22.  6 

1.  e 

14:    8  ...126.  1 

26:    9.... 100.  2.  a  (1) 

9. ...245.  I. a 

22  ...253.1.6,255. 

bis 

13..  ..60.  3.  a 

\.a 

15.... 141.  3 

13, 14.... 306.  6 

34....349.  3.  a 

18....92.  rf 

13-21.... 277 

35.... 244.  a 

18,  21.... 255.  4 

22.... 300.  a,c 

38....288.  2.  a 

24.... 246.  l.rt 

23,  28.... 151.  5 

40....245.2.  6 

25.... 132.  1 

34.... 245.  2.6 

42.... 158.  2 

33...  9-2.  c 

5:    1....269.2.a,  306.6 

43.... 92.  d,  94.6, 

.34....  174.  1 

2. ...304 

177.2 

34,  35....  65.  rt,  288. 

8.... 255.  4.  6 

48.... 284.  e 

2.  rt 

13. ...2.53.  l.c 

54-56.... 248.  3.  a 

34,43  ...140.6 

15.... 315.  2.  d 

15:  15....253.  1.6,255. 

36.... 261.  3.  6,285. 

16,  84.... 270. 1.  a 

1.  a 

3.  a 

398 

INDEX   II. 

86:  37...  §261.3.6 

11:  13...  §267.2.  a 

20:  26.... §287.  1 

30:    3....§280.  3.  a 

42....256.  3.  « 

15  ..71.      0     (2), 

21:    5....104. ; 

11....288.  2.  6 

43.... 272.  a, 296.  3 

281.  2.  a 

7....275.  2.  c 

15,16.... 281.1.«(1) 

27:    2fl....245.  2.  c? 

16....111.3.a 

9.... 375.  1.  rt(4), 

10.... 279.  (/,306.a 

7.... 254.  2.  a 

20.... 198.  d 

284.  c,  306.  6 

31:    2... .1:51.  3 

8....  112.   3,    245. 

23.... 298. 2 

14.... 256.  3.  rt 

6...  311.  2.  a 

2.6 

25  ...111.  a.  c,  252. 

17.... 267.  5.  6 

12.... 45.  2 

9....289.  6.  a 

1.  c 

23..   .271 

25.... 24.  a 

9,  11.... 245.  2.6 

27....248.  3.  a,6.  6 

30.... 105.  rt,  140.5 

40,  46....  2.54.  2.  6 

14.... 94.  a 

32....281.2.  a 

33, 35.... 44.  rt 

32:    5....2&4.  € 

23...  249.  2.  a 

12:     1...  248.3.ff,  290. 

35.... 379.  e 

17.... 113.1,266.1. d 

31.... 370.  1.  a 

1.  ff 

22:    6.... 283.    6,  287. 

21....257.  9.  6 

2.... 266.  1.  a 

4.  a,  304 

28.... 260.  4 

4....253.  2.  (2)6 

8.... 288.  2.  rt 

30...   111.2.  rf 

NUMBERS. 

6....249.  2.  a 

11....  19.  2.  rt,  141. 

32.... 71.  a(l) 

8.... 250.  6 

1,  279.  6 

3::5....249.  l.rt 

1:     4....§296.  1.  a 

13  ...274.  a 

13....102.  3.  rt 

43.... 27 

10.... 13.  6 

14.... 281.  1.  a(2), 

17...  141.1,281.1.6 

33:    5-49  ...311.  1.  a 

17.... 96.  a 

309.  3,  311.  4.  6 

18.... 267.  1.  d 

38.... 2,55.  2 

2:  16,  24.... 253.  1.  a 

13:    2.... 296.  \.a 

19....94.  c 

34:    2....257.  3.  a 

a3....96.  « 

18.   ..3.31.  4, «, 298. 

25.... 119.  1 

5....61.  6.  a 

3:    4....2W.  l.a 

2.  a 

29....  206.1,306.6, 

6,  7,0.... 24.  a 

26....284.  fi 

32.... 256.  3.  a 

307.  rt 

18.. ..131.  1 

27,  33.... 289.  6.  a 

27.... 300.  c 

30.... 300.  6 

28.... 57.  2(2)6 

47.... 296.  1 

32....  158.  4 

32.... 246.  l.rt,  248. 

35:    4...  254.  3.  rt 

49.... 55.  1 

14:    1....289.  5.  6 

3.6 

16....262.  1.  a 

4:  12....279.  ri 

2.... 266.  1,307.6 

33....105.rt,266.1.e 

16-23.... 306.  rt 

16. ...252.1./ 

4.... 271 

»4....263.  1.  a 

19....125.  2,  259.  b 

19,  49.... 296.  1.  a 

16.... 279.  e 

23:    2.... 248. 4 

20  . . .  105.  d 

23.... 22.  a 

81....284.« 

3.... 304.  rt 

33.... 245.  1.  rt,  2. 

5:    7....270.  1.  a 

24.... 297.6,312. 2.a 

3, 15.... 273.  c 

6,  294.  6 

8.... 252.  l.d 

28.... 30.5.  rt 

7.... 19.  2.  119.3, 

24.... 306.  6 

10.... 284.  e 

32.... 297.  a 

141.  1,  267.  5 

25....289.  5.  rt 

10,  12...  300.  6 

15:    5....255.  4.  a 

8... 267.  1.  e 

25,  30.... 245.  2.  6 

13,  14....71.  a(3) 

21.   ..;B9.3.  6 

10.   ..266.    1.      a. 

30.... 397.  6 

15.... 259.  b 

28.... 27,  219.  1.6 

n-2.a 

31.... 300 

18, 19,23,24.... 257. 

29.... 294.  6 

11...  281.  3.  rt 

36:    1....260.  4 

6.  c 

30...  297. 6 

13..   .141.3,367.1. 

6.... 389.  6.  a 

19,  20.... 307 

35....280.  3.  6 

e,  299.  c 

22.... 131.  2 

16:    3....2S9.  5.  rt 

18  ..  61.  6.  a 

29.... 300.  a 

5  ...312.2.6 

19.... 131.  3,267.1. 

DEUTERONOMY. 

30,  31   . .  304.  a 

5,  7.... 300. c 

/,  2T5.  2.  6 

6:    3....270.  1.  a 

6....294.  rt 

23.... 248.  3.  C 

1:  3. ...§38.  l.rt 

13.... 245.2,6,  258.3 

9.... 264.  2(2)6 

24.... 168.  5 

4....279.(i 

23....120..3,279.c(2) 

13.... 281.  1.6,  2.  a 

25....  16.  3.  6,  139. 

5.... 283 

7:    3....255.  4.  « 

14.... 299 

1,  2, 273.  d,  381. 

9....266.  2.  6 

11....296.  2.  a 

16  ...335 

1.6 

14.... 363 

15....230.  4.  6 

18,  27.... 297.  (^ 

27.... 104.  j 

15.... 326.  1.  a 

85  ...256.  2.  « 

22.... 231.  3. rt, 253. 

31.... 287.  4.  rt 

16.... 380. 4 

89  ...287.  4.  a 

1.  rt,260.  4 

24:    3....61.  6.  rt 

18.... 287.  2.  a 

8:    7..  ..121.  3 

27.... 309.  2 

4.... 278 

19.... 285  2 

24.... 23. a 

35.... 254.  4.  rt 

5.... 266.  2.6 

22....99.3.rt,387.1.a 

9:    4. ...311. 4 

17:     2,25.  ...27.5.  2.  c 

7....19.2.C,  131.  6 

28.... .38.  ha 

6  ...284.  « 

3....  245. 2.  6,287. 

8....287.  3.  rt 

31.... 300.  c. 

1.5-2:B....267.  4.  o 

3.  rt 

9.... 289.  2.  rt 

81,  44.... 267.  4,  6 

17.... 302.  a 

3,4....104.  gr 

10.... 281.  2.  rt 

35....38.1.a,  252.1 

20.... 256.  2 

5.... 267.  1./,  300 

11. ...127.  2 

38  ...287.  1 

20,  21..... 304 

10.... 140.  4 

13...  267.  1.  d 

41     ..259.6 

21.... 277.  a 

12.... 271.  4 

15.  ...61.  6.  rt 

44.... 248.  6./ 

23.... 266.  1.  a 

17.... 296.1.rt,  300.6 

n....l63.  2,  284./ 

45.... 112.  3 

10:    2... 287,  3.  a 

21.... 296.  2.  a 

21.... 160.  3 

2:    4. ...262.  l.rt 

3,  4.... 245.  2.  6 

23.... 35.  1.  rt 

22.... 35.  1,305.6 

9.... 60.  4.  rt,  272.0 

3-6...  245.  2.  d 

28....  125.2,298.  l.rt 

25:    4....275.  2.  c 

10.... 266.  l.rt 

6.... 255.  4.  b 

18:  23....246.  2.  rt 

13.... 256.  3.  a 

10,  21 . . . .235.  d 

23.... 45. 5 

28.... 246.  1.  a 

26:    8.... 291.  a 

12.... 269.  2.  6 

29.... 21.  1 

19:     2....275.  2.  c 

30. . . .249.  3.  c 

24. ...131.  3 

.33.... .309.  1.  a 

2-7.... 277.  a 

53,  55.... 284. e 

27.... 385.2,396.3.0 

35.... 4.  a 

3,5....245.  2.  6 

54.... 300.  6 

32....297.  eJ 

36....  16.  3.  6.267. 

14.... 248.  1 

59.... 345.  1 

35.... 139.  1 

4.  a 

16.... 288.  3.  a 

62.... 96.  a,  284.  e 

3:     1....297.  (^ 

11:    3,  34.... 245.  2,  6 

16-19.... 377.  rt 

64.... 358.  3.  6 

3....279.  e 

4.   ..57.  2(2)a,230. 

18.... 266.  1.  d 

27:    3....289.  5.  rt 

4.... 253.  2(1) 

3.  a 

18,  19.... 288.  .3.  rt 

2S:    4....253.  1.  rt 

5.... 250.  c,252.  1. 

5....2fi6.  2.  6 

20:    3...  125.  2,  307.  6, 

6.... 257.  6.  c 

/,  2.56.  3.  6 

5,  9.... 267.  4 

311.  4.  6 

8.... 104.  d 

6.... 280.  3 

7.  ...218.  \.e 

5.... 104.;,  261.3.6 

14,20....  248.4,255. 

9.... 367.  4.  6 

8....266.1.«,275. 

8.... 290.  2 

3.  rt 

13.... 349.  l.rt 

1.  a  (4) 

14.... 104.  i 

17.... 284. e 

17....318.  2.  rt 

10.... 287.  4.  a 

17...   16.  1 

26....;^9.  3.  6 

24....287.1,298.3.rt 

11. ...166. 2 

21.... 131.  4 

29:  10.... 355.  4.  a 

26.... 21.  1,  153.  2, 

12.... 267.4.6,  298.2 

22,... 256.  l.rt 

15.... 254.  1 

245.  3.  a 

INDEX   II. 


399 


11: 


l....§  2C7.    1.    /•, 

277.  a 
1,  9,23....2r0.  l.« 
3....248.6.f,  297.^/ 
4.... 297.  a 
5,  6,  39.... 277. 6 
9....375.  l.e,288. 

2.  a 

10....  119.  1,388.2. 

a,  303.  a 
11.... 99. 3 fl,  378.3 
14.... 379.  d 
15... 258.     2.     «, 

277.6 
21.... 279.  e 
26.... 44.  &,  91.  6, 

266.  2.  a 
33.... 298.  2.  rt 
33.... 35.  1,376.  e, 

387.  4.  a 
37.... 266.  3.  & 
38.... 279.  c(\) 
40.... 267.  1.  f 
41    ...333.      1.     6, 

259.  c,  367.  5.  b 
42.... 367.  l.c 
*r..   .250.  6 
1....270.  l.a 
3..     397.  « 
5....309. 1.  b 
6-31....39.  4.  a 
8        37 
9!.'.'.'lll.  3.  rt 
12.... 280.  4 
13,  15.... 277.  « 
14.... 255.1. a,397.<? 
16....3701.  a 
17.... 37 
23....  387. 4.  a,  389. 

3.  a 

24...  71.  a  (2),  246. 
1.  a 

1,3.... 345.  8.  rf 

2....297. rf 

4.... 4.  a 
17....281.1.  6 
25.... 45.  1 

2. ...119.  1 

5.... 126.  1 

7.... 264.  2  (2)  a 

9,  12.... 250.  d 
10....92.  c 
13.... 104.  A 
15.... 105.  a 
17.... 257.  9.6 
19....2.50.  f/,  300.  c 
23.... 387. 2 
34  ...94.  b.  113.  3 
35.... 303.  « 

3.... 86.  b  (3  pi.), 
305.6 

9.... 209.  2.  a 
13.... 290.  l.a 
15.... 209.  2.  b 
16.... .55.  2.  a,  86.6 
(3  pi.) 

3. ...112.  3 

6....38.  4.«,  352.3 

7.... 345.  3.  d 
14.... 98. 3 
16.... 366.  1.  c 
21.... 280.  3 
23.... 376.  6 
25....  345. 2.  fl,  254. 

4.  288.  3.  a 
26.... 119.  1 

1....24.  a 
15.... 119. 3 
17....30.  2,252.  1, 
857.  2.  a 

2.... 295 


11:  10.... §267.    4.    a, 
277.  a 
12.... 250.  6 
14.... 284.  6 
18....252.  2.  6 
19....279.  c(2) 
28.... 87,   88  (pi.), 

381.  1.  6 
34...  356.  3.  a 
35.... 345.  3.  a 
13:    5....300.  c 

6....258.3.C,  284.6 
7,13.  18.... 397.  d 
10. . . .288.  3.  e 
14.... 3051,6 
20....37r\ 
30,  22...  367.  \.e 
33.... 284.  « 
23.... 346.     2.     a, 

279.  e 
30....279.  (« 
31....45.  5,266.  l.a 
13:    3....111.3.  a 
4.... 298.  1 
6.... 65.  6,249.2.6 
7.... 290.  l.a 
10.... 281.  1.  a{l) 
14.... 357.  6.  6 
16.... 380. 2 
14:    5....57.  3  (3)  a 
17.... 198.0,230.4. 6 
30.... 277.  a 
31.... 380.  3.  a 
23.... 396.  1 
26.... 387.  3.  a 
15:    3....373.  « 
6,  7.... 377.  6 
7.... 253.  l.c 
9.... 355.  3.6,356. 

3.6 
14.... 387.  3.  a 
16. ...119.  1 
18.   ..136.1,345.3.a 
16:    1.... 32.  6,  280.  4 
Iff.... 245.  2 
3. ...30.2 
20.... 296. 3 
31.... 356. 3 
17:    2,  3.... 276.  c 
8.... 256.  2.  a 
13  ...275.2.6 
14....271.rt 
17.... 367.  1./ 
20.... 379.  e 
18:    3.... 389.    3.     a, 
306.  c 
15.... 345.  2.d 
18.... 367.  l.a 
19....348.  2.  a 
22.... 301.  6 
19:   1^3.... 245.  2.  d 
5.... 232.  3.  a 
6. ...114 
9.... 254.  4.  a 
13.... 257.  6.  C 
14.... 270.  1.  a 
15...  43 
20.... 275.  2.  6 
30:    3  ...19.  2.  a,  119. 3 
5.... 367.  1.  e 
5,  8.... 273.  a 
7.. ..119.  1 
8.   ..359.  6,284.  «, 

304.6 
15. ...300 
16. ...79.  l.a 
19....331.3.  a 
21:     1....309. 2 
3....2.*1.  e 
7.... 13.  6,86.6(3 
pi.) 


21:    8....§83.  c(2) 
8,  9.... 257.  6.  c 
11.... 316.  1.6. 
33:    1,4.... 290.  l.a 
4,  5.... 267.  1.  e 
7.... 126.  1 
8....245.  3.  a 
19....349.  3.  a 
21 . . .  345.  3.  d 
34...  258.  2,303.  a 
26....287.  2.  a 
33:    5....256.3.a,302.a 
11.  ...24.  6 
12....2;9.  c(3) 
34:    l....S4.a 
3.... 104.  h 
4.... 96.  a 
35:    1....3J5.  3.  6 
4....  160.  3 
7....60.  3.  a,  103. 

3.  a 
13.... 396.  2 

26:    1....277. 6 
2.... 39.  4 
3....266.  2.  a 
5...  257.  6.  c, 263. 

1.  ff,  309.  3.  a 
12.... 94.  6,113.2 
14.... 286.  1.  ar4) 
37:    2,  5.... 289.  6.  a 
4....106.a,245.3.o? 
8.... 280.  2 
28:    Iff.... 345.  3 
8.... 277.  a 
8,  21,  36.... 272.  a 
20.... 106.  a 
24....  104.6,  387.3.a 
27....348.  3.  a 
39....  367.  4.  6,278. 

4.  a 
43....396.  3.  a 
45.... 104.  6 
48... 94.  6 

52  ...126.  1 

53.... 285.  3.  a 

54.... 297.  6 

57.... 106. 2 

58.... 252.  1,  259.  a 

59....167.2,219.2.a 

64....256.  3.  a 

66.... 179.  3 
29:     5....367.  1./ 
8.... 377.  b 

11....  106.  a 

15.... 300.  c 

22.... 311.  l.a 
30:    3...  92.  c 

3,4...  104.  A 

11....  168.  1,207.  c 

16..   .300.  6 

18.... 266.  2.  a,  381. 
1.  ad) 

19.... 377.  6 

20.... 39.  4 
31:    2....366.  2.  6 
6..   .275.  1.  c 
9.... 276.  d 

11. ...91.6 

13.... 383 

16.... 358.  3.  a 

18.... 266.  \.d 

19.... 105.  a 

26.... 280.  4 

28.... 22.  6 

29  ...168.  1,267.1. 
a,  281.  1.  a  (4) 
32:     1....248.  6.  d 
1,  7....276.  2.  c 
6.... 229.  2.  a 
7  ...104.    h,  235, 
296.8 


3:    8 

...§11.  1.6,  W. 

6,  376.  g 

10 

...60.  3.c,105.6 

10 

11. ...311.  4.  c 

10 

13....367.  5.  a 

11 

...367.  3.  a,  4.6 

13 

...13.a 

15 

...302 

17 

...303.  a 

18 

...174.  4,376.7 

31 

.   .399.  6 

31, 

39.... 311.  4 

32 

. . .  148.  4 

34 

...357.  9.  6  bis 

36 

...104./,  174.  3 

27 

...266.2.6,307.rt 

28 

...90,217.  1.  6 

29 

...266.   1  ,267. 

1.  e 

32 

. . .24.  6,  57.  2. 

2)  a 

34 

...90  (pass.) 

36 

...35.  1,86.  6 

37 

...174.  1,302.  a 

37 

38....219.  8.  c 

38 

. .  272.  a 

39 

...246.2.6 

41 

...141.  2,  306.  a 

49, 

50.... 375.  l.c 

3:     2. 

...375.  1.  a(l) 

6 

...399.  a 

9 

...131.  8 

n 

...279.6,387.3.a 

12 

...345.  1.  a 

16 

...61.6.a,88(.3f.-) 

21 

...111.3.6,179.3 

23 

...98.  1 

24 

. .  378.  4.  a 

25 

...363.  3 

JOSHUA. 

1:    1 

...§276./ 

2 

...256.     8.      a, 

397.  c 

4 

...288.2.6 

5, 

9.... 299 

7 

...272.  c, 375.  1. 

C,  300.  c 

8 

...36.  3,  359.  a 

14 

...359 

16 

...367.  1 

8:    3 

...378.  3.  a 

3 

4....376.  c? 

4 

...389.  2.  a 

5 

...279.  c  (4) 

8 

...88  (pi.),  309. 

3.  a 

10 

...301.6 

14 

...352.3.6 

16 

...159.  1.  166.  3 

17 

18,  30....  104.  k 

18 

...112.3,  309.3 

19 

...357.  10.6 

20 

...3.53.  3.  6 

22 

...376.  rf 

34 

...305.  a 

3:    3 

. .  249.  3 

4 

...367.  1./ 

5 

...367.  l.a 

9 

...131.3 

11 

...349.  3.6 

13 

...296.  1 

13 

. . .  249. 3 

14 

...256.  3.  a 

16 

...880.  2.  a 

4:    3 

....296.  1 

4 

...254.  4.6 

5 

...258.3 

6 

...88  (pi.) 

400 

INDEX   11. 

4:    8....§104.  g- 

18:  12, 14, 19.... §86.  6 

5:  27.,..§311.  4.  c 

10:  10.... §  266.   1.  h, 

10....289.  5.  a 

(3  pi.) 

28  ...60.  3.  6  (2), 

311.2 

23.... 127.  2 

19.... 297.  c 

121.2 

12....266.  1.  rt 

24....166. 1,266. 1, 

30...  88 

30....296.  3.  6 

14. ...119.  4 

266.  1.  q 

19:  39, 33.... 284.  e 

31...  267.  1 

11:    1....257.  6 

5:    5.... 278.' 4.  a 

43.... 61.  6.  a 

6:     3.... 275.  1.  a  (2) 

7.... 266. 1.6 

6:     1...  278.3.  309.1. a 

49, 51.... 279.  6 

4.... 245.  2.  d 

8. . . .277.  6 

5.   ..125.  2 

50.. ..174. 4 

5...  311.3 

9.... .306.  a 

6....257. 10.  i» 

51....39.  l.a,  260.4 

9....99.  2.  6 

13.... 268.  a 

7.... 46 

21:     1....260.  4 

9,  10.... 276. /t 

18.... 99.  2.  a 

8.... 275.  1.  a(4) 

10.... 228.  1.  a 

11....249.  3.  c 

19.... 271.  rt 

13....281.2.6,282.a 

33....254.  2.  a 

13.... 261.  3.6 

25.... 91.  6,119,  1, 

17.... 168.  1 

40.... 296.  1.  a 

14.... 252.  2.  6 

281.    1.     rt    (3), 

21....250. e 

22:     1... .267.5.6 

15.... 353.  3(2)6 

396.  3.  rt 

7:    3....299.  c 

8.... 252.  1./ 

17 74.  a 

33.... 245.  2.  d 

7.... 60.   3.   h  (2), 

13.... 45.  5 

20.... 7:3.  2.  a 

34....289.  6.  rt 

94.  6, 112.  2,  276. 

14.... 296.  l.a 

20,  21.... 249.  3.  a 

35....  104.  A,  246. 1, 

a,  281.2.  a 

16.  ...119.  3 

25... 255.  l.a,  256. 

a,  266.  2.  6 

8....272.C 

17.... 284. e 

3.6 

37....  98.  2, 275. 2.  C 

9.... 174. 3 

20.... 285.  3.  a 

26,  28.... 230.  4.  6 

39....345.  3.  6 

15  ...284.  e 

25.... 147.  1 

28.... 266.  1.  c 

40....  253.     3    (2), 

19  ...274.  rt 

27.... 44.  6 

31....2:31.3.a,273.a 

267.4 

20,  21.... 276. (^ 

23:    7,  12.... 252.  2.  a 

34. ...119.  1 

12:    4.... 286.  2 

21.... 249. 2.  a, 254. 

12.... 305.  6 

36....361.3.6,306.a 

5.... 231.  3.  rt,275. 

2.5 

16.... 282. « 

37.... 306.  a 

1.  rt  (4),  276.  6 

8:  1,2. ...277.6 

34:  10.... 93.  cZ,  381.  1. 

39....  372.  a,  274.  a, 

6. ...3.  l.a 

4.... 277.    a,    278. 

6,2.  a 

275.  2.  c 

7....291.  rt 

4.  a 

14....16. 1,275.  l.c 

7:     3....272.  «,  304.  6 

14.... 254.  2.  6 

11....249.  3.(!),  258. 

15....88(pl.),306.  c 

0....23.rt,257. 10.6 

13:     2.... 251.  a 

\.a 

19.... 389.  3.  a 

7.... 289.  5.  a 

3....16.  1 

19....  248.6.  6,285.2 

30....S45.  2.  6 

7,32  ...254.4 

5, 7.... 90  (2.  f.  8.) 

22  . .  879.  «,  286.  2 

8.... 284.  6 

6.  ...119.  2 

23....287.  4. a 

JUDGES. 

12....74. rt 

8....93.6,248.6.c 

24  ...22.6 

16....287.  3.  rt 

9...  261.3.6,278. 

30.... 267.  5.  6 

1:    4....§289.  5.  6 

19.... 280.  3,281.1. 

3,  309.  1.  a 

33....249.  2.  a 

6,  7.... 258.  3.  6 

a  (2),  288.  2.  a. 

12.... 289.  l.a 

9:     4....163.  1 

7....354.  3.  6,278. 

397.  cZ 

14.... 272.  c 

6. ...119.  4 

4.  rt 

22.... 311.  2 

16.... 286.  1.  a  (4), 

8....266.  2.  f/ 

15....386.  1.  (Z 

25....258.  3.  6 

306.  a,  c 

13....  163. 1,252.2. 

24...  387.  1 

8:    1... .168.2 

19.... 245.  l.a, 309. 

a,  287.  4.  a 

ai,  25....248. 1 

2....35,  233.  rt 

l.rt 

13.... 126.  1 

28.... 281.  1.  «(1) 

4....:309.  2 

23....  248.  3.  c,  266. 

20.... 280.  3.  a 

2:    1....267,  5.  a 

10....2-.>5.  a 

l.e,  287.1, 307.a 

24....95.  c,  174.3 

7.... 259 

11.... 230.  4.6,249. 

14:    1....61.  6.  a 

27  ...311.  2.  a 

9.... 258.  1.  a 

3.  6,  258.  1.  rt. 

5... 391.  rt 

10:     7.... 311.  2 

15,  16.... 376.  a 

261.    3,    262.  2, 

6.... 348.  6./ 

11.... 38.  4.  a,  39. 

15,17, 18... 266.1.a 

309.  1 

9.... 281.  2.  a 

1.  «,  287.  3.  a 

18.... 275.  1.  a  (4) 

12.... 290.  1.  a 

10. . .  .267.  4.  rt 

12....267.  5.  6 

19.... 264.  2  (2)  a. 

15....230.  2.  rt 

11....254.  2.  6 

13....  250.(^,267.1./ 

277. « 

19.... 111.  3.6,307 

12.... 281.  l.rt (2) 

20.... 22.  6 

22.... 298.  2 

24....285.  3.  a 

12,  13.... 306.  6 

24.... 86.  6  (3  pi.), 

3:  15.  ...249.  3.  c 

26....74.a 

15.... 275.  2. c, 298. 

284.  6.  c 

24....  140.5,  309.3.rt 

34....266.  2.  6 

2.  rt 

26.... 56.  4 

25.... 159.  1 

9:     2....231.2.rt 

16.... 267.  I.e.  298. 

27....245.  2.6,276.« 

27....286.  2.  6 

8....98. 1.  rt 

3.a 

29,31,38...  286.2 

30.... 288.  2. a 

8, 14.... 273. c 

18.... 61.  6.  rt,  266. 

30.... 21.1 

4:     5.... 309.  3.  a 

9...,53.  2.6,  63.1. 

1.  e,  307.  a 

11:    4...  290.  1.  a 

8.... 306. 6 

a,  95.  6.  268.  rt. 

15:    2. ...272.  a,  281. 

8.... 21.  1,279.  « 

14.... 266.  4.  « 

10.... 89  (f.  P.,  m. 

1.  rt  (4) 

14.... 94.  6 

18....35.  2.273.  c 

pi.) 

7.... 305.  6 

18.... 266.  1.  a 

19....  166.  2,  266.2 

11.... 53.  2.6,95.6 

8....287.  2.  rt 

12:  21. ...55.  2.  a 

20....104.  «,  127.  2 

12.... 89  (f.  8.,  m. 

11. ...263.  1.  rt 

13:     1....266.  2.  6 

21. ...11. l.a,  158.3 

pi.) 

12.... 246.  l.rt 

13... 198. 6 

22. ...278 

13. ...95.  6 

16.   ..296.3.  6 

23...  250.6 

23. ...136.  1 

14.... 89 

16:     5....130.  1.  6 

14:    8....62.  2.  177.  1 

24...  381.3.6 

15....275.1.c,30G.a 

6,  13.... 267.  1.  e 

15.    3-11.... 375.  1.  a 

5:     5.... 86.  a,  141.  1, 

16.... 283 

7,  11....245.  8.  6 

(4) 

252.2.a 

16,  19.... 296.  3.  a 

13. ...112.  3 

16.... 304.  a 

7. . . .  24.  c,  74.  a. 

19..   .273.  a 

14.... 249.  3.  6 

21.... 358.  \.a 

281.  l.c 

28.... 246.  l.a, 267. 

16.... 25 

21-62.... 311.1.  a 

8....92.  d,  121.  1, 

\.d 

25.... 51.  3 

36.... 205.  5.  6 

267.  5.  a 

29  ...166.5,  174.3, 

26.... 151.  1 

38.... 22.  6 

10.... 258.  l.a 

176.5 

27.... 285.  1 

56.... 22.  6 

13....45.2.  c 

35....288.  2.  6 

28....22.  6,224.  l.a 

17:    1....30. 2 

13....  149.3, 256.3.a 

37.... 278.  3 

30.... 272.  a 

11. ...284.  d,e 

14.... 302.  6 

38.... 91.  6 

17:    2.... 71.  rt  (2) 

18.... 286.  l.c(l) 

15....301.c,209.3.a 

48.... 75.  1 

3,  4....276.  (/ 

18:    4....275.  1.  6 

22....24.6,296,3.a 

53.... 140.  5 

6....  267.  4.  a,  269. 

8....275.1.c,276.d 

33.... 381.  2.  a 

10:    2....60.  3.  6(1) 

2.6 

8,  9.... 876.  d 

26.... 88  (3  f.  pi.). 

4. ...209.  1./ 

7....256.  3.  rt 

12.... 284.  « 

105.6 

9....245.  3,  3.  6 

8....267.  1./ 

INDEX  II. 

401 

18:    7....§280.  5.  c 

3:  12....§261.3.  6 

3:    7....§2C7.  1.  A 

13:  17,  18.... §  253.  6. 

12.... 245.  2.  b 

13....  119.  3 

8....257.  9.6,  255. 

a,  369.  2.  6 

16.... 254.2.(/,  259.6 

15.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 

4.  6 

19...  66.  6  (3  pi.), 

17....2&4.      2.     d, 

120.    1,    166.  2, 

12.... 280.  2 

267.  1.  e 

254.4 

254.  2.  c 

17.... 348.  6.  e 

21....19.  2.c,65.rt, 

29.... 93.  6 

17....254.  4.  rt 

4:    8....2r8.  2.  a 

2.33.  5.  a 

30... .4.(1 

18.... 266.  \.dh\a 

12....  849.  3.  rt,  278. 

21,23...  876./ 

19:    5....  19.  2.  b,  89, 

4:    1... .148.5 

3,  :}09.  1.  a 

22....244.  6.875. 1. 

313.  3.  b 

3....248.6.  c,  266. 

12,13  ...276.  (i 

a.   (4),  376.    d, 

9....297.  rf 

2.  c 

13.... 276./ 
14.... 75.  1 

311.  4.  a 

10.   ..276.  d 

4.... 246.  l.a,267. 

39.... 2,56.  l.rt 

11.... 152.  1 

1.  e,  294.  a 

15..    .289.  4.  rt 

14:    1....73.  3.  a,  848. 

11,     13.... 271.     a. 

7....266.1.a,275. 

18....266.1.c,276/ 

6-/ 

277.  a 

1.  «  (4) 

19....  149.  2,  283.  a 

8.... 363.  l.a 

13.... 86.  6  (1  pi.), 

15....1tM.  c,i 

5:    1....876./ 

14.... 255.  3.  a,  356. 

251.  a 

\ 

5....367.  4.  6 

3.  a 

17,  18...  266.  2.  d 

\ 

7....276. /■ 

15.... 264.  2  (3)  d. 

18.... 285.  2 

I  SAMUEL. 

11.... 375.3.  c  bis 

388.  3.  a 

20.... 272.  c 

13.... 888.  2.  6 

16...  259 

22....82.  .^.  a,  257. 

1:    l....§251.fl!,  276./ 

6:    4.... 894.  a 

18....311.3.a 

3.  « 

3  ..  233.  l.«,256. 

7.... 289.  6.  « 

19....312.  2.  a 

84.... 219.  1.6,289. 

3.  rt,  276./,  379. 

10....  104.  9,  167.  3 

21....879.  c(4) 

6.  a 

cO.) 

13.... 88  (3  f.  pi.), 

28.... 94.  c 

30.... 275.  1.  a(4) 

3,4... .375.1. a(4) 

148.  4,  381.  2 

24....ni.3.</,299.<; 

30:    2.... 250.    c,    254. 

4...  248.6./ 

14....249.  3.  c 

25....889.  5.  c 

2.  (/ 

5.... 266.  1.  c 

15....276. /• 

28.... 281.  l.a  (4) 

5, 43.... 276./ 

5,  7...  267.  4.  « 

19....366.i.c,376.<Z 

29....  252.  2.  e,  866. 

13  ...46 

6.... 24.   6,  94.  rt. 

7:    3  ...S75.2.r,3()6.a 

1.  a 

15, 17.... 96.  a 

104.  2,    277.    a. 

8....119.1,875.8.f 

30.... 866.1.  «,306.6 

25.... 225.  a 

287.  2.  a 

16.... 375.  1.  rt(4) 

32  . .   159.  3,  174.  4 

28.... 298. 3 

7....94.  rt,  276,  6, 

8:    1....387.  4.  a 

33.... 57.   8   (3)   a, 

31.... 131.  2 

296.  1.  a 

3... .876.  d 

166.3 

33.... 34. 6 

8.... 332. 4.  a,  266. 

5....873.  c 

36.... 94.  c,  97.  3. 

39.... 131.  5 

2.(^,267.2 

19....84.  rt 

a.  141.  1 

43. ...24.6 

9....104.r/,  174.4, 

9:    2  ...361.3.6 

38.... 131. 3 

44....384.(Z 

257.  1,  279.  6 

3....3&4.  c 

40.... 290.  2 

21:    8....298.  3.  a 

13....  267.  1.6,269. 

4....861.3.  6 

44  . .  305.  a 

9.... 96.  a 

2.6 

7....361.  3.  6 

45.... 305.  a 

13,  22.... 289.  6.  a 

14.... 88  (2 f.) 

9.... 348.  8.  a,   3, 

47.... 367.  4.  a 

21....39.  3.6,  306.6 

17.... 53.  8.  a 

867.  4.  a 

15:    l....]35.2,856.8.a 

22....  160.  .3,  248.3. 

20.... 119.  2 

9,  10....371.  rt 

3.... 277 

c,286.1.c/,  300.6 

22  ..277.  a 

11.... 309.  3 

5....in.2.c 

25....261.  3.  6 

23.... 272 

18.... 27:3.  c 

6... 153.  8 

24. ...104.  i 

13....397.  rt 

7.... 845.  2.  d 

RUTH. 

28....119.  2,246.  1. 

15.... 266.  \.c 

9.... 91.  €,  252.  1. 

rt,  268.  a 

16....877.  rt 

6,299 

1:    l....§276./ 

2:    1.... 266.  2.  6  bis 

83...  873. c 

13.... 887.  5.6 

8.... 289.  6.  a 

3.... 28.3.    a,    287. 

34....348.fi.c,887. 

17....376. rf 

9  ...89    (f.    pi.). 

5.  6,  299 

5.  6 

19....  159. 3, 174.  4, 

275.  2.  d 

3-5...  266.  3.  rt 

10:    1-8. ...100.1 

398.  1.  a 

10  ...305.  rt 

5....24.<; 

4....354.  3.  c 

30.... 30.5.  rt 

12.... 264.   2  (2)  6, 

6....276.  c,  282.  rt 

5....273.6,  278.  3 

83.... 136.  1 

308.  a 

6-8  ..378.  1 

6. ...167.3 

30...   100.  3.  rt(l) 

13.... 25,  71.  a  (3), 

8.... 267.  3.  rt 

8.... 872 

16:    4.... 298. 3 

88  (f.  pi.),  91.  c. 

10.... 119.  1,  373. rt, 

13...  167.3,279.6 

7....267.  3.  « 

245.    3.    «,   267. 

375.  1.6,297.6 

14....261.3.  6 

11.... 373. c 

\.d 

11.... 378.  4.  rt 

18.... 289.  6.  a 

13.... 311.  3.  a 

15.... 265.  3.  a  (6) 

13.... 305.5.«,  256.3 

18,  19.... 246.  1.  rt 

15.. ..119.  1 

17.... 305.  a 

15,  19,  20.... 277.  a 

19.... 253.  3  (8)  6, 

16.... 283.  a 

19.... 104.  q 

16....266.  2.  c,  267. 

300,  305.  a 

18.   ..249.  3. c, 257. 

20.... 60.   3.   c,    89 

1.  e  bis,  281.  1. 

84. ...24.6 

6.  6,  260.  2 

(f.  pi),  198.  d 

6  bis,  306.  6 

11:     1....273.  c 

23...  345.  3.  a,  248. 

22....248.  6.  C 

19.... 267.  4 

4.... 357.  l.rt 

3,  6,  875.  l.a  (4) 

2:    2.... 301 

20  ...845.2.  e,  289. 

5.... 366.  3.  d 

17:    5....376.«,287.5.a 

2,  7.... 16.  3.6 

6.  a 

11....313.  2.  6 

8....367.  2.  rt 

6....218.  6.  c 

22.... 88  (pi.).  267. 

12:     2...  275.  1.  a  (2) 

13....  858. 3.  c,  366, 

7.... 302.  a 

4.  rt,  276./ 

3....  38.  l.a,  267. 

3.  a 

8.... 88,  88(2  f.), 

23.... 266.  2.  d 

!•/ 

13...  281.  l.c 

97.  2.  6,  127.  1 

25.... 269.2.6,  306  6 

7....91.C 

14..   .346.8.254.4 

9.... 88  (pi.),  167. 

26....281.  2.  6 

13..   .119.8 

16,  17.... 876.  d 

3,  279.  6 

27.... 91.  6,  281.1. 

14.... 306. c 

18  ...354.4.rt,359.a 

13.... 266.  2.  6 

a  (3),  298.  1.  a 

15,80..   .399 

81....3S9.  5.  c 

14. ...151.  3 

28...  280.  3.  a 

21.... 289.  5.  rt,299 

25...  24.  6,  104.  A, 

16....  139.  2,  281.  1. 

29....260.  l.a,  276. 

23.... 233 

245.  1.  rt,  848.  2. 

a  (5) 

6.  288.  2.  6 

24. ...94.  a 

rt,  2.53.  2 

17.... 256.  2 

29,  32.... 2.50.  a 

25.... 281.1.  a  (8) 

26.... 73.  2.  a 

21.... 266.  1.  d 

34.... 2.56.  3.  rt 

13:     5....3.53.  8.  (1) 

26,  36.... 289.  .3.  a 

3:    2.... 219.  1.6 

3:     1.... 256.  l.a 

6 . . . .  289.  5.  rt 

28....  257.  2.  rt,  289. 

3....86.  6(2f.) 

2.... 361.  3.  a,  266. 

8....150.  2,  295 

5,  a 

4.... 16.  1,  55.   2. 

1.  c.  269.  2.  6 

13.... 266.  1.  e 

34....248.6.f,284.(? 

c,88(2f.),106.a 

4.... 267.  l.A 

17.... 248.  6.  6 

34,35....2r5.1.u(l) 

402 

INDEX 

II. 

17:  35 

...§14.  a,  112.3 

24 

7 

...§305.  a 

1 

26.. 

.§  168 

40. 

...257.    3,   260, 

11. 

...19.  2.  a,  245. 

2 

6.. 

.246.  1.  a 

311.2 

1.  a 

19.. 

.  1:3.  6 

42 

...174.4,311.3.a 

14. 

...248.  6.6 

22.. 

.273.  c 

43 

...291.  a 

15. 

..  251.a,298.3.a 

37.. 

.65.  a,  306.  6, 

47. 

...151.3 

16. 

...272,  a 

307.  a 

48. 

...283.  a 

17. 

...264.  1 

28.. 

.269.  2.  6 

52. 

...245.2.(^,249. 

18. 

. .  287.  2.  a 

32.. 

.245. 3.  a,  288. 

1.  a,  358.  3.  b 

19. 

..71.  a (2) 

2.6 

55, 

56....2.52.  2.  a 

20. 

...245.  2.  a 

3 

2.. 

.260.  1 

56, 

58  ...298.  3.  a 

21. 

...281.  l.a(4) 

6.. 

.278.  4.  a 

18:    1. 

...105.  a 

25 

7 

...94.  a 

8.. 

.167.3,267.2. 

6. 

...160.  3 

8 

...166.  2,  274.0 

a, 

300.  6 

7 

...253.  2(2)& 

10 

...252.  \.d 

12.. 

.273.  c 

9' 

.   .158.  1 

11. 

..  277.6 

13.. 

.278.  2 

17. 

...119.1,272.0, 

14. 

. . . 159.  3 

21.. 

.275.  1.  6 

299.  309.  1 

15. 

...302.  a 

22  . 

.290.  1.  a 

20. 

...245.  2 

18 

...174.5,211.3.a 

31.. 

.256.  1.  a 

21. 

...275.  2.  c 

20. 

...275.  1.  «t3) 

33.. 

.267.  1.  e 

23. 

...219.2.  b 

24. 

...297.  rt 

34.. 

.282.  a 

23. 

...279.  « 

26, 

;J3....2S0.  3.  a. 

35.. 

.305.  a,  6 

26. 

...266.2.6 

285.  4.  a 

37.. 

.279.  a 

28. 

..   104.  i 

27. 

...312.  2.  a 

38.. 

.266.  2.  6 

29. 

...149.  1,  153.2 

28. 

...281.  1.  a  (4) 

4 

2.. 

.255.  1.6,256. 

30 

...264.  2(2)« 

29. 

...289.6.«,297.6 

3 

6,  267,  4.  a 

19:    3. 

...271.  a 

29, 

31.... 308.  6 

9,  10.:.. 305.  a 

5. 

...279.  c(2) 

31. 

...279.a,311.4.« 

10.. 

.297.  6 

9. 

...2.50.  b 

32. 

...104.  a 

11.. 

.284.  b 

10. 

...252.  2.6 

as. 

...167.  3 

5 

2.. 

.166.2 

11. 

...306.  a 

34 

...88(3  f.),276. 

4.. 

.266.  1.  a 

13, 

16.... 203. 2 

a,  305.  «,  307.  a 

10.. 

.256. 3.  a,  281. 

17. 

...104.  it 

42. 

...254. 4.  a,  290. 

3. 

6 

21. 

...2.55.1.a,283.a 

1.  a 

13.. 

.279.  d 

23. 

...253.  \.c 

43. 

..253.2(2)6 

17... 

.245.  2.  a 

23. 

...297.  a 

26: 

9. 

...275.  1.  a(4) 

20.. 

.245.  2.  6 

20:    3. 

...267.1.(^,269. 

12. 

...216.2.  a 

33... 

.273.  a 

2.6 

13 

...309.  1.6 

24... 

.266.1.<Z,272.a 

3. 

...305.  a 

16. 

.   .284. rf,  305. a 

6: 

1.. 

153.  2 

4. 

...304. a 

19. 

...272.  « 

2  .. 

.296.  3.  a 

5. 

...267.  l.« 

20. 

...245.2.6,248. 

3.. 

.252.1.6 

6. 

...119.  1 

6.6,251.0,284.6 

5.. 

.16.  3.  6,  288. 

9. 

...305.6 

22. 

...249.3.6 

3 

a 

10. 

...287.  2.  ffl 

27: 

4 

...269.2.6 

16.. 

.275.  1.  a  (3) 

12. 

...311.  1.6 

8. 

...245.2.d,288. 

18.. 

.279.  6 

13. 

...267.1.e,284.e 

3.  a,    389.  5.  c. 

19.. 

.348.  4.  a 

21. 

...39.4 

390.  1.  a 

20.. 

.281.  1.  c 

23. 

...290.2 

10. 

. .  398.  3.  a 

21.. 

.256. 2.  a,  312. 

28. 

...119.  1 

12. 

...119.1,275.2.a 

2 

a 

29. 

...297.6 

28 

3. 

...311.  3 

21,22....264.2(2)a 

31. 

...257.6.6,273. 

7 

...316.  1.6.357. 

22.. 

.289.6.a,297.6 

c,  275.  1.  c,  290. 

3.  0,  275.  2.  c 

23.. 

.56.  3 

\.a 

8. 

...89  (f.  s.,  m. 

7 

5... 

.398.  1.  a 

38. 

...201.6 

pl.) 

7.. 

.304 

42. 

...253.  2 (2)  a 

10. 

...24.  b 

9-11 

....  275.1.  a(2) 

21:    2. 

...233.  1.  b 

14. 

...60.  3.  6(2) 

10... 

.114 

3. 

...92.  6,220.3.a 

15. 

...63.   1.  c,  97. 

23... 

.289. 3.  a,  298. 

5. 

...250.  c 

1.  6,  166.  5 

3. 

a 

7. 

...44 

22. 

...246.1.a,271.a 

28.. 

.246.  2 

8. 

...260 

24. 

...111.  2.6 

8: 

2... 

.280.  2 

9. 

...261.3.6 

29: 

4. 

..275.2.  c 

8... 

.253.  1./ 

12. 

...267.4.  a 

6. 

...30.  2,  305.  a 

10... 

.258.  3.  a 

14. 

...66.1  (1),105. 

9. 

...249.  3.  a 

18... 

.201.  b 

a,  176.  4,  297.  c 

30 

1. 

...14.  a 

9: 

3... 

.257.  10 

15. 

...126.1,267.2.a 

31: 

1. 

...276.6 

10... 

.254.  2.  6 

22:    2 

167.  2 

2. 

...94.  c 

10: 

9.. 

.258.  1.  a 

7. 

..257.     10.     6, 

1. 

. .  290.  1.  a 

11... 

.  289.  5.  c 

298.  3.  a 

9, 

10....  257.  10.6 

12... 

.312.2.68 

13. 

...280.3.  a 

17... 

.289.  5.  c 

15. 

...298.  3.  a 

11: 

1... 

.11.1.6 

18. 

...254.  2.  (i 

II 

SAMUEL. 

4.. 

.309.  3.  a 

22. 

...267.1.6,^,281. 

11... 

.305.  a 

1.  a  (4) 

1: 

1. 

..§276.  « 

12.. 

.  104.  h 

23:    1. 

..276.  f? 

2. 

..:309.  \.a 

13... 

245.  1.  a 

11. 

...94.  c? 

4. 

...244. c 

20... 

.245.  2.  6 

15. 

...245.2.  a 

6. 

...91.  6,168.3 

22... 

.300.  c 

21. 

...287.5.6 

9 

...259.  a 

24... 

.179.  3 

22. 

...281.1.6 

10. 

...99.  3.6,106.a 

25... 

.248.  6,  284.  e 

22, 

23.... 275.  1. c 

13. 

...278.  3 

12: 

1... 

.255.  1.  6 

27. 

...273.  c 

15. 

...l:51.3,258.1.a 

1,4 

. . . 158.  3 

28. 

...245.  2.  6 

21. 

...358.  1 

2.. 

.252.  1./ 

94:    3. 

...330.2.3 

23. 

...311.3 

3,3 

....267.  4.  a 

12:     4....§252.  1.  c 
14....92.  (/ 
16.... 275.  1.  a(4), 

285.  3.  a 
21. ...309.  2.  a 
30....302.  c 
13:    4....296.  1 
7....275.  1.  c 
12....  174.3, 267.1.< 
15.... 275.  l.c 
16....264.  1,279.0 
IS.... 267.  4.  a 
19.... 281.  2.6 
20.... 309.  1.  a 
22.... 302.  a 
25....274.a,296.3.a 
26...  311.4.  6 
31.... 257.  10 
32.... 160.  3 
33.... 272.  c,  305,  6 
.39.... 245.  3.  6 
14:     2,  3....16.  1 
5....2~e.d 
6....255.1.6,297.c 
7....38.4.a,  160.3 
10.... 104.  k 
13.... 279.  d 
14....267. 1,367.  1. 

e,  279.  e,  299 
15.... 271.  a 
16....  249. 3.  a,  279. 

C(4) 
17.... 274.  a, 294. a 
19....57.2(l),182.a 
26.... 288.  2.  c 
30.... 150.  1,  151.4 
32.... 125.  1,306.6 
15:    2.... 275.1. a  (4) 
4.   ..277.  a 
8.... 281.  l.c 
12.... 125.  2 
20....  245. 2.  a,  298. 

3.  a 
21....305.  6,306.  c 
23....289.  5.  c 
25....287.1.«,306.6 
30. ...281.  2.  6 
32....  245.  2. 6, 267. 

1.  6,  287.  5.  o 
33.... 277. 6 
34.... 312. 2 
37....217.  l.e,267. 

1.6 
16:  1.... 2.53.  2(1) 
5.... 281.  2.6 
9....  267.1.(^,271  .a 
10.... 266.  2.d 
13  ...281.2.6 
16....217.  l.e,  29(>, 

3.  a 
18. ...290.  1.  a 
19  . .  255.  4.  6 
23....245.  2.  o, 6 
17:    1-3.... 275. 1.6 
5.... 297.  a 
8.... 246.  1.  a  bia 
9.... 245.  2.  a 
10....  140.  4,248.6. 

/,  297.  6 
10,  11.... 281.  1.6 
11.... 266.  2.  a 
12.... 71.  a(l),  97. 

2.  a.  266.  1.  d 
13.... 266.1. r/,306.j 
16....245.3.  a,275. 

l.c 
17.... 91.  6,  277.  a 
17, 19.... 348.  3.  a 
22  ...234.  1.  a 
2:j....ll3.  1 
38.... 294.  a 


INDEX    II. 

403 

18:    3..   .§  113.  2 

I.  KINGS. 

6:  16....S  10.  a 

13:  20....§C0.  3.  6(2) 

5....2aS.  3.  a 

19.... 132.  1 

31.... 279.  d 

12... .301.  6,307.0 

1:     1... .§269.  2.6 

21.... 209.  l.c 

33.... 275.  2.  C 

14.... 309.  l.a 

1,2.... 245.   3.  a, 

21,  23...  287. 3.  a 

14:     2.... 71.  0(2) 

18.... 266. l.c,  284.6 

272.  a 

26,   27,    34.... 255. 

3.... 60.  2.0,127.1 

22....246.1.rt,272. 

2....277.  rt 

1.6 

6  ... 253. l.«, 287.5 

a,  304,  311.4.6 

5....246.  l.a,254. 

27 296.  S.  a 

8....2:9.  c(2) 

23.... 273.  a 

2.  rf 

32  ...312.  2.  rt 

9.... 264.  2  (2)  0, 

29.... 279.  c(S),d 

6....245.1,266.1.c 

32,35...  275.1.a(l) 

283.  „ 

29,  32.... 298.  3 

9.... 286.  2.  a 

36.... 257. 4 

10....24.5.  2.  6 

32....256.  2.a,263. 

11,  13,  18....2(;5.3. 

38.... 2.54.  4.  6 

17...  309.3 

2.  a 

»(H) 

7:    1.... 266.  l.a 

19.... 300.  c 

19:     1....297 

12,40...  285.3.  a 

7,  8.... 267.  1.6 

20.... 2.54.  2 

2....276. c 

13. . .  .266.2.  a,  267. 

12.... 2.52.  l.c 

24.... 249.  3.  6 

8.... 264.     2    (1), 

l.a    \ 

14.... 248.  6.  a 

25.... 260.  3 

308.  a 

14....309.Va 

15,  26.... 267.  1.  e 

15:  13.... 279.     c    (4), 

14. ...111.  2.  b 

15.... 54.  1,^207.6 

31,  32.... 255.  3.  rt 

312.  2.  0 

18.... 225.  « 

17...  246.  l.a 

37.... 219.  1.6 

16.... 60.  3.  O 

19. ...113.  2 

17,27.    .  294.  a 

41-14.... 254. 4 

19.... 4.  o 

23.... 298.  3.  a 

21. ...87 

42  ...256.2 

20.... 360 

25....  249.3.6, 300.C 

24.... 298.  3.  a 

44...  254.  4.6 

23.... 200.  4,  285.4 

.      38  ...272.  a 

26.... 297.  a 

48-50. . .  387.  3.  rt 

29.... 94.  b 

41.... 257. 3 

27.... 298.  2.6 

8:     1....94.  c 

33  ...360.  3,  4 

43.... 231.  4 

40... .284.  7 

3....289.  6.  a 

16:   10.... 3.55.  2 

20;     1....260  2 

41.... 246.  l.a, 266. 

5,  27....267.  l.e 

16....  250.6, 289.5.6 

4....119.1,28S.2.a 

l.c,287.4.a,290. 

8.... 269.  2.6 

17....  174.  4,  177.3 

5. ...111.  2.  d 

l.a 

9....300. c 

21.... 255.  3,267.5 

6  ...264.  2  (2)  a. 

44. ...284.6 

26,  28,  .30....  277.  a 

0,  279.  d 

266.  ff,  277.  6 

46....265.  3.  a(6) 

27.... 257.  2.  a 

24.... 356.  2.  a 

9....111.2.6,262. 

47...  248.  3.  6 

30....256.  2.  a 

25.... 174. 4 

2.  « 

2:     3,4  ...267.   1.  /, 

31.... 300.  a 

26.... 357.  9.  a 

10.   .  245.  l.a, 290. 

279.  c  (2) 

33..     246.  l.rt 

26,  27.... 258.  .3.  c 

l.a 

5.... 256.  2.  a 

33,35...  267.  l.c 

29.... 254. 2,255.2.0 

11. ...304.  6 

6....272.  c,  277.  6 

35.... 282. a 

31.... 298.  1.  o 

13. ...231.  4.  a 

7.... 257.  9.6 

39.... £66.  2.6 

32.... 288.  2.  6 

19.... 258.  3.  c 

16,  20.... 285.  3.  a 

43....2S8.  2.6 

34.... 349.  .3.  c 

20....296.3.a,305.a 

21.... 284. e 

48.... 86.  6  (Ic.) 

17:     3...  100.  1 

21...  95.  « 

22.... 273.  a,  297. 

57.... 272.  rt 

13.... 257.  2.  0 

21:    1... .296.  l.a 

(;,311.  3 

9:     4   ...311.2 

13. ...16.  1 

2  ...168.2 

23...  305. « 

8.... 255.  .3.  « 

14....  132.  1,  179.3 

3.... 275.  2.  d 

24.... 105.  a 

8,  9.... 245.  l.a 

16.... 293 

6....60.3.  fl.  127.2 

31....257.  6.  c 

11....167.2,267.5.a 

21..   .43,272.0,274 

9.   .162.5,244.1. 

37.... 283.  a 

22.... 300.  rt 

18:     1....275.  2.  c 

a,  253.  2  (2)  b 

3:     3  ...126.  1,278.  1 

25....275.2.rt,280. 

10....  104. 6,  261. 3. 

11,  22.... 284.  e 

4....267.  4.  a 

3.  rt,  300.  a 

6.  267.  1.  «,  275. 

12.... 179.  3 

7.... 279.  6 

10:    3.... 112. 3 

1.  a  (4) 

22:     3....257.  6.a 

12,13     .266.2.  c 

5,   28,    29.... 267. 

12....100.  3.  0  (1), 

7  ...143.2 

14.... 306. 6 

4.  rt 

246.  l.a 

12.... 276.  fir 

15. ...148.4 

9.... 2.57.  8 

13.... 248. 4. 

14....276.  (/ 

16.... 267.  5.  a 

12.... 289.  l.a 

23.... 377.  6 

24.... 45.  1,276.  A 

17,22...  255.1.  6 

15.... 2.57.  3 

2.3,  £8.... 245.  3.  6 

33...   162.1,256.3.a 

18.... 253.  2(2)6 

10.... 248.  6.  c 

35.... 36:3.  6 

37,40,  48...  239.  6 

22,  23....i:63.  6 

23.... 28.5.  4.  a 

30....  1.31. 3 

40..   .53.  3.  a,  111. 

23,-25....246.  2.  6 

27.... 248.  6 

32.... 287.  3 

2.C 

28.... 285.  3.  a 

11:     1....212.  d 

39.... 246.2,296.3.0 

41.... 53.  2.  6,132. 

4:     5....217.  1.  « 

7.... 267.  5.  a 

43.... 17 7.3 

1,  312.  2.  a 

7....  25.5.  4.a,  267. 

8....  253. 1.(^,266. 

43...  357.  9.0,388. 

43.... 118.  3,  141.3 

4.«,275.  l.rt(4) 

1.  rt 

2.d 

44.... 201.  6 

13....254.2.6,  256. 

9....248.  6.c,266. 

44....  104.  6,249.3. 

23:    1...  163.5,258.3.a 

3.6 

l.c 

a,  275.  3.  c 

3.... 288.  2.  e 

20.... 278.  1 

10.... 266.  l.c, 279. 

46....345.  3.  (? 

5  ...258.  3.  c 

5:    3....2.56.  3.  a 

b,e 

19:     2  ...289.  3.  o 

6.... 33.  3,  140.6, 

7. ...269.  2.6 

13.... 299.  c 

4....2S8.  2.  c 

219.  1.    6,    245. 

8.... 290.  1.  a 

14.... 302.  c 

4,  5.... 251.  o 

2.6 

10....257.8,264.2. 

19.... 287.  4 

7.  ...38.  l.o 

7. ...281.  1.  6 

(2)  a 

23....24.d 

8....288.  3.  0 

8.... 201.  6 

11....264.  2(2)a 

25....284.  f^,  295 

10.... 92.  d 

10.... 269.  2.  6 

15.... 266.1.0,278. 

27.... 300.  c 

11....2S9.  6.  0 

22,  23.... 254. 4 

4.  a 

39....57.  2(2)a 

15.... 66.    2  (2)  ft. 

27.... 24.  6 

17....289.  5.  a 

12:     1....266.  l.c 

223.  1,  259.  c 

24:    3    .298. 3.  a,  311. 

20. ...119.  1 

2.... 300.  c 

19....2.54.4.  6 

4.6 

25....53.  2.  a 

8....287.  2.  a 

20.... 98.  l.a 

5.... 256.  3.  rt 

25,  28.... 267.  4.  a 

9.... 267.  1./ 

21.... 287.  2.0 

11.... 309.  3.  a 

6:     3.... 248.  2 

10....220.  5.  a 

20:  5,  6.... 305.  6 

12.... 280.  4 

4....257.  6,  c 

12...   166.2 

9.... .39.  4 

13.... 2.56.  2 

5....260.1.«,284.rf 

32.... 260.  3 

13.... 330.  1.6 

17....246.  l.rt,257. 

7....  256.  3,  287.  5. 

13:     1,4 249.3.0 

16....254.  2.  d 

9.  6,  272.  «,  287. 

a,  290.  1.0,311. 

6.... 275.  2.  c 

27.... 96.  0,163.4 

4.  a.  289.  5.  a 

l.a 

7.... 98.  1,2.35.0 

30....354.  2.  d 

24....252.1./,281. 

8.... 267.  4.  0 

11....251.rt,309..3.a 

32.... 273.  « 

1.  a  (1) 

12.... 278. 2 

12.... 75. 2 

33.... 207.1.6,376.6 

404 

INDEX   II. 

20:  35....§174.  3 

4:  35.... §246.  2.6 

10:  30.... §39.  4,  255. 

23:    4,  5. ...§375.  l.o 

37.... 280.  2 

40....309.  3.  rt 

l.a 

(4),  288.  3.  a 

39  ...91.6 

41. ...311.  4.6 

11:    4. ...201.  6 

5....276.  e 

40.... 278. 4. a 

43.... 280.  2 

5.... 252.  l.e 

9....267. 1.6,269. 

21:    1...  45.1 

5:    1....39.  1.  a 

7.... 312.  2.  a 

3.  d 

2,  10...  275.  2.C 

2.... 288.  2.  e 

8.... 311. 3 

10.... 379.  6 

6.... 267.  4. a, 276, 

3. ...112.  3 

13. . .  .201.  a,  356.3. 

13.... 258.  1.  a 

b,  306.  b 

6....  104.  ;.  277.  6 

a,  311.  1.  a 

17.... 73.  2.  a, 249. 

7.... 246,1.  a, 267. 

6,  17....311.  4.  b 

18.... 348.  6./ 

3.  6  bis 

l.e 

7....257.9.6,275. 

13:     1....255.  8.  6 

33.... 379.  6 

8.... 46 

1.  c,  2^'9.  d 

8.... 218.  1.  a 

25:     1....355.  l.a 

15.... 305.  6 

8  ...275.  2.C 

9...  60.  3.c,132.2 

10.... 295 

19.... 265.  3.  a  (3), 

9.... 200 

10.... 253.  1.  a 

17.... 354.  2.  6 

297.  a,  298.  l.o, 

10.... 275.  2.  c,  d, 

10-12.... 275.1.ff(4) 

24...  373 

302.  a 

280.  4 

13-16....369.  2.  6 

29.... 179.  3. 

29...   166.2 

11...  277.   a,   281. 

14....  267. 4.  a,  289. 

22:    5.... 274.  a 

1.  a,  (4),  2.  a 

6.  a 

6....267.1.e,298.2 

13....275.2.(?,308.a 

18.... 367.  5.  a 

I.  CHRONICLES. 

9.... 251.  a 

17....256.2.a,274.a 

13:   6  ...166.  3. 

10....287.  5.  a 

18.... 46,  178.  1. 

7....354.  3.  6 

2:  13.... §57.  2(1) 

12....  126.1 

20....277.  6,  305.  6 

14  ...267.  1 

16.... 13.  6 

13....2r2.a,289.6.a 

ay.... 256.  2.  a 

19.... 266.  1.6,279. 

48...  289.  6.  a 

15.... 273.  c 

6:   3-5.... 253.  1.6 

c(4) 

54.,..249.  3.  c 

23.... 252.  2.6 

5.... 284.  d 

20....  267. 4.  a,  289. 

3:     5...   150.  1 

25.... 167.1 

5,  26.... 309.  3 

6.  a 

4:  10....  100.  2.  a  (1), 

27.... 256.  3,256.3. 

8  . .  219.  2.  a 

25.... 266.  1.  a 

102.  3.  a 

a,  284.  c 

10.... 255.    4,   275, 

14:     7.... 22.  6,275. 1. 

42.... 256.  2.  a 

28.... 294. a 

1.  a  (4) 

ail) 

5:    1.... 279.  6(4) 

35.... 148. 4 

11.... 74.  a 

8,  11.... 285.  4 

20.... 74.  a,280.3.a 

36....289.  6.  a 

18....98.  3,  209.1.a 

22....  279.6? 

26....286.  2.  a 

;        41.52..     265.3.«(6) 

19....88(pl.),  275. 

15:     1....255.2.  a 

6:  55.... 358.  1.  a 

42.... 265.  3.  a (6; 

2.C 

10....19.  2.  a 

7:    4...  257.  10.6 

54.... 119.  1 

22.... 231.  3 

13.... 2.55.  l.a 

5.... 257.     10.    6, 

23. ...174. 4 

16.... 349.  2.  a,  267. 

260.5 

25.... 255.  3.  a 

5.  a 

14.... 245.  1 

II.  KINGS. 

27..   .308.  a 

20  ...254.3.  6,255. 

9:  13.... 256. 3. 6 

32.... 24.  6 

4.  a 

33.... 297.  a 

1:     2.... §252.    2.    c, 

7:     1....256.2 

29.... 198.  c 

25.... 279.  6(4) 

298.  1 

2.   ..308.  a 

16:     5...  207.5.a,276.6 

27....296.1.a,311.2 

6  ...36.2,39.4 

4....235.  f7 

7. ...158.  3 

32.... 258.  2.  a 

7.... 75.  1 

10.... 246.  6.  6,289. 

14  ...349.3.6 

10:  13..   .279.6(2) 

9,  11,  15.... 273.  c 

5.  a,  .311.  4.  a 

17....  249.3.6,356.2. 

11:    7....245.  2.  6 

10  ...174.  4 

11.... 289.  1.  a 

17:    6.... 355.  1.  a 

8.... 267. 1.6 

10,  14....  253.2  (2)6 

12....  167.1, 275.2.6 

7,13,23.... 266.1.a 

9....281.  3.  6 

12,  13.... 276.  rf 

13...  249.3.6,275. 

13. ...39,  4.  a 

23....248.  3.  a 

13.... 255.  l.a 

1.  6,  311.  4.  6 

15...  379.6 

12:     1....14.  a,  257.  9. 

16...  39.  4 

19.... 244.  a 

28.... 378.  4.  a 

6,  309.  2.  a 

8:     1....16.  3.  6 

8:     1...  71.a(3),245. 

29.... 257.  10.6 

2....  151.  1,  182.  a 

9.... 272.a, 311.4.6 

2.  a 

36.... 39. 4 

8...  248.  6./' 

10.... 93.  6,272.  a, 

4.... 274.  a 

18:     4  ...275.  1. 

14...  264.2(2) 

283.  a,  287.  4.  a 

5.... 309.  3.  a 

5,  19....266.  2.  6 

17.... 272. a 

11.... 16.  3.  6,  281. 

8....252.  2.  c 

7.  ...275.  2.  a 

20. . . .  14.  a 

2.  a 

10.... 281.  1.6 

13....104.  <7 

23  ...267. 4.  a,  296. 

12.... 258.  3.  c,309. 

12....  136.   1,    266. 

19,  28....2'56,  3.  a 

l.a 

1.  a 

2.  d,  287.  4.  a 

23. ...119.  1 

13:    3....104.; 

16....  210.  3.  c,  266. 

13.... 75.  l,287.4.a 

28.... 276.  d 

6....800.C 

l.(7,275.2.c,276.a 

21....11.1.  6,  90 

28,  31.... 273.  d 

12. ...51. 2 

21.... 167.  2 

28.... 249.  1.  a 

30....  136.    1,  281. 

14:  11.... 245. 2.  6 

22.... 167.  3 

29.... 266.  l.c 

1.  a  (4),  284.  e 

15.... 272.  a 

23.... 309. 3 

9:  11....230.  2.  a 

32....373.  a,883.a 

15:  12.... 302.  6 

24.... 254.  2.  6 

13.... 265.  3.  a  (6) 

33.... 381.  1.6 

18....256.  3.  c 

3:     4....256.  3.  « 

16.... 266.  1.  c 

19:     6...  300.  c 

19.... 256.  2 

14.... 305.  a,  307.  a 

17.... 198.  6 

8.... 387.  4.  a 

34....94.  6.  182.  a 

16....280.4,296.2.a 

21.... 24.5.  2.6 

33.... 257.  2.  a 

27...  182.a.  349.3.6 

23.... 119.1,281. 1.6 

25.... 319.1.6,275.1. 

35....177.2,275.2.c 

29.... 287.  4.  a 

25.... 65.  6,  111.1, 

c,  387.  4.a.309.  3 

39.... 131. 3 

16:    2.... 279.  6 

267.  4.  ff,  277.  a 

27.... 297.  a 

20:     3.... 274. 

31. ...273.  a 

26.... 289.  6.  a 

29....255.  2.  a 

4.... 252.  l.e 

37....2S6.  3.  a 

27.... 267.1 

37....  174.  1 

9.... 267.1.6,  268. 

43.... 397.  6 

4:     2.... 2.56.  2 

10:    1.... 254.  2.  6 

a,  298.  2.  6 

17:    4.... 278.  4 

5.... 151.  4. 

2.   ..309.  l.a, 311. 

10.... 266.  2.6 

10....311.4.  6 

7.... 219. 1.6,290. 

4.6 

19.... 298.  1.  a 

11....266. 1.  fi,2.6, 

1.  a 

5.... 94.  a,  248.5 

21:     6.... 275.  1.  a  (3) 

277.6 

8....348.  6./,S67. 

6....252.1.rf,257 

13.... 245.  3.  6,  207. 

20:    2.... 257.  5. 

4.  « 

3.  a,  258.  3 

4.  6,  381.  3.  6 

8.... 73.  1,  150.  1 

16,  23.... 71.  a  (2) 

9...   112.  5.  c 

16.... 396.  3.  a 

21:    3....267.  2.  a 

22..     253.   2  (2)  a. 

10...  244.  a 

26.... 245.  2.  6 

12.... 2.56.  2 

275.  2.  c 

12,  13.... 309.  3.  a 

22:     1....254.  2.  6 

n....246.  1.  a.  3. 

24. ...131.1 

14. ...118.  3 

18.... 378.  3.  a 

a,  281.  1,  300.6 

25.... 73.  2.  a 

15.... 261.  3.  6 

19.... 106.  a 

301.6 

32.... 95.  a 

24,  39.... 297.  6 

23:     4....256.  3.  c 

17,  23.... 272.  o 

INDEX   II. 


405 


21: 

23... 

.§266.  2.  C 

13: 

11.... §246.1  abis, 

24... 

.280.  3.  a 

296.  1 

22: 

7. . . 

.297.  a 

15....309.  .3.  a 

11... 

.277.  a 

14: 

b....287.  3.  a 

12... 

.267.  1.  e 

7....250. c 

14   .. 

.  253.  2  (3) 

10  ...86.  6  dpi.) 

19... 

.278.  2.  a 

15: 

8....249.  3.6,  2.56. 

23: 

6... 

.59.  a 

3.  a 

28... 

.250.  l.rt 

16: 

7.... 282.  a 

24: 

3... 

.59.  a,  113.  1 

7,8. ...119.  1 

25: 

19... 

254.  4.  b 

9....297.  6,  302.  6 

25... 

.2.W.  6 

12....  179.  3. 285.  4. 

26: 

8... 

.250. c 

a,  286.  2.  a 

2t)... 

.260.4 

14.. ..291. a 

2S... 

.248.  6.  c 

17: 

11.... 62.  2.  6,211. 

27: 

14,  15 

....25.5.2 

2.  rt,^78.  1 

15... 

254.  4.  b 

12....2S1.2.  6 

2S: 

1... 

.:)6.  1.2.58.  3.  «< 

18: 

12....272.  «,  277.  a 

2... 

.105.  (/,297.  « 

19....273.  2.  c 

5... 

.252.  1.  a 

22....25i  2.  6 

14-17 

....296.2.  a 

23.... .38.  4.  a 

15... 

.2.56.  2.  a 

19: 

2....112.5.C,  279. 

18... 

.•>.5(i.  3.  rt 

C(4) 

21     . 

.258.  3. «» 

6... 245.  1.  a 

29: 

2.18 

....25S.  3.  6 

7.... 272.  a 

3... 

.302.  a 

11.... 260.  1 

8  .. 

.256.  2.  a,  289. 

20: 

6....279.  c(4) 

2. 

rt,  300.  b 

7. ...105.  a 

12,2 

2.... 286.  2.  a 

11  ...2:«.  rt 

17... 

.248.  6.  c 

15.... 246.1.  rt.  252. 

18.. 

.125.  1 

a,  305.  6 

20.. 

.286.2.  rt 

21: 

20.... 275.  2.  d 
35  ...96.  a 
17.... 125.    1,    264. 

2 

CHRONICLES. 

2.(2) 

22: 

5....53.  2.  a,  249. 

1: 

4... 

.§248.     6.     c, 

l.rt 

30 

2.  b 

11  ...39.  l.rt 

10... 

Am.  5 

23: 

10.... 300.  6 

12.. 

.248.  6.  a 

19.... 267.  1./ 

2: 

7... 

.14.  a,  257.  3 

24: 

8...  276.6 

9.. 

.266.  2.  c 

11. .. .266.1. rt,  267. 

12  . 

.266.  2.  a 

4.  rt,  302.  rt 

3: 

3.. 

.2.50.  b 

12.... 249.   3,    258. 

11.. 

.259.rt,289.6.a 

:3,278.4  a 

11,  12....  255.  1.6 

18....252.  2.  6 

4: 

1... 

.249.  3.  a 

22.... 272.  a 

3.. 

.296.  3.  a 

26- 

4.... 2.57.  7 

3,13  ...256.2 

9.... 254.    4,   264. 

15.. 

.2.>3.1.«,  254. 

2(2)rt 

4 

b 

10....2.32.  5.fl,286. 

5: 

2... 

.94.  c,  267.5.6 

2.  a 

12.. 

.182.  a 

14.... 267.  4.  a 

13.. 

.296.  3.  a 

19.... 275.  2.  a 

6: 

38... 

.287.  2.  a 

26 

14....256.2.rt,297.c 

42.. 

98.  1 

15.... 149.1,  179.3, 

7. 

3... 

2.58.  3.  b,  280. 

283.  rt,  286.2.6 

3 

a 

17.... 254.  2.  6 

6.. 

.94.  e 

18.... 244.  6,  305.  6 

7.. 

.219.  3.  a 

19....119.3,309.3.a 

12,. 

..275.2.  a 

21.... 200.  rt  (4) 

14.. 

.275.  1.  6 

28 

7.... 256.  .3.  C 

17.. 

..280.3.a,  .311.2 

10....279.  rt 

21.. 

..284.  rf 

15.... 276.  d 

8 

5.. 

.256.  3.  b 

19....280.  3.  rt 

7 

..288.  3.  a,  300 

22....2.52.  2.  rt 

9!! 

.  300.  a 

23....94.  e 

13.. 

..248.4,288.3. 

29 

10.... 275.  2.  c 

a 

,  311.2 

18,  19.... 284. 6 

16.. 

..249.3.6 

19.... 275.  l,rt  (1) 

18.. 

..13.  a 

27.... 2.32.5. rt,  258. 

9 

n.. 

.2.54.  2.  a 

2.  rt 

18.. 

.  248.  6.  c 

31....&5.  6 

10 

.2:32.  5.  a 

34.... 264.  1 

'  lO'.'. 

..19.  2.  a 

36....218.  6.  c 

11 

:  12.. 

..296.  2.  a 

30 

:    6....258.  3.  6 

14.. 

..290.  l.rt 

6,  8.... 275.  2.  c 

22 

..279.  c  (4) 

18.... 252.  1 

12 

:  10.'. 

..276./ 

18,  19.... 302.  6 

11.. 

..266.  l.a 

31 

:    7....14.  rt,  149.  1 

12.. 

..279.  c  (4) 

10.... 280.  1 

.31:  14. 
32:    5. 

15. 

30. 

30, 

33:  19. 

34:    4. 

5. 

6. 

19. 


35:  13. 

21. 
36:  15. 

16. 

19. 

23. 


...§223.  l.rt 
...256.  3.  a 
...248.  6.  e 
. . .  152.  2,  297. 
31 . . .  .259.  rt 
...201.  c 
...126.  1 
...219.  1.6 

.  .4;i.  c 

..279.  rf 

..295 

..57.  1 

..297.  rt 

..280.2 

..258.3.  a 

..279.  c(4) 

..272.  rt 


1:  1. 
3 
5, 
8 

2:  62 
63 
68 

3:  11. 
12 

5:  11 

7:  8. 
25 

8:  6- 
15 
18 
21 
22 
23, 
24. 
25, 

25, 
26 
29, 
31. 
9:     1. 

3 
4 
6 
10:  1, 
3 
6 
9 
13 
14 


EZRA. 

,...§255.2.6 
....272 

...260.  4.302. « 
....308.  rt 
....256.3.rt,286.3 
....2«6.  1.  rt(4) 
....244.  rt 

...95.  c.  1.51.  5 
....288.3.rt,297.c 
....246.2 

...2.55.  1.  a 
....39.  4 
-14.... 254.  2.  b 
....276. A 
....26 

....256.  1.  a 
....266.2.6 

...99.  2 

286.  2.  rt 

,...98.  l.a,  209. 

1.6,248.  6.  c 
,26.... 276.  (i 
....98.  l.rt 
....249.3.6 

.99.  2 
'.'.'.'256.1.0,260. 

1.  a,  297.  C 
....276.  h 
....269.2.6 
....266.  2.  6 
,...257.9.6,309.2 
....271.  rt 
....276.  rf,309.2 

255.  1.  rt 

...262.  2.  rt 
....248.  6.  c,249. 

2.  a,  260.  5, 296. 
2.  rt 


.122.  2,  141.  1 
.248.  6.  c,256. 


2.6 


NEHEMIAH. 

1:    4....  §  12.5.2,276.74 
5.... 2.50.   d,  259. 

6,  274.  6 
6,  11....272.  rt 
7. ...281.  l.c 
8.... 246.  l.rt 
11.... 273. c 
2:    5.... 306.  a 
7. ...111. 2.6 
12.... 39.  4 
13...  4.  o,  166.5 
3:  13.... 53.  2.  6.62.1 
13,14,15...  267.1.6 
19. ...256.  3.  a 
80.... 94.  a 


3:  33....8  288. 1 

34.... 212. c 
4:     7.... 218.  2.  a 
5:    2,4  ...304 
5....244.rt 
7,8,  13.... 276.  A 
8.... 258.  1 
11....  255. 3,253.3.6 
14. ...65.  rt 
16  ...112.3 
6:     1,7....287.  5.  6 
6  ...179.1 
8.... 57.   2  (3)  a, 

166.  3 
9...  267.  1./ 
11....231.  3.  rt 
12...  290.  1.  rt 
13.... 267.  l.f,275. 

2.  6,  277.  a 
17.... 260.  1 

7:    3,...245.2.c,280.4 
34.... 2.54.  3 
64.... 2.56.  3.  a 
8:    2.... 168.  4 

5 . . . .  106.  rt,  125. 2 
8  ...280.  3.  a 
10....:i02.  6 
13. ...311.   2 
9:3.   .255.  3 

5....  163.  4,  257  6. 
6,  258.  1.  rt,  275. 

6.... 71.     a     (2), 

246.   2 
8,  13....280.  3.  rt 

18  ..  63.  l.rt,  289. 

3.  a 

19  ...2.32.5.rt, 252.1 
26.... 6:3.  l.rt 

2S  ...252. l.rt 

29.. ..297.  6 

32.... 284.    e,    286. 
2.  rt 

35.... 252.  l.c 
10:    3-a8....31l.  1.  a 

29.... 311.  l.rt 

33.... 112.    3,   255. 
3.  rt 

39.... 94.   6,  113.2 
11:    9....256.  3.  c 

17. ...151.  2 
12:  38....2.32.  5.  rt 

44.... 39.  3.  6 
13:    4.... 257.  6.  c 

7-13,  21.... 276.  h 

13. ...111.  2.  (/ 

16. ...11.1.  rt 

19..     267.    1.    /, 
276.  e 

23.... 212.  d 

20....287.  5.  6 


ESTHER. 

1:    7....§279.  rt.296. 
2.  a 
19....245.  3.  rt 

2:     3....280.  3.  rt 
8. ...126.  1 
9.... 209.  2.  d 
10.... 267.  1./ 
11.... 296.  1.  a 
12,  13.... 267.  4.  a 
13.... 284.  e 
14.... 255.  l.o 
15.... 30.5.  6 
16....255.  2.  6 

3:    4....298.  1.  rt 
8....297.  C 
12....296.  2.a 


406 


INDEX   II. 


3-  13.... §280.  3.  a 
4:     3....  151. 5, 267.  1. 
b,  2.  b,  287.  .5.  b, 
290.   1.  «,  311. 3 
4.... 163.    9 
13... 296.  2.  a 
14....  127.  1,290.2 
16  ...266.  l.f/,  290. 

1.  a,  296.  3.  a 
5:    3....24S.  6.  rt 

8.... 279.  a 
13.... 287.  4.  a 
6  :    1 . . .  249.  3.   b, 
278.  4.  a 
9.... 280.  3.  a 
7:    4.... 307.  a 

5.... 82.  1.  a  (1), 

298.3.  a 
6.... 252.  1.  d. 
8.... 279.  c(4) 
8:    6. ...283 
15.... 259 
17.... 296.  2.  a 
9:    1....280.   3.  b 
4.... 281.  2.  b 
6,12,  16-18.... 280. 
3.  a 
21.... 278.  4.  a 
23.... 289.  1.  a 
27....86.  6(3pl.), 

275.  1.  «  (2) 
30.... 256.  2 

JOB 

1  :     !....§  276.  f 

3... 2.53.  2(S),264. 

2(1) 
4,5.... 275. 1.  fl(4) 
5.... 267.  4,288. 

2.  d 
7...  45.  1 
8.... 36.  1.  a 

10....71.«(2) 
11. ...131.  3,  274. 

«,  305,  « 
14...  219.    1.    b, 

261.   3,  278. 4.  a 
15  ff  ...246.  l.rt 
16.... 266.     1.  c, 

309.  3 
21....  166.  2,  266. 

1.  «,  278.  4.  a 
2:    3....276.  e 

7.  ...16.  3.  6,46 
10.... 2.51.  a 
11.... 248.  6.   C, 

254   4.  a 

3:     3.   ..267.5 

5.... 105.  d 

8.  ..279.6 
9.... 272.  c 

11. ...267.  5 
13.... 245.     3.     ff, 

267.  1 
16.... 267.  1.  d 
17.... 266.     2.     b, 

269.  1 
18...  266.  2.6 
19.... 246.  2.  ff 
20.... 267.  2.  a 
21...  264.2(2)  o, 

282.  a 
24.... 289.  6.  ff 
25....170.  ff,  174.3 
96....276.  rf 
4:    2.. 2:35.  f,  298.1.a 
4.... 202.  e 
5.... 24.5.  3.  b 
6..    .276.    c,   299, 
312.  S 


5:  10.... §286.  3.  a 
12, 15, 16.. 267.  5.« 
16.... 235 
17-20...  267.  3.  rt 
19.... 245.    2.    c, 
300,  302.  a 
5:    7....  9  6,  311.4 
8  ...267.  1 
9-13...  278.  1 
11.... 279.   c  (1) 
14.... 267.  4.  a 
16.... 61.  6.  a 
18  ...167.  3 
19, 20....  209.   2.  d 
20.... 266.  4.  « 
6:    2....2-I5.  2.  c,267. 
1,  267.  1.  (',281. 

1.  b,  307.  b 
3.... 264.  2  (2)  a 
5.... 207.  3.  a 
T...245.3.  «,301.  6 
9.... 272.  a,  275. 

2.  c,   283 
10.... 250.  rt 
13.... 298.  l.ff 
14. ...311.  4 
16.... 96.  b 
17.... 302.  rt 
20.   ..289.  2.   a 
21.... 299.  6 
22.... 60.   3.   b  (2), 

119.4 
25.... 279 
26....  126.     1 
27.... 267.    i.d 
7:    3.... 245.  2.   c, 
287.  5.  a 
4.... 306. 6 
5  ..119.  1,139.  3 
7....283.ff 
n....271.  a,b 
12...  298.  2 
13.... 266.  1.  « 
14.... 104.  j,  105.  6 
16.       266.      2.     b, 

299.  c 
18....  105.6,276.   c 
20...  308.  rt 
8:    4.... 306.  6 
6... 306.  6 
8.... 57.   2.  (2)  «, 

228.  1.  ff 
9.... 262.  2.a,266. 

2.6 
21   ...107.  1 
9:    3....287.  2.  « 
6.... 88  (pi.) 
15.... 92.  6 
16....276.  «,306.rt 
16,  20.... 267.  1.  d 
18.... 24.  6,  105.  «, 

192.  a 
19.... 306.  6 
20.... 307.  6 
20,23  ...306.  6 
21....26T.  l.e 
25.   ..309.  2 
27....279.  rf,306.a 
30.... 121.  1 
32.... 267.  1./ 
33.... 272.  6 
34....  105.  6,  272.  a 
10:     2  ...273.  d 
3.... 269.  2.  ff 
8.... 276.  d,e 
10,  11.... 267.  5.  ff 
12.  ...19.2.a,  280.3. 
14.... 306.  6 
16.... 308.  a 
22....61.6.a,  276,c, 
299.6 


13; 


3....§94.o,  276.  « 
5.... 282.  a 
9....285.  4.  ff 
14....275.1.6.306.(Z 
12....  139.  3,  311.4 

13  ...266.  l.rf,277. 
6,  294.  6,  306.  ff 

14.... 306.  6 
15....  151.  5 
17....97.  l.ff,  264. 

2  (2)  c,  308.  a 
20....266.4.  ff,  269. 

2.d 
2. ...248.     6.     ff, 

305.  « 
4.... 294.  ff 
7.... 275. 2.  c, 289. 

4.  ff 
9.... 266.  1.  ff 
11. ...311. 4 

14  ...111.  1 
15. ...311.  4 
17.... 282 
22-24.... 276.  c 
24.... 258.  3 

3.... 279.  6 

5.... 281.  1.  ff(5) 

9.... 24.  c 
13. ...304 
15. ...83.  6 
17..   .281.  2.  ff 
19....298.3.a,302.ff 
21. ...119.  1 
25.... 231.  4,284.  6 
26,  27...   275.  1.  6 
27. ...272.  6 
28.... 294.  «,302.ff 

1....257.  9.  6 

8,  9.... .306.  6 
10....276.rf,  311.4 
12,  19...  311.4 
14.... 306.  6 
14,  15.... 267.  i.d 
18.... .309.  2.  ff 
19....  112.    3,   289. 

4.  « 
20.... 276.  c 

3. ...280.2 

7....16.1,228.1.a, 
207.  5.  « 

8... 248.  6.  ff 

9.... 266.  2.  6 
10.... 285.  4.  « 
11.  ...264.  2(2)6 
18.  ...121.  2 
22.... 174.  5 
26....257.  2.  ff 
31.... 272.  c 
33....272.  ff 
35.... 280.  1,282.« 

4.. ..275.  1.6 

4,  5 . . .   267.  6.  1 

5.... 104.  h 

6.... 306.  ff,  308.ff 
11.... 148.  3 
12.... 163.  2 
13. ...126.1,218.1. 6 
16.... 60.  3.6(2) 
19....  19.  2.  ff 
21.... 275.  2.  c 
22.... 289.  6.  a 

2.... 24.  6,  272.6, 
305.  ff 

3.... 126.  1 

6.... 245.  1.  ff 

9....217.1.e,311.4 
10.... 294.  a 
16.... 88  (.3.  f.  pi.) 

2.... 54.3.  258. l.ff 

4....91.  6,  231.  2, 
294.  a 


18:    5,  6.... §269.  2.  <? 

6.... 266.  4.  ff 

9,  12.... 272.  o 
14.... 245.  3.  6 
15.... 302.  6 
18  ...245.  2.  c 
21....  258.2.ff, 302.6 
19:     1...  291.  a 

2. . . .  105.  C 

3....94.  c,  255.4, 
206.  2.  6,  283 

4....308. ff 

6.... 45.  4 

6-16....269.  2.  c 

7....113.  1 
14. ...11.  1.  6 
15....105.e,290.1.a 
17....  1.39.  2 
18.... 308.  a 
19.... 303.  ff 
23.... 8H  (pi.),  141. 

1,  312.  2.  ff 
24....288.  3.  ff 
25....311.  4.  6 
26.... 245.  2.  c 
27.... 266.  l.d 
28  . . .  294.  a 
29....74,  74,a,262. 

2.  « 

20:    2....295.  ff 

4....  160.3,298.1.0 
6.... 307.  a 
8....139.3,245.2.c 
17...  25S.3.c,272.c 
23.... 245.  1.  a 
24....  112.  .5,  308.  a 
25.... 269.  2.  « 
26....  60.  3.C,  93.a, 
111.  2.  «,308.  a 
27...  278.  1 
28...   140.2 
21:    4.... 231.  4 
5....  140.  5 
6....:306.  6 
13....24.  c 
15.... 267.  l.d 
16....  266.  1./ 
17... .2^5.  l.ff 
18...  104.  i 
19....245.1.ff,294.a 
21.... 293 
22.... 245.  l.ff 
24  ...88  (pi.) 
27....302.  ff 
32.... 291.  « 
22:     2.... 305.  6 

3....231.3,  298.  2 
6,  7.... 267.  4.  ff 
9....284.  « 
12.... 24,  c,  288.2.6 
17.... 294.  ff 
18...  266.  1./ 
20....219.1.6,305.a 
21.... 88  (3/.),  94. 

d,  275.  2.  d 
23  ...295.  ff 
23:     1. .. .262.2.  ff 
2....257.  9.  ff 
3....245.1.ff.283.6 
9  ...34,  97.  2.  a 
10....308.  ff 
11.... 79.   3.  a,  97. 

2.  ff 
11,  12....  276.  (7 
12.... 312.  2.  rt 
17.... 86.  6  (2  m.), 
299 
24:     1....287.  5.  6 
2.... 269.  l.ff 
2ff....245.  2.  6 
4.... 269.  2.  a 


INDEX    II. 

407 

24:    5....525fi.  l.a 

33:    9.... 71.  ad) 

41:  17....§  131.4,166.2 

8:     2.... §132.1,300.4 

9....hOi.b 

11.  ..272.6 

25.... 174.  5 

3.... 94.  6 

9-16.... 209.  2.(1 

13  ...160.1 

26.... 43.  43.  6 

4.... 266.  1.0 

14.. ..83.6 

17.... 282.  a 

42:    2.... 86.  6(1  c.) 

5.... 267.  1.  a 

14,  25... 272.  b 

21.... 26,  121.1,276. 

3....  266.  2.  6,295. 

5,  6.... 276.  c 

16  ...246.  2.6 

(f.  293.  a 

a,  302.0,309.1. a 

6.... 287.  l.a 

19....S02 

23,24  ...306.  a 

5.... 266.  2.  « 

9:    5,6  ...266.  1.6 

20.... 276. c 

25.... 182.  a 

7.... 254.  4.  a 

7... 297.  a 

21.... 151.2 

26.... 276.  c 

8  ..305.6 

8.... 269.  1 

23....219.  2.  c 

27.... 160.  2 

13....224.  l.« 

10.... 272.  a 

24.... 189.  1 

29....267.  4.  6,  311 

15  ...289.  6.  a 

14. ...141.  1 

25.... 299. 6 

1.  a     \ 

15...  219.  2.  a 

25:     3. ...219.  1.6 

30  ...161.x    279. 

16....  2.57.    10.    6, 

5.... 312.  2.  a 

c(1)         \ 

PSALMS. 

302,  303.  a 

26:    2  ..299.  6 

31.... 273.  6  \ 

17..   .1.50.  1 

9  . . . 182.  a 

32.... 279.  6    \ 
34:    5.... 65.  0,266.2.6 

1:    l....§248.  2,  266. 

18.... 220.  1.  a 

11. ...163. 4 

1.  a 

19... 126.  1,  299.  c 

13....262.  2.  a 

10....288.  3.  a 

1,2....269.  l.fl 

10:    2....;303 

14.... 298.  3.  a 

13..    .61.  6.  a 

2,  3.... 267.  l.« 

3..    269.  2.  a 

27:     3  ...259. a 

14.... 307. a 

2, 4.... 305.  6 

8,  10.... 211.  1.  a 

4....92.« 

16.... 273. a 

4.... 267.  3.0 

11.... 266.  1.  g,  3. 

8,  22.... 272. 6 

18. ...112.1 

6...  284.  a 

a,  299.  c 

12  ...285.  3 

20.... 245.  2.  c 

2:     1,  2,  10.... 284.  « 

12.... 131.  3 

14.... 295.  a,  306. 6 

22.... 91.  6,  259.  a, 

2.... 350 

16....266.  4.  0 

19,  20....2G9.  2.  d 

279.  rf 

3.... 45.   4,   97.  1. 

18...  252.1./,  367. 

20.... 289.  4.  a 

24.... 276.  c 

271.  a,  275.  1.  6 

I-./" 

22.... 281.  1.  a  (4) 

25. ...218.  l.a 

5.... 267.  1.  a 

11:    1... .260.1 

23....  219,2.0,245. 

29....:m8.  a 

6....  2,57.  9.«,  259. 

2.... 269.  2.  a 

2.6 

30....279.  6,  c(4) 

6,266.1.6,311.4.6 

3.... 268. a 

28:    1.  ..302.0! 

31. ...113.  1 

6,  7... 246.  1.  a 

4.... 297. 6 

3.... 24.5.  2.  a,  6, 

32.... .302.  6 

7....71.  a(2) 

6.... 272.  a 

258.  3.  6 

37.... 272.  6 

8.... 284.  a 

7  ...219.2.0,289. 

4....  245. 2. 6,  287. 

35:    2.... 264. 2  (2) e 

12....  35.1, 2.58.1. rt. 

3.  0 

5.6 

3.... 294.  a 

257.1./',275.2.6, 

12:    2...  250.  0 

7...  302.  a 

6,  7.... 306.  6 

285.  4.  a 

3.... 296.  2 

11   . .  269.  2.  6,287. 

11.... 5:3.  3.  a.  111. 

3:    2.... 141. 1.266.2.6 

4. ...119.  1 

1.  a 

2.  c 

3.... 61.  6.  a 

5.... 257.  10.6 

12.... 248.  6 

15....261.  3. 6 

5.... 276.6,285.4.0 

8.... 7:3.1, 252. 3. 6 

18....  248. 6.  a,  290. 

36:     7...  312.  2.  a 

5,  7.... 267.  2.0 

13:    4... .285.  3 

1.  « 

10.... 267.  l.f 

6  ...207.4.6,276. 

5....  104.   k,  286. 

24,  25....269.  l.rt 

14,  15.... 272.  a 

h,  284.  0 

l.d 

29:    2....258.2.a.302.a 

20.... 279.  c(4) 

8....266. 1.6,  284. 

6....272.  0 

2,  3....2b7.  4.  a 

26....312.  2.  « 

a,  287.  2 

14:    1....266. 1.  0 

3....1.39.  2,  285.2, 

37:    2....281.2.  a 

4:    2  ...259.    6,    266. 

1,3... 266.  3.  a 

297.  c 

6.... 179.  1 

1.  b,.f 

5....285.  3.  a 

6.... 53.  3.6 

12...  61.  6.  « 

3.  ...111.  2. «,  309. 

7....272.  0 

10.... 293 

18.... 298.  3.  a 

1.6 

15:     2,  3.... 282.  a 

12.   ..278  4.  a,309. 

24.... 104. A 

4,  7.... 284.  a 

3-5.... 301.  a 

2.  a 

38:     1....4.  « 

5....27S.d 

5....299.  c 

14.... 105.  d 

2....298.  3.  a 

6....257.  6.  6 

16:    2.... 86.  6(1  C.) 

21....24.C 

12.... 86.  6  (2m.), 

7.... 3.1. 0,131.3, 

3....  258. 2.  a,  300, 

30:    3  ...296.  3.a 

266.  1.  a 

107.  1 

302.  a 

6.... 279.  c(4) 

14,  15.... 275.  1.6 

8.... 264.  2  (2)  0, 

4.   ..252.1. f 

12flf...  269.  2.C 

18.... 298.  3.  a 

303.0 

5....  19.  2.   6,  90, 

25.... 299 

19,  24.... 302.  a 

9.... 207.  1.  0 

153.  3 

26....99,2.6.308.rt 

21.... 267.  5.  «,  29:3 

5:    3....257.  9.  « 

8.... 245.  1.0 

31:     5. ...159.3 

24  ...60.4.0,113.1 

4. ...267.  1.0 

9....276. rf 

7,16-18....  269.2.C? 

35....231.2.  a 

5.... 286.  l.d 

17:     3. ...139.  2 

13, 14.... 306.  6 

36.... 248.  6.  a 

8....257.2.  a 

5.... 380.  3.6 

15.... 61.  3,  105.6, 

39:    2....104.g',298.S.a 

9. ...151.  1 

9.... 2.52.  l./-,269. 

163.  3 

3....  103.  2 

10.... 2.57.  10.6 

1.  0,  303. 'a 

18.... 286.  l.d 

4.. ..112. 5.  c 

11.... 42 

10,  13.... 285.  4.  a 

22.... 27 

15.... 276.  c 

12...  112.  5.  0,2.57. 

11....287.  2.  a 

24.... CO.  1.  a 

19,  21....2S9.  5.  rt 

9.  6,  275.  1.  6 

12....W2.a 

27.... 276.  6 

24. ...167.  2 

13....2S7.  3.  a 

14     ..377.0 

36  ...305.  a 

26.... 272. 6 

6:    3.... 42,    105.    d. 

18:     5ff....265.3.a(4) 

37.... 286.  l.d 

27.... 295.  a 

294.0 

6....104.  i 

32:    3....276.  ^,  299.  a 

40:    2....280.  3.  6 

4.... 71.  0(2) 

7...  207.  5.  a 

4.... 266.  1.  c 

5...  255.4 

7...  267.4.  6 

8....2-i6.d 

7....24S.6.«,293.^ 

8,9. ...298.  2 

7:    2....266.  2.  6 

9,12,13....269.2.d 

9.... 267.  3.  a,  299 

10....273.  rt 

3.... 309.  2 

10.... 148.  5 

10. . . . 125.  1 

21,  22.... 210.  3.  a 

4,  5.... 306,  306.  r 

12....276.  gr 

11. ...53.  2.  a,  111. 

22....220.  fi.  6 

5....276.  A,306.  « 

14....276.  <7 

2.C 

23.... 249.  l.a 

6.  ...60.  2.  a.  114 

15.... 82.  1.0  (.3) 

11,  12...  267.  1.6 

24....  131.  2 

9  ...2.52.  l.f 

19,  24.... 276.  6 

18.... 166.  2 

25....298.  3.  a 

10....267.1.cr.274.a 
11. ...257.10 

21.. ..21.  1 

19...  267.2.6 

30....298.  3.  a 

27.... 143.  2 

20  ...275.  2.C 

32  ...272. c 

13,  14....269.  2.  c 

33.... 276.0,287.3.  a 

22....  267.1.^,283.6 

41:     1....162.  5 

14,  15.... 267.  2.  a 

34.... 264.  2(2)e 

83:2,3....266.  2.  a 

2. ...105. 6 

16....267.1.6,302,rt 

a5....289.  4.  0 

5....in.3.a,273.c 

3,  5.... 266.  l.a 

18.... 271 

37-46....269.  2.  c« 

408 

INDEX   11. 

18:  40....§257.  9.  6 

31:    8.. 

.§300.  rt 

42:     9.... §219.  1.6 

57:    5....§271.a 

41.   ..132.    1,    278. 

24.. 

.119.4 

10...  111.  2.6 

7.... 266.1.  rt,  275 

3.  a 

25.. 

.272.  rt 

43:    5.... 396.  art 

2.  a 

42.... 295.  n 

32:    1.. 

.167.3,257.10 

44:    3.... 285.  4.  rt 

9....250.  c 

48,  49.... 294.  a 

4.. 

.257.  9.  a 

3,10-16.... 267.5.rt 

58:     2.... 88  (pi.) 

51.... 94.  a,  256.  2. 

5.. 

.269.  2.  rf 

5....246.  2,  261.3 

4.... 158. 2 

a,  294.  a 

7. . 

.287.  3.  rt 

9  ...269,  l.a 

5....258.1.rt,302.a 

19:    2....278.  1 

8..! 

.285.4.rt,303.rt 

10....  266.  1.6 

7.  ...131.  3 

3.... 24.  a 

10... 

.252.  1.  rt 

18,  21. ...127.2 

8....  139.  3 

6.   ..252.  1 

33:     3... 

.283.  rt 

19.... 289.  4.  rt,299 

9. ...24.6, 216.1.6 

7....296.  3.  S 

5.   . 

.278.  1 

21.... 306 

12....  275. 2.  rt,  289. 

8. . .  257.  9.  b 

9... 

.276.  e 

21, 23.... 306. 6 

3.  rt 

8-11....311.  4.  c 

13,  14.... 266.  3.rt 

22.... 267.  1.  d 

59:    2....2.57.9.  6 

11.... 2.^0.  d,263.6 

20... 

.266.  3.  b 

24.... 299.  c 

4  ...269.  l.rt 

14. ...11.  \.b 

23... 

.372 

26....  273.  c 

5,  8.... 267.  2.  a 

20:     4.... 63.  1.   c,  97. 

34:       ... 

.6,  7.2.  rt 

27.... 61.  6.  a 

6.... 256. 3.  rt,  257. 

\.a,b 

1... 

.245.  1.  fl 

45:    3.. ..92.  a 

6.  rt 

7....2G6.  4.  a 

5,6 

...275.  2.  rt 

5....24.  rt,387.  1 

14....250.  rt 

8.... 295.  a 

6... 

.272.  c 

6.... 302.  c 

18.... 259.  6 

9. ...246.  1 

7... 

.252.  2.  rt 

7....256.  3.«,264. 

60:    2.... 43.  6 

21:    4....287.  2.  a 

8.. 

.376.  c 

2.  (2)  e,  288.  2.  a 

4....  167.  1 

7.... 287.  3.  a 

9.. 

.275.  2.  cl 

9. ...201.6,309.1.6 

5.... 356.  3.  a 

9.... 286.  2.  a 

11.. 

.266.3.rt,275. 

10....  14.  rt,  24.  6, 

7....385.  4.  rt 

12.... 309. 2 

1. 

a  (4) 

273 

11....268.  rt 

13.... 287.  3.  a 

13.. 

.250.  d 

11.... 275.  1.  c 

13.... 311.  4 

22:     2.... 104. 7,266.1.  J» 

15... 

.275.1.  c 

14....;309.  1.  6 

61  :    1....198.  6 

5.... 266.  l.a 

23... 

.284.  rt 

46:  5.... 257.2.0,297.6 

62:    4.... 93.    rt      bis, 

6....275.  2.  a 

35:     5,  6 

....309.  l.rt 

47:    5.... 43.  6 

252.  1.  d 

7.... 311.  4 

8... 

.105.  rt,  309.  2 

7.... 286.  2.  rt 

5.... 289.     2.     a. 

9.... 42.  308.  a 

10... 

.19.  2.  6,  217. 

10....  112. 5. c,  288. 

309.  1.  6 

10....  1.59.  1 

1. 

C 

l.rt 

10.... 264.  2  (2)  c 

12.... 272. c 

13... 

.297.  a 

48:    6...  275.  2.  « 

63:    4....105.  c 

17....158.  3,  201.  h 

15,  16.... 280.  2 

15.... 252.  2.  rt 

6.... 235 

22...  266.   1.  6,  f. 

19... 

.102.  3 

49:     6.... 302.  a 

6,  7.... 306.  6 

269.  2.  a,  286.  3 

25... 

.127.2 

7.   ..2S2.  rt 

8....61.6.rt,306.a 

25.... 299 

36:     6... 

.232.  5.  rt 

8....281.1.  6 

64:    7.... 54.  3 

28.... 275.  \.b 

13... 

.121.1,266.2.6 

8,17  ...245.  2.  rt 

8....276. c 

29....245.1.a,278.1 

37:       ... 

.6 

9. ...55.  1 

65:    5.... 257. 2.  rt, 258. 

30...  276.    «,   278. 

2... 

.257.  2.  a 

10. ...275.  2.  c 

2.  rt,  302.  6 

4.  6,282.  a,  302.6 

3,8 

...275.  1.  c 

13,21..   .303.  rt 

7  ...112.5.c,294.o 

32.... 278.  3 

4... 

.275.2.6 

15....269.2.d,276.c 

10....104.  A,105.  6 

23:     1,4....267.  1.  « 

5,6 

...277.  rt 

19  ...246.  3.6 

66:    4....289.  5.  c 

2-6.... 267.  1.  a 

7... 

.283.  rt 

19,  20... 294.  rt 

6.... 269.  2.  6 

6....149.  2,279.  (i 

9... 

.91.6 

20... 299.  c 

12. ...114 

24:     2. ...269.1 

14... 

.275.  l.rt  (2) 

50:     3.... 245.3.6, 272.C 

13.... 286.  l.rt  (3) 

3 267.  1.  e 

15... 

.24.6 

6...  246.2.a,276.c 

16....275.  2.  e 

8.... 298.  3.  a 

16... 

.248.  6.  6 

7....275.  2.  c 

18....267.1.(;,306.6 

10. . .  298.  3.  a 

20.. 

.269.  2.  rt 

10.... 253.  l.rt 

68:     3.... 91.  6,  131.2, 

14. ...131. 3 

23... 

.16:3.4,287.5.6 

12....267.1.c?,307.rt 

140.  4 

25:       ....6,  7.  3.  a 

28.. 

.266.  1.  a 
.275.  1.  6 

16.... 282.  rt 

5. ...111.  3.  rt 

2. ...271.  6 

29.. 

17.... 309.  1 

8. ...119.3 

4.... 287.  1 

31.. 

.289.  4.  rt 

18.... 306.  6,  311.  4 

15...  245.3.6,276.7 

5,16,18  ...275.1.C 

33.. 

.106. rt 

21....  112.  .3, 275.1. 

18. ...21.  1 

9.... 272.  a 

38:    2.. 

.299 

6,  2.  rt.,  281.  1.  c 

21. ...232.  3.  rt 

11....812.  3.  ff 

3.. 

.131.  1 

23.... 105. 6 

23.... 256. 3.  6,287. 

12.... 259.    6,   298. 

8... 

.261.  3.  6 

51:    4....383.  rt 

2.  rt 

3.  rt,  302.  a 

9... 

.266.  2.  a 

6.... 267.  1 

28  ...252.  1.6 

20  ...273 

11... 

.92.  rt 

7. ...121.  2 

29....303.  rt 

27....71,  rt(2) 

12.. 

.257.  9.  a 

10  ...303.  rt 

69:     4....252.1.<',  309. 

26:     2....98.  l.fl 

16... 

.266.  3.6 

11-13.... 373 

2.  a 

4. ...112. 3,366.1. 

17.. 

.267.  1./ 

18..   .275.3.6,299.« 

5.... 252.  1./,  267. 

a,  269.  1 

20... 

.  256.  3.  rt 

5-2:    9.... 276.  6 

\.e 

6,... 275.  2.  c 

21... 

.19.  2.  6 

53:    6.... 219. 1.6,386. 

6.... 286.  2.  rt 

27:     2..   .266.1. rt, 275. 

39:    2... 

.97.  1 

\.d 

6,  20.... 246.  1.  a 

1.  «(4) 

5.. 

.75.  1 

.54:     9....269.  2.  rt 

10.... 23.  rt,  104.  i, 

9....266.1.rt,272.c 

8  .. 

268.  rt 

55:    6.... 290. 2 

218.  2.  rt 

10.... 112.  3 

11... 

.257.  9.  rt 

10....92. c 

11.  ...245.  3.  6 

13  ...A.  a 

12.. 

.276.  rt 

13....275.2.6,299.rt 

11,  12.... 276.  e 

14....272.  rt 

14... 

.35.  2,177.4 

16....166.  2,  285.  2 

13,  22.... 276.  <7 

28:    3. ...311.  4 

40:    5... 

.257.  9.6 

18.... 2.35,  276.    c. 

14  ... 257.6. rt,297.a 

7....151.2,275.3.rt 

13... 

.266.  2.  6 

288.  2.  a 

15. ...271.  6 

9.. ..275.  l.c 

18... 

.71.  a.  (2) 

19-22....19.  2.  6 

19...  98.1.rt,105.a 

29:     9. ...111.1 

41:    3... 

.273.  c 

20.... 309.  1.  rt 

21.... 276.  h 

10....276.  rt 

5... 

.98.  1,  119.  3. 

23.... 141.  1 

24. ...119.  1 

30:    4....13.  rt 

166.  5,  246.  1.  « 

23.... 299.  c 

26  ...278.  4 

7....299.  t- 

11... 

.275.  2.  c 

56:     4.... 302.  rt 

27....300. rt 

8.... 220.  6.  b 

13.. 

.297.  rt 

4,  10...  258.  2.  rt 

32...  345.3.6.264. 

13. ...105.  6 

42:    2.. 

.267.  3.  rt 

5,11,12.... 296.3.rt 

2  (2)  rt 

31:     2,  18.... 271. 6 

5.. 

.271.  rt,  311. 4 

5,  12.... 309. 2 

33.... 269. 2.  6,272. 

3.... 273 

6,  1 

2....296.  3.  « 

13....257.  9.  rt 

a,308.rt,312.2.a 

5.... 303.  a 

7. . 

.249.  1.  a 

57:    2,...174.1,289.6.a 

34,.,. 266.  3.  a 

INDEX   II. 

4(.)U 

69:  36.... §275.  1.6 

80: 

6. ...§112.  3,286. 

97: 

4....§276.  e 

116- 

14.... §257.  9.0 

70:     6....71.  «(2) 

1.  a  (4) 

101: 

2,3...  271.  6 

15. ...61.  6.  a 

71:     1...  271.6 

9.... 267.  5.  a 

4.... 267.  1.  e 

16.... 266.    1.   /, 

6. ...159.  1 

9-14....269.  2.  (<; 

5.... 92.  6,  93.  a 

274.  6,  286.2.a 

7.... 256.  3.  a 

11. ...93.  a 

102: 

3.   ..258.2.  a 

19.... 219.  1.6 

12.... 160.  2 

13.... 275.  2.  a 

5. ...14.  a 

118: 

8,  9.... 279.  6 

21.... 272 

14.... 4.  a,  182.  a 

7.... 266. 2.  6 

10....  105.  a 

23....88(f.  pi.) 

15....252.  2.  c 

8-10.... 266.2.  a 

11.... 139.  1 

72:       ....250.  a 

16.... 4.  rt,  1:39.2 

14....  139.  2 

13,  18.... 281.   1. 

2-7.... 275.  1.6 

18.... 272.  rt,  302.  a 

19.... 278.  3 

a(l) 

5.... 296.  2.  a 

19.  ...159.  3 

25.... 296.  2.  a 

14....2.58.  3.  c 

8. ...306.  6 

81: 

6....358.2.a,302.a 

28.... 246.  2.6 

18....92.rf,104.a 

8,  15,  17.... 272. o 

7,8,  13 \.. 276.  g 

103: 

3,  4.... 219.  2.  c 

23.. ..168.  1 

10.... 258.  3.  b 

9....307>p 

3-5.... 252.  1.  d 

25.... 274. 6 

15.... 105.  6 

11....119.1\249.2.a 

4....104.  c.  249. 

119: 

....6 

17....161.3,  250 

14.... 307.  (I 

2.6 

2.... 250.  6 

18.... 256.  3.  a 

15-17...   294 

5... 289.  3.  a 

2,  3.... 269.  l.a 

19....284.  « 

16....272.a,875.1.6 

7.... 267.  5 

9....267.  l.e 

20.... 93.  a 

83: 

12.... 297.  c 

9....299.  6- 

18.... 98. 2 

73:    2....  174.1,289.4. a 

84: 

2....202.  e 

11, 13.... 266.3.  a 

22....  1.39.  2 

3. ...276.  1.6 

4. ...24.  a 

13....119.1,2(J6.3 

43.... 60.  4.  a 

10.... 257.  6.  c 

7.... 258.  l.a 

16 269.   2.6. 

46.... 271.  6 

11.... 298.  l.a 

9....256.  3.  a 

311.  4 

47.... 142.  6 

14....  257. 9.  a,  276. 

85: 

14.... 275.  2.  c 

20.... 279.  c(2) 

55...  276. A 

€,  278.  4.  a 

86: 

2....19.2.a,126.1 

104: 

5-9.    ..269.2.6 

75   ...262.2.  a 

15....:W6 

9....286.  2.  a 

6....287.  3.  a 

76.... 272.  a 

16....99.2.6,308.a 

87: 

3....284.  e 

8....258.2.a,302. 

80,  172.... 272.  a 

16,  17....2:6.  fif 

88: 

2....258.2.a,302.a 

a,  303 

86.... 114 

17.... 267.  1.6 

5,  6.... 257.  9.  6 

15.... 267.  3. a 

90.... 276. a 

22.... 269.  2.  6 

10  ...266.  l.a 

17. ...16. 3.6 

101 ... .  167.  2 

27.... 86.  6  (2  m.) 

14.... 269.  1 

18.... 252.  l.c 

103....289.  5.  a 

74:    1.... 298.  l.a 

15.... 267.  2.  a 

20,22,28  ...308.6 

117.... 174.  3 

2....  287. 3.  a,  288. 

16. ...271.  a 

25....252.1.6,2.a 

129... 104. i 

2.  a,  303.  a 

17....24.  6,  92.  a 

26.... 119.  1,267. 

133.... 97.  2 

4.... 219.  2.  a 

89 

2....218.  2.  a 

4.  6,  303. a 

137.... 289.1. a,6.a 

5....19.2.6,  344.  a 

8. ...111.  3.6 

28.... 88  (pi.) 

139.... 24.  6 

7.... 286.  3 

10. ...131. 4 

29. ...111.  2.   6, 

146....275.  2.  c 

8....  10.5.  a 

40.... 286.  3 

153.2 

161-168.... 3.  l.a 

10. ...119.  1 

44....  104.^- 

SI.... 272.  a 

171. ...126.  a 

11. ...311. 2 

45.... 86.  6  (2  m.) 

32  ...275.   2.    6, 

120: 

2.... 256.  3.  a 

14.... 256.  2.  a 

48.... 298.  3.  a 

276.  c,  282.  a 

7....262.  2.  a 

15.... 257.  6.  c 

49.... 298.  3.  a 

105: 

22.... 232.  3.  a 

122- 

124.... 74.  a 

17.. ..11.  1.6 

51.... 252.  1.  a 

28....35.1.«,99.2 

122: 

2....278.  4.  a 

19.... 198. 6 

51,52....285.  3.  a 

44....269.  2.  6 

4.... 288.  2.  e 

22.... 35. 2 

52.... 24.6,  218.2. a 

45.... 267.  1./ 

123: 

1...  61.  6.a,248. 

75:     6.... 299 

90: 

1....266.  l.a 

106: 

12,  13....269.2.rf 

6.  d 

11. ...163.  4 

2...  267.  l.h 

17,  19.... 276.  6 

4....249.  3.  6 

76:     3....205.  5.  c 

3.... 276.  (7 

18,  19....276.5.a 

124: 

4.  ...61.  6.  a 

4  ...22.  a,  126.  2, 

5...  269. '2.  6 

25. ...114 

125: 

3. ...61.  6.  a 

218.  2.  a 

10. ...22.  a 

47.... 126.  1 

5.... 79.  3.  a 

6.... 96.  a 

14...  275.  2.  c 

107: 

5....269.  2.  6 

126: 

2.... 267.     5.    a. 

7 

...311.4 

15. ...302.  a 

6,  1.3,14...  269. 

283.  a 

8 

...297.  a,  302. rt 

17.... 272.  a 

2.6 

6.... 281.  l.a(l) 

r::   2 

...112.  3,  125.  1 

91: 

5,  6.... 302.  a 

10....258.  3.  6 

127: 

1....306.  6 

4 

...174.3,275.1.6 

6.. ..140.  1 

20-22.... 275. 1.6 

2....  198.  d,  257. 

7 

...276.  c 

7....267. 1.  « 

27....  126.  1 

9.  6,  283.  a 

10 

...139.  2 

12....105.  <; 

28-30....  276. c 

3...  295.  a 

17 

...269.2.6 

13,  14.... 294. a 

29,  33...  276.  gr 

129: 

....74.  a 

18 

...92.6 

15...  311.4 

109: 

4...  262.  2.  a 

1-3.... 266.  1.  a 

20 

...24.6 

92: 

2....244.  6,  279.  a 

8.... 252.  1./ 

3.... 24.5.  2.  a 

78:    6 

...267.1./,302.a 

6....266.  2.  6 

13.... 175.  3 

8... 266.  2.  a 

9 

...258.  3'.  c 

7....2S4.  c 

17.... 276.  e 

1.30: 

6  ...296.  3.  a 

15,  26,  45.... 276.  6 

8.... 282.  a 

19. ...302.  a 

131: 

2 . . . .  305.  a 

15, 29,45.... 267.5.a 

10....296.  3.  a 

23.... 112.  5.  c 

132: 

1....176.  6 

15,  29,  72.... 276.  ^ 

16....61.6.  a 

110: 

2.... 273.  a 

6....  137.  2 

19.... 276./ 

93 

1  ...126.  2 

3.... 262.  2.  a 

12.... 65.  rt,  219. 

20.... 276.  e 

3.... 296. 3.  a 

4.  ...61.  6.  a 

2.    rt,    303.  a, 

26.... 276.  9- 

5.... 176.  1 

5,  6.... 266.  4.  a 

306.a 

30,  31.... 309.  3.  a 

94 

1....94.  d 

5-7.... 269.  2.  d 

13.3- 

1.37.... 74.  a 

34.... 275.  l.a  (4), 

9...  126.1 

111: 

....6 

1.33: 

1....24.  rt,  244.6 

306.  6 

9,  10.... 298.1.  a 

112: 

....6 

134: 

2.... 219.    2.     6, 

40....267.  4.  a 

17.... 61. 6.  a 

113: 

5,  6.... 295.  a 

287.  2 

40,  41.... 276.  6 

19.... 142.  6 

5-9....61.6.  a 

135: 

7....94.  «,  167.2 

44....269.  2.  6 

20....93.a,111.2.e 

6...  222 

15.... 262.  2 

49.... 2.57.  6.  r 

95: 

1,2,  6.... 271.  a 

114: 

8.  ...61.  6.  a 

17.... 261.  •i.b 

54....258.2.a,303.a 

7... .307.  6 

115: 

7....312.  2.  a 

137: 

4.... 267.  l.d 

63.... 93.  6 

10 267.    4.    a, 

14.... 297.  d 

6....104.C 

65  ...142.  5 

276.6 

116: 

4.... 274.  6 

1.38: 

6.... 148.  3 

80:    3....61.  6.  a 

11.... .305.  a 

6.... 141.2,151.2 

139: 

1....104.jf,148.5 

5,8, 15,  20.... 256. 

96 

11.... 272.  a 

10.  11.... 246.  l.a 

2. ...160.1 

8.  a 

97 

1....272. a 

13....219.  2.  c 

5.... 219.  1.6 

410 

INDEX   IL 

139:    8....§53.  3.^88 

6:    3  ..  §49 

17:    6....§269.2.  a 

25:  17....§187.  2 

(lc.),267.1.rf, 

8....  266. 3.  a,  269. 

10.... 131.  1 

19  ...90 

288.  2.  b,  307. 

2.  a 

12....280.  3.  6 

20.... 286.  8.6 

a,  308.  a 

10....257.2.  a 

14.... 126.  1,  131.3 

24.... 279.  0 

15...  300. c 

ll....ll.l.a 

16  ...261.3.6,309. 

27.... 279.  o 

18.... 308.  a 

21....104.  <7 

1.  o 

26:     1....852.  1./ 

19.... 83.  6,  307.  & 

24....257.  "6.  c 

26....244,  344.  6 

7.... 141.  1,174.1 

20.... 57.  2  (3i  a. 

27.... 118. 4 

27....385.  3.  o 

13,  15.... 866.  3.  o 

86.  b   (3    pi.), 

27,  2S....245.  2.  rt. 

18:     5....244.6,  279.  c; 

14.... 311.  4 

166.  3 

309.  1 

22... .308.0 

14,  20.... 367.  3.0 

82.... 285.  3.0 

7:    7....276.  gr 

24....279.  c(4) 

17.... 302.  0 

140:     9....299.  « 

13.... 141.  1 

19:    6....248.  6.  e 

18.... 143.  6 

10....  174.  3 

25...  272. c 

7....19.  2.  6,  217. 

21. ...142.  6 

11. ...309.  2 

8:    3....97.  l.a 

l.c 

27:     8....272. c 

13.... 86.  6(lc.) 

9.... 278.  1 

13.... 218.  l.c? 

9.... 290. 2 

141:     3....24.6,98.  l.rt 

11.... 264.  1 

19.... 217.1.C,  305.6 

10....  112.3,  817.1.(5 

4.... 286.  1.  a  (4) 

13.... 168.  2 

24....57.  1 

12..   .366.  3.  o 

5. ...111.1.166.2, 

15.... 88 

25....94.d,245.2.f? 

15.   ..83.  c(2) 

273.  c,  312.  2.  b 

17.  ...53.  2.  a.  111. 

20:     9....  266.  2. 6, 267. 

17....  140.  1 

6...  277.6 

2.  6 

i.e 

24....296.2.o,'i98. 

8.... 60.  4.  a 

25.... 267.  1.  A 

13....275.  2.  (i 

2.  6,  299.  c 

142:    4.... 303. a 

27,29  ...141.3 

14....309.  2.  a 

25...  24.6,818.8.0 

143:     3.... 167.  3 

32.... 302.  6 

16....111.3.a 

28:     1....  866. 3.  a,  869. 

6.... 272.     2.     b. 

9:    4....  304.6,312.2.0 

25....279.  c(4) 

1.  0,  289.  5.  o 

286.  2.  b 

5... 275.  l.c 

26.... 276.  c 

■      6.18.   ..205.3 

8.... 31  3.  a 

6....  275.2.1^,286. 

81:     7....269.  2.  0 

10.... 297.  6 

144:       .   .74.  (t 

1.  a  (4) 

8.... 56. 2 

21....94.  6,  244.  6 

2.... 201.  b 

9....275.  2.  c 

9.... 279.  a 

89:     6....140.  1 

3....276. c 

11....245.  2.  c 

9,  19.... 244. 6 

9.  ...311.  4.  o 

6.... 285.  3.  a 

12.... 306.  6 

13....257.  9.  a 

9,  13...  266.3.  0 

12....288.  2.  e 

16....3I2.  2.  a 

15...  279.0 

30:     3.... 899 

145:       ....6 

10:     lff....267.  3.  « 

16.... 279. 6 

4....  65.  6,  266.  l.a 

2.... 275.  1.6 

3. ...111.  1 

22.... 63.  l.a,  266. 

6.... 66.    1  (2)   a, 

7...  257.  2.  a 

4. ...11.  l.a,  158. 

3.  a,  276.  a 

153.8 

8.... 217.  l.c 

3,  288.  2.  e 

23.... 278.  1 

8....11.1.0 

10.... 104. 6 

11.... 252.  1 

22:     3....375.  2.  o 

9.... 65.  o 

146:    4.... 269.    2.    a, 

22,24  ...297.6 

11. ...217.  l.c 

17... 14.  0,  24.  6, 

308.6 

31.... 285.  1.  a 

12.... 866.3.0,876.0 

57.  3  (3)  0 

147:     1.... 92.  (i,  244,  6 

11:    2....276.  e 

15...  262.  l.a 

25.... 202.  c 

10...  248.6 

7.... 210.  3.0,269. 

17.... 267.  l.e 

31.... 230.  1.0 

148:    9,  10...  2.50.  a 

2.  a 

19.... 297.  a 

31:     1.... 256. 1.0, 287. 

IS 250.  a 

14.... 250.  c 

21.... 256.    2,   256. 

2.  a 

149:    5....112.  5.  c 

21...  2.3.  l.a 

2.0 

8.... 801.  a 

150:     1,2,5,6... 311.1.  a 

25.... 151.  5 

24....60.  4.  a 

10-31.... 6 

6.... 248.  6.  e 

12:     6.... 279.  a 

37....245.  8.  6 

12.... 104.  i 

13....276.  rf 

28.... 270.  l.rt 

14.... 300.  6 

29.... 308.  o 

PROVERBS. 

19. ...271.  a 

23:     1....160. 3 

ECCLESIASTES. 

25.... 199.  6 

12.... 245. 2 

l:    2-6.... §  311.  1.  a 

13:    1,8.... 266.  3.  a 

15.... 297.  a 

1:    2.... §257.  2.  o 

3.... 279.  6 

2....3Q0.  6 

17.... 29.5.  o 

4.... 278.1,296.2.0 

5.... 272.  a 

4....297.C 

22.... 303. 0 

7.... 302.  o 

10  ...111.2.6,179.3 

13.... 287.  5.  6 

24....160.  2,  3 

8....84.5.  2.  0 

12....2S7.  4.  a 

19.... 279.  a 

27.... 209.  l.c 

9....248.6.  c,26.5. 

15.... 273.  c 

23.... 158.  3 

35.... 266.  1.  0,283 

3.  a  (3),  304.  6 

19....285.  3.  a 

24  ...287.  2.  a 

24:    2....92. e 

11.... 297.  6 

80.... 97.  1.  a 

14:     1....289.  2.  a 

7. ...158.3 

13.... 8.57.  6.  e 

22.... 60.  3.  c,  111. 

3.... 105.  d 

9. ...858.  1.0 

15.... 163.  4 

2.   e,   266.  2.  6, 

6,  19.... 266.  3.  a 

10.   ..308.  a 

16.... 346. 1.0, 375. 

269.  1.  a 

10.... 23.  1,  60.  4. 

11.... 307.  6 

1.  a  (2) 

28....105. c 

a,  1)9.  1 

14.... 97. 1.6, 149.3 

17.   ..3.  l.a 

2;     1  ff..   .245.2 

13.... 297.  c 

16....235.  rf 

18. ...90 

3.... 30.5.  6 

14.... 302.  6 

17.... 91.  6,232.5. 

2:     1,  llfl....240.1.a 

11.... 104. 6 

18  ...269.  l.a 

a,  873.  c 

5.. ..209.  1.0 

3:     3....  12.5.  1 

20....287.  5.  6 

81.... 235 

6  ...285.  1.  0 

9,  10  . .  .275.  2.  6 

31 . . .  269.  2.  a 

23.... 94.  6 

7.... 256.2.0, 284.« 

10.... 285.  1 

34.... 267.  3 

25.... 245.  3.  a 

8....296.  3.  6 

11.... 257.  9.  a 

15:     1....23.  1.  a,  60. 

27....312.  2.  6 

13  .57.    2  (3)   0, 

12...  43.6.266.2.6 

4.  a 

31....93.  o,  209.2. 

2:}8.  3.  6,  248.  6 

14....264.  2(2)e 

9....112.  5.  c 

d,  285. 1 

14.... 297.  6 

17.... 261.1 

16  ...309.  1.  a 

32....267.  1.  6 

15...   264.   2  (2)0, 

25.... 272.  c 

20....257.  2.  « 

25:-29: 311.4 

297.0 

4:     1....248.6.d 

25....272.a,275.1.6 

25:     3.... 2.35 

19...  2.31.4,298.2.0 

4....275.  2.  rf 

16:     3....275.  2.  6 

3,  20,  25.... 311.  4 

22... 74,  179.  1 

5,13,  27.... 273.  r 

4.... 249.  2.  a 

6.... 126.  2 

3:    2fE....279.  6 

6. ...118.  3 

12-15.... 250. c 

7.... 60.  3.  6  (1), 

4.... 279.  6 

6,8, 10.... 275.2.  6 

16..   .278.1,298.3.0 

244.6 

13.... 277.  o 

13.... 24.  6,  106.6 

33.... 284. e 

9.... 176.  4 

14... 279.     c     (4), 

16. ...88 

17:     1...  309.  1.0 

11... .10.0 

301.  c 

25.... 151.  1 

4....53.  2.  «,  111. 

13.... 235 

15....  279.     c     (4), 

5:  22.... 105.  c,  297.  c 

2.  c.  140. 5 

16.... 308.  0 

304.6 

INDEX  II. 


411 


8:  17....§3ie.  6.  6 
18....  74,  139.2 
4:    1....296.  3.  rt 
1.  7....280.  3.  o 
2.... 280.  3.6 
6...  256.  2.  a 
7.... 283.  a 
8.... 235 
9.... 2.53.  1.6,254 

4,  2G4.  1 
10.... 262.  1. e 
12.... 105.  a 
14.... 53.  2.  a.  111 

2  c 
15..'..2fi7.  1.6 
17.... 279.  a,  6 
5:     1....252.  1./    • 
5. ...113.  2 
7.... 38.  l.«,203.2 
8. ...112.  5.C 
9. ...301.  a 
12.... 287.  5.  6 
14,  15....2B9.  1 
6.     4....269.  1 
5  ..  246.  2.  6 
6.... 306.  6,307.  a 
12.... 258.  3 
7:    1.... 215.  2.  a,  6 
4. ...311.  4 
5.... 244. 6 
7....  267. 3.  a,  284. 

6,  289.  6.  a 
12, 19....  248.  6.  a 
16.... S2.  5.  a 
22.... 71.  a  (2) 
24.... 296.  3,  300.  a 
25....2S7.  4,  311.3 
26.... 91.  6,  167.2 
8:     1....  179.  3, 232.  5. 
a,  267.  3.  a 
2. ...311. 2 
9.... 280.  3 
11....289.  6.  a 
12.... 167.  2 
17.... 229.  2.  a 
9:     1....  139. 2,  218.1. 
a,  279.  c  (4) 
4....284.  rf,  304.  6 
5.... 248.  6.  6 
11.... 280.  3.  a 
12.... 59.  rt,  93.  e 
14. ...252.  1./ 
18  ...167.  2 
10:     5. ...166.  3 
8.... 267.  a. a 
10....121.1.245.2.a 
12.... 262.  2.  a 

15.  ..289.6.«.300.a 
16....267.  4.  6 

16,  17.... 248.  6.(1 
17.... 219.  2.  c,  300 

11:     1....245. 2 

2.... 267.  1.  e 

3.... 179.  1 

6.... 75.  2 

9.... .311.  4 
12:     1....203. 2 

4.... 87 

5  ...11.  1.  a.  122. 
2,  140.  5,  259.  6 

6  ...140.1,2,275. 
1.6 

11....19.2.C,  65.a, 

287.  5.  6 
13.... 256.  2.  6 


CANTICLES. 

1:    4....  §275.1.6, 287. 
1.  a 


1:    6....§105.«,141.1, 
209. 1.  a,  297.  c 
7....74,  211.1.  a 
8.... 264.  2(2) 
10.... 176.  1 
15....264.  2(2)e 
2:     3  ...283 
5.... 257.  7 
7....296.3.«,305.a 
10....220.  2.  6 
15.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 
119.  4v  262.  2.  a 
3:    5.... 296.3.  a 
7....297. fc 
8....300.  » 
11....149. 3  166.  3 
4:     1....257.  4' 
2....219.  1.  6 
4.... 254.  2.  a,  d 
5.... 218.  1.  c 
9...  104.  k 
5:     2....23.  1,57.  2(3) 
a,  60.  4.  a,  287. 
4.  a 
3.... 105.  d,    265. 

3.  a  (3) 
4-7.... 266.  1.  a 
5.... 246.  \.a 
9.... 104.  k 
12...  57.  2 (3)  a 
6:    fi....219.  1.6 

8  ....309.1.  6 

9  ...10.'5.«,289.6.a 
11. ...141.1 

7:2..  .266.  2.  6 
3.... 220. 6.  6, 259. 

6.  a 
4  ...218.  l.c 
8.... 212.  e 
9.... 274. a 

10....257.  6.  c 

13. ...141.  1 
8:     2.... 201.  6 
5. ...104.  i 
6...  22.  «,218.2.a 
7....245.2.a,307.a 
8.... 245.  3.  a 

11.... 267.  l.e 

13....248.  6.  rf 


ISAIAH. 

l:  l....§266.  l.a,311. 

1.  «,  2.  a 
2.... 266. 2.  a, 275. 

l.a(2),  c 
2,  4.... 266.  1.  6 
3.... 266.  3 
5.... 248.  6.e,26;i. 

a.  309.  1.  b 
6..  .158.  2,  250.  6 
9.... 266.  1,307.  a 
11.... 266.  2.   a,  6 

bis,  285.  1 
12.... 91.  6,266.  1. 

a,  279.  a 
13.... 262. 1.  a,267. 

1.  e.  285.  3.  a 
14.... 266.  2.  6  bis 
15.... 104.  A,  119.1, 

267.  1.  «,  282.  a 
16.... 54.   4.  a,  82. 

5.  a 
17....187.  2.C.279.6 
18....248.6./,.307.6 
20.... 287.5. 0,306.  6 
21.... 33.  1,61.  C.« 

222,  267.    4.   a, 

286.  l.c  (3) 
23.... 267.  4.  6 


1:  24.... §248.5,  271.0 
24-26... 275.  1 
28.... 257.  9.  6 
29.... 245.  2.  6,294 
29,  30.... 267.  1.  a 
30.... 257. 10 
31.... 60.  3.  6(2) 
2:     2....  277. 6,278.4.0 
3... 267.  1.  a 
4....  209. 1.0,277.0 
6.... 266.  1.6 

6,  8.... 267.  4.  6 
6-9.... 276.  a 

7,  8.... 287.  5.  o 
9.... 272.  c,  276.  e 

11.... 266.     4.     a, 

277.6 
11,  17.... 296.  3.  o 
20.... 43.  c,  209.  1. 
o,  259,  267.  1.  a 
22.... 262. 1.0,278.1 
3:     1....  262. 1.0,278. 
2,  296.  3.  6 
3.... 257.  10 
4....267. 1.  a 
7.... 278.  4.  o 
8... 94.  6 
8,9,12.... 266.  2.0 
13.... 262.  1.  a 
14.... 266.  1.6,311. 

4.  6 
15...  24.  0,  75.  1, 

267.  2.  o 
16.... 174.  5,211.3. 
0,267.4.  6,281. 
2.  a 
17...  .3.  1.  a 
18.... 267.  1.  0 
24....5;3.  3.  a 
26.... 283.  a 
4:     3....248.  6.  e 
3,4.. 306.  6 
4.... 266.  1,266.1. 
d,  306.  a 
5:     1....257.  6.  6 
1,5.. 274 
1,6. ..285.  3.  a 
4.  5... 279.  c(4) 
4,  24.... 266.1.  6 
5....278.  2,  280.  1 
6.... 279.    6,    285, 

285.  1 
7.... 257.     6.     a, 
262.1.0,296.  3.  6 
8....  267.  4.  6, 282. 

0.  294. a 
9.... 305.  a 

10.... 22.  0,218.2.0 
IJ   ...258.1.  0,309. 

1.  6 

12.... 262. 2.  0,269. 

1.0,311.  1.  a 
13.... 266.  4.  a 
14.... 275.  1.  o  (4) 
14-16.... 276.  a 
17.... 277.  6 
19.... 97.  1,97.1.0, 

267.  l.d./, 275.2 
20.... 10.  a 
23... 289.  2.  a 
24.... 259.  a 
28.... 24.  6.262.  1. 

a,  266.  2.  a 
29.... 264.  2(2)« 
30...  266. 2. 6,  269. 

2.  o 

6:     1....257.  6.  a 

2 20.5.  5,  a 

2,  4.. 267.  1.  6 
3....275.  1.  o  (4), 
296.  3.  c 


6:    3,5,13....  §262.1. a 
5.... 257.10,266. 1. 

6,4 
6... 309.  1.  0 
7..    .266.  2.0,269. 

1,  275.  2.  o 
8....  267.  1.0,287. 

4.  0,  289.  3.  a 
9....  177. 4.281 .2.0 

10....235.rf,245.2. 

C,  273 
11.... 266.  1.  <Zbis, 

285.3 
12. ...119.  1 
13....92.(/,  257.6.0 
7:     2.... 159.  1 
4. ...91. 6 
7.... 266.  2.  a 
8.... 279.  C(4) 
8,18,20  ...267.1.0 
9.... 306.  6 
11.... 119.    3,    120. 

1.  280.  2.  o 
13.... 264.  2  (2)6 
14.... 168.  1,  246.2 
15.... 267. 1.0, 279. 

6,  C  (2) 
17.... 267.  1.  O 
19.... 158.  4 
23. ...267. 1.  c 
24....245.  2.6,  262. 

2.  o 
25....245.  2.f/,267. 

4.  6,  288.  2.  e 
8:    2.... 22.  6 
4....245.  2.  c 
6.... 280.  3.  a 
8...  284.6 
9....275.  2.(/,296. 

3.  o 
10....275.  2.6,  285. 

3.  a 
11....  104.  0,275.1. 

a  (4) 
12....267.1.«..300.c 
13.... 267.1.6,297. 6 
17....  100.  2.  od) 
19....248.  6.  6,267. 

\.e 
23. ...61. 6.  a 
9:     1....258.  l.a 
1-5.. 266.  4.  a 
2.  ..245.2.6,258. 

l.O 
3.... 24.  6,220.5.0 
4  ...143.  1 

5,  6.... 276.  a 
6....4.0 
7....275.  1.  a  (2) 
7-13.... 276.  a 

11, 16,  20.. 296.  3.  a 

12.... 249.  2.6 

13.... 250. C 

17.... 45. 2 
lO:     1.... 209.  2.0,250. 
c,  302.  o 
2.... 282 
4.... 296.  3.  o 
5.... 294.  a 
7....252.1./.305.6 
9.... 22.  6,  298.   2 

10....264.  2(2)c,  e 

12  ...2.58.  3 

13.... 11.  1.6,  57.2 
(3)0,92.6,176.1, 
232.  3.  6 

14.... 248.  6./ 

15.... 299.  6 

16.... 148.  4 

17  ...220.5.  6 

22.... 305.  6,307.  h 


412 


INDEX   IL 


10 

:  27. ...§24.6 

28-32.... 269.  2.  c, 

311.  4.  c 

30....273.a,285.4.rt 

34.... 19.  1.  a,  45.2 

11 

2.. .100.  2.  a  (2), 

158.  4,  258.  3.  b 

8.   ..142.  6 

9....269.2.a,  286. 

2.  « 

10.... 262.  2.  a 

12.... 2.57.  2 

13.... 257.  9.6 

14.... 250. 6 

15.... 60.  3.  a 

12 

3.... 258.  3.  c 

13 

3.... 259.  b 

6....273.« 

8.... 65.  6 

9  ...311.3 

10....269.  2.  (i 

16. ...91.  c 

18....92.  e 

19. ...284.  q 

20....53.3.a,111.2.c 

14: 

6....  114,  257.6. c, 

287.  2.  a 

9.... 289.  6.  a 

11....  151.  5,289.5. 

a,  6.  a 

13,14,16  ...275.1.6 

16.... 252.  1.  d 

19....95.a,258.1.a 

21.... 299 

23.... 57.  2  (2)    a. 

94.  6,  163.  2 

24  ....305.  a 

25.... 24.  b 

27.... 263.  6 

31. ...119.4 

15: 

5. ...163.  2 

7.... 302.  a 

8.... 288.  3.  a 

16: 

8.... 293 

9.... 56.  3.  a,  170. 

a,  176.  4 

10.... 8b.   b  (2ni.), 

163.  4 

12....  266.1.^,277.6 

17: 

1...  279.  c(4) 

6.... 255.  4.«,297. 

c,  311.  1.  a 

8.... 230.  3. a 

10.... 257.  6.  a 

11.... 158.  2,163.  2 

14...   139.  2 

18: 

2.... 139.  3 

4....98.  l.ff,271.a 

5  ...65.  a,269.2.a 

19: 

3. ...141.  1 

4.... 289.  3.  a 

6... 24.  c,  94.  a, 

182.  a 

7.... 266.  4.  a 

8....259.a,266.2.6 

9....201.C 

17.... 11.  1.  a,  198. 

(/,  304 

21...  92. c 

22.... 280.  2 

30: 

1....2r9.6 

4....201.C 

21: 

2...  284.  « 

2-5.... 311.  4.  c 

3.... 209.  1.  a 

5.... 280.  1 

9.... 266.  4 

12...  112.  1,174.  I, 

179.  3,  250,  275. 

1.  c,  306.  b 

14. ...111.  2.  c 

22:     1... .§257.6 

2....2.57.  7,  284.  (7 
5.... 163.  2 
7 . . .  293.  a 
10.... 25 
11.... 220.  7.  a 
12.... 248.  fS.d 
13....267.1.«,280.1 
14.... 305.  a 
16.... 294.  a 
17....163.2,287.2.« 
18.... 281.  1.  c 
19.... 45.  3,  111.  1 
21.... 220.  3.  a 
24.... 257.  6.  c 
23:     1....245.  l.« 
1,4.... 273.  a 
4.... 299 
9.... 257.  2 
11.... 54.  3,  94.   6, 

220.  6.  6 
13.... 252.  2.  a 
17,  18.... 219.  1.6 
18. ...113.  1 
24:     1,3,  4.... 296.  3.  6 
2....  167,  2,248.6. 

/,  249.  2.  a 
3. ...140.  3,  4 
10.... 248.  6.  e 
12.... 287.  5.  a 
19....  139.2,281. 1.6 
20.... 82.  l.o(l) 
25:     1....104.  A 
2.... 279.  c  (4) 
6. ...211.  1.  a 
10.... 161. 2 
11. ...119.  1 
26:    5....105.  a,6 

9...  269.1,285. 4.rt 
10....269.2.«,308.a 
11.... 257.  9.  a 
16.... 86.  6  (3  pi.) 
19.... 220.2.6,235.0? 
20.... 174.  3 
27:     1,5....296.  3.  « 
3....  16.  3.6,105.fZ 
4....  19.  2.  e,127.3 
6.... 272.  a 
8.... 24.  a 
11....88  (3f.pl.) 
12.... 224.  1.  a 
28:     1....256.  3.  6 

1,3,  4.... 296.3.  « 
2.... 266.  4.  ffi 
3.... 88  (3  f.  pi.), 

91.  c,289.  5.  a 
4....245.  2.a,267. 

\.h 
6....60.  3.  a 
7. ...248.6 
9.... 258.  1.  a 

10,  13.... 296. 2 
12....86.  6{3pl.) 
16.... 151,  5,  294.  a 
19. ...296.1 
21.... 2.52. 1.  a 
25.... 306.  a 
27.... 113.  1 
28.... 281. 1.6,299.  e 

29:     1.... 1.31.  2,258,2. 
a,  302.  a 
2,  6.... 296.  3.  6 
7. ...167.3 
9....142.6,281.1.c 
11.... 300. c 

11,  12  ...245.  2.  c 
12..     301.6 
13.... 279.  d 
14....90,  294.  a 
16.... 298.  2.  6 
21.,.. 86.  6(3  pi.) 


29:  22.... §  158.1,300. fl 
30:     2....159.  1 

5.... 153.  3 

6....302.  rt 

8....  105.   a,  275. 

2.  c 
11....79.  .S.«,233.« 
12  ...19.  2.  a,  119. 

3,  282.  a 
14. ...280.2 
18.... 106.   a,    119. 

1,  1.39.  2 
19....  104.    6,    106. 

a,  141.  3 
21....1S2.«,  261.1 
23.... 257.  9,287.3 
28....  162.  4 
29.... 96.  6 
31:     1....282.  a 

4....  22.  a,  43, 248, 

267.  4.  6 
5.... 280.  2.  a 
6.... .300.  c 
7.... 294.  a 
8.   ..299.6 
32:     1....88,  284.  rf 
7. ...311.  3 
9.... 248.  6.  d 
11....289.  l.a,6.a 
13.... 256.  3.6 
14....266.  4.  a 
17.... 279.  a 
33:     1....24.  6,  87, 131. 
2, 141.3,  261, 3.a 
6.... 2.58.  2 
9.... 82.  1.  a  (1), 

289.  6.  a 
10....82.  5.  a,  267. 

\.e 
12....24.  c,  150.  1 
15.... 285.  2 
20.... 294.  a 
21. ...56.  1 
24.... 257.  10 
34:     4....  140.2,248.6./ 
6....96.  « 
11.... 21. 1,230. 4. 6 
13.... 289.  2.  a 
16.... 104.  0 
17.... 104.2, 289.6.a 
35:     1.... 55.1,  88  (pi.), 
160.   2,   272.    a, 
286.  1.  d 
2.... 258.  2 
4....126.  1 
7  ...289.  4.  a 
36:     2....257.  6.  c 
6.... 245.  2.  a 
8...  249.  3.6,271 
9.... 253.  1.  a 
15.... 272.  f,  2&1.  e 
19.... 258.  3.  6 
37:    3....261.  3.  6 
6...  287.  3.  a 
13.... 258.  3.  6 
16.... 246.  1.  «,  2 
22....250.6,257.3.a 
23...  284.  c 
26.... 275. 2.  <;,279. 

c  (4),  287.  3.  a 
30.... 273.   a,  275. 

2.  d,  280.  4 
32.... 257.  9.  a 
38.... 309.  3 
38:     3.... 274.  6 

5....90,  294.  « 
10.  ...246.  1.  a,  271 
12,  13.... 245.  \.a 
14.... 19.  2.  a 
16.... 259.  a 
18.... 299 


38:  20....§279.  c(4) 

21.... 267.  1.  e 
39:     3.... 266.  2.  c? 
40:     i....266.2.a,267.a 
7.... 22.  b,  35.  1 
12.... 217.  l.c,275. 

1.  a  (4) 
12-14...   266.  \.a 
14....245.1.«,276.« 
17.... 264.  2(2)c 
20.... 285.  4.  rt 
21....  266. 2.6,267.3 
24..   .92.  6,  299 
25..   .2.50.  a 
27.... 266.  2.  rf,275 

1.6 

30  ...148.  4 

31.... 248, 6 

41:     2...  287.  3.  a 

4.... 246.  2.6,275. 

1.  a  (2) 
7.... 90,  267.  1./, 

284.6 
8.... 300 
9....302.  c 
10  ...272.  c 
11.... 275.  1.6 
14.... 2.57.  3 
15.... 275.  2.6,287. 

3.  « 
17....24.  c 
20...  27.5.  1.6 
22  ...275.  2.  c 
23.  ...174.  3 
23,  28...  97.  2.  a 
24.... 264.  2.  (2)c, 
302.  6 
42:     1....302.  c 

4...   140.1,267.1.6 
5. ...126.  1,220.7. 

a,  311.3 
6....94.  f 

6,  21.... 275.  1.6 
11. ...158.  1 
14.... 267.  1.6,275. 

1.  6 
16.... 302.  a 
17.... 285.  3.  a 
18....248.  6.  «{ 
19.... 305.  6 
21.... 283 
22....65.«,257.10.6 
24....279.  6,  303.  a 
25....a87.  4 
43:     5.  ...105.  6 

7.... 248.  6.  e 

8....94.(/,  309.1.a 

9....91.rf 
10.... 246.  2.  6 
11.... 297.  a 
12....275.  1.  a(2) 
14....  277.  6,  302.  a 
17....269.  2.  a 
23.... 112.  3 
25.... 246.  2 
26  ...106.  6 
44:     2.... 105.  6 

7. ...112.  5.  c 

7,  17....  275.  1.6 
8....  148.   3,    275. 

1.  a  (2) 
11.... 275.  1.  6 
13....  19.  2.  a,  60. 

3.   6  (2),    120.1, 

269.  2.  6 
14.... 279.  c(4) 
14,16,17.... 269. 2.(1 
15.... 269.  2.  a 
16...  141.  2 
17. ...13.  a 
18....  158.2,269.1.0 


44: 

21   .. 

.§102.2 

22... 

.35.2 

24,  25.... 294.  rt 

27... 

.111.  3.  a 

28... 

.311.  2 

45: 

1... 

.  1.39.  2 

2... 

.151.  1 

3... 

.2.52.  1.  d 

10... 

.88(21-.) 

11... 

.118.3,287.2.a 

22... 

.275.  2.  d 

23... 

.246.  2.  b 

46: 

10... 

.2.50.  b 

12... 

.2.52.  1.  c 

47: 

1... 

.257.  8.  a,  273 

1,  5 

...§35.2.  a, 

283.6 

2... 

.89(f.s.),  111. 

3. 

a 

8... 

.261.  3.  a 

10... 

.102.  3,  104.  c 

11... 

.289.  6.  a 

12... 

.273. «,  301.  b 

13... 

.219.  2.  a 

14... 

.104.  i 

48: 

1... 

.294.  a,  301.  a 

3... 

.269.  2.  b 

7 

.104.gr 

8'.  ■. '. 

.87 

9,  11.... 295. a 

11... 

..39.  l.a 

13... 

.262.  1.  a 

14... 

.302.6 

18... 

.266.  1./ 

21... 

.302.  « 

22... 

.296.  3.  a 

49: 

3,  23.... 300.  6 

6... 

.264.    2  (2)  6, 

266.  2.  6,  275.  2. 

« 

311.  3 

r» 

.3.5.  1.  a 

8'.'.' 

.209. 1.  a,257. 

6. 

a 

15... 

.246.  l.«,267. 

1. 

e 

18... 

.65.  6,  305.  a 

26.. 

.112.  3,287.  1 

50: 

2... 

.272.0,281.1. 

a 

(3) 

8... 

.304.  b 

51: 

2... 

.267.  l./,5.  a 

8... 

.296.  2.  a 

12... 

.246.  2,  276.  c 

14.. 

.126.  1 

15... 

.126.  1,  276.  e 

20... 

.57.  2  (3)  a 

21... 

.258.  2 

B2: 

1... 

.283 

5... 

.96.  a,  b,  122. 

2, 

131.  6,  151.  2 

•7 

.176.  1 

li.'.' 

.140.  4 

14.. 

.60.  3.  b  (2) 

53 

2.. 

.111.  1,267.1./ 

3.. 

M.e 

3,4 

....258.3.  c 

4.. 

246.  l.«,257. 

9, 

266.4 

4-10.... 266.  4.  a 

5.. 

.143.1,245.3.a 

7.. 

.296.  3.  a 

9.. 

.245.  2.  c 

10.. 

.177.1,267.1. 

c. 

306.  6 

11.. 

.252.1.  a,  286. 

2. 

a 

54 

1.. 

.209.1.  a,  248. 

6. 

6?,  294.  « 

5.. 

.203.  2 

6.. 

.104.  c 

9.. 

.135.2 

INDEX   II. 

54: 

10 

...§240 
...22.6 

JEREMIAH. 

8:    3 

12 

17. 

...299. c 

1:     5.... §105.  d 

4 

55: 

2 

...299.  6 

6,  7... 246.  1.   a. 

5. 

3 

...271.rt.275.2.c 

262.  l.a 

4 

...258.  3.  c 

11. ...278.  2 

6 

5 

...104.6 

15....25r  6.  c 

11 

7 

...272.  « 

18....287.  3.  a 

13 

9 

...266.2.6 

2:     2.... 280.  4 

16 

10 

...267.  4.6 

8,  11. ...302. 6 

19 

11 

...287.3 

11. ...11.  1.6,231.3 

21 

56: 

3 

..,105.a,248.6.c 

12.... 111.  3.  a 

22 

6 

...§79.6 

10....287.  2.  a 

23 

7 

...237.  9.  a 

17....278.4.rt,279.a 

9:     1 

10 

...2.58.  l.a 

19....105.c,257.  9. 

2 

12 

...161  5 

a,  279.  a 

3 

57: 

2 

285.  2 

20.... 805. 6 

4 

3 

;!;302.6 

21.... 219.  1.6,252. 

7 

5 

...140.2 

1.6 

9 

6 

...24.  6,218.2.a 

24....  105.  c 

11 

8 

...88  (3  f.), 289. 

27....104.  A:.  250.  6 

14 

6.  a 

28....262.  2.  a 

17 

11 

...811.2 

32....309.  1.  6 

19 

13 

...119.3 

34.... 104.  k,  293 

23 

15 

...257.6.6 

36...   111.2.  b 

17 

...280.2 

3:     1....277.   «,   281. 

24, 

20 

...279.6 

1.  6,  306.  6 

10:     2 

21 

...296.  3.  a 

3  ...279.  6 

3 

58: 

3 

...24.6,  131.  2, 

5...  86.    6   (2f.), 

4 

218.  2. a 

131.  2,  289.  6.  a 

5 

5- 

-7....28£  a 

6....  174.  3 

6 

7. ...280.  1 

6,  7.... 249.  1.  a 

7 

9 

...125.2,275.2.6 

8.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 

10 

10 

...218.1.  6 

209.  1.  a 

12 

...244.  a 

9.... 275.  1.  ffi(3) 

13 

13 

...279.6 

11.... 209.  l.a 

17 

59 

3 

...63.     C     (2), 

12  ...299. c 

23 

122.2 

22.... 179.  3 

25 

4 

13. ...280.  1 

25.... 22.  6,271.  a 

5 

...112.3,158.4, 

4:    3.... 160.  2 

11:     7 

198.  rf 

7...  24.6,220.5.a 

15 

10 

...191,  271 

11. ...259.  a 

17 

12 

...  127.2,289.1. a 

13  ...141.  1 

21 

13 

...92.6,  (/,  176.1 

14. ...289.  l.a 

12:    4 

16 

...104.  i 

19.... 86.  6(2f.) 

5 

17 

...174.4 

19,  21.... 271.  a 

6 

60: 

1 

...159.  2,  273.  a 

29....248.  6.  «> 

9 

4 

...88{f.  pi.) 

30.... 71.  a  (2) 

10 

7 

...105.  c 

31. ...158.  1,  2 

13 

9 

...104.C 

5:     1....275.1.C,  306.6 

17 

10 

. . .  105.  C 

6....]41.1,269.1.a 

13:    4 

14 

...257.  1.  a 

7.... 75.  2,  125.  1, 

5 

61: 

1 

...43.C 

299.6 

7 

2 

...257.  6.  a 

13....248.  6.  c 

7 

...288.3.  a 

15.... 302.  c 

10 

10 

...272.  a 

18.... 287.  3.  a 

62: 

2 

...105.  d 

22....56. 1,105.6,  c 

3 

..  16.  1 

26.... 139.  2 

11 

5 

...lOS.rf 

28....285.1.a,299.a 

12 

63 

3 

...94.  a,  119.  1, 

29.... 311.  4 

12 

267.  5.  a,  275.2.C 

31.... 266.  l.a 

13 

16 

...105.  a 

6:    2....230.  2.  a 

17 

18 

...295.  a 

10...  275.2.6 

19 

19 

...86.  «,  266.  1. 
/,  302.  6,  307.  6 

19.... 312.  2.  a 
20.... 252.  \.c 

21 

64 

2 

....86.  a 

27....  187.  2.  c 

25 

3 

...245.2.6 

28....257.  2.  a 

14:     1 

5 

...132.3 

29.... 281.  2.  a 

4 

6 

...163.  3 

7:    4....296.  3.  a 

5 

8 

. .  94.  d,  274 

9.... 280.  1 

7 

10 

...139.1 

10  . .  65.  a 

15 

65: 

1 

....302.  6 

13  ...281.2 

17 

5 

...286.  1.  d 

19.... 246.  2.  6 

17 

...235 

23.... 305.  6 

18 

18 

...273.  a 

25.... 296.  l.a, 312. 

22 

20 

..  167.2 

2.6 

15:    1 

24 

...267.  1.  A 

27.... 104.  6 

2 

66 

3 

...35.1. a 

29. ...141.  1 

3 

12 

....14:B.  1 

31. ...245.  3.  6 

10 

13 

...45.5 

8:     1....258.  3.  6,312. 

15 

20 

....39.  l.a 

3.6 

413 


§287.5.6,289. 
5.  « 

....245.2.6 
....356.3.6,289. 
5.  c 
....276.  a 

167.  3 

J....  281. 1.6, 302.6 
..2.58.  l.a 
..231.  3.  a 
.  266.  3.  6 
..231.  2 
3....275.  2.  C 
.275.  2.  c 
J....94.  c,  287.  4 
3.... 267.  4.6 
...279.  6 
. . .  245.  2.  6 
...244.  a 
1....272.  6 
....297.  c 
...   118.4 
....219.  1.  6 
....245.2.  a, 279. 
a,  280.  1 
,25.... 288.  3.  a 

88 
.".'.246.2.0,297.6 
.... 267.1. /,311.4 
....57.  2  (3)  a. 
86.6  (3pl.),  166.3 
.245.  8.  6 
.256.  3.  a,  389. 
3.  a 

...302.  a 
....89  (f.s.) 
....312.  2.  a 
....27.5.  1.  a  (2), 
281.  1.  c 
...280.2 
).   ..219.  1.6 
....279.  c  (2) 
....311.4 
....289.  l.a 
....94.  a 
....297.6 
;».... 230.  3 
....121.2 
....294.  a 
....92.  f/,  280.  2 
....249  8.a,273.C 
....127.  1 
....266.  l.c,269. 
2.  6 

....252.2.a.  272. 
rt,  282.a,  289.  5. 
«,  312.  2.  rt 
12....267.  4.  6 
....281.  1.  6 
13.... 277.  6 
...36.1,287.  l.a 
....105. «/,  148.2 
...174.1,289.5.0 
...60.   3.6    (1), 
86.  6  (2  f.) 
..  ..60.  2.  a 
....300.  a 
....309.  2.  a 
....280.  3.  a 
....306.  6,807.6 
....290.1.rt,809.1 
....257.  3. a,  287. 
5.  a 

....306.  a 
....246.2 
...307.  a 
....301 
....119.1 
....90i3pl.)104.* 
....106.   6,   275. 
l.c 


414 


INDEX   II. 


15:  17....§]12.  5.  c 
16:     6,  7.... 245.  2.  c 
8.... 285.  3 
16....  160.  1,252.  1 
17:     3....220.  6.  6 

4.... 86.  6  (2m.), 

112.3 
5....302. c 
5,  7.... 266.  2.  & 
8.... 271.  6 
10.... 279.    c     (4), 

311.  2 
17....174.3,246.1.« 
18....94.  f/,  246.  1. 
a,  285.  3.  a 
18:    8,  3.... 285.  2 
4.... 275.  1.  a(4) 
7,  9.... 288.  2.  a 
7-10. ...277. a 
14.... 298. 2 
18....271.  & 
23....  46,    174.     3, 
177.  3 
19:     1....280. 4,297.0? 
2.... 3.  l.« 
4.... 297.  rf,  300.C 
4,  5....275.1.rt(2) 
11....  167. 1,345.2. 6 
13.... 258.  3.6,280. 
3.  a 
20:    4....201.C 
7.... 286.  1.  d 
9.... 277.  a 
10.... 275.  2.  h 
14.... 302. a 
15....281.1.a(4) 
21:    3....209.  1.  a 
12.... 112.  1,174.1, 

179.  3,  250 
14. . ..111. 2. c 

82:     3 187.  2.  C 

6. ...13.  b 
7  ...257.2.  a 
10.... 281.  2.  a 
12.... 300.  c 
14  ...\iA.  4,201.  c 
15.... 94. a 
19.... 280.  2.  a 
20        19.  3.6>,  235.ffl 
23.... 61.  6.  a,  86. 
&(3f.),90(2f.s.), 
140.2 
»4....22.  «,  105.  6, 
267.  l.rf,  307.  a 
26.... 104.  i,  252.1. 

h.  290.  2 
29.... 296.  3.  a 
23:     5....245.  2.  a 
13.... 131. 6 
14....  279.  a,  e,  280. 

1,  282.  a 
17....281.  2.  a 
18.... 275.  2.  c 
20.... 285.  3.  a 
22.... 257. 2.  a,  287. 
1,306.  6,307.  a 
23.... 257.  6.  c 
26....258.  2.  a,259. 

6,  298.  1.  a 
29.... 163. 2 
33....284.c,312.2.rt 
36.... 289.  3.  a 
37.... 104.  b 
39.... 179.  3 
24:     1....279.  d 

2 91.  c,  253.  2. 

«,257.3.a,262.3.a 
2,  8.... 267.  1.  e 
25:     3.... 94.  6 
14.. ..297   a 
15....256  2.a,259.a 


25:  16....§96.a 

26....249.3.6,259.a 
27.... 167.  3 
29.... 298.  3.  a 
34.... 163. 5 
36.... 57.  2  (3)  a, 
2;35.  c 
26:    9. ...167.3 
14.... 273.  o 
15.... 305.  b 
21. ...44.  6 
27:     3....252.  1.  c 
7.... 297. a 
18....158.  2,279.  e 
20. ...13.  a 
28:    1....255.  l.a 
6.... 267.  l.e 
12....279.  <; 
16....  248.  3.  c,  278. 
2,  288.  2.  a 
29:    2....258.3.&,279.d 
8.... 94.  6,  112.5.C 
17.... 267.  1.  e 
18.... 288.  3.  a 
19.... 281.  2.  a 
25.... 219. 1.  b 
27. ...24. 6 
30:     6.... 309.  1.  b 
12.... 285.  4.  a 
14.... 285.  3.  a 
16.... 139. 3 
19.... 290. 2 
21.... 298.  3.  a 
31:     2....280.2.«,297.c 
5.... 245.  2. a 
7.... 288.  2. e 
12....87, 119. 3 
18.... 287. 4 
20.... 266.  2.6 
21.... 252.  2.  6,311. 

4.  C 
29.... 267.  3. a 
32.... 112.   3,    300. 

6,  311,  4 
32,33.... 265.3. a(3) 
33....16.3.6,105.(i, 

266.  2.  c 
38  ...46 
32:     1.  .255.  l.a 
4....91.6,  131.  5 
9.... 98.  1.  a 
11....288.  2.  «> 
12  ...249.  3.  6 
14.... 253.  1.  c 
16  ...279.  d 
19.... 300.  6 
29.... 266.  \.a 
33....92.  (^,280.2.a 
35... 106. 2 
37.... 10.  a 
44.... 280. 3 
33:     8. ...13.  a 
20....256.  3.  a 
22....257.  9.  6 
24.... 45.  1 
26. ...11.  1.6 
34:     1.... 44.  a,  258. 3 
8....2-9.  (/ 
9.... 259.  a 
35:     8....279.  e,  297.  rf 
14.... 279.  6 
14,  16.... 284. « 
.36:    8....267.  4.  a 
16.... 286.  3 
23.... 254. 1 
27.... 279.  d 
37:     4.... 278.1 

8,  9.... 249.  1.  a 
9....281.1.  a  (4) 
10.... 252.  1.  rf,277. 
a,  307.  a 


37:  ll....§875.1.a(3) 
12....  113.  2 
14.... 278 
15.... 275.  1.  a(l> 
16.... 211.  3. « 
21.... 280.  3.  a 
38:    4....274.  a,  284.  e 
5.... 261.  3.  b 
6.... 256.  3.  a 
9.... 276.  e,  284.  c, 

301.6 
13.... 56.  4 
14.... 255.  1.  a 
20.... 275.  2.  c 
26.... 279.  e 
28.... 302.  a 
39:     1,4.... 290.  l.a 
4....276.  <i 
12....23. 1. a 
18....92.  (i 
40:     1....57.   2  (2)  a, 

279.  d 
2.... 286.  2.  a 
3.... 252.  2. c, 275. 

2.  a 
4....250.  (i 
5.... 311. 4.  6 

14.... 287.  2.  a 
16..   .272. c 
41:    3....297. c 
5,  6.... 309.  2 
6....281.2.  6 
8.... 256.  2.  a 
16.... 290.  l.a 
42:    2.   ..177.2,252.1./ 
5.... .300.(5 
6....46,  71.  a(l) 
10....  53. 2. 6, 149.2 
43:    3.... 290.  l.a 

5.... 272. a 
44:     2.... 262.  l.a 
7.... 250.  c 
9  ...289. 2. a, 296. 

3.  a 
14....285.  2,  311.2 
15.... 262.  1.  a 
17..   .266.1.0,279. 

c(2) 
18.... 285.  1,302.  a 
19.... 94.  6,  104.  e, 

280.  3.  a 
23.... 168.  1 
25....  162.4,290.1. a 

46:    1....300.  a 
2.... 255.  1.  a 
6....272.  c 
7....298.  3.  a 
7,8.... 122.  2 
8...  m.a,\\\Si.d 
11....86.  6(2f.) 
20....43.  c 
28. ...287.  3.  a 
47:    1....300.a 
48:     2.... 279.  c  (4) 
9....281.1.  6 
11.... 161.  1 
15....289.  5.  c 
19.... 296.  3.  6 
27.... 298.  2.  6 
32....249.  3.  6 
36...  258. 2.  a,  289. 

5.  ff,  302. a 
41....289.  2.  a 
44.... 297.  c 
49:     3....54.4.a,82.5.a 
8....95.  ri,275.1.c 
10.... 167.  1,266.4 
11....88(3f.pl.),98. 

1,  273.  a 
12.... 246. 2 
17....289.  5.  c 


49:  18 
20 
24 


50: 


52: 


...§  45.4,65.* 
. . . 140.  5 
...104.?,  289.4. 
a,  290.  1.  a 
...141.  1 
...302.  c 
...300.  a 
...248.  6./ 
...86.  6  (2m.), 
112.  3, 5.  c,  139.3 
...158.  2 
...281.2.  a 
...71.a(3),91.(« 
...289.5.  a 
...198.  rf 
. . . 167.  2,  884.  e 
...91.  a 
...261.2 
...111.3.a 
...94.    6,     114, 
160.3 
. .  .299.  c 
. . .  105.  6 
...302.6 
...167.2,  3 
...90(2f.s.) 
. .  305.  6,  307.  6 
...245.2.6 
28.... 275.  l.c 
...94.6,245.2.6 
...167.2 
...289. 6.  a,  296. 
2.  a 

...289.  l.a 
. . .  15:B.  1 
...24.  c,  150.  1 
..  255. 1.  a 
. .  269.  2.  6 
...257.  6.  C 
...295 

...253.1.flr,297.c 
30....254.  2.  6 
....248.  6.  e 


LAMENTATIONS. 

1 §6 

1:    1....33.  1,  61.  6. 
a,  222 

4....150.  l,201.a 

8.... 59.  a,  141.3 

9....288.  2.  e 

12.... 143.  1 

14. ...302.6 

16. ...209.1. a,  211. 
l.a,  285.  1,296. 
3.  a 

17....286.  2.  6 

19.... 267.  1./ 

20.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 
92.  a 

2 6 

2:    8. ...126.1 

11....92.  a,  113. 1, 
2,  115 

13. . .  .257.  3.  a 

15,  16.    ..74.  a 

18.... 258.  1.  a 

3 6 

3:    7....267.  1. e 
8....269.  2.  a 

12....198. d 

14.... 201. 6 

22....54.3,  218.2.a 

31.... 299. c 

33.... 30,5.  6 

33.... 152.  2 

42.... 71.  a  (1) 

45.... 379.  6 

48.... 148.  2 


INDEX  II. 


415 


50....§2T2.  «> 
52.... 252.  1./ 
53....  53. 3.«,  152.2 
56-C1....266.  1./ 
57.... 302. a 
58.... 160.  1 
61-63.... 3.  1.  a 


1....96.  6,179.3 
3....4.3.  c 
5.... 286.  2.  a 


9. 
14. 

2. 
17. 

5... 

6... 


3.  a 


.m.  C  (2),  122. 
,283 
.237.2,256.2 
.162.5 

288.2.6 

22.... 281.  X.a  (1), 
305.6 


EZEKIEL. 


1:    4 


15.. 
17.. 
20.. 
21.. 

3.. 

9.. 
12.. 


10 


12 


.§  53.  2.  a 
6.... 205.  5.  a 
11....219.  2.  c 
14  ...181.1.a,280. 

3.6 
16.... 267.  1./ 
5....306. c 
10.... 53.  2.  a,  3.  a 
3.... 272.  a 
6.... 305.  «,  308 
..257.  10 
..139.3 
..277.6 
..88(f.  pi.) 
..297.  c 
..54.1,287.3.0 
..201.  a 
..1.59.3 
7....220.  3.  ff 
12.... 219.  1.  6 
13.... 121.  3,  131.  6 
16. ...119.1 
3.... 210.  3.  c 
6.... 148. 4 
7....250. c 
8.... 175.  2 
9....24.C 
11....98.  2,  259.  a 
..296.3.6 
..248.  6.  c 
..205.5.0,285.1 
..141.1,218.2.rt 
..198.  c 
..118.4 
..65.2(2)6 
..167.3 
75.  1,  119.  3 
90  (2m.pl.) 
264. 2  (2)  b 
252.1.c,259.6 
...275.1.  C 
275.  1.  a  (1), 
287.  1.  a 
. . . 120. 2 
.  257.9.6,259.6 
..258.  X.a 
..253.  X.a 
..159.1 
..241.6 
..ll.l.a,  250.  c 
..280.  Z.a 
8-10.... 277.  a 
11.... 299. « 
12.... 300.  b 
13.... 287.  3.  a 
21.... 302. 6 
23.... 245.  2.  6 
25....245.2.a,300.a 


14 
7:  14 
17 
24 
25 
27 
8:     2. 


3. 

6... 
16... 
17... 

2... 

5,7 


11.. 

3.. 

9.. 
17.. 

3.. 

6.. 

7. 


5.. 


25,  28....  §  245.-3.  6 
2.... 209.1.6, 258.1 
3.... 279.  .',302.6 
4.... 248.  6./,  260. 

2.6 
4-7.... 294.  a 
8.... 282.  a 
10.... 287.  3.  a 
10,15,16.... 261. 3.6 
11.... 71.  «(2) 

11,  12 260.  2.  c 

11,  13... .311.  4.  6 
II,  19.... 257.  9.  6 
13-15.... 277- & 
17.... 219.  li 6 
18.... 201.  c  \ 
19  . . . 159. 3 
20.... 24.  6,  71.  o 

(2),  219.  2.  c 
22....279.  e,287.3. 
«,  .302.  c 
1....289.  l.« 
3. ...53.  1.  a,  91. 
6,  c,  119.  1,  281. 
I.ai3) 
4. ...296.  1.  a 
.2.56.  2.  6 
. . .275.  2.  c 
8. ...141. 3 
9.... 277.6 
11.... 267. 1.  f 
13.... 279.  c (2) 
13-15.... 277.  a 
15, 17.... 308.  « 
16,  18,20...  305. a 
18.... 305. 6 
22.... 284.  rf, 289.5. 

«,  296.  3.  a 
3.... 245.  2.  c 
5....104.i 
6,  7.... 277.  6 
4.... 23.  1.  a,  60. 
4.  «,  93.  a,  95.  c, 
121.   1,    126.    1, 
127.   1,    1.51.   5, 
220.  6.  6,  281.  1. 
a  (1),  6,  284.  e 
5.... 87, 95.  a, 111. 

3.  a,  151.  5 
6....  113.4,296.3.0 
7....257.  2.  a 
8, 10.... 99.  2.  6 
15.... 276.  7 
16.... 267.  X.e 
19,  58....  104.  *: 
22.... 86.  6  (2f.) 
27.... 256.  3.0 
28....  127.  1,279.  « 
31....175.  2,  282.0 
32.... 284.  6 
33.... 60.  3.  6  (2), 
120.  1,  246.  1.  a 
.34, ...14.  o,  93.  6 
36.... 91.  6 
50. ...128 

52....  92.(^,219.2.0 
53.... 219.  1.  6 
57...  158.3 

86.  6  (1  c.) 
.275.  1.  c 
.246.  1.  a 
.132.2 
.24.  o 

.168.  2,    193. 
,  218.  2.  a 
.2S5.  2 
..279.  c(l),  e 
.65.6,249.  3. 
6,  298.  1.  a 
15,  18.... 279.  c  (2) 
16.... 305.  a 


17 


21: 


19. 

...§312.2.0 

19, 

20.... 277. 6 

21 

..  284.  (/ 

22. 

...246.1.0,311. 

4.6 

23. 

...88  (f.  pi.). 

257.6.0,289.5.0 

2. 

...267.3.  a 

3. 

...244.6,285.3.0 

4. 

...246.2.  0 

6, 

9.... 269.  l.o 

7. 

...256.3.0,287. 

3.  a 

10. 

...  217.6,253.1. c 

22. 

...299. c 

26. 

...2-20.5.  6 

27. 

...276.  c 

28. 

...276.  rf 

32 

...345.2.0,311.4 

2. 

...198.  (/ 

9. 

...140.4 

16. 

...284. d 

17. 

. .  287.  3.  a 

21 

...65.6 

26. 

...267.  1./ 

27. 

...119.3 

36. 

...91. c 

37. 

...5.3.8.0 

5. 

...285.3.  a 

15. 

...179.1 

15, 

16..  .24.c,93.e 

18 

...121.1 

19 

...252.  l.c,255. 

4.6 

21 

...182.  0 

26, 

28.... 87 

29 

...91.  6,  106.  0, 

126.  1 

31 

...94.  6,  198.  c, 

280.1.  a 

32 

...296.  3.  c 

27: 


28: 


S9: 


32: 


S.2.  6 


59.. 
2.. 
3.. 
5.. 

8.. 

9... 
4, 
12  .. 
14. 
15. 


23: 


24: 


25: 


26: 


27: 


33....111.2.  c 
34.... 87 
4.... 289.  6.0 
18  ...256.3 
20. ...131. 2 
29.... 285.  3.  a 
5. ...111.1 
14.... 257.  8.  c 
16,  20. ...97.  1.  a 
19.... 177. 3 
28.... 301 
42. ...21.  1 
48  ...83.c(2),  152.3 
49....  16.  1,  167.2, 

219.  1. 6 
10.... 199. 6 
11. ...140.1 
12.... 174.  1 
26...  128,191.6 
6.... 57.  2  (3)   o, 
106.  a,  125.    2, 
250.6 
13.... 223. 1.6 
15.... 57.    2  (3)  a, 

282.  a 
2..  ..140.  2,245.1. 

o,  271.C 
3....286.  2.  o 
7.... 257.  2.  a 
9....19.  2.  rf,  220. 

5.  a 
10.... 258. 2 
..113.  1,2 
..248.  6.  c 
..112.  5.  C 
..16.3.6,235.0 
..90  (2  f.  8.) 
..158.3 
..218.  1.  a 
..22.  o 


33: 


34 


35 


36 


15.. 
17.. 
18.. 
21. 
3. 


15.... I  13.0 
17.... 2.95.  rf 
19....24.  c,  93.  * 
23...  !>».  2 
26....104.  0,158.3 
31....11.1.0, 198.rf 
.34.... 278.  4.  a 
35.... 285.  3.  a 
36.... 262.  2.  a 

8...  86.  6  (2  m.) 

9.... 231.  4 
13....  19. 2.  c,  16.3. 4 
14.... 71.  0(2),  258. 

3.  a 

15.... 61. 6,0, 104.6 
16.... 53.  2.  «,  111. 

2.  c,  167.  3 
17.... 170.  o,  174.2 
18....  104.  i,186.6, 

218.  1.  a 
23.... 92.  a 
24. ...139.  3 
24,  26.... 158. 3 
3.... 102.  1.  a 
15.... 168.  5 
18....95.  o 
16... 257.  6.  c 
25. ...112.  3 
2,8,  18....2e 
3.... 140.  5 
5...  11.1.0,  86.6 
8. ...11.  1.0,201 
15.... 93.  c 
15-18  ...266.4.0 
16.... 258.  3.  c 
16....88(f.  pi.) 
18.. ..11.  1.6 
19.... 95.  o,  d 
20.... 89  (f.  8.,  m. 

pi.) 
30.... 233.  a 
32.... 95.  a 
2,3  ...277.  a 
4.... 245.2.0,276.0 
5.... 301 .6,309.2.0 
13...  168.  2 
13.... 220.  5.6 
15.... 269.  2.  a 
29.... 296.  3.6 
30.... 53.  2.  6,  224. 

1.  a  bis 
33.... 312.  2.6 
9.... 248.  6.  d 
12...  252.1.6,284.^ 
14.... 258.  3.  a 
17  ...71.  o(2) 
31.... 71.  0(2) 
6.... 105.  d 
8. ...218.  X.d 
9.... 148.  2 
10.... 284.  d 
11.... 219.  2.  a 
12.... 63.  1.  o,  86. 
6  (3 pi.) 
3....  139.  2,141.  1 
5.... 219.  1.6 
8... 220.  5.  c 
11.. ..163.  5 
13.... 71.  a  12) 
27-31  ...2(7.  a 
28.... 71.  0(1) 
30.... 267.  X.f 
.35.... 73.  2.0 
35,  38....  19.  2.  « 
2. ...112.  3 
2,7,8,  10.... 275. 
1.  a.  (4) 

4,  9.... 248.  6.  d 
7.... 88  (2f.pl.) 
8....261.  3.  6 
9..  ..131.  3 


416 

INDEX   II. 

37:  10....§  131.6 

l:  18.... §312.  2.6 

3:     2....§24.  6 

JOEL. 

11.... 275.  1.  a  (2), 

20...  312.2.  a 

4:     2....280.  1 

286.  1.  c 

2:    1.... 99 .2.  a,  119.1 

4....35.2.a,272.c 

l:    2. ...§231. 4 

17....119.1,224.1.a 

3:    3... .22. 6 

6.... 11.  1.  rt,  104. 

7.... 281.  l.rt  (4) 

28     ..262.  I.  a 

25.... 94.  e 

6,  246.  1.  a 

8.... 257.  9.  6 

38:     2....258.  3.  & 

5:     9.... 205.  5.  c 

11....267.3.«,290. 

9....266.  2.  6 

8.... 163.  4 

8:     1.... 248.  6.  c, 255. 

1.  a 

9,  13... 290.  3 

23.... 96.  6 

2.  6,  297.  a 

12,  13.... 267.  4.  6 

11....248.  6.  6f 

39:     1....258.  3.  & 

5  ...261.3.  6 

13. ...118.  4 

12,  20.... 266.  2.  6 

4.... 257.  2.  a 

6        248.2 

14.... 246.  2.  6 

14. ...311.  1.  a 

9....250.  c 

10  ...311.2 

17.... 281.  l.a(4) 

17.... 24.  6,  192.  rt 

15....  245.  2. «,  289. 

11....  95.  «,  287. 5.6 

18.... 43.  c,  92.  rt. 

20.... 289.  4.  rt 

2.  a 

12.... 272.  6 

123.  1,  149.  3 

2:    1  ...245.  1.  a 

26  ...167.3 

13  ...98.  1.  «,  250, 

5:     2....87,  119.  3 

3.... 269.  1.  rt 

27.... 252.  1.6 

251.  «,  2.52.  1.  6, 

8....286.  2.  6 

5.... 60.   3.  6  (1), 

40:     3.... 168.  4 

256.  3,  311.  4 

11.... 283 

257.  9.  6 

4.... 65.  6,  104.6 

14.... 311.  1.  a 

13.... 249.1.  a, 256. 

6.... 269.  2.  a 

5.... 296.  3.  a 

16.... 73.  2.  a,  232. 

1.  a 

20.... 283.  a 

16....219.  2.  c 

5.  a 

6:     1....276.  <7 

23.... 276.  a 

22.... 253.  2  (3) 

19.... 301.  6 

2....174.  3,  311.  4 

23-27.... 277. 6 

25.... 232.  5.  a 

22.... 88  (3  f.  pi.) 

4.... 283 

26.... 280.    2,   283. 

31.... 252.  \.c 

25....257.  2.  « 

9.... 176.  3 

rt,  299.  c 

41....296.  2.  « 

9:     1,2.... 255.  2.  6 

7:    4....100.a,111.3. 

4:     2....312.  2.  6 

42.... 312.  2.  a 

2.... 160.  1 

«,  160.  3,  198.  c 

4.... 262.  1.  rt 

43.... 19.  2.  c 

4.... 2.'>9.  6,274.6, 

5....258.1.rt,288. 

11. ...91.  d,  131.  1. 

41:     4. ...16.  .3.  b 

294.  a 

2.  fl 

273.  a 

7. ...141.  1 

5.... 275.  1.  «(2) 

6.... 22.  rt,  263.6 

14....296.  2.  a 

9,  11....1H2.  5 

5,  11. ...280.  3.  a 

12.. ..151.  1 

15.... 266.  4.  a 

15.... 219.  2.6- 

6.... 288.  3.  a 

8:     2.... 60.  3.  rt,  289. 

18.... 285.  1 

21.... 257.  6.  c 

11.... 279. e 

5.  C 

22....  262.2,  288.2.C 

13....284. rf 

3. ...105.  rt 

24.... 255.  1.6 

16.... 272.  « 

4....246.1.rt,  266. 

AMOS. 

25.... 19.  2.6 

18.... 16.  3.6 

2.6 

42:     5.... 45.    1,   57.   2 

19....  119. 3, 125.1, 

6. ...311.  c 

1:     4.. ..§284./ 

(2)  «,  111,  2.  6 

273 

12... 88,  308.6 

11....104.€,289.5.<! 

43:     7.  ..284.  d 

21. ...309.  3.  a 

12,  13.... 267.  5.  rt 

13.... 12.5.  2 

13.... 199. 6 

23....262.  2.  obis 

9:     2. ...119.1 

2:     4. ...119.3 

18.... 113.  1 

24..  .284.  e 

4.... 210.  3.  c 

3:    5.... 281.  1.  a  (2) 

20.... 104. j 

25....97.  2.  226,  2, 

6.... 258.  1.  a 

5,  6.... 298.  2 

23.... 279. 6 

272.  «,  287.  5.  a 

9..     283.  « 

11.... 86.  rt,  140.  2 

24....  100.  2.  a  (2) 

26.... 252.  l.d 

10. ...119.  3 

15.... 158.  4 

27.... 179. 3 

10:     1....160.  1 

12....306.  6,  307.  6 

4:     2....167.  2,284.  « 

44:     3....284.  ri 

1,  4  ..  312.2.6 

13.... 279.  c(4) 

3. ...86.  6  (2  pi.) 

19.... 296.  3.  a 

3.... 256.  2.  a 

10:     4....285.  3.  rt 

4....255.4.rt,283.rt 

45:     1....254.  2.  6 

11,  19.... 262.  2.  rt 

5.... 286.  l.c 

5.... 280.  3.  rt 

10.... 270.  1.  a 

14....179,  3,  301 

6....256.1.rt,284.« 

7  ..245.  3.6,267. 

13. ...255.  3.  a 

16, 18.... 244. a 

10. ...105.  d 

4.  rt 

15,  24.... 248.  4 

17. ...51.  2 

11....61.6.rt 

8.... 25.5.  4.  rt 

16.... 249.  3.6,256. 

11:     1....279.  (/ 

12.... 160. 2 

5:     1....287.  4 

3.  a 

4,  10.... 272. 6 

13....61.  6.  rt 

3....2(i0.  1 

46:   13.... 248.  4 

5.... 244.  a 

14....11.].rt,  158.3 

5...  281.  1.  rt(4) 

14.... 255.  3.  a 

6.... 11.  1.6,  249. 

15.... 266.  4.  rt 

6....275.  2.  rf 

17. ...86.  6 

2.6 

11:     2....275.  2.  rt 

7, 8.... 282.  a 

19....249.  3.  6 

10.... 281.  2.  a 

3.... 94.  rt,  132.2 

11.... 92.  6,163.3 

22..   .95.  e 

12....19.  2.  6 

4  ...57.   2  (2)   rt, 

12.... 257.  9.6 

47:     4.... 256.  3 

14.. ..131.  6 

111.2.  d 

15....139..3,275.1.(; 

5.... 267.  l.e 

15.... 312. 2.  a 

7....  179.3,257.9. rt 

19....248.6./,277.a 

7.... 102.  3.  a 

23....96.  ^,  257.2.« 

7,  8   ...  56.  4 

21.... 269.  1.  rt 

8....1G6.  3 

29,  30.... 277.  a 

8.... 298.  l.rt 

21,  25.... 24.  6 

11.... 11.  l.fl,201 

30.... 11.  1.6 

12:     1....104.  ;,  203.  2 

6:     2.... 54.  2,  245.  1. 

15.... 249.  3.  6 

31.... 252.  1.  6 

3....279.  c(4) 

«,257.1.rt,298.2 

16.... 252.  l.c 

34. ...91. 6 

4....288.  2.  6 

8.... 262.  1.  rt 

22....232.  5.  a 

35.... 94.  6 

5.... 105. 6 

8,  9.... 277.  6 

48:  10....39.  4.  a 

36.... 82.  5.  a 

9....  245.  2. 6, 206. 

9.... 306.  6 

14.... 245.  2.  6 

38.... 286.  2.  a 

2.  6 

10.... 245.    1,   279. 

16.... 46 

40.... 126.  1 

11. ...246.  1.  rt 

c(4) 

18.... 219.  1.6 

44.... 198.  d 

12....298.  2.  6 

12.... 245.  2.  6 

12:     2....233.  « 

15....2S8.  2.  e 

7:     1....201.C 

3.... 295. a 

13:     2....257.2.  rt,  9.6 

4.... 262.  1.  rt 

DANIEL. 

6,  7.... 259. 6 

3.... 92.  6 

7.... 309.  l.rt 

13.... 201.  a 

14...   19.  2.  rt,  220. 

17.... 246.1.  rt,  281. 

5.  a 

1.  rt  (5) 

1:    !....§  265.3.a(6) 

15. ,..179.  3 

8:     4....94.6,232.5.rt 

3. ...311.  2.  a 

HOSEA. 

14:     1....88  (3f.  pi.). 

8  ...53.  2.  rt,  3.  rt. 

4.... 258.  3.  c 

211.    1.   rt,   289. 

128 

5.... 267.  1./ 

5.  c 

9:     1....105.rt,125. 1, 

8.. ..119.  1 

1:     2....§258.2,302.a 

3.... 259.   rt,   275. 

245.  2.  rt 

13.... 174.  3 

6.... 283 

2.  c,  287.  4 

2-4.... 267.    1.    d, 

15.... 289.  6.  a 

2:     4....275.  2.  c 

5... 288.  2.  e 

306.  c,  307.  a 

17.... 2.53.   2  (2)  6, 

14  ...104.  «7 

6....272.  rt 

3....277.  rt 

2M.  4.  a 

16.... 220.  7.  a 

10....272.6,  304.  a 

5....276.  « 

INDEX  II. 


417 


9:    8.... §94.  6,281.1,  I 
1.6 
9.... 345.  3.  a 

OBADIAH. 

Ver.  3....§294.  rt 

3,  20.... 257.  2.  a 
4     ..160.    3,   280. 

3.  «,  307.  rt 
6.... 289.  5.  c 
9.... 185.  o 
11  ...19.  2.  a,  45. 

2,  106.  a 
13....  105.6,246.1. a 
16....158.  4,2J9.6, 
281.  1.  c,  302.  6 

JONAH. 

1-.     5....§  114,  266.1. 
c,  276.  a 
10,  16.... 285.  3.  a 
11.... 267.  1./,  281. 

2.6 
14.... 271.  6,274.6 
2.     1....125.  2 
4.... 276.  d 
10...  61.  6.  a 
3:    3.... 257.  5,   264. 
2{2)d 
4.... 309.  3.  a 
4-     1,6...  285.  3.  a 
2....274.6,  283.  rt 
5.... 267.  1./ 
6.... 286.  2.  rt 
11.... 22.  6 

MICAH. 


l:     2.... §256.    2.    6, 
294.  a 
7....92.  c 
8....  151. 2, 153.1, 

271.  rt 
9.... 289.  1.  a 
10.... 53.  3.  rt 
11-16.... 273 
14.... 256.  3.  a 
15.    ..166.2 
16.... 89  (f.  s.,  m. 
pi.),  266.  4.  a 
S:    3....288.  2.  e 
4.... 141.  2,    245. 

3.  rt,  269.  2.  rt 
6....245.  l.«,289. 

6.  a 
7  ...230.  4.rt,252. 

\.d 
8.... 88  (pi.),  2.^7. 

9.6 
11.... 307.  a 
12....92.d,  249.2.rt 
13....266.4.a,276.a 
8:     1... .244.6 
4.... 272.  a 
12.   ..201.   a,  248. 
5,  287.  5.  a 
4:    6. ...153.  2 

8.  ...111. 2.  6,258. 

1.  a 
10.... 160.  2 
10,  13....  159.  2 
18....248.  6.  6 


l....§279.  6 

2.... 266.  1 

7.... 275.  1.  a  (4), 
306 

8.... 272.  a 

6.... 267.  l.e 

8,  13.... 283.  rt 
10.... 57.  2(1) 
12  ...266.  1.  a 
13.... 139.  3 
l:i-15....246.  1.  a 

3.... 297.  6 

4  ...2K4.2(2).(2)C 
10....35\2, 174.  3, 
272.  a  \ 

11,  12.... 252.  2.  C 

12....  245. 2.  6, 288. 
3.  a 

16.... 250.  6 

17.... 257.  9.  6 


NAHUM. 

l:    3.... §13.  rt,  174 

3,217.1.  c,  297.  6 

4....152.  2,  276.  e 

5.... 250.   fl,   258. 

1.  a,  311.  4 
8.... 287.  2.  a 
12.... 140.  2 
13.... 219.  1.6 
2-     1....289.  5.  C 
4.... 219.  2.  C 
6.... 285.  2 
8.   ..245.3.  a 
9.... 89  (m.  pi.), 

219.  1.  a 
11.... 296.  3.  6 
14....219.  2.  c 
3:     5. ...114 

7...  93.  a,289.2.a 
8....148.  4,300.  c 
11....  112.  3,  179.  1 
12  ...277.  a,  306. a 
17.... 24.  6,  143.  1, 
201.  c,  296.  3.  6 


HABAKKUK. 

l:     5....§281.  1.  c 
6...  302.  rt 
8.. ..100.  2.  rt  (2) 

bis 
10.... 199.  6.276-  c 
11     ..73.  l,252.2.rt 
12.... 104. 7 
13.... 126.  1 
15. ...112.2 
16.... 199.  6 
17,... 279.  c(4) 
2-     1,2     ..276.  c 
6....289.2.a,302.6 
7..  ..163.  2 
8.... 293.  a 
10.... 309.  1.  a 
15.... 2.57.  9.6,280. 
3.a.294.a,309.2 
17....  104.  (/,  141.3 
19.... 257.  6.  C,  287. 
5.  a 
3:    2....275.  2.  rt 
3.... 250.  a 
3fE....265.3.  a(4) 
3, 4, 12, 13.... 269. 
2.  a 


3,7,£E....§269.2.c 
6....99.2.rt,276./ 
8.... 256.  3.  a 
9.. ..281.  1. c 
10....  219. 2.  C,  269. 

2.  6 

13.... 280.  2,284.  g 
14  ...267.  1.  6 
15.... 285. 4.  a,  288. 

3.  rt 

16.... 140.  1,  276.  € 
19.... 47 


ZEPHANIAH. 

1:    2. ...§281.  1.6 

3 250.  a 

15.... 296.  3.  6 
17.... 100.  2.  ad) 
2-     1....281.  1. '■ 

2  ...267.  1.  A  bis 

4.... 126.  2 

9.... 219.  1.  c 

12  ...246.2 

13.... 272.  a 

14... 230.  4.  6 

15.... 39.  4.  rt 
3:    7.... 283,  304 

9.... 288.  2.  e 

11...  125.3 

14....89(f  s.),lll. 
3.  a 

18. ...150.1 

19....200,  249.  3.  6 

20.... 279.  d 


HAGGAI. 

l:     1,15.... §255.  2.  6 
4        231.   3,    252. 
1.  6,  297.  a 

2-     5.... 284.  d 
11....287.  2.  a 
15....267. 1.  A 
17 284.  e 


ZECHARIAH. 


6:  14.... §289.  1.  a 
7:     1....255.  2.  6 
2....276.  d 
3.... 280. 2 
5....  102.  2,  104./. 
255.  2.  6,  280.  3. 
rt.  2S1.  1.  a  (3), 
297.  rt 
7.... 295 
9....89(m.  pi.) 
10.... 300.  6 
14  ...45.  5,  60.  3. 

c,  92.  e 
8:    2...  28.5.3 

3.... 277.  6 
6.... 298.  3.  a 
14,  15.... 139.  1 
17. . ..111. 2. e,  284 

d,  300.  6 
23...  271 

9:     5...  35.  2,272.  a, 

275.  2.  6 

9.... 291.  a 

11....297.a 

17.... 295. a 

10:     6. ...153.3 

7....272.a 

11:     4 257.6 

5.... 57.   2   (3)   a, 
104.  (7,  111.  2.  c, 
235.  c,  289.  2.  a 
7.... 224.  1.  a 
8. ...119.1 
10.... 140. 5 
13...  254.4. «,  257. 

2.  a 
17.... 61.  6.  a,  281. 
1.  rt  (5) 
12:     4....248.  3.  a 
7,...267.  1./ 
10.... 280. 3.  a,  300 

a,  301.  6 
11.... 55.  2.  a 
12-14.... 290.  3.  a 
13:     1-6.... 277.  a 
4.... 168.  2 
6.... 285.  3.  a 
14:     2....45.  2,  91.C 
5....201.C 
10  ...158.3,255.1. a 
12.... 289.  2.  a 


1:    2... 


9... 

10... 

13... 

17... 

5... 

8... 

2. 

13-15 

1... 

4... 

7... 

9... 

:     2... 

5... 

7... 

1. 

10... 

a, 

14... 

:    4... 

11... 

,:    6... 


.§285.  3.  a 
.277. 6 
.288.  2.  rt 
.75.1 
.252.  1.  d 
.256.2 
.159.3 
.309.  1.  a 
.73.  2.  a,  25 

e 
....294.  a 

.106.  « 

.280.  3.  a 

.94.  e,  153.  1 

.  205.  5.  a 

.296.  1 

.261. 2 

.249.3.6,252. 

c 

.158.2,  254.4. 

256.  2.  a,  283 

.259.  6 

.158.4 

.162.5 

.250.  a 

.06.6 


MALACHI. 

l:     6.... §248.   6.    d, 
257.  9.  6,   267. 
3,  3.  a 
7.... 106.  a,  127. 

2,  309.  2 

7,  12.... 246.  2 
11.... 95.  a, 245.3.0 
13...  24.  a,  75.  1, 

298.  3.  a 
14.... 54.  1,207.6 
2-     7....245.  2.  6 
13.... 280.1.  rt,  287. 

3.  a 

14...  86.  6(2in.) 
15....  245.2.  rf,  298. 

3.  a 
15,  16.... 277.  6 
16.... 279. 6 
3:     7....275.  2.  C 
9.... 140. 2 
19. ...119.  1 
20. ...158.2 


INDEX    IIL 


HEBREW  GRAMMATICAL  TERMS. 


•Jinst  13. 
tr^nna  nix  7.  1. 
ni^ri«  2. 

n^irn  ni'^nis  7.  3. 
tri'^TrnTB  ni^niji  7.  3. 
sbsn  n-ou  ^n^x  7.  3. 
nrW  31 ! 

aniD  rrabo ''2X  7.3.«. 
nss  n^a  21.  l. 
'i:i:"'2i  85.  1.  a. 
U^T^^  76.  1. 
x^ya  45.  4.  a. 
pm  TSa'l  23.  1. 
bp'tJW  21.  1. 
ny^T.n  ^n  230.  1. 
nbsTsn  xn  231.  l. 
iipirsn  7.  3. 
n^iai  9.  1. 
?f^sn"  Ti  99.  1. 
n:T  198. 
Pi-jn  16.  3.  «. 
pi-i^n  45.  4.  a. 
D::t2  28, 

D^nns  76.  2. 

D"i^^3  71.  c. 


"jiisn  nx  b^nrD  7. 3.  a. 
n'^ns  46 

•'"ip  sbi  n-^ns  46. 
'i^n'i  ]ittjb  201, 
D^nn  "jiffib  201. 
D^.:o  -jiicb  201. 
nij->npr|  nnssnb  24. 
•fi-isia  45.  4.  a. 
naniQ  71.  c. 
nns^ia  214. 
n^V'a  70.  a. 

D^DbTO  28. 
b-'rbis  32. 
ynbip  32. 
nnioia  10.  46. 

p'^E'Q  26. 

nip^  85.  1.  a, 

^pia  43. 

nrbs  nnD  nt::Q  7.  3.  r/. 

ania  44. 

nir53  28.  &. 

ns  16.  2. 

K2^:  71.  c. 

?FT2o;  214. 

-ipo:  71.  c. 


3?3  16.  2. 
nap3  193. 
Di"T^p;  2. 
p^DB  qio  36.  1. 

Tfl^D  214. 

D^iay  28. 

nny  85.  1.  a. 

^^-ly  85,  1.  a. 

xsi-"'  bys  284.  f. 

•'p^bcbX2iiby2  2S4./'. 

"'iirb  i<2ii  bys  284.  /, 

ni2iy  byfe  284.  /*. 

D^bl^S  70.  a. 

•'n^s  85.  1.  a, 

•«np  46. 

n-^ns  xb"!  i-ip  46. 

Hen' 27.' 

■'nnD^  pn  bxw  7. 3.  a. 

sntJ,  X1C  16.  1. 
HDnn  Tx  "i^ibir  7.  3.  a. 
anD3  nnibx  d©  7. 3.  a. 
r\ii2t  70.  «. 
nsorin  ni^©  224.  i. 
nrn  inDsbia©  7.  3,  a. 
W'lsn  12. 


Names  of  the  letters  §  2,  their  signification  §  5.  ft. 
Names  of  the  vowels  §  12,  their  signification  §  12.  6. 
Names  of  the  accents  §  29,  their  signification  §  29.  h. 
Names  of  the  verbal  species  §  76.  1.  2. 
i)esignatious  of  imperfect  verbs  §  76.  3. 


I.  Paradigm.   Personal  Pronouns,  §  71. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL 

1.   I             ^5bN,   ix 

We         WDN,  ^:n5,  ^lix 

fThou  m.  HFiS,    m 

2  J                                               r-'          T- 

iThou/.       m,  ^ri5$ 

Ye      m.  Dins 
•••  - 

Ye     /.    -jns,  npns 

fHe             K^n^ 

They  m.    tan,  n^n 

They/.       -p,  ran 

Suffixes,  §§  72,  101,  219. 


With  Dual  and 
Simple         "VTitb  union  Vowels  of  Verbs    With  Sing.  Nouns        p^^^.  ^ 


1  c.    ^D,"  ^D  ^D  "2    O'J  ) 

• '    •        •-  •"  ••/  \  •-/ 

pl.  ^D  !1D^  !1D^  ^3.. 

1)^.  D  (rj)  D^ ,  D_  n.. 

3  /.  n  n  n  ns 

T                                        T  TV  T» 


D3  OS"' 


Demonstrative,  §  73. 

Masc.  Fern.  Common. 

SixG.  HT  (^7)    n^^7  (iT ,  riT)  f/iie.  Plub,  b.s ,  ri-^k  tJiese, 


Relative,  §  74. 
aiK  who  or  which ;  abbreviated  form  •  ^  (•  IS ,  Tfl ,  ti) 


Interrogative  and  Indefinite,  §  75. 
"•fi  who?  or  whoever.         TV2  (TV2^  TV2)  wMt?  or  i-JuiteDer. 


l^7.faJ.     t'lM^aMr^'f^M 

i!r/W^. 

KAL.               NIPHAIj.                PIEL. 

PUAIi. 

Pret. 

8  m. 

^^1? 

^t:p5 

btjp 

bt:p 

(Pebf.) 

3/. 

^^^P. 

nbtopD 

nbtop 

^^^P 

2  m. 

r^^^P 

J^bbpD 

nbtop 

nbt?]^ 

2/ 

i^bbi? 

ribpp? 

I^btop 

ribtop 

1  e. 

*^r?b^P 

^ribDipD 

^nbisp 

^nbtsp 

Flur. 

3  e. 

^^^P. 

^^^P? 

iibtap 

JibtDi; 

2  m. 

t^n^^P 

DP}bt:p? 

Dnbtap 

Q^^t^p 

2/. 

l^^^P 

I'^^^P? 

lii]b^P 

"R^^P 

1  c. 

^bp^ 

^sbbp? 

^3btop 

^5b^p 

Infin. 

ahsol. 

bibi^ 

btipn 

btip 

btap 

constr. 

b-rii. 

^^pn 

^^P 

(^top) 

Fdt. 

3  wi. 

^^p! 

^t?p: 

biap": 

btop-; 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

btbppi 

bi?.pn 

-i^pJ\i 

b^pn 

2  m. 

bt2i:ri 

bt?pr^ 

-fepi\^ 

b^pin 

2/. 

^^^pp? 

•    :  liT  • 

"'btspn 

"{Jtopri 

1  e. 

^bp^ 

bi:px 

••  It  V 

^T^P^ 

%i< 

Flur. 

3  m. 

*i^t2p: 

sibt:p^ 

sibtap": 

^^^p: 

3/. 

riDbtii^n 

nsbtJi^n 

n;bt:pn 

nsbi^pn 

2  W. 

^btpi^n 

^bi:pn 

:  liT  • 

sibi2pn 

sibtopn 

2/. 

rijbbpn 

T  :      ';    • 

riDbbpn 

T  :    "It    • 

riDbispn 

T  :  ••!-    : 

n:b^pn 

1  c. 

-'^P? 

^^P5 

^^p3 

bio^D 

Impeb, 

2  m. 

btip 

^t^pn 

btsp 

2/. 

^bt:p 

''bt^pn 

•    :  I'T  • 

^^^p 

riur. 

2  m. 

^btpp 

^^t:pn 

iibtsp 

wanting 

2/. 

n:btDi^ 

riDbbpn 

t:     -It    • 

nDbiDp 

T  :  •••- 

Past. 

act 

^^p 

^^p'9 

pass. 

b^it215 

^^P5 

^i;a 

v^'a^ 


te^L! 

'tMEl 

•  ij;ijLi,r.ifue 

HIPHIli. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

KAL  (»ti(i,  c). 

KAL  (»lfd.  o). 

^■ppn 

"^Pri 

b"^pr^n 

ni3 

••    T 

bri: 

T 

nb-tbpn 

nbtppn 

nbtapnn 

T    ;  IT 

nbDTT 

T  :   tT 

r.b"jpn 

nbt:pn 

T  :    -  ':    r 

nbi^pnn 

T    :  -  T 

nbb'i 

T  :       T 

i^t^pn 

ribppn 

nbibpnn 

nb'i"^ 

^p^^i?n 

Tibbpn 

•  :    -  ':    T 

\"'nbibpnn 

•   :  -  T 

^nb'DTi: 

^b^iipn 

'i^t:pn 

'  ^brsprirj 

;  IT 

^bs-ij 

:    IT 

Ui:ibt:pn 

Dnbt:pn 

V  ;    -  • :    T 

Dnbtipnn 

^^1^? 

(Dnb^'^) 

l^r^P^ 

li^.^ppn 

■jpb^pnn 

ftl^? 

(1^^5^) 

^:^-^)?n 

^Sbtipn 

ii^btapnn 

:  -  T 

iijbiir 

:       T 

^fei?n 

^^^pn 

(btipnri) 

T 

bii^ 

T 

b-i?pn 

bi:pn 

^^pr>n 

n'da 

bbiz: 

^'Pi?- 

^^Pr 

^^pt]^": 

"'^?": 

bs'^: 

b-ppii) 

^^PJ? 

^^pj?i^ 

lisn 

bitr\ 

b^PifP) 

biipn 

^t?pr^ri 

"1^??? 

b^irn 

"b^^ipn 

'^^ir^^ 

^bt2pnn 

"i::!?!? 

^b^irn 

b^ppj? 

^^P^ 

b^n« 
^bfpri': 

^^?^ 

bstN 

^bT:p: 

^^^p: 

^^^?: 

^b^ia^ 

HDbDpn 

DDb^pn 

T  :    - •:    T 

rijbiapnn 

n:-aDri 

n:b3'j:n 

sib^bpn 

iibtapn 

^biapnn 

siinDn 

^bsirn 

rijbtjpn 

rijbbpn 

T  :  -':    T 

n:b^pnri 

T   :  -  :    • 

JljbS'iTl 

T  :  -   :    • 

b^P= 

bbpD 

bt?Pf;^? 

-I3S3 

bi'9? 

i5bpn 

^^pon 

ni? 

^b^t?pn 

^^^pf^n 

^"1^3 

iibTbpn 

wanting 

^bt^pnn 

siins 

njbtbpn 

npbiopnn 

na^ia 

bibp53 

^pr^23 

^^pa 

in.  Paradigm  of  the  Perfect 


Singular. 
1  com.        2  masc.        2  feni.        3  masc.  8  fern. 


Kal  Preterite  or  Perfect. 

siNQ.  3  masc.     ^d5d)^      ^bx^i^  t^x^'i)     ^T^^xip)  n5t:p 

8 /em.     ^:5n5t:;:    i^^^^l?  ^rj^^i?   ^!^t^^9Pl  ni^5t:p 

nnbt:p  J  ijnbt:]^  j 

2 /em.    ^rnbt:p5      sin^Fibt;p|  n^nbttjp 

rnbtpp  j 

1  com.      —     ^i^nbpp  "q'nbpip    rnbt:p  n^nbt:]:? 

plub.  3  com.      ^3^bt:p     :|^bt:p  -rj^brip    ^n^br^p  »v^^t:p 

2  masc.    ^I^Flbpp        ^H^nbpp  H^PI^tip 

—      !?i^ibpp  "^^iibpp  ^n^Dbt:p  n^i^tap 


1  com. 


INFLNITIVB.  ^^Pi^l         ^^^P  ^??'^Ii  "i^Pl?  ribpp 

^Dbapj 


FuTimE  OR  Imperfect. 

SiNQ.   3  masc.      ■'Dbtpp^l  ^^^P^  |  ^??PP1    ^S^^^PP"!}  H^PPV 

^sbti|^':J  ,^bt:p";/  'isbpp^j  nrbtsp-. 

Plub.  3  masc.    ^D^btpp^  ^^b'jp^  tj^^Pp^    ^n^bpp";  Pl^btpp^. 

Imperative. 

Sisa.    2  masc.        "Sbt^p         rtt2p  tlbap 


PiEL  Preterite  or  Perfect. 
Sing.   8  masc.        ^Dbl^p         TjbtSp  '?]bt2p  IbtSp  t^lbtSp 


HiiHiL  Preterite  or  Perfect. 

siNo.  3  masc.  "Db^Dj^n  ?|b't:;:n    T^b^ppn  ib^pipn     nb^ttpn 


Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  101. 


1  com. 


2  masc. 


Plural. 
2  fern. 


3  masc. 


3  fern 


JD^tap 


^3rb^I^ 


!irnbt:p 


D5bttT5  ]bb^^         D^^I^  lbt:ip 

Dirbt:]:       l^.r^^^I?       ^'^^^i?       I'^^^i? 


?3^bt:p 


Drpbt:]: 
Di^ibtop 


■jrpbpi: 


DD^jbtip 


■iirjbt:p 


D^nbpjp 

D^nbt^i: 
D^]bt:p 


5obt2p 


^35t:i5  — . 


cbpi^ 


!lDbtSp  DbbtSP  -|D 


D^ribt:p      rnbpp 


■,*bpi^ 

■,^bt:ip 

■,^ribt:|: 

",^ibt:p 


DDbtij^         "(ibtaip         Dbtpi^         -jbtDi^ 


*9p:\     o^V^i?"^      l^.r^i?'      °??^i?' 

^j^bipp":        DD^bt:j:':       li^bt:,::       D^bt:]:-:       i^ibtpp'; 


Dbtap  "btfip 


5QVPi?n     o=^'^i?n     ir-^'^i?n    D^'^i?n     iV^i?n 


IV.  Pa 

RADIGM  OF  Pe  GuTTURAL  VeEBS,  §  108. 

^y?^^^>yvu£ 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIi.     KAL  (fut.  a) 

pRET.     3  m. 

it:^ 

ibs:i 

n^ryji 

T!25n 

pi^ 

(Pkrf.) 

3/. 

nii2:^ 

ni7^2?3 

tT:'^2:^'n 

711-2:?^ 

T    :  T  IT 

2  »n. 

T   :   -  T 

T\T2-J: 

rrP2yT: 

T    :  -:•:  iv 

nT!:^n 

2/ 

riTjy 

mi:?D 

m:!:yn 

Pi72:5?n 

:    :  -  t:  IT 

1  c. 

•   ;  ~  T 

^riT^yn 

^riTb^n 

^pnb^n 

P/wr.    3  c. 

:  IT 

^n/j:?] 

inrh^n 

;  T  IT 

2  m. 

nriiw 

Dni7J3?D 

ani^jrn 

ur\ii2'jn 

2/ 

]tW.. 

l^T-^^S- 

■jFiT^yr! 

■jFii^yn 

1  c. 

:  -  T 

^^Tr.??. 

^3T^?.vl 

S   -  t:  IT 

Ikfin.  ^6soZ 

rc'2s 

T 

T    !•• 

ntjyn 

••  t:  it 

Cowsfr. 

n'r? 

••  T     1" 

•  -:  r 

-t:  it 

FuT.       3  m. 

-I2i2?,: 

..  X  •■ 

^hT 

pio: 

(Impf.) 

3/ 

Tt^n 

i"'-??,!;] 

ligyn 

piC;^. 

2  m. 

■'53?.?! 

■•  T    1" 

i^52?n 

Tbn 

Piri? 

2/ 

^i/jyn 

•   :  IT   •• 

^iTj3>n 

^larn 

^f?Tnn 

1  c. 

")"5::?wS 

152  ^i< 

1'^?^ 

-t:  it 

ptn5< 

P/wr.   3  m. 

^rzs^ 

:  IT" 

•  -ir» 

:  TIT 

*i^:. 

3/. 

T   :      -;  r 

T    ;  ••  T  1" 

T  :  •■  -:  1- 

•^?T^?:^ 

n:p!nn 

2  WJ. 

^i:jyn 

siiryn 

•  -;    1- 

;   r    IT 

^PJ^P) 

2/ 

n^Tb^n 

T    :  •■  T  I" 

T   :  ••  -:  1- 

T    :    -  t:  IT 

nDpinn 

ir. 

'^''2?p. 

■•  Tl" 

1'^??- 

-  J-JT 

pTTO 

Imper.    2  m. 

152? 

i52>n 

^hsri 

pin 

2/. 

^i"9? 

^T^i^n 

'1'535n 

wanting 

^fein 

P/wr.    2  m. 

^i52y 

;  IT  •* 

^i'^^?ri 

SipTH 

2/. 

T  :       -: 

T   :  ••  T  1" 

n;"t:?n 

napin 

Part.    Act. 

ni35 

rts^2 

Pass. 

T 

^n 

ntr^ 

'pvcy^ 


V.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Gtuttueal  Verbs,  § 

116. 

'^r  AxcLtJyXAyf' 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAIi. 

HITHPAKL. 

PuET.      3  m. 

bka 

bti:3 

bK3 

bxa 

bkann 

(Perf.)      ^ 

nbi^a 

nbj^sD 

^b^<s 

nbi<a 

T    ~'.     ' 

nbi^ann 

2  m. 

pbs<3 

nbs^D 

nbxa 

nbi<a 

T  :   - 

nb^ian^ 

2/. 

nbsa 

nb>ijD 

ribi?a 

r}bi<3 

nbi^ann 

1  c. 

^nbi^a 

'TibxjS 

^nbxa 

•^nbka 

"nbikann  I 

Tlur.    3  c. 

^bx3 

^bH33 

^bi^a 

^bi^a 

^bi^ann 

2  m. 

Dinbsa 

Dfnb!JC»3 

Dinb^a 

Dnb^a 

Dnb^^ann 

2/ 

l^bssi 

li!)b5<:o 

lii)b«3 

lP)bt?a 

-jnlpi^ann 

1  c. 

^3bxj? 

!iDbi<a 

^bxa 

iiDbi^ann 

Ikfin.  4&S0/. 

bii^a 

bs^n 

bxa 

Comtr. 

bs3 

"  T       ♦ 

bka 

••  T 

^^^t^n 

FuT.       3  m. 

bkT 

bNa"* 

b^<J.■' 

bi<T 

bj^ant 

••  T  :  • 

(Impf.) 

^              3/ 

bk^T\ 

bssn 

bxr^n 

bsari 

b^ann 

8  m. 

bi^jTi 

bKsn 

bi^^n 

bi<an 

bi<ann 

2/. 

^b^jVi 

^bu^sn 

^bi^^n 

^bwn 

^b^iann 

1  e. 

bX35< 

bssx 

bs^ii 

bi<ay; 

b^^an« 

Plur.    3  m. 

^bs:^ 

!ibj<r 

^bytai 

^b«a^ 

iib^an^ 

-:iT  :  • 

3/ 

nDbs:;n 

nDbxsn 

nDbxsr 

nsbkarn 

nDbxann 

T  ;  -  T    t     • 

2  m. 

^b^^3n 

^bxsn 

sibi^an 

^biiin 

^bi^ann 

-:rr   :     • 

a/- 

n:b.s3n 

nDbk5n 

nibs^ri 

n:b5^an 

n3bt<ann 

1  e. 

bi<3.5 

"  T  • 

b5<:a 

•*t: 

-    : 

bxans 

••  T    ;  • 

Impee.    2  m. 

biks 

bi^sn 

b^a 

••  T 

bi<ann 

••  T    :    • 

2/. 

^bs3 

•^bxsn 

-bsa 

wanting 

^b^ann 

Plur.   2  w. 

iibi^a 

!lb^^Ii^ 

^bxa 

iibsann 

2/ 

n:bsa 

T  ;    -  ; 

nDbxsn 

T  :   -  T   • 

^;b^5a 

T  :   -  T 

n3bi<ann 

Pabt.    Act 

bK3 

bi^sa 

bxan^ 

Pass. 

b!ij<5 

T 

bx:3 

T          J 

VI.  Paradigm  of 

Lamedh  Guttural  YERBfi 

,  §  123. 

^t/>^ 

KAL. 

NIPHAIi. 

PIBL. 

HIPHIL. 

HITHPAEU 

Pret.     3  n». 

-     T 

nbTS3 

r^bic 

^'^^n 

nbriTcn 

(Perf.)       ^ 
^              3/. 

nnbTD 

T  :   IT 

nnbisD 

T  ;    ;  • 

nnbTT 

T  ;     • 

nn"bT2jn 

T    "    :    - 

nn^nirn 

2  m. 

nnbir 

T    ;  ~    ;  • 

nnbTi: 

T  :  -    • 

nnbirn 

nnbniEn 

2/. 

rinb^ 

nnbiDD 

nnbic 

nnbirn 

tnnbnian 

1  e. 

•   :  -   T 

■^nnbts 

^nnbia 

^nnbiiJn 

^nnbntn 

Vlw.    3  C. 

iinbis 

:  IT 

iinbir? 

sinbia 

!in^birn 

^nbnTrn 

2  m. 

DrnbTD 

Dnnb^D 

nfnnbirn 

DfnnbPiJDn 

a/. 

1  c. 

"innbi? 
sisnbTT 

■jt^ribTrri 
iisribirri 

■(innbriipn 
^Dnbnujn 

Infin.  Ahsol. 

nibib 

—              T 

n"bc5 

n^^ 

nb^n 

Constr. 

rbiD 

nbiijn 

-     T     • 

nbip 

H'V^'n 

nbnirn 

•  FuT.       3  m. 

ritt': 

nbis': 

nb'fl^ 

^^^^!! 

nbniT": 

flilPF.) 

3/. 

nbirn 

~      T      • 

nbisn 

n^birn 

nbnirn 

2  m. 

nbTcn 

nbirn 

-      T      • 

nbirn 

n^bicn 

nbnirri 

2/ 

^nbirr? 

^nbTsn 

^rktr\ 

^n^b^n 

•^Jibnirn 

1  c. 

nb^ti 

'^^^!? 

r^m 

n^bir^^ 

nbn-j:^ 

P/wr.   3  m. 

iinbTr": 

iinbis^ 

^nr^l 

sin^b^^ 

^Tibri;!?': 

3/. 

n^ribirn 

riDrib^n  i 

ijiii'^r} 

riDnbirn 

T     •   -      ;      - 

nDnbn^n 

2  m. 

^hbirn 

sinbirn 

:    iT    • 

Jinbirn 

sin^bTrn 

^nbn^^n 

2/ 

nDr^birn 

nDnb^rn 

riDnbn^n ! 

T  :  -   -   :    • 

1  e. 

nb'iT? 

nb^D 

"      T  • 

nb^TD 

^^^'^? 

nbnifl? 

Imper.    2  m. 

mbifl 

nbTsn 

~      T      • 

nb^: 

nbirn 

nbnirn 

2/. 

iib^ 

"nbTrn 

^bT? 

••n^bTrn 

^nbnTDn 

P^Mr.   2  m. 

iinbia 

^nb^n 

sinbUD 

sin^birn 

iinbnirn 

2/. 

HDnb^ 

njnbUJn 

T  :  ~   T    • 

nDnbib 

T   :  -    ~ 

nrnb^'H 

T  :  -    :   - 

HDnbrnrn 

T  :  -  -   :    • 

Part.  Act. 

nb'Ts' 

nbTT^j 

n-'bica 

-      •     5     — 

ribn^^g 

Fass. 

~               T 

nb-^D 

1 

vn. 

Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  129 

1 
1 
1 

KAL. 

NIPHAIi. 

HIPHIL 

HOP  HAL. 

KAIi. 

Pret.      3  W. 

1233 

^^5 

ifl^^n 

'can 

•P5 

2  m. 

T  :rr 
T    :  -T 

n^33 

T  ;  • 
T   :  -  • 

T       •       • 

mriin 

T    :  -    • 

mran 

T    :  -    \ 

nh: 

T      -T 

2/. 

n^ia 

niraD 

:    :  -• 

ririin 

:    :  '    • 

n'i'in 

1  e. 

^nt'jz 

^r}ira3 

^riirin 

""nnD 

Flur.    3  c. 

:iT 

iiizjas 

Jiui^^n 

:    \ 

2  m. 

Di^^'5? 

DtntBD 

nnirsn 

Drri-an 

Dnns 

2/. 
1  C. 

1  V    :  -   \ 
:  -   \ 

-T 

Ikfin.  ^6so?. 

T 

T      • 

^ran 

^'^rj 

Iih3 

Co«s?r. 

r>T?^ 

izjisn 

"T      • 

•c^an 

jnn 

Fur.        3  m. 

irr 

•T   • 

ir^i;; 

lii): 

(lilPF.)            . 

ir^n 

Tzj^in 

ujan 

l^^pi 

2  m. 

■©in 

ir^in 

iran 

",nri 

2/. 

^■izjBn 

^tosn 

•^ir^an 

^TTSn 

^inn 

1  e. 

•x^^ 

••  r    V 

ir^i;^5 

ujas; 

■jn« 

Fhir.    3  m. 

iiirr 

:iT  • 

^iij^r 

^t^^ 

iiin^ 

3/ 

ns^sn 

nsirin 

(^inn) 

2  m. 

^t:2D 

iiizirisn 

^izj^an 

Jiican 

^inn 

2/. 

n;iran 

T    :  "T    • 

niiriin 

T   :  •■    - 

riDTran 

(nsjnn) 

1  e. 

TTSD 

irij3 

"T  • 

ir^3] 

u:a3 

1^3 

Imper.    2  m. 

Tzia 

••T     • 

Trin 

1^ 

2/. 

''b'a 

•  :iT  • 

^ip^in 

wanting 

4n 

P/jtr.    2  t». 

^izj'3 

^■o^an 

?6n 

2/. 

riDTra 

T    :  - 

r    :  ■•  T    • 

T    ;  ■•    ~ 

(n|n) 

Part.  J^cf. 

Tiib 

t^i:^ 

1^3 

Pass. 

T 

T2-13 

T  • 

iraa 

1^^5 

VTTT. 

Paradigm  op  Ayin 

^  ,--2,*/l.'-V'l-«r»-H^*^?S 

KAL. 

KIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

Pret.     3  m. 

nno 

no 

noD 

-T 

nnio 

(Perf.)       ^ 

nniiD 

nmb 

T    " 

nnoD 

T  -T 

nnnio 

T  :      1 

2  m. 

(J^^c) 

T 

nnnio 

T  :  - 

2/. 

(i^^^c) 

niiD 

ninDD 

nnnio 

:  t  - 

1  e. 

•   :   -  T 

•^niiiD 

"ni^pD 

^nnnio 

Plur.   3  c. 

:  IT 

iisp 

iinnio 

2  m. 

(DfnnnD) 

DhinD 

DninpD 

Dfnnnip 

2/. 

(IPlt-?) 

l^i'sp 

"l^'i^P? 

innnio 

1  c. 

:  ~  T 

sisinp 

ilSiilpD 

siDnnio 

Infin.  J.ftsoZ. 

niio 

T 

nb 

nibn 

nnio 

Consfr. 

inD 

sb 

^pn 

nnio 

FuT.       3  m. 

T 

nb: 

±. 

^io" 

(IMPF.)     ^^^ 

abn 

nbn 

nbn 

nnion 

2  m. 

nbn 

T 

ibn 

npn 

nnion 

2/ 

"nbFi 

•            T 

^iDri 

^npr) 

^inion 

1  c. 

nb>5 

T 

V 

np^ 

^^"ic?^ 

P/itr.    3  m. 

iinb' 

T 

JiiD^ 

sinp: 

iinnic"^ 

3/. 

nDnbn 

T  :       • 

nanbn 

T  :  -    • 

HDnnion 

2  tn. 

^sbn 

T 

iiisri 

sinbn 

iinnion 

2/. 

T     V  ■•.   : 

nsnbn 

T  :        • 

nsnbn 

T  :  -    • 

HDnnion 

T  :  ••          : 

1  c. 

nb] 

T 

nb? 

np3 

^5iD3 

Imper.  2  m. 

nb 

nbn 

nnio 

2/ 

%t 

^nbri 

^nnio 

P/«r.    2  m. 

iinb 

iinbn 

sinnio 

2/ 

T 

'^5 

ronbn 

T  :  -    • 

njniio 

Part.  ^cf. 

^ib 

saio7^ 

Pas«. 

T 

noa 

TT 

10 


DoxjBLED  Verbs,  §  133. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

PIBIi. 

non 

nsc^n 

T    - 

niincn 
nniinon 

T  :      1    :    • 

^P?P 

T   ;    :    • 

niiicn 

nniincn 

T  :  -          :    • 

n±5o 

T  :        :    • 

niiicn 

raiincn 

ri?p?? 

"niiipn 

"nniincn 

^=i?n 

sap^in 

^isincn 

^DDpp 

D^ison 

Dnnninon 

DJi)PPPP 

^3^3cn 

■jinnsirrn 

nnincn 

^P?P 

ncn 

np^i" 
nc^n 
npsin 

nnino: 
niinon 
niincn 
"isincn 

■qp??"; 
■^IP^crn 

tjP^pri 
"ppspn 

^c^ 

^3?: 

niinoijj 
siiniPiD" 

TjpDp^i 

^DDpP" 

^r^?^ 

riDniincn 

T  :  ••           :     • 

nssbscn 

^sbn 

sGb^in 

^sincn 

^Dpippn 

HD^scn 

nsniincn 

nDib::Dn 

^?5 

nc^3 

niinoD 

TjpDpD 

son 

wanting 

niincrj 

"nninon 
iiininon 

■^iP^P 
^iWp 
ilDOSp  1 

nr^cn 

nsniinprj 

n;^PDP 

=ip.^ 

T 

nnino^a 

t^pDoa 

Tbi>i.z^ 


11 


IX.  Pae 

ADIGM  OF  AyIN  VaV 

^ -a^Si^*^  yVt'^Ut. 

KAL. 

NIP  HAL. 

PIBL. 

PUAIi. 

Pret.     3  m. 

(Perf.) 

3/. 

Dt5 

D'jip 

n7jrip 

Dhip 
n^-jip 

2  m. 

T\-)2p_ 

ni7j^p3 

r!7j7jip 

n7:tiip 

2/ 

^'^P 

riTb^p? 

nri^ip 

Tp2J2^p 

1  c. 

"ri^fe 

^ntb^ps 

"PJ'-^-bip 

"riiabip 

Plur.   3  c. 

^^1? 

il7jip3 

ii7b52ip 

iib-^ip 

2  m. 

urp2j) 

nhiisipD 

ntr2i2ip 
...  ■  -  'i 

Dni27^ip 

if- 

tP^ 

■|^i-jip3 

■;ri7:7Jip 

tf=P^ 

1«. 

mp_ 

iiaib^p; 

si:atip 

siDa^ip 

Infin.  J.&SO/. 

Dip 

cipn 

Constr. 

D^p 

Dipn 

Dt?ip 

Put.       o  w. 

0*: 

Dip: 

D'^'ip'; 

Dtip^ 

(Impf.) 

D^^n 

Dipn 

Di]ipri 

D-bipn 

2  m. 

D^fn 

DipFl 

Dtipri 

D72ipn 

2/ 

^SD^pn 

••aipn 

'7b7;ipri 

^^9ipn 

1  e. 

D^pSl 

Dip« 

DbipS!^ 

Dbipx 

Plur,    3  w. 

!)r^ip; 

si7jij5': 

^i^'ip^ 

sib-^ip-; 

3/. 

np^-b-pn 

n;7;i]5n 

nj:2"i;ipri 

nD7:i5ipn 

2  »w. 

ii-::^i:n 

si7jipn 

ii^aipn 

^'-■^"ipi? 

«/ 

nj^ib^pn 

n57^ipn 

nsTsiQipn 

n:73-^ipn 

1  e. 

D^PD 

Dip? 

citsip? 

Dbips 

Imper.   2  m. 

n-^p 

Dipn 

D7bip 

2/. 

^7^^p 

^7:ipn 

^^'^■ip 

wanting 

P/i(r.    2  wi. 

*i^2^p 

si73ipn 

ii7:7;ip 

P       ^' 

T    : 

HD'^ipn 

n37j^jip 

Part.    Act. 

Dp 

DbipTa 

Pass. 

n^p 

Dips 

DtipTS 

12 


AND  Ayin  Yodh  Vekbs,  §  154. 

HIPHIIi. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPABL. 

KAL, 

£Vvv&M^ 

ci"f?n 

Dp^n 

Dtiipnn 

T 

, 

n^'fen 

n?bp^ri 

nbi2ipnn 

T   T 

r!tb^i:n 

(nap^n) 

r^j^bipnn 

T    ;   - 

nih^-i 

niri'pn 

(pxfp^n) 

n:rbipnn 

p^i 

^nii^-'pn 

(^n-^.^n) 

"riT^bipnn 

^rj^i 

^nin^-) 

^"^^V.^. 

^iap^n 

Tbi:iprin 

T 

sQ^n 

nniTj^pn 

(Dn^p^n) 

Dn^riipnn 

^^^'^ 

"fi^"-^K 

(i^'?p^ri) 

•pnia-^ipnn 

■jnnn 

!i3i7b"pn 

(^rjp^n) 

iis^jtipnn 

siDni 

Dl^n 

ai-i 

^^^. 

D^fen 

i±ipnn 

r^ 

D-'fe: 

Dpv 

O'^.'ipf;^! 

•T 

Dt>i=3 

Dp^n 

DiQiprp) 

Tin 

D^pn 

Dp^n 

Dtiipnn 

•    T 

"^^pn 

rbp^in 

^iD^^iprn 

•         •    T 

Dt.55 

Dp!i« 

Dt;ipni^ 

•    T 

^^^p: 

^^P^: 

^i27:]ipn^ 

SQ^i^ 

nj':?pr) 

(ns^jp^n) 

nj^7bipnn 

HDinn 

T   :  ••    T 

JDj^pn 

^bp^n 

iib^ipnn 

'     T 

nT2br\ 

T   :'••   T 

(ns-cp^n) 

nDrbipnn 

rijinn 

T   :  ••   T 

DT5 

Dp!l3 

D^ipn] 

•t 

cpn 

nripnn 

^■"] 

-'a'pn 

wanting 

rj-jipnn 

"^^i 

ii7JT;n 

si:j52ipr;^n 

!Q^^ 

T    :'••   T 

HDTf^ipnn 

(n::^^) 

I 

D'i?^ 

np^^ 

oiipn^s 

T 

13 


X. 

Paradigm  of  Pb  Yodh  Verbs,  §  144 

• 

±t^ 

KAL. 

NIPHAL, 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAIi. 

KAIj. 

Pret.      3  m. 
(Peef.) 

T    :iT 

T    :     1 

T         • 

nizj^n 

8  m. 

T    ;    -T 

nniziin 

T   :    - 

T   :  -T 

«/• 

:    :    -  T 

P!n-i:i3 

nnujin 

nnir^n 

1  e. 

•   :   "T 

^nn-iijis 

^nnizjin 

•^nniij^in 

•    :  "T 

Plur.    3  c. 

:iT 

iQiris 

sQ^izjin 

^Toi^n 

2  m. 

DraTT"' 

DinniriD 

Dnniijin 

Qnira^ 

if- 

|JD?^: 

ife^^*^? 

IPi^^in 

innTT^n 

1^^^"! 

1  e. 

siDiiiiJiD 

ii3niz:in 

siDnTT^in 

ilDlZJn^ 

:  ~T 

Infin.  Absol. 

T 

niD'in 

T 

Constr. 

^^^ 

"T      • 

n^icin 

aia^n 

Trn"; 

FuT.       3  m. 

(I^PF.)     g^_ 

••T  • 

nizi^n 

n"iz:r 

2  m. 

^^JD 

••T       • 

a^icin 

aib^n 

Tfli^n 

2/. 

^nu:^n 

"n^^in 

"'iTzj^n 

^'^'^i) 

1  c. 

^^:^ 

a^iriK 

n2;^5< 

;sTSi 

P/ur.    3  m. 

SQTSr 

sii^Tai'' 

^ilZJ!!^ 

siizjr;: 

3/ 

T  :    ••  T    • 

riDn-din 

T   ;    - 

T    :  ~      • 

2  m. 

:   r* 

^iTTiin 

iia^ic'in 

^i-oi^n 

iitjn^rn 

if- 

T  :    -   •• 

HDi-izJin 

T  :    - 

T    ;   -      • 

1  c. 

^^5 

"T  • 

n^iziia 

aia^D 

1151^5 

Imper.    2  m. 

^^ 

"T      • 

nibin 

•©i": 

2/. 
P^Mr.    2  w. 

wanting 

2/. 

T  :    •• 

nsri^jn 

T   ; 

^5^^: 

Paet.  ^cfc 

aTS"« 

aibi^a 

-iSZ" 

Pa5». 

T 

2%i: 

n"o^^ 

T 

1 


u 


XI.  Paradigm 

OP  Lam 

EDH  Aleph  Verbs, 

§  164.        1 

n>  'T^y^-^OL 

KAL 

NIPHAIj. 

PI  EL.. 

HIPHIL. 

HITHPAEL.     1 

Pret.    3  in. 

(Pbrf.) 

^             3/. 

T     T 

T  :   IT 

T     ;     • 

T      •    :    • 

8  m. 

T       T    r 

T       *'    :  • 

T            "      • 

nj^k'^n 

n5<k-2nn 

T               •     -      »       • 

«/• 

T     T 

f^^'^? 

t^mp2 

f^>5k-^n 

nsk'^nn 

1  c. 

•          T     T 

•^rj^ka 

^nj^r^n 

•^ri^r^nn 

Plur.   3  c. 

:   IT 

^N^rra 

'^ii-q 

^^'kan 

iiss^^nn 

2  m. 

T    : 

t3ini<rj3 

tibi!^%'2 

df;iss:';n 

D^srjnn 

2/. 

•|nsrj 

■R^^?5 

1^><"4^ 

ini^::^;^ 

■jfix-^-^rin 

1  c. 

T    T 

^DS^k'^? 

ii:«ri2 

^^^k'^n 

sij^ii-^nn 

iNFm.  Afcso/. 

T 

&<ro3 

m'2 

J^^n 

Constr. 

5<ik^ 

"     T      • 

m'2 

j^-r^n 

Nk^:^n 

FuT.     3  m. 

(Impf.) 

3/. 

T  :  • 

••      T  • 

••   r    * 

••  - : 

•    :- 

2  w. 

••     T      • 

^k^T^ 

fc^-rcn 

fcik^nn 

2/ 

"Nr:n 

^5<i::i2n 

^k-im 

T^'^p) 

^Ni^^ann 

1  c. 

T   :  V 

••     T    V 

^kjri^. 

K^iaj5 

^^^r!!!< 

P^wr.  3  m. 

si5<ri': 

:   IT  • 

ilJiS^: 

^5<^i/J^ 

^'3.-^2t^^ 

3/. 

T         .•     :      •            T        V    T     • 

ns^kisn 

riDid^^n 

T       .•  -  :    • 

2  m. 

iii^r^n 

:  IT    • 

iiiis::ari 

iiu^^k'^n 

sa<2i^rin 

2/. 

T         V     :      •             T         V     T      • 

nsi^k'^n 

n:sr:n 

r       V    :    - 

nsxk^ann 

1  c. 

T    ;  • 

••    T  • 

J^^'^3 

^'^535 

^^r? 

Imper.  2  m. 

T     t 

•'      T      • 

JJ<2I13 

^^n 

i^kann 

2/ 

^kii2 

''kiizn 

^i$2I52 

^^TrH 

^5<sirnn 

P/wr.    2  m. 

^ki-2 

:    rr    • 

ilN2i^ 

^^"krri 

^rjnn 

2/ 

T       •.•    :         r      V   T   • 

T             .•      - 

T       V    ;    ~ 

riDj^k^arn 

Pabt.  ^cf. 

Kib 

fc^'-^ip 

fc^^rji? 

i<fi^jri7j 

Fass. 

T 

15 


r 

xn. 

Paeadigm 

OF  Lamedh 

7*  »A./,,A-ft--Oa/]«/'l- 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PitET.      3  m. 

nb3 

nb:g 

nba 

(Pebf.) 

3/. 

T  :  IT 

•^^t^? 

nhba 

2  m. 

n^ba 

r)'b^? 

n-ba 

T        •     • 

2/ 

•   T 

J^'^j.? 

n^ba 

1  e. 

^n^ba 

''J^'^^? 

"n^a 

PZttr.   3  c. 

T 

^^33 

^ba 

2  w. 

Dn;ba 

D^'ba 

2/. 

1^^^? 

1^^^^? 

■jh^ba 

1  e. 

•   T 

^3'^^? 

siD^a 

Infin,  ^6so?. 

T 

n'Bro 

nba 

Constr. 

niB^i 

nibsn 

T       • 

niba 

FuT.        3  w. 

nbr 

V  T  • 

^!5: 

(lilPF.) 

^              3/ 

nb:n 

nban 

V  T      • 

nbar} 

2  m. 

♦iban 

»^^5^ 

nban 

2/. 

''^^r? 

•    T      • 

^ban 

1  c. 

nSas 

V  T    V 

*^h^. 

Plur.   3  m. 

^: 

T    • 

^ba: 

3/ 

»"*r^^^ 

nrbsn 

T      •••  T      • 

HD^bari 

2  m. 

tjr\ 

^ban 

T      • 

^ban 

2/ 

nrb:n 

T    V :    • 

nrban  ■ 

T      V  T      • 

'   ♦^r^^^' 

1  e. 

^1?? 

nbas 

:■  r  • 

nb:o 

Imper.     2  w. 

nba 

nban 

••  T      • 

nba 

2/. 

^^^ 

'^sn 

la- 

P/wr.   2  m. 

^ba 

iiban 

T     • 

_^ba 

2/. 

nr5a 

T    V  : 

ns^ban 

T      V   T     • 

^5^5 

Part.    J.c^. 

nbii 

nba'j 

Pass. 

^^ba 

nb:o 

16 


rt 


1 1  .-1^ 


u 


in 


He  Verbs,  §  170. 

PUAIi. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

hithpael 

nh 

n'i^n 

T  :    T 

nbyrn 

T  -    :     • 

nKs3 

nhbjH 

nribr«n 

T  :  :    T 

nnb-«rn 

T  :  '    :    • 

K% 

n-bn  • 

T    ••  :    T 

n"b-.rn 

T     •  -    :     • 

n1? 

n^D:n 

n^hn 

n^bsrn 

Ti? 

T"5jn 

•     •  :    T 

^n^b^nn 

a-. 

iibsn 

:    T 

^bsnn 

^^M 

D^;<^n 

Dfi"^b3n 

ch^'^srn 

in^^a 

iri'^i^n 

fr^^n 

)  V     •  -    :    • 

^^53 

sirbn 

*i3^b:jn 

^rbsnn 

(nbo 

n^?n 

^^'^ 

(nb^rn) 

T\^^ 

nilbsn 

(nib^n) 

nib^nn 

^)^: 

n^?: 

nb:^ 

nbsr: 

n^SFl 

nli^n 

nbsn 

nbarn 

r!^;.ri 

nb:n 

nb:n 

nbsnri 

^5:ri 

^351!) 

^bsrn 

n?:s^ 

n^:x 

nb:ij 

^b5ln^^ 

^^?1 

^^^: 

^5r 

:  T 

^bn: 

n=i?3^ 

nrb:n 

"=1^5? 

T    V  -    :     • 

^5:n 

ilb:Fl 

iib.-n 

iibsrp 

nrf.^ri 

nrbsn 

T     V  :     T 

nj^b^rr} 

^ 

^?^5 

nb:o 

nb^w 

n^?n 

Hiyrn 

wanting 

^hn 

wanting 

^bsnn 

Jib^n 

si'ijsnn 

^r'^^-^ 

ns^b^rn 

^)}^ 

V  ~  :    • 

n|:^ 

17 


vW'  , 


Xin.  Paeadigm  of  the 


Class  I. 
I  1.  Monosyllables  and  Segholates;  Abstract  Nouns. 

Vowel  with  Perfect  Roots  hgj  ^  4gj      y^      hjj  ^  i^-^  ^^ 

l8t.  Radical  2d.  Radical    Segholates  Guttural  I 


i^":5 

-lia 

^^^ 

n?5' 

• 

P^ 

b:^ 

i^-n 

iXV^ 

ntS3 

T  ; 

on^i 

^JS^ 

T        T  : 

C1?.T? 

P1^ 

n^s 

5f*'^'^.C') 

-V 

n?:a  ^53 

11=1 

^^1 

p^j? 

3?7:u? 

n^^C') 

1^ 

^^■1 

^^  {""W 

n-qa 

bn5<' 

5<"Tfl(D) 

=1'1 

"3  n?) 

W 

biiTC 

v^^ 

-i?D 

•    nior) 

n^ 

li« 

b^ia 

nn'aj 

b^n(^) 

n^ta 

K  prosthetic:  :'^^^,  nits,  tjinsi,  bi7jn^. 

^S  unessential  long  vowel:  "lilJ^ ,  ]'^'h^, 

2   Long  ultimate  with  pretonic  ~  or  -^. 
Adjectives:  «,  e,  o  intrans.  "jbl^,  '|i:)^,  "jID'l. 
1,  w  passive  *i''n^ ,  Ti'^nS ,  b^b)?. 
3?3?:  "qn,  nn,  ni3.       ir  and  '^3?:  Tz:^,  -IT,  p'^'i,  nits. 

nb:  n^:,n^;^T^15^1^^• 
a,  0  quahties  existing:  biia,  pTH,  li'S|5,  pirTI. 
e  „        ftecomm^:  bia,  pin,  nn]^,  pnT 

0  2>ermanent,  as  figure  "r^nij ,  b'i:^ ,  riis ,  pts ,  njb?. 

colour  0*15$,  TO,  pir,  nn^,  nniD. 

character  D'-^iJ ,  piiTQ ,  nint: ,  im%, 
e  variable  states  of  body  Ti^ ,  i<ts ,  n?n ,  >'n^. 

mind  bn^,  ysn,  inn,  «i;,  te 
Concrete  Nouns:  ni'iT  (^ir),  niTS,  -taD,  Cpi^,  liilS. 
Names  of  seasons:  n^isj,  vj^DiJ,  "i^isn,  Tbj,  ^-in,  n^i:g. 

3.  Long  immutable  penult,  —  or  —  in  ultimate. 
Agents:  bbp,  DMn,  b^'^lUJ,  qb^3,  bb^H. 

Occupations:  npin,  bin,  Tciin,  nir,  Diiis,  "{ns. 

18 


FOEMATION  OF  NoUNS,  8  183. 


Class  II.    Eeduplicated. 

Intensive:  irln ,  ry^B ,  p^'jji? ,  nina ,  "j^sn ,  Qiirri. 

Daghesh  resolved:  T2Ji7rp,  "lib^p,  Viis^?. 

h:  nnnn,  np^j:,  nbnb-,  n5t:bp,  nVaba. 

do.  vowel  inserted  bib:?,  '^i^'i^?,  bjbibp. 

do.  consonant  softened  nbiS ,  ^ibp^p ,  "133 ,  TT&y\S, 

''B:  D^:hr;nr;(^),  d^5<ss^(^).       nb:  ni«D. 

Occupations:  ^3J? ,  1^3 ,  j-|'n ,  "jj'n ,  ir^n,  nstt. 
Defects:  Df.i^,  '35,  tnn,  n^.!?,  irjDy,  nos,  n%. 

Abstracts:  D^b'iT,  D"'^E3,  DT^^blD.        53?:  nnnn,  D^i?ir?^. 
Reduplicate  3d.  Radical:  with  a  TTpB,  "ji^n,  bb^JX. 

«  tS^s  ,  n^nnp .    5  bbnp. ,  nn^D .    ^2  y^JD ,  n^nj<5. 
Red.  two  Radicals:  nip-npS,  H^^SSn,  bii^T?. 

repetition  TjB^sn,  pbpbn,  bihbns?,  CiDSpx. 

diminutives  of  colour  D'H^SIX,  pip^'',  *in"inB, 
Class  m.    With  Prefixes. 

K:  superlative  nbi<,  'nisx,  'frr^. 

53:  agent  b^S'iT!!?,  bB'^,  participles  with  %}. 

instrument  "rsi?,  TJb:^,  nitJa. 

place  or  time  niTr,  yi*'?,  "jiibr ,  m^ia. 

action  or  condition  fjip'^J ,  I^C^ ,  ti\-12 ,  n'O^Sa. 

object  or  subject  bij^;,:,  niisj:^ ,  "^^rj,  pn"!^. 
'':  names  pns"; ,  tins* ;  appellatives  t:^pb",  nh^";. 
r\:  abstracts  j^D^n,  H/J'^^n;  concrete  "ihnr,  i^iabD. 

Class  IV.    With  Affixes.    Denominatives. 

■(i  or  1^:  adjectives  pfjX,  "n'^'D,  "ji^b?. 

abstracts  "ji^^y,  ",ip^;i,  "ji^nx,  "jini^. 

augmentative  "p^iS'iT;  diminutive  ']i'0''JJ. 
1 ,  D  or  b :  -713 ,  D^D ,  Uhin ,  b-J^-iS. 
"  :  relation  ^nns?,  ^C^n^  4iSS,  ^153. 
\:  ''Sin,  •'i^'i,''b^b,"'b^3. 

19 


1 

XIV. 

Paradigm  of  the 

I 

king 

covert 

1. 

drought 

boy 

Sing. 

abs. 

tl^S? 

"'flfa 

V 

^?3 

const 

-m 

^^.Q 

••• 

•^^i 

Pluk 

.  abs. 

D^nnp 

•   T  T« 

•  t: 

const. 

^5>'^ 

^■^^t^^ 

••  :  T 

Sma. 

I.  suf. 

^3^^ 

■"l^np 

'   :  T 

gr.  suf. 

I2?.?^'5 

Qil^np 

V     ;     ;  T 

d5'^?P. 

Pldr 

I.  suf. 

-  T  t; 

^'n:>3 

gr.  suf. 

t3^'5r^ 

V    ••  :   * 

DD;nnn 

*But  rinys 

feet 

knees 

loins 

shoes 

Dc. 

obi. 

nit^^j 

•  -    ;   • 

•  -   :   T 

D^b:?3 

•  --:r 

const 

^b^n 

< 

2. 

••   :  T 

^b^D 

lord      vengeance           cloud 

old  maa 

heart 

Smo. 

abs. 

lii« 

Dfe5 

15? 

tl 

nib 

T   — 

const 

V% 

Qfe? 

P. 

Ife! 

nib 

Plub. 

abs. 

D^inX       D^i3p5        0*535 

•      -:                    •  It  :                      •  T  -1 

°ii?l 

D'^nnb 

const 

i!"'^N 

^t]p5 

"-jt- 

^51?I 

^nnb 

Sing. 

I.  suf. 

•         -! 

^'^1?? 

%^? 

-nnb 

gr.  suf 

Dbj'nx     D5;jpD 

Dnnnb 

Plub. 

I.  suf. 

^5'"i5)? 

^^I?? 

iR 

^nnb 

gr.  suf 

orsny^    Di^52p. 

Db;5ipT 

°5'5^^ 

great 

strong 

dry          t: 

J  Hiph.  part 

Smo. 

masc. 

biia 

T 

PJf^ 

^i? 

D'fe'^ 

fern. 

nbi-ia 

^feK 

^^?: 

^^'l?? 

Plue. 

masc. 

D^bl? 

t^TH 

Dijn'; 

DTj-p^a 

fern. 

nibia 

nipjn 

nib-pia 

20 


Declej 

»siON  OF  Masculine  Nouns, 

■1 

§221  A. 

perpetuity 

deed 

I. 

death 

olive 

sickness 

'^^.^ 

b>t 

^ti 

^bn 

nsn 

bsb 

ni^a 

f^"! 

•bn 

•  t: 

D^n:2a 

D^fii7j 

D^n^T 

B'^bn 

Xii2 

••  t:  it 

"ni^a 

tl"! 

-bn 

"  T  t: 

'^223 

*^1?5D 

ini:a 

"^"I 

'  :   T 

CJi":?? 

Dib>"S 

n 

Jif^'i'^ 

C3^.t?'t 

Bb^bn 

V  :  :   T 

"  t; 

-  T   : 

^ni^j 

-hV 

-bn 

-  T    T! 

:•    ••  t:  it 

V      ~       1 

DD^^bn 

V   "IT  t: 

•But  r,VirD 

noon 

eyes 

cheeks 

•  -   -RIT 

-    T  1 

3 

4.  (Kb) 

work               field 

tree 

name 

30tter 

seal 

F 

D'^ 

'iir 

Dnin 

T 

^^^^. 

mis 

*.•     T 

T5 

^T 

Dnin 

nir?;; 

niifl 

Q*i?? 

^""i^*? 

•     T 

D^i2??p. 

•     T 

rzs 

^'^^1 

^m 

"^ra 

^.'12 

':          ^? 

*''^'0 

*"iiin2*i 

•      T      1 

•-!   1- 

•     T 

Di-ir 

Dbrnn 

"^. 

^"2?; 

~    T 

^ir?;^ 

-     T 

Oi."2??! 

C3.'"l^? 

...      ..-:  1- 

V    -    : 

. 

*But  fjTa'r 

■^fi^? 

dead 

Kal  act.  part.  Niph.  part. 

rfb  part. 

fair 

tcq 

bt2p 

^^P? 

r^ 

m5* 

VT 

nn"j 

f^^pi?] 

1          nb^Pf?) 

nba 

ns- 

T     •• 

r^^i^P. 

nbt:p3  J 

T 

TT 

D"il'-3 

D^bpp 

Q'^^P? 

D^ba 

•T 

nih-j 

r\ibt:p 

nibt:p3 

T ':  • 

r\ib3 

T 

21 


XV.  Paradigm  of  Masculine  Nouns  (continued). 

^ 

5  {h 

and  the  like) 

camel 

garden 

goat 

statute 

SiKO.  abs. 

TT 

1^ 

T? 

ph 

comt 

-  : 

15 

t? 

ph 

Plur.  abs. 

t3"l?533i 

D'l? 

Q'-t? 

D^pn 

const. 

"1^3 

ia 

•i? 

'^n 

SiNO.    I.  suf. 

'i'^ 

.h 

^f? 

t^. 

gr.  suf. 

Di.V^? 

C3i33 

t3i-T? 

fi?I?n 

Plub.  I.  suf. 

i^s 

^i'? 

^b 

^j3n 

gr.  suf. 

cii;^53a 

C3i'25 

D3'-!? 

cii^pn 

Bmall 

much  or  many 

deep 

fresh 

SiNO.  mase. 

V?r 

nn 

P7b? 

^•ntt 

fern. 

nspip 

T  - 

^fe^.? 

T  •  : 

PiiUR.  masc. 

0^2:5;: 

D^^n 

D'l?'^? 

D^ijntp 

fern. 

ni3i:|^ 

ninn 

ni^na 

Nouns 

■WITH  Suffixes. 

horse 

horses 

mare 

mares 

Abs. 

So.  D^O 

Pi.    D^q^O     8q 

.  nc^D 

pi«  nio^o 

Const. 

DSID 

^b^D 

nc^io 

nic^io 

Sing.    1  c.    my 

^b^o 

"•O^D 

•    T        1 

^niD^p 

2  m.  thy 

TjC^D 

^"D'^D 

;?|ncsiD 

irj^nio^p 

2/.    thy 

tjDilD 

i]:qsid 

tjiiD^p 

•q^nio^D 

S  m.  his 

io^o 

T 

T        1 

T                   1 

3/.    her 

r 

T       V 

T  T        1 

TV                 1 

Plub.  1  c.    our 

^DC^D 

sirD^iD 

•'    T         1 

^D^niD^p 

2  m.  your 

DrD?lD 

V     ••       1 

Dinciip 

Db^nio^D 

2  /.    your 

1  V     •^      1 

1D;ciip 

■|it}0^9 

"jb;nipiiD 

3  m.  their 

T 

cn^c^p 

T    T        1 

Dh^nip^iD 

8/    their 

IC^D 

■,n^c^D 

■jhp^p 

ih^nip^o 

22 


XVL  Paradigm  of  Feminine  Nouns,  §  221 

B. 

SiNO.    abs. 

queen 

covert 

1. 

desert 

T    ;  T 

girl 

T-:i- 

const. 

nsb^ 

n-^nc 

-   :  T 

nny3 

Plur.  abs. 

T     ; 

ni-no 

T    ; 

T  Tt 

const. 

ni3b53 

ninno 

;  T 

ni-i?:  • 

Sing.    I.  suf. 

•  T  ;     - 

•  T    :    " 

•    T   :  T 

gr.  suf. 

°?.I?5>"r 

Dinnnp 

V    ;    ~    :  T 

•.•    :  -  -.1- 

PliDR.  I.  suf. 

^niDb^ 

^hinnp 

:  T 

"^■i"!??. 

gr.  suf 

□i^nbb^ 

..  ..  ,  .  . 

...        •■     1       t   T 

sides      ( 

louble  embroidery 

Do.      abs. 

D'h-.pi 

coist. 

"ri?"]- 

Sing.   abn. 

counsel 

2. 

vengeance 

cry 

3. 

sucker 

const. 

riy 

f^^P? 

f^p.?;. 

npir 

Pluk.  abs. 

rr±y 

nit2p3 

nipJT 

nipii"; 

const. 

nik3? 

nii^p? 

^t?J 

nipDi"; 

Sing.    I.  suf. 

^^2:? 

T^P? 

^^r>?j 

'rii??"!' 

gr.  suf. 

D?P^? 

D3.f^^P? 

DDnp^T 

nbrip^i"; 

Pluk.  I.  suf 

^ni:23? 

^ri'i'-p? 

^n1p5[T 

vvt 

gr.  suf. 

C33;r5br5 

DD^n'^apD 

DDTp?T 

D^.^r^'ipr 

Do.      abg. 

lips 

t 

twofold  sloth 

const. 

'ri^'^ 

23 


Date  Due 


M(^^^II9I^ 


WAR27»lJi 


AtJGlJ 


zm 


2  3  '65 


-•*-*«i»i»<g)*' 


-^"wmiiMiMMim^ 


aaifeifti»it^ 


'*^>     ^. 


PJ4564  .G79  1895 

A  grammar  of  the  Hebrew  language. 

Princeton  Theological  Semmary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00076  3138 


^■■iiia^rtW 


